Finance disscussion 3
yeo1992226
STEPHEN A. ROSS Massachuset ts Ins t i tu te o f Technolog y
RANDOLPH W. WESTERFIELD Univer s i t y o f Southern Ca l i fo rn ia
BRADFORD D. JORDAN Univer s i t y o f Kentucky
GORDON S. ROBERTS Schul ich School o f Bus iness , Yor k Univer s i t y
Fundamenta l s o f
Corporate Finance
Eighth Canadian Edition
00Ross_FrontMatter_FIN.indd i00Ross_FrontMatter_FIN.indd i 12-12-20 13:0012-12-20 13:00
Fundamentals of Corporate Finance Eighth Canadian Edition
Copyright © 2013, 2010, 2007, 2005, 2002, 1999 by McGraw-Hill Ryerson Limited, a Subsidiary of The McGraw-Hill Companies. Copyright © 1996, 1993 by Richard D. Irwin, a Times Mirror Higher Education Group, Inc. company. All rights reserved. No part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means, or stored in a data base or retrieval system, without the prior written permission of McGraw-Hill Ryerson Limited, or in the case of photocopying or other reprographic copying, a license from The Canadian Copyright Licensing Agency (Access Copyright). For an Access Copyright licence, visit www.accesscopyright.ca or call toll free to 1-800-893-5777.
Statistics Canada information is used with the permission of Statistics Canada. Users are forbidden to copy this material and/or redisseminate the data, in an original or modified form, for commercial purposes, without the expressed permission of Statistics Canada. Information on the availability of the wide range of data from Statistics Canada can be obtained from Statistics Canada’s Regional Offices, its World Wide Web site at http://www.statcan.gc.ca and its toll-free access number 1-800-263-1136.
The Internet addresses listed in the text were accurate at the time of publication. The inclusion of a Web site does not indicate an endorsement by the authors or McGraw-Hill Ryerson, and McGraw-Hill Ryerson does not guarantee the accuracy of information presented at these sites.
ISBN-13: 978-0-07-105160-6 ISBN-10: 0-07-105160-0
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 QGV 1 9 8 7 6 5 4 3
Printed and bound in the United States of America.
Care has been taken to trace ownership of copyright material contained in this text; however, the publisher will welcome any information that enables it to rectify any reference or credit for subsequent editions.
Director of Product Management: Rhondda McNabb Senior Product Manager: Kimberley Veevers Marketing Manager: Jeremy Guimond Senior Manager, Development: Kelly Dickson Senior Product Developer: Maria Chu Senior Product Team Associate: Christine Lomas Photo/Permissions Research: Maria Chu Supervising Editor: Joanne Limebeer Copy Editors: Armour Robert Templeton, Bradley T. Smith/First Folio Resource Group Inc. Production Coordinator: Tammy Mavroudi Cover Design: Word & Image Cover Images: Modern architecture (Vetta archives), columns (Philip and Karen Smith) Interior Design: Word & Image Page Layout: Tom Dart/First Folio Resource Group Inc. Printer: Quad/Graphics Versailles
Library and Archives Canada Cataloguing in Publication
Fundamentals of corporate finance / Stephen A. Ross … [et al.].—8th Canadian ed. Includes bibliographical references and indexes.
ISBN 978-0-07-105160-6
1. Corporations—Finance—Textbooks. I. Ross, Stephen A
HG4026.F86 2013 658.15 C2012-906997-3
00Ross_FrontMatter_FIN.indd ii00Ross_FrontMatter_FIN.indd ii 12-12-20 13:0012-12-20 13:00
ABOUT THE AUTHORS
Stephen A. Ross Sloan School of Management, Franco Modigliani Professor of Finance and Economics, Massachusetts Institute of Technology
Stephen A. Ross is the Franco Modigliani Professor of Finance and Economics at the Sloan School of Management, Massachusetts Institute of Technology. One of the most widely published authors in finance and economics, Professor Ross is recognized for his work in developing the Arbitrage Pricing Theory and his substantial contributions to the discipline through his research in signalling, agency theory, option pricing, and the theory of the term structure of interest rates, among other topics. A past president of the American Finance Association, he currently serves as an associate editor of several academic and practitioner journals. He is a trustee of CalTech.
Randolph W. Westerf ield Marshall School of Business, University of Southern California
Randolph W. Westerfield is Dean Emeritus of the University of Southern California’s Marshall School of Business and is the Charles B. Thornton Professor of Finance. He came to USC from the Wharton School, University of Pennsylvania, where he was the chairman of the finance department and a member of the finance faculty for 20 years. He is a member of several public company boards of directors, including Health Management Associates, Inc., William Lyons Homes, and the Nicholas Applegate growth fund. His areas of expertise include corporate financial policy, investment management, and stock market price behaviour.
Bradford D. Jordan Gatton College of Business and Economics, Professor of Finance and holder of the Richard W. and Janis H. Furst Endowed Chair in Finance, University of Kentucky
Bradford D. Jordan is Professor of Finance and holder of the Richard W. and Janis H. Furst Endowed Chair in Finance at the University of Kentucky. He has a long- standing interest in both applied and theoretical issues in corporate finance and has extensive experience teaching all levels of corporate finance and financial management policy. Professor Jordan has published nu- merous articles on issues such as cost of capital, capital structure, and the behaviour of security prices. He is a past president of the Southern Finance Association, and he is co-author (with Thomas W. Miller, Jr.) of Fundamentals of Investments: Valuation and Management, 4e, a leading investments text, published by McGraw-Hill/Irwin.
Gordon S. Roberts Schulich School of Business, York University, Canadian Imperial Bank of Commerce Professor of Financial Services
Gordon S. Roberts is Canadian Imperial Bank of Commerce Professor of Financial Services at the Schulich School of Business, York University. His exten- sive teaching experience includes finance classes for un- dergraduate and MBA students, executives, and bankers in Canada and internationally. Professor Roberts con- ducts research on the pricing of bank loans and the reg- ulation of financial institutions. He has served on the editorial boards of several Canadian and international academic journals. Professor Roberts has been a consul- tant to a number of regulatory bodies responsible for the oversight of financial institutions and utilities.
00Ross_FrontMatter_FIN.indd iii00Ross_FrontMatter_FIN.indd iii 12-12-20 13:0012-12-20 13:00
BRIEF CONTENTS
PREFACE xvii
P A R T 1
OVERVIEW OF CORPORATE FINANCE 1
1 Introduction to Corporate Finance 1 2 Financial Statements, Cash Flow, and Taxes 25
P A R T 2
FINANCIAL STATEMENTS AND LONG-TERM FINANCIAL PLANNING 53
3 Working with Financial Statements 53 4 Long-Term Financial Planning and
Corporate Growth 84
P A R T 3
VALUATION OF FUTURE CASH FLOWS 111
5 Introduction to Valuation: The Time Value of Money 111
6 Discounted Cash Flow Valuation 129 7 Interest Rates and Bond Valuation 165 8 Stock Valuation 196
P A R T 4
CAPITIAL BUDGETING 220
9 Net Present Value and Other Investment Criteria 220
10 Making Capital Investment Decisions 250 11 Project Analysis and Evaluation 288
P A R T 5
RISK AND RETURN 317
12 Lessons from Capital Market History 317 13 Return, Risk, and the Security Market Line 346
P A R T 6
COST OF CAPITAL AND LONG-TERM FINANCIAL POLICY 387
14 Cost of Capital 387 15 Raising Capital 423 16 Financial Leverage and Capital
Structure Policy 454 17 Dividends and Dividend Policy 490
P A R T 7
SHORT-TERM FINANCIAL PLANNING AND MANAGEMENT 519
18 Short-Term Finance and Planning 519 19 Cash and Liquidity Management 552 20 Credit and Inventory Management 572
P A R T 8
TOPICS IN CORPORATE FINANCE 606
21 International Corporate Finance 606 22 Leasing 634 23 Mergers and Acquisitions 655
P A R T 9
DERIVATIVE SECURITIES AND CORPORATE FINANCE 685
24 Enterprise Risk Management 685 25 Options and Corporate Securities 711 26 Behavioural Finance: Implications for
Financial Management 750
Glossary 773 Appendix A: Mathematical Tables (available on Connect) Appendix B: Answers to Selected End-of-Chapter Problems (available on Connect) Subject Index 781 Name Index 800 Equation Index 802
00Ross_FrontMatter_FIN.indd iv00Ross_FrontMatter_FIN.indd iv 12-12-20 13:0012-12-20 13:00
CONTENTS
PREFACE xvii
P A R T 1
OVERVIEW OF CORPORATE FINANCE 1
C H A P T E R 1
INTRODUCTION TO CORPORATE FINANCE 1
1.1 Corporate Finance and the Financial Manager 1 What Is Corporate Finance? 2 The Financial Manager 2 Financial Management Decisions 2
1.2 Forms of Business Organization 4 Sole Proprietorship 4 Partnership 5 Corporation 5 Income Trust 6 Co-operative (Co-op) 7
1.3 The Goal of Financial Management 8 Possible Goals 8 The Goal of Financial Management 8 A More General Goal 9
1.4 The Agency Problem and Control of the Corporation 10 Agency Relationships 10 Management Goals 10 Do Managers Act in the Shareholders’ Interests? 10 Corporate Social Responsibility and Ethical Investing 12
1.5 Financial Markets and the Corporation 14 Cash Flows to and from the Firm 15 Money versus Capital Markets 15 Primary versus Secondary Markets 16
1.6 Financial Institutions 18
1.7 Trends in Financial Markets and Financial Management 20
1.8 Outline of the Text 21
1.9 Summary and Conclusions 22
C H A P T E R 2
FINANCIAL STATEMENTS, CASH FLOW, AND TAXES 25
2.1 Statement of Financial Position 25 Assets 26 Liabilities and Owners’ Equity 26 Net Working Capital 27 Liquidity 28 Debt versus Equity 28 Value versus Cost 28
2.2 Statement of Comprehensive Income 30 International Financial Reporting Standards (IFRS) 30 Non-Cash Items 31 Time and Costs 31
2.3 Cash Flow 32 Cash Flow from Assets 32 Cash Flow to Creditors and Shareholders 34 Net Capital Spending 36 Change in NWC and Cash Flow from Assets 36
2.4 Taxes 37 Individual Tax Rates 37 Average versus Marginal Tax Rates 37 Taxes on Investment Income 39 Corporate Taxes 39 Taxable Income 39 Global Tax Rates 40 Capital Gains and Carry-forward and Carry-back 40 Income Trust Income and Taxation 41
2.5 Capital Cost Allowance 42 Asset Purchases and Sales 43
2.6 Summary and Conclusions 45
00Ross_FrontMatter_FIN.indd v00Ross_FrontMatter_FIN.indd v 12-12-20 13:0012-12-20 13:00
P A R T 2
FINANCIAL STATEMENTS AND LONG-TERM FINANCIAL PLANNING 53
C H A P T E R 3
WORKING WITH FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 53
3.1 Cash Flow and Financial Statements: A Closer Look 54 Sources and Uses of Cash 54 The Statement of Cash Flows 56
3.2 Standardized Financial Statements 57 Common-Size Statements 57 Common-Base-Year Financial Statements: Trend Analysis 59
3.3 Ratio Analysis 60 Short-Term Solvency or Liquidity Measures 61 Other Liquidity Ratios 63 Long-Term Solvency Measures 64 Asset Management, or Turnover, Measures 65 Profitability Measures 67 Market Value Measures 68
3.4 The Du Pont Identity 71
3.5 Using Financial Statement Information 73 Why Evaluate Financial Statements? 73 Choosing a Benchmark 74 Problems with Financial Statement Analysis 75
3.6 Summary and Conclusions 75
C H A P T E R 4
LONG-TERM FINANCIAL PLANNING AND CORPORATE GROWTH 84
4.1 What Is Financial Planning? 85 Growth as a Financial Management Goal 85 Dimensions of Financial Planning 86 What Can Planning Accomplish? 86
4.2 Financial Planning Models: A First Look 88 A Financial Planning Model: The Ingredients 88 A Simple Financial Planning Model 89
4.3 The Percentage of Sales Approach 90 An Illustration of the Percentage of Sales Approach 90
4.4 External Financing and Growth 95 External Financing Needed and Growth 95 Internal Growth Rate 97 Financial Policy and Growth 98 Determinants of Growth 100 A Note on Sustainable Growth Rate Calculations 101
4.5 Some Caveats on Financial Planning Models 103
4.6 Summary and Conclusions 103
Appendix 4 (available on Connect)
P A R T 3
VALUATION OF FUTURE CASH FLOWS 111
C H A P T E R 5
INTRODUCTION TO VALUATION: THE TIME VALUE OF MONEY 111
5.1 Future Value and Compounding 112 Investing for a Single Period 112 Investing for More than One Period 112 A Note on Compound Growth 118
5.2 Present Value and Discounting 118 The Single-Period Case 119 Present Values for Multiple Periods 119
5.3 More on Present and Future Values 121 Present versus Future Value 121 Determining the Discount Rate 122 Finding the Number of Periods 124
5.4 Summary and Conclusions 126
C H A P T E R 6
DISCOUNTED CASH FLOW VALUATION 129
6.1 Future and Present Values of Multiple Cash Flows 129 Future Value with Multiple Cash Flows 129 Present Value with Multiple Cash Flows 131 A Note on Cash Flow Timing 134
6.2 Valuing Level Cash Flows: Annuities and Perpetuities 135 Present Value for Annuity Cash Flows 135
vi Contents
00Ross_FrontMatter_FIN.indd vi00Ross_FrontMatter_FIN.indd vi 12-12-20 13:0012-12-20 13:00
Future Value for Annuities 140 A Note on Annuities Due 141 Perpetuities 142 Growing Perpetuities 143 Formula for Present Value of Growing Perpetuity 144 Growing Annuity 145 Formula for Present Value of Growing Annuity 145
6.3 Comparing Rates: The Effect of Compounding 145 Effective Annual Rates and Compounding 146 Calculating and Comparing Effective Annual Rates 146 Mortgages 147 EARs and APRs 148 Taking It to the Limit: A Note on Continuous Compounding 149
6.4 Loan Types and Loan Amortization 150 Pure Discount Loans 150 Interest-Only Loans 150 Amortized Loans 151
6.5 Summary and Conclusions 155
Appendix 6A: Proof of Annuity Present Value Formula 164
C H A P T E R 7
INTEREST RATES AND BOND VALUATION 165
7.1 Bonds and Bond Valuation 165 Bond Features and Prices 165 Bond Values and Yields 166 Interest Rate Risk 169 Finding the Yield to Maturity 170
7.2 More on Bond Features 173 Is It Debt or Equity? 173 Long-Term Debt: The Basics 174 The Indenture 174
7.3 Bond Ratings 177
7.4 Some Different Types of Bonds 178 Financial Engineering 178 Stripped Bonds 179 Floating-Rate Bonds 180 Other Types of Bonds 180
7.5 Bond Markets 181 How Bonds Are Bought and Sold 181 Bond Price Reporting 182 A Note on Bond Price Quotes 182 Bond Funds 184
7.6 Inflation and Interest Rates 184 Real versus Nominal Rates 184 The Fisher Effect 185 Inflation and Present Values 186
7.7 Determinants of Bond Yields 186 The Term Structure of Interest Rates 187 Bond Yields and the Yield Curve: Putting It All Together 188 Conclusion 189
7.8 Summary and Conclusions 190
Appendix 7A: On Duration 194
Appendix 7B (available on Connect)
C H A P T E R 8
STOCK VALUATION 196
8.1 Common Stock Valuation 196 Common Stock Cash Flows 196 Common Stock Valuation: Some Special Cases 198 Changing the Growth Rate 202 Components of the Required Return 203
8.2 Common Stock Features 205 Shareholders’ Rights 205 Dividends 206 Classes of Stock 206
8.3 Preferred Stock Features 207 Stated Value 207 Cumulative and Non-Cumulative Dividends 207 Is Preferred Stock Really Debt? 208 Preferred Stock and Taxes 209 Beyond Taxes 209
8.4 Stock Market Reporting 210 Growth Opportunities 211 Application: The Price-Earnings Ratio 211
8.5 Summary and Conclusions 213
Appendix 8A: Corporate Voting 218
Contents vii
00Ross_FrontMatter_FIN.indd vii00Ross_FrontMatter_FIN.indd vii 12-12-20 13:0012-12-20 13:00
P A R T 4
CAPITAL BUDGETING 220
C H A P T E R 9
NET PRESENT VALUE AND OTHER INVESTMENT CRITERIA 220
9.1 Net Present Value 221 The Basic Idea 221 Estimating Net Present Value 222
9.2 The Payback Rule 225 Defining the Rule 225 Analyzing the Payback Period Rule 225 Redeeming Qualities 226 Summary of the Rule 226 The Discounted Payback Rule 227
9.3 The Average Accounting Return 228 Analyzing the Average Accounting Return Method 229
9.4 The Internal Rate of Return 230 Problems with the IRR 233 Redeeming Qualities of the IRR 237
9.5 The Profitability Index 238
9.6 The Practice of Capital Budgeting 239
9.7 Summary and Conclusions 241
Appendix 9A: The Modified Internal Rate of Return 248
C H A P T E R 1 0
MAKING CAPITAL INVESTMENT DECISIONS 250
10.1 Project Cash Flows: A First Look 251 Relevant Cash Flows 251 The Stand-Alone Principle 251
10.2 Incremental Cash Flows 251 Sunk Costs 251 Opportunity Costs 252 Side Effects 252 Net Working Capital 253 Financing Costs 253 Inflation 253
Capital Budgeting and Business Taxes in Canada 254 Other Issues 254
10.3 Pro Forma Financial Statements and Project Cash Flows 254 Getting Started: Pro Forma Financial Statements 254 Project Cash Flows 255 Project Total Cash Flow and Value 256
10.4 More on Project Cash Flow 257 A Closer Look at Net Working Capital 257 Depreciation and Capital Cost Allowance 258 An Example: The Majestic Mulch and Compost Company (MMCC) 259
10.5 Alternative Definitions of Operating Cash Flow 263 The Bottom-Up Approach 263 The Top-Down Approach 264 The Tax Shield Approach 264 Conclusion 265
10.6 Applying the Tax Shield Approach to the Majestic Mulch and Compost Company Project 265 Present Value of the Tax Shield on CCA 266 Salvage Value versus UCC 268
10.7 Some Special Cases of Discounted Cash Flow Analysis 269 Evaluating Cost-Cutting Proposals 269 Replacing an Asset 270 Evaluating Equipment with Different Lives 272 Setting the Bid Price 273
10.8 Summary and Conclusions 276
Appendix 10A: More on Inflation and Capital Budgeting 285
Appendix 10B: Capital Budgeting with Spreadsheets 286
C H A P T E R 1 1
PROJECT ANALYSIS AND EVALUATION 288
11.1 Evaluating NPV Estimates 288 The Basic Problem 289 Projected versus Actual Cash Flows 289 Forecasting Risk 289 Sources of Value 289
viii Contents
00Ross_FrontMatter_FIN.indd viii00Ross_FrontMatter_FIN.indd viii 12-12-20 13:0012-12-20 13:00
11.2 Scenario and Other What-If Analyses 290 Getting Started 290 Scenario Analysis 291 Sensitivity Analysis 293 Simulation Analysis 295
11.3 Break-Even Analysis 296 Fixed and Variable Costs 296 Accounting Break-Even 297 Accounting Break-Even: A Closer Look 299 Uses for the Accounting Break-Even 299
11.4 Operating Cash Flow, Sales Volume, and Break-Even 300 Accounting Break-Even and Cash Flow 300 Cash Flow and Financial Break-Even Points 302
11.5 Operating Leverage 304 The Basic Idea 304 Implications of Operating Leverage 305 Measuring Operating Leverage 305 Operating Leverage and Break-Even 306
11.6 Managerial Options 307
11.7 Capital Rationing 310
11.8 Summary and Conclusions 311
P A R T 5
RISK AND RETURN 317
C H A P T E R 1 2
LESSONS FROM CAPITAL MARKET HISTORY 317
12.1 Returns 318 Dollar Returns 318 Percentage Returns 319
12.2 The Historical Record 321 A First Look 323 A Closer Look 324
12.3 Average Returns: The First Lesson 324 Calculating Average Returns 324 Average Returns: The Historical Record 324 Risk Premiums 325 The First Lesson 325
12.4 The Variability of Returns: The Second Lesson 326 Frequency Distributions and Variability 326 The Historical Variance and Standard Deviation 326 The Historical Record 328 Normal Distribution 329 Value at Risk 331 The Second Lesson 331 2008 The Bear Growled and Investors Howled 331 Using Capital Market History 332
12.5 More on Average Returns 333 Arithmetic versus Geometric Averages 333 Calculating Geometric Average Returns 333 Arithmetic Average Return or Geometric Average Return? 335
12.6 Capital Market Efficiency 335 Price Behaviour in an Efficient Market 336 The Efficient Markets Hypothesis 337 Market Efficiency—Forms and Evidence 339
12.7 Summary and Conclusions 341
C H A P T E R 1 3
RETURN, RISK, AND THE SECURITY MARKET LINE 346
13.1 Expected Returns and Variances 347 Expected Return 347 Calculating the Variance 349
13.2 Portfolios 351 Portfolio Weights 351 Portfolio Expected Returns 351 Portfolio Variance 352 Portfolio Standard Deviation and Diversification 353 The Efficient Set 355 Correlations in the Financial Crisis of 2007–2009 357
13.3 Announcements, Surprises, and Expected Returns 359 Expected and Unexpected Returns 359 Announcements and News 359
13.4 Risk: Systematic and Unsystematic 360 Systematic and Unsystematic Risk 360 Systematic and Unsystematic Components of Return 361
Contents ix
00Ross_FrontMatter_FIN.indd ix00Ross_FrontMatter_FIN.indd ix 12-12-20 13:0012-12-20 13:00
13.5 Diversification and Portfolio Risk 361 The Effect of Diversification: Another Lesson from Market History 362 The Principle of Diversification 363 Diversification and Unsystematic Risk 364 Diversification and Systematic Risk 364 Risk and the Sensible Investor 364
13.6 Systematic Risk and Beta 365 The Systematic Risk Principle 366 Measuring Systematic Risk 366 Portfolio Betas 367
13.7 The Security Market Line 368 Beta and the Risk Premium 368 Calculating Beta 372 The Security Market Line 374
13.8 Arbitrage Pricing Theory And Empirical Models 377
13.9 Summary and Conclusions 379
Appendix 13A: Derivation of the Capital Asset Pricing Model 384
P A R T 6
COST OF CAPITAL AND LONG-TERM FINANCIAL POLICY 387
C H A P T E R 1 4
COST OF CAPITAL 387
14.1 The Cost of Capital: Some Preliminaries 388 Required Return versus Cost of Capital 388 Financial Policy and Cost of Capital 388
14.2 The Cost of Equity 389 The Dividend Growth Model Approach 389 The SML Approach 391 The Cost of Equity in Rate Hearings 392
14.3 The Costs of Debt and Preferred Stock 393 The Cost of Debt 393 The Cost of Preferred Stock 394
14.4 The Weighted Average Cost of Capital 394 The Capital Structure Weights 395 Taxes and the Weighted Average Cost of Capital 396 Solving the Warehouse Problem and Similar Capital Budgeting Problems 396 Performance Evaluation: Another Use of the WACC 398
14.5 Divisional and Project Costs of Capital 399 The SML and the WACC 399 Divisional Cost of Capital 401 The Pure Play Approach 401 The Subjective Approach 402
14.6 Flotation Costs and the Weighted Average Cost of Capital 403 The Basic Approach 403 Flotation Costs and NPV 404
14.7 Calculating WACC for Loblaw 406 Estimating Financing Proportions 406 Market Value Weights for Loblaw 406 Cost of Debt 407 Cost of Preferred Shares 408 Cost of Common Stock 408 CAPM 408 Dividend Valuation Model Growth Rate 409 Loblaw’s WACC 409
14.8 Summary and Conclusions 409
Appendix 14A: Adjusted Present Value 414
Appendix 14B: Economic Value Added and the Measurement of Financial Performance 419
C H A P T E R 1 5
RAISING CAPITAL 423
15.1 The Financing Life Cycle of a Firm: Early-Stage Financing and Venture Capital 423 Venture Capital 424 Some Venture Capital Realities 424 Choosing a Venture Capitalist 424 Conclusion 425
x Contents
00Ross_FrontMatter_FIN.indd x00Ross_FrontMatter_FIN.indd x 12-12-20 13:0012-12-20 13:00
15.2 The Public Issue 425
15.3 The Basic Procedure for a New Issue 426 Securities Registration 427 Alternative Issue Methods 427
15.4 The Cash Offer 427 Types of Underwriting 428 Bought Deal 428 Dutch Auction Underwriting 429 The Selling Period 429 The Overallotment Option 430 Lockup Agreements 430 The Quiet Period 430 The Investment Dealers 430
15.5 IPOs and Underpricing 431 IPO Underpricing: The 1999–2000 Experience 431 Evidence on Underpricing 432 Why Does Underpricing Exist? 435
15.6 New Equity Sales and the Value of the Firm 436
15.7 The Cost of Issuing Securities 437 IPOs in Practice: The Case of Athabasca Oil Sands 439
15.8 Rights 439 The Mechanics of a Rights Offering 439 Number of Rights Needed to Purchase a Share 440 The Value of a Right 441 Theoretical Value of a Right 442 Ex Rights 443 Value of Rights after Ex-Rights Date 444 The Underwriting Arrangements 444 Effects on Shareholders 444 Cost of Rights Offerings 445
15.9 Dilution 446 Dilution of Proportionate Ownership 446 Dilution of Value: Book versus Market Values 446
15.10 Issuing Long-term Debt 448
15.11 Summary and Conclusions 449
C H A P T E R 1 6
FINANCIAL LEVERAGE AND CAPITAL STRUCTURE POLICY 454
16.1 The Capital Structure Question 455 Firm Value and Stock Value: An Example 455 Capital Structure and the Cost of Capital 456
16.2 The Effect of Financial Leverage 456 The Basics of Financial Leverage 456 Corporate Borrowing and Homemade Leverage 460
16.3 Capital Structure and the Cost of Equity Capital 462 M&M Proposition I: The Pie Model 462 The Cost of Equity and Financial Leverage: M&M Proposition II 462 Business and Financial Risk 463
16.4 M&M Propositions I and II with Corporate Taxes 466 The Interest Tax Shield 466 Taxes and M&M Proposition I 466 Taxes, the WACC, and Proposition II 468
16.5 Bankruptcy Costs 470 Direct Bankruptcy Costs 470 Indirect Bankruptcy Costs 470 Agency Costs of Equity 471
16.6 Optimal Capital Structure 472 The Static Theory of Capital Structure 472 Optimal Capital Structure and the Cost of Capital 473 Optimal Capital Structure: A Recap 473 Capital Structure: Some Managerial Recommendations 475
16.7 The Pie Again 475 The Extended Pie Model 475 Marketed Claims versus Non-Marketed Claims 476
16.8 The Pecking-Order Theory 477 Internal Financing and the Pecking Order 477 Implications of the Pecking Order 477
16.9 Observed Capital Structures 478
Contents xi
00Ross_FrontMatter_FIN.indd xi00Ross_FrontMatter_FIN.indd xi 12-12-20 13:0012-12-20 13:00
16.10 Long-Term Financing Under Financial Distress and Bankruptcy 479 Liquidation and Reorganization 480 Agreements to Avoid Bankruptcy 481
16.11 Summary and Conclusions 482
Appendix 16A: Capital Structure and Personal Taxes 487
Appendix 16B: Derivation of Proposition II (Equation 16.4) 489
C H A P T E R 1 7
DIVIDENDS AND DIVIDEND POLICY 490
17.1 Cash Dividends and Dividend Payment 491 Cash Dividends 491 Standard Method of Cash Dividend Payment 492 Dividend Payment: A Chronology 492 More on the Ex-Dividend Date 492
17.2 Does Dividend Policy Matter? 494 An Illustration of the Irrelevance of Dividend Policy 494
17.3 Real-World Factors Favouring a Low Payout 496 Taxes 496 Some Evidence on Dividends and Taxes in Canada 497 Flotation Costs 498 Dividend Restrictions 498
17.4 Real-World Factors Favouring a High Payout 499 Desire for Current Income 499 Uncertainty Resolution 499 Tax and Legal Benefits from High Dividends 500 Conclusion 500
17.5 A Resolution of Real-World Factors? 500 Information Content of Dividends 501 Dividend Signalling in Practice 501 The Clientele Effect 502
17.6 Establishing a Dividend Policy 503 Residual Dividend Approach 503
Dividend Stability 505 A Compromise Dividend Policy 507 Some Survey Evidence on Dividends 507
17.7 Stock Repurchase: An Alternative to Cash Dividends 508 Cash Dividends versus Repurchase 508 Real-World Considerations in a Repurchase 510 Share Repurchase and EPS 510
17.8 Stock Dividends and Stock Splits 510 Some Details on Stock Splits and Stock Dividends 511 Value of Stock Splits and Stock Dividends 512 Reverse Splits 512
17.9 Summary and Conclusions 513
P A R T 7
SHORT-TERM FINANCIAL PLANNING AND MANAGEMENT 519
C H A P T E R 1 8
SHORT-TERM FINANCE AND PLANNING 519
18.1 Tracing Cash and Net Working Capital 520
18.2 The Operating Cycle and the Cash Cycle 521 Defining the Operating and Cash Cycles 522 Calculating the Operating and Cash Cycles 524 Interpreting the Cash Cycle 525
18.3 Some Aspects of Short-Term Financial Policy 526 The Size of the Firm’s Investment in Current Assets 526 Alternative Financing Policies for Current Assets 528 Which Financing Policy is Best? 531 Current Assets and Liabilities in Practice 531
18.4 The Cash Budget 533 Sales and Cash Collections 533 Cash Outflows 534 The Cash Balance 534
18.5 A Short-Term Financial Plan 536 Short-Term Planning and Risk 537
xii Contents
00Ross_FrontMatter_FIN.indd xii00Ross_FrontMatter_FIN.indd xii 12-12-20 13:0012-12-20 13:00
18.6 Short-Term Borrowing 537 Operating Loans 537 Letters of Credit 539 Secured Loans 539 Factoring 540 Securitized Receivables—A Financial Innovation 541 Inventory Loans 541 Trade Credit 542 Money Market Financing 543
18.7 Summary and Conclusions 545
C H A P T E R 1 9
CASH AND LIQUIDITY MANAGEMENT 552
19.1 Reasons for Holding Cash 552 Speculative and Precautionary Motives 553 The Transaction Motive 553 Costs of Holding Cash 553 Cash Management versus Liquidity Management 553
19.2 Determining the Target Cash Balance 554 The Basic Idea 554 Other Factors Influencing the Target Cash Balance 555
19.3 Understanding Float 556 Disbursement Float 556 Collection Float and Net Float 557 Float Management 557 Accelerating Collections 560 Over-the-Counter Collections 561 Controlling Disbursements 563
19.4 Investing Idle Cash 564 Temporary Cash Surpluses 564 Characteristics of Short-Term Securities 565 Some Different Types of Money Market Securities 567
19.5 Summary and Conclusions 568
Appendix 19A (available on Connect)
C H A P T E R 2 0
CREDIT AND INVENTORY MANAGEMENT 572
20.1 Credit and Receivables 572 Components of Credit Policy 573 The Cash Flows from Granting Credit 573 The Investment in Receivables 573
20.2 Terms of the Sale 574 Why Trade Credit Exists 574 The Basic Form 575 The Credit Period 575 Cash Discounts 576 Credit Instruments 578
20.3 Analyzing Credit Policy 578 Credit Policy Effects 578 Evaluating a Proposed Credit Policy 579
20.4 Optimal Credit Policy 581 The Total Credit Cost Curve 581 Organizing the Credit Function 581
20.5 Credit Analysis 583 When Should Credit Be Granted? 583 Credit Information 584 Credit Evaluation and Scoring 585
20.6 Collection Policy 588 Monitoring Receivables 588 Collection Effort 589 Credit Management in Practice 589
20.7 Inventory Management 590 The Financial Manager and Inventory Policy 590 Inventory Types 590 Inventory Costs 591
20.8 Inventory Management Techniques 591 The ABC Approach 592 The Economic Order Quantity (EOQ) Model 592 Extensions to the EOQ Model 595 Managing Derived-Demand Inventories 596 Materials Requirements Planning (MRP) 597 Just-In-Time Inventory 598
20.9 Summary and Conclusions 600
Appendix 20A (available on Connect)
Contents xiii
00Ross_FrontMatter_FIN.indd xiii00Ross_FrontMatter_FIN.indd xiii 12-12-20 13:0012-12-20 13:00
P A R T 8
TOPICS IN CORPORATE FINANCE 606
C H A P T E R 2 1
INTERNATIONAL CORPORATE FINANCE 606
21.1 Terminology 607
21.2 Foreign Exchange Markets and Exchange Rates 608 Exchange Rates 609 Types of Transactions 611
21.3 Purchasing Power Parity 613 Absolute Purchasing Power Parity 613 Relative Purchasing Power Parity 614 Currency Appreciation and Depreciation 615
21.4 Interest Rate Parity, Unbiased Forward Rates, and the Generalized Fisher Effect 616 Covered Interest Arbitrage 616 Interest Rate Parity (IRP) 617 Forward Rates and Future Spot Rates 617 Putting It All Together 618
21.5 International Capital Budgeting 620 Method 1: The Home Currency Approach 620 Method 2: The Foreign Currency Approach 621 Unremitted Cash Flows 621
21.6 Financing International Projects 622 The Cost of Capital for International Firms 622 International Diversification and Investors 622 Sources of Short- and Intermediate-Term Financing 623
21.7 Exchange Rate Risk 624 Transaction Exposure 624 Economic Exposure 625 Translation Exposure 626 Managing Exchange Rate Risk 627
21.8 Political and Governance Risks 627 Corporate Governance Risk 628
21.9 Summary and Conclusions 629
C H A P T E R 2 2
LEASING 634
22.1 Leases and Lease Types 634 Leasing versus Buying 635 Operating Leases 635 Financial Leases 636
22.2 Accounting and Leasing 637
22.3 Taxes, Canada Revenue Agency (CRA), and Leases 639
22.4 The Cash Flows from Leasing 639 The Incremental Cash Flows 640
22.5 Lease or Buy? 641 A Preliminary Analysis 641 NPV Analysis 642 A Misconception 643 Asset Pool and Salvage Value 643
22.6 A Leasing Paradox 644 Resolving the Paradox 645 Leasing and Capital Budgeting 647
22.7 Reasons for Leasing 649 Good Reasons for Leasing 649 Bad Reasons for Leasing 649 Other Reasons for Leasing 650 Leasing Decisions in Practice 650
22.8 Summary and Conclusions 651
C H A P T E R 2 3
MERGERS AND ACQUISITIONS 655
23.1 The Legal Forms of Acquisitions 656 Merger or Consolidation 656 Acquisition of Stock 657 Acquisition of Assets 657 Acquisition Classifications 657 A Note on Takeovers 658 Alternatives to Merger 659
23.2 Taxes and Acquisitions 659 Determinants of Tax Status 659 Taxable versus Tax-Free Acquisitions 660
xiv Contents
00Ross_FrontMatter_FIN.indd xiv00Ross_FrontMatter_FIN.indd xiv 12-12-20 13:0012-12-20 13:00
23.3 Accounting for Acquisitions 660
23.4 Gains from Acquisition 661 Synergy 661 Revenue Enhancement 662 Cost Reductions 663 Tax Gains 664 Changing Capital Requirements 665 Avoiding Mistakes 665 A Note on Inefficient Management and Opportunistic Takeover Offers 666 The Negative Side of Takeovers 666
23.5 Some Financial Side Effects of Acquisitions 667 EPS Growth 667 Diversification 668
23.6 The Cost of an Acquisition 668 Case I: Cash Acquisition 669 Case II: Stock Acquisition 669 Cash versus Common Stock 670
23.7 Defensive Tactics 670 The Control Block and the Corporate Charter 671 Repurchase ∕ Standstill Agreements 671 Exclusionary Offers and Dual Class Stock 672 Share Rights Plans 672 Going Private and Leveraged Buyouts 673 LBOs to Date: The Record 674 Other Defensive Devices 674
23.8 Some Evidence on Acquisitions 676
23.9 Divestitures and Restructurings 678
23.10 Summary and Conclusions 679
P A R T 9
DERIVATIVE SECURITIES AND CORPORATE FINANCE 685
C H A P T E R 2 4
ENTERPRISE RISK MANAGEMENT 685
24.1 Insurance 686
24.2 Managing Financial Risk 687 The Impact of Financial Risk: The Credit Crisis of 2007–2009 687
The Risk Profile 688 Reducing Risk Exposure 688 Hedging Short-Run Exposure 689 Cash Flow Hedging: A Cautionary Note 690 Hedging Long-Term Exposure 690 Conclusion 690
24.3 Hedging with Forward Contracts 691 Forward Contracts: The Basics 691 The Payoff Profile 691 Hedging with Forwards 692
24.4 Hedging with Futures Contracts 694 Trading in Futures 694 Futures Exchanges 694 Hedging with Futures 698
24.5 Hedging with Swap Contracts 698 Currency Swaps 699 Interest Rate Swaps 699 Commodity Swaps 699 The Swap Dealer 699 Interest Rate Swaps: An Example 700 Credit Default Swaps (CDS) 701
24.6 Hedging with Option Contracts 701 Option Terminology 701 Options versus Forwards 702 Option Payoff Profiles 702 Option Hedging 703 Hedging Commodity Price Risk with Options 703 Hedging Exchange Rate Risk with Options 704 Hedging Interest Rate Risk with Options 704 Actual Use of Derivatives 706
24.7 Summary and Conclusions 707
C H A P T E R 2 5
OPTIONS AND CORPORATE SECURITIES 711
25.1 Options: The Basics 711 Puts and Calls 712 Stock Option Quotations 712 Option Payoffs 713 Put Payoffs 716 Long-Term Options 716
Contents xv
00Ross_FrontMatter_FIN.indd xv00Ross_FrontMatter_FIN.indd xv 12-12-20 13:0012-12-20 13:00
25.2 Fundamentals of Option Valuation 716 Value of a Call Option at Expiration 717 The Upper and Lower Bounds on a Call Option’s Value 718 A Simple Model: Part I 719 Four Factors Determining Option Values 720
25.3 Valuing a Call Option 721 A Simple Model: Part II 721 The Fifth Factor 722 A Closer Look 723
25.4 Employee Stock Options 724 ESO Features 725 ESO Repricing 725
25.5 Equity as a Call Option on the Firm’s Assets 726 Case I: The Debt Is Risk-Free 726 Case II: The Debt Is Risky 727
25.6 Warrants 729 The Difference between Warrants and Call Options 729 Warrants and the Value of the Firm 730
25.7 Convertible Bonds 732 Features of a Convertible Bond 732 Value of a Convertible Bond 732
25.8 Reasons for Issuing Warrants and Convertibles 734 The Free Lunch Story 735 The Expensive Lunch Story 735 A Reconciliation 735
25.9 Other Options 736 The Call Provision on a Bond 736 Put Bonds 736 The Overallotment Option 736 Insurance and Loan Guarantees 737 Managerial Options 737
25.10 Summary and Conclusions 740
Appendix 25A: The Black–Scholes Option Pricing Model 745
C H A P T E R 2 6
BEHAVIOURAL FINANCE: IMPLICATIONS FOR FINANCIAL MANAGEMENT 750
26.1 Introduction to Behavioural Finance 751
26.2 Biases 751 Overconfidence 751 Overoptimism 751 Confirmation Bias 752
26.3 Framing Effects 752 Loss Aversion 753 House Money 754
26.4 Heuristics 755 The Affect Heuristic 755 The Representativeness Heuristic 756 Representativeness and Randomness 756 The Gambler’s Fallacy 757
26.5 Behavioural Finance and Market Efficiency 758 Limits to Arbitrage 758 Bubbles and Crashes 761
26.6 Market Efficiency and the Performance of Professional Money Managers 766
26.7 Summary and Conclusions 770
Glossary 773 Appendix A: Mathematical Tables (available on Connect) Appendix B: Answers to Selected End-of-Chapter Problems (available on Connect) Subject Index 781 Name Index 800 Equation Index 802
xvi Contents
00Ross_FrontMatter_FIN.indd xvi00Ross_FrontMatter_FIN.indd xvi 12-12-20 13:0012-12-20 13:00
PREFACE
Fundamentals of Corporate Finance continues on its tradition of excellence that has earned it its status as market leader. The rapid and extensive changes in financial markets and instruments has placed new burdens on the teaching of Corporate Finance in Canada. As a result, every chapter has been updated to provide the most current examples that reflect Corporate Finance in today’s world. This best-selling text is written with one strongly held principle—that Corporate Finance should be developed and taught in terms of a few integrated powerful ideas: Emphasis on Intuition, Unified Valuation Approach, and Managerial Focus.
An Emphasis on Intuition We are always careful to separate and explain the principles at work on an intuitive level before launching into any specifics. The underlying ideas are discussed first in very general terms and then by way of examples that illustrate in more concrete terms how a financial manager might proceed in a given situation.
A Unified Valuation Approach We treat net present value (NPV) as the basic concept un- derlying corporate finance. Many texts stop well short of consistently integrating this important principle. The most basic notion—that NPV represents the excess of market value over cost— tends to get lost in an overly mechanical approach to NPV that emphasizes computation at the expense of understanding. Every subject covered in Fundamentals of Corporate Finance is firmly rooted in valuation, and care is taken throughout the text to explain how particular decisions have valuation effects.
A Managerial Focus Students will not lose sight of the fact that financial management con- cerns management. Throughout the text, the role of the financial manager as decision maker is emphasized, and the need for managerial input and judgement is stressed. “Black box” approaches to finance are consciously avoided.
These three themes work together to provide a sound foundation, and a practical and work- able understanding of how to evaluate and make financial decisions.
New to This Edition In addition to retaining the coverage that has characterized Fundamen- tals of Corporate Finance from the beginning, the Eighth Canadian Edition features enhanced Canadian content on current issues such as:
• Perspective on the financial crisis of 2007–2009 and its aftermath, in particular, the Euro- pean government debt credit crisis (Chapters 1, 12, and 24, among others).
• Updated and expanded coverage of corporate governance, social responsibility, ethical in- vesting, and shareholder activism (Chapters 1, 8, and 23).
• Addition of a new chapter on Behavioural Finance (Chapter 26). • Refocusing of the derivatives coverage on Enterprise Risk Management (Chapter 24).
00Ross_FrontMatter_FIN.indd xvii00Ross_FrontMatter_FIN.indd xvii 12-12-20 13:0012-12-20 13:00
COVERAGE
This book was designed and developed explicitly for a first course in business or corporate finance, for both finance majors and non-majors alike. In terms of background or prerequisites, the book is nearly self-contained, assuming some familiarity with basic algebra and accounting concepts, while still reviewing important accounting principles very early on. The organization of this text has been developed to give instructors the flexibility they need.
Just to give an idea of the breadth of coverage in the Eighth Canadian Edition, the following grid presents, for each chapter, some of the most significant features, as well as a few selected chapter highlights. Of course, in every chapter, opening vignettes, boxed features, in-chapter illustrated examples using real companies, and end-of-chapter materials have been thoroughly updated as well.
Chapters Selected Topics of Interest Benefits to You
PART ONE OVERVIEW OF CORPORATE FINANCE Chapter 1 Introduction to Corporate Finance
• New material: Perspective on the financial crisis of 2007–2009 and its aftermath, in particular, the European government debt credit crisis
• Links to headlines on financial crisis.
• Goal of the firm and agency problems • Stresses value creation as the most fundamental aspect of management and describes agency issues that can arise.
• Ethics, financial management, and executive compensation
• Brings in real-world issues concerning conflicts of interest and current controversies surrounding ethical conduct and management pay.
Chapter 2 Financial Statements, Cash Flow, and Taxes
• New material: Financial statements conforming to IFRS • Links to current practice.
• Cash flow vs. earnings • Defines cash flow and the differences between cash flow and earnings.
• Market values vs. book values • Emphasizes the relevance of market values over book values.
PART TWO FINANCIAL STATEMENTS AND LONG-TERM FINANCIAL PLANNING Chapter 3 Working with Financial Statements
• Using financial statement information • Discusses the advantages and disadvantages of using financial statements.
Chapter 4 Long-Term Financial Planning and Corporate Growth
• Explanation of alternative formulas for sustainable and internal growth rates
• Explanation of growth rate formulas clears up a common misunderstanding about these formulas and the circumstances under which alternative formulas are correct.
• Thorough coverage of sustainable growth as a planning tool
• Provides a vehicle for examining the interrelationships among operations, financing, and growth.
PART THREE VALUATION OF FUTURE CASH FLOWS Chapter 5 Introduction to Valuation: The Time Value of Money
• First of two chapters on time value of money • Relatively short chapter introduces the basic ideas on time value of money to get students started on this traditionally difficult topic.
Chapter 6 Discounted Cash Flow Valuation
• Second of two chapters on time value of money • Covers more advanced time value topics with numerous examples, calculator tips, and Excel spreadsheet exhibits. Contains many real-world examples.
Chapter 7 Interest Rates and Bond Valuation
• New material: Discussion of bond fund strategies at time of European government debt crisis
• Links chapter material to current events.
• “Clean” vs. “dirty” bond prices and accrued interest
• Clears up the pricing of bonds between coupon payment dates and also bond market quoting conventions.
• Bond ratings • Up-to-date discussion of bond rating agencies and ratings given to debt. Includes the latest descriptions of ratings used by DBRS.
Chapter 8 Stock Valuation
• New material: Stock valuation using multiples • Broadens coverage of valuation techniques.
• New material: Examples of shareholder activism at Canadian Pacific and Magna International
• Expands governance coverage and links chapter material to current events.
00Ross_FrontMatter_FIN.indd xviii00Ross_FrontMatter_FIN.indd xviii 12-12-20 13:0012-12-20 13:00
Chapters Selected Topics of Interest Benefits to You PART FOUR CAPITAL BUDGETING
Chapter 9 Net Present Value and Other Investment Criteria
• New material: Enhanced discussion of multiple IRRs and modified IRR
• Clarifies properties of IRR.
• New material: Practice of capital budgeting in Canada • Current Canadian material demonstrates relevance of techniques presented.
• First of three chapters on capital budgeting • Relatively short chapter introduces key ideas on an intuitive level to help students with this traditionally difficult topic.
• NPV, IRR, payback, discounted payback, and accounting rate of return
• Consistent, balanced examination of advantages and disadvantages of various criteria.
Chapter 10 Making Capital Investment Decisions
• Project cash flow • Thorough coverage of project cash flows and the relevant numbers for a project analysis.
• Alternative cash flow definitions • Emphasizes the equivalence of various formulas, thereby removing common misunderstandings.
• Special cases of DCF analysis • Considers important applications of chapter tools.
Chapter 11 Project Analysis and Evaluation
• New material: Detailed examples added of scenario analysis in gold mining and managerial options in zoo management
• Brings technique to life in real-world example.
• Sources of value • Stresses the need to understand the economic basis for value creation in a project.
• Scenario and sensitivity “what-if” analyses • Illustrates how to apply and interpret these tools in a project analysis.
• Break-even analysis • Covers cash, accounting, and financial break-even levels.
PART FIVE RISK AND RETURN Chapter 12 Lessons from Capital Market History
• New material: Capital market history updated through 2011, new section on market volatility in 2008, In Their Own Words box on the crash of 2008 and the efficient markets hypothesis
• Extensively covers historical returns, volatilities, and risk premiums.
• Geometric vs. arithmetic returns • Discusses calculation and interpretation of geometric returns. Clarifies common misconceptions regarding appropriate use of arithmetic vs. geometric average returns.
• Market efficiency • Discusses efficient markets hypothesis along with common misconceptions.
Chapter 13 Return, Risk, and the Security Market Line
• New material: Correlations in the financial crisis • Explains instability in correlations with a current example.
• Diversification, systematic and unsystematic risk • Illustrates basics of risk and return in straightforward fashion.
• Beta and the security market line • Develops the security market line with an intuitive approach that bypasses much of the usual portfolio theory and statistics.
PART SIX COST OF CAPITAL AND LONG-TERM FINANCIAL POLICY Chapter 14 Cost of Capital
• Cost of capital estimation • Contains a complete step-by-step illustration of cost of capital for publicly traded Loblaw Companies.
Chapter 15 Raising Capital
• Dutch auction IPOs • Explains uniform price auctions using Google IPO as an example.
• IPO “quiet periods” • Explains the OSC’s and SEC’s quiet period rules.
• Lockup agreements • Briefly discusses the importance of lockup agreements.
• IPOs in practice • Takes in-depth look at IPOs of Facebook and Athabasca Oil Sands.
Chapter 16 Financial Leverage and Capital Structure Policy
• New material: Pecking order theory • Expands coverage of capital structure.
• Basics of financial leverage • Illustrates the effect of leverage on risk and return.
• Optimal capital structure • Describes the basic trade-offs leading to an optimal capital structure.
• Financial distress and bankruptcy • Briefly surveys the bankruptcy process.
Chapter 17 Dividends and Dividend Policy
• New material: Recent Canadian survey evidence on dividend policy
• Survey results show the most important (and least important) factors that financial managers consider when setting dividend policy.
• Dividends and dividend policy • Describes dividend payments and the factors favouring higher and lower payout policies.
Coverage xix
00Ross_FrontMatter_FIN.indd xix00Ross_FrontMatter_FIN.indd xix 12-12-20 13:0012-12-20 13:00
Chapters Selected Topics of Interest Benefits to You PART SEVEN SHORT-TERM FINANCIAL PLANNING AND MANAGEMENT
Chapter 18 Short-Term Finance and Planning
• Operating and cash cycles • Stresses the importance of cash flow timing.
• Short-term financial planning • Illustrates creation of cash budgets and potential need for financing.
Chapter 19 Cash and Liquidity Management
• Float management • Covers float management thoroughly.
• Cash collection and disbursement • Examines systems that firms use to handle cash inflows and outflows.
Chapter 20 Credit and Inventory Management
• Credit management • Analysis of credit policy and implementation.
• Inventory management • Briefly surveys important inventory concepts.
PART EIGHT TOPICS IN CORPORATE FINANCE Chapter 21 International Corporate Finance
• Exchange rate, political, and governance risks • Discusses hedging and issues surrounding sovereign and governance risks.
• Foreign exchange • Covers essentials of exchange rates and their determination.
• International capital budgeting • Shows how to adapt basic DCF approach to handle exchange rates.
Chapter 22 Leasing
• Synthetic leases • Discusses controversial practice of financing off the statement of financial position (also referred to as off-balance sheet financing).
• Leases and lease valuation • Discusses essentials of leasing.
Chapter 23 Mergers and Acquisitions
• New material: Expanded discussion of dual class stock, investor activism, and ownership and control
• Presents topical issues with Canadian examples.
• Alternatives to mergers and acquisitions • Covers strategic alliances and joint ventures and explains why they are important alternatives.
• Divestitures and restructurings • Examines important actions such as equity carve-outs, spins-offs, and split-ups.
• Mergers and acquisitions • Develops essentials of M&A analysis, including financial, tax, and accounting issues.
PART NINE DERIVATIVE SECURITIES AND CORPORATE FINANCE Chapter 24 Enterprise Risk Management
• New material: Enterprise risk management framework and insurance
• Illustrates need to manage risk and some of the most important types of risk.
• New material: Recent survey results on derivatives use • Relates material to practice by financial executives.
• Hedging with forwards, futures, swaps, and options • Shows how many risks can be managed with financial derivatives.
Chapter 25 Options and Corporate Securities
• Put-call parity and Black–Scholes • Develops modern option valuation and factors influencing option values.
• Options and corporate finance • Applies option valuation to a variety of corporate issues, including mergers and capital budgeting.
Chapter 26 (New Chapter) Behavioural Finance: Implications for Financial Management
• Introduction to Behavioural Finance • Introduces biases, framing effects, and heuristics.
• Behavioural Finance and market efficiency • Explains limits to arbitrage and discusses bubbles and crashes, including the Crash of 2008.
• Market efficiency and the performance of professional money managers
• Expands on efficient markets discussion in Chapter 12 and relates it to Behavioural Finance.
xx Coverage
00Ross_FrontMatter_FIN.indd xx00Ross_FrontMatter_FIN.indd xx 12-12-20 13:0012-12-20 13:00
LEARNING SOLUTIONS
In addition to illustrating pertinent concepts and presenting up-to-date coverage, the authors strive to present the material in a way that makes it logical and easy to understand. To meet the varied needs of the intended audience, our text is rich in valuable learning tools and support.
Each feature can be categorized by the benefit to the student: • Real Financial Decisions • Application Tools • Study Aids
Real F inancial Decis ions We have included key features that help students connect chapter concepts to how decision makers use this material in the real world.
In Their Own Words Boxes A unique series of brief essays are written by distinguished scholars and by Canadian practitioners on key topics in the text. To name just a few, these include essays by Jeremy Siegel on efficient market theory and the financial crisis, Eric Lie on option backdating, and Heather Pelant on investment risk.
Jeremy Siegel on Efficient Market Theory and the Crisis
Financial journalist and best-selling author Roger Lowenstein didn’t mince words in a piece for the Washington WW Post this summer: “The upside of the current Great Recession is that it could drive a stake through the heart of the academic nostrum known as the efficient-market hypothesis.” In a similar vein, thethethe highighiggghlyhlyhlyyy resresrespecpecpecpp tedtedted monmonmonmoneyeyey ey y manmanmanmanageageageageg rrr r andandand fifififinannannanciaciacialll l anaanaanalyslyslysyy ttt JJerJerJerJ emyemyemyy GGraGraGra thnthnthnthamamam wrowrowrottetete iininin hihishishis quaquaquaq trterterte lrlyrlyrlyy l tletletlettterterter llaslaslastttt JJanJanJanJ uaruaruary:y:y:yrrr “Th“ThThTheee iincincinc dredredredibliblibliblyyy y iinainainaccuccuccu tratratrateee ffieffieffieffi icieciecie tntntnt marmarmark tketketket ththethetheorororyyy yrrrr [[ca[ca[ca[ useuseused]d]d]d] ] aaa letletletlethalhalhalhallylylyly dandandandangergergergero sousousous comcomcomcombinbinbinbinatiatiatiationononon ofofofof assassassassetetetet b bbubbubbubbleblebleblesss,s, laxlaxlaxlax conconconcontrotrotrotrolslsls,ls,
thought that underlying collateral—the home—could always cover the principal in the event the homeowner defaulted. These models led credit agencies to rate these subprime mortgages as “investment grade.”
But this assessment was faulty. From 2000 through 2006, national home prices rose by 88.7%, far more than the 17.5% gaig n in the consumer prip ce index or the palp try yr 1% rise in median hhouhouhou hsehsehseh ldoldoldold iincincincomeomeome.. NNevNevNevererer b fbefbefbeforeoreore hhavhavhaveee hhomhomhomeee ipripriprip cescesces jjumjumjumj dpedpedpedp ththathathatttt ffarfarfar hahahah deadeadead fofofof prprprprp iiceiceices as as as a dndndnd iincincincomeomeomeomesss.s.
ThiThiThiThisss s shoshoshoshoulduldulduld havhavhavhaveeee sensensensenttt t upupupupp redredredred flflflflagsagsagsagsg andandandand cascascascasttt t doudoudoudoubtsbtsbtsbts onononon usiusiusiusingngngngg d l h l k d l hi i l d li j d f
IN THEIR OWN WORDSIN THEIR OWN WORDS…
Enhanced Real-World Examples There are many current examples integrated throughout the text, tying chapter concepts to real life through illustration and reinforcing the relevance of the material. For added reinforcement, some examples tie into the chapter-opening vignettes.
Web Links We have added and updated website references, a key research tool directing stu- dents to websites that tie into the chapter material.
Integrative Mini Cases These longer problems seek to integrate a number of topics from within the chapter. The Mini Cases allow students to test and challenge their abilities to solve real-life situations for each of the key sections of the text material.
Internet Application Questions Questions relevant to the topic discussed in each chapter, are presented for the students to explore using the Internet. Students will find direct links to the websites included in these questions on the Ross Connect site and linked out directly from the eBook.
Appl icat ion Tools Realizing that there is more than one way to solve problems in Corporate Finance, we include sections that will not only encourage students to learn different problem-solving methods, but will also help them learn or brush up on their financial calculator and Excel® spreadsheet skills.
00Ross_FrontMatter_FIN.indd xxi00Ross_FrontMatter_FIN.indd xxi 12-12-20 13:0012-12-20 13:00
Calculator Hints This feature introduces students to problem solving with the assistance of a financial calculator. Sample keystrokes are provided for illustrative purposes, although individual calculators will vary.
Annuity Payments
Finding annuity payments is easy with a financial calculator. In our example just above, the PV is $100,000, the interest rate is 18 percent, and there are five years. We find the pay- ment as follows:
Enter 5 18 100,000
S lSolSolSolSolveveveve fforforforfor -3131313131,,978978978978978
HHerHerHerHere we we we we ge ge ge gggetetetet a na na na negaegaegaegagg itivtivtivtive se se se siignignignigngg onononon hththththe pe pe pe pppaymaymaymaymyy entententent bbebebebecaucaucaucausesesese hthethethethe papapapapp ymeymeymeymeyy ntntntnt iisisisis anananan outoutoutoutflfloflofloflo fw fw fw fw forororor usususus.
CALCULATOR HINTS
Spreadsheet Strategies This feature either introduces students to Excel® or helps them brush up on their Excel® spreadsheet skills, particularly as they relate to Corporate Finance. This feature appears in self-contained sections and shows students how to set up spreadsheets to ana- lyze common financial problems—a vital part of every business student’s education.
How to Calculate Bond Prices and Yields Using a Spreadsheet
Most spreadsheets have fairly elaborate routines available for calculating bond values and yields; many of these routines involve details that we have not discussed. However, setting up a simple spreadsheet to calculate prices or yields is straightforward, as our next two spreadsheets show:
1
2222
333333
44444
5
A B C D E F G H
SSuppoSuppoSuppopp se wese wese we hhavehavehave ba boa boa bo d ind wind wind with 22th 22th 22th 22 yearyearyeary ts tos tos to tmaturmaturmaturitityityityy a ca c, a c, ouponouponouponp trateraterate f 8of 8of 8of 8 percpercpercp tententent, , dand aand aand a i lyielyielyiely d td tod tod to
t it f 9 t If th b d k i l t h t i it i t d ?
U iUsingUsingUsingg a spa spa spp dreadsreadsreadsh theetheetheet tto cato cato cal llculalculalculat bte bote bote bo dnd vand vand valluelueluesss
SPREADSHEET STRATEGIES
Excel® Spreadsheet Templates Selected questions within the end-of-chapter material, identified by the following icon: , can be solved using the Excel® Spreadsheet Templates available on this text’s Connect. These Excel® templates are a valuable extension of the Spreadsheet Strategies feature.
Study Aids We want students to get the most from this resource and their course, and we realize that students have different learning styles and study needs. We therefore present a number of study features to appeal to a wide range of students.
Chapter Learning Objectives This feature maps out the topics and learning goals in each chapter. Each end-of-chapter problem is linked to a learning objective to help students organize their study time appropriately.
DISCOUNTED CASH FLOW VALUATIONAA
C H A P T E R 6
ith multimillion dollar contracts and
bonuses, the signing of big-name ath-
letes in the sports industry r is often accompanied by
great fanfare, but the numbers can often be mislead-
ing. For example, in September 2009, the Vancou-VV
ver Canucks extended its contract with goaltender
Roberto Luongo, offering him a twelve-year deal
through to 2021 valued at a total of US$64 million.
Considering the time value of money,yy how much is
Luongo really receiving? After reading this chapter, rr
you’ll see that although Luongo still received a sub-
stantial amount, it is less than the US$64 million dol-
lar figure that sent the sports media into a frenzy.
Learning Object ives
After studying this chapter, you should understand:rr
LO1 How to determine the future and presp ent value of investments with multiple p hcashcashcash flflofloflowsws.ws.
LO2LO2 HowHow loanloan papapp ymenymenyy ts ats are cre calcualculatelated and and hod how tow to finfind thd the ine intereterest rst rateate on aon a loaloann.
LO3LO3LO3 HHowHow lloanloans ars are ame amorortitizetizedd ord or ipaipaid fd ofd offff.
LO4LO4LO4LO4LO4 HHowHowHow iinteinteinterestrestrest ratratrates aes aes are qre qre quoteuoteuoted (d (ad (ad (a dnd mnd mnd miisquisquisqu dotedotedoted))).).
© Z
U M
A P
re ss
, I nc
./ m
y A
la m
/ A
ll C
an ad
a Ph
ot os
xxii Learning Solutions
00Ross_FrontMatter_FIN.indd xxii00Ross_FrontMatter_FIN.indd xxii 12-12-20 13:0012-12-20 13:00
Concept Building Chapter sections are intentionally kept short to promote a step-by-step, building block approach to learning. Each section is then followed by a series of short concept questions that highlight the key ideas just presented. Students use these questions to make sure they can identify and understand the most important concepts as they read.
Numbered Examples Separate numbered and titled examples are extensively integrated into the chapters. These examples provide detailed applications and illustrations of the text material in a step-by-step format. Each example is completely self-contained so students don’t have to search for additional information. Based on our classroom testing, these examples are among the most useful learning aids because they provide both detail and explanation.
Key Terms Within each chapter, key terms are highlighted in boldface type the first time they appear. Key terms are defined in the text, and also in a running glossary in the margins of the text for quick reminders. For reference, there is a list of key terms at the end of each chapter and a full glossary with page references for each term at the back of the textbook.
Summary Tables These tables succinctly restate key principles, results, and equations. They appear whenever it is useful to emphasize and summarize a group of related concepts.
Key Equations These are called out in the text and identified by equation number. An Equa- tion Index is available at the end of the book and a Formula Sheet can be found on the text’s Connect site.
Chapter Summary and Conclusion These paragraphs review the chapter’s key points and provide closure to the chapter.
Chapter Review Problems and Self-Test Appearing after the Summary and Conclusions and Key Terms, each chapter includes Chapter Review Problems and a Self-Test section. These questions and answers allow students to test their abilities in solving key problems related to the chapter content and provide instant reinforcement.
Concepts Review and Critical Thinking Questions This section facilitates students’ knowledge of key principles, and their intuitive understanding of chapter concepts. A number of the questions relate to the chapter-opening vignette—reinforcing students’ critical-thinking skills and the learning of chapter material.
Concepts Review and Critical Thinking Questions 1. (LO3) What effect would the following actions have on a
firm’s current ratio? Assume that net working capital is positive. a. Inventory is purchased. b. A supplier is paid. c. A short-term bank loan is repaid. d. A long-term debt is paid off early. e. A customer pays off a credit account. f. Inventory is sold at cost. gg.g InveInventorntory isy isy solsold fod for ar a profprofp itit.
222.2. 2. ( O(LO3(LO3(LO3(LO3(LO3( ))))))) IInIn In recerecerece tntntnt yearyearyeary ss, s, hCh tChetChetChetiicamicamicampppp CCoCo. Co. hhhashashas greagreagreag ltltlytlytly y iincrincrincreaseeaseeaseddddd ititsitsits currcurrcurrententent tiratiratiratiooo. AAtAtAt hthethethe samesamesame titimetimetime,, , hthethethe iquicquicquicq kkkk tiratiratiratiooo hhashashas f llfallfallfallenenen. WWWhhathathat hhhhasasas hhapphapphapppp denedenedened???? HasHasHas hthethethe lliquliquliquq diditiditidityyy yy fofofof hthethethe compcompcomppanananyyy yy i d?
closely watched for semiconductor manufacturers. A ratio of 0.93 indicates that for every $100 worth of chips shipped over some period, only $93 worth of new orders is received. In Feb- ruary 2006, the semiconductor equipment industry’s book-to- bill reached 1.01, compared to 0.98 during the month of January 2006. The book-to-bill ratio reached a low of 0.78 during October 2006. The three-month average of worldwide bookings in January 2006 was $1.30 billion, an increase of 6 percent over January 2005, while the three-month average of billbillingsingsg inin FebrFebruaryuaryy 20062006 waswas $1 2$1.2$ 99 billbillionion,, aa 22 percpercp entent in-in- creacreacreasese se fffromfromfrom bF bFebrFebrFebruaryuaryuaryy 2005200520052005. . hWh tWhatWhatWhat iisis is hthithisthisthis tiratiratiratioo o i tinteinteinte d dd dndedndednded ttototo measmeasmeas ?ure?ure?ure? WhWhyWhyWhyy ddododo youyouyou y hithinthinthink ik itk itk it iisisis so cso cso clloseloseloselly wly wly wy hatchatchatch d?ed?ed?ed?
9999.9. ((LO5(LO5(LO5(LO5(LO5( ))))))) SSo cSo-cSo-c llalleallealledddd ““samsamsame ste-ste-storeoreore lsalesalesale ”s”ss areareare aaa veryveryveryyy impoimpoimpop rtanrtanrtanttt meamea-mea- f i di C di Ti d Ti H
Questions and Problems We have found that many students learn better when they have plenty of opportunity to practise; therefore, we provide extensive end-of-chapter questions and problems. These are labelled by topic and separated into three learning levels: Basic, Intermediate, and Challenge. Throughout the text, we have worked to supply interesting problems that illustrate real-world applications of chapter material. Answers to selected end-of-chapter material appear in Appendix B (now available on Connect).
As described earlier in this Preface, students’ learning and understanding of the chapter con- tent is further supported by the following end-of-chapter materials:
• Internet Application Questions • Mini Cases • Suggested Readings (now available on Connect)
Learning Solutions xxiii
00Ross_FrontMatter_FIN.indd xxiii00Ross_FrontMatter_FIN.indd xxiii 12-12-20 13:0012-12-20 13:00
McGraw-Hill Connect™ is a web-based assignment and assessment platform that gives students the means to better connect with their coursework, with their instructors, and with the important concepts that they will need to know for success now and in the future.
With Connect, instructors can deliver assignments, quizzes, and tests online. Nearly all the questions from the text are presented in an auto-gradeable format and tied to the text’s learning objectives. Instructors can edit existing questions and write entirely new problems. Instructors can track individual student performance—by question, assignment, or in relation to the class overall—with detailed grade reports. Integrate grade reports easily with Learning Management Systems (LMS) such as WebCT and Blackboard.
By choosing Connect, instructors are providing their students with a powerful tool for improving academic performance and truly mastering course material. Connect allows students to practise important skills at their own pace and on their own schedule. Importantly, students’ assessment results and instructors’ feedback are all saved online—so students can continually review their progress and plot their course to success.
Connect also provides 24/7 online access to an eBook—an online edition of the text—to aid them in successfully completing their work, wherever and whenever they choose.
Key Features Simple Assignment Management With Connect, creating assignments is easier than ever, so you can spend more time teaching and less time managing.
• Create and deliver assignments easily with selectable end-of-chapter questions and testbank material to assign online.
• Streamline lesson planning, student progress reporting, and assignment grading to make classroom management more efficient than ever.
• Go paperless with the eBook and online submission and grading of student assignments.
Smart Grading When it comes to studying, time is precious. Connect helps students learn more efficiently by providing feedback and practice material when they need it, where they need it.
• Automatically score assignments, giving students immediate feedback on their work and side- by-side comparisons with correct answers.
• Access and review each response; manually change grades or leave comments for students to review.
• Reinforce classroom concepts with practice tests and instant quizzes.
Instructor Library The Connect Instructor Library is your course creation hub. It provides all the critical resources you’ll need to build your course, just how you want to teach it.
• Assign eBook readings and draw from a rich collection of textbook-specific assignments. • Access to all instructor resources:
Connect content Prepared by Merlyn Foo, Athabasca University. Instructor’s Manual Prepared by Lewis Stevenson, Brock University. The Instructor’s Manual contains two main sections. The first section contains a chapter outline with lecture tips, real-world tips, and ethics notes. The second section includes detailed solutions for all end-of-chapter problems.
TECHNOLOGY SOLUTIONS
00Ross_FrontMatter_FIN.indd xxiv00Ross_FrontMatter_FIN.indd xxiv 12-12-20 13:0012-12-20 13:00
TECHNOLOGY SOLUTIONS
Computerized Test Bank Prepared by Sepand Jazzi, Kwantlen Polytechnic University. The computerized test bank is available through EZ Test Online—a flexible and easy-to-use electronic testing program—that allows instructors to create tests from book-specific items. EZ Test accommodates a wide range of question types and allows instructors to add their own questions. Test items are also available in Word format (Rich text format). For secure online testing, exams created in EZ Test can be exported to WebCT and Blackboard. EZ Test Online is supported at mhhe.com/eztest where users can download a Quick Start Guide, access FAQs, or log a ticket for help with specific issues. PowerPoint® Presentation Prepared by Anne Inglis. The Microsoft® PowerPoint® Pre- sentation slides have been enhanced to better illustrate chapter concepts. Image Bank All figures and tables are available in digital format on the McGraw-Hill Con- nect™ site associated with this text, which can be found at mcgrawhillconnect.ca. Excel® Templates (with Solutions) Prepared by Brent Matheson, University of Water- loo. Excel® templates are included with solutions for end-of-chapter problems indicated by an Excel® icon in the margin of the text. • View assignments and resources created for past sections. • Post your own resources for students to use.
eBook Connect reinvents the textbook learning experience for the modern student. Every Connect subject area is seamlessly integrated with Connect eBooks, which are designed to keep students focused on the concepts key to their success.
• Provide students with a Connect eBook, allowing for anytime, anywhere access to the text- book.
• Merge media, animation and assessments with the text’s narrative to engage students and im- prove learning and retention.
• Pinpoint and connect key concepts in a snap using the powerful eBook search engine. • Manage notes, highlights, and bookmarks in one place for simple, comprehensive review.
No two students are alike. McGraw-Hill LearnSmart™ is an intelligent learning system that uses a series of adaptive questions to pinpoint each student’s knowledge gaps. LearnSmart then provides an optimal learning path for each student, so that they spend less time in areas they already know and more time in areas they don’t. The result is LearnSmart’s adaptive learning path helps students retain more knowledge, learn faster, and study more efficiently.
Lyryx for Corporate F inance Lyryx Assessment for Finance is a leading-edge online assessment system, designed to support both students and instructors. The assessment takes the form of a homework assignment called a Lab. The assessments are algorithmically generated and automatically graded so that students get instant grades and feedback. New Labs are randomly generated each time, providing the student with unlimited opportunities to try a type of question. After they submit a Lab for marking, students receive extensive feedback on their work, thus promoting their learning experience.
Please contact your iLearning Sales Specialist for additional information on the Lyryx As- sessment Finance system. Visit lyryx.com.
a d v a n c i n g l e a r n i n g
Technology Solutions xxv
00Ross_FrontMatter_FIN.indd xxv00Ross_FrontMatter_FIN.indd xxv 12-12-20 13:0012-12-20 13:00
Superior Learning Solut ions and Support The McGraw-Hill Ryerson team is ready to help you assess and integrate any of our products, technology, and services into your course for optimal teaching and learning performance. Whether it’s helping your students improve their grades, or putting your entire course online, the McGraw-Hill Ryerson team is here to help you do it. Contact your iLearning Sales Specialist today to learn how to maximize all of McGraw-Hill Ryerson’s resources!
For more information on the latest technology and Learning Solutions offered by McGraw-Hill Ryerson and its partners, please visit us online: mcgrawhill.ca/he/solutions.
Solutions that make a difference.
Course Management CourseSmart brings together thousands of textbooks across hundreds of courses in an e-
textbook format, providing unique benefits to students and faculty. By purchasing an e-textbook, students can save up to 50 percent off the cost of a print textbook, reduce their impact on the environment, and gain access to powerful Web tools for learning, including full-text search, notes and highlighting, and e-mail tools for sharing notes between classmates. For faculty, CourseSmart provides instant access to review and compare textbooks and course materials in their discipline area without the time, cost, and environmental impact of mailing print examination copies. For further details contact your McGraw-Hill Ryerson iLearning Sales Specialist or go to coursesmart.com.
McGraw-Hill Ryerson offers a range of flexible integration solutions for Blackboard, WebCT, Desire2Learn, Moodle, and other leading learning management platforms. Please contact your local McGraw-Hill Ryerson iLearning Sales Specialist for details.
McGraw-Hill’s Create Online gives you access to the most abundant resource at your finger- tips—literally. With a few mouse clicks, you can create customized learning tools simply and af- fordably. McGraw-Hill Ryerson has included many of our market-leading textbooks within Create Online for ebook and print customization as well as many licensed readings and cases. For more information, go to mcgrawhillcreate.ca.
xxvi Technology Solutions
00Ross_FrontMatter_FIN.indd xxvi00Ross_FrontMatter_FIN.indd xxvi 12-12-20 13:0012-12-20 13:00
We never would have completed this book without the incredible amount of help and support we received from colleagues, editors, family members, and friends. We would like to thank, without implicating, all of you.
For starters, a great many of our colleagues read the drafts of our first and current editions. Our reviewers continued to keep us working on improving the content, organization, exposition, and Canadian content of our text. To the following reviewers, we are grateful for their many con- tributions to the Eighth Canadian Edition:
Mohamed Ayadi, Brock University Larry Bauer, Memorial University Jaime Morales Burgos, Trent University Bill Dawson, University of Western Ontario Chris Duff, Royal Roads University Shantanu Dutta, University of Ontario Institute of Technology Larbi Hammami, McGill University Andras Marosi, University of Alberta Brent Matheson, University of Waterloo Judy Palm, Vancouver Island University William Rentz, University of Ottawa David Roberts, Southern Alberta Institute of Technology Jun Yang, Acadia University Yuriy Zabolotnyuk, Carleton University
A special thank you must be given to Hamdi Driss, Schulich School of Business, and VijayShree Vethantham for their vigilant effort of technical proofreading and, in particular, care- ful checking of the solutions in the Instructor’s Manual. Their keen eyes and attention to detail have contributed greatly to the quality of the final product.
Several of our most respected colleagues and journalists contributed essays, entitled “In Their Own Words,” that appear in selected chapters. To these individuals we extend a special thanks:
Edward Altman, New York University James Darroch, York University Christine Dobby, Financial Post Robert C. Higgins, University of Washington Ken Hitzig, Accord Financial Corp. Erik Lie, University of Iowa Robert C. Merton, Harvard University Merton H. Miller, University of Chicago Heather Pelant, Barclays Global Investors Canada Jay R. Ritter, University of Florida Robert J. Schiller, Yale University Hersh Shefrin, Santa Clara University Jeremy Siegel, University of Pennsylvania Bennett Stewart, Stern Stewart & Co. Jamie Sturgeon, Financial Post Samuel Weaver, The Hershey Company David Weitzner, York University
Ganesh Kannan, recent Schulich MBA graduate, deserves special mention for his role in producing the Eighth Canadian Edition. He capably researched updates, drafted revisions, and responded to editorial queries; and his excellent input was essential to this edition.
ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS
00Ross_FrontMatter_FIN.indd xxvii00Ross_FrontMatter_FIN.indd xxvii 12-12-20 13:0012-12-20 13:00
Much credit goes to a “AAA-rated” group of people at McGraw-Hill Ryerson who worked on the Eighth Canadian Edition. Leading the team was Kimberley Veevers, Senior Product Manager, who continued her role as champion of this project by arranging unparalleled support for the development of the text and support package for this edition. Maria Chu, Senior Product Developer, efficiently and cheerfully supervised the reviews and revision as she has done for many prior editions. Production and copy-editing were handled ably by Joanne Limebeer, Supervising Editor, and Robert Templeton and Bradley T. Smith, First Folio Resource Group Inc., Copy Editors.
Through the development of this edition, we have taken great care to discover and eliminate errors. Our goal is to provide the best Canadian textbook available in Corporate Finance.
Please forward your comments to: Professor Gordon S. Roberts Schulich School of Business, York University 4700 Keele Street, Toronto, Ontario M3J IP3
Or, email your comments to [email protected].
Stephen A. Ross Randolph W. Westerfield
Bradford D. Jordan Gordon S. Roberts
xxviii Acknowledgements
00Ross_FrontMatter_FIN.indd xxviii00Ross_FrontMatter_FIN.indd xxviii 12-12-20 13:0012-12-20 13:00
Chapters Selected Topics of Interest Benefits to You
PART ONE OVERVIEW OF CORPORATE FINANCE
Chapter 1 Introduction to Corporate Finance
• New material: Perspective on the financial crisis of 2007–2009 and its aftermath, in particular, the European government debt credit crisis
• Links to headlines on financial crisis.
• Goal of the firm and agency problems • Stresses value creation as the most fundamental aspect of management and describes agency issues that can arise.
• Ethics, financial management, and executive compensation
• Brings in real-world issues concerning conflicts of interest and current controversies surrounding ethical conduct and management pay.
Chapter 2 Financial Statements, Cash Flow, and Taxes
• New material: Financial statements conforming to IFRS
• Links to current practice.
• Cash flow vs. earnings • Defines cash flow and the differences between cash flow and earnings.
• Market values vs. book values • Emphasizes the relevance of market values over book values.
PART TWO FINANCIAL STATEMENTS AND LONG-TERM FINANCIAL PLANNING
Chapter 3 Working with Financial Statements
• Using financial statement information • Discusses the advantages and disadvantages of using financial statements.
Chapter 4 Long-Term Financial Planning and Corporate Growth
• Explanation of alternative formulas for sustainable and internal growth rates
• Explanation of growth rate formulas clears up a common misunderstanding about these formulas and the circumstances under which alternative formulas are correct.
• Thorough coverage of sustainable growth as a planning tool
• Provides a vehicle for examining the interrelationships among operations, financing, and growth.
PART THREE VALUATION OF FUTURE CASH FLOWS
Chapter 5 Introduction to Valuation: The Time Value of Money
• First of two chapters on time value of money • Relatively short chapter introduces the basic ideas on time value of money to get students started on this traditionally difficult topic.
Chapter 6 Discounted Cash Flow Valuation
• Second of two chapters on time value of money • Covers more advanced time value topics with numerous examples, calculator tips, and Excel spreadsheet exhibits. Contains many real-world examples.
Chapter 7 Interest Rates and Bond Valuation
• New material: Discussion of bond fund strategies at time of European government debt crisis
• Links chapter material to current events.
• “Clean” vs. “dirty” bond prices and accrued interest
• Clears up the pricing of bonds between coupon payment dates and also bond market quoting conventions.
• Bond ratings • Up-to-date discussion of bond rating agencies and ratings given to debt. Includes the latest descriptions of ratings used by DBRS.
Chapter 8 Stock Valuation
• New material: Stock valuation using multiples • Broadens coverage of valuation techniques.
• New material: Examples of shareholder activism at Canadian Pacific and Magna International
• Expands governance coverage and links chapter material to current events.
PART FOUR CAPITAL BUDGETING
Chapter 9 Net Present Value and Other Investment Criteria
• New material: Enhanced discussion of multiple IRRs and modified IRR
• Clarifies properties of IRR.
• New material: Practice of capital budgeting in Canada
• Current Canadian material demonstrates relevance of techniques presented.
• First of three chapters on capital budgeting • Relatively short chapter introduces key ideas on an intuitive level to help students with this traditionally difficult topic.
• NPV, IRR, payback, discounted payback, and accounting rate of return
• Consistent, balanced examination of advantages and disadvantages of various criteria.
41Ross_InsideBackCover_1st.indd B41Ross_InsideBackCover_1st.indd B 12-12-20 11:5812-12-20 11:58
Chapters Selected Topics of Interest Benefits to You
Chapter 10 Making Capital Investment Decisions
• Project cash flow • Thorough coverage of project cash flows and the relevant numbers for a project analysis.
• Alternative cash flow definitions • Emphasizes the equivalence of various formulas, thereby removing common misunderstandings.
• Special cases of DCF analysis • Considers important applications of chapter tools.
Chapter 11 Project Analysis and Evaluation
• New material: Detailed examples added of scenario analysis in gold mining and managerial options in zoo management
• Brings technique to life in real-world example.
• Sources of value • Stresses the need to understand the economic basis for value creation in a project.
• Scenario and sensitivity “what-if” analyses • Illustrates how to apply and interpret these tools in a project analysis.
• Break-even analysis • Covers cash, accounting, and financial break-even levels.
PART FIVE RISK AND RETURN
Chapter 12 Lessons from Capital Market History
• New material: Capital market history updated through 2011, new section on market volatility in 2008, In Their Own Words box on the crash of 2008 and the efficient markets hypothesis
• Extensively covers historical returns, volatilities, and risk premiums.
• Geometric vs. arithmetic returns • Discusses calculation and interpretation of geometric returns. Clarifies common misconceptions regarding appropriate use of arithmetic vs. geometric average returns.
• Market efficiency • Discusses efficient markets hypothesis along with common misconceptions.
Chapter 13 Return, Risk, and the Security Market Line
• New material: Correlations in the financial crisis • Explains instability in correlations with a current example.
• Diversification, systematic and unsystematic risk • Illustrates basics of risk and return in straightforward fashion.
• Beta and the security market line • Develops the security market line with an intuitive approach that bypasses much of the usual portfolio theory and statistics.
PART SIX COST OF CAPITAL AND LONG-TERM FINANCIAL POLICY
Chapter 14 Cost of Capital
• Cost of capital estimation • Contains a complete step-by-step illustration of cost of capital for publicly traded Loblaw Companies.
Chapter 15 Raising Capital
• Dutch auction IPOs • Explains uniform price auctions using Google IPO as an example.
• IPO “quiet periods” • Explains the OSC’s and SEC’s quiet period rules.
• Lockup agreements • Briefly discusses the importance of lockup agreements.
• IPOs in practice • Takes in-depth look at IPOs of Facebook and Athabasca Oil Sands.
Chapter 16 Financial Leverage and Capital Structure Policy
• New material: Pecking order theory • Expands coverage of capital structure.
• Basics of financial leverage • Illustrates the effect of leverage on risk and return.
• Optimal capital structure • Describes the basic trade-offs leading to an optimal capital structure.
• Financial distress and bankruptcy • Briefly surveys the bankruptcy process.
Chapter 17 Dividends and Dividend Policy
• New material: Recent Canadian survey evidence on dividend policy
• Survey results show the most important (and least important) factors that financial managers consider when setting dividend policy.
• Dividends and dividend policy • Describes dividend payments and the factors favouring higher and lower payout policies.
41Ross_InsideBackCover_1st.indd C41Ross_InsideBackCover_1st.indd C 12-12-20 11:5812-12-20 11:58
Chapters Selected Topics of Interest Benefits to You
PART SEVEN SHORT-TERM FINANCIAL PLANNING AND MANAGEMENT
Chapter 18 Short-Term Finance and Planning
• Operating and cash cycles • Stresses the importance of cash flow timing.
• Short-term financial planning • Illustrates creation of cash budgets and potential need for financing.
Chapter 19 Cash and Liquidity Management
• Float management • Covers float management thoroughly.
• Cash collection and disbursement • Examines systems that firms use to handle cash inflows and outflows.
Chapter 20 Credit and Inventory Management
• Credit management • Analysis of credit policy and implementation.
• Inventory management • Briefly surveys important inventory concepts.
PART EIGHT TOPICS IN CORPORATE FINANCE
Chapter 21 International Corporate Finance
• Exchange rate, political, and governance risks • Discusses hedging and issues surrounding sovereign and governance risks.
• Foreign exchange • Covers essentials of exchange rates and their determination.
• International capital budgeting • Shows how to adapt basic DCF approach to handle exchange rates.
Chapter 22 Leasing
• Synthetic leases • Discusses controversial practice of financing off the statement of financial position (also referred to as off-balance sheet financing).
• Leases and lease valuation • Discusses essentials of leasing.
Chapter 23 Mergers and Acquisitions
• New material: Expanded discussion of dual class stock, investor activism, and ownership and control
• Presents topical issues with Canadian examples.
• Alternatives to mergers and acquisitions • Covers strategic alliances and joint ventures and explains why they are important alternatives.
• Divestitures and restructurings • Examines important actions such as equity carve-outs, spins-offs, and split-ups.
• Mergers and acquisitions • Develops essentials of M&A analysis, including financial, tax, and accounting issues.
PART NINE DERIVATIVE SECURITIES AND CORPORATE FINANCE
Chapter 24 Enterprise Risk Management
• New material: Enterprise risk management framework and insurance
• Illustrates need to manage risk and some of the most important types of risk.
• New material: Recent survey results on derivatives use
• Relates material to practice by financial executives.
• Hedging with forwards, futures, swaps, and options
• Shows how many risks can be managed with financial derivatives.
Chapter 25 Options and Corporate Securities
• Put-call parity and Black–Scholes • Develops modern option valuation and factors influencing option values.
• Options and corporate finance • Applies option valuation to a variety of corporate issues, including mergers and capital budgeting.
Chapter 26 (New Chapter) Behavioural Finance: Implications for Financial Management
• Introduction to Behavioural Finance • Introduces biases, framing effects, and heuristics.
• Behavioural Finance and market efficiency • Explains limits to arbitrage and discusses bubbles and crashes, including the Crash of 2008.
• Market efficiency and the performance of professional money managers
• Expands on efficient markets discussion in Chapter 12 and relates it to Behavioural Finance.
41Ross_InsideBackCover_1st.indd D41Ross_InsideBackCover_1st.indd D 12-12-20 11:5812-12-20 11:58
To begin our study of modern corporate fi nance and fi nancial management, we need to address two central issues: First, what is corporate fi nance, and what is the role of the fi nancial manager in the corporation? Second, what is the goal of fi nancial management? To describe the fi nancial management environment, we look at the corporate form of organization and discuss some con- fl icts that can arise within the corporation. We also take a brief look at fi nancial institutions and fi nancial markets in Canada.
1.1 Corporate Finance and the Financial Manager
In this section, we discuss where the fi nancial manager fi ts in the corporation. We start by looking at what corporate fi nance is and what the fi nancial manager does.
INTRODUCTION TO CORPORATE FINANCE
C H A P T E R 1
T im Hortons Inc. has come a long way since its 1964 inception in Hamilton, Ontario under the title “Tim Horton Donuts.” Today, the com-
pany is the largest quick-service restaurant chain in
Canada, and is among the well-recognized brands
in the country. Founded as a sole proprietorship by
Tim Horton, and later run as a partnership with Ron
Joyce, the company began with a specialized focus
on coffee and donuts. Following Horton’s death in
1974, Joyce continued to run the business under an
aggressive expansion strategy. By February 1987,
Tim Hortons had opened 300 stores across Canada.
In 1995, Tim Hortons was acquired by Wendy’s
International Inc., which gave new impetus to the
expansion of the brand in the United States. Eleven
years later in March of 2006, Tim Hortons held its
initial public offering (IPO) and was fully spun off
by Wendy’s International in September of the same
year. With more than 4,000 locations in Canada, the
United States, and the Gulf Cooperation Council,
the majority of which are franchisee owned, the Tim
Hortons story touches on different business forms,
corporate goals, and corporate control, all topics
that are discussed in this chapter. Tim Hortons is a
registered trademark of The TDL Marks Corporation.
Used with permission.
Learning Object ives
After studying this chapter, you should understand:
LO1 The basic types of financial management decisions and the role of the financial manager.
LO2 The financial implications of the different forms of business organization.
LO3 The goal of financial management.
LO4 The conflicts of interest that can arise between managers and owners.
LO5 The roles of financial institutions and markets.
P A R T 1
Ti m
H or
to ns
is a
re
gi st
er ed
t ra
de m
ar k
of T
he T
D L
M ar
ks
C or
p or
at io
n.
U se
d w
ith p
er m
is si
on .
01Ross_Chapter01_3rd_A.indd 101Ross_Chapter01_3rd_A.indd 1 12-11-12 13:3012-11-12 13:30
What Is Corporate Finance? Imagine that you were to start your own business. No matter what type you started, you would have to answer the following three questions in some form or another:
1. What long-term investments should you take on? That is, what lines of business will you be in and what sorts of buildings, machinery, equipment, and research and development facili- ties will you need?
2. Where will you get the long-term financing to pay for your investment? Will you bring in other owners or will you borrow the money?
3. How will you manage your everyday financial activities, such as collecting from customers and paying suppliers?
Th ese are not the only questions by any means, but they are among the most important. Cor- porate fi nance, broadly speaking, is the study of ways to answer these three questions.
Accordingly, we’ll be looking at each of them in the chapters ahead. Th ough our discussion focuses on the role of the fi nancial manager, these three questions are important to managers in all areas of the corporation. For example, selecting the fi rm’s lines of business (Question 1) shapes the jobs of managers in production, marketing, and management information systems. As a result, most large corporations centralize their fi nance function and use it to measure perform- ance in other areas. Most CEOs have signifi cant fi nancial management experience.
The Financial Manager A striking feature of large corporations is that the owners (the shareholders) are usually not directly involved in making business decisions, particularly on a day-to-day basis. Instead, the corporation employs managers to represent the owners’ interests and make decisions on their behalf. In a large corporation, the fi nancial manager is in charge of answering the three questions we raised earlier.
It is a challenging task because changes in the fi rm’s operations and shift s in Canadian and global fi nancial markets mean that the best answers for each fi rm are changing, sometimes quite rapidly. Globalization of markets and advanced communications and computer technology, as well as increased volatility of interest rates and foreign exchange rates, have raised the stakes in fi nancial management decisions. We discuss these major trends and how they are changing the fi nancial manager’s job aft er we introduce you to some of the basics of corporate fi nancial decisions.
Th e fi nancial management function is usually associated with a top offi cer of the fi rm, such as a vice president of fi nance or some other chief fi nancial offi cer (CFO). Figure 1.1 is a simpli- fi ed organization chart that highlights the fi nance activity in a large fi rm. Th e CFO reports to the president, who is the chief operating offi cer (COO) in charge of day-to-day operations. Th e COO reports to the chairman, who is usually chief executive offi cer (CEO). However, as businesses become more complex, there is a growing pattern among large companies to separate the roles of Chairman and CEO. Th e CEO has overall responsibility to the board. As shown, the vice presi- dent of fi nance coordinates the activities of the treasurer and the controller. Th e controller’s offi ce handles cost and fi nancial accounting, tax payments, and management information systems. Th e treasurer’s offi ce is responsible for managing the fi rm’s cash, its fi nancial planning, and its capital expenditures. Th ese treasury activities are all related to the three general questions raised earlier, and the chapters ahead deal primarily with these issues. Our study thus bears mostly on activities usually associated with the treasurer’s offi ce.
Financial Management Decisions As our discussion suggests, the fi nancial manager must be concerned with three basic types of questions. We consider these in greater detail next.
CAPITAL BUDGETING The first question concerns the firm’s long-term investments. The process of planning and managing a firm’s long-term investments is called capital budget- ing. In capital budgeting, the financial manager tries to identify investment opportunities that are worth more to the firm than they will cost to acquire. Loosely speaking, this means that the value
For current issues facing CFOs, see cfo.com
capital budgeting The process of planning and managing a firm’s investment in long-term assets.
2 Part 1: Overview of Corporate Finance
01Ross_Chapter01_3rd_A.indd 201Ross_Chapter01_3rd_A.indd 2 12-11-12 13:3012-11-12 13:30
of the cash flow generated by an asset exceeds the cost of that asset. The types of investment op- portunities that would typically be considered depend in part on the nature of the firm’s business. For example, for a restaurant chain like Tim Hortons, deciding whether or not to open stores would be a major capital budgeting decision. Some decisions, such as what type of computer sys- tem to purchase, might not depend so much on a particular line of business.
Financial managers must be concerned not only with how much cash they expect to receive, but also with when they expect to receive it and how likely they are to receive it. Evaluating the size, timing, and risk of future cash fl ows is the essence of capital budgeting. We discuss how to do this in detail in the chapters ahead.
FIGURE 1.1
A simplified organization chart. The exact titles and organization differ from company to company.
Board of Directors
Chairman of the Board and Chief Executive Officer (CEO)
President and Chief Operating Officer (COO)
Vice President Production
Treasurer Controller
Cash Manager Credit Manager Tax Manager Cost Accounting Manager
Capital Expenditures
Financial Planning
Financial Accounting Manager
Data Processing Manager
Vice President Finance (CFO)
Vice President Marketing
Shareholders
CAPITAL STRUCTURE The second major question for the financial manager concerns how the firm should obtain and manage the long-term financing it needs to support its long-term investments. A firm’s capital structure (or financial structure) refers to the specific mixture of short-term debt, long-term debt, and equity the firm uses to finance its operations. The financial manager has two concerns in this area. First, how much should the firm borrow; that is, what mixture is best? The mixture chosen affects both the risk and value of the firm. Second, what are the least expensive sources of funds for the firm?
If we picture the fi rm as a pie, then the fi rm’s capital structure determines how that pie is sliced. In other words, what percentage of the fi rm’s cash fl ow goes to creditors and what percentage goes to shareholders? Management has a great deal of fl exibility in choosing a fi rm’s fi nancial structure. Whether one structure is better than any other for a particular fi rm is the heart of the capital structure issue.
In addition to deciding on the fi nancing mix, the fi nancial manager has to decide exactly how and where to raise the money. Th e expenses associated with raising long-term fi nancing can be
capital structure The mix of debt and equity maintained by a firm.
CHAPTER 1: Introduction to Corporate Finance 3
01Ross_Chapter01_3rd_A.indd 301Ross_Chapter01_3rd_A.indd 3 12-11-12 13:3012-11-12 13:30
considerable, so diff erent possibilities must be carefully evaluated. Also, corporations borrow money from a variety of lenders, tapping into both Canadian and international debt markets, in a number of diff erent—and sometimes exotic—ways. Choosing among lenders and among loan types is another of the jobs handled by the fi nancial manager.
WORKING CAPITAL MANAGEMENT The third major question concerns working capital management. The phrase working capital refers to the difference between a firm’s short- term assets, such as inventory, and its short-term liabilities, such as money owed to suppliers. Managing the firm’s working capital is a day-to-day activity that ensures the firm has sufficient resources to continue its operations and avoid costly interruptions. This involves a number of activities, all related to the firm’s receipt and disbursement of cash.
Some of the questions about working capital that must be answered are: (1) How much cash and inventory should we keep on hand? (2) Should we sell on credit? If so, what terms should we off er, and to whom should we extend them? (3) How do we obtain any needed short-term fi nanc- ing? Will we purchase on credit or borrow short-term and pay cash? If we borrow short-term, how and when should we do it? Th is is just a small sample of the issues that arise in managing a fi rm’s working capital.
Th e three areas of corporate fi nancial management we have described—capital budgeting, cap- ital structure, and working capital management—are very broad categories. Each includes a rich variety of topics; we have indicated only a few of the questions that arise in the diff erent areas. Th e following chapters contain greater detail.
1. What is the capital budgeting decision?
2. Into what category of financial management does cash management fall?
3. What do you call the specific mixture of short-term debt, long-term debt, and equity that a firm chooses to use?
1.2 Forms of Business Organization
Large fi rms in Canada, such as CIBC and BCE, are almost all organized as corporations. We examine the fi ve diff erent legal forms of business organization—sole proprietorship, partnership, corporation, income trust, and co-operative—to see why this is so. Each of the three forms has distinct advantages and disadvantages in the life of the business, the ability of the business to raise cash, and taxes. A key observation is that, as a fi rm grows, the advantages of the corporate form may come to outweigh the disadvantages.
Sole Proprietorship A sole proprietorship is a business owned by one person. Th is is the simplest type of business to start and is the least regulated form of organization. Depending on where you live, you can start up a proprietorship by doing little more than getting a business licence and opening your doors. For this reason, many businesses that later become large corporations start out as sole proprietor- ships. Th ere are more proprietorships than any other type of business.
As the owner of a sole proprietorship, you keep all the profi ts. Th at’s the good news. Th e bad news is that the owner has unlimited liability for business debts. Th is means that creditors can look beyond assets to the proprietor’s personal assets for payment. Similarly, there is no distinc- tion between personal and business income, so all business income is taxed as personal income.
Th e life of a sole proprietorship is limited to the owner’s life span, and, importantly, the amount of equity that can be raised is limited to the proprietor’s personal wealth. Th is limitation oft en means that the business cannot exploit new opportunities because of insuffi cient capital. Owner- ship of a sole proprietorship may be diffi cult to transfer, since this requires the sale of the entire business to a new owner.
working capital management Planning and managing the firm’s current assets and liabilities.
Concept Questions
sole proprietorship A business owned by a single individual.
For more information on forms of business organization, see the “Starting a Business” section at canadianlawsite.ca; also see canadabusiness.ca
4 Part 1: Overview of Corporate Finance
01Ross_Chapter01_3rd_A.indd 401Ross_Chapter01_3rd_A.indd 4 12-11-12 13:3012-11-12 13:30
Partnership A partnership is similar to a proprietorship, except that there are two or more owners (partners). In a general partnership, all the partners share in gains or losses, and all have unlimited liability for all partnership debts, not just some particular share. Th e way partnership gains (and losses) are divided is described in the partnership agreement. Th is agreement can be an informal oral agree- ment, or a lengthy, formal written document.
In a limited partnership, one or more general partners has unlimited liability and runs the busi- ness for one or more limited partners who do not actively participate in the business. A limited partner’s liability for business debts is limited to the amount contributed to the partnership. Th is form of organization is common in real estate ventures, for example.
Th e advantages and disadvantages of a partnership are basically the same as those for a pro- prietorship. Partnerships based on a relatively informal agreement are easy and inexpensive to form. General partners have unlimited liability for partnership debts, and the partnership termi- nates when a general partner wishes to sell out or dies. All income is taxed as personal income to the partners, and the amount of equity that can be raised is limited to the partners’ combined wealth. Ownership by a general partner is not easily transferred because a new partnership must be formed. A limited partner’s interest can be sold without dissolving the partnership. But fi nding a buyer may be diffi cult, because there is no organized market in limited partnerships.
Based on our discussion, the primary disadvantages of sole proprietorship and partnership as forms of business organization are (1) unlimited liability for business debts on the part of the owners, (2) limited life of the business, and (3) diffi culty of transferring ownership. Th ese three disadvantages add up to a single, central problem: the ability of such businesses to grow can be seriously limited by an inability to raise cash for investment.
Corporation In terms of size, the corporation is the most important form of business organization in Canada. A corporation is a legal entity separate and distinct from its owners; it has many of the rights, duties, and privileges of an actual person. Corporations can borrow money and own property, can sue and be sued, and can enter into contracts. A corporation can even be a general partner or a limited partner in a partnership, and a corporation can own stock in another corporation.
Not surprisingly, starting a corporation is somewhat more complicated than starting the other forms of business organization, but not greatly so for a small business. Forming a corporation involves preparing articles of incorporation (or a charter) and a set of bylaws. Th e articles of incor- poration must contain a number of things, including the corporation’s name, its intended life (which can be forever), its business purpose, and the number of shares that can be issued. Th is information must be supplied to regulators in the jurisdiction where the fi rm is incorporated. Canadian fi rms can be incorporated under either the federal Canada Business Corporation Act or provincial law.1
Th e bylaws are rules describing how the corporation regulates its own existence. For example, the bylaws describe how directors are elected. Th ese bylaws may be a very simple statement of a few rules and procedures, or they may be quite extensive for a large corporation. Th e bylaws may be amended or extended from time to time by the shareholders.
In a large corporation, the shareholders and the management are usually separate groups. Th e shareholders elect the board of directors, which then selects the managers. Management is charged with running the corporation’s aff airs in the shareholders’ interest. In principle, share- holders control the corporation because they elect the directors.
As a result of the separation of ownership and management, the corporate form has several advantages. Ownership (represented by shares of stock) can be readily transferred, and the life of the corporation is therefore not limited. Th e corporation borrows money in its own name. As a result, the shareholders in a corporation have limited liability for corporate debts. Th e most they can lose is what they have invested.2
1 In some provinces, the legal documents of incorporation are called letters patent or a memorandum of association. 2 An important exception is negligence by a corporate director. If this can be proven, for example in a case of environ- mental damage, the director may be liable for more than the original investment.
partnership A business formed by two or more co-owners.
corporation A business created as a distinct legal entity owned by one or more individuals or entities.
CHAPTER 1: Introduction to Corporate Finance 5
01Ross_Chapter01_3rd_A.indd 501Ross_Chapter01_3rd_A.indd 5 12-11-12 13:3012-11-12 13:30
While limited liability makes the corporate form attractive to equity investors, lenders some- times view the limited liability feature as a disadvantage. If the borrower experiences fi nancial dis- tress and is unable to repay its debt, limited liability blocks lenders’ access to the owners’ personal assets. For this reason, chartered banks oft en circumvent limited liability by requiring that owners of small businesses provide personal guarantees for company debt.
Th e relative ease of transferring ownership, the limited liability for business debts, and the unlimited life of the business are the reasons why the corporate form is superior when it comes to raising cash. If a corporation needs new equity, for example, it can sell new shares of stock and attract new investors. Th e number of owners can be huge; larger corporations have many thou- sands or even millions of shareholders.
Th e corporate form has a signifi cant disadvantage. Because a corporation is a legal entity, it must pay taxes. Moreover, money paid out to shareholders in dividends is taxed again as income to those shareholders. Th is is double taxation, meaning that corporate profi ts are taxed twice—at the corporate level when they are earned, and again at the personal level when they are paid out.3
As the discussion in this section illustrates, the need of large businesses for outside investors and creditors is such that the corporate form generally is best for such fi rms. We focus on corpora- tions in the chapters ahead because of the importance of the corporate form in the Canadian and world economies. Also, a few important fi nancial management issues, such as dividend policy, are unique to corporations. However, businesses of all types and sizes need fi nancial management, so the majority of the subjects we discuss bear on all forms of business.
A CORPORATION BY ANOTHER NAME The corporate form of organization has many variations around the world. The exact laws and regulations differ from country to country, of course, but the essential features of public ownership and limited liability remain. These firms are often designated as joint stock companies, public limited companies, or limited liability com- panies, depending on the specific nature of the firm and the country of origin.
In addition to international variations, there are specialized forms of corporations in Canada and the U.S. One increasingly common example is the professional corporation set up by archi- tects, accountants, lawyers, dentists and others who are licensed by a professional governing body. A professional corporation has limited liability but each professional is still open to being sued for malpractice.
Income Trust Starting in 2001, the income trust, a non-corporate form of business organization, grew in impor- tance in Canada.4 In response to the growing importance of this sector, provincial legislation extended limited liability protection, previously limited to corporate shareholders, to trust unit holders. Along the same lines, at the end of 2005, the TSX began to include income trusts in its benchmark S&P / TSX composite index.
Business income trusts (also called income funds) hold the debt and equity of an underlying business and distribute the income generated to unit holders. Because income trusts are not cor- porations, they are not subject to corporate income tax and their income is typically taxed only in the hands of unit holders. As a result, investors viewed trusts as tax-effi cient and were generally willing to pay more for a company aft er it converted from a corporation to a trust. However, this tax advantage largely disappeared on Halloween 2006 when the government announced plans to tax income trusts at the same rate as corporations starting in 2011. As a result, most income trusts converted to corporations. Th e number of income trusts reduced from 179 (with a market capital- ization of $112.1 billion) in 2009 to 65 (with a market capitalization of $51.5 billion) in mid-2011.
3 The dividend tax credit for individual shareholders and a corporate dividend exclusion reduce the bite of double taxa- tion for Canadian corporations. These tax provisions are discussed in Chapter 2. Trusts and limited partnerships are designed to avoid double taxation. 4 For more on income trusts see J. Fenwick and B. Kalymon, “A Note on Income Trusts,” Ivey Publishing, 2004 and De- partment of Finance, “Tax and Other Issues Related to Publicly Listed Flow-Through Entities (Income Trusts and Lim- ited Partnerships),” September 8, 2005. Data for TSX: Jan S. Koyanagi, “Income Trusts on Toronto Stock Exchange,” TSX, January 2007. Chapter 2 covers income trust income and taxation in more detail.
6 Part 1: Overview of Corporate Finance
01Ross_Chapter01_3rd_A.indd 601Ross_Chapter01_3rd_A.indd 6 12-11-12 13:3012-11-12 13:30
Co-operative (Co-op) A co-operative is an enterprise that is equally owned by its members who share the benefi ts of co-operation, based on how much they use the co-operative’s services.5 Th e co-ops are generally classifi ed into four types:
• Consumer Co-op: This provides products or services to its members (such as a retail co-op, housing, health-care or child-care co-op)
• Producer Co-op: This processes and markets the goods or services produced by its members, and supplies products or services necessary to the members’ professional activities (such as independent entrepreneurs, artisans, or farmers)
• Worker Co-op: This provides employment for its members. In this co-op, the employees are members and owners of the enterprise.
• Multi-Stakeholder Co-op: This serves the needs of different stakeholder groups—such as employees, clients, and other interested individuals and organizations (examples include health, home care and other social enterprises)
Th ere are more than 18 million members in Canada, which means every four out of ten Cana- dians are members of a co-op. Th ere are various key benefi ts of co-op such as to help producers compete eff ectively in the marketplace, to server rural and remote communities, to develop com- munity leadership, to build social capital and to promote local ownership and control.
Table 1.1 reviews the key features of Sole Proprietorship, Partnership and Corporation in Canada.
TABLE 1.1 Forms of business organization
Sole Proprietorship Partnership Corporation
Definition A business owned by a single individual.
A business formed by two or more co-owners.
A business created as a distinct legal entity owned by one or more individuals or entities.
Pros • Simplest form of business to start and is the least regulated.
• Owner keeps all profits.
• Simplest form of business to start with little regulation.
• Owners keep all profits. • Access to more human and
financial capital. • Limited partner(s) have limited
liability.
• Ownership can be easily transferred.
• Life of corporation not limited to lives of owners or managers.
• Corporation has limited liability. • Ability to raise and access large
sums of capital in both debt and equity markets.
Cons • Owner has unlimited liability for business debts.
• Business income taxed as personal income.
• Life of sole-proprietorship limited to life of owner.
• Limited ability to raise financing. • Difficulty in transferring ownership
of a sole proprietorship.
• General partner(s) have unlimited liability for business debts.
• Business income taxed as personal income.
• Life of partnership limited to lives of owners.
• Difficulty in transferring ownership. • Possible disagreements over
partnership.
• Double taxation. • Lenders sometimes view the limited
liability as a disadvantage and require the owners of small corporations to make personal guarantees.
• More complex and expensive form of organization to establish.
1. What are the three forms of business organization?
2. What are the primary advantages and disadvantages of a sole proprietorship or partnership?
3. What is the difference between a general and a limited partnership?
4. Why is the corporate form superior when it comes to raising cash?
5 For more on Co-operatives in Canada visit the website of the Co-operatives Secretariat at coop.gc.ca/
Concept Questions
CHAPTER 1: Introduction to Corporate Finance 7
01Ross_Chapter01_3rd_A.indd 701Ross_Chapter01_3rd_A.indd 7 12-11-12 13:3012-11-12 13:30
1.3 The Goal of Financial Management
Assuming that we restrict ourselves to for-profi t businesses, the goal of fi nancial management is to make money or add value for the owners. Th is goal is a little vague, of course, so we examine some diff erent ways of formulating it to come up with a more precise defi nition. Such a defi nition is important because it leads to an objective basis for making and evaluating fi nancial decisions.
Possible Goals If we were to consider possible fi nancial goals, we might come up with some ideas like the following: • Survive in business. • Avoid fi nancial distress and bankruptcy. • Beat the competition. • Maximize sales or market share. • Minimize costs. • Maximize profi ts. • Maintain steady earnings growth. Th ese are only a few of the goals we could list. Furthermore, each of these possibilities presents problems as a goal for a fi nancial manager.
For example, it’s easy to increase market share or unit sales; all we have to do is lower our prices or relax our credit terms. Similarly, we can always cut costs simply by doing away with things such as research and development. We can avoid bankruptcy by never borrowing any money or taking any risks, and so on. It’s not clear that any of these actions would be in the shareholders’ best interests.
Profi t maximization would probably be the most commonly cited goal, but even this is not a very precise objective. Do we mean profi ts this year? If so, then actions such as deferring main- tenance, letting inventories run down, and other short-run cost-cutting measures tend to increase profi ts now, but these activities aren’t necessarily desirable.
Th e goal of maximizing profi ts may refer to some sort of long-run or average profi ts, but it’s still unclear exactly what this means. First, do we mean something like accounting net income or earnings per share? As we see in more detail in the next chapter, these accounting numbers may have little to do with what is good or bad for the fi rm. Second, what do we mean by the long run? What is the appropriate trade-off between current and future profi ts?
Although the goals we’ve just listed are all diff erent, they fall into two classes. Th e fi rst of these relates to profi tability. Th e goals involving sales, market share, and cost control all relate, at least potentially, to diff erent ways of earning or increasing profi ts. Th e second group, involving bank- ruptcy avoidance, stability, and safety, relate in some way to controlling risk. Unfortunately, these two types of goals are somewhat contradictory. Th e pursuit of profi t normally involves some ele- ment of risk, so it isn’t really possible to maximize both safety and profi t. What we need, therefore, is a goal that encompasses both these factors.
The Goal of Financial Management Th e fi nancial manager in a corporation makes decisions for the shareholders of the fi rm. Given this, instead of listing possible goals for the fi nancial manager, we really need to answer a more fundamental question: From the shareholders’ point of view, what is a good fi nancial manage- ment decision?
If we assume that shareholders buy stock because they seek to gain fi nancially, the answer is obvious: Good decisions increase the value of the stock, and poor decisions decrease it.
Given our observation, it follows that the fi nancial manager acts in the shareholders’ best inter- ests by making decisions that increase the value of the stock. Th e appropriate goal for the fi nancial manager can thus be stated quite easily:
Th e goal of fi nancial management is to maximize the current value per share of existing stock.
Th e goal of maximizing the value of the stock avoids the problems associated with the diff er- ent goals we listed earlier. Th ere is no ambiguity in the criterion, and there is no short-run versus long-run issue. We explicitly mean that our goal is to maximize the current stock value. If this goal
8 Part 1: Overview of Corporate Finance
01Ross_Chapter01_3rd_A.indd 801Ross_Chapter01_3rd_A.indd 8 12-11-12 13:3012-11-12 13:30
seems a little strong or one-dimensional to you, keep in mind that the shareholders in a fi rm are residual owners. By this we mean that they are only entitled to what is left aft er employees, sup- pliers, and creditors (and anyone else with a legitimate claim) are paid their due. If any of these groups go unpaid, the shareholders get nothing. So, if the shareholders are winning in the sense that the left over, residual, portion is growing, it must be true that everyone else is winning also. For example, following its stock split in 2005 to mid 2012, technology giant Apple Inc. has increased value to its shareholders with a 1400 percent rise in its share price.6 Apple attributes this fi nancial success to major improvements in its bottom line and market share through the development and introduction of innovative products such as the iPod, iPhone, iPad, and MacBooks series.
Because the goal of fi nancial management is to maximize the value of the stock, we need to learn how to identify those investments and fi nancing arrangements that favourably impact the value of the stock. Th is is precisely what we are studying. In fact, we could have defi ned corporate fi nance as the study of the relationship between business decisions and the value of the stock in the business.
To make the market value of the stock a valid measure of fi nancial decisions requires an effi - cient capital market. In an effi cient capital market, security prices fully refl ect available informa- tion. Th e market sets the stock price to give the fi rm an accurate report card on its decisions. We return to capital market effi ciency in Part Five.
A More General Goal Given our goal of maximizing the value of the stock, an obvious question comes up: What is the appropriate goal when the fi rm is privately owned and has no traded stock? Corporations are certainly not the only type of business, and the stock in many corporations rarely changes hands, so it’s diffi cult to say what the value per share is at any given time.
To complicate things further, some large Canadian companies such as Irving are privately owned. Many large fi rms in Canada are subsidiaries of foreign multinationals, while others are controlled by a single domestic shareholder.
Recognizing these complications, as long as we are dealing with for-profi t businesses, only a slight modifi cation is needed. Th e total value of the stock in a corporation is simply equal to the value of the owners’ equity. Th erefore, a more general way of stating our goal is to maximize the market value of the owners’ equity. Th is market value can be measured by a business appraiser or by investment bankers if the fi rm eventually goes public.
With this in mind, it doesn’t matter whether the business is a proprietorship, a partnership, or a corporation. For each of these, good fi nancial decisions increase the market value of the owners’ equity and poor fi nancial decisions decrease it. In fact, although we choose to focus on corpora- tions in the chapters ahead, the principles we develop apply to all forms of business. Many of them even apply to the not-for-profi t sector.
Finally, our goal does not imply that the fi nancial manager should take illegal or unethical actions in the hope of increasing the value of the equity in the fi rm. What we mean is that the fi nancial manager best serves the owners of the business by identifying opportunities that add to the fi rm because they are desired and valued in the free marketplace.
In fact, truthful fi nancial reporting is incredibly important to the long run viability of capital markets. Th e collapse of companies like Enron and Worldcom has illustrated what a dramatic impact unethical behaviour can have on public trust and confi dence in our fi nancial institutions. Th e ability of companies to raise capital and of our economies to function effi ciently is based on this trust and confi dence. If investors cannot assume that the information they receive is honest and truthful, many of the models and theories we learn through this textbook no longer apply.7
1. What is the goal of financial management?
2. What are some shortcomings of the goal of profit maximization?
3. How would you define corporate finance?
6 A current stock price quote for Apple Inc. can be found at google.com/finance. 7 For more on ethics and financial reporting visit the website of the Canadian Centre for Ethics and Corporate Policy at ethicscentre.ca
Concept Questions
CHAPTER 1: Introduction to Corporate Finance 9
01Ross_Chapter01_3rd_A.indd 901Ross_Chapter01_3rd_A.indd 9 12-11-12 13:3012-11-12 13:30
1.4 The Agency Problem and Control of the Corporation
We’ve seen that the fi nancial manager acts in the best interest of the shareholders by taking actions that increase the value of the stock. However, we’ve also seen that in large corporations ownership can be spread over a huge number of shareholders. Or a large shareholder may control a block of shares. In these cases, will management necessarily act in the best interests of the shareholders? Put another way, might not management pursue its own goals (or those of a small group of share- holders) at the shareholders’ expense? We briefl y consider some of the arguments next.
Agency Relationships Th e relationship between shareholders and management is called an agency relationship. Such a relationship exists whenever someone (the principal) hires another (the agent) to represent his or her interests. For example, you might hire someone (an agent) to sell a car that you own. In all such relationships, there is a possibility of confl ict of interest between the principal and the agent. Such confl ict is called an agency problem.
In hiring someone to sell your car, you agree to pay a fl at fee when the car sells. Th e agent’s incentive is to make the sale, not necessarily to get you the best price. If you paid a commission of, say, 10 percent of the sale price instead of a fl at fee, this problem might not exist. Th is example illustrates that the way an agent is compensated is one factor that aff ects agency problems.
Management Goals To see how management and shareholders’ interests might diff er, imagine that the fi rm has a new investment under consideration. Th e new investment favourably impacts the share value, but it is a relatively risky venture. Th e owners of the fi rm may wish to take the investment because the stock value will rise, but management may not because of the possibility that things will turn out badly and management jobs will be lost. If management does not take the investment, the share- holders may have lost a valuable opportunity. Th is is one example of an agency cost.
More generally, agency costs refer to the costs of the confl ict of interests between shareholders and management. Th ese costs can be indirect or direct. An indirect agency cost is a lost opportu- nity such as the one we have just described.
Direct agency costs come in two forms: Th e fi rst is a corporate expenditure that benefi ts man- agement but costs the shareholders. Perhaps the purchase of a luxurious and unneeded corporate jet would fall under this heading. Th e second direct agency cost is an expense that arises from the need to monitor management actions. Paying outside auditors to assess the accuracy of fi nancial statement information is one example.
Some argue that if left to themselves, managers would maximize the amount of resources they have control over or, more generally, corporate power or wealth. Th is goal could lead to an overemphasis on corporate size or growth. For example, cases where management is accused of overpaying to buy up another company just to increase the size of the business or to demonstrate corporate power are not uncommon. Obviously, if overpayment does take place, such a purchase does not benefi t the shareholders.
Our discussion indicates that management may tend to overemphasize organizational survival to protect job security. Also, management may dislike outside interference, so independence and corporate self-suffi ciency may be important goals.
Do Managers Act in the Shareholders’ Interests? Whether managers do, in fact, act in the best interest of shareholders depends on two factors. First, how closely are management goals aligned with shareholder goals? Th is question relates to the way managers are compensated. Second, can managers be replaced if they do not pursue shareholder goals? Th is issue relates to control of the fi rm. As we discuss, there are a number of reasons to think that, even in the largest fi rms, management has a signifi cant incentive to act in the interest of shareholders.8
8 The legal system is another important factor in restraining managers and controlling shareholders. The common law sys- tem in place in Canada, the U.S., and U.K. offers the greatest protection of shareholder rights according to R. La Porta, F. Lopez-de-Silanes, A. Schliefer, and R. W. Vishny, “Law and Finance,” Journal of Political Economy, December 1998.
agency problem The possibility of conflicts of interest between the shareholders and management of a firm.
10 Part 1: Overview of Corporate Finance
01Ross_Chapter01_3rd_A.indd 1001Ross_Chapter01_3rd_A.indd 10 12-11-12 13:3012-11-12 13:30
MANAGERIAL COMPENSATION Management frequently has a significant economic incentive to increase share value for two reasons: First, managerial compensation, particularly at the top, is usually tied to financial performance in general and often to the share value in particu- lar. For example, managers are frequently given the option to buy stock at current prices. The more the stock is worth, the more valuable this option becomes.9 The second incentive managers have relates to job prospects. Better performers within the firm get promoted. More generally, those managers who are successful in pursuing shareholder goals are in greater demand in the labour market and thus command higher salaries.
Of course, in management compensation, as with other areas of business, matters sometimes get off track. Many observers believe that top executives are overpaid. For example, shareholders of Novartis criticized the company for excessively compensating its chairman, Daniel Vasella, when he was paid over $21 million in 2011.10 One control on compensation is the ‘say on pay’ initiative whereby a fi rm’s shareholders have the right to vote on the remuneration of executives. Going further, creative forms of excessive corporate compensation at U.S. companies like World- com, Tyco, and Adelphia led to the passage of the Sarbanes-Oxley Act in 2002. Th e act is intended to protect investors from corporate abuses. For example, one section prohibits personal loans from a company to its offi cers, such as the ones that were received by former Worldcom CEO Bernie Ebbers.
Excessive management pay and unauthorized management consumption are examples of agency costs.11
CONTROL OF THE FIRM Control of the firm ultimately rests with shareholders. They elect the board of directors, who, in turn, hire and fire management. In 2007, frustrated with his management tactics and overly generous compensation package, shareholders of Home Depot pressured the board of directors into ousting CEO Robert Nardelli.12 From replacing CEOs to entire boards to demanding changes in a firm’s articles of incorporation, shareholder activism is becoming increasingly prominent worldwide. For example, shareholders of HudBay Minerals Inc. halted a proposed acquisition of Lundin Mining Corp. in 2008 over objections to issuing the 153 million shares that would be needed to fund the purchase.13 Poorly managed firms are more attractive as acquisitions than well-managed firms because a greater turnaround potential exists. Thus, avoiding a takeover by another firm gives management another incentive to act in the shareholders’ interest.
Th e available theory and evidence substantiate that shareholders control the fi rm and that shareholder wealth maximization is the relevant goal of the corporation. Even so, at times man- agement goals are undoubtedly pursued at the expense of the shareholders, at least temporarily. For example, management may try to avoid the discipline of a potential takeover by instituting “poison pill” provisions to make the stock unattractive. Or the fi rm may issue non-voting stock to thwart a takeover attempt. Canadian shareholders, particularly pension funds and other insti- tutional investors, are becoming increasingly active in campaigning against such management actions.14
Large funds like the Ontario Teachers’ Pension Plan Board have set up detailed corporate gov- ernance and proxy voting guidelines for the companies in which they invest. Smaller funds may employ the services of fi rms like Institutional Shareholder Services (ISS) to advise them on how to vote on proposed governance changes.
STAKEHOLDERS Our discussion thus far implies that management and shareholders are the only parties with an interest in the firm’s decisions. This is an oversimplification, of course.
9 Employee stock options allow the manager to purchase a certain number of shares at a fixed price over a specified per- iod of time. By providing the manager an ownership stake in the company, the options are meant to align the manager’s goals and actions with the shareholders’ interests. For more on employee stock options, see Chapter 25. 10 2011 Dow Jones & Company, Inc. 11 Because it requires management to pay out almost all of the cash flow to unit holders, the income trust form of orga- nization can help to control these agency costs. 12 The New York Times, January 4, 2007. 13 financialpost.com/news/Shareholders+step+forefront/5433163/story.html 14 We discuss takeovers and pension managers’ activism in monitoring management activities in Chapter 23.
corporate governance Rules for corporate organization and conduct.
CHAPTER 1: Introduction to Corporate Finance 11
01Ross_Chapter01_3rd_A.indd 1101Ross_Chapter01_3rd_A.indd 11 12-11-12 13:3012-11-12 13:30
Employees, customers, suppliers, and various levels of government all have financial interests in the firm.
Taken together, these various groups are called stakeholders in the fi rm. In general, a stake- holder is a shareholder, creditor, or other individual (or group) that potentially has a claim on the cash fl ows of the fi rm. Such groups also attempt to exert control over the fi rm by introducing alter- nate, socially oriented goals such as preserving the environment or creating employment equity. Even though stakeholder pressures may create additional costs for owners, almost all major cor- porations pay close attention to stakeholders because stakeholder satisfaction is consistent with shareholder wealth maximization. Table 1.2 summarizes concerns of various stakeholders.
TABLE 1.2 Inventory of typical stakeholders and issues
Company Employees Shareholders Customers Suppliers Public
Stakeholders Competitors Company history
Industry background
Organization structure
Economic performance
Competitive environment
Mission or purpose
Corporate codes
Stakeholder and social issues
Management
General policy Compensation and rewards
Career planning
Health promotion
Leaves of absence
Dismissal and appeal
Retirement and termination counselling
Women in management and on the board
Employee communication
Part-time temporary, or contract employees
Benefits
Training and development
Employee assistance program
Absenteeism and turnover
Relationships with unions
Termination, layoff, and redundancy
Employment equity and discrimination
Day care and family accommodation
Occupational health and safety
Other employee or human resource issues
General policy
Shareholder communications and complaints
Shareholder advocacy
Shareholder rights
Other shareholder issues
General policy
Customer communications
Product safety
Customer complaints
Special customer services
Other customer issues
General policy
Relative power
Other supplier issues
Public health, safety, and protection
Environmental issues
Public policy involvement
Community relations
Social investment and donations
General policy
Source: M. B. E. Clarkson, “Analyzing Corporate Performance: A New Approach,” Canadian Investment Review, Fall 1991, p. 70. (Reprinted with permission from Canadian Investment Review, Rogers Media Publishing.)
Corporate Social Responsibility and Ethical Investing Well-managed large corporations seek to maintain a reputation as good corporate citizens with detailed policies on important social issues. Investors are becoming increasingly concerned with corporate social responsibility (CSR) and may turn to fi rms like Sustainalytics, founded by Michael Jantzi in Canada, for information. Sustainalytics provides a social responsibility rating for corporations based on over 200 indicators of responsible behaviour with respect to stake- holder issues that dovetail with those in Figure 1.2: community and society, customers, corporate governance, employees, environment, and human rights. Jantzi ratings also assess controversial business activities; these include, alcohol, gaming, genetic engineering, nuclear power, pornogra- phy, tobacco, and weapons. An example Jantzi rating for Nexen Inc. is shown in Figure 1.2.
More than sixty companies that avoid controversial business activities and score well on Jant- zi’s other criteria are included in its Jantzi Social Index. Ethical investment mutual funds such as Ethical Growth and Investors Summa off er an opportunity to buy a portfolio of Canadian com- panies that meet criteria similar to Jantzi’s. Similar funds exist in the U.S. and Europe.
You might wonder about the performance of such funds: Can investors “do well by doing good”? Th e results to date are mixed. A Canadian study suggests that socially responsible invest- ing during the 1990s produced returns similar to those of the overall market aft er adjusting for
stakeholder Anyone who potentially has a claim on a firm.
sustainalytics.com
12 Part 1: Overview of Corporate Finance
01Ross_Chapter01_3rd_A.indd 1201Ross_Chapter01_3rd_A.indd 12 12-11-12 13:3012-11-12 13:30
risk and concludes that “investing for the soul may not hurt the bottom line.” However, because ethical funds tend to invest more heavily in “clean” tech companies, it remains an open ques- tion whether this fi nding applies in other periods. A more recent U.S. study argues that socially responsible investing imposes a heavy penalty on return.15 Given the mixed evidence, major Can- adian institutional investors like the Ontario Teachers’ Pension Plan and the Ontario Municipal Employees Retirement System pay careful attention to corporate social responsibility in selecting investments but do not eliminate companies from their portfolios based solely on environmental and other social issues.16 To address controversy over their corporate social responsibility Canad- ian mining companies like Barrick Gold and Sherritt International provide detailed information on their CSR activities in Latin America where they are the third largest source of foreign invest- ment aft er the United States and Spain.17
FIGURE 1.2
Sustainalytics Global Platform–Nexen Inc.
PERFORMANCE PER TOPIC
PERFORMANCE PER THEMETOP 5 RANKED COMPETITORS
Rank Company Score
1 Nexen Inc. 79
2 Talisman Energy Inc. 76
3 Hess Corporation 73
4 Suncor Energy Inc. 72
5 ARC Resources Ltd. 69
OVERALL PERFORMANCE RANKING
1 out of 87 79 TOTAL SCORE
Source: Sustainalytics. Used with permission.
15 P. Amundson and S.R. Foerster, “Socially Responsible Investing: Better for Your Soul or Your Bottom Line?” Canad- ian Investment Review, Winter 2001, pp. 26–34 and C. Geczy, R. F. Stambaugh and D. Levin, “Investing in Socially Re- sponsible Mutual Funds,” October 2005, available at SSRN: ssrn.com/sol3/papers.cfm?abstract_id=416380. 16 For a detailed summary of arguments in favour of socially responsible investing by pension funds, see “A legal frame- work for the integration of environmental, social and governance issues into institutional investment,” by Freshfields Bruckhaus Deringer and the UNEP Finance Initiative, October 2005, available at www.unepfi.org/publications/ investment/?&0= 17 J. Sagebien et al., “The Corporate Social Responsibility of Canadian Mining Companies in Latin America: A Systems Perspective,” Canadian Foreign Policy, 14, 3 (2008), 103–128
CHAPTER 1: Introduction to Corporate Finance 13
01Ross_Chapter01_3rd_A.indd 1301Ross_Chapter01_3rd_A.indd 13 12-11-12 13:3012-11-12 13:30
David Weitzner and James Darroch on Why Moral Failures Precede Financial Crises
Innovation and crises are endemic to the fi nancial system and while every failure leads to signifi cant regulatory improvement, it has never been enough to prevent the next fi nancial crisis. Yet, each crisis has unique elements and the current crisis cannot be understood without seeing how fi nancial innovation fundamentally changed the fi nancial system of the USA and consequently for those fi nancial systems connected to the USA—essentially the globe. To this end, it is important to note that the drivers of the problems—structured fi nance products—were essentially creatures of the unregulated or lightly regulated side of the US fi nancial system, where greed was unchecked. While there was clearly a failure of regulation, it should be fi rst seen as a failure in scope of regulation. But it is equally important to understand how hubris united with greed was instrumental in players working to create an unregulated market. What is stunning about the current crisis is that it is the result of governance failures of both the boards of fi nancial institutions and markets despite signifi cant regulatory reforms in the banking world—Basel II—and corporate governance in the USA—Sarbanes-Oxley (SOX). The lesson to be learned is that regulatory reform without ethical reform will never be enough. The faith that public policymakers had resolved the major economic issues associated with business cycles and volatility combined with the private sector’s faith in hyper-rational modern fi nance and unregulated markets created an environment conducive to the growth of greed. The arrogant faith in the new fi nancial order led to a lack of attention to governance and ethics despite famous ethical failures and heightened regulatory concerns. While it is often said that success breeds success, long
bull markets and excess liquidity breed over-confi dence and an over-commitment to revenue-generating activities as opposed to control activities. In this environment of weak governance, unethical behavior fl ourishes. Management scholars have already faced tough questions about the ethical implications of their theoretical suppositions (Ghoshal, 2005), but the current fi nancial woes have led to renewed calls for a more central place for ethical considerations in mainstream management theories along with new questions about the signifi cant role greed and hubris tend to play in the practice of management. We believe that the time has come for researchers concerned with the fi nancial system and the question of ethics to address explicitly the problem of greed.
The immediate challenge is to restore trust not only among fi nancial institutions to restore the inter-bank markets, but also trust from the public. This is a tall order. Greed led to the governance failures at both the market and individual institutional level. Financial players who should have been committed to the good of the system in order to ensure that they could create wealth for themselves while improving the lot of others failed to recognize this obligation. Rather, greed and hubris led to the enrichment of the few to the cost of the many. It would be naive to believe that a moral renaissance is at hand and will solve all ills, so until that time we must enforce rules to promote the virtue of transparency to prevent shadow worlds in the fi nancial system.
Source: From the authors Used with permission.
David Weitzner is an Instructor (Strategy/Policy) and James Darroch is an Associate Professor (Policy) at Schulich School of Business, York University.
IN THEIR OWN WORDS…
1. What is an agency relationship?
2. What are agency problems and how do they come about? What are agency costs?
3. What incentives do managers in large corporations have to maximize share value?
4. What role do stakeholders play in determining corporate goals?
1.5 Financial Markets and the Corporation
We’ve seen that the primary advantages of the corporate form of organization are that ownership can be transferred more quickly and easily than with other forms and that money can be raised more readily. Both of these advantages are signifi cantly enhanced by the existence of fi nancial institutions and markets. Financial markets play an extremely important role in corporate fi nance.
Concept Questions
14 Part 1: Overview of Corporate Finance
01Ross_Chapter01_3rd_A.indd 1401Ross_Chapter01_3rd_A.indd 14 12-11-12 13:3012-11-12 13:30
FIGURE 1.3
Cash flows between the firm and the financial markets
A. Firm issues securities B. Firm invests in assets
Current assets Fixed assets
Financial markets
Short-term debt Long-term debt Equity shares
F. Dividends and debt payments
E. Reinvested cash flows
C. Cash flow from firm’s assets
D. Government Other stakeholders
Total Value of Firm’s Assets
Total Value of the Firm to Investors in
the Financial Markets
A. Firm issues securities to raise cash. B. Firm invests in assets. C. Firm’s operations generate cash flow.
D. Cash is paid to government as taxes. Other stakeholders may receive cash. E. Reinvested cash flows are plowed back into firm. F. Cash is paid out to investors in the form of interest and dividends.
Cash Flows to and from the Firm Th e interplay between the corporation and the fi nancial markets is illustrated in Figure 1.3. Th e arrows in Figure 1.3 trace the passage of cash from the fi nancial markets to the fi rm and from the fi rm back to the fi nancial markets.
Suppose we start with the fi rm selling shares of stock and borrowing money to raise cash. Cash fl ows to the fi rm from the fi nancial market (A). Th e fi rm invests the cash in current and fi xed assets (B). Th ese assets generate some cash (C), some of which goes to pay corporate taxes (D). Aft er taxes are paid, some of this cash fl ow is reinvested in the fi rm (E). Th e rest goes back to the fi nancial markets as cash paid to creditors and shareholders (F).
Companies like Tim Hortons routinely make decisions that create such cash fl ows to and from the fi rm. For example, in 2010 the company used increased cash fl ow from operations to fund its growth requirements.
A fi nancial market, like any market, is just a way of bringing buyers and sellers together. In fi nancial markets, it is debt and equity securities that are bought and sold. Financial markets diff er in detail, however. Th e most important diff erences concern the types of securities that are traded, how trading is conducted, and who the buyers and sellers are. Some of these diff erences are discussed next.
Money versus Capital Markets Financial markets can be classifi ed as either money markets or capital markets. Short-term debt securities of many varieties are bought and sold in money markets. Th ese short-term debt secur- ities are oft en called money market instruments and are essentially IOUs. For example, a bankers acceptance represents short-term borrowing by large corporations and is a money-market instru- ment. Treasury bills are an IOU of the government of Canada. Capital markets are the markets for long-term debt and shares of stock, so the Toronto Stock Exchange, for example, is a capital market.
Th e money market is a dealer market. Generally, dealers buy and sell something for them- selves, at their own risk. A car dealer, for example, buys and sells automobiles. In contrast, brokers
money markets Financial markets where short-term debt securities are bought and sold.
capital markets Financial markets where long-term debt and equity securities are bought and sold.
CHAPTER 1: Introduction to Corporate Finance 15
01Ross_Chapter01_3rd_A.indd 1501Ross_Chapter01_3rd_A.indd 15 12-11-12 13:3012-11-12 13:30
and agents match buyers and sellers, but they do not actually own the commodity. A real estate agent or broker, for example, does not normally buy and sell houses.
Th e largest money-market dealers are chartered banks and investment dealers. Th eir trading facilities, like those of other market participants, are connected electronically via telephone and computer, so the money market has no actual physical location.
Primary versus Secondary Markets Financial markets function as both primary and secondary markets for debt and equity securities. Th e term primary markets refers to the original sale of securities by governments and corpora- tions. Th e secondary markets are where these securities are bought and sold aft er the original sale. Equities are, of course, issued solely by corporations. Debt securities are issued by both govern- ments and corporations. In the following discussion, we focus only on corporate securities.
PRIMARY MARKETS In a primary market transaction, the corporation is the seller, and the transaction raises money for the corporation. Corporations engage in two types of primary market transactions: public offerings and private placements. A public offering, as the name sug- gests, involves selling securities to the general public. For example, in 1999 and early 2000, investors were snapping up new issues providing equity funding to untested dot-com IPOs (initial public of- ferings). A private placement, on the other hand, is a negotiated sale involving a specific buyer. These topics are covered in some detail in Part 6, so we only introduce the bare essentials here.
Most publicly off ered debt and equity securities are underwritten. In Canada, underwriting is conducted by investment dealers specialized in marketing securities. Examples are RBC Capital Markets, Scotia Capital, BMO Capital Markets, and CIBC World Markets.
When a public off ering is underwritten, an investment dealer or a group of investment dealers (called a syndicate) typically purchase the securities from the fi rm and market them to the public. Th e underwriters hope to profi t by reselling the securities to investors at a higher price than they pay the fi rm.
By law, public off erings of debt and equity must be registered with provincial authorities, of which the most important is the Ontario Securities Commission (OSC). Registration requires the fi rm to disclose a great deal of information before selling any securities. Th e accounting, legal, and underwriting costs of public off erings can be considerable.
Partly to avoid the various regulatory requirements and the expense of public off erings, debt and equity are oft en sold privately to large fi nancial institutions such as life insurance companies or mutual funds. Such private placements do not have to be registered with the OSC and do not require the involvement of underwriters.
SECONDARY MARKETS A secondary market transaction involves one owner or credi- tor selling to another. Therefore, the secondary markets provide the means for transferring own- ership of corporate securities. There are two kinds of secondary markets: auction markets and dealer markets.
Dealer markets in stocks and long-term debt are called over-the-counter (OTC) markets. Trading in debt securities takes place over the counter, with much of the trading now conducted electronically. Th e expression over-the-counter refers to days of old when securities were literally bought and sold at counters in offi ces around the country. Today, like the money market, a sig- nifi cant fraction of the market for stocks and all of the market for long-term debt have no central location; the many dealers are connected electronically.
THIRD AND FOURTH MARKETS A third market involves trading exchange-listed se- curities in OTC markets. This allows investors to trade large volume of securities directly without an exchange. Fourth Market trading involves institution-to-institution trading without using the services of brokers or dealers.
TRADING IN CORPORATE SECURITIES The equity shares of most of the large firms in Canada trade in organized auction and dealer markets. The largest stock market in Can- ada is the Toronto Stock Exchange (TSX). It is owned and operated as a subsidiary of the TMX Group for the trading of senior securities. Table 1.3 shows the top ten stock markets in the world in 2011, Toronto ranked number eight based on market value. The TMX Group also runs the
16 Part 1: Overview of Corporate Finance
01Ross_Chapter01_3rd_A.indd 1601Ross_Chapter01_3rd_A.indd 16 12-11-12 13:3012-11-12 13:30
TSX Venture Exchange for listing smaller, emerging companies. The four main industries repre- sented on the Venture Exchange are biotechnology, information technology, mining, and oil and gas.
Auction markets diff er from dealer markets in two ways: First, an auction market or exchange, unlike a dealer market, has a physical location (like Wall Street). Second, in a dealer market, most of the buying and selling is done by the dealer. Th e primary purpose of an auction market, on the other hand, is to match those who wish to sell with those who wish to buy. Dealers play a limited role.
In addition to the stock exchanges, there is a large OTC market for stocks. In 1971, the U.S. National Association of Securities Dealers (NASD) made available to dealers and brokers an electronic quotation system called NASDAQ (NASD Automated Quotation system, pronounced “naz-dak” and now spelled “Nasdaq”). In January 2006, Nasdaq took the next step forward when its application to be registered as a national stock exchange was accepted by the U.S. Securities and Exchange Commission. Th ere are roughly three times as many companies on Nasdaq as there are on NYSE, but they tend to be much smaller in size and trade less actively. Th ere are exceptions, of course. For example, tech giants Microsoft and Intel trade on Nasdaq. Nonetheless, the total value of Nasdaq stocks is considerably less than the total value of the NYSE stocks.
TABLE 1.3
Largest stock markets in the world by market capitalization in 2011
Rank in 2011 Stock Exchanges Market Capitalization
(in U.S. $ billions)
1 NYSE Euronext (US) $11,796 2 NASDAQ OMX (US) 3,845 3 Tokyo Stock Exchange Group 3,325 4 London Stock Exchange Group 3,266 5 NYSE Euronext (Europe) 2,447 6 Shanghai Stock Exchange 2,357 7 Hong Kong Exchanges 2,258 8 TMX Group 1,912 9 BM&FBOVESPA 1,229
10 Australian Securities Exchange 1,198 Source: World Federation of Stock Exchanges at world-exchanges.org
LISTING Stocks that trade on an organized exchange are said to be listed on that exchange. To be listed, firms must meet certain minimum criteria concerning, for example, asset size and number of shareholders. These criteria differ for various exchanges.
Th e requirements for listing on the TSX Venture are not as strict as those for listing on the TSX, although the listing process is quite similar. Th e TSX Venture, however, has two diff erent tiers that companies can register under. Companies can list shares on the second tier with as little as $500,000 in net tangible assets and $50,000 in pre-tax earnings. Both tiers require that there exist 300 public shareholders, holding one board lot or more; Tier 1 also requires that there be 1 million free trading shares with a market value of $1 million or more, and Tier 2 requires at least 500,000 free trading shares with a market value of $500,000 or more. Th ese requirements make it possible for smaller companies that would not normally be able to obtain listing on the TSX to acquire equity fi nancing.
Th e TSX has the most stringent requirements of the exchanges in Canada. For example, to be listed on the TSX, a company is expected to have at least 1,000,000 freely tradable shares with a market value of at least $4 million and a total of at least 300 shareholders with at least 100 shares each.18 Th ere are additional minimums on earnings, assets, and number of shares outstanding. Research suggests that listing on exchanges adds valuable liquidity to a company’s shares.19 In
18 tmx.com/en/pdf/InternationalGuidetoListing.pdf 19 Relevant studies include S. R. Foerster and G. A. Karolyi, “The Effects of Market Segmentation and Investor Recogni- tion on Asset Prices: Evidence from Foreign Stocks Listings in the U.S.,” Journal of Finance, 54: 3, 1999, 981–1013 and U.R. Mittoo, “The Winners and Losers of Listings in the U.S.,” Canadian Investment Review, Fall 1998, 13–17.
CHAPTER 1: Introduction to Corporate Finance 17
01Ross_Chapter01_3rd_A.indd 1701Ross_Chapter01_3rd_A.indd 17 12-11-12 13:3012-11-12 13:30
November 2002, the TSX itself went public and listed its shares for the fi rst time. With an off ering of just under 19 million shares at an initial off ering price of $18, the TSX easily exceeded its own listing requirements.
1.6 Financial Institutions
Financial institutions act as intermediaries between investors (funds suppliers) and fi rms raising funds. (Federal and provincial governments and individuals also raise funds in fi nancial markets, but our examples focus on fi rms.) Financial institutions justify their existence by providing a vari- ety of services that promote the effi cient allocation of funds. Th ese institutions also serve as inter- mediaries for households and individuals—providing a medium where individuals can save and borrow money. Individuals and households may choose to save not only in the traditional savings and chequing accounts, but also in savings plans such as a Registered Retirement Savings Plan (RRSP), Registered Education Savings Plan (RESP), or Tax-Free Savings Account (TFSA). Can- adian fi nancial institutions include chartered banks and other depository institutions—trust com- panies, credit unions, investment dealers, insurance companies, pension funds, and mutual funds.
Table 1.4 ranks the top eleven publicly traded fi nancial institutions in Canada by market capi- talization in 2011. Th ey include the Big Six chartered banks, three life insurance companies, one fi nancial holding company, and a diversifi ed fi nancial services company. Because they are allowed to diversify by operating in all provinces, Canada’s chartered banks are of a reasonable size on an international scale.
Chartered banks operate under federal regulation, accepting deposits from suppliers of funds and making commercial loans to mid-sized businesses, corporate loans to large companies, and per- sonal loans and mortgages to individuals.20 Banks make the majority of their income from the spread between the interest paid on deposits and the higher rate earned on loans. Th is is indirect fi nance.
Chartered banks also provide other services that generate fees instead of spread income. For example, a large corporate customer seeking short-term debt funding can borrow directly from another large corporation with funds supplied through a bankers acceptance. Th is is an interest- bearing IOU stamped by a bank guaranteeing the borrower’s credit. Instead of spread income, the bank receives a stamping fee. Bankers acceptances are an example of direct fi nance. Notice that the key diff erence between direct fi nance and indirect fi nance is that in direct fi nance funds do not pass through the bank’s balance sheet in the form of a deposit and loan. Oft en called securitization because a security (the bankers acceptance) is created, direct fi nance is growing rapidly.
TABLE 1.4
Largest financial institutions in Canada, by market capitalization, December 2011
Rank Company Market Capitalization
($ billion)
1 Royal Bank of Canada $79.9 2 Toronto Dominion 72.5 3 Bank of Nova Scotia 59.7 4 Bank of Montreal 38.7 5 Canadian Imperial Bank of Commerce 32.5 6 Manulife Financial Corp. 21.6 7 Great-West Lifeco 21.2 8 Power Financial 20.1 9 Sun Life Financial Inc. 13.3
10 National Bank of Canada 12.3 11 IGM Financial 11.5
Source: tmx.com/en/pdf/mig/ TSX_TSXV_Issuers.xls
Trust companies also accept deposits and make loans. In addition, trust companies engage in fi duciary activities—managing assets for estates, registered retirement savings plans, and so on.
20 Loan and mortgage calculations are discussed in Chapter 6.
18 Part 1: Overview of Corporate Finance
01Ross_Chapter01_3rd_A.indd 1801Ross_Chapter01_3rd_A.indd 18 12-11-12 13:3012-11-12 13:30
Like trust companies, credit unions also accept deposits and make loans. Caisses Desjardins du Quebec is a major Quebec credit union, but does not appear in Table 1.4 because it is member- owned and not publicly traded.
Investment dealers are non-depository institutions that assist fi rms in issuing new securities in exchange for fee income. Investment dealers also aid investors in buying and selling securities. Chartered banks own majority stakes in fi ve of Canada’s top 15 investment dealers.
Insurance companies include property and casualty insurance and health and life insurance companies. Life insurance companies engage in indirect fi nance by accepting funds in a form similar to deposits and making loans. Manulife Financial and Sun Life Financial are major life insurance companies that have expanded aggressively to become rivals of the chartered banks.
Fuelled by the aging of the Canadian population and the longest bull market in history, assets in pension and mutual funds grew rapidly in the 1990s. Pension funds invest contributions from employers and employees in securities off ered by fi nancial markets. Mutual funds pool individ- ual investments to purchase diversifi ed portfolios of securities. Th ere are many diff erent types of mutual funds. Table 1.5 shows the totals of mutual fund assets by fund type. In June 2011, the two largest categories were Canadian and foreign equity. However, the Canadian mutual fund market is small on a global scale. Table 1.6 shows the percentage of global mutual fund market by geography.
TABLE 1.5
Total net assets by fund type in June 2011
Net Assets ($ billions)
Canadian Equity $137.4 Global and International Equity 61.4 U.S. Equity 21.3 Sector Equity 18.2 Domestic Balanced 163.6 Global Balanced 129.5 Canadian Fixed Income 71.1 Global and High Yield Fixed Income 16.1 Specialty Funds Money Market Funds
5.2 32.5
Total $656.3
Source: Data drawn from Investment Funds Institute of Canada, Monthly statistics, June 2011. ific.ca.
TABLE 1.6
Global mutual fund industry by geography (Percentage of total net assets, year-end 2011)
Total worldwide mutual fund assets $23.8 trillion
Percentage of total net assets
United States 49 Europe 30 Africa and Asia/Pacific 13 Other Americas (includes Canada) 8
Source: Investment Company Institute, European Fund and Asset Management Association, and other national mutual fund associations
Hedge funds are another growing group of fi nancial institutions. According to the 2011 Hedge Fund Asset Flows & Trends report published by HedgeFund.net, the industry had approximately US$2.561 trillion under management worldwide in the second quarter of 2011. Hedge funds are largely unregulated and privately managed investment funds catering to sophisticated invest- ors, which look to earn high returns using aggressive fi nancial strategies prohibited by mutual
CHAPTER 1: Introduction to Corporate Finance 19
01Ross_Chapter01_3rd_A.indd 1901Ross_Chapter01_3rd_A.indd 19 12-11-12 13:3012-11-12 13:30
funds. Th ese strategies may include arbitrage,21 high levels of leverage,22 and active involvement in the derivatives market. However, hedge funds are not restricted to investing in fi nancial instru- ments—some hedge fund strategies involve acquiring stakes in public or private companies and pressuring the board to sell the business. In January 2011, the Canadian hedge fund industry was worth between $35 billion and $40 billion.23 Th ere is a high risk associated with hedge funds as these are highly unregulated and subject to fraud. In 2011, Raj Rajaratnam, hedge-fund tycoon and founder of Galleon Group was sentenced to 11 years in prison for insider trading. He amassed over $72 million by using illegal tips to trade in stocks of companies including Goldman Sachs Group Inc., Intel Corp., Google Inc., ATI Technologies Inc., and Clearwire Corp.24
We base this survey of the principal activities of fi nancial institutions on their main activities today. Recent deregulation now allows chartered banks, trust companies, insurance companies, and investment dealers to engage in most of the activities of the others with one exception: Char- tered banks are not allowed to sell life insurance through their branch networks. Although not every institution plans to become a one-stop fi nancial supermarket, the diff erent types of institu- tions are likely to continue to become more alike.
1. What are the principal financial institutions in Canada? What is the principal role of each?
2. What are direct and indirect finance? How do they differ?
3. How are money and capital markets different?
4. What is a dealer market? How do dealer and auction markets differ?
5. What is the largest auction market in Canada?
1.7 Trends in Financial Markets and Financial Management
Like all markets, fi nancial markets are experiencing rapid globalization. Globalization also makes it harder for investors to shelter their portfolios from fi nancial shocks in other countries. In the summer of 1998, the Asian fi nancial crisis shook fi nancial markets around the world. With increasing globalization, interest rates, foreign exchange rates, and other macroeconomic vari- ables have become more volatile. Th e toolkit of available fi nancial management techniques has expanded rapidly in response to a need to control increased risk from volatility and to track complexities arising from dealings in many countries. Computer technology improvements are making new fi nancial engineering applications practical.
When fi nancial managers or investment dealers design new securities or fi nancial processes, their eff orts are referred to as fi nancial engineering. Successful fi nancial engineering reduces and controls risk and minimizes taxes. Financial engineering creates a variety of debt and equity securities and reinforces the trend toward securitization of credit introduced earlier. A controver- sial example is the invention and rapid growth of trading in options, futures, and other derivative securities. Derivative securities are very useful in controlling risk, but they have also produced large losses when mishandled. For example, in 2008 during the fi nancial crisis, American Inter- national Group (AIG) owed heft y Credit Default Swaps Settlement payments to various banks. When AIG was about to go bankrupt, the U.S. government intervened and bailed out the com- pany by providing $182 billion.25
Financial engineering also seeks to reduce fi nancing costs of issuing securities as well as the
21 The practice of taking advantage of a price differential between two or more markets. 22 The use of debt to increase the potential return of an investment. 23 Source: cbc.ca/news/business/taxseason/story/2011/01/17/f-hedge-funds-industry-canada.html. To learn more about hedge fund developments, visit hedgefund.net. 24 articles.economictimes.indiatimes.com/2012-09-08/news/33696695_1_raj-rajaratnam-roomy-khan-oral-arguments 25 theglobeandmail.com/globe-investor/aig-profit-lifted-by-aia-stake-tax-benefit/article2119948/
Concept Questions
financial engineering Creation of new securities or financial processes.
derivative securities Options, futures, and other securities whose value derives from the price of another, underlying, asset.
20 Part 1: Overview of Corporate Finance
01Ross_Chapter01_3rd_A.indd 2001Ross_Chapter01_3rd_A.indd 20 12-11-12 13:3012-11-12 13:30
costs of complying with rules laid down by regulatory authorities. An example is the Short Form Prospectus Distribution (SFPD) allowing fi rms that frequently issue new equity to bypass most of the OSC registration requirements.
In addition to fi nancial engineering, advances in technology have created e-business, bring- ing new challenges for the fi nancial manager. For example, consumers ordering products on a company’s website expect rapid delivery and failure to meet these expectations can damage a company’s image. Th is means that companies doing e-business with consumers must invest in supply chain management as well as in additional inventory.
Technological advances have also created opportunities to combine diff erent types of fi nancial institutions to take advantage of economies of scale and scope. For example, Royal Bank, Canada’s largest chartered bank, owns Royal Trust and RBC Dominion Securities. Such large institutions operate in all provinces and internationally and enjoy more lax regulations in some jurisdictions than in others. Financial institutions pressure authorities to deregulate in a push-pull process called the regulatory dialectic.
For example, in 1998 and again in 2002, banks planned mergers in an eff ort to pressure the federal government to grant approval. Although the federal government turned down the merg- ers, we believe this issue is dormant, not dead, and will reemerge in the not too distant future.
Not all trends are driven by technology. In the aft ermath of the technology bubble of the late 1990s, stakeholders and regulators have become very interested in corporate governance reform, a topic we introduced earlier in the chapter. For example, proponents of such reform argue that a stronger, independent board of directors can prevent management excesses.
Another trend underlying the global fi nancial crisis starting in 2007 was excessive fi nancial leverage. Following the technology bubble and September 11, the United States Federal Reserve looked to aggressively lower interest rates in order to restore confi dence in the economy. In the U.S., individuals with bad credit ratings, sub-prime borrowers, looked to banks to provide loans at historically low interest rates for home purchases. Investors also reacted to these low rates by seeking higher returns. Th e fi nancial industry responded by manufacturing sub-prime mortgages and asset-backed securities. However, once housing prices began to cool and interest rates rose, sub-prime borrowers started defaulting on their loans and the collapse of the sub-prime market ensued. With mortgages serving as the underlying asset supporting most of the fi nancial instru- ments that investment banks, institutions, and retail buyers had acquired, these assets lost much of their value and hundreds of billions of dollars of write-downs followed.
Canada faced much the same external environments in the leadup to the crisis as the US did. But despite its fi nancial and economic integration with the US, Canada did not experience a single bank failure or bailout., Th e diff erence was that a highly stable branch banking system dominated by six large institutions forms the heart of Canada’s fi nancial system. Banks dominate lending and credit creation nationally and account for over 60% of total fi nancial assets in Canada.26
Th ese trends have made fi nancial management a much more complex and technical activ- ity. For this reason, many students of business fi nd introductory fi nance one of their most chal- lenging subjects. Th e trends we reviewed have also increased the stakes. In the face of increased global competition, the payoff for good fi nancial management is great. Th e fi nance function is also becoming important in corporate strategic planning. Th e good news is that career opportuni- ties (and compensation) in fi nancial positions are quite attractive.
1.8 Outline of the Text
Now that we’ve completed a quick tour of the concerns of corporate fi nance, we can take a closer look at the organization of this book. Th e text is organized into the following nine parts:
Part 1: Overview of Corporate Finance Part 2: Financial Statements and Long-Term Financial Planning Part 3: Valuation of Future Cash Flows Part 4: Capital Budgeting
26 Donald J.S. Brean, Lawrence Kryzanowski & Gordon S. Roberts (2011): Canada and the United States: Different roots, different routes to financial sector regulation, Business History, 53:2, 249–269
rbcroyalbank.com
regulatory dialectic The pressures financial institutions and regulatory bodies exert on each other.
CHAPTER 1: Introduction to Corporate Finance 21
01Ross_Chapter01_3rd_A.indd 2101Ross_Chapter01_3rd_A.indd 21 12-11-12 13:3012-11-12 13:30
Part 5: Risk and Return Part 6: Cost of Capital and Long-Term Financial Policy Part 7: Short-Term Financial Planning and Management Part 8: Topics in Corporate Finance Part 9: Derivative Securities and Corporate Finance
Part 1 of the text contains some introductory material and goes on to explain the relationship between accounting and cash fl ow. Part 2 explores fi nancial statements and how they are used in fi nance in greater depth.
Parts 3 and 4 contain our core discussion on valuation. In Part 3, we develop the basic proce- dures for valuing future cash fl ows with particular emphasis on stocks and bonds. Part 4 draws on this material and deals with capital budgeting and the eff ect of long-term investment decisions on the fi rm.
In Part 5, we develop some tools for evaluating risk. We then discuss how to evaluate the risks associated with long-term investments by the fi rm. Th e emphasis in this section is on coming up with a benchmark for making investment decisions.
Part 6 deals with the related issues of long-term fi nancing, dividend policy, and capital struc- ture. We discuss corporate securities in some detail and describe the procedures used to raise capital and sell securities to the public. We also introduce and describe the important concept of the cost of capital. We go on to examine dividends and dividend policy and important consider- ations in determining a capital structure.
Th e working capital question is addressed in Part 7. Th e subjects of short-term fi nancial plan- ning, cash management, and credit management are covered.
Part 8 contains the important special topic of international corporate fi nance. Part 9 covers risk management and derivative securities.
1.9 SUMMARY AND CONCLUSIONS
Th is chapter has introduced you to some of the basic ideas in corporate fi nance. In it, we saw that:
1. Corporate finance has three main areas of concern: a. What long-term investments should the firm take? This is the capital budgeting decision. b. Where will the firm get the long-term financing to pay for its investment? In other
words, what mixture of debt and equity should we use to fund our operations? This is the capital structure decision.
c. How should the firm manage its everyday financial activities? This is the working capital decision.
2. The goal of financial management in a for-profit business is to make decisions that increase the value of the stock or, more generally, increase the market value of the equity.
3. The corporate form of organization is superior to other forms when it comes to raising money and transferring ownership interest, but it has the disadvantage of double taxation.
4. There is the possibility of conflicts between shareholders and management in a large corpo- ration. We called these conflicts agency problems and discussed how they might be con- trolled and reduced.
5. The advantages of the corporate form are enhanced by the existence of financial markets. Financial institutions function to promote the efficiency of financial markets. Financial mar- kets function as both primary and secondary markets for corporate securities and can be or- ganized as either dealer or auction markets. Globalization, deregulation, and financial engineering are important forces shaping financial markets and the practice of financial management.
Of the topics we’ve discussed thus far, the most important is the goal of fi nancial management: Maximizing the value of the stock. Th roughout the text, as we analyze fi nancial decisions, we always ask the same question: How does the decision under consideration aff ect the value of the shares?
22 Part 1: Overview of Corporate Finance
01Ross_Chapter01_3rd_A.indd 2201Ross_Chapter01_3rd_A.indd 22 12-11-12 13:3012-11-12 13:30
Key Terms agency problem (page 10) capital budgeting (page 2) capital markets (page 15) capital structure (page 3) corporate governance (page 11) corporation (page 5) derivative securities (page 20)
financial engineering (page 20) money markets (page 15) partnership (page 5) regulatory dialectic (page 21) sole proprietorship (page 4) stakeholder (page 12) working capital management (page 4)
Chapter Review Problems and Self-Test 1. The Financial Management Decision Process (LO1) What
are the three types of financial management decisions? For each type of decision, give an example of a business transac- tion that would be relevant.
2. Sole Proprietorships and Partnerships (LO2) What are the three primary disadvantages to the sole proprietorship and partnership forms of business organization? What benefits are there to these types of business organization as opposed to the corporate form?
3. Corporate Organization (LO2) What is the primary disad- vantage of the corporate form of organization? Name at least two advantages of corporate organization.
4. Corporate Finance Organizational Structure (LO4) In a large corporation, what are the two distinct groups that report to the chief financial officer? Which group is the focus of cor- porate finance?
5. The Goal of Financial Management (LO3) What goal should always motivate the actions of the firm’s financial manager?
6. Corporate Agency Issues (LO4) Who owns a corporation? Describe the process whereby the owners control the firm’s management. What is the main reason that an agency rela- tionship exists in the corporate form of organization? In this context, what kind of problems can arise?
7. Financial Markets (LO5) An initial public offering (IPO) of a company’s securities is a term you’ve probably noticed in the financial press. Is an IPO a primary market transaction or a secondary market transaction?
8. Financial Markets (LO5) What does it mean when we say the Toronto Stock Exchange is both an auction market and a dealer market? How are auction markets different from dealer markets? What kind of market is Nasdaq?
9. Not-for-Profit Firm Goals (LO3) Suppose you were the fi- nancial manager of a not-for-profit business (a not-for-profit hospital, perhaps). What kinds of goals do you think would be appropriate?
10. Firm Goals and Stock Value (LO3) Evaluate the following statement: “Managers should not focus on the current stock
value because doing so will lead to an overemphasis on short- term profits at the expense of long-term profits.”
11. Firm Goals and Ethics (LO3) Can our goal of maximizing the value of the stock conflict with other goals, such as avoid- ing unethical or illegal behaviour? In particular, do you think subjects like customer and employee safety, the environment, and the general good of society fit in this framework, or are they essentially ignored? Try to think of some specific scenar- ios to illustrate your answer.
12. Firm Goals and Multinational Firms (LO3) Would our goal of maximizing the value of the stock be different if we were thinking about financial management in a foreign country? Why or why not?
13. Agency Issues and Corporate Control (LO4) Suppose you own shares in a company. The current price per share is $25. Another company has just announced that it wants to buy your company and will pay $35 per share to acquire all the outstanding shares. Your company’s management immedi- ately begins fighting off this hostile bid. Is management acting in the shareholders’ best interests? Why or why not?
14. Agency Issues and International Finance (LO4) Corporate ownership varies around the world. Historically, individuals have owned the majority of shares in public corporations in the United States. In Canada this is also the case, but owner- ship is more often concentrated in the hands of a majority shareholder. In Germany and Japan, banks, other financial institutions, and large companies own most of the shares in public corporations. How do you think these ownership dif- ferences affect the severity of agency costs in different countries?
15. Major Institutions and Markets (LO5) What are the major types of financial institutions and financial markets in Canada?
16. Direct versus Indirect Finance (LO5) What is the difference between direct and indirect finance? Give an example of each.
17. Current Major Trends (LO5) What are some of the major trends in Canadian financial markets? Explain how these trends affect the practice of financial management in Canada.
Internet Application Questions 1. Equity markets are an important source of capital for private firms in Canada. Take a tour of the Toronto Stock Exchange at
tmx.com. What is the TSX Composite Index? Check out Index Lists/Information under Investor Information. What does a change in the TSX Composite Index tell you?
2. Canadian banks are actively involved in financing home mortgages. Describe the role played by the Canada Mortgage and Housing Corporation in home mortgages (cmhc.ca). What is the National Housing Act? Can an investor participate in the mortgage “pool” represented by housing loans insured by the CMHC? Click on the Investment Opportunities menu on the CMHC homepage and describe Mortgage Backed Securities offered by the CMHC.
CHAPTER 1: Introduction to Corporate Finance 23
01Ross_Chapter01_3rd_A.indd 2301Ross_Chapter01_3rd_A.indd 23 12-11-12 13:3012-11-12 13:30
3. The choice of business organization form depends on many factors. The following website from British Columbia outlines the pros and cons of a sole proprietorship, partnership, and corporation: www.smallbusinessbc.ca/starting-a-business/ legal-requirements.
Can you suggest a few reasons why some firms that were organized as partnerships decided to incorporate (e.g., Goldman Sachs (goldmansachs.com) with shares traded on the NYSE (nyse.com)?
4. Ethical investing following socially responsible principles is gaining popularity. The Social Investment Organization website provides information about these principles and on Canadian ethical mutual funds at socialinvestment.ca. Sustainalytics offers research services to support socially responsible investing at sustainalytics.com/. How does investing in ethical funds differ from investing in general? What has been the performance record of Canadian ethical funds?
5. Ontario Securities Commission (OSC) administers and enforces securities law in the province of Ontario. The OSC website (osc.gov.on.ca) outlines various security laws and instruments. Visit the ‘Securities Law and Instruments’ section and check out the latest instruments, rules and policies. What are Securities Act (Ontario) and Commodity Futures Act?
24 Part 1: Overview of Corporate Finance
01Ross_Chapter01_3rd_A.indd 2401Ross_Chapter01_3rd_A.indd 24 12-11-12 13:3012-11-12 13:30
In this chapter, we examine fi nancial statements, cash fl ow, and taxes. Our emphasis is not on preparing fi nancial statements. Instead, we recognize that fi nancial statements are frequently a key source of information for fi nancial decisions, so our goal is to briefl y examine such statements and point out some of their more relevant features along with a few limitations. We pay special attention to some of the practical details of cash fl ow. By cash fl ow, we simply mean the diff erence between the number of dollars that come in and the number that go out. A crucial input to sound fi nancial management, cash fl ow analysis is used throughout the book. For example, bankers lending to businesses are looking increasingly at borrowers’ cash fl ows as the most reliable mea- sures of each company’s ability to repay its loans. In another example, most large companies base their capital budgets for investments in plant and equipment on analysis of cash fl ow. As a result, there is an excellent payoff in later chapters for knowledge of cash fl ow.
One very important topic is taxes because cash fl ows are measured aft er taxes. Our discussion looks at how corporate and individual taxes are computed and at how investors are taxed on dif- ferent types of income. A basic understanding of the Canadian tax system is essential for success in applying the tools of fi nancial management.
2.1 Statement of Financial Position
Th e statement of fi nancial position, also referred to as the balance sheet, is a snapshot of the fi rm. It is a convenient means of organizing and summarizing what a fi rm owns (its assets), what a fi rm owes (its liabilities), and the diff erence between the two (the fi rm’s equity) at a given time. Figure 2.1 illustrates how the traditional statement of fi nancial position is constructed. As shown, the left -hand side lists the assets of the fi rm, and the right-hand side lists the liabilities and equity. However, most publicly accountable enterprises in Canada choose a vertical format for the state- ment of fi nancial position.
In 2011, publicly traded fi rms in Canada switched to International Financial Reporting Standards (IFRS).1 Under IFRS, a company enjoys fl exibility over how to present its statement
1 cica.ca/ifrs//index.aspx
statement of financial position Financial statement showing a firm’s accounting value on a particular date. Also known as a balance sheet.
FINANCIAL STATEMENTS, CASH FLOW, AND TAXES
C H A P T E R 2
I n 2011, the Ontario Securities Commission (OSC) began investigating Sino-Forest Corp., one of the leading commercial plant operators in People’s
Republic of China. The OSC found the company
to have misrepresented some of its revenue and/or
exaggerated some of its timber holdings. In August
2011, Allen Chan, the CEO of Sino-Forest Corp., had
resigned amid allegations of fraud and misconduct.
The story of Sino-Forest Corp. highlights the issue
of reliability of financial statements and the importance
of understanding the financial reporting of companies.
Financial statements are discussed in this chapter.
Learning Object ives
After studying this chapter, you should understand:
LO1 The difference between accounting value (or “book” value) and market value.
LO2 The difference between accounting income and cash flow.
LO3 How to determine a firm’s cash flow from its financial statements.
LO4 The difference between average and marginal tax rates.
LO5 The basics of Capital Cost Allowance (CCA) and Undepreciated Capital Cost (UCC).
Pe te
r Po
w er
/T he
G lo
be a
nd M
ai l
02Ross_Chapter02_FIN.indd 2502Ross_Chapter02_FIN.indd 25 12-12-19 11:3512-12-19 11:35
of fi nancial position. For example, in applications of IFRS in Europe, many companies list fi xed assets at the top of the left -hand side of their balance sheets. In Canada, the practice is to retain the order used under GAAP.
FIGURE 2.1
The statement of financial position model of the firm. Left side lists total value of assets. Right side, or total value of the firm to investors, determines how the value is distributed.
Current assets
Fixed assets
1. Tangible fixed assets
2. Intangible fixed assets
Total Value of Assets
Current liabilities
Shareholders' equity
Long-term debt
Total Value of the Firm to Investors
Net working capital
Assets Assets are classifi ed as either current or fi xed. A fi xed asset is one that has a relatively long life. Fixed assets can either be tangible, such as a truck or a computer, or intangible, such as a trade- mark or patent. Accountants refer to these assets as capital assets. A current asset has a life of less than one year. Th is means that the asset will convert to cash within 12 months. For example, inventory would normally be purchased and sold within a year and is thus classifi ed as a current asset. Obviously, cash itself is a current asset. Accounts receivable (money owed to the fi rm by its customers) is also a current asset.
Liabil it ies and Owners’ Equity Th e fi rm’s liabilities are the fi rst thing listed on the right-hand side of the statement of fi nancial position. Th ese are classifi ed as either current or long-term. Current liabilities, like current assets, have a life of less than one year (meaning they must be paid within the year) and are listed before long-term liabilities. Accounts payable (money the fi rm owes to its suppliers) is one example of a current liability.
A debt that is not due in the coming year is a long-term liability. A loan that the fi rm will pay off in fi ve years is one such long-term debt. Firms borrow long-term from a variety of sources. We use the terms bond and bondholders generically to refer to long-term debt and long-term credi- tors, respectively.
Finally, by defi nition, the diff erence between the total value of the assets (current and fi xed) and the total value of the liabilities (current and long-term) is the shareholders’ equity, also called common equity or owners’ equity. Th is feature of the statement of fi nancial position is intended to refl ect the fact that, if the fi rm were to sell all of its assets and use the money to pay off its debts, whatever residual value remained would belong to the shareholders. So, the statement of fi nancial position balances because the value of the left -hand side always equals the value of the right-hand side. Th at is, the value of the fi rm’s assets is equal to the sum of liabilities and shareholders’ equity:2
Assets = Liabilities + Shareholders’ equity [2.1]
Th is is the statement of fi nancial position identity or equation, and it always holds because share- holders’ equity is defi ned as the diff erence between assets and liabilities.
2 The terms owners’ equity and shareholders’ equity are used interchangeably to refer to the equity in a corporation. The term net worth is also used. Variations exist in addition to these.
26 Part 1: Overview of Corporate Finance
02Ross_Chapter02_FIN.indd 2602Ross_Chapter02_FIN.indd 26 12-12-19 11:3512-12-19 11:35
Net Working Capital As shown in Figure 2.1, the diff erence between a fi rm’s current assets and its current liabilities is called net working capital. Net working capital is positive when current assets exceed current liabilities. Based on the defi nitions of current assets and current liabilities, this means that the cash available over the next 12 months exceeds the cash that must be paid over that same period. For this reason, net working capital is usually positive in a healthy fi rm.3
EXAMPLE 2.1: Building the Statement of Financial Position
A firm has current assets of $100, fixed assets of $500, short-term debt of $70, and long-term debt of $200. What does the statement of financial position look like? What is shareholders’ equity? What is net working capital?
In this case, total assets are $100 + 500 = $600 and total liabilities are $70 + 200 = $270, so shareholders’ equity is the difference: $600 - 270 = $330. The state- ment of financial position would thus look like:
Assets Liabilities
Current assets $100 Current liabilities $ 70 Fixed assets 500 Long-term debt 200
Shareholders’ equity 330 Total assets $600 Total liabilities and shareholders’ equity $600
Net working capital is the diff erence between current assets and current liabilities, or $100 - 70 = $30.
Table 2.1 shows a simplifi ed statement of fi nancial position for Canadian Enterprises Limited. Th e assets in the statement of fi nancial position are listed in order of the length of time it takes for them to convert to cash in the normal course of business. Similarly, the liabilities are listed in the order in which they would normally be paid.
TABLE 2.1
Canadian Enterprises Limited Statement of Financial Position as of December 31, 2011 and 2012
($ millions)
2011 2012 2011 2012
Assets Liabilities and Owners’ Equity Current assets Current liabilities Cash $ 114 $ 160 Accounts payable $ 232 $ 266 Accounts receivable 445 688 Notes payable 196 123 Inventory 553 555 Total $ 428 $ 389 Total $ 1,112 $ 1,403
Long-term debt $ 408 $ 454 Fixed assets Owners’ equity Net, plant and equipment $ 1,644 $ 1,709 Common shares 600 640
Retained earnings 1,320 1,629 Total $ 1,920 $ 2,269
Total assets $ 2,756 $ 3,112 Total liabilities and owners’ equity $ 2,756 $ 3,112
Th e structure of the assets for a particular fi rm refl ects the line of business that the fi rm is in and also managerial decisions about how much cash and inventory to maintain and about credit policy, fi xed asset acquisition, and so on.
3 Chapter 18 discusses net working capital in detail.
CHAPTER 2: Financial Statements, Cash Flow, and Taxes 27
02Ross_Chapter02_FIN.indd 2702Ross_Chapter02_FIN.indd 27 12-12-19 11:3512-12-19 11:35
Th e liabilities side of the statement of fi nancial position primarily refl ects managerial decisions about capital structure and the use of short-term debt. For example, in 2012, total long-term debt for Canadian Enterprises Limited was $454 and total equity was $640 + 1,629 = $2,269, so total long-term fi nancing was $454 + 2,269 = $2,723. Of this amount, $454/2,723 = 16.67% was long- term debt. Th is percentage refl ects capital structure decisions made in the past by the manage- ment of Canadian Enterprises.
Th ree particularly important things to keep in mind when examining a statement of fi nancial position are liquidity, debt versus equity, and market value versus book value.4
Liquidity Liquidity refers to the speed and ease with which an asset can be converted to cash. Gold is a relatively liquid asset; a custom manufacturing facility is not. Liquidity really has two dimensions: ease of conversion versus loss of value. Any asset can be converted to cash quickly if we cut the price enough. A highly liquid asset is therefore one that can be quickly sold without signifi cant loss of value. An illiquid asset is one that cannot be quickly converted to cash without a substantial price reduction.
Assets are normally listed on the statement of fi nancial position in order of decreasing liquid- ity, meaning that the most liquid assets are listed fi rst. Current assets are relatively liquid and include cash and those assets that we expect to convert to cash over the next 12 months. Accounts receivable, for example, represents amounts not yet collected from customers on sales already made. Naturally, we hope these will convert to cash in the near future. Inventory is probably the least liquid of the current assets, at least for many businesses.
Fixed assets are, for the most part, relatively illiquid. Th ese consist of tangible things such as buildings and equipment. Intangible assets, such as a trademark, have no physical existence but can be very valuable. Like tangible fi xed assets, they won’t ordinarily convert to cash and are gen- erally considered illiquid.
Liquidity is valuable. Th e more liquid a business is, the less likely it is to experience fi nancial distress (that is, diffi culty in paying debts or buying needed assets). Unfortunately, liquid assets are generally less profi table to hold. For example, cash holdings are the most liquid of all invest- ments, but they sometimes earn no return at all—they just sit there. Th erefore, the trade-off is between the advantages of liquidity and forgone potential profi ts. We discuss this trade-off further in the rest of the book.
Debt versus Equity To the extent that a fi rm borrows money, it usually gives creditors fi rst claim to the fi rm’s cash fl ow. Equity holders are only entitled to the residual value, the portion left aft er creditors are paid. Th e value of this residual portion is the shareholders’ equity in the fi rm and is simply the asset value less the value of the fi rm’s liabilities:
Shareholders’ equity = Assets - Liabilities
Th is is true in an accounting sense because shareholders’ equity is defi ned as this residual portion. More importantly, it is true in an economic sense: If the fi rm sells its assets and pays its debts, whatever cash is left belongs to the shareholders.
Th e use of debt in a fi rm’s capital structure is called fi nancial leverage. Th e more debt a fi rm has (as a percentage of assets), the greater is its degree of fi nancial leverage. As we discuss in later chapters, debt acts like a lever in the sense that using it can greatly magnify both gains and losses. So fi nancial leverage increases the potential reward to shareholders, but it also increases the potential for fi nancial distress and business failure.
Value versus Cost Th e accounting value of a fi rm’s assets is frequently referred to as the carrying value or the book value of the assets. IFRS allows companies to use the historical cost method; it also allows use of
4 Chapters 3 and 4 expand on financial statement analysis.
28 Part 1: Overview of Corporate Finance
02Ross_Chapter02_FIN.indd 2802Ross_Chapter02_FIN.indd 28 12-12-19 11:3512-12-19 11:35
the revaluation (fair value) method. When a company adopts the revaluation method, all items in a class of assets should be revalued simultaneously, and the revaluation should be performed with enough regularity to ensure that, at the statement of fi nancial position date, the carrying amount is not materially diff erent from the fair value amount. Th us a class of property, plant, and equip- ment with signifi cant unpredictable changes in fair value will require more frequent revaluations (every one or two years) than will another class of asset that has insignifi cant changes in fair value (e. g., a building may only require revaluation every three to fi ve years).
Market value is the price at which willing buyers and sellers trade the assets. Manage ment’s job is to create a value for the fi rm that is higher than its cost. When market values are consider- ably below book values, it is customary accounting practice to write down assets. For example, in 2011, Suncor Energy Inc., took a massive $514 million write-down of Libyan assets as a result of instability in the war torn country.5 Sometimes, huge write-off s are also indicative of overstated profi ts in previous years, as assets were not expensed properly.
Th ere are many users of a fi rm’s statement of fi nancial position and each may seek diff erent informa tion from it. A banker may look at a balance sheet for evidence of liquidity and working capital. A supplier may also note the size of accounts payable, which refl ects the gen eral prompt- ness of payments. Many users of fi nancial statements, including managers and investors, want to know the value of the fi rm, not its cost. Th is is not found on the statement of fi nancial position. In fact, many of a fi rm’s true resources (good management, proprietary assets, and so on) do not appear on the statement of fi nancial position. Henceforth, whenever we speak of the value of an asset or the value of the fi rm, we will normally mean its market value. So, for example, when we say the goal of the fi nancial manager is to increase the value of the stock, we mean the market value of the stock.
EXAMPLE 2.2: Market versus Book Value
The Quebec Corporation has fixed assets with a book value of $700 and an appraised market value of about $1,000. Net working capital is $400 on the books, but approxi- mately $600 would be realized if all the current accounts were liquidated. Quebec Corporation has $500 in long-
term debt, both book value and market value. What is the book value of the equity? What is the market value?
We can construct two simplified statements of financial position, one in accounting (book value) terms and one in economic (market value) terms:
QUEBEC CORPORATION Statement of Financial Position Market Value versus Book Value
Book Market Book Market
Assets Liabilities Net working capital $ 400 $ 600 Long-term debt $ 500 $ 500 Net fixed assets 700 1,000 Shareholders’ equity 600 1,100
$ 1,100 $ 1,600 $ 1,100 $ 1,600
1. What does the statement of financial position identity?
2. What is liquidity? Why is it important?
3. What do we mean by financial leverage?
4. Explain the difference between accounting value and market value. Which is more important to the financial manager? Why?
5 Scott Haggett and Jeffrey Jones, “Canadian oil profits marred by production woes” financialpost.com, July 28, 2011. business.financialpost.com/2011/07/28/canadian-oil-profits-marred-by-production-woes/.
Concept Questions
CHAPTER 2: Financial Statements, Cash Flow, and Taxes 29
02Ross_Chapter02_FIN.indd 2902Ross_Chapter02_FIN.indd 29 12-12-19 11:3512-12-19 11:35
2.2 Statement of Comprehensive Income
Th e statement of comprehensive income measures performance over some period of time, usu- ally a year. Th e statement of comprehensive income equation is:
Revenues - Expenses = Income [2.2]
If you think of the statement of fi nancial position as a snapshot, then you can think of statement of comprehensive income as a video recording covering the period between, before, and aft er pic- tures. Table 2.2 gives a simplifi ed statement of comprehensive income for Canadian Enterprises.
Th e initial thing reported on the statement of comprehensive income would usually be revenue and expenses from the fi rm’s principal operations. Subsequent parts include, among other things, fi nancing expenses such as interest paid. Taxes paid are reported separately. Th e last item is net income (the so-called bottom line). Net income is oft en expressed on a per-share basis and called earnings per share (EPS).
TABLE 2.2
CANADIAN ENTERPRISES 2012 Statement of Comprehensive Income
($ millions)
Net sales $ 1,509 Cost of goods sold 750 Depreciation 65 Earnings before interest and taxes $ 694 Interest paid 70 Income before taxes $ 624 Taxes 250 Net income $ 374 Addition to retained earnings $309 Dividends 65
As indicated, Canadian Enterprises paid cash dividends of $65. Th e diff erence between net income and cash dividends, $309, is the addition to retained earnings for the year. Th is amount is added to the cumulative retained earnings account on the statement of fi nancial position. If you’ll look back at the two statements of fi nancial position for Canadian Enterprises in Table 2.1, you’ll see that retained earnings did go up by this amount, $1,320 + 309 = $1,629.
EXAMPLE 2.3: Calculating Earnings and Dividends per Share
Suppose that Canadian had 200 million shares outstanding at the end of 2012. Based on the preceding statement of comprehensive income, what was Canadian’s EPS? What were the dividends per share?
From the statement of comprehensive income in Table 2.2 Canadian had a net income of $374 million for the
year. Since 200 million shares were outstanding, EPS was $374/200 = $1.87 per share. Similarly, dividends per share were $65/200 = $.325 per share.
When looking at the statement of comprehensive in- come, the financial manager needs to keep three things in mind: IFRS, cash versus non-cash items, and time and costs.
International Financial Reporting Standards (IFRS) As pointed out earlier, the focus in fi nancial decisions is on market value, which depends
on cash fl ow. However, like the statement of fi nancial position, the statement of comprehensive income has many diff erent users and the accounting profession has developed IFRS to provide infor mation for a broad audience not necessarily concerned with cash fl ow. For this reason, it is
statement of comprehensive income Financial statement summarizing a firm’s performance over a period of time. Formerly called the income statement.
30 Part 1: Overview of Corporate Finance
02Ross_Chapter02_FIN.indd 3002Ross_Chapter02_FIN.indd 30 12-12-19 11:3512-12-19 11:35
necessary to make adjustments to information on statements of comprehensive income to obtain cash fl ow.
For example, revenue is recognized on the statement of comprehensive income when the earn- ings process is virtually completed and an exchange of goods or services has occurred. Th erefore, the unrealized appreciation in owning property will not be recognized as income. Th is provides a device for smoothing income by selling appreciated property at convenient times. For example, if the fi rm owns a tree farm that has doubled in value, then in a year when its earnings from other businesses are down, it can raise overall earnings by selling some trees. Th e matching principle of IFRS dictates that revenues be matched with expenses. Th us, income is reported when it is earned or accrued, even though no cash fl ow has necessarily occurred. (For example, when goods are sold for credit, sales and profi ts are reported.)
Non-Cash Items A primary reason that accounting income diff ers from cash fl ow is that a statement of compre- hensive income contains non-cash items. Th e most important of these is depreciation. Suppose a fi rm purchases an asset for $5,000 and pays in cash. Obviously, the fi rm has a $5,000 cash outfl ow at the time of purchase. However, instead of deducting the $5,000 as an expense, an accountant might depreciate the asset over a fi ve-year period.
If the depreciation is straight-line and the asset is written down to zero over that period, $5,000/5 = $1,000 would be deducted each year as an expense.6 Th e important thing to recog- nize is that this $1,000 deduction isn’t cash—it’s an accounting number. Th e actual cash outfl ow occurred when the asset was purchased.
Th e depreciation deduction is an application of the representational faithfulness principle in accounting. Th e revenues associated with an asset would generally occur over some length of time. So the accountant seeks to expense the purchase of the asset with the benefi ts produced from owning it as a way of representing the use of the asset over time.
As we shall see, for the fi nancial manager, the actual timing of cash infl ows and outfl ows is critical in coming up with a reasonable estimate of market value, so we need to learn how to sepa- rate the cash fl ows from the non-cash accounting entries.
Time and Costs It is oft en useful to think of the future as having two distinct parts: the short run and the long run. Th ese are not precise time periods. Th e distinction has to do with whether costs are fi xed or variable. In the long run, all business costs are variable. Given suffi cient time, assets can be sold, debts can be paid, and so on.
If our time horizon is relatively short, however, some costs are eff ectively fi xed—they must be paid no matter what (property taxes, for example). Other costs, such as wages to workers and pay- ments to suppliers, are still variable. As a result, even in the short run, the fi rm can vary its output level by varying expenditures in these areas.
Th e distinction between fi xed and variable costs is important, at times, to the fi nancial man- ager, but the way costs are reported on the statement of comprehensive income is not a good guide as to which costs are which. Th e reason is that, in practice, accountants tend to classify costs as either product costs or period costs.
Product costs include such things as raw materials, direct labour expense, and manufacturing overhead. Th ese are reported on the statement of comprehensive income as costs of goods sold, but they include both fi xed and variable costs. Similarly, period costs are incurred during a par- ticular time period and are reported as selling, general, and administrative expenses. Once again, some of these period costs may be fi xed and others may be variable. Th e company president’s sal- ary, for example, is a period cost and is probably fi xed, at least in the short run.
6 By straight-line, we mean that the depreciation deduction is the same every year. By written down to zero, we mean that the asset is assumed to have no value at the end of five years. Tax depreciation is discussed in more detail later in the chapter.
non-cash items Expenses charged against revenues that do not directly affect cash flow, such as depreciation.
CHAPTER 2: Financial Statements, Cash Flow, and Taxes 31
02Ross_Chapter02_FIN.indd 3102Ross_Chapter02_FIN.indd 31 12-12-19 11:3512-12-19 11:35
1. What is the statement of comprehensive income equation?
2. What are three things to keep in mind when looking at an statement of comprehensive income?
3. Why is accounting income not the same as cash flow? Give two reasons.
2.3 Cash Flow
At this point, we are ready to discuss one of the most important pieces of fi nancial information that can be gleaned from fi nancial statements: cash fl ow. Th ere is no standard fi nancial statement for presenting this information in the way that we wish. Th erefore, we discuss how to calculate cash fl ow for Canadian Enterprises and point out how the result diff ers from standard fi nancial statement calculations. Th ere is a standard accounting statement called the statement of cash fl ows, but it is concerned with a somewhat diff erent issue and should not be confused with what is discussed in this section. Th e accounting statement of cash fl ows is discussed in Chapter 3.
From the statement of fi nancial position identity, we know that the value of a fi rm’s assets is equal to the value of its liabilities plus the value of its equity. Similarly, the cash fl ow from assets must equal the sum of the cash fl ow to bondholders (or creditors) plus the cash fl ow to sharehold- ers (or owners):
Cash flow from assets = Cash flow to bondholders + Cash flow to shareholders [2.3]
Th is is the cash fl ow identity. It says that the cash fl ow from the fi rm’s assets is equal to the cash fl ow paid to suppliers of capital to the fi rm. A fi rm generates cash through its various activities; that cash is either used to pay creditors or paid out to the owners of the fi rm.
Cash Flow from Assets Cash fl ow from assets involves three components: operating cash fl ow, capital spending, and additions to net working capital. Operating cash fl ow refers to the cash fl ow that results from the fi rm’s day-to-day activities of producing and selling. Expenses associated with the fi rm’s fi nancing of its assets are not included because they are not operating expenses.
As we discussed in Chapter 1, some portion of the fi rm’s cash fl ow is reinvested in the fi rm. Capital spending refers to the net spending on fi xed assets (purchases of fi xed assets less sales of fi xed assets). Finally, additions to net working capital is the amount spent on net working capital. It is measured as the change in net working capital over the period being examined and represents the net increase in current assets over current liabilities. Th e three components of cash fl ow are examined in more detail next.
OPERATING CASH FLOW To calculate operating cash flow, we want to calculate rev- enues minus costs, but we don’t want to include depreciation since it’s not a cash outflow, and we don’t want to include interest because it’s a financing expense. We do want to include taxes, be- cause taxes are, unfortunately, paid in cash.
If we look at the statement of comprehensive income in Table 2.2, Canadian Enterprises had earnings before interest and taxes (EBIT) of $694. Th is is almost what we want since it doesn’t include interest paid. We need to make two adjustments: First, recall that depreciation is a non- cash expense. To get cash fl ow, we fi rst add back the $65 in depreciation since it wasn’t a cash deduction. Th e second adjustment is to subtract the $250 in taxes since these were paid in cash. Th e result is operating cash fl ow:
Canadian Enterprises thus had a 2012 operating cash fl ow of $509 as shown in Table 2.3. Th ere is an unpleasant possibility for confusion when we speak of operating cash fl ow. In
accounting practice, operating cash fl ow is oft en defi ned as net income plus depreciation. For Canadian Enterprises in Table 2.2, this would amount to $374 + 65 = $439.
Th e accounting defi nition of operating cash fl ow diff ers from ours in one important way: Inter- est is deducted when net income is computed. Notice that the diff erence between the $509 operat- ing cash fl ow we calculated and this $439 is $70, the amount of interest paid for the year.
Concept Questions
cash flow from assets The total of cash flow to bondholders and cash flow to shareholders, consisting of: operating cash flow, capital spending, and additions to net working capital.
operating cash flow Cash generated from a firm’s normal business activities.
32 Part 1: Overview of Corporate Finance
02Ross_Chapter02_FIN.indd 3202Ross_Chapter02_FIN.indd 32 12-12-19 11:3512-12-19 11:35
TABLE 2.3
CANADIAN ENTERPRISES 2012 Operating Cash Flow
Earnings before interest and taxes $694
+ Depreciation 65
- Taxes 250
Operating cash flow $509
Th is defi nition of cash fl ow thus considers interest paid to be an operating expense. Our defi ni- tion treats it properly as a fi nancing expense. If there were no interest expense, the two defi nitions would be the same.
To fi nish our calculations of cash fl ow from assets for Canadian Enterprises, we need to con- sider how much of the $509 operating cash fl ow was reinvested in the fi rm. We consider spending on fi xed assets fi rst.
CAPITAL SPENDING Net capital spending is just money spent on fixed assets less money received from the sale of fixed assets. At the end of 2011, net fixed assets were $1,644. During the year, we wrote off (depreciated) $65 worth of fixed assets on the statement of comprehensive in- come. So, if we did not purchase any new fixed assets, we would have had $1,644 - 65 = $1,579 at year’s end. The 2012 statement of financial position shows $1,709 in net fixed assets, so we must have spent a total of $1,709 - 1,579 = $130 on fixed assets during the year:
Ending fixed assets $ 1,709
- Beginning fixed assets 1,644
+ Depreciation 65
Net investment in fixed assets $ 130
Th is $130 is our net capital spending for 2012. Could net capital spending be negative? Th e answer is yes. Th is would happen if the fi rm sold
more assets than it purchased. Th e net here refers to purchases of fi xed assets net of any sales.
CHANGE IN NET WORKING CAPITAL In addition to investing in fixed assets, a firm also invests in current assets. For example, going back to the statement of financial position in Table 2.1, we see that, at the end of 2012, Canadian Enterprises had current assets of $1,403. At the end of 2011, current assets were $1,112, so, during the year, Canadian Enterprises invested $1,403 - 1,112 = $291 in current assets.
As the fi rm changes its investment in current assets, its current liabilities usually change as well. To determine the changes to net working capital, the easiest approach is just to take the diff erence between the beginning and ending net working capital (NWC) fi gures. Net working capital at the end of 2012 was $1,403 - 389 = $1,014. Similarly, at the end of 2011, net working capital was $1,112 - 428 = $684. So, given these fi gures, we have:
Ending NWC $ 1,014
- Beginning NWC 684
Change in NWC $ 330
Net working capital thus increased by $330. Put another way, Canadian Enterprises had a net investment of $330 in NWC for the year.
CONCLUSION Given the figures we’ve come up with, we’re ready to calculate cash flow from assets. The total cash flow from assets is given by operating cash flow less the amounts in- vested in fixed assets and net working capital. So, for Canadian Enterprises we have:
CHAPTER 2: Financial Statements, Cash Flow, and Taxes 33
02Ross_Chapter02_FIN.indd 3302Ross_Chapter02_FIN.indd 33 12-12-19 11:3512-12-19 11:35
CANADIAN ENTERPRISES 2012 Cash Flow from Assets
Operating cash flow $ 509
- Net capital spending 130
- Changes in NWC 330
Cash flow from assets $ 49
A NOTE ON “FREE” CASH FLOW Cash flow from assets sometimes goes by a differ- ent name, free cash flow. Of course, there is no such thing as “free” cash. Instead, the name refers to cash that the firm is free to distribute to creditors and shareholders because it is not needed for working capital or fixed asset investment. Free cash flow is the cash flow minus any reinvestment required to maintain the firm’s competitive advantage. We will stick with “cash flow from assets” as our label for this important concept because, in practice, there is some variation in exactly how free cash flow is computed; different users calculate it in different ways. Nonetheless, whenever you hear the phrase “free cash flow,” you should understand that what is being discussed is cash flow from assets or something quite similar.
Cash Flow to Creditors and Shareholders Th e cash fl ows to creditors and shareholders represent the net payments to creditors and owners during the year. Th ey are calculated in a similar way. Cash fl ow to creditors is interest paid less net new borrowing; cash fl ow to shareholders is dividends less net new equity raised.
CASH FLOW TO CREDITORS Looking at the statement of comprehensive income in Table 2.2, Canadian paid $70 in interest to creditors. From the statement of financial position in Table 2.1, long-term debt rose by $454 - 408 = $46. So, Canadian Enterprises paid out $70 in interest, but it borrowed an additional $46. Net cash flow to creditors is thus:
CANADIAN ENTERPRISES 2012 Cash Flow to Creditors
Interest paid $70
- Net new borrowing 46
Cash flow to creditors $24
Cash fl ow to creditors is sometimes called cash fl ow to bondholders; we use these interchangeably.
CASH FLOW TO SHAREHOLDERS From the statement of comprehensive income, we see that dividends paid to shareholders amount to $65. To calculate net new equity raised, we need to look at the common share account. This account tells us how many shares the company has sold. During the year, this account rose by $40, so $40 in net new equity was raised. Given this, we have:
CANADIAN ENTERPRISES 2012 Cash Flow to Shareholders
Dividends paid $65
- Net new equity 40
Cash flow to shareholders $25
Th e cash fl ow to shareholders for 2012 was thus $25. Th e last thing that we need to do is to check that the cash fl ow identity holds to be sure that we
didn’t make any mistakes. Cash fl ow from assets adds up the sources of cash fl ow while cash fl ow to creditors and shareholders measures how the fi rm uses its cash fl ow. Since all cash fl ow has to be accounted for, total sources (cash fl ow from assets) must equal total uses (cash fl ow to creditors and shareholders). Earlier we found the cash fl ow from assets is $49. Cash fl ow to creditors and shareholders is $24 + 25 = $49, so everything checks out. Table 2.4 contains a summary of the various cash fl ow calculations for future reference.
Two important observations can be drawn from our discussion of cash fl ow: First, several types of cash fl ow are relevant to understanding the fi nancial situation of the fi rm. Operating cash fl ow, defi ned as earnings before interest and depreciation minus taxes, measures the cash generated from operations not counting capital spending or working capital requirements. It should usually be posi- tive; a fi rm is in trouble if operating cash fl ow is negative for a long time because the fi rm is not
free cash flow Another name for cash flow from assets.
cash flow to creditors A firm’s interest payments to creditors less net new borrowings.
cash flow to shareholders Dividends paid out by a firm less net new equity raised.
34 Part 1: Overview of Corporate Finance
02Ross_Chapter02_FIN.indd 3402Ross_Chapter02_FIN.indd 34 12-12-19 11:3512-12-19 11:35
generating enough cash to pay operating costs. Total cash fl ow of the fi rm includes capital spending and additions to net working capital. It will frequently be negative. When a fi rm is growing at a rapid rate, the spending on inventory and fi xed assets can be higher than cash fl ow from sales.
Second, net income is not cash fl ow. Th e net income of Canadian Enterprises in 2012 was $374 million, whereas total cash fl ow from assets was $49 million. Th e two numbers are not usually the same. In determining the economic and fi nancial condition of a fi rm, cash fl ow is more revealing.
EXAMPLE 2.4: Cash Flows for Dole Cola
During the year, Dole Cola Ltd. had sales and costs of $600 and $300, respectively. Depreciation was $150 and interest paid was $30. Taxes were calculated at a straight 40 per- cent. Dividends were $30. All figures are in millions of dol- lars. What was the operating cash flow for Dole? Why is this different from net income?
The easiest thing to do here is to create an statement of comprehensive income. We can then fill in the numbers we need. Dole Cola’s statement of comprehensive income follows:
DOLE COLA 2012 Statement of Comprehensive Income ($ millions)
Net sales $ 600 Cost of goods sold 300 Depreciation 150 Earnings before interest and taxes $ 150 Interest paid 30 Taxable income $ 120 Taxes 48 Net income $ 72 Retained earnings $42 Dividends 30
Net income for Dole is thus $72. We now have all the num- bers we need; so referring back to the Canadian Enterprises example, we have:
DOLE COLA 2012 Operating Cash Flow ($ millions)
Earnings before interest and taxes $ 150
+ Depreciation 150
- Taxes 48
Operating cash flow $ 252
As this example illustrates, operating cash flow is not the same as net income, because depreciation and interest are subtracted out when net income is calculated. If you recall our earlier discussion, we don’t subtract these out in com- puting operating cash flow because depreciation is not a cash expense and interest paid is a financing expense, not an operating expense.
TABLE 2.4 Cash flow summary
The cash flow identity
Cash flow from assets = Cash flow to creditors (or bondholders) + Cash flow to shareholders (or owners)
Cash flow from assets
Cash flow from assets = Operating cash flow - Net capital spending - Changes in net working capital (NWC) where:
a. Operating cash flow = Earnings before interest and taxes (EBIT) + Depreciation - Taxes
b. Net capital spending = Ending net fixed assets - Beginning net fixed assets + Depreciation
c. Changes in NWC = Ending NWC - Beginning NWC
Cash flow to creditors (bondholders)
Cash flow to creditors = Interest paid - Net new borrowing
Cash flow to shareholders (owners)
Cash flow to shareholders = Dividends paid - Net new equity raised
CHAPTER 2: Financial Statements, Cash Flow, and Taxes 35
02Ross_Chapter02_FIN.indd 3502Ross_Chapter02_FIN.indd 35 12-12-19 11:3512-12-19 11:35
Net Capital Spending Suppose that beginning net fi xed assets were $500 and ending net fi xed assets were $750. What was the net capital spending for the year?
From the statement of comprehensive income for Dole, depreciation for the year was $150. Net fi xed assets rose by $250. We thus spent $150 to cover the depreciation and an additional $250 as well, for a total of $400.
Change in NWC and Cash Flow from Assets Suppose that Dole Cola started the year with $2,130 in current assets and $1,620 in current lia- bilities. Th e corresponding ending fi gures were $2,260 and $1,710. What was the change in NWC during the year? What was cash fl ow from assets? How does this compare to net income?
Net working capital started out as $2,130 - 1,620 = $510 and ended up at $2,260 - 1,710 = $550. Th e change in NWC was thus $550 - 510 = $40. Putting together all the information for Dole we have:
DOLE COLA 2012 Cash Flow from Assets
Operating cash flow $252
- Net capital spending 400
- Changes in NWC 40
Cash flow from assets -$188
Dole had a cash fl ow from assets of negative $188. Net income was positive at $72. Is the fact that cash fl ow from assets is negative a cause for alarm? Not necessarily. Th e cash fl ow here is negative primarily because of a large investment in fi xed assets. If these are good investments, the resulting negative cash fl ow is not a worry.
CASH FLOW TO CREDITORS AND SHAREHOLDERS We saw that Dole Cola had cash flow from assets of -$188. The fact that this is negative means that Dole raised more money in the form of new debt and equity than it paid out for the year. For example, suppose we know that Dole didn’t sell any new equity for the year. What was cash flow to shareholders? To bondholders?
Because it didn’t raise any new equity, Dole’s cash fl ow to shareholders is just equal to the cash dividend paid:
DOLE COLA 2012 Cash Flow to Shareholders
Dividends paid $ 30
- Net new equity 0
Cash flow to shareholders $ 30
Now, from the cash fl ow identity the total cash paid to bondholders and shareholders was -$188. Cash fl ow to shareholders is $30, so cash fl ow to bondholders must be equal to -$188 - $30 = -$218:
Cash flow to bondholders + Cash flow to shareholders = -$188 Cash flow to bondholders + $30 = -$188 Cash flow to bondholders = -$218
From the statement of comprehensive income, interest paid is $30. We can determine net new borrowing as follows:
DOLE COLA 2012 Cash Flow to Bondholders
Interest paid $ 30
- Net new borrowing -248 Cash flow to bondholders -$218
As indicated, since cash fl ow to bondholders is -$218 and interest paid is $30, Dole must have borrowed $248 during the year to help fi nance the fi xed asset expansion.
36 Part 1: Overview of Corporate Finance
02Ross_Chapter02_FIN.indd 3602Ross_Chapter02_FIN.indd 36 12-12-19 11:3512-12-19 11:35
1. What is the cash flow identity? Explain what it says.
2. What are the components of operating cash flow?
3. Why is interest paid not a component of operating cash flow?
2.4 Taxes
Taxes are very important because, as we just saw, cash fl ows are measured aft er taxes. In this section, we examine corporate and personal tax rates and how taxes are calculated. We apply this knowledge to see how diff erent types of income are taxed in the hands of individuals and corporations.
Th e size of the tax bill is determined through tax laws and regulations in the annual budgets of the federal government (administered by Canada Revenue Agency (CRA)) and provincial gov- ernments. If the various rules of taxation seem a little bizarre or convoluted to you, keep in mind that tax law is the result of political, as well as economic, forces. According to economic theory, an ideal tax system has three features. First, it should distribute the tax burden equitably, with each taxpayer shouldering a “fair share.” Second, the tax system should not change the effi cient alloca- tion of resources by markets. If this happened, such distortions would reduce economic welfare. Th ird, the system should be easy to administer.
Th e tax law is continually evolving so our discussion cannot make you a tax expert. Rather it gives you an understanding of the tax principles important for fi nancial management along with the ability to ask the right questions when consulting a tax expert. Th e Canada Revenue Agency allows students in Canada to claim an education tax credit. Th e credit reduces income tax based on the number of months that a student is enrolled in a qualifying educational program at a des- ignated educational institution.
Individual Tax Rates Individual tax rates in eff ect for federal taxes for 2012 are shown in Table 2.5. Th ese rates apply to income from employment (wages and salary) and from unincorporated businesses. Invest- ment income is also taxable. Interest income is taxed at the same rates as employment income, but special provisions reduce the taxes payable on dividends and capital gains. We discuss these in detail later in the chapter. Table 2.5 also provides information on provincial taxes for selected provinces. Other provinces and territories follow similar approaches, although they use diff erent rates and brackets.
To illustrate, suppose you live in British Columbia and have a taxable income over $75,042. Your tax on the next dollar is:7
32.50% = federal tax rate + provincial tax rate = 22% + 10.50%
Average versus Marginal Tax Rates In making fi nancial decisions, it is frequently important to distinguish between average and mar- ginal tax rates. Your average tax rate is your tax bill divided by your taxable income; in other words, the percentage of your income that goes to pay taxes. Your marginal tax rate is the extra tax you would pay if you earned one more dollar. Th e percentage tax rates shown in Table 2.5 are all marginal rates. To put it another way, the tax rates in Table 2.5 apply to the part of income in the indicated range only, not all income.
Following the equity principle, individual taxes are designed to be progressive with higher incomes taxed at a higher rate. In contrast, with a fl at rate tax, there is only one tax rate, and this rate is the same for all income levels. With such a tax, the marginal tax rate is always the same as the average tax rate. As it stands now, individual taxation in Canada is progressive but approaches a fl at rate for the highest incomes. Alberta has introduced a fl at tax.
7 Actual rates are somewhat higher, as we ignore surtaxes that apply in higher brackets.
Concept Questions
average tax rate Total taxes paid divided by total taxable income.
marginal tax rate Amount of tax payable on the next dollar earned.
CHAPTER 2: Financial Statements, Cash Flow, and Taxes 37
02Ross_Chapter02_FIN.indd 3702Ross_Chapter02_FIN.indd 37 12-12-19 11:3512-12-19 11:35
TABLE 2.5
Individual income tax rates—2012 (current as of December 31, 2011)
Tax Rates Tax Brackets Surtax
Rates Thresholds Federal 15.00% Up to $42,707
22.00 42,708–85,414 26.00 85,415–132,406 29.00 132,407 and over
British Columbia 5.06% Up to $37,013 7.70 37,014–74,028
10.50 74,029–84,993 12.29 84,994–103,205 14.70 103,206 and over
Alberta 10.00% All income Saskatchewan 11.00% Up to $42,065
13.00 42,066–120,185 15.00 120,186 and over
Manitoba 10.80% Up to $31,000 12.75 31,001–67,000 17.40 67,001 and over
Ontario 5.05% Up to $39,020 9.15 39,021–78,043 20% $4,213
11.16 78,044 and over 36 5,392 Quebec 16.00% Up to $40,100
20.00 40,101–80,200 24.00 80,201 and over
New Brunswick 9.10% Up to $38,190 12.10 38,191–76,380 12.40 76,381–124,178 14.30 124,179 and over
Nova Scotia 8.79% Up to $29,590 14.95 29,591-59,180 16.67 59,181-93,000 17.50 93,001–150,000 21.00 150,001 and over
Prince Edward Island
9.80% Up to $31,984 13.80 31,985–63,969 16.70 63,970 and over 10% $12,500
Newfoundland 7.70% Up to $32,893 12.50 32,894–65,785 13.30 65,786 and over
Source: © 2011 KPMG LLP, a Canadian limited liability partnership and a member fi rm of the KPMG network of independent member fi rms affi liated with KPMG International Cooperative (“KPMG International”), a Swiss entity. All rights reserved. Th e information contained herein is of a general nature and is not intended to address the circumstances of any particular individual or entity. Although we endeavour to provide accurate and timely information, there can be no guarantee that such information is accurate as of the date it is received or that it will continue to be accurate in the future. No one should act on such information without appropriate professional advice aft er a thorough examination of the particular situation.
TABLE 2.6
Combined marginal tax rates for individuals in top federal tax bracket (over $132,407)—2012 (current as of December 31, 2011)
Provinces/ Territories
Interest and Regular
Income (%)
Capital Gains (%)
Eligible Dividends
(%)
Non-eligible Dividends
(%)
British Columbia 43.70 21.85 26.11 33.71 Alberta 39.00 19.50 19.29 27.71 Saskatchewan 44.00 22.00 24.81 33.33 Manitoba 46.40 23.20 28.13 39.15 Ontario 46.41 23.21 29.54 32.57 Quebec 48.22 24.11 32.81 36.35 New Brunswick 43.30 21.65 24.33 30.83 Nova Scotia 50.00 25.00 36.06 36.21 Prince Edward Island 47.37 23.69 30.50 41.17 Newfoundland 42.30 21.15 22.47 29.96
Source: © 2011 KPMG LLP, a Canadian limited liability partnership and a member fi rm of the KPMG network of independent member fi rms affi liated with KPMG International Cooperative (“KPMG International”), a Swiss entity. All rights reserved. Th e information contained herein is of a general nature and is not intended to address the circumstances of any particular individual or entity. Although we endeavour to provide accurate and timely information, there can be no guarantee that such information is accurate as of the date it is received or that it will continue to be accurate in the future. No one should act on such information without appropriate professional advice aft er a thorough examination of the particular situation.
38 Part 1: Overview of Corporate Finance
02Ross_Chapter02_FIN.indd 3802Ross_Chapter02_FIN.indd 38 12-12-19 11:3512-12-19 11:35
Normally, the marginal tax rate is relevant for decision making. Any new cash fl ows are taxed at that marginal rate. Since fi nancial decisions usually involve new cash fl ows or changes in exist- ing ones, this rate tells us the marginal eff ect on our tax bill.
Taxes on Investment Income When introducing the topic of taxes, we warned that tax laws are not always logical. Th e treat- ment of dividends in Canada is at least a partial exception because there are two clear goals: First, corporations pay dividends from aft er-tax income so tax laws shelter dividends from full tax in the hands of shareholders. Th is diminishes double taxation, which would violate the principle of equitable taxation. Second, the dividend tax credit applies only to dividends paid by Canad- ian corporations. Th e result is to encourage Canadian investors to invest in Canadian fi rms as opposed to foreign companies.8
With these goals in mind, to see how dividends are taxed, we start with common shares held by individual investors. Table 2.6 shows the combined marginal tax rates for individuals in top federal tax bracket. For example, an individual in top federal tax bracket in Manitoba will pay $232 as taxes on a capital gain of $1,000.
Th e dividends are taxed far more lightly than regular income. Dividend taxation became lighter under recent changes with the stated goal of making dividend-paying stocks more attrac- tive in comparison to income trusts. Th e federal government announced an increase in the gross- up of the federal dividend tax credit to the levels shown in Table 2.6.
Individual Canadian investors also benefi t from a tax reduction for capital gains. Capital gains arise when an investment increases in value above its purchase price. For capital gains, taxes apply at 50 percent of the applicable marginal rate. For example, individuals in Newfoundland in the highest bracket in Table 2.6 would pay taxes on capital gains at a nominal rate of 21.15 percent = 42.30% × 0.50.
Table 2.6 shows that, for an individual in the top bracket, salary and interest are taxed far more heavily than capital gains and dividend income.
In practice, capital gains are lightly taxed because individuals pay taxes on realized capital gains only when stock is sold. Because many individuals hold shares for a long time (have unreal- ized capital gains), the time value of money dramatically reduces the eff ective tax rate on capital gains.9 Also, investors can manage capital gain realization to off set with losses in many cases.
Corporate Taxes Canadian corporations, like individuals, are subject to taxes levied by the federal and provin- cial governments. Corporate taxes are passed on to consumers through higher prices, to workers through lower wages, or to investors through lower returns.
Table 2.7 shows corporate tax rates using Alberta as an example. You can see from the table that small corporations (income less than $400,000) and, to a lesser degree, manufacturing and processing companies, receive a tax break in the form of lower rates.
Comparing the rates in Table 2.7 with the personal tax rates in Table 2.5 appears to reveal a tax advantage for small businesses and professionals that form corporations. Th e tax rate on corporate income of, say, $150,000 is less than the personal tax rate assessed on the income of unincorporated businesses. But this is oversimplifi ed because dividends paid to the owners are also taxed, as we saw earlier.
Taxable Income In Section 2.2 we discussed the statement of comprehensive income for Canadian Enterprises (Table 2.2); it includes both dividends and interest paid. An important diff erence is that interest paid is deducted from EBIT in calculating income but dividends paid are not. Because interest is
8 Evidence that the dividend tax credit causes investors to favour Canadian stocks is provided in L. Booth, “The Divi- dend Tax Credit and Canadian Ownership Objectives,” Canadian Journal of Economics 20 (May 1987). 9 L. Booth and D. J. Johnston, “The Ex-Dividend Day Behavior of Canadian Stock Prices: Tax Changes and Clientele Ef- fects,” Journal of Finance 39 (June 1984). Booth and Johnston find a “very low effective tax rate on capital gains” in the 1970s. They compare their results with a U.S. study that found an effective tax rate on capital gains under 7 percent.
dividend tax credit Tax formula that reduces the effective tax rate on dividends.
capital gains The increase in value of an investment over its purchase price.
realized capital gains The increase in value of an investment, when converted to cash.
CHAPTER 2: Financial Statements, Cash Flow, and Taxes 39
02Ross_Chapter02_FIN.indd 3902Ross_Chapter02_FIN.indd 39 12-12-19 11:3512-12-19 11:35
a tax-deductible expense, debt fi nancing has a tax advantage over fi nancing with common shares. To illustrate, Table 2.2 shows that Canadian Enterprises paid $250 million in taxes on taxable income of $624 million. Th e fi rm’s tax rate is $250/624 = 40%. Th is means that to pay another $1 in dividends, Canadian Enterprises must increase EBIT by $1.67. Of the marginal $1.67 EBIT, 40 percent, or 67 cents, goes in taxes, leaving $1 to increase dividends. In general, a taxable fi rm must earn 1/ (1 - Tax rate) in additional EBIT for each extra dollar of dividends. Because interest is tax deductible, Canadian Enterprises needs to earn only $1 more in EBIT to be able to pay $1 in added interest.
Th e tables are turned when we contrast interest and dividends earned by the fi rm. Interest earned is fully taxable just like any other form of ordinary income. Dividends on common shares received from other Canadian corporations qualify for a 100 percent exemption and are received tax free.10
TABLE 2.7 Corporate tax rates in percentages in 2012 (current as of December 31, 2011)
Federal (%)
Alberta (%)
Combined (%)
Basic corporations 15 10 25 All small corporations with a taxable income less than $400,000 11 3 14
Source: © 2011 KPMG LLP, a Canadian limited liability partnership and a member fi rm of the KPMG network of independent member fi rms affi liated with KPMG International Cooperative (“KPMG International”), a Swiss entity. All rights reserved. Th e information contained herein is of a general nature and is not intended to address the circumstances of any particular individual or entity. Although we endeavour to provide accurate and timely information, there can be no guarantee that such information is accurate as of the date it is received or that it will continue to be accurate in the future. No one should act on such information without appropriate professional advice aft er a thorough examination of the particular situation.
Global Tax Rates Corporate and individual tax rates vary around the world. Corporate rates range from 10 percent in Bulgaria to 40 percent in India. Wealthy individuals in countries such as Canada, France, U.K., Sweden, and other high-taxing nations look for opportunities and tax laws that allow them to move their wealth to countries such as Monaco and Hong Kong where they can enjoy individual tax rates as low as 0 percent.11
How taxable income gains are calculated also varies. For instance, the U.S. tax regime distin- guishes between short-term capital gains (one year or less) taxed at ordinary income rates and long-term capital gains (more than one year), which receive preferential tax rates ranging between 0 and 15 percent depending on one’s marginal tax rate. Canada does not have a tiered capital gains tax system. Unlike the U.S. where long-term capital gains are taxed at lower rates than dividends, individuals in Canada have an incentive to hold dividend-paying stocks as dividends are taxed only marginally more than capital gains.
Capital Gains and Carry-forward and Carry-back When a fi rm disposes of an asset for more than it paid originally, the diff erence is a capital gain. As with individuals, fi rms receive favourable tax treatment on capital gains. At the time of writing, capital gains received by corporations are taxed at 50 percent of the marginal tax rate.
When calculating capital gains for tax purposes, a fi rm nets out all capital losses in the same year. If capital losses exceed capital gains, the net capital loss may be carried back to reduce tax- able capital gains in the three prior years. Under the carry-back feature, a fi rm fi les a revised tax return and receives a refund of prior years’ taxes. For example, suppose Canadian Enterprises
10 The situation is more complicated for preferred stock dividends, as we discuss in Chapter 7. 11 William Perez, “Capital Gains Tax Rates,” Tax Planning: U.S.
loss carry-forward, carry-back Using a year’s capital losses to offset capital gains in past or future years.
40 Part 1: Overview of Corporate Finance
02Ross_Chapter02_FIN.indd 4002Ross_Chapter02_FIN.indd 40 12-12-19 11:3512-12-19 11:35
experienced a net capital loss of $1 million in 2012 and net capital gains of $300,000 in 2011, $200,000 in 2010, and $150,000 in 2009. Canadian could carry back a total of $650,000 to get a refund on its taxes. Th e remaining $350,000 can be carried forward indefi nitely to reduce future taxes on capital gains.
A similar carry-forward provision applies to operating losses. Th e carry-back period is three years and carry-forward is allowed up to seven years.
Income Trust Income and Taxation As stated in Chapter 1, a revised tax regime was introduced for Income Trusts in 2011. Under this regime their tax treatment is like that of corporations, and their investors are treated like shareholders.
Income trust structure has worked well for trusts in stable businesses with strong cash-fl ow- generating abilities; examples are AltaGas Income Fund or Boston Pizza Royalty Fund. As cash fl ows fl uctuate in riskier industries, trusts have had to reduce or suspend distributions. When this happened to Halterm—a trust based on the container port business in Halifax—in 2003, the unit price dropped by 59 percent.
As we explained in Chapter 1, at the end of October 2006, the federal government announced plans to tax income trusts as corporations. Applicable to trusts in existence in October 2006 starting in 2011 and immediately to new trusts, these plans put an end to new trust conver- sions.12 In the meantime, the tax changes to income trusts include increased dividend tax credits (illustrated in Table 2.8) to remove the advantage of income trust distribution. Under the new system, the tax exempt investor (income trusts in this case) will be taxed at the same rate of large corporations.
TABLE 2.8 Taxation of Income Trust Distributions vs. Dividends
Investor
Previous System New System
Income Trust (Income)
Large Corporation (Dividend)
Income Trust (Non-Portfolio
Earnings) Large Corporation
(Dividend)
Taxable Canadian (*) 46% 46% 45.5% 45.5% Canadian tax-exempt 0% 32% 31.5% 31.5% Taxable U.S. investor (**) 15% 42% 41.5% 41.5%
(*) All rates in the table are as of 2011, include both entity- and investor-level tax (as applicable) and refl ect already-announced rate reductions and the additional 0.5% corporate rate reduction described below. Rates for “Taxable Canadian” assume that top personal income tax rates apply and that provincial governments increase their dividend tax credit for dividends of large corporations. (**) Canadian taxes only. U.S. tax will in most cases also apply.
Source: fin.gc.ca/n06/06-061-eng.asp
Market reaction to news of the modifi ed income trust taxation rule illustrates the effi cient market hypothesis (EMH). As will be discussed in Chapter 11, the EMH holds that prices refl ect all available information. On November 1, 2006, the day following the announcement of the new taxes, share prices of Yellow Pages Income Trust, AltaGas Income Fund, and Boston Pizza Royal- ties Income Fund all fell by more than 10 percent. In addition, income trust prices fell by lesser amounts in the days prior to the announcement, suggesting that rumours surrounding the new taxes were leaked at that time.13
12 ScotiaMcLeod, “Federal Government to Implement New Tax Fairness Plan,” November 1, 2006. 13 L. Kryzanowski and Y. Lu, “In Government We Trust: Rise and Fall of Canadian Business Income Trust Conversion,” Managerial Finance 35, pp. 789–802.
CHAPTER 2: Financial Statements, Cash Flow, and Taxes 41
02Ross_Chapter02_FIN.indd 4102Ross_Chapter02_FIN.indd 41 12-12-19 11:3512-12-19 11:35
2.5 Capital Cost Allowance
Capital cost allowance (CCA) is depreciation for tax purposes in Canada. Capital cost allowance is deducted in determining income. Because the tax law refl ects various political compromises, CCA is not the same as depreciation under IFRS so there is no reason calculation of a fi rm’s income under tax rules has to be the same as under IFRS. For example, taxable corporate income may oft en be lower than accounting income because the company is allowed to use accelerated capital cost allowance rules in computing depreciation for tax purposes while using straight-line depreciation for IFRS reporting.14
CCA calculation begins by assigning every capital asset to a particular class. An asset’s class establishes its maximum CCA rate for tax purposes. Intangible assets like leasehold improve- ments in Table 2.9 follow straight-line depreciation for CCA. For all other assets, CCA follows the declining balance method. Th e CCA for each year is computed by multiplying the asset’s book value for tax purposes, called undepreciated capital cost (UCC), by the appropriate rate.
Th e CCA system is unique to Canada and diff ers in many respects from the ACRS depreciation method used in the United States. One key diff erence is that in the Canadian system, the expected salvage value (what we think the asset will be worth when we dispose of it) and the actual expected economic life (how long we expect the asset to be in service) are not explicitly considered in the calculation of capital cost allowance. Some typical CCA classes and their respective CCA rates are described in Table 2.9.
To illustrate how capital cost allowance is calculated, suppose your fi rm is considering buying a van costing $30,000, including any setup costs that must (by law) be capitalized. (No rational, profi table business would capitalize, for tax purposes, anything that could legally be expensed.) Table 2.9 shows that vans fall in Class 10 with a 30 percent CCA rate. To calculate the CCA, we follow CRA’s half-year rule that allows us to fi gure CCA on only half of the asset’s installed cost in the fi rst year it is put in use. Table 2.10 shows the CCA for our van for the fi rst fi ve years.
TABLE 2.9
Common capital cost allowance classes
Class Rate Assets
1 4% Buildings acquired after 1987 8 20 Furniture, photocopiers 10 30 Vans, trucks, tractors, and equipment 13 Straight-line Leasehold improvements 16 40 Taxicabs and rental cars 43 30 Manufacturing equipment
TABLE 2.10
Capital cost allowance for a van
Year Beginning UCC CCA Ending UCC
1 $15,000* $4,500 $10,500 2 25,500† 7,650 17,850 3 17,850 5,355 12,495 4 12,495 3,748 8,747 5 8,747 2,624 6,123
*One-half of $30,000. †Year 1 ending balance 1 + Remaining half of $30,000.
14 Where taxable income is less than accounting income, the difference goes into a long-term liability account on the statement of financial position labelled deferred taxes.
capital cost allowance (CCA) Depreciation for tax purposes, not necessarily the same as depreciation under IFRS.
half-year rule CRA’s requirement to figure CCA on only one-half of an asset’s installed cost for its first year of use.
42 Part 1: Overview of Corporate Finance
02Ross_Chapter02_FIN.indd 4202Ross_Chapter02_FIN.indd 42 12-12-19 11:3512-12-19 11:35
As we pointed out, in calculating CCA under current tax law, the economic life and future market value of the asset are not an issue. As a result, the UCC of an asset can diff er substantially from its actual market value. With our $30,000 van, UCC aft er the fi rst year is $15,000 less the fi rst year’s CCA of $4,500, or $10,500. Th e remaining UCC values are summarized in Table 2.10. Aft er fi ve years, the undepreciated capital cost of the van is $6,123.
Asset Purchases and Sales When an asset is sold, the UCC in its asset class (or pool) is reduced by what is realized on the asset or by its original cost, whichever is less. Th is amount is called the adjusted cost of disposal. Suppose we wanted to sell the van in our earlier example aft er fi ve years. Based on historical averages of resale prices, it will be worth, say, 25 percent of the purchase price or .25 × $30,000 = $7,500. Since the price of $7,500 is less than the original cost, the adjusted cost of disposal is $7,500 and the UCC in Class 10 is reduced by this amount.
Table 2.10 shows that the van has a UCC aft er fi ve years of $6,123. Th e $7,500 removed from the pool is $1,377 more than the undepreciated capital cost of the van we are selling, and future CCA deductions will be reduced as the pool continues. On the other hand, if we had sold the van for, say, $4,000, the UCC in Class 10 would be reduced by $4,000 and the $2,123 excess of UCC over the sale price would remain in the pool. Th en, future CCA increases as the declining balance calculations depreciate the $2,123 excess UCC to infi nity.
EXAMPLE 2.5: Capital Cost Allowance Incentives in Practice
Since capital cost allowance is deducted in computing in- come, larger CCA rates reduce taxes and increase cash flows. As we pointed out earlier, finance ministers some- times tinker with the CCA rates to create incentives. For example, in a federal budget a few years ago, the minister announced an increase in CCA rates from 20 to 30 percent for manufacturing and processing assets. The combined federal/provincial corporate tax rate for this sector is 36.1 percent in Ontario.
Mississauga Manufacturing was planning to acquire new processing equipment to enhance efficiency and its ability to compete with U.S. firms. The equipment had an installed cost of $1 million. How much additional tax will the new
measure save Mississauga in the first year the equipment is put into use?
Under the half-year rule, UCC for the first year is 1/2 × $1 million = $500,000. The CCA deductions under the old and new rates are:
Old rate: CCA = .20 × $500,000 = $100,000 New rate: CCA = .30 × $500,000 = $150,000
Because the firm deducts CCA in figuring taxable in- come, taxable income will be reduced by the incremental CCA of $50,000. With $50,000 less in taxable income, Mis- sissauga Manufacturing’s combined tax bill would drop by $50,000 × .361 = $18,050.
So far we focused on CCA calculations for one asset. In practice, fi rms oft en buy and sell assets from a given class in the course of a year. In this case, we apply the net acquisitions rule. From the total installed cost of all acquisitions, we subtract the adjusted cost of disposal of all assets in the pool. Th e result is net acquisitions for the asset class. If net acquisitions are positive, we apply the half-year rule and calculate CCA as we did earlier. If net acquisitions is negative, there is no adjustment for the half-year rule.
WHEN AN ASSET POOL IS TERMINATED Suppose your firm decides to contract out all transport and to sell all company vehicles. If the company owns no other Class 10 assets, the asset pool in this class is terminated. As before, the adjusted cost of disposal is the net sales proceeds or the total installed cost of all the pool assets, whichever is less. This adjusted cost of disposal is subtracted from the total UCC in the pool. So far, the steps are exactly the same as in our van example where the pool continued. What happens next is different. Unless the adjusted cost of disposal just happens to equal the UCC exactly, a positive or negative UCC balance re- mains and this has tax implications.
A positive UCC balance remains when the adjusted cost of disposal is less than UCC before the sale. In this case, the fi rm has a terminal loss equal to the remaining UCC. Th is loss is deductible from income for the year. For example, if we sell the van aft er two years for $10,000, the UCC of
net acquisitions Total installed cost of capital acquisitions minus adjusted cost of any disposals within an asset pool.
terminal loss The difference between UCC and adjusted cost of disposal when the UCC is greater.
CHAPTER 2: Financial Statements, Cash Flow, and Taxes 43
02Ross_Chapter02_FIN.indd 4302Ross_Chapter02_FIN.indd 43 12-12-19 11:3512-12-19 11:35
$17,850 in Table 2.10 exceeds the market value by $7,850 as Table 2.12 shows. Th e terminal loss of $7,850 gives rise to a tax saving of .40 × $7,850 = $3,140. (We assume the tax rate is 40 percent.)
A negative UCC balance occurs when the adjusted cost of disposal exceeds UCC, in the pool. To illustrate, return to our van example and suppose that this van is the only Class 10 asset our company owns when it sells the pool for $7,500 aft er fi ve years. Th ere is a $1,377 excess of adjusted cost of disposal (7,500 - 6,123) over UCC, so the fi nal UCC credit balance is $1,377.
Th e company must pay tax at its ordinary tax rate on this balance. Th e reason that taxes must be paid is that the diff erence in adjusted cost of disposal and UCC is excess CCA recaptured when the asset is sold. We over depreciated the asset by $7,500 - $6,123 = $1,377. Because we deducted $1,377 too much in CCA, we paid $551 too little in taxes (at 40 percent), and we simply have to make up the diff erence.
EXAMPLE 2.6: CCA Calculations
Staple Supply Ltd. has just purchased a new computerized information system with an installed cost of $160,000. The computer qualifies for a CCA rate of 45 percent. What are the yearly capital cost allowances? Based on historical experience, we think that the system will be worth only $10,000 when we get rid of it in four years. What will be the tax conse- quences of the sale if the company has several other comput- ers still in use in four years? Now suppose that Staple Supply will sell all its assets and wind up the company in four years.
In Table 2.11, at the end of Year 4, the remaining bal- ance for the specific computer system mentioned would be $20,630.15 The pool is reduced by $10,000, but it will con- tinue to be depreciated. There are no tax consequences in Year 4. This is only the case when the pool is active. If this were the only computer system, we would have been clos- ing the pool and would have been able to claim a terminal loss of $20,630 - $10,000 = $10,630.
15
TABLE 2.11
CCA for computer system
Year Beginning UCC CCA Ending UCC
1 $ 80,000* $36,000 $44,000 2 124,000† 55,800 68,200 3 68,200 30,690 37,510 4 37,510 16,880 20,630
*One-half of $160,000. †Year 1 ending balance 1 + Remaining half of $160,000.
Notice that this is not a tax on a capital gain. As a general rule, a capital gain only occurs if the market price exceeds the original cost. To illustrate a capital gain, suppose that instead of buying the van, our fi rm purchased a classic car for $50,000. Aft er fi ve years, the classic car will be sold for $75,000. Th e sale price would exceed the purchase price, so the adjusted cost of disposal is $50,000 and UCC pool is reduced by this amount. Th e total negative balance left in the UCC pool is $50,000 - $6,123 = $43,877 and this is recaptured CCA. In addition, the fi rm has a capital gain of $75,000 - $50,000 = $25,000, the diff erence between the sale price and the original cost.16
TABLE 2.12
UCC and terminal loss
UCC Market value Terminal loss Tax Savings
17,850 10,000 7850 3140
6123 7500 -1377 -551
15 In actuality, the capital cost allowance for the entire pool will be calculated at once, without specific identification of each computer system. 16 This example shows that it is possible to have a recapture of CCA without closing out a pool if the UCC balance goes negative.
recaptured depreciation The taxable difference between adjusted cost of disposal and UCC when UCC is smaller.
44 Part 1: Overview of Corporate Finance
02Ross_Chapter02_FIN.indd 4402Ross_Chapter02_FIN.indd 44 12-12-19 11:3512-12-19 11:35
EXAMPLE 2.7: Capital Loss, CCA Recapture, and Terminal Loss
T-Grill is a manufacturer and distributor of high-end com- mercial barbeques. In 2010, the company purchased $900,000 worth of manufacturing equipment, subject to Class 43 for CCA purposes. Class 43 assets depreciate at an annual rate of 30 percent. In 2012, T-Grill’s CEO decided to sell the existing manufacturing equipment for $500,000 and outsource production to India. As a result, it no longer holds class 43 assets. Does this transaction result in a capital gain, CCA recapture, or terminal loss?
A capital gain occurs when the selling price exceeds the original cost of the asset. In T-Grill’s case, the selling price of $500,000 is below the original cost of $900,000 so there is no capital gain.
CCA recapture occurs when the selling price is greater than the ending UCC. According to Table 2.13, at the end of 2012, T-Grill had an ending UCC of $374,850.
CCA recapture = Lower of selling price and the original cost - Ending UCC = $500,000 - $374,850 = $125,150
T-Grill must pay tax on the $125,150. However, what if due to economic turmoil, T-Grill could
only sell its manufacturing equipment for $300,000. Would it continue to have a CCA recapture, or will it now experi- ence a terminal loss?
CCA terminal loss = $300,000 - $374, 850 = -$74,850.
T-Grill now has a terminal loss of $74,850 and this amount is considered as a tax-deductible expense.
TABLE 2.13
CCA for manufacturing equipment
Year Beginning UCC CCA Ending UCC
2010 $450,000 $135,000 $315,000 2011 765,000 229,500 535,500 2012 535,500 160,650 374,850
1. What is the difference between capital cost allowance and IFRS depreciation?
2. Why do governments sometimes increase CCA rates?
3. Reconsider the CCA increase discussed in Example 2.5. How effective do you think it was in stimulating investment? Why?
2.6 SUMMARY AND CONCLUSIONS
Th is chapter has introduced you to some of the basics of fi nancial statements, cash fl ow, and taxes. Th e Sino-Forest example that was introduced at the start of the chapter shows just how important these issues can be for shareholders. In this chapter, we saw that:
1. The book values on an accounting statement of financial position can be very different from market values. The goal of financial management is to maximize the market value of the stock, not its book value.
2. Net income as it is computed on the statement of comprehensive income is not cash flow. A pri- mary reason is that depreciation, a non-cash expense, is deducted when net income is computed.
3. Marginal and average tax rates can be different; the marginal tax rate is relevant for most fi- nancial decisions.
4. There is a cash flow identity much like the statement of financial position identity. It says that cash flow from assets equals cash flow to bondholders and shareholders. The calculation
Concept Questions
CHAPTER 2: Financial Statements, Cash Flow, and Taxes 45
02Ross_Chapter02_FIN.indd 4502Ross_Chapter02_FIN.indd 45 12-12-19 11:3512-12-19 11:35
of cash flow from financial statements isn’t difficult. Care must be taken in handling non- cash expenses, such as depreciation, and in not confusing operating costs with financial costs. Most of all, it is important not to confuse book values with market values and ac- counting income with cash flow.
5. Different types of Canadian investment income, dividends, interest, and capital gains are taxed differently.
6. Corporate income taxes create a tax advantage for debt financing (paying tax-deductible in- terest) over equity financing (paying dividends). Chapter 15 discusses this in depth.
7. Capital cost allowance (CCA) is depreciation for tax purposes in Canada. CCA calculations are important for determining cash flows.
Key Terms average tax rate (page 37) capital cost allowance (CCA) (page 42) capital gains (page 39) cash flow from assets (page 32) cash flow to creditors (page 34) cash flow to shareholders (page 34) dividend tax credit (page 39) free cash flow (page 34) half-year rule (page 42) loss carry-forward, carry-back (page 40)
marginal tax rate (page 37) net acquisitions (page 43) non-cash items (page 31) operating cash flow (page 32) realized capital gains (page 39) recaptured depreciation (page 44) statement of comprehensive income (page 30) statement of financial position (page 25) terminal loss (page 43)
Chapter Review Problems and Self-Test 2.1 Cash Flow for B.C. Resources Ltd. This problem will give
you some practice working with financial statements and cal- culating cash flow. Based on the following information for B.C. Resources Ltd., prepare an statement of comprehensive income for 2012 and statement of financial positions for 2011and 2012. Next, following our Canadian Enterprises ex- amples in the chapter, calculate cash flow for B.C. Resources, cash flow to bondholders, and cash flow to shareholders for 2012. Use a 40-percent tax rate throughout. You can check your answers in the next section.
2011 2012
Sales $4,203 $4,507 Cost of goods sold 2,422 2,633 Depreciation 785 952 Interest 180 196 Dividends 225 250 Current assets 2,205 2,429 Net fixed assets 7,344 7,650 Current liabilities 1,003 1,255 Long-term debt 3,106 2,085
Answers to Self-Test Problems 2.1 In preparing the statement of financial positions, remember that shareholders’ equity is the residual and can be found using the
equation: Total assets = Total liabilities + Total equity With this in mind, B.C. Resources’ statement of financial positions are as follows:
B.C. RESOURCES LTD. Statement of Financial Position as of December 31, 2011 and 2012
2011 2012 2011 2012
Current assets $ 2,205 $ 2,429 Current liabilities $1,003 $ 1,255 Net fixed assets 7,344 7,650 Long-term debt 3,106 2,085
Equity 5,440 6,739 Total assets $ 9,549 $10,079 Total liabilities and shareholders’ equity $9,549 $ 10,079
The statement of comprehensive income is straightforward:
46 Part 1: Overview of Corporate Finance
02Ross_Chapter02_FIN.indd 4602Ross_Chapter02_FIN.indd 46 12-12-19 11:3512-12-19 11:35
B.C. RESOURCES LTD. 2012 Statement of Comprehensive Income
Sales $ 4,507 Costs of goods sold 2,633 Depreciation 952 Earnings before interest and taxes $ 922 Interest paid 196 Taxable income $ 726 Taxes (40%) 290 Net income $ 436 Dividends $250 Addition to retained earnings 186
Notice that we’ve used a flat 40 percent tax rate. Also notice that retained earnings are just net income less cash dividends. We can now pick up the figures we need to get operating cash flow:
B.C. RESOURCES LTD. 2012 Operating Cash Flow
Earnings before interest and taxes $ 922
+ Depreciation 952
- Taxes 290
Operating cash flow $ 1,584
Next, we get the capital spending for the year by looking at the change in fixed assets, remembering to account for the depreciation:
Ending net fixed assets $ 7,650
- Beginning net fixed assets 7,344
+ Depreciation 952
Net capital spending $ 1,258
After calculating beginning and ending NWC, we take the difference to get the change in NWC:
Ending NWC $ 1,174
- Beginning NWC 1,202
Change in NWC -$ 28
We now combine operating cash flow, net capital spending, and the change in net working capital to get the total cash flow from assets:
B.C. RESOURCES LTD. 2012 Cash Flow from Assets
Operating cash flow $ 1,584
- Net capital spending 1,258
- Change in NWC 28
Cash flow from assets $ 354
To get cash flow to creditors, notice that long-term borrowing decreased by $1,021 during the year and that interest paid was $196: B.C. RESOURCES LTD.
2012 Cash Flow to Creditors
Interest paid $ 196
- Net new borrowing 1,021
Cash flow to creditors $1,217
Finally, dividends paid were $250. To get net new equity, we have to do some extra calculating. Total equity was found by balancing the statement of financial position. During 2012, equity increased by $6,739 - 5,440 = $1,299. Of this increase, $186 was from additions to retained earnings, so $1,113 in new equity was raised during the year. Cash flow to shareholders was thus:
B.C. RESOURCES LTD. 2012 Cash Flow to Shareholders
Dividends paid $ 250
- Net new equity 1,113
Cash flow to shareholders -$ 863
As a check, notice that cash flow from assets, $354, does equal cash flow to creditors plus cash flow to shareholders ($1,217 - 863 = $354).
CHAPTER 2: Financial Statements, Cash Flow, and Taxes 47
02Ross_Chapter02_FIN.indd 4702Ross_Chapter02_FIN.indd 47 12-12-19 11:3512-12-19 11:35
Concepts Review and Critical Thinking Questions 1. Liquidity (LO1) What does liquidity measure? Explain the
trade-off a firm faces between high liquidity and low liquidity levels.
2. Accounting and Cash Flows (LO2) Why might the revenue and cost of figures shown on a standard statement of compre- hensive income not be representative of the actual inflows and outflows that occurred during a period?
3. Book Values versus Market Values (LO1) In preparing a statement of financial position, why do you think standard ac- counting practice focuses on historical cost rather than mar- ket value?
4. Operating Cash Flow (LO3) In comparing accounting net in- come and operating cash flow, name two items you typically find in the net income that are not in operating cash flow. Ex- plain what each is and why it is excluded on operating cash flow.
5. Book Values versus Market Values (LO1) Under standard accounting rules, it is possible for a company’s liabilities to exceed its assets. When this occurs, the owners’ equity is nega- tive. Can this happen with market values? Why or why not?
6. Cash Flow for Assets (LO3) Suppose a company’s cash flow from assets is negative for a particular period. Is this necessar- ily a good sign or a bad sign?
7. Operating Cash Flow (LO3) Suppose a company’s operating cash flow has been negative for several years running. Is this necessarily a good sign or a bad sign?
8. Net Working Capital and Capital Spending (LO3) Could a company’s change in NWC be negative in a given year? Ex- plain how this might come about. What about net capital spending?
9. Cash Flow to Shareholders and Creditors (LO3) Could a company’s cash flow to shareholders be negative in a given year? Explain how this might come about. What about cash flow to creditors?
10. Enterprise Value (LO1) A firm’s enterprise value is equal to the market value of its debt and equity, less the firm’s holdings of cash and cash equivalents. This figure is particularly rele- vant to potential purchasers of the firm. Why?
Questions and Problems 1. Building a Statement of Financial Position (LO1) Oakville Pucks Inc. has current assets of $5,100, net fixed assets of $23,800,
current liabilities of $4,300, and long-term debt of 7,400. What is the value of the shareholders’ equity account for this firm? How much is net working capital?
2. Building an Statement of Comprehensive Income (LO1) Burlington Exterminators Inc. has sales of $586,000, cost of $247,000, depreciation expense of $43,000, interest expense of $32,000, and a tax rate of 35 percent. What is the net income for this firm?
3. Dividends and Retained Earnings (LO1) Suppose the firm in Problem 2 paid out $73,000 in cash dividends. What is the addition to retained earnings?
4. Per-Share Earnings and Dividends (LO1) Suppose the firm in Problem 3 had 85,000 shares of common stock outstanding. What is the earnings per share, or EPS, figure? What is the dividends per share figure?
5. Market Values and Book Values (LO1) Kimbo Widgets Inc. purchased new cloaking machinery three years ago for $7 million. The machinery can be sold to the Rimalons today for $4.9 million. Kimbo’s current statement of financial position shows net fixed assets of $3.7 million, current liabilities of $1.1 million, and net working capital of $380,000. If all the current assets were liquidated today, the company would receive $1.6 million cash. What is the book value of Kimbo’s assets today? What is the market value?
6. Calculating Taxes (LO4) The Grimsby Co. in Alberta had $236,000 in 2012 taxable income. Using the rates from Table 2.7 in the chapter, calculate the company’s 2012 income taxes.
7. Tax rates (LO4) In Problem 6 what is the average tax rate? What is the marginal tax rate? 8. Calculating OCF (LO3) Fergus Inc. has sales of $27,500, costs of $13,280, depreciation expense of $2,300, and interest expense
of $1,105. If the tax rate is 35 percent, what is the operating cash flow, or OCF? 9. Calculating Net Capital Spending (LO3) Yale Driving School’s 2011 statement of financial position showed net fixed assets of
$3.4 million, and the 2012 statement of financial position showed net fixed assets of $4.2 million. The company’s 2012 statement of comprehensive income showed a depreciation expense of $385,000. What was net capital spending in 2012?
10. Calculating Changes in NWC (LO3) The 2011 statement of financial position of Owosso Inc. showed current assets of $2,100 and current liabilities of $1,380. The 2012 statement of financial position showed current assets of $2,250 and current liabilities of $1,710. What was the company’s 2012 change in net working capital or NWC?
11. Cash Flow to Creditors (LO3) The 2011 statement of financial position of Roger’s Tennis Shop Inc. showed long-term debt of $2.6 million, and the 2012 statement of financial position showed long term debt of $2.9 million. The 2012 Statement of Comprehensive Income showed an interest expense of $170,000. What was the firm’s cash flow to creditors during 2012?
12. Cash Flow to Shareholders (LO3) The 2011 statement of financial position of Roger’s Tennis Shop Inc. showed $740,000 in the common stock account and $5.2 million in the additional retained earnings account. The 2012 statement of financial position showed $815,000 and $5.5 million in the same two accounts, respectively. If the company paid out $490,000 in cash dividends during 2012, what was the cash flow to shareholders for the year?
13. Calculating Total Cash Flows (LO3) Given the information for Roger’s Tennis Shop Inc. in Problem 11 and 12, suppose you also know the firm’s net capital spending for 2011 was $940,000, and that the firm reduced its net working capital investment by $85,000. What was the firm’s 2012 operating cash flow, or OCF?
Basic (Questions
1–12)
2
3
4
6
8
Intermediate (Questions
13–24)
48 Part 1: Overview of Corporate Finance
02Ross_Chapter02_FIN.indd 4802Ross_Chapter02_FIN.indd 48 12-12-19 11:3512-12-19 11:35
14. Calculating Total Cash Flows (LO3) Teeswater Corp. shows the following information on its 2012 statement of comprehensive income: sales = $196,000; costs = $104,000; other expenses = $6,800; depreciation expense = $9,100; interest expense = $14,800; taxes = $21,455; dividends = $10,400. In addition, you’re told that the firm issued $5,700 in new equity during 2012 and redeemed $7,300 in outstanding long-term debt.
a. What is the 2012 operating cash flow? b. What is the 2012 cash flow to creditors? c. What is the 2012 cash flow to shareholders? d. If net fixed assets increased by $27,000 during the year, what was the addition to NWC?
15. Using Statement of Comprehensive Income (LO1) Given the following information for Lucan Pizza Co., calculate the depreciation expense: sales = $41,000; costs = $19,500; addition to retained earnings = $5,100; dividends paid = $1,500; interest expense = $4,500; tax rate = 35 percent.
16. Preparing a Statement of Financial Position (LO1) Prepare a 2012 statement of financial position for Listowel Corp. based on the following information: cash = $195,000; patents and copyrights = $780,000; accounts payable = $405,000; accounts receivable = $137,000; tangible net fixed assets = $2,800,000; inventory = $264,000; notes payable = $160,000; accumulated retained earnings = $1,934,000; long-term debt = $1,195,000.
17. Residual Claims (LO1) Pelham Inc. is obligated to pay its creditors $7,300 during the year. a. What is the market value of the shareholder’s equity if assets have a market value of $8,400? b. What if assets equal $6,700?
18. Marginal versus Average Tax Rates (LO4) (Refer to Table 2.7) Corporation Growth has $88,000 in taxable income, and Corporation Income has $8,800,000 in taxable income.
a. What is the tax bill for each? b. Suppose both firms have identified a new project that will increase taxable income by $10,000. How much additional taxes
will each firm pay? Is this amount the same? if not, why? 19. Net Income and OCF (LO2) During 2012, Thorold Umbrella Corp. had sales of $730,000. Cost of goods sold, administrative
and selling expenses, and depreciation expenses were $580,000, $105,000, and $135,000, respectively. In addition, the company had an interest expense of $75,000 and a tax rate of 35 percent. (Ignore any tax loss carry-back or carry-forward provisions.)
a. What is Thorold’s net income for 2012? b. What is its operating cash flow? c. Explain your results in (a) and (b).
20. Accounting Values versus Cash Flows (LO3) In Problem 19, suppose Thorold Umbrella Corp. paid out $25,000 in cash dividends. Is this possible? If spending on net fixed assets and net working capital was zero, and if no new stock was issued during the year, what do you know about the firm’s long-term debt account?
21. Calculating Cash Flows (LO2) Nanticoke Industries had the following operating results for 2012: sales $22,800; cost of goods sold = $16,050; depreciation expense = $4,050; interest expense = $1,830; dividends paid = $1,300. At the beginning of the year, net assets were $13,650, current assets were $4,800, and current liabilities were $2,700. At the end of the year, net fixed assets were $16,800, current assets were $5,930, and current liabilities were $3,150. The tax rate for 2012 was 34 percent.
a. What is net income for 2012? b. What is the operating cash flow for 2012? c. What is the cash flow from assets for 2012? Is this possible? Explain. d. If no new debt was issued during the year, what is the cash flow to creditors? What is the cash flow to shareholders? Ex-
plain and interpret the positive and negative signs of your answers in (a) through (d). 22. Calculating Cash Flows (LO3) Consider the following abbreviated financial statements for Barrie Enterprises:
BARRIE Enterprises 2011 and 2012 Partial Statement of Financial Position
Assets Liabilities and Owner’s Equity
2011 2012 2011 2012 Current Assets $ 653 $ 707 Current liabilities $ 261 $ 293 Net fixed Assets 2,691 3,240 Long-term debt 1,422 1,512
BARRIE Enterprises 2012 Statement of Comprehensive Income
Sales $8,280 Costs 3,861 Depreciation 738 Interest Paid 211
a. What is owner’s equity for 2011 and 2012? b. What is the change in net working capital for 2012?
CHAPTER 2: Financial Statements, Cash Flow, and Taxes 49
02Ross_Chapter02_FIN.indd 4902Ross_Chapter02_FIN.indd 49 12-12-19 11:3512-12-19 11:35
c. In 2012, Barrie Enterprises purchased $1,350 in new fixed assets. How much in fixed assets did Barrie Enterprises sell? What is the cash flow from assets for the year? (The tax rate is 35 percent.)
d. During 2012, Barrie Enterprises raised $270 in new long-term debt. How much long-term debt must Barrie Enterprises have paid off during the year? What is the cash flow to creditors?
23. Income Trust Distributions vs. Corporate Dividends (LO4) The Bancroft Company is currently structured as an income trust. It is considering restructuring the company to become a corporation, but is unsure if this would benefit shareholders. Company executives have asked for your advice. They tell you that the corporate tax rate is 35 percent, last year’s net income before tax was $500,000 and there are 10,000 outstanding shares. If the company decides to restructure into a corporation, one income trust unit will become one share. From your experience doing your own tax returns, you know that dividends are taxed at 23 percent and income and interest income are taxed at 48 percent. Is it worth it for the Bancroft Company to restructure into a corporation? If so, how much more would an investor gain if that investor owned 2000 shares?
24. Net Fixed Assets and Depreciation (LO3) On the statement of financial position, the net fixed assets (NFA) account is equal to the gross fixed assets (FA) account (which records the acquisition cost of fixed assets) minus the accumulated depreciation (AD) account (which records the total depreciation taken by the firm against its fixed assets). Using the fact that NFA = FA - AD, show that the expression given in the chapter for net capital spending, NFAend - NFAbeg + D (where D is the depreciation expense during the year), is equivalent to FAend - FAbeg.
Use the following information for Clarington Inc. for Problems 25 and 26 (assume the tax rate is 34 percent): 2011 2012
Sales $7,233 $8,085 Depreciation 1,038 1,085 Cost of goods sold 2,487 2,942 Other expenses 591 515 Interest 485 579 Cash 3,972 4,041 Accounts receivable 5,021 5,892 Short-term notes payable 732 717 Long-term debt 12,700 15,435 Net fixed assets 31,805 33,291 Accounts payable 3,984 4,025 Inventory 8,927 9,555 Dividends 882 1,011
25. Financial Statements (LO1) Draw up an statement of comprehensive income and statement of financial position for this company for 2011 and 2012.
26. Calculating Cash Flow (LO3) For 2012, calculate the cash flow from assets, cash flow to creditors, and cash flow to shareholders.
27. Taxes on Investment Income (LO4) Linda Milner, an Alberta investor, receives $40,000 in dividends from Okotoks Forest Products shares, $20,000 in interest from a deposit in a chartered bank, and a $20,000 capital gain from Cremona Mines shares. Use the information in Tables 2.5 and 2.6 to calculate the after-tax cash flow from each investment. Ms. Milner’s federal tax rate is 29 percent.
28. Investment Income (LO4) Assuming that Ms. Milner’s cash flows in Problem 27 came from equal investments of $75,000 each, find her after-tax rate of return on each investment.
29. CCA (LO5) Scugog Manufacturing Ltd. just invested in some new processing machinery to take advantage of more favourable CCA rates in a new federal budget. The machinery qualifies for 25 percent CCA rate and has an installed cost of $500,000. Calculate the CCA and UCC for the first five years.
30. UCC (LO5) A piece of newly purchased industrial equipment costs $1,000,000. It is Class 8 property with a CCA rate of 20 percent. Calculate the annual depreciation allowances and end-of-year book values (UCC) for the first five years.
31. CCA and UCC (LO5) Our new computer system cost us $100,000. We will outgrow it in five years. When we sell it, we will probably get only 20 percent of the purchase price. CCA on the computer will be calculated at a 30 percent rate (Class 10). Calculate the CCA and UCC values for five years. What will be the after-tax proceeds from the sale assuming the asset class is continued? Assume a 40 percent tax rate.
32. CCA (LO5) Havelock Industries bought new manufacturing equipment (Class 8) with a CCA rate of 20 percent for $4,125,000 in 2011 and then paid $75,000 for installation it capitalized in Class 8. The firm also invested $4 million in a new brick building (Class 3) with a CCA rate of 5 percent. During 2011 Havelock finished the project and put it in use. Find the total CCA for Havelock for 2011 and 2012.
33. UCC (LO5) Kanata Construction specializes in large projects in Edmonton and Saskatoon. In 2011, Kanata invested $1.5 million in new excavating equipment, which qualifies for a CCA rate of 50 percent. At the same time the firm sold some older equipment on the secondhand market for $145,000. When it was purchased in 2008, the older equipment cost $340,000. Calculate the UCC for the asset pool in each year from 2008 through 2012.
Challenge (Questions
24–36)
2
2
50 Part 1: Overview of Corporate Finance
02Ross_Chapter02_FIN.indd 5002Ross_Chapter02_FIN.indd 50 12-12-19 11:3512-12-19 11:35
34. Income Tax (LO4) A resident of Alberta has taxable income from employment of $170,000. This individual is considering three investments of equal risk and wishes to determine the after-tax income for each:
a. $57,000 worth of bonds with a coupon rate of 5 percent. b. 250 shares of stock that will pay a dividend at the end of the year of $25 per share. c. 500 shares of another stock that is expected to increase in value by $15 per share during the year.
35. Tax Loss Carry-back and Carry-forward (LO4) The Stayner Company experienced an operating loss of $4,100,000 in 2009. Taxable income figures for recent years are given below. Show how the firm can maximize its tax refunds.
2006 2007 2008 2009 2010 2011 2012
Taxable income ($000) $116 $140 $168 ($600) $40 $40 $40
36. UCC (LO5) A proposed cost-saving device has an installed cost of $99,200. It is in Class 43 (30 percent rate) for CCA purposes. It will actually function for five years, at which time it will have no value.
a. Calculate UCC at the end of five years. b. What are the tax implications when the asset is sold?
Nepean Boards is a small company that manufactures and sells snowboards in Ottawa. Scott Redknapp, the founder of the company, is in charge of the design and sale of the snow- boards, but he is not from a business background. As a result, the company’s financial records are not well maintained. The initial investment in Nepean Boards was provided by Scott and his friends and family. Because the initial investment was relatively small, and the company has made snowboards only for its own store, the investors haven’t required detailed financial statements from Scott. But thanks to word of mouth among professional boarders, sales have picked up recently, and Scott is considering a major expansion. His plans include opening another snowboard store in Calgary, as well as sup- plying his “sticks” (boarder lingo for boards) to other sellers. Scott’s expansion plans require a significant investment, which he plans to finance with a combination of additional funds from outsiders plus some money borrowed from the banks. Naturally, the new investors and creditors require more organized and detailed financial statements than Scott previ- ously prepared. At the urging of his investors, Scott has hired financial analyst Jennifer Bradshaw to evaluate the perform- ance of the company over the past year. After rooting through old bank statements, sales receipts, tax returns, and other records, Jennifer has assembled the fol- lowing information:
2011 2012
Cost of goods sold $126,038 $159,143 Cash 18,187 27,478 Depreciation 35,581 40,217 Interest expense 7,735 8,866 Selling and administrative expenses 24,787 32,352 Accounts payable 32,143 36,404 Fixed assets 156,975 191,250 Sales 247,259 301,392 Accounts receivable 12,887 16,717 Notes payable 14,651 15,997 Long-term debt 79,235 91,195 Inventory 27,119 37,216 New equity 0 15,600
Nepean Boards currently pays out 50 percent of net income as dividends to Scott and the other original investors, and has a 20 percent tax rate. You are Jennifer’s assistant, and she has asked you to prepare the following: 1. A statement of comprehensive income for 2011 and 2012. 2. A statement of financial position for 2011 and 2012. 3. Operating cash flow for the year. 4. Cash flow from assets for 2012. 5. Cash flow to creditors for 2012. 6. Cash flow to shareholders for 2012.
Questions
1. How would you describe Nepean Boards’ cash flows for 2012? Write a brief discussion.
2. In light of your discussions in the previous question, what do you think about Scott’s expansion plans?
MINI CASE
CHAPTER 2: Financial Statements, Cash Flow, and Taxes 51
02Ross_Chapter02_FIN.indd 5102Ross_Chapter02_FIN.indd 51 12-12-19 11:3512-12-19 11:35
Internet Application Questions 1. The distinction between capital investment and current expenditure is somewhat arbitrary. Nevertheless, from the tax view-
point, a distinction must be made to calculate depreciation and its associated tax shield. The following link at Canada Revenue Agency provides a set of pointers to distinguish whether an expenditure is considered capital in nature, or whether it is a cur- rent expense.
cra-arc.gc.ca/E/pub/tp/it128r/it128r-e.html Use the guidelines in the link above to classify the following expenses as capital or current: a. Your company buys a fleet of trucks for material delivery b. The local barbershop buys a new chair c. The local barbershop buys a new pair of scissors What assumptions did you need to make to answer the above questions? 2. Capital cost allowance is not the only tax shelter available to Canadian firms. In some cases, notably cultural industries, there
are both federal and provincial tax credits to offset a portion of the production costs involved in content development. The fol- lowing website at Canada Revenue Agency describes the Film or Video Production Tax Credit (FTC), which is available to qualified producers.
cra-arc.gc.ca/tx/nnrsdnts/flm/ftc-cip/menu-eng.html For a company with $1 million in production costs, what is the size of the federal FTC? 3. The Canadian Institute of Chartered Accountants (cica.ca/index.aspx) provides standards and guidance for new issues, and
solicits comments for new policies. Click on What’s New and pick one item from Guidance and one item from Comments. Summarize the new guidelines and critique the comments article. Note that items on this site change from time to time.
4. The home page for Air Canada can be found at aircanada.ca. Locate the most recent annual report, which contains a statement of financial position for the company. What is the book value of equity for Air Canada? The market value of a company is the number of shares of stock outstanding times the price per share. This information can be found at ca.finance.yahoo.com using the ticker symbol for Air Canada (AC). What is the market value of equity? Which number is more relevant for shareholders?
52 Part 1: Overview of Corporate Finance
02Ross_Chapter02_FIN.indd 5202Ross_Chapter02_FIN.indd 52 12-12-19 11:3512-12-19 11:35
In Chapter 2, we discussed some of the essential concepts of fi nancial statements and cash fl ows. Part 2, this chapter and the next, continues where our earlier discussion left off . Our goal here is to expand your understanding of the uses (and abuses) of fi nancial statement information.
Financial statement information crops up in various places in the remainder of our book. Part 2 is not essential for understanding this material, but it helps give you an overall perspective on the role of fi nancial statement information in corporate fi nance.
A good working knowledge of fi nancial statements is desirable simply because such state- ments, and numbers derived from those statements, are the primary means of communicating fi nancial information both within the fi rm and outside the fi rm. In short, much of the language of corporate fi nance is rooted in the ideas we discuss in this chapter.
Furthermore, as we shall see, there are many diff erent ways of using fi nancial statement infor- mation and many diff erent types of users. Th is diversity refl ects the fact that fi nancial statement information plays an important part in many types of decisions.
In the best of all worlds, the fi nancial manager has full market value information about all the fi rm’s assets. Th is rarely (if ever) happens. So the reason we rely on accounting fi gures for much of our fi nancial information is that we almost always cannot obtain all (or even part) of the market
WORKING WITH FINANCIAL STATEMENTS
C H A P T E R 3
O n November 17, 2011, common shares of Canadian energy company, Suncor Energy Inc., traded at $33.15 on the Toronto Stock
Exchange (TSX). At that price, Bloomberg reported
that the company had a price–earnings (P/E) ratio of
11.30. In other words, investors were willing to pay
$11.30 for every dollar of income earned by Suncor
Energy. At the same time, investors were willing to
pay $18.01 for every dollar earned by TransCanada
Corporation. At the other extreme was RIM, which,
at that time, had a P/E ratio of 3.32. However, the
company was still trading at $19.25. At that time,
the typical stock on the S&P/TSX Composite Index
was trading at a P/E of 15.23, or roughly 15 times
earnings, as they say on Bay Street.
Price–earnings comparisons are examples of
financial ratios. As we will see in this chapter, there
is a wide variety of financial ratios, all designed to
summarize specific aspects of a firm’s financial posi-
tion. In addition to discussing how to analyze finan-
cial statements and compute financial ratios, we will
have quite a bit to say about who uses this informa-
tion and why.
Learning Object ives
After studying this chapter, you should understand:
LO1 The sources and uses of a firm’s cash flows.
LO2 How to standardize financial statements for comparison purposes.
LO3 How to compute and, more importantly, interpret some common ratios.
LO4 The determinants of a firm’s profitability.
LO5 Some of the problems and pitfalls in financial statement analysis.
P A R T 2
C ou
rt es
y of
Su
nc or
E ne
rg y
03Ross_Chapter03_4th.indd 5303Ross_Chapter03_4th.indd 53 12-11-27 12:0212-11-27 12:02
information that we want. Th e only meaningful benchmark for evaluating business decisions is whether or not they create economic value (see Chapter 1). However, in many important situ- ations, it is not possible to make this judgement directly because we can’t see the market value eff ects of decisions.
We recognize that accounting numbers are oft en just pale refl ections of economic reality, but they frequently are the best available information. For privately held corporations, not-for-profi t businesses, and smaller fi rms, for example, very little direct market value information exists. Th e accountant’s reporting function is crucial in these circumstances.
Clearly, one important goal of the accountant is to report fi nancial information to the user in a form useful for decision making. Ironically, the information frequently does not come to the user in such a form. In other words, fi nancial statements don’t come with a user’s guide. Th is chapter and the next are fi rst steps in fi lling this gap.
3.1 Cash Flow and Financial Statements: A Closer Look
At the most fundamental level, fi rms do two diff erent things: Th ey generate cash and they spend it. Cash is generated by selling a product, an asset, or a security. Selling a security involves either borrowing or selling an equity interest (i.e., shares of stock) in the fi rm. Cash is spent by paying for materials and labour to produce a product and by purchasing assets. Payments to creditors and owners also require spending cash.
In Chapter 2, we saw that the cash activities of a fi rm could be summarized by a simple identity:
Cash flow from assets = Cash flow to creditors + Cash flow to owners
Th is cash fl ow identity summarizes the total cash result of all the transactions the fi rm engaged in during the year. In this section, we return to the subject of cash fl ows by taking a closer look at the cash events during the year that lead to these total fi gures.
Sources and Uses of Cash Th ose activities that bring in cash are called sources of cash. Th ose activities that involve spend- ing cash are called uses of cash (or applications of cash). What we need to do is to trace the changes in the fi rm’s statement of fi nancial position to see how the fi rm obtained its cash and how the fi rm spent its cash during some time period.
To get started, consider the statement of fi nancial position for the Prufrock Corporation in Table 3.1. Notice that we have calculated the changes in each of the items on the statement of fi nancial position over the year from the end of 2011 to the end of 2012.
Looking over the statement of fi nancial position for Prufrock, we see that quite a few things changed during the year. For example, Prufrock increased its net fi xed assets by $149,000 and its inventory by $29,000. Where did the money come from? To answer this and related questions, we must identify those changes that used up cash (uses) and those that brought cash in (sources). A little common sense is useful here. A fi rm uses cash by either buying assets or making payments. So, loosely speaking, an increase in an asset account means the fi rm bought some net assets, a use of cash. If an asset account went down, then, on a net basis, the fi rm sold some assets. Th is would be a net source. Similarly, if a liability account goes down, then the fi rm has made a net payment, a use of cash.
Given this reasoning, there is a simple, albeit mechanical, defi nition that you may fi nd use- ful. An increase in a left -hand side (asset) account or a decrease in a right-hand side (liability or equity) account is a use of cash. Likewise, a decrease in an asset account or an increase in a liability (or equity) account is a source of cash.
Looking back at Prufrock, we see that inventory rose by $29. Th is is a net use since Prufrock eff ectively paid out $29 to increase inventories. Accounts payable rose by $32. Th is is a source of cash since Prufrock eff ectively has borrowed an additional $32 by the end of the year. Notes payable, on the other hand, went down by $35, so Prufrock eff ectively paid off $35 worth of short- term debt—a use of cash.
sources of cash A firm’s activities that generate cash.
uses of cash A firm’s activities in which cash is spent.
54 Part 2: Financial Statements and Long-Term Financial Planning
03Ross_Chapter03_4th.indd 5403Ross_Chapter03_4th.indd 54 12-11-27 12:0212-11-27 12:02
TABLE 3.1
PRUFROCK CORPORATION Statement of Financial Position as of December 31, 2011 and 2012
($ thousands)
2011 2012 Change
Assets Current assets
Cash $ 84 $ 98 +$ 14 Accounts receivable 165 188 + 23 Inventory 393 422 + 29 Total $ 642 $ 708 +$ 66 Fixed assets Net plant and equipment 2,731 2,880 + 149 Total assets $ 3,373 $ 3,588 +$ 215
Liabilities and Owners’ Equity Current liabilities Accounts payable $ 312 $ 344 +$ 32 Notes payable 231 196 - 35 Total $ 543 $ 540 -$ 3 Long-term debt $ 531 $ 457 -$ 74 Owners’ equity Common stock 500 550 + 50 Retained earnings 1,799 2,041 + 242 Total $ 2,299 $ 2,591 +$ 292 Total liabilities and owners’ equity $ 3,373 $ 3,588 +$ 215
Based on our discussion, we can summarize the sources and uses from the statement of fi nancial position as follows:
Sources of cash: Increase in accounts payable $ 32 Increase in common stock 50 Increase in retained earnings 242 Total sources $ 324 Uses of cash: Increase in accounts receivable $ 23 Increase in inventory 29 Decrease in notes payable 35 Decrease in long-term debt 74 Net fixed asset acquisitions 149 Total uses $ 310 Net addition to cash $ 14
Th e net addition to cash is just the diff erence between sources and uses, and our $14 result here agrees with the $14 change shown on the statement of fi nancial position.
Th is simple statement tells us much of what happened during the year, but it doesn’t tell the whole story. For example, the increase in retained earnings is net income (a source of funds) less dividends (a use of funds). It would be more enlightening to have these reported separately so we could see the breakdown. Also, we have only considered net fi xed asset acquisitions. Total or gross spending would be more interesting to know.
To further trace the fl ow of cash through the fi rm during the year, we need an income state- ment. For Prufrock, the results are shown in Table 3.2. Because we are looking at cash fl ow during calendar year 2012, we focus on the 2012 statement of comprehensive income.
CHAPTER 3: Working with Financial Statements 55
03Ross_Chapter03_4th.indd 5503Ross_Chapter03_4th.indd 55 12-11-27 12:0212-11-27 12:02
TABLE 3.2
PRUFROCK CORPORATION Statement of Comprehensive Income
($ thousands)
2012
Sales $ 2,311 Cost of goods sold 1,344 Depreciation 276 Earnings before interest and taxes $ 691 Interest paid 141 Taxable income $ 550 Taxes 187 Net income $ 363 Addition to retained earnings $ 242 Dividends 121
Notice here that the $242 addition to retained earnings we calculated from the statement of fi nancial position is just the diff erence between the 2012 net income of $363 and that year’s dividend of $121.
The Statement of Cash Flows Th ere is some fl exibility in summarizing the sources and uses of cash in the form of a fi nancial statement. However, when it is presented, the result is called the statement of cash fl ows.
We present a particular format in Table 3.3 for this statement. Th e basic idea is to group all the changes into one of three categories: operating activities, fi nancing activities, and investment activities. Th e exact form diff ers in detail from one preparer to the next.
TABLE 3.3
PRUFROCK CORPORATION 2012 Statement of Cash Flows
Operating activities Net income $ 363 Plus: Depreciation 276 Increase in accounts payable 32 Less: Increase in accounts receivable -23 Increase in inventory -29 Net cash from operating activity $ 619 Investment activities: Fixed asset acquisitions -$ 425 Net cash from investment activity -$ 425 Financing activities: Decrease in notes payable -$ 35 Decrease in long-term debt -74 Dividends paid -121 Increase in common stock 50 Net cash from financing activity -$ 180 Net increase in cash $ 14
statement of cash flows A firm’s financial statement that summarizes its sources and uses of cash over a specified period.
56 Part 2: Financial Statements and Long-Term Financial Planning
03Ross_Chapter03_4th.indd 5603Ross_Chapter03_4th.indd 56 12-11-27 12:0212-11-27 12:02
Don’t be surprised if you come across diff erent arrangements. Th e types of information pre- sented may be very similar, but the exact order can diff er. Th e key thing to remember is that we started out with $84 in cash and ended up with $98, for a net increase of $14. We’re just trying to see what events led to this change.
Going back to Chapter 2, there is a slight conceptual problem here. Interest paid should really go under fi nancing activities, but, unfortunately, that’s not the way the accounting is handled. Th e reason, you may recall, is that interest is deducted as an expense when net income is computed. Also, notice that our net purchase of fi xed assets was $149. Since we wrote off $276 worth (the depreciation), we must have actually spent a total of $149 + 276 = $425 on fi xed assets.
Once we have this statement, it might seem appropriate to express the change in cash on a per-share basis, much as we did for net income. Although standard accounting practice does not report this information, it is oft en calculated by fi nancial analysts. Th e reason is that accoun- tants believe that cash fl ow (or some component of cash fl ow) is not an alternative to accounting income, so only earnings per share are to be reported.
Now that we have the various cash pieces in place, we can get a good idea of what happened during the year. Prufrock’s major cash outlays were fi xed asset acquisitions and cash dividends. Th e fi rm paid for these activities primarily with cash generated from operations.
Prufrock also retired some long-term debt and increased current assets. Finally, current liabil- ities were virtually unchanged, and a relatively small amount of new equity was sold. Altogether, this short sketch captures Prufrock’s major sources and uses of cash for the year.
1. What is a source of cash? Give three examples.
2. What is a use or application of cash? Give three examples.
3.2 Standardized Financial Statements
Th e next thing we might want to do with Prufrock’s fi nancial statements is to compare them to those of other, similar companies. We would immediately have a problem, however. It’s almost impossible to directly compare the fi nancial statements for two companies because of diff erences in size. In Canada, this problem is compounded because some companies are one of a kind. BCE is an example. Further, large Canadian companies usually span two, three, or more industries, making comparisons extremely diffi cult.
To start making comparisons, one obvious thing we might try to do is to somehow standardize the fi nancial statements. One very common and useful way of doing this is to work with per- centages instead of total dollars. In this section, we describe two diff erent ways of standardizing fi nancial statements along these lines.
Common-Size Statements To get started, a useful way of standardizing fi nancial statements is to express the statement of fi nancial position as a percentage of total assets and to express the statement of comprehensive income as a percentage of sales. Such a fi nancial statement is called a common-size statement. We consider these statements next.
COMMON-SIZE STATEMENT OF FINANCIAL POSITION One way, but not the only way, to construct a common-size statement of financial position is to express each item as a percentage of total assets. Prufrock’s 2011 and 2012 common-size statement of financial posi- tion are shown in Table 3.4.
Notice that some of the totals don’t check exactly because of rounding errors. Also, notice that the total change has to be zero, since the beginning and ending numbers must add up to 100 percent.
Concept Questions
common-size statement A standardized financial statement presenting all items in percentage terms. Statement of financial position is shown as a percentage of assets and income statements as a percentage of sales.
CHAPTER 3: Working with Financial Statements 57
03Ross_Chapter03_4th.indd 5703Ross_Chapter03_4th.indd 57 12-11-27 12:0212-11-27 12:02
TABLE 3.4
PRUFROCK CORPORATION Common-Size Statement of Financial Position
December 31, 2011 and 2012
2011 2012 Change
Assets Current Assets Cash 2.5% 2.7% +0.2% Accounts receivable 4.9 5.2 +0.3 Inventory 11.7 11.8 +0.1 Total 19.0 19.7 +0.7 Fixed assets Net plant and equipment 81.0 80.3 -0.7 Total assets 100.0% 100.0% 0.0%
Liabilities and Owners’ Equity Current liabilities Accounts payable 9.2% 9.6% +0.4% Notes payable 6.8 5.5 -1.3 Total 16.1 15.1 -1.0 Long-term debt 15.7 12.7 -3.0 Owners’ equity Common stock 14.8 15.3 +0.5 Retained earnings 53.3 56.9 +3.6 Total 68.2 72.2 +4.0 Total liabilities and owners’ equity 100.0% 100.0% 0.0%
In this form, fi nancial statements are relatively easy to read and compare. For example, just looking at the two statement of fi nancial position for Prufrock, we see that current assets were 19.7 percent of total assets in 2012, up from 19 percent in 2011. Current liabilities declined from 16.1 percent to 15.1 percent of total liabilities and owners’ equity over that same time. Similarly, total equities rose from 68.2 percent of total liabilities and owners’ equity to 72.2 percent.
Overall, Prufrock’s liquidity, as measured by current assets compared to current liabilities, increased over the year. Simultaneously, Prufrock’s indebtedness diminished as a percentage of total assets. We might be tempted to conclude that the statement of fi nancial position has grown stronger. We say more about this later.
COMMON-SIZE INCOME STATEMENTS A useful way of standardizing statements of comprehensive income is to express each item as a percentage of total sales, as illustrated for Prufrock in Table 3.5.
Common-size statements of comprehensive income tell us what happens to each dollar in sales. For Prufrock in 2012 for example, interest expense eats up $.061 out of every sales dollar and taxes take another $.081. When all is said and done, $.157 of each dollar fl ows through to the bottom line (net income), and that amount is split into $.105 retained in the business and $.052 paid out in dividends.
Th ese percentages are very useful in comparisons. For example, a very relevant fi gure is the cost of goods sold percentage. For Prufrock, $.582 of each $1 in sales goes to pay for goods sold in 2012 as compared to $.624 in 2011. Th e reduction likely signals improved cost controls in 2012. To pursue this point, it would be interesting to compute the same percentage for Prufrock’s main competitors to see how Prufrock’s improved cost control in 2012 stacks up.
COMMON-SIZE STATEMENTS OF CASH FLOW Although we have not pre- sented it here, it is also possible and useful to prepare a common-size statement of cash flows. Unfortunately, with the current statement of cash flows, there is no obvious denominator such as total assets or total sales. However, when the information is arranged similarly to Table 3.5, each
58 Part 2: Financial Statements and Long-Term Financial Planning
03Ross_Chapter03_4th.indd 5803Ross_Chapter03_4th.indd 58 12-11-27 12:0212-11-27 12:02
item can be expressed as a percentage of total sources or total uses. The results can then be inter- preted as the percentage of total sources of cash supplied or as the percentage of total uses of cash for a particular item.
TABLE 3.5
PRUFROCK CORPORATION Common-Size Statement of Comprehensive Income
2011 2012
Sales 100.0% 100.0% Cost of goods sold 62.4 58.2 Depreciation 12.0 11.9 Earnings before interest and taxes 25.6 29.9 Interest paid 6.2 6.1 Taxable income 19.4 23.8 Taxes 7.8 8.1 Net income 11.6% 15.7% Addition to retained earnings 5.8% 10.5% Dividends 5.8% 5.2%
Common-Base-Year Financial Statements: Trend Analysis Imagine that we were given statement of fi nancial position for the last 10 years for some company and we were trying to investigate trends in the fi rm’s pattern of operations. Does the fi rm use more or less debt? Has the fi rm grown more or less liquid? A useful way of standardizing fi nancial statements is to choose a base year and then express each item relative to the base amount. We call such a statement a common-base-year statement.
For example, Prufrock’s inventory rose from $393 to $422. If we pick 2011 as our base year, then we would set inventory equal to 1 for that year. For the next year, we would calculate inventory rela- tive to the base year as $422/$393 = 1.07. We could say that inventory grew by about 7 percent dur- ing the year. If we had multiple years, we would just divide each one by $393. Th e resulting series is very easy to plot, and it is then very easy to compare two or more diff erent companies. Table 3.6 summarizes these calculations for the asset side of the statement of fi nancial position.
COMBINED COMMON-SIZE AND BASE-YEAR ANALYSIS The trend analysis we have been discussing can be combined with the common-size analysis discussed earlier. The reason for doing this is that as total assets grow, most of the other accounts must grow as well. By first forming the common-size statements, we eliminate the effect of this overall growth.
For example, Prufrock’s accounts receivable were $165, or 4.9 percent of total assets in 2011. In 2012, they had risen to $188, which is 5.2 percent of total assets. If we do our trend analysis in terms of dollars, the 2012 fi gure would be $188/$165 = 1.14, a 14 percent increase in receivables. How- ever, if we work with the common-size statements, the 2012 fi gure would be 5.2%/4.9% = 1.06. Th is tells us that accounts receivable, as a percentage of total assets, grew by 6 percent. Roughly speaking, what we see is that of the 14 percent total increase, about 8 percent (14% - 6%) is attrib- utable simply to growth in total assets. Table 3.6 summarizes this discussion for Prufrock’s assets.
1. Why is it often necessary to standardize financial statements?
2. Name two types of standardized statements and describe how each is formed.
common-base-year statement A standardized financial statement presenting all items relative to a certain base year amount.
Concept Questions
CHAPTER 3: Working with Financial Statements 59
03Ross_Chapter03_4th.indd 5903Ross_Chapter03_4th.indd 59 12-11-27 12:0212-11-27 12:02
TABLE 3.6
PRUFROCK CORPORATION Summary of Standardized Statement of Financial Position (Asset side only)
($ thousands)
Assets Common-Size Common Base-Year
Combined Common- Size and Base-Year
2011 2012 2011 2012 2011 2012
Current Assets Cash $ 84 $ 98 2.5% 2.7% 1.17 1.08 Accounts receivable 165 188 4.9 5.2 1.14 1.06 Inventory 393 422 11.7 11.8 1.07 1.01 Total current assets $ 642 $ 708 19.0 19.7 1.10 1.04 Fixed assets Net plant and equipment 2,731 2,880 81.0 80.3 1.05 0.99 Total assets $ 3,373 $ 3,588 100.0% 100.0% 1.06 1.00
Th e common-size numbers are calculated by dividing each item by total assets for that year. For example, the 2011 common-size cash amount is $84/$3,373 = 2.5%. Th e common–base-year numbers are calculated by dividing each 2012 item by the base-year dollar (2011) amount. Th e common- base cash is thus $98/$84 = 1.17, representing a 17 percent increase. Th e combined common-size and base-year fi gures are calculated by dividing each common-size amount by the base-year (2011) common-size amount. Th e cash fi gure is therefore 2.7%/2.5% = 1.08, representing an 8 percent increase in cash holdings as a percentage of total assets.
3.3 Ratio Analysis
Another way of avoiding the problem of comparing companies of diff erent sizes is to calculate and compare fi nancial ratios. Such ratios are ways of comparing and investigating the relation- ships between diff erent pieces of fi nancial information. Using ratios eliminates the size problem since the size eff ectively divides out. We’re then left with percentages, multiples, or time periods.
Th ere is a problem in discussing fi nancial ratios. Since a ratio is simply one number divided by another, and since there is a substantial quantity of accounting numbers out there, there are a huge number of possible ratios we could examine. Everybody has a favourite, so we’ve restricted ourselves to a representative sampling. We chose the sample to be consistent with the practice of experienced fi nancial analysts. Another way to see which ratios are used most oft en in practice is to look at the output of commercially available soft ware that generates ratios.
Once you have gained experience in ratio analysis, you will fi nd that 20 ratios do not tell you twice as much as 10. You are looking for problem areas, not an exhaustive list of ratios, so you don’t have to worry about including every possible ratio.
What you do need to worry about is the fact that diff erent people and diff erent sources fre- quently don’t compute these ratios in exactly the same way, and this leads to much confusion. Th e specifi c defi nitions we use here may or may not be the same as ones you have seen or will see elsewhere.1 When you are using ratios as a tool for analysis, you should be careful to document how you calculate each one.
We defer much of our discussion of how ratios are used and some problems that come up with using them to the next section. For now, for each of the ratios we discuss, several questions come to mind:
1. How is it computed? 2. What is it intended to measure, and why might we be interested? 3. What might a high or low value be telling us? How might such values be misleading? 4. How could this measure be improved?
Financial ratios are traditionally grouped into the following categories:
1 For example, we compute ratios using year-end statement of financial position values in the denominators, while many other sources use average ending values from last year and the current year.
financial ratios Relationships determined from a firm’s financial information and used for comparison purposes.
60 Part 2: Financial Statements and Long-Term Financial Planning
03Ross_Chapter03_4th.indd 6003Ross_Chapter03_4th.indd 60 12-11-27 12:0212-11-27 12:02
1. Short-term solvency or liquidity ratios. 2. Long-term solvency or financial leverage ratios. 3. Asset management or turnover ratios. 4. Profitability ratios. 5. Market value ratios.
We consider each of these in turn. To illustrate ratio calculations for Prufrock, we use the ending statement of fi nancial position (2012) fi gures unless we explicitly say otherwise. Aft er calculating the 2012 ratios, we illustrate the inferences you can make from them by making two comparisons for each ratio. Th e comparisons draw on numbers in Table 3.7 that summarize each ratio’s 2012 value and also present corresponding values for Prufrock in 2011 and for the industry average.2
Short-Term Solvency or Liquidity Measures As the name suggests, short-term solvency ratios as a group are intended to provide information about a fi rm’s liquidity, and these ratios are sometimes called liquidity measures. Th e primary concern is the fi rm’s ability to pay its bills over the short run without undue stress. Consequently, these ratios focus on current assets and current liabilities.
For obvious reasons, liquidity ratios are particularly interesting to short-term creditors. Since fi nancial managers are constantly working with banks and other short-term lenders, an under- standing of these ratios is essential.
One advantage of looking at current assets and liabilities is that their book values and market values are likely to be similar. Oft en (but not always), these assets and liabilities just don’t live long enough for the two to get seriously out of step. Th is is true for a going concern that has no problems in selling inventory (turning it into receivables) and then collecting the receivables, all at book values. Even in a going concern, all inventory may not be liquid, since some may be held permanently as a buff er against unforeseen delays.
On the other hand, like any type of near-cash, current assets and liabilities can and do change fairly rapidly, so today’s amounts may not be a reliable guide to the future. For example, when a fi rm experiences fi nancial distress and undergoes a loan workout or liquidation, obsolete inven- tory and overdue receivables oft en have market values well below their book values.
CURRENT RATIO One of the best known and most widely used ratios is the current ratio. As you might guess, the current ratio is defined as:
Current ratio = Current assets/Current liabilities [3.1]
For Prufrock, the 2012 current ratio is:
Current ratio = $708/540 = 1.31
Because current assets and liabilities are, in principle, converted to cash over the following 12 months, the current ratio is a measure of short-term liquidity. Th e unit of measurement is either dollars or times. So, we could say that Prufrock has $1.31 in current assets for every $1 in current liabilities, or we could say that Prufrock has its current liabilities covered 1.31 times over. To a creditor, particularly a short-term creditor such as a supplier, the higher the current ratio, the better. To the fi rm, a high current ratio indicates liquidity, but it also may indicate an ineffi cient use of cash and other short-term assets. Absent some extraordinary circumstances, we would expect to see a current ratio of at least 1, because a current ratio of less than 1 would mean that net working capital (current assets less current liabilities) is negative. Th is would be unusual in a healthy fi rm, at least for most types of business. Some analysts use a rule of thumb that the current ratio should be at least 2.0 but this can be misleading for many industries.
Applying this to Prufrock, we see from Table 3.7 that the current ratio of 1.31 for 2012 is higher than the 1.18 recorded for 2011 and slightly above the industry average. For this reason, the ana- lyst has recorded an OK rating for this ratio.
2 In this case the industry average figures are hypothetical. We will discuss industry average ratios in some detail later.
CHAPTER 3: Working with Financial Statements 61
03Ross_Chapter03_4th.indd 6103Ross_Chapter03_4th.indd 61 12-11-27 12:0212-11-27 12:02
TABLE 3.7 Selected financial ratios for Prufrock
Short-Term Solvency (Liquidity) 2011 2012 Industry Rating
Current ratio 1.18 1.31 1.25 OK Quick ratio 0.46 0.53 0.60 — Cash ratio 0.15 0.18 0.20 OK Net working capital to Total assets 2.9% 4.7% 5.2% OK Interval measure (days) 182 192 202 OK
Turnover Inventory turnover 3.3 3.2 4.0 — Days’ sales in inventory 111 114 91 — Receivables turnover 12.5 12.3 11.5 OK Days’ sales in receivables 29 30 32 OK NWC turnover 20.9 13.8 14.6 — Fixed asset turnover 0.76 0.80 0.90 OK Total asset turnover 0.61 0.64 0.71 OK
Financial Leverage Total debt ratio 0.32 0.28 0.42 ++ Debt/equity 0.47 0.39 0.72 ++ Equity multiplier 1.47 1.39 1.72 + Long-term debt ratio 0.16 0.15 0.16 + Times interest earned 4.2 4.9 2.8 ++ Cash coverage ratio 6.2 6.9 4.2 ++
Profitability Profit margin 11.6% 15.7% 10.7% ++ Return on assets (ROA) 7.1% 10.1% 7.6% + Return on equity (ROE) 10.5% 14.0% 13.1% +
Market Value Ratios Price-earnings ratio (P/E) 12.0 14.27 12.0 + Market-to-book ratio 2.4 2.0 1.92 + EV/EBITDA 6.5 5.93 5.5 +
Comments: Company shows strength relative to industry in avoiding increased leverage. Profi tability is above average. Company carries more inventory than the industry average, causing weakness in related ratios. Market value ratios are strong.
EXAMPLE 3.1: Current Events
Suppose a firm were to pay off some of its suppliers and short-term creditors. What would happen to the current ra- tio? Suppose a firm buys some inventory for cash. What happens in this case? What happens if a firm sells some merchandise?
The first case is a trick question. What happens is that the current ratio moves away from 1. If it is greater than 1 (the usual case), it gets bigger; but if it is less than 1, it gets smaller. To see this, suppose the firm has $4 in current as- sets and $2 in current liabilities for a current ratio of 2. If we use $1 in cash to reduce current liabilities, then the new current ratio is ($4 - $1)/($2 - $1) = 3. If we reverse this
to $2 in current assets and $4 in current liabilities, the cur- rent ratio would fall to 1/3 from 1/2.
The second case is not quite as tricky. Nothing happens to the current ratio because cash goes down while inven- tory goes up—total current assets are unaffected.
In the third case, the current ratio would usually rise be- cause inventory is normally shown at cost and the sale would normally be at something greater than cost (the dif- ference is the mark-up). The increase in either cash or re- ceivables is therefore greater than the decrease in inventory. This increases current assets, and the current ratio rises.
62 Part 2: Financial Statements and Long-Term Financial Planning
03Ross_Chapter03_4th.indd 6203Ross_Chapter03_4th.indd 62 12-11-27 12:0212-11-27 12:02
In general, the current ratio, like any ratio, is aff ected by various types of transactions. For example, suppose the fi rm borrows long term to raise money. Th e short-run eff ect would be an increase in cash from the issue proceeds and an increase in long-term debt. Current liabilities would not be aff ected, so the current ratio would rise.
Finally, note that an apparently low current ratio may not be a bad sign for a company with a large reserve of untapped borrowing power.
THE QUICK (OR ACID-TEST) RATIO Inventory is often the least liquid current as- set. It’s also the one for which the book values are least reliable as measures of market value, since the quality of the inventory isn’t considered. Some of it may be damaged, obsolete, or lost.
More to the point, relatively large inventories are oft en a sign of short-term trouble. Th e fi rm may have overestimated sales and overbought or overproduced as a result. In this case, the fi rm may have a substantial portion of its liquidity tied up in slow-moving inventory.
To further evaluate liquidity, the quick or acid-test ratio is computed just like the current ratio, except inventory is omitted:
Quick ratio = Current assets - Inventory
______________________ Current liabilities [3.2]
Notice that using cash to buy inventory does not aff ect the current ratio, but it reduces the quick ratio. Again, the idea is that inventory is relatively illiquid compared to cash.
For Prufrock, this ratio in 2012 was:
Quick ratio = [$708 - 422]/$540 = .53
Th e quick ratio here tells a somewhat diff erent story from the current ratio, because inventory accounts for more than half of Prufrock’s current assets. To exaggerate the point, if this inventory consisted of, say, unsold nuclear power plants, this is a cause for concern.
Table 3.7 provides more information. Th e quick ratio has improved from 2011 to 2012, but it is still less than the industry average. At a minimum, this suggests Prufrock still is carrying relatively more inventory than its competitors. We need more information to know if this is a problem.
Other Liquidity Ratios We briefl y mention three other measures of liquidity. A very short-term creditor might be inter- ested in the cash ratio:
Cash ratio = (Cash + Cash equivalents)/Current liabilities [3.3]
You can verify that this works out to be .18 for Prufrock in 2012. According to Table 3.7, this is a slight improvement over 2011 and around the industry average. Cash adequacy does not seem to be a problem for Prufrock.
Because net working capital (NWC) is frequently viewed as the amount of short-term liquidity a fi rm has, we can measure the ratio of NWC to total assets:
Net working capital to total assets = Net working capital/Total assets [3.4]
A relatively low value might indicate relatively low levels of liquidity. For Prufrock in 2012, this ratio works out to be ($708 - 540)/$3,588 = 4.7%. As with the cash ratio, comparisons with 2011 and the industry average indicate no problems.
Finally, imagine that Prufrock is facing a strike and cash infl ows are beginning to dry up. How long could the business keep running? One answer is given by the interval measure:
Interval measure = Current assets/Average daily operating costs [3.5]
Costs for the year 2012, excluding depreciation and interest, were $1,344. Th e average daily cost was $1,344/365 = $3.68 per day. Th e interval measure is thus $708/$3.68 = 192 days. Based on this, Prufrock could hang on for six months or so, about in line with its competitors.3
3 Sometimes depreciation and/or interest is included in calculating average daily costs. Depreciation isn’t a cash expense, so this doesn’t make a lot of sense. Interest is a financing cost, so we excluded it by definition (we only looked at operat- ing costs). We could, of course, define a different ratio that included interest expense.
CHAPTER 3: Working with Financial Statements 63
03Ross_Chapter03_4th.indd 6303Ross_Chapter03_4th.indd 63 12-11-27 12:0212-11-27 12:02
Long-Term Solvency Measures Long-term solvency ratios are intended to address the fi rm’s long-run ability to meet its obliga- tions or, more generally, its fi nancial leverage. Th ese are sometimes called fi nancial leverage ratios or just leverage ratios. We consider three commonly used measures and some variations. Th ese ratios all measure debt, equity, and assets at book values. As we stressed at the beginning, market values would be far better, but these are oft en not available.
TOTAL DEBT RATIO The total debt ratio takes into account all debts of all maturities to all creditors. It can be defined in several ways, the easiest of which is:
Total debt ratio = [Total assets - Total equity]/Total assets [3.6] = [$3,588 - 2,592]/$3,588 = .28
In this case, an analyst might say that Prufrock uses 28 percent debt.4 Th ere has been a large vol- ume of theoretical research on how much debt is optimal, and we discuss this in Part 6. Taking a more pragmatic view here, most fi nancial analysts would note that Prufrock’s use of debt has declined slightly from 2011 and is considerably less than the industry average. To fi nd out if this is good or bad, we would look for more information on the fi nancial health of Prufrock’s competi- tors. Th e rating and comment in Table 3.7 suggest that competitors are overleveraged and that Prufrock’s more moderate use of debt is a strength.
Regardless of the interpretation, the total debt ratio shows that Prufrock has $.28 in debt for every $1 in assets in 2012. Th erefore, there is $.72 in equity ($1 - $.28) for every $.28 in debt. With this in mind, we can defi ne two useful variations on the total debt ratio, the debt/equity ratio and the equity multiplier. We illustrate each for Prufrock for 2012:
Debt/equity ratio = Total debt/Total equity [3.7] = $.28/$.72 = .39
Equity multiplier = Total assets/Total equity [3.8] = $1/$.72 = 1.39
Th e fact that the equity multiplier is 1 plus the debt/equity ratio is not a coincidence:
Equity multiplier = Total assets/Total equity = $1/$.72 = 1.39 = (Total equity + Total debt)/Total equity = 1 + Debt/Equity ratio = 1.39
Th e thing to notice here is that given any one of these three ratios, you can immediately calculate the other two, so they all say exactly the same thing. You can verify this by looking at the com- parisons in Table 3.7.
A BRIEF DIGRESSION: TOTAL CAPITALIZATION VERSUS TOTAL ASSETS Frequently, financial analysts are more concerned with the firm’s long-term debt than its short- term debt because the short-term debt is constantly changing. Also, a firm’s accounts payable may be more a reflection of trade practice than debt management policy. For these reasons, the long- term debt ratio is often calculated as:
Long-term debt ratio = Long-term debt
_________________________ Long-term debt + Total equity [3.9]
= $457/ [ $457 + 2,591 ] = $457/$3,048 = .15
Th e $3,048 in total long-term debt and equity is sometimes called the fi rm’s total capitalization, and the fi nancial manager frequently focuses on this quantity rather than total assets. As you can see from Table 3.7, the long-term debt ratio follows the same trend as the other fi nancial leverage ratios.
To complicate matters, diff erent people (and diff erent books) mean diff erent things by the term debt ratio. Some mean total debt, and some mean long-term debt only, and, unfortunately, a substantial number are simply vague about which one they mean.
Th is is a source of confusion, so we choose to give two separate names to the two measures. Th e same problem comes up in discussing the debt/equity ratio. Financial analysts frequently
4 Total equity here includes preferred stock (discussed in Chapter 14 and elsewhere), if there is any. An equivalent nu- merator in this ratio would be (Current liabilities + Long-term debt).
64 Part 2: Financial Statements and Long-Term Financial Planning
03Ross_Chapter03_4th.indd 6403Ross_Chapter03_4th.indd 64 12-11-27 12:0212-11-27 12:02
calculate this ratio using only long-term debt.
TIMES INTEREST EARNED Another common measure of long-term solvency is the times interest earned (TIE) ratio. Once again, there are several possible (and common) defini- tions, but we’ll stick with the most traditional:
Times interest earned ratio = EBIT/Interest [3.10] = $691/$141 = 4.9 times
As the name suggests, this ratio measures how well a company has its interest obligations cov- ered. For Prufrock, the interest bill is covered 4.9 times over in 2012. Table 3.7 shows that TIE increased slightly over 2011 and exceeds the industry average. Th is reinforces the signal of the other debt ratios.
CASH COVERAGE A problem with the TIE ratio is that it is based on EBIT, which is not really a measure of cash available to pay interest. The reason is that depreciation, a non-cash ex- pense, has been deducted out. Since interest is most definitely a cash outflow (to creditors), one way to define the cash coverage ratio is:
Cash coverage ratio = [EBIT + Depreciation]/Interest [3.11] = [$691 + 276]/$141 = $967/$141 = 6.9 times
Th e numerator here, EBIT plus depreciation, is oft en abbreviated EBITDA (earnings before inter- est, taxes, depreciation, and amortization). It is a basic measure of the fi rm’s ability to generate cash from operations, and it is frequently used as a measure of cash fl ow available to meet fi nan- cial obligations. If depreciation changed dramatically from one year to the next, cash coverage could give a diff erent signal than TIE. In the case of Prufrock, the signals are reinforcing as you can see in Table 3.7.5
Asset Management, or Turnover, Measures We next turn our attention to the effi ciency with which Prufrock uses its assets. Th e measures in this section are sometimes called asset utilization ratios. Th e specifi c ratios we discuss can all be interpreted as measures of turnover. What they are intended to describe is how effi ciently or intensively a fi rm uses its assets to generate sales. We fi rst look at two important current assets, inventory and receivables.
INVENTORY TURNOVER AND DAYS’ SALES IN INVENTORY During 2012, Prufrock had a cost of goods sold of $1,344. Inventory at the end of the year was $422. With these numbers, inventory turnover can be calculated as:
Inventory turnover = Cost of goods sold/Inventory [3.12] = $1,344/$422 = 3.2 times
In a sense, the company sold or turned over the entire inventory 3.2 times.6 As long as Prufrock is not running out of stock and thereby forgoing sales, the higher this ratio is, the more effi ciently it is managing inventory.
If we turned our inventory over 3.2 times during the year, then we can immediately fi gure out how long it took us to turn it over on average. Th e result is the average days’ sales in inventory (also known as the “inventory period”):
Days’ sales in inventory = 365 days/Inventory turnover [3.13] = 365/3.2 = 114 days
Th is tells us that, roughly speaking, inventory sits 114 days on average in 2012 before it is sold. Alternatively, assuming we used the most recent inventory and cost fi gures, it should take about 114 days to work off our current inventory.
5 Any one-time transactions, such as capital gains or losses, should be netted out of EBIT before calculating cash coverage. 6 Notice that we used cost of goods sold in the top of this ratio. For some purposes, it might be more useful to use sales instead of costs. For example, if we wanted to know the amount of sales generated per dollar of inventory, then we could just replace the cost of goods sold with sales.
CHAPTER 3: Working with Financial Statements 65
03Ross_Chapter03_4th.indd 6503Ross_Chapter03_4th.indd 65 12-11-27 12:0212-11-27 12:02
Looking at Table 3.7, it would be fair to state that Prufrock has a 114 days’ supply of inven- tory. Ninety-one days is considered normal. Th is means that, at current daily sales, it would take 114 days to deplete the available inventory. We could also say that we have 114 days of sales in inventory. Table 3.7 registers a negative rating for inventory because Prufrock is carrying more than the industry average. Th is could be a sign of poor fi nancial management in overinvesting in inventory that will eventually be sold at a normal markup. Worse, it could be that some of Pru- frock’s inventory is obsolete and should be marked down. Or it could be that Prufrock is simply selling a diff erent product mix than its competitors and nothing is wrong. What the ratio tells us is that we should investigate further.
Returning to ratio calculation, it might make more sense to use the average inventory in cal- culating turnover. Inventory turnover would then be $1,344/[($393 + $422)/2] = 3.3 times.7 It really depends on the purpose of the calculation. If we are interested in how long it will take us to sell our current inventory, then using the ending fi gure (as we did initially) is probably better.
In many of the ratios we discuss next, average fi gures could just as well be used. Again, it really depends on whether we are worried about the past when averages are appropriate, or the future, when ending fi gures might be better. Also, using ending fi gures is very common in reporting industry averages; so, for comparison purposes, ending fi gures should be used. In any event, using ending fi gures is defi nitely less work, so we’ll continue to use them.
RECEIVABLES TURNOVER AND DAYS’ SALES IN RECEIVABLES Our in- ventory measures give some indications of how fast we can sell products. We now look at how fast we collect on those sales. The receivables turnover is defined in the same way as inventory turnover:
Receivables turnover = Sales/Accounts receivable [3.14] = $2,311/$188 = 12.3 times
Loosely speaking, we collected our outstanding credit accounts and reloaned the money 12.3 times during 2012.8
Th is ratio makes more sense if we convert it to days, so the days’ sales in receivables is: Days’ sales in receivables = 365 days/Receivables turnover [3.15]
= 365/12.3 = 30 days
Th erefore, on average, we collected on our credit sales in 30 days in 2012. For this reason, this ratio is very frequently called the average collection period (ACP) or days sales outstanding (DSO).
EXAMPLE 3.2: Payables Turnover
Here is a variation on the receivables collection period. How long, on average, does it take for Prufrock Corporation to pay its bills in 2012? To answer, we need to calculate the accounts payable turnover rate using cost of goods sold.7 We assume that Prufrock purchases everything on credit.
The cost of goods sold is $1,344, and accounts payable are $344. The turnover is therefore $1,344/$344 = 3.9 times. So payables turned over about every 365/3.9 = 94 days. On average then, Prufrock takes 94 days to pay. As a potential creditor, we might take note of this fact.
9
Also, note that if we are using the most recent fi gures, we could also say that we have 30 days’ worth of sales that are currently uncollected. Turning to Table 3.7, we see that Prufrock’s average collection period is holding steady on the industry average, so no problem is indicated. You will learn more about this subject when we discuss credit policy in Chapter 20.
ASSET TURNOVER RATIOS Moving away from specific accounts like inventory or re- ceivables, we can consider several “big picture” ratios. For example, NWC turnover is:
7 Notice we have calculated the average as (Beginning value + Ending value)/2. 8 Here we have implicitly assumed that all sales are credit sales. If they are not, then we would simply use total credit sales in these calculations, not total sales. 9 This calculation could be refined by changing the numerator from cost of goods sold to purchases.
66 Part 2: Financial Statements and Long-Term Financial Planning
03Ross_Chapter03_4th.indd 6603Ross_Chapter03_4th.indd 66 12-11-27 12:0212-11-27 12:02
NWC turnover = Sales/NWC [3.16] = $2,311/($708 - $540) = 13.8 times
Looking at Table 3.7, you can see that NWC turnover is smaller than the industry average. Is this good or bad? Th is ratio measures how much work we get out of our working capital. Once again, assuming that we aren’t missing out on sales, a high value is preferred. Likely, sluggish inventory turnover causes the lower value for Prufrock.
Similarly, fi xed asset turnover is: Fixed asset turnover = Sales/Net fixed assets [3.17]
= $2,311/$2,880 = .80 times
With this ratio, we see that, for every dollar in fi xed assets, we generated $.80 in sales. Our fi nal asset management ratio, the total asset turnover, comes up quite a bit. We see it later
in this chapter and in the next chapter. As the name suggests, the total asset turnover is:
Total asset turnover = Sales/Total assets [3.18] = $2,311/$3,588 = .64 times
In other words, for every dollar in assets, we generate $.64 in sales in 2012. Comparisons with 2011 and with the industry norm reveal no problem with fi xed asset turnover. Because the total asset turnover is slower than the industry average, this points to current assets—and in this case, inventory—as the source of a possible problem.
Profitabil ity Measures Th e measures we discuss in this section are probably the best known and most widely used of all fi nancial ratios. In one form or another, they are intended to measure how effi ciently the fi rm uses its assets and how effi ciently the fi rm manages its operations. Th e focus in this group is on the bottom line, net income.
PROFIT MARGIN Companies pay a great deal of attention to their profit margins: Profit margin = Net income/Sales [3.19]
= $363/$2,311 = 15.7%
EXAMPLE 3.3: More Turnover
Suppose you find that a particular company generates $.40 in sales for every dollar in total assets. How often does this company turn over its total assets?
The total asset turnover here is .40 times per year. It takes 1/.40 = 2.5 years to turn them over completely.
Th is tells us that Prufrock, in an accounting sense, generates a little less than 16 cents in profi t for every dollar in sales in 2012. Th is is an improvement over 2011 and exceeds the industry average.
All other things being equal, a relatively high profi t margin is obviously desirable. Th is situ- ation corresponds to low expense ratios relative to sales. However, we hasten to add that other things are oft en not equal.
For example, lowering our sales price normally increases unit volume, but profi t margins nor- mally shrink. Total profi t (or more importantly, operating cash fl ow) may go up or down; so the fact that margins are smaller isn’t necessarily bad. Aft er all, isn’t it possible that, as the saying goes, “Our prices are so low that we lose money on everything we sell, but we make it up in volume!”?10
Two other forms of profi t margin are sometimes analyzed. Th e simplest is gross profi t mar- gin, which considers a company’s performance in making profi ts above the cost of goods sold (COGS). Th e next stage is to consider how well the company does at making money once general and administrative costs (SGA) are considered.
10 No, it’s not.
CHAPTER 3: Working with Financial Statements 67
03Ross_Chapter03_4th.indd 6703Ross_Chapter03_4th.indd 67 12-11-27 12:0212-11-27 12:02
Gross profit margin = (Sales - COGS)/Sales Operating profit margin = (Sales - COGS - SGA)/Sales
RETURN ON ASSETS Return on assets (ROA) is a measure of profit per dollar of assets. It can be defined several ways, but the most common is:11
Return on assets = Net income/Total assets [3.20] = $363/$3,588 = 10.12%
RETURN ON EQUITY Return on equity (ROE) is a measure of how the shareholders fared during the year. Since benefiting shareholders is our goal, ROE is, in an accounting sense, the true bottom-line measure of performance. ROE is usually measured as:12
Return on equity = Net income/Total equity [3.21] = $363/$2,591 = 14%
For every dollar in equity, therefore, Prufrock generated 14 cents in profi t, but, again, this is only correct in accounting terms.
Because ROA and ROE are such commonly cited numbers, we stress that they are accounting rates of return. For this reason, these measures should properly be called return on book assets and return on book equity. In fact, ROE is sometimes called return on net worth. Whatever it’s called, it would be inappropriate to compare the result to, for example, an interest rate observed in the fi nancial markets. We have more to say about accounting rates of return in later chapters.
From Table 3.7, you can see that both ROA and ROE are more than the industry average. Th e fact that ROE exceeds ROA refl ects Prufrock’s use of fi nancial leverage. We examine the relation- ship between these two measures in more detail next.
Market Value Measures Our fi nal group of measures is based, in part, on information that is not necessarily contained in fi nancial statements—the market price per share of the stock. Obviously, these measures can only be calculated directly for publicly traded companies.
EXAMPLE 3.4: ROE and ROA
Because ROE and ROA are usually intended to measure per- formance over a prior period, it makes a certain amount of sense to base them on average equity and average assets, respectively. For Prufrock, how would you calculate these for 2012?
We begin by calculating average assets and average equity:
Average assets = ($3,373 + $3,588)/2 = $3,481 Average equity = ($2,299 + $2,591)/2 = $2,445
With these averages, we can recalculate ROA and ROE as follows:
ROA = $363/$3,481 = 10.43% ROE = $363/$2,445 = 14.85%
These are slightly higher than our previous calculations be- cause assets grew during the year, with the result that the average is less than the ending value.
We assume that Prufrock has 33,000 shares outstanding at the end of 2012 and the stock sold for $157 per share at the end of the year.13 If we recall that Prufrock’s net income was $363,000, its earnings per share (EPS) are:
11 An alternate definition abstracting from financing costs of debt and preferred shares is in R. H. Garrison, G. R. Chesley, and R. F. Carroll, Managerial Accounting, 5th Canadian ed. (Whitby, Ontario: McGraw-Hill Ryerson, 2001), chap. 17. 12 Alternative methods for calculating some financial ratios have also been developed. For example, the Canadian Secur- ities Institute defines ROE as the return on common equity, which is calculated as the ratio of net income less preferred dividends to common equity. 13 In this example, basic shares outstanding was used to compute EPS. However, one may also calculate diluted EPS by adding all outstanding options and warrants to shares outstanding. P/E ratios (as will be discussed next) rely on diluted EPS figures.
68 Part 2: Financial Statements and Long-Term Financial Planning
03Ross_Chapter03_4th.indd 6803Ross_Chapter03_4th.indd 68 12-11-27 12:0212-11-27 12:02
EPS = Net Income ________________ Shares Outstanding = $363/33 = $11
PRICE/EARNINGS RATIO The first of our market value measures, the price/earnings (P/E) ratio (or multiple) is defined as:
P/E ratio = Price per share/Earnings per share [3.22] = $157/$11 = 14.27 times
In the vernacular, we would say that Prufrock shares sell for 14.27 times earnings, or we might say that Prufrock shares have or carry a P/E multiple of 14.27. In 2011, the P/E ratio was 12 times, the same as the industry average.
Because the P/E ratio measures how much investors are willing to pay per dollar of current earnings, higher P/Es are oft en taken to mean that the fi rm has signifi cant prospects for future growth. Such expectations of higher growth likely go a long way toward explaining why Suncor Energy had a much higher price-earnings ratio than RIM in the example we used to open the chapter. If a fi rm had no or almost no earnings, its P/E would probably be quite large; so, as always, care is needed in interpreting this ratio.
Sometimes analysts divide PE ratios by expected future earnings growth rates (aft er multiply- ing the growth rate by 100). Th e result is the PEG ratio. Suppose Prufrock’s anticipated growth rate in EPS was 6 percent. Its PEG ratio would then be 14.27/6 = 2.38. Th e idea behind the PEG ratio is that whether a PE ratio is high or low depends on expected future growth. High PEG ratios suggest that the PE may be too high relative to growth, and vice versa.
MARKET-TO-BOOK RATIO A second commonly quoted measure is the market-to- book ratio:
Market-to-book ratio = Market value per share/Book value per share [3.23] = $157/($2,591/33) = $157/$78.5 = 2 times
Notice that book value per share is total equity (not just common stock) divided by the number of shares outstanding. Table 3.7 shows that the market-to-book ratio was 2.4 in 2011.
Since book value per share is an accounting number, it refl ects historical costs. In a loose sense, the market-to-book ratio therefore compares the market value of the fi rm’s investments to their cost. A value less than 1 could mean that the fi rm has not been successful overall in creating value for its shareholders. Prufrock’s market-to-book ratio exceeds 1 and this is a positive indication.
ENTERPRISE VALUE/EARNINGS BEFORE INTEREST, TAX, DEPRECIA- TION, AND AMORTIZATION Perhaps the most commonly cited market value measure used by practitioners is the Enterprise Value/Earnings Before Interest, Tax, Depreciation, and Amortization (EV/EBITDA) multiple.
EV/EBITDA multiple = [Market value of equity + market value of interest-bearing debt 14 + preferred shares + minority interest - Cash (and cash equivalents)]/EBITDA = [(33,000 × $157) + ($196,000 + $457,000) - $98,000]/($691,000 + $276,000) = 5.93 times
Notice how unlike the P/E or market-to-book ratios, the EV/EBITDA multiple values the com- pany as a whole and not just the equity portion of the company. Minority interest is added back so that the EV also becomes “consolidated,” and the numerator and denominator of the ratio are consistent. EBITDA is used as a rough proxy for a fi rm’s cash fl ows. Th erefore, the EV/EBITDA looks to examine how many times more a fi rm’s capital holders value the company relative to the cash fl ow the company generates.
Th e appeal of the EV/EBITDA ratio is two-fold: (1) EBITA seems to be replacing EBITDA in common parlance. It is less susceptible to accounting manipulation. Th e more one moves down the income statement, the more leeway fi nancial statement preparers have in presenting their
14 In this example, we assume that the debt of the company is not traded and hence, the market value of debt is equal to the book value of debt.
CHAPTER 3: Working with Financial Statements 69
03Ross_Chapter03_4th.indd 6903Ross_Chapter03_4th.indd 69 12-11-27 12:0212-11-27 12:02
company. Given that EBITDA is higher on the income statement than earnings, it is a more trust- worthy fi gure and more comparable between companies. (2) It can be used to value companies with negative cash fl ows. Some companies have negative earnings, especially start-ups, and thus they cannot be valued using a P/E ratio.
TABLE 3.8 Common financial ratios
I. Short-Term Solvency or Liquidity Ratios II. Long-Term Solvency or Financial Leverage Ratios
Current ratio = Current assets ________________ Current liabilities
Quick ratio = Current assets - Inventory
________________________ Current liabilities
Cash ratio = Cash ________________ Current liabilities
Net working capital = Net working capital
__________________ Total assets
Interval measure = Current assets ___________________________ Average daily operating costs
Total debt ratio = Total assets - Total equity
________________________ Total assets
Debt/equity ratio = Total debt ___________ Total equity
Equity multiplier = Total assets ___________ Total equity
Long-term debt ratio = Long-term debt
____________________________ Long-term debt + Total equity
Times interest earned = EBIT _______ Interest
Cash coverage ratio = EBIT + Depreciation
___________________ Interest
III. Asset Utilization Turnover Ratios IV. Profitability Ratios
Inventory turnover = Cost of goods sold
_________________ Inventory
Day s′ sales in inventory = 365 days
_________________ Inventory turnover
Receivables turnover = Sales __________________ Accounts receivable
Day s′ sales in receivables = 365 days
___________________ Receivables turnover
NWC turnover = Sales _____ NWC
Fixed asset turnover = Sales ______________ Net fixed assets
Total asset turnover = Sales ___________ Total assets
Profit margin = Net income ___________ Sales
Return on assets ( ROA ) = Net income ___________ Total assets
Return on equity ( ROE ) = Net income ___________ Total equity
ROE = Net income ___________ Sales
× Sales ______ Assets
× Assets ______ Equity
V. Market Value Ratios
Price-earning ratio = Price per share
_________________ Earnings per share
Market-to-book ratio = Market value per share
_____________________ Book value per share
EV/EBITDA = [Market value of equity + Market value of interest-bearing debt + Preferred shares + Minority interest - Cash ( and cash equivalent ) ]/EBITDA
It is entirely possible for start-ups to have a negative EBITDA, but very rare for the mature com- panies, making EV/EBITDA a good metric to evaluate performance of mature companies unlike the start-up ones.
Th is completes our defi nitions of some common ratios. We could tell you about more of them, but these are enough for now. We’ll leave it here and go on to discuss in detail some ways of using these ratios in practice. Table 3.8 summarizes the formulas for the ratios that we discussed.
1. What are the five groups of ratios? Give two or three examples of each kind.
2. Turnover ratios all have one of two figures as numerators. What are they? What do these ratios measure? How do you interpret the results?
3. Profitability ratios all have the same figure in the numerator. What is it? What do these ratios measure? How do you interpret the results?
Concept Questions
70 Part 2: Financial Statements and Long-Term Financial Planning
03Ross_Chapter03_4th.indd 7003Ross_Chapter03_4th.indd 70 12-11-27 12:0212-11-27 12:02
3.4 The Du Pont Identity
As we mentioned in discussing ROA and ROE, the diff erence between these two profi tability measures is a refl ection of the use of debt fi nancing or fi nancial leverage. We illustrate the rela- tionship between these measures in this section by investigating a famous way of decomposing ROE into its component parts.
To begin, let’s recall the defi nition of ROE:
Return on equity = Net income/Total equity
If we were so inclined, we could multiply this ratio by Assets/Assets without changing anything:
Return of equity = Net Income/Total equity × Assests/Assets = Net Income/Assets × Assets/Equity
Notice that we have expressed the return on equity as the product of two other ratios—return on assets and the equity multiplier:
ROE = ROA × Equity multiplier = ROA × (1 + Debt/Equity ratio)
Looking back at Prufrock in 2012, for example, the debt/equity ratio was .39 and ROA was 10.12 per- cent. Our work here implies that Prufrock’s return on equity, as we previously calculated, is:
ROE = 10.12% × 1.39 = 14%
Th e diff erence between ROE and ROA can be substantial, particularly for certain businesses. For example, Royal Bank of Canada had an ROA of only 0.70 percent in 2011, which might be attrib- uted to the fi nancial crisis. Th e banks tend to borrow a lot of money, and, as a result, have rela- tively large equity multipliers. For Royal Bank, ROE was around 18 percent in that year, implying an equity multiplier of 25.71.
We can further decompose ROE by multiplying the top and bottom by total sales:
ROE = Net income/Sales × Sales/Assets × Assets/Equity = Profit margin × Total asset turnover × Equity multiplier
What we have now done is to partition the return on assets into its two component parts, profi t margin and total asset turnover. Th is last expression is called the Du Pont identity, aft er E. I. Du Pont de Nemours & Company, which popularized its use.
We can check this relationship for Prufrock by noting that in 2012 the profi t margin was 15.7 percent and the total asset turnover was .64. ROE should thus be:
ROE = Profit margin × Total asset turnover × Equity multiplier = 15.5% × .64 × 1.39 = 14%
Th is 14 percent ROE is exactly what we had before. Th e Du Pont identity tells us that ROE is aff ected by three things:
1. Operating efficiency (as measured by profit margin). 2. Asset use efficiency (as measured by total asset turnover). 3. Financial leverage (as measured by the equity multiplier).
Weakness in either operating or asset use effi ciency (or both) shows up in a diminished return on assets, which translates into a lower ROE.
Considering the Du Pont identity, it appears that the ROE could be leveraged up by increasing the amount of debt in the fi rm. It turns out that this only happens when the fi rm’s ROA exceeds the interest rate on the debt. More importantly, the use of debt fi nancing has a number of other eff ects, and, as we discuss at some length in Part 6, the amount of leverage a fi rm uses is governed by its capital structure policy.
Th e decomposition of ROE we’ve discussed in this section is a convenient way of systemati- cally approaching fi nancial statement analysis. If ROE improves, then the Du Pont identity tells you where to start looking for the reasons. To illustrate, we know from Table 3.7, that ROE for Prufrock increased from 10.4 percent in 2011 to 14 percent in 2012. Th e Du Pont identity can tell
Du Pont identity Popular expression breaking ROE into three parts: profit margin, total asset turnover, and financial leverage.
CHAPTER 3: Working with Financial Statements 71
03Ross_Chapter03_4th.indd 7103Ross_Chapter03_4th.indd 71 12-11-27 12:0212-11-27 12:02
us why. Aft er decomposing ROE for 2011, we can compare the parts with what we found earlier for 2012. For 2011:
ROE = 10.4% = Profit margin × Total asset turnover × Equity multiplier = 11.6% × .61 × 1.47
For 2012:
ROE = 14% = 15.7% × .64 × 1.39
Th is comparison shows that the improvement in ROE for Prufrock was caused mainly by the higher profi t margin.
A higher ROE is not always a sign of fi nancial strength, however, as the example of General Motors illustrates. In 1989, GM had an ROE of 12.1 percent. By 1993, its ROE had improved to 44.1 percent, a dramatic improvement. On closer inspection, however, we fi nd that, over the same period, GM’s profi t margin had declined from 3.4 to 1.8 percent, and ROA had declined from 2.4 to 1.3 percent. Th e decline in ROA was moderated only slightly by an increase in total asset turnover from .71 to .73 over the period.
Given this information, how is it possible for GM’s ROE to have climbed so sharply? From our understanding of the Du Pont identity, it must be the case that GM’s equity multiplier increased substantially. In fact, what happened was that GM’s book equity value was almost wiped out over- night in 1992 by changes in the accounting treatment of pension liabilities. If a company’s equity value declines sharply, its equity multiplier rises. In GM’s case, the multiplier went from 4.95 in 1989 to 33.62 in 1993. In sum, the dramatic “improvement” in GM’s ROE was almost entirely due to an accounting change that aff ected the equity multiplier and doesn’t really represent an improvement in fi nancial performance at all.
1. Return on assets (ROA) can be expressed as the product of two ratios. Which two?
2. Return on equity (ROE) can be expressed as the product of three ratios. Which three?
EXAMPLE 3.5: Food versus Variety Stores
Table 3.9 shows the ratios of the Du Pont identity for food and variety stores. The return on equity ratios (ROEs) for the two industries are roughly comparable. This is despite the higher profit margin achieved by variety stores. To overcome their lower profit margin, food stores turn over their assets faster and use more financial leverage. Du Pont
analysis allows us to go further by asking why food stores have higher total asset turnover. The reason is higher inven- tory turnover—15.4 times for food stores versus 4.9 times for variety stores. Figure 3.1 shows the interaction of state- ment of financial position and income statement items through the Du Pont analysis.
TABLE 3.9
Du Pont identity ratios for food and variety stores
Industry Profit
Margin Total Asset Turnover
Equity Multiplier
Return on Equity
Food stores 1.0% 3.56 3.04 10.8% Variety stores 1.8 2.60 2.58 12.1
Concept Questions
72 Part 2: Financial Statements and Long-Term Financial Planning
03Ross_Chapter03_4th.indd 7203Ross_Chapter03_4th.indd 72 12-11-27 12:0212-11-27 12:02
FIGURE 3.1
The Du Pont analysis
Profit margin
Net income after taxes
Total income
Pricing
Marketing
Product mix
Productivity
Employee expense
Occupancy expense
Other expenses
Minus
Expenses
Income taxes
Cash
Receivables
Inventory
Capital assets
Sales
Sales
Total assets
Total asset turnover
ROA
3.5 Using Financial Statement Information
Our last task in this chapter is to discuss in more detail some practical aspects of fi nancial state- ment analysis. In particular, we look at reasons for doing fi nancial statement analysis, how to get benchmark information, and some of the problems that come up in the process.
Why Evaluate Financial Statements? As we have discussed, the primary reason for looking at accounting information is that we don’t have, and can’t reasonably expect to get, market value information. Remember that whenever we have market information, we would use it instead of accounting data. Also, when accounting and market data confl ict, market data should be given precedence.
Financial statement analysis is essentially an application of management by exception. In many cases, as we illustrated with our hypothetical company, Prufrock, such analysis boils down to comparing ratios for one business with some kind of average or representative ratios. Th ose ratios that diff er the most from the averages are tagged for further study.
INTERNAL USES Financial information has a variety of uses within a firm. Among the most important of these is performance evaluation. For example, managers are frequently evalu- ated and compensated on the basis of accounting measures of performances such as profit margin and return on equity. Also, firms with multiple divisions frequently compare the performance of those divisions using financial statement information.
Another important internal use that we explore in the next chapter is planning for the future. As we see, historical fi nancial statement information is very useful for generating projections about the future and for checking the realism of assumptions made in those projections.
EXTERNAL USES Financial statements are useful to parties outside the firm, including short-term and long-term creditors and potential investors. For example, we would find such in- formation quite useful in deciding whether or not to grant credit to a new customer. Chapter 20 shows how statistical models based on ratios are used in credit analysis in predicting insolvency.
If your fi rm borrows from a chartered bank, you can expect your loan agreement to require you to submit fi nancial statements periodically. Most bankers use computer soft ware to prepare common-size statements and to calculate ratios for their accounts. Standard soft ware produces
CHAPTER 3: Working with Financial Statements 73
03Ross_Chapter03_4th.indd 7303Ross_Chapter03_4th.indd 73 12-11-27 12:0212-11-27 12:02
output in the format of Table 3.7. More advanced soft ware generates a preliminary diagnosis of the account by comparing the company’s ratios against benchmark parameters selected by the banker. Investment analysts also use ratio analysis soft ware as input to their buy and sell recom- mendations. Credit rating agencies like Standard & Poor’s and DBRS rely on fi nancial statements in assessing a fi rm’s overall creditworthiness.
In addition to its use by investment and credit analysts, ratio analysis of competitors might be of interest to the fi rm. For example, Canadian Tire might be thinking of reentering the U.S. retail market. A prime concern would be the fi nancial strength of the competition. Of course, the ana- lyst could easily change the comparison fi rms if the goal were to analyze Canadian competitors. Either way, comparison fi rms should be in the same industries and roughly the same size.
Finally, we might be thinking of acquiring another fi rm. Financial statement information would be essential in identifying potential targets and deciding what to off er.
Choosing a Benchmark Given that we want to evaluate a division or a fi rm based on its fi nancial statements, a basic prob- lem immediately comes up. How do we choose a benchmark or a standard of comparison? We describe some ways of getting started in this section.
TIME-TREND ANALYSIS One standard we could use is history. In our Prufrock exam- ple, we looked at two years of data. More generally, suppose we find that the current ratio for a particular firm is 2.4 based on the most recent financial statement information. Looking back over the last 10 years, we might find that this ratio has declined fairly steadily.
Based on this, we might wonder if the liquidity position of the fi rm has deteriorated. It could be, of course, that the fi rm has made changes to use its current assets more effi ciently, that the nature of the fi rm’s business has changed, or that business practices have changed. If we investi- gate, these are all possible explanations. Th is is an example of what we mean by management by exception—a deteriorating time trend may not be bad, but it does merit investigation.
PEER GROUP ANALYSIS The second means of establishing a benchmark is to identify firms that are similar in the sense that they compete in the same markets, have similar assets, and operate in similar ways. In other words, we need to identify a peer group. This approach is often used together with time-trend analysis and the two approaches are complementary.
In our analysis of Prufrock, we used an industry average without worrying about where it came from. In practice, matters are not so simple because no two companies are identical. Ultimately, the choice of which companies to use as a basis for comparison involves judgement on the part of the analyst. One common way of identifying peers is based on the North American Industry Clas- sifi cation System (NAICS) codes. Th ese are fi ve-digit codes established by the statistical agencies of Canada, Mexico, and the United States for statistical reporting purposes. Firms with the same NAICS code are frequently assumed to be similar.
Various other benchmarks are available.15 You can turn to Statistics Canada publications and website that include typical statements of fi nancial position, statements of comprehensive income, and selected ratios for fi rms in about 180 industries. Other sources of benchmarks for Canadian companies include fi nancial data bases available from Th e Financial Post Datagroup and Dun & Bradstreet Canada.16 Several fi nancial institutions gather their own fi nancial ratio data bases by compiling information on their loan customers. In this way, they seek to obtain more up-to-date information than is available from services like Statistics Canada and Dun & Bradstreet.
Obtaining current information is not the only challenge facing the fi nancial analyst. Most large Canadian corporations do business in several industries so the analyst must oft en compare the company against several industry averages. Also keep in mind that the industry average is not necessarily where fi rms would like to be. For example, agricultural analysts know that farmers are suff ering with painfully low average profi tability coupled with excessive debt. Despite these short- comings, the industry average is a useful benchmark for the management by exception approach we advocate for ratio analysis.
15 This discussion draws on L. Kryzanowski, M.C. To and R. Seguin, Business Solvency Risk Analysis, Institute of Canad- ian Bankers, 1990, chap. 3. 16 Analysts examining U.S. companies will find comparable information available from Robert Morris Associates.
74 Part 2: Financial Statements and Long-Term Financial Planning
03Ross_Chapter03_4th.indd 7403Ross_Chapter03_4th.indd 74 12-11-27 12:0212-11-27 12:02
Problems with Financial Statement Analysis We close our chapter on fi nancial statements by discussing some additional problems that can arise in using fi nancial statements. In one way or another, the basic problem with fi nancial state- ment analysis is that there is no underlying theory to help us identify which quantities to look at and to guide us in establishing benchmarks.
As we discuss in other chapters, there are many cases where fi nancial theory and economic logic provide guidance to making judgements about value and risk. Very little such help exists with fi nancial statements. Th is is why we can’t say which ratios matter the most and what a high or low value might be.
One particularly severe problem is that many fi rms are conglomerates, owning more-or-less unrelated lines of business. Th e consolidated fi nancial statements for such fi rms as Sears Canada don’t really fi t any neat industry category. More generally, the kind of peer group analysis we have been describing is going to work best when the fi rms are strictly in the same line of business, the industry is competitive, and there is only one way of operating.
Another problem that is becoming increasingly common is having major competitors and natural peer group members in an industry scattered around the globe. As we discussed in Chap- ter 2, the trend toward adopting IFRS improves comparability across many countries but the U.S. remains on GAAP. Th is complicates interpretation of fi nancial statements for companies like Manulife Financial that operate in both the U.S. and Canada as well as internationally.
Even companies that are clearly in the same line of business may not be comparable. For exam- ple, electric utilities engaged primarily in power generation are all classifi ed in the same group. Th is group is oft en thought to be relatively homogeneous. However, utilities generally operate as regulated monopolies, so they don’t compete with each other. Many have shareholders, and many are organized as cooperatives with no shareholders. Th ere are several diff erent ways of generating power, ranging from hydroelectric to nuclear, so their operating activities can diff er quite a bit. Finally, profi tability is strongly aff ected by regulatory environment, so utilities in diff erent loca- tions can be very similar but show very diff erent profi ts.
Several other general problems frequently crop up. First, diff erent fi rms use diff erent account- ing procedures for inventory, for example. Th is makes it diffi cult to compare statements. Second, diff erent fi rms end their fi scal years at diff erent times. For fi rms in seasonal businesses (such as a retailer with a large Christmas season), this can lead to diffi culties in comparing statements of fi nancial position because of fl uctuations in accounts during the year. Finally, for any particular fi rm, unusual or transient events, such as a onetime profi t from an asset sale, may aff ect fi nancial performance. In comparing fi rms, such events can give misleading signals.
1. What are some uses for financial statement analysis?
2. Where do industry average ratios come from and how might they be useful?
3. Why do we say that financial statement analysis is management by exception?
4. What are some problems that can come up with financial statement analysis?
3.6 SUMMARY AND CONCLUSIONS
Th is chapter has discussed aspects of fi nancial statement analysis:
1. Sources and uses of cash. We discussed how to identify the ways that businesses obtain and use cash, and we described how to trace the flow of cash through the business over the course of the year. We briefly looked at the statement of cash flows.
2. Standardized financial statements. We explained that differences in size make it difficult to compare financial statements, and we discussed how to form common-size and common- base-period statements to make comparisons easier.
Concept Questions
CHAPTER 3: Working with Financial Statements 75
03Ross_Chapter03_4th.indd 7503Ross_Chapter03_4th.indd 75 12-11-27 12:0212-11-27 12:02
3. Ratio analysis. Evaluating ratios of accounting numbers is another way of comparing finan- cial statement information. We therefore defined and discussed a number of the most com- monly reported and used financial ratios. We also developed the famous Du Pont identity as a way of analyzing financial performance.
4. Using financial statements. We described how to establish benchmarks for comparison pur- poses and discussed some of the types of available information. We then examined some of the problems that can arise.
Aft er you study this chapter, we hope that you will have some perspective on the uses and abuses of fi nancial statements. You should also fi nd that your vocabulary of business and fi nancial terms has grown substantially.
Key Terms common-base-year statement (page 59) common-size statement (page 57) Du Pont identity (page 71) financial ratios (page 60; Table 3.8, p. 70)
sources of cash (page 54) statement of cash flows (page 56) uses of cash (page 54)
Chapter Review Problems and Self-Test 3.1 Sources and Uses of Cash Consider the following statement
of financial position for the Philippe Corporation. Calculate the changes in the various accounts and, where applicable, identify the change as a source or use of cash. What were the major sources and uses of cash? Did the company become more or less liquid during the year? What happened to cash during the year?
PHILIPPE CORPORATION tatement of Financial Position as of December 31, 2011
and 2012 ($ millions) 2011 2012
Assets Current assets Cash $ 210 $ 215 Accounts receivable 355 310 Inventory 507 328 Total $ 1,072 $ 853 Fixed assets Net plant and equipment $ 6,085 $ 6,527 Total assets $ 7,157 $ 7,380
Liabilities and Owners’ Equity Current liabilities Accounts payable $ 207 $ 298 Notes payable 1,715 1,427 Total $ 1,922 $ 1,725 Long-term debt $ 1,987 $ 2,308 Owners’ equity Common stock and paid-in surplus $ 1,000 $ 1,000 Retained earnings 2,248 2,347 Total $ 3,248 $ 3,347 Total liabilities and owners’ equity $ 7,157 $ 7,380
3.2 Common-Size Statements Below is the most recent income statement for Philippe. Prepare a common-size statement of comprehensive income based on this information. How do you interpret the standardized net income? What percentage of sales goes to cost of goods sold?
PHILIPPE CORPORATION 2012 Statement of Comprehensive Income
($ millions)
Sales $ 4,053 Cost of goods sold 2,780 Depreciation 550 Earnings before interest and taxes $ 723 Interest paid 502 Taxable income $ 221 Taxes (34%) 75 Net income $ 146 Dividends $47 Addition to retained earnings 99
3.3 Financial Ratios Based on the statement of financial position and income statement in the previous two problems, calculate the following ratios for 2012: Current ratio ____________________________ Quick ratio ____________________________ Cash ratio ____________________________ Inventory turnover ____________________________ Receivables turnover ____________________________ Days’ sales in inventory ____________________________ Days’ sales in receivables ____________________________ Total debt ratio ____________________________ Long-term debt ratio ____________________________ Times interest earned ratio ____________________________ Cash coverage ratio ____________________________
3.4 ROE and the Du Pont Identity Calculate the 2012 ROE for the Philippe Corporation and then break down your answer into its component parts using the Du Pont identity.
76 Part 2: Financial Statements and Long-Term Financial Planning
03Ross_Chapter03_4th.indd 7603Ross_Chapter03_4th.indd 76 12-11-27 12:0212-11-27 12:02
Answers to Self-Test Problems 3.1 We’ve filled in the answers in the following table. Remember, increases in assets and decreases in liabilities indicate that we spent some
cash. Decreases in assets and increases in liabilities are ways of getting cash.
PHILIPPE CORPORATION Statement of Financial Position as of December 31, 2011 and 2012
($ millions)
2011 2012 Change Source or
Use of Cash
Assets Current assets Cash $ 210 $ 215 +$ 5 Accounts receivable 355 310 - 45 Source
Inventory 507 328 - 179 Source
Total $ 1,072 $ 853 -$ 219 Fixed assets Net plant and equipment $ 6,085 $ 6,527 +$ 442 Use
Total assets $ 7,157 $ 7,380 +$ 223
Liabilities and Owners’ Equity Current liabilities Accounts payable $ 207 $ 298 +$ 91 Source
Notes payable 1,715 1,427 - 288 Use
Total $ 1,922 $ 1,725 -$ 197 Long-term debt $ 1,987 $ 2,308 +$ 321 Source
2011 2012 Change Source or
Use of Cash
Owners’ equity Common stock and paid-in surplus $ 1,000 $1,000 +$ 0 —
Retained earnings 2,248 2,347 + 99 Source
Total $ 3,248 $3,347 +$ 99 Total liabilities and owners’ equity $ 7,157 $7,380 +$ 223
Philippe used its cash primarily to purchase fixed assets and to pay off short-term debt. The major sources of cash to do this were addi- tional long-term borrowing and, to a larger extent, reductions in current assets and additions to retained earnings.
The current ratio went from $1,072/1,922 = .56 to $853/1,725 = .49, so the firm’s liquidity appears to have declined somewhat. Overall, however, the amount of cash on hand increased by $5.
3.2 We’ve calculated the common-size income statement below. Remember that we simply divide each item by total sales. PHILIPPE CORPORATION
2012 Common-Size Statement of Comprehensive Income
Sales 100.0% Cost of goods sold 68.6 Depreciation 13.6 Earnings before interest and taxes 17.8 Interest paid 12.3 Taxable income 5.5 Taxes (34%) 1.9 Net income 3.6% Dividends 1.2% Addition to retained earnings 2.4%
Net income is 3.6 percent of sales. Because this is the percentage of each sales dollar that makes its way to the bottom line, the standard- ized net income is the firm’s profit margin. Cost of goods sold is 68.6 percent of sales.
3.3 We’ve calculated the following ratios based on the ending figures. If you don’t remember a definition, refer back to Table 3.8. Current ratio $853/$1,725 = .49 times Quick ratio $525/$1,725 = .30 times Cash ratio $215/$1,725 = .12 times Inventory turnover $2,780/$328 = 8.48 times
CHAPTER 3: Working with Financial Statements 77
03Ross_Chapter03_4th.indd 7703Ross_Chapter03_4th.indd 77 12-11-27 12:0212-11-27 12:02
Receivables turnover $4,053/$310 = 13.07 times Days’ sales in inventory 365/8.48 = 43.06 days Days’ sales in receivables 365/13.07 = 27.92 days Total debt ratio $4,033/$7,380 = 54.6% Long-term debt ratio $2,308/$5,655 = 40.8% Times interest earned ratio $723/$502 = 1.44 times Cash coverage ratio $1,273/$502 = 2.54 times
3.4 The return on equity is the ratio of net income to total equity. For Philippe, this is $146/$3,347 = 4.4%, which is not outstanding. Given the Du Pont identity, ROE can be written as:
ROE = Profit margin × Total asset turnover × Equity multiplier = $146/$4,053 × $4,053/$7,380 × $7,380/$3,347 = 3.6% × 0.549 × 2.20 = 4.4%
Notice that return on assets, ROA, is 3.6% × 0.549 = 1.98%.
Concepts Review and Critical Thinking Questions 1. (LO3) What effect would the following actions have on a
firm’s current ratio? Assume that net working capital is positive.
a. Inventory is purchased. b. A supplier is paid. c. A short-term bank loan is repaid. d. A long-term debt is paid off early. e. A customer pays off a credit account. f. Inventory is sold at cost. g. Inventory is sold for a profit. 2. (LO3) In recent years, Cheticamp Co. has greatly increased
its current ratio. At the same time, the quick ratio has fallen. What has happened? Has the liquidity of the company improved?
3. (LO3) Explain what it means for a firm to have a current ratio equal to .50. Would the firm be better off if the current ratio were 1.50? What if it were 15.0? Explain your answers.
4. (LO3) Fully explain the kind of information the following fi- nancial ratios provide about a firm:
a. Quick ratio b. Cash ratio c. Interval measure d. Total asset turnover e. Equity multiplier f. Long-term debt ratio g. Times interest earned ratio h. Profit margin i. Return on assets j. Return on equity k. Price-earnings ratio 5. (LO2) What types of information do common-size financial
statements reveal about the firm? What is the best use for these common-size statements? What purpose do common- base year statements have? When would you use them?
6. (LO3) Explain what peer group analysis means. As a financial manager, how could you use the results of peer group analysis to evaluate the performance of your firm?
7. (LO4) Why is the Du Pont identity a valuable tool for analyz- ing the performance of a firm? Discuss the types of informa- tion it reveals as compared to ROE considered by itself.
8. (LO3) Specialized ratios are sometimes used in specific in- dustries. For example, the so-called book-to-bill ratio is
closely watched for semiconductor manufacturers. A ratio of 0.93 indicates that for every $100 worth of chips shipped over some period, only $93 worth of new orders is received. In Feb- ruary 2006, the semiconductor equipment industry’s book-to- bill reached 1.01, compared to 0.98 during the month of January 2006. The book-to-bill ratio reached a low of 0.78 during October 2006. The three-month average of worldwide bookings in January 2006 was $1.30 billion, an increase of 6 percent over January 2005, while the three-month average of billings in February 2006 was $1.29 billion, a 2 percent in- crease from February 2005. What is this ratio intended to measure? Why do you think it is so closely watched?
9. (LO5) So-called “same-store sales” are a very important mea- sure for companies as diverse as Canadian Tire and Tim Hor- tons. As the name suggests, examining same-store sales means comparing revenues from the same stores or restaurants at two different points in time. Why might companies focus on same-store sales rather than total sales?
10. (LO2) There are many ways of using standardized financial information beyond those discussed in this chapter. The usual goal is to put firms on an equal footing for comparison pur- poses. For example, for auto manufacturers, it is common to express sales, costs, and profits on a per-car basis. For each of the following industries, give an example of an actual com- pany and discuss one or more potentially useful means of standardizing financial information:
a. Public utilities b. Large retailers c. Airlines d. Online services e. Hospitals f. University textbook publishers 11. (LO5) In recent years, several manufacturing companies have
reported the cash flow from the sale of Treasury securities in the cash from operations section of the statement of cash flows. What is in the problem with this practice? Is there any situation in which this practice would be acceptable?
12. (LO1) Suppose a company lengthens the time it takes to pay suppliers. How would this affect the statement of cash flows? How sustainable is the change in cash flows from this practice?
78 Part 2: Financial Statements and Long-Term Financial Planning
03Ross_Chapter03_4th.indd 7803Ross_Chapter03_4th.indd 78 12-11-27 12:0212-11-27 12:02
Questions and Problems 1. Calculating Liquidity Ratios (LO3) Carman Inc. has net working capital of $1,370, current liabilities of $3,720 and inventory
of $1,950. What is the current ratio? What is the quick ratio? 2. Calculating Profitability Ratios (LO3) Teulon Inc. has sales of $29 million, total assets of $17.5 million, and total debt of
$6.3 million. If the profit margin is 8 percent, what is net income? What is ROA? What is ROE? 3. Calculating the Average Collection Period (LO3) Grunthal Lumber Yard has a current accounts receivable balance of
$431,287. Credit sales for the year ended were $3,943,709. What is the receivables turnover? The days’ sales in receivables? How long did it take on average for credit customers to pay off their accounts during the past year?
4. Calculating Inventory Turnover (LO3) The Morden Corporation has ending inventory of $407,534, and cost of goods sold for the year just ended was $4,105,612. What is the inventory turnover? The days’ sales in inventory? How long on average did a unit of inventory sit on the shelf before it was sold?
5. Calculating Leverage Ratios (LO3) Plumas Inc. has a total debt ratio of 0.63. What is its debt–equity ratio? What is its equity multiplier?
6. Calculating Market Value Ratios (LO3) Manitou Corp. had additions to retained earnings for the year just ended of $430,000. The firm paid out $175,000 in cash dividends, and it has ending total equity of $5.3 million. If Bellanue currently has 210,000 shares of common stock outstanding, what are the earnings per share? Dividends per share? Book value per share? If the stock currently sells for $63 per share, what is the market-to-book ratio? The price–earnings ratio? If the company had sales of $4.5 million, what is the price–sales ratio?
7. Du Pont Identity (LO4) If Garson Rooters Inc. has an equity multiplier of 2.80, total asset turnover of 1.15, and a profit margin of 5.5 percent, what is its ROE?
8. Du Pont Identity (LO4) Glenboro Fire Prevention Corp. has a profit margin of 6.80 percent, total asset turnover of 1.95, and ROE of 18.27 percent. What is this firm’s debt–equity ratio?
9. Source and Uses of Cash (LO1) Based on the following information for Dauphin Corp., did cash go up or down? By how much? Classify each event as a source or use of cash.
Decrease in inventory $375 Decrease in accounts payable 190 Increase in notes payable 210 Increase in accounts receivable 105
10. Calculating Average Payables Period (LO3) For 2012, Hartney Inc. had a cost of goods sold of $28,834. At the end of the year, the account payable balance was $6,105. How long on average did it take the company to pay off its suppliers during the year? What might a large value for this ratio imply?
11. Cash Flow and Capital Spending (LO1) For the year just ended, Winkler Frozen Yogurt showed an increase in its net fixed assets account of $835. The company took $148 in depreciation expense for the year. How much did Winkler spend on new fixed assets? Is this a source or use of cash?
12. Equity Multiplier and Return on Equity (LO4) Bowsman Fried Chicken Company has a debt–equity ratio of 0.65. Return on assets is 8.5 percent, and total equity is $540,000. What is the equity multiplier? Net income? Return on equity?
Birtle Corporation reports the following statement of financial position information for 2011 and 2012. Use this information to work on Problems 13 through 17.
Birtle CORPORATION 2011 and 2012 Statement of Financial Position
Assets Liabilities and Owners’ Equity
2011 2012 2011 2012 Current assets Current liabilities Cash $ 8,436 $ 10,157 Accounts payable $ 43,050 $ 46,821 Accounts receivable 21,530 23,406 Notes payable 18,384 17,382 Inventory 38,760 42,650 Total $ 61,434 $ 64,203 Total $ 68,726 $ 76,213 Long-term debt $ 25,000 $ 32,000 Fixed assets Owners’ equity Net plant and equipment 226,706 248,306 Common stock and paid-in surplus $ 40,000 $ 40,000
Retained earnings 168,998 188,316 Total $ 208,998 $ 228,316
Total assets $ 295,432 $ 324,519 Total liabilities and owners’ equity $ 295,432 $ 324,519
13. Preparing Standardized Financial Statements (LO2) Prepare the 2011 and 2012 common-size statement of financial position for Birtle.
14. Preparing Standardized Financial Statements (LO2) Prepare the 2012 common-base-year statement of financial position for Birtle.
Basic (Questions
1–17)
3
7
CHAPTER 3: Working with Financial Statements 79
03Ross_Chapter03_4th.indd 7903Ross_Chapter03_4th.indd 79 12-11-27 12:0212-11-27 12:02
15. Preparing Standardized Financial Statements (LO2) Prepare the 2012 combined common-size, common-base-year statement of financial position for Birtle.
16. Sources and Uses of Cash (LO1) For each account on Birtle Corporation’s statement of financial position, show the change in the account during 2012 and note whether this change was a source or use of cash. Do your numbers add up and make sense? Explain your answer for total assets as compared to your answer for total liabilities and owners’ equity.
17. Calculating Financial Ratios (LO3) Based on the statement of financial position given for Birtle, calculate the following financial ratios for each year:
a. Current ratio b. Quick ratio c. Cash ratio d. NWC to total assets ratio e. Debt–equity ratio and equity multiplier f. Total debt ratio and long-term debt ratio
18. Using the Du Pont Identity (LO4) Ethelbert Inc. has sales of $5,276, total assets of $3,105, and a debt–equity ratio of 1.40. If its return on equity is 15 percent, what is its net income?
19. Days’ Sales in Receivables (LO3) Gunton Corp. has net income of $218,000, a profit margin of 8.70 percent, and an accounts receivable balance of $132,850. Assuming 70 percent of sales are on credit, what are the Gunton’s days’ sales in receivables?
20. Ratios and Fixed Assets (LO3) The Fortier Company has a long-term debt ratio of 0.45 and a current ratio of 1.25. Current liabilities are $875, sales are $5,780, profit margin is 9.5 percent, and ROE is 18.5 percent. What is the amount of the firm’s net fixed assets?
21. Profit Margin (LO5) In response to complaints about high prices, a grocery chain runs the following advertising campaign: “If you pay your child $3 to go buy $50 worth of groceries, then your child makes twice as much on the trip as we do.” You’ve collected the following information from the grocery chain’s financial statements:
(millions)
Sales $750 Net income $22.5 Total assets $420 Total debt $280
Evaluate the grocery chain’s claim. What is the basis for the statement? Is this claim misleading? Why or why not? 22. Return on Equity (LO3) Firm A and Firm B have total debt ratios of 35 percent and 30 percent and return on assets of
12 percent and 11 percent, respectively. Which firm has a greater return on equity? 23. Calculating the Cash Coverage Ratio (LO3) Brunkild Inc.’s net income for the most recent year was $13,168. The tax rate was
34 percent. The firm paid $3,605 in total interest expense and deducted $2,382 in depreciation expense. What was Giant’s cash coverage ratio for the year?
24. Cost of Goods Sold (LO3) Montcalm Corp. has current liabilities of $365,000, a quick ratio of 0.85, inventory turnover of 5.8, and a current ratio of 1.4. What is the cost of goods sold for the company?
25. Ratios and Foreign Companies (LO3) Wolseley PLC has a net loss of £13,482 on sales of £138,793 (both in thousands of pounds). Does the fact that these figures are quoted in a foreign currency make any difference? Why? What was the company’s profit margin? In dollars, sales were $274,213,000. What was the net loss in dollars?
Some recent financial statements for Earl Grey Golf Corp. follow. Use this information to work on problems 26 through 30. EARL GREY GOLF CORP.
2011 and 2012 Statement of Financial Position
Assets Liabilities and Owners’ Equity
2011 2012 2011 2012 Current assets Current liabilities Cash $ 21,860 $ 22,050 Accounts payable $ 19,320 $ 22,850 Accounts receivable 11,316 13,850 Notes payable 10,000 9,000 Inventory 23,084 24,650 Other 9,643 11,385 Total $ 56,260 $ 60,550 Total $ 38,963 $ 43,235 Fixed assets Long-term debt $ 75,000 $ 85,000 Net plant and equipment $ 234,068 $ 260,525 Owners’ equity Common stock
and paid-in surplus $ 25,000 $ 25,000
Retained earnings 151,365 167,840 Total $ 176,365 $ 192,840
Total assets $ 290,328 $ 321,075 Total liabilities and owners’ equity $ 290,328 $ 321,075
Intermediate (Questions
18–30)
80 Part 2: Financial Statements and Long-Term Financial Planning
03Ross_Chapter03_4th.indd 8003Ross_Chapter03_4th.indd 80 12-11-27 12:0212-11-27 12:02
EARL GREY GOLF CORP. 2012 Statement of Comprehensive Income
Sales $ 305,830 Cost of goods sold 210,935 Depreciation 26,850 Earnings before interest and tax $ 68,045 Interest paid 11,930 Taxable income $ 56,115 Taxes (35%) 19,640 Net Income $ 36,475 Dividends $ 20,000 Additions to retained earnings 16,475
26. Calculating Financial Ratios (LO3) Find the following financial ratios for Earl Grey Golf Corp. (use year-end figures rather than average values where appropriate):
Short-term solvency ratios a. Current ratio _____________________________ b. Quick ratio _____________________________ c. Cash ratio _____________________________
Asset utilization ratios d. Total asset turnover _____________________________ e. Inventory turnover _____________________________ f. Receivables turnover _____________________________
Long-term solvency ratios g. Total debt ratio _____________________________ h. Debt-equity ratio _____________________________ i. Equity multiplier _____________________________ j. Times interest earned ratio _____________________________ k. Cash coverage ratio _____________________________
Profitability ratios l. Profit margin _____________________________ m. Return on assets _____________________________ n. Return on equity _____________________________
27. Du Pont Identity (LO4) Construct the Du Pont identity for Earl Grey Golf Corp. 28. Calculating the Interval Measure (LO3) For how many days could Earl Grey Golf Corp. continue to operate if its cash inflows
were suddenly suspended? 29. Statement of Cash Flows (LO1) Prepare the 2012 statement of cash flows for Earl Grey Golf Corp. 30. Market Value Ratios (LO3) Earl Grey Golf Corp. has 25,000 shares of common stock outstanding, and the market price for a
share of stock at the end of 2012 was $43. What is the price-earnings ratio? What are the dividends per share? What is the market-to-book ratio at the end of 2012? If the company’s growth rate is 9 percent, what is the PEG ratio?
CHAPTER 3: Working with Financial Statements 81
03Ross_Chapter03_4th.indd 8103Ross_Chapter03_4th.indd 81 12-11-27 12:0212-11-27 12:02
Ed Cowan was recently hired by Tuxedo Air Inc. to assist the organization with its financial planning and to evaluate the organization’s performance. Ed graduated from university six years ago with a finance degree. He has been employed in the finance department of a TSX100 company since then. Tuxedo Air was founded 12 years ago by friends Mark Taylor and Jack Rodwell. The organization manufactured and sold light airplanes over this period, and its products have received high reviews for safety and reliability. The organization has a niche market in that it sells primarily to individuals who own and fly their own airplanes. The company has two models; the Sparrow, which sells for $53,000, and the Vulture, which sells for $78,000. Although the company manufactures aircraft, its opera- tions are different from commercial aircraft companies. Tux- edo Air builds aircraft to order. By using prefabricated parts, the organization can complete the manufacture of an airplane in only five weeks. The organization also receives a deposit on each order, as well as another partial payment before the or- der is complete. In contrast, a commercial airplane may take
one and one-half to two years to manufacture once the order is placed. Mark and Jack have provided the following financial state- ments. Ed has gathered the industry ratios for the light air- plane manufacturing industry.
Tuxedo Air Inc. 2012 Statement of Comprehensive Income
Sales $ 30,499,420 Cost of goods sold 22,224,580 Other expenses 3,867,500 Depreciation 1,366,680 EBIT $ 3,040,660 Interest 478,240 Taxable income $ 2,562,420 Taxes (40%) 1,024,968 Net income $ 1,537,452 Dividends $560,000 Add to retained earnings 977,452
Tuxedo Air Inc. 2012 Statement of Financial Position
Assets Liabilities and Equity Current Assets Current liabilities Cash $ 441,000 Accounts payable $ 889,000 Accounts receivable 708,400 Notes payable 2,030,000
Total current liabilities 2,919,000 Inventory 1,037,120 Total current assets $ 2,186,520 Long-term debt $ 5,320,000 Fixed assets Owners’ equity Net plant and equipment $ 16,122,400 Common stock $ 350,000
Retained earnings 9,719,920 Total equity $ 10,069,920
Total assets $ 18,308,920 Total liabilities and owners’ equity $ 18,308,920
Light Airplane Industry Ratios
Lower Quartile Median
Upper Quartile
Current ratio 0.50 1.43 1.89 Quick ratio 0.21 0.38 0.62 Cash ratio 0.08 0.21 0.39 Total asset turnover 0.68 0.85 1.38 Inventory turnover 4.89 6.15 10.89 Receivables turnover 6.27 9.82 14.11 Total debt ratio 0.44 0.52 0.61 Debt-equity ratio 0.79 1.08 1.56 Equity multiplier 1.79 2.08 2.56 Times interest earned 5.18 8.06 9.83 Cash coverage ratio 5.84 8.43 10.27 Profit margin 4.05% 6.98% 9.87% Return on assets 6.05% 10.53% 13.21% Return on equity 9.93% 16.54% 26.15%
Questions
1. Using the financial statements provided for Tuxedo Air, calculate each of the ratios listed in the table for the light aircraft industry.
2. Mark and Jack agree that a ratio analysis can provide a measure of the company’s performance. They have cho- sen Bombardier as an aspirant company. Would you choose Bombardier as an aspirant company? Why or why not? There are other aircraft manufacturers Tuxedo Air could use as aspirant companies. Discuss whether it is ap- propriate to use any of the following companies: Boeing, XOJET, Piper Aircraft, and AeroCentury.
3. Compare the performance of Tuxedo Air to the industry. For each ratio, comment on why it might be viewed as positive or negative relative to the industry. Suppose you create an inventory ratio calculated as inventory divided by current liabilities. How do you think Tuxedo Air would compare to the industry average?
MINI CASE
82 Part 2: Financial Statements and Long-Term Financial Planning
03Ross_Chapter03_4th.indd 8203Ross_Chapter03_4th.indd 82 12-11-27 12:0212-11-27 12:02
Internet Application Questions 1. Ratio analysis is a powerful tool in determining the quality of a firm’s liabilities. For example, bond rating agencies employ ratio
analysis in combination with other risk assessment tools to sort companies’ debt into risk categories. Higher risk debt typically carries higher yields. Go to Standard & Poor’s Canada (standardandpoors.com) and click on Ratings Action Press Release. How do financial ratios impact ratings?
2. DBRS (dbrs.com) employs a different rating scale for short-term and long-term debt. Which ratios do you think are important for rating short-term and long-term debt? Is it possible for a firm to get a high rating for short-term debt and a lower rating for long-term debt?
3. Many Canadian companies now provide online links to their financial statements. Try the following link to Shaw Communica- tions (shaw.ca/en-ca/InvestorRelations/FinancialReports/AnnualReports). How would you rate Shaw’s long-term debt based on the criteria employed by DBRS?
4. Find the most recent financial statements for Loblaws at loblaw.com and for Husky Energy at huskyenergy.com. Calculate the asset utilization ratio for these two companies. What does this ratio measure? Is the ratio similar for both companies? Why or why not?
5. Find the most recent financial statements for Metro Inc. at metro.ca. a) Identify three of Metro’s competitors and obtain the most recent financial statements from their company website. Briefly
mention the reason for choosing these competitors. b) Refer to Table 3.8 and calculate the ratio for these companies. c) Analyze how Metro Inc. is faring against these competitors after calculating these ratios. d) Calculate two non-standard ratios—Number of stores per square foot and number of sales per store. Analyze how each
company is faring against each other in these ratios. (Refer to Management Discussion & Analysis part of the Annual Report for answering this question)
CHAPTER 3: Working with Financial Statements 83
03Ross_Chapter03_4th.indd 8303Ross_Chapter03_4th.indd 83 12-11-27 12:0212-11-27 12:02
A lack of effective long-range planning is a commonly cited reason for fi nancial distress and failure. Th is is especially true for small businesses—a sector vital to the creation of future jobs in Canada. As we develop in this chapter, long-range planning is a means of systematically thinking about the future and anticipating possible problems before they arrive. Th ere are no magic mir- rors, of course, so the best we can hope for is a logical and organized procedure for exploring the unknown. As one member of General Motors Corporation’s board was heard to say, “Planning is a process that at best helps the fi rm avoid stumbling into the future backwards.”
Financial planning establishes guidelines for change and growth in a fi rm. It normally focuses on the “big picture.” Th is means it is concerned with the major elements of a fi rm’s fi nancial and investment policies without examining the individual components of those policies in detail.
Our primary goals in this chapter are to discuss fi nancial planning and to illustrate the inter- relatedness of the various investment and fi nancing decisions that a fi rm makes. In the chapters ahead, we examine in much more detail how these decisions are made.
We begin by describing what is usually meant by fi nancial planning. For the most part, we talk about long-term planning. Short-term fi nancial planning is discussed in Chapter 18. We examine what the fi rm can accomplish by developing a long-term fi nancial plan. To do this, we develop a simple, but very useful, long-range planning technique: the percentage of sales approach. We describe how to apply this approach in some simple cases, and we discuss some extensions.
To develop an explicit fi nancial plan, management must establish certain elements of the fi rm’s fi nancial policy. Th ese basic policy elements of fi nancial planning are:
gm.ca
LONG-TERM FINANCIAL PLANNING AND CORPORATE GROWTH
C H A P T E R 4
I n 2011, Bank of Nova Scotia, Canada’s third largest bank by assets, acquired an almost 20% stake in Bank of Guangzhou for about C$719 million,
expanding its presence in China. Bank of Guangzhou
is the 29th largest bank in China by assets and has
84 branches around Guangzhou, the country’s third
richest city behind Shanghai and Beijing.
Scotiabank has a long history of acquiring small
stakes in foreign banks that usually increase over
time. This is a key part of Scotiabank’s long term
strategy for growth. “These are all consumers that
are going to want to buy houses and buy cars, and
that’s good for banking generally. It fits in the same
footprint and same basis that we made investments
in Central America and Latin America,” Brian Porter,
Scotiabank’s group head of international banking,
said in an interview. Acquisitions and the issuance of
securities are both components of long-term finan-
cial planning and growth, which will be discussed in
this chapter.
Learning Object ives
After studying this chapter, you should understand:
LO1 The objectives and goals of financial planning.
LO2 How to compute the external financing needed to fund a firm’s growth.
LO3 How to apply the percentage of sales method.
LO4 The factors determining the growth of the firm.
LO5 How to compute the sustainable and internal growth rates.
LO6 Some of the problems in planning for growth.
C ou
rt es
y of
Sc
ot ia
ba nk
04Ross_Chapter04_4th.indd 8404Ross_Chapter04_4th.indd 84 12-11-27 12:0312-11-27 12:03
1. The firm’s needed investment in new assets. This arises from the investment opportunities that the firm chooses to undertake, and it is the result of the firm’s capital budgeting decisions.
2. The degree of financial leverage the firm chooses to employ. This determines the amount of borrowing the firm uses to finance its investments in real assets. This is the firm’s capital structure policy.
3. The amount of cash the firm thinks is necessary and appropriate to pay shareholders. This is the firm’s dividend policy.
4. The amount of liquidity and working capital the firm needs on an ongoing basis. This is the firm’s net working capital decision.
As we shall see, the decisions that a fi rm makes in these four areas directly aff ect its future profi t- ability, its need for external fi nancing, and its opportunities for growth.
A key lesson from this chapter is that the fi rm’s investment and fi nancing policies interact and thus cannot truly be considered in isolation from one another. Th e types and amounts of assets that the fi rm plans on purchasing must be considered along with the fi rm’s ability to raise the necessary capital to fund those investments.
Financial planning forces the corporation to think about goals. A goal frequently espoused by corporations is growth, and almost all fi rms use an explicit, company-wide growth rate as a major component of their long-run fi nancial planning. In January 2011, Bank of Montreal acquired a Hong Kong based wealth management fi rm, Lloyd George Management. By increasing its pres- ence in China’s fast growing fi nancial sector, BMO sought to expand the bank’s wealth manage- ment division through tapping attractive growth opportunities in China’s emerging market. Th is strategy shows that growth is an important goal for most large companies.
Th ere are direct connections between the growth that a company can achieve and its fi nancial policy. In the following sections, we show that fi nancial planning models can help you better understand how growth is achieved. We also show how such models can be used to establish limits on possible growth. Th is analysis can help companies avoid the sometimes fatal mistake of growing too fast.
4.1 What Is Financial Planning?
Financial planning formulates the way fi nancial goals are to be achieved. A fi nancial plan is thus a statement of what is to be done in the future. Most decisions have long lead times, which means they take a long time to implement. In an uncertain world, this requires that decisions be made far in advance of their implementation. A fi rm that wants to build a factory in 2014, for example, might have to begin lining up contractors and fi nancing in 2012, or even earlier.
Growth as a Financial Management Goal Because we discuss the subject of growth in various places in this chapter, we start out with an important warning: Growth, by itself, is not an appropriate goal for the fi nancial manager. In fact, as we have seen, rapid growth isn’t always good for a fi rm. Cott Corp., a Toronto-based bottler of private-label soft drinks, is another example of what happens when a fi rm grows too fast. Th e com- pany aggressively marketed its soft drinks in the early 1990s, and sales exploded. However, despite its growth in sales, the company lost $29.4 million for the fi scal year ended January 27, 1996.
Cott’s pains included the following: (1) aluminum prices rose; (2) the fi rm faced price competi- tion; (3) costs surged as Cott built corporate infrastructure in anticipation of becoming a much bigger company; and (4) the fi rm botched expansion into the United Kingdom. Cott quickly grabbed a 25 percent market share by undercutting the big brands, but then had to hire an outside bottler at a cost much higher than the cost of bottling in its own plants to meet the demand. Half the cases sold in the United Kingdom in 1995 were sold below cost, bringing a loss to the com- pany as a whole. Cott is now focusing on slower growth while keeping a line on operating costs.
As we discussed in Chapter 1, the appropriate goal is increasing the market value of the owners’ equity. Of course, if a fi rm is successful in doing this, growth usually results. Growth may thus be a desirable consequence of good decision making, but it is not an end unto itself. We discuss growth simply because growth rates are so commonly used in the planning process. As we see, growth is
bmo.com
cott.com
CHAPTER 4: Long-Term Financial Planning and Corporate Growth 85
04Ross_Chapter04_4th.indd 8504Ross_Chapter04_4th.indd 85 12-11-27 12:0312-11-27 12:03
a convenient means of summarizing various aspects of a fi rm’s fi nancial and investment policies. Also, if we think of growth as growth in the market value of the equity in the fi rm, then the goals of growth and increasing the market value of the equity in the fi rm are not all that diff erent.
Dimensions of Financial Planning It is oft en useful for planning purposes to think of the future as having a short run and a long run. Th e short run, in practice, is usually the coming 12 months. We focus our attention on fi nancial planning over the long run, which is usually taken to be the coming two to fi ve years. Th is is called the planning horizon, and it is the fi rst dimension of the planning process that must be established.1
In drawing up a fi nancial plan, all of the individual projects and investments that the fi rm undertakes are combined to determine the total needed investment. In eff ect, the smaller invest- ment proposals of each operational unit are added up and treated as one big project. Th is process is called aggregation. Th is is the second dimension of the planning process.
Once the planning horizon and level of aggregation are established, a fi nancial plan would need inputs in the form of alternative sets of assumptions about important variables. For example, suppose a company has two separate divisions: one for consumer products and one for gas turbine engines. Th e fi nancial planning process might require each division to prepare three alternative business plans for the next three years.
1. A worst case. This plan would require making relatively pessimistic assumptions about the company’s products and the state of the economy. This kind of disaster planning would em- phasize a division’s ability to withstand significant economic adversity, and it would require details concerning cost cutting, and even divestiture and liquidation. For example, the bot- tom was dropping out of the PC market in 2001. That left big manufacturers like Compaq, Dell, and Gateway locked in a price war, fighting for market share at a time when sales were stagnant.
2. A normal case. This plan would require making the most likely assumptions about the com- pany and the economy.
3. A best case. Each division would be required to work out a case based on optimistic assump- tions. It could involve new products and expansion and would then detail the financing needed to fund the expansion.
In this example, business activities are aggregated along divisional lines and the planning horizon is three years. Th is type of planning, which considers all possible events, is particularly important for cyclical businesses (businesses with sales that are strongly aff ected by the overall state of the economy or business cycles). For example, in 2006 New York-based investment bank, Lehman Brothers predicted corporate earnings growth of 7% in the next year. Even though the company posted record earnings in 2007, the next year turned out completely diff erent. Just to show you how hard it is to predict the future, Lehman Brothers fi led for bankruptcy in 2008 as the fi nan- cial crisis took hold. Th e company’s investment banking and trading division in North America was acquired by Barclays and the company’s franchise in the Asia-Pacifi c region was acquired by Nomura Holdings. In March 2012, Lehman emerged from bankruptcy and will operate as a liqui- dating company for a few years to pay back around $65 billion to creditors and investors.
What Can Planning Accomplish? Because the company is likely to spend a lot of time examining the diff erent scenarios that could become the basis for the company’s fi nancial plan, it seems reasonable to ask what the planning process will accomplish.
EXAMINING INTERACTIONS As we discuss in greater detail later, the financial plan must make explicit the linkages between investment proposals for the different operating activi- ties of the firm and the financing choices available to the firm. In other words, if the firm is plan- ning on expanding and undertaking new investments and projects, where will the financing be obtained to pay for this activity?
1 The techniques we present can also be used for short-term financial planning.
planning horizon The long-range time period the financial planning process focuses on, usually the next two to five years.
aggregation The process by which smaller investment proposals of each of a firm’s operational units are added up and treated as one big project.
86 Part 2: Financial Statements and Long-Term Financial Planning
04Ross_Chapter04_4th.indd 8604Ross_Chapter04_4th.indd 86 12-11-27 12:0312-11-27 12:03
EXPLORING OPTIONS The financial plan provides the opportunity for the firm to develop, analyze, and compare many different scenarios in a consistent way. Various investment and financing options can be explored, and their impact on the firm’s shareholders can be evaluated. Questions concerning the firm’s future lines of business and questions of what financing arrangements are opti- mal are addressed. Options such as marketing new products or closing plants might be evaluated. As Research in Motion (RIM) shares plunged in 2012, the company explored several options including shifting its focus from smart phones to tablets and possibly selling some divisions.
AVOIDING SURPRISES Financial planning should identify what may happen to the firm if different events take place. In particular, it should address what actions the firm would take if things go seriously wrong or, more generally, if assumptions made today about the future are seriously in error. Thus, one of the purposes of financial planning is to avoid surprises and develop contingency plans. For example, at the end of June 2011, quarterly net income of Toyota fell to $14 million from $2.5 billion due to the massive earthquake and tsunami in Japan.2 The quake disrupted production and came on top of Toyota’s problems in recovering from massive recalls in 2010. Thus, a lack of planning for sales growth can be a problem for even the biggest companies.
ENSURING FEASIBILITY AND INTERNAL CONSISTENCY Beyond a specific goal of creating value, a firm normally has many specific goals. Such goals might be couched in market share, return on equity, financial leverage, and so on. At times, the linkages between dif- ferent goals and different aspects of a firm’s business are difficult to see. Not only does a financial plan make explicit these linkages, but it also imposes a unified structure for reconciling differing goals and objectives. In other words, financial planning is a way of checking that the goals and plans made with regard to specific areas of a firm’s operations are feasible and internally consis- tent. Conflicting goals often exist. To generate a coherent plan, goals and objectives have to be modified therefore, and priorities have to be established.
For example, one goal a fi rm might have is 12 percent growth in unit sales per year. Another goal might be to reduce the fi rm’s total debt ratio from 40 percent to 20 percent. Are these two goals compatible? Can they be accomplished simultaneously? Maybe yes, maybe no. As we dis- cuss later, fi nancial planning is a way of fi nding out just what is possible, and, by implication, what is not possible.
Th e fact that planning forces management to think about goals and to establish priorities is probably the most important result of the process. In fact, conventional business wisdom says that plans can’t work, but planning does. Th e future is inherently unknown. What we can do is estab- lish the direction that we want to travel in and take some educated guesses about what we will fi nd along the way. If we do a good job, we won’t be caught off guard when the future rolls around.
COMMUNICATION WITH INVESTORS AND LENDERS Our discussion to this point has tried to convince you that financial planning is essential to good management. Because good management controls the riskiness of a firm, equity investors and lenders are very interested in studying a firm’s financial plan. As discussed in Chapter 15, securities regulators require that firms issuing new shares or debt file a detailed financial plan as part of the prospectus describing the new issue. For example, Aureus Mining Inc. filed a prospectus3 on April 20, 2011, providing a detailed financial plan for the use of proceeds to be raised through its initial public offer. Char- tered banks and other financial institutions that make loans to businesses almost always require prospective borrowers to provide a financial plan. In small businesses with limited resources for planning, pressure from lenders is often the main motivator for engaging in financial planning.
1. What are the two dimensions of the financial planning process?
2. Why should firms draw up financial plans?
2 money.cnn.com/2011/08/02/news/international/toyota/index.htm 3 The Company’s prospectus can be accessed from the website sedar.com.
Concept Questions
CHAPTER 4: Long-Term Financial Planning and Corporate Growth 87
04Ross_Chapter04_4th.indd 8704Ross_Chapter04_4th.indd 87 12-11-27 12:0312-11-27 12:03
4.2 Financial Planning Models: A First Look
Just as companies diff er in size and products, the fi nancial planning process diff ers from fi rm to fi rm. In this section, we discuss some common elements in fi nancial plans and develop a basic model to illustrate these elements.
A Financial Planning Model: The Ingredients Most fi nancial planning models require the user to specify some assumptions about the future. Based on those assumptions, the model generates predicted values for a large number of variables. Models can vary quite a bit in their complexity, but almost all would have the following elements:
SALES FORECAST Almost all financial plans require an externally supplied sales forecast. In the models that follow, for example, the sales forecast is the driver, meaning that the user of the planning model supplies this value and all other values are calculated based on it. This arrange- ment would be common for many types of business; planning focuses on projected future sales and the assets and financing needed to support those sales.
Frequently, the sales forecast is given as a growth rate in sales rather than as an explicit sales fi gure. Th ese two approaches are essentially the same because we can calculate projected sales once we know the growth rate. Perfect sales forecasts are not possible, of course, because sales depend on the uncertain future state of the economy and on industry conditions.
For example, at the time of writing in winter 2012, Canadian commodity producers are revisit- ing their sales forecasts in light of the European debt crisis and possible slowdown in China. To help fi rms come up with such projections, some economic consulting fi rms specialize in macro- economic and industry projections. Economic and industry forecasts are also available on data- bases such as IHS Global Insight.
As we discussed earlier, we are frequently interested in evaluating alternative scenarios even though the sales forecast may not be accurate due to unforeseen events. Our goal is to examine the interplay between investment and fi nancing needs at diff erent possible sales levels, not to pinpoint what we expect to happen.
PRO FORMA STATEMENTS A financial plan has forecasted statements of comprehen- sive income and financial position, and a statement of cash flows. These are called pro forma statements, or pro formas for short. The phrase pro forma literally means “as a matter of form.” This means that the financial statements are the forms we use to summarize the different events projected for the future. At a minimum, a financial planning model generates these statements based on projections of key items such as sales.
In the planning models we describe later, the pro formas are the output from the fi nancial planning model. Th e user supplies a sales fi gure, and the model generates the resulting statements of comprehensive income and fi nancial position.
ASSET REQUIREMENTS The plan describes projected capital spending. At a minimum, the projected statements of financial position contain changes in total fixed assets and net working capital. These changes are effectively the firm’s total capital budget. Proposed capital spending in different areas must thus be reconciled with the overall increases contained in the long-range plan.
FINANCIAL REQUIREMENTS The plan includes a section on the financial arrange- ments that are necessary. This part of the plan should discuss dividend policy and debt policy. Sometimes firms expect to raise cash by selling new shares of stock or by borrowing. Then, the plan has to spell out what kinds of securities have to be sold and what methods of issuance are most appropriate. These are subjects we consider in Part 6 when we discuss long-term financing, capital structure, and dividend policy.
CASH SURPLUS OR SHORTFALL After the firm has a sales forecast and an estimate of the required spending on assets, some amount of new financing is often necessary because projected total assets exceed projected total liabilities and equity. In other words, the statement of financial position no longer balances.
Because new fi nancing may be necessary to cover all the projected capital spending, a fi nancial “plug” variable must be designated. Th e cash surplus or shortfall (also called the “plug”) is the
Spreadsheets to use for pro forma statements can be obtained at jaxworks.com
88 Part 2: Financial Statements and Long-Term Financial Planning
04Ross_Chapter04_4th.indd 8804Ross_Chapter04_4th.indd 88 12-11-27 12:0312-11-27 12:03
designated source or sources of external fi nancing needed to deal with any shortfall (or surplus) in fi nancing and thereby to bring the statement of fi nancial position into balance.
For example, a fi rm with a great number of investment opportunities and limited cash fl ow may have to raise new equity. Other fi rms with few growth opportunities and ample cash fl ow have a surplus and thus might pay an extra dividend. In the fi rst case, external equity is the plug variable. In the second, the dividend is used.
ECONOMIC ASSUMPTIONS The plan has to explicitly describe the economic environ- ment in which the firm expects to reside over the life of the plan. Among the more important economic assumptions that have to be made are the level of interest rates and the firm’s tax rate, as well as sales forecasts, as discussed earlier.
A Simple Financial Planning Model We begin our discussion of long-term planning models with a relatively simple example.4 Th e Computerfi eld Corporation’s fi nancial statements from the most recent year are as follows:
COMPUTERFIELD CORPORATION Financial Statements
Statement of Comprehensive Income Statement of Financial Position
Sales $ 1,000 Assets $500 Debt $ 250 Costs 800 Equity 250 Net income $ 200 Total $500 Total $ 500
Unless otherwise stated, the fi nancial planners at Computerfi eld assume that all variables are tied directly to sales and that current relationships are optimal. Th is means that all items grow at exactly the same rate as sales. Th is is obviously oversimplifi ed; we use this assumption only to make a point.
Suppose that sales increase by 20 percent, rising from $1,000 to $1,200. Th en planners would also forecast a 20 percent increase in costs, from $800 to $800 × 1.2 = $960. Th e pro forma state- ment of comprehensive income would thus be:
PRO FORMA Statement of Comprehensive Income
Sales $ 1,200 Costs 960 Net income $ 240
Th e assumption that all variables would grow by 20 percent enables us to easily construct the pro forma statement of fi nancial position as well:
PRO FORMA STATEMENT OF FINANCIAL POSITION
Assets $600 (+100) Debt $ 300 (+50) Equity 300 (+50)
Total $600 (+100) Total $ 600 (+100)
Notice that we have simply increased every item by 20 percent. Th e numbers in parentheses are the dollar changes for the diff erent items.
Now we have to reconcile these two pro formas. How, for example, can net income be equal to $240 and equity increase by only $50? Th e answer is that Computerfi eld must have paid out the diff erence of $240 - 50 = $190, possibly as a cash dividend. In this case, dividends are the plug variable.
Suppose Computerfi eld does not pay out the $190. Here, the addition to retained earnings is the full $240. Computerfi eld’s equity thus grows to $250 (the starting amount) + 240 (net income) = $490, and debt must be retired to keep total assets equal to $600.
With $600 in total assets and $490 in equity, debt has to be $600 - 490 = $110. Since we started with $250 in debt, Computerfi eld has to retire $250 - 110 = $140 in debt. Th e resulting pro forma statement of fi nancial position would look like this:
4 Computer spreadsheets are the standard way to execute this and the other examples we present. Appendix 10B gives an overview of spreadsheets and how they are used in planning with capital budgeting as the application.
CHAPTER 4: Long-Term Financial Planning and Corporate Growth 89
04Ross_Chapter04_4th.indd 8904Ross_Chapter04_4th.indd 89 12-11-27 12:0312-11-27 12:03
PRO FORMA STATEMENT OF FINANCIAL POSITION
Assets $600 (+100) Debt $ 110 (-140) Equity 490 (+240)
Total $600 (+100) Total $ 600 (+100)
In this case, debt is the plug variable used to balance out projected total assets and liabilities. Th is example shows the interaction between sales growth and fi nancial policy. As sales increase,
so do total assets. Th is occurs because the fi rm must invest in net working capital and fi xed assets to support higher sales levels. Since assets are growing, total liabilities and equity, the right-hand side of the statement of fi nancial position, grow as well.
Th e thing to notice from our simple example is that the way the liabilities and owners’ equity change depends on the fi rm’s fi nancing policy and its dividend policy. Th e growth in assets requires that the fi rm decide on how to fi nance that growth. Th is is strictly a managerial decision. Also, in our example the fi rm needed no outside funds. As this isn’t usually the case, we explore a more detailed situation in the next section.
1. What are the basic concepts of a financial plan?
2. Why is it necessary to designate a plug in a financial planning model?
4.3 The Percentage of Sales Approach
In the previous section, we described a simple planning model in which every item increased at the same rate as sales. Th is may be a reasonable assumption for some elements. For others, such as long-term borrowing, it probably is not, because the amount of long-term borrowing is some- thing set by management, and it does not necessarily relate directly to the level of sales.
In this section, we describe an extended version of our simple model. Th e basic idea is to sepa- rate the items on the statements of comprehensive income and fi nancial position into two groups, those that do vary directly with sales and those that do not. Given a sales forecast, we are able to calculate how much fi nancing the fi rm needs to support the predicted sales level.
An I l lustration of the Percentage of Sales Approach Th e fi nancial planning model we describe next is based on the percentage of sales approach.
Our goal here is to develop a quick and practical way of generating pro forma statements. We defer discussion of some bells and whistles to a later section.
THE STATEMENT OF COMPREHENSIVE INCOME We start with the most re- cent statement of comprehensive income for the Rosengarten Corporation, as shown in Table 4.1. Notice that we have still simplified things by including costs, depreciation, and interest in a single cost figure.
Rosengarten has projected a 25 percent increase in sales for the coming year, so we are antici- pating sales of $1,000 × 1.25 = $1,250. To generate a pro forma statement of comprehensive income, we assume that total costs continue to run at $800/$1,000 = 80% of sales. With this assumption, Rosengarten’s pro forma statement is as shown in Table 4.2. Th e eff ect here of assum- ing that costs are a constant percentage of sales is to assume that the profi t margin is constant. To check this, notice that the profi t margin was $132/$1,000 = 13.2%. In our pro forma, the profi t margin is $165/$1,250 = 13.2%; so it is unchanged. Next, we need to project the dividend payment. Th is amount is up to Rosengarten’s management. We assume that Rosengarten has a policy of paying out a constant fraction of net income in the form of a cash dividend. From the most recent year, the dividend payout ratio was:
Dividend payout ratio = Cash dividends/Net income [4.1] = $44/$132 = 33 1/3%
Concept Questions
percentage of sales approach Financial planning method in which accounts are projected depending on a firm’s predicted sales level.
dividend payout ratio Amount of cash paid out to shareholders divided by net income.
90 Part 2: Financial Statements and Long-Term Financial Planning
04Ross_Chapter04_4th.indd 9004Ross_Chapter04_4th.indd 90 12-11-27 12:0312-11-27 12:03
TABLE 4.1
ROSENGARTEN CORPORATION Statement of Comprehensive Income
Sales $ 1,000 Costs 800 Taxable income $ 200 Taxes 68 Net income $ 132 Addition to retained earnings $88 Dividends $44
TABLE 4.2
ROSENGARTEN CORPORATION Pro Forma Statement of Comprehensive Income
Sales (projected) $ 1,250 Costs (80% of sales) 1,000 Taxable income $ 250 Taxes 85 Net income $ 165
We can also calculate the ratio of the addition to retained earnings to net income as:
Retained earnings/Net income = $88/$132 = 66 2/3%
Th is ratio is called the retention ratio or plowback ratio, and it is equal to 1 minus the dividend payout ratio because everything not paid out is retained. Assuming that the payout and retention ratios are constant, the projected dividends and addition to retained earnings would be:
Projected addition to retained earnings = $165 × 2/3 = $110 Projected dividends paid to shareholders = $165 × 1/3 = 55 Net income $165
THE STATEMENT OF FINANCIAL POSITION To generate a pro forma statement of financial position, we start with the most recent statement in Table 4.3. On our statement, we assume that some of the items vary directly with sales, while others do not. For those items that do vary with sales, we express each as a percentage of sales for the year just completed. When an item does not vary directly with sales, we write “n/a” for “not applicable.”
For example, on the asset side, inventory is equal to 60 percent of sales ($600/$1,000) for the year just ended. We assume that this percentage applies to the coming year, so for each $1 increase in sales, inventory rises by $.60. More generally, the ratio of total assets to sales for the year just ended is $3,000/$1,000 = 3, or 300%.
Th is ratio of total assets to sales is sometimes called the capital intensity ratio. It tells us the assets needed to generate $1 in sales; so the higher the ratio is, the more capital intensive is the fi rm. Notice also that this ratio is just the reciprocal of the total asset turnover ratio we defi ned in the last chapter. For Rosengarten, assuming this ratio is constant, it takes $3 in total assets to generate $1 in sales (apparently Rosengarten is in a relatively capital intensive business). Th erefore, if sales are to increase by $100, Rosengarten has to increase total assets by three times this amount, or $300.
On the liability side of the statement of fi nancial position, we show accounts payable varying with sales. Th e reason is that we expect to place more orders with our suppliers as sales volume increases, so payables should change spontaneously with sales. Notes payable, on the other hand, represent short-term debt such as bank borrowing. Th ese would not vary unless we take specifi c actions to change the amount, so we mark them as n/a.
Similarly, we use n/a for long-term debt because it won’t automatically change with sales. Th e same is true for common stock. Th e last item on the right-hand side, retained earnings, varies with sales, but it won’t be a simple percentage of sales. Instead, we explicitly calculate the change in retained earnings based on our projected net income and dividends.
We can now construct a partial pro forma statement of fi nancial position for Rosengarten. We do this by using the percentages we calculated earlier wherever possible to calculate the projected amounts. For example, fi xed assets are 180 percent of sales; so, with a new sales level of $1,250, the fi xed asset amount is 1.80 × $1,250 = $2,250, an increase of $2,250 - 1,800 = $450 in plant and equipment. Importantly, for those items that don’t vary directly with sales, we initially assume no change and simply write in the original amounts. Th e result is the pro forma statement of fi nancial position in Table 4.4. Notice that the change in retained earnings is equal to the $110 addition to retained earnings that we calculated earlier.
retention ratio or plowback ratio Retained earnings divided by net income.
capital intensity ratio A firm’s total assets divided by its sales, or the amount of assets needed to generate $1 in sales.
CHAPTER 4: Long-Term Financial Planning and Corporate Growth 91
04Ross_Chapter04_4th.indd 9104Ross_Chapter04_4th.indd 91 12-11-27 12:0312-11-27 12:03
TABLE 4.3
ROSENGARTEN CORPORATION Partial Pro Forma Statement of Financial Position
($) (%) ($) (%)
Assets Liabilities and Owners’ Equity Current assets Current liabilities Cash $ 160 16% Accounts payable $ 300 30% Accounts receivable 440 44 Notes payable 100 n/a Inventory 600 60 Total $ 400 n/a Total $ 1,200 120%
Long-term debt $ 800 n/a Fixed assets Owners’ equity Net plant and equipment $ 1,800 180% Common stock $ 800 n/a
Retained earnings 1,000 n/a Total $ 1,800 n/a
Total assets $ 3,000 300% Total liabilities and owners’ equity $ 3,000 n/a
Inspecting our pro forma statement of fi nancial position, we notice that assets are projected to increase by $750. However, without additional fi nancing, liabilities and equity only increase by $185, leaving a shortfall of $750 - 185 = $565. We label this amount external fi nancing needed (EFN).
FULL-CAPACITY SCENARIO Our financial planning model now reminds us of one of those good news/bad news jokes. The good news is that we’re projecting a 25 percent increase in sales. The bad news is that this isn’t going to happen unless we can somehow raise $565 in new financing.
Th is is a good example of how the planning process can point out problems and potential confl icts. If, for example, Rosengarten has a goal of not borrowing any additional funds and not selling any new equity, a 25 percent increase in sales is probably not feasible.
When we take the need for $565 in new fi nancing as a given, Rosengarten has three possible sources: short-term borrowing, long-term borrowing, and new equity. Th e choice of a combina- tion among these three is up to management; we illustrate only one of the many possibilities.
TABLE 4.4
ROSENGARTEN CORPORATION Partial Pro Forma Statement of Financial Position
Present Year
Change from Previous Year
Present Year
Change from Previous Year
Assets Liabilities and Owners’ Equity Current assets Current liabilities Cash $ 200 $ 40 Accounts payable $ 375 $ 75 Accounts receivable 550 110 Notes payable 100 0
Total $ 475 $ 75 Inventory 750 150 Total $ 1,500 $ 300 Long-term debt $ 800 $ 0 Fixed assets Owners’ equity Net plant and equipment $ 2,250 $ 450 Common stock $ 800 $ 0
Retained earnings 1,110 110 Total $ 1,910 $ 110
Total assets $ 3,750 $ 750 Total liabilities and owners’ equity $ 3,185 $ 185 External financing needed $ 565
external financing needed (EFN) The amount of financing required to balance both sides of the statement of financial position.
92 Part 2: Financial Statements and Long-Term Financial Planning
04Ross_Chapter04_4th.indd 9204Ross_Chapter04_4th.indd 92 12-11-27 12:0312-11-27 12:03
TABLE 4.5
ROSENGARTEN CORPORATION Pro Forma Statement of Financial Position
Present Year
Change from Previous Year
Present Year
Change from Previous Year
Assets Liabilities and Owners’ Equity Current assets Current liabilities Cash $ 200 $ 40 Accounts payable $ 375 $ 75 Accounts receivable 550 110 Notes payable 325 225
Total $ 700 $ 300 Inventory 750 150 Long-term debt $ 1,140 $ 340 Total $ 1,500 $ 300 Owners’ equity Fixed assets Common stock $ 800 $ 0 Net plant and equipment $ 2,250 $ 450 Retained earnings 1,110 110
Total $ 1,910 $ 110 Total assets $ 3,750 $ 750 Total liabilities and owners’ equity $ 3,750 $ 750
Suppose that Rosengarten decides to borrow the needed funds. Th e fi rm might choose to bor- row some short-term and some long-term. For example, current assets increased by $300 while current liabilities rose by only $75. Rosengarten could borrow $300 - 75 = $225 in short-term notes payable in the form of a loan from a chartered bank. Th is would leave total net working capital unchanged. With $565 needed, the remaining $565 - 225 = $340 would have to come from long-term debt. Two examples of long-term debt discussed in Chapter 15 are a bond issue and a term loan from a chartered bank or insurance company. Table 4.5 shows the completed pro forma statement of fi nancial position for Rosengarten. Even though we used a combination of short- and long-term debt as the plug here, we emphasize that this is just one possible strategy; it is not necessarily the best one by any means. Th ere are many other scenarios that we could (and should) investigate. Th e various ratios we discussed in Chapter 3 come in very handy here. For example, with the scenario we have just examined, we would surely want to examine the current ratio and the total debt ratio to see if we were comfort- able with the new projected debt levels.
Now that we have fi nished our statement of fi nancial position, we have all of the projected sources and uses of cash. We could fi nish off our pro formas by drawing up the projected state- ment of changes in fi nancial position along the lines discussed in Chapter 3. We leave this as an exercise and instead investigate an important alternative scenario.
EXCESS CAPACITY SCENARIO The assumption that assets are a fixed percentage of sales is convenient, but it may not be suitable in many cases. For example, we effectively assumed that Rosengarten was using its fixed assets at 100 percent of capacity because any increase in sales led to an increase in fixed assets. For most businesses, there would be some slack or excess capac- ity, and production could be increased by, perhaps, running an extra shift. For example, Bombar- dier’s wheelset operation centre began in operation in 2011 at Siegen in Germany. Th e company plans to use the excess capacity of the centre to serve wider markets in Europe.
If we assume that Rosengarten is only operating at 70 percent of capacity, the need for external funds would be quite diff erent. By 70 percent of capacity, we mean that the current sales level is 70 percent of the full capacity sales level:
Current sales = $1,000 = .70 × Full capacity sales Full capacity sales = $1,000/.70 = $1,429
Th is tells us that sales could increase by almost 43 percent—from $1,000 to $1,429—before any new fi xed assets were needed.
In our previous scenario, we assumed it would be necessary to add $450 in net fi xed assets. In the current scenario, no spending on net fi xed assets is needed, because sales are projected to rise to $1,250, which is substantially less than the $1,429 full capacity level.
CHAPTER 4: Long-Term Financial Planning and Corporate Growth 93
04Ross_Chapter04_4th.indd 9304Ross_Chapter04_4th.indd 93 12-11-27 12:0312-11-27 12:03
As a result, our original estimate of $565 in external funds needed is too high. We estimated that $450 in net new fi xed assets would be needed. Instead, no spending on new net fi xed assets is necessary. Th us, if we are currently operating at 70 percent capacity, we only need $565 - 450 = $115 in external funds. Th e excess capacity thus makes a considerable diff erence in our projections.
Th ese alternative scenarios illustrate that it is inappropriate to manipulate fi nancial statement information blindly in the planning process. Th e output of any model is only as good as the input assumptions or, as is said in the computer fi eld, GIGO: garbage in, garbage out. Results depend critically on the assumptions made about the relationships between sales and asset needs. We return to this point later.
EXAMPLE 4.1: EFN and Capacity Usage
Suppose Rosengarten were operating at 90 percent capac- ity. What would be sales at full capacity? What is the capital intensity ratio at full capacity? What is EFN in this case?
Full capacity sales would be $1,000/.90 = $1,111. From Table 4.3, fixed assets are $1,800. At full capacity, the ratio of fixed assets to sales is thus:
Fixed assets/Full capacity sales = $1,800/$1,111 = 1.62
This tells us that we need $1.62 in fixed assets for every $1 in sales once we reach full capacity. At the projected sales
level of $1,250, we need $1,250 × 1.62 = $2,025 in fixed assets. Compared to the $2,250 we originally projected, this is $225 less, so EFN is $565 - 225 = $340.
Current assets would still be $1,500, so total assets would be $1,500 + 2,025 = $3,525. The capital intensity ratio would thus be $3,525/$1,250 = 2.82, less than our original value of 3 because of the excess capacity. See Table 4.6 for a partial pro forma statement of financial position. Total pro forma assets exceed the sum of total liabilities and owners’ equity by EFN = $340.
TABLE 4.6
ROSENGARTEN CORPORATION partial pro forma Statement of Financial Position
Present Year
Change from Previous Year
Present Year
Change from Previous Year
Current Assets Current liabilities Cash $ 200 $ 40 Accounts payable $ 375 $ 75 Accounts Notes payable 100 0 receivable 550 110 Total 475 75 Inventory 750 150 Total $ 1,500 $ 300 Long-term debt $ 800 $ 0 Fixed assets Owners’ equity Net plant and equipment $ 2,025 $ 225 Common stock $ 800 $ 0
Retained earnings 1,110 110 Total $ 1,910 $ 110
Total Assets $ 3,525 $ 525 Total liabilities and owners’ equity $ 3,185 $ 185 External financing needed $ 340
1. What is the basic idea behind the percentage of sales approach?
2. Unless it is modified, what does the percentage of sales approach assume about fixed asset capacity usage?
Concept Questions
94 Part 2: Financial Statements and Long-Term Financial Planning
04Ross_Chapter04_4th.indd 9404Ross_Chapter04_4th.indd 94 12-11-27 12:0312-11-27 12:03
4.4 External Financing and Growth
External fi nancing needed and growth are obviously related. All other things being the same, the higher the rate of growth in sales or assets, the greater will be the need for external fi nancing. In the previous section, we took a growth rate as a given, and then we determined the amount of external fi nancing needed to support the growth. In this section, we turn things around a bit. We take the fi rm’s fi nancial policy as a given and then examine the relationship between that fi nancial policy and the fi rm’s ability to fi nance new investments and thereby grow.
Th is approach can be very useful because, as you have already seen, growth in sales requires fi nancing, so it follows that rapid growth can cause a company to grow broke.5 Companies that neglect to plan for fi nancing growth can fail even when production and marketing are on track. From a positive perspective, planning growth that is fi nancially sustainable can help an excellent company achieve its potential. Th is is why managers, along with their bankers and other suppliers of funds, need to look at sustainable growth.
External Financing Needed and Growth To begin, we must establish the relationship between EFN and growth. To do this, we introduce Table 4.7, simplifi ed statements of comprehensive income and fi nancial position for the Hoff man Company. Notice that we have simplifi ed the statement of fi nancial position by combining short- term and long-term debt into a single total debt fi gure. Eff ectively, we are assuming that none of the current liabilities varies spontaneously with sales. Th is assumption isn’t as restrictive as it sounds. If any current liabilities (such as accounts payable) vary with sales, we can assume they have been netted out in current assets.6 Also, we continue to combine depreciation, interest, and costs on the statement of comprehensive income.
TABLE 4.7
HOFFMAN COMPANY Statements of Comprehensive Income and Financial Position
Statement of Comprehensive Income
Sales $ 500 Costs 400 Taxable income $ 100 Taxes 34 Net income $ 66 Addition to retained earnings $44 Dividends $22
Statement of Financial Position
$ % of Sales $ % of Sales
Assets Liabilities Current assets $ 200 40% Total debt $250 n/a Net fixed assets 300 60 Owners’ equity 250 n/a Total assets $ 500 100% Total liabilities and owners’ equity $500 n/a
Th e following symbols are useful: S = Previous year’s sales = $500 A = Total assets = $500 D = Total debt = $250 E = Total equity = $250
5 This phrase and the following discussion draws heavily on R. C. Higgins, “How Much Growth Can a Firm Afford?” Financial Management 6, Fall 1977, pp. 7–16. 6 This assumption makes our use of EFN here consistent with how we defined it earlier in the chapter.
CHAPTER 4: Long-Term Financial Planning and Corporate Growth 95
04Ross_Chapter04_4th.indd 9504Ross_Chapter04_4th.indd 95 12-11-27 12:0312-11-27 12:03
In addition, based on our earlier discussions of fi nancial ratios, we can calculate the following: p = Profit margin = $66/$500 = 13.2% R = Retention ratio = $44/$66 = 2/3 ROA = Return on assets = $66/$500 = 13.2% ROE = Return on equity = $66/$250 = 26.4% D/E = Debt/equity ratio = $250/$250 = 1.0
Suppose the Hoff man Company is forecasting next year’s sales level at $600, a $100 increase. Th e capital intensity ratio is $500/$500 = 1, so assets need to rise by 1 × $100 = $100 (assuming full capacity usage). Notice that the percentage increase in sales is $100/$500 = 20%. Th e percent- age increase in assets is also 20 percent: 100/$500 = 20%. As this illustrates, assuming a constant capital intensity ratio, the increase in total assets is simply A × g, where g is growth rate in sales:
Increase in total assets = A × g = $500 × 20% = $100
In other words, the growth rate in sales can also be interpreted as the rate of increase in the fi rm’s total assets.
Some of the fi nancing necessary to cover the increase in total assets comes from internally gen- erated funds and shows up in the form of the addition to retained earnings. Th is amount is equal to net income multiplied by the plowback or retention ratio, R. Projected net income is equal to the profi t margin, p, multiplied by projected sales, S × (1 + g). Th e projected addition to retained earnings for Hoff man can thus be written as:
Addition to retained earnings = p(S)R × (1 + g) = .132($500)(2/3) × 1.20 = $44 × 1.20 = $52.80
Notice that this is equal to last year’s addition to retained earnings, $44, multiplied by (1 + g). Putting this information together, we need A × g = $100 in new fi nancing. We generate
p(S)R × (1 + g) = $52.80 internally, so the diff erence is what we need to raise. In other words, we fi nd that EFN can be written as:
EFN = Increase in total assets - Addition to retained earnings [4.2] = A(g) - p(S)R × (1 + g)
For Hoff man, this works out to be
EFN = $500(.20) - .132($500)(2/3) × 1.20 = $100 - $52.80 = $47.20
We can check that this is correct by fi lling in pro forma statements of comprehensive income and fi nancial position, as in Table 4.8. As we calculated, Hoff man needs to raise $47.20.
Looking at our equation for EFN, we see that EFN depends directly on g. Rearranging things to highlight this relationship, we get:
EFN = -p(S)R + [A - p(S)R] × g [4.3] Plugging in the numbers for Hoff man, the relationship between EFN and g is:
EFN = -.132($500)(2/3) + [$500 - .132($500)(2/3)] × g = -44 + 456 × g
Notice that this is the equation of a straight line with a vertical intercept of -$44 and a slope of $456. Th e relationship between growth and EFN is illustrated in Figure 4.1. Th e y-axis intercept of
our line, -$44, is equal to last year’s addition to retained earnings. Th is makes sense because, if the growth in sales is zero, then retained earnings are $44, the same as last year. Furthermore, with no growth, no net investment in assets is needed, so we run a surplus equal to the addition to retained earnings, which is why we have a negative sign.
Th e slope of the line in Figure 4.1 tells us that for every .01 (1 percent) in sales growth, we need an additional $456 × .01 = $4.56 in external fi nancing to support that growth.
96 Part 2: Financial Statements and Long-Term Financial Planning
04Ross_Chapter04_4th.indd 9604Ross_Chapter04_4th.indd 96 12-11-27 12:0312-11-27 12:03
TABLE 4.8
HOFFMAN COMPANY Pro Forma Statements of Comprehensive Income and Financial Position
Statement of Comprehensive Income
Sales $ 600.0 Costs (80% of sales) 480.0 Taxable income $ 120.0 Taxes 40.8 Net income $ 79.2 Addition to retained earnings $52.8 Dividends $26.4
Statement of Financial Position
$ % of Sales $ % of Sales
Assets Liabilities Current assets $ 240.0 40% Total debt $ 250.0 n/a Net fixed assets 360.0 60 Owners’ equity 302.8 n/a Total assets $ 600.0 100% Total liabilities $ 552.8 n/a
External funds needed $ 47.2
FIGURE 4.1
External financing needed and growth in sales for the Hoffman Company
External financing
needed ($) EFN
Projected growth in sales (%)
–$44
$0
= $456
g
9.65%
Internal Growth Rate Looking at Figure 4.1, there is one growth rate of obvious interest. What growth rate can we achieve with no external fi nancing? We call this the internal growth rate because it is the rate the fi rm can maintain with only internal fi nancing. Th is growth rate corresponds to the point where our line crosses the horizontal axis, that is, the point where EFN is zero. At this point, the required increase in assets is exactly equal to the addition to retained earnings, and EFN is therefore zero.
internal growth rate The growth rate a firm can maintain with only internal financing.
CHAPTER 4: Long-Term Financial Planning and Corporate Growth 97
04Ross_Chapter04_4th.indd 9704Ross_Chapter04_4th.indd 97 12-11-27 12:0312-11-27 12:03
Figure 4.1 shows that this rate is just under 10 percent. We can easily calculate this rate by setting EFN equal to zero:
EFN = -p(S)R + [A - p(S)R] × g [4.4] g = p(S)R/[A - p(S)R]
= .132($500)(2/3)/[$500 - .132($500)(2/3)] = 44/[500 - 44] = 44/456 = 9.65%
Hoff man can therefore grow at a 9.65 percent rate before any external fi nancing is required. With a little algebra, we can restate the expression for the internal growth rate (Equation 4.4) as:7
Internal growth rate = ROA × R ____________ 1 − ROA × R [4.5]
For Hoff man, we can check this by recomputing the 9.65 percent internal growth rate
= .132 × 2/3 _____________ 1 - .132 × 2/3
Financial Policy and Growth Suppose Hoff man, for whatever reason, does not wish to sell any new equity. As we discuss in Chapter 15, one possible reason is simply that new equity sales can be very expensive. Alterna- tively, the current owners may not wish to bring in new owners or contribute additional equity themselves. For a small business or a start-up, the reason may be even more compelling: All sources of new equity have likely already been tapped and the only way to increase equity is through additions to retained earnings.
In addition, we assume that Hoff man wishes to maintain its current debt/equity ratio. To be more specifi c, Hoff man (and its lenders) regard its current debt policy as optimal. We discuss why a particular mixture of debt and equity might be better than any other in Chapters 14 and 15. For now, we say that Hoff man has a fi xed debt capacity relative to total equity. If the debt/equity ratio declines, Hoff man has excess debt capacity and can comfortably borrow additional funds.
Assuming that Hoff man does borrow to its debt capacity, what growth rate can be achieved? Th e answer is the sustainable growth rate (SGR), the maximum growth rate a fi rm can achieve with no external equity fi nancing while it maintains a constant debt/equity ratio. To fi nd the sus- tainable growth rate, we go back to Equation 4.2 and add another term for new borrowings (up to debt capacity). One way to see where the amount of new borrowings comes from is to relate it to the addition to retained earnings. Because this addition increases equity, it reduces the debt/ equity ratio. Since sustainable growth is based on a constant debt/equity ratio, we use new bor- rowings to top up debt. Because we are now allowing new borrowings, EFN* refers to outside equity only. Because no new outside equity is available, EFN* = 0 as the D/E ratio is constant,
∴ D/E = New borrowing
________________________ Addition to retained earnings
New borrowing = D/E[p(S)R(1 + g)]
EFN* = Increase in total assets - Addition to retained earnings - New borrowing [4.6] = A(g) - p(S)R × (1 + g) - p(S)R × (1 + g)[D/E] EFN* = 0
With some algebra we can solve for the sustainable growth rate.
g* = ROE × R/[1 - ROE × R] [4.7] Th is growth rate is called the fi rm’s sustainable growth rate (SGR).
For example, for the Hoff man Company, we already know that the ROE is 26.4 percent and the retention ratio, R, is 2/3. Th e sustainable growth rate is thus:
7 To derive Equation 4.5 from (4.4) divide through by A and recognize that ROA = p(S)/A.
debt capacity The ability to borrow to increase firm value.
sustainable growth rate (SGR) The growth rate a firm can maintain given its debt capacity, ROE, and retention ratio.
98 Part 2: Financial Statements and Long-Term Financial Planning
04Ross_Chapter04_4th.indd 9804Ross_Chapter04_4th.indd 98 12-11-27 12:0312-11-27 12:03
g* = (ROE × R)/(1 - ROE × R) = .176 / .824 = 21.4%
Th is tells us that Hoff man can increase its sales and assets at a rate of 21.4 percent per year without selling any additional equity and without changing its debt ratio or payout ratio. If a growth rate in excess of this is desired or predicted, something has to give.
To better see that the SGR is 21.4 percent (and to check our answer), we can fi ll out the pro forma fi nancial statements assuming that Hoff man’s sales increase at exactly the SGR. We do this to verify that if Hoff man’s sales do grow at 21.4 percent, all needed fi nancing can be obtained without the need to sell new equity, and, at the same time, the debt/equity ratio can be maintained at its current level of 1.
To get started, sales increase from $500 to $500 × (1 + .214) = $607. Assuming, as before, that costs are proportional to sales, the statement of comprehensive income would be:
HOFFMAN COMPANY Pro Forma Statement of Comprehensive Income
Sales $ 607 Costs (80% of sales) 486 Taxable income $ 121 Taxes 41 Net income $ 80
Given that the retention ratio, R, stays at 2/3, the addition to retained earnings is $80 × (2/3) = $53, and the dividend paid is $80 - 53 = $27.
We fi ll out the pro forma statement of fi nancial position (Table 4.9) just as we did earlier. Note that the owners’ equity rises from $250 to $303 because the addition to retained earnings is $53. As illustrated, EFN is $53. If Hoff man borrows this amount, its total debt rises to $250 + 53 = $303. Th e debt/equity ratio therefore is $303/$303 = 1 as desired, thereby verifying our earlier calculations. At any other growth rate, something would have to change.
TABLE 4.9
HOFFMAN COMPANY Pro Forma Statement of Financial Position
$ % of Sales $ % of Sales
Current assets $ 242 40 Total debt $ 250 n/a Net fixed assets 364 60 Owners’ equity 303 n/a Total assets $ 606 100 Total liabilities $ 553 n/a
External funds needed $ 53
To maintain the debt/equity ratio at 1, Hoff man can increase debt to $338, an increase of $88. Th is leaves $412 - $88 = $324 to be raised by external equity. If this is not available, Hoff man could try to raise the full $412 in additional debt. Th is would rocket the debt/equity ratio to ($250 + $412)/$338 = 1.96, basically doubling the target amount.
Given that the fi rm’s bankers and other external lenders likely had considerable say over the target D/E in the fi rst place, it is highly unlikely that Hoff man could obtain this much additional debt. Th e most likely outcome is that if Hoff man insists on doubling sales, the fi rm would grow bankrupt.
CHAPTER 4: Long-Term Financial Planning and Corporate Growth 99
04Ross_Chapter04_4th.indd 9904Ross_Chapter04_4th.indd 99 12-11-27 12:0312-11-27 12:03
EXAMPLE 4.2: Growing Bankrupt
Suppose the management of Hoffman Company is not satis- fied with a growth rate of 21 percent. Instead, the company wants to expand rapidly and double its sales to $1,000 next year. What will happen? To answer this question we go back to the starting point of our previous example.
We know that the sustainable growth rate for Hoffman is 21.3 percent, so doubling sales (100 percent growth) is not possible unless the company obtains outside equity fi- nancing or allows its debt/equity ratio to balloon beyond 1. We can prove this with simple pro forma statements.
Pro Forma Statement of Comprehensive Income
Sales $ 1,000 Costs (80% of sales) 800 Taxable income $ 200 Taxes 68 Net income $ 132 Dividends (1/3) $ 44 Addition to retained earnings 88
Pro Forma Statement of Financial Position
Current assets $ 400 Total debt $250 Fixed assets 600 Owners’ equity 338 Total assets $ 1,000 Total liabilities $588
External funds needed $412
Determinants of Growth In the last chapter, we saw that the return on equity could be decomposed into its various com- ponents using the Du Pont identity. Because ROE appears prominently in the determination of the SGR, the important factors in determining ROE are also important determinants of growth. To see this, recall that from the Du Pont identity, ROE can be written as:
ROE = Profit margin × Total asset turnover × Equity multiplier 8
Using our current symbols for these ratios,
ROE = p(S/A)(1 + D/E)
If we substitute this into our expression for g* (SGR), we see that the sustainable growth rate can be written in greater detail as:
g* = p ( S/A ) ( 1 + D/E ) × R
______________________ 1 − p ( S/A ) ( 1 + D/E ) × R [4.8]
Writing the SGR out in this way makes it look a little complicated, but it does highlight the various important factors determining the ability of a fi rm to grow.
Examining our expression for the SGR, we see that growth depends on the following four factors:
1. Profit margin. An increase in profit margin, p, increases the firm’s ability to generate funds internally and thereby increase its sustainable growth.
2. Dividend policy. A decrease in the percentage of net income paid out as dividends increases the retention ratio, R. This increases internally generated equity and thus increases sustain- able growth.
3. Financial policy. An increase in the debt/equity ratio, D/E, increases the firm’s financial le- verage. Since this makes additional debt financing available, it increases the sustainable growth rate.
8 Remember that the equity multiplier is the same as 1 plus the debt/equity ratio.
100 Part 2: Financial Statements and Long-Term Financial Planning
04Ross_Chapter04_4th.indd 10004Ross_Chapter04_4th.indd 100 12-11-27 12:0312-11-27 12:03
4. Total asset turnover. An increase in the firm’s total asset turnover, S/A, increases the sales generated for each dollar in assets. This decreases the firm’s need for new assets as sales grow and thereby increases the sustainable growth rate. Notice that increasing total asset turnover is the same thing as the decreasing capital intensity.
Th e sustainable growth rate is a very useful planning number. What it illustrates is the explicit relationship between the fi rm’s four major areas of concern: its operating effi ciency as measured by p, its asset use effi ciency as measured by S/A, its dividend policy as measured by R, and its fi nancial policy as measured by D/E.
Given values for all four of these, only one growth rate can be achieved. Th is is an important point, so it bears restating:
If a fi rm does not wish to sell new equity and its profi t margin, dividend policy, fi nancial policy, and total asset turnover (or capital intensity) are all fi xed, there is only one possible maximum growth rate.
As we described early in this chapter, one of the primary benefi ts to fi nancial planning is to ensure internal consistency among the fi rm’s various goals. Th e sustainable growth rate captures this ele- ment nicely. For this reason, sustainable growth is included in the soft ware used by commercial lenders at several Canadian chartered banks in analyzing their accounts.
Also, we now see how to use a fi nancial planning model to test the feasibility of a planned growth rate. If sales are to grow at a rate higher than the sustainable growth rate, the fi rm must increase profi t margins, increase total asset turnover, increase fi nancial leverage, increase earn- ings retention, or sell new shares.
At the other extreme, suppose the fi rm is losing money (has a negative profi t margin) or is paying out more than 100 percent of earnings in dividends so that R is negative. In each of these cases, the negative SGR signals the rate at which sales and assets must shrink. Firms can achieve negative growth by selling assets and closing divisions. Th e cash generated by selling assets is oft en used to pay down excessive debt taken on earlier to fund rapid expansion. For example, in 2011, Lionsgate Entertainment, the Vancouver based mini-studio, sold its non-core assets to pay down its debt. Th is was done primarily to address investor worries and to strengthen its statement of fi nancial position.
A Note on Sustainable Growth Rate Calculations Very commonly, the sustainable growth rate is calculated using just the numerator in our expres- sion, ROE × R. Th is causes some confusion, which we can clear up here. Th e issue has to do with how ROE is computed. Recall that ROE is calculated as net income divided by total equity. If total equity is taken from an ending statement of fi nancial position (as we have done consistently, and is commonly done in practice), then our formula is the right one. However, if total equity is from the beginning of the period, then the simpler formula is the correct one.
EXAMPLE 4.3: Sustainable Growth
The Sandar Company has a debt/equity ratio of .5, a profit margin of 3 percent, a dividend payout of 40 percent, and a capital intensity ratio of 1. What is its sustainable growth rate? If Sandar desires a 10 percent SGR and plans to achieve this goal by improving profit margins, what would you think?
The sustainable growth rate is:
g* = .03(1)(1 + .5)(1 - .40)/[1 - .03(1)(1 + .5)(1 - .40)] = 2.77%
To achieve a 10 percent growth rate, the profit margin has to rise. To see this, assume that g* is equal to 10 percent and then solve for p:
.10 = p(1.5)(.6)/[1 - p(1.5)(.5)] p = .1/.99 = 10.1%
For the plan to succeed, the necessary increase in profit margin is substantial, from 3 percent to about 10 percent. This may not be feasible.
CHAPTER 4: Long-Term Financial Planning and Corporate Growth 101
04Ross_Chapter04_4th.indd 10104Ross_Chapter04_4th.indd 101 12-11-27 12:0312-11-27 12:03
In principle, you’ll get exactly the same sustainable growth rate regardless of which way you calcu- late it (as long you match up the ROE calculation with the right formula). In reality, you may see some diff erences because of accounting-related complications. By the way, if you use the average of beginning and ending equity (as some advocate), yet another formula is needed. Note: all of our comments here apply to the internal growth rate as well.
One more point that is important to note is that for the sustainable growth calculations to work, assets must increase at the same rate as sales as shown in [4.6]. If any items do not change at the same rate, the formulas will not work properly.
1. What are the determinants of growth?
2. How is a firm’s sustainable growth related to its accounting return on equity (ROE)?
3. What does it mean if a firm’s sustainable growth rate is negative?
Robert C. Higgins on Sustainable Growth
MOST FINANCIAL OFFICERS know intuitively that it takes money to make money. Rapid sales growth requires increased assets in the form of accounts receivable, inventory, and fi xed plant, which, in turn, require money to pay for assets. They also know that if their company does not have the money when needed, it can literally “grow broke.” The sustainable growth equation states these intuitive truths explicitly.
Sustainable growth is often used by bankers and other external analysts to assess a company’s creditworthiness. They are aided in this exercise by several sophisticated computer software packages that provide detailed analyses of the company’s past fi nancial performance, including its annual sustainable growth rate.
Bankers use this information in several ways. Quick comparison of a company’s actual growth rate to its sustainable rate tells the banker what issues will be at the top of management’s fi nancial agenda. If actual growth consistently exceeds sustainable growth, management’s problem will be where to get the cash to fi nance growth. The banker thus can anticipate interest in loan products. Conversely, if sustainable growth consistently exceeds actual, the banker had best be prepared to talk about investment products, because management’s problem will be what to do with all the cash that keeps piling up in the till.
Bankers also fi nd the sustainable growth equation useful for explaining to fi nancially inexperienced small business owners and overly optimistic entrepreneurs that, for the long-run
viability of their business, it is necessary to keep growth and profi tability in proper balance.
Finally, comparison of actual to sustainable growth rates helps a banker understand why a loan applicant needs money and for how long the need might continue. In one instance, a loan applicant requested $100,000 to pay off several insistent suppliers and promised to repay in a few months when he collected some accounts receivable that were coming due. A sustainable growth analysis revealed that the fi rm had been growing at four to six times its sustainable growth rate and that this pattern was likely to continue in the foreseeable future. This alerted the banker that impatient suppliers were only a symptom of the much more fundamental disease of overly rapid growth, and that a $100,000 loan would likely prove to be only the down payment on a much larger, multiyear commitment.
Robert C. Higgins is Professor Emeritus of Finance and Marguerite Reimers Endowed Faculty Fellow at the University of Washington Michael G. Foster School of Business. He pioneered the use of sustainable growth as a tool for fi nancial analysis.
IN THEIR OWN WORDS…
Concept Questions
102 Part 2: Financial Statements and Long-Term Financial Planning
04Ross_Chapter04_4th.indd 10204Ross_Chapter04_4th.indd 102 12-11-27 12:0312-11-27 12:03
4.5 Some Caveats on Financial Planning Models
Financial planning models do not always ask the right questions. A primary reason is that they tend to rely on accounting relationships and not fi nancial relationships. In particular, the three basic elements of fi rm value tend to get left out, namely, cash fl ow size, risk, and timing.
Because of this, fi nancial planning models sometimes do not produce output that gives the user many meaningful clues about what strategies would lead to increases in value. Instead, they divert the user’s attention to questions concerning the association of, say, the debt/equity ratio and fi rm growth.
Th e fi nancial model we used for the Hoff man Company was simple, in fact, too simple. Our model, like many in use today, is really an accounting statement generator at heart. Such models are useful for pointing out inconsistencies and reminding us of fi nancial needs, but they off er very little guidance concerning what to do about these problems.
In closing our discussion, we should add that fi nancial planning is an iterative process. Plans are created, examined, and modifi ed over and over. Th e fi nal plan is a negotiated result between all the diff erent parties to the process. In practice, long-term fi nancial planning in some cor- porations relies too much on a top-down approach. Senior management has a growth target in mind and it is up to the planning staff to rework and ultimately deliver a plan to meet that target. Such plans are oft en made feasible (on paper or a computer screen) by unrealistically optimistic assumptions on sales growth and target debt/equity ratios. Th e plans collapse when lower sales make it impossible to service debt. Th is is what happened to Campeau’s takeover of Federated Department Stores, as we discuss in Chapter 23.
As a negotiated result, the fi nal plan implicitly contains diff erent goals in diff erent areas and also satisfi es many constraints. For this reason, such a plan need not be a dispassionate assessment of what we think the future will bring; it may instead be a means of reconciling the planned activi- ties of diff erent groups and a way of setting common goals for the future.
1. What are some important elements often missing in financial planning models?
2. Why do we say that planning is an iterative process?
4.6 SUMMARY AND CONCLUSIONS
Financial planning forces the fi rm to think about the future. We have examined a number of fea- tures of the planning process. We describe what fi nancial planning can accomplish and the com- ponents of a fi nancial model. We go on to develop the relationship between growth and fi nancing needs. Two growth rates, internal and sustainable, are summarized in Table 4.10. Th e table recaps the key diff erence between the two growth rates. Th e internal growth rate is the maximum growth rate that can be achieved with no external fi nancing of any kind. Th e sustainable growth rate is the maximum growth rate that can be achieved with no external equity fi nancing while maintain- ing a constant debt/equity ratio. For Hoff man, the internal growth rate is 9.65 percent and the sustainable growth rate is 21.3 percent. Th e sustainable growth rate is higher because the calcula- tion allows for debt fi nancing up to a limit set by the target debt/equity ratio. We discuss how a fi nancial planning model is useful in exploring that relationship.
Corporate fi nancial planning should not become a purely mechanical activity. When it does, it probably focuses on the wrong things. In particular, plans all too oft en are formulated in terms of a growth target with no explicit linkage to value creation, and they frequently are overly con- cerned with accounting statements. Nevertheless, the alternative to fi nancial planning is stum- bling into the future backwards.
Concept Questions
CHAPTER 4: Long-Term Financial Planning and Corporate Growth 103
04Ross_Chapter04_4th.indd 10304Ross_Chapter04_4th.indd 103 12-11-27 12:0312-11-27 12:03
TABLE 4.10 Summary of internal and sustainable growth rates from Hoffman Company example
I. INTERNAL GROWTH RATE
Internal growth rate = ROA × R ____________ 1 - ROA × R
= .132 × 2/3 ________________ 1 - 0.132 × 2/3
= 9.65%
where ROA = Return on assets = Net income/Total assets = 13.2% R = Plowback (retention) ratio = 2/3
= Addition to retained earnings/Net income The internal growth rate is the maximum growth rate that can be achieved with no external financing of any kind.
II. SUSTAINABLE GROWTH RATE
Sustainable growth rate = ROE × R ____________ 1 - ROE × R
= 0.264 × (2/3)
_________________ 1 - 0.264 × (2/3)
= 21.3% where ROE = Return on equity = Net income/Total equity = 26.4% R = Plowback (retention) ratio = 2/3
= Addition to retained earnings/Net income The sustainable growth rate is the maximum growth rate that can be achieved with no external equity financing while maintaining a constant debt/equity ratio.
Key Terms aggregation (page 86) capital intensity ratio (page 91) debt capacity (page 98) dividend payout ratio (page 90) external financing needed (EFN) (page 92)
internal growth rate (page 97) percentage of sales approach (page 90) planning horizon (page 86) retention ratio or plowback ratio (page 91) sustainable growth rate (SGR) (page 98)
Chapter Review Problems and Self-Test 4.1 Calculating EFN Based on the following information for the Skandia Mining Company, what is EFN if sales are predicted to grow by
10 percent? Use the percentage of sales approach and assume the company is operating at full capacity. The payout ratio is constant.
SKANDIA MINING COMPANY Financial Statements
Statement of Comprehensive Income Statement of Financial Position
Sales $ 4,250.0 Assets Liabilities and Owners’ Equity Costs 3,876.0 Current assets $ 900 Current liabilities $ 500 Taxable income $ 374.0 Net fixed assets 2,200 Long-term debt $ 1,800 Taxes (34%) 127.2 Total $ 3,100 Owners’ equity 800 Net income $ 246.8 Total liabilities and owners’ equity $3,100 Dividends $ 82.4 Addition to retained earnings 164.4
4.2 EFN and Capacity Use Based on the information in Problem 4.1, what is EFN, assuming 60 percent capacity usage for net fixed assets? Assuming 95 percent capacity?
4.3 Sustainable Growth Based on the information in Problem 4.1, what growth rate can Skandia maintain if no external financing is used? What is the sustainable growth rate?
Answers to Self-Test Problems 4.1 We can calculate EFN by preparing the pro forma statements using the percentage of sales approach. Note that sales are forecasted to be
$4,250 × 1.10 = $4,675.
104 Part 2: Financial Statements and Long-Term Financial Planning
04Ross_Chapter04_4th.indd 10404Ross_Chapter04_4th.indd 104 12-11-27 12:0312-11-27 12:03
SKANDIA MINING COMPANY Pro Forma Financial Statements
Statement of Comprehensive Income
Sales $ 4,675.0 Forecast Costs 4,263.6 91.2% of sales Taxable income $ 411.4 Taxes (34%) $ 139.9 Net income $ 271.5 Dividends $ 90.6 33.37% of net Addition to retained earnings 180.9 income
Statement of Financial Position
Assets Liabilities and Owners’ Equity Current assets $ 990.0 21.18% Current liabilities $ 550 11.76% Net fixed assets 2,420.0 51.76% Long-term debt $ 1,800.0 n/a Total assets $ 3,410.0 72.94% Owners’ equity 980.9 n/a
Total liabilities and owners’ equity 3,330.9 n/a EFN $ 79.1 n/a
Also applying the formula for EFN in Equation 4.2, we get EFN = A(g) - p(S)R × (1 + g)
= 3100 (0.1) - [.05807588 × 4250 × .666126418 × 1.1] = 310 - 180.84 = 129.16
Why is the answer different using two methods? Because, in the percentage of sales approach it was assumed that current liabilities were ac- counts payable (or a similar account) that spontaneously increases with sales. Hence this amount needs to be deducted from the total assets of $3,100 to get $2,600. If we use this number in the EFN formula, the value is 79.16 which is closer to the answer obtained in sales approach.
4.2 Full-capacity sales are equal to current sales divided by the capacity utilization. At 60 percent of capacity: $4,250 = .60 × Full-capacity sales
$7,083 = Full-capacity sales With a sales level of $4,675, no net new fixed assets will be needed, so our earlier estimate is too high. We estimated an increase in fixed
assets of $2,420 - 2,200 = $220. The new EFN will thus be $79.1 - 220 = -$140.9, a surplus. No external financing is needed in this case. At 95 percent capacity, full-capacity sales are $4,474. The ratio of fixed assets to full-capacity sales is thus $2,200/4,474 = 49.17%. At a
sales level of $4,675, we will thus need $4,675 × .4917 = $2,298.7 in net fixed assets, an increase of $98.7. This is $220 - 98.7 = $121.3 less than we originally predicted, so the EFN is now $79.1 - 121.3 = $42.2, a surplus. No additional financing is needed.
4.3 Skandia retains R = 1 - .3337 = 66.63% of net income. Return on assets is $246.8/3,100 = 7.96%. The internal growth rate is:
ROA × R ____________ 1 - ROA × R = .0796 × .6663 _______________ 1 - .0796 × .6663
= 5.60% Return on equity for Skandia is $246.8/800 = 30.85%, so we can calculate the sustainable growth rate as:
ROE × R ____________ 1 - ROE × R = .3085 × .6663 _______________ 1 - .3085 × .6663
R = 25.87%
Concepts Review and Critical Thinking Questions 1. (LO1) Why do you think most long-term financial planning
begins with sales forecasts? Put differently, why are future sales the key input?
2. (LO1) Would long-range financial planning be more impor- tant for a capital intensive company, such as a heavy equip- ment manufacturer, or an import-export business? Why?
3. (LO2) Testaburger, Ltd., uses no external financing and maintains a positive retention ratio. When sales grow by 15 percent, the firm has a negative projected EFN. What does this tell you about the firm’s internal growth rate? How about the sustainable growth rate? At this same level of sales growth, what will happen to the projected EFN if the retention ratio is increased? What if the retention ratio is decreased? What hap-
pens to the projected EFN if the firm pays out all of its earn- ings in the form of dividends?
4. (LO2, 3) Broslofski Co. maintains a positive retention ratio and keeps its debt-equity ratio constant every year. When sales grow by 20 percent, the firm has a negative projected EFN. What does this tell you about the firm’s sustainable growth rate? Do you know, with certainty, if the internal growth rate is greater than or less than 20 percent? Why? What happens to the projected EFN if the retention ratio is increased? What if the retention ratio is decreased? What if the retention ratio is zero?
Use the following information to answer the next six ques- tions: A small business called The Grandmother Calendar
CHAPTER 4: Long-Term Financial Planning and Corporate Growth 105
04Ross_Chapter04_4th.indd 10504Ross_Chapter04_4th.indd 105 12-11-27 12:0312-11-27 12:03
Company began selling personalized photo calendar kits. The kits were a hit, and sales soon sharply exceeded forecasts. The rush of orders created a huge backlog, so the company leased more space and expanded capacity, but it still could not keep up with demand. Equipment failed from overuse and quality suffered. Working capital was drained to expand production, and, at the same time, payments from customers were often delayed until the product was shipped. Unable to deliver on orders, the company became so strapped for cash that em- ployee pay cheques began to bounce. Finally, out of cash, the company ceased operations entirely three years later.
5. (LO6) Do you think the company would have suffered the same fate if its product had been less popular? Why or why not?
6. (LO6) The Grandmother Calendar Company clearly had a cash flow problem. In the context of the cash flow analysis we developed in Chapter 2, what was the impact of customers not
paying until orders were shipped? 7. (LO6) The firm actually priced its product to be about 20
percent less than that of competitors, even though the Grand- mother calendar was more detailed. In retrospect, was this a wise choice?
8. (LO6) If the firm was so successful at selling, why wouldn’t a bank or some other lender step in and provide it with the cash it needed to continue?
9. (LO6) Which is the biggest culprit here: too many orders, too little cash, or too little production capacity?
10. (LO6) What are some of the actions that a small company like The Grandmother Calendar Company can take if it finds itself in a situation in which growth in sales outstrips produc- tion capacity and available financial resources? What other options (besides expansion of capacity) are available to a com- pany when orders exceed capacity?
Questions and Problems 1. Pro Forma Statements (LO3) Consider the following simplified financial statements for the Steveston Corporation (assuming
no income taxes): Statement of Comprehensive Income Statement of Financial Position
Sales $ 23,000 Assets $15,800 Debt $ 5,200 Costs 16,700 Equity 10,600 Net income $ 6,300 Total $15,800 Total $ 15,800
Steveston has predicted a sales increase of 15 percent. It has predicted that every item on the statement of financial position will increase by 15 percent as well. Create the pro forma statements and reconcile them. What is the plug variable here?
2. Pro Forma Statements and EFN (LO2, 3) In the previous question, assume Steveston pays out half of net income in the form of a cash dividend. Costs and assets vary with sales, but debt and equity do not. Prepare the pro forma statements and determine the external financing needed.
3. Calculating EFN (LO2) The most recent financial statements for Marpole Inc. are shown here (assuming no income taxes): Statement of Comprehensive Income Statement of Financial Position
Sales $ 6,300 Assets $18,300 Debt $ 12,400 Costs 3,890 Equity 5,900 Net income $ 2,410 Total $18,300 Total $ 18,300
Assets and costs are proportional to sales. Debt and equity are not. No dividends are paid. Next year’s sales are projected to be $7,434. What is the external financing needed?
4. EFN (LO2) The most recent financial statements for Suncrest Inc. are shown here: Statement of Comprehensive Income Statement of Financial Position
Sales $ 19,500 Assets $98,000 Debt $ 52,500 Costs 15,000 Equity 45,500 Taxable income $ 4,500 Total $98,000 Total $ 98,000 Taxes (40%) 1,800 Net income $ 2,700
Assets and costs are proportional to sales. Debt and equity are not. A dividend of $1,400 was paid, and Suncrest wishes to maintain a constant payout ratio. Next year’s sales are projected to be $21,840. What is the external financing needed?
5. EFN (LO2) The most recent financial statements for Kitsilano Inc. are shown here: Statement of Comprehensive Income Statement of Financial Position
Sales $ 4,200 Current Assets $ 3,600 Current Liabilities $ 2,100 Costs 3,300 Fixed Assets 7,900 Long-term debt 3,650 Taxable income $ 900 Equity $ 5,750 Taxes (34%) 306 Total $ 11,500 Total $ 11,500 Net income $ 594
Assets, costs, and current liabilities are proportional to sales. Long-term debt and equity are not. Kitsilano maintains a constant 40 percent dividend payout ratio. Like every other firm in its industry, next year’s sales are projected to increase by exactly 15 percent. What is the external financing needed?
Basic (Questions
1–15)
5
106 Part 2: Financial Statements and Long-Term Financial Planning
04Ross_Chapter04_4th.indd 10604Ross_Chapter04_4th.indd 106 12-11-27 12:0312-11-27 12:03
6. Calculating Internal Growth (LO5) The most recent financial statements for Burnaby Co. are shown here: Statement of Comprehensive Income Statement of Financial Position
Sales $ 13,250 Current Assets $10,400 Debt $ 17,500 Costs 9,480 Fixed Assets 28,750 Equity 21,650 Taxable income $ 3,770 Total $39,150 Total $ 39,150 Taxes (40%) 1,508 Net income $ 2,262
Assets and costs are proportional to sales. Debt and equity are not. Burnaby maintains a constant 30 percent dividend payout ratio. No external equity financing is possible. What is the internal growth rate?
7. Calculating Sustainable Growth (LO5) For the company in the previous problem, what is the sustainable growth rate? 8. Sales and Growth (LO2) The most recent financial statements for Cariboo Co. are shown here:
Statement of Comprehensive Income Statement of Financial Position
Sales $ 42,000 Current Assets $ 21,000 Long-term Debt $ 51,000 Costs 28,500 Fixed Assets 86,000 Equity 56,000 Taxable income $ 13,500 Total $ 107,000 Total $ 107,000 Taxes (34%) 4,590 Net income $ 8,910
Assets and costs are proportional to sales. The company maintains a constant 30 percent dividend payout ratio and a constant debt-equity ratio. What is the maximum increase in sales that can be sustained, assuming no new equity is issued?
9. Calculating Retained Earnings from Pro Forma Income (LO3) Consider the following statement of comprehensive income for the Dartmoor Corporation:
DARTMOOR CORPORATION Statement of Comprehensive Income
Sales $ 38,000 Costs 18,400 Taxable income $ 19,600 Taxes (34%) 6,664 Net income $ 12,936 Dividends $5,200 Addition to retained earnings 7,736
A 20 percent growth rate in sales is projected. Prepare a pro forma statement of comprehensive income assuming costs vary with sales and the dividend payout ratio is constant. What is the projected addition to retained earnings?
10. Applying Percentage of Sales (LO3) The statement of financial position for the Dartmoor Corporation follows. Based on this information and the statement of comprehensive income in the previous problem, supply the missing information using the percentage of sales approach. Assume that accounts payable vary with sales, whereas notes payable do not. Put “n/a” where needed.
DARTMOOR CORPORATION Statement of Financial Position
Assets Liabilities and Owners’ Equity
$ Percentage of Sales
$ Percentage of Sales
Current assets Current liabilities Cash $ 3,050 ________ Accounts payable $ 1,300 ________ Accounts receivable 6,900 ________ Notes payable 6,800 ________ Inventory 7,600 ________ Total $ 8,100 ________ Total $ 17,550 ________ Long-term debt $ 25,000 ________ Fixed assets Owners’ equity Net plant and Common stock and paid-in surplus $ 15,000 ________ equipment $ 34,500 ________ Retained earnings 3,950 ________ Total assets $ 52,050 ________ Total $ 18,950 ________
Total liabilities and owners’ equity $ 52,050 ________
11. EFN and Sales (LO2, 3) From the previous two questions, prepare a pro forma statement of financial position showing EFN, assuming a 15 percent increase in sales, no new external debt or equity financing, and a constant payout ratio.
12. Internal Growth (LO5) If Sunbury Hobby Shop has a 8 percent ROA and a 20 percent payout ratio, what is its internal growth rate?
13. Sustainable Growth (LO5) If the Whalley Corp. has a 15 percent ROE and a 25 percent payout ratio, what is its sustainable growth rate?
6
CHAPTER 4: Long-Term Financial Planning and Corporate Growth 107
04Ross_Chapter04_4th.indd 10704Ross_Chapter04_4th.indd 107 12-11-27 12:0312-11-27 12:03
14. Sustainable Growth (LO5) Based on the following information, calculate the sustainable growth rate for Lesner’s Kickboxing: Profit margin = 8.2%
Capital intensity ratio = .75 Debt-equity ratio = .40 Net income = $43,000 Dividends = $12,000
What is the ROE here? 15. Sustainable Growth (LO5) Assuming the following ratios are constant, what is the sustainable growth rate? Total asset turnover = 2.50
Profit margin = 7.8% Equity multiplier = 1.80 Payout ratio = 60%
16. Full-Capacity Sales (LO3) Mud Bay Services Inc. is currently operating at only 95 percent of fixed asset capacity. Current sales are $550,000. How fast can sales grow before any new fixed assets are needed?
17. Fixed Assets and Capacity Usage (LO3) For the company in the previous problem, suppose fixed assets are $440,000 and sales are projected to grow to $630,000. How much in new fixed assets are required to support this growth in sales?
18. Full-Capacity Sales (LO3) If a company is operating at 60 percent of fixed asset capacity and current sales are $350,000, how fast can that company grow before any new fixed assets are needed?
19. Full-Capacity Sales (LO4) Elgin Brick Manufacturing sold $200,000 of red bricks in the last year. They were operating at 94 percent of fixed asset capacity. How fast can Elgin Brick grow before they need to purchase new fixed assets?
20. Growth and Profit Margin (LO4) Hazelmere Co. wishes to maintain a growth rate of 12 percent a year, a debt-equity ratio of 1.20, and a dividend payout ratio of 30 percent. The ratio of total assets to sales is constant at 0.75. What profit margin must the firm achieve?
21. Growth and Debt-Equity Ratio (LO4) A firm wishes to maintain a growth rate of 11.5 percent and a dividend payout ratio of 30 percent. The ratio of total assets to sales is constant at 0.60, and profit margin is 6.2 percent. If the firm also wishes to maintain a constant debt-equity ratio, what must it be?
22. Growth and Assets (LO4) A firm wishes to maintain an internal growth rate of 7 percent and a dividend payout ratio of 25 percent. The current profit margin is 5 percent and the firm uses no external financing sources. What must total asset turnover be?
23. Sustainable Growth (LO5) Based on the following information, calculate the sustainable growth rate for Zeppelin Guitars Inc.: Profit margin = 4.8%
Total asset turnover = 1.25 Total debt ratio = 0.65 Payout ratio = 30%
What is the ROA here? 24. Sustainable Growth and Outside Financing (LO2, 5) You’ve collected the following information about Grandview Toy
Company Inc.: Sales = $195,000
Net income = $17,500 Dividends = $9,300 Total debt = $86,000 Total equity = $58,000
What is the sustainable growth rate for Grandview Toy Company Inc.? If it does grow at this rate, how much new borrowing will take place in the coming year, assuming a constant debt-equity ratio? What growth rate could be supported with no outside financing at all?
25. Sustainable Growth Rate (LO5) Langley County Inc. had equity of $135,000 at the beginning of the year. At the end of the year, the company had total assets of $250,000. During the year the company sold no new equity. Net income for the year was $19,000 and dividends were $2,500. What is the sustainable growth rate for the company? What is the sustainable growth rate if you use the formula ROE × R and beginning of period equity? What is the sustainable growth rate if you use end of period equity in this formula? Is this number too high or too low? Why?
26. Internal Growth Rates (LO5) Calculate the internal growth rate for the company in the previous problem. Now calculate the internal growth rate using ROA × R for both beginning of period and end of period total assets. What do you observe?
27. Calculating EFN (LO2) The most recent financial statements for Hopington Tours Inc. follow. Sales for 2013 are projected to grow by 20 percent. Interest expense will remain constant; the tax rate and the dividend payout rate will also remain constant. Costs, other expenses, current assets, and accounts payable increase spontaneously with sales. If the firm is operating at full capacity and no new debt or equity is issued, what is the external financing needed to support the 20 percent growth rate in sales?
Intermediate (Questions
16–29)
2
2
108 Part 2: Financial Statements and Long-Term Financial Planning
04Ross_Chapter04_4th.indd 10804Ross_Chapter04_4th.indd 108 12-11-27 12:0312-11-27 12:03
HOPINGTON TOURS INC. 2012 Statement of Comprehensive Income
Sales $ 929,000 Costs 723,000 Other expenses 19,000 Earnings before interest and taxes $ 187,000 Interest paid 14,000 Taxable income $ 173,000 Taxes (35%) 60,550 Net income $ 112,450 Dividends $33,735 Addition to retained earnings 78,715
HOPINGTON TOURS INC. Statement of Financial Position as of December 31, 2012
Assets Liabilities and Owners’ Equity Current assets Current liabilities Cash $ 25,300 Accounts payable $ 68,000 Accounts receivable 40,700 Notes payable 17,000 Inventory 86,900 Total $ 85,000 Total $ 152,900 Long-term debt $ 158,000 Fixed assets Owners’ equity Net plant and Common stock and paid-in surplus $ 140,000 equipment $ 413,000 Retained earnings 182,900
Total $ 322,900 Total assets $ 565,900 Total liabilities and owners’ equity $ 565,900
28. Capacity Usage and Growth (LO2) In the previous problem, suppose the firm was operating at only 80 percent capacity in 2012. What is EFN now?
29. Calculating EFN (LO2) In Problem 27, suppose the firm wishes to keep its debt-equity ratio constant. What is EFN now? 30. EFN and Internal Growth (LO2, 5) Redo Problem 27 using sales growth rates of 15 and 25 percent in addition to 20 percent.
Illustrate graphically the relationship between EFN and the growth rate, and use this graph to determine the relationship between them. At what growth rate is the EFN equal to zero? Why is this internal growth rate different from that found by using the equation in the text?
31. EFN and Sustainable Growth (LO2, 5) Redo Problem 29 using sales growth rates of 30 and 35 percent in addition to 20 percent. Illustrate graphically the relationship between EFN and the growth rate, and use this graph to determine the relationship between them. At what growth rate is the EFN equal to zero? Why is this sustainable growth rate different from that found by using the equation in the text?
32. Constraints on Growth (LO4) Aberdeen Records Inc. wishes to maintain a growth rate of 12 percent per year and a debt-equity ratio of .30. Profit margin is 6.70 percent, and the ratio of total assets to sales is constant at 1.35. Is this growth rate possible? To answer, determine what the dividend payout ratio must be. How do you interpret the result?
33. EFN (LO2) Define the following: S = Previous year’s sales
A = Total assets E = Total equity g = Projected growth in sales PM = Profit margin b = Retention (plowback) ratio
Assuming all debt is constant, show that EFN can be written as follows: EFN = -PM(S)b + (A - PM(S)b) × g Hint: Asset needs will equal A × g. The addition to retained earnings will equal PM(S) b × (1 + g). 34. Growth Rates (LO3) Based on the result in Problem 33, show that the internal and sustainable growth rates are as given in the
chapter. Hint: For the internal growth rate, set EFN equal to zero and solve for g. 35. Sustainable Growth Rate (LO3) In the chapter, we discussed the two versions of the sustainable growth rate formula. Derive
the formula ROE × b from the formula given in the chapter, where ROE is based on beginning of period equity. Also, derive the formula ROA × b from the internal growth rate formula.
2
30. E I b
Challenge (Questions
30–32)
CHAPTER 4: Long-Term Financial Planning and Corporate Growth 109
04Ross_Chapter04_4th.indd 10904Ross_Chapter04_4th.indd 109 12-11-27 12:0312-11-27 12:03
After Ed completed the ratio analysis for Tuxedo Air (see Chapter 3), Mark and Jack approached him about planning for next year’s sales. The company had historically used little planning for investment needs. As a result, the company expe- rienced some challenging times because of cash flow prob- lems. The lack of planning resulted in missed sales, as well as periods where Mark and Jack were unable to draw salaries. To this end, they would like Ed to prepare a financial plan for the next year so the company can begin to address any outside investment requirements. The statements of comprehensive income and financial position are shown here:
Questions
1. Calculate the internal growth rate and sustainable growth rate for Tuxedo Air. What do these numbers mean?
2. Tuxedo Air is planning for a growth rate of 12 percent next year. Calculate the EFN for the company assuming the company is operating at full capacity. Can the com- pany’s sales increase at this growth rate?
3. Most assets can be increased as a percentage of sales. For instance, cash can be increased by any amount. How- ever, fixed assets must be increased in specific amounts
because it is impossible, as a practical matter, to buy part of a new plant or machine. In this case, a company has a “staircase” or “lumpy” fixed cost structure. Assume Tux- edo Air is currently producing at 100 percent capacity. As a result, to increase production, the company must set up an entirely new line at a cost of $5,000,000. Calculate the new EFN with this assumption. What does this imply about capacity utilization for the company next year?
Tuxedo Air Inc. 2012 Statement of Comprehensive Income
Sales $ 30,499,420 Cost of goods sold 22,224,580 Other expenses 3,867,500 Depreciation 1,366,680 EBIT $ 3,040,660 Interest 478,240 Taxable income $ 2,562,420 Taxes (40%) 1,024,968 Net income 1,537,452 Dividends $560,000 Addition to retained earnings 977,452
Tuxedo Air Inc. 2012 Statement of Financial Position
Assets Liabilities and Owners’ Equity Current Assets Current liabilities Cash $ 441,000 Accounts payable $ 889,000 Accounts receivable 708,400 Notes payable 2,030,000 Inventory 1,037,120 Total 2,919,000 Total $ 2,186,520 Long-term debt $ 5,320,000 Fixed assets Owners’ equity Net plant and equipment $ 16,122,400 Common stock $ 350,000
Retained earnings 9,719,920 Total equity 10,069,920
Total assets $ 18,308,920 Total liabilities and owners’ equity $ 18,308,920
MINI CASE
Internet Application Questions 1. Go to theglobeandmail.com/globe-investor/ and enter the ticker symbol “TRP-T” for TransCanada Corp. When you get the
quote, follow the “Analysts” link. What is projected earnings growth for next year? For the next five years? How do these earn- ings growth projections compare to the industry and to the TSX-S&P index?
2. You can find the homepage for Barrick at barrick.com. Go to the “Annual & Quarterly Report” under “Investors” menu. Using the growth in sales for the most recent year as the projected sales growth rate for next year, construct a pro forma statements of comprehensive income and financial position.
3. Locate the most recent annual financial statements for Canadian Tire at corp.canadiantire.ca by clicking on “Investors” and then on “Annual Reports.” Using the information from the financial statements, what is the internal growth rate for Canadian Tire? What is the sustainable growth rate?
110 Part 2: Financial Statements and Long-Term Financial Planning
04Ross_Chapter04_4th.indd 11004Ross_Chapter04_4th.indd 110 12-11-27 12:0312-11-27 12:03
One of the basic problems that fi nancial managers face is how to determine the value today of cash fl ows that are expected in the future. For example, suppose your province’s fi nance minister asked your advice on overhauling the provincial lottery with a view toward increasing revenues to help balance the budget. One attractive idea is to increase the size of the prizes while easing the strain on the treasury by spreading out the payments over time. Instead of off ering $1 million paid immediately, the new lottery would pay $1 million in 10 annual payments of $100,000. How much money would this idea save the province? Th e answer depends on the time value of money, the subject of this chapter.
In the most general sense, the phrase time value of money refers to the fact that a dollar in hand today is worth more than a dollar promised at some time in the future. On a practical level, one reason for this is that you could earn interest while you waited; so a dollar today would grow to more than a dollar later. Th e trade-off between money now and money later thus depends on, among other things, the rate you can earn by investing. Our goal in this chapter is to explicitly evaluate this trade-off between dollars today and dollars at some future time.
A thorough understanding of the material in this chapter is critical to understanding material in subsequent chapters, so you should study it with particular care. We will present a number of examples in this chapter. In many problems, your answer may diff er from ours slightly. Th is can happen because of rounding and is not a cause for concern.
INTRODUCTION TO VALUATION: THE TIME VALUE OF MONEY
C H A P T E R 5
I n 1922, two brothers from Toronto, John W. Billes and Alfred J. Billes, with a combined savings of $1,800, bought the Hamilton Tire and Garage Lim-
ited at the corner of Gerrard and Hamilton streets
in Toronto. In 1923, this company was sold and the
brothers set up a new company under the name
Canadian Tire Corp. at the corner of Yonge and Isa-
bella streets. Canadian Tire is now one of Canada’s
top 60 publicly traded companies and is listed in the
Toronto Stock Exchange. The market capitalization
of Canadian Tire in January 2012 was $5.3 billion.
Assuming that the owners were still alive and sold
the company in 2012 for $5.3 billion, is giving up
$1,800 in exchange for $5.3 billion in 90 years a
good deal? On the plus side the owners get back
around three million times the money they had
invested. That probably sounds excellent, but on the
down side, they had to wait 90 long years to get it.
What you need to know is how to analyze this trade-
off; this chapter gives you the tools you need.
Learning Object ives
After studying this chapter, you should understand:
LO1 How to determine the future value of an investment made today.
LO2 How to determine the present value of cash to be received at a future date.
LO3 How to find the return on an investment.
LO4 How long it takes for an investment to reach a desired value.
P A R T 3
C ou
rt es
y of
C
an ad
ia n
Ti re
5.1 Future Value and Compounding
We begin by studying future value. Future value (FV) refers to the amount of money to which an investment would grow over some length of time at some given interest rate. Put another way, future value is the cash value of an investment sometime in the future. We start out by considering the simplest case, a single-period investment.
Investing for a Single Period Suppose you were to invest $100 in a savings account that pays 10 percent interest per year. How much will you have in one year? You would have $110. Th is $110 is equal to your original prin- cipal of $100 plus $10 in interest that you earn. We say that $110 is the future value (FV) of $100 invested for one year at 10 percent, and we simply mean that $100 today is worth $110 in one year, given that 10 percent is the interest rate.
In general, if you invest for one period at an interest rate of r, your investment grows to (1 + r) per dollar invested. In our example, r is 10 percent, so your investment grows to (1 + .10) = 1.1 dol- lars per dollar invested. You invested $100 in this case, so you ended up with $100 × (1.10) = $110.
You might wonder if the single period in this example has to be a year. Th e answer is no. For example, if the interest rate were 2 percent per quarter, your $100 would grow to $100 × (1 + .02) = $102 by the end of the quarter. You might also wonder if 2 percent every quarter is the same as 8 percent per year. Th e answer is again no, and we’ll explain why a little later.
Investing for More than One Period Going back to your $100 investment, what will you have aft er two years, assuming the interest rate doesn’t change? If you leave the entire $110 in the bank, you will earn $110 × .10 = $11 in interest during the second year, so you will have a total of $110 + 11 = $121. Th is $121 is the future value of $100 in two years at 10 percent. Another way of looking at it is that one year from now you are eff ectively investing $110 at 10 percent for a year. Th is is a single-period problem, so you’ll end up with $1.1 for every dollar invested or $110 × 1.1 = $121 total.
Th is $121 has four parts. Th e fi rst part is the $100 original principal. Th e second part is the $10 in interest you earned in the fi rst year along with another $10 (the third part) you earn in the second year, for a total of $120. Th e last $1 you end up with (the fourth part) is interest you earn in the second year on the interest paid in the fi rst year: $10 × .10 = $1.
Th is process of leaving your money and any accumulated interest in an investment for more than one period, thereby reinvesting the interest, is called compounding. Compounding the interest means earning interest on interest, so we call the result compound interest. With simple inter- est, the interest is not reinvested, so interest is earned each period only on the original principal. We now take a closer look at how we calculated the $121 future value. We multiplied $110 by 1.1 to get $121. Th e $110, however, was $100 also multiplied by 1.1. In other words:
$121 = $110 × 1.1 = ($100 × 1.1) ×1.1 = $100 × (1.1 ×1.1) = $100 × 1.12 = $100 × 1.21
Future value = $121 r = 10%
Time (years)
$100
× 1.1 × 1.1
$110 $121
0 1 2
As our example suggests, the future value of $1 invested for t periods at a rate of r per period is: Future value = $1 × (1 + r)t [5.1]
Th e expression (1 + r)t is sometimes called the future value interest factor (or just future value fac- tor) for $1 invested at r percent for t periods and can be abbreviated as FVIF (r, t).
future value (FV) The amount an investment is worth after one or more periods. Also compound value.
compounding The process of accumulating interest in an investment over time to earn more interest.
interest on interest Interest earned on the reinvestment of previous interest payments.
compound interest Interest earned on both the initial principal and the interest reinvested from prior periods.
simple interest Interest earned only on the original principal amount invested.
112 Part 3: Valuation of Future Cash Flows
In our example, what would your $100 be worth aft er fi ve years? We can fi rst compute the relevant future value factor as:
(1+ r)t = (1 + .10)5 = 1.15 = 1.6105
Your $100 would thus grow to:
$100 × 1.6105 = $161.05
EXAMPLE 5.1: Interest on Interest
Suppose you locate a two-year investment that pays 4 per- cent per year. If you invest $325, how much will you have at the end of the two years? How much of this is simple in- terest? How much is compound interest?
At the end of the first year, you would have $325 × (1 + .04) = $338. If you reinvest this entire amount and thereby compound the interest, you would have $338 × 1.04 = $351.52 at the end of the second year. The total interest
you earn is thus $351.52 - 325 = $26.52. Your $325 origi- nal principal earns $325 × .04 = $13 in interest each year, for a two-year total of $26 in simple interest. The remaining $26.52 - 26 = $0.52 results from compounding. You can check this by noting that the interest earned in the first year is $13. The interest on interest earned in the second year thus amounts to $13 × .04 = $0.52, as we calculated.
Th e growth of your $100 each year is illustrated in Table 5.1. As shown, the interest earned in each year is equal to the beginning amount multiplied by the interest rate of 10 percent.
In Table 5.1, notice that the total interest you earn is $61.05. Over the fi ve-year span of this investment, the simple interest is $100 × .10 = $10 per year, so you accumulate $50 this way. Th e other $11.05 is from compounding.
TABLE 5.1 Future values of $100 at 10 percent
Year Beginning Amount
Simple Interest
Interest on Interest
Total Interest Earned
Ending Amount
1 $100.00 10 0.00 $10.00 $110.00 2 110.00 10 1.00 11.00 121.00 3 121.00 10 2.10 12.10 133.10 4 133.10 10 3.31 13.31 146.41 5 146.41 10 4.64 14.64 161.05
Total simple interest
50 Total interest on interest
$11.05 Total interest
$61.05
Figure 5.1 illustrates the growth of the compound interest in Table 5.1. Notice how the simple interest is constant each year, but the compound interest you earn gets bigger every year. Th e size of the compound interest keeps increasing because more and more interest builds up and there is thus more to compound.
Future values depend critically on the assumed interest rate, particularly for long-lived invest- ments. Figure 5.2 illustrates this relationship by plotting the growth of $1 for diff erent rates and lengths of time. Notice that the future value of $1 aft er 10 years is about $6.20 at a 20 percent rate, but it is only about $2.60 at 10 percent. In this case, doubling the interest rate more than doubles the future value.
To solve future value problems, we need to come up with the relevant future value factors. Th ere are several diff erent ways of doing this. In our example, we could have multiplied 1.1 by itself fi ve times. Th is will work just fi ne, but it would get to be very tedious for, say, a 30-year investment.
Fortunately, there are several easier ways to get future value factors. Most calculators have a key labelled . You can usually just enter 1.1, press this key, enter 5, and press the key to get the answer. Th is is an easy way to calculate future value factors because it’s quick and accurate.
For a discussion of time value concepts (and more) see financeprofessor.com or teachmefinance.com
CHAPTER 5: Introduction to Valuation: The Time Value of Money 113
Alternatively, you can use a table that contains future value factors for some common interest rates and time periods. Table 5.2 contains some of these factors. Table A.1 on the book’s website con- tains a much larger set. To use the table, fi nd the column that corresponds to 10 percent. Th en look down the rows until you come to fi ve periods. You should fi nd the factor that we calculated, 1.6105.
FIGURE 5.1
Future value, simple interest, and compound interest
Time (years)
$160
$110
$121
$133.10
$146.41
$161.05
$150
$140
$130
$120
$110
$100
$0 1 2 3 4 5
Future value
Growth of $100 original amount at 10% per year. The shaded area represents the portion of the total that results from compounding of interest.
FIGURE 5.2
Future value of $1 for different periods and rates
Time (years)
$1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
0%
5%
10%
15%
20%
Future value of $1
$2
$3
$4
$5
$6
$7
114 Part 3: Valuation of Future Cash Flows
TABLE 5.2
Future value interest factors
Periods
Interest Rate
5% 10% 15% 20%
1 1.0500 1.1000 1.1500 1.2000 2 1.1025 1.2100 1.3225 1.4400 3 1.1576 1.3310 1.5209 1.7280 4 1.2155 1.4641 1.7490 2.0736 5 1.2763 1.6105 2.0114 2.4883
Tables similar to Table 5.2 are not as common as they once were because they predate inexpensive calculators and are only available for a relatively small number of rates. Interest rates are oft en quoted to three or four decimal points, so the number of tables needed to deal with these accu- rately would be quite large. As a result, business people rarely use them. We illustrate the use of a calculator in this chapter.
EXAMPLE 5.2: Compound Interest
You’ve located an investment that pays 4 percent. That rate sounds good to you, so you invest $400. How much will you have in three years? How much will you have in seven years? At the end of seven years, how much interest have you earned? How much of that interest results from compounding?
Based on our discussion, we can calculate the future value factor for 4 percent and three years as:
(1+ r)t = 1.043 = 1.1249
Your $400 thus grows to:
$400 × 1.1249 = $449.96
After seven years, you would have:
$400 × 1.047 = $400 × 1.3159 = $526.36
Since you invested $400, the interest in the $526.36 fu- ture value is $526.36 - 400 = $126.36. At 4 percent, your $400 investment earns $400 × .04 = $16 in simple interest every year. Over seven years, the simple interest thus totals 7 × $16 = $112. The other $126.36 - 112 = $14.36 is from compounding.
EXAMPLE 5.3: How Much for that Cup?
To further illustrate the effect of compounding for long ho- rizons, consider the case of the Stanley Cup. The cup, the oldest team trophy in North America, was originally pur- chased by the governor general of Canada, Frederick Arthur Stanley, in 1893. Lord Stanley paid $48.67 for the cup 120 years ago. The Hockey Hall of Fame in Toronto has the cup insured for $1.5 million, although to millions of fans across Canada, it is priceless.1 What would the sum Lord Stanley paid for the cup be worth today if he had invested it at 10 percent rather than purchasing the cup?
120 years, at 10 percent, $48.67 grows quite a bit. How much? The future value factor is approximately:
(1 + r)t = (1.10)120 = 92,709.07 FV = $48.67 × 92,709.07 = $4,512,150.38
Well, $4,512,150.38 is a lot of money, considerably more than $1.5 million—of course, no hockey fan would recom- mend that Lord Stanley should have invested the money rather than buy the cup!
This example is something of an exaggeration, of course. In 1893, it would not have been easy to locate an investment that would pay 10 percent every year without fail for the next 120 years.
1
1 When this value for the Stanley Cup was reported in 2012, the practice of compounding interest was already more than 600 years old.
CHAPTER 5: Introduction to Valuation: The Time Value of Money 115
Th ese tables still serve a useful purpose. To make sure that you are doing the calculations cor- rectly, pick a factor from the table and then calculate it yourself to see that you get the same answer. Th ere are plenty of numbers to choose from.
Th e eff ect of compounding is not great over short time periods, but it really starts to add up as the horizon grows. To take an extreme case, suppose one of your more frugal ancestors had invested $5 for you at a 6 percent interest 200 years ago, how much would you have today? Th e future value factor is a substantial (1.06)200 = 115,125.90 (you won’t fi nd this one in a table), so you would have $5 × 115,125.90 = $575,629.52. Notice that the simple interest is just $5 × 0.06 = $.30 per year. Aft er 200 years, this amounts to $60. Th e rest is from reinvesting. Such is the power of compound interest!
Using a Financial Calculator
Although there are the various ways of calculating future values, as we have described so far, many of you will decide that a financial calculator is the way to go. If so, you should read this extended hint; otherwise, you can skip it. A financial calculator is simply an ordinary calculator with a few extra features. In par- ticular, it knows some of the most commonly used financial formulas, so it can directly compute things like future values. Financial calculators have the advantage that they handle a lot of the computation, but that is really all. In other words, you still have to understand the problem; the calculator just does some of the arithmetic. We therefore have two goals for this section. First, we’ll discuss how to compute future values. After that, we’ll show you how to avoid the most common mistakes people make when they start using financial calculators. Note that the actual keystrokes vary from calculator to calculator, so the following examples are for il- lustrative purposes only.
How to Calculate Future Values with a Financial Calculator Examining a typical financial calculator, you will find five keys of particular interest. They usually look like this:
For now, we need to focus on four of these. The keys labelled and are just what you would guess, present value and future value. The key labelled refers to the number of periods, which is what we have been calling t. Finally, stands for the in- terest rate, which we have called r.* If we have the financial calculator set up right (see our next section), then calculating a future value is very simple. Take a look back at our question involving the future value of $100 at 10 percent for five years. We have seen that the answer is $161.05. The exact key- strokes will differ depending on what type of calculator you use, but here is basically all you do: 1. Enter 100 followed by the +/- key. Press the key. (The negative sign is explained below.) 2. Enter 10. Press the key. (Notice that we entered 10, not .10; see below.) 3. Enter 5. Press the key. Now we have entered all of the relevant information. To solve for the future value, we need to ask the calculator what the FV is. Depending on your calculator, you either press the button labelled “CPT” (for compute) and then press , or else you just press
CALCULATOR HINTS
* The reason financial calculators use N and I/Y is that the most common use for these calculators is determining loan payments. In this context, N is the number of payments and I/Y is the interest rate on the loan. But, as we will see, there are many other uses of financial calculators that don’t involve loan payments and interest rates.
116 Part 3: Valuation of Future Cash Flows
Either way, you should get 161.05. If you don’t (and you probably won’t if this is the first time you have used a financial calculator!), we will offer some help in our next section. Before we explain the kinds of problems that you are likely to run into, we want to estab- lish a standard format for showing you how to use a financial calculator. Using the example we just looked at, in the future, we will illustrate such problems like this:
Enter 5 10 -100
Solve for 161.05
If all else fails, you can read the manual that came with the calculator.
How to Get the Wrong Answer Using a Financial Calculator There are a couple of common (and frustrating) problems that cause a lot of trouble with financial calculators. In this section, we provide some important dos and don’ts. If you just can’t seem to get a problem to work out, you should refer back to this section. There are two categories we examine: three things you need to do only once and three things you need to do every time you work a problem. The things you need to do just once deal with the following calculator settings:
1. Make sure your calculator is set to display a large number of decimal places. Most finan- cial calculators only display two decimal places; this causes problems because we fre- quently work with numbers—like interest rates—that are very small.
2. Make sure your calculator is set to assume only one payment per period or per year. Most financial calculators assume monthly payments (12 per year) unless you say otherwise.
3. Make sure your calculator is in “end” mode. This is usually the default, but you can acci- dently change to “begin” mode.
If you don’t know how to set these three things, see your calculator’s operating manual. There are also three things you need to do every time you work a problem:
1. Before you start, completely clear out the calculator. This is very important. Failure to do this is the number one reason for wrong answers; you simply must get in the habit of clearing the calculator every time you start a problem. How you do this depends on the calculator, but you must do more than just clear the display. For example, on a Texas Instruments BA II Plus you must press then for clear time value of money. There is a similar command on your calculator. Learn it!
Note that turning the calculator off and back on won’t do it. Most financial calculators remember everything you enter, even after you turn them off. In other words, they re- member all your mistakes unless you explicitly clear them out. Also, if you are in the middle of a problem and make a mistake, clear it out and start over. Better to be safe than sorry.
2. Put a negative sign on cash outflows. Most financial calculators require you to put a nega- tive sign on cash outflows and a positive sign on cash inflows. As a practical matter, this usually just means that you should enter the present value amount with a negative sign (because normally the present value represents the amount you give up today in ex- change for cash inflows later). By the same token, when you solve for a present value, you shouldn’t be surprised to see a negative sign.
3. Enter the rate correctly. Financial calculators assume that rates are quoted in percent, so if the rate is .08 (or 8 percent), you should enter 8, not .08.
One way to determine if you may have made a mistake while using your financial calcu- lator is to complete a check for reasonableness. This means that you should think about the problem logically, and consider whether your answer seems like a reasonable or even pos- sible one. For example, if you are determining the future value of $100 invested for three
CHAPTER 5: Introduction to Valuation: The Time Value of Money 117
years at 5 percent, an answer of $90 is clearly wrong. Future value has to be greater than the original amount invested.
If you follow these guidelines (especially the one about clearing the calculator), you should have no problem using a financial calculator to work almost all of the problems in this and the next few chapters. We’ll provide additional examples and guidance where appropriate.
A Note on Compound Growth If you are considering depositing money in an interest-bearing account, the interest rate on that account is just the rate at which your money grows, assuming you don’t remove any of it. If that rate is 10 percent, each year you simply have 10 percent more money than you had the year before. In this case, the interest rate is just an example of a compound growth rate.
Th e way we calculated future values is actually quite general and lets you answer some other types of questions related to growth. For example, your company currently has 10,000 employees. You’ve estimated that the number of employees grows by 3 percent per year. How many employ- ees will there be in fi ve years? Here, we start with 10,000 people instead of dollars, and we don’t think of the growth rate as an interest rate, but the calculation is exactly the same:
10,000 × (1.03)5 = 10,000 × 1.1593 = 11,593 employees
Th ere will be about 1593 net new hires over the coming fi ve years.
EXAMPLE 5.4: Dividend Growth
Over the 16 years ending in 2011, the Royal Bank of Cana- da’s dividend grew from $0.29 to $2.08, an average annual growth rate of 13.10 percent.2 Assuming this growth con- tinues, what will the dividend be in 2014?
Here we have a cash dividend growing because it is be- ing increased by management, but, once again, the calcu- lation is the same:
Future value = $2.08 × (1.1310)3
= $2.08 (1.4467) = $3.01
The dividend will grow by $0.93 over that period. Divi- dend growth is a subject we return to in a later chapter.
2
1. What do we mean by the future value of an investment?
2. What does it mean to compound interest? How does compound interest differ from simple interest?
3. In general, what is the future value of $1 invested at r per period for t periods?
5.2 Present Value and Discounting
When we discuss future value, we are thinking of questions such as: What will my $2,000 invest- ment grow to if it earns a 6.5 percent return every year for the next six years? Th e answer to this question is what we call the future value of $2,000 invested at 6.5 percent for six years (check that the answer is about $2,918).
Another type of question that comes up even more oft en in fi nancial management is obviously related to future value. Suppose you need to have $10,000 in 10 years, and you can earn 6.5 per- cent on your money. How much do you have to invest today to reach your goal? You can verify that the answer is $5,327.26. How do we know this? Read on.
2 $2.08 = $0.29 × (1 + g)16 7.1724 = (1 + g)16 (7.1724)1/16 = 1 + g 1.1310 = 1 + g g = 13.10%
Concept Questions
118 Part 3: Valuation of Future Cash Flows
The Single-Period Case We’ve seen that the future value of $1 invested for one year at 10 percent is $1.10. We now ask a slightly diff erent question: How much do we have to invest today at 10 percent to get $1 in one year? In other words, we know the future value here is $1, but what is the present value (PV)? Th e answer isn’t too hard to fi gure out. Whatever we invest today will be 1.1 times bigger at the end of the year. Since we need $1 at the end of the year:
Present value × 1.1 = $1
Or:
Present value = $1/1.1 = $.909
Th is present value is the answer to the following question: What amount, invested today, will grow to $1 in one year if the interest rate is 10 percent? Present value is thus just the reverse of future value. Instead of compounding the money forward into the future, we discount it back to the present.
EXAMPLE 5.5: Single Period PV
Suppose you need $400 to buy textbooks next year. You can earn 4 percent on your money. How much do you have to put up today?
We need to know the PV of $400 in one year at 4 per- cent. Proceeding as we just did:
Present value × 1.04 = $400
We can now solve for the present value:
Present value = $400 × (1/1.04) = $384.62
Thus, $384.62 is the present value. Again, this just means that investing this amount for one year at 4 percent results in your having a future value of $400.
From our examples, the present value of $1 to be received in one period is generally given as:
PV = $1 × [1/(1 + r)] = $1/(1 + r)
We next examine how to get the present value of an amount to be paid in two or more periods into the future.
Present Values for Multiple Periods Suppose you need to have $1,000 in two years. If you can earn 7 percent, how much do you have to invest to make sure that you have the $1,000 when you need it? In other words, what is the present value of $1,000 in two years if the relevant rate is 7 percent?
Based on your knowledge of future values, we know that the amount invested must grow to $1,000 over the two years. In other words, it must be the case that:
$1,000 = PV × 1.072 = PV × 1.1449
Given this, we can solve for the present value as:
Present value = $1,000/1.1449 = $873.44
Present value = $873.44 r = 7%
$873.44 $1,000
× 1.072
Time (Years)
0 1 2
Th erefore, you must invest $873.44 to achieve your goal.
present value (PV) The current value of future cash flows discounted at the appropriate discount rate.
discount To calculate the present value of some future amount.
CHAPTER 5: Introduction to Valuation: The Time Value of Money 119
As you have probably recognized by now, calculating present values is quite similar to calcu- lating future values, and the general result looks much the same. Th e present value of $1 to be received t periods in the future at a discount rate of r is:
PV = $1 × [1/(1 + r)t] = $1/(1 + r)t [5.2] Th e quantity in brackets, 1/(1 + r)t, goes by several diff erent names. Since it’s used to discount a future cash fl ow, it is oft en called a discount factor. With this name, it is not surprising that the rate used in the calculation is oft en called the discount rate. We tend to call it this in talking about present values. Th e discount rate is also sometimes referred to as the interest rate or rate of return. Regardless of what it is called, the discount rate is related to the risk of the cash fl ows. Th e higher the risk, the larger the discount rate and the lower the present value.
Th e quantity in brackets is also called the present value interest factor for $1 at r percent for t periods and is sometimes abbreviated as PVIF(r,t). Finally, calculating the present value of a future cash fl ow to determine its worth today is commonly called discounted cash fl ow (DCF) valuation.
To illustrate, suppose you need $1,000 in three years. You can earn 5 percent on your money. How much do you have to invest today? To fi nd out, we have to determine the present value of $1,000 in three years at 5 percent. We do this by discounting $1,000 back three periods at 5 per- cent. With these numbers, the discount factor is:
1/(1 +.05)3 = 1/1.1576 = .8638
Th e amount you must invest is thus:
$1,000 × .8638 = $863.80
We say that $863.80 is the present or discounted value of $1,000 to be received in three years at 5 percent.
EXAMPLE 5.6: Saving up for a Ferrari
You would like to buy the latest model Ferrari 458 Spider. You have about $230,000 or so, but the car costs $274,000. If you can earn 4 percent, how much do you have to invest today to buy the car in two years? Do you have enough? Assume the price will stay the same.
What we need to know is the present value of $274,000 to be paid in two years, assuming a 4 percent rate. Based on our discussion, this is:
PV = $274,000/1.042 = $274,000/1.0816 = $253,328.40
You’re still about $23,328.40 short, even if you’re willing to wait two years.
Th ere are tables for present value factors just as there are tables for future value factors, and you use them in the same way (if you use them at all). Table 5.3 contains a small set. A much larger set can be found in Table A.2 on the book’s website.
TABLE 5.3
Present value interest factors
Periods
Interest Rate
5% 10% 15% 20%
1 .9524 .9091 .8696 .8333
2 .9070 .8264 .7561 .6944 3 .8638 .7513 .6575 .5787 4 .8227 .6830 .5718 .4823 5 .7835 .6209 .4972 .4019
In Table 5.3, the discount factor we just calculated (.8638) can be found by looking down the col- umn labelled 5% until you come to the third row.
discount rate The rate used to calculate the present value of future cash flows.
120 Part 3: Valuation of Future Cash Flows
You solve present value problems on a financial calculator just as you do future value prob- lems. For the example we just examined (the present value of $1,000 to be received in three years at 5 percent), you would do the following:
Enter 3 5 1000
Solve for -863.80
Notice that the answer has a negative sign; as we discussed above, that’s because it repre- sents an outflow today in exchange for the $1,000 inflow later.
As the length of time until payment grows, present values decline. As Example 5.7 illus- trates, present values tend to become small as the time horizon grows. If you look out far enough, they will always get close to zero. Also, for a given length of time, the higher the discount rate is, the lower is the present value. Put another way, present values and discount rates are inversely related. Increasing the discount rate decreases the PV and vice versa.
EXAMPLE 5.7: Th e ‘Th riller’ jacket
In June 2011, Michael Jackson’s zombie-ridden ‘Thriller’ jacket was sold in an auction for $1.8 million. Assuming that the original value of the jacket was $20,000 in 1983, what rate of return did his jacket earn?
Rate of return earned by his jacket is:
$20,000 = $1,800,000/(1 + r)28
(1 + r)28 = 90.00 1 + r = 1.1743
r = 17.43%
The discount rate, r, is found to be 17.43 percent.
1. What do we mean by the present value of an investment?
2. The process of discounting a future amount back to the present is the opposite of doing what?
3. What do we mean by the discounted cash flow or DCF approach?
5.3 More on Present and Future Values
Look back at the expressions that we came up with for present and future values, and you will see a very simple relationship between the two. We explore this relationship and some related issues in this section.
Present versus Future Value What we called the present value factor is just the reciprocal of (that is, 1 divided by) the future value factor:
Future value factor = (1 + r)t Present value factor = 1/(1 + r)t
In fact, the easy way to calculate a present value factor on many calculators is to fi rst calculate the future value factor and then press the key to fl ip it over. If we let FVt stand for the future value aft er t periods, the relationship between future value and present value can be written very simply as one of the following:
PV × (1 + r)t = FVt [5.3] PV = FVt/(1 + r)t = FVt × [1/(1 + r)t]
Th is last result we call the basic present value equation. We use it throughout the text. Th ere are a
CALCULATOR HINTS
Concept Questions
CHAPTER 5: Introduction to Valuation: The Time Value of Money 121
number of variations that come up, but this simple equation underlies many of the most impor- tant ideas in corporate fi nance.3
EXAMPLE 5.8: Evaluating Investments
To give you an idea of how we use present and future val- ues, consider the following simple investment. Your com- pany proposes to buy an asset of $335,000. This investment is very safe. You will sell the asset in three years for $400,000. You know that you could invest the $335,000 elsewhere at 3 percent with very little risk. What do you think of the proposed investment?
This is a good investment. Why? Because If you can in- vest the $335,000 elsewhere at 3 percent, after three years it would grow to:
$335,000 × (1 + r)t = $335,000 × 1.033
= $335,000 × 1.0927 = $366,054.50
Because the proposed investment pays out $400,000, it is better than other alternative that we have. Another way of saying the same thing is to notice that the present value of $400,000 in three years at 3 percent is:
$400,000 × [1/(1 + r)t] = $400,000/1.033 = $400,000/1.0927 = $366,065.71
This tells us that we have to invest about $366,000 to get $400,000 in three years, not $335,000. We return to this type of analysis later.
Determining the Discount Rate Frequently, we need to determine what discount rate is implicit in an investment. We can do this by looking at the basic present value equation:
PV = FVt/(1 + r)t
Th ere are only four parts to this equation: the present value (PV), the future value (FVt), the discount rate (r), and the life of the investment (t). Given any three of these, we can always fi nd the fourth part.
To illustrate what happens with multiple periods, let’s say that we are off ered an investment that costs us $100 and doubles our money in eight years. To compare this to other investments, we would like to know what discount rate is implicit in these numbers. Th is discount rate is called the rate of return or sometimes just return for the investment. In this case, we have a present value of $100, a future value of $200 (double our money), and an eight-year life. To calculate the return, we can write the basic present value equation as:
PV = FVt/(1 + r)t $100 = $200/(1 + r)8
It could also be written as:
(1 + r)8 = 200/100 = 2
We now need to solve for r. Th ere are three ways we could do it:
1. Use a financial calculator. 2. Solve the equation for 1 + r by taking the eighth root of both sides. Since this is the same
thing as raising both sides to the power of 1/8 or .125, this is actually easy to do with the yx key on a calculator. Just enter 2, then press , enter .125, and press the key. The eighth root should be about 1.09, which implies that r is 9 percent.
3. Use a future value table. The future value factor after eight years is equal to 2. Look across the row corresponding to eight periods in Table A.1 to see that a future value factor of 2 cor- responds to the 9 percent column, again implying that the return here is 9 percent.4
3 The process of applying the present value equation is known as discounting. If you apply the future value equation, you are compounding. 4 There is a useful “back-of-the-envelope” means of solving for r—the Rule of 72. For reasonable rates of return, the time it takes to double your money is given approximately by 72/r%. In our example, this is 72/r% = 8 years, implying that r is 9 percent as we calculated. This rule is fairly accurate for discount rates in the 5 percent to 20 percent range.
For a downloadable Windows- based financial calculator, go to calculator.org
122 Part 3: Valuation of Future Cash Flows
We can illustrate how to calculate unknown rates using a financial calculator using these numbers. For our example, you would do the following:
Enter 8 -100 200
Solve for 9.05
As in our previous examples, notice the minus sign on the present value.
EXAMPLE 5.9: Finding r for a Single Period Investment
You are considering a one-year investment. If you put up $1,250, you would get back $1,350. What rate is this in- vestment paying?
First, in this single-period case, the answer is fairly obvi- ous. You are getting a total of $100 in addition to your $1,250. The rate of return on this investment is thus $100/1,250 = 8 percent.
More formally, from the basic present value equation, the present value (the amount you must put up today) is
$1,250. The future value (what the present value grows to) is $1,350. The time involved is one period, so we have: $1,250 = $1,350/(1 + r)1
(1 + r) = $1,350/$1,250 = 1.08 r = 8%
In this simple case, of course, there was no need to go through this calculation, but, as we describe later, it gets a little harder when there is more than one period.
Not taking the time value of money into account when computing growth rates or rates of return oft en leads to some misleading numbers in the real world. For example, in 1997, Nissan announced plans to restore 56 vintage Datsun 240Zs and sell them to consumers. Th e price tag of a restored Z? About $38,000, which was at least 700 percent greater than the cost of a 240Z when it sold new 27 years earlier. As expected, many viewed the restored Zs as potential investments because they are a virtual carbon copy of the classic original.
EXAMPLE 5.10: Saving for University
Many Canadian universities are increasing their tuition and fees. You estimate that you will need about $100,000 to send your child to a university in eight years. You have about $45,000 now. If you can earn 4 percent, will you make it? At what rate will you just reach your goal?
If you can earn 4 percent, the future value of your $45,000 in eight years would be:
FV = $45,000 × (1.04)8 = $45,000 × 1.3686 = $61,587
So you will not make it easily. The minimum rate is the unknown r in the following:
FV = $45,000 × (1 + r)8 = $100,000 (1 + r)8 = $100,000/$45,000 = 2.2222
To get the exact answer, we could use a financial calculator or we can solve for r:
(1 +r) = 2.2222(1/8) = 2.2222.125 = 1.1050 r = 10.50%
EXAMPLE 5.11: Only 10,956 Days to Retirement
You would like to retire in 30 years as a millionaire. If you have $10,000 today, what rate of return do you need to earn to achieve your goal?
The future value is $1 million. The present value is $10,000, and there are 30 years until payment. We need to calculate the unknown discount rate in the following:
$10,000 = $1,000,000/(1 + r)30
(1 + r)30 = 100
The future value factor is thus 100. You can verify that the implicit rate is about 16.59 percent.
CALCULATOR HINTS
CHAPTER 5: Introduction to Valuation: The Time Value of Money 123
If history is any guide, we can get a rough idea of how well you might expect such an investment to perform. According to the numbers quoted above, a Z that originally sold for about $5,289 twenty-seven years earlier would sell for about $38,000 in 1997. See if you don’t agree that this represents a return of 7.58 percent per year, far less than the gaudy 700 percent diff erence in the values when the time value of money is ignored.
Our example shows it’s easy to be misled when returns are quoted without considering the time value of money. However, it’s not just the uninitiated who are guilty of this slight form of deception. Th e title of a recent feature article in a leading business magazine predicted the Dow- Jones Industrial Average would soar to a 70 percent gain over the coming fi ve years. Do you think it meant a 70 percent return per year on your money? Th ink again!
Finding the Number of Periods Suppose we were interested in purchasing an asset that costs $50,000. We currently have $25,000. If we can earn 12 percent on this $25,000, how long until we have the $50,000? Th e answer involves solving for the last variable in the basic present value equation, the number of periods. You already know how to get an approximate answer to this particular problem. Notice that we need to double our money. From the Rule of 72, this would take 72/12 = 6 years at 12 percent.
EXAMPLE 5.12: Waiting for Godot
You’ve been saving to buy the Godot Company. The total cost will be $10 million. You currently have about $2.3 mil- lion. If you can earn 5 percent on your money, how long will you have to wait? At 16 percent, how long must you wait?
At 5 percent, you’ll have to wait a long time. From the basic present value equation:
$2.3 = 10/(1.05)t
1.05t = 4.35 t = 30 years
At 16 percent, things are a little better. Check for yourself that it would take about 10 years.
To come up with the exact answer, we can again manipulate the basic present value equation. Th e present value is $25,000, and the future value is $50,000. With a 12 percent discount rate, the basic equation takes one of the following forms:
$25,000 = $50,000/(1.12)t $50,000/25,000 = (1.12)t = 2
We thus have a future value factor of 2 for a 12 percent rate. To get the exact answer, we have to explicitly solve for t (or use a fi nancial calculator)5.
Stripped coupons are a widely held investment. You purchase them for a fraction of their face value. For example, suppose you buy a Government of Canada stripped coupon for $50 on July 1, 2012. Th e coupon will mature aft er 12 years on July 1, 2024 and pay its face value of $100. You invest $50 and receive double your money aft er 12 years, what rate do you earn? Because this investment is doubling in value in 12 years, the Rule of 72 tells you the answer right away: 72/12 = 6 percent. You can check this using the basic time value equation.
Th is example completes our introduction to basic time value concepts. Table 5.4 summarizes present and future value calculations for your reference.
5 To solve for t, we have to take the logarithm of both sides of the equation: 1.12t = 2 log 1.12t = log 2 t log 1.12 = log 2 We can then solve for t explicitly: t = log 2/log 1.12 = 6.1163 Almost all calculators can determine a logarithm; look for a key labelled log or ln. If both are present, use either one.
Why does the Rule of 72 work? See moneychimp.com
Learn more about using Excel™ for time value and other calculations at studyfinance.com
124 Part 3: Valuation of Future Cash Flows
Using a Spreadsheet for Time Value of Money Calculations
More and more business people from many different areas (and not just finance and ac- counting) rely on spreadsheets to do all the different types of calculations that come up in the real world. As a result, in this section, we will show you how to use a spreadsheet to handle the various time value of money problems we presented in this chapter. We will use Microsoft Excel™, but the commands are similar for other types of software. We assume you are already familiar with basic spreadsheet operations. As we have seen, you can solve for any one of the following four potential unknowns: future value, present value, the discount rate, or the number of periods. With a spreadsheet, there is a separate formula for each. In Excel, these are as follows:
To Find Enter This Formula
Future value = FV (rate,nper,pmt,pv) Present value = PV (rate,nper,pmt,fv) Discount rate = RATE (nper,pmt,pv,fv) Number of periods = NPER (rate,pmt,pv,fv)
In these formulas, pv is the present value, fv is the future value, nper is the number of peri- ods, and rate is the discount, or interest, rate. There are two things that are a little tricky here. First, unlike a financial calculator, you have to enter the rate into the spreadsheet as a decimal. Second, as with most financial cal- culators, you have to put a negative sign on either the present value or the future value to solve for the rate or the number of periods. For the same reason, if you solve for a present value, the answer will have a negative sign unless you input a negative future value. The same is true when you compute a future value. To illustrate how you might use these formulas, we will go back to an example in the chapter. If you invest $25,000 at 12 percent per year, how long until you have $50,000? You might set up a spreadsheet like this:
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
1 0
11
1 2
1 3
1 4
A B C D E F G H
If we invest $25,000 at 12 percent, how long until we have $50,000? We need to solve
for the unknown number of periods, so we use the formula NPER(rate, pmt, pv, fv).
Present value (pv): $25,000
Future value (fv): $50,000
Rate (rate): 0.12
Periods: 6.1162554
The formula entered in cell B11 is = NPER(B9, 0, –B7, B8); notice that pmt is zero and that pv
has a negative sign on it. Also notice that rate is entered as a decimal, not a percentage.
Using a spreadsheet for time value of money calculations
TABLE 5.4 Summary of time-value calculations
I. Symbols:
PV = Present value, what future cash flows are worth today
FVt = Future value, what cash flows are worth in the future
r = Interest rate, rate of return, or discount rate per period—typically, but not always, one year
t = Number of periods—typically, but not always, the number of years
C = Cash amount
II. Future value of C invested at r percent for t periods:
FVt = C × (1 + r) t
The term (1 + r)t is called the future value factor.
III. Present value of C to be received in t periods at r percent per period:
PV = C/(1 + r)t
The term 1/(1 + r)t is called the present value factor.
IV. The basic present value equation giving the relationship between present and future value is:
PV = FVt/(1 + r) t
SPREADSHEET STRATEGIES
CHAPTER 5: Introduction to Valuation: The Time Value of Money 125
1. What is the basic present value equation?
2. In general, what is the present value of $1 to be received in t periods, assuming a discount rate of r per period?
3. What is the Rule of 72?
5.4 SUMMARY AND CONCLUSIONS
Th is chapter has introduced you to the basic principles of present value and discounted cash fl ow valuation. In it, we explained a number of things about the time value of money, including:
1. For a given rate of return, the value at some point in the future of an investment made today can be determined by calculating the future value of that investment.
2. The current worth of a future cash flow or a series of cash flows can be determined for a given rate of return by calculating the present value of the cash flow(s) involved.
3. The relationship between present value (PV) and future value (FV) for a given rate r and time t is given by the basic present value equation:
PV = FVt/(1 + r)t
As we have shown, it is possible to find any one of the four components (PV, FVt, r, or t) given the other three components.
Th e principles developed in this chapter will fi gure prominently in the chapters to come. Th e reason for this is that most investments, whether they involve real assets or fi nancial assets, can be analyzed using the discounted cash fl ow (DCF) approach. As a result, the DCF approach is broadly applicable and widely used in practice. Before going on, you might want to do some of the problems that follow.
Key Terms compound interest (page 112) compounding (page 112) discount (page 119) discount rate (page 120)
future value (FV) (page 112) interest on interest (page 112) present value (PV) (page 119) simple interest (page 112)
Chapter Review Problems and Self-Test 5.1 Calculating Future Values Assume you deposit $10,000 to-
day in an account that pays 6 percent interest. How much will you have in five years?
5.2 Calculating Present Values Suppose you have just celebrated your 19th birthday. A rich uncle has set up a trust fund for you that will pay you $150,000 when you turn 30. If the relevant discount rate is 9 percent, how much is this fund worth today?
5.3 Calculating Rates of Return You’ve been offered an invest- ment that will double your money in 10 years. What rate of return are you being offered? Check your answer using the Rule of 72.
5.4 Calculating the Number of Periods You’ve been offered an
investment that will pay you 9 percent per year. If you invest $15,000, how long until you have $30,000? How long until you have $45,000?
5.5 Compound Interest In 1867, George Edward Lee found on his property in Ontario an astrolabe (a 17th-century navigat- ing device) originally lost by Samuel de Champlain. Lee sold the astrolabe to a stranger for $10. In 1989, the Canadian Mu- seum of Civilization purchased the astrolabe for $250,000 from the New York Historical Society. (How it got there is a long story.) It appears that Lee had been swindled; however, suppose he had invested the $10 at 10 percent. How much was it worth 140 years later in 2007?
Answers to Self-Test Problems 5.1 We need to calculate the future value of $10,000 at 6 percent for five years. The future value factor is: 1.065 = 1.3382 The future value is thus $10,000 × 1.3382 = $13,382.26.
Concept Questions
126 Part 3: Valuation of Future Cash Flows
5.2 We need the present value of $150,000 to be paid in 11 years at 9 percent. The discount factor is: 1/1.0911 = 1/2.5804 = .3875 The present value is thus about $58,130. 5.3 Suppose you invest, say, $1,000. You will have $2,000 in 10 years with this investment. So, $1,000 is the amount you have today, or the
present value, and $2,000 is the amount you will have in 10 years, or the future value. From the basic present value equation, we have: $2,000 = $1,000 × (1 + r)10
2 = (1 + r)10
From here, we need to solve for r, the unknown rate. As shown in the chapter, there are several different ways to do this. We will take the 10th root of 2 (by raising 2 to the power of 1/10):
2(1/10) = 1 + r 1.0718 = 1 + r r = 7.18% Using the Rule of 72, we have 72/t = r%, or 72/10 = 7.2%, so our answer looks good (remember that the Rule of 72 is only an
approximation). 5.4 The basic equation is: $30,000 = $15,000 × (1 + .09)t
2 = (1 + .09)t
If we solve for t, we get that t = 8.04 years. Using the Rule of 72, we get 72/9 = 8 years, so, once again, our answer looks good. To get $45,000, verify for yourself that you will have to wait 12.75 years.
5.5 At 10 percent, the $10 would have grown quite a bit over 140 years. The future value factor is: (1 + r)t = 1.1140 = 623,700.26 The future value is thus on the order of: $10 × 623,700.26 = $6,237,003.
Concepts Review and Critical Thinking Questions 1. (LO2) The basic present value equation has four parts. What
are they? 2. (LO1, 2) What is compounding? What is discounting? 3. (LO1, 2) As you increase the length of time involved, what
happens to future values? What happens to present values? 4. (LO1, 2) What happens to a future value if you increase the
rate r? What happens to a present value? The next four questions refer to a stripped coupon issued by the Province of Ontario. 5. (LO2) Why would an investor be willing to pay $76.04 today
in exchange for a promise to receive $100 in the future? 6. (LO2) Would you be willing to pay $500 today in exchange
for $10,000 in 30 years? What would be the key considerations in answering yes or no? Would your answer depend on who is making the promise to repay?
7. (LO2) Suppose that when the Province of Ontario offered the bond for $76.04, the Province of Alberta had offered an es- sentially identical security. Do you think it would have a higher or lower price? Why?
8. (LO2) The Province of Ontario bonds are actively bought and sold by investment dealers. If you obtained a price today, do you think the price would exceed the $76.04 original price? Why? If you looked in the year 2010, do you think the price would be higher or lower than today’s price? Why?
Questions and Problems 1. Simple Interest versus Compound Interest (LO1) Bank of Vancouver pays 8 percent simple interest on its savings account
balances, whereas Bank of Calgary pays 8 percent interest compounded annually. If you made a $5,000 deposit in each bank, how much more money would you earn from your Bank of Calgary account at the end of 10 years?
2. Calculating Future Values (LO1) For each of the following, compute the future value: Present Value Years Interest Rate Future Value
$2,250 11 10% 8,752 7 8
76,355 14 17 183,796 8 7
3. Calculating Present Values (LO2) For each of the following, compute the present value: Present Value Years Interest Rate Future Value
6 7% $15,451 7 13 51,557
23 14 886,073 18 9 550,164
1. S b h
Basic (Questions
1–15)
2
3
CHAPTER 5: Introduction to Valuation: The Time Value of Money 127
4. Calculating Interest Rates (LO3) Solve for the unknown interest rate in each of the following: Present Value Years Interest Rate Future Value
$240 2 $297 360 10 1,080
39,000 15 185,382 38,261 30 531,618
5. Calculating the Number of Periods (LO4) Solve for the unknown number of years in each of the following: Present Value Years Interest Rate Future Value
$560 9% $1,284 810 10 4,341
18,400 17 364,518 21,500 15 173,439
6. Calculating Interest Rates (LO3) Assume the total cost of a university education will be $290,000 when your child enters university in 18 years. You currently have $55,000 to invest. What annual rate of interest must you earn on your investment to cover the cost of your child’s university education?
7. Calculating the Number of Periods (LO4) At 7 percent interest, how long does it take to double your money? To quadruple it? 8. Calculating Interest Rates (LO3) In 2013, the automobile industry announced the average vehicle selling price was $34,958.
Five years earlier, the average price was $27,641. What was the annual percentage increase in vehicle selling price? 9. Calculating the Number of Periods (LO4) You’re trying to save to buy a new $170,000 BMW 3 series sedan. You have $40,000
today that can be invested at your bank. The bank pays 5.3 percent annual interest on its accounts. How long will it be before you have enough to buy the car?
10. Calculating Present Values (LO2) Normandin Inc. has an unfunded pension liability of $650 million that must be paid in 20 years. To assess the value of the firm’s stock, financial analysts want to discount this liability back to the present. If the relevant discount rate is 7.4 percent, what is the present value of this liability?
11. Calculating Present Values (LO2) You have just received notification that you have won the $1 million first prize in Lamarche lottery. However, the prize will be awarded on your 100th birthday (assuming you’re around to collect), 80 years from now. What is the present value of your windfall if the appropriate discount rate is 10 percent?
12. Calculating Future Values (LO1) Your coin collection contains fifty 1952 silver dollars. If your grandparents purchased them for their face value when they were new, how much will your collection be worth when you retire in 2057, assuming they appreciate at a 4.5 percent annual rate?
13. Calculating Interest Rates and Future Values (LO1, 3) In 1970, the prize money of the Canadian Open Tennis tournament was $15,000. In 2012, the prize money was $2,648,700. What was the percentage increase in the prize money over this period? If the winner’s prize continues to increase at the same rate, what will it be in 2040?
14. Calculating Present Values (LO2) The first comic book featuring Superman was sold in 1938. In 2005, the estimated price for this comic book in good condition was about $485,000. This represented a return of 25.90 percent per year. For this to be true, what must the comic book have sold for when new?
15. Calculating Rates of Return (LO3) Although appealing to more refined tastes, art as a collectible has not always performed so profitably. During 2003, Sothebys sold the Edgar Degas bronze sculpture Petit Danseuse de Quartorze Ans at auction for a price of $10,311,500. Unfortunately for the previous owner, he had purchased it in 1999 at a price of $12,377,500. What was his annual rate of return on this sculpture?
16. Calculating Rates of Return (LO3) On February 2, 2013, an investor held some Province of Ontario stripped coupons in a self- administered RRSP at ScotiaMcLeod, an investment dealer. Each coupon represented a promise to pay $100 at the maturity date on January 13, 2019 but the investor would receive nothing until then. The value of the coupon showed as $76.04 on the investor’s screen. This means that the investor was giving up $76.04 on February 2, 2013 in exchange for $100 to be received just less than six years later.
a. Based upon the $76.04 price, what rate was the yield on the Province of Ontario bond? b. Suppose that on February 2, 2014, the security’s price was $81.00. If an investor had purchased it for $76.04 a year earlier
and sold it on this day, what annual rate of return would she have earned? c. If an investor had purchased the security at market on February 2, 2014, and held it until it matured, what annual rate of
return would she have earned? 17. Calculating Present Values (LO2) Suppose you are still committed to owning a $170,000 BMW (see Question 9). If you believe
your mutual fund can achieve an 11 percent annual rate of return and you want to buy the car in 10 years on the day you turn 30, how much must you invest today?
18. Calculating Future Values (LO1) You have just made your first $4,000 contribution to your registered retirement saving plan (RRSP). Assuming you earn a 11 percent rate of return and make no additional contributions, what will your account be worth when you retire in 45 years? What if you wait 10 years before contributing? (Does this suggest an investment strategy?)
19. Calculating Future Values (LO1) You are scheduled to receive $20,000 in two years. When you receive it, you will invest it for six more years at 8.4 percent per year. How much will you have in eight years?
20. Calculating the Number of Periods (LO4) You expect to receive $10,000 at graduation in two years. You plan on investing it at 11 percent until you have $75,000. How long will you wait from now?
4
5
Intermediate (Questions
16–20)
128 Part 3: Valuation of Future Cash Flows
In our previous chapter, we covered the basics of discounted cash fl ow valuation. However, so far, we have only dealt with single cash fl ows. In reality, most investments have multiple cash fl ows. For example, if Tim Hortons or Second Cup is thinking of opening a new outlet, there will be a large cash outlay in the beginning and then cash infl ows for many years. In this chapter, we begin to explore how to value such investments.
When you fi nish this chapter, you should have some very practical skills. For example, you will know how to calculate your own car payments or student loan payments. You will also be able to determine how long it will take to pay off a credit card if you make the minimum payment each month (a practice we do not recommend). We will show you how to compare interest rates to determine which are the highest and which are the lowest, and we will also show you how interest rates can be quoted in diff erent, and at times deceptive, ways.
6.1 Future and Present Values of Multiple Cash Flows
Th us far, we have restricted our attention to either the future value of a lump-sum present amount or the present value of some single future cash fl ow. In this section, we begin to study ways to value multiple cash fl ows. We start with future value.
Future Value with Multiple Cash Flows Suppose you deposit $100 today in an account paying 8 percent. In one year, you will deposit another $100. How much will you have in two years? Th is particular problem is relatively easy. At the end of the fi rst year, you will have $108 plus the second $100 you deposit, for a total of $208. You leave this $208 on deposit at 8 percent for another year. At the end of this second year, it is worth:
$208 × 1.08 = $224.64
Figure 6.1 is a time line that illustrates the process of calculating the future value of these two $100 deposits. Figures such as this one are very useful for solving complicated problems. Almost any
DISCOUNTED CASH FLOW VALUATION
C H A P T E R 6
W ith multimillion dollar contracts and bonuses, the signing of big-name ath- letes in the sports industry is often accompanied by
great fanfare, but the numbers can often be mislead-
ing. For example, in September 2009, the Vancou-
ver Canucks extended its contract with goaltender
Roberto Luongo, offering him a twelve-year deal
through to 2021 valued at a total of US$64 million.
Considering the time value of money, how much is
Luongo really receiving? After reading this chapter,
you’ll see that although Luongo still received a sub-
stantial amount, it is less than the US$64 million dol-
lar figure that sent the sports media into a frenzy.
Learning Object ives
After studying this chapter, you should understand:
LO1 How to determine the future and present value of investments with multiple cash flows.
LO2 How loan payments are calculated and how to find the interest rate on a loan.
LO3 How loans are amortized or paid off.
LO4 How interest rates are quoted (and misquoted).
© Z
U M
A P
re ss
, I nc
./ A
la m
y/ A
ll C
an ad
a Ph
ot os
06Ross_Chapter06_3rd_B.indd 12906Ross_Chapter06_3rd_B.indd 129 12-11-19 17:0212-11-19 17:02
time you are having trouble with a present or future value problem, drawing a time line will help you to see what is happening.
In the fi rst part of Figure 6.1, we show the cash fl ows on the time line. Th e most important thing is that we write them down where they actually occur. Here, the fi rst cash fl ow occurs today, which we label as Time 0. We therefore put $100 at Time 0 on the time line. Th e second $100 cash fl ow occurs one year from today, so we write it down at the point labelled as Time 1. In the second part of Figure 6.1, we calculate the future values one period at a time to come up with the fi nal $224.64.
When we calculated the future value of the two $100 deposits, we simply calculated the bal- ance as of the beginning of each year and then rolled that amount forward to the next year. We could have done it another, quicker way. Th e fi rst $100 is on deposit for two years at 8 percent, so its future value is:
$100 × 1.082 = $100 × 1.1664 = $116.64
Th e second $100 is on deposit for one year at 8 percent, and its future value is thus:
$100 × 1.08 = $108
Th e total future value, as we previously calculated, is equal to the sum of these two future values:
$116.64 + 108 = $224.64
Based on this example, there are two ways to calculate future values for multiple cash fl ows: (1) compound the accumulated balance forward one year at a time or (2) calculate the future value of each cash fl ow fi rst and then add them up. Both give the same answer, so you can do it either way.
FIGURE 6.1 Drawing and using a time line:
A. The time line:
Cash flows
B. Calculating the future value:
Time (years)
0 1 2
Cash flows
Future values
Time (years)
0 1
+108
2
$100 $100
$100 $100
$208 $224.64
×1.08
×1.08
EXAMPLE 6.1: Saving up Revisited
You think you will be able to deposit $4,000 at the end of each of the next three years in a bank account paying 3 percent interest. You currently have $7,000 in the account. How much will you have in three years? In four years? At the end of the first year, you will have:
$7,000 × 1.03 + 4,000 = $11,210
At the end of the second year, you will have:
$11,210 × 1.03 + 4,000 = $15,546.30
Repeating this for the third year gives:
$15,546.30 × 1.03 + 4,000 = $20,012.69
Therefore, you will have $20,012.69 in three years. If you leave this on deposit for one more year (and don’t add to it), at the end of the fourth year, you’ll have:
$20,012.69 × 1.03 = $20,613.07
To illustrate the two different ways of calculating future val- ues, consider the future value of $2,000 invested at the end of each of the next five years. The current balance is zero, and the rate is 10 percent. We first draw a time line, as shown in Figure 6.2.
On the time line, notice that nothing happens until the end of the first year, when we make the first $2,000 invest- ment. This first $2,000 earns interest for the next four (not five) years. Also notice that the last $2,000 is invested at the end of the fifth year, so it earns no interest at all.
Figure 6.3 illustrates the calculations involved if we com- pound the investment one period at a time. As illustrated, the future value is $12,210.20.
Figure 6.4 goes through the same calculations, but the second technique is used. Naturally, the answer is the same.
130 Part 3: Valuation of Future Cash Flows
06Ross_Chapter06_3rd_B.indd 13006Ross_Chapter06_3rd_B.indd 130 12-11-19 17:0212-11-19 17:02
FIGURE 6.2
Time line for $2,000 per year for five years
0 1
$2,000 $2,000 $2,000 $2,000 $2,000
2 3 4 5 Time
(years)
FIGURE 6.3 Future value calculated by compounding forward one period at a time:
0
0 0
$0
1 2 3 4 5
Beginning amount + Additions
Ending amount
$
1.1
$ 0 2,000
$2,000
$2,200 2,000
$4,200 1.1
$4,620 2,000
$6,620 1.1
$7,282 2,000
$9,282 1.1
$10,210.20 2,000.00
$12,210.20 1.1
Time (years)
FIGURE 6.4
Future value calculated by compounding each cash flow separately:
0 1
$2,000 $2,000 $2,000
×
× ×
×
Total future value
$2,000 $ 2,000.00
2,200.00 2,420.00 2,662.00 2,928.20 $12,210.20
2 3 4 5 Time
(years)
1.14 1.13
1.12 1.1
EXAMPLE 6.2: Saving up Once Again
If you deposit $100 in one year, $200 in two years, and $300 in three years, how much will you have in three years? How much of this is interest? How much will you have in five years if you don’t add additional amounts? Assume a 4 percent interest rate throughout.
We will calculate the future value of each amount in three years. Notice that the $100 earns interest for two years, and the $200 earns interest for one year. The final $300 earns no interest. The future values are thus:
$100 × 1.042 = $108.16 $200 × 1.04 = 208.00 + $300 = 300.00 Total future value = $616.16
The total future value is thus $616.16. The total interest is:
$616.16 - (100 + 200 + 300) = $16.16
How much will you have in five years? We know that you will have $616.16 in three years. If you leave that in for two more years, it will grow to:
$616.16 × 1.042 = $616.16 × 1.0816 = $666.44
Notice that we could have calculated the future value of each amount separately. Once again, be careful about the lengths of time. As we previously calculated, the first $100 earns interest for only four years, the second deposit earns three years’ interest, and the last earns two years’ interest:
$100 × 1.044 = $100 × 1.1699 = $116.99 $200 × 1.043 = $200 × 1.1249 = 224.98 $300 × 1.042 = $300 × 1.0816 = 324.48 Total future value = $666.45
Present Value with Multiple Cash Flows It will turn out that we will very oft en need to determine the present value of a series of future cash fl ows. As with future values, there are two ways we can do it. We can either discount back one period at a time, or we can just calculate the present values individually and add them up.
Suppose you need $1,000 in one year and $2,000 more in two years. If you can earn 9 percent on your money, how much do you have to put up today to exactly cover these amounts in the future? In other words, what is the present value of the two cash fl ows at 9 percent?
CHAPTER 6: Discounted Cash Flow Valuation 131
06Ross_Chapter06_3rd_B.indd 13106Ross_Chapter06_3rd_B.indd 131 12-11-19 17:0212-11-19 17:02
Th e present value of $2,000 in two years at 9 percent is:
$2,000/1.092 = $1,683.36
Th e present value of $1,000 in one year is:
$1,000/1.09 = $917.43
Th erefore, the total present value is:
$1,683.36 + 917.43 = $2,600.79
To see why $2,600.79 is the right answer, we can check to see that aft er the $2,000 is paid out in two years, there is no money left . If we invest $2,600.79 for one year at 9 percent, we will have:
$2,600.79 × 1.09 = $2,834.86
We take out $1,000, leaving $1,834.86. Th is amount earns 9 percent for another year, leaving us with:
$1,834.86 × 1.09 = $2,000
Th is is just as we planned. As this example illustrates, the present value of a series of future cash fl ows is simply the amount that you would need today in order to exactly duplicate those future cash fl ows (for a given discount rate).
An alternative way of calculating present values for multiple future cash fl ows is to discount back to the present, one period at a time. To illustrate, suppose we had an investment that was going to pay $1,000 at the end of every year for the next fi ve years. To fi nd the present value, we could discount each $1,000 back to the present separately and then add them up. Figure 6.5 illus- trates this approach for a 6 percent discount rate; as shown, the answer is $4,212.37 (ignoring a small rounding error).
FIGURE 6.5
Present value calculated by discounting each cash flow separately:
0 1
$1,000 $1,000 $1,000
Total present value r = 6%
$1,000 $ 1,000
$943.40 890.00 839.62 792.09 747.26
$4,212.37
2 3 4 5 Time
(years)
1/1.06 1/1.062
1/1.063
1/1.064
1/1.065
Alternatively, we could discount the last cash fl ow back one period and add it to the next-to- the-last cash fl ow:
($1,000/1.06) + 1,000 = $943.40 + 1,000 = $1,943.40
We could then discount this amount back one period and add it to the Year 3 cash fl ow:
($1,943.40/1.06) + 1,000 = $1,833.40 + 1,000 = $2,833.40
Th is process could be repeated as necessary. Figure 6.6 illustrates this approach and the remaining calculations.
132 Part 3: Valuation of Future Cash Flows
06Ross_Chapter06_3rd_B.indd 13206Ross_Chapter06_3rd_B.indd 132 12-11-19 17:0212-11-19 17:02
FIGURE 6.6
Present value calculated by discounting back one period at a time
0
$4,212.37 0.00
$4,212.37
$3,465.11 1,000.00
$4,465.11
$2,673.01 1,000.00
$3,673.01
$1,833.40 1,000.00
$2,833.40
$ 943.40 1,000.00
$1,943.40
$ 0.00 1,000.00
$1,000.00
1 2 3 4 5
Time (years)
Present value = $4,212.37
r = 6%
If we consider Roberto Luongo’s twelve-year contract introduced at the start of the chapter, and use a 5 percent discount rate, what is the present value of his agreement? In 2009, the remaining amount to be paid to him was US$64 million over twelve years. Assuming he is paid US$5.33 mil- lion annually starting in 2010, the actual payout is:
$5.33 mi llion/1.05 = 5.08 million $5.33 million/1.052 = 4.83 million $5.33million/1.053 = 4.60 million $5.33million/1.054 = 4.39 million $5.33million/1.055 = 4.18 million $5.33million/1.056 = 3.98 million $5.33 million/1.057 = 3.79 million $5.33 million/1.058 = 3.61 million $5.33 million/1.059 = 3.44 million $5.33 million/1.0510 = 3.27 million $5.33 million/1.0511 = 3.12 million $5.33 million/1.0512 = 2.97 million
Th erefore, in 2009, his contract is actually only worth US$52.59 (summing the present values above and adding the US$5.33 million paid in 2009), not the publicized US$64 million.
EXAMPLE 6.3: How Much is it Worth?
You are offered an investment that will pay you $200 in one year, $400 the next year, $600 the next year, and $800 at the end of the next year. You can earn 3 percent on very similar investments. What is the most you should pay for this one?
We need to calculate the present value of these cash flows at 3 percent. Taking them one at a time gives:
$200 × 1/1.031 = $200/1.0300 = $ 194.17 $400 × 1/1.032 = $400/1.0609 = 377.04 $600 × 1/1.033 = $600/1.0927 = 549.10 $800 × 1/1.034 = $800/1.1255 = 710.80 Total present value = $ 1,831.11
If you can earn 3 percent on your money, then you can duplicate this investment’s cash flows for $1,831.11, so this is the most you should be willing to pay.
How to Calculate Present Values with Multiple Future Cash Flows Using a Financial Calculator
To calculate the present value of multiple cash flows with a financial calculator, we will simply discount the individual cash flows one at a time using the same technique we used in our previous chapter, so this is not really new. There is a shortcut, however, that we can show you. We will use the numbers in Example 6.3 to illustrate.
To begin, of course we first remember to clear out the calculator! Next, from Example 6.3, the first cash flow is $200 to be received in one year and the discount rate is 3 percent, so we do the following:
CALCULATOR HINTS
CHAPTER 6: Discounted Cash Flow Valuation 133
06Ross_Chapter06_3rd_B.indd 13306Ross_Chapter06_3rd_B.indd 133 12-11-19 17:0212-11-19 17:02
Enter 1 3 200
Solve for -194.17
Now, you can write down this answer to save it, but that’s inefficient. All calculators have a memory where you can store numbers. Why not just save it there? Doing so cuts way down on mistakes because you don’t have to write down and/or rekey numbers, and it’s much faster.
Next we value the second cash flow. We need to change N to 2 and FV to 400. As long as we haven’t changed anything else, we don’t have to reenter I/Y or clear out the calcula- tor, so we have:
Enter 2 400
Solve for -377.04
You save this number by adding it to the one you saved in our first calculation, and so on for the remaining two calculations.
As we will see in a later chapter, some financial calculators will let you enter all of the future cash flows at once, but we’ll discuss that subject when we get to it.
EXAMPLE 6.4: How Much is it Worth? Part 2
You are offered an investment that will make three $5,000 payments. The first payment will occur four years from to- day. The second will occur in five years, and the third will follow in six years. If you can earn 4 percent, what is the most this investment is worth today? What is the future value of the cash flows?
We will answer the questions in reverse order to illustrate a point. The future value of the cash flows in six years is:
($5,000 × 1.042) + (5,000 × 1.04) + 5,000 = $5,408 + 5,200 + 5,000 = $15,608
The present value must be:
$15,608/1.046 = $12,335.23
Let’s check this. Taking them one at a time, the PVs of the cash flows are:
$5,000 × 1/1.046 = $5,000/1.2653 = $ 3,951.57 $5,000 × 1/1.045 = $5,000/1.2167 = 4,109.64 $5,000 × 1/1.044 = $5,000/1.1699 = 4,274.02 Total present value = $12,335.23
This is as we previously calculated. The point we want to make is that we can calculate present and future values in any order and convert between them using whatever way seems most convenient. The answers will always be the same as long as we stick with the same discount rate and are careful to keep track of the right number of periods.
A Note on Cash Flow Timing In working present and future value problems, cash fl ow timing is critically important. In almost all such calculations, it is implicitly assumed that the cash fl ows occur at the end of each period. In fact, all the formulas we have discussed, all the numbers in a standard present value or future value table, and, very importantly, all the preset (or default) settings on a fi nancial calculator assume that cash fl ows occur at the end of each period. Unless you are very explicitly told other- wise, you should always assume that this is what is meant.
As a quick illustration of this point, suppose you are told that a three-year investment has a fi rst-year cash fl ow of $100, a second-year cash fl ow of $200, and a third-year cash fl ow of $300. You are asked to draw a time line. Without further information, you should always assume that the time line looks like this:
0 1 2 3
$100 $200 $300
On our time line, notice how the fi rst cash fl ow occurs at the end of the fi rst period, the second at the end of the second period, and the third at the end of the third period.
134 Part 3: Valuation of Future Cash Flows
06Ross_Chapter06_3rd_B.indd 13406Ross_Chapter06_3rd_B.indd 134 12-11-19 17:0212-11-19 17:02
How to Calculate Present Values with Multiple Future Cash Flows Using a Spreadsheet
Just as we did in our previous chapter, we can set up a basic spreadsheet to calculate the present values of the individual cash flows as follows. Notice that we have simply calculated the present values one at a time and added them up:
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
1 0
11
1 2
1 3
1 4
1 5
1 6
1 7
1 8
1 9
2 0
A B C D E
What is the present value of $200 in one year, $400 the next year, $600 the next year, and
$800 the last year if the discount rate is 12 percent?
Rate: 0.12
Year Cash flows Present values Formula used
1 $200 $178.57 =PV($B$7, A10, 0, –B10)
2 $400 $318.88 =PV($B$7, A11, 0, –B11)
3 $600 $427.07 =PV($B$7, A12, 0, –B12)
4 $800 $508.41 =PV($B$7, A13, 0, –B13)
Total PV: $1,432.93 =SUM(C10:C13)
Notice the negative signs inserted in the PV formulas. These just make the present values have
positive signs. Also, the discount rate in cell B7 is entered as $B$7 (an "absolute" reference) because
it is used over and over. We could have just entered ".12" instead, but our approach is more flexible.
Using a spreadsheet to value multiple future cash flows
1. Describe how to calculate the future value of a series of cash flows.
2. Describe how to calculate the present value of a series of cash flows.
3. Unless we are explicitly told otherwise, what do we always assume about the timing of cash flows in present and future value problems?
6.2 Valuing Level Cash Flows: Annuities and Perpetuities
We will frequently encounter situations in which we have multiple cash fl ows that are all the same amount. For example, a very common type of loan repayment plan calls for the borrower to repay the loan by making a series of equal payments over some length of time. Almost all consumer loans (such as car loans and student loans) and home mortgages feature equal payments, usually made each month.
More generally, a series of constant or level cash fl ows that occur at the end of each period for some fi xed number of periods is called an ordinary annuity; or, more correctly, the cash fl ows are said to be in ordinary annuity form. Annuities appear frequently in fi nancial arrangements, and there are some useful shortcuts for determining their values. We consider these next.
Present Value for Annuity Cash Flows Suppose we were examining an asset that promised to pay $500 at the end of each of the next
three years. Th e cash fl ows from this asset are in the form of a three-year, $500 annuity. If we wanted to earn 10 percent on our money, how much would we off er for this annuity? From the previous section, we know that we can discount each of these $500 payments back to the present at 10 percent to determine the total present value:
Present value = ($500/1.11) + (500/1.12) + (500/1.13) = ($500/1.1) + (500/1.21) + (500/1.331) = $454.55 + 413.22 + 375.66 = $1,243.43
SPREADSHEET STRATEGIES
Concept Questions
annuity A level stream of cash flows for a fixed period of time.
CHAPTER 6: Discounted Cash Flow Valuation 135
06Ross_Chapter06_3rd_B.indd 13506Ross_Chapter06_3rd_B.indd 135 12-11-19 17:0212-11-19 17:02
Th is approach works just fi ne. However, we will oft en encounter situations in which the number of cash fl ows is quite large. For example, a typical home mortgage calls for monthly payments over 25 years, for a total of 300 payments. If we were trying to determine the present value of those payments, it would be useful to have a shortcut.
Because the cash fl ows of an annuity are all the same, we can come up with a very useful varia- tion on the basic present value equation. It turns out that the present value of an annuity of C dollars per period for t periods when the rate of return or interest rate is r is given by:
Annuity present value = C × ( 1 - Present value factor ____________________ r ) [6.1] = C × { 1 - 1/(1 + r )
t ____________ r } Th e term in parentheses on the fi rst line is sometimes called the present value interest factor for annuities and abbreviated PVIFA(r,t).
Th e expression for the annuity present value may look a little complicated, but it isn’t diffi cult to use. Notice that the term on the second line, 1/(1 + r)t, is the same present value factor we’ve been calculating. In our example from the beginning of this section, the interest rate is 10 percent and there are three years involved. Th e usual present value factor is thus:
Present value factor = 1/1.13 = 1/1.331 = .75131
To calculate the annuity present value factor, we just plug this in:
Annuity present value factor = (1 - Present value factor)/r = (1 - .75131)/.10 = .248685/.10 = 2.48685
Just as we calculated before, the present value of our $500 annuity is then:
Annuity present value = $500 × 2.48685 = $1,243.43
ANNUITY TABLES Just as there are tables for ordinary present value factors, there are ta- bles for annuity factors as well. Table 6.1 contains a few such factors; Table A.3 on the book’s website contains a larger set. To find the annuity present value factor, look for the row corre- sponding to three periods and then find the column for 10 percent. The number you see at that intersection should be 2.4869 (rounded to four decimal places), as we calculated. Once again, try calculating a few of these factors yourself and compare your answers to the ones in the table to make sure you know how to do it. If you are using a financial calculator, just enter $1 as the pay- ment and calculate the present value; the result should be the annuity present value factor.
Annuity Present Values
Using a spreadsheet to find annuity present values goes like this:
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
1 0
11
1 2
1 3
1 4
1 5
1 6
1 7
A B C D E F G
What is the present value of $500 per year for 3 years if the discount rate is 10 percent?
We need to solve for the unknown present value, so we use the formula PV(rate, nper, pmt, fv).
Payment amount per period: $500
Number of payments: 3
Discount rate: 0.1
Annuity present value: $1,243.43
The formula entered in cell B11 is =PV(B9, B8, –B7, 0); notice that fv is zero and that
pmt has a negative sign on it. Also notice that rate is entered as a decimal, not a percentage.
Using a spreadsheet to find annuity present values
SPREADSHEET STRATEGIES
136 Part 3: Valuation of Future Cash Flows
06Ross_Chapter06_3rd_B.indd 13606Ross_Chapter06_3rd_B.indd 136 12-11-19 17:0212-11-19 17:02
Annuity Present Values
To find annuity present values with a financial calculator, we need to use the key (you were probably wondering what it was for). Compared to finding the present value of a single amount, there are two important differences. First, we enter the annuity cash flow using the key, and, second, we don’t enter anything for the future value, FV. So, for example, the problem we have been examining is a three-year, $500 annuity. If the dis- count rate is 10 percent, we need to do the following (after clearing out the calculator!):
Enter 3 10 500 Solve for -1,243.43
As usual, we get a negative sign on the PV.
FINDING THE PAYMENT Suppose you wish to start up a new business that specializes in the latest of health food trends, frozen yak milk. To produce and market your product, you need to borrow $100,000. Because it strikes you as unlikely that this particular fad will be long- lived, you propose to pay off the loan quickly by making five equal annual payments. If the inter- est rate is 18 percent, what will the payment be?
TABLE 6.1
Annuity present value interest factors Periods
Interest Rate
5% 10% 15% 20%
1 .9524 .9091 .8696 .8333 2 1.8594 1.7355 1.6257 1.5278 3 2.7232 2.4869 2.2832 2.1065 4 3.5460 3.1699 2.8550 2.5887 5 4.3295 3.7908 3.3522 2.9906
In this case, we know the present value is $100,000. Th e interest rate is 18 percent, and there are fi ve years. Th e payments are all equal, so we need to use the annuity formula and fi nd the relevant annuity factor and solve for the unknown cash fl ow:
Annuity present value = $100,000 = C × [(1 - Present value factor)/r] = C × {[1 - (1/1.185)/.18} = C × [(1 - .4371)/.18] = C × 3.1272 C = $100,000/3.1272 = $31,977
Th erefore, you’ll make fi ve payments of just under $32,000 each.
Annuity Payments
Finding annuity payments is easy with a financial calculator. In our example just above, the PV is $100,000, the interest rate is 18 percent, and there are five years. We find the pay- ment as follows:
Enter 5 18 100,000 Solve for -31,978
Here we get a negative sign on the payment because the payment is an outflow for us.
CALCULATOR HINTS
CALCULATOR HINTS
CHAPTER 6: Discounted Cash Flow Valuation 137
06Ross_Chapter06_3rd_B.indd 13706Ross_Chapter06_3rd_B.indd 137 12-11-19 17:0212-11-19 17:02
Annuity Payments
Using a spreadsheet to work annuity payments for the new business example goes like this:
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
1 0
11
1 2
1 3
1 4
1 5
1 6
A B C D E F G
What is the annuity payment if the present value is $100,000, the interest rate is 18 percent, and
there are 5 periods? We need to solve for the unknown payment in an annuity, so we use the
formula PMT(rate, nper, pv, fv).
Annuity present value: $100,000
Number of payments: 5
Discount rate: 0.18
Annuity payment: $31,977.78
The formula entered in cell B12 is =PMT(B10, B9, –B8, 0); notice that fv is zero and that the payment
has a negative sign because it is an outflow to us.
Using a spreadsheet to find annuity payments
EXAMPLE 6.5: How Much Can You Aff ord?
After carefully going over your budget, you have deter- mined you can afford to pay $632 per month towards a new Honda Civic. You visit your bank’s website and find that the going rate is 1 percent per month for 48 months. How much can you borrow?
To determine how much you can borrow, we need to calculate the present value of $632 per month for 48 months at 1 percent per month. The loan payments are in ordinary annuity form, so the annuity present value factor is:
Annuity PV factor = (1 - Present value factor)/r = [1 - (1/1.0148)]/.01 = (1 - .6203)/.01 = 37.9740
With this factor, we can calculate the present value of the 48 payments of $632 each as:
Present value = $632 × 37.9740 = $24,000 Therefore, $24,000 is what you can afford to borrow and repay.
EXAMPLE 6.6: Finding the Number of Payments
You ran a little short on your February vacation, so you put $1,000 on your credit card. You can only afford to make the minimum payment of $20 per month. The interest rate on the credit card is 1.5 percent per month. How long will you need to pay off the $1,000?
What we have here is an annuity of $20 per month at 1.5 percent per month for some unknown length of time. The present value is $1,000 (the amount you owe today). We need to do a little algebra (or else use a financial calculator):
$1,000 = $20 × [(1 - Present value factor)/.015] ($1,000/20) × .015 = 1 - Present value factor Present value factor = .25 = 1/(1 + r)t
1.015t = 1/.25 = 4
At this point, the problem boils down to asking the ques- tion, how long does it take for your money to quadruple at 1.5 percent per month? The answer is about 93 months:
1.01593 = 3.99 ≈ 4
It will take you about 93/12 = 7.75 years to pay off the $1,000 at this rate. If you use a financial calculator for prob- lems like this one, you should be aware that some auto- matically round up to the next whole period.
SPREADSHEET STRATEGIES
138 Part 3: Valuation of Future Cash Flows
06Ross_Chapter06_3rd_B.indd 13806Ross_Chapter06_3rd_B.indd 138 12-11-19 17:0212-11-19 17:02
Finding the Number of Payments
To solve this one on a financial calculator, do the following:
Enter 1.5 -20 1,000
Solve for 93.11
Notice that we put a negative sign on the payment you must make, and we have solved for the number of months. You still have to divide by 12 to get our answer. Also, some finan- cial calculators won’t report a fractional value for N; they automatically (without telling you) round up to the next whole period (not to the nearest value). With a spreadsheet, use the function =NPER(rate,pmt,pv,fv); be sure to put in a zero for fv and to enter -20 as the payment.
FINDING THE RATE The last question we might want to ask concerns the interest rate implicit in an annuity. For example, an insurance company offers to pay you $1,000 per year for 10 years if you will pay $6,710 up front. What rate is implicit in this 10-year annuity?
In this case, we know the present value ($6,710), we know the cash fl ows ($1,000 per year), and we know the life of the investment (10 years). What we don’t know is the discount rate:
$6,710 = $1,000 × [(1 - Present value factor)/r] $6,710/1,000 = 6.71 = {1 - [1/(1 + r)10]}/r
So, the annuity factor for 10 periods is equal to 6.71, and we need to solve this equation for the unknown value of r. Unfortunately, this is mathematically impossible to do directly. Th e only way to fi nd a value for r is to use a calculator, a table, or trial and error.
To illustrate how to fi nd the answer by trial and error1, suppose a relative of yours wants to borrow $3,000. She off ers to repay you $1,000 every year for four years. What interest rate are you being off ered?
Th e cash fl ows here have the form of a four-year, $1,000 annuity. Th e present value is $3,000. We need to fi nd the discount rate, r. Our goal in doing so is primarily to give you a feel for the relationship between annuity values and discount rates.
We need to start somewhere, and 10 percent is probably as good a place as any to begin. At 10 percent, the annuity factor is:
Annuity present value factor = [1 - (1/1.104)]/.10 = 3.1699
Th e present value of the cash fl ows at 10 percent is thus:
Present value = $1,000 × 3.1699 = $3,169.90
You can see that we’re already in the right ballpark. Is 10 percent too high or too low? Recall that present values and discount rates move in oppo-
site directions: increasing the discount rate lowers the PV and vice versa. Our present value here is too high, so the discount rate is too low. If we try 12 percent:
Present value = $1,000 × {[1 - (1/1.124)]/.12} = $3,037.35
Now we’re almost there. We are still a little low on the discount rate (because the PV is a little high), so we’ll try 13 percent:
Present value = $1,000 × {[1 - (1/1.134)]/.13} = $2,974.47
Th is is less than $3,000, so we now know that the answer is between 12 percent and 13 percent, and it looks to be about 12.5 percent. For practice, work at it for a while longer and see if you fi nd that the answer is about 12.59 percent.
1 Financial calculators rely on trial and error to find the answer. That’s why they sometimes appear to be “thinking” be- fore coming up with the answer. Actually, it is possible to directly solve for r if there are fewer than five periods, but it’s usually not worth the trouble.
CALCULATOR HINTS
CHAPTER 6: Discounted Cash Flow Valuation 139
06Ross_Chapter06_3rd_B.indd 13906Ross_Chapter06_3rd_B.indd 139 12-11-19 17:0212-11-19 17:02
Finding the Rate
Alternatively, you could use a financial calculator to do the following:
Enter 4 1,000 -3,000
Solve for 12.59
Notice that we put a negative sign on the present value (why?). With a spreadsheet, use the function =RATE(nper,pmt,pv,fv); be sure to put in a zero for fv and to enter 1,000 as the payment and -3,000 as the pv.
To illustrate a situation in which fi nding the unknown rate can be very useful, let us consider provincial lotteries, which oft en off er you a choice of how to take your winnings. In a recent drawing, participants were off ered the option of receiving a lump-sum payment of $400,000 or an annuity of $800,000 to be received in equal installments over a 20-year period. (At the time, the lump-sum payment was always half the annuity option.) Which option was better?
To answer, suppose you were to compare $400,000 today to an annuity of $800,000/20 = $40,000 per year for 20 years. At what rate do these have the same value? Th is is the same prob- lem we’ve been looking at; we need to fi nd the unknown rate, r, for a present value of $400,000, a $40,000 payment, and a 20-year period. If you grind through the calculations (or get a little machine assistance), you should fi nd that the unknown rate is about 7.75 percent. You should take the annuity option if that rate is attractive relative to other investments available to you.
To see why, suppose that you could fi nd a low risk investment with a rate of return of 6 percent. Your lump sum of $400,000 would generate annual payments of only $34,874 as opposed to the $40,000 off ered by the lottery. Th e payments are lower because they are calculated assuming a return of 6 percent while the lottery off er is based on a higher rate of 7.75 percent. Th is example shows why it makes sense to think of the discount rate as an opportunity cost—the return one could earn on an alternative investment of equal risk. We will have a lot more to say on this later in the text.
Future Value for Annuities On occasion, it’s also handy to know a shortcut for calculating the future value of an annuity. For example, suppose you plan to contribute $2,000 every year into a Registered Retirement Savings Plan (RRSP) paying 8 percent. If you retire in 30 years, how much will you have?
One way to answer this particular problem is to calculate the present value of a $2,000, 30-year annuity at 8 percent to convert it to a lump sum, and then calculate the future value of that lump sum:
Annuity present value = $2,000 × (1 - 1/1.0830)/.08 = $2,000 × 11.2578 = $22,515.57
Th e future value of this amount in 30 years is:
Future value = $22,515.57 × 1.0830 = $22,515.57 × 10.0627 = $226,566.42
We could have done this calculation in one step:
Annuity future value = Annuity present value × (1.0830) = $2,000 × (1 - 1/1.0830)/.08 × (1.08)30 = $2,000 × (1.0830 - 1)/.08 = $2,000 × (10.0627 - 1)/.08 = $2,000 × 113.2832 = $226,566.4
As this example illustrates, there are future value factors for annuities as well as present value fac- tors. In general, the future value factor for an annuity is given by:
Annuity FV factor = (Future value factor - 1)/r [6.2] = ((1 + r)t - 1)/r
CALCULATOR HINTS
140 Part 3: Valuation of Future Cash Flows
06Ross_Chapter06_3rd_B.indd 14006Ross_Chapter06_3rd_B.indd 140 12-11-19 17:0212-11-19 17:02
Future Values of Annuities
Of course, you could solve this problem using a financial calculator by doing the following:
Enter 30 8 -2,000
Solve for 226,566.42
Notice that we put a negative sign on the payment (why?). With a spreadsheet, use the function = FV(rate,nper,pmt,pv); be sure to put in a zero for pv and to enter -2,000 as the payment.
For example, True North Distillers has just placed a shipment of Canadian whiskey in a bonded warehouse where it will age for the next eight years. An exporter plans to buy $1 million worth of whiskey in eight years. If the exporter annually deposits $95,000 at year-end in a bank account paying 8 percent interest, would there be enough to pay for the whiskey?
In this case, the annuity future value factor is given by:
Annuity FV factor = (Future value factor - 1)/r = (1.088 - 1)/.08 = (1.8509 - 1)/.08 = 10.6366
Th e future value of this eight-year, $95,000 annuity is thus:
Annuity future value = $95,000 × 10.6366 = $1,010,480
Th us, the exporter would make it with $10,480 to spare. In our example, notice that the fi rst deposit occurs in one year and the last in eight years. As we
discussed earlier, the fi rst deposit earns seven years’ interest; the last deposit earns none.
A Note on Annuities Due So far, we have only discussed ordinary annuities. Th ese are the most important, but there is a fairly common variation. Remember that with an ordinary annuity, the cash fl ows occur at the end of each period. When you take out a loan with monthly payments, for example, the fi rst loan payment normally occurs one month aft er you get the loan. However, when you lease an apart- ment, the fi rst lease payment is usually due immediately. Th e second payment is due at the begin- ning of the second month, and so on. A lease is an example of an annuity due. An annuity due is an annuity for which the cash fl ows occur at the beginning of each period. Almost any type of arrangement in which we have to prepay the same amount each period is an annuity due.
Th ere are several diff erent ways to calculate the value of an annuity due. With a fi nancial cal- culator, you simply switch it into “due” or “beginning” mode. It is very important to remember to switch it back when you are done! Another way to calculate the present value of an annuity due can be illustrated with a time line. Suppose an annuity due has fi ve payments of $400 each, and the relevant discount rate is 10 percent. Th e time line looks like this:
0 1 2 3
$400 $400 $400
4 5
$400$400
Notice how the cash fl ows here are the same as those for a four-year ordinary annuity, except that there is an extra $400 at Time 0. For practice, check to see that the value of a four-year ordinary annuity at 10 percent is $1,267.95. If we add on the extra $400, we get $1,667.95, which is the pres- ent value of this annuity due.
Th ere is an even easier way to calculate the present or future value of an annuity due. If we assume cash fl ows occur at the end of each period when they really occur at the beginning, then we discount each one by one period too many. We could fi x this by simply multiplying our answer by (1 + r), where r is the discount rate. In fact, the relationship between the value of an annuity due and an ordinary annuity is just:
CALCULATOR HINTS
annuity due An annuity for which the cash flows occur at the beginning of the period.
CHAPTER 6: Discounted Cash Flow Valuation 141
06Ross_Chapter06_3rd_B.indd 14106Ross_Chapter06_3rd_B.indd 141 12-11-19 17:0212-11-19 17:02
Annuity due value = Ordinary annuity value × (1 + r) [6.3] Th is works for both present and future values, so calculating the value of an annuity due involves two steps: (1) calculate the present or future value as though it were an ordinary annuity, and (2) multiply your answer by (1 + r).
Perpetuit ies We’ve seen that a series of level cash fl ows can be valued by treating those cash fl ows as an annu- ity. An important special case of an annuity arises when the level stream of cash fl ows continues forever. Such an asset is called a perpetuity because the cash fl ows are perpetual. One type of perpetuities is called a consol.
Since a perpetuity has an infi nite number of cash fl ows, we obviously can’t compute its value by discounting each one. Fortunately, evaluating a perpetuity turns out to be the easiest possible case. Consider a perpetuity that costs $1,000 and off ers a 12 percent rate of return with payments at the end of each period. Th e cash fl ow each year must be $1,000 × .12 = $120. More generally, the present value of a perpetuity (PV = $1,000) multiplied by the rate (r = 12%) must equal the cash fl ow (C = $120):
Perpetuity present value × Rate = Cash flow [6.4] PV × r = C
Th erefore, given a cash fl ow and a rate of return, we can compute the present value very easily:
PV for a perpetuity = C/r = C × (1/r)
For example, an investment off ers a perpetual cash fl ow of $500 every year. Th e return you require on such an investment is 8 percent. What is the value of this investment? Th e value of this per- petuity is:
Perpetuity PV = C × (1/r) = $500/.08 = $6,250
Another way of seeing why a perpetuity’s value is so easy to determine is to take a look at the expression for an annuity present value factor:
Annuity present value factor = (1 - Present value factor)/r [6.5] = (1/r) × (1 - Present value factor)
As we have seen, when the number of periods involved gets very large, the present value factor gets very small. As a result, the annuity factor gets closer and closer to 1/r. At 10 percent, for example, the annuity present value factor for 100 years is:
Annuity present value factor = (1/.10) × (1 - 1/1.10100) = (1/.10) × (1 - .000073) ≈ (1/.10)
Table 6.2 summarizes the formulas for annuities and perpetuities.
EXAMPLE 6.7: Early Bird RRSPs
Every February, financial institutions advertise their various RRSP products. While most people contribute just before the deadline, RRSP sellers point out the advantages of con- tributing early—greater returns because of compounding. In our example of the future value of annuities, we found that contributing $2,000 each year at the end of the year would compound to $226,566 in 30 years at 8 percent. Suppose you made the contribution at the beginning of each year. How much more would you have after 30 years?
Annuity due future value = Payment × Annuity FV factor × (1 + r) = $2,000 × (1.0830 - 1)/.08 × (1.08) = $244,692
Alternatively, you could simply estimate the value as $226,566 × 1.08 = $244,691 since you are effectively earning one extra year worth of interest.2
You would have $244,692 - $226,566 = $18,126 more.
2
2 The answers vary slightly due to rounding.
perpetuity An annuity in which the cash flows continue forever.
consol A type of perpetuity.
142 Part 3: Valuation of Future Cash Flows
06Ross_Chapter06_3rd_B.indd 14206Ross_Chapter06_3rd_B.indd 142 12-11-19 17:0212-11-19 17:02
TABLE 6.2 Summary of annuity and perpetuity calculations
I. Symbols:
PV = Present value, what future cash flows are worth today FVt = Future value, what cash flows are worth in the future
r = Interest rate, rate of return, or discount rate per period—typically, but not always, one year t = Number of periods—typically, but not always, the number of years C = Cash amount
II. Future value of C per period for t periods at r percent per period:
FVt = C × {[1 + r) t - 1]/r}
A series of identical cash flows is called an annuity, and the term [(1 + r)t - 1]/r is called the annuity future value factor.
III. Present value of C per period for t periods at r percent per period:
PV = C × {1 - [1/(1 + r)t]}/r The term {1- [1/(1 + r)t]}/r is called the annuity present value factor.
IV. Present value of a perpetuity of C per period:
PV = C/r A perpetuity has the same cash flow every year forever.
EXAMPLE 6.8: Preferred Stock
Fixed-rate preferred stock is an important example of a per- petuity.3 When a corporation sells fixed rate preferred, the buyer is promised a fixed cash dividend every period (usu- ally every quarter) forever. This dividend must be paid be- fore any dividend can be paid to regular shareholders, hence the term preferred.
Suppose the Home Bank of Canada wants to sell pre- ferred stock at $100 per share. A very similar issue of pre- ferred stock already outstanding has a price of $40 per share and offers a dividend of $1 every quarter. What divi- dend would the Home Bank have to offer if the preferred stock is going to sell?
The issue that is already out has a present value of $40 and a cash flow of $1 every quarter forever. Since this is a perpetuity:
Present value = $40 = $1 × (1/r) r = 2.5%
To be competitive, the new Home Bank issue would also have to offer 2.5 percent per quarter; so, if the present value is to be $100, the dividend must be such that:
Present value = $100 = C × (1/.025) C = $2.50 (per quarter)
3
Growing Perpetuit ies Th e perpetuities we have discussed so far are annuities with constant payments. In practice, it is common to fi nd perpetuities with growing payments. For example, imagine an apartment build- ing in which cash fl ows to the landlord aft er expenses will be $100,000 next year. Th ese cash fl ows are expected to rise at 5 percent per year. If we assume that this rise will continue indefi nitely, the cash fl ow stream is termed a growing perpetuity. With an 11 percent discount rate, the present value of the cash fl ows can be represented as
PV = $100,000 ________ 1.11 + 100,000(1.05) ____________
(1.11 ) 2 + $100,000(1.05 )
2 _____________ (1.11 ) 3
+ … + 100,000(1.05 ) N-1 ______________
(1.11 ) N + …
Algebraically, we can write the formula as
PV = C ______ (1 + r) + C × (1 + g)
__________ (1 + r ) 2 +
C × (1 + g ) 2 ___________
(1 + r ) 3 + … C × (1 + g ) N−1
_____________ (1 + r ) N + …
3 Corporations also issue floating rate preferred stock, as we discuss in Chapter 8.
growing perpetuity A constant stream of cash flows without end that is expected to rise indefinitely.
CHAPTER 6: Discounted Cash Flow Valuation 143
06Ross_Chapter06_3rd_B.indd 14306Ross_Chapter06_3rd_B.indd 143 12-11-19 17:0212-11-19 17:02
where C is the cash fl ow to be received one period hence, g is the rate of growth per period, expressed as a percentage, and r is the interest rate. Th is formula is an example of the geometric series formula taught in high school.
Fortunately, the formula reduces to the following simplifi cation:4
Formula for Present Value of Growing Perpetuity:
PV = C _____ r - g [6.6]
Using this equation, the present value of the cash fl ows from the apartment building is
$100,000 __________ 0.11 - 0.05 = $1,666,667
Th ere are three important points concerning the growing perpetuity formula:
1. The Numerator. The numerator is the cash flow one period hence, not at date 0. Consider the following example:
EXAMPLE 6.9
Hoffstein Corporation is just about to pay a dividend of $3.00 per share. Investors anticipate that the annual dividend will rise by 6 percent a year forever. The applicable interest rate is 11 percent. What is the price of the stock today?
The numerator in the formula is the cash flow to be re- ceived next period. Since the growth rate is 6 percent, the dividend next year is $3.18 (or $3.00 × 1.06). The price of the stock today is
$66.60 = $3.00 + $3.18 ___________ 0.11 - 0.06
Imminent Present value of dividend all dividend dividends beginning a year
from now
The price of $66.60 includes both the dividend to be re- ceived immediately and the present value of all dividends beginning a year from now. The formula only makes it pos- sible to calculate the present value of all dividends begin- ning a year from now. Be sure you understand this example; test questions on this subject always seem to confuse a few of our students.
2. The Interest Rate and the Growth Rate. The interest rate r must be greater than the growth rate g for the growing perpetuity formula to work. Consider the case in which the growth rate approaches the interest rate in magnitude. Then the denominator in the growing perpe- tuity formula gets infinitesimally small and the present value grows infinitely large. The present value is in fact undefined when r is less than g.
3. The Timing Assumption. Cash generally flows into and out of real-world firms both ran- domly and nearly continuously. However, our growing perpetuity formula assumes that cash flows are received and disbursed at regular and discrete points in time. In the example of the apartment, we assumed that the net cash flows only occurred once a year. In reality, rent cheques are commonly received every month. Payments for maintenance and other ex- penses may occur at any time within the year.
Th e growing perpetuity formula can be applied only by assuming a regular and discrete pattern of cash fl ow. Although this assumption is sensible because the formula saves so much time, the user should never forget that it is an assumption. Th is point will be mentioned again in the chapters ahead.
4 PV is the sum of an infinite geometric series: PV = a(1 + x + x2 + …) where a = C/(1 + r) and x = (1 + g)/(1 + r). Previously we showed that the sum of an infinite geometric series is a/(1 - x). Using this result and substituting for a and x, we find PV = C/(r - g) Note that this geometric series converges to a finite sum only when x is less than 1. This implies that the growth rate, g, must be less than the interest rate, r.
144 Part 3: Valuation of Future Cash Flows
06Ross_Chapter06_3rd_B.indd 14406Ross_Chapter06_3rd_B.indd 144 12-11-19 17:0212-11-19 17:02
Growing Annuity Cash fl ows in business are very likely to grow over time, either due to real growth or infl ation. Th e growing perpetuity, which assumes an infi nite number of cash fl ows, provides one formula to handle this growth. We now introduce a growing annuity, which is a fi nite number of growing cash fl ows. Because perpetuities of any kind are rare, a formula for a growing annuity oft en comes in handy. Th e formula is5
Formula for Present Value of Growing Annuity:
PV = C _____ r - g [ 1 - ( 1 + g _____ 1 + r ) t ] [6.7]
where, as before, C is the payment to occur at the end of the fi rst period, r is the interest rate, g is the rate of growth per period, expressed as a percentage, and t is the number of periods for the annuity.
EXAMPLE 6.10
Gilles Lebouder, a second-year MBA student, has just been offered a job at $90,000 a year. He anticipates his salary increasing by 2 percent a year until his retirement in 40 years. Given an interest rate of 5 percent, what is the pres- ent value of his lifetime salary?
We simplify by assuming he will be paid his $90,000 sal- ary exactly one year from now, and that his salary will con-
tinue to be paid in annual installments. From the growing annuity formula, the calculation is
Present value of Gilles’s lifetime salary = $90,000 × [1/(0.05 - 0.02)] × [1 - {(1 + 0.02)/(1 + 0.05)}40] = $2,059,072.50
Though the growing annuity is quite useful, it is more te- dious than the other simplifying formulas.
1. In general, what is the present value of an annuity of C dollars per period at a discount rate of r per period? The future value?
2. In general, what is the present value of a perpetuity?
3. In general, what is the present value of a growing perpetuity?
4. In general, what is the present value of a growing annuity?
6.3 Comparing Rates: The Effect of Compounding
Th e last issue we need to discuss has to do with the way interest rates are quoted. Th is subject causes a fair amount of confusion because rates are quoted in many diff erent ways. Sometimes the way a rate is quoted is the result of tradition, and sometimes it’s the result of legislation. Unfortu- nately, at times, rates are quoted in deliberately deceptive ways to mislead borrowers and invest- ors. We will discuss these topics in this section.
5 This can be proved as follows. A growing annuity can be viewed as the difference between two growing perpetuities. Consider a growing perpetuity A, where the first payment of C occurs at date 1. Next, consider growing perpetuity B, where the first payment of C(1 + g)T is made at date T + 1. Both perpetuities grow at rate g. The growing annuity over T periods is the difference between annuity A and annuity B. This can be represented as: Date 0 1 2 3 � T T + 1 T + 2 T + 3 Perpetuity A C C × (1 + g) C × (1 + g)2 � C × (1 + g)T-1 C × (1 + g)T C × (1 + g)T+1 C × (1 + g)T+2� Perpetuity B C × (1 + g)T C × (1 + g)T+1 C × (1 + g)T+2� Annuity C C × (1 + g) C × (1 + g)2 � C × (1 + g)T-1
The value of perpetuity A is C _____ r − g .
The value of perpetuity B is C × (1 + g ) r
___________ r − g × 1 _______ (1 + r ) r .
The difference between the two perpetuities is given by the formula for the present value of a growing annuity.
growing annuity A finite number of growing annual cash flows.
Concept Questions
CHAPTER 6: Discounted Cash Flow Valuation 145
06Ross_Chapter06_3rd_B.indd 14506Ross_Chapter06_3rd_B.indd 145 12-11-19 17:0212-11-19 17:02
Effective Annual Rates and Compounding If a rate is quoted as 10 percent compounded semiannually, then what this means is that the investment actually pays 5 percent every six months. A natural question then arises: Is 5 percent every six months the same thing as 10 percent per year? It’s easy to see that it is not. If you invest $1 at 10 percent per year, you will have $1.10 at the end of the year. If you invest at 5 percent every six months, then you’ll have the future value of $1 at 5 percent for two periods, or:
$1 × 1.052 = $1.1025
Th is is $.0025 more. Th e reason is very simple. What has occurred is that your account was cred- ited with $1 × .05 = 5 cents in interest aft er 6 months. In the following six months, you earned 5 percent on that nickel, for an extra 5 × .05 = .25 cents.
As our example illustrates, 10 percent compounded semiannually is actually equivalent to 10.25 percent per year. Put another way, we would be indiff erent between 10 percent compounded semiannually and 10.25 percent compounded annually. Anytime we have compounding during the year, we need to be concerned about what the rate really is.
In our example, the 10 percent is called a stated interest rate, or quoted interest rate. As you will see later in the chapter, other terms are used to describe this rate as well. It is simply the interest rate charged per period multiplied by the number of periods per year. Th e 10.25 percent, which is actually the rate that you will earn, is called the eff ective annual rate (EAR). To compare diff erent investments or interest rates, we will always need to convert to eff ective rates. Some gen- eral procedures for doing this are discussed next.
Calculating and Comparing Effective Annual Rates To see why it is important to work only with eff ective rates, suppose you’ve shopped around and come up with the following three rates:
Bank A: 15 percent compounded daily Bank B: 15.5 percent compounded quarterly Bank C: 16 percent compounded annually
Which of these is the best if you are thinking of opening a savings account? Which of these is best if they represent loan rates?
To begin, Bank C is off ering 16 percent per year. Because there is no compounding during the year, this is the eff ective rate. Bank B is actually paying .155/4 = .03875 or 3.875 percent per quarter. At this rate, an investment of $1 for four quarters would grow to:
$1 × 1.038754 = $1.1642
Th e EAR, therefore, is 16.42 percent. For a saver, this is much better than the 16 percent rate Bank C is off ering; for a borrower, it’s worse.
Bank A is compounding every day. Th is may seem a little extreme, but it is very common to calculate interest daily. In this case, the daily interest rate is actually:
.15/365 = .000411
Th is is .0411 percent per day. At this rate, an investment of $1 for 365 periods would grow to:
$1 × 1.000411365 = $1.1618
Th e EAR is 16.18 percent. Th is is not as good as Bank B’s 16.42 percent for a saver, and not as good as Bank C’s 16 percent for a borrower.
Th is example illustrates two things. First, the highest quoted rate is not necessarily the best. Second, the compounding during the year can lead to a signifi cant diff erence between the quoted rate and the eff ective rate. Remember that the eff ective rate is what you get or what you pay.
If you look at our examples, you see that we computed the EARs in three steps. We fi rst divided the quoted rate by the number of times that the interest is compounded. We then added 1 to the result and raised it to the power of the number of times the interest is compounded. Finally, we subtracted the 1. If we let m be the number of times the interest is compounded during the year, these steps can be summarized simply as:
EAR = [1 + (Quoted rate/m)]m - 1 [6.8]
stated interest rate or quoted interest rate The interest rate expressed in terms of the interest payment made each period. Also, quoted interest rate.
effective annual rate (EAR) The interest rate expressed as if it were compounded once per year.
146 Part 3: Valuation of Future Cash Flows
06Ross_Chapter06_3rd_B.indd 14606Ross_Chapter06_3rd_B.indd 146 12-11-19 17:0212-11-19 17:02
For example, suppose you are off ered 7 percent compounded monthly. In this case, the interest is compounded 12 times a year; so m is 12. You can calculate the eff ective rate as:
EAR = [1 + (Quoted rate/m)]m - 1 = [1 + (.07/12)]12 - 1 = 1.005812 - 1 = 1.0723 - 1 = 7.23%
EXAMPLE 6.11: What’s the EAR?
A bank is offering 12 percent compounded quarterly. If you put $100 in an account, how much will you have at the end of one year? What’s the EAR? How much will you have at the end of two years?
The bank is effectively offering 12%/4 = 3% every quar- ter. If you invest $100 for four periods at 3 percent per period, the future value is:
Future value = $100 × 1.034
= $100 × 1.1255 = $112.55
The EAR is 12.55 percent: $100 × (1 + .1255) = $112.55. We can determine what you would have at the end of
two years in two different ways. One way is to recognize
that two years is the same as eight quarters. At 3 percent per quarter, after eight quarters, you would have:
$100 × 1.038 = $100 × 1.2668 = $126.68 Alternatively, we could determine the value after two years by using an EAR of 12.55 percent; so after two years you would have:
$100 × 1.12552 = $100 × 1.2688 = $126.68 Thus, the two calculations produce the same answer. This illustrates an important point. Anytime we do a present or future value calculation, the rate we use must be an actual or effective rate. In this case, the actual rate is 3 percent per quarter. The effective annual rate is 12.55 percent. It doesn’t matter which one we use once we know the EAR.
EXAMPLE 6.12: Quoting a Rate
Now that you know how to convert a quoted rate to an EAR, consider going the other way. As a lender, you know you want to actually earn 18 percent on a particular loan. You want to quote a rate that features monthly compound- ing. What rate do you quote?
In this case, we know the EAR is 18 percent and we know this is the result of monthly compounding. Let q stand for the quoted rate. We thus have:
EAR = [1 + (Quoted rate/m)]m - 1 .18 = [1 + (q/12)]12 - 1 1.18 = [1 + (q/12)]12
We need to solve this equation for the quoted rate. This calculation is the same as the ones we did to find an un- known interest rate in Chapter 5:
1.18(1/12) = 1 + (q/12) 1.18.08333 = 1 + (q/12) 1.0139 = 1 + (q/12) q = .0139 × 12 = 16.68%
Therefore, the rate you would quote is 16.68 percent, com- pounded monthly.
Mortgages Mortgages are a very common example of an annuity with monthly payments. All major fi nancial institutions have websites providing mortgage information. For example, CIBC’s website has a mortgage calculator on the mortgages menu. To understand mortgage calculations, keep in mind two institutional arrangements: First, although payments are monthly, regulations for Canad- ian fi nancial institutions require that mortgage rates be quoted with semi-annual compounding. Th us, the compounding frequency diff ers from the payment frequency. Second, fi nancial institu- tions off er mortgages with interest rates fi xed for various periods ranging from 6 months to 25 years. As the borrower, you must choose the period for which the rate is fi xed. (We off er some guidance in Example 6.14.) In any case, payments on conventional mortgages are calculated to maturity (usually aft er 25 years).
CHAPTER 6: Discounted Cash Flow Valuation 147
06Ross_Chapter06_3rd_B.indd 14706Ross_Chapter06_3rd_B.indd 147 12-11-19 17:0212-11-19 17:02
EXAMPLE 6.13: What Are Your Payments?
A financial institution is offering a $100,000 mortgage at a quoted semiannual rate of 6 percent. Assume the mortgage is amortized over 25 years. To find the payments, we need to find the quoted monthly rate. To do this, we convert the quoted semiannual rate to an EAR:
EAR = [1 + Quoted rate/m]m - 1 = [1 + .06/2]2 - 1 = 1.032 - 1 = 6.09%
Then we find the quoted monthly rate used to calculate the payments:
Quoted rate/m = (EAR + 1)1/m - 1 Quoted rate/12 = (1.0609)1/12 - 1 = 1.004939 - 1 = 0.4939%
Annuity present value = $100,000 = C × (1 - Present value factor)/r
$100,000 = C × (1 - 1/1.004939300)/.004939 = C × (1 - .22808)/.004939 = C × 156.2907
C = $639.83
Your monthly payments will be $639.83.
EXAMPLE 6.14: Choosing the Mortgage Term
Earlier we pointed out that while mortgages are amortized over 300 months, the rate is fixed for a shorter period, usu- ally no longer than five years. Suppose the rate of 6 percent in Example 6.13 is fixed for five years and you are wondering whether to lock in this rate or to take a lower rate of 4 per- cent fixed for only one year. If you chose the one-year rate, how much lower would your payments be for the first year?
The payments at 4 percent are $525.63, a reduction of $111.40 per month. If you choose to take the shorter-term
mortgage with lower payments, you are betting that rates will not take a big jump over the next year, leaving you with a new rate after one year much higher than 6 percent. While the mortgage formula cannot make this decision for you (it depends on risk and return discussed in Chapter 12), it does give you the risk you are facing in higher monthly payments. In 1981, mortgage rates were around 20 percent!
EARs and APRs Sometimes it’s not clear whether a rate is an eff ective annual rate. A case in point concerns what is called the annual percentage rate (APR) on a loan. Cost of borrowing disclosure regulations (part of the Bank Act) in Canada require that lenders disclose an APR on virtually all consumer loans. Th is rate must be displayed on a loan document in a prominent and unambiguous way.
EXAMPLE 6.15: What Rate Are You Paying?
Depending on the issuer, a typical credit card agreement quotes an interest rate of 10 percent APR. Monthly pay- ments are required. What is the actual interest rate you pay on such a credit card?
Based on our discussion, an APR of 10 percent with monthly payments is really .10/12 = .0083 or 0.83 percent per month. The EAR is thus:
EAR = [1 + (.10/12)]12 - 1 = 1.008312 - 1 = 1.1043 - 1 = 10.43%
This is the rate you actually pay.
Given that an APR must be calculated and displayed, an obvious question arises: Is an APR an eff ective annual rate? Put another way, if a bank quotes a car loan at 12 percent APR, is the con- sumer actually paying 12 percent interest? Surprisingly, the answer is no. Th ere is some confusion over this point, which we discuss next.
annual percentage rate (APR) The interest rate charged per period multiplied by the number of periods per year.
148 Part 3: Valuation of Future Cash Flows
06Ross_Chapter06_3rd_B.indd 14806Ross_Chapter06_3rd_B.indd 148 12-11-19 17:0212-11-19 17:02
Th e confusion over APRs arises because the law requires lenders to compute the APR in a particular way. By law, the APR is simply equal to the interest rate per period multiplied by the number of periods in a year.6 For example, if a bank is charging 1.2 percent per month on car loans, then the APR that must be reported is 1.2% × 12 = 14.4%. So, an APR is, in fact, a quoted or stated rate in the sense we’ve been discussing. For example, an APR of 12 percent on a loan calling for monthly payments is really 1 percent per month. Th e EAR on such a loan is thus:
EAR = [1 + APR/12]12 - 1 = 1.0112 - 1 = 12.6825%
Th e diff erence between an APR and an EAR probably won’t be all that great, but it is somewhat ironic that truth-in-lending laws sometimes require lenders to be untruthful about the actual rate on a loan.
Taking It to the Limit: A Note on Continuous Compounding If you made a deposit in a savings account, how oft en could your money be compounded during the year? If you think about it, there isn’t really any upper limit. We’ve seen that daily compound- ing, for example, isn’t a problem. Th ere is no reason to stop here, however. We could compound every hour or minute or second. How high would the EAR get in this case? Table 6.3 illustrates the EARs that result as 10 percent is compounded at shorter and shorter intervals. Notice that the EARs do keep getting larger, but the diff erences get very small.
TABLE 6.3
Compounding frequency and effective annual rates
Compounding Period
Number of Times Compounded
Effective Annual Rate
Year 1 10.00000% Quarter 4 10.38129 Month 12 10.47131 Week 52 10.50648 Day 365 10.51558 Hour 8,760 10.51703 Minute 525,600 10.51709
As the numbers in Table 6.3 seem to suggest, there is an upper limit to the EAR. If we let q stand for the quoted rate, then, as the number of times the interest is compounded gets extremely large, the EAR approaches:
EAR = eq - 1 [6.9] where e is the number 2.71828 (look for a key labelled “ex” on your calculator). For example, with our 10 percent rate, the highest possible EAR is:
EAR = eq - 1 = 2.71828.10 - 1 = 1.1051709 - 1 = 10.51709%
In this case, we say that the money is compounded continuously, or instantaneously. What is hap- pening is that interest is being credited the instant it is earned, so the amount of interest grows continuously.
6 Note that we have simplified the discussion somewhat, as the Bank Act requires that the APR include costs such as up- front fees associated with borrowing the funds.
CHAPTER 6: Discounted Cash Flow Valuation 149
06Ross_Chapter06_3rd_B.indd 14906Ross_Chapter06_3rd_B.indd 149 12-11-19 17:0212-11-19 17:02
1. If an interest rate is given as 12 percent compounded daily, what do we call this rate?
2. What is an APR? What is an EAR? Are they the same thing?
3. In general, what is the relationship between a stated interest rate and an effective interest rate? Which is more relevant for financial decisions?
4. What does continuous compounding mean?
6.4 Loan Types and Loan Amortization
Whenever a lender extends a loan, some provision will be made for repayment of the principal (the original loan amount). A loan might be repaid in equal installments, for example, or it might be repaid in a single lump sum. Because the way that the principal and interest are paid is up to the parties involved, there is actually an unlimited number of possibilities.
In this section, we describe a few forms of repayment that come up quite oft en, and more com- plicated forms can usually be built up from these. Th e three basic types of loans are pure discount loans, interest-only loans, and amortized loans. Working with these loans is a very straightfor- ward application of the present value principles that we have already developed.
Pure Discount Loans Th e pure discount loan is the simplest form of loan. With such a loan, the borrower receives money today and repays a single lump sum at some time in the future. A one-year, 10 percent pure discount loan, for example, would require the borrower to repay $1.10 in one year for every dollar borrowed today.
Because a pure discount loan is so simple, we already know how to value one. Suppose a bor- rower was able to repay $25,000 in fi ve years. If we, acting as the lender, wanted a 12 percent inter- est rate on the loan, how much would we be willing to lend? Put another way, what value would we assign today to that $25,000 to be repaid in fi ve years? Based on our work in Chapter 5, we know the answer is just the present value of $25,000 at 12 percent for fi ve years:
Present value = $25,000/1.125 = $25,000/1.7623 = $14,186
Pure discount loans are very common when the loan term is short, say, a year or less. In recent years, they have become increasingly common for much longer periods.
EXAMPLE 6.16: Treasury Bills
When the Government of Canada borrows money on a short-term basis (a year or less), it does so by selling what are called Treasury bills or T-bills for short. A T-bill is a promise by the government to repay a fixed amount at some future time, for example, in 3 or 12 months.
Treasury bills are pure discount loans. If a T-bill promises to repay $10,000 in 12 months, and the market interest rate is 4 percent, how much does the bill sell for in the market?
Since the going rate is 4 percent, the T-bill sells for the pres- ent value of $10,000 to be paid in one year at 4 percent, or:
Present value = $10,000/1.04 = $9,615.38
In recent years, the Government of Canada has emphasized T-bills over Canada Savings Bonds when seeking short-term financing. T-bills are originally issued in denominations of $1 million. Investment dealers buy T-bills and break them up into smaller denominations, some as small as $1,000, for resale to individual investors.
Interest-Only Loans A second type of loan repayment plan calls for the borrower to pay interest each period and to repay the entire principal (the original loan amount) at some point in the future. Loans with such
Concept Questions
150 Part 3: Valuation of Future Cash Flows
06Ross_Chapter06_3rd_B.indd 15006Ross_Chapter06_3rd_B.indd 150 12-11-19 17:0212-11-19 17:02
a repayment plan are called interest-only loans. Notice that if there is just one period, a pure dis- count loan and an interest-only loan are the same thing.
For example, with a three-year, 10 percent, interest-only loan of $1,000, the borrower would pay $1,000 × .10 = $100 in interest at the end of the fi rst and second years. At the end of the third year, the borrower would return the $1,000 along with another $100 in interest for that year. Similarly, a 50-year interest-only loan would call for the borrower to pay interest every year for the next 50 years and then repay the principal. In the extreme, the borrower pays the interest every period forever and never repays any principal. As we discussed earlier in the chapter, the result is a perpetuity.
Most bonds issued by the Government of Canada, the provinces, and corporations have the general form of an interest-only loan. Because we consider bonds in some detail in the next chap- ter, we defer a further discussion of them for now.
Amortized Loans With a pure discount or interest-only loan, the principal is repaid all at once. An alternative is an amortized loan, with which the lender may require the borrower to repay parts of the loan amount over time. Th e process of providing for a loan to be paid off by making regular principal reduc- tions is called amortizing the loan.
A simple way of amortizing a loan is to have the borrower pay the interest each period plus some fi xed amount. Th is approach is common with medium-term business loans. For example, suppose a student takes out a $5,000, fi ve-year loan at 9 percent for covering a part of her tuition fees. Th e loan agreement calls for the borrower to pay the interest on the loan balance each year and to reduce the loan balance each year by $1,000. Because the loan amount declines by $1,000 each year, it is fully paid in fi ve years.
In the case we are considering, notice that the total payment will decline each year. Th e reason is that the loan balance goes down, resulting in a lower interest charge each year, whereas the $1,000 principal reduction is constant. For example, the interest in the fi rst year will be $5,000 × .09 = $450. Th e total payment will be $1,000 + 450 = $1,450. In the second year, the loan balance is $4,000, so the interest is $4,000 × .09 = $360, and the total payment is $1,360. We can calculate the total payment in each of the remaining years by preparing a simple amortization schedule as follows:
Year Beginning
Balance Total
Payment Interest
Paid Principal
Paid Ending Balance
1 $5,000 $1,450 $ 450 $1,000 $4,000 2 4,000 1,360 360 1,000 3,000 3 3,000 1,270 270 1,000 2,000 4 2,000 1,180 180 1,000 1,000 5 1,000 1,090 90 1,000 0
Totals $6,350 $1,350 $5,000
Notice that in each year, the interest paid is given by the beginning balance multiplied by the interest rate. Also notice that the beginning balance is given by the ending balance from the previous year.
Probably the most common way of amortizing a loan is to have the borrower make a single, fi xed payment every period. Almost all consumer loans (such as car loans) and mortgages work this way. For example, suppose our fi ve-year, 9 percent, $5,000 loan was amortized this way. How would the amortization schedule look?
We fi rst need to determine the payment. From our discussion earlier in the chapter, we know that this loan’s cash fl ows are in the form of an ordinary annuity. In this case, we can solve for the payment as follows:
$5,000 = C × {[1 - (1/1.095)]/.09} = C × [(1 - .6499)/.09]
Th is gives us:
C = $5,000/3.8897 = $1,285.46
Th e borrower will therefore make fi ve equal payments of $1,285.46. Will this pay off the loan? We will check by fi lling in an amortization schedule.
CHAPTER 6: Discounted Cash Flow Valuation 151
06Ross_Chapter06_3rd_B.indd 15106Ross_Chapter06_3rd_B.indd 151 12-11-19 17:0212-11-19 17:02
In our previous example, we knew the principal reduction each year. We then calculated the interest owed to get the total payment. In this example, we know the total payment. We will thus calculate the interest and then subtract it from the total payment to calculate the principal portion in each payment.
In the fi rst year, the interest is $450, as we calculated before. Because the total payment is $1,285.46, the principal paid in the fi rst year must be:
Principal paid = $1,285.46 - 450 = $835.46
Th e ending loan balance is thus:
Ending balance = $5,000 - 835.46 = $4,164.54
Th e interest in the second year is $4,164.54 × .09 = $374.81, and the loan balance declines by $1,285.46 - 374.81 = $910.65. We can summarize all of the relevant calculations in the following schedule:
Year Beginning
Balance Total
Payment Interest
Paid Principal
Paid Ending Balance
1 $5,000.00 $1,285.46 $ 450.00 $ 835.46 $4,164.54 2 4,164.54 1,285.46 374.81 910.65 3,253.89 3 3,253.89 1,285.46 292.85 992.61 2,261.28 4 2,261.28 1,285.46 203.52 1,081.94 1,179.34 5 1,179.34 1,285.46 106.14 1,179.32 0.02
Total $6,427.30 $1,427.31 $5,000.00
Th e ending balance at Year 5 is 0.02 and not 0 due to rounding error using the fi nancial calculator in fi nding the payment. In practice, the 2 cents would be added to the fi nal payment.
Because the loan balance declines to zero, the fi ve equal payments do pay off the loan. Notice that the interest paid declines each period. Th is isn’t surprising because the loan balance is going down. Given that the total payment is fi xed, the principal paid must be rising each period.
If you compare the two loan amortizations in this section, you will see that the total interest is greater for the equal total payment case, $1,427.31 versus $1,350. Th e reason for this is that the loan is repaid more slowly early on, so the interest is somewhat higher. Th is doesn’t mean that one loan is better than the other; it simply means that one is eff ectively paid off faster than the other. For example, the principal reduction in the fi rst year is $835.46 in the equal total payment case as compared to $1,000 in the fi rst case.
How to Calculate the Amortization of Loan Payments Using a Financial Calculator
The amortization of loan payments may be determined using your calculator once you have mastered the calculation of a loan payment. Once you have completed the four-step procedure to find the loan payment, you can find the amortization of any payment.
To begin, of course, we must remember to clear the calculator!
Enter 5 9 5,000
Solve for -1285.46
To use the amortization worksheet, press . At payment number, P1 = 1.00, press the down arrow key to view the ending balance
after the payment is made as well as the interest and principal portions of the second pay- ment. This gives you a balance of $4,164.54 and the principal returned equal to $835.46. To view the ending balance after the next payment press at P1. This changes P1 from 1.00 to 2.00. Then, press down arrow key again to view ending balance, principal and inter- est portions and repeat these steps for P1 = 3.00, 4.00, and 5.00. The ending balance of $0.02 at P1 = 5.00 is due to rounding error in the financial calculator.
CALCULATOR HINTS
152 Part 3: Valuation of Future Cash Flows
06Ross_Chapter06_3rd_B.indd 15206Ross_Chapter06_3rd_B.indd 152 12-11-19 17:0212-11-19 17:02
Loan Amortization Using a Spreadsheet
Loan amortization is a very common spreadsheet application. To illustrate, we will set up the problem that we have just examined, a five-year, $5,000, 9 percent loan with constant payments. Our spreadsheet looks like this:
1
2
3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 0 11 1 2
1 3 1 4 1 5 1 6 1 7 1 8 1 9 2 0 2 1 2 2 2 3
2 4 2 5 2 6 2 7 2 8 2 9 3 0 3 1
A B C D E F G H
Loan amount: $5,000
Interest rate: 0.09
Loan term: 5
Loan payment: $1,285.46
Note: payment is calculated using PMT(rate, nper, –pv, fv)
Amortization table:
Year Beginning Total Interest Principal Ending
Balance Payment Paid Paid Balance
1 $5,000.00 $1,285.46 $450.00 $835.46 $4,164.54
2 4,164.54 1,285.46 374.81 910.65 3,253.88
3 3,253.88 1,285.46 292.85 992.61 2,261.27
4 2,261.27 1,285.46 203.51 1,081.95 1,179.32
5 1,179.32 1,285.46 106.14 1,179.32 0.00
Totals 6,427.31 1,427.31 5,000.00
Formulas in the amortization table:
Year Beginning Total Interest Principal Ending
Balance Payment Paid Paid Balance
1 =+D4 =$D$7 =+$D$5*C13 =+D13–E13 =+C13–F13
2 =+G13 =$D$7 =+$D$5*C14 =+D14–E14 =+C14–F14
3 =+G14 =$D$7 =+$D$5*C15 =+D15–E15 =+C15–F15
4 =+G15 =$D$7 =+$D$5*C16 =+D16–E16 =+C16–F16
5 =+G16 =$D$7 =+$D$5*C17 =+D17–E17 =+C17–F17
Note: totals in the amortization table are calculated using the SUM formula.
Using a spreadsheet to amortize a loan
The ending balance using MS Excel is rounded to zero.
EXAMPLE 6.17: Student Loan Amortization
An increasing number of Canadian university and college students are financing their education via government and bank loans, student lines of credits, credit cards, and/or loans from family members. Suppose you owe $20,000 in government loans upon graduation. The interest rate is 6 percent, compounded monthly (for the sake of simplicity, assume this rate is fixed), and you estimate that you can
make monthly payments of $250. What will be the remain- ing balance of your loan after one year? How long will it take for you to pay off your debt?
The interest paid each month is simply 0.5 percent (6 percent ÷ 12 months) multiplied by the beginning bal- ance. The principal paid is the total payment less the monthly interest amount.
Month Beginning Balance Total Payment Interest Paid Principal Paid Ending Balance
1 $20,000.00 $250.00 $100.00 $150.00 $19,850.00 2 19,850.00 250.00 99.25 150.75 19,699.25 3 19,699.25 250.00 98.50 151.50 19,547.75 . . . . . .
12 18,308.13 250.00 91.54 158.46 18,149.67
Using an amortization schedule as the one above, you can see that at the end of one year, your remaining balance is $18,149.67.
To calculate the number of months it will take to pay off the $20,000 you can follow the calculations below (or use a financial calculator).
$20,000 = $250 × [(1 - Present value factor)/0.005] 0.6 = Present value factor Present value factor = 0.6 = 1/(1 + 0.005)t
= 1.005t = 1/0.6 = 1.67 = 1.005102 ≈ 1.66
Thus, it will take you approximately 102 months or a bit over eight and a half years to pay off your student loan.
SPREADSHEET STRATEGIES
CHAPTER 6: Discounted Cash Flow Valuation 153
06Ross_Chapter06_3rd_B.indd 15306Ross_Chapter06_3rd_B.indd 153 12-11-19 17:0212-11-19 17:02
EXAMPLE 6.18: Partial Amortization, or the “Bullet” Loan
As we explained earlier, real estate lending usually involves mortgages with a loan period far shorter than the mort- gage life. A common example might call for a five-year loan with, say, a 15-year amortization. This means the borrower makes a payment every month of a fixed amount based on a 15-year amortization. However, after 60 months, the bor- rower either negotiates a new five-year loan or makes a single, much larger payment called a balloon or bullet to pay off the loan. Balloon payments are common in both commercial and residential mortgages. In either case, be- cause the monthly payments don’t fully pay off the loan, the loan is said to be partially amortized.
Suppose we have a $100,000 commercial mortgage with a 5 percent rate compounded semiannually and a 20-year (240-month) amortization. Further suppose that the mortgage has a five-year balloon. What will the monthly payment be? How big will the balloon payment be?
The monthly payment can be calculated based on an ordinary annuity with a present value of $100,000. To find the monthly rate, we first have to find the EAR and then convert it to a quoted monthly rate. To do this, we convert the quoted semiannual rate to an EAR.
EAR = [1 + Quoted rate/m]m - 1 = [1 + .05/2]2 - 1 = 1.02502 - 1 = 5.06%
Then, we find the quoted monthly rate used to calculate the payments:
Quoted rate/m = (EAR + 1)1/m - 1 Quoted rate/12 = (1.0506)1/12 - 1 = 1.0041 - 1 = 0.41%
The quoted monthly rate is 0.41 percent and there are 12 × 20 = 240 payments. To find the payment amount, we use the annuity present value formula.
Annuity present value = $100,000 = C × (1 - Present value factor)/r $100,000 = C × (1 - 1/1.0041240)/.0041 = C × (1 - .3746)/.0041 = C × 152.5366 C = $655.58
Your monthly payments will be $655.58 Now, there is an easy way and a hard way to determine
the balloon payment. The hard way is to actually amortize the loan for 60 months to see what the balance is at that time. The easy way is to recognize that after 60 months, we have a 240 - 60 = 180-month loan. The payment is still $655.58 per month, and the interest rate is still .41 percent per month. The loan balance is thus the present value of the remaining payments:
Loan balance = $655.58 × (1 - 1/1.0041180)/.0041 = $655.58 × 127.1220 = $83,338.64
The balloon payment is a substantial $83,339. Why is it so large? To get an idea, consider the first payment on the mortgage. The interest in the first month is $100,000 × .0041 = $410. Your payment is $655.58, so the loan bal- ance declines by only $245.58. Since the loan balance de- clines so slowly, the cumulative pay down over five years is not great.7
7
1. What is a pure discount loan? An interest-only loan?
2. What does it mean to amortize a loan?
3. What is a balloon payment? How do you determine its value?
7 To get the precise payment of $657.13 you need to carry 6 decimal places in the interest rate using 0.412392 percent.
Concept Questions
154 Part 3: Valuation of Future Cash Flows
06Ross_Chapter06_3rd_B.indd 15406Ross_Chapter06_3rd_B.indd 154 12-11-19 17:0212-11-19 17:02
6.5 SUMMARY AND CONCLUSIONS
Th is chapter rounds out your understanding of fundamental concepts related to the time value of money and discounted cash fl ow valuation. Several important topics were covered, including:
1. There are two ways of calculating present and future values when there are multiple cash flows. Both approaches are straightforward extensions of our earlier analysis of single cash flows.
2. A series of constant cash flows that arrive or are paid at the end of each period is called an ordinary annuity, and we described some useful shortcuts for determining the present and future values of annuities.
3. Interest rates can be quoted in a variety of ways. For financial decisions, it is important that any rates being compared be first converted to effective rates. The relationship between a quoted rate, such as an annual percentage rate (APR), and an effective annual rate (EAR) is given by:
EAR = [1 + (Quoted rate/m]m - 1 where m is the number of times during the year the money is compounded. 4. Many loans are annuities. The process of providing for a loan to be paid off gradually is
called amortizing the loan, and we discussed how amortization schedules are prepared and interpreted.
Th e principles developed in this chapter will fi gure prominently in the chapters to come. Th e reason for this is that most investments, whether they involve real assets or fi nancial assets, can be analyzed using the discounted cash fl ow (DCF) approach. As a result, the DCF approach is broadly applicable and widely used in practice. For example, the next two chapters show how to value bonds and stocks using an extension of the techniques presented in this chapter. Before going on, therefore, you might want to do some of the problems that follow.
Key Terms annual percentage rate (APR) (page 148) annuity (page 135) annuity due (page 141) consol (page 142) effective annual rate (EAR) (page 146)
growing annuity (page 145) growing perpetuity (page 143) perpetuity (page 142) stated interest rate or quoted interest rate (page 146)
Chapter Review Problems and Self-Test 6.1 Present Values with Multiple Cash Flows A first-round
draft choice quarterback has been signed to a three-year, $25 million contract. The details provide for an immediate cash bonus of $2 million. The player is to receive $5 million in salary at the end of the first year, $8 million the next, and $10 million at the end of the last year. Assuming a 15 percent discount rate, is this package worth $25 million? How much is it worth?
6.2 Future Value with Multiple Cash Flows You plan to make a series of deposits in an individual retirement account. You will deposit $1,000 today, $2,000 in two years, and $2,000 in five years. If you withdraw $1,500 in three years and $1,000 in seven years, assuming no withdrawal penalties, how much will you have after eight years if the interest rate is 7 percent? What is the present value of these cash flows?
6.3 Annuity Present Value You are looking into an investment that will pay you $12,000 per year for the next 10 years. If you require a 15 percent return, what is the most you would pay for this investment?
6.4 APR versus EAR The going rate on student loans is quoted as 8 percent APR. The terms of the loans call for monthly pay- ments. What is the effective annual rate (EAR) on such a stu- dent loan?
6.5 It’s the Principal that Matters Suppose you borrow $10,000. You are going to repay the loan by making equal annual pay- ments for five years. The interest rate on the loan is 14 percent per year. Prepare an amortization schedule for the loan. How much interest will you pay over the life of the loan?
6.6 Just a Little Bit Each Month You’ve recently finished your MBA at the Darnit School. Naturally, you must purchase a new Lexus ES 350 immediately. The car costs about $42,000. The bank quotes an interest rate of 15 percent APR for a 72-month loan with a 10 percent down payment. You plan on trading the car in for a new one in two years. What will your monthly payment be? What is the effective interest rate on the loan? What will the loan balance be when you trade the car in?
CHAPTER 6: Discounted Cash Flow Valuation 155
06Ross_Chapter06_3rd_B.indd 15506Ross_Chapter06_3rd_B.indd 155 12-11-19 17:0212-11-19 17:02
Answers to Self-Test Problems 6.1 Obviously, the package is not worth $25 million because the payments are spread out over three years. The bonus is paid today, so it’s
worth $2 million. The present values for the three subsequent salary payments are: ($5/1.15) + (8/1.152) + (10/1.153) = ($5/1.15) + (8/1.132) + (10/1.152)
= $16.9721 million The package is worth a total of $16.9721 million. 6.2 We will calculate the future values for each of the cash flows separately and then add them up. Notice that we treat the withdrawals as
negative cash flows: $1,000 × 1.078 = $1,000 × 1.7182 = $1,718.19
$2,000 × 1.076 = $2,000 × 1.5007 = 3,001.46 -$1,500 × 1.075 = -$1,500 × 1.4026 = -2,103.83 $2,000 × 1.073 = $2,000 × 1.2250 = 2,450.09 -$1,000 × 1.071 = -$1,000 × 1.0700 = -1,070.00 Total future value = $3,995.91
This value includes a small rounding error. To calculate the present value, we could discount each cash flow back to the present or we could discount back a single year at a time.
However, because we already know that the future value in eight years is $3,995.91, the easy way to get the PV is just to discount this amount back eight years:
Present value = $3,995.91/1.078 = $3,995.91/1.7182 = $2,325.65
We again ignore a small rounding error. For practice, you can verify that this is what you get if you discount each cash flow back separately.
6.3 The most you would be willing to pay is the present value of $12,000 per year for 10 years at a 15 percent discount rate. The cash flows here are in ordinary annuity form, so the relevant present value factor is:
Annuity present value factor = (1 - Present value factor)/r = [1 - (1/1.1510)]/.15 = (1 - .2472)/.15 = 5.0188
The present value of the 10 cash flows is thus: Present value = $12,000 × 5.0188
= $60,225 This is the most you would pay. 6.4 A rate of 8 percent APR with monthly payments is actually 8%/12 = .67% per month. The EAR is thus: EAR = [1 + (.08/12)]12 - 1 = 8.30% 6.5 We first need to calculate the annual payment. With a present value of $10,000, an interest rate of 14 percent, and a term of five years,
the payment can be determined from: $10,000 = Payment × {[1 - (1/1.145)]/.14}
= Payment × 3.4331 Therefore, the payment is $10,000/3.4331 = $2,912.84 (actually, it’s $2,912.8355; this will create some small rounding errors in the fol-
lowing schedule). We can now prepare the amortization schedule as follows: Year Beginning Balance Total Payment Interest Paid Principal Paid Ending Balance
1 $10,000.00 $ 2,912.84 $1,400.00 $ 1,512.84 $8,487.16 2 8,487.16 2,912.84 1,188.20 1,724.63 6,762.53 3 6,762.53 2,912.84 946.75 1,966.08 4,796.45 4 4,796.45 2,912.84 671.50 2,241.33 2,555.12 5 2,555.12 2,912.84 357.72 2,555.12 0.00
Totals $14,564.17 $4,564.17 $10,000.00
6.6 The cash flows on the car loan are in annuity form, so we only need to find the payment. The interest rate is 15%/12 = 1.25% per month, and there are 72 months. The first thing we need is the annuity factor for 72 periods at 1.25 percent per period:
Annuity present value factor = (1 - Present value factor)/r = [1 - (1/1.012572)]/.0125 = [1 - (1/2.4459)]/.0125 = (1 - .4088)/.0125 = 47.2925
The present value is the amount we finance. With a 10 percent down payment, we will be borrowing 90 percent of $42,000, or $37,800.
156 Part 3: Valuation of Future Cash Flows
06Ross_Chapter06_3rd_B.indd 15606Ross_Chapter06_3rd_B.indd 156 12-11-19 17:0212-11-19 17:02
So, to find the payment, we need to solve for C in the following: $37,800 = C × Annuity present value factor
= C × 47.2925 Rearranging things a bit, we have:
C = $37,800 × (1/47.2925) = $37,800 × .02115 = $799.28
Your payment is just under $800 per month. The actual interest rate on this loan is 1.25 percent per month. Based on our work in the chapter, we can calculate the effective annual
rate as: EAR = (1.0125)12 - 1 = 16.08% The effective rate is about one point higher than the quoted rate. To determine the loan balance in two years, we could amortize the loan to see what the balance is at that time. This would be fairly te-
dious to do by hand. Using the information already determined in this problem, we can instead simply calculate the present value of the remaining payments. After two years, we have made 24 payments, so there are 72 - 24 = 48 payments left. What is the present value of 48 monthly payments of $799.28 at 1.25 percent per month? The relevant annuity factor is:
Annuity present value factor = (1 - Present value factor)/r = [1 - (1/1.012548)]/.0125 = [1 - (1/1.8154)]/.0125 = (1 - .5509)/.0125 = 35.9315
The present value is thus: Present value = $799.28 × 35.9315 = $28,719.37 You will owe about $28,726 on the loan in two years.
Concepts Review and Critical Thinking Questions 1. (LO1) In evaluating an annuity present value, there are four
pieces. What are they? 2. (LO1) As you increase the length of time involved, what hap-
pens to the present value of an annuity? What happens to the future value?
3. (LO1) What happens to the future value of an annuity if you increase the rate r? What happens to the present value?
4. (LO1) What do you think about a lottery advertising a $500,000 prize when the lump-sum option is $250,000? Is it deceptive advertising?
5. (LO1) If you were an athlete negotiating a contract, would you want a big signing bonus payable immediately and smaller payments in the future, or vice versa? How about from the team’s perspective?
6. (LO1) Suppose two athletes sign 10-year contracts for $90 mil- lion. In one case, we’re told that the $90 million will be paid in 10 equal installments. In the other case, we’re told that the $90 million will be paid in 10 installments, but the installments will increase by 6 percent per year. Who got the better deal?
Questions and Problems 1. Present Value and Multiple Cash Flows (LO1) Buena Vista Co. has identified an
investment project with the following cash flows. If the discount rate is 10 percent, what is the present value of these cash flows? What is the present value at 18 percent? At 24 percent?
2. Present Value and Multiple Cash Flows (LO1) Investment X offers to pay you $6,000 per year for nine years, whereas Investment Y offers to pay you $8,000 per year for six years. Which of these cash flow streams has the higher present value if the discount rate is 5 percent? If the discount rate is 22 percent?
3. Future Value and Multiple Cash Flows (LO1) Dundonald Inc. has identified an investment project with the following cash flows. If the discount rate is 8 percent, what is the future value of these cash flows in year 4? What is the future value at a discount rate of 11 percent? At 24 percent?
4. Calculating Annuity Present Value (LO1) An investment offers $5,300 per year for 15 years, with the first payment occurring one year from now. If the required return is 7 percent, what is the value of the investment? What would the value be if the payments occurred for 40 years? For 75 years? Forever?
5. Calculating Annuity Cash Flows (LO1) If you put up $34,000 today in exchange for a 7.65 percent, 15-year annuity, what will the annual cash flow be?
1. P i w
Basic (Questions
1–29)
Year Cash Flow
1 $950 2 1,040 3 1,130 4 1,075
3 Year Cash Flow 1 $ 940 2 1,090 3 1,340 4 1,405
CHAPTER 6: Discounted Cash Flow Valuation 157
06Ross_Chapter06_3rd_B.indd 15706Ross_Chapter06_3rd_B.indd 157 12-11-19 17:0212-11-19 17:02
6. Calculating Annuity Values (LO1) Your company will generate $73,000 in annual revenue each year for the next eight years from a new information database. If the appropriate interest rate is 8.5 percent, what is the present value of the savings?
7. Calculating Annuity Values (LO1) If you deposit $4,000 at the end of each of the next 20 years into an account paying 11.2 percent interest, how much money will you have in the account in 20 years? How much will you have if you make deposits for 40 years?
8. Calculating Annuity Values (LO1) You want to have $90,000 in your savings account 10 years from now, and you’re prepared to make equal annual deposits into the account at the end of each year. If the account pays 6.8 percent interest, what amount must you deposit each year?
9. Calculating Annuity Values (LO2) Erindale Bank offers you a $50,000, seven-year term loan at 7.5 percent annual interest. What will your annual loan payment be?
10. Calculating Annuity Values (LO1) A six-year lease requires payment of $1,059.00 at the beginning of every three months. If money is worth 5 percent compounded monthly, what is the cash value of the lease?
11. Calculating Perpetuity Values (LO1) The Sutherland Life Insurance Co. is trying to sell you an investment policy that will pay you and your heirs $25,000 per year forever. If the required return on this investment is 7.2 percent, how much will you pay for the policy?
12. Calculating Perpetuity Values (LO1) In the previous problem, suppose a sales associate told you the policy costs $375,000. At what interest rate would this be a fair deal?
13. Calculating EAR (LO4) Find the EAR in each of the following cases: Stated Rate (APR) Number of Times Compounded Effective Rate (EAR)
8% Quarterly 16 Monthly 12 Daily 15 Infinite
14. Calculating APR (LO4) Find the APR, or stated rate, in each of the following cases: Stated Rate (APR) Number of Times Compounded Effective Rate (EAR)
Semiannually 8.6% Monthly 19.8 Weekly 9.4 Infinite 16.5
15. Calculating EAR (LO4) Royal Grandora Bank charges 14.2 percent compounded monthly on its business loans. First United Bank charges 14.5 percent compounded semiannually. As a potential borrower, which bank would you go to for a new loan?
16. Calculating APR (LO4) Dunfermline Credit Corp. wants to earn an effective annual return on its consumer loans of 16 percent per year. The bank uses daily compounding on its loans. What interest rate is the bank required by law to report to potential borrowers? Explain why this rate is misleading to an uninformed borrower.
17. Calculating Future Values (LO1) What is the future value of $2,100 in 17 years assuming an interest rate of 8.4 percent compounded semiannually?
18. Calculating Future Values (LO1) Edzeil Credit Bank is offering 9.3 percent compounded daily on its savings accounts. If you deposit $4,500 today, how much will you have in the account in 5 years? In 10 years? In 20 years?
19. Calculating Present Values (LO1) An investment will pay you $58,000 in seven years. If the appropriate discount rate is 10 percent compounded daily, what is the present value?
20. EAR versus APR (LO4) Big Show’s Pawn Shop charges an interest rate of 30 percent per month on loans to its customers. Like all lenders, Big Show must report an APR to consumers. What rate should the shop report? What is the effective annual rate?
21. Calculating Loan Payments (LO2, 4) You want to buy a new sports coupe for $68,500, and the finance office at the dealership has quoted you a 6.9 percent APR loan for 60 months to buy the car. What will your monthly payments be? What is the effective annual rate on this loan? Assume that the APR is compounded monthly.
22. Calculating Number of Periods (LO3) One of your customers is delinquent on his accounts payable balance. You’ve mutually agreed to a repayment schedule of $500 per month. You will charge 1.3 percent per month interest on the overdue balance. If the current balance is $18,000, how long will it take for the account to be paid off?
23. Calculating EAR (LO4) Bergheim’s Quick Loans Inc. offers you “three for four or I knock on your door.” This means you get $3 today and repay $4 when you get your pay cheque in one week (or else). What’s the effective annual return Bergheim’s earns on this lending business? If you were brave enough to ask, what APR would Bergheim’s say you were paying?
24. Valuing Perpetuities (LO1) Gledhow Life Insurance Co. is selling a perpetuity contract that pays $1,800 monthly. The contract currently sells for $95,000. What is the monthly return on this investment vehicle? What is the APR? The effective annual return?
25. Calculating Annuity Future Values (LO1) You are planning to make monthly deposits of $300 into a retirement account that pays 10 percent interest compounded monthly. If your first deposit will be made one month from now, how large will your retirement account be in 30 years?
26. Calculating Annuity Future Values (LO1) In the previous problem, suppose you make $3,600 annual deposits into the same retirement account. How large will your account balance be in 30 years?
7
158 Part 3: Valuation of Future Cash Flows
06Ross_Chapter06_3rd_B.indd 15806Ross_Chapter06_3rd_B.indd 158 12-11-19 17:0212-11-19 17:02
27. Calculating Annuity Present Values (LO1) Beginning three months from now, you want to be able to withdraw $2,300 each quarter from your bank account to cover tuition expenses over the next four years. If the account pays .65 percent interest per quarter, how much do you need to have in your bank account today to meet your expense needs over the next four years?
28. Discounted Cash Flow Analysis (LO1) If the appropriate discount rate for the following cash flows is 11 percent compounded quarterly, what is the present value of the cash flows?
29. Discounted Cash Flow Analysis (LO1) If the appropriate discount rate for the following cash flows is 8.45 percent per year, what is the present value of the cash flows?
30. Simple Interest versus Compound Interest (LO4) Vanscoy Bank pays 7 percent simple interest on its investment accounts. If Vade Bank pays interest on its accounts compounded annually, what rate should the bank set if it wants to match Vanscoy Bank over an investment horizon of 10 years?
31. Calculating EAR (LO4) You are looking at an investment that has an effective annual rate of 17 percent. What is the effective semiannual return? The effective quarterly return? The effective monthly return?
32. Calculating Interest Expense (LO2) You receive a credit card application from Thode Bank offering an introductory rate of 1.5 percent per year, compounded monthly for the first six months, increasing thereafter to 18 percent compounded monthly. Assuming you transfer the $5,000 balance from your existing credit card and make no subsequent payments, how much interest will you owe at the end of the first year?
33. Calculating Annuities (LO1) You are planning to save for retirement over the next 30 years. To do this, you will invest $700 a month in a stock account and $300 a month in a bond account. The return of the stock account is expected to be 11 percent, and the bond account will pay 6 percent. When you retire, you will combine your money into an account with a 9 percent return. How much can you withdraw each month from your account assuming a 25-year withdrawal period? Assume that the APR is compounded monthly.
34. Calculating Future Values (LO1) You have an investment that will pay you 1.07 percent per month. How much will you have per dollar invested in one year? In two years?
35. Calculating Annuity Payments (LO1) You want to be a millionaire when you retire in 40 years. How much do you have to save each month if you can earn 12 percent annual return? How much do you have to save if you wait 10 years before you begin your deposits? 20 years? Assume that the APR is compounded monthly.
36. Calculating Rates of Return (LO2) Suppose an investment offers to quadruple your money in 12 months (don’t believe it). What rate of return per quarter are you being offered?
37. Comparing Cash Flow Streams (LO1) You’ve just joined the investment banking firm of Dewey, Cheatum, and Howe. They’ve offered you two different salary arrangements. You can have $95,000 per year for the next two years, or you can have $70,000 per year for the next two years, along with a $45,000 signing bonus today. The bonus is paid immediately, and the salary is paid at the end of each year. If the interest rate is 10 percent compounded monthly, which do you prefer?
38. Growing Annuity (LO1) You have just won the lottery and will receive $1,000,000 every year. You will receive payments for 30 years, which will increase 5 percent per year. If the appropriate discount rate is 9 percent, what is the present value of your winnings?
39. Growing Annuity (LO1) Your job pays you only once a year for all the work you did over the previous 12 months. Today, December 31, you just received your salary of $50,000 and you plan to spend all of it. However, you want to start saving for retirement beginning next year. You have decided that one year from today you will begin depositing 5 percent of your annual salary in an account that will earn 11 percent per year. Your salary will increase at 4 percent per year throughout your career. How much money will you have on the date of your retirement 40 years from today?
40. Present Value and Interest Rates (LO1) What is the relationship between the value of an annuity and the level of interest rates? Suppose you just bought a 10-year annuity of $6,000 per year at the current interest rate of 10 percent per year. What happens to the value of your investment if interest rates suddenly drop to 5 percent? What if interest rates suddenly rise to 15 percent?
41. Calculating the Number of Payments (LO2) You’re prepared to make monthly payments of $340, beginning at the end of this month, into an account that pays 6 percent interest compounded monthly. How many payments will you have made when your account balance reaches $20,000?
42. Calculating Annuity Present Values (LO2) You want to borrow $73,000 from your local bank to buy a new sailboat. You can afford to make monthly payments of $1,450, but no more. Assuming monthly compounding, what is the highest rate you can afford on a 60-month APR loan?
43. Calculating Annuity Present Values (LO2) Maddy Christiansen received $2,900 today July 1, 2012 from her annuity. Ms. Christiansen has been receiving similar payments on the first of each month for several years from an annuity that will expire on
Year Cash Flow
1 $ 725 2 980 3 0 4 1,360
Year Cash Flow
1 $1,650 2 0 3 4,200 4 2,430
Intermediate (Questions
30–58)
3
CHAPTER 6: Discounted Cash Flow Valuation 159
06Ross_Chapter06_3rd_B.indd 15906Ross_Chapter06_3rd_B.indd 159 12-11-19 17:0212-11-19 17:02
September 1, 2015. If she discounts the future cash flows at an annual rate of 8 percent, what is the present value of her annuity including the July 1 payment? Assume that the APR is compounded monthly.
44. Calculating Loan Payments (LO2) You need a 30-year, fixed-rate mortgage to buy a new home for $240,000. Your mortgage bank will lend you the money at a 6.35 percent APR (semi-annual) for this 360-month loan. However, you can afford monthly payments of only $1,150, so you offer to pay off any remaining loan balance at the end of the loan in the form of a single balloon payment. How large will this balloon payment have to be for you to keep your monthly payments at $1,150?
45. Present and Future Values (LO1) The present value of the following cash flow stream is $6,550 when discounted at 10 percent annually. What is the value of the missing cash flow?
46. Calculating Present Values (LO1) You just won the Luck o’ Luck Lottery. You will receive $1 million today plus another 10 annual payments that increase by $500,000 per year. Thus, in one year, you receive $1.5 million. In two years you get $2 million, and so on. If the appropriate interest rate is 9 percent, what is the present value of your winnings?
47. EAR versus APR (LO4) You have just purchased a new warehouse. To finance the purchase, you’ve arranged for a 30-year mortgage loan for 80 percent of the $2,900,000 purchase price. The monthly payment on this loan will be $15,000. What is the APR on this loan? The EAR?
48. Present Value and Break-Even Interest (LO1) Consider a firm with a contract to sell an asset for $165,000 three years from now. The asset costs $94,000 to produce today. Given a relevant discount rate on this asset of 13 percent per year, will the firm make a profit on this asset? At what rate does the firm just break even?
49. Present Value and Multiple Cash Flows (LO1) What is the present value of $4,000 per year, at a discount rate of 10 percent, if the first payment is received 8 years from now and the last payment is received 25 years from now?
50. Variable Interest Rates (LO1) A 15-year annuity pays $1,500 per month, and payments are made at the end of each month. If the interest rate is 11 percent compounded monthly for the first seven years, and 7 percent compounded monthly thereafter, what is the present value of the annuity?
51. Comparing Cash Flow Streams (LO1) You have your choice of two investment accounts. Investment A is a 15-year annuity that features end-of-month $1,200 payments and has an interest rate of 8.5 percent compounded monthly. Investment B is a 8 percent continuously compounded lump sum investment, also good for 15 years. How much money would you need to invest in B today for it to be worth as much as investment A 15 years from now?
52. Calculating Present Value of a Perpetuity (LO1) Given an interest rate of 6.2 percent per year, what is the value at date t = 7 of a perpetual stream of $3,500 payments that begins at date t = 15?
53. Calculating EAR (LO4) A local finance company quotes a 16 percent interest rate on one-year loans. So, if you borrow $25,000, the interest for the year will be $4,000. Because you must repay a total of $29,000 in one year, the finance company requires you to pay $29,000/12, or $2,416.67, per month over the next 12 months. Is this a 16 percent loan? What rate would legally have to be quoted? What is the effective annual rate?
54. Calculating Present Values (LO1) A 5-year annuity of ten $7,000 semiannual payments will begin 8 years from now, with the first payment coming 8.5 years from now. If the discount rate is 10 percent compounded monthly, what is the value of this annuity five years from now? What is the value three years from now? What is the current value of the annuity?
55. Calculating Annuities Due (LO1) As discussed in the text, an ordinary annuity assumes equal payments at the end of each period over the life of the annuity. An annuity due is the same thing except the payments occur at the beginning of each period instead. Thus, a three-year annual annuity due would have periodic payment cash flows occurring at years 0, 1, and 2, whereas a three-year annual ordinary annuity would have periodic payment cash flows occurring at years 1, 2 and 3.
a. At a 9.5 percent annual discount rate, find the present value of an eight-year ordinary annuity contract of $950 payments. b. Find the present value of the same contract if it is an annuity due.
56. Calculating Annuities Due (LO1) You want to buy a new Ducati Monster 696 for $68,000. The contract is in the form of a 60-month annuity due at an 7.85 percent APR. What will your monthly payment be? Assume that the APR is compounded monthly.
57. Amortization with Equal Payments (LO3) Prepare an amortization schedule for a five-year loan of $42,000. The interest rate is 8 percent per year, and the loan calls for equal annual payments. How much interest is paid in the third year? How much total interest is paid over the life of the loan?
58. Amortization with Equal Principal Payments (LO3) Rework Problem 57 assuming that the loan agreement calls for a principal reduction of $8,400 every year instead of equal annual payments.
59. Calculating Annuity Values (LO1) Bilbo Baggins wants to save money to meet three objectives. First, he would like to be able to retire 30 years from now with retirement income of $20,000 per month for 25 years, with the first payment received 30 years and 1 month from now. Second, he would like to purchase a cabin in Rivendell in 10 years at an estimated cost of $380,000. Third, after he passes on at the end of the 25 years of withdrawals, he would like to leave an inheritance of $900,000 to his nephew Mitchell. He can afford to save $2,500 per month for the next 10 years. If he can earn a 10 percent EAR before he retires and an 7 percent EAR after he retires, how much will he have to save each month in years 11 through 30?
4
Year Cash Flow
1 $1,700 2 ? 3 2,100 4 2,800
4
4
5
Challenge (Questions
59–81)
160 Part 3: Valuation of Future Cash Flows
06Ross_Chapter06_3rd_B.indd 16006Ross_Chapter06_3rd_B.indd 160 12-11-19 17:0212-11-19 17:02
60. Calculating Annuity Values (LO1) After deciding to buy a new Mercedes-Benz C Class sedan, you can either lease the car or purchase it on a three-year loan. The car you wish to buy costs $32,000. The dealer has a special leasing arrangement where you pay $99 today and $450 per month for the next three years. If you purchase the car, you will pay it off in monthly payments over the next three years at an 7 percent APR compounded monthly. You believe you will be able to sell the car for $23,000 in three years. Should you buy or lease the car? What break-even resale price in three years would make you indifferent between buying and leasing?
61. Calculating Annuity Values (LO1) An All-Pro defensive lineman is in contract negotiations. The team has offered the following salary structure:
Time Salary
0 $7,000,000 1 $4,500,000 2 $5,600,000 3 $6,000,000 4 $6,800,000 5 $7,900,000 6 $8,800,000
All salaries are to be paid in lump sums. The player has asked you as his agent to renegotiate the terms. He wants a $9 million signing bonus payable today and a contract value increase of $1,400,000. He also wants an equal salary paid every three months, with the first pay cheque three months from now. If the interest rate is 5.5 percent compounded daily, what is the amount of his quarterly cheque? Assume 365 days in a year.
62. Calculating Annuity Values (LO1) You are buying a new Porsche Boxter, priced at $65,200. You will pay $4,700 now and the rest monthly, in a four-year loan. All rates are APRs. The automobile dealership is offering a sales promotion where either: a. You will receive a $2,000 discount cheque now and the annual interest rate on the loan is 6.1 percent, or b. The annual interest rate on the loan will be 1.2 percent but there is no discount.
Compare the two options by calculating the present value of each option, assuming the discount rate is 8 percent. Which option is a better deal?
63. Discount Interest Loans (LO4) This question illustrates what is known as discount interest. Imagine you are discussing a loan with a somewhat unscrupulous lender. You want to borrow $25,000 for one year. The interest rate is 15 percent. You and the lender agree that the interest on the loan will be .15 × $25,000 = $3,750. So the lender deducts this interest amount from the loan up front and gives you $21,250. In this case, we say that the discount is $3,750. What’s wrong here?
64. Calculating Annuity Values (LO1) You are serving on a jury. A plaintiff is suing the city for injuries sustained after a freak street sweeper accident. In the trial, doctors testified that it will be five years before the plaintiff is able to return to work. The jury has already decided in favour of the plaintiff. You are the foreperson of the jury and propose that the jury give the plaintiff an award to cover the following: (a) The present value of two years’ back pay. The plaintiff ’s annual salary for the last two years would have been $47,000 and $50,000, respectively. (b) The present value of five years’ future salary. You assume the salary will be $55,000 per year. (c) $100,000 for pain and suffering. (d) $20,000 for court costs. Assume that the salary payments are equal amounts paid at the end of each month. If the interest rate you choose is a 8 percent EAR, what is the size of the settlement? If you were the plaintiff, would you like to see a higher or lower interest rate?
65. EAR versus APR (LO4) Two banks in the area offer 30-year, $240,000 mortgages at 6.8 percent and charge a $2,300 loan application fee. However, the application fee charged by Insecurity Bank and Trust is refundable if the loan application is denied, whereas that charged by I.M. Greedy and Sons Mortgage Bank is not. The current disclosure law requires that any fees that will be refunded if the applicant is rejected be included in calculating the APR, but this is not required with nonrefundable fees (presumably because refundable fees are part of the loan rather than a fee). What are the EARs on these two loans? What are the APRs? Assume that the APR is compounded monthly.
66. Calculating EAR with Add-On Interest (LO4) This problem illustrates a deceptive way of quoting interest rates called add-on interest. Imagine that you see an advertisement for Crazy Judy’s Stereo City that reads something like this: “$1,000 Instant Credit! 14% Simple Interest! Three Years to Pay! Low, Low Monthly Payments!” You’re not exactly sure what all this means and somebody has spilled ink over the APR on the loan contract, so you ask the manager for clarification.
Judy explains that if you borrow $1,000 for three years at 14 percent interest, in three years you will owe: $1,000 × 1.143 = $1,000 × 1.48154 = $1,481.54 Now, Judy recognizes that coming up with $1,481.54 all at once might be a strain, so she lets you make “low, low monthly
payments” of $1,481.54/36 = $41.15 per month, even though this is extra bookkeeping work for her. Is this a 14 percent loan? Why or why not? What is the APR on this loan? What is the EAR? Why do you think this is called
add-on interest? 67. Calculating Annuity Payments (LO1) This is a classic retirement problem. A time line will help in solving it. Your friend is
celebrating her 35th birthday today and wants to start saving for her anticipated retirement at age 65. She wants to be able to withdraw $105,000 from her savings account on each birthday for 20 years following her retirement; the first withdrawal will be on her 66th birthday. Your friend intends to invest her money in the local credit union, which offers 7 percent interest per year.
6
CHAPTER 6: Discounted Cash Flow Valuation 161
06Ross_Chapter06_3rd_B.indd 16106Ross_Chapter06_3rd_B.indd 161 12-11-19 17:0212-11-19 17:02
She wants to make equal annual payments on each birthday into the account established at the credit union for her retirement fund. a. If she starts making these deposits on her 36th birthday and continues to make deposits until she is 65 (the last deposit will
be on her 65th birthday), what amount must she deposit annually to be able to make the desired withdrawals at retirement? b. Suppose your friend has just inherited a large sum of money. Rather than making equal annual payments, she has decided to
make one lump sum payment on her 35th birthday to cover her retirement needs. What amount does she have to deposit? c. Suppose your friend’s employer will contribute $1,500 to the account every year as part of the company’s profit-sharing
plan. In addition, your friend expects a $150,000 distribution from a family trust fund on her 55th birthday, which she will also put into the retirement account. What amount must she deposit annually now to be able to make the desired with- drawals at retirement?
68. Calculating the Number of Periods (LO2) Your Christmas ski vacation was great, but it unfortunately ran a bit over budget. All is not lost: You just received an offer in the mail to transfer your $10,000 balance from your current credit card, which charges an annual rate of 19.8 percent, to a new credit card charging a rate of 6.2 percent. How much faster could you pay the loan off by making your planned monthly payments of $200 with the new card? What if there was a 2 percent fee charged on any balances transferred?
69. Future Value and Multiple Cash Flows (LO1) An insurance company is offering a new policy to its customers. Typically, the policy is bought by a parent or grandparent for a child at the child’s birth. The details of the policy are as follows: The purchaser (say, the parent) makes the following six payments to the insurance company:
First birthday: $900 Second birthday: $900 Third birthday: $1,000 Fourth birthday: $1,000 Fifth birthday: $1,100 Sixth birthday: $1,100
After the child’s sixth birthday, no more payments are made. When the child reaches age 65, he or she receives $500,000. If the relevant interest rate is 12 percent for the first six years and 8 percent for all subsequent years, is the policy worth buying?
70. Calculating a Balloon Payment (LO2) You have just arranged for a $750,000 mortgage to finance the purchase of a large tract of land. The mortgage has an 8.1 percent APR (semi-annual), and it calls for monthly payments over the next 30 years. However, the loan has an eight-year balloon payment, meaning that the loan must be paid off then. How big will the balloon payment be?
71. Calculating Interest Rates (LO4) A financial planning service offers a university savings program. The plan calls for you to make six annual payments of $9,000 each, with the first payment occurring today, your child’s 12th birthday. Beginning on your child’s 18th birthday, the plan will provide $20,000 per year for four years. What return is this investment offering?
72. Break-Even Investment Returns (LO4) Your financial planner offers you two different investment plans. Plan X is a $20,000 annual perpetuity. Plan Y is a 10-year, $28,000 annual annuity. Both plans will make their first payment one year from today. At what discount rate would you be indifferent between these two plans?
73. Perpetual Cash Flows (LO1) What is the value of an investment that pays $15,000 every other year forever, if the first payment occurs one year from today and the discount rate is 10 percent compounded daily? What is the value today if the first payment occurs four years from today?
74. Ordinary Annuities and Annuities Due (LO1) As discussed in the text, an annuity due is identical to an ordinary annuity except that the periodic payments occur at the beginning of each period and not at the end of the period. Show that the relationship between the value of an ordinary annuity and the value of an otherwise equivalent annuity due is:
Annuity due value = Ordinary annuity value × (1 + r) Show this for both present and future values. 75. Calculating Growing Annuities (LO1) You have 40 years left until retirement and want to retire with $2 million. Your salary is
paid annually, and you will receive $40,000 at the end of the current year. Your salary will increase at 3 percent per year, and you can earn a 11 percent return on the money you invest. If you save a constant percentage of your salary, what percentage of your salary must you save each year?
76. Calculating EAR (LO4) A cheque-cashing store is in the business of making personal loans to walk-up customers. The store makes only one-week loans at 7 percent interest per week.
a. What APR must the store report to its customers? What EAR are customers actually paying? b. Now suppose the store makes one-week loans at 7 percent discount interest per week (see Problem 63). What’s the APR
now? The EAR? c. The cheque-cashing store also makes one-month add-on interest loans at 7 percent discount interest per week. Thus if you
borrow $100 for one month (four weeks), the interest will be ($100 × 1.074) - 100 = $31.08. Because this is discount interest, your net loan proceeds today will be $68.92. You must then repay the store $100 at the end of the month. To help you out, though, the store lets you pay off this $100 in installments of $25 per week. What is the APR of this loan? What is the EAR?
77. Present Value of a Growing Perpetuity (LO1) What is the equation for the present value of a growing perpetuity with a payment of C one period from today if the payments grow by C each period?
7
7
162 Part 3: Valuation of Future Cash Flows
06Ross_Chapter06_3rd_B.indd 16206Ross_Chapter06_3rd_B.indd 162 12-11-19 17:0212-11-19 17:02
78. Rule of 72 (LO4) Earlier, we discussed the Rule of 72, a useful approximation for many interest rates and periods for the time it takes a lump sum to double in value. For a 10 percent interest rate, show that the “Rule of 73” is slightly better. For what rate is the Rule of 72 exact? (Hint: Use the Solver function in Excel.)
79. Rule of 69.3 (LO4) A corollary to the Rule of 72 is the Rule of 69.3. The Rule of 69.3 is exactly correct except for rounding when interest rates are compounded continuously. Prove the Rule of 69.3 for continuously compounded interest.
The MBA Decision
Raj Danielson graduated from university six years ago with a finance undergraduate degree. Although he is satisfied with his current job, his goal is to become an investment banker. He feels that an MBA degree would allow him to achieve this goal. After examining schools, he has narrowed his choice to either Assiniboine University or the University of Passy. Both schools encourage internships, but to get class credit for the internship, no salary can be accepted. Other than internships, neither school allows its students to work while enrolled in its MBA program. Raj currently works at the money management firm of Prash and Sid. His annual salary at the firm is $55,000 and his salary is expected to increase at 3 percent per year until retire- ment. He is currently 28 years old and expects to work for 38 more years. His current job includes a fully paid health insur- ance plan, and his current average tax rate is 26 percent. Raj has a savings account with enough money to cover the entire cost of his MBA program. The Sentinel School of Business at Assiniboine University is one of the top MBA programs in the country. The MBA degree requires two years of full-time enrollment at the university. The annual tuition is $63,000, payable at the beginning of each school year. Books and other supplies are estimated to cost $2,500 per year. Raj expects that after graduation from Assiniboine, he will receive a job offer for about $98,000 per year, with a $15,000 signing bonus. The salary at this job will increase at 4 percent per year. Because of the higher salary, his average income tax rate will increase to 31 percent. The Pond School of Business at the University of Passy be- gan its MBA program 16 years ago. The Pond School is smaller
and less well known than the Sentinel School. It offers an ac- celerated one-year program, with a tuition cost of $80,000 to be paid upon matriculation. Books and other supplies for the program are expected to cost $3,500. Raj thinks that he will receive an offer of $81,000 per year upon graduation, with a $10,000 signing bonus. The salary at this job will increase at 3.5 percent per year. His average tax rate at this level of in- come will be 29 percent. Both schools offer a health insurance plan that will cost $300 per year, payable at the beginning of the year. Raj also estimates that room and board expenses will cost $20,000 per year at both schools. The appropriate discount rate is 6.5 percent.
Questions
1. How does Raj’s age affect his decision to get an MBA? 2. What other, perhaps nonquantifiable, factors affect Raj’s
decision to get an MBA? 3. Assuming all salaries are paid at the end of each year,
what is the best option for Raj from a strictly financial standpoint?
4. Raj believes that the appropriate analysis is to calculate the future value of each option. How would you evaluate this statement?
5. What initial salary would Raj need to receive to make him indifferent between attending Assiniboine University and staying in his current position?
6. Suppose, instead of being able to pay cash for his MBA, Raj must borrow the money. The current borrowing rate is 5.4 percent. How would this affect his decision?
MINI CASE
Internet Application Questions 1. Buying a house frequently involves borrowing a significant portion of the house price from a lending institution such as a bank.
Often times, the bank provides repayment of the loan based on long amortization periods. The following site maintained by Royal LePage shows the effect of increasing your monthly payment on the amortization period. royallepage.ca/en/realestateguide/buying/preparing/index.aspx
Note that increasing the monthly payment has a disproportionate impact on reducing the amortization period. Can you explain why this happens?
2. Alberta Treasury Branch (atb.com) offers a variation of GIC called a Springboard® GIC. Click on their homepage and estimate the effective annual yield on a five-year Springboard® GIC. How does this compare to the yield on a five-year standard GIC offered by CIBC (cibc.com)?
3. Toyota of Canada (toyota.ca) offers its own financing plans that may sometimes compare favourably to bank financing. Pick a vehicle from this website, and use Toyota’s pricing calculator to estimate your monthly financing payment for this car. Assume zero down payment. How does Toyota’s financing compare with the lending rates at CIBC? What is the present value of your savings if you choose to finance through Toyota?
CHAPTER 6: Discounted Cash Flow Valuation 163
06Ross_Chapter06_3rd_B.indd 16306Ross_Chapter06_3rd_B.indd 163 12-11-19 17:0212-11-19 17:02
PROOF OF ANNUITY PRESENT VALUE FORMULA
An annuity is a level stream of regular payments that lasts for a fixed number of periods. Not surprisingly, annuities are among the most common kinds of financial instruments. The pensions that people receive when they retire are often in the form of an annuity. Leases, mortgages, and pension plans are also annuities.
To figure out the present value of an annuity, we need to evaluate the following equation:
C _____ 1 + r + C _______
(1 + r ) 2 + C _______
(1 + r ) 3 + … + C _______
(1 + r ) T
The present value of only receiving the coupons for T periods must be less than the present value of a con- sol, but how much less? To answer this, we have to look at consols a bit more closely.
Consider the following time chart:
Date (or end of year) 0 1 2 3…T T + 1 T + 2 Consol 1 C C C…C C C… Consol 2 C C… Annuity C C C…C
Consol 1 is a normal consol with its first payment at date 1. The first payment of consol 2 occurs at date T+1.
The present value of having cash flow of C at each of T dates is equal to the present value of consol 1 minus the present value of consol 2. The present value of consol 1 is given by
PV = C __ r
Consol 2 is just a consol with its first payment at date T + 1. From the perpetuity formula, this consol will be worth C/r at date T.8 However, we do not want the value at date T. We want the value now; in other words, the present value at date 0. We must discount C/r back by T periods. Therefore, the present value of consol 2 is
PV = C __ r [ 1 _______ (1 + r ) T ] The present value of having cash flows for T years is the present value of a consol with its first payment at date 1 minus the present value of a consol with its first payment at date T + 1. Thus, the present value of an annuity is the first formula minus the second formula. This can be written as
C __ r - C __ r [ 1 _______ (1 + r ) T ]
This simplifies to the formula for the present value of an annuity:
PV = C [ 1 __ r − 1 ________ r(1 + r ) T ] = C[1 − {1/(1 + r ) T }]/r
8 Students frequently think that C/r is the present value at date T + 1 because the consol’s first payment is at date T + 1. However, the formula values the annuity as of one period before the first payment.
APPENDIX 6A
164 Part 3: Valuation of Future Cash Flows
06Ross_Chapter06_3rd_B.indd 16406Ross_Chapter06_3rd_B.indd 164 12-11-19 17:0212-11-19 17:02
Our goal in this chapter is to introduce you to bonds. We begin by showing how the techniques we developed in Chapters 5 and 6 can be applied to bond valuation. From there, we go on to discuss bond features and how bonds are bought and sold. One important thing we learn is that bond values depend, in large part, on interest rates. We therefore close out the chapter with an examination of interest rates and their behaviour.
7.1 Bonds and Bond Valuation
When a corporation or government wishes to borrow money from the public on a long-term basis, it usually does so by issuing or selling debt securities that are generically called bonds. In this section, we describe the various features of corporate bonds and some of the terminology associated with bonds. We then discuss the cash fl ows associated with a bond and how bonds can be valued using our discounted cash fl ow procedure.
Bond Features and Prices A bond is normally an interest-only loan, meaning the borrower pays the interest every period, but none of the principal is repaid until the end of the loan. For example, suppose Alcan wants to borrow $1,000 for 30 years and that the interest rate on similar debt issued by similar corporations is 12 percent. Alcan thus pays .12 × $1,000 = $120 in interest every year for 30 years. At the end of 30 years, Alcan repays the $1,000. As this example suggests, a bond is a fairly simple fi nancing arrangement. Th ere is, however, a rich jargon associated with bonds, so we use this example to defi ne some of the more important terms.
In our example, the $120 regular interest payments that Alcan promises to make are called the bond’s coupons. Because the coupon is constant and paid every year, the type of bond we are describing is sometimes called a level coupon bond. Th e amount repaid at the end of the loan
coupon The stated interest payment made on a bond.
INTEREST RATES AND BOND VALUATION
C H A P T E R 7
O n July 11, 2012, the Government of Canada conducted an auction worth $3.4 billion of 1.5% bonds due September 1, 2017. The proceeds
from the bond issue were used for general govern-
ment purposes. DBRS, formerly known as the Domin-
ion Bond Rating Service, gave the Government of
Canada bond its highest possible rating, AAA, which
puts the bond in the league of the safest in the world.
Despite the uncertainty surrounding European debt
troubles, Canada has the flexibility to withstand
these hurdles without compromising its strong credit
profile. Bonds issued by such safe institutions carry
lower yields. In this chapter, we will learn more about
bonds and what makes them risky or safe.
Learning Object ives
After studying this chapter, you should understand:
LO1 Important bond features and types of bonds.
LO2 Bond values and yields and why they fluctuate.
LO3 Bond ratings and what they mean.
LO4 How bond prices are quoted.
LO5 The impact of inflation on interest rates.
LO6 The term structure of interest rates and the determinants of bond yields.
© W
oo dy
gr ap
hs /A
la m
y/ A
ll C
an ad
a Ph
ot os
07Ross_Chapter07_3rd_A.indd 16507Ross_Chapter07_3rd_A.indd 165 12-11-12 13:3312-11-12 13:33
is called the bond’s face value or par value. As in our example, this par value is usually $1,000 for corporate bonds, and a bond that sells for its par value is called a par bond. Government of Canada and provincial bonds frequently have much larger face or par values. Finally, the annual coupon divided by the face value is called the coupon rate on the bond, which is $120/1,000 = 12%; so the bond has a 12 percent coupon rate.
Th e number of years until the face value is paid is called the bond’s time to maturity. A corpo- rate bond would frequently have a maturity of 30 years when it is originally issued, but this varies. Once the bond has been issued, the number of years to maturity declines as time goes by.
Bond Values and Yields As time passes, interest rates change in the market place. Th e cash fl ows from a bond, however, stay the same because the coupon rate and maturity date are specifi ed when it is issued. As a result, the value of the bond fl uctuates. When interest rates rise, the present value of the bond’s remaining cash fl ows declines, and the bond is worth less. When interest rates fall, the bond is worth more.
To determine the value of a bond on a particular date, we need to know the number of periods remaining until maturity, the face value, the coupon, and the market interest rate for bonds with similar features. Th is interest rate required in the market on a bond is called the bond’s yield to maturity (YTM). Th is rate is sometimes called the bond’s yield for short. Given this information, we can calculate the present value of the cash fl ows as an estimate of the bond’s current market value.
Figure 7.1 shows a bond certifi cate for a Government of Canada bond maturing on November 1, 1980. Th e right hand side of the fi gure shows the individual coupons that could be clipped off for redemption. Today, most bonds are traded online and do not have physical certifi cates but investors still use the same terminology.
FIGURE 7.1
The Government of Canada Bonds with coupons
Source: Dave Rogers (whathesaid.ca)
face value or par value The principal amount of a bond that is repaid at the end of the term. Also par value.
coupon rate The annual coupon divided by the face value of a bond.
maturity date Specified date at which the principal amount of a bond is paid.
yield to maturity (YTM) The market interest rate that equates a bond’s present value of interest payments and principal repayment with its price.
166 Part 3: Valuation of Future Cash Flows
07Ross_Chapter07_3rd_A.indd 16607Ross_Chapter07_3rd_A.indd 166 12-11-12 13:3312-11-12 13:33
For example, suppose Royal Bank were to issue a bond with 10 years to maturity. Th e Royal Bank bond has an annual coupon of $56. Suppose similar bonds have a yield to maturity of 5.6 percent. Based on our previous discussion, the Royal Bank bond pays $56 per year for the next 10 years in coupon interest. In 10 years, Royal Bank pays $1,000 to the owner of the bond. Th e cash fl ows from the bond are shown in Figure 7.2. What would this bond sell for?
FIGURE 7.2
Cash flows for Royal Bank 0
$56 $56 $56 $56 $56 $56 $56 $56 $56 $56
$1,000 $56 $56 $56 $56 $56 $56 $56 $56 $56 $1,056
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10Year
Coupon
Face value
As illustrated in Figure 7.2, the Royal Bank bond’s cash fl ows have an annuity component (the coupons) and a lump sum (the face value paid at maturity). We thus estimate the market value of the bond by calculating the present value of these two components separately and adding the results together. First, at the going rate of 5.6 percent, the present value of the $1,000 paid in 10 years is:
Present value = $1,000/1.05610 = $1,000/1.7244 = $579.91
Second, the bond off ers $56 per year for 10 years, so the present value of this annuity stream is:
Annuity present value = $56 × (1 - 1/1.05610)/.056 = $56 × (1 - 1/1.7244)/.056 = $56 × 7.5016 = $420.09
We can now add the values for the two parts together to get the bond’s value:
Total bond value = $579.91 + 420.09 = $1,000.00
Th is bond sells for its exact face value. Th is is not a coincidence. Th e going interest rate in the market is 5.6 percent. Considered as an interest-only loan, what interest rate does this bond have? With a $56 coupon, this bond pays exactly 5.6 percent interest only when it sells for $1,000.
To illustrate what happens as interest rates change, suppose a year has gone by. Th e Royal Bank bond now has nine years to maturity. If the interest rate in the market had risen to 7.6 percent, what would the bond be worth? To fi nd out, we repeat the present value calculations with nine years instead of 10, and a 7.6 percent yield instead of a 5.6 percent yield. First, the present value of the $1,000 paid in nine years at 7.6 percent is:
Present value = $1,000/1.0769 = $1,000/1.9333 = $517.25
Second, the bond now off ers $56 per year for nine years, so the present value of this annuity stream at 7.6 percent is:
Annuity present value = $56 × (1 - 1/1.0769)/.076 = $56 × (1 - 1/1.9333)/.076 = $56 × 6.3520 = $355.71
We can now add the values for the two parts together to get the bond’s value:
Total bond value = $517.25 + 355.71 = $872.96
Th erefore, the bond should sell for about $873. In the vernacular, we say this bond, with its 5.6 percent coupon, is priced to yield 7.6 percent at $873.
rbcroyalbank.com
A good bond site to visit is pfin. ca/canadianfixedincome/ Default.aspx
Online bond calculators are available at personal.fidelity.com
CHAPTER 7: Interest Rates and Bond Valuation 167
07Ross_Chapter07_3rd_A.indd 16707Ross_Chapter07_3rd_A.indd 167 12-11-12 13:3312-11-12 13:33
Th e Royal Bank bond now sells for less than its $1,000 face value. Why? Th e market interest rate is 7.6 percent. Considered as an interest-only loan of $1,000, this bond pays only 5.6 percent, its coupon rate. Because this bond pays less than the going rate, investors are only willing to lend something less than the $1,000 promised repayment. A bond that sells for less than face value, or at a discount, is called a discount bond.
Th e only way to get the interest rate up to 7.6 percent is for the price to be less than $1,000 so that the purchaser, in eff ect, has a built-in gain. For the Royal Bank bond, the price of $873 is $127 less than the face value, so an investor who purchased and kept the bond would get $56 per year and would have a $127 gain at maturity as well. Th is gain compensates the lender for the below- market coupon rate.
Another way to see why the bond is discounted by $127 is to note that the $56 coupon is $20 below the coupon on a newly issued par value bond, based on current market conditions. By this we mean the bond would be worth $1,000 only if it had a coupon of $76 per year. In a sense, an investor who buys and keeps the bond gives up $20 per year for nine years. At 7.6 percent, this annuity stream is worth:
Annuity present value = $20 × (1 - 1/1.0769)/.076 = $20 × 6.3520 = $127.04
Th is is just the amount of the discount. What would the Royal Bank bond sell for if interest rates had dropped by 2 percent instead of
rising by 2 percent? As you might guess, the bond would sell for more than $1,000. Such a bond is said to sell at a premium and is called a premium bond.
Th is case is just the opposite of a discount bond. Th e Royal Bank bond still has a coupon rate of 5.6 percent when the market rate is only 3.6 percent. Investors are willing to pay a premium to get this extra coupon. Th e relevant discount rate is 3.6 percent, and there are nine years remaining. Th e present value of the $1,000 face amount is:
Present value = $1,000/1.0369 = $1,000/1.3748 = $727.38 Th e present value of the coupon stream is:
Annuity present value = $56 × (1 - 1/1.0369)/.036 = $56 × (1 - 1/1.3748)/.036 = $56 × 7.5728 = $424.08
We can now add the values for the two parts together to get the bond’s value: Total bond value = $727.38 + 424.08 = $1,151.46
Total bond value is, therefore, about $151 in excess of par value. Once again, we can verify this amount by noting that the coupon is now $20 too high. Th e present value of $20 per year for nine years at 3.6 percent is:
Annuity present value = $20 × (1 - 1/1.0369)/.036 = $20 × 7.5728 = $151.46
Th is is just as we calculated. Based on our examples, we can now write the general expression for the value of a bond. If a
bond has (1) a face value of F paid at maturity, (2) a coupon of C paid per period, (3) t periods to maturity, and (4) a yield of r per period, its value is:
Bond value = C × (1 - 1/(1 + r)t)/r + F/(1 + r)t [7.1]
Bond value = Present value of the coupons + Present value of the face amount As we have illustrated in this section, bond prices and interest rates (or market yields) always move in opposite directions like the ends of a seesaw. Most bonds are issued at par, with the cou- pon rate set equal to the prevailing market yield or interest rate. Th is coupon rate does not change over time. Th e coupon yield, however, does change and refl ects the return the coupon represents based on current market prices for the bond. Finally, the yield to maturity is the interest rate that equates the present value of the bond’s coupons and principal repayments with the current market price (i.e., the total annual return the purchaser would receive if the bond were held to maturity).
168 Part 3: Valuation of Future Cash Flows
07Ross_Chapter07_3rd_A.indd 16807Ross_Chapter07_3rd_A.indd 168 12-11-12 13:3312-11-12 13:33
When interest rates rise, a bond’s value, like any other present value, declines. When interest rates are above the bond’s coupon rate, the bond sells at a discount. Similarly, when interest rates fall, bond values rise. Interest rates below the bond’s coupon rate cause the bond to sell at a pre- mium. Even if we are considering a bond that is riskless in the sense that the borrower is certain to make all the payments, there is still risk in owning the bond. We discuss this next.
EXAMPLE 7.1: Semiannual Coupons
In practice, bonds issued in Canada usually make coupon payments twice a year. So, if an ordinary bond has a cou- pon rate of 8 percent, the owner gets a total of $80 per year, but this $80 comes in two payments of $40 each. Suppose we were examining such a bond. The yield to ma- turity is quoted at 10 percent.
Bond yields are quoted like APRs; the quoted rate is equal to the actual rate per period multiplied by the num- ber of periods. With a 10 percent quoted yield and semian- nual payments, the true yield is 5 percent per six months. The bond matures in seven years. What is the bond’s price? What is the effective annual yield on this bond?
Based on our discussion, we know the bond would sell at a discount because it has a coupon rate of 4 percent ev- ery six months when the market requires 5 percent every six months. So, if our answer exceeds $1,000, we know that we made a mistake.
To get the exact price, we first calculate the present value of the bond’s face value of $1,000 paid in seven
years. This seven years has 14 periods of six months each. At 5 percent per period, the value is:
Present value = $1,000/1.0514 = $1,000/1.9799 = $505.08 The coupons can be viewed as a 14-period annuity of $40 per period. At a 5 percent discount rate, the present value of such an annuity is:
Annuity present value = $40 × (1 - 1/1.0514)/.05 = $40 × (1 - .5051)/.05 = $40 × 9.8980 = $395.92
The total present value gives us what the bond should sell for:
Total present value = $505.08 + 395.92 = $901.00 To calculate the effective yield on this bond, note that 5 percent every six months is equivalent to:
Effective annual rate = (1 + .05)2 - 1 = 10.25% The effective yield, therefore, is 10.25 percent.
Interest Rate Risk Th e risk that arises for bond owners from fl uctuating interest rates (market yields) is called inter- est rate risk. How much interest risk a bond has depends on how sensitive its price is to interest rate changes. Th is sensitivity directly depends on two things: the time to maturity and the coupon rate. Keep the following in mind when looking at a bond:
1. All other things being equal, the longer the time to maturity, the greater the interest rate risk.
2. All other things being equal, the lower the coupon rate, the greater the interest rate risk.
We illustrate the fi rst of these two points in Figure 7.3. As shown, we compute and plot prices under diff erent interest rate scenarios for 10 percent coupon bonds with maturities of one year and 30 years. Notice how the slope of the line connecting the prices is much steeper for the 30-year maturity than it is for the one-year maturity.1 Th is tells us that a relatively small change in interest rates could lead to a substantial change in the bond’s value. In comparison, the one-year bond’s price is relatively insensitive to interest rate changes.
Intuitively, the reason longer-term bonds have greater interest rate sensitivity is that a large portion of a bond’s value comes from the $1,000 face amount. Th e present value of this amount isn’t greatly aff ected by a small change in interest rates if it is to be received in one year. If it is to be received in 30 years, however, even a small change in the interest rate can have a signifi cant eff ect once it is compounded for 30 years. Th e present value of the face amount becomes much more volatile with a longer-term bond as a result.
1 We explain a more precise measure of this slope, called duration, in Appendix 7A. Our example assumes that yields of one-year and 30-year bonds are the same.
CHAPTER 7: Interest Rates and Bond Valuation 169
07Ross_Chapter07_3rd_A.indd 16907Ross_Chapter07_3rd_A.indd 169 12-11-12 13:3312-11-12 13:33
FIGURE 7.3
Interest rate risk and time to maturity
Bond values
$2,000
$1,500
$1,000
$500
20%15%10%5% Interest rates
•
•
• •
•
$1,768.62
$1,047.62
$916.67
$502.11
30-year bond
1-year bond
Value of a Bond with a 10% Coupon Rate for Different Interest Rates and Maturities
Time to Maturity
Interest Rate 1 Year 30 Years
$1,047.62 1,000.00
956.52 916.67
$1,768.62 1,000.00
671.70 502.11
5% 10% 15% 20%
Th e reason that bonds with lower coupons have greater interest rate risk is essentially the same. As we just discussed, the value of a bond depends on the present value of its coupons and the pres- ent value of the face amount. If two bonds with diff erent coupon rates have the same maturity, the value of the one with the lower coupon is proportionately more dependent on the face amount to be received at maturity. As a result, all other things being equal, its value fl uctuates more as inter- est rates change. Put another way, the bond with the higher coupon has a larger cash fl ow early in its life, so its value is less sensitive to changes in the discount rate.
Finding the Yield to Maturity Frequently, we know a bond’s price, coupon rate, and maturity date, but not its yield to maturity. For example, suppose we were interested in a six-year, 8 percent coupon bond. A broker quotes a price of $955.14. What is the yield on this bond?
We’ve seen that the price of a bond can be written as the sum of its annuity and lump-sum components. With an $80 coupon for six years and a $1,000 face value, this price is:
$955.14 = $80 × (1 - 1/(1 + r)6)/r + $1,000/(1 + r)6
where r is the unknown discount rate or yield to maturity. We have one equation here and one unknown, but we cannot solve it for r explicitly. Th e only way to fi nd the answer exactly is to use trial and error.
Th is problem is essentially identical to the one we examined in the last chapter when we tried to fi nd the unknown interest rate on an annuity. However, fi nding the rate (or yield) on a bond is even more complicated, because of the $1,000 face amount.
We can speed up the trial-and-error process by using what we know about bond prices and yields: Th e bond has an $80 coupon and is selling at a discount. We thus know that the yield is greater than 8 percent. If we compute the price at 10 percent:
170 Part 3: Valuation of Future Cash Flows
07Ross_Chapter07_3rd_A.indd 17007Ross_Chapter07_3rd_A.indd 170 12-11-12 13:3312-11-12 13:33
Bond value = $80 × (1 - 1/1.106)/.10 + $1,000/1.106 = $80 × (4.3553) + $1,000/1.7716 = $912.89
At 10 percent, the value we calculate is lower than the actual price, so 10 percent is too high. Th e true yield must be somewhere between 8 percent and 10 percent. At this point, it’s “plug and chug” to fi nd the answer. You would probably want to try 9 percent next. If you do, you will see that this is, in fact, the bond’s yield to maturity. As the trial-and-error process can be very time consuming, a more common method of calculating a bond’s yield is to use a fi nancial calculator or fi nancial spreadsheet soft ware. Our discussion of bond valuation is summarized in Table 7.1.
TABLE 7.1 Summary of bond valuation
I. FINDING THE VALUE OF A BOND:
Bond value = C × (1 - 1/(1 + r)t)/r + F/(1 + r)t where: C = the coupon paid each period r = the rate per period t = the number of periods F = the bond’s face value
II. FINDING THE YIELD ON A BOND:
Given a bond value, coupon, time to maturity, and face value, it is possible to find the implicit discount rate or yield to maturity by trial and error only. To do this, try different discount rates until the calculated bond value equals the given value. Remember that increasing the rate decreases the bond value.
EXAMPLE 7.2: Bond Yields
You’re looking at two bonds identical in every way except for their coupons and, of course, their prices. Both have 12 years to maturity. The first bond has a 5 percent coupon rate and sells for $932.16. The second has a 6 percent cou- pon rate. What do you think it would sell for? Because the two bonds are very similar, they must be priced to yield about the same rate. We begin by calculating the yield on the 5 percent coupon bond. A little trial and error reveals that the yield is actually 5.8 percent:
Bond value = $50 × (1 - 1/1.05812)/.058 + $1,000/1.05812
= $50 × 8.4759 + $1,000/1.9671 = $423.80 + 508.36 = $932.16
With an 5.8 percent yield, the second bond sells at a pre- mium because of its $60 coupon. Its value is:
Bond value = $60 × (1 - 1/1.05812)/.058 + $1,000/1.05812
= $60 × 8.4765 + $1,000/1.9671 = $508.59 + 508.36 = $1,016.95
What we did in pricing the second bond is what bond trad- ers do. Bonds trade over the counter in a secondary market made by investment dealers and banks. Suppose a bond trader at, say, BMO Nesbitt Burns receives a request for a selling price on the second bond from another trader at, say, ScotiaCapital. Suppose further that the second bond has not traded recently. The trader prices it off the first ac- tively traded bond.
How to Calculate Bond Prices and Yields Using a Financial Calculator
Many financial calculators have fairly sophisticated built-in bond valuation routines. How- ever, these vary quite a lot in implementation, and not all financial calculators have them. As a result, we will illustrate a simple way to handle bond problems that will work on just about any financial calculator.
CALCULATOR HINTS
CHAPTER 7: Interest Rates and Bond Valuation 171
07Ross_Chapter07_3rd_A.indd 17107Ross_Chapter07_3rd_A.indd 171 12-11-12 13:3312-11-12 13:33
To begin, of course, we first remember to clear out the calculator! Next, for Example 7.2, we have two bonds to consider, both with 12 years to maturity. The first one sells for $932.16 and has a 5 percent coupon rate. To find its yield, we can do the following:
Enter 12 50 -932.16 1,000
Solve for 5.8
Notice that we entered both a future value of $1,000, representing the bond’s face value, and a payment of $50 per year ($1,000 × 5 percent), representing the bond’s annual cou- pon. Since the face value and annual coupon are cash inflows to the investor they are en- tered as positive values. On the contrary, the bond’s price, which we entered as the present value, has a negative sign as it is a cash outflow.
For the second bond, we now know that the relevant yield is 5.8 percent. It has a 6 per- cent coupon and 12 years to maturity, so what’s the price? To answer, we just enter the relevant values and solve for the present value of the bond’s cash flows:
Enter 12 5.8 60 1,000
Solve for -1,016.95
There is an important detail that comes up here. Suppose we have a bond with a price of $902.29, 10 years to maturity, and a coupon rate of 6 percent. As we mentioned earlier, most bonds actually make semiannual payments. Assuming that this is the case for the bond here, what’s the bond’s yield? To answer, we need to enter the relevant numbers like this:
Enter 20 30 -902.29 1,000
Solve for 3.7
Notice that we entered $30 as the payment because the bond actually makes payments of $30 every six months. Similarly, we entered 20 for N because there are actually 20 six- month periods. When we solve for the yield, we get 3.7 percent, but the tricky thing to re- member is that this is the yield per six months, so we have to double it to get the right answer: 2 × 3.7 = 7.4 percent, which would be the bond’s reported yield.
How to Calculate Bond Prices and Yields Using a Spreadsheet
Most spreadsheets have fairly elaborate routines available for calculating bond values and yields; many of these routines involve details that we have not discussed. However, setting up a simple spreadsheet to calculate prices or yields is straightforward, as our next two spreadsheets show:
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
1 0
11
1 2
1 3
1 4
1 5
1 6
A B C D E F G H
Suppose we have a bond with 22 years to maturity, a coupon rate of 8 percent, and a yield to
maturity of 9 percent. If the bond makes semiannual payments, what is its price today?
Settlement date: 1/1/13
Maturity date:
Annual coupon rate: 0.08
Yield to maturity: .09
Face value (% of par): 100
Coupons per year: 2
Bond price (% of par): 90.49
The formula entered in cell B13 is = PRICE(B7, B8, B9, B10, B11, B12); notice that face value and bond
price are given as a percentage of face value.
Using a spreadsheet to calculate bond values
1/1/35
SPREADSHEET STRATEGIES
172 Part 3: Valuation of Future Cash Flows
07Ross_Chapter07_3rd_A.indd 17207Ross_Chapter07_3rd_A.indd 172 12-11-12 13:3312-11-12 13:33
In our spreadsheets, notice that we had to enter two dates: a settlement date and a maturity date. The settlement date is just the date you actually pay for the bond, and the maturity date is the day the bond actually matures. In most of our problems, we don’t explicitly have these dates, so we have to make them up. For example, since our bond has 22 years to ma- turity, we just picked 1/1/2013 (January 1, 2013) as the settlement date and 1/1/2035 (Janu- ary 1, 2035) as the maturity date. Any two dates would do as long as they are exactly 22 years apart, but these are particularly easy to work with. Finally, notice that we had to enter the coupon rate and yield to maturity in annual terms and then explicitly provide the number of coupon payments per year.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
1 0
11
1 2
1 3
1 4
1 5
1 6
A B C D E F G H
Suppose we have a bond with 22 years to maturity, a coupon rate of 8 percent, and a price of
$960.17. If the bond makes semiannual payments, what is its yield to maturity?
Settlement date: 1/1/13
Maturity date:
Annual coupon rate: 0.08
Bond price (% of par): 96.017
Face value (% of par): 100
Coupons per year: 2
Yield to maturity: 0.084
The formula entered in cell B13 is = YIELD(B7, B8, B9, B10, B11, B12); notice that face value and bond
price are entered as a percentage of face value.
Using a spreadsheet to calculate bond yields
1/1/35
7.2 More on Bond Features
In this section, we continue our discussion of corporate debt by describing in some detail the basic terms and features that make up a typical long-term corporate bond. We discuss additional issues associated with long-term debt in subsequent sections.
Securities issued by corporations may be classifi ed roughly as equity securities and debt secur- ities. At the crudest level, a debt represents something that must be repaid; it is the result of bor- rowing money. When corporations borrow, they generally promise to make regularly scheduled interest payments and to repay the original amount borrowed (that is, the principal). Th e person or fi rm making the loan is called the creditor, or lender. Th e corporation borrowing the money is called the debtor, or borrower.
From a fi nancial point of view, the main diff erences between debt and equity are the following:
1. Debt is not an ownership interest in the firm. Creditors generally do not have voting power. 2. The corporation’s payment of interest on debt is considered a cost of doing business and is
fully tax deductible. Dividends paid to shareholders are not tax deductible. 3. Unpaid debt is a liability of the firm. If it is not paid, the creditors can legally claim the assets
of the firm. This action can result in liquidation or reorganization, two of the possible conse- quences of bankruptcy. Thus, one of the costs of issuing debt is the possibility of financial failure. This possibility does not arise when equity is issued. In 2010, Canwest, a major Can- adian media company, failed to make an interest payment on its debt, and as a result had to file for bankruptcy protection.
Is It Debt or Equity? Sometimes it is not clear if a particular security is debt or equity. For example, suppose a corpo- ration issues a perpetual bond with interest payable solely from corporate income if and only if earned. Whether or not this is really a debt is hard to say and is primarily a legal and semantic issue. Courts and taxing authorities would have the fi nal say.
Corporations are very adept at creating exotic, hybrid securities that have many features of equity but are treated as debt. Obviously, the distinction between debt and equity is very impor- tant for tax purposes. So one reason that corporations try to create a debt security that is really equity is to obtain the tax benefi ts of debt and the bankruptcy benefi ts of equity.
CHAPTER 7: Interest Rates and Bond Valuation 173
07Ross_Chapter07_3rd_A.indd 17307Ross_Chapter07_3rd_A.indd 173 12-11-12 13:3312-11-12 13:33
As a general rule, equity represents an ownership interest, and it is a residual claim. Th is means that equity holders are paid aft er debt holders. As a result of this, the risks and benefi ts associ- ated with owning debt and equity are diff erent. To give just one example, note that the maximum reward for owning a debt security is ultimately fi xed by the amount of the loan, whereas there is no upper limit to the potential reward from owning an equity interest.
Long-Term Debt: The Basics Ultimately, all long-term debt securities are promises by the issuing fi rm to pay the principal when due and to make timely interest payments on the unpaid balance. Beyond this, a number of features distinguish these securities from one another. We discuss some of these features next.
Th e maturity of a long-term debt instrument refers to the length of time the debt remains out- standing with some unpaid balance. Debt securities can be short-term (maturities of one year or less) or long-term (maturities of more than one year).2
Debt securities are typically called notes, debentures, or bonds. Strictly speaking, a bond is a secured debt, but, in common usage, the word bond refers to all kinds of secured and unsecured debt. We use the term generically to refer to long-term debt.
Th e two major forms of long-term debt are public-issue and privately placed. We concentrate on public-issue bonds. Most of what we say about them holds true for private-issue, long-term debt as well. Th e main diff erence between public-issue and privately placed debt is that the latter is directly placed with a lender and not off ered to the public. Since this is a private transaction, the specifi c terms are up to the parties involved.
Th ere are many other dimensions to long-term debt, including such things as security, call features, sinking funds, ratings, and protective covenants. Th e following table illustrates these features for a Manitoba Telecom Services Inc. medium-term note issued in September 2011. If some of these terms are unfamiliar, have no fear. We discuss them all next.
Features of Manitoba Telecom Services Inc.—Medium-Term Notes (unsecured) issue
Terms Explanation
Amount of Issue $200 million The company will issue $200 million of bonds. Issue Date 09/30/11 The bonds will be sold on September 30, 2011. Maturity Date 10/01/18 The bonds will be paid in 7 years. Annual Coupon 4.59 Each bondholder will receive $45.90 per bond per year. Face Value $1,000 The denomination of the bonds is $1,000. Issue Price 99.988 The issue price will be 99.988% of the $1,000 face value per bond. Yield to Maturity 4.59 If the bond is held to maturity, bondholders will receive a stated
annual rate of return equal to 4.59 percent. Coupon Payment 04/01 and 10/01 Coupons of $45.90/2 = $22.95 will be paid semi-annually on these
dates. Security Unsecured The bonds are debentures. Rating DBRS BBB The bond is of satisfactory credit quality, but is not as high as A or
AA.
Source: sedar.com
Many of these features are detailed in the bond indenture, so we discuss this now.
The Indenture Th e indenture is the written agreement between the corporation (the borrower) and its creditors. It is sometimes referred to as the deed of trust.3 Usually, a trustee (a trust company) is appointed by the corporation to represent the bondholders. Th e trust company must (1) make sure the terms of the indenture are obeyed, (2) manage the sinking fund (described later), and (3) represent the bondholders in default, that is, if the company defaults on its payments to them.
Th e bond indenture is a legal document. It can run several hundred pages and generally makes for very tedious reading. It is an important document, however, because it generally includes the
2 There is no universally agreed-upon distinction between short-term and long-term debt. In addition, people often re- fer to medium-term debt, which has a maturity of more than 1 year and less than 3 to 5, or even 10, years. 3 The words loan agreement or loan contract are usually used for privately placed debt and term loans.
indenture Written agreement between the corporation and the lender detailing the terms of the debt issue.
174 Part 3: Valuation of Future Cash Flows
07Ross_Chapter07_3rd_A.indd 17407Ross_Chapter07_3rd_A.indd 174 12-11-12 13:3312-11-12 13:33
following provisions:
1. The basic terms of the bonds. 2. The amount of the bonds issued. 3. A description of property used as security if the bonds are secured. 4. The repayment arrangements. 5. The call provisions. 6. Details of the protective covenants.
We discuss these features next.
TERMS OF A BOND Corporate bonds usually have a face value (that is, a denomination) of $1,000. This is called the principal value, and it is stated on the bond certificate. So, if a corpo- ration wanted to borrow $1 million, it would have to sell 1,000 bonds. The par value (that is, the initial accounting value) of a bond is almost always the same as the face value.
Corporate bonds are usually in registered form. For example, the indenture might read as fol- lows: Interest is payable semiannually on July 1 and January 1 of each year to the person in whose name the bond is registered at the close of business on June 15 or December 15, respectively.
Th is means the company has a registrar who records the ownership of each bond and records any changes in ownership. Th e company pays the interest and principal by cheque mailed directly to the address of the owner of record. A corporate bond may be registered and may have attached coupons. To obtain an interest payment, the owner must separate a coupon from the bond certifi - cate and send it to the company registrar (the paying agent).
Alternatively, the bond could be in bearer form. Th is means the certifi cate is the basic evi- dence of ownership, and the corporation pays the bearer. Ownership is not otherwise recorded, and, as with a registered bond with attached coupons, the holder of the bond certifi cate detaches the coupons and sends them to the company to receive payment.
Th ere are two drawbacks to bearer bonds: First, they are diffi cult to recover if they are lost or stolen. Second, because the company does not know who owns its bonds, it cannot notify bond- holders of important events. Th e bearer form of ownership does have the advantage of easing transactions for investors who trade their bonds frequently.
SECURITY Debt securities are classified according to the collateral and mortgages used to protect the bondholder.
Collateral is a general term that, strictly speaking, means securities (for example, bonds and stocks) pledged as security for payment of debt. For example, collateral trust bonds oft en involve a pledge of common stock held by the corporation. Th is pledge is usually backed by marketable secur- ities. However, the term collateral oft en is used much more loosely to refer to any form of security.
Mortgage securities are secured by a mortgage on the real property of the borrower. Th e prop- erty involved may be real estate, transportation equipment, or other property. Th e legal document that describes a mortgage on real estate is called a mortgage trust indenture or trust deed.
Sometimes mortgages are on specifi c property, for example, a railroad car. Th is is called a chat- tel mortgage. More oft en, blanket mortgages are used. A blanket mortgage pledges all the real property owned by the company.4
Bonds frequently represent unsecured obligations of the company. A debenture is an unse- cured bond, where no specifi c pledge of property is made. Th e term note is generally used for such instruments if the maturity of the unsecured bond is less than 10 or so years when it is origi- nally issued. Debenture holders only have a claim on property not otherwise pledged; in other words, the property that remains aft er mortgages and collateral trusts are taken into account.
At the current time, most public bonds issued by industrial and fi nance companies are deben- tures. However, most utility and railroad bonds are secured by a pledge of assets.
SENIORITY In general terms, seniority indicates preference in position over other lenders, and debts are sometimes labelled as “senior” or “junior” to indicate seniority. Some debt is subor- dinated, as in, for example, a subordinated debenture.
In the event of default, holders of subordinated debt must give preference to other specifi ed
4 Real property includes land and things “affixed thereto.” It does not include cash or inventories.
registered form Registrar of company records ownership of each bond; payment is made directly to the owner of record.
bearer form Bond issued without record of the owner’s name; payment is made to whoever holds the bond.
debenture Unsecured debt, usually with a maturity of 10 years or more.
note Unsecured debt, usually with a maturity under 10 years.
CHAPTER 7: Interest Rates and Bond Valuation 175
07Ross_Chapter07_3rd_A.indd 17507Ross_Chapter07_3rd_A.indd 175 12-11-12 13:3312-11-12 13:33
creditors. Usually, this means the subordinated lenders are paid off from cash fl ow and asset sales only aft er the specifi ed creditors have been compensated. However, debt cannot be subordinated to equity.
REPAYMENT Bonds can be repaid at maturity, at which time the bondholder receives the stated or face value of the bonds, or they may be repaid in part or in entirety before maturity. Early repayment in some form is more typical and is often handled through a sinking fund.
A sinking fund is an account managed by the bond trustee for the purpose of repaying the bonds. Th e company makes annual payments to the trustee, who then uses the funds to retire a portion of the debt. Th e trustee does this by either buying up some of the bonds in the market or calling in a fraction of the outstanding bonds. We discuss this second option in the next section.
Th ere are many diff erent kinds of sinking fund arrangements. Th e fund may start immediately or be delayed for 10 years aft er the bond is issued. Th e provision may require the company to redeem all or only a portion of the outstanding issue before maturity. From an investor’s viewpoint, a sink- ing fund reduces the risk that the company will be unable to repay the principal at maturity. Since it involves regular purchases, a sinking fund improves the marketability of the bonds.
THE CALL PROVISION A call provision allows the company to repurchase or “call” part or all of the bond issue at stated prices over a specified period. Corporate bonds are usually callable.
Generally, the call price is more than the bond’s stated value (that is, the par value). Th e dif- ference between the call price and the stated value is the call premium. Th e call premium may also be expressed as a percentage of the bond’s face value. Th e amount of the call premium usu- ally becomes smaller over time. One arrangement is to initially set the call premium equal to the annual coupon payment and then make it decline to zero the closer the call date is to maturity.
Call provisions are not usually operative during the fi rst part of a bond’s life. Th is makes the call provision less of a worry for bondholders in the bond’s early years. For example, a company might be prohibited from calling its bonds for the fi rst 10 years. Th is is a deferred call. During this period, the bond is said to be call protected.
Many long-term corporate bonds outstanding in Canada have call provisions as we just described. New corporate debt features a diff erent call provision referred to as a Canada plus call. Th is new approach is designed to replace the traditional call feature by making it unattractive for the issuer ever to call the bonds. Unlike the standard call, with the Canada call the exact amount of the call premium is not set at the time of issuance. Instead, the Canada plus call stipulates that, in the event of a call, the issuer must provide a call premium which will compensate investors for the diff erence in interest between the original bond and new debt issued to replace it. Th is compensation cancels the borrower’s benefi t from calling the debt and the result is that the call will not occur.
Th e Canada plus call takes its name from the formula used to calculate the diff erence in the interest; to determine the new, lower interest rate, the formula adds a premium to the yield on Canadas (Government of Canada bonds).
PROTECTIVE COVENANTS A protective covenant is that part of the indenture or loan agreement that limits certain actions a company might otherwise wish to take during the term of the loan. Covenants are designed to reduce the agency costs faced by bondholders. By controlling company activities, they reduce the risk of the bonds.
For example, common covenants limit the dividends the fi rm can pay and require bondholder approval for any sale of major assets. Th is means that, if the fi rm is headed for bankruptcy, it can- not sell all the assets and pay a liquidating dividend to stockholders, leaving the bondholders with only a corporate shell. Protective covenants can be classifi ed into two types: negative covenants and positive (or affi rmative) covenants.
A negative covenant is a “thou shalt not.” It limits or prohibits actions that the company may take. Here are some typical examples:
1. The firm must limit the amount of dividends it pays according to some formula. 2. The firm cannot pledge any assets to other lenders. 3. The firm cannot merge with another firm. 4. The firm cannot sell or lease any major assets without approval by the lender. 5. The firm cannot issue additional long-term debt.
sinking fund Account managed by the bond trustee for early bond redemption.
call provision Agreement giving the corporation the option to repurchase the bond at a specified price before maturity.
call premium Amount by which the call price exceeds the par value of the bond.
deferred call Call provision prohibiting the company from redeeming the bond before a certain date.
call protected Bond during period in which it cannot be redeemed by the issuer.
Canada plus call Call provision that compensates bond investors for interest differential, making it unattractive for an issuer to call a bond.
protective covenant Part of the indenture limiting certain transactions that can be taken during the term of the loan, usually to protect the lender’s interest.
176 Part 3: Valuation of Future Cash Flows
07Ross_Chapter07_3rd_A.indd 17607Ross_Chapter07_3rd_A.indd 176 12-11-12 13:3312-11-12 13:33
A positive covenant is a “thou shalt.” It specifi es an action that the company agrees to take or a condition the company must abide by. Here are some examples:
1. The company must maintain its working capital at or above some specified minimum level. 2. The company must periodically furnish audited financial statements to the lender. 3. The firm must maintain any collateral or security in good condition.
Th is is only a partial list of covenants; a particular indenture may feature many diff erent ones.
1. What are the distinguishing features of debt as compared to equity?
2. What is the indenture? What are protective covenants? Give some examples.
3. What is a sinking fund?
7.3 Bond Ratings
Firms frequently pay to have their debt rated. Th e two leading bond rating fi rms in Canada are Standard & Poor’s (S&P) and DBRS. Moody’s and Standard & Poor’s are the largest U.S. bond raters and they oft en rate Canadian companies that raise funds in U.S. bond markets.5 Th e debt ratings are an assessment of the creditworthiness of the corporate issuer. Th e defi nitions of cred- itworthiness used by bond rating agencies are based on how likely the fi rm is to default and what protection creditors have in the event of a default.
Remember that bond ratings only concern the possibility of default. Earlier in this chapter, we discussed interest rate risk, which we defi ned as the risk of a change in the value of a bond from a change in interest rates. Bond ratings do not address this issue. As a result, the price of a highly rated bond can still be quite volatile.
Bond ratings are constructed from information supplied by the corporation. Th e rating classes and information concerning them are shown in Table 7.2. Table 7.2 shows ratings by DBRS. Stan- dard & Poor’s follows a similar system.
TABLE 7.2
Descriptions of ratings used by DBRS
AAA Highest credit quality. The capacity for the payment of financial obligations is exceptionally high and unlikely to be adversely affected by future events.
AA Superior credit quality. The capacity for the payment of financial obligations is considered high. Credit quality differs from AAA only to a small degree. Unlikely to be significantly vulnerable to future events.
A Good credit quality. The capacity for the payment of financial obligations is substantial, but of lesser credit quality than AA. May be vulnerable to future events, but qualifying negative factors are considered manageable.
BBB Adequate credit quality. The capacity for the payment of financial obligations is considered acceptable. May be vulnerable to future events.
BB Speculative, non-investment-grade credit quality. The capacity for the payment of financial obligations is uncertain. Vulnerable to future events.
B Highly speculative credit quality. There is a high level of uncertainty as to the capacity to meet financial obligations. CCC/ CC/ C
Very highly speculative credit quality. In danger of defaulting on financial obligations. There is little difference between these three categories, although CC and C ratings are normally applied to obligations that are seen as highly likely to default, or subordinated to obligations rated in the CCC to B range. Obligations in respect of which default has not technically taken place but is considered inevitable may be rated in the C category.
D A financial obligation has not been met or it is clear that a financial obligation will not be met in the near future or a debt instrument has been subject to a distressed exchange. A downgrade to D may not immediately follow an insolvency or restructuring filing as grace periods or extenuating circumstances may exist.
Source: © 2012 DBRS, dbrs.com. Used with permission.
5 They also rate bonds issued by the individual provinces.
Concept Questions
CHAPTER 7: Interest Rates and Bond Valuation 177
07Ross_Chapter07_3rd_A.indd 17707Ross_Chapter07_3rd_A.indd 177 12-11-12 13:3312-11-12 13:33
Th e highest rating a fi rm can have is AAA and such debt is judged to be the best quality and to have the lowest degree of risk. Th is rating is not awarded very oft en; AA ratings indicate very good quality debt and are much more common. Investment grade bonds are bonds rated at least BBB. Th e lowest ratings are for debt that is in default.
In the 1980s, a growing part of corporate borrowing took the form of low-grade, or junk, bonds, particularly in the United States. If they are rated at all, such low-grade bonds are rated below investment grade by the major rating agencies. Junk bonds are also called high-yield bonds, as they yield an interest rate 3 to 5 percentage points (300 to 500 basis points) higher than that of AAA-rated debt. Original issue junk bonds have never been a major source of funds in Canad- ian capital markets. Th eir niche has been fi lled in part by preferred shares and to a lesser extent, income bonds. In recent years, some Canadian corporations with large debt fi nancing needs have issued bonds below investment grade (in 2011 Armtec Holdings Ltd. had a Standard & Poor’s corporate credit rating of B) while others had their bonds downgraded aft er issue. For example, in August 2011, S&P downgraded U.S Treasury bonds for the fi rst time in history from AAA to AA+.
1. What is a junk bond?
2. What does a bond rating say about the risk of fluctuations in a bond’s value from interest rate changes?
7.4 Some Different Types of Bonds
Th us far, we have considered “plain vanilla” bonds. In this section, we look at some more unusual types, the products of fi nancial engineering: stripped bonds, fl oating-rate bonds, and others.
Financial Engineering When fi nancial managers or their investment bankers design new securities or fi nancial processes, their eff orts are referred to as fi nancial engineering.6 Successful fi nancial engineering reduces and controls risk and minimizes taxes. It also seeks to reduce fi nancing costs of issuing and servic- ing debt as well as costs of complying with rules laid down by regulatory authorities. Financial engineering is a response to the trends we discussed in Chapter 1, globalization, deregulation, and greater competition in fi nancial markets.
When applied to debt securities, fi nancial engineering creates exotic, hybrid securities that have many features of equity but are treated as debt. Th e most common example of a hybrid security is a convertible bond, which gives the bondholder the option to exchange the bond for company shares. Another example, as we noted earlier, is a perpetual bond that pays interest solely from corporate income only when it is earned and at no other time. Whether these bonds are actually debt is diffi cult to determine and in many cases, the fi nal verdict is left to legal and taxing authorities.
Distinguishing between debt and equity is particularly important for taxation purposes. Inter- est paid on corporate debt is tax deductible, while dividends paid to shareholders are not.
As a general rule, equity represents an ownership interest and it is a residual claim (sharehold- ers are paid aft er debt holders). Compared with debt, equity also carries greater risks and rewards. Th us, from an investor’s perspective the risks and benefi ts of owning the two types of securities are quite diff erent.
Financial engineers can alter this division of claims by selling bonds with warrants attached giving bondholders options to buy stock in the fi rm. Th ese warrants allow holders to participate in future rewards beyond the face value of the debt. We discuss other examples of fi nancial engi- neering throughout this chapter.
6 For more on financial engineering, see John Finnerty, “Financial Engineering in Corporate Finance: An Overview,” in The Handbook of Financial Engineering, eds. C. W. Smith and C. W. Smithson (New York: Harper Business, 1990).
Concept Questions
178 Part 3: Valuation of Future Cash Flows
07Ross_Chapter07_3rd_A.indd 17807Ross_Chapter07_3rd_A.indd 178 12-11-12 13:3312-11-12 13:33
Edward I. Altman on Junk Bonds
ONE OF THE most important developments in corporate fi nance over the last 20 years has been the reemergence of publicly owned and traded low-rated corporate debt. Originally offered to the public in the early 1900s to help fi nance some of our emerging growth industries, these high-yield, high-risk bonds virtually disappeared after the rash of bond defaults during the Depression. Recently, however, the junk bond market has been catapulted from being an insignifi cant element in the corporate fi xed-income market to being one of the fastest- growing and most controversial types of fi nancing mechanisms.
The term junk emanates from the dominant type of low- rated bond issues outstanding prior to 1977 when the “market” consisted almost exclusively of original-issue investment-grade bonds that fell from their lofty status to a higher-default risk, speculative-grade level. These so-called fallen angels amounted to about $8.5 billion in 1977. At the end of 1998, fallen angels comprised about 10 percent of the $450 billion publicly owned junk bond market.
Beginning in 1977, issuers began to go directly to the public to raise capital for growth purposes. Early users of junk bonds were energy-related fi rms, cable TV companies, airlines, and assorted other industrial companies. The emerging growth company rationale coupled with relatively high returns to early investors helped legitimize this sector.
By far the most important and controversial aspect of junk bond fi nancing was its role in the corporate restructuring movement from 1985 to 1989. High-leverage transactions and acquisitions, such as leveraged buyouts (LBOs), which occur when a fi rm is taken private, and leveraged recapitalizations (debt-for-equity swaps), transformed the face of corporate America, leading to a heated debate as to the economic and social consequences of fi rms’ being transformed with debt- equity ratios of at least 6:1.
These transactions involved increasingly large companies, and the multibillion-dollar takeover became fairly common, fi nally capped by the huge $25+ billion RJR Nabisco LBO in 1989. LBOs were typically fi nanced with about 60 percent senior bank and insurance company debt, about 25–30 percent subordinated public debt (junk bonds), and 10–15 percent equity. The junk bond segment is sometimes referred to as “mezzanine” fi nancing because it lies between the “balcony” senior debt and the “basement” equity.
These restructurings resulted in huge fees to advisors and underwriters and huge premiums to the old shareholders who were bought out, and they continued as long as the market was willing to buy these new debt offerings at what appeared to be a favourable risk-return trade-off. The bottom fell out of the market in the last six months of 1989 due to a number of factors including a marked increase in defaults, government regulation against S&Ls’ holding junk bonds, and a recession.
The default rate rose dramatically to 4 percent in 1989 and then skyrocketed in 1990 and 1991 to 10.1 percent and 10.3 percent, respectively, with about $19 billion of defaults in 1991. By the end of 1990, the pendulum of growth in new junk bond issues and returns to investors swung dramatically downward as prices plummeted and the new-issue market all but dried up. The year 1991 was a pivotal year in that, despite record defaults, bond prices and new issues rebounded strongly as the prospects for the future brightened.
In the early 1990s, the fi nancial market was questioning the very survival of the junk bond market. The answer was a resounding “yes,” as the amount of new issues soared to record annual levels of $40 billion in 1992 and almost $60 billion in 1993, and in 1997 reached an impressive $119 billion. Coupled with plummeting default rates (under 2.0 percent each year in the 1993–97 period) and attractive returns in these years, the risk-return characteristics have been extremely favourable.
The junk bond market today is a quieter one compared to that of the 1980s, but, in terms of growth and returns, it is healthier than ever before. While the low default rates in 1992– 98 helped to fuel new investment funds and new issues, the market will experience its ups and downs in the future. It will continue, however, to be a major source of corporate debt fi nancing and a legitimate asset class for investors.
Edward I. Altman is Max L. Heine Professor of Finance and vice director of the Salomon Center at the Stern School of Business of New York University. He is widely recognized as one of the world’s experts on bankruptcy and credit analysis as well as on the high-yield, or junk bond, market. Updates on his research are at stern.nyu.edu/~ealtman.
IN THEIR OWN WORDS…
Stripped Bonds A bond that pays no coupons must be off ered at a price that is much lower that its stated value. Such a bond is called a stripped bond or zero-coupon bond.7 Stripped bonds start life as normal
7 A bond issued with a very low coupon rate (as opposed to a zero coupon rate) is an original issue, discount (OID) bond.
stripped bond or zero- coupon bond A bond that makes no coupon payments, thus initially priced at a deep discount.
CHAPTER 7: Interest Rates and Bond Valuation 179
07Ross_Chapter07_3rd_A.indd 17907Ross_Chapter07_3rd_A.indd 179 12-11-12 13:3312-11-12 13:33
coupon bonds. Investment dealers engage in bond stripping when they sell the principal and coupons separately.
Suppose the DDB Company issues a $1,000 face value fi ve-year stripped bond. Th e initial price is set at $497. It is straightforward to check that, at this price, the bonds yield 15 percent to matu- rity. Th e total interest paid over the life of the bond is $1,000 - 497 = $503.
For tax purposes, the issuer of a stripped bond deducts interest every year even though no interest is actually paid. Similarly, the owner must pay taxes on interest accrued every year as well, even though no interest is actually received.8 Th is second tax feature makes taxable stripped bonds less attractive to taxable investors. However, they are still a very attractive investment for tax-exempt investors with long-term dollar-denominated liabilities, such as pension funds, because the future dollar value is known with relative certainty. Stripped coupons are attractive to individual investors for tax-sheltered registered retirement savings plans (RRSPs).
Floating-Rate Bonds Th e conventional bonds we have talked about in this chapter have fi xed-dollar obligations because the coupon rate is set as a fi xed percentage of the par value. Similarly, the principal is set equal to the par value. Under these circumstances, the coupon payment and principal are fi xed.
With fl oating-rate bonds (fl oaters), the coupon payments are adjustable. Th e adjustments are tied to the Treasury bill rate or another short-term interest rate. For example, the Royal Bank has outstanding $250 million of fl oating-rate notes maturing in 2083. Th e coupon rate is set at 0.40 percent more than the bankers acceptance rate.
Floating rate bonds were introduced to control the risk of price fl uctuations as interest rates change. A bond with a coupon equal to the market yield is priced at par. In practice, the value of a fl oating-rate bond depends on exactly how the coupon payment adjustments are defi ned. In most cases, the coupon adjusts with a lag to some base rate, and so the price can deviate from par within some range. For example, suppose a coupon-rate adjustment is made on June 1. Th e adjustment might be based on the simple average of Treasury bill yields during the previous three months. In addition, the majority of fl oaters have the following features:
1. The holder has the right to redeem his or her note at par on the coupon payment date after some specified amount of time. This is called a put provision, and it is discussed later.
2. The coupon rate has a floor and a ceiling, meaning the coupon is subject to a minimum and a maximum.
Other Types of Bonds Many bonds have unusual or exotic features, such as the so-called catastrophe, or cat, bonds. To give an example of an unusual cat bond, the Fédération Internationale de Football Association (FIFA) issued $260 million worth of cat bonds to protect against the cancellation of the 2006 FIFA World Cup soccer tournament due to terrorism. Under the terms of the off er, the bondholders would lose up to 75 percent of their investment if the World Cup were to be cancelled.
Most cat bonds, however, cover natural disasters. For example, in 2011, Muteki Limited issued catastrophe bonds valued at $1.7 billion for Japanese carrier Zenkyoren and it experienced a major loss due to earthquakes and the tsunami in Japan.
As these examples illustrate, bond features are really only limited by the imaginations of the parties involved. Unfortunately, there are far too many variations for us to cover in detail here. We therefore close out this discussion by mentioning only a few of the more common types.
Income bonds are similar to conventional bonds, except that coupon payments depend on company income. Specifi cally, coupons are paid to bondholders only if the fi rm’s income is suf- fi cient. In Canada, income bonds are usually issued by fi rms in the process of reorganizing to try to overcome fi nancial distress. Th e fi rm can skip the interest payment on an income bond without being in default. Purchasers of income bonds receive favourable tax treatment on interest received. Real return bonds have coupons and principal indexed to infl ation to provide a stated
8 The way the yearly interest on a stripped bond is calculated is governed by tax law and is not necessarily the true com- pound interest.
180 Part 3: Valuation of Future Cash Flows
07Ross_Chapter07_3rd_A.indd 18007Ross_Chapter07_3rd_A.indd 180 12-11-12 13:3312-11-12 13:33
real return. In 1993, the federal government issued a stripped real return bond packaging infl ation protection in the form of a zero coupon bond.
A convertible bond can be swapped for a fi xed number of shares of stock anytime before matu- rity at the holder’s option. Convertibles are debt/equity hybrids that allow the holder to profi t if the issuer’s stock price rises.
Asset-backed bonds are backed by a diverse pool of illiquid assets such as accounts receivable collections, credit card debt, or mortgages. If an issuing company defaults on its bond debt repay- ments, bondholders become legally entitled to cash fl ows generated from these illiquid pools of assets. Asset backing or securitization reduces risk provided that the assets are of high quality. In the credit crisis of 2007–2008, bonds backed by sub-prime mortgages to risky borrowers lost most of their value.
A retractable bond or put bond allows the holder to force the issuer to buy the bond back at a stated price. As long as the issuer remains solvent, the put feature sets a fl oor price for the bond. It is, therefore, just the reverse of the call provision and is a relatively new development. We discuss convertible bonds, call provisions, and put provisions in more detail in Chapter 25.
A given bond may have many unusual features. Two fairly recent exotic bonds are CoCo bonds, which have a coupon payment, and NoNo bonds, which are zero coupon bonds. CoCo and NoNo bonds are contingent convertible, putable, callable, subordinated bonds. Th e contingent convert- ible clause is similar to the normal conversion feature, except the contingent feature must be met. For example, a contingent feature may require that the company stock trade at 110 percent of the conversion price for 20 out of the most recent 30 days. Valuing a bond of this sort can be quite complex, and the yield to maturity calculation is oft en meaningless. For example, in 2011, Credit Suisse issued CoCo bonds worth 6 billion Swiss francs at a coupon rate of 9% to 9.5%. Coco bonds are gaining popularity aft er the recession of 2008, as the bonds can be converted into equity once the stock price recovers and a threshold is reached.
1. Why might an income bond be attractive to a corporation with volatile cash flows? Can you think of a reason why income bonds are not more popular?
2. What do you think the effect of a put feature on a bond’s coupon would be? How about a convertibility feature? Why?
7.5 Bond Markets
Bonds are bought and sold in enormous quantities every day. You may be surprised to learn that the trading volume in bonds on a typical day is many, many times larger than the trading volume in stocks (by trading volume, we simply mean the amount of money that changes hands). Here is a fi nance trivia question: What is the largest securities market in the world? Most people would guess the New York Stock Exchange. In fact, the largest securities market in the world in terms of trading volume is the U.S. Treasury market.
How Bonds Are Bought and Sold As we mentioned all the way back in Chapter 1, most trading in bonds takes place OTC: over the counter. Recall that this means that there is no particular place where buying and selling occur. Instead, dealers around the country (and around the world) stand ready to buy and sell. Th e vari- ous dealers are connected electronically.
One reason the bond markets are so big is that the number of bond issues far exceeds the num- ber of stock issues. A corporation would typically have only one common stock issue outstanding (there are exceptions to this that we discuss in our next chapter). However, a single large corpora- tion could easily have a dozen or more note and bond issues outstanding.
Because the bond market is almost entirely OTC, it has little or no transparency. A fi nancial market is transparent if it is possible to easily observe its prices and trading volume. On the Toronto Stock Exchange, for example, it is possible to see the price and quantity for every single transaction.
retractable bond Bond that may be sold back to the issuer at a prespecified price before maturity.
Concept Questions
CHAPTER 7: Interest Rates and Bond Valuation 181
07Ross_Chapter07_3rd_A.indd 18107Ross_Chapter07_3rd_A.indd 181 12-11-12 13:3312-11-12 13:33
In contrast, in the bond market, it is usually not possible to observe either. Transactions are pri- vately negotiated between parties, and there is little or no centralized reporting of transactions.
Although the total volume of trading in bonds far exceeds that in stocks, only a very small fraction of the total bond issues that exist actually trade on a given day. Th is fact, combined with the lack of transparency in the bond market, means that getting up-to-date prices on individ- ual bonds is oft en diffi cult or impossible, particularly for smaller corporate or municipal issues. Instead, a variety of sources of estimated prices exist and are very commonly used.
Bond Price Reporting If you were to visit the website for the National Post, you would see information on various bonds issued by the Government of Canada, the provinces and provincial crown corporations, and large corporations. Figure 7.4 reproduces excerpts from the bond quotations on January 5, 2012. If you look down the list under “Corporate,” you come to an entry marked “Loblaw 6.05 Jun 09/34.” Th is tells us the bond was issued by Loblaw Companies Ltd. and it will mature on June 09, 2034. Th e 6.05 is the bond’s coupon rate, so the coupon is 6.05 percent of the face value. Assuming the face value is $1,000, the annual coupon on this bond is 0.0605 × $1,000 = $60.50.
Th e column marked Bid $ gives us the last available bid price on the bond at close of business the day before. Th e bid price is the price a buyer is willing to pay for a security. Th is price was supplied by the National Post. As with the coupon, the price is quoted as a percentage of face value; so, again assuming a face value of $1,000, this bond last sold for 106.08 percent of $1,000 or $1,060.80. Quoting bond prices as percentages of face value is common practice. Because this bond is selling for about 106.08 percent of its par value, it is trading at a premium. Th e last column marked Yield % gives the going market yield to maturity on the Loblaw bond as 5.57 percent. Th is yield is lower than the coupon rate of 6.05 percent, which explains why the bond is selling above its par value. Th e market yield is below the coupon rate by 0.48 percent, or 48 basis points. (In bond trader’s jargon, one basis point equals 1/100 of 1 percent.) Th is causes the price premium to be above par.
EXAMPLE 7.3: Bond Pricing in Action
Investment managers who specialize in bonds use bond pricing principles to try to make money for their clients by buying bonds whose prices they expect to rise. An interest rate anticipation strategy starts with a forecast for the level of interest rates. Such forecasts are extremely difficult to make consistently. In Chapter 12, we discuss in detail how difficult it is to beat the market.
Suppose a manager had predicted a significant drop in interest rates in 2013. How should such a manager have invested?
This manager would have invested heavily in bonds with the greatest price sensitivity; that is, in bonds whose prices would rise the most as rates fell. Based on the earlier discus- sion, you should recall that such price-sensitive bonds have longer times to maturity and low coupons.
Suppose you wanted to bet on the expectation that in- terest rates were going to fall significantly using the bond quotations in Figure 7.4. Suppose further that your client wanted to invest only in Government of Canada bonds. Which would you buy?
A Note on Bond Price Quotes If you buy a bond between coupon payment dates, the price you pay is usually more than the price you are quoted. Th e reason is that standard convention in the bond market is to quote prices “net of accrued interest,” meaning that accrued interest is deducted to arrive at the quoted price. Th is quoted price is called the clean price. Th e price you actually pay, however, includes the accrued interest. Th is price is the dirty price, also known as the “full” or “invoice” price.
An example is the easiest way to understand these issues. Suppose you buy a bond with a 6 percent annual coupon, payable semiannually. You actually pay $1,080 for this bond, so $1,080 is the dirty, or invoice, price. Further, on the day you buy it, the next coupon is due in four months, so you are between coupon dates. Notice that the next coupon will be $30.
Th e accrued interest on a bond is calculated by taking the fraction of the coupon period that
clean price The price of a bond net of accrued interest; this is the price that is typically quoted.
dirty price The price of a bond including accrued interest, also known as the full or invoice price. This is the price the buyer actually pays.
182 Part 3: Valuation of Future Cash Flows
07Ross_Chapter07_3rd_A.indd 18207Ross_Chapter07_3rd_A.indd 182 12-11-12 13:3312-11-12 13:33
has passed, in this case two months out of six, and multiplying this fraction by the next coupon, $30. So, the accrued interest in this example is 2/6 × $30 = $10. Th e bond’s quoted price (i.e., its clean price) would be $1,080 - $10 = $1,070.9
FIGURE 7.4 Sample bond quotations
PC Bond Indices on 2012.01.05 Data provided by: National Post
Bond Index Index Level Average Yield Daily Total Return Daily Price Return MTD Total Return Universe 861.18 2.35 0.16 0.15 -0.21 Short 628.24 1.55 0.04 0.03 0.01 Mid 916.27 2.60 0.13 0.12 -0.08 Long 1,281.73 3.44 0.37 0.36 -0.68 Canada 194.85 1.54 0.14 0.13 -0.23 All Govt. 846.54 2.03 0.16 0.15 -0.25 Federal 784.90 1.54 0.12 0.11 -0.17 Provincial 978.32 2.75 0.23 0.22 -0.37 Municipal 1,019.67 2.71 0.15 0.14 -0.24 All Corp 925.45 3.25 0.14 0.13 -0.10 Maple 126.41 4.10 0.09 0.07 -0.04 RRB 523.46 0.28 0.52 0.51 -0.24 91 day Tbill 387.01 0.82 0 n. a. 0.02
Source: financialpost.com/markets/data/bonds-pc.html, Jan 05, 2012; Used with permission.
Canadian Bonds on 2012.01.05 Data provided by: National Post
Federal Coupon Maturity Date Bid $ Yield %
Canada 2 Mar 01/14 102.18 0.97 Canada 10.25 Mar 15/14 119.98 0.97 Canada 5 Jun 01/14 109.49 0.98 Canada 11.25 Jun 01/15 133.70 1.10 Canada 4.5 Jun 01/15 111.23 1.12 Canada 3 Dec 01/15 106.86 1.19 Canada 4 Jun 01/16 111.67 1.26 Canada 2.75 Sep 01/16 106.54 1.29 Canada 4 Jun 01/17 113.48 1.40 Canada 4.25 Jun 01/18 116.54 1.52 Canada 3.75 Jun 01/19 114.21 1.70 Canada 3.5 Jun 01/20 112.62 1.87 Canada 9.75 Jun 01/21 167.09 1.91 Canada 5.75 Jun 01/29 146.60 2.45 Canada 5.75 Jun 01/33 152.50 2.55 CHT 2.2 Mar 15/14 102.36 1.10 CHT 2.75 Jun 15/16 105.24 1.52 CHT 3.8 Jun 15/21 105.24 1.52
Provincial Coupon Maturity Date Bid $ Yield %
B C 4.7 Jun 18/37 120.78 3.46 HydQue 6.5 Feb 15/35 145.12 3.61 HydQue 6.0 Feb 15/40 142.15 3.60 NovaSc 6.6 Jun 01/27 139.23 3.32 Ontario 5 Mar 08/14 108.04 1.22 Ontario 4.3 Mar 08/17 111.86 1.88 Quebec 5.5 Dec 01/14 111.78 1.33 Quebec 5 Dec 01/15 112.89 1.57
Corporate Coupon Maturity Date Bid $ Yield %
Bell 4.85 Jun 30/14 106.18 2.27 Bell 6.10 Mar 16/35 112.25 5.19 BMO 5.10 Apr 21/16 110.07 2.60 BMO 6.17 Jul 16/14 104.01 1.80 BNS 3.43 Oct 30/13 105.28 1.58 BNS 3.34 Mar 25/15 104.04 2.03 CIBC 3.15 Nov 02/15 100.67 2.96 Enbridge 4.53 Mar 09/20 108.70 3.31 GE CAP 5.68 Sep 10/19 110.80 4.03 GWLife 4.65 Aug 13/20 104.89 3.97 HSBC 4.8 Apr 10/17 106.46 3.44 HydOne 4.64 Mar 03/16 109.87 2.14 HydOne 5.36 May 20/36 120.07 4.06 Loblaw 6.05 Jun 09/34 106.08 5.57 MLI 7.768 Apr 08/19 118.74 4.69 MLI 5.059 Dec 15/36 80.91 6.64 RoyBnk 3.18 Mar 16/15 103.75 1.96 RoyBnk 3.18 Nov 02/15 100.87 2.94 SunLife 5.59 Jan 30/18 106.03 4.44 TD Bnk 5.763 Dec 18/17 112.17 3.48
Source: financialpost.com/markets/data/bonds-canadian.html, Jan 05, 2012; Used with permission.
9 The way accrued interest is calculated actually depends on the type of bond being quoted: for example, Government of Canada or corporate. The difference has to do with exactly how the fractional period is calculated. In our example above, we implicitly treated the months as having exactly the same length (i.e., 30 days each, 360 days in a year), which is the way corporate bonds are quoted in the U.S. In Canada, the calculation assumes 365 days in a year. In contrast, Government of Canada and U.S. treasury bonds use actual day counts in quoting prices.
CHAPTER 7: Interest Rates and Bond Valuation 183
07Ross_Chapter07_3rd_A.indd 18307Ross_Chapter07_3rd_A.indd 183 12-11-12 13:3312-11-12 13:33
Bond Funds A bond fund is a mutual fund that invests in bonds and other debt securities. In addition to Canada bonds, these include mortgages and provincial, corporate and municipal debt. A example of a bond fund that is very prominent in North America is the Pacifi c Investment Management Company (PIMCO), one of the world’s largest bond management companies with assets of around $250 bil- lion U.S., run by the well-known U.S. money manager, Bill Gross. In June 2012, Gross’ PIMCO Total Return attracted $1.4 billion as the fi rm shied away from securities in Spain and Portugal in favour of U.S. Treasuries and Mortgage Securities. As the European crisis worsened in 2012, investors con- tinued to avoid Europe Securities. Four of the region’s main countries—Portugal, Italy, Greece, and Spain (also referred to as PIGS) failed to generate enough economic growth and were in immediate danger of possible default. As a result, Moody’s Investors Service downgraded several of the coun- tries’ ratings. By avoiding bonds issued by such countries, PIMCO was able to improve its return.
1. What are the cash flows associated with a bond?
2. What is the general expression for the value of a bond?
3. Is it true that the only risk associated with owning a bond is that the issuer will not make all the payments? Explain.
4. Figure 7.4 shows two Canada bonds, both maturing on June 1, 2015. These bonds are both issued by the Government of Canada and they have identical maturities. Why do they have different yields?
7.6 Inflation and Interest Rates
So far, we haven’t considered the role of infl ation in our various discussions of interest rates, yields, and returns. Because this is an important consideration, we consider the impact of infl ation next.
Real versus Nominal Rates In examining interest rates, or any other fi nancial market rates such as discount rates, bond yields, rates of return, and required returns, it is oft en necessary to distinguish between real rates and nominal rates. Nominal rates are called “nominal” because they have not been adjusted for infl a- tion. Real rates are rates that have been adjusted for infl ation.
To see the eff ect of infl ation, suppose prices are currently rising by 5 percent per year. In other words, the rate of infl ation is 5 percent. An investment is available that will be worth $115.50 in one year. It costs $100 today. Notice that with a present value of $100 and a future value in one year of $115.50, this investment has a 15.5 percent rate of return. In calculating this 15.5 percent return, we did not consider the eff ect of infl ation, however, so this is the nominal return.
What is the impact of infl ation here? To answer, suppose pizzas cost $5 apiece at the beginning of the year. With $100, we can buy 20 pizzas. Because the infl ation rate is 5 percent, pizzas will cost 5 percent more, or $5.25, at the end of the year. If we take the investment, how many pizzas can we buy at the end of the year? Measured in pizzas, what is the rate of return on this investment?
Our $115.50 from the investment will buy us $115.50/5.25 = 22 pizzas. Th is is up from 20 piz- zas, so our pizza rate of return is 10 percent. What this illustrates is that even though the nominal return on our investment is 15.5 percent, our buying power goes up by only 10 percent because of infl ation. Put another way, we are really only 10 percent richer. In this case, we say that the real return is 10 percent.
Alternatively, we can say that with 5 percent infl ation, each of the $115.50 nominal dollars we get is worth 5 percent less in real terms, so the real dollar value of our investment in a year is:
$115.50/1.05 = $110
What we have done is to defl ate the $115.50 by 5 percent. Because we give up $100 in current buying power to get the equivalent of $110, our real return is again 10 percent. Because we have removed the eff ect of future infl ation here, this $110 is said to be measured in current dollars.
Concept Questions
real rates Interest rates or rates of return that have been adjusted for inflation.
nominal rates Interest rates or rates of return that have not been adjusted for inflation.
Current and historical Treasury yield information is available at bankofcanada.ca
184 Part 3: Valuation of Future Cash Flows
07Ross_Chapter07_3rd_A.indd 18407Ross_Chapter07_3rd_A.indd 184 12-11-12 13:3312-11-12 13:33
Th e diff erence between nominal and real rates is important and bears repeating:
Th e nominal rate on an investment is the percentage change in the number of dollars you have.
Th e real rate on an investment is the percentage change in how much you can buy with your dol- lars, in other words, the percentage change in your buying power.
The Fisher Effect Our discussion of real and nominal returns illustrates a relationship oft en called the Fisher eff ect (aft er the great economist Irving Fisher). Because investors are ultimately concerned with what they can buy with their money, they require compensation for infl ation.10 Let R stand for the nominal rate and r stand for the real rate. Th e Fisher eff ect tells us that the relationship between nominal rates, real rates, and infl ation can be written as:
1 + R = (1 + r) × (1 + h) [7.2] where h is the infl ation rate.
In the preceding example, the nominal rate was 15.50 percent and the infl ation rate was 5 per- cent. What was the real rate? We can determine it by plugging in these numbers:
1 + .1550 = (1 + r) × (1 + .05) 1 + r = 1.1550/1.05 = 1.10 r = 10%
Th is real rate is the same as we had before. If we take another look at the Fisher eff ect, we can rearrange things a little as follows:
1 + R = (1 + r) × (1 + h) [7.3] R = r + h + r × h
What this tells us is that the nominal rate has three components. First, there is the real rate on the investment, r. Next, there is the compensation for the decrease in the value of the money origi- nally invested because of infl ation, h. Th e third component represents compensation for the fact that the dollars earned on the investment are also worth less because of the infl ation.
Th is third component is usually small, so it is oft en dropped. Th e nominal rate is then approxi- mately equal to the real rate plus the infl ation rate:
R ≈ r + h [7.4] A good example of the Fisher eff ect in practice comes from the history of interest rates in Cana- da.11 In 1980, the average T-bill rate over the year was around 13 percent. In contrast, in 2011, the average rate was much lower, at under 1 percent. Th e infl ation rates for the same two years were approximately 10 percent for 1980 and about 2.9 percent for 2011. Lower expected infl ation goes a long way toward explaining why interest rates were lower in 2011 than in 1980.
EXAMPLE 7.4: Th e Fisher Eff ect
If investors require a 10 percent real rate of return, and the inflation rate is 8 percent, what must be the approximate nominal rate? The exact nominal rate?
First of all, the nominal rate is approximately equal to the sum of the real rate and the inflation rate: 10% + 8% = 18%. From the Fisher effect, we have:
1 + R = (1 + r) × (1 + h) = 1.10 × 1.08 = 1.1880
Therefore, the nominal rate will actually be closer to 19 percent.
10 Here we are referring to the expected inflation rate, rather than the actual inflation rate. Buyers and sellers of invest- ments must use their best estimate of future inflation rates at the time of a transaction. Actual rates of inflation are not known until a considerable period after the purchase or sale, when all the cash flows from the investment instrument have taken place. 11 You can find historical and international data on interest rates and inflation at economist.com, and bankofcanada.ca
Fisher effect The relationship between nominal returns, real returns, and inflation.
CHAPTER 7: Interest Rates and Bond Valuation 185
07Ross_Chapter07_3rd_A.indd 18507Ross_Chapter07_3rd_A.indd 185 12-11-12 13:3312-11-12 13:33
Th e Fisher eff ect also holds on an international scale. While 2011interest rates were low in Canada compared to 1980, they were considerably higher than for the same year in Japan. In that country, the 2011 average infl ation rate was -0.5 percent, while the Bank of Japan’s short-term rates were 0 percent.
It is important to note that fi nancial rates, such as interest rates, discount rates, and rates of return, are almost always quoted in nominal terms.
Inf lation And Present Values One question that oft en comes up is the eff ect of infl ation on present value calculations. Th e basic principle is simple: Either discount nominal cash fl ows at a nominal rate or discount real cash fl ows at a real rate. As long as you are consistent, you will get the same answer.
To illustrate, suppose you want to withdraw money each year for the next three years, and you want each withdrawal to have $25,000 worth of purchasing power as measured in current dollars. If the infl ation rate is 4 percent per year, then the withdrawals will simply have to increase by 4 percent each year to compensate. Th e withdrawals each year will thus be:
C1 = $25,000(1.04) = $26,000 C2 = $25,000(1.04)2 = $27,040 C3 = $25,000(1.04)3 = $28,121.60
What is the present value of these cash fl ows if the appropriate nominal discount rate is 10 per- cent? Th is is a standard calculation, and the answer is:
PV = $26,000/1.10 + $27,040/1.102 + $28,121.60/1.103 = $67,111.75
Notice that we discounted the nominal cash fl ows at a nominal rate. To calculate the present value using real cash fl ows, we need the real discount rate. Using the
Fisher equation, the real discount rate is:
(1 + R) = (1 + r)(1 + h) (1 + .10) = (1 + r)(1 + .04) r = .0577
By design, the real cash fl ows are an annuity of $25,000 per year. So, the present value in real terms is:
PV = $25,000[1- (1/1.05773)]/.0577 = $67,111.65
Th us, we get exactly the same answer (aft er allowing for a small rounding error in the real rate). Of course, you could also use the growing annuity equation we discussed in the previous chapter. Th e withdrawals are increasing at 4 percent per year; so using the growing annuity formula, the present value is:
PV = $26,000 [ 1 - ( 1 + .04 _______ 1 + .10 )
3 ____________ .10 - .04 ] = $26,000 ( 2.58122 ) = $67,111.75
Th is is exactly the same present value we calculated before.
1. What is the difference between a nominal and a real return? Which is more important to a typical investor?
2. What is the Fisher effect?
7.7 Determinants of Bond Yields
We are now in a position to discuss the determinants of a bond’s yield. As we will see, the yield on any particular bond is a refl ection of a variety of factors, some common to all bonds and some specifi c to the issue under consideration.
Concept Questions
186 Part 3: Valuation of Future Cash Flows
07Ross_Chapter07_3rd_A.indd 18607Ross_Chapter07_3rd_A.indd 186 12-11-12 13:3312-11-12 13:33
The Term Structure of Interest Rates At any point in time, short-term and long-term interest rates will generally be diff erent. Some- times short-term rates are higher, sometimes lower. Th rough time, the diff erence between short- and long-term rates has ranged from essentially zero to up to several percentage points, both positive and negative.
Th e relationship between short- and long-term interest rates is known as the term structure of interest rates. To be a little more precise, the term structure of interest rates tells us what nominal interest rates are on default-free, pure discount bonds of all maturities. Th ese rates are, in essence, “pure” interest rates because they involve no risk of default and a single, lump-sum future payment. In other words, the term structure tells us the pure time value of money for diff erent lengths of time.
When long-term rates are higher than short-term rates, we say that the term structure is upward sloping, and, when short-term rates are higher, we say it is downward sloping. Th e term structure can also be “humped.” When this occurs, it is usually because rates increase at fi rst, but then begin to decline as we look at longer- and longer-term rates. Th e most common shape of the term structure, particularly in modern times, is upward sloping, but the degree of steepness has varied quite a bit.
What determines the shape of the term structure? Th ere are three basic components. Th e fi rst two are the ones we discussed in our previous section, the real rate of interest and the rate of infl ation. Th e real rate of interest is the compensation investors demand for forgoing the use of their money. You can think of it as the pure time value of money aft er adjusting for the eff ects of infl ation.
Th e real rate of interest is the basic component underlying every interest rate, regardless of the time to maturity. When the real rate is high, all interest rates will tend to be higher, and vice versa. Th us, the real rate doesn’t really determine the shape of the term structure; instead, it mostly infl u- ences the overall level of interest rates.
In contrast, the prospect of future infl ation very strongly infl uences the shape of the term structure. Investors thinking about lending money for various lengths of time recognize that future infl ation erodes the value of the dollars that will be returned. As a result, investors demand compensation for this loss in the form of higher nominal rates. Th is extra compensation is called the infl ation premium.
If investors believe that the rate of infl ation will be higher in future, then long-term nominal interest rates will tend to be higher than short-term rates. Th us, an upward-sloping term struc- ture may be a refl ection of anticipated increases in infl ation. Similarly, a downward-sloping term structure probably refl ects the belief that infl ation will be falling in the future.
Th e third, and last, component of the term structure has to do with interest rate risk. As we discussed earlier in the chapter, longer-term bonds have much greater risk of loss resulting from changes in interest rates than do shorter-term bonds. Investors recognize this risk, and they demand extra compensation in the form of higher rates for bearing it. Th is extra compensation is called the interest rate risk premium. Th e longer the term to maturity, the greater the interest rate risk, so the interest rate risk premium increases with maturity. However, as we discussed ear- lier, interest rate risk increases at a decreasing rate, so the interest rate risk premium does as well.12
Putting the pieces together, we see that the term structure refl ects the combined eff ect of the real rate of interest, the infl ation premium, and the interest rate risk premium. Figure 7.5 shows how these can interact to produce an upward-sloping term structure (in the top part of Figure 7.5) or a downward-sloping term structure (in the bottom part).
In the top part of Figure 7.5, notice how the rate of infl ation is expected to rise gradually. At the same time, the interest rate risk premium increases at a decreasing rate, so the combined eff ect is to produce a pronounced upward-sloping term structure. In the bottom part of Figure 7.5, the rate of infl ation is expected to fall in the future, and the expected decline is enough to off set the interest rate risk premium and produce a downward-sloping term structure. Notice that if the rate of infl ation was expected to decline by only a small amount, we could still get an upward-sloping term structure because of the interest rate risk premium.
12 In days of old, the interest rate risk premium was called a “liquidity” premium. Today, the term liquidity premium has an altogether different meaning, which we explore in our next section. Also, the interest rate risk premium is sometimes called a maturity risk premium. Our terminology is consistent with the modern view of the term structure.
term structure of interest rates The relationship between nominal interest rates on default-free, pure discount securities and time to maturity; that is, the pure time value of money.
inflation premium The portion of a nominal interest rate that represents compensation for expected future inflation.
interest rate risk premium The compensation investors demand for bearing interest rate risk.
CHAPTER 7: Interest Rates and Bond Valuation 187
07Ross_Chapter07_3rd_A.indd 18707Ross_Chapter07_3rd_A.indd 187 12-11-12 13:3312-11-12 13:33
We assumed in drawing Figure 7.5 that the real rate would remain the same. Actually, expected future real rates could be larger or smaller than the current real rate. Also, for simplicity, we used straight lines to show expected future infl ation rates as rising or declining, but they do not necessar- ily have to look like this. Th ey could, for example, rise and then fall, leading to a humped yield curve.
FIGURE 7.5
The term structure of interest rates
Time to maturity
Inflation premium
Real rate
Interest rate risk premium
Nominal interest rate
Nominal interest rate
Interest rate
Time to maturity
Interest rate
A. Upward-sloping term structure
B. Downward-sloping term structure
Inflation premium
Interest rate risk premium
Real rate
Bond Yields and the Yield Curve: Putting It All Together Going back to Figure 7.4, recall that we saw that the yields on Government of Canada bonds of diff erent maturities are not the same. Each day, we can plot the Canada bond prices and yields shown in Figure 7.4, relative to maturity. Th is plot is called the Canada yield curve (or just the yield curve). Figure 7.6 shows the yield curve drawn from the yields in Figure 7.4.
As you probably now suspect, the shape of the yield curve is a refl ection of the term structure of interest rates. In fact, the Canada yield curve and the term structure of interest rates are almost the same thing. Th e only diff erence is that the term structure is based on pure discount bonds, whereas the yield curve is based on coupon bond yields. As a result, Canada yields depend on the three components that underlie the term structure—the real rate, expected future infl ation, and the interest rate risk premium.
Canada bonds have three important features that we need to remind you of: they are default- free, they are taxable, and they are highly liquid. Th is is not true of bonds in general, so we need to examine what additional factors come into play when we look at bonds issued by corporations or municipalities.
Canada yield curve A plot of the yields on Government of Canada notes and bonds relative to maturity.
188 Part 3: Valuation of Future Cash Flows
07Ross_Chapter07_3rd_A.indd 18807Ross_Chapter07_3rd_A.indd 188 12-11-12 13:3312-11-12 13:33
Th e fi rst thing to consider is credit risk, that is, the possibility of default. Investors recognize that issuers other than the Government of Canada may or may not make all the promised pay- ments on a bond, so they demand a higher yield as compensation for this risk. Th is extra com- pensation is called the default risk premium. Earlier in the chapter, we saw how bonds were rated based on their credit risk. What you will fi nd if you start looking at bonds of diff erent ratings is that lower-rated bonds have higher yields.
FIGURE 7.6
Government of Canada yield curve
0
Years to maturity
B o
n d
y ie
ld (
% )
1
0.5
2
1.5
2.5
3
4
3.5
0 5 10 15 25 3020 35Source: Financial Post,
January 05, 2012. Used with permission.
An important thing to recognize about a bond’s yield is that it is calculated assuming that all the promised payments will be made. As a result, it is really a promised yield, and it may or may not be what you will earn. In particular, if the issuer defaults, your actual yield will be lower, probably much lower. Th is fact is particularly important when it comes to junk bonds. Th anks to a clever bit of marketing, such bonds are now commonly called high-yield bonds, which has a much nicer ring to it; but now you recognize that these are really high-promised yield bonds. Tax- ability also aff ects the bond yields as bondholders have to pay income tax on the interest income they receive from privately issued bonds.
Finally, bonds have varying degrees of liquidity. As we discussed earlier, there are an enormous number of bond issues, most of which do not trade on a regular basis. As a result, if you wanted to sell quickly, you would probably not get as good a price as you could otherwise. Investors prefer liquid assets to illiquid ones, so they demand a liquidity premium on top of all the other pre- miums we have discussed. As a result, all else being the same, less liquid bonds will have higher yields than more liquid bonds.
Conclusion If we combine all of the things we have discussed regarding bond yields, we fi nd that bond yields represent the combined eff ect of no fewer than six things. Th e fi rst is the real rate of interest. On top of the real rate are fi ve premiums representing compensation for (1) expected future infl ation, (2) interest rate risk, (3) default risk, (4) tax status, and (5) lack of liquidity. As a result, determin- ing the appropriate yield on a bond requires careful analysis of each of these eff ects.
1. What is the term structure of interest rates? What determines its shape?
2. What is the Canada yield curve?
3. What are the six components that make up a bond’s yield?
default risk premium The portion of a nominal interest rate or bond yield that represents compensation for the possibility of default.
liquidity premium The portion of a nominal interest rate or bond yield that represents compensation for lack of liquidity.
Concept Questions
CHAPTER 7: Interest Rates and Bond Valuation 189
07Ross_Chapter07_3rd_A.indd 18907Ross_Chapter07_3rd_A.indd 189 12-11-12 13:3312-11-12 13:33
7.8 SUMMARY AND CONCLUSIONS
Th is chapter has explored bonds, bond yields, and interest rates. We saw that:
1. Determining bond prices and yields is an application of basic discounted cash flow principles.
2. Bond values move in the direction opposite that of interest rates, leading to potential gains or losses for bond investors.
3. Bonds have a variety of features spelled out in a document called the indenture. 4. Bonds are rated based on their default risk. Some bonds, such as Treasury bonds, have no
risk of default, whereas so-called junk bonds have substantial default risk. 5. A wide variety of bonds exist, many of which contain exotic or unusual features. 6. Almost all bond trading is OTC, with little or no market transparency. As a result, bond
price and volume information can be difficult to find. 7. Bond yields reflect the effect of the real rate and premiums that investors demand as com-
pensation for inflation and interest rate risk.
In closing, we note that bonds are a vital source of fi nancing to governments and corporations of all types. Bond prices and yields are a rich subject, and our one chapter necessarily touches on only the most important concepts and ideas. Th ere is a great deal more we could say, but instead we will move on to stocks in our next chapter.
Key Terms bearer form (page 175) call premium (page 176) call protected (page 176) call provision (page 176) Canada plus call (page 176) Canada yield curve (page 188) clean price (page 182) coupon (page 165) coupon rate (page 165) debenture (page 175) default risk premium (page 189) deferred call (page 176) dirty price (page 182) face value or par value (page 165) Fisher effect (page 185)
indenture (page 174) inflation premium (page 187) interest rate risk premium (page 187) liquidity premium (page 189) maturity date (page 165) nominal rates (page 184) note (page 175) protective covenant (page 176) real rates (page 184) registered form (page 175) retractable bond (page 181) sinking fund (page 176) stripped bond or zero-coupon bond (page 179) term structure of interest rates (page 187) yield to maturity (YTM) (page 166)
Chapter Review Problems and Self-Test 7.1 Bond Values A Microgates Industries bond has a 10 percent
coupon rate and a $1,000 face value. Interest is paid semian- nually, and the bond has 20 years to maturity. If investors re- quire a 12 percent yield, what is the bond’s value? What is the effective annual yield on the bond?
7.2 Bond Yields A Macrohard Corp. bond carries an 8 percent coupon, paid semiannually. The par value is $1,000 and the bond matures in six years. If the bond currently sells for $911.37, what is its yield to maturity? What is the effective an- nual yield?
Answers to Self-Test Problems 7.1 Because the bond has a 10 percent coupon yield and investors require a 12 percent return, we know that the bond must sell at a discount.
Notice that, because the bond pays interest semiannually, the coupons amount to $100/2 = $50 every six months. The required yield is 12%/2 = 6% every six months. Finally, the bond matures in 20 years, so there are a total of 40 six-month periods.
The bond’s value is thus equal to the present value of $50 every six months for the next 40 six-month periods plus the present value of the $1,000 face amount:
Bond value = $50 × (1 - 1/1.0640)/.06 + 1,000/1.0640 = $50 × 15.04630 + 1,000/10.2857 = $849.54
190 Part 3: Valuation of Future Cash Flows
07Ross_Chapter07_3rd_A.indd 19007Ross_Chapter07_3rd_A.indd 190 12-11-12 13:3312-11-12 13:33
Notice that we discounted the $1,000 back 40 periods at 6 percent per period, rather than 20 years at 12 percent. The reason is that the effective annual yield on the bond is 1.062 - 1 = 12.36%, not 12 percent. We thus could have used 12.36 percent per year for 20 years when we calculated the present value of the $1,000 face amount, and the answer would have been the same.
7.2 The present value of the bond’s cash flows is its current price, $911.37. The coupon is $40 every six months for 12 periods. The face value is $1,000. So the bond’s yield is the unknown discount rate in the following:
$911.37 = $40 × [1 - 1/(1 + r)12]/r + 1,000/(1 + r)12
The bond sells at a discount. Because the coupon rate is 8 percent, the yield must be something in excess of that. If we were to solve this by trial and error, we might try 12 percent (or 6 percent per six months): Bond value = $40 × (1 - 1/1.0612)/.06 + 1,000/1.0612
= $832.32 This is less than the actual value, so our discount rate is too high. We now know that the yield is somewhere between 8 and 12 percent.
With further trial and error (or a little machine assistance), the yield works out to be 10 percent, or 5 percent every six months. By convention, the bond’s yield to maturity would be quoted as 2 × 5% = 10%. The effective yield is thus 1.052 - 1 = 10.25%.
Concepts Review and Critical Thinking Questions 1. (LO1) Is it true that a Government of Canada security is
risk-free? 2. (LO2) Which has greater interest rate risk, a 30-year Canada
bond or a 30-year BB corporate bond? 3. (LO4) With regard to bid and ask prices on a Canada bond, is
it possible for the bid price to be higher? Why or why not? 4. (LO4) Canada bid and ask quotes are sometimes given in
terms of yields, so there would be a bid yield and an ask yield. Which do you think would be larger? Explain.
5. (LO1) A company is contemplating a long-term bond issue. It is debating whether or not to include a call provision. What are the benefits to the company from including a call provi- sion? What are the costs? How do these answers change for a put provision?
6. (LO1) How does a bond issuer decide on the appropriate coupon rate to set on its bonds? Explain the difference be- tween the coupon rate and the required return on a bond.
7. (LO5) Are there any circumstances under which an investor might be more concerned about the nominal return on an in- vestment than the real return?
8. (LO3) Companies pay rating agencies such as DBRS to rate their bonds, and the costs can be substantial. However, compan- ies are not required to have their bonds rated in the first place; doing so is strictly voluntary. Why do you think they do it?
9. (LO3) Canada bonds are not rated. Why? Often, junk bonds are not rated. Why?
10. (LO6) What is the difference between the term structure of interest rates and the yield curve?
Questions and Problems 1. Interpreting Bond Yields (LO2) Is the yield to maturity on a bond the same thing as the required return? Is YTM the same
thing as the coupon rate? Suppose today a 10 percent coupon bond sells at par. Two years from now, the required return on the same bond is 8 percent. What is the coupon rate on the bond then? The YTM?
2. Interpreting Bond Yields (LO2) Suppose you buy a 7 percent coupon, 20-year bond today when it’s first issued. If interest rates suddenly rise to 15 percent, what happens to the value of your bond? Why?
3. Bond Prices (LO2) Malahat Inc. has 7.5 percent coupon bonds on the market that have 10 years left to maturity. The bonds make annual payments. If the YTM on these bonds is 8.75 percent, what is the current bond price?
4. Bond Yields (LO2) Leechtown Co. has 9 percent coupon bonds on the market with nine years left to maturity. The bonds make annual payments. If the bond currently sells for $934, what is its YTM?
5. Coupon Rates (LO2) Goldstream Enterprises has bonds on the market making annual payments, with 13 years to maturity, and selling for $1,045. At this price, the bonds yield 7.5 percent. What must the coupon rate be on the bonds?
6. Bond Prices (LO2) Langford Co. issued 11-year bonds a year ago at a coupon rate of 6.9 percent. The bonds make semiannual payments. If the YTM on these bonds is 7.4 percent, what is the current bond price?
7. Bond Yields (LO2) Braemar Corp. issued 12-year bonds 2 years ago at a coupon rate of 8.4 percent. The bonds make semiannual payments. If these bonds currently sell for 105 percent of par value, what is the YTM?
8. Coupon Rates (LO2) Happy Valley Corporation has bonds on the market with 14.5 years to maturity, a YTM of 6.8 percent, and a current price of $924. The bonds make semiannual payments. What must the coupon rate be on these bonds?
9. Calculating Real Rates of Return (LO5) If Treasury bills are currently paying 7 percent and the inflation rate is 3.8 percent, what is the approximate real rate of interest? The exact real rate?
10. Inflation and Nominal Returns (LO5) Suppose the real rate is 3 percent and the inflation rate is 4.7 percent. What rate would you expect to see on a Treasury bill?
11. Nominal and Real Returns (LO5) An investment offers a 14 percent total return over the coming year. Jim Flaherty thinks the total real return on this investment will be only 9 percent. What does Jim believe the inflation rate will be over the next year?
Basic (Questions
1–14)
6
7
8
9
CHAPTER 7: Interest Rates and Bond Valuation 191
07Ross_Chapter07_3rd_A.indd 19107Ross_Chapter07_3rd_A.indd 191 12-11-12 13:3312-11-12 13:33
12. Nominal versus Real Returns (LO5) Say you own an asset that had a total return last year of 11.4 percent. If the inflation rate last year was 4.8 percent, what was your real return?
13. Bond Pricing (LO2) This problem refers to bond quotes in Figure 7.4. Calculate the price of the Canada Jun 01/15 to prove that it is 111.23 as shown. Assume that today is January 05, 2012.
14. Bond Value (LO2) At the time of the last referendum, Quebec provincial bonds carried a higher yield than comparable Ontario bonds because of investors’ uncertainty about the political future of Quebec. Suppose you were an investment manager who thought the market was overplaying these fears. In particular, suppose you thought that yields on Quebec bonds would fall by 50 basis points. Which bonds would you buy or sell? Explain in words.
15. Bond Price Movements (LO2) Bond X is a premium bond making annual payments. The bond pays a 8 percent coupon, has a YTM of 6 percent, and has 13 years to maturity. Bond Y is a discount bond making annual payments. This bond pays a 6 percent coupon, has a YTM of 8 percent, and also has 13 years to maturity. If interest rates remain unchanged, what do you expect the price of these bonds to be one year from now? In three years? In eight years? In 12 years? In 13 years? What’s going on here? Illustrate your answers by graphing bond prices versus time to maturity.
16. Interest Rate Risk (LO2) Both Bond Sam and Bond Dave have 9 percent coupons, make semiannual payments and are priced at par value. Bond Sam has 3 years to maturity, whereas Bond Dave has 20 years to maturity. If interest rates suddenly rise by 2 percent, what is the percentage change in the price of Bond Sam? Of Bond Dave? If rates were to suddenly fall by 2 percent instead, what would the percentage change in the price of Bond Sam be then? Of Bond Dave? Illustrate your answers by graphing bond prices versus YTM. What does this problem tell you about the interest rate risk of longer-term bonds?
17. Interest Rate Risk (LO2) Bond J is a 4 percent coupon bond. Bond K is a 12 percent coupon bond. Both bonds have nine years to maturity, make semiannual payments and have a YTM of 8 percent. If interest rates suddenly rise by 2 percent, what is the percentage price change of these bonds? What if rates suddenly fall by 2 percent instead? What does this problem tell you about the interest rate risk of lower coupon bonds?
18. Bond Yields (LO2) Oak Bay Software has 9.2 percent coupon bonds on the market with nine years to maturity. The bonds make semiannual payments and currently sell for 106.8 percent of par. What is the current yield on the bonds? The YTM? The effective annual yield?
19. Bond Yields (LO2) Airbutus Co. wants to issue new 20-year bonds for some much-needed expansion projects. The company currently has 8 percent coupon bonds on the market that sell for $930, make semiannual payments, and mature in 20 years. What coupon rate should the company set on its new bonds if it wants them to sell at par?
20. Accrued Interest (LO2) You purchase a bond with an invoice price of $968. The bond has a coupon rate of 7.4 percent, and there are five months to the next semiannual coupon date. What is the clean price of the bond?
21. Accrued Interest (LO2) You purchase a bond with a coupon rate of 6.8 percent and a clean price of $1,073. If the next semiannual coupon payment is due in three months, what is the invoice price?
22. Finding the Bond Maturity (LO2) Colwood Corp. has 8 percent coupon bonds making annual payments with a current yield of 7.5 percent. How many years do these bonds have left until they mature?
23. Using Bond Quotes (LO4) Suppose the following bond quotes for IOU Corporation appear in the financial page of today’s newspaper. Assume the bond has a face value of $1,000 and the current date is April 15, 2013. What is the yield to maturity of the bond? What is the yield to maturity on a comparable Bank of Canada issue?
Company (Ticker) Coupon Maturity
Last Price
Last Yield
EST Spread UST
EST Vol (000s)
IOU (IOU) 7.2 Apr 15, 2023 108.96 ?? 468 10 1,827
24. Bond Prices versus Yields (LO2) a. What is the relationship between the price of a bond and its YTM? b. Explain why some bonds sell at a premium over par value while other bonds sell at a discount. What do you know about
the relationship between the coupon rate and the YTM for premium bonds? What about for discount bonds? For bonds selling at par value?
c. What is the relationship between the current yield and YTM for premium bonds? For discount bonds? For bonds selling at par value?
25. Interest on Zeroes (LO2) Tillicum Corporation needs to raise funds to finance a plant expansion, and it has decided to issue 25-year zero coupon bonds to raise the money. The required return on the bonds will be 9 percent.
a. What will these bonds sell for at issuance? b. What interest deduction can Tillicum Corporation take on these bonds in the first year? In the last year? c. Based on your answers in (b), which interest deduction method would Tillicum Corporation prefer? Why?
26. Zero Coupon Bonds (LO2) Suppose your company needs to raise $30 million and you want to issue 30-year bonds for this purpose. Assume the required return on your bond issue will be 8 percent, and you’re evaluating two issue alternatives: an 8 percent annual coupon bond and a zero coupon bond. Your company’s tax rate is 35 percent.
a. How many of the coupon bonds would you need to issue to raise the $30 million? How many of the zeroes would you need to issue?
b. In 30 years, what will your company’s repayment be if you issue the coupon bonds? What if you issue the zeroes?
Intermediate (Questions
15–28)
192 Part 3: Valuation of Future Cash Flows
07Ross_Chapter07_3rd_A.indd 19207Ross_Chapter07_3rd_A.indd 192 12-11-12 13:3312-11-12 13:33
c. Based on your answers in (a) and (b), why would you ever want to issue the zeroes? To answer, calculate the firm’s after-tax cash outflows for the first year under the two different scenarios.
27. Finding the Maturity (LO2) You’ve just found a 10 percent coupon bond on the market that sells for par value. What is the maturity on this bond?
28. Real Cash Flows (LO5) You want to have $1.5 million in real dollars in an account when you retire in 40 years. The nominal return on your investment is 11 percent and the inflation rate is 3.8 percent. What real amount must you deposit each year to achieve your goal?
29. Components of Bond Returns (LO2) Bond P is a premium bond with a 12 percent coupon. Bond D is a 6 percent coupon bond currently selling at a discount. Both bonds make annual payments, have a YTM of 9 percent, and have five years to maturity. What is the current yield for bond P? For bond D? If interest rates remain unchanged, what is the expected capital gains yield over the next year for bond P? For bond D? Explain your answers and the interrelationships among the YTM, coupon rate, and capital gains yield.
30. Holding Period Yield (LO2) The YTM on a bond is the interest rate you earn on your investment if interest rates don’t change. If you actually sell the bond before it matures, your realized return is known as the holding period yield (HPY).
a. Suppose that today you buy an 7 percent annual coupon bond for $1,060. The bond has 10 years to maturity. What rate of return do you expect to earn on your investment?
b. Two years from now, the YTM on your bond has declined by 1 percent, and you decide to sell. What price will your bond sell for? What is the HPY on your investment? Compare this yield to the YTM when you first bought the bond. Why are they, different?
31. Valuing Bonds (LO2) The Metchosin Corporation has two different bonds currently outstanding. Bond M has a face value of $20,000 and matures in 20 years. The bond makes no payments for the first six years, then pays $1,100 every six months over the subsequent eight years, and finally pays $1,400 every six months over the last six years. Bond N also has a face value of $20,000 and a maturity of 20 years; it makes no coupon payments over the life of the bond. If the required return on both these bonds is 7 percent compounded semiannually, what is the current price of bond M? Of bond N?
Financing Tuxedo Air’s Expansion Plans with a Bond Issue
Mark Taylor and Jack Rodwell, the owners of Tuxedo Air, have decided to expand their operations. They instructed their newly hired financial analyst, Ed Cowan, to enlist an under- writer to help sell $35 million in new 10-year bonds to finance construction. Chris has entered into discussions with Suzanne Lenglen, an underwriter from the firm of Raines and Warren, about which bond features Tuxedo Air should consider and what coupon rate the issue will likely have. Although Ed is aware of the bond features, he is uncertain about the costs and benefits of some features, so he isn’t sure how each feature would affect the coupon rate of the bond issue. You are Suzanne’s assistant, and she has asked you to prepare a memo to Ed describing the effect of each of the fol- lowing bond features on the coupon rate of the bond. She would also like you to list any advantages or disadvantages of each feature:
1. The security of the bond—that is, whether the bond has collateral.
2. The seniority of the bond. 3. The presence of a sinking fund. 4. A call provision with specified call dates and call prices. 5. A deferred call accompanying the call provision. 6. A Canada plus call provision. 7. Any positive covenants. Also, discuss several possible pos-
itive covenants Tuxedo Air might consider. 8. Any negative covenants. Also, discuss several possible
negative covenants Tuxedo Air might consider. 9. A conversion feature (note that Tuxedo Air is not a pub-
licly traded company). 10. A floating-rate coupon.
MINI CASE
Internet Application Questions 1. The Bank of Canada maintains a site containing historical bond yields. Pick a short-term bond and a real return bond and
compare their yields. What is your expectation of inflation for the coming year? bankofcanada.ca/rates/interest-rates/ canadian-bonds/
2. Barclays Global Investors has two exchange traded bond funds, iG5 and iG10. Explain the advantage of investing in exchange traded bond funds relative to buying the bonds outright. group.barclays.com
3. Go to the website of DBRS at dbrs.com. Use Quick Search and Ticker Lookup to find Manufacturers Life Insurance Company and look up its rating. Do the same for Loblaw Companies Limited and Rogers Communications Inc. Which companies are investment grade? Are any junk? Now click on Rating and Methodologies. Which are the key factors in determining ratings?
29. C b m
Challenge (Questions
29–31)
CHAPTER 7: Interest Rates and Bond Valuation 193
07Ross_Chapter07_3rd_A.indd 19307Ross_Chapter07_3rd_A.indd 193 12-11-12 13:3312-11-12 13:33
ON DURATION
Our discussion of interest rate risk and applications explains how bond managers can select bonds to en- hance price volatility when interest rates are falling. In this case, we recommended buying long-term, low- coupon bonds. When they apply this advice, Canadian bond managers use duration—a measure of a bond’s effective maturity incorporating both time to maturity and coupon rate. This Appendix explains how dura- tion is calculated and how it is used by bond managers.
Consider a portfolio consisting of two pure discount (zero coupon) bonds. The first bond matures in one year and the second after five years. As pure discount bonds, each provides a cash flow of $100 at maturity and nothing before maturity. Assuming the interest rate is 10 percent across all maturities, the bond prices are:
Value of the one-year discount bond: $100 _____ 1.10 = $90.91
Value of the fi ve-year discount bond: $100 ______ ( 1.10 ) 5 = $62.09
Which of these bonds would produce the greater percentage capital gain if rates drop to 8 percent across all maturities? From the text discussion, we know that price volatility increases with maturity and decreases with the coupon rate. Both bonds have the same coupon rate (namely zero), so the five-year bond should produce the larger percentage gain.
To prove this, we calculate the new prices and percentage changes. The one-year bond is now priced at $92.59 and has increased in price by 1.85%.13 The five-year bond is now priced at $68.06 for a price rise of 9.61 percent. You should be able to prove that the effect works the other way. If interest rates rise to 12 per- cent across maturities, the five-year bond will have the greater percentage loss.
If all bonds were pure discount bonds, time to maturity would be a precise measure of price volatility. In reality, most bonds bear coupon payments. Duration provides a measure of effective maturity that incor- porates the impact of differing coupon rates.
Duration We begin by noticing that any coupon bond is actually a combination of pure discount bonds. For example, a five-year, 10 percent coupon bond, with a face value of $100, is made up of five pure discount bonds:
1. A pure discount bond paying $10 at the end of Year 1. 2. A pure discount bond paying $10 at the end of Year 2. 3. A pure discount bond paying $10 at the end of Year 3. 4. A pure discount bond paying $10 at the end of Year 4. 5. A pure discount bond paying $110 at the end of Year 5.
Because the price volatility of a pure discount bond is determined only by its maturity, we would like to determine the average maturity of the five pure discount bonds that make up a five-year coupon bond. This leads us to the concept of duration.
We calculate average maturity in three steps for the 10 percent coupon bond:
1. Calculate present value of each payment using the bond’s yield to maturity. We do this as
Year Payment Present Value of Payment
by Discounting at 10%
1 $ 10 $ 9.091 2 10 8.264 3 10 7.513 4 10 6.830 5 110 68.302 Total $ 100.000
2. Express the present value of each payment in relative terms. We calculate the relative value of a single payment as the ratio of the present value of the payment to the value of the bond. Th e value of the bond is $100. We have
13 The percentage price increase is: ($92.59 - $90.91)/$90.91 = 1.85%.
APPENDIX 7A
194 Part 3: Valuation of Future Cash Flows
07Ross_Chapter07_3rd_A.indd 19407Ross_Chapter07_3rd_A.indd 194 12-11-12 13:3312-11-12 13:33
Year Payment Present Value of Payment
Relative value = Present Value of Payment ÷ Value of Bond
1 $ 10 $ 9.091 $9.091/$100 = 0.09091 2 10 8.264 0.08264 3 10 7.513 0.07513 4 10 6.830 0.0683
5 110 68.302 0.68302 Total $100.000 1.00000
Th e bulk of the relative value, 68.302 percent, occurs at Year 5 because the principal is paid back at that time.
3. Weight the maturity of each payment by its relative value. We have 4.1699 years = 1 year × 0.09091 + 2 years × 0.08264 + 3 years × 0.07513 + 4 years × 0.06830 + 5 years × 0.68302
There are many ways to calculate the average maturity of a bond. We have calculated it by weighting the maturity of each payment by the payment’s present value. We find that the effective maturity of the bond is 4.1699 years. Duration is a commonly used word for effective maturity. Thus, the bond’s duration is 4.1699 years. Note that duration is expressed in units of time.14
Because the five-year, 10 percent coupon bond has a duration of 4.1699 years, its percentage price fluc- tuations should be the same as those of a zero coupon bond with a duration of 4.1699 years.15 It turns out that a five-year, 1 percent coupon bond has a duration of 4.9020 years. Because the 1 percent coupon bond has a higher duration than the 10 percent bond, the 1 percent coupon bond should be subject to greater price fluctuations. This is exactly what we expected.
Why does the 1 percent bond have a greater duration than the 10 percent bond, even though they both have the same five-year maturity? As mentioned earlier, duration is an average of the maturity of the bond’s cash flows, weighted by the present value of each cash flow. The 1 percent coupon bond receives only $1 in each of the first four years. Thus, the weights applied to Years 1 through 4 in the duration formula will be low. Conversely, the 10 percent coupon bond receives $10 in each of the first four years. The weights applied to Years 1 through 4 in the duration formula will be higher.
In general, the percentage price changes of a bond with high duration are greater than the percentage price changes for a bond with low duration. This property is useful to investment managers who seek su- perior performance. These managers extend portfolio duration when rates are expected to fall and reduce duration in the face of rising rates.
Because forecasting rates consistently is almost impossible, other managers hedge their returns by set- ting the duration of their assets equal to the duration of liabilities. In this way, market values on both sides of the balance sheet adjust in the same direction keeping the market value of net worth constant. Duration hedging is often called portfolio immunization.
Current research on Government of Canada bond returns shows that duration is a practical way of measuring bond price volatility and an effective tool for hedging interest rate risk.
Appendix Questions and Problems
A.1 Why do portfolio managers use duration instead of term to maturity as a measure of a bond’s price volatility?
A.2 Calculate the duration of a seven-year Canada bond with a 8 percent coupon and a yield of 4 percent.
A.3 You are managing a bond portfolio following a policy of interest-rate anticipation. You think that rates have bottomed and are likely to rise. Th e average duration of your portfolio is 5.5 years. Which bonds are more attractive for new purchases, those with a 10-year duration or three-year duration? Explain.
14 Also note that we discounted each payment by the interest rate of 10 percent. This was done because we wanted to calculate the duration of the bond before a change in the interest rate occurred. After a change in the rate to say 8 or 12 percent, all three of our steps would need to reflect the new interest rate. In other words, the duration of a bond is a function of the current interest rate. 15 Actually, the relationship only exactly holds true in the case of a one-time shift in the flat yield curve, where the change in the spot rate is identical for all different maturities. But duration research finds that the error is small.
CHAPTER 7: Interest Rates and Bond Valuation 195
07Ross_Chapter07_3rd_A.indd 19507Ross_Chapter07_3rd_A.indd 195 12-11-12 13:3312-11-12 13:33
In our previous chapter, we introduced you to bonds and bond valuation. In this chapter, we turn to the other major source of fi nancing for corporations, common and preferred stock. We fi rst describe the cash fl ows associated with a share of stock and then go on to develop a very famous result, the dividend growth model. From there, we move on to examine various important features of common and preferred stock, focusing on shareholder rights. We close out the chapter with a discussion of how shares of stock are traded and how stock prices and other important information are reported in the fi nancial press.
8.1 Common Stock Valuation
In practice, it is more diffi cult to value a share of common stock than a bond for at least three reasons. First, not even the promised cash fl ows are known in advance. Second, the life of the investment is essentially forever because common stock has no maturity. Th ird, there is no way to easily observe the rate of return that the market requires. Nonetheless, there are cases under which we can come up with the present value of the future cash fl ows for a share of stock and thus determine its value.
Common Stock Cash Flows Imagine that you are buying a share of stock today. You plan to sell the stock in one year. You somehow know that the stock will be worth $70 at that time. You predict that the stock will also pay a $10 per share dividend at the end of the year. If you require a 25 percent return on your investment, what is the most you would pay for the stock? In other words, what is the present value of the $10 dividend along with the $70 ending value at 25 percent?
If you buy the stock today and sell it at the end of the year, you will have a total of $80 in cash. At 25 percent:
aircanada.com westjet.com
STOCK VALUATION
C H A P T E R 8
W estJet Airlines Ltd. is a Canadian low-cost carrier headquartered in Calgary. Effec- tive January 2012, WestJet’s dividend was $0.05
per share quarterly, or $0.20 per share annually. In
contrast, Air Canada, Canada’s largest airline head-
quartered in Montreal, has never paid a dividend. In
January 2012, a share of Air Canada traded on the
TSX for $1, while a share of WestJet was worth $12.
How might investors decide on these valuations?
While there are many factors that drive share prices,
dividends are one of the most frequently analyzed.
This chapter explores dividends, stock values, and
the connection between them.
Learning Object ives
After studying this chapter, you should understand:
LO1 How stock prices depend on future dividends and dividend growth.
LO2 The characteristics of common and preferred stocks.
LO3 The different ways corporate directors are elected to office.
LO4 The stock market quotations and the basics of stock market reporting.
Re p
ro du
ce d
w ith
t he
pe
rm is
si on
o f
A ir
C an
ad a
08Ross_Chapter08_3rd_A.indd 19608Ross_Chapter08_3rd_A.indd 196 12-11-12 13:3212-11-12 13:32
Present value = ($10 + 70)/1.25 = $64
Th erefore, $64 is the value you would assign to the stock today. More generally, let P0 be the current price of the stock, and defi ne P1 to be the price in one
period. If D1 is the cash dividend paid at the end of the period, then: P0 = (D1 + P1)/(1 + r) [8.1]
where r is the required return in the market on this investment. Notice that we really haven’t said much so far. If we wanted to determine the value of a share of
stock today (P0), we would have to come up with its value in one year (P1). Th is is even harder to do in the fi rst place, so we’ve only made the problem more complicated.1
What is the price in one period, P1? We don’t know in general. Instead, suppose that we some- how knew the price in two periods, P2. Given a predicted dividend in two periods, D2, the stock price in one period would be:
P1 = (D2 + P2)/(1 + r)
If we were to substitute this expression for P1 into our expression for P0, we would have:
P 0 = D 1 + P 1 _______ (1 + r) =
D 1 + D 2 + P 2 _______ 1 + r ____________ (1 + r)
= D 1 _______ (1 + r ) 1 +
D 2 _______ (1 + r ) 2 + P 2 _______ (1 + r ) 2
Now we need to get a price in two periods. We don’t know this either, so we can procrastinate again and write:
P2 = (D3 + P3)/(1 + r)
If we substitute this back in for P2, we would have:
P 0 = D 1 _______ (1 + r ) 1 +
D 2 _______ (1 + r ) 2 + P 2 _______ (1 + r ) 2
= D 1 _______ (1 + r ) 1 +
D 2 _______ (1 + r ) 2 + D 3 + P 3 _______ 1 + r _______ (1 + r ) 2
= D 1 _______ (1 + r ) 1 +
D 2 _______ (1 + r ) 2 + D 3 _______ (1 + r ) 3 +
P 3 _______ (1 + r ) 3
Notice that we can push the problem of coming up with the stock price off into the future forever. Importantly, no matter what the stock price is, the present value is essentially zero if we push it far enough away.2 What we would be left with is the result that the current price of the stock can be written as the present value of the dividends beginning in one period and extending out forever:
P 0 = D 1 _______ (1 + r ) 1 +
D 2 _______ (1 + r ) 2 + D 3 _______ (1 + r ) 3 +
D 4 _______ (1 + r ) 4 + D 5 _______ (1 + r ) 5 + …
We have illustrated here that the price of the stock today is equal to the present value of all the future dividends. How many future dividends are there? In principle, there can be an infi nite number. Th is means we still can’t compute a value for the stock because we would have to forecast an infi nite number of dividends and then discount them all. In the next section, we consider some special cases where we can get around this problem.
1 The only assumption we make about the stock price is that it is a finite number no matter how far away we push it. It can be extremely large, just not infinitely so. Since no one has ever observed an infinite stock price, this assumption is plausible. 2 One way of solving this problem is the “bigger fool” approach, which asks how much a bigger fool (than you) would pay for the stock. This approach has considerable appeal in explaining speculative bubbles that occur when prices rise to irrational levels and then fall when the bubble bursts. Our discussion focuses on more ordinary times when prices are based on rational factors.
CHAPTER 8: Stock Valuation 197
08Ross_Chapter08_3rd_A.indd 19708Ross_Chapter08_3rd_A.indd 197 12-11-12 13:3212-11-12 13:32
EXAMPLE 8.1: Growth Stock
You might be wondering about shares of stock in companies that currently pay no dividends. Small, growing companies frequently plow back everything and thus pay no dividends. Many such companies are in mining, oil and gas, and high tech. For example, at the time of writing, CGI Group Inc., an IT services company headquartered in Montreal, was trading at $18 per share and paid no dividends. Are such shares ac- tually worth nothing? When we say that the value of the stock is equal to the present value of the future dividends, we don’t rule out the possibility that some number of those divi- dends are zero. They just can’t all be zero.
Imagine a hypothetical company that had a provision in its corporate charter prohibiting the payment of dividends now or ever. The corporation never borrows any money,
never pays out any money to shareholders in any form whatsoever, and never sells any assets. Such a corporation couldn’t really exist because the shareholders wouldn’t stand for it. However, the shareholders could always vote to amend the charter if they wanted to. If it did exist, how- ever, what would the stock be worth?
The stock is worth absolutely nothing. Such a company is a financial black hole. Money goes in, but nothing valu- able ever comes out. Because nobody would ever get any return on this investment, the investment has no value. This example is a little absurd, but it illustrates that when we speak of companies that don’t pay dividends, what we re- ally mean is that they are not currently paying dividends.
Common Stock Valuation: Some Special Cases Th ere are a few very useful special circumstances where we can come up with a value for the stock. What we have to do is make some simplifying assumptions about the pattern of future dividends. Th e three cases we consider are (1) the dividend has a zero growth rate, (2) the dividend grows at a constant rate, and (3) the dividend grows at a constant rate aft er some length of time. We consider each of these separately.3
ZERO GROWTH The case of zero growth is one we’ve already seen. A share of common stock in a company with a constant dividend is much like a share of preferred stock. From Ex- ample 6.8 in Chapter 6, we know that the dividend on a share of fixed-rate preferred stock has zero growth and thus is constant through time. For a zero growth share of common stock, this implies that:
D1 = D2 = D3 = D = constant
So, the value of the stock is:
P0 = D _______ (1 + r)1 +
D _______ (1 + r)2 + D _______ (1 + r)3 +
D _______ (1 + r)4 + D _______ (1 + r)5 +
Since the dividend is always the same, the stock can be viewed as an ordinary perpetuity with a cash fl ow equal to D every period. Th e per-share value is thus given by:
P0 = D/r [8.2] where r is the required return. For example, suppose the Eastcoast Energy Company has a policy of paying a $10 per share divi- dend every year. If this policy is to be continued indefi nitely, what is the value of a share of stock if the required return is 20 percent? As it amounts to an ordinary perpetuity, the stock is worth $10/.20 = $50 per share.
CONSTANT GROWTH Suppose we knew that the dividend for some company always grows at a steady rate. Call this growth rate g. If we let D0 be the dividend just paid, then the next dividend, D1 is:
D1 = D0 × (1 + g)
3 Growth simply compares dollar dividends over time. In Chapter 12 we examine inflation and growth.
198 Part 3: Valuation of Future Cash Flows
08Ross_Chapter08_3rd_A.indd 19808Ross_Chapter08_3rd_A.indd 198 12-11-12 13:3212-11-12 13:32
Th e dividend in two periods is:
D2 = D1 × (1 + g) = [D0 × (1 + g)] × (1 + g) = D0 × (1 + g)2
We could repeat this process to come up with the dividend at any point in the future. In general, from our discussion of compound growth in previous chapters, we know that the dividend t peri- ods in the future, Dt, is given by:
Dt = D0 × (1 + g)t
As we showed in Chapter 6, a stock with dividends that grow at a constant rate forever is an example of a growing perpetuity. Th is will come in handy shortly when we are ready to fi nd the present value of this dividend stream.
Th e assumption of steady dividend growth might strike you as peculiar. Why would the dividend grow at a constant rate? Th e reason is that, for many companies—chartered banks, for example— steady growth in dividends is an explicit goal. For example, in 2011, Fortis Inc., a St. John’s, New- foundland and Labrador based international diversifi ed electric utility holding company, increased its dividend by 3.6% to $1.16 per share; this increase was notable because it was the 40th in a row. Such companies with a policy of consistently increasing dividends every year for a specifi c period of time are known as “dividend aristocrats”. In Canada, the time frame to attain dividend aristocrat status is fi ve consecutive years of dividend increases. Th ese companies are monitored by the S&P/ TSX Canadian Dividend Aristocrats Index. In the United States, it takes at least 25 consecutive years of increasing dividends for a company to qualify for the S&P 500 Dividend Aristocrats Index. Note also that by using a constant growth rate, we are simply trying to estimate the expected aver- age growth rate over a long period of time. While we use this expected average value in our model, the actual growth rate does not have to be the same every year. Th is subject falls under the general heading of dividend policy, so we defer further discussion of it to Chapter 17.
EXAMPLE 8.2: Dividend Growth Revisited
The Bank of Manitoba has just paid a dividend of $3 per share. The dividend grows at a steady rate of 8 percent per year. Based on this information, what would the dividend be in five years?
Here we have a $3 current amount that grows at 8 per- cent per year for five years. The future amount is thus:
$3 × (1.08)5 = $3 × 1.4693 = $4.41
The dividend, therefore, increases by $1.41 over the coming five years.
If the dividend grows at a steady rate, we have replaced the problem of forecasting an infi nite number of future dividends with the problem of coming up with a single growth rate, a consider- able simplifi cation. Taking D0 to be the dividend just paid and g to be the constant growth rate, the value of a share of stock can be written as:
P 0 = D 1 _______ (1 + r ) 1 +
D 2 _______ (1 + r ) 2 + D 3 _______ (1 + r ) 3 + …
= D 0 (1 + g ) 1 _________ (1 + r ) 1 +
D 0 (1 + g ) 2 _________ (1 + r ) 2 + D 0 (1 + g ) 3 _________ (1 + r ) 3 + …
As long as the growth rate, g, is less than the discount rate, r, the present value of this series of cash fl ows can be written very simply using the growing perpetuity formula from Chapter 6.
P0 = D 0 × (1 + g) ___________ r − g =
D 1 _____ r - g [8.3]
Th is elegant result goes by a lot of diff erent names. We call it the dividend growth model.4 By any
4 It is often called the Gordon Model in honour of the late Professor Myron Gordon, University of Toronto, its best- known developer.
dividend growth model A model that determines the current price of a stock as its dividend next period, divided by the discount rate less the dividend growth rate.
CHAPTER 8: Stock Valuation 199
08Ross_Chapter08_3rd_A.indd 19908Ross_Chapter08_3rd_A.indd 199 12-11-12 13:3212-11-12 13:32
name, it is very easy to use. To illustrate, suppose D0 is $2.30, r is 13 percent, and g is 5 percent. Th e price per share is:
P0 = D0 × (1 + g)/(r - g) = $2.30 × (1.05)/(.13 - .05) = $2.415/(.08) = $30.19
We can actually use the dividend growth model to get the stock price at any point in time, not just today. In general, the price of the stock as of time t is:
Pt = D t × (1 + g) ____________ r − g =
D t+1 _____ r − g [8.4]
In our example, suppose we were interested in the price of the stock in fi ve years, P5. We fi rst need the dividend at time 5, D5. Since the dividend just paid is $2.30 and the growth rate is 5 percent per year, D5 is:
D5 = $2.30 × (1.05)5 = $2.30 × 1.2763 = $2.935
From the dividend growth model, the price of stock in fi ve years is:
P5 = D 5 × (1 + g) ___________ r - g =
$2.935 × (1.05) _____________ .13 - .05 = $3.0822 _______ .08 = $38.53
EXAMPLE 8.3: Bank of Prince Edward Island
The next dividend for the Bank of Prince Edward Island (BPEI) will be $4.00 per share. Investors require a 16 per- cent return on companies such as BPEI. The bank’s dividend increases by 6 percent every year. Based on the dividend growth model, what is the value of BPEI stock today? What is the value in four years?
The only tricky thing here is that the next dividend, D1, is given as $4.00, so we won’t multiply this by (1 + g). With this in mind, the price per share is given by:
P0 = D1/(r - g) = $4.00/(.16 - .06) = $4.00/(.10) = $40.00
Because we already have the dividend in one year, the divi- dend in four years is equal to D1 × (1 + g)
3 = $4.00 × (1.06)3 = $4.764. The price in four years is therefore:
P4 = [D4 × (1 + g)]/(r - g) = [$4.764 × 1.06]/(.16 - .06) = $5.05/(.10) = $50.50
Notice in this example that P4 is equal to P0 × (1 + g) 4:
P4 = $50.50 = $40.00 × (1.06) 4 = P0 × (1 + g)
4
To see why this is so, notice that:
P4 = D5/(r - g)
However, D5 is just equal to D1 × (1 + g) 4, so we can write
P4 as:
P4 = D1 × (1 + g) 4/(r - g)
= {D1/(r - g)} × (1 + g) 4
= P0 × (1 + g) 4
This last example illustrates that the dividend growth model has the implicit assumption that the stock price will grow at the same constant rate as the dividend. This really isn’t too surprising. What it tells us is that if the cash flows on an investment grow at a constant rate through time, so does the value of that investment.
You might wonder what would happen with the dividend growth model if the growth rate, g, were greater than the discount rate, r. It looks like we would get a negative stock price because r - g would be less than zero. But this is not what would happen.
Instead, if the constant growth rate exceeds the discount rate, the stock price is infi nitely large. Why? When the growth rate is bigger than the discount rate, the present value of the dividends keeps on getting bigger and bigger. Essentially, the same is true if the growth rate and the discount rate are equal. In both cases, the simplifi cation that allows us to replace the infi nite stream of dividends with the dividend growth model is “illegal,” so the answers we get from the dividend growth model are nonsense unless the growth rate is less than the discount rate.
200 Part 3: Valuation of Future Cash Flows
08Ross_Chapter08_3rd_A.indd 20008Ross_Chapter08_3rd_A.indd 200 12-11-12 13:3212-11-12 13:32
NON-CONSTANT GROWTH The last case we consider is non-constant growth. The main reason to consider this is to allow for supernormal growth rates over some finite length of time. As we discussed earlier, the growth rate cannot exceed the required return indefinitely, but it certainly could do so for some number of years. To avoid the problem of having to forecast and discount an infinite number of dividends, we require that the dividends start growing at a con- stant rate sometime in the future.5
To give a simple example of non-constant growth, consider a company that is not currently paying dividends. You predict that in fi ve years, the company will pay a dividend for the fi rst time. Th e dividend will be $.50 per share. You expect this dividend to grow at 10 percent indefi - nitely. Th e required return on companies such as this one is 20 percent. What is the price of the stock today?
To see what the stock is worth today, we fi nd out what it will be worth once dividends are paid. We can then calculate the present value of that future price to get today’s price. Th e fi rst dividend will be paid in fi ve years, and the dividend will grow steadily from then on. Using the dividend growth model, the price in four years will be:
P4 = D5/(r - g) = $.50/(.20 - .10) = $5.00
If the stock will be worth $5.00 in four years, we can get the current value by discounting this back four years at 20 percent:
P0 = $5.00/(1.20)4 = $5.00/2.0736 = $2.41
Th e stock is therefore worth $2.41 today. Th e problem of non-constant growth is only slightly more complicated if the dividends are
not zero for the fi rst several years. For example, suppose you have come up with the following dividend forecasts for the next three years:
Year Expected Dividend
1 $1.00
2 2.00 3 2.50
Aft er the third year, the dividend will grow at a constant rate of 5 percent per year. Th e required return is 10 percent. What is the value of the stock today?
As always, the value of the stock is the present value of all the future dividends. To calculate this present value, we begin by computing the present value of the stock price three years down the road just as we did previously. We then add in the present value of the dividends paid between now and then. So, the price in three years is:
P3 = D3 × (1 + g)/(r - g) = $2.50 × (1.05)/(.10 - .05) = $52.50
We can now calculate the total value of the stock as the present value of the fi rst three dividends plus the present value of the price at time 3, P3:
P0 = D1/(1 + r)1 + D2/(1 + r)2 + D3/(1 + r)3 + P3/(1 + r)3 = $1.00/1.10 + $2.00/1.102 + $2.50/1.103 + $52.50/1.103 = $0.91 + 1.65 + 1.88 + 39.44 = $43.88
Th us, the value of the stock today is $43.88. Th e case of Apple Inc. illustrates the importance of growth in the pricing of a stock. When
Apple fi nally declared dividends in 2012, it was enjoying super-normal growth.
5 This type of analysis can also be done to take into account negative growth rates, which are really just a special case of supernormal growth.
CHAPTER 8: Stock Valuation 201
08Ross_Chapter08_3rd_A.indd 20108Ross_Chapter08_3rd_A.indd 201 12-11-12 13:3212-11-12 13:32
EXAMPLE 8.4: Supernormal Growth
Genetic Engineering Ltd. has been growing at a phenome- nal rate of 30 percent per year because of its rapid expan- sion and explosive sales. You believe that this growth rate will last for three more years and then drop to 10 percent per year. If the growth rate remains at 10 percent indefi- nitely, what is the total value of the stock? Total dividends just paid were $5 million, and the required return is 20 percent.
Genetic Engineering is an example of supernormal growth. It is unlikely that 30 percent growth can be sus- tained for any extended time. To value the equity in this company, we calculate the total dividends over the super- normal growth period:
Year Total Dividends (in $ millions)
1 $5.00 × (1.3) = $ 6.500 2 6.50 × (1.3) = 8.450 3 8.45 × (1.3) = 10.985
The price at year 3 can be calculated as:
P3 = D3 × (1 + g)/(r - g)
where g is the long-run growth rate. So we have:
P3 = $10.985 × (1.10)/(.20 - .10) = $120.835
To determine the value today, we need the present value of this amount plus the present value of the total dividends:
P0 = D1/(1 + r) 1 + D2/(1 + r)
2 + D3/(1 + r) 3 + P3/(1 + r)
3
= $6.50/1.20 + $8.45/1.202 + $10.985/1.203 + $120.835/1.203
= $5.42 + 5.87 + 6.36 + 69.93 = $87.58
The total value of the stock today is thus $87.58 million. If there were, for example, 20 million shares, the stock would be worth $87.58/20 = $4.38 per share.
Changing the Growth Rate When investment analysts use the dividend valuation model, they generally consider a range of growth scenarios. Th e way to do this is to set up the model on a spreadsheet and vary the inputs. For example, in our original analysis of Genetic Engineering Ltd. we chose numbers for the inputs as shown in the baseline scenario in the following table. Th e model calculated the price per share as $4.38. Th e table shows two other possible scenarios. In the best case, the super-normal growth rate is 40 percent and continues for fi ve instead of three years. Starting in Year 6, the normal growth rate is higher at 13 percent. In the worst case, normal growth starts immediately and there is no supernormal growth spurt. Th e required rate of return is 20 percent in all three cases.
Th e table shows that the model-calculated price is very sensitive to the inputs. In the worst case, the model price drops to $2.50; in the best case, it climbs to $8.14. Of course, there are many other scenarios we could consider with our spreadsheet. For example, many investment ana- lysts use a three-stage scenario with two supernormal and one normal growth rate. To illustrate, we could input a supernormal growth rate of 40 percent for three years, a second supernormal growth rate of 20 percent for two years, and then a normal growth rate of 10 percent indefi nitely.
Baseline Best Case Worst Case
Supernormal growth rate 30% 40% n/a Supernormal growth period 3 years 5 years 0 years Normal growth rate 10% 13% 10% Required rate of return 20% 20% 20% Model calculated price $4.38 $8.14 $2.50
Th e number of possible scenarios is infi nite but we have done enough to show that the value of a stock depends greatly on expected growth rates and how long they last. Our examples also show that valuing stocks with the dividend growth model is far from an exact science. In fact, the model has come under criticism based on a hindsight exercise comparing the present value of dividends against market prices for broad stock indexes. Critics raise two points. First, in the late 1990s, the level of the market, and especially tech stocks, was far higher than the present value of expected dividends. Second, market prices are far more volatile than the present value of dividends.
Th ese criticisms suggest that, while it is a useful analytical tool, the dividend growth model is not the last word on stock valuation. We look at alternative valuation techniques later in the chapter.
202 Part 3: Valuation of Future Cash Flows
08Ross_Chapter08_3rd_A.indd 20208Ross_Chapter08_3rd_A.indd 202 12-11-12 13:3212-11-12 13:32
Components of the Required Return Th us far, we have taken the required return or discount rate, r, as given. We have quite a bit to say on this subject in Chapters 12 and 13. For now, we want to examine the implications of the dividend growth model for this required return. Earlier, we calculated P0 as:
P0 = D1/(r - g)
If we rearrange this to solve for r, we get: (r - g) = D1/P0 [8.5] r = D1/P0 + g
Th is tells us that the total return, r, has two components: Th e fi rst of these, D1/P0, is called the dividend yield. Th e second part of the total return is the growth rate, g. We know that the divi- dend growth rate is also the rate at which the stock price grows (see Example 8.3). Th us, this growth rate can be interpreted as the capital gains yield, that is, the rate at which the value of the investment grows.
To illustrate the components of the required return, suppose we observe a stock selling for $20 per share. Th e next dividend will be $1 per share. You think that the dividend will grow by 10 percent more or less indefi nitely. What return does this stock off er you if this is correct? Th e dividend growth model calculates total return as:
r = Dividend yield + Capital gains yield r = D1/P0 + g
Th e total return works out to be:
r = $1/$20 + 10% = 5% + 10% = 15%
Th is stock, therefore, has a return of 15 percent. We can verify this answer by calculating the price in one year, P1, using 15 percent as the
required return. Based on the dividend growth model, this price is:
P1 = D1 × (1 + g)/(r - g) = $1 × (1.10)/(.15 - .10) = $1.1/.05 = $22
Notice that this $22 is $20 × (1.1), so the stock price has grown by 10 percent as it should. If you pay $20 for the stock today, you would get a $1 dividend at the end of the year and have a $22 - 20 = $2 gain. Your dividend yield is thus $1/$20 = 5%. Your capital gains yield is $2/$20 = 10%, so your total return would be 5% + 10% = 15%. Our discussion of stock valuation is summarized in Table 8.1.
It is important to note that dividends and dividend growth, although commonly used to esti- mate share value, are not the only factors that drive share prices. Factors like industry life cycle, the business cycle, supply or demand shocks (e.g., oil price spikes), liquidation value of the fi rm, replacement cost of the fi rm’s assets, and investor psychology are examples of other potentially important price drivers.6
To get a feel for actual numbers in this context, consider that, according to the 2010 Value Line Investment Survey, Proctor & Gamble’s dividends were expected to grow by 6 percent over the next 5 years, compared to a historical growth rate of 12 percent over the preceding 5 years and 11 percent over the preceding 10 years. In 2010, the projected dividend for the coming year was given at US $1.95. Th e stock price at that time was US$67 per share. What is the return investors require on P&G? Here, the dividend yield is 2.9 percent and the capital gains yield is 6 percent, giving a total required return of 8.9 percent.
6 A readable article on behavioural finance is: Robert J. Shiller, “From Efficient Markets Theory to Behavioral Finance,” Journal of Economic Perspectives, American Economic Association, vol. 17(1), pages 83–104, Winter 2003.
dividend yield A stock’s cash dividend divided by its current price.
capital gains yield The dividend growth rate or the rate at which the value of an investment grows.
CHAPTER 8: Stock Valuation 203
08Ross_Chapter08_3rd_A.indd 20308Ross_Chapter08_3rd_A.indd 203 12-11-12 13:3212-11-12 13:32
STOCK VALUATION USING MULTIPLES An obvious problem with our dividend- based approach to stock valuation is that many companies don’t pay dividends. What do we do in such cases? A common approach is to make use of the PE ratio, which we defined in Chapter 3 as the ratio of a stock’s price per share to its earnings per share (EPS) over the previous year. The idea here is to have some sort of benchmark or reference PE ratio, which we then multiply by earnings to come up with a price:
Price at time t = Pt = Benchmark PE ratio × EPSt Th e benchmark PE ratio could come from one of several possible sources. It could be based on
similar companies (perhaps an industry average or median), or it could be based on a company’s own historical values. For example, suppose we are trying to value Rovio Entertainment Limited, the creator of the video game Angry Birds used in various smartphones. Rovio does not pay divi- dends, but, aft er studying the industry, you feel that a PE ratio of 20 is appropriate for a company like this one. Total earnings over the four most recent quarters combined are $2 per share, so you think the stock should sell for 20 × $2 = $40. If it is going for less than $40, you might view it an attractive purchase and vice versa if it sells for more than $40.
Security analysts spend a lot of time forecasting future earnings, particularly for the com- ing year. A PE ratio that is based on estimated future earnings is called a “forward” PE ratio. For example, suppose you felt that Rovio’s earnings for the coming year were going to be $2.50, refl ecting the growing popularity of Angry Birds. In this case, if the current stock price is $40, the forward PE ratio is $40/$2.50 = 16.
Finally, notice that your benchmark PE ratio of 20 applies to earnings over the previ- ous year. If earnings over the coming year turn out to be $2.50, then the stock price one year from today should be 20 × $2.50 = $50. Forecast prices such as this one are oft en called “target” prices.
Oft en we will be interested in valuing newer companies that both don’t pay dividends and are not yet profi table, meaning that earnings are negative. What do we do now? One answer is to use the Price-sales ratio, which we also introduced in Chapter 3. As the name suggests, this ratio is the price per share on the stock divided by sales per share. You use this ratio just as you use the PE ratio, except you use sales per share instead of earnings per share. As with PE ratios, Price-to-sales ratios vary depending on company age and industry. Typical values are in the 0.8–2.0 range, but they can be much higher for younger, faster growing companies such as Rovio.
TABLE 8.1 Summary of stock valuation
The General Case
In general, the price today of a share of stock, P0, is the present value of all of its future dividends, D1, D2, D3, …
P0 = D 1 _______
(1 + r ) 1 +
D 2 _______ (1 + r ) 2
+ D 3 _______
(1 + r ) 3 + …
where r is the required return.
Zero Growth Case
If there is no growth in dividends, the price can be written as
P 0 = D 1 ___ r
Constant Growth Case
If the dividend grows at a steady rate, g, the price can be written as:
P 0 = D 1 _______
(r - g)
This result is called the dividend growth model.
Supernormal Growth Case
If the dividend grows steadily after t periods, the price can be written as:
P 0 = D 1 _______
(1 + r ) 1 +
D 2 _______ (1 + r ) 2
+ … + D t _______
(1 + r ) t +
P t _______ (1 + r ) t
where
P t = D t × (1 + g) ____________
(r - g)
Valuation using Multiples
For stocks that don’t pay dividends (or have erratic dividend growth rates), we can value them using the PE ratio and/or the Price-sales ratio: Pt = Benchmark PE ratio × EPSt Pt = Benchmark Price-sales ratio × Sales per share
The Required Return
The required return, r, can be written as the sum of two things: r = D1/P0 + g where D1/P0 is the dividend yield and g is the capital gains yield (which is the same thing as the growth rate in the dividends for the steady growth case).
204 Part 3: Valuation of Future Cash Flows
08Ross_Chapter08_3rd_A.indd 20408Ross_Chapter08_3rd_A.indd 204 12-11-12 13:3212-11-12 13:32
8.2 Common Stock Features
Th e term common stock means diff erent things to diff erent people, but it is usually applied to stock that has no special preference either in dividends or in bankruptcy.
Shareholders’ Rights Th e conceptual structure of the corporation assumes that shareholders elect directors who, in turn, hire management to carry out their directives. Shareholders, therefore, control the corpora- tion through their right to elect the directors. Generally, only shareholders have this right.
Directors are elected each year at an annual meeting. Despite the exceptions we discuss later, the general idea is “one share, one vote” (not one shareholder, one vote). Corporate democracy is thus very diff erent from our political democracy. With corporate democracy, the “golden rule” prevails absolutely.7 Large institutional investors, like the Caisse de dépôt and Ontario Teachers’ Pension Plan Board, take an active interest in exercising their votes to infl uence the corporate governance practices of the companies in their portfolios. For example, they are concerned that the elections for directors allow large investors to have an independent voice on the board.8
Th e introduction of new exchange listing rules and the Sarbanes-Oxley Act (SOX) in the United States, aft er the fallout of corporations such as Enron, legally enforces many aspects of U.S. cor- porate governance. Such practices, however, remain largely voluntary in Canada. Canadian fi rms are legally required to disclose whether or not they wish to comply with a recommendation of best practices put forth in the Dey Report published in 1994, but they are not legally mandated to follow the recommendations. Large Canadian fi rms oft en cross-list in the U.S. seeking increased liquidity, lower cost of capital, and access to foreign investors. When they do so, Canadian fi rms must comply with SOX.
Recent concern over company performance, including issues like managerial compensation and option packages, has renewed focus on shareholder activism. While shareholders oft en vote for the recommendations of management and/or the board of directors, concerned shareholders could also enter into a proxy contest. A proxy contest is essentially a fi ght for shareholder votes between parties attempting to control the corporation. For example, in 2012, one of Canadian Pacifi c Railway Ltd.’s largest shareholders, activist investor, William Ackman, waged a successful proxy battle to oust the existing CEO, Fred Green. While the board of directors backed the exist- ing CEO, Ackman was in favour of Hunter Harrison, who was credited with successfully turn- ing around Canadian Pacifi c’s rival Canadian National Railway Company. Aft er Ackman’s group gathered a large number of proxy votes, the board backed down and installed Harrison.
Aft er the global collapse of fi nancial markets, shareholder activists increased their criticism of executive compensation packages. In early 2009, in response to these concerns, Canada’s six largest banks adopted measures giving their shareholders a voice in determining executive pay packages. Beginning in 2010, these “say on pay” policies, give shareholders an advisory and non- binding vote on executive compensation.
Directors are elected at an annual shareholders’ meeting by a vote of the holders of a majority of shares present and entitled to vote. However, the exact mechanism for electing directors diff ers across companies. Th e two most important methods are cumulative voting and straight voting; we discuss these in Appendix 8A.
OTHER RIGHTS The value of a share of common stock in a corporation is directly related to the general rights of shareholders. In addition to the right to vote for directors, shareholders usually have the following rights under the Canadian Business Corporations Act:
1. The right to share proportionally in dividends paid. 2. The right to share proportionally in assets remaining after liabilities have been paid in a
liquidation. 3. The right to vote on shareholder matters of great importance, such as a merger, usually done
at the annual meeting or a special meeting.
7 The golden rule: Whosoever has the gold makes the rules. 8 A good shareholder resource is the Canadian Coalition for Good Governance (www.ccgg.ca). You can find current ex- amples of governance policies at lacaisse.com.en and otpp.com.
common stock Equity without priority for dividends or in bankruptcy.
CHAPTER 8: Stock Valuation 205
08Ross_Chapter08_3rd_A.indd 20508Ross_Chapter08_3rd_A.indd 205 12-11-12 13:3212-11-12 13:32
In addition, shareholders sometimes have the right to share proportionally in any new stock sold. Th is is called the preemptive right. Essentially, a preemptive right means that a company wishing to sell stock must fi rst off er it to the existing shareholders before off ering it to the general public. Th e purpose is to give a shareholder the opportunity to protect his or her proportionate ownership in the corporation.
Dividends A distinctive feature of corporations is that they have shares of stock on which they are autho-
rized by their bylaws to pay dividends to their shareholders. Dividends paid to shareholders rep- resent a return on the capital directly or indirectly contributed to the corporation by the share- holders. Th e payment of dividends is at the discretion of the board of directors.
Some important characteristics of dividends include the following:
1. Unless a dividend is declared by the board of directors of a corporation, it is not a liability of the corporation. A corporation cannot default on an undeclared dividend. As a conse- quence, corporations cannot become bankrupt because of nonpayment of dividends. The amount of the dividend and even whether it is paid are decisions based on the business judgement of the board of directors.
2. The payment of dividends by the corporation is not a business expense. Dividends are not deductible for corporate tax purposes. In short, dividends are paid out of after-tax profits of the corporation.
3. Dividends received by individual shareholders are partially sheltered by a dividend tax credit discussed in detail in Chapter 2. Corporations that own stock in other corporations are per- mitted to exclude 100 percent of the dividend amounts they receive from taxable Canadian corporations. The purpose of this provision is to avoid the double taxation of dividends.
Classes of Stock Some fi rms have more than one class of common stock.9 Oft en, the classes are created with unequal voting rights. Canadian Tire Corporation, for example, has two classes of common stock both publicly traded. Th e voting common stock was distributed as follows in 1990: 61 percent to three off spring of the company founder and the rest divided among Canadian Tire dealers, pen- sion funds, and the general public. Th e non-voting, Canadian Tire A stock was more widely held.
Th ere are many other Canadian corporations with restricted (non-voting) stock. Such stock made up around 15 percent of the market values of TSX listed shares at the end of 1989. Non- voting shares must receive dividends no lower than dividends on voting shares. Some companies pay a higher dividend on the non-voting shares. In 2011, Canadian Tire paid $1.10 per share on both classes of stock.
A primary reason for creating dual classes of stock has to do with control of the fi rm. If such stock exists, management of a fi rm can raise equity capital by issuing non-voting or limited- voting stock while maintaining control.
Because it is only necessary to own 51 percent of the voting stock to control a company, non- voting shareholders could be left out in the cold in the event of a takeover bid for the company. To protect the non-voting shareholders, most companies have a “coattail” provision giving non-voting shareholders either the right to vote or to convert their shares into voting shares that can be tendered to the takeover bid. In the Canadian Tire case, all Class A shareholders become entitled to vote and the coattail provision is triggered if a bid is made for “all or substantially all” of the voting shares.
Th e eff ectiveness of the coattail provision was tested in 1986 when the Canadian Tire Dealers Association off ered to buy 49 percent of the voting shares from the founding Billes family. In the absence of protection, the non-voting shareholders stood to lose substantially. Th e dealers bid at a large premium for the voting shares that were trading at $40 before the bid. Th e non-voting shares were priced at $14. Further, since the dealers were the principal buyers of Canadian Tire products, control of the company would have allowed them to adjust prices to benefi t themselves over the non-voting shareholders.
9 Our discussion of Canadian Tire draws heavily on Elizabeth Maynes, Chris Robinson, and Alan White, “How Much Is a Share Vote Worth?” Canadian Investment Review, Spring 1990, pp. 49–56.
dividends Return on capital of corporation paid by company to shareholders in either cash or stock.
canadiantire.ca
206 Part 3: Valuation of Future Cash Flows
08Ross_Chapter08_3rd_A.indd 20608Ross_Chapter08_3rd_A.indd 206 12-11-12 13:3212-11-12 13:32
Th e key question was whether the bid triggered the coattail. Th e dealers and the Billes family argued that the off er was for 49 percent of the stock not for “all or substantially all” of the voting shares. In the end, the Ontario Securities Commission ruled that the off er was unfair to the hold- ers of the A shares and its view was upheld in two court appeals.
As a result, investors believe that coattails have protective value but remain skeptical that they aff ord complete protection. In January 2012, Canadian Tire voting stock traded at a substantial premium over non-voting stock.
Sometimes there is a huge gap between diff erent classes of voting shares. For example, Magna International Inc., the Canadian auto parts manufacturer, established its dual class structure in 1978 with around 112 million Class A subordinate voting shares, each carrying one vote and around 726,000 Class B shares, each carrying 300 votes per share. Th e Class A shares were pub- licly traded on both the TSX and NYSE, while the Class B shares were fully owned by a trust con- trolled by the company founder, Frank Stronach. In 2010, Magna agreed to eliminate its dual class structure through a shareholder and court-approved plan of agreement. Magna made this change due to investor pressure for a more straightforward voting structure. More generally, institutional investors tend to hold smaller positions in dual class fi rms.10
1. What rights do shareholders have?
2. Why do some companies have two classes of stock?
8.3 Preferred Stock Features
Preferred stock diff ers from common stock because it has preference over common stock in the payment of dividends and in the distribution of corporation assets in the event of liquidation. Preference means the holders of the preferred shares must receive a dividend (in the case of an ongoing fi rm) before holders of common shares are entitled to anything. If the fi rm is liquidated, preferred shareholders rank behind all creditors but ahead of common shareholders.
Preferred stock is a form of equity from a legal, tax, and regulatory standpoint. In the last decade, chartered banks were important issuers of preferred stock as they moved to meet higher capital requirements. Importantly, however, holders of preferred stock generally have no voting privileges.
Stated Value Preferred shares have a stated liquidating value. Th e cash dividend is described in dollars per share or as a percentage of the stated value. For example, Bank of Montreal’s “$1.625” translates easily into a dividend yield of 6.5 percent of $25 stated value.
Cumulative and Non-Cumulative Dividends A preferred dividend is not like interest on a bond. Th e board of directors may decide not to pay the dividends on preferred shares, and their decision may have nothing to do with the current net income of the corporation.
Dividends payable on preferred stock are either cumulative or non-cumulative; most are cumulative. If preferred dividends are cumulative and are not paid in a particular year, they are carried forward as an arrearage. Usually both the cumulated (past) preferred dividends plus the current preferred dividends must be paid before the common shareholders can receive anything.
Unpaid preferred dividends are not debts of the fi rm. Directors elected by the common share- holders can defer preferred dividends indefi nitely. However, in such cases:
1. Common shareholders must also forgo dividends. 2. Holders of preferred shares are often granted voting and other rights if preferred dividends
have not been paid for some time.
10 Ortiz-Molina, H., & Zhao, X. (2008). Do voting rights affect institutional investment decisions? evidence from dual- class firms. Financial Management, 37(4), 713–745
Concept Questions
preferred stock Stock with dividend priority over common stock, normally with a fixed dividend rate, often without voting rights.
bmo.com
CHAPTER 8: Stock Valuation 207
08Ross_Chapter08_3rd_A.indd 20708Ross_Chapter08_3rd_A.indd 207 12-11-12 13:3212-11-12 13:32
Because preferred shareholders receive no interest on the cumulated dividends, some have argued that fi rms have an incentive to delay paying preferred dividends.
EXAMPLE 8.5: Preferred Stock Price
A preferred stock is an example of a share with a constant, zero-growth dividend. At the close of the trading day on January 12, 2012, CIBC’s class D preferred shares Series 26 showed the following information on the TSX:
The price of the share can be derived using the zero- growth formula. If the rate of return demanded by investors for preferred shares with similar risk is 5.51 percent, the price of CM.PR.D is calculated as:
P0 = D/r P0 = 1.44/0.0551 P0 = $26.13
Why did we assume a discount rate of 5.51 percent? We simply rearranged the zero-growth formula and calculated r as:
r = D/P0 r = 1.44/26.14 r = 0.0551
Other than a difference due to rounding, the price we cal- culated and the one reported on the TSX are the same! This should not surprise you as investors would be unwilling to invest in a security that did not offer their required rate of return.
Company Ticker Volume High Low Close Net Chg 52 Wk High
52 Wk Low Div Yield
CIBC CM.PR.D 1,250 26.14 26.05 26.14 -0.08 26.22 24.80 1.44 5.50
Is Preferred Stock Really Debt? A good case can be made that preferred stock is really debt in disguise, a kind of equity bond. Preferred shareholders receive a stated dividend only, and, if the corporation is liquidated. Oft en, preferreds carry credit ratings much like bonds. Furthermore, preferred stock is sometimes con- vertible into common stock. Preferred stocks are oft en callable by the issuer and the holder oft en has the right to sell the preferred stock back to the issuer at a set price.
In addition, in recent years, many new issues of preferred stock have had obligatory sinking funds. Such a sinking fund eff ectively creates a fi nal maturity since the entire issue is ultimately retired. For example, if a sinking fund required that 2 percent of the original issue be retired each year, the issue would be completely retired in 50 years.
On top of all of this, preferred stocks with adjustable dividends have been off ered in recent years. For example, a CARP is a cumulative, adjustable rate, preferred stock. Th ere are various types of fl oating-rate preferreds, some of which are quite innovative in the way the dividend is determined. For example, Royal Bank of Canada used to have First Preferred Shares Series C where dividends were set at 2/3 of the bank’s average Canadian prime rate with a fl oor dividend of 6.67 percent per year.
For all these reasons, preferred stock seems to be a lot like debt. In comparison to debt yields, the yields on preferred stock can appear very competitive. For example, the Royal Bank has another preferred stock with a $1.225 stated dividend. In January 2012, the market price of the $1.225 Royal Bank preferred was $25.56. Th is is a $1.225/$25.56 = 4.79% yield, similar to the yield on Royal Bank long-term debt. Also at that time, long-term Government of Canada bonds were yielding around 3 percent due to continuing easy monetary policy due to continued unset- tled conditions in Europe.
In addition to the competitive yields, corporate investors have a further incentive to hold the preferred stock issued by other corporations rather than holding their debt because 100 percent of the dividends they receive are exempt from income taxes. Similarly, individual investors receive a dividend tax credit for preferred dividends, although it is much smaller than the corporate tax break. Overall, from the time of the fi nancial crisis in 2008 to the time of writing in the winter of 2012, preferred stock was highly attractive.
208 Part 3: Valuation of Future Cash Flows
08Ross_Chapter08_3rd_A.indd 20808Ross_Chapter08_3rd_A.indd 208 12-11-12 13:3212-11-12 13:32
Preferred Stock and Taxes Turning to the issuers’ point of view, a tax loophole encourages corporations that are lightly taxed or not taxable due to losses or tax shelters to issue preferred stock. Such low-tax companies can make little use of the tax deduction on interest. However, they can issue preferred stock and enjoy lower fi nancing costs because preferred dividends are signifi cantly lower than interest payments.
In 1987, the federal government attempted to close this tax loophole by introducing a tax of 40 percent of the preferred dividends to be paid by the issuer of preferred stock. Th e tax is refunded (through a deduction) to taxable issuers only. Th e eff ect of this (and associated) tax changes was to narrow but not close the loophole.
Table 8.2 shows how Zero Tax Ltd., a corporation not paying any income taxes, can issue pre- ferred shares attractive to Full Tax Ltd., a second corporation taxable at a combined federal and provincial rate of 45 percent. Th e example assumes that Zero Tax is seeking $1,000 in fi nancing through either debt or preferred stock and that Zero Tax can issue either debt with a 10 percent coupon or preferred stock with a 6.7 percent dividend.11
Table 8.2 shows that with preferred stock fi nancing, Zero Tax pays out 6.7% × $1,000 = $67.00 in dividends and 40% × $67.00 = $26.80 in tax on the dividends for a total aft er-tax outlay of $93.80. Th is represents an aft er-tax cost of $93.80/$1,000 = 9.38%. Debt fi nancing is more expen- sive with an outlay of $100 and an aft er-tax yield of 10 percent. So Zero Tax is better off issuing preferred stock.
From the point of view of the purchaser, Full Tax Ltd., the preferred dividend is received tax free for an aft er-tax yield of 6.7 percent. If it bought debt issued by Zero Tax instead, Full Tax would pay income tax of $45 for a net aft er-tax receipt of $55 or 5.5 percent. So again, preferred stock is better than debt.
Of course, if we change the example to make the issuer fully taxable, the aft er-tax cost of debt drops to 5.5 percent making debt fi nancing more attractive. Th is reinforces our point that the tax motivation for issuing preferred stock is limited to lightly taxed companies.
TABLE 8.2
Tax loophole on preferred stock
Preferred Debt
Issuer: Zero Tax Ltd. Preferred dividend/interest paid $ 67.00 $ 100.00 Dividend tax at 40% 26.80 0.00 Tax deduction on interest 0.00 0.00 Total financing cost $ 93.80 $ 100.00 After-tax cost 9.38% 10.00%
Purchaser: Full Tax Ltd. Before-tax income $ 67.00 $ 100.00 Tax 0.00 45.00 After-tax income $ 67.00 $ 55.00 After-tax yield 6.70% 5.50%
Beyond Taxes For fully taxed fi rms, the fact that dividends are not an allowable deduction from taxable cor- porate income is the most serious obstacle to issuing preferred stock, but there are a couple of reasons beyond taxes why preferred stock is issued.
First, fi rms issuing preferred stock can avoid the threat of bankruptcy that might otherwise exist if debt were relied on. Unpaid preferred dividends are not debts of a corporation, and pre- ferred shareholders cannot force a corporation into bankruptcy because of unpaid dividends.
11 We set the preferred dividend at around two-thirds of the debt yield to reflect market practice as exemplified by the Royal Bank issue discussed earlier. Further discussion of preferred stock and taxes is in I. Fooladi, P. A. McGraw, and G. S. Roberts, “Preferred Share Rules Freeze Out the Individual Investor,” CA Magazine, April 11, 1988, pp. 38–41.
CHAPTER 8: Stock Valuation 209
08Ross_Chapter08_3rd_A.indd 20908Ross_Chapter08_3rd_A.indd 209 12-11-12 13:3212-11-12 13:32
A second reason for issuing preferred stock concerns control of the fi rm. Since preferred share- holders oft en cannot vote, preferred stock may be a means of raising equity without surrendering control.
On the demand side, most preferred stock is owned by corporations. Corporate income from preferred stock dividends enjoys a tax exemption, which can substantially reduce the tax disad- vantage of preferred stock. Some of the new types of adjustable-rate preferred stocks are highly suited for corporations needing short-term investments for temporarily idle cash.
1. What is preferred stock?
2. Why is it arguably more like debt than equity?
3. Why is it attractive for firms that are not paying taxes to issue preferred stock?
4. What are two reasons unrelated to taxes why preferred stock is issued?
8.4 Stock Market Reporting
If you look through the pages of the National Post, in another fi nancial newspaper, or at theglobeandmail.com/globe-investor/, you fi nd information on a large number of stocks in several diff erent markets.12 Figure 8.1 reproduces “Th e TSX Top 100” from the National Post on January 13, 2012. For a more detailed listing of all stocks on the TSX, you can visit financialpost.com or the website of a similar fi nancial newspaper. In Figure 8.1, locate the line for Lundin Mining Corp. Th e Close, as you might have guessed, is the closing, price during the day. Th e Net Change of -0.15 tells us the closing price of $4.53 per share is $0.15 lower than the closing price the day before.
FIGURE 8.1
TSX—Daily Most Active Stocks on January 13, 2012— Financial Post
Company Symbol Volume Close Net Change
Bombardier Inc BBD.B 16,575,251 4.41 -0.09 iShares S&P/TSX 60 Index XIU 7,378,897 17.54 -0.06 Connacher Oil & Gas Ltd CLL 4,157,009 1.09 +0.07 Lake Shore Gold Corp LSG 4,145,020 1.39 -0.13 Manulife Financial Corp MFC 3,911,353 11.92 +0.03 Nexen Inc NXY 3,783,411 18.07 -0.14 Talisman Energy Inc TLM 3,765,932 11.74 -0.41 Suncor Energy Inc SU 3,651,347 32.63 -0.02 Horizons BetaPro Gas Bull HNU 3,597,822 5.39 -0.37 AuRico Gold Inc AUQ 3,534,807 8.77 -0.14 Royal Bank of Canada RY 3,295,669 52.09 -0.68 Orbite Aluminae Inc ORT 3,005,032 2.99 +0.16 Yamana Gold Inc YRI 2,980,941 16.05 -0.04 Poseidon Concepts Corp PSN 2,707,659 13.80 +0.01 Lundin Mining Corp LUN 2,636,242 4.53 -0.15 Horizons BetaPro Oil Bull HOU 2,461,270 6.33 +0.02 Horizons BetaPro Oil Bear HOD 2,356,799 5.37 -0.03 Thomson Reuters Corp TRI 2,255,529 28.56 -0.14 Uranium One Inc UUU 2,225,826 2.37 -0.11 Encana Corp ECA 2,206,800 17.89 -0.31
Source: Reprinted with permission of the Financial Post, January 13, 2012.
Volume tells us how many shares traded during the day. For example, the 2,636,242 for Lundin Mining Corp. tells us that 2,636,242 shares changed hands. If the average price during the day was $4.5 or so, the dollar volume of transactions was on the order of $4.5 × 2,636,242 = $11,863,089 worth of Lundin stock.
12 To look up detailed stock information on line, any one of the following Web pages can provide excellent data: canada. com/business, theglobeandmail.com/globe-investor/, ca.finance.yahoo.com, or money.ca.msn.com/.
Concept Questions
210 Part 3: Valuation of Future Cash Flows
08Ross_Chapter08_3rd_A.indd 21008Ross_Chapter08_3rd_A.indd 210 12-11-12 13:3212-11-12 13:32
Growth Opportunities We previously spoke of the growth rate of dividends. We now want to address the related
concept of growth opportunities. Imagine a company with a level stream of earnings per share in perpetuity. Th e company pays all these earnings out to shareholders as dividends. Hence,
EPS = Div
where EPS is earnings per share and Div is dividends per share. A company of this type is fre- quently called a cash cow.
From the perpetuity formula of the previous chapter, the value of a share of stock is:
Value of a share of stock when firm acts as a cash cow: EPS ____ r = Div ____ r
where r is the discount rate on the fi rm’s stock. Th e preceding policy of paying out all earnings as dividends may not be the optimal one. Many
fi rms have growth opportunities, that is, opportunities to invest in profi table projects. Because these projects can represent a signifi cant fraction of the fi rm’s value, it would be foolish to forgo them to pay out all earnings as dividends.
Although management frequently thinks of a set of growth opportunities, let’s focus on only one opportunity; that is, the opportunity to invest in a single project. Suppose the fi rm retains the entire dividend at Date 1 to invest in a particular capital budgeting project. Th e net present value per share of the project as of Date 0 is NPVGO, which stands for the net present value (per share) of the growth opportunity.
What is the price of a share of stock at Date 0 if the fi rm decides to take on the project at Date 1? Because the per-share value of the project is added to the original stock price, the stock price must now be:
Stock price after firm commits to new project: EPS ____ r + NPVGO
Th is equation indicates that the price of a share of stock can be viewed as the sum of two diff er- ent items: Th e fi rst term (EPS/r) is the value of the fi rm if it rested on its laurels, that is, if it simply distributed all earnings to the shareholders. Th e second term is the additional value if the fi rm retains earnings to fund new projects.
Application: The Price-Earnings Ratio Even though our stock valuation formulas focused on dividends, not earnings, fi nancial analysts oft en rely on price earnings ratios (P/Es). Financial newspapers and websites also report P/Es.
We showed in the previous section that
Price per share = EPS ____ r + NPVGO
Dividing by EPS yields
Price per share _____________ EPS = 1 __ r +
NPVGO ________ EPS
Th e left -hand side is the formula for the price-earnings ratio. Th e equation shows that the P/E ratio is related to the net present value of growth opportunities. As an example, consider two fi rms each having just reported earnings per share of $1. However, one fi rm has many valu- able growth opportunities while the other fi rm has no growth opportunities at all. Th e fi rm with growth opportunities should sell at a higher price because an investor is buying both current income of $1 and growth opportunities. Suppose the fi rm with growth opportunities sells for $16 and the other fi rm sells for $8. Th e $1 earnings per share appears in the denominator of the P/E ratio for both fi rms. Th us, the P/E ratio is 16 for the fi rm with growth opportunities, but only 8 for the fi rm without the opportunities.
Because P/E ratios are based on earnings and not cash fl ows, investors should follow up with cash fl ow analysis using the dividend valuation model. Using a spreadsheet to look at diff erent growth scenarios lets investors quantify projected growth in cash fl ows.
In January 2012, stocks like Salesforce.com were trading at P/Es over 5000! Th is was mainly due to the sudden surge in cloud computing services. Clearly the P/E analysis we present could
salesforce.com/
CHAPTER 8: Stock Valuation 211
08Ross_Chapter08_3rd_A.indd 21108Ross_Chapter08_3rd_A.indd 211 12-11-12 13:3212-11-12 13:32
never explain these prices in terms of growth opportunities. Some analysts who recommended buying these stocks developed a new measure called the PEG ratio to justify their recommenda- tion. Although it is not based on any theory, the PEG ratio became popular among proponents of Internet stocks. On the other side, many analysts believed that the market had lost touch with reality. To these analysts, Internet stock prices were the result of speculative fever. Subsequent events support the second group of analysts.
1. What are the relevant cash flows for valuing a share of common stock?
2. Does the value of a share of stock depend on how long you expect to keep it?
3. How does expected dividend growth impact on the stock price in the dividend valuation model? Is this consistent with the NPVGO approach?
Robert J. Shiller on How a Bubble Stayed Under the Radar
ONE great puzzle about the recent housing bubble is why even most experts didn’t recognize the bubble as it was forming.
Alan Greenspan, a very serious student of the markets, didn’t see it, and, moreover, he didn’t see the stock market bubble of the 1990s, either. In his 2007 autobiography, The Age of Turbulence: Adventures in a New World, he talks at some length about his suspicions in the 1990s that there was irrational exuberance in the stock market. But in the end, he says, he just couldn’t fi gure it out: “I’d come to realize that we’d never be able to identify irrational exuberance with certainty, much less act on it, until after the fact.”
With the housing bubble, Mr. Greenspan didn’t seem to have any doubt: “I would tell audiences that we were facing not a bubble but a froth—lots of small local bubbles that never grew to a scale that could threaten the health of the overall economy.”
The failure to recognize the housing bubble is the core reason for the collapsing house of cards we are seeing in fi nancial markets in the United States and around the world. If people do not see any risk, and see only the prospect of outsized investment returns, they will pursue those returns with disregard for the risks.
Were all these people stupid? It can’t be. We have to consider the possibility that perfectly rational people can get caught up in a bubble. In this connection, it is helpful to refer to an important bit of economic theory about herd behavior.
Three economists, Sushil Bikhchandani, David Hirshleifer, and Ivo Welch, in a classic 1992 article, defi ned what they call “information cascades” that can lead people into serious error. They found that these cascades can affect even perfectly rational people and cause bubblelike phenomena. Why? Ultimately, people sometimes need to rely on the judgment of others, and
therein lies the problem. The theory provides a framework for understanding the real estate turbulence we are now observing.
Mr. Bikhchandani and his co-authors present this example: Suppose that a group of individuals must make an important decision, based on useful but incomplete information. Each one of them has received some information relevant to the decision, but the information is incomplete and “noisy” and does not always point to the right conclusion.
Let’s update the example to apply it to the recent bubble: The individuals in the group must each decide whether real estate is a terrifi c investment and whether to buy some property. Suppose that there is a 60 percent probability that any one person’s information will lead to the right decision.
In other words, that person’s information is useful but not defi nitive—and not clear enough to make a fi rm judgment about something as momentous as a market bubble. Perhaps that is how Mr. Greenspan assessed the probability that he could make an accurate judgment about the stock market bubble.
The theory helps explain why he—or anyone trying to verify the existence of a market bubble—may have squelched his own judgment.
The fundamental problem is that the information obtained by any individual—even one as well-placed as the chairman of the Federal Reserve—is bound to be incomplete. If people could somehow hold a national town meeting and share their independent information, they would have the opportunity to see the full weight of the evidence. Any individual errors would be averaged out, and the participants would collectively reach the correct decision.
Of course, such a national town meeting is impossible. Each person makes decisions individually, sequentially, and reveals his decisions through actions—in this case, by entering the housing market and bidding up home prices.
IN THEIR OWN WORDS…
Concept Questions
212 Part 3: Valuation of Future Cash Flows
08Ross_Chapter08_3rd_A.indd 21208Ross_Chapter08_3rd_A.indd 212 12-11-12 13:3212-11-12 13:32
Suppose houses are really of low investment value, but the fi rst person to make a decision reaches the wrong conclusion (which happens, as we have assumed, 40 percent of the time). The fi rst person, A, pays a high price for a home, thus signaling to others that houses are a good investment.
The second person, B, has no problem if his own data seem to confi rm the information provided by A’s willingness to pay a high price. But B faces a quandary if his own information seems to contradict A’s judgment. In that case, B would conclude that he has no worthwhile information, and so he must make an arbitrary decision—say, by fl ipping a coin to decide whether to buy a house.
The result is that even if houses are of low investment value, we may now have two people who make purchasing decisions that reveal their conclusion that houses are a good investment.
As others make purchases at rising prices, more and more people will conclude that these buyers’ information about the market outweighs their own.
Mr. Bikhchandani and his co-authors worked out this rational herding story carefully, and their results show that the probability of the cascade leading to an incorrect assumption is 37 percent. In other words, more than one-third of the time, rational individuals, all given information that is 60 percent accurate, will reach the wrong collective conclusion.
Thus, we should expect to see cascades driving our thinking from time to time, even when everyone is absolutely rational and calculating.
This theory poses a major challenge to the “effi cient markets” view of the world, which assumes that investors are like independent-minded voters, relying only on their own information to make decisions. The effi cient-markets view holds that the market is wiser than any individual: in aggregate, the market will come to the correct decision. But the theory is fl awed because it does not recognize that people must rely on the judgments of others.
Now, let’s modify the Bikhehandani-Hirshleifer-Welch example again, so that the individuals are no longer purely rational beings. Instead, they are real people, subject to emotional reactions.
Furthermore, these people are being infl uenced by agencies like the National Association of Realtors, which is conducting a public-relations campaign intended to show that putting money into housing is a reliable way to build wealth. Under these circumstances, it’s easy to understand how even experts could come to believe that housing is a spectacular investment.
It is clear that just such an information cascade helped to create the housing bubble. And it is now possible that a downward cascade will develop—in which rational individuals become excessively pessimistic as they see others bidding down home prices to abnormally low levels.
Robert J. Shiller is Arthur M. Okun Professor of Economics at Yale and co- founder and chief economist of MacroMarkets LLC. He also writes for The New York Times. His comments are reproduced with permission from the March 2, 2008 edition.
8.5 SUMMARY AND CONCLUSIONS
Th is chapter has covered the basics of stocks and stock valuation. Th e key points include:
1. The cash flows from owning a share of stock come in the form of future dividends. We saw that in certain special cases it is possible to calculate the present value of all the future divi- dends and thus come up with a value for the stock.
2. As the owner of shares of common stock in a corporation, you have various rights, including the right to vote to elect corporate directors. Voting in corporate elections can be either cu- mulative or straight. Most voting is actually done by proxy, and a proxy battle breaks out when competing sides try to gain enough votes to have their candidates for the board elected.
3. In addition to common stock, some corporations have issued preferred stock. The name stems from the fact that preferred shareholders must be paid first, before common share- holders can receive anything. Preferred stock has a fixed dividend.
Th is chapter completes Part 3 of our book. By now, you should have a good grasp of what we mean by present value. You should also be familiar with how to calculate present values, loan pay- ments, and so on. In Part 4, we cover capital budgeting decisions. As you will see, the techniques you learned in Chapters 5-8 form the basis for our approach to evaluating business investment decisions.
CHAPTER 8: Stock Valuation 213
08Ross_Chapter08_3rd_A.indd 21308Ross_Chapter08_3rd_A.indd 213 12-11-12 13:3212-11-12 13:32
Key Terms capital gains yield (page 203) common stock (page 205) cumulative voting (page 218) dividend growth model (page 199) dividend yield (page 203)
dividends (page 206) preferred stock (page 207) proxy (page 218) straight voting (page 218)
Chapter Review Problems and Self-Test 8.1 Dividend Growth and Stock Valuation The Brigapenski Co.
has just paid a cash dividend of $2 per share. Investors require a 16 percent return from investments such as this. If the divi- dend is expected to grow at a steady 8 percent per year, what is the current value of the stock? What will the stock be worth in five years?
8.2 More Dividend Growth and Stock Valuation In Self-Test Problem 8.1, what would the stock sell for today if the divi- dend was expected to grow at 20 percent per year for the next three years and then settle down to 8 percent per year, indefinitely?
Answers to Self-Test Problems 8.1 The last dividend, D0, was $2. The dividend is expected to grow steadily at 8 percent. The required return is 16 percent. Based on the
dividend growth model, we can say that the current price is: P0 = D1/(r - g) = D0 × (1 + g)/(r - g)
= $2 × 1.08/(.16 - .08) = $2.16/.08 = $27
We could calculate the price in five years by calculating the dividend in five years and then using the growth model again. Alternatively, we could recognize that the stock price will increase by 8 percent per year and calculate the future price directly. We’ll do both. First, the dividend in five years will be:
D5 = D0 × (1 + g)5 = $2 × 1.4693 = 2.9387
The price in five years would therefore be: P5 = D5 × (1 + g)/(r - g)
= $2.9387 × 1.08/.08 = $3.1738/.08 = $39.67
Once we understand the dividend model, however, it’s easier to notice that: P5 = P0 × (1 + g)5
= $27 × (1.08)5 = $27 × 1.4693 = $39.67
Notice that both approaches yield the same price in five years. 8.2 In this scenario, we have supernormal growth for the next three years. We’ll need to calculate the dividends during the rapid-growth
period and the stock price in three years. The dividends are: D1 = $2.00 × 1.20 = $2.400
D2 = $2.40 × 1.20 = $2.880 D3 = $2.88 × 1.20 = $3.456
After three years, the growth rate falls to 8 percent indefinitely. The price at that time, P3, is thus: P3 = D3 × (1 + g)/(r - g)
= $3.456 × 1.08/(.16 - .08) = $3.7325/.08 = $46.656
To complete the calculation of the stock’s present value, we have to determine the present value of the three dividends and the future price:
P0 = D 1 _______ (1 + r ) 1 +
D 2 _______ (1 + r ) 2 + D 3 _______ (1 + r ) 3 +
P 3 _______ (1 + r ) 3
= $2.40 _____ 1.16 + 2.88 _____ 1.1 6 2 +
3.456 _____ 1.1 6 3 + 46.656 ______ 1.1 6 3
= $2.07 + 2.14 + 2.21 + 29.89 = $36.31
214 Part 3: Valuation of Future Cash Flows
08Ross_Chapter08_3rd_A.indd 21408Ross_Chapter08_3rd_A.indd 214 12-11-12 13:3212-11-12 13:32
Concepts Review and Critical Thinking Questions 1. (LO1) Why does the value of a share of stock depend on
dividends? 2. (LO1) A substantial percentage of the companies listed on
the TSX and the Nasdaq don’t pay dividends, but investors are nonetheless willing to buy shares in them. How is this possible given your answer to the previous question?
3. (LO1) Referring to the previous question, under what cir- cumstances might a company choose not to pay dividends?
4. (LO1) Under what two assumptions can we use the dividend growth formula presented in the chapter to determine the value of a share of stock? Comment on the reasonableness of these assumptions.
5. (LO2) Suppose a company has a preferred stock issue and a common stock issue. Both have just paid a $2 dividend. Which do you think will have a higher price, a share of the preferred or a share of the common?
6. (LO1) Based on the dividend growth model, what are the two components of the total return on a share of stock? Which do you think is typically larger?
7. (LO1) In the context of the dividend growth model, is it true that the growth rate in dividends and the growth rate in the price of the stock are identical?
8. (LO3) When it comes to voting in elections, what are the dif- ferences between political democracy and corporate democracy?
9. (LO3) Is it unfair or unethical for corporations to create classes of stock with unequal voting rights?
10. (LO2) Some companies, such as Canadian Tire, have created classes of stock with no voting rights at all. Why would invest- ors buy such stock?
Questions and Problems 1. Stock Values (LO1) The Stopperside Wardrobe Co. just paid a dividend of $1.95 per share on its stock. The dividends are
expected to grow at a constant rate of 6 percent per year indefinitely. If investors require a 11 percent return on The Stopperside Wardrobe Co. stock, what is the current price? What will the price be in three years? In 15 years?
2. Stock Values (LO1) The next dividend payment by Kilbride Inc. will be $2.10 per share. The dividends are anticipated to maintain a 5 percent growth rate forever. If the stock currently sells for $48.00 per share, what is the required return?
3. Stock Values (LO1) For the company in the previous problem, what is the dividend yield? What is the expected capital gains yield?
4. Stock Values (LO1) Torbay Corporation will pay a $3.04 per share dividend next year. The company pledges to increase its dividend by 3.8 percent per year indefinitely. If you require an 11 percent return on your investment, how much will you pay for the company’s stock today?
5. Stock Valuation (LO1) Glenhill Co. is expected to maintain a constant 5.2 percent growth rate in its dividends indefinitely. If the company has a dividend yield of 6.3 percent, what is the required return on the company’s stock?
6. Stock Valuation (LO1) Suppose you know that a company’s stock currently sells for $47 per share and the required return on the stock is 11 percent. You also know that the total return on the stock is evenly divided between a capital gains yield and a dividend yield. If it’s the company’s policy to always maintain a constant growth rate in its dividends, what is the current dividend per share?
7. Stock Valuation (LO1) Goulds Corp. pays a constant $9.75 dividend on its stock. The company will maintain this dividend for the next 11 years and will then cease paying dividends forever. If the required return on this stock is 10 percent, what is the current share price?
8. Valuing Preferred Stock (LO1) Big Pond Inc. has an issue of preferred stock outstanding that pays a $5.50 dividend every year in perpetuity. If this issue currently sells for $108 per share, what is the required return?
9. Stock Valuation (LO1) Talcville Farms just paid a dividend of $3.50 on its stock. The growth rate in dividends is expected to be a constant 5 percent per year indefinitely. Investors require a 14 percent return on the stock for the first three years, a 12 percent return for the next three years, and an 10 percent return thereafter. What is the current share price?
10. Nonconstant Growth (LO1) Foxtrap Bearings Inc. is a young start-up company. No dividends will be paid on the stock over the next nine years because the firm needs to plow back its earnings to fuel growth. The company will pay a $10 per share dividend in 10 years and will increase the dividend by 5 percent per year thereafter. If the required return on this stock is 14 percent, what is the current share price?
11. Non-constant Dividends (LO1) Kelligrews Inc. has an odd dividend policy. The company has just paid a dividend of $6 per share and has announced that it will increase the dividend by $4 per share for each of the next 5 years, and then never pay another dividend. If you require an 11 percent return on the company’s stock, how much will you pay for a share today?
12. Non-constant Dividends (LO1) Chamberlain Corporation is expected to pay the following dividends over the next four years: $11, $8, $5, and $2. Afterward, the company pledges to maintain a constant 5 percent growth rate in dividends forever. If the required return on the stock is 12 percent, what is the current share price?
13. Supernormal Growth (LO1) Duffs Co. is growing quickly. Dividends are expected to grow at a 30 percent rate for the next three years, with the growth rate falling off to a constant 6 percent thereafter. If the required return is 13 percent and the company just paid a $1.80 dividend, what is the current share price?
Basic (Questions
1–8)
4
6
Intermediate (Questions
9–20)
CHAPTER 8: Stock Valuation 215
08Ross_Chapter08_3rd_A.indd 21508Ross_Chapter08_3rd_A.indd 215 12-11-12 13:3212-11-12 13:32
14. Supernormal Growth (LO1) Rabbit Town Corp. is experiencing rapid growth. Dividends are expected to grow at 25 percent per year during the next three years, 15 percent over the following year, and then 8 percent per year indefinitely. The required return on this stock is 13 percent, and the stock currently sells for $76 per share. What is the projected dividend for the coming year?
15. Negative Growth (LO1) Foxtrap Inc. is a mature manufacturing firm. The company just paid a $10.46 dividend, but management expects to reduce the payout by 4 percent per year indefinitely. If you require an 11.5 percent return on this stock, what will you pay for a share today?
16. Finding the Dividend (LO1) Codner Corporation stock currently sells for $64 per share. The market requires a 10 percent return on the firm’s stock. If the company maintains a constant 4.5 percent growth rate in dividends, what was the most recent dividend per share paid on the stock?
17. Valuing Preferred Stock (LO1) Peachytown Bank just issued some new preferred stock. The issue will pay a $20 annual dividend in perpetuity, beginning 20 years from now. If the market requires a 6.4 percent return on this investment, how much does a share of preferred stock cost today?
18. Using Stock Quotes (LO4) You have found the following stock quote for Enerplus Corp. in the Globe Investor on January 19, 2012. What was the closing price for this stock that appeared in yesterday’s paper? If the company currently has 232,455 shares of stock outstanding, what was net income for the most recent four quarters?
52-WEEK STOCK (DIV)
YLD % PE
VOL 100s CLOSE
NET CHGHI LO
32.83 23.00 ERF 2.16 9.20 10.21 179 ?? 0.03
19. Two-Stage Dividend Growth Model (LO1) Upper Gullies Corp. just paid a dividend of $1.25 per share. The dividends are expected to grow at 28 percent for the next eight years and then level off to a 6 percent growth rate indefinitely. If the required return is 13 percent, what is the price of the stock today?
20. Two-Stage Dividend Growth Model (LO1) Lance Cove Choppers Inc. is experiencing rapid growth. The company expects dividends to grow at 25 percent per year for the next 11 years before leveling off at 6 percent into perpetuity. The required return on the company’s stock is 12 percent. If the dividend per share just paid was $1.74, what is the stock price?
21. Capital Gains versus Income (LO1) Consider four different stocks, all of which have a required return of 19 percent and a most recent dividend of $4.50 per share. Stocks W, X, and Y are expected to maintain constant growth rates in dividends for the foreseeable future of 10 percent, 0 percent, and -5 percent per year, respectively. Stock Z is a growth stock that will increase its dividend by 20 percent for the next two years and then maintain a constant 12 percent growth rate thereafter. What is the dividend yield for each of these four stocks? What is the expected capital gains yield? Discuss the relationship among the various returns that you find for each of these stocks.
22. Stock Valuation (LO1) Most corporations pay quarterly dividends on their common stock rather than annual dividends. Barring any unusual circumstances during the year, the board raises, lowers, or maintains the current dividend once a year and then pays this dividend out in equal quarterly installments to its shareholders.
a. Suppose a company currently pays a $3.20 annual dividend on its common stock in a single annual installment, and man- agement plans on raising this dividend by 6 percent per year indefinitely. If the required return on this stock is 12 percent, what is the current share price?
b. Now suppose the company in (a) actually pays its annual dividend in equal quarterly installments; thus, the company has just paid a $.80 dividend per share, as it has for the previous three quarters. What is your value for the current share price now? (Hint: Find the equivalent annual end-of-year dividend for each year.) Comment on whether you think this model of stock valuation is appropriate.
23. Non-constant Growth (LO1) Holyrood Co. just paid a dividend of $2.45 per share. The company will increase its dividend by 20 percent next year and will then reduce its dividend growth rate by 5 percentage points per year until it reaches the industry average of 5 percent dividend growth, after which the company will keep a constant growth rate forever. If the required return on Holyrood stock is 11 percent, what will a share of stock sell for today?
24. Non-constant Growth (LO1) This one’s a little harder. Suppose the current share price for the firm in the previous problem is $63.82 and all the dividend information remains the same. What required return must investors be demanding on Holyrood stock? (Hint: Set up the valuation formula with all the relevant cash flows, and use trial and error to find the unknown rate of return.)
25. Constant Dividend Growth Model (LO1) Assume a stock has dividends that grow at a constant rate forever. If you value the stock using the constant dividend growth model, how many years worth of dividends constitute one-half of the stock’s current price?
21. C m f
Challenge (Questions
21–25)
2
216 Part 3: Valuation of Future Cash Flows
08Ross_Chapter08_3rd_A.indd 21608Ross_Chapter08_3rd_A.indd 216 12-11-12 13:3212-11-12 13:32
Stock Valuation at Siddle Inc.
Siddle Inc. was founded nine years ago by brother and sister Wendy and Peter Siddle. The company manufactures and in- stalls commercial heating, ventilation, and cooling (HVAC) units. Siddle Inc. has experienced rapid growth because of a proprietary technology that increases the energy efficiency of its units. The company is equally owned by Wendy and Peter. The original partnership agreement between the siblings gave each 50,000 shares of stock. In the event either wished to sell stock, the shares first had to be offered to the other at a dis- counted price. Although neither sibling wants to sell, they have decided they should value their holdings in the company. To get started, they have gathered information about their main competitors, summarized in the table below: In addition, they found that Expert HVAC Corporation’s negative earnings per share were the result of an accounting write-off last year. Without the write-off, earnings per share for the company would have been $1.06. Last year, Siddle Inc. had an EPS of $4.54 and paid a divi- dend to Wendy and Peter of $63,000 each. The company also had a return on equity of 25 percent. The siblings believe that 20 percent is an appropriate required return for the company.
Questions
1. Assuming the company continues its current growth rate, what is the value per share of the company’s stock?
2. To verify their calculations, Wendy and Peter have hired David Boon as a consultant. David was previously an eq- uity analyst and covered the HVAC industry. David has examined the company’s financial statements, as well as its competitors. Although Siddle Inc. currently has a tech- nological advantage, his research indicates that other
companies are investigating methods to improve effi- ciency. Given this, David believes that the company’s technological advantage will last only for the next five years. After that period, the company’s growth will likely slow to the industry growth average. Additionally, David believes that the required return used by the company is too high. He believes the industry average required re- turn is more appropriate. Under this growth rate assump- tion, what is your estimate of the stock price?
3. What is the industry average price-earnings ratio? What is the price-earnings ratio for Siddle Inc.? Is this the relation- ship you would expect between the two ratios? Why?
4. Wendy and Peter are unsure how to interpret the price- earnings ratio. After some head scratching, they’ve come up with the following expression for the price-earnings ratio:
P 0 __ E 1
= 1 - b _____________ R - (ROE × b)
Beginning with the constant dividend growth model, verify this result. What does this expression imply about the relationship between the dividend payout ratio, the required return on the stock, and the company’s ROE?
5. Assume the company’s growth rate slows to the industry average in five years. What future return on equity does this imply, assuming a constant payout ratio?
6. After discussing the stock value with David, Wendy and Peter agree that they would like to increase the value of the company stock. Like many small business owners, they want to retain control of the company, but they do not want to sell stock to outside investors. They also feel that the company’s debt is at a manageable level and do not want to borrow more money. How can they increase the price of the stock? Are there any conditions under which this strategy would not increase the stock price?
Siddle Inc. Competitors EPS DPS Stock Price ROE R
Arctic Cooling Inc. $0.79 $0.20 $14.18 10% 10% National Heating & Cooling 1.38 0.62 11.87 13 13 Expert HVAC Corp. -0.48 0.38 13.21 14 12
Industry Average $0.56 $0.40 $13.09 12.33% 11.67%
MINI CASE
Internet Application Questions 1. What are the latest corporate governance policies of institutional investors? Go to lacaisse.com/en and otpp.com to see. How
do these large Canadian institutions seek to ensure the practice of corporate governance? 2. Stock valuation is difficult because dividends are difficult to forecast. Go to Suncor’s website (suncor.com) and click on “Inves-
tor Centre”. Use the information provided and the dividend growth model to estimate the implied growth for Suncor’s divi- dends. Is this reasonable? Can you form a similar conclusion by looking at Suncor’s P/E ratio?
3. Barclays Global Investors (group.barclays.com) has an exchange traded equity fund, i60 (ca.ishares.com/product_info/fund/ overview/XIU.htm?fundSearch=true&qt=XIU). The i60 trades on the Toronto Stock Exchange (tmx.com) and invests in 60 firms that comprise the S&P/TSX 60 Index. Explain the advantage of investing in exchange traded funds relative to buying the stocks outright, and relative to buying index funds from banks.
4. Explore the wealth of online materials about stocks by going to theglobeandmail.com/globe-investor/. Enter the ticker symbol, BCE-T and view the summary of BCE Inc.
CHAPTER 8: Stock Valuation 217
08Ross_Chapter08_3rd_A.indd 21708Ross_Chapter08_3rd_A.indd 217 12-11-12 13:3212-11-12 13:32
CORPORATE VOTING
To illustrate the two different voting procedures, imagine that a corporation has two shareholders: Smith with 20 shares and Jones with 80 shares. Both want to be directors. Jones, however, does not want Smith to be a director. We assume that four directors are to be elected.
CUMULATIVE VOTING The effect of cumulative voting is to permit minority participation.13 If cumulative voting is permitted, the total number of votes that each shareholder may cast is determined first. This is usually calculated as the number of shares (owned or controlled) multiplied by the number of directors to be elected.
With cumulative voting, the directors are elected all at once. In our example, this means that the top four vote getters will be the new directors. A shareholder can distribute votes however he or she wishes.
Will Smith get a seat on the board? If we ignore the possibility of a five-way tie, the answer is yes. Smith casts 20 × 4 = 80 votes, and Jones casts 80 × 4 = 320 votes. If Smith gives all his votes to himself, he is as- sured of a directorship. The reason is that Jones can’t divide 320 votes among four candidates in such a way as to give all of them more than 80 votes, so Smith would finish fourth at worst.
In general, if there are N directors up for election, 1/(N + 1) percent of the stock (plus one share) would guarantee you a seat. In our current example, this is 1/(4 + 1) = 20%. So the more seats that are up for elec- tion at one time, the easier (and cheaper) it is to win one.
STRAIGHT VOTING With straight voting, the directors are elected one at a time. Each time, Smith can cast 20 votes and Jones can cast 80. As a consequence, Jones elects all the candidates. The only way to guarantee a seat is to own 50 percent plus one share. This also guarantees that you would win every seat, so it’s really all or nothing. For example, as of February 2012, the Bombardier family controlled 79.23 percent of the firm’s outstanding Class A common shares and 54.39 percent of all voting rights related to all issued and outstanding voting shares.14 Consequently, if the company were to use the straight voting procedure, the Bombardier family would successfully influence all outcomes.
PROXY VOTING A proxy is the grant of authority by a shareholder to someone else to vote his or her shares. For convenience, much of the voting in large public corporations is actually done by proxy.
EXAMPLE 8A.1: Buying the Election
Stock in JRJ Corporation sells for $20 per share and features cumulative voting. There are 10,000 shares outstanding. If three directors are up for election, how much does it cost to ensure yourself a seat on the board?
The question here is how many shares of stock it will take to get a seat. The answer is 2,501, so the cost is 2,501 × $20 = $50,020. Why 2,501? Because there is no way the remaining 7,499 votes can be divided among three people to give all of them more than 2,501 votes. For example, suppose two people receive 2,502 votes and the first two seats. A third person can receive at most 10,000 - 2,502 - 2,502 - 2,501 = 2,495, so the third seat is yours.
As we’ve illustrated, straight voting can “freeze out” mi- nority shareholders; that is the rationale for cumulative vot- ing. But devices have been worked out to minimize its impact.
One such device is to stagger the voting for the board of directors. With staggered elections, only a fraction of the directorships are up for election at a particular time. Thus, if only two directors are up for election at any one time, it takes 1/(2 + 1) = 33.33% of the stock to guarantee a seat. Overall, staggering has two basic effects:
1. Staggering makes it more difficult for a minority to elect a director when there is cumulative voting because there are fewer to be elected at one time.
2. Staggering makes takeover attempts less likely to be suc- cessful because it is more difficult to vote in a majority of new directors.
We should note that staggering may serve a beneficial purpose. It provides “institutional memory,” that is, continu- ity on the board of directors. This may be important for cor- porations with significant long-range plans and projects.
13 By minority participation, we mean participation by shareholders with relatively small amounts of stock. 14 bombardier.com/en
APPENDIX 8A
cumulative voting Procedure where a shareholder may cast all votes for one member of the board of directors.
straight voting Procedure where a shareholder may cast all votes for each member of the board of directors.
proxy Grant of authority by shareholder allowing for another individual to vote his or her shares.
218 Part 3: Valuation of Future Cash Flows
08Ross_Chapter08_3rd_A.indd 21808Ross_Chapter08_3rd_A.indd 218 12-11-12 13:3212-11-12 13:32
As we have seen, with straight voting, each share of stock has one vote. The owner of 10,000 shares has 10,000 votes. Many companies have hundreds of thousands or even millions of shareholders. Shareholders can come to the annual meeting and vote in person, or they can transfer their right to vote to another party.
Obviously, management always tries to get as many proxies transferred to it as possible. However, if the shareholders are not satisfied with management, an outside group of shareholders can try to obtain votes via proxy. They can vote by proxy to replace management by adding enough directors. Or they can vote to op- pose certain specific measures proposed by management. For example, proxyholders can vote against grant- ing generous stock options to management. This activity is called a proxy battle and we come back to it in more detail in Chapter 23.
In Canada, large pension fund managers have increasingly used proxy voting to establish social respon- sibility in the firms in which they invest. Such organizations have also developed their own proxy voting guidelines to ensure voting is conducted using principles of good corporate governance.
Appendix Review Problem and Self-Test
A.1 Cumulative versus Straight Voting Th e Krishnamurti Corporation has 500,000 shares outstanding. Th ere are four directors up for election. How many shares would you need to own to guarantee that you will win a seat if straight voting is used? If cumulative voting is used? Ignore possible ties.
Answer to Appendix Self-Test Problem
A.1 If there is straight voting, you need to own half the shares, or 250,000. In this case, you could also elect the other three directors. With cumulative voting, you need 1/(N + 1) percent of the shares, where N is the number of directors up for election. With four directors, this is 20 percent, or 100,000 shares.
Appendix Question and Problem
A.1 Voting for Directors Th e shareholders of Vycom, Inc., need to elect six new directors to the board. Th ere are 2 million shares of common stock outstanding. How many shares do you need to own to guarantee yourself a seat on the board if:
a. Th e company uses cumulative voting procedures?
b. Th e company uses straight voting procedures?
CHAPTER 8: Stock Valuation 219
08Ross_Chapter08_3rd_A.indd 21908Ross_Chapter08_3rd_A.indd 219 12-11-12 13:3212-11-12 13:32
In Chapter 1, we identifi ed the three key areas of concern to the fi nancial manager. Th e fi rst of these was deciding which fi xed assets to buy. We called this the capital budgeting decision. In this chapter, we begin to deal with the issues that arise in answering this question.
Th e process of allocating or budgeting capital is usually more involved than just deciding whether to buy a particular fi xed asset. We frequently face broader issues such as whether to launch a new product or enter a new market. Decisions such as these determine the nature of a fi rm’s operations and products for years to come, primarily because fi xed asset investments are generally long-lived and not easily reversed once they are made.
Th e most fundamental decision that a business must make concerns its product line. What services will we off er or what will we sell? In what markets will we compete? What new products will we introduce? Th e answer to any of these questions requires that the fi rm commit its scarce and valuable capital to certain types of assets. As a result, all these strategic issues fall under the general heading of capital budgeting. Th e process of capital budgeting could thus be given a more descriptive (not to mention impressive) name: strategic asset allocation.
For the reasons we have discussed, the capital budgeting question is probably the most important
auricogold.com
NET PRESENT VALUE AND OTHER INVESTMENT CRITERIA
C H A P T E R 9
A uRico Gold Inc. is a leading intermediate gold and silver mining and exploration company headquartered in Halifax. It has a diversified portfolio
of mines in Canada, Mexico, and Australia. In August
2011, the company announced that it would acquire
NorthGate Minerals. For the 12-month period end-
ing on December 31, 2010, NorthGate Minerals’
total revenue was valued at around $485 million.
At the time of the announcement, AuRico Gold Inc.
noted that not only would the purchase increase its
total revenue, but also would establish the company
as a leading intermediate, low cost producer with a
substantial growth platform and a compelling valu-
ation opportunity.
The acquisition by AuRico Gold is an example of
a capital budgeting decision. When the deal was
closed in October 2011, NorthGate Minerals was
purchased for around $1.5 billion. Investing millions
of dollars to acquire a company is a major undertak-
ing that requires serious evaluation of the potential
risks and rewards. In this chapter, we will discuss the
basic tools in making such decisions.
Learning Object ives
After studying this chapter, you should understand:
LO1 How to compute the net present value and why it is the best decision criterion.
LO2 The payback rule and some of its shortcomings.
LO3 The discounted payback rule and some of its shortcomings.
LO4 Accounting rates of return and some of the problems with them.
LO5 The internal rate of return criterion and its strengths and weaknesses.
LO6 The modified internal rate of return.
LO7 The profitability index and its relation to net present value.
P A R T 4
C ou
rt es
y of
A uR
ic o
G ol
d
09Ross_Chapter09_4th.indd 22009Ross_Chapter09_4th.indd 220 12-11-27 12:0512-11-27 12:05
issue in corporate fi nance. How a fi rm chooses to fi nance its operations (the capital structure ques- tion) and how a fi rm manages its short-term operating activities (the working capital question) are certainly issues of concern; however, fi xed assets defi ne the business of the fi rm. Airlines, for example, are airlines because they operate airplanes, regardless of how they fi nance them.
Any fi rm possesses a huge number of possible investments. Each of these possible investments is an option available to the fi rm. Some of these options are valuable and some are not. Th e essence of successful fi nancial management, of course, is learning to identify which are which. With this in mind, our goal in this chapter is to introduce you to the techniques used to analyze potential business ventures to decide which are worth undertaking.
We present and compare a number of diff erent procedures used in practice. Our primary goal is to acquaint you with the advantages and disadvantages of the various approaches. As we shall see, the most important concept is the idea of net present value. When evaluating each method and determining which to use, it is important to look at three very important criteria and ask yourself the following questions:
• Does the decision rule adjust for the time value of money? • Does the decision rule adjust for risk? • Does the decision rule provide information on whether we are creating value for the fi rm?
A good decision rule will adjust for both the time value of money and risk, and will determine whether value has been created for the fi rm, and thus its shareholders.
9.1 Net Present Value
The Basic Idea An investment is worth undertaking if it creates value for its owners. In the most general sense, we create value by identifying an investment that is worth more in the marketplace than it costs us to acquire. How can something be worth more than it costs? It’s a case of the whole being worth more than the cost of the parts.
For example, suppose you buy a run-down house for $65,000 and spend another $25,000 on painters, plumbers, and so on to get it fi xed. Your total investment is $90,000. When the work is completed, you place the house back on the market and fi nd that it’s worth $100,000. Th e market value ($100,000) exceeds the cost ($90,000) by $10,000. What you have done here is to act as a manager and bring together some fi xed assets (a house), some labour (plumbers, carpenters, and others), and some materials (carpeting, paint, and so on). Th e net result is that you have created $10,000 in value by employing business skills like human resources (hiring labour), project man- agement, and marketing. Put another way, this $10,000 is the value added by management.
With our house example, it turned out aft er the fact that $10,000 in value was created. Th ings thus worked out very nicely. Th e real challenge, of course, was to somehow identify ahead of time whether or not investing the necessary $90,000 was a good idea. Th is is what capital budgeting is all about, namely, trying to determine whether a proposed investment or project will be worth more than it costs once it is in place.
For reasons that will be obvious in a moment, the diff erence between an investment’s market value and its cost is called the net present value (NPV) of the investment. In other words, net present value is a measure of how much value is created or added today by undertaking an invest- ment. Given our goal of creating value for the shareholders, the capital budgeting process can be viewed as a search for investments with positive net present values.
With our run-down house, you can probably imagine how we would make the capital budget- ing decision. We would fi rst look at what comparable, fi xed-up properties were selling for in the market. We would then get estimates of the cost of buying a particular property and bringing it up to market. At this point, we have an estimated total cost and an estimated market value. If the diff erence is positive, this investment is worth undertaking because it has a positive estimated net present value. Th ere is risk, of course, because there is no guarantee that our estimates will turn out to be correct.
As our example illustrates, investment decisions are greatly simplifi ed when there is a market for assets similar to the investment we are considering. Capital budgeting becomes much more
net present value (NPV) The difference between an investment’s market value and its cost.
Chapter 9: Net Present Value and Other Investment Criteria 221
09Ross_Chapter09_4th.indd 22109Ross_Chapter09_4th.indd 221 12-11-27 12:0512-11-27 12:05
diffi cult when we cannot observe the market price for at least roughly comparable investments. We are then faced with the problem of estimating the value of an investment using only indirect market information. Unfortunately, this is precisely the situation the fi nancial manager usually encounters. We examine this issue next.
Estimating Net Present Value Imagine that we are thinking of starting a business to produce and sell a new product, say, organic fertilizer. We can estimate the start-up costs with reasonable accuracy because we know what we need to buy to begin production. Would this be a good investment? Based on our discussion, you know that the answer depends on whether the value of the new business exceeds the cost of start- ing it. In other words, does this investment have a positive NPV?
Th is problem is much more diffi cult than our fi xer-upper house example because entire fertil- izer companies are not routinely bought and sold in the marketplace, so it is essentially impossible to observe the market value of a similar investment. As a result, we must somehow estimate this value by other means.
Based on our work in Chapters 5 and 6, you may be able to guess how we estimate the value of our fertilizer business. We begin by trying to estimate the future cash fl ows that we expect the new business to produce. We then apply our basic discounted cash fl ow procedure to estimate the present value of those cash fl ows. Once we have this number, we estimate NPV as the dif- ference between the present value of the future cash fl ows and the cost of the investment. As we mentioned in Chapter 6, this procedure is oft en called discounted cash fl ow (DCF) valuation.
To see how we might estimate NPV, suppose we believe that the cash revenues from our fertil- izer business will be $20,000 per year, assuming everything goes as expected. Cash costs (includ- ing taxes) will be $14,000 per year. We will wind down the business in eight years. Th e plant, property, and equipment will be worth $2,000 as salvage at that time. Th e project costs $30,000 to launch. We use a 15 percent discount rate1 on new projects such as this one. Is this a good invest- ment? If there are 1000 shares of stock outstanding, what will be the eff ect on the price per share from taking it?
From a purely mechanical perspective, we need to calculate the present value of the future cash fl ows at 15 percent. Th e net cash fl ow infl ow will be $20,000 cash income less $14,000 in costs per year for eight years. Th ese cash fl ows are illustrated in Figure 9.1. As Figure 9.1 suggests, we eff ec- tively have an eight-year annuity of $20,000 - 14,000 = $6,000 per year along with a single lump- sum infl ow of $2,000 in eight years. Calculating the present value of the future cash fl ows thus comes down to the same type of problem we considered in Chapter 6. Th e total present value is:
Present value = $6,000 × (1 - 1/1.158)/.15 + 2,000/1.158 = $6,000 × 4.4873 + 2,000/3.0590 = $26,924 + 654 = $27,578
FIGURE 9.1
Project cash flows ($000s)
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
–$30
–$30
$20 – 14
$ 6
$20 – 14
$ 6
$20 – 14
$ 6
$20 – 14
$ 6
$20 – 14
$ 6
$20 – 14
$ 6
$20 – 14
$ 6
$20 – 14
$ 6
Time (years)
Initial cost
Inflows Outflows
Net inflow
Salvage
Net cash flow
2
$ 6 $ 6 $ 6 $ 6 $ 6 $ 6 $ 6 $ 8
1 The discount rate reflects the risk associated with the project. Here it is assumed that all new projects have the same risk.
discounted cash flow (DCF) valuation The process of valuing an investment by discounting its future cash flows.
222 Part 4: Capital Budgeting
09Ross_Chapter09_4th.indd 22209Ross_Chapter09_4th.indd 222 12-11-27 12:0512-11-27 12:05
When we compare this to the $30,000 estimated cost, the NPV is:
NPV = -$30,000 + 27,578 = -$2,422
Th erefore, this is not a good investment. Based on our estimates, taking it would decrease the total value of the stock by $2,422. With 1000 shares outstanding, our best estimate of the impact of taking this project is a loss of value of $2,422/1000 = $2.422 per share.
Our fertilizer example illustrates how NPV estimates can help determine whether or not an investment is desirable. From our example, notice that, if the NPV is negative, the eff ect on share value would be unfavourable. If the NPV is positive, the eff ect would be favourable. As a conse- quence, all we need to know about a particular proposal for the purpose of making an accept/ reject decision is whether the NPV is positive or negative.
Given that the goal of fi nancial management is to increase share value, our discussion in this section leads us to the net present value rule:
An investment should be accepted if the net present value is positive and rejected if it is negative.
In the unlikely event that the net present value turned out to be zero, we would be indiff erent to taking the investment or not taking it.
Two comments about our example are in order: First, it is not the rather mechanical process of discounting the cash fl ows that is important. Once we have the cash fl ows and the appropriate discount rate, the required calculations are fairly straightforward. Th e task of coming up with the cash fl ows and the discount rate in the fi rst place is much more challenging. We have much more to say about this in the next several chapters. For the remainder of this chapter, we take it as given that we have estimates of the cash revenues and costs and, where needed, an appropriate discount rate.
Th e second thing to keep in mind about our example is that the -$2,422 NPV is an estimate. Like any estimate, it can be high or low. Th e only way to fi nd out the true NPV would be to place the investment up for sale and see what we could get for it. We generally won’t be doing this, so it is important that our estimates be reliable. Once again, we have more to say about this later. For the rest of this chapter, we assume the estimates are accurate.
Going back to the decision criteria set out at the beginning of the chapter, we can see that the NPV method of valuation meets all three conditions. It adjusts cash fl ows for both the time value of money and risk through the choice of discount rate (discussed in detail in Chapter 14), and the NPV fi gure itself tells us how much value will be created with the investment.
As we have seen in this section, estimating NPV is one way of assessing the merits of a pro- posed investment. It is certainly not the only way that profi tability is assessed, and we now turn to some alternatives. As we shall see, when compared to NPV, each of the ways of assessing profi t- ability that we examine is fl awed in some key way; so NPV is the preferred approach in principle, if not always in practice.
EXAMPLE 9.1: Using the NPV Rule
Suppose we are asked to decide whether or not a new con- sumer product should be launched. Based on projected sales and costs, we expect that the cash flows over the five- year life of the project will be $2,000 in the first two years, $4,000 in the next two, and $5,000 in the last year. It will cost about $10,000 to begin production. We use a 10 per- cent discount rate to evaluate new products. What should we do here?
Given the cash flows and discount rate, we can calculate the total value of the product by discounting the cash flows back to the present:
Present value = $2,000/1.1 + 2,000/1.12 + 4,000/1.13 + 4,000/1.14 + 5,000/1.15
= $1,818 + 1,653 + 3,005 + 2,732 + 3,105 = $12,313
The present value of the expected cash flows is $12,313, but the cost of getting those cash flows is only $10,000, so the NPV is $12,313 – 10,000 = $2,313. This is positive; so, based on the net present value rule, we should take on the project.
Chapter 9: Net Present Value and Other Investment Criteria 223
09Ross_Chapter09_4th.indd 22309Ross_Chapter09_4th.indd 223 12-11-27 12:0512-11-27 12:05
Calculating NPVs with a Spreadsheet
Spreadsheets are commonly used to calculate NPVs. Examining the use of spreadsheets in this context also allows us to issue an important warning. Let’s rework Example 9.1:
1
2
3 4 5 6 7 8 9
10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
A B C D E F G H
From Example 9.1, the project’s cost is $10,000. The cash flows are $2,000 per year for the first two years, $4,000 per year for the next two, and $5,000 in the last year. The discount rate is 10 percent; what’s the NPV?
Year Cash flow 0 -$10,000 Discount rate = 10% 1 2,000 2 2,000 (wrong answer) 3 4,000 (right answer) 4 4,000 5 5,000
The formula entered in cell F11 is =NPV(F9, C9:C14). This gives the wrong answer because the NPV function calculates the sum of the present value of each number in the series, assuming that the first number occurs at the end of the first period. Therefore, in this example the year 0 value is discounted by 1 year or 10 percent (we clearly don’t want this number to be discounted at all). The formula entered in cell F12 is =NPV(F9, C10:C14) + C9. This gives the right answer because the NPV function is used to calculate the present value of the cash flows for future years and then the initial cost is subtracted to calculate the answer. Notice that we added cell C9 because it is already negative.
Using a spreadsheet to calculate net present values
NPV = $2,312.99 NPV = $2,102.72
In our spreadsheet example just above, notice that we have provided two answers. By com- paring the answers to that found in Example 9.1, we see that the first answer is wrong even though we used the spreadsheet’s NPV formula. What happened is that the “NPV” func- tion in our spreadsheet is actually a PV function; unfortunately, one of the original spread- sheet programs many years ago got the definition wrong, and subsequent spreadsheets have copied it! Our second answer shows how to use the formula properly. The example here illustrates the danger of blindly using calculators or computers with- out understanding what is going on; we shudder to think of how many capital budgeting decisions in the real world are based on incorrect use of this particular function. We will see another example of something that can go wrong with a spreadsheet later in the chapter.
Finding NPV
You can solve this problem using a financial calculator by doing the following:
CFo = -$10,000 C01 = $2,000 F01 = 2 C02 = $4,000 F02 = 2 I = 10% C03 = $5,000 F03 = 1 NPV = CPT The answer to the problem is: $2,312.99
NOTE: To toggle between the different cash flow and NPV options, use the [SET] arrows found on the calculator.
1. What is the net present value rule?
2. If we say that an investment has an NPV of $1,000, what exactly do we mean?
SPREADSHEET STRATEGIES
CALCULATOR HINTS
Concept Questions
224 Part 4: Capital Budgeting
09Ross_Chapter09_4th.indd 22409Ross_Chapter09_4th.indd 224 12-11-27 12:0512-11-27 12:05
9.2 The Payback Rule
It is very common in practice to talk of the payback on a proposed investment. Loosely, the pay- back is the length of time it takes to recover our initial investment. Because this idea is widely understood and used, we examine and critique it in some detail.
Defining the Rule We can illustrate how to calculate a payback with an example. Figure 9.2 shows the cash fl ows from a proposed investment. How many years do we have to wait until the accumulated cash fl ows from this investment equal or exceed the cost of the investment? As Figure 9.2 indicates, the initial investment is $50,000. Aft er the fi rst year, the fi rm has recovered $30,000, leaving $20,000. Th e cash fl ow in the second year is exactly $20,000, so this investment pays for itself in exactly two years. Put another way, the payback period is two years. If we require a payback of, say, three years or less, then this investment is acceptable. Th is illustrates the payback period rule:
Based on the payback rule, an investment is acceptable if its calculated payback is less than some prespecifi ed number of years.
FIGURE 9.2
Net project cash flows
0 1 2 3 4
–$50,000 $30,000 $20,000 $10,000 $5,000
Year
In our example, the payback works out to be exactly two years. Th is won’t usually happen, of course. When the numbers don’t work out exactly, it is customary to work with fractional years. For example, suppose the initial investment is $60,000, and the cash fl ows are $20,000 in the fi rst year and $90,000 in the second. Th e cash fl ows over the fi rst two years are $110,000, so the project obviously pays back sometime in the second year. Aft er the fi rst year, the project has paid back $20,000, leaving $40,000 to be recovered. To fi gure out the fractional year, note that this $40,000 is $40,000/$90,000 = 4/9 of the second year’s cash fl ow. Assuming that the $90,000 cash fl ow is paid uniformly throughout the year, the payback would thus be 1 4/9 years.
Analyzing the Payback Period Rule When compared to the NPV rule, the payback period rule has some rather severe shortcomings. Perhaps the biggest problem with the payback period rule is coming up with the right cutoff per- iod because we don’t really have an objective basis for choosing a particular number. Put another way, there is no economic rationale for looking at payback in the fi rst place, so we have no guide as to how to pick the cutoff . As a result, we end up using a number that is arbitrarily chosen.
Another critical disadvantage is that the payback period is calculated by simply adding the future cash fl ows. Th ere is no discounting involved, so the time value of money is ignored. Finally, a payback rule does not consider risk diff erences. Th e payback rule would be calculated the same way for both very risky and very safe projects. Suppose we have somehow decided on an appropriate payback period, say two years or less. As we have seen, the payback period rule ignores the time value of money for the fi rst two years. More seriously, cash fl ows aft er the second year are ignored. To see this, consider the two investments, Long and Short, in Table 9.1. Both projects cost $250. Based on our discussion, the payback on Long is 2 + $50/100 = 2.5 years, and the payback on Short is 1 + $150/200 = 1.75 years. With a cutoff of two years, Short is acceptable and Long is not.
Is the payback period rule giving us the right decisions? Maybe not. Suppose again that we require a 15 percent return on this type of investment. We can calculate the NPV for these two investments as:
payback period The amount of time required for an investment to generate cash flows to recover its initial cost.
Chapter 9: Net Present Value and Other Investment Criteria 225
09Ross_Chapter09_4th.indd 22509Ross_Chapter09_4th.indd 225 12-11-27 12:0512-11-27 12:05
NPV(Short) = -$250 + 100/1.15 + 200/1.152 = -$11.81 NPV(Long) = -$250 + 100 × (1 - 1/1.154)/.15 = $35.50
Now we have a problem. Th e NPV of the shorter-term investment is actually negative, meaning that taking it diminishes the value of the shareholders’ equity. Th e opposite is true for the longer- term investment—it increases share value.
Our example illustrates two primary shortcomings of the payback period rule. First, by ignor- ing time value, we may be led to take investments (like Short) that actually are worth less than they cost. Second, by ignoring cash fl ows beyond the cutoff , we may be led to reject profi table long-term investments (like Long). More generally, using a payback period rule tends to bias us toward shorter-term investments.
TABLE 9.1
Investment projected cash flows
Year Long Short
1 $100 $100 2 100 200 3 100 0 4 100 0
Redeeming Qualit ies Despite its shortcomings, the payback period rule is oft en used by small businesses whose man- agers lack fi nancial skills. It is also used by large and sophisticated companies when making rela- tively small decisions. Th ere are several reasons for this. Th e primary reason is that many deci- sions simply do not warrant detailed analysis because the cost of the analysis would exceed the possible loss from a mistake. As a practical matter, an investment that pays back rapidly and has benefi ts extending beyond the cutoff period probably has a positive NPV.
Small investment decisions are made by the hundreds every day in large organizations. More- over, they are made at all levels. As a result, it would not be uncommon for a corporation to require, for example, a two-year payback on all investments of less than $10,000. Investments larger than this are subjected to greater scrutiny. Th e requirement of a two-year payback is not perfect for reasons we have seen, but it does exercise some control over expenditures and thus limits possible losses.
In addition to its simplicity, the payback rule has several other features to recommend it. First, because it is biased toward short-term projects, it is biased toward liquidity. In other words, a payback rule favours investments that free up cash for other uses more quickly. Th is could be very important for a small business; it would be less so for a large corporation. Second, the cash fl ows that are expected to occur later in a project’s life are probably more uncertain. Arguably, a payback period rule takes into account the extra riskiness of later cash fl ows, but it does so in a rather draconian fashion—by ignoring them altogether.
We should note here that some of the apparent simplicity of the payback rule is an illusion. We still must come up with the cash fl ows fi rst, and, as we discussed previously, this is not easy to do. Th us, it would probably be more accurate to say that the concept of a payback period is both intuitive and easy to understand.
Summary of the Rule To summarize, the payback period is a kind of “break-even” measure. Because time value is ignored, you can think of the payback period as the length of time it takes to break even in an accounting sense, but not in an economic sense. Th e biggest drawback to the payback period rule is that it doesn’t ask the right question. Th e relevant issue is the impact an investment will have on the value of our stock, not how long it takes to recover the initial investment. Th us, the payback period rule fails to meet all three decision criteria.
Nevertheless, because it is so simple, companies oft en use it as a screen for dealing with the myriad of minor investment decisions they have to make. Th ere is certainly nothing wrong with
226 Part 4: Capital Budgeting
09Ross_Chapter09_4th.indd 22609Ross_Chapter09_4th.indd 226 12-11-27 12:0512-11-27 12:05
this practice. As with any simple rule of thumb, there will be some errors in using it, but it would not have survived all this time if it weren’t useful. Now that you understand the rule, you can be on the alert for those circumstances under which it might lead to problems. To help you remember, the following table lists the pros and cons of the payback period rule.
Advantages and Disadvantages of the Payback Period Rule
Advantages Disadvantages 1. Easy to understand. 2. Adjusts for uncertainty of
later cash flows. 3. Biased towards liquidity.
1. Ignores the time value of money. 2. Requires an arbitrary cutoff point. 3. Ignores cash flows beyond the cutoff point. 4. Biased against long-term projects, such as
research and development, and new projects. 5. Ignores any risks associated with projects.
The Discounted Payback Rule We saw that one of the shortcomings of the payback period rule was that it ignored time value. Th ere is a variation of the payback period, the discounted payback period, that fi xes this particu- lar problem. Th e discounted payback period is the length of time until the sum of the discounted cash fl ows equals the initial investment. Th e discounted payback rule is:
An investment is acceptable if its discounted payback is less than some prescribed number of years.
To see how we might calculate the discounted payback period, suppose we require a 12.5 percent return on new investments. We have an investment that costs $300 and has cash fl ows of $100 per year for fi ve years. To get the discounted payback, we have to discount each cash fl ow at 12.5 percent and then start adding them. We do this in Table 9.2. We have both the discounted and the undiscounted cash fl ows in Table 9.2. Looking at the accumulated cash fl ows, the regular payback is exactly three years (look for the arrow in Year 3). Th e discounted cash fl ows total $300 only aft er four years, so the discounted payback is four years as shown.2
TABLE 9.2
Ordinary and discounted payback
Year
Cash Flow Accumulated Cash Flow
Undiscounted Discounted Undiscounted Discounted
1 $100 $89 $100 $ 89 2 100 79 200 168 3 100 70 →300 238
4 100 62 400 →300 5 100 55 500 355
How do we interpret the discounted payback? Recall that the ordinary payback is the time it takes to break even in an accounting sense. Since it includes the time value of money, the discounted payback is the time it takes to break even in an economic or fi nancial sense. Loosely speaking, in our example, we get our money back along with the interest we could have earned elsewhere in four years.
Based on our example, the discounted payback would seem to have much to recommend it. You may be surprised to fi nd out that it is rarely used. Why? Probably because it really isn’t any simpler than NPV. To calculate a discounted payback, you have to discount cash fl ows, add them up, and compare them to the cost, just as you do with NPV. So, unlike an ordinary payback, the discounted payback is not especially simple to calculate.
2 In this case, the discounted payback is an even number of years. This won’t ordinarily happen, of course. However, calculating a fractional year for the discounted payback period is more involved than for the ordinary payback, and it is not commonly done.
discounted payback period The length of time required for an investment’s discounted cash flows to equal its initial cost.
Chapter 9: Net Present Value and Other Investment Criteria 227
09Ross_Chapter09_4th.indd 22709Ross_Chapter09_4th.indd 227 12-11-27 12:0512-11-27 12:05
A discounted payback period rule still has a couple of signifi cant drawbacks. Th e biggest one is that the cutoff still has to be arbitrarily set and cash fl ows beyond that point are ignored.3 As a result, a project with a positive NPV may not be acceptable because the cutoff is too short. Also, just because one project has a shorter discounted payback period than another does not mean it has a larger NPV.
All things considered, the discounted payback is a compromise between a regular payback and NPV that lacks the simplicity of the fi rst and the conceptual rigour of the second. Nonetheless, if we need to assess the time it takes to recover the investment required by a project, the discounted payback is better than the ordinary payback because it considers time value. In other words, the discounted payback recognizes that we could have invested the money elsewhere and earned a return on it. Th e ordinary payback does not take this into account.
Th e advantages and disadvantages of the discounted payback are summarized in the following table:
Discounted Payback Period Rule
Advantages Disadvantages 1. Includes time value of money. 2. Easy to understand. 3. Does not accept negative
estimated NPV investments. 4. Biased towards liquidity.
1. May reject positive NPV investments. 2. Requires an arbitrary cutoff point. 3. Ignores cash flows beyond the cutoff date. 4. Biased against long-term projects, such as
research and development, and new projects.
1. What is the payback period? The payback period rule?
2. Why do we say that the payback period is, in a sense, an accounting break-even?
9.3 The Average Accounting Return
Another attractive, but fl awed, approach to making capital budgeting decisions is the average accounting return (AAR). Th ere are many diff erent defi nitions of the AAR. However, in one form or another, the AAR is always defi ned as:
some measure of average accounting profit
___________________________________ some measure of average accounting value
Th e specifi c defi nition we use is:
Average net income
_________________ Average book value
To see how we might calculate this number, suppose we are deciding whether to open a store in a new shopping mall. Th e required investment in improvements is $500,000. Th e store would have a fi ve-year life because everything reverts to the mall owners aft er that time. Th e required invest- ment would be 100 percent depreciated (straight-line) over fi ve years, so the depreciation would be $500,000/5 = $100,000 per year. Th e tax rate for this small business is 25 percent.4 Table 9.3 contains the projected revenues and expenses. Based on these fi gures, net income in each year is also shown.
To calculate the average book value for this investment, we note that we started out with a book value of $500,000 (the initial cost) and ended up at $0. Th e average book value during the life of the investment is thus ($500,000 + 0)/2 = $250,000. As long as we use straight-line depreciation, the average investment is always 1/2 of the initial investment.5
3 If the cutoff were forever, then the discounted payback rule would be the same as the NPV rule. It would also be the same as the profitability index rule considered in a later section. 4 These depreciation and tax rates are chosen for simplicity. Chapter 10 discusses depreciation and taxes. 5 We could, of course, calculate the average of the six book values directly. In thousands, we would have ($500 + 400 + 300 + 200 + 100 + 0)/6 = $250.
Concept Questions
average accounting return (AAR) An investment’s average net income divided by its average book value.
228 Part 4: Capital Budgeting
09Ross_Chapter09_4th.indd 22809Ross_Chapter09_4th.indd 228 12-11-27 12:0512-11-27 12:05
TABLE 9.3
Projected yearly revenue and costs for average accounting return Year 1 Year 2 Year 3 Year 4 Year 5
Revenue $433,333 $450,000 $ 266,667 $ 200,000 $ 133,333 Expenses 200,000 150,000 100,000 100,000 100,000 Earnings before depreciation $233,333 $300,000 $ 166,667 $ 100,000 $ 33,333 Depreciation 100,000 100,000 100,000 100,000 100,000 Earnings before taxes $133,333 $200,000 $ 66,667 $ 0 -$ 66,667
Taxes (TC = 0.25) 33,333 50,000 16,667 0 -16,667 Net income $100,000 $150,000 $ 50,000 $ 0 -$ 50,000
Average net income = ($100,000 + 150,000 + 50,000 + 0 - 50,000)
___________________________________________ 5 = $50,000
Average investment = $500,000 + 0
_____________ 2 = $250,000
Looking at Table 9.3, net income is $100,000 in the fi rst year, $150,000 in the second year, $50,000 in the third year, $0 in Year 4, and -$50,000 in Year 5. Th e average net income, then, is:
[$100,000 + 150,000 + 50,000 + 0 + (-$50,000)]/5 = $50,000
Th e average accounting return is:
AAR = Average net income/Average book value = $50,000/$250,000 = 20%
If the fi rm has a target AAR less than 20 percent, this investment is acceptable; otherwise it is not. Th e average accounting return rule is thus:
Based on the average accounting return rule, a project is acceptable if its average accounting return exceeds a target average accounting return.
As we see in the next section, this rule has a number of problems.
Analyzing the Average Accounting Return Method You recognize the fi rst drawback to the AAR immediately. Above all else, the AAR is not a rate of return in any meaningful economic sense. Instead, it is the ratio of two accounting numbers, and it is not comparable to the returns off ered, for example, in fi nancial markets.6
One of the reasons the AAR is not a true rate of return is that it ignores time value. When we average fi gures that occur at diff erent times, we are treating the near future and the more dis- tant future the same way. Th ere was no discounting involved when we computed the average net income, for example.
Th e second problem with the AAR is similar to the problem we had with the payback period rule concerning the lack of an objective cutoff period. Since a calculated AAR is really not com- parable to a market return, the target AAR must somehow be specifi ed. Th ere is no generally agreed-on way to do this. One way of doing it is to calculate the AAR for the fi rm as a whole and use this for a benchmark, but there are lots of other ways as well.
Th e third, and perhaps worst, fl aw in the AAR is that it doesn’t even look at the right things. Instead of cash fl ow and market value, it uses net income and book value. Th ese are both poor substitutes because the value of the fi rm is the present value of future cash fl ows. As a result, an AAR doesn’t tell us what the eff ect on share price will be from taking an investment, so it does not tell us what we really want to know.
6 The AAR is closely related to the return on assets (ROA) discussed in Chapter 3. In practice, the AAR is sometimes computed by first calculating the ROA for each year and then averaging the results. This produces a number that is sim- ilar, but not identical, to the one we computed.
Chapter 9: Net Present Value and Other Investment Criteria 229
09Ross_Chapter09_4th.indd 22909Ross_Chapter09_4th.indd 229 12-11-27 12:0512-11-27 12:05
Does the AAR have any redeeming features? About the only one is that it almost always can be computed. Th e reason is that accounting information is almost always available, both for the pro- ject under consideration and for the fi rm as a whole. We hasten to add that once the accounting information is available, we can always convert it to cash fl ows, so even this is not a particularly important fact. Th e AAR is summarized in the following table:
Average Accounting Return Rule
Advantages Disadvantages 1. Easy to calculate. 2. Needed information
is usually available.
1. Not a true rate of return; time value of money is ignored. 2. Uses an arbitrary benchmark cutoff rate. 3. Based on accounting (book) values, not cash flows and
market values.
1. What is an accounting rate of return (AAR)?
2. What are the weaknesses of the AAR rule?
9.4 The Internal Rate of Return
We now come to the most important alternative to NPV, the internal rate of return, universally known as the IRR. As you will see, the IRR is closely related to NPV. With the IRR, we try to fi nd a single rate of return that summarizes the merits of a project. Furthermore, we want this rate to be an internal rate in the sense that it depends only on the cash fl ows of a particular investment, not on rates off ered elsewhere.
To illustrate the idea behind the IRR, consider a project that costs $100 today and pays $110 in one year. Suppose you were asked, “What is the return on this investment?” What would you say? It seems both natural and obvious to say that the return is 10 percent because, for every dollar we put in, we get $1.10 back. In fact, as we see in a moment, 10 percent is the internal rate of return or IRR on this investment.
Is this project with its 10 percent IRR a good investment? Once again, it would seem apparent that this is a good investment only if our required return is less than 10 percent. Th is intuition is also correct and illustrates the IRR rule:
Based on the IRR rule, an investment is acceptable if the IRR exceeds the required return. It should be rejected otherwise.
If you understand the IRR rule, you should see that we used the IRR (without defi ning it) when we calculated the yield to maturity of a bond in Chapter 7. In fact, the yield to maturity is the bond’s IRR.7 More generally, many returns for diff erent types of assets are calculated the same way. Imagine that we wanted to calculate the NPV for our simple investment. At a discount rate of r, the NPV is:
NPV = -$100 + 110/(1 + r) Suppose we didn’t know the discount rate. Th is presents a problem, but we could still ask how high the discount rate would have to be before this project was unacceptable. We know that we are indiff erent to taking or not taking this investment when its NPV is just equal to zero. In other words, this investment is economically a break-even proposition when the NPV is zero because value is neither created nor destroyed. To fi nd the break-even discount rate, we set NPV equal to zero and solve for r:
NPV = 0 = -$100 + 110/(1 + r) $100 = $110/(1 + r) 1 + r = $110/100 = 1.10 r = 10%
7 Strictly speaking, this is true for bonds with annual coupons. Typically, bonds carry semiannual coupons so yield to maturity is the six-month IRR expressed as a stated rate per year. Further, the yield to maturity is based on cash flows promised by the bond issuer as opposed to cash flows expected by a firm.
Concept Questions
internal rate of return (IRR) The discount rate that makes the NPV of an investment zero.
230 Part 4: Capital Budgeting
09Ross_Chapter09_4th.indd 23009Ross_Chapter09_4th.indd 230 12-11-27 12:0512-11-27 12:05
FIGURE 9.3
Project cash flows
0 1 2
–$100 +$60 +$60
Year
Th is 10 percent is what we already have called the return on this investment. What we have now illustrated is that the internal rate of return on an investment (or just return for short) is the dis- count rate that makes the NPV equal to zero. Th is is an important observation, so it bears repeating:
Th e IRR on an investment is the return that results in a zero NPV when it is used as the discount rate.
Th e fact that the IRR is simply the discount rate that makes the NPV equal to zero is important because it tells us how to calculate the returns on more complicated investments. As we have seen, fi nding the IRR turns out to be relatively easy for a single period investment. However, suppose you were now looking at an investment with the cash fl ows shown in Figure 9.3. As illustrated, this investment costs $100 and has a cash fl ow of $60 per year for two years, so it’s only slightly more complicated than our single period example. If you were asked for the return on this invest- ment, what would you say? Th ere doesn’t seem to be any obvious answer (at least to us). Based on what we now know, we can set the NPV equal to zero and solve for the discount rate:
NPV = 0 = -$100 + 60/(1 + IRR) + 60/(1 + IRR)2
Unfortunately, the only way to fi nd the IRR in general is by trial and error, either by hand or by calculator. Th is is precisely the same problem that came up in Chapter 5 when we found the unknown rate for an annuity and in Chapter 7 when we found the yield to maturity on a bond. In fact, we now see that, in both of those cases, we were fi nding an IRR.
In this particular case, the cash fl ows form a two-period, $60 annuity. To fi nd the unknown rate, we can try various diff erent rates until we get the answer. If we were to start with a 0 percent rate, the NPV would obviously be $120 - 100 = $20. At a 10 percent discount rate, we would have:
NPV = -$100 + 60/1.1 + 60/(1.1)2 = $4.13
Now, we’re getting close. We can summarize these and some other possibilities as shown in Table 9.4. From our calculations, the NPV appears to be zero between 10 and 15 percent, so the IRR is somewhere in that range. With a little more eff ort, we can fi nd that the IRR is about 13.1 percent.8 So, if our required return is less than 13.1 percent, we would take this investment. If our required return exceeds 13.1 percent, we would reject it.
TABLE 9.4
NPV at different discount rates
Discount Rate NPV
0% $20.00 5 11.56
10 4.13 15 -2.46 20 -8.33
By now, you have probably noticed that the IRR rule and the NPV rule appear to be quite simi- lar. In fact, the IRR is sometimes simply called the discounted cash fl ow or DCF return. Th e easiest way to illustrate the relationship between NPV and IRR is to plot the numbers we calculated in
8 With a lot more effort (or a calculator or personal computer), we can find that the IRR is approximately (to 15 decimal points) 13.0662386291808 percent, not that anybody would ever want this many decimal points.
Chapter 9: Net Present Value and Other Investment Criteria 231
09Ross_Chapter09_4th.indd 23109Ross_Chapter09_4th.indd 231 12-11-27 12:0512-11-27 12:05
Table 9.4. On the vertical or y-axis we put the diff erent NPVs. We put discount rates on the hori- zontal or x-axis. If we had a very large number of points, the resulting picture would be a smooth curve called a net present value profi le. Figure 9.4 illustrates the NPV profi le for this project. Beginning with a 0 percent discount rate, we have $20 plotted directly on the y-axis. As the dis- count rate increases, the NPV declines smoothly. Where does the curve cut through the x-axis? Th is occurs where the NPV is just equal to zero, so it happens right at the IRR of 13.1 percent.
FIGURE 9.4
An NPV profile
NPV
$20
$15
$10
–$10
$5
5% 10% 15% 20% 25% 30%
–$5
$0
NPV > 0
NPV < 0
•
•
•
• •
•
IRR = 13.1%
r
In our example, the NPV rule and the IRR rule lead to identical accept/reject decisions. We accept an investment using the IRR rule if the required return is less than 13.1 percent. As Figure 9.4 illustrates, however, the NPV is positive at any discount rate less than 13.1 percent, so we would accept the investment using the NPV rule as well. Th e two rules are equivalent in this case.
At this point, you may be wondering whether the IRR and the NPV rules always lead to iden- tical decisions. Th e answer is yes as long as two very important conditions are met: First, the project’s cash fl ows must be conventional, meaning that the fi rst cash fl ow (the initial investment) is negative and all the rest are positive. Second, the project must be independent, meaning the decision to accept or reject this project does not aff ect the decision to accept or reject any other. Th e fi rst of these conditions is typically met, but the second oft en is not. In any case, when one or both of these conditions is not met, problems can arise. We discuss some of these next.
EXAMPLE 9.2: Calculating the IRR
A project has a total up-front cost of $435.44. The cash flows are $100 in the first year, $200 in the second year, and $300 in the third year. What’s the IRR? If we require an 18 percent return, should we take this investment?
We’ll describe the NPV profile and find the IRR by calcu- lating some NPVs at different discount rates. You should check our answers for practice. Beginning with 0 percent, we have:
Discount Rate NPV
0% $164.56 5 100.36
10 46.15 15 0.00 20 –39.61
The NPV is zero at 15 percent, so 15 percent is the IRR. If we require an 18 percent return, we should not take the invest- ment. The reason is that the NPV is negative at 18 percent (check that it is –$24.47). The IRR rule tells us the same thing in this case. We shouldn’t take this investment because its 15 percent return is less than our required 18 percent return.
net present value profile A graphical representation of the relationship between an investment’s NPVs and various discount rates.
232 Part 4: Capital Budgeting
09Ross_Chapter09_4th.indd 23209Ross_Chapter09_4th.indd 232 12-11-27 12:0512-11-27 12:05
Problems with the IRR Problems with the IRR come about when the cash fl ows are not conventional or when we are trying to compare two or more investments to see which is best. In the fi rst case, surprisingly, the simple question—What’s the return?—can become very diffi cult to answer. In the second case, the IRR can be a misleading guide.
NON-CONVENTIONAL CASH FLOWS Suppose we have an oil sands project that requires a $60 investment. Our cash flow in the first year will be $155. In the second year, the mine is depleted, but we have to spend $100 to restore the terrain. As Figure 9.5 illustrates, both the first and third cash flows are negative.
FIGURE 9.5
Project cash flows 0 1 2Year
–$60 +$155 –$100
Calculating IRRs with a Spreadsheet
Because IRRs are so tedious to calculate by hand, financial calculators and, especially, spreadsheets are generally used. The procedures used by various financial calculators are too different for us to illustrate here, so we will focus on using a spreadsheet. As the follow- ing example illustrates, using a spreadsheet is very easy.
1
2
3 4 5 6 7 8 9
10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
A B C D E F G H
Suppose we have a four-year project that costs $500. The cash flows over the four-year life will be $100, $200, $300, and $400. What is the IRR?
Year Cash flow 0 -$500 1 100 27.3% 2 200 3 300 4 400
The formula entered in cell F9 is =IRR(C8:C12). Notice that the Year 0 cash flow has a negative sign representing the initial cost of the project.
Using a spreadsheet to calculate internal rates of return
IRR =
Finding IRR
You can solve this problem using a financial calculator by doing the following:
CFo = -$500 C01 = $100 F01 = 1 C02 = $200 F02 = 1 C03 = $300 F03 = 1 IRR = CPT C04 = $400 F04 = 1 The answer to the problem is: 27.2732%
NOTE: To toggle between the different cash flow options, use the arrows found on the calculator.
SPREADSHEET STRATEGIES
CALCULATOR HINTS
Chapter 9: Net Present Value and Other Investment Criteria 233
09Ross_Chapter09_4th.indd 23309Ross_Chapter09_4th.indd 233 12-11-27 12:0512-11-27 12:05
To fi nd the IRR on this project, we can calculate the NPV at various rates:
Th e NPV appears to be behaving in a very peculiar fashion here. As the discount rate increases from 0 percent to 30 percent, the NPV starts out negative and becomes positive. Th is seems backward because the NPV is rising as the discount rate rises. It then starts getting smaller and becomes negative again. What’s the IRR? To fi nd out, we draw the NPV profi le in Figure 9.6.
In Figure 9.6, notice that the NPV is zero when the discount rate is 25 percent, so this is the IRR. Or is it? Th e NPV is also zero at 33⅓ percent. Which of these is correct? Th e answer is both or neither; more precisely, there is no unambiguously correct answer. Th is is the multiple rates of return problem. Many fi nancial computer packages (including the best seller for personal com- puters) aren’t aware of this problem and just report the fi rst IRR that is found. Others report only the smallest positive IRR, even though this answer is no better than any other.
FIGURE 9.6
NPV and the multiple IRR problem
NPV
$1
$0
–$1
–$5
–$2
10% 30% 50%
–$4
–$3
IRR = 25% IRR = 33 %
r
1 3
• • 20% 40%
•
In our current example, the IRR rule breaks down completely. Suppose our required return were 10 percent. Should we take this investment? Both IRRs are greater than 10 percent, so, by the IRR rule, maybe we should. However, as Figure 9.6 shows, the NPV is negative at any discount rate less than 25 percent, so this is not a good investment. When should we take it? Looking at Figure 9.6 one last time, the NPV is positive only if our required return is between 25 and 33⅓ percent.
Non-conventional cash fl ows occur when a project has an outlay (negative cash fl ow) at the end (or in some intermediate period in the life of a project) as well as the beginning. Earlier, we gave the example of a strip mine with its major environmental cleanup costs at the end of the project life. Another common example is hotels which must renovate their properties periodically to keep up with competitors’ new buildings. Th is creates a major expense gives hotel projects a non-conventional cash fl ow pattern.
Th e moral of the story is that when the cash fl ows aren’t conventional, strange things can start to happen to the IRR. Th is is not anything to get upset about, however, because the NPV rule, as always, works just fi ne. Th is illustrates that, oddly enough, the obvious question—What’s the rate of return?—may not always have a good answer.
MUTUALLY EXCLUSIVE INVESTMENTS Even if there is a single IRR, another problem can arise concerning mutually exclusive investment decisions. If two investments, X
Discount Rate % NPV
0 -$5.00 10 -1.74 20 -0.28 30 0.06 40 -0.31
multiple rates of return One potential problem in using the IRR method if more than one discount rate makes the NPV of an investment zero.
mutually exclusive investment decisions One potential problem in using the IRR method is the acceptance of one project excludes that of another.
234 Part 4: Capital Budgeting
09Ross_Chapter09_4th.indd 23409Ross_Chapter09_4th.indd 234 12-11-27 12:0512-11-27 12:05
and Y, are mutually exclusive, then taking one of them means we cannot take the other. For ex- ample, if we own one corner lot, we can build a gas station or an apartment building, but not both. These are mutually exclusive alternatives.
Th us far, we have asked whether or not a given investment is worth undertaking. A related question, however, comes up very oft en: Given two or more mutually exclusive investments, which one is the best? Th e answer is simple enough: Th e best one is the one with the largest NPV. Can we also say that the best one has the highest return? As we show, the answer is no.
To illustrate the problem with the IRR rule and mutually exclusive investments, consider the cash fl ows from the following two mutually exclusive investments:
EXAMPLE 9.3: What’s the IRR?
You are looking at an investment that requires you to invest $51 today. You’ll get $100 in one year, but you must pay out $50 in two years. What is the IRR on this investment?
You’re on the alert now to the non-conventional cash flow problem, so you probably wouldn’t be surprised to see more than one IRR. However, if you start looking for an IRR
by trial and error, it will take you a long time. The reason is that there is no IRR. The NPV is negative at every discount rate, so we shouldn’t take this investment under any cir- cumstances. What’s the return of this investment? Your guess is as good as ours.
EXAMPLE 9.4: “I Th ink, Th erefore I Know How Many IRRs Th ere Can Be.”
We’ve seen that it’s possible to get more than one IRR. If you wanted to make sure that you had found all of the pos- sible IRRs, how could you tell? The answer comes from the great mathematician, philosopher, and financial analyst Descartes (of “I think; therefore I am” fame). Descartes’s rule of signs says that the maximum number of IRRs is equal to the number of times that the cash flows change sign from positive to negative and/or negative to positive.9
In our example with the 25 and 331/3 percent IRRs, could there be yet another IRR? The cash flows flip from negative to positive, then back to negative, for a total of two sign changes. As a result, the maximum number of IRRs is two, and, from Descartes’s rule, we don’t need to look for any more. Note that the actual number of IRRs can be less than the maximum (see Example 9.3).
9
Year Investment A Investment B
0 –$100 –$100 1 50 20 2 40 40 3 40 50 4 30 60
IRR 24% 21%
Since these investments are mutually exclusive, we can take only one of them. Simple intuition suggests that Investment A is better because of its higher return. Unfortunately, simple intuition is not always correct.
To see why investment A is not necessarily the better of the two investments, we’ve calculated the NPV of these investments for diff erent required returns:
Discount Rate % NPV(A) NPV(B)
0 $60.00 $70.00 5 43.13 47.88
10 29.06 29.79 15 17.18 14.82 20 7.06 2.31 25 -1.63 -8.22
9 To be more precise, the number of IRRs that are bigger than -100 percent is generally equal to the number of sign changes, or it differs from the number of sign changes by an even number. Thus, for example, if there are five sign changes, there are either five, three, or one IRRs. If there are two sign changes, there are either two IRRs or no IRRs.
Chapter 9: Net Present Value and Other Investment Criteria 235
09Ross_Chapter09_4th.indd 23509Ross_Chapter09_4th.indd 235 12-11-27 12:0512-11-27 12:05
Calculating IRRs with a Spreadsheet for non-conventional cash flows
The spreadsheet shows the IRR calculation of the oil sands project.
1
2
3 4 5 6 7 8 9
10 11 12
A B C D E F G H
Suppose we have an oil sands project that requires a $60 investment. The cash flows over the 2 year life are $155 and –$100. What is the IRR
Year Cash flow 0 ($60) 1 $155 25% 2 ($100)
The formula entered in cell E9 is =IRR(C8:C10). Notice that the Year 0 and Year 2 cash flow is negative.
Using a spreadsheet to calculate internal rates of return for non-conventional cash flows
IRR =
The spreadsheet calculates only the smaller value of IRR. The MIRR (modified IRR) func- tion in MS Excel addresses the multiple IRR problem. Further, it allows the user to override an unrealistic assumption implicit in the IRR method that the positive cash flows are rein- vested at the IRR instead of the cost of capital. MIRR fixes both the issues by taking the cash, flows, finance rate (interest rates to be paid for negative cash flows) and reinvestment rate (interest rates that would be earned on the cash during the investment period) as input and returning a single value. Refer to Appendix 9A to know more about MIRR.
Th e IRR for A (24 percent) is larger than the IRR for B (21 percent). However, if you compare the NPVs, you’ll see that which investment has the higher NPV depends on our required return. B has greater total cash fl ow, but it pays back more slowly than A. As a result, it has a higher NPV at lower discount rates.
In our example, the NPV and IRR rankings confl ict for some discount rates. If our required return is 10 percent, for instance, B has the higher NPV and is thus the better of the two even though A has the higher return. If our required return is 15 percent, there is no ranking confl ict: A is better.
Th e confl ict between the IRR and NPV for mutually exclusive investments can be illustrated as we have done in Figure 9.7 by plotting their NPV profi les. In Figure 9.7, notice that the NPV profi les cross at about 11 percent. Th is discount rate is referred to as the cross-over point. Notice also that at any discount rate less than 11 percent, the NPV for B is higher. In this range, taking B benefi ts us more than taking A, even though A’s IRR is higher. At any rate greater than 11 percent, project A has the greater NPV.
FIGURE 9.7
NPV and the IRR ranking problem
NPV
$60
$70
$50
$40
$0
$30 $26.34
5% 30%10% 15% 20% 25%
$10
–$10
$20
r• • • •
• •
••
•
• •
•
• •
NPVB > NPVA
NPVA > NPVB
Project B
Project A Crossover point
IRRA = 24%
IRRB = 21%11.1%
SPREADSHEET STRATEGIES
236 Part 4: Capital Budgeting
09Ross_Chapter09_4th.indd 23609Ross_Chapter09_4th.indd 236 12-11-27 12:0512-11-27 12:05
What this example illustrates is that whenever we have mutually exclusive projects, we shouldn’t rank them based on their returns. More generally, anytime we are comparing invest- ments to determine which is best, IRRs can be misleading. Instead, we need to look at the relative NPVs to avoid the possibility of choosing incorrectly. Remember, we’re ultimately interested in creating value for the shareholders, so the option with the higher NPV is preferred, regardless of the relative returns.
If this seems counterintuitive, think of it this way. Suppose you have two investments. One has a 10 percent return and makes you $100 richer immediately. Th e other has a 20 percent return and makes you $50 richer immediately. Which one do you like better? We would rather have $100 than $50, regardless of the returns, so we like the fi rst one better.
A fi nal, important consideration in choosing between investment options is the actual amount of funds to be invested. In our example above, the options involve diff erent amounts of money ($70,000 versus $60,000). In this case, we must consider whether we have suffi cient funds to undertake a particular option, and if we choose the smaller investment, what to do with the excess funds. Some important tools to handle this situation, like the profi tability index and capital rationing, will be discussed further in this section of the text.
Th ere are oft en challenges while evaluating mutually exclusive projects in real life. For exam- ple, when the World Trade Center (twin towers) was destroyed in a terrorist attack on September 11, 2011, there was a lot of debate about the usage of the site. Th ere were many confl icting parties suggesting mutually exclusive projects for the site. Th e Port Authority of New York and New Jer- sey could have built another twin towers or it could have used the site for community purposes. In such scenarios, evaluating mutually exclusive projects based on NPV and IRR becomes diffi cult as there are lots of external stakeholders involved. Finally, the Port Authority of New York and New Jersey decided on fi ve new offi ce towers—One WTC, Memorial and Museum, Transportation Hub, WTC Retail and a Performing Arts Center slated for completion in 2013.
Redeeming Qualit ies of the IRR Despite its fl aws, the IRR is very popular in practice, more so than even the NPV. It probably survives because it fi lls a need that the NPV does not. In analyzing investments, people in gen- eral and fi nancial analysts in particular seem to prefer talking about rates of return rather than dollar values.
EXAMPLE 9.5: Calculating the Crossover Rate
In Figure 9.7, the NPV profiles cross at about 11 percent. How can we determine just what this crossover point is? The crossover rate, by definition, is the discount rate that makes the NPVs of two projects equal. To illustrate, suppose we have the following two mutually exclusive investments:
Year Investment A Investment B
0 –$400 –$500 1 250 320 2 280 340
What’s the crossover rate? To find the crossover, consider moving out of Invest-
ment A and into Investment B. If you make the move, you’ll have to invest an extra $100 = ($500 – 400). For this $100 investment, you’ll get an extra $70 = ($320 – 250) in the first year and an extra $60 = ($340 – 280) in the second year. Is this a good move? In other words, is it worth invest- ing the extra $100?
Based on our discussion, the NPV of the switch, NPV (B – A) is:
NPV(B – A) = –$100 + $70/(1 + r) + $60/(1 + r)2
We can calculate the return on this investment by setting the NPV equal to zero and solving for the IRR;
NPV(B – A) = 0 = –$100 + $70/(1 + r) + $60/(1 + r)2
If you go through this calculation, you will find the IRR is exactly 20 percent. What this tells us is that at a 20 percent discount rate, we are indifferent between the two invest- ments because the NPV of the difference in their cash flows is zero. As a consequence, the two investments have the same value, so this 20 percent is the crossover rate. Check that the NPV at 20 percent is $2.78 for both.
In general, you can find the crossover rate by taking the difference in the cash flows and calculating the IRR using the differences. It doesn’t make any difference which one you subtract from which. To see this, find the IRR for (A – B); you’ll see it’s the same number. Also, for practice, you might want to find the exact crossover in Figure 9.7. (Hint: It’s 11.0704 percent.)
Chapter 9: Net Present Value and Other Investment Criteria 237
09Ross_Chapter09_4th.indd 23709Ross_Chapter09_4th.indd 237 12-11-27 12:0512-11-27 12:05
In a similar vein, the IRR also appears to provide a simple way of communicating information about a proposal. One manager might say to another: “Remodelling the clerical wing has a 20 percent return.” Th is may somehow be simpler than saying: “At a 10 percent discount rate, the net present value is $4,000.”
Finally, under certain circumstances, the IRR may have a practical advantage over NPV. We can’t estimate the NPV unless we know the appropriate discount rate, but we can still estimate the IRR. Suppose we only had a rough estimate of the required return on an investment, but we found, for example, that it had a 40 percent return. We would probably be inclined to take it since it is very unlikely that the required return is that high. Th e advantages and disadvantages of the IRR follow:
Internal Rate of Return Rule
Advantages Disadvantages 1. Closely related to NPV, generally
leading to identical decisions. 2. Easy to understand and communicate.
1. May result in multiple answers or no answer with non-conventional cash flows.
2. May lead to incorrect decisions in comparisons of mutually exclusive investments.
To address some of the problems that can crop up with the standard IRR, it is oft en proposed that a modifi ed version be used. As we will see, there are several diff erent ways of calculating a modifi ed IRR, or MIRR, but the basic idea is to modify the cash fl ows fi rst and then calculate an IRR using the modifi ed cash fl ows. Appendix 9A discusses MIRR.
1. Under what circumstances will the IRR and NPV rules lead to the same accept/reject decisions? When might they conflict?
2. Is it generally true that an advantage of the IRR rule over the NPV rule is that we don’t need to know the required return to use the IRR rule?
9.5 The Profitability Index
Another method used to evaluate projects is called the profi tability index (PI) or benefi t/cost ratio. Th is index is defi ned as the present value of the future cash fl ows divided by the initial investment. So, if a project costs $200 and the present value of its future cash fl ows is $220, the profi tability index value would be $220/200 = 1.10. Notice that the NPV for this investment is $20, so it is a desirable investment.
More generally, if a project has a positive NPV, the present value of the future cash fl ows must be bigger than the initial investment. Th e profi tability index would thus be bigger than 1.00 for a positive NPV investment and less than 1.00 for a negative NPV investment.
How do we interpret the profi tability index? In our example, the PI was 1.10. Th is tells us that, per dollar invested, $1.10 in value or $.10 in NPV results. Th e profi tability index thus measures “bang for the buck,” that is, the value created per dollar invested. For this reason, it is oft en proposed as a measure of performance for government or other not-for-profi t investments. Th ey can use the index by attempting to quantify both tangible and intangible costs and benefi ts of a particular program. For example, the cost of a tree planting program might be simply the value of the trees and the labour to plant them. Th e benefi ts might be improvement to the environment and public enjoyment (the dollar value of which would have to be estimated). Also, when capital is scarce, it may make sense to allocate it to those projects with the highest PIs. We return to this issue in a later chapter.
Th e PI is obviously very similar to the NPV. However, consider an investment that costs $5 and has a $10 present value and an investment that costs $100 with a $150 present value. Th e fi rst of these investments has an NPV of $5 and a PI of 2. Th e second has an NPV of $50 and a PI of 1.50. If these were mutually exclusive investments, the second one is preferred even though it has a lower PI.10 Th is ranking problem is very similar to the IRR ranking problem we saw in the previous section. In all, there seems to be little reason to rely on the PI instead of the NPV. Our discussion of the PI is summarized in the following table:
10 Both IRR and PI are affected by the scale issue when projects are of different size.
Concept Questions
profitability index (PI) The present value of an investment’s future cash flows divided by its initial cost. Also benefit/cost ratio.
benefit/cost ratio The profitability index of an investment project.
238 Part 4: Capital Budgeting
09Ross_Chapter09_4th.indd 23809Ross_Chapter09_4th.indd 238 12-11-27 12:0512-11-27 12:05
Profitability Index Rule
Advantages Disadvantages 1. Closely related to NPV, generally
leading to identical decisions. 2. Easy to understand and communicate. 3. May be useful when available
investment funds are limited.
1. May lead to incorrect decisions in comparisons of mutually exclusive investments.
1. What does the profitability index measure?
2. How would you state the profitability index rule?
9.6 The Practice of Capital Budgeting
So far, this chapter has asked the question: Which capital budgeting methods should companies be using? An equally important question is: Which methods are companies using? Table 9.5 goes a long way toward answering this question. As can be seen from the table, three-quarters of Can- adian companies use the NPV method and two-thirds use IRR.11 Th is is not surprising, given the theoretical advantages of these approaches.
TABLE 9.5
Capital Budgeting Techniques used by Canadian firms
% of Often or Always
Net present value Internal rate of return Payback period Accounting rate of return Discounted payback Adjusted present value Profitability index Modified internal rate of return Real options
74.6 68.4 67.2 39.7 24.8 17.2 11.2 12.0 10.4
Source: Table 3 from Baker, H. K., Dutta, S., & Saadi, S. (2011). Corporate fi nance practices in Canada: Where do we stand? Multinational Finance Journal, 15(3–4), 157.
Over half of these companies use the payback method, a rather surprising result given the conceptual problems with this approach. And while discounted payback represents a theoretical improvement over regular payback, the usage here is far less. Perhaps companies are attracted to the user-friendly nature of payback.
You might expect the capital budgeting methods of large fi rms to be more sophisticated than the methods of small fi rms. Aft er all, large fi rms have the fi nancial resources to hire more sophis- ticated employees. Table 9.6 provides some support for this idea. Here, the managers of Canadian fi rms indicate frequency of use of the various capital budgeting methods on a scale of 0 (never) to 4 (always). Both the IRR and payback methods are used more frequently in large fi rms than in small fi rms. Th e use of the NPV method is similar for large and the small fi rms. Capital budgeting for not- for-profi t organizations such as hospitals must balance the hospital mission with fi nancial resource availability. Managers of hospitals maximize value by accepting projects that fulfi ll the hospital mis- sion while maintaining liquidity and solvency. Th ese managers may accept some projects with the least negative NPVs12 because they contribute to the fulfi llment of the hospital mission.
11 Baker, H. K., Dutta, S., & Saadi, S. (2011). Corporate finance practices in Canada: Where do we stand? Multinational Finance Journal, 15(3–4), 157. 12 Negative NPV projects have costs greater than the benefits generated.
Concept Questions
Chapter 9: Net Present Value and Other Investment Criteria 239
09Ross_Chapter09_4th.indd 23909Ross_Chapter09_4th.indd 239 12-11-27 12:0512-11-27 12:05
Th e use of quantitative techniques in capital budgeting varies with the industry. As you would imagine, fi rms that are better able to estimate cash fl ows precisely are more likely to use NPV. For example, estimation of cash fl ow in certain aspects of the oil business is quite feasible. Because of this, energy-related fi rms were among the fi rst to use NPV analysis. Conversely, the fl ows in the motion picture business are very hard to project. Th e grosses of great hits like Avatar, Th e Dark Knight Rises, and Th e Avengers were far, far greater than anyone imagined. Th e big failures like Waterworld were unexpected as well. Consequently, NPV analysis is frowned upon in the movie business.
TABLE 9.6
Frequency of use of various capital budgeting methods for Canadian firms
Large Firms Small Firms
Net present value Internal rate of return Payback period Accounting rate of return Discounted payback Adjusted present value Profitability index Modified internal rate of return Real options
2.92 3.40 3.04 2.04 0.61 1.04 0.32 0.40 0.68
2.95 2.52 2.73 1.67 1.34 0.88 0.60 0.53 0.35
Source: Table 3 from Baker, H. K., Dutta, S., & Saadi, S. (2011). Corporate fi nance practices in Canada: Where do we stand? Multinational Finance Journal, 15(3–4), 157.
TABLE 9.7 Summary of investment criteria
I. DISCOUNTED CASH FLOW CRITERIA Net Present Value (Npv)
Definition: Rule:
Advantages:
The difference between a project’s market value and cost. Invest in projects with positive NPVs. No serious flaws; preferred decision criteria.
Internal Rate of Return (IRR) Definition:
Rule: Advantages:
Disadvantages:
The discount rate that makes the estimated NPV equal to zero. Invest in projects when their IRR exceeds the required return. Closely related to NPV; leads to the exact same decision as NPV for conventional, independent projects. Cannot use to rank mutually exclusive projects or when project cash flows are unconventional.
Profitability Index (PI) Definition:
Rule: Advantages:
Disadvantages:
Ratio of present value to cost. Also known as the benefit/cost ratio. Invest in projects when the index exceeds one. Similar to NPV. Cannot use to rank mutually exclusive projects.
ii. Payback Criteria Payback Period
Definition: Rule:
Advantages: Disadvantages:
The length of time until the sum of an investment’s cash flows equals its cost. Invest in projects with payback periods less than the cutoff point. Easy to use and understand. Ignores risk, the time value of money and cash flows beyond the cutoff point.
Discounted Payback Period Definition:
Rule: Advantages:
Disadvantages:
The length of time until the sum of an investment’s discounted cash flows equals its cost. Invest in projects if the discounted payback period is less than the cutoff point. Includes time value of money, easy to understand. Ignores cash flows after the cutoff point. Ignores cash flows after the cutoff point.
III. Accounting Criteria Average Accounting Return (AAR)
Definition: Rule:
Advantages: Disadvantages:
A measure of accounting profit relative to book value. Invest in projects if their AAR exceeds a benchmark AAR. Easy to calculate, information is readily available. Not a true rate of return; ignores time value of money, cash flows, and market values.
240 Part 4: Capital Budgeting
09Ross_Chapter09_4th.indd 24009Ross_Chapter09_4th.indd 240 12-11-27 12:0512-11-27 12:05
In Chapter 11 we discuss what types of capital budgeting techniques fi rms with less predictable cash fl ows can use.
Table 9.7 provides a summary of investment criteria for capital budgeting. Th e table discusses the benefi ts and fl aws of each approach.
1. What are the most commonly used capital budgeting procedures?
2. Since NPV is conceptually the best procedure for capital budgeting, why do you think that multiple measures are used in practice?
9.7 SUMMARY AND CONCLUSIONS
Th is chapter has covered the diff erent criteria used to evaluate proposed investments. Th e six criteria, in the order we discussed them, are:
1. Net present value (NPV) 2. Payback period 3. Discounted payback period 4. Average accounting return (AAR) 5. Internal rate of return (IRR) 6. Profitability index (PI)
Before making a proposed investment, the above criteria need to be evaluated on the basis of the following decision rules:
a. Does the decision rule adjust for the time value of money? b. Does the decision rule adjust for risk? c. Does the decision rule provide information on whether we are creating value for the firm?
We illustrated how to calculate each of these and discussed the interpretation of the results. We also described the advantages and disadvantages of each of them. Ultimately, a good capital bud- geting criterion must tell us two things. First, is a particular project a good investment? Second, if we have more than one good project, but we can only take one of them, which one should we take? Th e main point of this chapter is that only the NPV criterion can always provide the correct answer to both questions.
For this reason, NPV is one of the two or three most important concepts in fi nance, and we will refer to it many times in the chapters ahead. When we do, keep two things in mind: (1) NPV is always just the diff erence between the market value of an asset or project and its cost, and (2) the fi nancial manager acts in the shareholders’ best interests by identifying and taking positive NPV projects.
Finally, we noted that NPVs can’t normally be observed in the market; instead, they must be estimated. Because there is always the possibility of a poor estimate, fi nancial managers use mul- tiple criteria for examining projects. Th ese other criteria provide additional information about whether a project truly has a positive NPV.
Key Terms average accounting return (AAR) (page 228) benefit/cost ratio (page 238) discounted cash flow (DCF) valuation (page 222) discounted payback period (page 227) internal rate of return (IRR) (page 230) multiple rates of return (page 234)
mutually exclusive investment decisions (page 234) net present value (NPV) (page 221) net present value profile (page 232) payback period (page 225) profitability index (PI) (page 238)
Concept Questions
Chapter 9: Net Present Value and Other Investment Criteria 241
09Ross_Chapter09_4th.indd 24109Ross_Chapter09_4th.indd 241 12-11-27 12:0512-11-27 12:05
Chapter Review Problems and Self-Test 9.1 Investment Criteria This problem will give you some prac-
tice calculating NPVs and paybacks. A proposed overseas ex- pansion has the following cash flows
Year Cash Flow
0 -$200 1 50 2 60 3 70 4 200
Calculate the payback, the discounted payback, and the NPV at a required return of 10 percent.
9.2 Mutually Exclusive Investments Consider the following two mutually exclusive investments. Calculate the IRR for each
and the crossover rate. Under what circumstances will the IRR and NPV criteria rank the two projects differently?
Year Investment A Investment B
0 -$75 -$75 1 20 60 2 40 50 3 70 15
9.3 Average Accounting Return You are looking at a three-year project with a projected net income of $2,000 in Year 1, $4,000 in Year 2, and $6,000 in Year 3. The cost is $12,000, which will be depreciated straight-line to zero over the three-year life of the project. What is the average accounting return (AAR)?
Answers to Self-Test Problems 9.1 In the following table, we have listed the cash flow, cumulative cash flow, discounted cash flow (at 10 percent), and cumulative dis-
counted cash flow for the proposed project.
Year
Cash Flow Accumulated Cash Flow
Undiscounted Discounted Undiscounted Discounted
1 $ 50 $ 45.45 $ 50 $ 45.45 2 60 49.59 110 95.04 3 70 52.59 180 147.63 4 200 136.60 380 284.23
Recall that the initial investment was $200. When we compare this to accumulated undiscounted cash flows, we see that payback occurs between Years 3 and 4. The cash flows for the first three years are $180 total, so, going into the fourth year, we are short by $20. The total cash flow in Year 4 is $200, so the payback is 3 + ($20/200) = 3.10 years.
Looking at the accumulated discounted cash flows, we see that the discounted payback occurs between Years 3 and 4. The discounted cash flows for the first three years are $147.63 in total, so, going into the fourth year, we are short by $52.37. The total discounted cash flow in Year 4 is $136.60, so the payback is 3 + ($52.37/136.60) = 3.38 years. The sum of the discounted cash flows is $284.23, so the NPV is $84.23. Notice that this is the present value of the cash flows that occur after the discounted payback.
9.2 To calculate the IRR, we might try some guesses, as in the following table: Discount Rate NPV(A) NPV(B)
0% $55.00 $50.00 10 28.83 32.14 20 9.95 18.40 30 -4.09 7.57
40 -14.80 -1.17
Several things are immediately apparent from our guesses. First, the IRR on A must be between 20 percent and 30 percent (why?). With some more effort, we find that it’s 26.79 percent. For B, the IRR must be a little less than 40 percent (again, why?); it works out to be 38.54 percent. Also, notice that at rates between 0 percent and 10 percent, the NPVs are very close, indicating that the crossover is in that vicinity.
To find the crossover exactly, we can compute the IRR on the difference in the cash flows. If we take the cash flows from A minus the cash flows from B, the resulting cash flows are:
Year A - B
0 $ 0 1 -40 2 -10 3 55
These cash flows look a little odd, but the sign only changes once, so we can find an IRR. With some trial and error, you’ll see that the NPV is zero at a discount rate of 5.42 percent, so this is the crossover rate.
The IRR for B is higher. However, as we’ve seen, A has the larger NPV for any discount rate less than 5.42 percent, so the NPV and IRR rankings will conflict in that range. Remember, if there’s a conflict, we will go with the higher NPV. Our decision rule is thus very simple: take A if the required return is less than 5.42 percent, take B if the required return is between 5.42 percent and 38.54 percent (the IRR on B), and take neither if the required return is more than 38.54 percent.
242 Part 4: Capital Budgeting
09Ross_Chapter09_4th.indd 24209Ross_Chapter09_4th.indd 242 12-11-27 12:0512-11-27 12:05
9.3 Here we need to calculate the ratio of average net income to average book value to get the AAR. Average net income is: Average net income = ($2,000 + 4,000 + 6,000)/3 = $4,000 Average book value is: Average book value = $12,000/2 = $6,000 So the average accounting return is: AAR = $4,000/$6,000 = 66.67% This is an impressive return. Remember, however, that it isn’t really a rate of return like an interest rate or an IRR, so the size doesn’t tell
us a lot. In particular, our money is probably not going to grow at a rate of 66.67 percent per year, sorry to say.
Concepts Review and Critical Thinking Questions 1. (LO2, 3) If a project with conventional cash flows has a pay-
back period less than the project’s life, can you definitively state the algebraic sign of the NPV? Why or why not? If you know that the discounted payback period is less than the pro- ject’s life, what can you say about the NPV? Explain.
2. (LO2, 3, 6, 7) Suppose a project has conventional cash flows and a positive NPV. What do you know about its payback? Its discounted payback? Its profitability index? Its IRR? Explain.
3. (LO2) Concerning payback: a. Describe how the payback period is calculated and de-
scribe the information this measure provides about a se- quence of cash flows. What is the payback criterion decision rule?
b. What are the problems associated with using the payback period as a means of evaluating cash flows?
c. What are the advantages of using the payback period to evaluate cash flows? Are there any circumstances under which using payback might be appropriate? Explain.
4. (LO3) Concerning discounted payback: a. Describe how the discounted payback period is calcu-
lated and describe the information this measure provides about a sequence of cash flows. What is the discounted payback criterion decision rule?
b. What are the problems associated with using the dis- counted payback period as a means of evaluating cash flows?
c. What conceptual advantage does the discounted payback method have over the regular payback method? Can the discounted payback ever be longer than the regular pay- back? Explain.
5. (LO4) Concerning AAR: a. Describe how the average accounting return is usually
calculated and describe the information this measure provides about a sequence of cash flows. What is the AAR criterion decision rule?
b. What are the problems associated with using the AAR as a means of evaluating a project’s cash flows? What un- derlying feature of AAR is most troubling to you from a financial perspective? Does the AAR have any redeeming qualities?
6. (LO1) Concerning NPV: a. Describe how NPV is calculated and describe the infor-
mation this measure provides about a sequence of cash flows. What is the NPV criterion decision rule?
b. Why is NPV considered to be a superior method of eval- uating the cash flows from a project? Suppose the NPV for a project’s cash flows is computed to be $2,500. What does this number represent with respect to the firm’s shareholders?
7. (LO5) Concerning IRR: a. Describe how the IRR is calculated and describe the in-
formation this measure provides about a sequence of cash flows. What is the IRR criterion decision rule?
b. What is the relationship between IRR and NPV? Are there any situations in which you might prefer one method over the other? Explain.
c. Despite its shortcomings in some situations, why do most financial managers use IRR along with NPV when evaluating projects? Can you think of a situation in which IRR might be a more appropriate measure to use than NPV? Explain.
8. (LO7) Concerning the profitability index: a. Describe how the profitability index is calculated and de-
scribe the information this measure provides about a se- quence of cash flows. What is the profitability index decision rule?
b. What is the relationship between the profitability index and NPV? Are there any situations in which you might prefer one method over the other? Explain.
9. (LO2, 5) A project has perpetual cash flows of C per period, a cost of I, and a required return of R. What is the relationship between the project’s payback and its IRR? What implications does your answer have for long-lived projects with relatively constant cash flows?
10. (LO1) In early 2013, U.S retailer Target planned to open more than 100 stores in Canada. Also, in March 2011, Tata Steel, 10th largest steel maker in the world, announced its intention to in- vest around $5 billion in Quebec’s iron ore. What are some of the reasons that foreign manufacturers of products as diverse as retail and steel are opening up their facilities in Canada?
11. (LO1) What are some of the difficulties that might come up in actual applications of the various criteria we discussed in this chapter? Which one would be the easiest to implement in actual applications? The most difficult?
12. (LO1, 7) Are the capital budgeting criteria we discussed ap- plicable to not-for-profit corporations? How should such en- tities make capital budgeting decisions? What about different levels of government, i.e., federal, provincial, and municipal? Should they evaluate spending proposals using these techniques?
13. (LO5) One of the less flattering interpretations of the acro- nym MIRR is “meaningless internal rate of return.” Why do you think this term is applied to MIRR?
14. (LO1, 6) It is sometimes stated that “the net present value ap- proach assumes reinvestment of the intermediate cash flows at the required return.” Is this claim correct? To answer, sup- pose you calculate the NPV of a project in the usual way. Next, suppose you do the following:
Chapter 9: Net Present Value and Other Investment Criteria 243
09Ross_Chapter09_4th.indd 24309Ross_Chapter09_4th.indd 243 12-11-27 12:0512-11-27 12:05
a. Calculate the future value (as of the end of the project) of all the cash flows other than the initial outlay assuming they are reinvested at the required return, producing a single future value figure for the project.
b. Calculate the NPV of the project using the single future value calculated in the previous step and the initial out- lay. It is easy to verify that you will get the same NPV as in your original calculation only if you use the required return as the reinvestment rate in the previous step.
15. (LO5) It is sometimes stated that “the internal rate of return approach assumes reinvestment of the intermediate cash flows at the internal rate of return.” Is this claim correct? To
answer, suppose you calculate the IRR of a project in the usual way. Next, suppose you do the following: a. Calculate the future value (as of the end of the project) of
all the cash flows other than the initial outlay assuming they are reinvested at the IRR, producing a single future value figure for the project.
b. Calculate the IRR of the project using the single future value calculated in the previous step and the initial out- lay. It is easy to verify that you will get the same IRR as in your original calculation only if you use the IRR as the reinvestment rate in the previous step.
Questions and Problems 1. Calculating Payback (LO2) What is the payback period for the following set of cash flows?
Year Cash Flow
0 -$6,400 1 1,600 2 1,900 3 2,300 4 1,400
2. Calculating Payback (LO2) An investment project provides cash inflows of $765 per year for eight years. What is the project payback period if the initial cost is $2,400? What if the initial cost is $3,600? What if it is $6,500?
3. Calculating Payback (LO2) McKernan Inc. imposes a payback cutoff of three years for its international investment projects. If the company has the following two projects available, should they accept either of them?
Year Cash Flow (A) Cash Flow (B)
0 -$40,000 -$60,000 1 19,000 14,000 2 25,000 17,000 3 18,000 24,000 4 6,000 270,000
4. Calculating Discounted Payback (LO3) An investment project has annual cash inflows of $4,200, $5,300, $6,100, and $7,400, and a discount rate of 14 percent. What is the discounted payback period for these cash flows if the initial cost is $7,000? What if the initial cost is $10,000? What if it is $13,000?
5. Calculating Discounted Payback (LO3) An investment project costs $15,000 and has annual cash flows of $4,300 for six years. What is the discounted payback period if the discount rate is zero percent? What if the discount rate is 5 percent? If it is 19 percent?
6. Calculating AAR (LO4) You’re trying to determine whether to expand your business by building a new manufacturing plant. The plant has an installation cost of $15 million, which will be depreciated straight-line to zero over its four-year life. If the plant has projected net income of $1,938,200, $2,201,600, $1,876,000 and $1,329,500 over these four years, what is the project’s average accounting return (AAR)?
7. Calculating IRR (LO5) A firm evaluates all of its projects by applying the IRR rule. If the required return is 16 percent, should the firm accept the following project?
Year Cash Flow
0 -$34,000 1 16,000 2 18,000 3 15,000
8. Calculating NPV (LO1) For the cash flows in the previous problem, suppose the firm uses the NPV decision rule. At a required return of 12 percent, should the firm accept this project? What if the required return was 35 percent?
9. Calculating NPV and IRR (LO1, 5) A project that provides annual cash flows of $28,500 for nine years costs $138,000 today. Is this a good project if the required return is 8 percent? What if it’s 20 percent? At what discount rate would you be indifferent between accepting the project and rejecting it?
Basic (Questions
1–19)
3
6
7
9
244 Part 4: Capital Budgeting
09Ross_Chapter09_4th.indd 24409Ross_Chapter09_4th.indd 244 12-11-27 12:0512-11-27 12:05
10. Calculating IRR (LO5) What is the IRR of the following set of cash flows? Year Cash Flow
0 -$19,500 1 9,800 2 10,300 3 8,600
11. Calculating NPV(LO1) For the cash flows in the previous problem, what is the NPV at a discount rate of zero percent? What if the discount rate is 10 percent? If it is 20 percent? If it is 30 percent?
12. NPV versus IRR (LO1, 5) Parkallen Inc. has identified the following two mutually exclusive projects: Year Cash Flow (A) Cash Flow (B)
0 -$43,000 -$43,000 1 23,000 7,000 2 17,900 13,800 3 12,400 24,000 4 9,400 26,000
a. What is the IRR for each of these projects? Using the IRR decision rule, which project should the company accept? Is this decision necessarily correct?
b. If the required return is 11 percent, what is the NPV for each of these projects? Which project will the company choose if it applies the NPV decision rule?
c. Over what range of discount rates would the company choose Project A? Project B? At what discount rate would the com- pany be indifferent between these two projects? Explain.
13. NPV versus IRR (LO1, 5) Consider the following two mutually exclusive projects: Year Cash Flow (X) Cash Flow (Y)
0 -$15,000 -$15,000 1 8,150 7,700 2 5,050 5,150 3 6,800 7,250
Sketch the NPV profiles for X and Y over a range of discount rates from zero to 25 percent. What is the crossover rate for these two projects?
14. Problems with IRR (LO5) Belgravia Petroleum Inc. is trying to evaluate a generation project with the following cash flows: Year Cash Flow
0 -$45,000,000 1 78,000,000 2 -14,000,000
a. If the company requires a 12 percent return on its investments, should it accept this project? Why? b. Compute the IRR for this project. How many IRRs are there? Using the IRR decision rule, should the company accept the
project? What’s going on here? 15. Calculating Profitability Index (LO7) What is the profitability index for the following set of cash flows if the relevant discount
rate is 10 percent? What if the discount rate is 15 percent? If it is 22 percent? Year Cash Flow
0 -$14,000 1 7,300 2 6,900 3 5,700
16. Problems with Profitability Index (LO1, 7) The Hazeldean Computer Corporation is trying to choose between the following two mutually exclusive design projects:
Year Cash Flow (I) Cash Flow (II)
0 -$53,000 -$16,000 1 27,000 9,100 2 27,000 9,100 3 27,000 9,100
a. If the required return is 10 percent and the company applies the profitability index decision rule, which project should the firm accept?
b. If the company applies the NPV decision rule, which project should it take? c. Explain why your answers in (a) and (b) are different.
Chapter 9: Net Present Value and Other Investment Criteria 245
09Ross_Chapter09_4th.indd 24509Ross_Chapter09_4th.indd 245 12-11-27 12:0512-11-27 12:05
17. Comparing Investment Criteria (LO1, 2, 3, 5, 7) Consider the following two mutually exclusive projects: Year Cash Flow (A) Cash Flow (B)
0 -$300,000 -$40,000 1 20,000 19,000 2 50,000 12,000 3 50,000 18,000 4 390,000 10,500
Whichever project you choose, if any, you require a 15 percent return on your investment. a. If you apply the payback criterion, which investment will you choose? Why? b. If you apply the discounted payback criterion, which investment will you choose? Why? c. If you apply the NPV criterion, which investment will you choose? Why? d. If you apply the IRR criterion, which investment will you choose? Why? e. If you apply the profitability index criterion, which investment will you choose? Why? f. Based on your answers in (a) through (e), which project will you finally choose? Why?
18. NPV and Discount Rates (LO1) An investment has an installed cost of $684,680. The cash flows over the four-year life of the investment are projected to be $263,279, $294,060, $227,604, and $174,356. If the discount rate is zero, what is the NPV? If the discount rate is infinite, what is the NPV? At what discount rate is the NPV just equal to zero? Sketch the NPV profile for this investment based on these three points.
19. MIRR (LO6) Ritchie Ride Corp. is evaluating a project with the following cash flows: Year Cash Flow
0 -$16,000 1 6,100 2 7,800 3 8,400 4 6,500 5 -5,100
The company uses a 10 percent interest rate on all of its projects. Calculate the MIRR of the project using all three methods. 20. NPV and the Profitability Index (LO6) If we define the NPV index as the ratio of NPV to cost, what is the relationship
between this index and the profitability index? 21. Cash Flow Intuition (LO1, 7) A project has an initial cost of I, has a required return of R, and pays C annually for N years.
a. Find C in terms of I and N such that the project has a payback period just equal to its life. b. Find C in terms of I, N, and R such that this is a profitable project according to the NPV decision rule. c. Find C in terms of I, N, and R such that the project has a benefit-cost ratio of 2.
22. MIRR (LO 6) Suppose the company in Problem 19 uses an 11 percent discount rate and an 8 percent reinvestment rate on all of its projects. Calculate the MIRR of the project using all three methods using these interest rates.
23. Payback and NPV (LO2, 5) An investment under consideration has a payback of seven years and a cost of $724,000. If the required return is 12 percent, what is the worst-case NPV? The best-case NPV? Explain. Assume the cash flows are conventional.
24. Multiple IRRs (LO5) This problem is useful for testing the ability of financial calculators and computer software. Consider the following cash flows. How many different IRRs are there (Hint: search between 20 percent and 70 percent)? When should we take this project?
Year Cash Flow
0 -$ 1,512 1 8,586 2 -18,210 3 17,100 4 -6,000
25. NPV Valuation (LO1) The Argyll Corporation wants to set up a private cemetery business. According to the CFO, Kepler Wessels, business is “looking up.” As a result, the cemetery project will provide a net cash inflow of $85,000 for the firm during the first year, and the cash flows are projected to grow at a rate of 6 percent per year forever. The project requires an initial investment of $1,400,000. a. If Argyll requires a 13 percent return on such undertakings, should the cemetery business be started? b. The company is somewhat unsure about the assumption of a 6 percent growth rate in its cash flows. At what constant
growth rate would the company just break even if it still required a 13 percent return on investment?
Intermediate (Questions
20–22)
Challenge (Questions
23–28)
2
246 Part 4: Capital Budgeting
09Ross_Chapter09_4th.indd 24609Ross_Chapter09_4th.indd 246 12-11-27 12:0512-11-27 12:05
26. Problems with IRR (LO1, 5) A project has the following cash flows: Year Cash Flow
0 $58,000 1 -34,000 2 -45,000
What is the IRR for this project? If the required return is 12 percent, should the firm accept the project? What is the NPV of this project? What is the NPV of the project if the required return is 0 percent? 24 percent? What is going on here? Sketch the NPV profile to help you with your answer.
27. Problems with IRR (LO5) Avonmore Corp. has a project with the following cash flows: Year Cash Flow
0 $20,000 1 -26,000 2 13,000
What is the IRR of the project? What is happening here? 28. NPV and IRR (LO1, 5) Garneau International Limited is evaluating a project in Erewhon. The project will create the following
cash flows: Year Cash Flow
0 -$750,000 1 205,000 2 265,000 3 346,000 4 220,000
All cash flows will occur in Erewhon and are expressed in dollars. In an attempt to improve its economy, the Erewhon government has declared that all cash flows created by a foreign company are “blocked” and must be reinvested with the government for one year. The reinvestment rate for these funds is 4 percent. If Garneau uses an 11 percent required return on this project, what are the NPV and IRR of the project? Is the IRR you calculated the MIRR of the project? Why or why not?
Ferdinand Gold Mining
Rio Ferdinand, the owner of Ferdinand Gold Mining, is evalu- ating a new gold mine in Fort McMurray. Paul Pogba, the company’s geologist, has just finished his analysis of the mine site. He has estimated that the mine would be productive for eight years, after which the gold would be completely mined. Paul has taken an estimate of the gold deposits to Julia Davids, the company’s financial officer. Julia has been asked by Rio to perform an analysis of the new mine and present her recom- mendation on whether the company should open the new mine. Julia has used the estimates provided by Paul to determine the revenues that could be expected from the mine. She has also projected the expense of opening the mine and the an- nual operating expenses. If the company opens the mine, it will cost $600 million today, and it will have a cash outflow of $95 million nine years from today in costs associated with closing the mine and reclaiming the area surrounding it. The expected cash flows each year from the mine are shown in the table. Ferdinand Mining has a 12 percent required return on all of its gold mines.
Year Cash Flow
0 -$600,000,000 1 75,000,000 2 120,000,000 3 160,000,000 4 210,000,000 5 240,000,000 6 160,000,000 7 130,000,000 8 90,000,000 9 -95,000,000
1. Construct a spreadsheet to calculate the payback period, internal rate of return, modified internal rate of return, and net present value of the proposed mine.
2. Based on your analysis, should the company open the mine?
MINI CASE
Chapter 9: Net Present Value and Other Investment Criteria 247
09Ross_Chapter09_4th.indd 24709Ross_Chapter09_4th.indd 247 12-11-27 12:0512-11-27 12:05
Internet Application Questions 1. Net Present Value analysis assumes market efficiency. In fact, we can back out whether a particular investment had positive
NPV by observing the market reaction to its announcement. These are typically made over the wire to news agencies, and are also reported on the company’s website. For example, go to the homepage of Enbridge Inc. (enbridge.com/) and click on Media Center. On November 16, 2011, Enbridge announced that it would acquire 50 % stake in Seaway Crude Pipeline Company. Go to the Enbridge Investor Relations site (enbridge.com/InvestorRelations.aspx) and get the company’s stock price chart sur- rounding this date. Assuming that all of the price movement was due to the announcement, discuss whether the Seaway bid was a positive NPV investment for Enbridge.
2. NPV analysis assumes that managers’ objective is to maximize shareholders’ value. Directors on the boards of Canadian firms are required to look after the best interests of the corporation. Traditionally, this has meant the best interests of shareholders. The law firm of Osler, Hoskin and Harcourt maintains a public website providing detailed descriptions of the duties and responsibilities of Canadian directors (osler.com/NewsResources/Publications/Guides/). What are some of the difficulties in broadening the definition of corporate stakeholders? Do you think shareholders’ interests alone should be considered by direc- tors? Why or why not?
3. The Ontario Teachers’ Pension Plan has the responsibility to manage the retirement investments of teachers in the Province of Ontario. The plan presents its views and policies on corporate governance under the Governance link at the site otpp.com. From the shareholders’ perspective, what role should social responsibility and ethical considerations play in a firm’s investment analysis? Can these non-financial factors actually enhance shareholder value in the long term? How should companies take this into account in NPV decisions?
4. Here’s a concept most finance classes tiptoe around: a captive capital provider. Can a conglomerate successfully grow around its own capital-providing corporation? Or will internal capital ruin all NPV calculations? For GE Corp (ge.com), the answer is a big affirmative in favour of GE Capital (gecapital.com).
Do you think this is a successful strategy to imitate by other conglomerates? Do you see parallels with the Main Bank system of financing within Japanese keiretsu firms?
5. You have a project that has an initial cash outflow of -$20,000 and cash inflows of $6,000; $5,000; $4,000; and $3,000, respec- tively, for the next four years. Go to datadynamica.com/FinCalc/, and select the “On-line NPV IRR Calculator” link. Enter the cash flows. If the required return is 12 percent, what is the NPV of the project? The IRR?
THE MODIFIED INTERNAL RATE OF RETURN
This appendix presents the MIRR. To illustrate, let’s go back to the cash flows in Figure 9.5: -$60, +$155, and -$100. As we saw, there are two IRRs, 25 percent and 33⅓ percent. We next illustrate three different MIRRs, all of which have the property that only one answer will result, thereby eliminating the multiple IRR problem.
METHOD #1: THE DISCOUNTING APPROACH With the discounting approach, the idea is to discount all negative cash flows back to the present at the required return and add them to the initial cost. Then, calculate the IRR. Because only the first modified cash flow is negative, there will be only one IRR. The discount rate used might be the required return, or it might be some other externally supplied rate. We will use the project’s required return.
If the required return on the project is 20 percent, then the modified cash flows look like this:
Time 0: -$60 + $100 _____ 1.202
= -$129.44
Time 1: + $155 Time 2: + $0
If you calculate the MIRR now, you should get 19.74 percent.
METHOD #2: THE REINVESTMENT APPROACH With the reinvestment approach, we compound all cash flows (positive and negative) except the first out to the end of the project’s life and then calculate the IRR. In a sense, we are “reinvesting” the cash flows and not taking them out of the project until the very end. The rate we use could be the required return on the project, or it could be a separately specified “reinvestment rate.” We will use the project’s required return. When we do, here are the modified cash flows:
APPENDIX 9A
248 Part 4: Capital Budgeting
09Ross_Chapter09_4th.indd 24809Ross_Chapter09_4th.indd 248 12-11-27 12:0512-11-27 12:05
Time 0: - $60 Time 1: + 0 Time 2: - $100 + ($155 × 1.2) = $86
The MIRR on this set of cash flows is 19.72 percent, or a little lower than we got using the discounting approach.
METHOD #3: THE COMBINATION APPROACH As the name suggests, the combination approach blends our first two methods. Negative cash flows are discounted back to the present, and posi- tive cash flows are compounded to the end of the project. In practice, different discount or compounding rates might be used, but we will again stick with the project’s required return.
With the combination approach, the modified cash flows are as follows:
Time 0: -$60 + $100 _____ 1.202
= -$129.44
Time 1: + 0 Time 2: $155 × 1.2 = $186
See if you don’t agree that the MIRR is 19.87 percent, the highest of the three.
MIRR OR IRR: WHICH IS BETTER? MIRRs are controversial. At one extreme are those who claim that MIRRs are superior to IRRs, period. For example, by design, they clearly don’t suffer from the multiple rate of return problem.
At the other end, detractors say that MIRR should stand for “meaningless internal rate of return.” As our example makes clear, one problem with MIRRs is that there are different ways of calculating them, and there is no clear reason to say one of our three methods is better than any other. The differences are small with our simple cash flows, but they could be much larger for a more complex project. Further, it’s not clear how to interpret an MIRR. It may look like a rate of return; but it’s a rate of return on a modified set of cash flows, not the project’s actual cash flows.
We’re not going to take sides. However, notice that calculating an MIRR requires discounting, com- pounding, or both, which leads to two obvious observations. First, if we have the relevant discount rate, why not calculate the NPV and be done with it? Second, because an MIRR depends on an externally supplied discount (or compounding) rate, the answer you get is not truly an “internal” rate of return, which, by defi- nition, depends on only the project’s cash flows.
We will take a stand on one issue that frequently comes up in this context. The value of a project does not depend on what the firm does with the cash flows generated by that project. A firm might use a project’s cash flows to fund other projects, to pay dividends, or to buy an executive jet. It doesn’t matter: How the cash flows are spent in the future does not affect their value today. As a result, there is generally no need to consider reinvestment of interim cash flows.
Chapter 9: Net Present Value and Other Investment Criteria 249
09Ross_Chapter09_4th.indd 24909Ross_Chapter09_4th.indd 249 12-11-27 12:0512-11-27 12:05
So far, we’ve covered various parts of the capital budgeting decision. Our task in this chapter is to start bringing these pieces together. In particular, we show you how to “spread the numbers” for a proposed investment or project and, based on those numbers, make an initial assessment about whether or not the project should be undertaken.
In the discussion that follows, we focus on setting up a discounted cash fl ow analysis. From the last chapter, we know that the projected future cash fl ows are the key element in such an evalua- tion. Accordingly, we emphasize working with fi nancial and accounting information to come up with these fi gures.
In evaluating a proposed investment, we pay special attention to deciding what information is relevant to the decision at hand and what information is not. As we shall see, it is easy to overlook important pieces of the capital budgeting puzzle.
We wait until the next chapter to describe in detail how to evaluate the results of our dis- counted cash fl ow analysis. Also, where needed, we assume that we know the relevant required return or discount rate refl ecting the risk of the project. We continue to defer discussion of this subject to Part 5.
rogers.com/smarthome/
MAKING CAPITAL INVESTMENT DECISIONS
C H A P T E R 1 0
I n August 2011, Rogers Communications launched Smart Home Monitoring. This service offers complete home monitoring and an automated
solution that lets homeowners control appliances
and thermostats remotely using a smartphone. Rog-
ers offered this new technology initially in Ontario
and expects to release this service soon in other
areas.
The expenditures associated with the launch
of Smart Home Monitoring represent a capital
budgeting decision. In this chapter, we will investi-
gate, in detail, capital budgeting decisions, how they
are made, and how to look at them objectively.
This chapter follows up on the previous one by
delving more deeply into capital budgeting. In the
last chapter, we saw that cash flow estimates are a
critical input into a net present value analysis, but
we didn’t say much about where these cash flows
come from; so we will now examine this question in
some detail.
Learning Object ives
After studying this chapter, you should understand:
LO1 How to determine relevant cash flows for a proposed project.
LO2 How to project cash flows and determine if a project is acceptable.
LO3 How to calculate operating cash flow using alternative methods.
LO4 How to calculate the present value of a tax shield on CCA.
LO5 How to evaluate cost-cutting proposals.
LO6 How to analyze replacement decisions.
LO7 How to evaluate the equivalent annual cost of a project.
LO8 How to set a bid price for a project.
RO G
ER S
& M
ob iu
s D
es ig
n™ is
o w
ne d
an d
us ed
w ith
p er
m is
si on
o f R
og er
s C
om m
un ic
at io
ns In
c. A
ll rig
ht s
re se
rv ed
.
10Ross_Chapter10_3rd_C.indd 25010Ross_Chapter10_3rd_C.indd 250 12-11-12 13:3212-11-12 13:32
10.1 Project Cash Flows: A First Look
Th e eff ect of undertaking a project is to change the fi rm’s overall cash fl ows today and in the future. To evaluate a proposed investment, we must consider these changes in the fi rm’s cash fl ows and then decide whether they add value to the fi rm. Th e most important step, therefore, is to decide which cash fl ows are relevant and which are not.
Relevant Cash Flows What is a relevant cash fl ow for a project? Th e general principle is simple enough: A relevant cash fl ow for a project is a change in the fi rm’s overall future cash fl ow that comes about as a direct consequence of the decision to take that project. Because the relevant cash fl ows are defi ned in terms of changes in or increments to the fi rm’s existing cash fl ow, they are called the incremental cash fl ows associated with the project. Th e concept of incremental cash fl ow is central to our analysis, so we state a general defi nition and refer back to it as needed:
Th e incremental cash fl ows for project evaluation consist of any and all changes in the fi rm’s future cash fl ows that are a direct consequence of taking the project.
Th is defi nition of incremental cash fl ows has an obvious and important corollary: Any cash fl ow that exists regardless of whether or not a project is undertaken is not relevant.
The Stand-Alone Principle In practice, it would be very cumbersome to actually calculate the future total cash fl ows to the fi rm with and without a project, especially for a large fi rm. Fortunately, it is not really necessary to do so. Once we identify the eff ect of undertaking the proposed project on the fi rm’s cash fl ows, we need focus only on the resulting project’s incremental cash fl ows. Th is is called the stand-alone principle.
What the stand-alone principle says is that, once we have determined the incremental cash fl ows from undertaking a project, we can view that project as a kind of minifi rm with its own future revenues and costs, its own assets, and, of course, its own cash fl ows. We are then primarily interested in comparing the cash fl ows from this minifi rm to the cost of acquiring it. An impor- tant consequence of this approach is that we evaluate the proposed project purely on its own merits, in isolation from any other activities or projects.
1. What are the relevant incremental cash flows for project evaluation?
2. What is the stand-alone principle?
10.2 Incremental Cash Flows
We are concerned here only with those cash fl ows that are incremental to a project. Looking back at our general defi nition, it seems easy enough to decide whether a cash fl ow is incremental or not. Even so, there are a few situations when mistakes are easy to make. In this section, we describe some of these common pitfalls and how to avoid them.
Sunk Costs A sunk cost, by defi nition, is a cost we have already paid or have already incurred the liability to pay. Such a cost cannot be changed by the decision today to accept or reject a project. Put another way, the fi rm has to pay this cost no matter what. Based on our general defi nition of incremental cash fl ow, such a cost is clearly not relevant to the decision at hand. So, we are always careful to exclude sunk costs from our analysis.
incremental cash flows The difference between a firm’s future cash flows with a project and without the project.
stand-alone principle Evaluation of a project based on the project’s incremental cash flows.
Concept Questions
sunk cost A cost that has already been incurred and cannot be removed and therefore should not be considered in an investment decision.
CHAPTER 10: Making Capital Investment Decisions 251
10Ross_Chapter10_3rd_C.indd 25110Ross_Chapter10_3rd_C.indd 251 12-11-12 13:3212-11-12 13:32
Th at a sunk cost is not relevant seems obvious given our discussion. Nonetheless, it’s easy to fall prey to the sunk cost fallacy. For example, suppose True North Distillery Ltd. hires a fi nan- cial consultant to help evaluate whether or not a line of maple sugar liqueur should be launched. When the consultant turns in the report, True North objects to the analysis because the consul- tant did not include the heft y consulting fee as a cost to the liqueur project.
Who is correct? By now, we know that the consulting fee is a sunk cost, because the consulting fee must be paid whether or not the liqueur line is launched (this is an attractive feature of the consulting business).
A more subtle example of a cost that can sometimes be sunk is overhead. To illustrate, sup- pose True North Distillery is now considering building a new warehouse to age the maple sugar liqueur. Should a portion of overhead costs be allocated to the proposed warehouse project? If the overhead costs are truly sunk and independent of the project, the answer is no. An example of such an overhead cost is the cost of maintaining a corporate jet for senior executives. But if the new warehouse requires additional reporting, supervision, or legal input, these overheads should be part of the project analysis.
Opportunity Costs When we think of costs, we normally think of out-of-pocket costs, namely, those that require us to actually spend some amount of cash. An opportunity cost is slightly diff erent; it requires us to give up a benefi t. A common situation arises where another division of a fi rm already owns some of the assets that a proposed project will be using. For example, we might be thinking of converting an old rustic water-powered mill that we bought years ago for $100,000 into upscale condominiums.
If we undertake this project, there will be no direct cash outfl ow associated with buying the old mill since we already own it. For purposes of evaluating the condo project, should we then treat the mill as free? Th e answer is no. Th e mill is a valuable resource used by the project. If we didn’t use it here, we could do something else with it. Like what? Th e obvious answer is that, at a minimum, we could sell it. Using the mill for the condo complex thus has an opportunity cost: We give up the valuable opportunity to do something else with it.
Th ere is another issue here. Once we agree that the use of the mill has an opportunity cost, how much should the condo project be charged? Given that we paid $100,000, it might seem we should charge this amount to the condo project. Is this correct? Th e answer is no, and the reason is based on our discussion concerning sunk costs.
Th e fact that we paid $100,000 some years ago is irrelevant. It’s sunk. At a minimum, the opportunity cost that we charge the project is what it would sell for today (net of any selling costs) because this is the amount that we give up by using it instead of selling it.1
Side Effects Remember that the incremental cash fl ows for a project include all the resulting changes in the fi rm’s future cash fl ows. It would not be unusual for a project to have side, or spillover, eff ects, both good and bad. For example, when Air Canada began operations of Tango, its fi rst discount airline, in late 2001, it had to recognize the possibility that sales from Tango would come at the expense of sales from its main fl eet. Th e negative impact on cash fl ows is called erosion, and the same general problem anticipated by Air Canada could occur for any multiline consumer product producer or seller.2 In this case, the cash fl ows from the new line should be adjusted downwards to refl ect lost profi ts on other lines.
In accounting for erosion, it is important to recognize that any sales lost as a result of launching a new product might be lost anyway because of future competition. Erosion is only relevant when the sales would not otherwise be lost.
1 Economists sometimes use the acronym TANSTAAFL, which is short for “there ain’t no such thing as a free lunch”, to describe the fact that only very rarely is something truly free. Further, if the asset in question is unique, the opportunity cost might be higher because there might be other valuable projects we could undertake that would use it. However, if the asset in question is of a type that is routinely bought and sold (a used car, perhaps), the opportunity cost is always the going price in the market because that is the cost of buying another one. 2 More colourfully, erosion is sometimes called piracy or cannibalism.
opportunity cost The most valuable alternative that is given up if a particular investment is undertaken.
erosion The portion of cash flows of a new project that come at the expense of a firm’s existing operations.
252 Part 4: Capital Budgeting
10Ross_Chapter10_3rd_C.indd 25210Ross_Chapter10_3rd_C.indd 252 12-11-12 13:3212-11-12 13:32
Side eff ects show up in a lot of diff erent ways. For example, one of Walt Disney’s concerns when it built Euro Disney was that the new park would drain visitors from the Florida park, a popular vacation destination for Europeans.
Th ere are benefi cial side eff ects, of course. For example, you might think that Hewlett-Packard would have been concerned when the price of a printer that sold for $500 to $600 in 2003 declined to below $100 by 2007, but they weren’t. What HP realized was that the big money is in the con- sumables that printer owners buy to keep their printers going, such as ink-jet cartridges, laser toner cartridges, and special paper. Th e profi t margins for these products are astounding, reach- ing as high as 70 percent.
Net Working Capital Normally, a project requires that the fi rm invest in net working capital in addition to long-term assets. For example, a project generally needs some amount of cash on hand to pay any expenses that arise. In addition, a project needs an initial investment in inventories and accounts receivable (to cover credit sales). Some of this fi nancing would be in the form of amounts owed to suppliers (accounts payable), but the fi rm has to supply the balance. Th is balance represents the investment in net working capital.
It’s easy to overlook an important feature of net working capital in capital budgeting. As a pro- ject winds down, inventories are sold, receivables are collected, bills are paid, and cash balances can be drawn down. Th ese activities free up the net working capital originally invested. So, the fi rm’s investment in project net working capital closely resembles a loan. Th e fi rm supplies work- ing capital at the beginning and recovers it toward the end.
Financing Costs In analyzing a proposed investment, we do not include interest paid or any other fi nancing costs such as dividends or principal repaid, because we are interested in the cash fl ow generated by the assets from the project. As we mentioned in Chapter 2, interest paid, for example, is a component of cash fl ow to creditors, not cash fl ow from assets. More generally, our goal in project evaluation is to compare the cash fl ow from a project to the cost of acquiring that project to estimate NPV. Th e particular mixture of debt and equity that a fi rm actually chooses to use in fi nancing a project is a managerial variable and primarily determines how project cash fl ow is divided between owners and creditors. Th is is not to say that fi nancing costs are unimportant. Th ey are just something to be analyzed separately, and are included as a component of the discount rate. We cover this in later chapters.
Inf lation Because capital investment projects generally have long lives, price infl ation or defl ation is likely to occur during the project’s life. It is possible that the impact of infl ation will cancel out—changes in the price level will impact all cash fl ows equally—and that the required rate of return will also shift exactly with infl ation. But this is unlikely, so we need to add a brief discussion of how to handle infl ation.
As we explained in more detail in Chapter 7, investors form expectations of future infl ation. Th ese are included in the discount rate as investors wish to protect themselves against infl ation. Rates including infl ation premiums are called nominal rates. In Brazil, for example, where the infl ation rate is very high, discount rates are much higher than in Canada.
Given that nominal rates include an adjustment for expected infl ation, cash fl ow estimates must also be adjusted for infl ation.3 Ignoring infl ation in estimating the cash infl ows would lead to a bias against accepting capital budgeting projects. As we go through detailed examples of capital budgeting, we comment on making these infl ation adjustments. Appendix 10A discusses infl ation eff ects further.
3 In Chapter 7, we explained how to calculate real discount rates. The term, real, in finance and economics means ad- justed for inflation, that is, net of the inflation premium. A less common alternative approach uses real discount rates to discount real cash flows.
disneyworld.disney.go.com hp.com
CHAPTER 10: Making Capital Investment Decisions 253
10Ross_Chapter10_3rd_C.indd 25310Ross_Chapter10_3rd_C.indd 253 12-11-12 13:3212-11-12 13:32
Capital Budgeting and Business Taxes in Canada In Canada, various levels of government commonly off er incentives to promote certain types of capital investment. Th ese include grants, investment tax credits, more favourable rates for capital cost allowance (CCA), and subsidized loans. Since these change a project’s cash fl ows, they must be factored into capital budgeting analysis.
Other Issues Th ere are other things to watch for. First, we are interested only in measuring cash fl ow. Moreover, we are interested in measuring it when it actually occurs, not when it arises in an accounting sense. Second, we are always interested in aft er-tax cash fl ow since tax payments are defi nitely a cash outfl ow. In fact, whenever we write incremental cash fl ows, we mean aft er-tax incremental cash fl ows. Remember, however, that aft er-tax cash fl ow and accounting profi t or net income are diff erent things.
1. What is a sunk cost? An opportunity cost? Provide examples of each.
2. Explain what erosion is and why it is relevant.
3. Explain why interest paid is not a relevant cash flow for project valuation.
4. Explain how consideration of inflation comes into capital budgeting.
10.3 Pro Forma Financial Statements and Project Cash Flows
When we begin evaluating a proposed investment, we need a set of pro forma or projected fi nan- cial statements. Given these, we can develop the projected cash fl ows from the project. Once we have the cash fl ows, we can estimate the value of the project using the techniques we described in the previous chapter.
In calculating the cash fl ows, we make several simplifying assumptions to avoid bogging down in technical details at the outset. We use straight-line depreciation as opposed to capital cost allowance. We also assume that a full year’s depreciation can be taken in the fi rst year. In addition, we construct the example so the project’s market value equals its book cost when it is scrapped. Later, we address the real-life complexities of capital cost allowance and salvage values introduced in Chapter 2.
Getting Started: Pro Forma Financial Statements Pro forma fi nancial statements introduced in Chapter 4 are a convenient and easily understood means of summarizing much of the relevant information for a project. To prepare these state- ments, we need estimates of quantities such as unit sales, the selling price per unit, the variable cost per unit, and total fi xed costs. We also need to know the total investment required, including any investment in net working capital.
To illustrate, suppose we think we can sell 50,000 cans of shark attractant per year at a price of $4.30 per can. It costs us about $2.50 per can to make the attractant, and a new product such as this one typically has only a three-year life (perhaps because the customer base dwindles rapidly). We require a 20 percent return on new products.
Fixed operating costs for the project, including such things as rent on the production facility, would run $12,000 per year.4 Further, we need to invest $90,000 in manufacturing equipment. For simplicity, we assume this $90,000 will be 100 percent depreciated over the three-year life of
4 By fixed cost, we literally mean a cash outflow that occurs regardless of the level of sales. This should not be confused with some sort of accounting period charge.
capital cost allowance (CCA) Depreciation method under Canadian tax law allowing for the accelerated write-off of property under various classifications.
Concept Questions
pro forma financial statements Financial statements projecting future years’ operations.
254 Part 4: Capital Budgeting
10Ross_Chapter10_3rd_C.indd 25410Ross_Chapter10_3rd_C.indd 254 12-11-12 13:3212-11-12 13:32
the project in equal annual amounts.5 Furthermore, the cost of removing the equipment roughly equals its actual value in three years, so it would be essentially worthless on a market value basis as well. Finally, the project requires a $20,000 investment in net working capital. Th is amount remains constant over the life of the project. In Table 10.1, we organize these initial projections by fi rst preparing the pro forma statements of comprehensive income.
TABLE 10.1
Projected statement of comprehensive income, shark attractant project
Sales (50,000 units at $4.30/unit) $215,000 Variable costs ($2.50/unit) 125,000 Gross profit $ 90,000 Fixed costs $ 12,000 Depreciation ($90,000/3) 30,000 EBIT $ 48,000 Taxes (40%) 19,200 Net income $ 28,800
Once again, notice that we have not deducted any interest expense. Th is is always so. As we described earlier, interest paid is a fi nancing expense, not a component of operating cash fl ow.
We can also prepare a series of abbreviated statements of fi nancial position that show the cap- ital requirements for the project as we’ve done in Table 10.2. Here we have net working capital of $20,000 in each year. Fixed assets are $90,000 at the start of the project’s life (Year 0), and they decline by the $30,000 in depreciation each year, ending at zero. Notice that the total investment given here for future years is the total book or accounting value, not market value.
TABLE 10.2
Projected capital requirements, shark attractant project
Year
0 1 2 3
Net working capital $ 20,000 $20,000 $20,000 $0 Net fixed assets 90,000 60,000 30,000 0 Total investment $110,000 $80,000 $50,000 $0
At this point, we need to start converting this accounting information into cash fl ows. We consider how to do this next.
Project Cash Flows To develop the cash fl ows from a project, we need to recall (from Chapter 2) that cash fl ow from assets has three components: operating cash fl ow, capital spending, and additions to net working capital. To evaluate a project or minifi rm, we need to arrive at estimates for each of these. Once we have estimates of the components of cash fl ow, we can calculate cash fl ow for our mini- fi rm just as we did in Chapter 2 for an entire fi rm:
Project cash flow = Project operating cash flow - Project additions to net working capital - Project capital spending
We consider these components next.
5 We also assume that a full year’s depreciation can be taken in the first year. Together with the use of straight-line de- preciation, this unrealistic assumption smooths the exposition. We bring in real-life complications of capital cost allow- ance and taxes (introduced in Chapter 2) later in the chapter.
CHAPTER 10: Making Capital Investment Decisions 255
10Ross_Chapter10_3rd_C.indd 25510Ross_Chapter10_3rd_C.indd 255 12-11-12 13:3212-11-12 13:32
PROJECT OPERATING CASH FLOW To determine the operating cash flow associ- ated with a project, recall the definition of operating cash flow:
Operating cash flow = Earnings before interest and taxes (EBIT) + Depreciation - Taxes
As before, taxes in our equation are taxes assuming that there is no interest expense. To illustrate the calculation of operating cash fl ow, we use the projected information from the shark attractant project. For ease of reference, Table 10.1 contains the statement of comprehensive income.
Given this statement in Table 10.1, calculating the operating cash fl ow is very straightforward. As we see in Table 10.3, projected operating cash fl ow for the shark attractant project is $58,800.
TABLE 10.3
Projected operating cash flow, shark attractant project
EBIT $ 48,000 Depreciation 30,000 Taxes –19,200 Operating cash flow $ 58,800
PROJECT NET WORKING CAPITAL AND CAPITAL SPENDING We next need to take care of the fixed asset and net working capital requirements. Based on our preceding statements of financial position, the firm must spend $90,000 up front for fixed assets and invest an additional $20,000 in net working capital. The immediate outflow is thus $110,000. At the end of the project’s life, the fixed assets are worthless, but the firm recovers the $20,000 tied up in working capital.6 This leads to a $20,000 inflow in the last year.
On a purely mechanical level, notice that whenever we have an investment in net working capital, that investment has to be recovered; in other words, the same number needs to appear with the opposite sign.
Project Total Cash Flow and Value Given the information we’ve accumulated, we can fi nish the preliminary cash fl ow analysis as illustrated in Table 10.4.
Now that we have cash fl ow projections, we are ready to apply the various criteria we discussed in the last chapter. Th e NPV at the 20 percent required return is:
NPV = -$110,000 + $58,800/1.2 + $58,800/1.22 + 78,800/1.23 = $25,435
TABLE 10.4
Projected total cash flows, shark attractant project
Year
0 1 2 3
Operating cash flow 0 $58,800 $58,800 $58,800
Additions to NWC -$ 20,000 0 0 20,000
Capital spending -90,000 0 0 0
Total cash flow -$110,000 $58,800 $58,800 $78,800
DCF -$110,000 $49,000 $40,833 $45,602
NPV $ 25,435
6 In reality, the firm would probably recover something less than 100 percent of this amount because of bad debts, in- ventory loss, and so on. If we wanted to, we could just assume that, for example, only 90 percent was recovered and pro- ceed from there.
256 Part 4: Capital Budgeting
10Ross_Chapter10_3rd_C.indd 25610Ross_Chapter10_3rd_C.indd 256 12-11-12 13:3212-11-12 13:32
So, based on these projections, the project creates more than $25,000 in value and should be accepted. Also, the return on this investment obviously exceeds 20 percent (since the NPV is posi- tive at 20 percent). Aft er some trial and error, we fi nd that the IRR works out to be about 34 percent.
In addition, if required, we could go ahead and calculate the payback and the average account- ing return (AAR). Inspection of the cash fl ows shows that the payback on this project is just a little under two years (check that it’s about 1.85 years).7
From the last chapter, the AAR is average net income divided by average book value. Th e net income each year is $28,800. Th e average (in thousands) of the four book values (from Table 10.2) for total investment is ($110 + 80 + 50 + 20)/4 = $65, so the AAR is $28,800/65,000 = 44.31 percent.8 We’ve already seen that the return on this investment (the IRR) is about 34 percent. Th e fact that the AAR is larger illustrates again why the AAR cannot be meaningfully interpreted as the return on a project.
1. What is the definition of project operating cash flow? How does this differ from net income?
2. In the shark attractant project, why did we add back the firm’s net working capital investment in the final year?
10.4 More on Project Cash Flow
In this section, we take a closer look at some aspects of project cash fl ow. In particular, we discuss project net working capital in more detail. We then examine current tax laws regarding deprecia- tion. Finally, we work through a more involved example of the capital investment decision.
A Closer Look at Net Working Capital In calculating operating cash fl ow, we did not explicitly consider the fact that some of our sales might be on credit. Also, we may not have actually paid some of the costs shown. In either case, the cash fl ow has not yet occurred. We show here that these possibilities are not a problem as long as we don’t forget to include additions to net working capital in our analysis. Th is discussion thus emphasizes the importance and the eff ect of doing so.
Suppose that during a particular year of a project we have the following simplifi ed statement of comprehensive income:
Sales $500 Costs 310 Net income $190
Depreciation and taxes are zero. No fi xed assets are purchased during the year. Also, to illustrate a point, we assume the only components of net working capital are accounts receivable and payable. Th e beginning and ending amounts for these accounts are:
Beginning of Year End of Year Change
Accounts receivable $880 $910 +$30 Accounts payable 550 605 + 55 Net working capital $330 $305 -$25
Based on this information, what is total cash fl ow for the year? We can begin by mechanically applying what we have been discussing to come up with the answer. Operating cash fl ow in this particular case is the same as EBIT since there are no taxes or depreciation; thus, it equals $190.
7 We’re guilty of a minor inconsistency here. When we calculated the NPV and the IRR, we assumed all the cash flows oc- curred at end of year. When we calculated the payback, we assumed the cash flow occurred uniformly through the year. 8 Notice that the average total book value is not the initial total of $110,000 divided by 2. The reason is that the $20,000 in working capital doesn’t depreciate. Notice that the average book value could be calculated as (beginning book value + ending book value)/2 = ($110,000 + 20,000)/2 = $65,000. Also, the ending book value is taken as $20,000 instead of zero as the NWC is returned an instant after the project ends, i.e. after 3 years.
Concept Questions
CHAPTER 10: Making Capital Investment Decisions 257
10Ross_Chapter10_3rd_C.indd 25710Ross_Chapter10_3rd_C.indd 257 12-11-12 13:3212-11-12 13:32
Also, notice that net working capital actually declined by $25, so the addition to net working capital is negative. Th is just means that $25 was freed up during the year. Th ere was no capital spending, so the total cash fl ow for the year is:
Total cash flow = Operating cash flow - Additions to NWC - Capital spending = $190 - (-$25) - $0 = $215
Now, we know that this $215 total cash fl ow has to be “dollars in” less “dollars out” for the year. We could, therefore, ask a diff erent question: What were cash revenues for the year? Also, what were cash costs?
To determine cash revenues, we need to look more closely at net working capital. During the year, we had sales of $500. However, accounts receivable rose by $30 over the same time period. What does this mean? Th e $30 increase tells us that sales exceeded collections by $30. In other words, we haven’t yet received the cash from $30 of the $500 in sales. As a result, our cash infl ow is $500 - 30 = $470. In general, cash income is sales minus the increase in accounts receivable.
Cash outfl ows can be similarly determined. We show costs of $310 on the statement of com- prehensive income, but accounts payable increased by $55 during the year. Th is means we have not yet paid $55 of the $310, so cash costs for the period are just $310 - 55 = $255. In other words, in this case, cash costs equal costs less the increase in accounts payable.9
Putting this information together, cash infl ows less cash outfl ows is $470 - 255 = $215, just as we had before. Notice that:
Cash flow = Cash inflow - Cash outflow = ($500 - 30) - ($310 - 55) = ($500 - $310) - (30 - 55) = Operating cash flow - Change in NWC = $190 - (-25) = $215
More generally, this example illustrates that including net working capital changes in our calcula- tions has the eff ect of adjusting for the discrepancy between accounting sales and costs and actual cash receipts and payments.
EXAMPLE 10.1: Cash Collections and Costs
For the year just completed, Combat Wombat Telestat Ltd. (CWT) reports sales of $998 and costs of $734. You have collected the following beginning and ending statement of financial position information:
Beginning Ending
Accounts receivable $100 $110 Inventory 100 80 Accounts payable 100 70 Net working capital $100 $120
Based on these figures, what are cash inflows? Cash out- flows? What happened to each? What is net cash flow?
Sales were $998, but receivables rose by $10. So cash collections were $10 less than sales, or $988. Costs were
$734, but inventories fell by $20. This means we didn’t re- place $20 worth of inventory, so cash costs are actually overstated by this amount. Also, payables fell by $30. This means that, on a net basis, we actually paid our suppliers $30 more than the value of what we received from them, resulting in a $30 understatement of cash costs. Adjusting for these events, cash costs are $734 – 20 + 30 = $744. Net cash flow is $988 – 744 = $244.
Finally, notice that net working capital increased by $20 overall. We can check our answer by noting that the original accounting sales less costs of $998 – 734 is $264. In addi- tion, CWT spent $20 on net working capital, so the net re- sult is a cash flow of $264 – 20 = $244, as we calculated.
Depreciation and Capital Cost Al lowance As we note elsewhere, accounting depreciation is a noncash deduction. As a result, depreciation has cash fl ow consequences only because it infl uences the tax bill. Th e way that depreciation is computed for tax purposes is thus the relevant method for capital investment decisions. Chapter
9 If there were other accounts, we might have to make some further adjustments. For example, a net increase in inven- tory would be a cash outflow.
258 Part 4: Capital Budgeting
10Ross_Chapter10_3rd_C.indd 25810Ross_Chapter10_3rd_C.indd 258 12-11-12 13:3212-11-12 13:32
2 introduced the capital cost allowance (CCA) system—Canada Revenue Agency’s version of depreciation. We use CCA in the example that follows.
An Example: The Majestic Mulch and Compost Company (MMCC) At this point, we want to go through a somewhat more involved capital budgeting analysis. Keep in mind as you read that the basic approach here is exactly the same as that in the earlier shark attractant example. We have only added more real-world detail (and a lot more numbers). MMCC is investigating the feasibility of a new line of power mulching tools aimed at the growing number of home composters. Based on exploratory conversations with buyers for large garden shops, we project unit sales as follows:
Year Unit Sales
1 3000 2 5000 3 6000 4 6500 5 6000 6 5000 7 4000 8 3000
Th e new power mulcher would be priced to sell at $120 per unit to start. When the competition catches up aft er three years, however, we anticipate that the price would drop to $110.10
Th e power mulcher project requires $20,000 in net working capital at the start. Subsequently, total net working capital at the end of each year would be about 15 percent of sales for that year. Th e variable cost per unit is $60, and total fi xed costs are $25,000 per year. It costs about $800,000 to buy the equipment necessary to begin production. Th is investment is primarily in industrial equipment and thus falls in Class 8 with a CCA rate of 20 percent.11 Th e equipment will actually be worth about $150,000 in eight years. Th e relevant tax rate is 40 percent, and the required return is 15 percent. Based on this information, should MMCC proceed?
OPERATING CASH FLOWS There is a lot of information here that we need to organize. The first thing we can do is calculate projected sales. Sales in the first year are projected at 3000 units at $120 apiece, or $360,000 total. The remaining figures are shown in Table 10.5.
TABLE 10.5
Projected revenues, power mulcher project
Year Unit Price Unit Sales Revenues
1 $120 3000 $360,000 2 120 5000 600,000 3 120 6000 720,000 4 110 6500 715,000 5 110 6000 660,000 6 110 5000 550,000 7 110 4000 440,000 8 110 3000 330,000
Next, we compute the CCA on the $800,000 investment in Table 10.6. Notice how, under the half-year rule (Chapter 2), UCC is only $400,000 in Year 1.12
10 To be consistent, these prices include an inflation estimate. 11 Chapter 2 explains CCA classes. 12 Companies may purchase a capital item any time within the year, so it is assumed that they purchase it halfway through the year.
CHAPTER 10: Making Capital Investment Decisions 259
10Ross_Chapter10_3rd_C.indd 25910Ross_Chapter10_3rd_C.indd 259 12-11-12 13:3212-11-12 13:32
TABLE 10.6
Annual CCA, power mulcher project (Class 8, 20% rate)
Year Beginning UCC CCA Ending UCC
1 $400,000 $ 80,000 $320,000
2 720,000 144,000 576,000 3 576,000 115,200 460,800 4 460,800 92,160 368,640 5 368,640 73,728 294,912 6 294,912 58,982 235,930 7 235,930 47,186 188,744 8 188,744 37,749 150,995
With this information, we can prepare the pro forma statements of comprehensive income, as shown in Table 10.7.
TABLE 10.7
Projected statements of comprehensive income, power mulcher project Year
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Unit price $ 120 $ 120 $ 120 $ 110 $ 110 $ 110 $ 110 $ 110 Unit sales 3,000 5,000 6,000 6,500 6,000 5,000 4,000 3,000 Revenues $360,000 $600,000 $720,000 $715,000 $660,000 $550,000 $440,000 $330,000 Variable costs 180,000 300,000 360,000 390,000 360,000 300,000 240,000 180,000 Fixed costs 25,000 25,000 25,000 25,000 25,000 25,000 25,000 25,000 CCA 80,000 144,000 115,200 92,160 73,728 58,982 47,186 37,749 EBIT 75,000 131,000 219,800 207,840 201,272 166,018 127,814 87,251 Taxes 30,000 52,400 87,920 83,136 80,509 66,407 51,126 34,901 Net income $ 45,000 $ 78,600 $131,880 $124,704 $120,763 $ 99,611 $ 76,688 $ 52,350
From here, computing the operating cash fl ows is straightforward. Th e results are illustrated in the fi rst part of Table 10.8.
ADDITIONS TO NWC Now that we have the operating cash flows, we need to determine the additions to NWC. By assumption, net working capital requirements change as sales change. In each year, we generally either add to or recover some of our project net working capital. Recall- ing that NWC starts at $20,000 and then rises to 15 percent of sales, we can calculate the amount of NWC for each year as illustrated in Table 10.9.
As illustrated in Table 10.9, during the fi rst year, net working capital grows from $20,000 to .15 × 360,000 = $54,000. Th e increase in net working capital for the year is thus $54,000 - 20,000 = $34,000. Th e remaining fi gures are calculated the same way.
Remember that an increase in net working capital is a cash outfl ow and a decrease in net work- ing capital is a cash infl ow. Th is means that a negative sign in this table represents net working capital returning to the fi rm. Th us, for example, $16,500 in NWC fl ows back to the fi rm in Year 6. Over the project’s life, net working capital builds to a peak of $108,000 and declines from there as sales begin to drop.
We show the result for additions to net working capital in the second part of Table 10.8. Notice that at the end of the project’s life there is $49,500 in net working capital still to be recovered. Th erefore, in the last year, the project returns $16,500 of NWC during the year and then returns the remaining $49,500 for a total of $66,000 (the addition to NWC is -$66,000).
260 Part 4: Capital Budgeting
10Ross_Chapter10_3rd_C.indd 26010Ross_Chapter10_3rd_C.indd 260 12-11-12 13:3212-11-12 13:32
TABLE 10.8
Projected cash flows, power mulcher project Year
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
I. Operating Cash Flow EBIT $ 75,000 $ 131,000 $ 219,800 $ 207,840 $ 201,272 $ 166,018 $ 127,814 $ 87,251 CCA 80,000 144,000 115,200 92,160 73,728 58,982 47,186 37,749 Taxes 30,000 52,400 87,920 83,136 80,509 66,407 51,126 34,901 Operating cash flow $ 125,000 $ 222,600 $ 247,080 $ 216,864 $ 194,491 $ 158,593 $ 123,874 $ 90,099
II. Net Working Capital Initial NWC $ 20,000 NWC increases $ 34,000 $ 36,000 $ 18,000 -$ 750 -$ 8,250 -$ 16,500 -$ 16,500 -$ 16,500 NWC recovery -$ 49,500 Additions to NWC $ 20,000 $ 34,000 $ 36,000 $ 18,000 -$ 750 -$ 8,250 -$ 16,500 -$ 16,500 -$ 66,000
III. Capital Spending Initial outlay $ 800,000 After-tax salvage -$ 150,000 Capital spending $ 800,000 -$ 150,000
TABLE 10.9
Additions to net working capital, power mulcher project
Year Revenues Net Working Capital Increase
0 $ 20,000 1 $360,000 54,000 $ 34,000 2 600,000 90,000 36,000 3 720,000 108,000 18,000 4 715,000 107,250 -750 5 660,000 99,000 -8,250 6 550,000 82,500 -16,500 7 440,000 66,000 -16,500 8 330,000 49,500 -16,500
Finally, we have to account for the long-term capital invested in the project. In this case, we invest $800,000 at Time 0. By assumption, this equipment would be worth $150,000 at the end of the project. It will have an undepreciated capital cost of $150,995 at that time as shown in Table 10.6. As we discussed in Chapter 2, this $995 shortfall of market value below UCC creates a tax refund ($995 × 40 percent tax rate = $398) only if MMCC has no continuing Class 8 assets. However, we assume the company would continue in this line of manufacturing so there is no tax refund. Making this assumption is standard practice unless we have specifi c information about plans to close an asset class. Given our assumption, the diff erence of $995 stays in the asset pool, creating future tax shields.13 Th e investment and salvage are shown in the third part of Table 10.8.
13 We show the detailed calculations in Section 10.6.
CHAPTER 10: Making Capital Investment Decisions 261
10Ross_Chapter10_3rd_C.indd 26110Ross_Chapter10_3rd_C.indd 261 12-11-12 13:3212-11-12 13:32
TABLE 10.10
Projected total cash flow, power mulcher project Year
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Operating cash flow $ 125,000 $ 222,600 $ 247,080 $ 216,864 $ 194,491 $ 158,593 $ 123,874 $ 90,099 Additions to NWC -$ 20,000 - 34,000 - 36,000 - 18,000 750 8,250 16,500 16,500 66,000
Capital spending - 800,000 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 150,000
Total project cash -$ 820,000 $ 91,000 $ 186,600 $ 229,080 $ 217,614 $ 202,741 $ 175,093 $ 140,374 $ 306,099
flow Cumulative cash flow
-$ 820,000 -$ 729,000 -$ 542,400 -$ 313,320 -$ 95,706 $ 107,035 $ 282,128 $ 422,503 $ 728,602
Discounted cash flow @ 15%
-$ 820,000 $ 79,130 $ 141,096 $ 150,624 $ 124,422 $ 100,798 $ 75,698 $ 52,772 $ 100,064
NPV $ 4,604 IRR 15.15% PB 4.47
TOTAL CASH FLOW AND VALUE We now have all the cash flow pieces, and we put them together in Table 10.10. Note that an increase in net working capital is a cash outflow and a decrease in net working capital is a cash inflow and that a negative sign shows working capital returning to the firm. In addition to the total project cash flows, we have calculated the cumula- tive cash flows and the discounted cash flows. At this point, it’s essentially “plug and chug” to calculate the net present value, internal rate of return, and payback.
If we sum the discounted fl ows and the initial investment, the net present value (at 15 percent) works out to be $4,604. Th is is positive, so, based on these preliminary projections, the power mulcher project is acceptable. Th e internal or DCF rate of return is slightly greater than 15 percent since the NPV is positive. It works out to be 15.15, again indicating that the project is acceptable.14
Looking at the cumulative cash fl ows, we see that the project has almost paid back aft er four years since the cumulative cash fl ow is almost zero at that time. As indicated, the fractional year works out to be 95,706/202,741 = .47, so the payback is 4.47 years. We can’t say whether or not this is good since we don’t have a benchmark for MMCC. Th is is the usual problem with payback periods.
CONCLUSION This completes our preliminary DCF analysis. Where do we go from here? If we have a great deal of confidence in our projections, there is no further analysis to be done. We should begin production and marketing immediately. It is unlikely that this would be the case. For one thing, NPV is not that far above zero and IRR is only marginally more than the 15 per- cent required rate of return. Remember that the result of our analysis is an estimate of NPV, and we usually have less than complete confidence in our projections. This means we have more work to do. In particular, we almost surely want to evaluate the quality of our estimates. We take up this subject in the next chapter. For now, we look at alternative definitions of operating cash flow, and we illustrate some different cases that arise in capital budgeting.
1. Why is it important to consider additions to net working capital in developing cash flows? What is the effect of doing so?
2. How is depreciation calculated for fixed assets under current tax law? What effect do expected salvage value and estimated economic life have on the calculated capital cost allowance?
14 Appendix 10B shows how to analyze Majestic Mulch using a spreadsheet.
Concept Questions
262 Part 4: Capital Budgeting
10Ross_Chapter10_3rd_C.indd 26210Ross_Chapter10_3rd_C.indd 262 12-11-12 13:3212-11-12 13:32
10.5 Alternative Definitions of Operating Cash Flow
Th e analysis we have been through in the previous section is quite general and can be adapted to almost any capital investment problem. In the next section, we illustrate some particularly useful variations. Before we do so, we need to discuss the fact that diff erent defi nitions of project operat- ing cash fl ow are commonly used, both in practice and in fi nance texts.
As we see, the diff erent defi nitions of operating cash fl ow all measure the same thing. If they are used correctly, they all produce the same answer, and one is not necessarily any better or more useful than another. Unfortunately, the fact that alternative defi nitions are used sometimes leads to confusion. For this reason, we examine several of these variations next to see how they are related.
In the following discussion, keep in mind that when we speak of cash fl ow, we literally mean dollars in less dollars out. Th is is all that we are concerned with. Diff erent defi nitions of operating cash fl ow simply amount to diff erent ways of manipulating basic information about sales, costs, depreciation, and taxes to get at cash fl ow.
To begin, it will be helpful to defi ne the following:
OCF = Project operating cash flow S = Sales C = Operating costs D = Depreciation for tax purposes, i.e., CCA15 TC = Corporate tax rate
For a particular project and year under consideration, suppose we have the following estimates:
S = $1,500 C = $700 D = $600 TC = 40%
With these defi nitions, notice that EBIT is:
EBIT = S - C - D = $1,500 - 700 - 600 = $200
Once again, we assume no interest is paid, so the tax bill is:
Taxes = EBIT × TC = (S - C - D) × TC = $200 × .40 = $80
When we put all of this together, project operating cash fl ow (OCF) is:
OCF = EBIT + D - Taxes = (S - C - D) + D - (S - C - D) × TC [10.1] = $200 + 600 - 80 = $720
If we take a closer look at this defi nition of OCF, we see that there are other defi nitions that could be used. We consider these next.
The Bottom-Up Approach Since we are ignoring any fi nancing expenses such as interest in our calculations of project OCF, we can write project net income as:
Project net income = EBIT - Taxes = (S - C - D) - (S - C - D) × TC = (S - C - D) × (1 - TC) = ($1,500 - 700 - 600) × (1 - .40) = $200 × .60 = $120
15 In this discussion, we use the terms depreciation and CCA interchangeably.
CHAPTER 10: Making Capital Investment Decisions 263
10Ross_Chapter10_3rd_C.indd 26310Ross_Chapter10_3rd_C.indd 263 12-11-12 13:3212-11-12 13:32
With this in mind, we can develop a slightly diff erent and very common approach to the cash fl ow question by restating Equation (10.1) as follows:
OCF = (S - C - D) + D - (S - C - D) × TC = (S - C - D) × (1 - TC) + D = Project net income + Depreciation [10.2] = $120 + 600 = $720
Th is is the bottom-up approach. Here we start with the accountant’s bottom line (net income) and add back any non-cash deductions such as depreciation. It is important to remember that this def- inition of operating cash fl ow as net income plus depreciation is only equivalent to our defi nition, and thus correct, when there is no interest expense subtracted in the calculation of net income.
For the shark attractant project, net income was $28,800 and depreciation was $30,000, so the bottom-up calculation is:
OCF = $28,800 + 30,000 = $58,800
Th is again is the correct answer.
The Top-Down Approach A closely related, and perhaps more obvious, manipulation of our defi nition is to cancel the depreciation expense where possible:
OCF = (S - C - D) + D - (S - C - D) × TC = (S - C) - (S - C - D) × TC = Sales - Costs - Taxes [10.3] = $1,500 - 700 - 80 = $720
Th is is the top-down approach. Here we start at the top of the statement of comprehensive income with sales and work our way down to net cash fl ow by subtracting costs, taxes, and other expenses. Along the way, we simply leave out any strictly non-cash items such as depreciation.
For the shark attractant project, the top-down cash fl ow can be readily calculated. With sales of $215,000, total costs (fi xed plus variable) of $137,000, and a tax bill of $19,200, the OCF is:
OCF = $215,000 - 137,000 - 19,200 = $58,800
Th is is just as we had before.
The Tax Shield Approach Th e fi nal variation on our basic defi nition of OCF is the tax shield approach. Th is approach will be very useful for some problems we consider in the next section. Th e tax shield defi nition of OCF is:
OCF = (S - C - D) + D - (S - C - D) × TC [10.4] = (S - C) × (1 - TC) + D × TC
With our numbers, this works out to be:
= (S - C) × (1 - TC) + D × TC = $800 × .60 + $600 × .40 = $480 + 240 = $720
Th is is just as we had before. Th is approach views OCF as having two components: Th e fi rst part, (S - C) × (1 - TC), is
what the project’s cash fl ow would be if there were no depreciation expense. In this case, this would-have-been cash fl ow is $480.
Th e second part of OCF in this expression, D × TC, is called the depreciation (CCA) tax shield. We know that depreciation is a non-cash expense. Th e only cash fl ow eff ect from deduct- ing depreciation is to reduce our taxes, a benefi t to us. At the current 40 percent corporate tax rate, every dollar in CCA expense saves us 40 cents in taxes. So, in our example, the $600 in deprecia- tion saves us $600 × .40 = $240 in taxes.
depreciation (CCA) tax shield Tax saving that results from the CCA deduction, calculated as depreciation multiplied by the corporate tax rate.
264 Part 4: Capital Budgeting
10Ross_Chapter10_3rd_C.indd 26410Ross_Chapter10_3rd_C.indd 264 12-11-12 13:3212-11-12 13:32
TABLE 10.11
Alternative definitions of operating cash flow
Approach Formula
Basic OCF = EBIT + Depreciation - Taxes Bottom-up OCF = Net income + Depreciation Top-down OCF = Sales - Costs - Taxes Tax shield OCF = (Sales - Costs) (1 - TC) + Depreciation × TC
For the shark attractant project we considered earlier in the chapter, the CCA tax shield would be $30,000 × .40 = $12,000. Th e aft er-tax value for sales less costs would be ($240,000 - 162,000) × (1 - .40) = $46,800. Adding these together yields the right answer:
OCF = $46,800 + 12,000 = $58,800
Th is verifi es this approach.
Conclusion Table 10.11 summarizes the four approaches to computing OCF. Now that we’ve seen that all these defi nitions are the same, you’re probably wondering why everybody doesn’t just agree on one of them. One reason, as we see in the next section, is that diff erent defi nitions are useful in diff erent circumstances. Th e best one to use is whichever happens to be the most convenient for the problem at hand.
10.6 Applying the Tax Shield Approach to the Majestic Mulch and Compost Company Project
If you look back over our analysis of MMCC, you’ll see that most of the number crunching involved fi nding CCA, EBIT, and net income fi gures. Th e tax shield approach has the potential to save us considerable time.16 To realize on that potential, we do the calculations in a diff erent order from Table 10.10. Instead of adding the cash fl ow components down the columns for each year and fi nding the present value of the total cash fl ows, we fi nd the present values of each source of cash fl ows and add the present values.
Th e fi rst source of cash fl ow is (S - C)(1 - TC) as shown for each year on the fi rst line of Table 10.12. Th e fi gure for the fi rst year, $93,000, is the fi rst part of the OCF equation.
TABLE 10.12
Tax shield solution, power mulcher project Year
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
(S - C)(1 - TC) $93,000 $165,000 $201,000 $180,000 $165,000 $135,000 $105,000 $ 75,000
Additions to NWC -$20,000 -34,000 -36,000 -18,000 750 8,250 16,500 16,500 66,000
Capital spending -800,000 150,000
Totals
PV of (S - C)(1 - TC) $645,099
PV of additions to NWC -49,179 PV of capital spending -750,965 PV of CCA tax shield 159,649 NPV $ 4,604
16 This is particularly true if we set it up using a spreadsheet. See Appendix 10B.
CHAPTER 10: Making Capital Investment Decisions 265
10Ross_Chapter10_3rd_C.indd 26510Ross_Chapter10_3rd_C.indd 265 12-11-12 13:3212-11-12 13:32
TABLE 10.13
PV of tax shield on CCA
Year
Tax Shield
CCA .40 × CCA PV at 15%
1 $ 80,000 $32,000 $27,826 2 144,000 57,600 43,554 3 115,200 46,080 30,298 4 92,160 36,864 21,077 5 73,728 29,491 14,662 6 58,982 23,593 10,200 7 47,186 18,874 7,096 8 37,749 15,100 4,936
PV of tax shield on CCA $159,649
OCF = (S - C)(1 - TC) + DTC = (360,000 - 180,000 - 25,000)(1 - .40) + 80,000(.40) = 93,000 + 32,000 = $125,000
Calculating the present value of the $93,000 for the fi rst year and adding the present values of the other (S - C)(1 - TC) fi gures in Table 10.12 gives a total present value for this source of $645,099 as seen in the lower part of Table 10.12.
Th e second term is the tax shield on CCA for the fi rst year. Table 10.13 reproduces the fi rst year’s tax shield of $32,000 along with the corresponding tax shields for each year. Th e total pres- ent value of the CCA tax shield is shown as $159,649.
Th e additions to net working capital and capital expenditure are essentially the same as in Table 10.10. Th eir present values are shown in the lower part of Table 10.12. Th e NPV is the sum of the present value of the four sources of cash fl ow. Th e answer, $4,604 is identical to what we found earlier in Table 10.10.
Present Value of the Tax Shield on CCA Further time savings are possible by using a formula that replaces the detailed calculation of yearly CCA. Th e formula is based on the idea that tax shields from CCA continue in perpetuity as long as there are assets remaining in the CCA class.17 Th is idea is important because it gives us insight into when we can apply the formula in solving a problem in practice. Th e formula applies when the CCA asset class (or pool) will remain open when the project is completed. As we explained earlier, it is standard practice to assume that the asset class remains open unless we have specifi c information to the contrary. If, however, in a special case, we fi nd that the pool will be closed out at the end of the project’s life, we should not use this formula. Th e pool will only close if there are no remaining assets in the class. If this happens, the annual CCA values should be calculated to determine the UCC at the end of the project. If there is a terminal loss (i.e., the salvage value is less than this UCC), then there is a further tax shield when the asset is sold. If there is a gain (i.e., the salvage value is greater than this UCC), then there will be a recapture of a portion of the tax savings.18 To calculate the present value of the tax shield on CCA, we fi nd the present value of an infi nite stream of tax shields abstracting from two practical implications—the half-year rule for CCA and disposal of the asset. We then adjust the formula.
Our derivation uses the following terms:
I = Total capital investment in the asset which is added to the pool d = CCA rate for the asset class TC = Company’s marginal tax rate
17 Strictly speaking, the UCC for a class remains positive as long as there are physical assets in the class and the proceeds from disposal of assets is less than total UCC for the class. 18 Alternatively, the formula could be applied and the end-of-project effects calculated and discounted appropriately.
266 Part 4: Capital Budgeting
10Ross_Chapter10_3rd_C.indd 26610Ross_Chapter10_3rd_C.indd 266 12-11-12 13:3212-11-12 13:32
k = Discount rate Sn = Salvage or disposal value of the asset in year n Mn = Asset life in years
We can use the dividend valuation formula from Chapter 8 to derive the present value of the CCA tax shield. Recall that when dividends grow at a constant rate, g, the stock price is
P0 = D1 _____ k + g
To apply this to the tax shield problem, we recognize that the formula can be generalized for any growing perpetuity where for example, Payment 3 = (Payment 2) × (1 + g)
PV = 1st payment
___________________________ (Discount rate) + (Growth rate)
Since we are temporarily ignoring the half-year rule, the growth rate in CCA payments is equal to (-d). Th e declining UCC value implies negative growth. Th us, to account for the decline, the growth rate equals (-d). For example, in Table 10.13:
CCA3 = CCA2 (1 + (-d)) CCA3 = 144,000 (1 + (-.20)) CCA3 = 144,000 (.8) = 115,200
Given the growth rate as (-d), we need the 1st payment to complete the formula. Th is is the fi rst year’s tax shield IdTC. We can now complete the formula:
PV(CCA tax shield) = 1st payment
___________________________ (Discount rate) - (Growth rate)
= IdTC ________ k - (-d)
= IdTC _____ k + d
Th e next step is to extend the formula to adjust for CRA’s half-year rule. Th is rule implies that a fi rm adds one-half of the incremental capital cost of a new project in Year 1 and the other half in Year 2. Th e result is that we now calculate the present value of the tax shield in two parts: Th e present value of the stream starting the fi rst year is simply one-half of the original value:
PV of 1st half = 1/2 IdTC _____ k + d
Th e PV of the second half (deferred one year) is the same quantity (bracketed term) discounted back to time zero. Th e total present value of the tax shield on CCA under the half-year rule is the sum of the two present values.
PV tax shield on CCA = 1/2 IdTC _______ k + d + [
1/2 IdTC _______ k + d ] /(1 + k)
With a little algebra we can simplify the formula:
PV = 1/2 IdTC _______ k + d [1 + 1/(1 + k)] =
1/2 IdTC _______ k + d [ 1 + k + 1 _________ 1 + k ]
PV = IdTC _____ k + d [
1 + .5k _______ 1 + k ]
Th e fi nal adjustment for salvage-value begins with the present value in the salvage year, n of future tax shields beginning in Year n + 1:
SndTc _____ d + k
We discount this fi gure back to today and subtract it to get the complete formula:19
PV tax shield on CCA = [IdTc] _____ d + k ×
[1 + .5k] ________ 1 + k - SndTc _____ d + k ×
1 _______ (1 + k ) n [10.5]
19 By not adjusting the salvage value for the half-year rule, we assume there will be no new investment in year n.
CHAPTER 10: Making Capital Investment Decisions 267
10Ross_Chapter10_3rd_C.indd 26710Ross_Chapter10_3rd_C.indd 267 12-11-12 13:3212-11-12 13:32
Using the fi rst part of the formula, the present value of the tax shield on MMCC’s project is $170,932 assuming the tax shield goes on in perpetuity:
= 800,000(.20)(.40) ______________ .20 + .15 × 1 + .5 × (.15) ____________ 1 + .15
= 182,857 × 1.08/1.15 = $170,932
Th e adjustment for the salvage value is
-150,000(.20)(.40) ________________ .20 + .15 ×
1 _________ (1 + .15 ) 8
= –34,286 × 1/(1.15 ) 8 = –$11,208
Th e present value of the tax shield on CCA is the sum of the two present values:
Present value of tax shield from CCA = $170,932 - $11,208 = $159,724
Salvage Value versus UCC Th ere is a slight diff erence between this calculation for the present value of the tax shield on CCA and what we got in Table 10.13 by adding the tax shields over the project life. Th e diff erence arises whenever the salvage value of the asset diff ers from its UCC. Th e formula solution is more accu- rate as it takes into account the future CCA on this diff erence. In this case, the asset was sold for $150,000 and had UCC of $150,995. Th e $995 left in the pool aft er eight years creates an infi nite stream of CCA tax shields. At Time 8, this stream has a present value of [$995(.20)(.40)]/[.20 + .15] = $227.43. At Time 0, the present value of this stream at 15 percent is about $75. To get the precise estimate of the present value of the CCA tax shield, we need to add this to the approxima- tion in Table 10.13: $159,649 + $75 = $159,724.
EXAMPLE 10.2: Th e Ogopogo Paddler
Harvey Bligh, of Kelowna, British Columbia, is contemplat- ing purchasing a paddle-wheel boat that he will use to give tours of Okanagan Lake in search of the elusive Ogopogo. Bligh has estimated cash flows from the tours and dis- counted them back over the eight-year expected life of the boat at his 20 percent required rate of return. The summary of his calculations follows:
Investment -$250,000.00 Working capital -50,000.00 PV of salvage 11,628.40 PV of NWC recovery 11,628.40 PV of after-tax operating income 251,548.33 PV of CCATS ? NPV ?
He is struggling with the CCA tax shield calculation and is about to dump the project as it appears to be unprofit- able. Is the project as unprofitable as Bligh believes?
The salvage value of the boat is $50,000, the combined federal and provincial corporate tax rate in British Columbia is 43 percent, and the CCA rate is 15 percent on boats.
PV tax shield on CCA = [IdTC] ______ d + k
× [1 + .5k]
_________ 1 + k
- SndTC _____ d + k
× 1 ________ (1 + k ) n
1st term = [($250,000 × .15 × .43)/(.15 + .20)] × [(1 + .50 × .20)/(1 + .20)] = $42,232.14
2nd term = [($50,000 × .15 × .43)/(.15 + .20)] × 1/(1 + .20)8
= $2,142.95
PV of CCATS = $42,232.14 – 2,142.95 = $40,089.19
The NPV of the investment is $14,894.32. Bligh should pursue this venture.
1. What is meant by the term depreciation (CCA) tax shield?
2. What are the top-down and bottom-up definitions of operating cash flow?
Concept Questions
268 Part 4: Capital Budgeting
10Ross_Chapter10_3rd_C.indd 26810Ross_Chapter10_3rd_C.indd 268 12-11-12 13:3212-11-12 13:32
10.7 Some Special Cases of Discounted Cash Flow Analysis
To fi nish our chapter, we look at four common cases involving discounted cash fl ow analysis. Th e fi rst case involves investments that are primarily aimed at improving effi ciency and thereby cutting costs. Th e second case demonstrates analysis of a replacement decision. Th e third case arises in choosing between equipment with diff erent economic lives. Th e fourth and fi nal case we consider comes up when a fi rm is involved in submitting competitive bids.
Th ere are many other special cases that we should consider, but these four are particularly important because problems similar to these are so common. Also, they illustrate some very diverse applications of cash fl ow analysis and DCF valuation.
Evaluating Cost-Cutting Proposals One decision we frequently face is whether to upgrade existing facilities to make them more cost- eff ective. Th e issue is whether the cost savings are large enough to justify the necessary capital expenditure. For example, in 2012, Caterpillar Inc., the American industrial giant, decided to cut the wages of its London, Ontario employees by 50 percent. When the union rebelled, Caterpillar closed its London plant, Electro-Motive Canada.
Suppose we are considering automating some part of an existing production process presently performed manually in one of our plants. Th e necessary equipment costs $80,000 to buy and install. It will save $35,000 per year (pre-tax) by reducing labour and material costs. Th e equip- ment has a fi ve-year life and is in Class 8 with a CCA rate of 20 percent. Due to rapid obsoles- cence, it will actually be worth nothing in fi ve years. Should we do it? Th e tax rate is 40 percent, and the discount rate is 10 percent.
As always, the initial step in making this decision is to identify the relevant incremental cash fl ows. We keep track of these in the following table. First, determining the relevant capital spend- ing is easy enough. Th e initial cost is $80,000 and the salvage value aft er fi ve years is zero. Second, there are no working capital consequences here, so we don’t need to worry about additions to net working capital.
Operating cash fl ows are the third component. Buying the new equipment aff ects our operating cash fl ows in two ways. First, we save $35,000 pretax every year. In other words, the fi rm’s oper- ating income increases by $35,000, so this is the relevant incremental project operating income. Aft er taxes, this represents an annual cash fl ow of $21,000 as shown in the following table:
Year
0 1 2 3 4 5
Investment -$80,000 NWC 0 Subtotal -80,000 Op. income $35,000 $35,000 $35,000 $35,000 $35,000 Taxes 14,000 14,000 14,000 14,000 14,000 Subtotal 21,000 21,000 21,000 21,000 21,000 Salvage 0 Total -$80,000 $21,000 $21,000 $21,000 $21,000 $21,000
Present value of the tax shield on the CCA:
PV = 80,000(.20)(.40) _____________ .20 + .10 × 1 + .5(.10) _________ 1 + .10
= $20,364
Present value of the aft er-tax operating savings:
PV = $21,000 × (1 - (1/1.105))/.10 = $21,000 × 3.7908 = $79,607
CHAPTER 10: Making Capital Investment Decisions 269
10Ross_Chapter10_3rd_C.indd 26910Ross_Chapter10_3rd_C.indd 269 12-11-12 13:3212-11-12 13:32
NPV
Investment -$ 80,000 Operating cash flows 79,607 PV of salvage 0 CCATS 20,364 NPV $ 19,971
Second, we have a tax shield on the incremental CCA created by the new equipment. Th is equip- ment has zero salvage so the formula is simplifi ed as shown. CCA goes on forever and the present value of the tax shield is the sum of an infi nite series. Th e present value is $20,364.
We can now fi nish our analysis by fi nding the present value of the $21,000 aft er-tax operating savings and adding the present values. At 10 percent, it’s straightforward to verify that the NPV here is $19,971, so we should go ahead and automate.
EXAMPLE 10.3: To Buy or Not to Buy
We are considering the purchase of a $200,000 computer- based inventory management system. It is in Class 10 with a CCA rate of 30 percent. The computer has a four-year life. It will be worth $30,000 at that time. The system would save us $60,000 pretax in inventory-related costs. The rele- vant tax rate is 43.5 percent. Because the new set-up is more efficient than our existing one, we would be able to carry less total inventory and thus free $45,000 in net work- ing capital. What is the NPV at 16 percent? What is the DCF return (the IRR) on this investment?
We begin by calculating the operating cash flow. The after-tax cost savings are $60,000 × (1 – .435) = $33,900. The present value of the tax shield on the CCA is found us- ing the formula we first used in the Majestic Mulch and Compost Company problem.
PV = 200,000(.30)(.435)
__________________ .30 + .16
× 1 + .5(.16)
___________ 1 + .16
- 30,000(.30)(.435)
_________________ .30 + .16
× 1 __________ (1 + .16 ) 4
= $48,126
The capital spending involves $200,000 up front to buy the system. The salvage is $30,000. Finally, and this is the somewhat tricky part, the initial investment in net working capital is a $45,000 inflow because the system frees work- ing capital. Furthermore, we have to put this back in at the end of the project’s life. What this really means is simple:
While the system is in operation, we have $45,000 to use elsewhere.
To finish our analysis, we can compute the total cash flows:
Year
0 1 2 3 4 Investment -$200,000
NWC 45,000
Subtotal -155,000
Operating income $60,000 $60,000 $60,000 $60,000
Taxes 26,100 26,100 26,100 26,100
After-tax operating income
33,900 33,900 33,900 33,900
NWC returned -45,000
NPV
Investment -$ 200,000 NWC recovered now 45,000 Operating income 94,858 PV of salvage 16,569 PV of NWC returned -24,853 CCATS 48,126 NPV -$ 20,300
At 16 percent, the NPV is –$20,300, so the investment is not attractive. After some trial and error, we find that the NPV is zero when the discount rate is 9.36 percent, so the IRR on this investment is about 9.36 percent.20
20
Replacing an Asset Instead of cutting costs by automating a manual production process, companies oft en need to decide whether it is worthwhile to enhance productivity by replacing existing equipment with newer models or more advanced technology. Suppose the promising numbers we calculated for the automation proposal encourage you to look into buying three more sets of equipment to replace older technology on your company’s other production lines. Th ree new sets of equipment
20 This IRR is tricky to compute without a spreadsheet because the asset is sold for $30,000, which is less than its unde- preciated capital cost (after four years) of $48,000. Capital cost allowance on the difference remains in the pool and goes on to infinity. For this reason, we need to solve for the CCATS by trial and error.
270 Part 4: Capital Budgeting
10Ross_Chapter10_3rd_C.indd 27010Ross_Chapter10_3rd_C.indd 270 12-11-12 13:3212-11-12 13:32
cost $200,000 to buy and install. (Your projected cost is less than the earlier $80,000 per machine because you receive a quantity discount from the manufacturer.)
Th is time, the analysis is more complex because you are going to replace existing equipment. You bought it four years ago for $150,000 and expect it to last for six more years. Due to rapid techno- logical advances, the existing equipment is only worth $50,000 if you sell it today. Th e more effi cient newer technology would save you $75,000 per year in production costs over its projected six-year life.21Th ese savings could be realized through reduced wastage and downtime on the shop fl oor.
If you retain the current equipment for the rest of its working life, you can expect to realize $10,000 in scrap value aft er six years. Th e new equipment, on the other hand, is saleable in the second-hand market and is expected to have a salvage value of $30,000 aft er six years.
With regard to working capital, the new equipment requires a greater stock of specialized spare parts but off ers an off setting reduction in wastage of work in process. On balance, no change in net working capital is predicted.
You determine that both the existing and new equipment are Class 8 assets with a CCA rate of 20 percent. Your fi rm requires a return of 15 percent on replacement investments and faces a tax rate of 44 percent. Should you recommend purchase of the new technology?
Th ere is a lot of information here and we organize it in Table 10.14. Th e fi rst cash fl ow is the capital outlay—and the diff erence between the cost of the new and the sale realization on the old equipment. To address CCA, we draw on the discussion in Chapter 2. Th ere will still be unde- preciated capital cost in the Class 8 pool because the amount we are adding to the pool (purchase price of new equipment) is greater than the amount we are subtracting (salvage on old equip- ment). Because we are not creating a negative balance of undepreciated capital cost (recapturing CCA) or selling all the pool’s assets, there are no tax adjustments to the net outlay. Th e incremen- tal salvage in six years is treated in the same way.22
TABLE 10.14
Replacement of existing asset ($000s) Year
0 1 2 3 4 5 6
Investment -$200 Salvage on old 50 NWC additions 0 Subtotal -150 Op. savings $75 $75 $75 $75 $75 $75 Taxes 33 33 33 33 33 33 Subtotal 42 42 42 42 42 42 Salvage forgone -10 Salvage 30
NPV
Investment -$ 200,000 Salvage recovered now 50,000 Operating cash flows 158,948 PV of salvage forgone -4,323 PV of salvage recovered 12,970 CCATS 33,081 NPV $ 50,676
Th e fact that we are making a net addition to the asset pool in Class 8 simplifi es calculation of the tax shield on CCA. In this common case, Canada Revenue Agency’s half-year rule applies to the net addition to the asset class. So, we simply substitute the incremental outlay for C in the present value of tax shield formula. Finally, we substitute the incremental salvage for S and crank the formula.23
21 For simplicity, we assume that both the old and new equipment have six-year remaining lives. Later, we discuss how to analyze cases in which lives differ. 22 Here we are making an implicit assumption that at the end of six years the deduction of salvage will not exhaust the Class 8 pool. If this were not the case, the excess, recaptured depreciation (i.e., the amount by which salvage value exceeds the undepreciated cost of the pool to which the asset belongs), would be taxable at the firm’s tax rate of 44 percent. 23 The present value of tax shield formula does not adjust the salvage for the half-year rule. This means we are assuming that, while the asset class will continue beyond Year 6, no new assets will be added in that year. We make this and the other tax assumptions to illustrate common situations without bogging down in the fine points of taxes.
CHAPTER 10: Making Capital Investment Decisions 271
10Ross_Chapter10_3rd_C.indd 27110Ross_Chapter10_3rd_C.indd 271 12-11-12 13:3212-11-12 13:32
PV = 150,000(.20)(.44) ______________ .20 + .15 × 1 + .5(.15) _________ 1 + .15 -
20,000(.20)(.44) _____________ .20 + .15 × 1 _________
(1 + .15 ) 6
= $33,081
Additions to net working capital are not relevant here. Aft er-tax operating savings are calculated in the same way as in our prior examples. Table 10.14 shows that the replacement proposal has a substantial positive NPV and seems attractive. Another example on replacement is provided in Example 10.4 below.
EXAMPLE 10.4: Replacement
Theatreplex Oleum is considering replacing a projector sys- tem in one of its cinemas. The new projector has super-ho- lographic sound and is able to project laser-sharp images. These features would increase the attendance at the the- atre; and the new projector could cut repair costs dramati- cally. The new projector costs $250,000 and has a useful life of 15 years, at which time it could be sold for $20,000. The projector currently being used was purchased for $150,000 five years ago and can be sold now for $50,000. In 15 years the old projector would be scrapped for $5,000. The new projector would increase operating income by $50,000 annually; it belongs to Class 9 for CCA calculations with a rate of 25 percent. Theatreplex requires a 15 percent return on replacement assets and the corporate tax rate is 43.5 percent. Should Theatreplex replace the projector?
We begin calculating the profitability of such an invest- ment by finding the present value of the increased operat- ing income:
After-tax flow = $50,000 × (1 - .435) = $28,250
PV = $28,250 × (1 - 1/(1.15)15)/.15 = $28,250 × 5.84737 = $165,188
The next step is to calculate the present value of the net salvage value of the new projector:
PV = ($20,000 - 5,000) × 1/(1.15)15
= $1,843
The last step is to calculate the present value tax shield on the CCA:
PV = 200,000(.25)(.435)
__________________ .25 + .15
× 1 + .5(.15)
___________ 1 + .15
- 15,000(.25)(.435)
_________________ .25 + .15
× 1 __________ (1 + .15 ) 15
= 54,375 × 1.075/1.15 - 4,078 × 1/ ( 1.15 ) 15 = $50,829 - $501 = $50,328
The NPV is found by adding these present values to the original investment:
Net investment -$ 200,000 Increased operating income 165,188 Net salvage 1,843 CCATS 50,328 NPV $ 17,359
The investment surpasses the required return on invest- ments for Theatreplex Oleum and should be pursued.
Evaluating Equipment with Different Lives Our previous examples assumed, a bit unrealistically, that competing systems had the same life. Th e next problem we consider involves choosing among diff erent possible systems, equipment, or procedures with diff erent lives. For example, hospital managers need to decide which type of infusion pump to order for use in operating rooms to deliver anesthesia to patients undergoing surgery. Some pumps are single use while other, more expensive models last for 5 or 7 years and carry diff erent types of delivery tubing and maintenance costs. As always, our goal is to maxi- mize net present value. To do this, we place the projects on a common horizon for comparison. Equivalent annual cost (EAC) is oft en used as a decision-making tool in capital budgeting when comparing projects of unequal life spans.
Th e approach we consider here is only necessary when two special circumstances exist: First, the possibilities under evaluation have diff erent economic lives. Second, and just as important, we need whatever we buy more or less indefi nitely. As a result, when it wears out, we buy another one.
We can illustrate this problem with a simple example that holds the benefi ts constant across diff erent alternatives. Th is way we can focus on fi nding the least-cost alternative.24 Imagine that
24 Alternatively, in another case, the costs could be constant and the benefits differ. Then we would maximize the equiv- alent annual benefit.
272 Part 4: Capital Budgeting
10Ross_Chapter10_3rd_C.indd 27210Ross_Chapter10_3rd_C.indd 272 12-11-12 13:3212-11-12 13:32
we are in the business of manufacturing stamped metal subassemblies. Whenever a stamping mechanism wears out, we have to replace it with a new one to stay in business. We are considering which of two stamping mechanisms to buy.
Machine A costs $100 to buy and $10 per year to operate. It wears out and must be replaced every two years. Machine B costs $140 to buy and $8 per year to operate. It lasts for three years and must then be replaced. Ignoring taxes, which one should we go with if we use a 10 percent discount rate?
In comparing the two machines, we notice that the fi rst is cheaper to buy, but it costs more to operate and it wears out more quickly. How can we evaluate these trade-off s? We can start by computing the present value of the costs for each:
Machine A: PV = -$100 + -$10/1.1 + -10/1.12 = -$117.36 Machine B: PV = -$140 + -$8/1.1 + -$8/1.12 + -$8/1.13 = -$159.89
Notice that all the numbers here are costs, so they all have negative signs. If we stopped here, it might appear that A is the more attractive since the PV of the costs is less. However, all we have really discovered so far is that A eff ectively provides two years’ worth of stamping service for $117.36, while B eff ectively provides three years’ worth for $159.89. Th ese are not directly compa- rable because of the diff erence in service periods.
We need to somehow work out a cost per year for these two alternatives. To do this, we ask the question: What amount, paid each year over the life of the machine, has the same PV of costs? Th is amount is called the equivalent annual cost (EAC).
Calculating the EAC involves fi nding an unknown payment amount. For example, for Machine A, we need to fi nd a two-year ordinary annuity with a PV of -$117.36 at 10 percent. Going back to Chapter 6, the two-year annuity factor is:
Annuity factor = [1 - 1/1.102]/.10 = 1.7355
For Machine A, then, we have:
PV of costs = -$117.36 = EAC × 1.7355
EAC = -$117.36/1.7355 = -$67.62
For Machine B, the life is three years, so we fi rst need the three-year annuity factor:
Annuity factor = [1 - 1/1.103]/.10 = 2.4869
We calculate the EAC for B just as we did for A:
PV of costs = $159.89 = EAC × 2.4869
EAC = -$159.89/2.4869 = -$64.29
Based on this analysis, we should purchase B because it eff ectively costs $64.29 per year versus $67.62 for A. In other words, all things considered, B is cheaper. Its longer life and lower operating cost are more than enough to off set the higher initial purchase price. Using the EAC approach, hospitals make cost-eff ective decisions regarding similar devices using common capital invest- ment formulas.25
Setting the Bid Price Early on, we used discounted cash fl ow to evaluate a proposed new product. A somewhat diff erent (and very common) scenario arises when we must submit a competitive bid to win a job. Under such circumstances, the winner is whoever submits the lowest bid.
Th ere is an old saw concerning this process: the low bidder is whoever makes the biggest mistake. Th is is called the winner’s curse. In other words, if you win, there is a good chance that you underbid. In this section, we look at how to set the bid price to avoid the winner’s curse. Th e procedure we describe is useful anytime we have to set a price on a product or service.
25 Sinclair, D. R. (2010), Equivalent annual cost: a method for comparing the cost of multi-use medical devices, Canad- ian Anesthesiologists Society, Vol. 57, pp. 521-522.
equivalent annual cost (EAC) The present value of a project’s costs calculated on an annual basis.
CHAPTER 10: Making Capital Investment Decisions 273
10Ross_Chapter10_3rd_C.indd 27310Ross_Chapter10_3rd_C.indd 273 12-11-12 13:3212-11-12 13:32
EXAMPLE 10.5: Equivalent Annual Costs
This extended example illustrates what happens to the EAC when we consider taxes. You are evaluating two different pollution control options. A filtration system costs $1.1 mil- lion to install and $60,000 pre-tax annually to operate. It would have to be replaced every five years. A precipitation system costs $1.9 million to install, but only $10,000 per year to operate. The precipitation equipment has an effec- tive operating life of eight years. The company rents its fac- tory and both systems are considered leasehold improvements so straight-line capital cost allowance is used throughout, and neither system has any salvage value. Which method should we select if we use a 12 percent dis- count rate? The tax rate is 40 percent.
We need to consider the EACs for the two approaches because they have different service lives, and they will be replaced as they wear out. The relevant information is sum- marized in Table 10.15.
Notice that the operating cash flow is actually positive in both cases because of the large CCA tax shields.26 This can occur whenever the operating cost is small relative to the purchase price.
To decide which system to purchase, we compute the EACs for both using the appropriate annuity factors:
Filtration system: -$912,550 = EAC × 3.6048 EAC = -$253,149 per year
Precipitation system: -$1,457,884 = EAC × 4.9676 EAC = -$293,479 per year
The filtration system is the cheaper of the two, so we select it. The longer life and smaller operating cost of the precipitation system are not sufficient to offset its higher initial cost.
26
TABLE 10.15
Equivalent annual cost Filtration System Precipitation System
After-tax operating cost -$ 36,000 -$ 6,000 Annual CCATS 88,000 95,000 Operating cash flow $ 52,000 $ 89,000 Economic life 5 years 8 years Annuity factor (12%) 3.6048 4.9676 Present value of operating cash flow $ 187,450 $ 442,116 Capital spending -$ 1,100,000 -$ 1,900,000 Total PV of costs -$ 912,550 -$ 1,457,884
To illustrate how to set a bid price, imagine that we are in the business of buying stripped-down truck platforms and then modifying them to customer specifi cations for resale. A local distributor has requested bids for fi ve specially modifi ed trucks each year for the next four years, for a total of 20 trucks.
We need to decide what price per truck to bid. Th e goal of our analysis is to determine the lowest price we can profi tably charge. Th is maximizes our chances of being awarded the contract while guarding against the winner’s curse.
Suppose we can buy the truck platforms for $10,000 each. Th e facilities we need can be leased for $24,000 per year. Th e labour and material cost to do the modifi cation works out to be about $4,000 per truck. Total cost per year would thus be
$24,000 + 5 × ($10,000 + 4,000) = $94,000
26 We ignore the half-year rule for simplicity here. Also note that it is possible to rework Example 10.5 (and reach the same answer) treating the EAC as equivalent annual cash flows. In this case, the inflows have minus signs and the EAC is positive.
274 Part 4: Capital Budgeting
10Ross_Chapter10_3rd_C.indd 27410Ross_Chapter10_3rd_C.indd 274 12-11-12 13:3212-11-12 13:32
We need to invest $60,000 in new equipment. Th is equipment falls in Class 8 with a CCA rate of 20 percent. It would be worth about $5,000 at the end of the four years. We also need to invest $40,000 in raw materials inventory and other working capital items. Th e relevant tax rate is 43.5 percent. What price per truck should we bid if we require a 20 percent return on our investment?
TABLE 10.16
Setting the bid price
Cash Flow Year PV at 20%
Capital spending -$60,000 0 -$ 60,000 Salvage 5,000 4 2,411 Additions to NWC -40,000 0 -40,000
40,000 4 19,290 After-tax operating income (S -94,000)(1 - .435) 1–4 ?
Tax shield on CCA $ 11,438 NPV $0
PV = 60,000(.20)(.435)
_________________ .20 + .20
× 1 + .5(.20)
___________ 1 + .20
- 5,000(.20)(.435)
________________ .20 + .20
× 1 __________ (1 + .20 ) 4
= $11,438
We start by looking at the capital spending and net working capital investment. We have to spend $60,000 today for new equipment. Th e aft er-tax salvage value is simply $5,000 assuming as usual that at the end of four years, other assets remain in Class 8. Furthermore, we have to invest $40,000 today in working capital. We get this back in four years.
We can’t determine the aft er-tax operating income just yet because we don’t know the sales price. Th e present value of the tax shield on CCA works out to be $11,438. Th e calculations are in Table 10.16 along with the other data. With this in mind, here is the key observation: Th e lowest possible price we can profi tably charge results in a zero NPV at 20 percent. Th e reason is, at that price we earn exactly the required 20 percent on our investment.
Given this observation, we fi rst need to determine what the aft er-tax operating income must be for the NPV to be equal to zero. To do this, we calculate the present values of the salvage and return of net working capital in Table 10.16 and set up the NPV equation.
NPV = 0 = - $60,000+ 2,411 - 40,000 + 19,290 + PV(annual after-tax incremental operating income) + 11,438
PV (annual after-tax incremental operating income) = $66,861
Since this represents the present value of an annuity, we can fi nd the annual “payments,”
PV (annuity) = $66,86 1 = P[1 - 1/1.204]/.20 P = $25,828
Th e annual incremental aft er-tax operating income is $25,828. Using a little algebra we can solve for the necessary sales proceeds, S.
$25,828 = (S - 94,000)(1 - .435) $45,713 = S - 94,000 S = $139,713
Since the contract is for fi ve trucks, this represents $27,943 per truck. If we round this up a bit, it looks like we need to bid about $28,000 per truck. At this price, were we to get the contract, our return would be a bit more than 20 percent.
1. Under which circumstances do we have to worry about unequal economic lives? How do you interpret the EAC?
2. In setting a bid price, we used a zero NPV as our benchmark. Explain why this is appropriate.
Concept Questions
CHAPTER 10: Making Capital Investment Decisions 275
10Ross_Chapter10_3rd_C.indd 27510Ross_Chapter10_3rd_C.indd 275 12-11-12 13:3212-11-12 13:32
10.8 SUMMARY AND CONCLUSIONS
Th is chapter describes how to put together a discounted cash fl ow analysis. In it, we covered: 1. The identification of relevant project cash flows. We discussed project cash flows and de-
scribed how to handle some issues that often come up, including sunk costs, opportunity costs, financing costs, net working capital, and erosion.
2. Preparing and using pro forma or projected financial statements. We showed how such fi- nancial statement information is useful in coming up with projected cash flows, and we also looked at some alternative definitions of operating cash flow.
3. The role of net working capital and depreciation in project cash flows. We saw that includ- ing the additions to net working capital was important because it adjusted for the discrep- ancy between accounting revenues and costs and cash revenues and costs. We also went over the calculation of capital cost allowance under current tax law.
4. Some special cases in using discounted cash flow analysis. Here we looked at four special is- sues: cost-cutting investments, replacement decisions, the unequal lives problem, and how to set a bid price. Th e discounted cash fl ow analysis we’ve covered here is a standard tool in the business world.
It is a very powerful tool, so care should be taken in its use. Th e most important thing is to get the cash fl ows identifi ed in a way that makes economic sense. Th is chapter gives you a good start on learning to do this.
Key Terms capital cost allowance (CCA) (page 254) depreciation (CCA) tax shield (page 264) equivalent annual cost (EAC) (page 273) erosion (page 252) incremental cash flows (page 251)
opportunity cost (page 252) pro forma financial statements (page 254) stand-alone principle (page 251) sunk cost (page 251)
Chapter Review Problems and Self-Test These problems give you some practice with discounted cash flow analy- sis. The answers follow. 10.1 Capital Budgeting for Project X Based on the following in-
formation for Project X, should we undertake the venture? To answer, first prepare a pro forma statement of comprehensive income for each year. Second, calculate the operating cash flow. Finish the problem by determining total cash flow and then calculating NPV assuming a 20 percent required return. Use a 40 percent tax rate through-out. For help, look back at our shark attractant and power mulcher examples.
Project X is a new type of audiophile-grade stereo amplifier. We think we can sell 500 units per year at a price of $10,000 each. Variable costs per amplifier run about $5,000 per unit, and the product should have a four-year life. We require a 20 percent return on new products such as this one.
Fixed costs for the project run $610,000 per year. Further, we need to invest $1,100,000 in manufacturing equipment. This equipment belongs to class 8 for CCA purposes. In four years, the equipment can be sold for its UCC value. We would have to invest $900,000 in working capital at the start. After that, net working capital requirements would be 30 percent of sales.
10.2 Calculating Operating Cash Flow Mater Pasta Ltd. has pro- jected a sales volume of $1,432 for the second year of a pro- posed expansion project. Costs normally run 70 percent of sales, or about $1,002 in this case. The capital cost allowance will be $80, and the tax rate is 40 percent. What is the operat- ing cash flow? Calculate your answer using the top-down, bottom-up, and tax shield approaches described in the chapter.
10.3 Spending Money to Save Money For help on this one, refer back to the computerized inventory management system in Example 10.3. Here, we’re contemplating a new, mechanized welding system to replace our current manual system. It costs $600,000 to get the new system. The cost will be depreciated at a 30 percent CCA rate. Its expected life is four years. The sys- tem would actually be worth $100,000 at the end of four years.
We think the new system could save us $180,000 per year pre-tax in labour costs. The tax rate is 44 percent. What is the NPV of buying the new system? The required return is 15 percent.
Answers to Self-Test Problems 10.1 To develop the pro forma statements of comprehensive income, we need to calculate the depreciation for each of the four years. The
relevant CCA percentages, allowances, and UCC values for the first four years are:
276 Part 4: Capital Budgeting
10Ross_Chapter10_3rd_C.indd 27610Ross_Chapter10_3rd_C.indd 276 12-11-12 13:3212-11-12 13:32
Year CCA rate Eligible UCC Allowance Ending UCC
1 20.0% $550,000 $110,000 $990,000 2 20.0 990,000 198,000 792,000 3 20.0 792,000 158,400 633,600 4 20.0 633,600 126,720 506,880
The projected statements of comprehensive income, therefore, are as follows: Year
1 2 3 4
Sales $5,000,000 $5,000,000 $5,000,000 $5,000,000 Variable costs 2,500,000 2,500,000 2,500,000 2,500,000 Fixed costs 610,000 610,000 610,000 610,000 CCA deduction 110,000 198,000 158,400 126,720 EBIT $1,780,000 $1,692,000 $1,731,600 $1,763,280 Taxes (40%) 712,000 676,800 692,640 705,312 Net income $1,068,000 $1,015,200 $1,038,960 $1,057,968
Based on this information, the operating cash flows are: Year
1 2 3 4
EBIT $1,780,000 $1,692,000 $1,731,600 $1,763,280 CCA deduction 110,000 198,000 158,400 126,720 Taxes -712,000 -676,800 -692,640 -705,312 Operating cash flow $1,178,000 $1,213,200 $1,197,360 $1,184,688
We now have to worry about the non-operating cash flows. Net working capital starts at $900,000 and then rises to 30 percent of sales, or $1,500,000. This is a $600,000 addition to net working capital.
Finally, we have to invest $1,100,000 to get started. In four years, the market and book value of this investment would be identical, $506,880. Under our usual going-concern assumption, other Class 8 assets remain in the pool. There are no tax adjustments needed to the salvage value.
When we combine all this information, the projected cash flows for Project X are: Year
0 1 2 3 4
Operating cash flow $1,178,000 $1,213,200 $1,197,360 $1,184,688 Additions to NWC -$ 900,000 -600,000 1,500,000
Capital spending -1,100,000 506,880
Total cash flow -$2,000,000 $ 578,000 $1,213,200 $1,197,360 $3,191,568
With these cash flows, the NPV at 20 percent is: NPV = -$2,000,000 + 578,000/1.2 + 1,213,200/1.22 + 1,197,360/1.23 + 3,191,568/1.24
= $1,556,227 So this project appears quite profitable. 10.2 We begin by calculating the project’s EBIT, its tax bill, and its net income. EBIT = $1,432 - 1,002 - 80 = $350
Taxes = $350 × .40 = $140 Net income = $350 - 140 = $210
With these numbers, operating cash flow is: OCF = EBIT + D - Taxes
= $350 + 80 - 140 = $290
Using the other OCF definitions, we have: Tax shield OCF = (S - C) × (1 - .40) + D × .40
= ($1,432 - $1,002) × .60 + 80 × .40 = $290
Bottom-up OCF = Net income + D = $210 + 80 = $290
CHAPTER 10: Making Capital Investment Decisions 277
10Ross_Chapter10_3rd_C.indd 27710Ross_Chapter10_3rd_C.indd 277 12-11-12 13:3212-11-12 13:32
Top-down OCF = S - C - Taxes = $1,432 - 1,002 - 140 = $290
As expected, all of these definitions produce exactly the same answer. 10.3 The $180,000 pre-tax saving gives an after-tax amount of: (1 - .44) × $180,000 = $100,800 The present value of this four-year annuity amounts to:
PV = $100,800 × ( 1 - 1 _____ 1.154 ) /.15 = $100,800 × 2.8550 = $287,782
The present value of the tax shield on the CCA is:
PV = 600,000(.30)(.44) ______________ .15 + .30 × (1 + .5(.15)) ___________ 1 + .15 -
100,000(.30)(.44) ______________ .15 + .30 × 1 ______
(1.15)4
= 164,522 - 16,771 = $147,750
The only flow left undiscounted is the salvage value of the equipment. The present value of this flow is: PV = $100,000 × 1/1.154
= $100,000 × .5718 = $57,175
There are no working capital consequences, so the NPV is found by adding these three flows and the initial investment. Investment -$600,000 PV of labour savings 287,782 PV of salvage 57,175 CCATS 147,750 NPV -$107,293
You can verify that the NPV is -$107,293, and the return on the new welding system is only about 5.4 percent. The project does not appear to be profitable.
Concepts Review and Critical Thinking Questions 1. (LO1) In the context of capital budgeting, what is an oppor-
tunity cost? 2. (LO1) In our capital budgeting examples, we assumed that a
firm would recover all of the working capital it invested in a project. Is this a reasonable assumption? When might it not be valid?
3. (LO7) When is EAC analysis appropriate for comparing two or more projects? Why is this method used? Are there any im- plicit assumptions required by this method that you find trou- bling? Explain.
4. (LO1) “When evaluating projects, we’re only concerned with the relevant incremental after-tax cash flows. Therefore, be- cause depreciation is a non-cash expense, we should ignore its effects when evaluating projects.” Critically evaluate this statement.
5. (LO1) A major textbook publisher has an existing finance textbook. The publisher is debating whether or not to produce an “essentialized” version, meaning a shorter (and lower- priced) book. What are some of the considerations that should come into play?
In 2008, Indigo Books & Music Inc. launched a new chain called Pista- chio selling stationery, gifts, home decor and organic apothecary items. 6. (LO1) In evaluating the decision to start Pistachio, under
what circumstances might Indigo Books & Music have con- cluded that erosion was irrelevant?
7. (LO1) In evaluating Pistachio, what do you think Indigo needs to assume regarding the profit margins that exist in this market? Is it likely they will be maintained when others enter this market?
Questions and Problems 1. Relevant Cash Flows (LO1) White Oak Garden Inc. is looking at setting up a new manufacturing plant in London, Ontario to
produce garden tools. The company bought some land six years ago for $6 million in anticipation of using it as a warehouse and distribution site, but the company has since decided to rent these facilities from a competitor instead. If the land were sold today, the company would net $6.4 million. The company wants to build its new manufacturing plant on this land; the plant will cost $14.2 million to build, and the site requires $890,000 worth of grading before it is suitable for construction. What is the proper cash-flow amount to use as the initial investment in fixed assets when evaluating this project? Why?
2. Relevant Cash Flows (LO1) Nilestown Corp. currently sells 30,000 motor homes per year at $53,000 each, and 12,000 luxury motor coaches per year at $91,000 each. The company wants to introduce a new portable camper to fill out its product line; it hopes to sell 19,000 of these campers per year at $13,000 each. An independent consultant has determined that if Nilestown
Basic (Questions
1–34)
278 Part 4: Capital Budgeting
10Ross_Chapter10_3rd_C.indd 27810Ross_Chapter10_3rd_C.indd 278 12-11-12 13:3212-11-12 13:32
introduces the new campers, it should boost the sales of its existing motor homes by 4500 units per year, and reduce the sales of its motor coaches by 900 units per year. What is the amount to use as the annual sales figure when evaluating this project? Why?
3. Calculating Projected Net Income (LO1) A proposed new investment has projected sales of $830,000. Variable costs are 60 percent of sales, and fixed costs are $181,000; depreciation is $77,000. Prepare a pro forma statement of comprehensive income assuming a tax rate of 35 percent. What is the projected net income?
4. Calculating OCF (LO3) Consider the following statement of comprehensive income: Sales $824,500 Costs 538,900 Depreciation 126,500 EBIT ? Taxes (34%) ? Net income ?
Fill in the missing numbers and then calculate the OCF. What is the CCA tax shield? 5. OCF from Several Approaches (LO3) A proposed new project has projected sales of $108,000, costs of $51,000, and CCA of
$6,800. The tax rate is 35 percent. Calculate operating cash flow using the four different approaches described in the chapter and verify that the answer is the same in each case.
6. Calculating Net Income (LO1) A proposed new investment has projected sales in Year 5 of $940,000. Variable costs are 41 percent of sales and fixed costs are $147,000. CCA for the year will be $104,000. Prepare a projected statement of comprehensive income, assuming a 35 percent tax rate.
7. Calculating Depreciation (LO1, 2) A new electronic process monitor costs $990,000. This cost could be depreciated at 30 percent per year (Class 10). The monitor would actually be worthless in five years. The new monitor would save $460,000 per year before taxes and operating costs. If we require a 15 percent return, what is the NPV of the purchase? Assume a tax rate of 40 percent.
8. NPV and NWC Requirements (LO2) In the previous question, suppose the new monitor also requires us to increase net working capital by $47,200 when we buy it. Further suppose that the monitor could actually be worth $100,000 in five years. What is the new NPV?
9. NPV and CCA (LO2) In the previous question, suppose the monitor was assigned a 25 percent CCA rate. All the other facts are the same. Will the NPV be larger or smaller? Why? Calculate the new NPV to verify your answer.
10. Identifying Relevant Costs (LO1) Rick Bardles and Ed James are considering building a new bottling plant to meet expected future demand for their new line of tropical coolers. They are considering putting it on a plot of land they have owned for three years. They are analyzing the idea and comparing it to some others. Bardles says, “Ed, when we do this analysis, we should put in an amount for the cost of the land equal to what we paid for it. After all, it did cost us a pretty penny.” James retorts, “No, I don’t care how much it cost—we have already paid for it. It is what they call a sunk cost. The cost of the land shouldn’t be considered.” What would you say to Bardles and James?
11. Calculating Salvage Value27 (LO4) Consider an asset that costs $548,000 and can be depreciated at 20 percent per year (Class 8) over its eight-year life. The asset is to be used in a five-year project; at the end of the project, the asset can be sold for $105,000. If the relevant tax rate is 35 percent, what is the after-tax cash flow from the sale of the asset? You can assume that there will be no assets left in the class in six years.
12. Identifying Cash Flows (LO2) Last year, Lambeth Pizza Corporation reported sales of $102,000 and costs of $43,500. The following information was also reported for the same period:
Beginning Ending
Accounts receivable $45,120 $38,980 Inventory 53,500 59,140 Accounts payable 68,320 75,250
Based on this information, what was Lambeth’ change in net working capital for last year? What was the net cash flow? 13. Calculating Project OCF (LO3) Hubrey Home Inc. is considering a new three-year expansion project that requires an initial
fixed asset investment of $3.9 million. The fixed asset falls into Class 10 for tax purposes (CCA rate of 30 percent per year), and at the end of the three years can be sold for a salvage value equal to its UCC. The project is estimated to generate $2,650,000 in annual sales, with costs of $840,000. If the tax rate is 35 percent, what is the OCF for each year of this project?
14. Calculating Project NPV (LO2) In the previous problem, supposed the required return on the project is 12 percent. What is the project’s NPV?
15. Calculating Project Cash Flow from Assets (LO1, 2) In the previous problem, suppose the project requires an initial investment in net working capital of $300,000 and the fixed asset will have a market value of $210,000 at the end of the project. What is the project’s Year 0 net cash flow? Year 1? Year 2? Year 3? What is the new NPV?
16. NPV Applications (LO1, 2) We believe we can sell 90,000 home security devices per year at $150 a piece. They cost $130 to manufacture (variable cost). Fixed production costs run $215,000 per year. The necessary equipment costs $785,000 to buy and would be depreciated at a 25 percent CCA rate. The equipment would have a zero salvage value after the five-year life of the
27 Recall that terminal losses and recapture in CCA calculations were covered in Chapter 2.
CHAPTER 10: Making Capital Investment Decisions 279
10Ross_Chapter10_3rd_C.indd 27910Ross_Chapter10_3rd_C.indd 279 12-11-12 13:3212-11-12 13:32
project. We need to invest $140,000 in net working capital up front; no additional net working capital investment is necessary. The discount rate is 19 percent, and the tax rate is 35 percent. What do you think of the proposal?
17. Identifying Cash Flows (LO2) Suppose a company has $15,200 in sales during a quarter. Over the quarter, accounts receivable increased by $9,500. What were cash collections?
18. Stand-Alone Principle (LO1) Suppose a financial manager is quoted as saying: “Our firm uses the stand-alone principle. Since we treat projects like mini firms in our evaluation process, we include financing costs, because financing costs are relevant at the firm level.” Critically evaluate this statement.
19. Relevant Cash Flows (LO1) Kilworth Plexiglass Inc. is looking to set up a new manufacturing plant to produce surfboards. The company bought some land seven years ago for $7.2 million in anticipation of using it as a warehouse and distribution site, but the company decided to rent the facilities from a competitor instead. The land was appraised last week for $962,000. The company wants to build its new manufacturing plant on this land; the plant will cost $25 million to build, and the site requires an additional $586,000 in grading before it will be suitable for construction. What is the proper cash flow amount to use as the initial investment in fixed assets when evaluating this project? Why?
20. Relevant Cash Flows (LO1) Melrose Motorworks Corp. currently sells 23,000 compact cars per year at $14,690 each, and 38,600 luxury sedans at $43,700 each. The company wants to introduce a new mid-sized sedan to fill out its product line; it hopes to sell 28,500 of the cars per year at $33,600 each. An independent consultant has determined that if Melrose introduces the new cars, it should boost the sales of its existing compacts by 12,500 units per year, while reducing the unit sales of its luxury sedans by 8200 units per year. What is the annual cash flow amount to use as the sales figure when evaluating this project? Why?
21. Project Evaluation (LO1, 2) Fox Hollow Franks is looking at a new system with an installed cost of $560,000. This equipment is depreciated at a rate of 20 percent per year (Class 8) over the project’s five-year life, at the end of which the sausage system can be sold for $85,000. The sausage system will save the firm $165,000 per year in pre-tax operating costs, and the system requires an initial investment in net working capital of $29,000. If the tax rate is 34 percent and the discount rate is 10 percent, what is the NPV of this project?
22. Project Evaluation (LO1, 2) Your firm is contemplating the purchase of a new $720,000 million computer-based order entry system. The PVCCATS is $260,000, and the machine will be worth $280,000 at the end of the five-year life of the system. You will save $350,000 before taxes per year in order processing costs and you will be able to reduce working capital by $110,000 (this is a one-time reduction). If the tax rate is 35 percent, what is the IRR for this project?
23. Project Evaluation (LO1, 2) In the previous problem, suppose your required return on the project is 20 percent, your pre-tax cost savings are now $300,000 per year, and the machine can be depreciated at 30 percent (Class 10). Will you accept the project? What if the pre-tax savings are only $240,000 per year? At what level of pre-tax cost savings would you be indifferent between accepting the project and not accepting it?
24. Calculating a Bid Price (LO8) We have been requested by a large retailer to submit a bid for a new point-of-sale credit checking system. The system would be installed, by us, in 89 stores per year for three years. We would need to purchase $1,300,000 worth of specialized equipment. This will be depreciated at a 20 percent CCA rate. We will sell it in three years, at which time it will be worth about half of what we paid for it. Labour and material cost to install the system is about $96,000 per site. Finally, we need to invest $340,000 in working capital items. The relevant tax rate is 36 percent. What price per system should we bid if we require a 20 percent return on our investment? Try to avoid the winner’s curse.
25. Alternative OCF Definitions (LO3) Next year, Byron Corporation estimates that they will have $425,000 in sales, $96,000 in operating costs, and their corporate tax rate will be 35 percent. Undepreciated capital costs (UCC) will be $375,000 and the CCA rate will be 20 percent.
a. What is estimated EBIT for next year? b. Using the bottom-up approach, what is the operating cash flow? c. Using the tax shield method, what is the operating cash flow?
26. Alternating OCF Definitions (LO3) The Arva Logging Company is considering a new logging project in Ontario, requiring new equipment with a cost of $280,000. For the upcoming year, they estimate that the project will produce sales of $650,000 and $490,000 in operating costs. The CCA rate will be 25 percent and their net profits will be taxed at a corporate rate of 38 percent. Use the top-down approach and the tax shield approach to calculate the operating cash flow for the first year of the project for the Arva Logging Company.
27. EAC (LO7) Lobo is a leading manufacturer of positronic brains, a key component in robots. The company is considering two alternative production methods. The costs and lives associated with each are:
Year Method 1 Method 2
0 $6,700 $9,900 1 400 620 2 400 620 3 400 620 4 620
Assuming that Lobo will not replace the equipment when it wears out, which should it buy? If Lobo is going to replace the equipment, which should it buy (r = 13%)? Ignore depreciation and taxes in answering.
280 Part 4: Capital Budgeting
10Ross_Chapter10_3rd_C.indd 28010Ross_Chapter10_3rd_C.indd 280 12-11-12 13:3212-11-12 13:32
28. Calculating Cash Flows and EAC (LO7) In the previous question, suppose all the costs are before taxes and the tax rate is 39 percent. Both types of equipment would be depreciated at a CCA rate of 25 percent (Class 9), and would have no value after the project. What are the EACs in this case? Which is the preferred method?
29. Calculating EAC (LO7) A five-year project has an initial fixed asset investment of $270,000, an initial NWC investment of $25,000, and an annual OCF of -$42,000. The fixed asset is fully depreciated over the life of the project and has no salvage value. If the required return is 11 percent, what is this project’s equivalent annual cost, or EAC?
30. Calculating EAC (LO7) You are evaluating two different silicon wafer milling machines. The Techron I costs $290,000, has a three-year life, and has pre-tax operating costs of $67,000 per year. The Techron II costs $510,000, has a five-year life, and has pre-tax operating costs of $35,000 per year. Both milling machines are in Class 8 (CCA rate of 20 percent per year). Assume a salvage value of $40,000. If your tax rate is 35 percent and your discount rate is 10 percent, compute the EAC for both machines. Which do you prefer? Why?
31. Calculating EAC (LO7) You are considering two different methods for constructing a new warehouse site. The first method would use prefabricated building segments, would have an initial cost of $6.5 million, would have annual maintenance costs of $150,000, and would last for 25 years. The second alternative would employ a new carbon-fibre panel technology, would have an initial cost of $8.2 million, would have maintenance costs of $650,000 every 10 years, and is expected to last 40 years. Both buildings would be in CCA Class 1 (at a rate of 4 percent) and it is expected that each would have a salvage value equivalent to 25 percent of its construction cost at the end of its useful life. The discount rate the firm uses in evaluating projects is 11 percent. The tax rate is 35 percent. What is the annual cost for each option, and which would you pick?
32. Calculating EAC (LO7) A seven-year project has an initial investment of $550,000 and an annual operating cost of $32,000 in the first year. The operating costs are expected to increase at the rate of inflation, which is projected at 2 percent for the life of the project. The investment is in Class 7 for CCA purposes, and will therefore be depreciated at 15 percent annually. The salvage value at the end of the project will be $98,000. The firm’s discount rate is 11 percent, and the company falls in the 35 percent tax bracket. What is the EAC for the investment?
33. Calculating a Bid Price (LO8) Komoka Enterprises needs someone to supply it with 185,000 cartons of machine screws per year to support its manufacturing needs over the next five years, and you’ve decided to bid on the contract. It will cost you $940,000 to install the equipment necessary to start production. The equipment will be depreciated at 30 percent (Class 10), and you estimate that it can be salvaged for $70,000 at the end of the five-year contract. Your fixed production costs will be $305,000 per year, and your variable production costs should be $9.25 per carton. You also need an initial net working capital of $75,000. If your tax rate is 35 percent and you require a 12 percent return on your investment, what bid price should you submit?
34. Cost-cutting Proposals (LO5) Caradoc Machine Shop is considering a four-year project to improve its production efficiency. Buying a new machine press for $560,000 is estimated to result in $210,000 in annual pre-tax cost savings. The press falls into Class 8 for CCA purposes (CCA rate of 20 percent per year), and it will have a salvage value at the end of the project of $80,000. The press also requires an initial investment in spare parts inventory of $20,000, along with an additional $3,000 in inventory for each succeeding year of the project. If the shop’s tax rate is 35 percent and its discount rate is 9 percent, should Caradoc buy and install the machine press?
35. Cash Flows and NPV (LO2) We project unit sales for a new household-use laser-guided cockroach search and destroy system as follows:
Year Unit Sales
1 93,000 2 105,000 3 128,000 4 134,000 5 87,000
The new system will be priced to sell at $380 each. The cockroach eradicator project will require $1,800,000 in net working capital to start, and total net working capital will rise to
15 percent of the change in sales. The variable cost per unit is $265, and total fixed costs are $1,200,000 per year. The equipment necessary to begin production will cost a total of $24 million. This equipment is mostly industrial machinery and thus qualifies for CCA at a rate of 20 percent. In five years, this equipment will actually be worth about 20 percent of its cost.
The relevant tax rate is 35 percent, and the required return is 18 percent. Based on these preliminary estimates, what is the NPV of the project?
36. Replacement Decisions (LO6) An officer for a large construction company is feeling nervous. The anxiety is caused by a new excavator just released onto the market. The new excavator makes the one purchased by the company a year ago obsolete. As a result, the market value for the company’s excavator has dropped significantly, from $600,000 a year ago to $50,000 now. In 10 years, it would be worth only $3,000. The new excavator costs only $950,000 and would increase operating revenues by $90,000 annually. The new equipment has a 10-year life and expected salvage value of $175,000. What should the officer do? The tax rate is 35 percent, the CCA rate, 25 percent for both excavators, and the required rate of return for the company is 14 percent.
37. Replacement Decisions (LO6) A university student painter is considering the purchase of a new air compressor and paint gun to replace an old paint sprayer. (Both items belong to Class 9 and have a 25 percent CCA rate.) These two new items cost $12,000 and have a useful life of four years, at which time they can be sold for $1,600. The old paint sprayer can be sold now for $500 and
Intermediate (Questions
35–45)
CHAPTER 10: Making Capital Investment Decisions 281
10Ross_Chapter10_3rd_C.indd 28110Ross_Chapter10_3rd_C.indd 281 12-11-12 13:3212-11-12 13:32
could be scrapped for $250 in four years. The entrepreneurial student believes that operating revenues will increase annually by $8,000. Should the purchase be made? The tax rate is 22 percent and the required rate of return is 15 percent.
38. Different Lives (LO7) The Tempo Golf and Country Club in London, Ontario is evaluating two different irrigation system options. An underground automatic irrigation system will cost $9.2 million to install and $80,000 pre-tax annually to operate. It will not have to be replaced for 20 years. An aboveground system will cost $6.8 million to install, but $190,000 per year to operate. The aboveground equipment has an effective operating life of nine years. The country club leases its land from the city and both systems are considered leasehold improvements; as a result, straight-line capital cost allowance is used throughout, and neither system has any salvage value. Which method should we select if we use a 13 percent discount rate? The tax rate is 39 percent.
39. Comparing Mutually Exclusive Projects (LO1, 2) Mapleton Enterprises Inc. is evaluating alternative uses for a three-story manufacturing and warehousing building that it has purchased for $975,000. The company could continue to rent the building to the present occupants for $75,000 per year. These tenants have indicated an interest in staying in the building for at least another 15 years. Alternatively, the company could make leasehold improvements to modify the existing structure to use for its own manufacturing and warehousing needs. Mapleton’s production engineer feels the building could be adapted to handle one of two new product lines. The cost and revenue data for the two product alternatives follow.
Product A Product B
Initial cash outlay for building modifications $102,000 $192,250 Initial cash outlay for equipment 382,000 456,000 Annual pre-tax cash revenues (generated for 15 years) 323,100 396,000 Annual pre-tax cash expenditures (generated for 15 years) 174,700 235,700
The building will be used for only 15 years for either product A or product B. After 15 years, the building will be too small for efficient production of either product line. At that time, Mapleton plans to rent the building to firms similar to the current occupants. To rent the building again, Mapleton will need to restore the building to its present layout. The estimated cash cost of restoring the building if product A has been undertaken is $19,200; if product B has been produced, the cash cost will be $129,250. These cash costs can be deducted for tax purposes in the year the expenditures occur.
Mapleton will depreciate the original building shell (purchased for $975,000) at a CCA rate of 5 percent, regardless of which alternative it chooses. The building modifications fall into CCA Class 13 and are depreciated using the straight-line method over a 15-year life. Equipment purchases for either product are in Class 8 and have a CCA rate of 20 percent. The firm’s tax rate is 36 percent, and its required rate of return on such investments is 16 percent.
For simplicity, assume all cash flows for a given year occur at the end of the year. The initial outlays for modifications and equipment will occur at t = 0, and the restoration outlays will occur at the end of year 15. Also, Mapleton has other profitable ongoing operations that are sufficient to cover any losses.
Which use of the building would you recommend to management? 40. Valuation of the Firm (LO1, 2) The Mosley Wheat Company (MWC) has wheat fields that currently produce annual profits of
$1,100,000. These fields are expected to produce average annual profits of $820,000 in real terms forever. MWC has no depreciable assets, so the annual cash flow is also $820,000. MWC is an all-equity firm with 385,000 shares outstanding. The appropriate discount rate for its stock is 16 percent. MWC has an investment opportunity with a gross present value of $1,900,000. The investment requires a $1,400,000 outlay now. MWC has no other investment opportunities. Assume all cash flows are received at the end of each year. What is the price per share of MWC?
41. Comparing Mutually Exclusive Projects (LO4) Kingsmill Industrial Systems Company (KISC) is trying to decide between two different conveyor belt systems. System A costs $360,000, has a four-year life, and requires $135,000 in pre-tax annual operating costs. System B costs $430,000, has a six-year life, and requires $98,000 in pre-tax annual operating costs. Both systems are to be depreciated at 30 percent per year (Class 10) and will have no salvage value. Whichever project is chosen, it will not be replaced when it wears out. If the tax rate is 34 percent and the discount rate is 12 percent, which project should the firm choose?
42. Comparing Mutually Exclusive Projects (LO4) Suppose in the previous problem that KISC always needs a conveyor belt system; when one wears out, it must be replaced. Which project should the firm choose now?
43. Calculating a Bid Price (LO8) Consider a project to supply 140 million postage stamps per year to Canada Post for the next five years. You have an idle parcel of land available that cost $1,300,000 five years ago; if you sold the land today, it would net you $1,800,000, after tax. If you sold the land five years from now, the land can be sold again for a net $1,800,000 after tax. You will need to install $4.6 million in new manufacturing plant and equipment to actually produce the stamps. The equipment qualifies for a CCA rate of 30 percent and can be sold for $756,000 at the end of the project. You will also need $569,000 in initial net working capital for the project, and an additional investment of $68,000 every year thereafter. Your production costs are 0.9 cents per stamp, and you have fixed costs of $961,000 per year. If your tax rate is 34 percent and your required return on this project is 11 percent, what bid price should you submit on the contract?
44. Replacement with Unequal Lives (LO7) BIG Industries needs computers. Management has narrowed the choices to the SAL 5000 and the DET 1000. It would need 12 SALs. Each SAL costs $15,900 and requires $1,850 of maintenance each year. At the end of the computer’s six-year life, BIG expects to be able to sell each one for $1,300. On the other hand, BIG could buy 10 DETs. DETs cost $19,000 each and each machine requires $1,700 maintenance every year. They last for four years and have no resale
282 Part 4: Capital Budgeting
10Ross_Chapter10_3rd_C.indd 28210Ross_Chapter10_3rd_C.indd 282 12-11-12 13:3212-11-12 13:32
value. Whichever model BIG chooses, it will buy that model forever. Ignore tax effects, and assume that maintenance costs occur at year-end. Which model should BIG buy if the cost of capital is 15 percent?
45. Replacement with Unequal Lives (LO7) Kiss 92.5 is considering the replacement of its old, fully depreciated sound mixer. Two new models are available. Mixer X has a cost of $743,000, a six-year expected life, and after-tax cash flow savings of $296,000 per year. Mixer Y has a cost of $989,000, a 10-year life, and after-tax cash flow of $279,000 per year. No new technological developments are expected. The cost of capital is 12 percent. Should Kiss 92.5 replace the old mixer with X or Y?
46. Abandonment Decisions (LO1, 2) For some projects, it may be advantageous to terminate the project early. For example, if a project is losing money, you might be able to reduce your losses by scrapping out the assets and terminating the project, rather than continuing to lose money all the way through to the project’s completion. Consider the following project of Norman Clapper Inc. The company is considering a four-year project to manufacture clap-command garage door openers. This project requires an initial investment of $7 million with a CCA of 40 percent over the project’s life. An initial investment in net working capital of $2 million is required to support spare parts inventory; this cost is fully recoverable whenever the project ends. The company believes it can generate $5 million in pre-tax revenues with $2.5 million in total pre-tax operating costs. The tax rate is 39 percent and the discount rate is 13 percent. The market value of the equipment over the life of the project is as follows: a. Assuming Norman Clapper operates this project for four years, what is the
NPV? b. Now compute the project NPV assuming the project is abandoned after only
one year, after two years, and after three years. What economic life for this project maximizes its value to the firm? What does this problem tell you about not considering abandonment possibilities when evaluating projects?
47. Capital Budgeting Renovations (LO1, 2) Suppose we are thinking about renovating a leased office. The renovations would cost $364,000. The renovations will be depreciated straight-line to zero over the five-year remainder of the lease.
The new office would save us $36,000 per year in heating and cooling costs. Also, absenteeism should be reduced and the new image should increase revenues. These last two items would result in increased operating revenues of $43,000 annually. The tax rate is 36 percent, and the discount rate is 13 percent. Strictly from a financial perspective, should the renovations take place?
48. Calculating Required Savings (LO5, 8) A proposed cost-saving device has an installed cost of $620,000. It is in Class 8 (CCA rate = 20%) for CCA purposes. It will actually function for five years, at which time it will have no value. There are no working capital consequences from the investment, and the tax rate is 35 percent. a. What must the pre-tax cost savings be for us to favour the investment? We require a 11 percent return. (Hint: This one is a
variation on the problem of setting a bid price.) b. Suppose the device will be worth $90,000 in salvage (before taxes). How does this change your answer?
49. Cash Flows and Capital Budgeting Choices (LO1, 2) Dexter Company has recently completed a $1.3 million, two-year marketing study. Based on the results, Dexter has estimated that 19,600 of its new RUR-class robots could be sold annually over the next eight years at a price of $45,900 each. Variable costs per robot are $35,000 and fixed costs total $39.1 million.
Start-up costs include $96.5 million to build production facilities, $7.2 million in land, and $19.2 million in net working capital. The $96.5 million facility is made up of a building valued at $16 million that will belong to CCA Class 3 and $80.5 million of manufacturing equipment (belonging to CCA Class 8). Class 3 has a CCA rate of 5 percent, while Class 8 has a rate of 20 percent. At the end of the project’s life, the facilities (including the land) will be sold for an estimated $27.9 million; assume the building’s value will be $8.7 million. The value of the land is not expected to change.
Finally, start-up would also entail fully deductible expenses of $4.6 million at Year 0. Dexter is an ongoing, profitable business and pays taxes at a 39 percent rate. Dexter uses a 17 percent discount rate on projects such as this one. Should Dexter produce the RUR-class robots?
50. Project Evaluation (LO2) Aylmer-in-You (AIY) Inc. projects unit sales for a new opera tenor emulation implant as follows:
Production of the implants will require $800,000 in net working capital to start and additional net working capital investments each year equal to 40 percent of the projected sales increase for the following year. (Because sales are expected to fall in Year 5, there is no NWC cash flow occurring for Year 4.) Total fixed costs are $192,000 per year, variable production costs are $295 per unit, and the units are priced at $395 each. The equipment needed to begin production has an installed cost of $19.5 million. Because the implants are intended for professional singers, this equipment is considered industrial machinery and thus falls into Class 8 for tax purposes (20 percent). In five years, this equipment can be sold for about 30 percent of its acquisition cost. AIY is in the 40 percent marginal tax bracket and has a required return on all its projects of 23 percent. Based on these preliminary project estimates, what is the NPV of the project? What is the IRR?
51. Calculating Required Savings (LO5) A proposed cost-saving device has an installed cost of $865,000. The device will be used in a six-year project, but is classified as manufacturing and processing equipment for tax purposes. The required initial net working capital investment is $58,000, the marginal tax rate is 36 percent, and the project discount rate is 13.5 percent. The device has an estimated Year 6 salvage value of $138,000. What level of pre-tax cost savings do we require for this project to be profitable? The CCA rate is 20 percent.
Challenge (Questions
46–53)
Year Market Value (Millions)
1 $5.00 2 4.74 3 2.60 4 0.00
5 Year Unit Sales 1 107,000 2 123,000 3 134,000 4 156,000 5 95,500
CHAPTER 10: Making Capital Investment Decisions 283
10Ross_Chapter10_3rd_C.indd 28310Ross_Chapter10_3rd_C.indd 283 12-11-12 13:3212-11-12 13:32
52. Replacement Decisions (LO6) Suppose we are thinking about replacing an old computer with a new one. The old one cost us $420,000 one year ago; the new one will cost $368,000. The new machine will be in CCA Class 10 (30 percent). It will probably be worth about $198,000 after five years.
The old computer is being depreciated at a rate of $140,000 per year. It will be completely written off in three years. If we don’t replace it now, we will have to replace it in two years. We can sell it now for $190,000; in two years, it will probably be worth half that. The new machine will save us $130,000 per year in maintenance costs. The tax rate is 38 percent and the discount rate is 13 percent. a. Suppose we only consider whether or not we should replace the old computer now without worrying about what’s going to
happen in two years. What are the relevant cash flows? Should we replace it or not? (Hint: Consider the net change in the firm’s after-tax cash flows if we do the replacement.)
b. Suppose we recognize that if we don’t replace the computer now, we will be replacing it in two years. Should we replace now or should we wait? (Hint: What we effectively have here is a decision either to “invest” in the old computer (by not selling it) or to invest in the new one.) Notice that the two investments have unequal lives.
53. Financial Break-Even Analysis (LO8) To solve the bid price problem presented in the text, we set the project NPV equal to zero and found the required price using the definition of OCF. Thus the bid price represents a financial break-even level for the project. This type of analysis can be extended to many other types of problems. a. In Problem 33, assume that the price per carton is $15 and find the project NPV. What does your answer tell you about your
bid price? What do you know about the number of cartons you can sell and still break even? How about your level of costs? b. Solve Problem 33 again with the price still at $15 but find the quantity of cartons per year that you can supply and still break even. c. Repeat (b) with a price of $15 and a quantity of 185,000 cartons per year, and find the highest level of fixed costs you could
afford and still break even.
As a financial analyst at Glencolin International (GI) you have been asked to evaluate two capital investment alternatives submitted by the production department of the firm. Before beginning your analysis, you note that company policy has set the cost of capital at 15 percent for all proposed projects. As a small business, GI pays corporate taxes at the rate of 35 percent. The proposed capital project calls for developing new com- puter software to facilitate partial automation of production in GI’s plant. Alternative A has initial software development costs projected at $185,000, while Alternative B would cost $320,000. Software development costs would be capitalized and qualify for a capital cost allowance (CCA) rate of 30 per- cent. In addition, IT would hire a software consultant under either alternative to assist in making the decision whether to invest in the project for a fee of $16,000 and this cost would be expensed when it is incurred. To recover its costs, GI’s IT department would charge the production department for the use of computer time at the rate of $375 per hour and estimates that it would take 182 hours of computer time per year to run the new software un- der either alternative. GI owns all its computers and does not currently operate them at capacity. The information technol- ogy (IT) plan calls for this excess capacity to continue in the future. For security reasons, it is company policy not to rent excess computing capacity to outside users.
If the new partial automation of production is put in place, expected savings in production cost (before tax) are projected as follows:
Year Alternative A Alternative B
1 $82,000 $112,000 2 82,000 124,000 3 64,000 101,000 4 53,000 93,000 5 37,000 56,000
As the capital budgeting analyst, you are required to answer the following in your memo to the production department: a) Calculate the net present value of each of the alterna-
tives. Which would you recommend? b) The CFO suspects that there is a high risk that new tech-
nology will render the production equipment and this automation software obsolete after only three years. Which alternative would you now recommend? (Cost savings for Years 1 to 3 would remain the same.)
c) GI could use excess resources in its Engineering depart- ment to develop a way to eliminate this step of the man- ufacturing process by the end of year 3. The salvage value of the equipment (including any CCA and tax im- pact) would be $50,000 at the end of Year 3, $35,000 at the end of Year 4, and zero after five years. Should Engi- neering develop the solution and remove the equipment before the five years are up? Which alternative? When?
MINI CASE
Internet Application Questions 1. From time to time, governments at various levels provide tax incentives to promote capital investments in key industries.
The Province of Manitoba introduced the Mining & Exploration Tax Incentives program in the form of bonus tax credits (on top of normal deductions). Information on this program is found in the following release: gov.mb.ca/ctt/invest/busfacts/ govt/min_taxc.html
284 Part 4: Capital Budgeting
10Ross_Chapter10_3rd_C.indd 28410Ross_Chapter10_3rd_C.indd 284 12-11-12 13:3212-11-12 13:32
Explain how this incentive will affect new exploration activity. Is it possible that such tax incentives alter the NPV of a project? 2. In addition to NPV and IRR, Economic Value Added (EVA®) analysis (sternstewart.com/?content=proprietary&p=eva) has
emerged as a popular tool for capital budgeting and valuation. EVA was developed and is patented by Stern Stewart & Co (sternstewart.com). Explain the mechanics of EVA and show its equivalence to NPV. Provide at least two reasons why EVA and NPV may differ in implementation.
3. Toyota Canada expected the capital expansion of its Cambridge, Ontario facility to total $680 million (CDN). The plant began production of 60,000 Lexus RX300 (which have since been renamed RX330 and RX350) luxury SUVs annually in September 2003. Information on Toyota Canada’s plans for further expansion of Lexus production can be found at media.toyota.ca/pr/tci/ en/lexus/toyota-to-expand-lexus-production-236830.aspx. Assuming profit of $5,000 on the Lexus, a 15-year production hori- zon, and a 15 percent discount rate, do you think Toyota made a good investment decision? What other factors need to be considered? Why?
MORE ON INFLATION AND CAPITAL BUDGETING
This text states that interest rates can be expressed in either nominal or real terms. For example, suppose the nominal interest rate is 12 percent and inflation is expected to be 8 percent next year. Then the real interest rate is approximately
Real rate = Nominal rate - Expected infl ation rate = 12% - 8% = 4%.
Similarly, cash flows can be expressed in either nominal or real terms. Given these choices, how should one express interest rates and cash flows when performing capital budgeting?
Financial practitioners correctly stress the need to maintain consistency between cash flows and dis- count rates. That is, nominal cash flows must be discounted at the nominal rate. Real cash flows must be discounted at the real rate. The NPV is the same when cash flows are expressed in real quantities. The NPV is always the same under the two different approaches.
Because both approaches always yield the same result, which one should be used? Students will be happy to learn the following rule: Use the approach that is simpler. In the Shields Electric case, nominal quantities produce a simpler calculation. That is because the problem gave us nominal cash flows to begin with.
However, firms often forecast unit sales per year. They can easily convert these forecasts to real quanti- ties by multiplying expected unit sales each year by the product price at Date 0. (This assumes the price of the product rises at exactly the rate of inflation.) Once a real discount rate is selected, NPV can easily be calculated from real quantities. Conversely, nominal quantities complicate the example, because the extra step of converting all real cash flows to nominal cash flows must be taken.
EXAMPLE 10A.1:Real or Nominal?
Shields Electric forecasts the following nominal cash flows on a particular project:
Date
0 1 2 Cash Flow –$1,000 $600 $650
The nominal interest rate is 14 percent, and the inflation rate is forecast to be 5 percent. What is the value of the project?
Using Nominal Quantities The NPV can be calculated as:
$26.47 = -$1,000 + $600 _____ 1.14
+ $650 _______ (1.14 ) 2
The project should be accepted.
Using Real Quantities The real cash flows are: Date
0 1 2 Cash Flow –$1,000 $571.43 $589.57
$600 _____ 1.05
$650 _______ (1.05)2
The real interest rate is approximately 9 percent (14 per- cent – 5 percent); precisely it is 8.57143 percent.27
The NPV can be calculated as
$26.47 = -$1,000 + $571.32 __________ 1.0857143
+ $589.57 _____________ (1.0857143 ) 2
28
28 The exact calculation is 8.57143% = (1.14/1.05) – 1. It is explained in Chapter 12.
APPENDIX 10A
CHAPTER 10: Making Capital Investment Decisions 285
10Ross_Chapter10_3rd_C.indd 28510Ross_Chapter10_3rd_C.indd 285 12-11-12 13:3212-11-12 13:32
1. What is the difference between the nominal and the real interest rate?
2. What is the difference between nominal and real cash flows?
Appendix Questions and Problems
A.1 Repeat Question 27, assuming that all cash fl ows and discount rates provided are nominal rates, and that the infl ation rate is 3 percent. What are the real cash fl ows and the real rate of return? What is the new EAC for the production methods if infl ation is taken into account?
CAPITAL BUDGETING WITH SPREADSHEETS
Spreadsheets are almost essential for constructing a capital budgeting framework or for using pro forma financial statements. Table 10B.2 is an example of a capital budgeting framework, using the data from the Majestic Mulch and Compost Company. The framework is completely integrated, changing one of the in- put variables at the top reformulates the whole problem. This is useful for sensitivity calculations as it would be tedious to recalculate each column in the framework by hand.
The highlighted cells exhibit the more complicated procedures in the framework. The first, E16, is the CCA calculation. The IF statement is used to decide what year it is, to take into consideration the half-year effect. The second, G32, calculates the changes in net working capital. It is computed as 15 percent of the current year’s sales less 15 percent of the previous year’s sales. In Year 1, however, the intial net working capital is subtracted instead. The last cell, L53, simply discounts the future cash flows back to Year 0 dollars.
A well-designed capital budgeting framework allows most inputs to be easily changed, simplifying sen- sitivity calculations. We now turn our attention to a simple sensitivity calculation, to explain the usefulness of spreadsheets.
Table 10B.1 shows two sensitivity tables: One varies the initial investment and the other varies the dis- count rate. Notice in the first that if the initial investment runs over budget by as little as $25,000, it makes the whole project unprofitable. The second sensitivity analysis demonstrates that the project is even more sensitive to discount rate fluctuations.
Spreadsheets are invaluable in problems such as these; they decrease the number of silly errors and make all values easier to check. They also allow for what-if analyses such as these.
Recall that many problems in each chapter are labelled, with an icon, as Spreadsheet Problems. For some good practice at capital budgeting on a spreadsheet, we suggest that you consider completing Problem 50 in particular.
TABLE 10B.1
Sensitivity analysis
Initial Investment NPV Discount Rate NPV
Base case $ 4,604 15.0% $ 4,604 $750,000 44,626 10.0 177,240 775,000 24,615 12.5 84,796 800,000 4,604 15.0 4,604 825,000 -15,407 17.5 -65,319 850,000 -35,418 20.0 -126,589
Concept Questions
APPENDIX 10B
286 Part 4: Capital Budgeting
10Ross_Chapter10_3rd_C.indd 28610Ross_Chapter10_3rd_C.indd 286 12-11-12 13:3212-11-12 13:32
TABLE 10B.2
Capital budgeting framework A B C D E F G H I J K L
1 The Majestic Mulch and Compost Company 2 3 Input variables: 4 Tax rate 40.0% Discount rate 15.0% 5 CCA rate 20.0% NWC as a % of sale 15.0% 6 Initial investment $800,000 7 8 9 Statements of comprehensive income
10 Year 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 11 Unit price (Table 10.5) $ 120 $ 120 $ 120 $ 110 $ 110 $ 110 $ 110 $ 110 12 Unit sales (Table 10.5) 3,000 5,000 6,000 6,500 6,000 5,000 4,000 3,000 13 Revenues (Unit price × Unit sales) $360,000 $600,000 $720,000 $ 715,000 $ 660,000 $ 550,000 $ 440,000 $ 330,000 14 Variable costs ($60 × Unit sales) 180,000 300,000 360,000 390,000 360,000 300,000 240,000 180,000 15 Fixed costs 25,000 25,000 25,000 25,000 25,000 25,000 25,000 25,000 16 CCA 80,000 144,000 115,200 92,160 73,728 58,982 47,186 37,749 17 EBIT (Revenues - (Costs + CCA)) $ 75,000 $131,000 $219,800 $ 207,840 $ 201,272 $ 166,018 $ 127,814 $ 87,251 18 Taxes (EBIT × 40%) 30,000 52,400 87,920 83,136 80,509 66,407 51,126 34,901 19 Net income (EBIT-taxes) $ 45,000 $ 78,600 $131,880 $ 124,704 $ 120,763 $ 99,611 $ 76,688 $ 52,351 20 21 22 Projected cash flows 23 Year 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 24 Operating cash flows 25 EBIT $ 75,000 $131,000 $219,800 $ 207,840 $ 201,272 $ 166,018 $ 127,814 $ 87,251 26 CCA 80,000 144,000 115,200 92,160 73,728 58,982 47,186 37,749 27 Taxes 30,000 52,400 87,920 83,136 80,509 66,407 51,126 34,901 28 Op. cash flow (tax shield approach) $125,000 $222,600 $247,080 $ 216,864 $ 194,491 $ 158,593 $ 123,874 $ 90,099 29 30 Net working capital 31 Initial NWC $ 20,000 32 NWC Increases $ 34,000 36,000 $ 18,000 $ (750) $ (8,250) $ (16,500) $ (16,500) $ (16,500) 33 NWC recovery $ (49,500) 34 Add’ns to NWC $ 20,000 $ 34,000 $ 36,000 $ 18,000 $ (750) $ (8,250) $ (16,500) $ (16,500) $ (66,000) 35 36 37 38 39 40 Capital Spending (Table 10.8) 41 Initial inv. $ 800,000 42 After-tax salvage $(150,000) 43 Net cap. spending $ 800,000 $ - $ - $ - $ - $ - $ - $ - $(150,000) 44 45 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 46 Total project cash flow (OCF - Capital spending - Addn’s to NWC) 47 $(820,000) $ 91,000 $ 186,600 $229,080 $ 217,614 $ 202,741 $ 175,093 $ 140,374 $ 306,099 48 49 Cumulative cash flow 50 $(820,000) $(729,000) $(542,400) $(313,320) $ (95,706) $ 107,035 $ 282,128 $ 422,503 $ 728,602 51 52 Discounted cash flow (@15%) 53 $(820,000) $ 79,130 $ 141,096 $ 150,624 $ 124,422 $ 100,798 $ 75,698 $ 52,772 $ 100,064 54 55 NPV $ 4,604 56 57 IRR 15.15% Cash flows Cell formulas 58 $ (820,000) E16: =IF(E10=1,$C$6/2*$C$5,($C$6-SUM(D16:$E$16))*$C$5) 59 $ 91,000 G32: =(G13*$G$5)-(F13*$G$5) 60 $ 186,600 L53: =L47/((1+$G$4)^L45) 61 $ 229,080 62 $ 217,614 63 $ 202,741 64 $ 175,093 65 $ 140,374 66 $ 306,099
CHAPTER 10: Making Capital Investment Decisions 287
10Ross_Chapter10_3rd_C.indd 28710Ross_Chapter10_3rd_C.indd 287 12-11-12 13:3212-11-12 13:32
In our previous chapter, we discussed how to identify and organize the relevant cash fl ows for capital investment decisions. Our primary interest there was in coming up with a preliminary estimate of the net present value for a proposed project. In this chapter, we focus on assessing the reliability of such an estimate and avoiding forecasting risk, the possibility that errors in projected cash fl ow may lead to incorrect decisions.
We begin by discussing the need for an evaluation of cash fl ow and NPV estimates. We go on to develop some tools that are useful for doing so. We also examine complications and concerns that can arise in project evaluation.
11.1 Evaluating NPV Estimates
As we discussed in Chapter 9, an investment has a positive net present value if its market value exceeds its cost. Such an investment is desirable because it creates value for its owner. Th e pri- mary problem in identifying such opportunities is that most of the time we can’t actually observe the relevant market value. Instead, we estimate it. Having done so, it is only natural to wonder whether our estimates are at least close to the true values or whether we have fallen prey to fore- casting risk. We consider this question next.
PROJECT ANALYSIS AND EVALUATION
C H A P T E R 1 1
I n March 2011, the movie Mars Needs Moms, an animated science fiction film, was released to negative reviews from both critics and general audi-
ences. One critic wrote “the film looks neither fully
real nor fully imagined.” Others were even harsher,
saying “Mars may need moms, but Earth needs good
movies, and this isn’t one of them” and “Mars Needs
Moms isn’t much of a movie, but it’s a great teaching
tool for how not to make an animated film.”
Looking at the numbers, Walt Disney Pictures
spent close to $150 million making the movie, plus
millions more for marketing and distribution. Unfor-
tunately for Walt Disney, Mars Needs Moms crashed
and burned, pulling in only $40 million worldwide.
In fact, about 4 of 10 movies lose money at the box
office, though DVD sales often help the final tally. Of
course, there are movies that do quite well. Also in
2011, the Warner Brothers movie Harry Potter and
the Deathly Hallows: Part II raked in about $1.3 billion
worldwide at a production cost of $125 million.
Obviously, Walt Disney didn’t plan to lose $110
million or so on Mars Needs Moms, but it happened.
As the box office spinout of Mars Needs Moms shows,
projects don’t always go as companies think they
will. This chapter explores how this can happen,
and what companies can do to analyze and possibly
avoid these situations.
Learning Object ives
After studying this chapter, you should understand:
LO1 How to perform and interpret a sensitivity analysis for a proposed investment.
LO2 How to perform and interpret a scenario analysis for a proposed investment.
LO3 How to determine and interpret cash, accounting, and financial break-even points.
LO4 How the degree of operating leverage can affect the cash flows of a project.
LO5 How managerial options affect net present value.
W al
t D
is ne
y Pi
ct ur
es /C
ou rt
es y
Ev er
et t
C ol
le ct
io n
11Ross_Chapter11_4th.indd 28811Ross_Chapter11_4th.indd 288 12-11-27 12:0712-11-27 12:07
The Basic Problem Suppose we are working on a preliminary DCF analysis along the lines we described in the pre- vious chapter. We carefully identify the relevant cash fl ows, avoiding such things as sunk costs, and we remember to consider working capital requirements. We add back any depreciation; we account for possible erosion; and we pay attention to opportunity costs. Finally, we double-check our calculations, and, when all is said and done, the bottom line is that the estimated NPV is positive.
Now what? Do we stop here and move on to the next proposal? Probably not. Th e fact that the estimated NPV is positive is defi nitely a good sign, but, more than anything, this tells us we need to take a closer look.
If you think about it, there are two circumstances under which a discounted cash fl ow analysis could lead us to conclude that a project has a positive NPV. Th e fi rst possibility is that the project really does have a positive NPV. Th at’s the good news. Th e bad news is the second possibility: A project may appear to have a positive NPV because our estimate is inaccurate.
Notice that we could also err in the opposite way. If we conclude that a project has a negative NPV when the true NPV is positive, we lose a valuable opportunity.
Projected versus Actual Cash Flows Th ere is a somewhat subtle point we need to make here. When we say something like: “Th e pro- jected cash fl ow in Year 4 is $700,” what exactly do we mean? Does this mean we think the cash fl ow will actually be $700? Not really. It could happen, of course, but we would be surprised to see it turn out exactly that way. Th e reason is that the $700 projection is based only on what we know today. Almost anything could happen between now and then to change that cash fl ow.
Loosely speaking, we really mean that, if we took all the possible cash fl ows that could occur in four years and averaged them, the result would be $700. In other words, $700 is the expected cash fl ow. So, we don’t really expect a projected cash fl ow to be exactly right in any one case. What we do expect is that, if we evaluate a large number of projects, our projections are right on the average.
Forecasting Risk Th e key inputs into a DCF analysis are expected future cash fl ows. If these projections are seri- ously in error, we have a classic GIGO (garbage-in, garbage-out) system. In this case, no matter how carefully we arrange the numbers and manipulate them, the resulting answer can still be grossly misleading. Th is is the danger in using a relatively sophisticated technique like DCF. It is sometimes easy to get caught up in number crunching and forget the underlying nuts-and-bolts economic reality.
As stated above, the possibility that we can make a bad decision because of errors in the pro- jected cash fl ows is called forecasting risk (or estimation risk). Because of forecasting risk, there is the danger that we think a project has a positive NPV when it really does not. How is this pos- sible? It happens if we are overly optimistic about the future and, as a result, our projected cash fl ows don’t realistically refl ect the possible future cash fl ows.
So far, we have not explicitly considered what to do about the possibility of errors in our fore- casts, so one of our goals in this chapter is to develop some tools that are useful in identifying areas where potential errors exist and where they might be especially damaging. In one form or another, we try to assess the economic reasonableness of our estimates. We also consider how much damage can be done by errors in those estimates.
Sources of Value Th e fi rst line of defence against forecasting risk is simply to ask: What is it about this investment that leads to a positive NPV? We should be able to point to something specifi c as the source of value. For example, if the proposal under consideration involved a new product, we might ask questions such as: Are we certain that our new product is signifi cantly better than that of the competition? Can we truly manufacture at lower cost, or distribute more eff ectively, or identify undeveloped market niches, or gain control of a market?
forecasting risk The possibility that errors in projected cash flows lead to incorrect decisions.
Chapter 11: Project Analysis and Evaluation 289
11Ross_Chapter11_4th.indd 28911Ross_Chapter11_4th.indd 289 12-11-27 12:0712-11-27 12:07
Th ese are just a few of the potential sources of value. Th ere are many others. For example, in 2010, Amazon.com, which had built its online empire by selling books, DVDs, and electronics, opened its online grocery store service. Why? Th e answer is that Amazon would be able to lever- age its existing distribution network to provide groceries at lower price for the customers with zero delivery charges. A key factor to keep in mind is the degree of competition in the market. It is a basic principle of economics that positive NPV investments are rare in a highly competitive environment. Th erefore, proposals that appear to show signifi cant value in the face of stiff compe- tition are particularly troublesome, and the likely reaction of the competition to any innovations must be closely examined.
Similarly, beware of forecasts that simply extrapolate past trends without taking into account changes in technology or human behaviour. Forecasts similar to the following fall prey to the forecaster’s trap:
In 1860, several forecasters were secured from the fi nancial community by the city of New York to forecast the future level of pollution caused by the use of chewing tobacco and horses… . In 1850, the spit level in the gutter and manure level in the middle of the road had both averaged half an inch (approximately 1 cm). By 1860, each had doubled to a level of one inch. Using this historical growth rate, the forecasters projected levels of two inches by 1870, four inches by 1880 and 1,024 inches (22.5 metres) by 1960!1
To avoid the forecaster’s trap, the point to remember is that positive NPV investments are probably not all that common, and the number of positive NPV projects is almost certainly lim- ited for any given fi rm. If we can’t articulate some sound economic basis for thinking ahead of time that we have found something special, the conclusion that our project has a positive NPV should be viewed with some suspicion.
1. What is forecasting risk? Why is it a concern for the financial manager?
2. What are some potential sources of value in a new project?
11.2 Scenario and Other What-If Analyses
Our basic approach to evaluating cash fl ow and NPV estimates involves asking what-if questions. Accordingly, we discuss some organized ways of going about a what-if analysis. Our goal in doing so is to assess the degree of forecasting risk and to identify those components most critical to the success or failure of an investment.
Getting Started We are investigating a new project. Naturally, we begin by estimating NPV based on our projected cash fl ows. We call this the base case. Now, however, we recognize the possibility of error in those cash fl ow projections. Aft er completing the base case, we wish to investigate the impact of diff er- ent assumptions about the future on our estimates.
One way to organize this investigation is to put an upper and lower bound on the various com- ponents of the project. For example, suppose we forecast sales at 100 units per year. We know this estimate may be high or low, but we are relatively certain that it is not off by more than 10 units in either direction. We would thus pick a lower bound of 90 and an upper bound of 110. We go on to assign such bounds to any other cash fl ow components that we are unsure about.
When we pick these upper and lower bounds, we are not ruling out the possibility that the actual values could be outside this range. What we are saying, again loosely speaking, is that it is unlikely that the true average (as opposed to our estimated average) of the possible values is outside this range.
1 This apocryphal example comes from L. Kryzanowski, T. Minh-Chau, and R. Seguin, Business Solvency Risk Analysis (Montreal: Institute of Canadian Bankers, 1990), chap. 5, p. 10.
Concept Questions
290 Part 4: Capital Budgeting
11Ross_Chapter11_4th.indd 29011Ross_Chapter11_4th.indd 290 12-11-27 12:0712-11-27 12:07
An example is useful to illustrate the idea here. Th e project under consideration costs $200,000, has a fi ve-year life, and no salvage value. Depreciation is straight-line to keep our example sim- pler.2 Th e required return is 12 percent, and the tax rate is 34 percent. In addition, we have com- piled the following information:
Base Case Lower Bound Upper Bound
Unit sales 6000 5500 6500 Price per unit $80 $75 $85 Variable costs per unit 60 58 62 Fixed costs per year 50,000 45,000 55,000
With this information, we can calculate the base case NPV by fi rst calculating net income:
Sales $ 480,000 Variable costs 360,000 Fixed costs 50,000 Depreciation 40,000 EBIT $ 30,000 Taxes (34%) 10,200 Net income $ 19,800
Cash fl ow is thus $30,000 + 40,000 - 10,200 = $59,800 per year. At 12 percent, the fi ve-year annuity factor is 3.6048, so the base case NPV is:
Base case NPV = -$200,000 + (59,800 × 3.6048) = $15,567
Th us, the project looks good so far. What we are going to do next is recalculate NPV varying some key inputs such as unit sales,
price per unit, variable costs per unit, and fi xed costs. With the base case calculations completed, you can see why we assumed straight-line depreciation. It allows us to focus on key variables with- out the complications of calculating net income separately for each year or using the PVCCATS formula. Of course, for full accuracy you should employ the CCA rules.
Scenario Analysis Th e basic form of what-if analysis is called scenario analysis. What we do is investigate the changes in our NPV estimates that result from asking questions such as: What if unit sales realis- tically should be projected at 5500 units instead of 6000?
Once we start looking at alternative scenarios, we might fi nd that most of the plausible ones result in positive NPVs. Th is gives us some confi dence in proceeding with the project. If a sub- stantial percentage of the scenarios looks bad, the degree of forecasting risk is high and further investigation is in order.
Th ere are a number of possible scenarios we could consider. A good place to start is the worst- case scenario. Th is tells us the minimum NPV of the project. If this were positive, we would be in good shape. While we are at it, we also determine the other extreme, the best case. Th is puts an upper bound on our NPV.
To get the worst case, we assign the least favourable value to each item. Th is means low values for items such as units sold and price per unit and high values for costs. We do the reverse for the best case. For our project, these values would be:
Worst Case Best Case
Unit sales 5500 6500 Price per unit $75 $85 Variable costs per unit 62 58 Fixed costs 55,000 45,000
With this information, we can calculate the net income and cash fl ows under each scenario (check these for yourself):
2 We discuss how to change this later.
scenario analysis The determination of what happens to NPV estimates when we ask what-if questions.
Chapter 11: Project Analysis and Evaluation 291
11Ross_Chapter11_4th.indd 29111Ross_Chapter11_4th.indd 291 12-11-27 12:0712-11-27 12:07
Scenario Net Income Cash Flow Net Present Value IRR
Base case $19,800 $59,800 $ 15,567 15.1% Worst case* -15,510 24,490 -111,719 -14.4 Best case 59,730 99,730 159,504 40.9
*We assume a tax credit is created in our worst-case scenario.
What we learn is that under the worst scenario, the cash fl ow is still positive at $24,490. Th at’s good news. Th e bad news is that the return is -14.4 percent in this case, and the NPV is -$111,719. Since the project costs $200,000, we stand to lose a little more than half of the original investment under the worst possible scenario. Th e best case off ers an attractive 41 percent return.
Th e terms best case and worst case are very commonly used, and we will stick with them, but we should note they are somewhat misleading. Th e absolutely best thing that could happen would be something absurdly unlikely, such as launching a new diet soda and subsequently learning that our (patented) formulation also just happens to cure the common cold. Similarly, the true worst case would involve some incredibly remote possibility of total disaster. We’re not claiming that these things don’t happen; once in a while they do. Some products, such as personal comput- ers, succeed beyond the wildest of expectations, and some, turn out to be absolute catastrophes nonetheless. For example, in April 2010, British Petroleum’s Gulf of Mexico oil rig Deepwater Horizon caught fi re and sank following an explosion, leading to a massive oil spill. Th e leak was fi nally stopped in July aft er releasing over 200 million gallons of crude oil into the Gulf. BP’s costs associated with the disaster are expected to exceed $40 billion, perhaps by a wide margin. Instead, our point is that in assessing the reasonableness of an NPV estimate, we need to stick to cases that are reasonably likely to occur.
Instead of best and worst, then, it is probably more accurate to use the words optimistic and pessimistic. In broad terms, if we were thinking about a reasonable range for, say, unit sales, then what we call the best case would correspond to something near the upper end of that range. Th e worst case would simply correspond to the lower end.
Not all companies complete (or at least publish) all three estimates. For example, Almaden Minerals Ltd., a Vancouver-based exploration company specializing in the generation of new mineral prospects, made a press release with information concerning its Elk Gold Project in Brit- ish Columbia. Table 11.1 shows the possible outcomes given by the company.
As you can see, the NPV is projected at $28.7 million in the base case and $67.9 million in the best case. Unfortunately, Almaden did not release a worst-case analysis, but we hope the company also examined this possibility.
As we have mentioned, we could examine an unlimited number of diff erent scenarios. At a minimum, we might want to investigate two intermediate cases by going halfway between the base amounts and the extreme amounts. Th is would give us fi ve scenarios in all, including the base case.
Beyond this point, it is hard to know when to stop. As we generate more and more possibilities, we run the risk of paralysis by analysis. Th e diffi culty is that no matter how many scenarios we run on our spreadsheet, all we can learn are possibilities, some good and some bad. Beyond that, we don’t get any guidance as to what to do. Scenario analysis is thus useful in telling us what can happen and in helping us gauge the potential for disaster, but it does not tell us whether to take the project.
Unfortunately, in practice, even the worst-case scenarios may not be low enough. A recent example is the stress test designed by the European Banking Authority and applied to a wide sample of European banks (representing 60% of the total EU banking assets). Th e worst-case assumption was based on a long-term interest rate of 3.45% in the Euro area in 2011. However, in 2011 the Euro area long-term interest rate was 4.06%. Besides, the stress test also assumed a worst-case scenario unemployment rate of 10.3%in 2011, but the unemployment rate was 10.4% at the end of 2011.
292 Part 4: Capital Budgeting
11Ross_Chapter11_4th.indd 29211Ross_Chapter11_4th.indd 292 12-11-27 12:0712-11-27 12:07
TABLE 11.1
Project Assumptions and Results for Base and US$1,200 Cases Project summary Base Case $1,200 Case Unit
Assumed gold price 1000 1200 $US/tr. oz Tonnes per day treated 500 1000 tpd Life 7 9 years Total tonnes treated 1.1 2.6 MT Grade 4.14 3.89 g/t Waste: Ore ratio 16.4 30.1 Plant recovery 92 92 % Ounces Au produced 139,198 297,239 Tr.oz Initial capital expense 9.91 17.50 $CADM Working and preproduction capital 2.27 9.60 $CADM Waste mining 2.42 1.90 $CAD/tonne waste Ore mining 8.38 5.87 $CAD/tonne ore Processing 20.68 14.74 $CAD/tonne ore Administration and overheads 2.07 1.27 $CAD/tonne ore Total operating cost 70.30 78.91 $CAD/tonne ore Pre-tax NPV @ 8% 28.7 67.9 $CADM Pre-tax IRR 51% 39% Max Exposure 13.66 33.53 $CADM Payback, years from start production 1.85 3.30 years ratio, gross earnings: max exposure 5.02 6.00 ratio, NPV: max exposure 2.10 2.03
Source: www.almadenminerals.com/News%20Releases/2011/jan24-11.html
Sensit ivity Analysis Sensitivity analysis is a variation on scenario analysis that is useful in pinpointing the areas where forecasting risk is especially severe. Th e basic idea with a sensitivity analysis is to freeze all the variables except one and see how sensitive our estimate of NPV is to changes in that one variable. Th e logic is exactly the same as for ceteris paribus analysis in economics.
If our NPV estimate turns out to be very sensitive to relatively small changes in the projected value of some component of projected cash fl ow, the forecasting risk associated with that variable is high. To put it another way, NPV depends critically on the assumptions we made about this variable.
Sensitivity analysis is a very commonly used tool. For example, in 2011, Seabridge Gold announced that it had completed a preliminary economic assessment to spend $1.26 billion in start-up costs building a gold-mining operation in Courageous Lake, Northwest Territories. Th e company reported that the project would have a life of 16 years and an IRR of 9.3 percent assum- ing a gold price of USD1089 per ounce. However, Seabridge further estimated that, at a price of USD1527 per ounce, the IRR would double to 18.1 percent. Th us, Seabridge focused on the sensi- tivity of the project’s IRR to the price of gold. As of May 2012, Seabridge has been very fortunate with gold prices well above the best-case scenario. Since Seabridge conducted its analysis in 2010, gold prices have soared from $1,121 per ounce to $1,659 per ounce in May 2012.
To illustrate how sensitivity analysis works, we go back to our base case for every item except unit sales. We can then calculate cash fl ow and NPV using the largest and smallest unit sales fi g- ures. Th is is very easy to do on a spreadsheet program.
Scenario Unit Sales Cash Flow Net Present Value IRR
Base case 6000 $59,800 $15,567 15.1% Worst case 5500 53,200 -8,226 10.3
Best case 6500 66,400 39,357 19.7
sensitivity analysis Investigation of what happens to NPV when only one variable is changed.
Chapter 11: Project Analysis and Evaluation 293
11Ross_Chapter11_4th.indd 29311Ross_Chapter11_4th.indd 293 12-11-27 12:0712-11-27 12:07
By way of comparison, we now freeze everything except fi xed costs and repeat the analysis: Scenario Fixed Income Cash Flow Net Present Value IRR
Base case $50,000 $59,800 $15,567 15.1% Worst case 55,000 56,500 3,670 12.7 Best case 45,000 63,100 27,461 17.4
What we see here is that, given our ranges, the estimated NPV of this project is more sensitive to projected unit sales than it is to projected fi xed costs. In fact, under the worst case for fi xed costs, the NPV is still positive.
Th e results of our sensitivity analysis for unit sales can be illustrated graphically as in Figure 11.1. Here we place NPV on the vertical axis and unit sales on the horizontal axis. When we plot the combinations of unit sales versus NPV, we see that all possible combinations fall on a straight line. Th e steeper the resulting line is, the greater the sensitivity of the estimated NPV to the pro- jected value of the variable being investigated.
FIGURE 11.1
Sensitivity analysis for unit sales
Net present value ($000)
50
NPV = $39
NPV = $15
NPV = –$8
40
30
20
10
0 5500 6000 6500
–10
(worst case)
(base case)
(best case) Unit
sales
•
•
•
Sensitivity analysis can produce results that vary dramatically depending on the assumptions. For example, in early 2011, Bard Ventures, a Vancouver-based junior mining and exploration company with mineral interests in British Columbia and Ontario, announced its projections for a molybdenum mine in British Columbia. At a cost of capital of 10 percent and average molyb- denum price of $19 per ton, the NPV of the new mine would be $112 million with an IRR of 12.4 percent. At a high price of $30 a ton, the NPV would be $1.15 billion, and the IRR would be 32 percent.
As we have illustrated, sensitivity analysis is useful in pinpointing those variables that deserve the most attention. If we fi nd that our estimated NPV is especially sensitive to a variable that is diffi cult to forecast (such as unit sales), the degree of forecasting risk is high. We might decide that further market research would be a good idea in this case.
Because sensitivity analysis is a form of scenario analysis, it suff ers from the same drawbacks. Sensitivity analysis is useful for pointing out where forecasting errors could do the most damage, but it does not tell us what to do about possible errors. Management experience and judgement must still come into play.
294 Part 4: Capital Budgeting
11Ross_Chapter11_4th.indd 29411Ross_Chapter11_4th.indd 294 12-11-27 12:0712-11-27 12:07
Simulation Analysis Scenario analysis and sensitivity analysis are widely used in part because they are easily executed on spreadsheets. With scenario analysis, we let all the diff erent variables change, but we let them take on only a small number of values. With sensitivity analysis, we let only one variable change, but we let it take on a large number of values. If we combine the two approaches, the result is a crude form of simulation analysis.
Simulation analysis is potentially useful to measure risk in a complex system of variables. Th e technique is sometimes called Monte Carlo simulation and has been used successfully to test gam- bling strategies.
For example, researchers believed that casino gamblers could shift the odds in their favour in blackjack by varying their bets during the game. In blackjack, you play against the dealer and win if the dealer “goes bust” drawing cards that add to more than 21. Th e dealer must always take another card if his or her cards add to 16 or less. Th e probability of the dealer going bust increases as there are more face cards (worth 10) in the deck. To make the strategy work, players count all the cards as they are played and increase their bets when a high number of 10s remain in the deck.
Clearly, it would have been very expensive to test this strategy in a casino using real money. Researchers developed a computer simulation of blackjack and measured hypothetical winnings. Th ey found that the strategy worked but required a substantial stake because it oft en took consid- erable time for the winnings to occur.3
As our blackjack example illustrates, simulation analysis allows all variables to vary at the same time. If we want to do this, we have to consider a very large number of scenarios, and computer assistance is almost certainly needed. In the simplest case, we start with unit sales and assume that any value in our 5500 to 6500 range is equally likely. We start by randomly picking one value (or by instructing a computer to do so).4 We then randomly pick a price, a variable cost, and so on.
Once we have values for all the relevant components, we calculate an NPV. Since we won’t know the project’s risk until the simulation is fi nished, we avoid prejudging risk by discounting the cash fl ows at a riskless rate.5 We repeat this sequence as much as we desire, probably several thousand times. Th e result is a large number of NPV estimates that we summarize by calculating the average value and some measure of how spread out the diff erent possibilities are. For example, it would be of some interest to know what percentage of the possible scenarios result in negative estimated NPVs.
Because simulation is an extended form of scenario analysis, it has the same problems. Once we have the results, there is no simple decision rule that tells us what to do. Also, we have described a relatively simple form of simulation. To really do it right, we would have to consider the inter- relationships between the diff erent cash fl ow components. For example, oil sands production uses natural gas as input to heat bitumen in extracting oil. As a result, profi t is enhanced by higher oil prices but reduced when the gas price goes up. It follows that the historical correlation between oil and natural gas prices is a key input to simulation of an oil sands investment project. However, the recent decoupling of oil and natural gas prices would have led to incorrect forecasts based on such a model. Th is shows how diffi cult it is to specify the interrelationships among the variables. Furthermore, we assumed that the possible values were equally likely to occur. It is probably more realistic to assume that values near the base case are more likely than extreme values, but coming up with the probabilities is diffi cult, to say the least.
For these reasons, the use of simulation is somewhat limited in practice. A recent survey found that about 40 percent of large corporations use sensitivity and scenario analyses as compared to around 20 percent using simulation. However, recent advances in computer soft ware and hard- ware (and user sophistication) lead us to believe that simulation may become more common in the future, particularly for large-scale projects.
3 To learn more about simulation, blackjack, and what happened when the strategy was implemented in Las Vegas, read Beat the Dealer by Edward O. Thorp (New York: Random House, 1962). 4 Two popular software packages for simulation analysis are Crystal Ball (oracle.com/crystalball/index.html) and @Risk (palisade.com/risk/default.asp). 5 The rate on Government of Canada Treasury bills is a common example of a riskless rate.
simulation analysis A combination of scenario and sensitivity analyses.
Chapter 11: Project Analysis and Evaluation 295
11Ross_Chapter11_4th.indd 29511Ross_Chapter11_4th.indd 295 12-11-27 12:0712-11-27 12:07
11.3 Break-Even Analysis
It frequently turns out that the crucial variable for a project is sales volume. If we are thinking of a new product or entering a new market, for example, the hardest thing to forecast accurately is how much we can sell. For this reason, in order to control forecasting risk, sales volume is usually analyzed more closely than other variables.
Break-even analysis is a popular and commonly used tool for analyzing the relationships between sales volume and profi tability. Th ere are a variety of diff erent break-even measures, and we have already seen several types. All break-even measures have a similar goal. Loosely speak- ing, we are always asking: How bad do sales have to get before we actually begin to lose money? Implicitly, we are also asking: Is it likely that things will get that bad? To get started on this subject, we discuss fi xed and variable costs.
Fixed and Variable Costs In discussing break-even, the diff erence between fi xed and variable costs becomes very impor- tant. As a result, we need to be a little more explicit about the diff erence than we have been so far.
VARIABLE COSTS By definition, variable costs change as the quantity of output changes, and they are zero when production is zero. For example, direct labour costs and raw material costs are usually considered variable. This makes sense because, if we shut down operations to- morrow, there will be no future costs for labour or raw materials.
We assume that variable costs are a constant amount per unit of output. Th is simply means that total variable cost is equal to the cost per unit multiplied by the number of units. In other words, the relationship between total variable cost (VC), cost per unit of output (v), and total quantity of output (Q) can be written simply as:
Variable cost = Total quantity of output × Cost per unit of output VC = Q × v
For example, suppose that v is $2 per unit. If Q is 1000 units, what will VC be?
VC = Q × v = $1,000 × $2 = $2,000
Similarly, if Q is 5000 units, then VC is 5000 × $2 = $10,000. Figure 11.2 illustrates the relation- ship between output level and variable costs in this case. In Figure 11.2, notice that increasing output by one unit results in variable costs rising by $2, so the “rise over the run” (the slope of the line) is given by $2/1 = $2.
FIXED COSTS By definition, fixed costs do not change during a specified time period. So, unlike variable costs, they do not depend on the amount of goods or services produced during a period (at least within some range of production). For example, the lease payment on a produc- tion facility and the company president’s salary are fixed costs, at least over some period.
Naturally, fi xed costs are not fi xed forever. Th ey are fi xed only during some particular time, say a quarter or a year. Beyond that time, leases can be terminated and executives retired. More to the point, any fi xed cost can be modifi ed or eliminated given enough time; so, in the long run, all costs are variable.
Notice that during the time that a cost is fi xed, that cost is eff ectively a sunk cost because we are going to have to pay it no matter what.
TOTAL COSTS Total costs (TC) for a given level of output are the sum of variable costs (VC) and fixed costs (FC):
TC = VC + FC TC = v × Q + FC
So, for example, if we have a variable cost of $3 per unit and fi xed costs of $8,000 per year, our total cost is:
TC = $3 × Q + $8,000
variable costs Costs that change when the quantity of output changes.
fixed costs Costs that do not change when the quantity of output changes during a particular time period.
296 Part 4: Capital Budgeting
11Ross_Chapter11_4th.indd 29611Ross_Chapter11_4th.indd 296 12-11-27 12:0712-11-27 12:07
FIGURE 11.2
Output level and total costs
Variable cost ($)
10,000
2,000
1000 5000
Quantity of output (sales volume)
0
•
= 2
•
If we produce 6000 units, our total production cost would be $3 × 6000 + $8,000 = $26,000. At other production levels, we have:
Quantity Produced Total Variable Cost Fixed Costs Total Costs
0 $ 0 $8,000 $ 8,000 1000 3,000 8,000 11,000 5000 15,000 8,000 23,000
10,000 30,000 8,000 38,000
By plotting these points in Figure 11.3, we see that the relationship between quantity produced and total cost is given by a straight line. In Figure 11.3, notice that total costs are equal to fi xed costs when sales are zero. Beyond that point, every one-unit increase in production leads to a $3 increase in total costs, so the slope of the line is 3. In other words, the marginal cost or incremen- tal cost of producing one more unit is $3.
Accounting Break-Even Th e most widely used measure of break-even is accounting break-even. Th e accounting break- even point is simply the sales level that results in a zero project net income.
To determine a project’s accounting break-even, we start with some common sense. Suppose we retail one-terabyte Blu-ray discs for $5 a piece. We can buy Blu-ray discs from a wholesale sup- plier for $3 a piece. We have accounting expenses of $600 in fi xed costs and $300 in depreciation. How many Blu-ray discs do we have to sell to break even, that is, for net income to be zero?
For every Blu-ray disc we sell, we pick up $5 - 3 = $2 toward covering our other expenses. We have to cover a total of $600 + 300 = $900 in accounting expenses, so we obviously need to sell $900/$2 = 450 Blu-ray discs. We can check this by noting that, at a sales level of 450 units, our revenues are $5 × 450 = $2,250 and our variable costs are $3 × 450 = $1,350. Th e income statement is thus:
Sales $2,250 Variable costs 1,350 Fixed costs 600 Depreciation 300 EBIT $ 0 Taxes $ 0 Net income $ 0
marginal cost or incremental cost The change in costs that occurs when there is a small change in output.
accounting break-even The sales level that results in zero project net income.
Chapter 11: Project Analysis and Evaluation 297
11Ross_Chapter11_4th.indd 29711Ross_Chapter11_4th.indd 297 12-11-27 12:0712-11-27 12:07
FIGURE 11.3
Output level and variable costs
Total cost ($)
40,000
30,000
20,000
10,000 $8,000
1000 5000 10,000
Quantity of output (sales volume)
0
•
•
•
= 3
$38,000
$23,000
$11,000 Variable cost
Fixed cost
Remember, since we are discussing a proposed new project, we do not consider any interest expense in calculating net income or cash fl ow from the project. Also, notice that we include depreciation in calculating expenses here, even though depreciation is not a cash outfl ow. Th at is why we call it accounting break-even. Finally, notice that when net income is zero, so are pretax income and, of course, taxes. In accounting terms, our revenues are equal to our costs, so there is no profi t to tax.
Figure 11.4 is another way to see what is happening. Th is fi gure looks like Figure 11.3 except that we add a line for revenues. As indicated, total revenues are zero when output is zero. Beyond that, each unit sold brings in another $5, so the slope of the revenue line is 5.
FIGURE 11.4
Accounting break-even
Sales and costs ($)
4,500
2,250
900
1000 200 300 400 500 600 700 800 900
Quantity of output (sales volume)
Revenues = $5/unit
Total costs = $900 + $3/unit
Ne t in
com e >
0
Ne t in
com e <
0
298 Part 4: Capital Budgeting
11Ross_Chapter11_4th.indd 29811Ross_Chapter11_4th.indd 298 12-11-27 12:0712-11-27 12:07
From our preceding discussion, we break even when revenues are equal to total costs. Th e line for revenues and the line for total cost cross right where output is 450 units. As illustrated, at any level below 450, our accounting profi t is negative and, at any level above 450, we have a positive net income.
Accounting Break-Even: A Closer Look In our numerical example, notice that the break-even level is equal to the sum of fi xed costs and depreciation divided by price per unit less variable costs per unit. Th is is always true. To see why, we recall the following set of abbreviations for the diff erent variables:
P = Selling price per unit v = Variable cost per unit Q = Total units sold FC = Fixed costs D = Depreciation t = Tax rate VC = Variable cost in dollars
Project net income is given by:
Net income = (Sales - Variable costs - Fixed costs - Depreciation) × (1 - t) = (S - VC - FC - D) × (1 - t)
From here, it is not diffi cult to calculate the break-even point. If we set this net income equal to zero, we get:
Net income = 0 = (S - VC - FC - D) × (1 - t)
Divide both sides by (1 - t) to get:
S - VC - FC - D = 0
As we have seen, this says, when net income is zero, so is pretax income. If we recall that S = P × Q and VC = v × Q, we can rearrange this to solve for the break-even level:
S - VC = FC + D P × Q - v × Q = FC + D (P - v) × Q = FC + D [11.1] Q = (FC + D)/(P - v)
Th is is the same result we described earlier.
Uses for the Accounting Break-Even Why would anyone be interested in knowing the accounting break-even point? To illustrate how it can be useful, suppose we are a small specialty ice cream manufacturer in Vancouver with a strictly local distribution. We are thinking about expanding into new markets. Based on the esti- mated cash fl ow, we fi nd that the expansion has a positive NPV.
Going back to our discussion of forecasting risk, it is likely that what makes or breaks our expansion is sales volume. Th e reason is that, in this case at least, we probably have a fairly good idea of what we can charge for the ice cream. Further, we know relevant production and distribu- tion costs with a fair degree of accuracy because we are already in the business. What we do not know with any real precision is how much ice cream we can sell.
Given the costs and selling price, however, we can immediately calculate the break-even point. Once we have done so, we might fi nd that we need to get 30 percent of the market just to break even. If we think that this is unlikely to occur because, for example, we only have 10 percent of our current market, we know that our forecast is questionable and there is a real possibility that the true NPV is negative.
On the other hand, we might fi nd that we already have fi rm commitments from buyers for about the break-even amount, so we are almost certain that we can sell more. Because the forecasting
Chapter 11: Project Analysis and Evaluation 299
11Ross_Chapter11_4th.indd 29911Ross_Chapter11_4th.indd 299 12-11-27 12:0712-11-27 12:07
risk is much lower, we have greater confi dence in our estimates. If we need outside fi nancing for our expansion, this break-even analysis would be useful in presenting our proposal to our banker.
COMPLICATIONS IN APPLYING BREAK-EVEN ANALYSIS Our discussion ignored several complications you may encounter in applying this useful tool. To begin, it is only in the short run that revenues and variable costs fall along straight lines. For large increases in sales, price may decrease with volume discounts while variable costs increase as production runs up against capacity limits. If you have sufficient data, you can redraw cost and revenue as curves. Otherwise, remember that the analysis is most accurate in the short run.
Further, while our examples classifi ed costs as fi xed or variable, in practice some costs are semivariable (i.e., partly fi xed and partly variable). A common example is telephone expense, which breaks down into a fi xed charge plus a variable cost depending on the volume of calls. In applying break-even analysis, you have to make judgements on the breakdown.
1. How are fixed costs similar to sunk costs?
2. What is net income at the accounting break-even point? What about taxes?
3. Why might a financial manager be interested in the accounting break-even point?
11.4 Operating Cash Flow, Sales Volume, and Break-Even
Accounting break-even is one tool that is useful for project analysis. Ultimately, however, we are more interested in cash fl ow than accounting income. So, for example, if sales volume is the criti- cal variable in avoiding forecasting risk, we need to know more about the relationship between sales volume and cash fl ow than just the accounting break-even.
Our goal in this section is to illustrate the relationship between operating cash fl ow and sales volume. We also discuss some other break-even measures. To simplify matters somewhat, we ignore the eff ect of taxes.6 We start by looking at the relationship between accounting break-even and cash fl ow.
Accounting Break-Even and Cash Flow Now that we know how to fi nd the accounting break-even, it is natural to wonder what happens with cash fl ow. To illustrate, suppose that Victoria Sailboats Limited is considering whether to launch its new Mona-class sailboat. Th e selling price would be $40,000 per boat. Th e variable costs would be about half that, or $20,000 per boat, and fi xed costs will be $500,000 per year.
THE BASE CASE The total investment needed to undertake the project is $3.5 million for leasehold improvements to the company’s factory. This amount will be depreciated straight-line to zero over the five-year life of the equipment. The salvage value is zero, and there are no work- ing capital consequences. Victoria has a 20 percent required return on new projects. Based on market surveys and historical experience, Victoria projects total sales for the fi ve years at 425 boats, or about 85 boats per year. Should this project be launched? To begin (ignoring taxes), the operating cash fl ow at 85 boats per year is:
Operating cash flow = EBIT + Depreciation - Taxes = (S - VC - FC - D) + D - 0 = 85 × ($40,000 - 20,000) - $500,000 = $1,200,000 per year
At 20 percent, the fi ve-year annuity factor is 2.9906, so the NPV is:
6 This is a minor simplification because the firm pays no taxes when it just breaks even in the accounting sense. We also use straight-line depreciation, realistic in this case for leasehold improvements, for simplicity.
Concept Questions
300 Part 4: Capital Budgeting
11Ross_Chapter11_4th.indd 30011Ross_Chapter11_4th.indd 300 12-11-27 12:0712-11-27 12:07
NPV = -$3,500,000 + 1,200,000 × 2.9906 = -$3,500,000 + 3,588,720 = $88,720
In the absence of additional information, the project should be launched.
CALCULATING THE ACCOUNTING BREAK-EVEN LEVEL To begin looking a little more closely at this project, you might ask a series of questions. For example, how many new boats does Victoria need to sell for the project to break even on an accounting basis? If Victoria does break even, what would be the annual cash flow from the project? What would be the return on the investment?
Before fi xed costs and depreciation are considered, Victoria generates $40,000 - 20,000 = $20,000 per boat (this is revenue less variable cost). Depreciation is $3,500,000/5 = $700,000 per year. Fixed costs and depreciation together total $1.2 million, so Victoria needs to sell (FC + D)/ (P - v) = $1.2 million/$20,000 = 60 boats per year to break even on an accounting basis. Th is is 25 boats less than projected sales; so, assuming that Victoria is confi dent that its projection is accurate to within, say, 15 boats, it appears unlikely that the new investment will fail to at least break even on an accounting basis.
To calculate Victoria’s cash fl ow, we note that if 60 boats are sold, net income is exactly zero. Recalling from our previous chapter that operating cash fl ow for a project can be written as net income plus depreciation (the bottom-up defi nition), the operating cash fl ow is obviously equal to the depreciation, or $700,000 in this case. Th e internal rate of return would be exactly zero (why?).
Th e bad news is that a project that just breaks even on an accounting basis has a negative NPV and a zero return. For our sailboat project, the fact that we would almost surely break even on an accounting basis is partially comforting since our downside risk (our potential loss) is limited, but we still don’t know if the project is truly profi table. More work is needed.
SALES VOLUME AND OPERATING CASH FLOW At this point, we can general- ize our example and introduce some other break-even measures. As we just discussed, we know that, ignoring taxes, a project’s operating cash flow (OCF) can be written simply as EBIT plus depreciation:7
OCF = [(P - v) × Q - FC - D] + D [11.2] = (P - v) × Q - FC
For the Victoria Sailboats project, the general relationship between operating cash fl ow and sales volume is thus:
OCF = (P - v) × Q - FC = ($40,000 - 20,000) × Q - $500,000 = -$500,000 + $20,000 × Q
What this tells us is that the relationship between operating cash fl ow and sales volume is given by a straight line with a slope of $20,000 and a y-intercept of -$500,000. If we calculate some dif- ferent values, we get:
Quantity Sold Operating Cash Flow (in dollars)
0 -500,000 15 -200,000 30 100,000 50 500,000 75 1,000,000
Th ese points are plotted in Figure 11.5. In Figure 11.5, we have indicated three diff erent break- even points. We already covered the accounting break-even. We discuss the other two next.
7 With no taxes, depreciation drops out of cash flow because there is no tax shield.
Chapter 11: Project Analysis and Evaluation 301
11Ross_Chapter11_4th.indd 30111Ross_Chapter11_4th.indd 301 12-11-27 12:0712-11-27 12:07
FIGURE 11.5
Operating cash flow and sales volume
Operating cash flow ($)
1,200,000
800,000
400,000
– 400,000
0 50 100
Quantity sold
Cash break-even = 25
Accounting break-even = 60
Financial break-even = 84
$1,170,000
$700,000
– $500,000
Cash Flow and Financial Break-Even Points We know that the relationship between operating cash fl ow and sales volume (ignoring taxes) is:
OCF = (P - v) × Q - FC
If we rearrange this and solve it for Q, we get: Q = (FC + OCF)/(P - v) [11.3]
Th is tells us what sales volume (Q) is necessary to achieve any given OCF, so this result is more general than the accounting break-even. We use it to fi nd the various break-even points in Figure 11.5.
CASH BREAK-EVEN We have seen that our sailboat project that breaks even on an ac- counting basis has a net income of zero, but it still has a positive cash flow. At some sales level below the accounting break-even, the operating cash flow actually goes negative. This is a par- ticularly unpleasant occurrence. If it happens, we actually have to supply additional cash to the project just to keep it afloat.
To calculate the cash break-even (the point where operating cash fl ow is equal to zero), we put in a zero for OCF:
Q = (FC + 0)/(P - v) = $500,000/$20,000 = 25
Victoria must therefore sell 25 boats to cover the $500,000 in fi xed costs. As we show in Fig- ure 11.5, this point occurs right where the operating cash fl ow line crosses the horizontal axis.
In this example, cash break-even is lower than accounting break-even. Equation 11.3 shows why; when we calculated accounting break-even we substituted depreciation of $700,000 for OCF. Th e formula for cash break-even sets OCF equal to zero. Figure 11.5 shows that accounting break- even is 60 boats and cash break-even, 25 boats. Accounting break-even is 35 boats higher. Since Victoria generates a $20,000 contribution per boat, the diff erence exactly covers the depreciation of $700,000 = 35 × $20,000.
cash break-even The sales level where operating cash flow is equal to zero.
302 Part 4: Capital Budgeting
11Ross_Chapter11_4th.indd 30211Ross_Chapter11_4th.indd 302 12-11-27 12:0712-11-27 12:07
Th is analysis also shows that cash break-even does not always have to be lower than account- ing break-even. To see why, suppose Victoria had to make a cash outlay in Year 1 of $1 million for working capital. Accounting break-even remains at 60 boats. Th e new cash break-even is 75 boats:
Q = (FC + OCF)/(P - v) = ($500,000 + 1,000,000)/($20,000) = 75
In general, retail fi rms and other companies that experience substantial needs for working capital relative to depreciation expenses have cash break-evens greater than accounting break-evens.
Regardless of whether the cash break-even point is more or less than the accounting break- even, a project that just breaks even on a cash fl ow basis can cover its own fi xed operating costs, but that is all. It never pays back anything, so the original investment is a complete loss (the IRR is -100 percent).
FINANCIAL BREAK-EVEN The last case we consider is financial break-even, the sales level that results in a zero NPV. To the financial manager, this is the most interesting case. What we do is first determine what operating cash flow has to be for the NPV to be zero. We then use this amount to determine the sales volume.
To illustrate, recall that Victoria requires a 20 percent return on its $3,500,000 investment. How many sailboats does Victoria have to sell to break even once we account for the 20 percent per year opportunity cost?
Th e sailboat project has a fi ve-year life. Th e project has a zero NPV when the present value of the operating cash fl ow equals the $3,500,000 investment. Since the cash fl ow is the same each year, we can solve for the unknown amount by viewing it as an ordinary annuity. Th e fi ve-year annuity factor at 20 percent is 2.9906, and the OCF can be determined as follows:
$3,500,000 = OCF × 2.9906 OCF = $3,500,000/2.9906 = $1,170,334
Victoria thus needs an operating cash fl ow of $1,170,000 each year to break even. We can now plug this OCF into the equation for sales volume:
Q = ($500,000 + $1,170,334)/$20,000 = 83.5
So Victoria needs to sell about 84 boats per year. Th is is not good news. As indicated in Figure 11.5, the fi nancial break-even is substantially higher than the account-
ing break-even point. Th is is oft en the case. Moreover, what we have discovered is that the sailboat project has a substantial degree of forecasting risk. We project sales of 85 boats per year, but it takes 84 just to earn our required return.
CONCLUSION Overall, it seems unlikely that the Victoria Sailboats project would fail to break even on an accounting basis. However, there appears to be a very good chance that the true NPV is negative. This illustrates the danger in just looking at the accounting break-even.
Victoria can learn this lesson from the U.S. government. In the early 1970s, the U.S. Congress voted a guarantee for Lockheed Corporation, the airplane manufacturer, based on analysis that showed the L1011-TriStar would break even on an accounting basis. It subsequently turned out that the fi nancial break-even point was much higher.
What should Victoria Sailboats do? Is the new project all wet? Th e decision at this point is essentially a managerial issue—a judgement call. Th e crucial questions are:
1. How much confidence do we have in our projections? Do we think that forecasting risk is too high?
2. How important is the project to the future of the company? 3. How badly will the company be hurt if sales do turn out low?
What options are available to the company? We consider questions such as these in a later section. For future reference, our discussion of
diff erent break-even measures is summarized in Table 11.2.
financial break-even The sales level that results in a zero NPV.
Chapter 11: Project Analysis and Evaluation 303
11Ross_Chapter11_4th.indd 30311Ross_Chapter11_4th.indd 303 12-11-27 12:0712-11-27 12:07
1. If a project breaks even on an accounting basis, what is its operating cash flow?
2. If a project breaks even on a cash basis, what is its operating cash flow?
3. If a project breaks even on a financial basis, what do you know about its discounted payback?
11.5 Operating Leverage
We have discussed how to calculate and interpret various measures of break-even for a proposed project. What we have not explicitly discussed is what determines these points and how they might be changed. We now turn to this subject.
The Basic Idea Operating leverage is the degree to which a project or fi rm is committed to fi xed production costs. A fi rm with low operating leverage has low fi xed costs (as a proportion of total costs) com- pared to a fi rm with high operating leverage. Generally, projects with a relatively heavy invest- ment in plant and equipment have a relatively high degree of operating leverage. Such projects are said to be capital intensive. Airlines and hotels are two industries that have high operating leverage.
Any time we are thinking about a new venture, there are normally alternative ways of producing and delivering the product. For example, Victoria Sailboats can purchase the necessary equipment and build all the components for its sailboats in-house. Alternatively, some of the work could be farmed out to other fi rms. Th e fi rst option involves a greater investment in plant and equipment, greater fi xed costs and depreciation, and, as a result, a higher degree of operating leverage.
TABLE 11.2 Summary of break-even measures
The general expression. Ignoring taxes, the relation between operating cash flow (OCF) and quantity of output or sales volume (Q) is
Q = FC + OCF _________ P - v
where FC = Total fixed costs P = Price per unit v = Variable cost per unit As shown next, this relation can be used to determine the accounting, cash, and financial break-even points.
The accounting break-even point. Accounting break-even occurs when net income is zero. Operating cash flow (OCF) is equal to depreciation when net income is zero, so the accounting break-even point is:
Q = FC + D _______ P - v
A project that always just breaks even on an accounting basis has a payback exactly equal to its life, a negative NPV, and an IRR of zero.
The cash break-even point. Cash break-even occurs when operating cash flow (OCF) is zero; the cash break-even point is thus:
Q = FC _____ P - v
A project that always just breaks even on a cash basis never pays back, its NPV is negative and equal to the initial outlay, and the IRR is -100%.
The financial break-even point. Financial break-even occurs when the NPV of the project is zero. The financial break-even point is thus:
Q = FC + OCF* __________ P - v
where OCF* is the level of OCF that results in a zero NPV. A project that breaks even on a financial basis has a discounted payback equal to its life, a zero NPV, and an IRR just equal to the required return.
Concept Questions
operating leverage The degree to which a firm or project relies on fixed costs.
304 Part 4: Capital Budgeting
11Ross_Chapter11_4th.indd 30411Ross_Chapter11_4th.indd 304 12-11-27 12:0712-11-27 12:07
Implications of Operating Leverage Regardless of how it is measured, operating leverage has important implications for project evalu- ation. Fixed costs act like a lever in the sense that a small percentage change in operating revenue can be magnifi ed into a large percentage change in operating cash fl ow and NPV. Th is explains why we call it operating leverage.
Th e higher the degree of operating leverage, the greater is the potential danger from forecast- ing risk. Th e reason is that relatively small errors in forecasting sales volume can get magnifi ed or “levered up” into large errors in cash fl ow projections.
From a managerial perspective, one way of coping with highly uncertain projects is to keep the degree of operating leverage as low as possible.8 Th is generally has the eff ect of keeping the break- even point (however measured) at its minimum level. We illustrate this point aft er discussing how to measure operating leverage.
Measuring Operating Leverage One way of measuring operating leverage is to ask: If the quantity sold rises by 5 percent, what will be the percentage change in operating cash fl ow? In other words, the degree of operating leverage (DOL) is defi ned such that
Percentage change in OCF = DOL × Percentage change in Q
Based on the relationship between OCF and Q, DOL can be written as:9
DOL = 1 + FC/OCF
Also, based on our defi nition of OCF:
OCF + FC = (P - v) × Q
Th us, DOL can be written as:
DOL = (OCF + FC)/OCF = 1 + FC/OCF
Th e ratio FC/OCF simply measures fi xed costs as a percentage of total operating cash fl ow. Notice that zero fi xed costs would result in a DOL of 1, implying that changes in quantity sold would show up one for one in operating cash fl ow. In other words, no magnifi cation or leverage eff ect would exist.
To illustrate this measure of operating leverage, we go back to the Victoria Sailboats project. Fixed costs were $500 and (P - v) was $20, so OCF was:
OCF = -$500 + 20 × Q
Suppose Q is currently 50 boats. At this level of output, OCF is -$500 + 1,000 = $500. If Q rises by 1 unit to 51, then the percentage change in Q is (51 - 50)/50 = .02, or 2%. OCF
rises to $520, a change of (P - v) = $20. Th e percentage change in OCF is ($520 - 500)/500 = .04, or 4%. So a 2 percent increase in the number of boats sold leads to a 4 percent increase in operating cash fl ow. Th e degree of operating leverage must be exactly 2.00. We can check this by noting that:
DOL = 1 + FC/OCF = 1 + $500/$500 = 2
Th is verifi es our previous calculations.
8 Another response is to keep the amount of debt low. We cover financial leverage in Chapter 16. 9 To see this, note that, if Q goes up by 1 unit, OCF goes up by (P - v). The percentage change in Q is 1/Q, and the per- centage change in OCF is (P - v)/OCF. Given this, we have: Percentage of change in OCF = DOL × Percentage change in Q (P - v)/OCF = DOL × 1/Q DOL = (P - v) × Q/OCF
degree of operating leverage (DOL) The percentage change in operating cash flow relative to the percentage change in quantity sold.
Chapter 11: Project Analysis and Evaluation 305
11Ross_Chapter11_4th.indd 30511Ross_Chapter11_4th.indd 305 12-11-27 12:0712-11-27 12:07
Our formulation of DOL depends on the current output level, Q. However, it can handle changes from the current level of any size, not just one unit. For example, suppose Q rises from 50 to 75, a 50 percent increase. With DOL equal to 2, operating cash fl ow should increase by 100 percent, or exactly double. Does it? Th e answer is yes, because, at a Q of 75, OCF is:
-$500 + $20 × 75 = $1,000
Notice that operating leverage declines as output (Q) rises. For example, at an output level of 75, we have:
DOL = 1 + $500/1,000 = 1.50
Th e reason DOL declines is that fi xed costs, considered as a percentage of operating cash fl ow, get smaller and smaller, so the leverage eff ect diminishes.10
What do you think DOL works out to at the cash break-even point, an output level of 25 boats? At the cash break-even point, OCF is zero. Since you cannot divide by zero, DOL is undefi ned.
EXAMPLE 11.1: Operating Leverage
The Huskies Corporation currently sells gourmet dog food for $1.20 per can. The variable cost is 80 cents per can, and the packaging and marketing operation has fixed costs of $360,000 per year. Depreciation is $60,000 per year. What is the accounting break-even? Ignoring taxes, what will be the increase in operating cash flow if the quantity sold rises to 10 percent more than the break-even point?
The accounting break-even is $420,000/.40 = 1,050,000 cans. As we know, the operating cash flow is equal to the $60,000 depreciation at this level of produc- tion, so the degree of operating leverage is:
DOL = 1 + FC/OCF = 1 + $360,000/$60,000 = 7
Given this, a 10 percent increase in the number of cans of dog food sold increases operating cash flow by a substan- tial 70 percent.
To check this answer, we note that if sales rise by 10 percent, the quantity sold rises to 1,050,000 × 1.1 = 1,155,000. Ignoring taxes, the operating cash flow is 1,155,000 × .40 – $360,000 = $102,000. Compared to the $60,000 cash flow we had, this is exactly 70 percent more: $102,000/60,000 = 1.70.
Operating Leverage and Break-Even We illustrate why operating leverage is an important consideration by examining the Victoria Sailboats project under an alternative scenario. At a Q of 85 boats, the degree of operating lever- age for the sailboat project under the original scenario is:
DOL = 1 + FC/OCF = 1 + $500/1,200 = 1.42
Also, recall that the NPV at a sales level of 85 boats was $88,720, and that the accounting break- even was 60 boats.
An option available to Victoria is to subcontract production of the boat hull assemblies. If it does, the necessary investment falls to $3.2 million, and the fi xed operating costs fall to $180,000. However, variable costs rise to $25,000 per boat since subcontracting is more expensive than doing it in-house. Ignoring taxes, evaluate this option. For practice, see if you don’t agree with the following:
NPV at 20% (85 units) = $74,720
Accounting break-even = 55 boats
Degree of operating leverage = 1.16
10 Students who have studied economics will recognize DOL as an elasticity. Recall that elasticities vary with quantity along demand and supply curves. For the same reason, DOL varies with unit sales, Q.
306 Part 4: Capital Budgeting
11Ross_Chapter11_4th.indd 30611Ross_Chapter11_4th.indd 306 12-11-27 12:0712-11-27 12:07
What has happened? Th is option results in slightly lower estimated net present value, and the accounting break-even point falls to 55 boats from 60 boats.
Given that this alternative has the lower NPV, is there any reason to consider it further? Maybe there is. Th e degree of operating leverage is substantially lower in the second case. If we are wor- ried about the possibility of an overly optimistic projection, we might prefer to subcontract. Th ere is another reason we might consider the second arrangement. If sales turned out better than expected, we always have the option of starting to produce in-house later. As a practical matter, it is much easier to increase operating leverage (by purchasing equipment) than to decrease it (by selling equipment).11 As we discuss later, one of the drawbacks to discounted cash fl ow is that it is diffi cult to explicitly include options of this sort, even though they may be quite important.
1. What is operating leverage?
2. How is operating leverage measured?
3. What are the implications of operating leverage for the financial manager?
11.6 Managerial Options
In our capital budgeting analysis thus far, we have more or less ignored the possibility of future managerial actions. Implicitly, we assumed that once a project is launched, its basic features can- not be changed. For this reason, we say that our analysis is static (as opposed to dynamic).
In reality, depending on what actually happens in the future, there are always ways to modify a project. We call these opportunities managerial options or real options. As we will see, in many cases managerial options can improve project cash fl ows, making the best case better while placing a fl oor under the worst case. As a result, ignoring such options would lead to forecasting risk in underestimating NPV. Th ere are a great number of these options. Th e way a product is priced, manufactured, advertised, and produced can all be changed, and these are just a few of the possibilities.12
For example in February 2012, Stephen Harper, the prime minister of Canada, announced a ‘panda diplomacy’ agreement during his trip to China. Under the arrangement, two giant pandas will spend fi ve years at the Toronto zoo and then move on to Calgary for another fi ve years. Th e Toronto zoo, attracts around 1.3 million visitors each year but has suff ered from a drop in atten- dance. Since 2008, the offi cials of the Toronto zoo were contemplating launching an ambitious project to revitalize the zoo.
Th e arrival of pandas will be costly for the Toronto zoo. Th e rent on the pandas is $1 million a year plus an extra $200,000 if a cub is born. Also, enormous amounts of bamboo must be shipped from the United States at an annual cost of $200,000 Is this a good managerial option for the Toronto zoo management?
In 1985, Toronto zoo experienced its highest annual attendance ever with 1.9 million visitors when it housed pandas for only three months Th e Toronto zoo management is confi dent that the zoo would break-even on this panda exhibit. Th e panda conservation program is a part of the zoo’s 25 year master redevelopment plan. As this example suggests, the possibility of future actions is impor- tant. We discuss some of the most common types of managerial actions in the next few sections.13
CONTINGENCY PLANNING The various what-if procedures, particularly the break- even measures, in this chapter have another use. We can also view them as primitive ways of ex- ploring the dynamics of a project and investigating managerial options. What we think about are some of the possible futures that could come about and what actions we might take if they do.
11 In the extreme case, if firms were able to readjust the ratio of variable and fixed costs continually, there would be no increased risk associated with greater operating leverage. 12 We introduce managerial options here and return to the topic in more depth in Chapter 25. 13 Sources for the panda option are cbc.ca/news/canada/toronto/story/2012/02/11/toronto-china-giant-pandas-zoo.html and ctv.ca/CTVNews/Canada/20120211/Chinese-pandas-expected-to-boost-Toronto-Zoo-attendance-120211/
Concept Questions
managerial options or real options Opportunities that managers can exploit if certain things happen in the future.
Chapter 11: Project Analysis and Evaluation 307
11Ross_Chapter11_4th.indd 30711Ross_Chapter11_4th.indd 307 12-11-27 12:0712-11-27 12:07
For example, we might fi nd that a project fails to break even when sales drop below 10,000 units. Th is is a fact that is interesting to know, but the more important thing is to go on and ask: What actions are we going to take if this actually occurs? Th is is called contingency planning, and it amounts to an investigation of some of the managerial options implicit in a project.
Th ere is no limit to the number of possible futures or contingencies that we could investigate. However, there are some broad classes, and we consider these next.
THE OPTION TO EXPAND One particularly important option that we have not explic- itly addressed is the option to expand. If we truly find a positive NPV project, there is an obvious consideration. Can we expand the project or repeat it to get an even larger NPV? Our static analy- sis implicitly assumes that the scale of the project is fixed.
For example, if the sales demand for a particular product were to greatly exceed expectations, we might investigate increasing production. If this is not feasible for some reason, we could always increase cash fl ow by raising the price. Either way, the potential cash fl ow is higher than we have indicated because we have implicitly assumed that no expansion or price increase is possible. Overall, because we ignore the option to expand in our analysis, we underestimate NPV (all other things being equal).
THE OPTION TO ABANDON At the other extreme, the option to scale back or even abandon a project is also quite valuable. For example, if a project does not break even on a cash flow basis, it can’t even cover its own expenses. We would be better off if we just abandoned it. Our DCF analysis implicitly assumes that we would keep operating even in this case.
Sometimes the best thing to do is to reverse direction. For example, Merrill Lynch Canada has done this three times. First, it built up a retail brokerage operation in the 1980s and sold it to CIBC Wood Gundy in 1990. Later, in 1998, Merrill Lynch made headlines by paying $1.26 billion for Midland Walwyn, the last independently owned retail brokerage fi rm in Canada. Th e reason? Merrill Lynch wanted to continue its globalization drive and get back into the business it had earlier abandoned. However, in November 2001, Merrill Lynch Canada once again sold its retail brokerage and mutual fund and securities services businesses to CIBC Wood Gundy. Th is sale was part of an eff ort to cut back expenses on its international operations.
In reality, if sales demand were signifi cantly below expectations, we might be able to sell some capacity or put it to another use. Maybe the product or service could be redesigned or otherwise improved. Regardless of the specifi cs, we once again underestimate NPV if we assume the project must last for some fi xed number of years, no matter what happens in the future. For example, dur- ing the current economic crisis, GM and Chrysler had to shut down a number of plants in Canada and abandon some of their projects.
THE OPTION TO WAIT Implicitly, we have treated proposed investments as if they were go or no-go decisions. Actually, there is a third possibility. The project can be postponed, perhaps in hope of more favourable conditions. We call this the option to wait.
For example, suppose an investment costs $120 and has a perpetual cash fl ow of $10 per year. If the discount rate is 10 percent, the NPV is $10/.10 - 120 = -$20, so the project should not be undertaken now. However, this does not mean we should forget about the project forever, because in the next period, the appropriate discount rate could be diff erent. If it fell to, say, 5 percent, the NPV would be $10/.05 - 120 = $80, and we would take it.
More generally, as long as there is some possible future scenario under which a project has a positive NPV, the option to wait is valuable. Related to the option to wait is the option to suspend operations. For example, in 2012, Translink, the organization responsible for regional transportation around Vancouver, put its expansion plans on hold due to lack of cash. Of course, Translink could have raised money by increasing transit fares, but this action might have led to a decrease in ridership.
THE TAX OPTION Investment decisions may trigger favourable or unfavourable tax treat- ment of existing assets. This can occur because, as you recall from Chapter 2, capital cost allow- ance calculations are usually based on assets in a pooled class. Tax liabilities for recaptured CCA and tax shelters from terminal losses occur only when an asset class is liquidated either by selling all the assets or writing the undepreciated capital cost below zero. As a result, management has a potentially valuable tax option.
For example, suppose your fi rm is planning to replace all its company delivery vans at the end
contingency planning Taking into account the managerial options that are implicit in a project.
308 Part 4: Capital Budgeting
11Ross_Chapter11_4th.indd 30811Ross_Chapter11_4th.indd 308 12-11-27 12:0712-11-27 12:07
of the year. Because of unfavourable conditions in the used vehicle market, prices are depressed and you expect to realize a loss. Since you are replacing the vehicles, as opposed to closing out the class, no immediate tax shelter results from the loss. If your company is profi table and the poten- tial tax shelter sizable, you could exercise your tax option by closing out Class 12. To do this, you could lease the new vehicles or set up a separate fi rm to purchase the vehicles.
OPTIONS IN CAPITAL BUDGETING: AN EXAMPLE Suppose we are examining a new project. To keep things relatively simple, we expect to sell 100 units per year at $1 net cash flow apiece into perpetuity. We thus expect the cash flow to be $100 per year.
In one year, we will know more about the project. In particular, we will have a better idea of whether it is successful or not. If it looks like a long-run success, the expected sales could be revised upward to 150 units per year. If it does not, the expected sales could be revised downward to 50 units per year.
Success and failure are equally likely. Notice that with an even chance of selling 50 or 150 units, the expected sales are still 100 units as we originally projected.
Th e cost is $550, and the discount rate is 20 percent. Th e project can be dismantled and sold in one year for $400, if we decide to abandon it. Should we take it?
A standard DCF analysis is not diffi cult. Th e expected cash fl ow is $100 per year forever and the discount rate is 20 percent. Th e PV of the cash fl ows is $100/.20 = $500, so the NPV is $500 - 550 = -$50. We shouldn’t take it.
Th is analysis is static, however. In one year, we can sell out for $400. How can we account for this? What we have to do is to decide what we are going to do one year from now. In this simple case, there are only two contingencies that we need to evaluate, an upward revision and a down- ward revision, so the extra work is not great.
In one year, if the expected cash fl ows are revised to $50, the PV of the cash fl ows is revised downward to $50/.20 = $250. We get $400 by abandoning the project, so that is what we will do (the NPV of keeping the project in one year is $250 - 400 = -$150).
If the demand is revised upward, the PV of the future cash fl ows at Year 1 is $150/.20 = $750. Th is exceeds the $400 abandonment value, so we would keep the project.
We now have a project that costs $550 today. In one year, we expect a cash fl ow of $100 from the project. In addition, this project would either be worth $400 (if we abandon it because it is a failure) or $750 (if we keep it because it succeeds). Th ese outcomes are equally likely, so we expect it to be worth ($400 + 750)/2, or $575.
Summing up, in one year, we expect to have $100 in cash plus a project worth $575, or $675 total. At a 20 percent discount rate, this $675 is worth $562.50 today, so the NPV is $562.50 - 550 = $12.50. We should take it.
Th e NPV of our project has increased by $62.50. Where did this come from? Our original analysis implicitly assumed we would keep the project even if it was a failure. At Year 1, however, we saw that we were $150 better off ($400 versus $250) if we abandoned. Th ere was a 50 percent chance of this happening, so the expected gain from abandoning is $75. Th e PV of the amount is the value of the option to abandon, $75/1.20 = $62.50.
STRATEGIC OPTIONS Companies sometimes undertake new projects just to explore possibilities and evaluate potential future business strategies. This is a little like testing the water by sticking a toe in before diving. When Microsoft decided to buy Skype for US$8.5 billion in 2011, strategic considerations likely dominated immediate cash flow analysis.
Such projects are diffi cult to analyze using conventional DCF because most of the benefi ts come in the form of strategic options, that is, options for future, related business moves. Projects that create such options may be very valuable, but that value is diffi cult to measure. Research and development, for example, is an important and valuable activity for many fi rms precisely because it creates options for new products and procedures.
To give another example, a large manufacturer might decide to open a retail outlet as a pilot study. Th e primary goal is to gain some market insight. Because of the high start-up costs, this one operation won’t break even. However, based on the sales experience from the pilot, we can then evaluate whether or not to open more outlets, to change the product mix, to enter new markets, and so on. Th e information gained and the resulting options for actions are all valuable, but com- ing up with a reliable dollar fi gure is probably not feasible.
strategic options Options for future, related business products or strategies.
Chapter 11: Project Analysis and Evaluation 309
11Ross_Chapter11_4th.indd 30911Ross_Chapter11_4th.indd 309 12-11-27 12:0712-11-27 12:07
Strategic options can also include political issues. For example, in 2010, the government of Canada blocked BHP Billiton’s proposed acquisition of Potash Corp. of Saskatchewan for $40 bil- lion because the deal was not proven to be benefi cial for Canada.
CONCLUSION We have seen that incorporating options into capital budgeting analysis is not easy. What can we do about them in practice? The answer is that we can only keep them in the back of our minds as we work with the projected cash flows. We tend to underestimate NPV by ignoring options. The damage might be small for a highly structured, very specific proposal, but it might be great for an exploratory one such as a gold mine. The value of a gold mine de- pends on management’s ability to shut it down if the price of gold falls below a certain point, and the ability to reopen it subsequently if conditions are right.14 The most commonly used real op- tions in Canada are the option to expand and the option to wait. Managers also report that a lack of expertise prevents them from realizing the full potential of real options.15
11.7 Capital Rationing
Our fi nal topic in this chapter is capital rationing. While not strictly related to forecasting risk, the theme of this chapter, capital rationing also represents a complication in capital budgeting, so we discuss it here. Capital rationing is said to exist when we have profi table (positive NPV) investments available but we can’t get the needed funds to undertake them. For example, as divi- sion managers for a large corporation, we might identify $5 million in excellent projects, but fi nd that, for whatever reason, we can spend only $2 million. Now what? Unfortunately, for reasons we discuss next there may be no truly satisfactory answer.
SOFT RATIONING The situation we have just described is soft rationing. This occurs when, for example, different units in a business are allocated some fixed amount of money each year for capital spending. Such an allocation is primarily a means of controlling and keeping track of overall spending. The important thing about soft rationing is that the corporation as a whole isn’t short of capital; more can be raised on ordinary terms if management so desires.
If we face soft rationing, the fi rst thing to do is try to get a larger allocation. Failing that, then one common suggestion is to generate as large a net present value as possible within the existing budget. Th is amounts to choosing those projects with the largest benefi t/cost ratio (profi tability index).
Strictly speaking, this is the correct thing to do only if the soft rationing is a one-time event; that is, it won’t exist next year. If the soft rationing is a chronic problem, something is amiss. Th e reason goes all the way back to Chapter 1. Ongoing soft rationing means we are constantly by- passing positive NPV investments. Th is contradicts our goal of the fi rm. When we are not trying to maximize value, the question of which projects to take becomes ambiguous because we no longer have an objective goal in the fi rst place.
HARD RATIONING With hard rationing, a business cannot raise capital for a project under any circumstances. For large, healthy corporations, this situation probably does not occur very often. This is fortunate because with hard rationing our DCF analysis breaks down, and the best course of action is ambiguous.
Th e reason that DCF analysis breaks down has to do with the required return. Suppose we say our required return is 20 percent. Implicitly, we are saying we will take a project with a return that exceeds this. However, if we face hard rationing, we are not going to take a new project no matter what the return on that project is, so the whole concept of a required return is ambiguous. About the only interpretation we can give this situation is that the required return is so large that no project has a positive NPV in the fi rst place.
Hard rationing can occur when a company experiences fi nancial distress, meaning that bank- ruptcy is a possibility. Also, a fi rm may not be able to raise capital without violating a pre-existing contractual agreement. We discuss these situations in greater detail in a later chapter.
14 M. J. Brennan and E. S. Schwartz, “A New Approach to Evaluating Natural Resource Investments,” Midland Corpo- rate Financial Journal 3 (Spring 1985). 15 Baker, H.K., Dutta, S., and Saadi, S. (2011), “Management Views on Real Options in Capital Budgeting?” Journal of Applied Finance, 21(1), pp. 18–29.
capital rationing The situation that exists if a firm has positive NPV projects but cannot find the necessary financing.
soft rationing The situation that occurs when units in a business are allocated a certain amount of financing for capital budgeting.
hard rationing The situation that occurs when a business cannot raise financing for a project under any circumstances.
310 Part 4: Capital Budgeting
11Ross_Chapter11_4th.indd 31011Ross_Chapter11_4th.indd 310 12-11-27 12:0712-11-27 12:07
1. Why do we say that our standard discounted cash flow analysis is static?
2. What are managerial options in capital budgeting? Give some examples.
3. What is capital rationing? What types are there? What problem does it create for discounted cash flow analysis?
11.8 SUMMARY AND CONCLUSIONS
In this chapter, we looked at some ways of evaluating the results of a discounted cash fl ow analysis. We also touched on some problems that can come up in practice. We saw that: 1. Net present value estimates depend on projected future cash flows. If there are errors in
those projections, our estimated NPVs can be misleading. We called this forecasting risk.
2. Scenario and sensitivity analyses are useful tools for identifying which variables are critical to a project and where forecasting problems can do the most damage.
3. Break-even analysis in its various forms is a particularly common type of scenario analysis that is useful for identifying critical levels of sales.
4. Operating leverage is a key determinant of break-even levels. It reflects the degree to which a project or a firm is committed to fixed costs. The degree of operating leverage tells us the sensitivity of operating cash flow to changes in sales volume.
5. Projects usually have future managerial options associated with them. These options may be very important, but standard discounted cash flow analysis tends to ignore them.
6. Capital rationing occurs when apparently profitable projects cannot be funded. Standard discounted cash flow analysis is troublesome in this case because NPV is not necessarily the appropriate criterion anymore.
Th e most important thing to carry away from reading this chapter is that estimated NPVs or returns should not be taken at face value. Th ey depend critically on projected cash fl ows. If there is room for signifi cant disagreement about those projected cash fl ows, the results from the analysis have to be taken with a grain of salt.
Despite the problems we have discussed, discounted cash fl ow is still the way of attacking prob- lems, because it forces us to ask the right questions. What we learn in this chapter is that knowing the questions to ask does not guarantee that we get all the answers.
Key Terms accounting break-even (page 297) capital rationing (page 310) cash break-even (page 302) contingency planning (page 308) degree of operating leverage (page 305) financial break-even (page 303) fixed costs (page 296) forecasting risk (page 289) hard rationing (page 310)
managerial options or real options (page 307) marginal cost or incremental cost (page 297) operating leverage (page 304) scenario analysis (page 291) sensitivity analysis (page 293) simulation analysis (page 295) soft rationing (page 310) strategic options (page 309) variable costs (page 296)
Concept Questions
Chapter 11: Project Analysis and Evaluation 311
11Ross_Chapter11_4th.indd 31111Ross_Chapter11_4th.indd 311 12-11-27 12:0712-11-27 12:07
Chapter Review Problems and Self-Test Use the following base-case information to work the self-test problems. A project under consideration costs $750,000, has a five-year life, and has no salvage value. Depreciation is straight-line to zero. The required return is 17 percent, and the tax rate is 34 percent. Sales are projected at 500 units per year. Price per unit is $2,500, variable cost per unit is $1,500, and fixed costs are $200,000 per year. 11.1 Scenario Analysis Suppose you think that the unit sales,
price, variable cost, and fixed cost projections given here are
accurate to within 5 percent. What are the upper and lower bounds for these projections? What is the base-case NPV? What are the best- and worst-case scenario NPVs?
11.2 Break-Even Analysis Given the base-case projections in the previous problem, what are the cash, accounting, and finan- cial break-even sales levels for this project? Ignore taxes in answering.
Answers to Self-Test Problems 11.1 We can summarize the relevant information as follows:
Base Case Lower Bound Upper Bound
Unit sales 500 475 525 Price per unit $ 2,500 $ 2,375 $ 2,625 Variable cost per unit $ 1,500 $ 1,425 $ 1,575 Fixed cost per year $200,000 $190,000 $210,000
Depreciation is $150,000 per year; knowing this, we can calculate the cash flows under each scenario. Remember that we assign high costs and low prices and volume for the worst-case and just the opposite for the best-case scenario.
Scenario Unit Sales Unit Price Unit Variable
Cost Fixed Costs Cash Flow
Base case 500 $2,500 $1,500 $200,000 $249,000 Best case 525 2,625 1,425 190,000 341,400 Worst case 475 2,375 1,575 210,000 163,200
At 17 percent, the five-year annuity factor is 3.19935, so the NPVs are: Base-case NPV = -$750,000 + 3.19935 × $249,000
= $46,638 Best-case NPV = -$750,000 + 3.19935 × $341,400
= $342,258 Worst-case NPV = -$750,000 + 3.19935 × $163,200
= -$227,866 11.2 In this case, we have $200,000 in cash fixed costs to cover. Each unit contributes $2,500 - 1,500 = $1,000 towards covering fixed costs.
The cash break-even is thus $200,000/$1,000 = 200 units. We have another $150,000 in depreciation, so the accounting break-even is ($200,000 + 150,000)/$1,000 = 350 units.
To get the financial break-even, we need to find the OCF such that the project has a zero NPV. As we have seen, the five-year annuity factor is 3.19935 and the project costs $750,000, so the OCF must be such that:
$750,000 = OCF × 3.19935 So, for the project to break even on a financial basis, the project’s cash flow must be $750,000/3.19935, or $234,423 per year. If we add
this to the $200,000 in cash fixed costs, we get a total of $434,423 that we have to cover. At $1,000 per unit, we need to sell $434,423/$1,000 = 435 units.
Concepts Review and Critical Thinking Questions 1. (LO1) What is forecasting risk? In general, would the degree
of forecasting risk be greater for a new product or a cost-cut- ting proposal? Why?
2. (LO2) What is the essential difference between sensitivity analysis and scenario analysis?
3. (LO3) If you were to include the effect of taxes in break-even analysis, what do you think would happen to the cash, ac- counting, and financial break-even points?
4. (LO3) A co-worker claims that looking at all this marginal this and incremental that is just a bunch of nonsense, and states, “Listen, if our average revenue doesn’t exceed our aver- age cost, then we will have a negative cash flow, and we will go broke!” How do you respond?
5. (LO5) What is the option to abandon? Explain why we un- derestimate NPV if we ignore this option.
6. (LO5) In our previous chapter, we discussed Air Canada’s launch of Tango. Suppose Tango ticket sales had gone ex- tremely well and Air Canada was forced to expand capacity to meet demand. Air Canada’s action in this case would be an example of exploiting what kind of option?
7. (LO4) At one time at least, many Japanese companies had a “no layoff” policy (for that matter, so did IBM). What are the implications of such a policy for the degree of operating lever- age a company faces?
8. (LO4) Airlines offer an example of an industry in which the degree of operating leverage is fairly high. Why?
312 Part 4: Capital Budgeting
11Ross_Chapter11_4th.indd 31211Ross_Chapter11_4th.indd 312 12-11-27 12:0712-11-27 12:07
9. (LO5) Natural resource extraction facilities (e.g., oil wells or gold mines) provide a good example of the value of the option to suspend operations. Why?
10. (LO1, 2) In looking at Euro Disney, and its “Mickey Mouse” financial performance early on, note that the subsequent ac-
tions taken amount to a product reformulation. Is this a mar- keting issue, a finance issue, or both? What does Euro Disney’s experience suggest about the importance of coordination be- tween marketing and finance?
Questions and Problems 1. Calculating Costs and Break-Even (LO3) Thunder Bay Inc. (TBI) manufactures biotech sunglasses. The variable materials cost
is $10.48 per unit, and the variable labour cost is $6.89 per unit. a. What is the variable cost per unit? b. Suppose TBI incurs fixed costs of $870,000 during a year in which total production is 280,000 units. What are the total
costs for the year? c. If the selling price is $49.99 per unit, does TBI break even on a cash basis? If depreciation is $490,000 per year, what is the
accounting break-even point? 2. Computing Average Cost (LO3) Vickers Everwear Corporation can manufacture mountain climbing shoes for $31.85 per pair
in variable raw material costs and $22.80 per pair in variable labour expense. The shoes sell for $145 per pair. Last year, production was 120,000 pairs. Fixed costs were $1,750,000. What were total production costs? What is the marginal cost per pair? What is the average cost? If the company is considering a one-time order for an extra 5000 pairs, what is the minimum acceptable total revenue from the order? Explain.
3. Scenario Analysis (LO2) Whitewater Transmissions Inc. has the following estimates for its new gear assembly project: price = $1,400 per unit; variable costs = $220 per unit; fixed costs = $3.9 million; quantity = 85,000 units. Suppose the company believes all of its estimates are accurate only to within ±15 percent. What values should the company use for the four variables given here when it performs its best-case scenario analysis? What about the worst-case scenario?
4. Sensitivity Analysis (LO1) For the company in the previous problem, suppose management is most concerned about the impact of its price estimate on the project’s profitability. How could you address this concern? Describe how you would calculate your answer. What values would you use for the other forecast variables?
5. Sensitivity Analysis and Break-Even (LO1, 3) We are evaluating a project that costs $924,000, has an eight-year life, and has no salvage value. Assume that depreciation is straight-line to zero over the life of the project. Sales are projected at 75,000 units per year. Price per unit is $46, variable cost per unit is $31, and fixed costs are $825,000 per year. The tax rate is 35 percent, and we require a 15 percent return on this project.
a. Calculate the accounting break-even point. What is the degree of operating leverage at the accounting break-even point? b. Calculate the base-case cash flow and NPV. What is the sensitivity of NPV to changes in the sales figure? Explain what
your answer tells you about a 500-unit decrease in projected sales. c. What is the sensitivity of OCF to changes in the variable cost figure? Explain what your answer tells you about a $1 de-
crease in estimated variable costs. 6. Scenario Analysis (LO2) In the previous problem, suppose the projections given for price, quantity, variable costs, and fixed
costs are all accurate to within ±10 percent. Calculate the best-case and worst-case NPV figures. 7. Calculating Break-Even (LO3) In each of the following cases, calculate the accounting break-even and the cash break-even
points. Ignore any tax effects in calculating the cash break-even. Unit Price Unit Variable Cost Fixed Costs Depreciation
$3,020 $2,275 $9,000,000 $3,100,000 46 41 73,000 150,000 11 4 1,700 930
8. Calculating Break-Even (LO3) In each of the following cases, find the unknown variable: Accounting Break-Even Unit Price Unit Variable Cost Fixed Costs Depreciation
112,800 $39 $30 $ 820,000 ? 165,000 ? 27 3,200,000 $1,150,000
4,385 92 ? 160,000 105,000
9. Calculating Break-Even (LO3) A project has the following estimated data: price = $62 per unit; variable costs = $41 per unit; fixed costs = $15,500; required return = 12 percent; initial investment = $24,000; life = four years. Ignoring the effect of taxes, what is the accounting break-even quantity? The cash break-even quantity? The financial break-even quantity? What is the degree of operating leverage at the financial break-even level of output?
10. Using Break-Even Analysis (LO3) Consider a project with the following data: accounting break-even quantity = 13,400 units; cash break-even quantity = 10,600 units; life = five years; fixed costs = $150,000; variable costs = $24 per unit; required return = 12 percent. Ignoring the effect of taxes, find the financial break-even quantity.
Basic (Questions
1–15)
5
Chapter 11: Project Analysis and Evaluation 313
11Ross_Chapter11_4th.indd 31311Ross_Chapter11_4th.indd 313 12-11-27 12:0712-11-27 12:07
11. Calculating Operating Leverage (LO4) At an output level of 73,000 units, you calculate that the degree of operating leverage is 2.90. If output rises to 78,000 units, what will the percentage change in operating cash flow be? Will the new level of operating leverage be higher or lower? Explain.
12. Leverage (LO4) In the previous problem, suppose fixed costs are $150,000. What is the operating cash flow at 67,000 units? The degree of operating leverage?
13. Operating Cash Flow and Leverage (LO4) A proposed project has fixed costs of $84,000 per year. The operating cash flow at 7,500 units is $93,200. Ignoring the effect of taxes, what is the degree of operating leverage? If units sold rise from 7,500 to 8,000, what will be the increase in operating cash flow? What is the new degree of operating leverage?
14. Cash Flow and Leverage (LO4) At an output level of 15,000 units, you have calculated that the degree of operating leverage is 2.61. The operating cash flow is $57,000 in this case. Ignoring the effect of taxes, what are fixed costs? What will the operating cash flow be if output rises to 16,000 units? If output falls to 14,000 units?
15. Leverage (LO4) In the previous problem, what will be the new degree of operating leverage in each case? 16. Break-Even Intuition (LO3) Consider a project with a required return of R% that costs $I and will last for N years. The project
uses straight-line depreciation to zero over the N-year life; there is no salvage value or net working capital requirements. a. At the accounting break-even level of output, what is the IRR of this project? The payback period? The NPV? b. At the cash break-even level of output, what is the IRR of this project? The payback period? The NPV? c. At the financial break-even level of output, what is the IRR of this project? The payback period? The NPV?
17. Sensitivity Analysis (LO1) Consider a four-year project with the following information: initial fixed asset investment = $420,000; straight-line depreciation to zero over the four-year life; zero salvage value; price = $25; variable costs = $16; fixed costs = $180,000; quantity sold = 75,000 units; tax rate = 34 percent. How sensitive is OCF to changes in quantity sold?
18. Operating Leverage (LO4) In the previous problem, what is the degree of operating leverage at the given level of output? What is the degree of operating leverage at the accounting break-even level of output?
19. Project Analysis (LO1, 2, 3, 4) You are considering a new product launch. The project will cost $1,400,000, have a four-year life, and have no salvage value; depreciation is straight-line to zero. Sales are projected at 180 units per year; price per unit will be $16,000, variable cost per unit will be $9,800, and fixed costs will be $430,000 per year. The required return on the project is 12 percent, and the relevant tax rate is 35 percent.
a. Based on your experience, you think the unit sales, variable cost, and fixed cost projections given here are probably accu- rate to within ±10 percent. What are the upper and lower bounds for these projections? What is the base-case NPV? What are the best-case and worst-case scenarios?
b. Evaluate the sensitivity of your base-case NPV to changes in fixed costs. c. What is the cash break-even level of output for this project (ignoring taxes)? d. What is the accounting break-even level of output for this project? What is the degree of operating leverage at the account-
ing break-even point? How do you interpret this number? 20. Abandonment Value (LO5) We are examining a new project. We expect to sell 8,750 units per year at $189 net cash flow apiece
(including CCA) for the next 16 years. In other words, the annual operating cash flow is projected to be $189 × 8,750 = $1,653,750. The relevant discount rate is 14 percent, and the initial investment required is $5,500,000.
a. What is the base-case NPV? b. After the first year, the project can be dismantled and sold for $2,800,000. If expected sales are revised based on the first
year’s performance, when would it make sense to abandon the investment? In other words, at what level of expected sales would it make sense to abandon the project?
c. Explain how the $2,800,000 abandonment value can be viewed as the opportunity cost of keeping the project one year. 21. Abandonment (LO5) In the previous problem, suppose you think it is likely that expected sales will be revised upwards to 9500
units if the first year is a success and revised downwards to 4300 units if the first year is not a success. a. If success and failure are equally likely, what is the NPV of the project? Consider the possibility of abandonment in answering. b. What is the value of the option to abandon?
22. Abandonment and Expansion (LO5) In the previous problem, supposed the scale of the project can be doubled in one year in the sense that twice as many units can be produced and sold. Naturally, expansion would only be desirable if the project is a success. This implies that if the project is a success, projected sales after expansion will be 17,600. Again, assuming that success and failure are equally likely, what is the NPV of the project? Note that abandonment is still an option if the project is a failure. What is the value of the option to expand?
23. Project Analysis (LO1, 2) Baird Golf has decided to sell a new line of golf clubs. The clubs will sell for $825 per set and have a variable cost of $395 per set. The company has spent $150,000 for a marketing study that determined the company will sell 55,000 sets per year for seven years. The marketing study also determined that the company will lose sales of 10,000 sets of its high-priced clubs. The high-priced clubs sell at $1,100 and have variable costs of $650. The company will also increase sales of its cheap clubs by 12,000 sets. The cheap clubs sell for $410 and have variable costs of $185 per set. The fixed costs each year will be $9,200,000. The company has also spent $1,000,000 on research and development for the new clubs. The plant and equipment required will cost $29,400,000 and will be depreciated on a straight-line basis. The new clubs will also require an increase in net
Intermediate (Questions
16–27)
314 Part 4: Capital Budgeting
11Ross_Chapter11_4th.indd 31411Ross_Chapter11_4th.indd 314 12-11-27 12:0712-11-27 12:07
working capital of $1,400,000 that will be returned at the end of the project. The tax rate is 40 percent, and the cost of capital is 10 percent. Calculate the payback period, the NPV, and the IRR.
24. Scenario Analysis (LO2) In the previous problem, you feel that the values are accurate to within only ±10 percent. What are the best-case and worst-case NPVs? (Hint: The price and variable costs for the two existing sets of clubs are known with certainty; only the sales gained or lost are uncertain.)
25. Sensitivity Analysis (LO1) Baird Golf would like to know the sensitivity of NPV to changes in the price of the new clubs and the quantity of new clubs sold. What is the sensitivity of the NPV to each of these variables?
26. Break-Even Analysis (LO3) Hybrid cars are touted as a “green” alternative; however, the financial aspects of hybrid ownership are not as clear. Consider a 2010 Lexus RX 450h,which had a list price of $5,565 (-including tax consequences) more than a Lexus RX 350. Additionally, the annual ownership costs (other than fuel) for the hybrid were expected to be $300 more than the traditional sedan. The mileage estimate was 5 litre/100 km for the hybrid and 6.7 for the traditional sedan.
a. Assume that gasoline costs $1.35 per litre and you plan to keep either car for six years. How many kilometres per year would you need to drive to make the decision to buy the hybrid worthwhile, ignoring the time value of money?
b. If you drive 15,000 km per year and keep either car for six years, what price per litre would make the decision to buy the hybrid worthwhile, ignoring the time value of money?
c. Rework parts (a) and (b) assuming the appropriate interest rate is 10 percent and all cash flows occur at the end of the year. d. What assumption did the analysis in the previous parts make about the resale value of each car?
27. Break-Even Analysis (LO3) In an effort to capture the large jet market, Airbus invested $13 billion developing its A380, which is capable of carrying 800 passengers. The plane has a list price of $280 million. In discussing the plane, Airbus stated that the company would break even when 249 A380s were sold. a. Assuming the break-even sales figure given is the cash flow break-even, what is the cash flow per plane? b. Airbus promised its shareholders a 20 percent rate of return on the investment. If sales of the plane continue in perpetuity,
how many planes must the company sell per year to deliver on this promise? c. Suppose instead that the sales of the A380 last for only 10 years. How many planes must Airbus sell per year to deliver the
same rate of return? 28. Break-Even and Taxes (LO3) This problem concerns the effect of taxes on the various break-even measures.
a. Show that, when we consider taxes, the general relationship between operating cash flow, OCF, and sales volume, Q, can be written as:
Q = FC + OCF - T × D ____________ 1 - T _________________ P - v
b. Use the expression in part (a) to find the cash, accounting, and financial break-even points for the Victoria sailboats ex- ample in the chapter. Assume a 38 percent tax rate.
c. In part (b), the accounting break-even should be the same as before. Why? Verify this algebraically. 29. Operating Leverage and Taxes (LO4) Show that if we consider the effect of taxes, the degree of operating leverage can be
written as:
DOL = 1 + [FC × (1 - T) - T × D]/OCF Notice that this reduces to our previous result if T = 0. Can you interpret this in words? 30. Scenario Analysis (LO2) Consider a project to supply Thunder Bay with 25,000 tons of machine screws annually for
automobile production. You will need an initial $3,600,000 investment in threading equipment to get the project started; the project will last for five years. The accounting department estimates that annual fixed costs will be $850,000 and that variable costs should be $185 per ton; the CCA rate for threading equipment is 20 percent. It also estimates a salvage value of $500,000 after dismantling costs. The marketing department estimates that the automakers will let the contract at a selling price of $280 per ton. The engineering department estimates you will need an initial net working capital investment of $360,000. You require a 13 percent return and face a marginal tax rate of 40 percent on this project.
a. What is the estimated OCF for this project? The NPV? Should you pursue this project? b. Suppose you believe that the accounting department’s initial cost and salvage value projections are accurate only to within
±15 percent; the marketing department’s price estimate is accurate only within ±10 percent; and the engineering depart- ment’s net working capital estimate is accurate only to within ±5 percent. What is your worst-case scenario for this pro- ject? Your best-case scenario? Do you still want to pursue the project?
31. Sensitivity Analysis (LO1) In Problem 30, suppose you’re confident about your own projections, but you’re a little unsure about Thunder Bay’s actual machine screw requirement. What is the sensitivity of the project OCF to changes in the quantity supplied? What about the sensitivity of NPV to changes in quantity supplied? Given the sensitivity number you calculated, is there some minimum level of output below which you wouldn’t want to operate? Why?
32. Break-Even Analysis (LO3) Use the results of Problem 28 to find the accounting, cash, and financial break-even quantities for the company in Problem 30.
33. Operating Leverage (LO4) Use the results of Problem 29 to find the degree of operating leverage for the company in Problem 30 at the base-case output level of 25,000 units. How does this number compare to the sensitivity figure you found in Problem 31? Verify that either approach will give you the same OCF figure at any new quantity level.
Challenge (Questions
28–33)
3
Chapter 11: Project Analysis and Evaluation 315
11Ross_Chapter11_4th.indd 31511Ross_Chapter11_4th.indd 315 12-11-27 12:0712-11-27 12:07
As a financial analyst at Glencolin International (GI) you have been asked to revisit your analysis of the two capital invest- ment alternatives submitted by the production department of the firm. (Detailed discussion of these alternatives is in the Mini Case at the end of Chapter 10.) The CFO is concerned that the analysis to date has not really addressed the risk in this project. Your task is to employ scenario and sensitivity analysis to explore how your original recommendation might change when subjected to a number of “what-ifs.” In your discussions with the CFO, the CIO and the head of the production department, you have pinpointed two key in- puts to the capital budgeting decision: initial software devel- opment costs and expected savings in production costs (before tax). By properly designing the contract for software development, you are confident that initial software costs for
each alternative can be kept in a range of plus or minus 15 percent of the original estimates. Savings in production costs are less certain because the software will involve new technol- ogy that has not been implemented before. An appropriate range for these costs is plus or minus 40 percent of the origi- nal estimates. As the capital budgeting analyst, you are required to an- swer the following in your memo to the CFO: a) Conduct sensitivity analysis to determine which of the
two inputs has a greater input on the choice between the two projects.
b) Conduct scenario analysis to assess the risks of each alter- native in turn. What are your conclusions?
c) Explain what your sensitivity and scenario analyses tell you about your original recommendations.
MINI CASE
* We recommend using a spreadsheet in analyzing this Mini Case.
Internet Application Questions 1. The following website allows you to download a cash flow sensitivity analysis spreadsheet: bizfilings.com/toolkit/tools-forms/
finance/business-finances/cash-flow-budget-worksheet.aspx. You are faced with two technologies, one with a higher cash flow but greater risk, and the second with a lower cash flow and less risk. How would you use the cash flow sensitivity spreadsheet to pick the right technology? What factors would you consider in the analysis?
2. Suncor Energy Inc. is an integrated oil company based in Calgary. The company’s website, suncor.com, describes its businesses many of which involve real options. Go to the website and make a list of the real options of Suncor. Identify those which you think are most valuable today and explain why.
316 Part 4: Capital Budgeting
11Ross_Chapter11_4th.indd 31611Ross_Chapter11_4th.indd 316 12-11-27 12:0712-11-27 12:07
Thus far, we haven’t had much to say about what determines the required return on an invest- ment. In one sense, the answer is very simple: Th e required return depends on the risk of the investment. Th e greater the risk is, the greater is the required return.
Having said this, we are left with a somewhat more diffi cult problem. How can we measure the amount of risk present in an investment? Put another way, what does it mean to say that one investment is riskier than another? Obviously, we need to defi ne what we mean by risk if we are going to answer these questions. Th is is our task in the next two chapters.
From the last several chapters, we know that one of the responsibilities of the fi nancial man- ager is to assess the value of proposed real asset investments. In doing this, it is important to know what fi nancial investments have to off er. Going further, we saw in Chapter 2 that the cash fl ow of a fi rm equals the cash fl ow to creditors and shareholders. So the returns and risks of fi nancial investments provide information on the real investments fi rms undertake.
Our goal in this chapter is to provide a perspective on what capital market history can tell us about risk and return. Th e most important thing to get out of this chapter is a feel for the numbers. What is a high return? What is a low one? More generally, what returns should we expect from fi nancial assets and what are the risks from such investments? Th is perspective is essential for understanding how to analyze and value risky investment projects.
We start our discussion on risk and return by describing the historical experience of investors in Canadian fi nancial markets. In 1931, for example, the stock market lost about 33 percent of its value. Just two years later, the stock market gained 51 percent. In more recent memory, the U.S. market lost about 21 percent of its value in 2008, while the Canadian market lost about 33 percent
LESSONS FROM CAPITAL MARKET HISTORY
C H A P T E R 1 2
W ith the worldwide financial crisis and eco-nomic slowdown, the annual return for the S&P/TSX Composite in 2008 was -33.00 percent,
the index’s worst return in decades. In the recovery
period, the S&P/TSX posted impressive returns of
34.35 percent in 2009 and 17.25 percent in 2011,
U.S. stocks measured by the S&P 500 showed more
modest returns of 9.26 percent and 8.10 percent for
these respective years measured in Canadian dollars.
The superior performance of the Canadian index can
be attributed to the stability of the financial services
sector and the growth of the natural resources indus-
try in Canada. In 2011 and early 2012, the S&P/TSX
showed negative returns due to the slowdown in
China and the European debt crisis. Five countries—
Greece, Portugal, Italy, Spain, and Ireland, were par-
ticularly weak. In March 2012, the EU leaders signed
off a bailout package for Greece worth €130 billion.
Learning Object ives
After studying this chapter, you should understand:
LO1 How to calculate the return on an investment.
LO2 The historical returns on various important types of investments.
LO3 The historical risks on various important types of investments.
LO4 The implications of market efficiency.
P A R T 5
© R
ol f H
ic ke
r Ph
ot og
ra p
hy /A
la m
y/ A
ll C
an ad
a Ph
ot os
12Ross_Chapter12_3rd_A.indd 31712Ross_Chapter12_3rd_A.indd 317 12-11-12 13:3212-11-12 13:32
and gained around 34 percent in 2009. What lessons, if any, can fi nancial managers learn from such shift s in the stock market? We explore the last half-century of market history to fi nd out.
Not everyone agrees on the value of studying history. On the one hand, there is philosopher George Santayana’s famous comment, “Th ose who cannot remember the past are condemned to repeat it.” On the other hand, there is industrialist Henry Ford’s equally famous comment, “His- tory is more or less bunk.” Nonetheless, based on recent events, perhaps everyone would agree with Mark Twain when he observed, “October. Th is is one of the peculiarly dangerous months to speculate in stocks in. Th e others are July, January, September, April, November, May, March, June, December, August, and February.”
Two central lessons emerge from our study of market history: First, there is a reward for bear- ing risk. Second, the greater the risk, the greater the potential reward. To understand these facts about market returns, we devote much of this chapter to reporting the statistics and numbers that make up modern capital market history in Canada. Canadians also invest in the United States so we include some discussion of U.S. markets. In the next chapter, these facts provide the founda- tion for our study of how fi nancial markets put a price on risk.
12.1 Returns
We wish to discuss historical returns on diff erent types of fi nancial assets. We do this aft er briefl y discussing how to calculate the return from investing.
Dollar Returns If you buy an asset of any sort, your gain (or loss) from that investment is called the return on your investment. Th is return usually has two components: First, you may receive some cash directly while you own the investment. Th is is called the income component of your return. Second, the value of the asset you purchase oft en changes. In this case, you have a capital gain or capital loss on your investment.1
To illustrate, suppose Canadian Atlantic Enterprises has several thousand shares of stock out- standing. You purchased some of these shares at the beginning of the year. It is now year-end, and you want to fi nd out how well you have done on your investment.
Over the year, a company may pay cash dividends to its shareholders. As a shareholder in Canadian Atlantic Enterprises, you are a part owner of the company. If the company is profi table, it may choose to distribute some of its profi ts to shareholders (we discuss the details of dividend policy in Chapter 17). So, as the owner of some stock, you receive some cash. Th is cash is the income component from owning the stock.
In addition to the dividend, the other part of your return is the capital gain or capital loss on the stock. Th is part arises from changes in the value of your investment. For example, consider the cash fl ows illustrated in Figure 12.1. Th e stock is selling for $37 per share. If you buy 100 shares, you have a total outlay of $3,700. Suppose that, over the year, the stock paid a dividend of $1.85 per share. By the end of the year, then, you would have received income of:
Dividend = $1.85 × 100 = $185
Also, the value of the stock rises to $40.33 per share by the end of the year. Your 100 shares are worth $4,033, so you have a capital gain of:
Capital gain = ($40.33 - $37) × 100 = $333
On the other hand, if the price had dropped to, say, $34.78, you would have a capital loss of:
Capital loss = ($34.78 - $37) × 100 = -$222
Notice that a capital loss is the same thing as a negative capital gain. Th e total dollar return on your investment is the sum of the dividend and the capital gain:
Total dollar return = Dividend income + Capital gain (or loss) [12.1]
1 The after-tax dollar returns would be reduced by taxes levied differently for dividends and capital gains, as we dis- cussed in Chapter 2.
318 Part 5: Risk and Return
12Ross_Chapter12_3rd_A.indd 31812Ross_Chapter12_3rd_A.indd 318 12-11-12 13:3212-11-12 13:32
FIGURE 12.1
Dollar returns
Inflows
Outflows
$4,218
$185
$4,033
Time
Initial investment
Ending market value
TOTAL
Dividends
0 1
–$3,700
In our fi rst example, the total dollar return is thus given by:
Total dollar return = $185 + 333 = $518
If you sold the stock at the end of the year, the total amount of cash you would have would be your initial investment plus the total return. In the preceding example, then:
Total cash if stock is sold = Initial investment + Total return [12.2] = $3,700 + 518 = $4,218
As a check, notice that this is the same as the proceeds from the sale of the stock plus the dividends:
Proceeds from stock sale + Dividends = $40.33 × 100 + $185 = $4,033 + 185 = $4,218
Suppose you hold on to your Canadian Atlantic stock and don’t sell it at the end of the year. Should you still consider the capital gain as part of your return? Isn’t this only a paper gain and not really a cash fl ow if you don’t sell it?
Th e answer to the fi rst question is a strong yes, and the answer to the second is an equally strong no. Th e capital gain is every bit as much a part of your return as the dividend, and you should certainly count it as part of your return. Th at you actually decided to keep the stock and not sell (you don’t realize the gain) is irrelevant because you could have converted it to cash if you wanted to. Whether you choose to do so or not is up to you.
Aft er all, if you insisted on converting your gain to cash, you could always sell the stock at year-end and immediately reinvest by buying the stock back. Th ere is no net diff erence between doing this and just not selling (assuming there are no tax consequences from selling the stock). Again, the point is that whether you actually cash out or reinvest by not selling doesn’t aff ect the return you earn.
Percentage Returns It is usually more convenient to summarize information about returns in percentage terms, rather than dollar terms, because that way your return doesn’t depend on how much you actually invest. Th e question we want to answer is: How much do we get for each dollar we invest?
To answer this question, let Pt be the price of the stock at the beginning of the year and let Dt be the dividend paid on the stock during the year. Consider the cash fl ows in Figure 12.2. Th ese are the same as those in Figure 12.1, except we have now expressed everything on a per-share basis.
In our example, the price at the beginning of the year was $37 per share and the dividend paid during the year on each share was $1.85. As we discussed in Chapter 8, expressing the dividend as a percentage of the beginning stock price results in the dividend yield:
Chapter 12: Lessons from Capital Market History 319
12Ross_Chapter12_3rd_A.indd 31912Ross_Chapter12_3rd_A.indd 319 12-11-12 13:3212-11-12 13:32
FIGURE 12.2
Percentage, dollar, and per-share returns
Inflows
Outflows
$42.18 $1.85
$40.33
Time
Ending market value
TOTAL
Dividends
t t + 1
–$37
Percentage return =
1 + Percentage return =
Dividends paid at end of period
Dividends paid at end of period
Change in market value over period
Market value at end of period
Beginning market value
Beginning market value
+
+
Dividend yield = Dt/Pt = $1.85/$37 = .05 = 5%
Th is says that, for each dollar we invest, we get 5 cents in dividends. Th e other component of our percentage return is the capital gains yield. Th is is calculated as
the change in the price during the year (the capital gain) divided by the beginning price:
Capital gains yield = (Pt+1 - Pt)/Pt = ($40.33 - 37)/$37 = $3.33/$37 = 9%
So, per dollar invested, you get 9 cents in capital gains. Putting it together, per dollar invested, we get 5 cents in dividends and 9 cents in capital gains,
a total of 14 cents. Our percentage return is 14 cents on the dollar, or 14 percent. To check this, notice that you invested $3,700 and ended with $4,218. By what percentage did
your $3,700 increase? As we saw, you picked up $4,218 - 3,700 = $518. Th is is a $518/$3,700 = 14% increase.
FIGURE 12.3
Cash flow—an investment example
Cash inflows
Cash outflows
$37
$2
$35
Time
Ending price per share (P1)
TOTAL
Dividends (Div1)
0 1
–$25 (P0)
320 Part 5: Risk and Return
12Ross_Chapter12_3rd_A.indd 32012Ross_Chapter12_3rd_A.indd 320 12-11-12 13:3212-11-12 13:32
EXAMPLE 12.1: Calculating Returns
Suppose you buy some stock for $25 per share. At the end of the year, the price is $35 per share. During the year, you got a $2 dividend per share. This is the situation illustrated in Figure 12.3. What is the dividend yield? The capital gains yield? The percentage return? If your total investment was $1,000, how much do you have at the end of the year?
Your $2 dividend per share works out to a dividend yield of:
Dividend yield = Dt/Pt = $2/$25 = .08 = 8%
The per share capital gain is $10, so the capital gains yield is:
Capital gains yield = (Pt+1 - Pt)/Pt = ($35 - 25)/$25 = $10/$25 = 40%
The total percentage return is thus 48 percent.
If you had invested $1,000, you would have $1,480 at the end of the year, a 48 percent increase. To check this, note that your $1,000 would have bought you $1,000/25 = 40 shares. Your 40 shares would then have paid you a total of 40 × $2 = $80 in cash dividends. Your $10 per share gain would give you a total capital gain of $10 × 40 = $400. Add these together, and you get the $480.
To give another example, stock in Apple Inc., began 2011 at $322.56 per share. Apple did not pay any dividends in 2011, and the stock price at the end of the year was $405. What was the return on Apple for the year? For practice, see if you agree that the answer is 25.56 percent. Of course, negative returns occur as well. For example, again in 2011, Research In Motion’s stock price at the beginning of the year was $58.07 per share. No dividends were paid during the year and the stock ended the year at $14.80 per share. Verify that the loss was 74.51 percent for the year.
1. What are the two parts of total return?
2. Why are unrealized capital gains or losses included in the calculation of returns?
3. What is the difference between a dollar return and a percentage return? Why are percentage returns more convenient?
12.2 The Historical Record
Capital market history is of great interest to investment consultants who advise institutional investors on portfolio strategy. Th e data set we use is in Table 12.1. It is based on data originally assembled by Mercer Investment Consulting, drawing on two major studies. Roger Ibbotson and Rex Sinquefi eld conducted a famous set of studies dealing with rates of return in U.S. fi nancial markets. James Hatch and Robert White examined Canadian returns.2 Our data present year-to- year historical rates of return on six important types of fi nancial investments. Th e returns can be interpreted as what you would have earned if you held portfolios of the following:
1. Canadian common stocks. The common stock portfolio is based on a sample of the largest companies (in total market value of outstanding stock) in Canada.3
2. U.S. common stocks. The U.S. common stock portfolio consists of 500 of the largest U.S. companies. The full historical series is given in U.S. dollars. A separate series presents U.S. stock returns in Canadian dollars adjusting for shifts in exchange rates.
2 The two classic studies are R. G. Ibbotson and R. A. Sinquefield, Stocks, Bonds, Bills, and Inflation (Charlottesville, Va.: Financial Analysts Research Foundation, 1982), and J. Hatch and R. White, Canadian Stocks, Bonds, Bills, and Inflation: 1950–1983 (Charlottesville, Va.: Financial Analysts Research Foundation, 1985). Additional sources used by Mercer In- vestment Consulting are Nesbitt Burns for small capitalization for small stocks, Scotia Capital Markets for Canada Treasury bills and long bonds, and Statistics Canada CANSIM for rates of exchange and inflation. 3 From 1956 on, the S&P/TSX Composite is used. For earlier years, Mercer Investment Consulting used a sample pro- vided by the TSX.
Concept Questions
Chapter 12: Lessons from Capital Market History 321
12Ross_Chapter12_3rd_A.indd 32112Ross_Chapter12_3rd_A.indd 321 12-11-12 13:3212-11-12 13:32
TABLE 12.1 Annual market index returns, 1948–2011
Year
Statistics Canada inflation
Canadian stocks S&P/
TSX Composite
DEX 91-day T-bill
Scotia Capital Markets long
bonds US stocks S&P 500 (Cdn. $)
Nesbitt Burns small stocks
S&P/TSX Venture
Composite 1948 8.88 12.25 0.40 -0.80 5.50 1949 1.09 23.85 0.45 5.18 22.15 1950 5.91 51.69 0.51 1.74 39.18 1951 10.66 25.44 0.71 -7.89 15.00 1952 -1.38 0.01 0.95 5.01 13.68 1953 0.00 2.56 1.54 5.00 -0.99 1954 0.00 39.37 1.62 12.23 52.62 1955 0.47 27.68 1.22 0.13 35.51 1956 3.24 12.68 2.63 -8.87 2.35 1957 1.79 -20.58 3.76 7.94 -8.51 1958 2.64 31.25 2.27 1.92 40.49 1959 1.29 4.59 4.39 -5.07 10.54 1960 1.27 1.78 3.66 12.19 5.15 1961 0.42 32.75 2.86 9.16 32.85 1962 1.67 -7.09 3.81 5.03 -5.77 1963 1.64 15.60 3.58 4.58 23.19 1964 2.02 25.43 3.73 6.16 15.75 1965 3.16 6.67 3.79 0.05 12.58 1966 3.45 -7.07 4.89 -1.05 -9.33 1967 4.07 18.09 4.38 -0.48 23.61 1968 3.91 22.45 6.22 2.14 10.26 1969 4.79 -0.81 6.83 -2.86 -8.50 1970 1.31 -3.57 6.89 16.39 -1.96 -11.69 1971 5.16 8.01 3.86 14.84 13.28 15.83 1972 4.91 27.37 3.43 8.11 18.12 44.72 1973 9.36 0.27 4.78 1.97 -14.58 -7.82 1974 12.30 -25.93 7.68 -4.53 -26.87 -26.89 1975 9.52 18.48 7.05 8.02 40.72 41.00 1976 5.87 11.02 9.10 23.64 22.97 22.77 1977 9.45 10.71 7.64 9.04 0.65 39.93 1978 8.44 29.72 7.90 4.10 15.50 44.41 1979 9.69 44.77 11.01 -2.83 16.52 46.04 1980 11.20 30.13 12.23 2.18 35.51 42.86 1981 12.20 -10.25 19.11 -2.09 -5.57 -15.10 1982 9.23 5.54 15.27 45.82 25.84 4.55 1983 4.51 35.49 9.39 9.61 24.07 44.30 1984 3.77 -2.39 11.21 16.90 12.87 -2.33 1985 4.38 25.07 9.70 26.68 39.82 38.98 1986 4.19 8.95 9.34 17.21 16.96 12.33 1987 4.12 5.88 8.20 1.77 -0.96 -5.47 1988 3.96 11.08 8.94 11.30 7.21 5.46 1989 5.17 21.37 11.95 15.17 27.74 10.66 1990 5.00 -14.80 13.28 4.32 -3.06 -27.32 1991 3.78 12.02 9.90 25.30 30.05 18.51 1992 2.14 -1.43 6.65 11.57 18.42 13.01 1993 1.70 32.55 5.63 22.09 14.40 52.26 1994 0.23 -0.18 4.76 -7.39 7.48 -9.21 1995 1.75 14.53 7.39 26.34 33.68 13.88 1996 2.17 28.35 5.02 14.18 23.62 28.66 1997 0.73 14.98 3.20 18.46 39.18 6.97 1998 1.02 -1.58 4.74 12.85 37.71 -17.90 1999 2.58 31.59 4.66 -5.98 14.14 20.29 2000 3.23 7.41 5.49 12.97 -5.67 -4.29 2001 0.60 -12.60 4.70 8.10 -6.50 0.70 2002 4.30 -12.40 2.50 8.70 -22.70 -0.90 3.66 2003 1.60 26.70 2.90 6.70 5.30 42.70 63.24 2004 2.40 14.50 2.30 7.20 3.30 14.10 4.40 2005 2.00 23.29 2.58 6.46 3.80 13.70 22.62 2006 1.60 17.30 4.00 4.10 15.70 20.83 33.59 2007 2.10 9.80 4.40 3.70 -10.50 -11.38 -4.94 2008 1.20 -33.00 3.30 2.70 -21.20 -46.60 -71.93 2009 1.30 34.35 0.60 5.31 9.26 86.80 90.80 2010 2.40 17.27 0.50 12.10 8.10 36.10 50.45 2011 2.30 -8.57 1.00 17.72 4.39 -19.50 -35.07
Source: Mercer Investment Consulting, Bloomberg Financial Services, iShares, Cumis
322 Part 5: Risk and Return
12Ross_Chapter12_3rd_A.indd 32212Ross_Chapter12_3rd_A.indd 322 12-11-12 13:3212-11-12 13:32
3. TSX Venture stock. The TSX Venture stock portfolio consists of small and emerging com- panies that do not yet meet listing requirements for the S&P/TSX Composite Index.
4. Small stocks. The small stock portfolio is composed of the small capitalization Canadian stocks as compiled by BMO Nesbitt Burns.
5. Long bonds. The long bond portfolio has high-quality, long-term corporate, provincial, and Government of Canada bonds.
6. Canada Treasury bills. The T-bill portfolio has Treasury bills with a three-month maturity.
Th ese returns are not adjusted for infl ation or taxes; thus, they are nominal, pre-tax returns. In addition to the year-to-year returns on these fi nancial instruments, the year-to-year percent-
age change in the Statistics Canada Consumer Price Index (CPI) is also computed. Th is is a com- monly used measure of infl ation, so we can calculate real returns using this as the infl ation rate.
Th e six asset classes included in Table 12.1 cover a broad range of investments popular with Canadian individuals and fi nancial institutions. We include U.S. stocks since Canadian investors oft en invest abroad—particularly in the United States.4
A First Look Before looking closely at the diff erent portfolio returns, we take a look at the “big picture.” Fig- ure 12.4 shows what happened to $1 invested in three of these diff erent portfolios at the beginning of 1957. We work with a sample period of 1957–2011 for two reasons: the years immediately aft er the Second World War do not refl ect trends today and the TSE 300 (predecessor of the TSX) was introduced in 1956, making 1957 the fi rst really comparable year. Th is decision is somewhat con- troversial and we return to it later as we draw lessons from our data. Th e growth in value for each of the diff erent portfolios over the 55-year period ending in 2011 is given separately. Notice that, to get everything on a single graph, some modifi cation in scaling is used. As is commonly done with fi nancial series, the vertical axis is on a logarithmic scale such that equal distances measure equal percentage changes (as opposed to equal dollar changes) in value.
Looking at Figure 12.4, we see that the common stock investments did the best overall. Every dollar invested in Canadian stocks grew to $120.09 over the 55 years.
FIGURE 12.4
Returns to a $1 investment, 1957–2011
$120.90 $81.45
$25.81
$8.20
0.1
1
10
100
1000
1961 1966 1971 1976 1981 1986 1991 1996 2001 2006 2011 Initial investment of $1.00
S&P/TSX composite stocks
Bonds
T-bills
CPI
Index ($)
4 Chapter 21 discusses exchange rate risk and other risks of foreign investments.
Chapter 12: Lessons from Capital Market History 323
12Ross_Chapter12_3rd_A.indd 32312Ross_Chapter12_3rd_A.indd 323 12-11-12 13:3212-11-12 13:32
At the other end, the T-bill portfolio grew to only $25.81. Long bonds did better with an end- ing value of $81.45. Th ese values are less impressive when we consider infl ation over this period. As illustrated, the price level climbed such that $8.20 is needed just to replace the original $1.
Given the historical record as discussed so far, why would any investor hold any asset class other than common stocks? A close look at Figure 12.4 provides an answer. Th e T-bill portfo- lio and the long-term bond portfolio grew more slowly than did the stock portfolio, but they also grew much more steadily. Th e common stocks ended up on top, but as you can see, they grew erratically at times. For example, comparing Canadian stocks with T-bills, the stocks had a smaller return in 21 years during this 55-year period as you can see in Table 12.1.
A Closer Look To illustrate the variability of the diff erent investments, we look at a few selected years in Table 12.1. For example, looking at long-term bonds, we see the largest historical return (45.82 percent) occurred in 1982. Th is was a good year for bonds. Th e largest single-year return in the table is a very healthy 90.80 percent for the S&P/TSX Venture Composite in 2009. In the same year, T-bills returned only 0.60 percent. In contrast, the largest Treasury bill return was 19.11 percent (in 1981).
1. With 20-20 hindsight, what was the best investment for the period 1981–82?
2. Why doesn’t everyone just buy common stocks as investments?
3. What was the smallest return observed over the 52 years for each of these investments? When did it occur?
4. How many times did large Canadian stocks (common stocks) return more than 30 percent? How many times did they return less than 20 percent?
5. What was the longest winning streak (years without a negative return) for large Canadian stocks? For long-term bonds?
6. How often did the T-bill portfolio have a negative return?
7. How have Canadian stocks compared with U.S. stocks over the last 10 years?
12.3 Average Returns: The First Lesson
As you’ve probably begun to notice, the history of capital market returns is too complicated to be of much use in its undigested form. We need to begin summarizing all these numbers. Accord- ingly, we discuss how to consider the detailed data. We start by calculating average returns.
Calculating Average Returns Th e obvious way to calculate the average returns from 1957–2011 on the diff erent investments in Table 12.1 is simply to add up the yearly returns and divide by 55. Th e result is the historical average of the individual values. Statisticians call this the arithmetic average or arithmetic mean return. It has the advantage of being easy to calculate and interpret, so we use it here to measure expected return.
For example, if you add the returns for the Canadian common stocks for the 55 years, you get about 574.86. Th e average annual return is thus 574.86/55 = 10.45%. You interpret this 10.45 per- cent just like any other average. If you picked a year at random from the 55-year history and you had to guess what the return in that year was, the best guess is 10.45 percent.
Average Returns: The Historical Record Table 12.2 shows the average returns computed from Table 12.1. As shown, in a typical year, the small stocks increased in value by 13.71 percent. Notice also how much larger the stock returns are than the bond returns.
Concept Questions
324 Part 5: Risk and Return
12Ross_Chapter12_3rd_A.indd 32412Ross_Chapter12_3rd_A.indd 324 12-11-12 13:3212-11-12 13:32
TABLE 12.2
Average annual returns, 1957–2011
Investment Arithmetic Average Return (%)
Canadian common stocks 10.45 U.S. common stocks (Cdn $) 11.07 Long bonds 8.74 Small stocks 13.71 TSX Venture stocks 15.68 Inflation 3.95 Treasury bills 6.15
Average returns on small stocks and TSX Venture stocks are based on data from 1970–2011 and 2002–2011 respectively.
Th ese averages are, of course, nominal since we haven’t worried about infl ation. Notice that the average infl ation rate was 3.95 percent per year over this 55-year span. Th e nominal return on Canada Treasury bills was 6.15 percent per year. Th e average real return on Treasury bills was thus approximately 2.20 percent per year; so the real return on T-bills has been quite low historically.
At the other extreme, Canadian common stocks had an average real return of about 10.45% - 3.95% = 6.5%, which is relatively large. If you remember the Rule of 72 (Chapter 5), then a quick “back of the envelope” calculation tells us that 6 percent real growth doubles your buying power about every 12 years.
Th e TSX Venture stocks show an average return of 15.68 percent, which is higher than the return on T-bills.5 Since venture stocks fl uctuate greatly (as seen in Table 12.1) averages taken over short periods are considered extremely unreliable.
Risk Premiums Now that we have computed some average returns, it seems logical to see how they compare with each other. Based on our discussion so far, one such comparison involves government-issued securities. Th ese are free of much of the variability we see in, for example, the stock market.
Th e Government of Canada borrows money by issuing debt securities in diff erent forms. Th e ones we focus on are Treasury bills. Th ese have the shortest time to maturity of the diff erent government securities. Because the government can always raise taxes to pay its bills, this debt is virtually free of any default risk over its short life. Th us, we call the rate on such debt the risk-free return, and we use it as a kind of benchmark.
A particularly interesting comparison involves the virtually risk-free return on T-bills and the very risky return on common stocks. Th e diff erence between these two returns can be interpreted as a measure of the excess return on the average risky asset (assuming that the stock of a large Canadian corporation has about average risk compared to all risky assets).
We call this the excess return because it is the additional return we earn by moving from a relatively risk-free investment to a risky one. Because it can be interpreted as a reward for bearing risk, we call it a risk premium.
From Table 12.2, we can calculate the risk premiums for the diff erent investments. We report only the nominal risk premium in Table 12.3 because there is only a slight diff erence between the historical nominal and real risk premiums. Th e risk premium on T-bills is shown as zero in the table because we have assumed that they are riskless.
The First Lesson Looking at Table 12.3, we see that the average risk premium earned by a typical Canadian com- mon stock is 4.3 percent: 10.45- 6.15 = 4.30. Th is is a signifi cant reward. Th e fact that it exists historically is an important observation, and it is the basis for our fi rst lesson: Risky assets, on average, earn a risk premium. Put another way, there is a reward for bearing risk.
5 The S&P/TSX Venture Composite was preceded by the Canadian Venture Exchange (CDNX), which was created in November 1999. In 2001, the TSX Group purchased the CDNX and renamed it.
risk premium The excess return required from an investment in a risky asset over a risk-free investment.
Chapter 12: Lessons from Capital Market History 325
12Ross_Chapter12_3rd_A.indd 32512Ross_Chapter12_3rd_A.indd 325 12-11-12 13:3212-11-12 13:32
Why is this so? Why, for example, is the risk premium for common stocks larger than the risk premium for long bonds? More generally, what determines the relative sizes of the risk premiums for the diff erent assets? Th e answers to these questions are at the heart of modern fi nance, and the next chapter is devoted to them. For now, part of the answer can be found by looking at the historical variability of the returns on these diff erent investments. So, to get started, we now turn our attention to measuring variability in returns.
TABLE 12.3
Average annual returns and risk premiums, 1957–2011 Investment Arithmetic Average return (%) Risk Premium (%)
Canadian common stocks 10.45 4.30 U.S. common stocks (Cdn $) 11.07 4.92 Long bonds 8.74 2.58 Small stocks 13.71 7.56 TSX Venture stocks 15.68 9.53 Inflation 3.95 -2.21 Treasury bills 6.15 0.00
Average returns on small stocks and TSX Venture stocks are based on data from 1970–2011 and 2002–2011 respectively.
1. What do we mean by excess return and risk premium?
2. What was the nominal risk premium on long bonds? The real risk premium?
3. What is the first lesson from capital market history?
12.4 The Variability of Returns: The Second Lesson
We have already seen that the year-to-year returns on common stocks tend to be more volatile than the returns on, say, long-term bonds. Next we discuss measuring this variability so we can begin examining the subject of risk.
Frequency Distr ibutions and Variabil ity To get started, we can draw a frequency distribution for the common Canadian stock returns similar to the one in Figure 12.5. What we have done here is to count the number of times the annual return on the common stock portfolio falls within each 5 percent range. For example, in Figure 12.5, the height of 1 in the range -30 percent to -25 percent means that 1 of the 55 annual returns was in that range.
Now we need to measure the spread in returns. We know, for example, that the return on Canadian common stocks in a typical year was 10.45 percent. We now want to know how far the actual return deviates from this average in a typical year. In other words, we need a measure of how volatile the return is. Th e variance and its square root, the standard deviation, are the most commonly used measures of volatility. We describe how to calculate them next.
The Historical Variance and Standard Deviation Th e variance essentially measures the average squared diff erence between the actual returns and the average return. Th e bigger this number is, the more the actual returns tend to diff er from the average return. Also, the larger the variance or standard deviation is, the more spread out the returns are.
Concept Questions
variance The average squared deviation between the actual return and the average return.
standard deviation The positive square root of the variance.
326 Part 5: Risk and Return
12Ross_Chapter12_3rd_A.indd 32612Ross_Chapter12_3rd_A.indd 326 12-11-12 13:3212-11-12 13:32
FIGURE 12.5
Frequency distribution of returns on Canadian common stocks
Return (%)
N u
m b
e r
o f
y e a rs
0
6
7
4
5
3
2
8
9
10
1
–30 4540 555035302520151050–5–10–15–20–25
Th e way we calculate the variance and standard deviation depends on the situation. In this chapter, we are looking at historical returns; so the procedure we describe here is the correct one for calculating the historical variance and standard deviation. If we were examining projected future returns, the procedure would be diff erent. We describe this procedure in the next chapter.
To illustrate how we calculate the historical variance, suppose a particular investment had returns of 10 percent, 12 percent, 3 percent, and -9 percent over the last four years. Th e aver- age return is (.10 + .12 + .03 - .09)/4 = 4%. Notice that the return is never actually equal to 4 percent. Instead, the fi rst return deviates from the average by .10 - .04 = .06, the second return deviates from the average by .12 - .04 = .08, and so on. To compute the variance, we square each of these deviations, add them up, and divide the result by the number of returns less one, or three in this case. Th is information is summarized in the following table:
(1) Actual
Returns
(2) Average Return
(3) Deviation (1)-(2)
(4) Squared
Deviation
.10 .04 .06 .0036 .12 .04 .08 .0064 .03 .04 -.01 .0001
-.09 .04 -.13 .0169
Totals .16 .00 .0270
In the fi rst column, we write down the four actual returns. In the third column, we calculate the diff erence between the actual returns and the average by subtracting out 4 percent. Finally, in the fourth column, we square the numbers in column 3 to get the squared deviations from the average.
Th e variance can now be calculated by dividing .0270, the sum of the squared deviations, by the number of returns less one. Let Var(R) or σ2 (read this as sigma squared) stand for the vari- ance of the return:
Var(R) = σ2 = .027/(4 - 1) = .009
Th e standard deviation is the square root of the variance. So, if SD(R) or σ stands for the standard deviation of return:
SD(R) = σ = √ _____
0.009 = .09487 Th e square root of the variance is used because the variance is measured in squared percent-
ages and, thus, is hard to interpret. Th e standard deviation is an ordinary percentage, so the
Chapter 12: Lessons from Capital Market History 327
12Ross_Chapter12_3rd_A.indd 32712Ross_Chapter12_3rd_A.indd 327 12-11-12 13:3212-11-12 13:32
answer here could be written as 9.487 percent. In the preceding table, notice that the sum of the deviations is equal to zero. Th is is always the
case, and it provides a good way to check your work. In general, if we have T historical returns, where T is some number, we can write the historical variance as:
Var(R) = (1/(T - 1)) [ ( R1 - __
R ) 2 + … + ( RT - __
R ) 2 ] [12.3] Th is formula tells us to do just what we did above: Take each of the T individual returns (R1, R2,…) and subtract the average return,
__ R ; square the result, and add them up; fi nally, divide this total by
the number of returns less one (T - 1) because our 55 years’ data represents only a sample, not the full population. Th e standard deviation is always the square root of Var(R).
Each of the above calculations can also be completed using an Excel spreadsheet. Once your data are entered, you can use the following functions:
Average = AVERAGE( ) Variance = VAR( ) Standard Deviation = STDEV( )
EXAMPLE 12.2: Calculating the Variance and Standard Deviation
Suppose Northern Radio Comm and the Canadian Empire Bank have experienced the following returns in the last four years:
Year Northern Radio Comm Returns
Canadian Empire Bank Returns
2009 -.20 .05
2010 .50 .09 2011 .30 -.12 2012 .10 .20
What are the average returns? The variances? The standard deviations? Which investment was more volatile?
To calculate the average returns, we add the returns and divide by four. The results are: Northern Radio Comm average return =
__ R = (–0.20 + 0.50
+ 0.30 + 0.10)/4 = .70/4 = .175 Canadian Empire Bank average return =
__ R = (0.05 + 0.09
– 0.12 + 0.20)/4 = .22/4 = .055 To calculate the variance for Northern Radio Comm, we can summarize the relevant calculations as follows:
Year
(1) Actual
Returns
(2) Average Returns
(3) Deviation (1) – (2)
(4) Squared
Deviation
2010 -.20 .175 -.375 .140625
2011 .50 .175 .325 .105625 2012 .30 .175 .125 .015625 2013 .10 .175 -.075 .005625
Totals .70 .000 .267500
Since there are four years of returns, we calculate the vari- ances by dividing .2675 by (4 - 1) = 3:
Northern Radio Comm
Canadian Empire Bank
Variance (σ2) .2675/3 = .0892 .0529/3 = .0176
Standard deviation (σ) √ ______
.0892 = .2987 √ ______
.0176 = .1327
For practice, check that you get the same answer as we do for Canadian Empire Bank. Notice that the standard devia- tion for Northern Radio Comm, 29.87 percent, is a little more than twice Canadian Empire’s 13.27 percent; North- ern Radio Comm is thus the more volatile investment.6
6
The Historical Record Table 12.4 summarizes much of our discussion of capital market history so far. It displays aver- age returns and standard deviations of annual returns. We used spreadsheet soft ware to calculate these standard deviations. For example, in Excel it is STDEV. In Table 12.4, notice, for example, that the standard deviation for the Canadian common stock portfolio (16.93 percent per year) is about four times as large as the T-bill portfolio’s standard deviation (3.75 percent per year). We return to these fi gures momentarily.
6 Since our two stocks have different average returns, it may be useful to look at their risks in comparison to the average returns. The coefficient of variation shows this. It equals (Standard deviation)/(Average return).
328 Part 5: Risk and Return
12Ross_Chapter12_3rd_A.indd 32812Ross_Chapter12_3rd_A.indd 328 12-11-12 13:3212-11-12 13:32
Finding Standard Deviation (s) and Mean (x)
(Using Texas Instruments BA II Plus Financial Calculator)
You can solve Example 12.2 using a financial calculator by doing the following:
Clear any previous data: Action Keystrokes
Select the data entry function of the calculator. [DATA]
Clear any pre-existing data from the worksheet. [CLR WORK]
Enter the data into the calculator.
Keystrokes Calculator
Display
-0.20 X01 = -0.20
Y01 = 1.00
0.50 X02 = 0.50
Y02 = 1.00
0.30 X03 = 0.30
Y03 = 1.00
0.10 X04 = 0.10
Y04 = 1.00
Before calculating the statistics: Action Keystroke Calculator Display
Select the statistics calculation function of the calculator.
[STAT] Will display any pre-existing data from prior use
Clear any pre-existing data from the worksheet.
[CLR WORK] LIN
Set the calculator to 1-variable calculation mode.
[SET]
Repeatedly tap the [SET] key to toggle the different options.
1-V
To view statistics of data set: Action Keystroke Calculator Display
To view mean (x), toggle downward x = 0.1750
To view sample standard deviation (s), toggle downward Sx = 0.2986
Normal Distr ibution For many diff erent random events in nature, a particular frequency distribution, the normal dis- tribution (or bell curve), is useful for describing the probability of ending up in a given range. For example, the idea behind grading on a curve comes from the fact that exam scores oft en resemble a bell curve.
Figure 12.6 illustrates a normal distribution and its distinctive bell shape. As you can see, this distribution has a much cleaner appearance than the actual return distributions illustrated in Figure 12.5. Even so, like the normal distribution, the actual distributions do appear to be at least roughly mound-shaped and symmetrical. When this is true, the normal distribution is oft en a very good approximation.7
7 It is debatable whether such a smooth picture would necessarily always be a normal distribution. But we assume it would be normal to make the statistical discussion as simple as possible.
CALCULATOR HINTS
normal distribution A symmetric, bell-shaped frequency distribution that can be defined by its mean and standard deviation.
Chapter 12: Lessons from Capital Market History 329
12Ross_Chapter12_3rd_A.indd 32912Ross_Chapter12_3rd_A.indd 329 12-11-12 13:3212-11-12 13:32
TABLE 12.4
Historical returns and standard deviations, 1957–2011 Investment Arithmetic Average return (%) Standard Deviation (%)
Canadian common stocks 10.45 16.93 U.S. common stocks (Cdn $) 11.07 16.95 Long bonds 8.74 9.75 Small stocks 13.71 26.65 TSX Venture stocks 15.68 47.65 Inflation 3.95 3.13 Treasury bills 6.15 3.75
Average returns on small stocks and TSX Venture stocks are based on data from 1970–2011 and 2002–2011 respectively.
FIGURE 12.6
The normal distribution. Illustrated returns are based on the historical return and standard deviation for a portfolio of large common stocks.
Probability
Return on large common stocks
–3σ –2σ –1σ 0 +1σ +2σ +3σ –40.34% –23.41% –6.48% 10.45% 27.38 44.31% 61.24%
95% >99%
68%
Also, keep in mind that the distributions in Figure 12.5 are based on only 55 yearly observations while Figure 12.6 is, in principle, based on an infi nite number. So, if we had been able to observe returns for, say, 1,000 years, we might have fi lled in a lot of the irregularities and ended up with a much smoother picture. For our purposes, it is enough to observe that the returns are at least roughly normally distributed.
Th e usefulness of the normal distribution stems from the fact that it is completely described by the average and standard deviation. If you have these two numbers, there is nothing else to know. For example, with a normal distribution, the probability that we end up within one stan- dard deviation of the average is about two-thirds. Th e probability that we end up within two standard deviations is about 95 percent. Finally, the probability of being more than three standard deviations away from the average is less than 1 percent. Th ese ranges and the probabilities are illustrated in Figure 12.6.
To see why this is useful, recall from Table 12.4 that the standard deviation of returns on Can- adian common stocks is 16.93 percent. Th e average return is 10.45 percent. So, assuming that the frequency distribution is at least approximately normal, the probability that the return in a given year is in the range -6.48 percent to 27.38 percent (10.45 percent plus or minus one standard deviation, 16.93 percent) is about two-thirds. Th is range is illustrated in Figure 12.6. In other words, there is about one chance in three that the return is outside the range. Th is literally tells you that, if you buy stocks in larger companies, you should expect to be outside this range in one year out of every three. Th is reinforces our earlier observations about stock market volatility. However, there is only a 5 percent chance (approximately) that we would end up outside the range -23.41 percent to 44.31 percent (10.45 percent plus or minus 2 × 16.93 percent). Th ese points are also illustrated in Figure 12.6.
330 Part 5: Risk and Return
12Ross_Chapter12_3rd_A.indd 33012Ross_Chapter12_3rd_A.indd 330 12-11-12 13:3212-11-12 13:32
Value at Risk We can take this one step further to create a measure of risk that is widely used. Suppose you are a risk management executive at a bank that has $100 million invested in stocks. You want to know how much you can lose in any one year. We just showed that based on historical data you would be outside the range of 23.41 percent to 44.31 percent only 5 percent of the time. Because we based this on a normal distribution, you know that the distribution is symmetric. In other words, the 5 percent chance of being outside the range breaks down into a 2.5 percent probability of a return above 44.31 percent and an equal 2.5 percent chance of a return below -23.41 per- cent. You want to fi nd out how much you can lose, so you can safely ignore the chance of a return above 44.31 percent. Instead you focus on the 2.5 percent probability of a loss of more than 23.41 percent of the portfolio.
What you have discovered is that 97.5 percent of the time, your loss will not exceed this level. On a portfolio of $100 million, this means that your maximum loss estimate is $100 million × (-23.41%) = -$23.41 million. Th is number is called value at risk (VaR). You can fi nd examples of VaR in the annual report of Bank of Montreal and all other Canadian banks. Since VaR is a measure of possible loss, fi nancial institutions use it in determining adequate capital levels. Finan- cial institutions recognize that VaR likely underestimates the amount of capital needed because it is based on assuming a normal distribution of returns.
The Second Lesson Our observations concerning the year-to-year variability in returns are the basis for our second lesson from capital market history. On average, bearing risk is handsomely rewarded, but in a given year, there is a signifi cant chance of a dramatic change in value. Th us, our second lesson is: Th e greater the potential reward, the greater is the risk.
TSX Venture Stocks in Table 12.4 illustrate the second lesson over again, as this investment has both the highest average return and the largest standard deviation of any Canadian investment. On the contrary, Small stocks have the second-largest standard deviation, but also the second- smallest average return.
2008 The Bear Growled and Investors Howled To reinforce our point concerning stock market volatility, consider that just a few short years ago, 2008, entered the record books as one of the worst years for stock market investors in Canadian and global history. How bad was it? As shown in Table 12.1, the widely followed S&P/TSX Com- posite plunged 33 percent.
Over the period, 1948–2011, 2008 was the worst year, although 1974 came close with a loss of 25.93 percent. Making matters worse, the downdraft continued with a further decline of 17 per- cent in early 2009. In all, from August of 2008 (when the decline began in Canada) through March of 2009 (when it ended), the S&P/TSX lost 50 percent of its value.
Th e drop in stock prices was a global phenomenon with the U.S. S&P 500 also falling by a similar percent in U.S. dollar terms. Many of the world’s major markets were off by much more. China, India, and Russia, for example, all experienced declines of more than 50 percent. Iceland saw share prices drop by more than 90 percent in 2008. Trading on the Icelandic exchange was temporarily suspended on October 9, 2008. In what has to be a modern record for a single day, stocks fell by 76 percent when trading resumed on October 14.
Were there any bright spots in the fi nancial crisis? Th e answer is yes because as stocks tanked, bonds did well with returns in Canada of 2.70 percent in 2008 and 5.31 percent in 2009. Th ese returns were especially impressive considering that the rate of infl ation was just over 1 percent.
Of course, stock prices can be volatile in both directions. Starting in March 2009, stock prices climbed for an overall return of 34.35 percent in 2009 and a further 17.27 percent in 2010. So what lessons should investors take away from this very recent, and very turbulent, bit of capital market history? First, and most obviously, stocks have signifi cant risk! But there is a second, equally impor- tant lesson. Depending on the mix, a diversifi ed portfolio of stocks and bonds might have suff ered in 2008, but the losses would have been much smaller than those experienced by an all-stock portfolio. In other words, diversifi cation matters, a point we will examine in detail in our next chapter.
value at risk (VaR) Statistical measure of maximum loss used by banks and other financial institutions to manage risk exposures.
Chapter 12: Lessons from Capital Market History 331
12Ross_Chapter12_3rd_A.indd 33112Ross_Chapter12_3rd_A.indd 331 12-11-12 13:3212-11-12 13:32
Using Capital Market History Based on the discussion in this section, you should begin to have an idea of the risks and rewards from investing. For example, suppose Canada Treasury bills are paying about 5 percent. Suppose further we have an investment that we think has about the same risk as a portfolio of large-fi rm Canadian common stocks. At a minimum, what return would this investment have to off er to catch our interest?
From Table 12.3, the risk premium on Canadian common stocks has been 4.30 percent histori- cally, so a reasonable estimate of our required return would be this premium plus the T-bill rate, 5.0% + 4.30% = 9.30%. Th is may strike you as low, as during the 1990s, as well as in the years immediately aft er World War II, double-digit returns on Canadian and U.S. stocks were common, as Table 12.1 shows. Currently most fi nancial executives and professional investment managers expect lower returns and smaller risk premiums in the future.8
We agree with their expectation and this relates to our earlier discussion of which data to use to calculate the market risk premium. In Table 12.1 we display returns data back to 1948 but only go back to 1957 when we calculate risk premiums in Table 12.3. Th is drops off the high returns experienced in many of the post-war years. If we recalculate the returns and risk premiums in Table 12.3 going all the way back to 1948, we arrive at a market risk premium of 6.59 percent. We think this is too high looking to the future but we have to recognize that this is a controversial point over which experts disagree.
We discuss the relationship between risk and required return in more detail in the next chapter.
EXAMPLE 12.3: Investing in Growth Stocks
The phrase growth stock is frequently a euphemism for small-company stock. Are such investments suitable for el- derly, conservative investors? Before answering, you should consider the historical volatility. For example, from the his- torical record, what is the approximate probability that you could actually lose 10 percent or more of your money in a single year if you buy a portfolio of such companies?
Looking back at Table 12.4, the average return on small stocks is 13.71 percent and the standard deviation is 26.65 percent. Assuming the returns are approximately normal,
there is about a one-third probability that you could experi- ence a return outside the range -12.94 percent to 40.36 percent (13.71 plus or minus 26.65 percent).
Because the normal distribution is symmetric, the odds of being above or below this range are equal. There is thus a one-sixth chance (half of one-third) that you could lose more than 12.94 percent. So you should expect this to happen once in every six years, on average. Such invest- ments can thus be very volatile, and they are not well suited for those who cannot afford the risk.9
9
1. In words, how do we calculate a variance? A standard deviation?
2. With a normal distribution, what is the probability of ending up more than one standard deviation below the average?
3. Assuming that long-term bonds have an approximately normal distribution, what is the approximate probability of earning 17 percent or more in a given year? With T-bills, what is this probability?
4. What is the first lesson from capital market history? The second?
8 A survey of academic views on the market risk premium is in I. Welch, “Views of Financial Economists on the Equity Risk Premium and Other Issues,” Journal of Business 73 (October 2000), pp. 501–537. Mercer Investment Consulting surveys professional investment managers in its annual Fearless Forecast available in the Knowledge Center at mercer. com/ic. 9 Some researchers advise investors to “pensionize their nest eggs” using the new technique of product allocation to in- clude life annuities in their portfolios: Moshe A. Milevsky; Alexandra C. Macqueen. (2010). Step 7: Use Product Alloca- tion to Pensionize Your Nest Egg. In Pensionize Your Nest Egg (pp199–200). Hoboken, NJ: Wiley.
Concept Questions
332 Part 5: Risk and Return
12Ross_Chapter12_3rd_A.indd 33212Ross_Chapter12_3rd_A.indd 332 12-11-12 13:3212-11-12 13:32
12.5 More on Average Returns
Th us far in this chapter, we have looked closely at simple average returns. But there is another way of computing an average return. Th e fact that average returns are calculated two diff erent ways leads to some confusion, so our goal in this section is to explain the two approaches and also the circumstances under which each is appropriate.
Arithmetic versus Geometric Averages Let’s start with a simple example. Suppose you buy a particular stock for $200. Unfortunately, the fi rst year you own it, it falls to $100. Th e second year you own it, it rises back to $200, leaving you where you started (no dividends were paid).
What was your average return on this investment? Common sense seems to say that your average return must be exactly zero since you started with $200 and ended with $200. But if we calculate the returns year-by-year, we see that you lost 50 percent the fi rst year (you lost half of your money). Th e second year, you made 100 percent (you doubled your money). Your average return over the two years was thus (-50% + 100%)/2 = 25%!
So which is correct, 0 percent or 25 percent? Th e answer is that both are correct: Th ey just answer diff erent questions. Th e 0 percent is called the geometric average return. Th e 25 per- cent is called the arithmetic average return. Th e geometric average return answers the ques- tion “What was your average compound return per year over a particular period?” Th e arithmetic average return answers the question “What was your return in an average year over a particular period?”
Notice that, in previous sections, the average returns we calculated were all arithmetic aver- ages, so we already know how to calculate them. What we need to do now is (1) learn how to calculate geometric averages and (2) learn the circumstances under which one average is more meaningful than the other.
Calculating Geometric Average Returns First, to illustrate how we calculate a geometric average return, suppose a particular investment had annual returns of 10 percent, 12 percent, 3 percent, and -9 percent over the last four years. Th e geometric average return over this four-year period is calculated as
(1.10 × 1.12 × 1.03 × .91)1/4 - 1 = 3.66%.
In contrast, the average arithmetic return we have been calculating is
(.10 + .12 + .03 - .09)/4 = 4.0%.
In general, if we have T years of returns, the geometric average return over these T years is calculated using this formula:
Geometric average return = [(1 + R1) × (1 + R2) × … × (1 + RT)]1/T - 1 [12.4] Th is formula tells us that four steps are required:
1. Take each of the T annual returns R1, R2, …, RT and add a one to each (after converting them to decimals!).
2. Multiply all the numbers from step 1 together. 3. Take the result from step 2 and raise it to the power of 1/T. 4. Finally, subtract one from the result of step 3. The result is the geometric average return.
geometric average return The average compound return earned per year over a multi-year period.
arithmetic average return The return earned in an average year over a multi- year period.
Chapter 12: Lessons from Capital Market History 333
12Ross_Chapter12_3rd_A.indd 33312Ross_Chapter12_3rd_A.indd 333 12-11-12 13:3212-11-12 13:32
EXAMPLE 12.4: Calculating the Geometric Average Return
Calculate the geometric average return for S&P 500 large- cap stocks for the first five years in Table 12.1, 1948–1952.
First, convert percentages to decimal returns, add one, and then calculate their product:
S&P 500 Returns Product
5.50 1.055 22.15 ×1.2215 39.18 ×1.3918 15.00 ×1.15 13.68 ×1.1368
2.3448
Notice that the number 2.3448 is what our investment is worth after five years if we started with a one dollar invest- ment. The geometric average return is then calculated as
Geometric average return = 2.34481/5 - 1 = 0.1858, or 18.58%
Thus the geometric average return is about 18.58 percent in this example. Here is a tip: If you are using a financial calcu- lator, you can put $1 in as the present value, $2.3448 as the future value, and 5 as the number of periods. Then, solve for the unknown rate. You should get the same answer we did.
One thing you may have noticed in our examples thus far is that the geometric average returns seem to be smaller. It turns out that this will always be true (as long as the returns are not all iden- tical, in which case the two “averages” would be the same).
As shown in Table 12.5, the geometric averages are all smaller, but the magnitude of the dif- ference varies quite a bit. Th e reason is that the diff erence is greater for more volatile investments. In fact, there is useful approximation. Assuming all the numbers are expressed in decimals (as opposed to percentages), the geometric average return is approximately equal to the arithmetic average return minus half the variance. For example, looking at the Canadian stocks, the arithmetic average is .1045 and the standard deviation is .1693, implying that the variance is .0288. Th e approx- imate geometric average is thus .1045 - .0288/2 = .0901, which is quite close to the actual value.
TABLE 12.5
Geometric versus arithmetic average returns, 1957–2011
Investment
Average Return
Arithmetic (%) Geometric (%) Standard deviation (%)
Canadian common stocks 10.45 9.10 16.93 U.S. common stocks (Cdn $) 11.07 9.76 16.95 Long bonds 8.74 8.33 9.75 Small stocks 13.71 10.55 26.65 TSX Venture stocks 15.68 3.71 47.65 Inflation 3.95 3.90 3.13 Treasury bills 6.15 6.09 3.75
Average returns on small stocks and TSX Venture stocks are based on data from 1970–2011 and 2002–2011 respectively.
EXAMPLE 12.5: More Geometric Averages
Take a look back at Figure 12.4. There, we showed the value of a $1 investment after 55 years. Use the value for the S&P/TSX Composite stocks to check the geometric av- erage in Table 12.5.
In Figure 12.4, the S&P/TSX Composite stocks grew to $120.09 over 55 years. The geometric average return is thus:
Geometric average return = $120.091/55 - 1 = 0.0910 or 9.10%
This 9.10% is the value shown in Table 12.5. For prac- tice, check some of the other numbers in Table 12.5 the same way.
334 Part 5: Risk and Return
12Ross_Chapter12_3rd_A.indd 33412Ross_Chapter12_3rd_A.indd 334 12-11-12 13:3212-11-12 13:32
Arithmetic Average Return or Geometric Average Return? When we look at historical returns, the diff erence between the geometric and arithmetic average returns isn’t too hard to understand. To put it slightly diff erently, the geometric average tells you what you actually earned per year on average, compounded annually. Th e arithmetic average tells you what you earned in a typical year. You should use whichever one answers the question you want answered.
A somewhat trickier question concerns which average return to use when forecasting future wealth levels, and there’s a lot of confusion on this point among analysts and fi nancial planners. First, let’s get one thing straight: If you know the true arithmetic average return, then this is what you should use in your forecast. So, for example, if you know the arithmetic return is 10 percent, then your best guess of the value of a $1,000 investment in 10 years is the future value of $1,000 at 10 percent for 10 years, or $2,593.74.
Th e problem we face, however, is that we usually only have estimates of the arithmetic and geometric returns, and estimates have errors. In this case, the arithmetic average return is prob- ably too high for longer periods and the geometric average is probably too low for shorter periods. So, you should regard long-run projected wealth levels calculated using arithmetic averages as optimistic. Short-run projected wealth levels calculated using geometric averages are probably pessimistic.
As a practical matter, if you are using averages calculated over a long period of time (such as the 55 years we use) to forecast, then you should just split the diff erence between the arithmetic and geometric average returns. What this means is calculating the geometric mean market risk premium from Table 12.5: 9.10% - 6.09% = 3.01%. Our revised estimate of the market risk premium then becomes the average of this number and the arithmetic mean risk premium on Canadian common stocks of 4.30 percent from Table 12.3: (3.01% + 4.30%)/2 = 3.66%.10
Th is concludes our discussion of geometric versus arithmetic averages. One last note: In the future, when we say “average return,” we mean arithmetic unless we explicitly say otherwise.
1. If you wanted to forecast what the stock market is going to do over the next year, should you use an arithmetic or geometric average?
2. If you wanted to forecast what the stock market is going to do over the next century, should you use an arithmetic or geometric average?
12.6 Capital Market Efficiency
Capital market history suggests that the market values of stocks and bonds can fl uctuate widely from year to year. Why does this occur? At least part of the answer is that prices change because new information arrives, and investors reassess asset values based on that information.
Th e behaviour of market prices has been extensively studied. A question that has received par- ticular attention is whether prices adjust quickly and correctly when new information arrives. A market is said to be effi cient if this is the case. To be more precise, in an effi cient capital market, current market prices fully refl ect available information. By this we simply mean that, based on available information, there is no reason to believe the current price is too low or too high.
Th e concept of market effi ciency is a rich one, and much has been written about it. A full dis- cussion of the subject goes beyond the scope of our study of corporate fi nance. However, because the concept fi gures so prominently in studies of market history, we briefl y describe the key points here.
10 Our approach here is adapted from M.E. Blume, “Unbiased Estimators of Long-Run Expected Rates of Return,” Jour- nal of the American Statistical Association 69:347 (September 1974), pp. 634–638.
Concept Questions
efficient capital market Market in which security prices reflect available information.
Chapter 12: Lessons from Capital Market History 335
12Ross_Chapter12_3rd_A.indd 33512Ross_Chapter12_3rd_A.indd 335 12-11-12 13:3212-11-12 13:32
Price Behaviour in an Eff icient Market To illustrate how prices behave in an effi cient market, suppose the 3 Dee TV Corporation (3DT) has, through years of secret research and development, developed a television that projects TV programs into three-dimensional fi eld that does not require an individual to wear 3D glasses. 3DT’s capital budgeting analysis suggests that launching the new 3D television is a highly profi t- able move; in other words, the NPV appears to be positive and substantial. Th e key assumption thus far is that 3DT has not released any information about the new system, so the fact of its existence is only inside information.
Now consider a share of stock in 3DT. In an effi cient market, its price refl ects what is known about 3DT’s current operations and profi tability, and it refl ects market opinion about 3DT’s potential for future growth and profi ts. Th e value of the new 3D television is not refl ected, how- ever, because the market is unaware of its existence.
If the market agrees with 3DT’s assessment of the value of the new project, 3DT’s stock price rises when the decision to launch is made public. For example, assume the announcement is made in a press release on Wednesday morning. In an effi cient market, the price of shares in 3DT adjusts quickly to this new information. Investors should not be able to buy the stock on Wednesday aft ernoon and make a profi t on Th ursday. Th is would imply that it took the stock market a full day to realize the implication of the 3DT press release. If the market is effi cient, on Wednesday aft ernoon the price of 3DT shares already refl ects the information contained in that morning’s press release.
Figure 12.7 presents three possible stock price adjustments for 3DT. In Figure 12.7, Day 0 represents the announcement day. As illustrated, before the announcement, 3DT’s stock sells for $140 per share. Th e NPV per share of the new system is, say, $40, so the new price would be $180 once the value of the new project is fully refl ected.
FIGURE 12.7
Reaction of stock price to new information in efficient and inefficient markets
Days relative to announcement day
Price ($)
–8 –6 –4 –2 0 +2 +4 +6 +8
220
180
140
100
Overreaction and correction
Delayed reaction
Efficient market reaction
Efficient market reaction: The price instantaneously adjusts to and fully reflects new information; there is no tendency for subsequent increases and decreases.
Delayed reaction: The price partially adjusts to the new information; 10 days elapse before the price completely reflects the new information.
Overreaction: The price over adjusts to the new information; it “overshoots” the new price and subsequently corrects.
Th e solid line in Figure 12.7 represents the path taken by the stock price in an effi cient market. In this case, the price adjusts immediately to the new information and no further changes in the price of the stock occur. Th e broken line in Figure 12.7 depicts a delayed reaction. Here it takes the market eight days or so to fully absorb the information. Finally, the dotted line illustrates an overreaction and subsequent adjustments to the correct price.
Th e broken line and the dotted line in Figure 12.7 illustrate paths that the stock price might take in an ineffi cient market. If, for example, stock prices don’t adjust immediately to new infor- mation (the broken line), buying stock immediately following the release of new information and then selling it several days later would be a positive NPV activity because the price is too low for several days aft er the announcement.
336 Part 5: Risk and Return
12Ross_Chapter12_3rd_A.indd 33612Ross_Chapter12_3rd_A.indd 336 12-11-12 13:3212-11-12 13:32
The Eff icient Markets Hypothesis Th e effi cient markets hypothesis (EMH) asserts that well-organized capital markets such as the TSX and the NYSE are effi cient markets, at least as a practical matter. In other words, an advo- cate of the EMH might argue that while ineffi ciencies may exist, they are relatively small and not common.
When a market is effi cient, there is a very important implication for market participants: All investments in an effi cient market are zero NPV investments. Th e reason is not complicated. If prices are neither too low nor too high, the diff erence between the market value of an investment and its cost is zero; hence, the NPV is zero. As a result, in an effi cient market, investors get exactly what they pay for when they buy securities, and fi rms receive exactly what their stocks and bonds are worth when they sell them.
What makes a market effi cient is competition among investors. Many individuals spend their lives trying to fi nd mispriced stocks. For any given stock, they study what has happened in the past to the stock price and its dividends. Th ey learn, to the extent possible, what a company’s earn- ings have been, how much it owes to creditors, what taxes it pays, what businesses it is in, what new investments are planned, how sensitive it is to changes in the economy, and so on.
Not only is there a great deal to know about any particular company, but there is also a power- ful incentive for knowing it; namely, the profi t motive. If you know more about some company than other investors in the marketplace, you can profi t from that knowledge by investing in the company’s stock if you have good news and selling it if you have bad news.
Th e logical consequence of all this information being gathered and analyzed is that mispriced stocks will become fewer and fewer. In other words, because of competition among investors, the market is becoming increasingly effi cient. A kind of equilibrium comes into being where there is just enough mispricing around for those who are best at identifying it to make a living at it. For most other investors, the activity of information gathering and analysis does not pay. We can use Microsoft to illustrate the competition for information. A survey found that there are 60 analysts on Wall Street, Bay Street, and around the world assigned to following this stock. As a result, the chances are very low that one analyst will discover some information or insight into the company that is unknown to the other 59.
No idea in fi nance has attracted as much attention as that of effi cient markets, and not all the attention has been fl attering. Rather than rehash the arguments here, we are content to observe that some markets are more effi cient than others. For example, fi nancial markets on the whole are probably much more effi cient than real asset markets.
Effi ciency does imply that the price a fi rm obtains when it sells a share of its stock is a fair price in the sense that it refl ects the value of that stock given the information available about it. Share- holders do not have to worry that they are paying too much for a stock with a low dividend or some other sort of characteristic because the market has already incorporated that characteristic into the price. We sometimes say that the information has been “priced out.”
Th e concept of effi cient markets can be explained further by replying to a frequent objection. It is sometimes argued that the market cannot be effi cient because stock prices fl uctuate from day to day. If the prices are right, the argument goes, then why do they change so much and so oft en? From our prior discussion, these price movements are in no way inconsistent with effi ciency. Investors are bombarded with information every day. Th e fact that prices fl uctuate is, at least in part, a refl ection of that information fl ow. Th e Canadian government’s announcement on October 31st, 2006, to impose a new tax on income trusts came as a shock for the industry, and the S&P/ TSX Composite Index immediately plummeted by 294 points as a reaction to this news.11 Th is suggests the evidence that the markets are “informationally effi cient.” In fact, the absence of price movements in a world that changes as rapidly as ours would suggest ineffi ciency.12
11 TwoCanadian studies documents how this reaction reflected market efficiency: I.A. Glew and L.D. Johnson, “Conse- quences of the Halloween Nightmare: Analysis of Investors’ Response to an Overnight Tax Legislation Change in the Canadian Income Trust Sector,” Canadian Journal of Administrative Sciences, 2011, Vol. 28, Number 1, pp.53-69 and B. Amoako-Adu and B.F. Smith, “Valuation Effects of Recent Corporate Dividend and Income Trust Distribution Tax Changes,” Canadian Journal of Administrative Sciences, 2008, Vol.25, Number 1, pp. 55-66. 12 For a Canadian study showing the impact of some of this daily information flow related to business relocation an- nouncements, see, H. Bhabra, U. Lel, and D. Tirtiroglu, “Stock Market’s Reaction to Business Relocations: Canadian Evidence,” Canadian Journal of Administrative Sciences, December 2002, Vol. 19, Number 4, pp. 346–358.
efficient markets hypothesis (EMH) The hypothesis is that actual capital markets, such as the TSX, are efficient.
Chapter 12: Lessons from Capital Market History 337
12Ross_Chapter12_3rd_A.indd 33712Ross_Chapter12_3rd_A.indd 337 12-11-12 13:3212-11-12 13:32
Jeremy Siegel on Efficient Market Theory and the Crisis
Financial journalist and best-selling author Roger Lowenstein didn’t mince words in a piece for the Washington Post this summer: “The upside of the current Great Recession is that it could drive a stake through the heart of the academic nostrum known as the effi cient-market hypothesis.” In a similar vein, the highly respected money manager and fi nancial analyst Jeremy Grantham wrote in his quarterly letter last January: “The incredibly inaccurate effi cient market theory [caused] a lethally dangerous combination of asset bubbles, lax controls, pernicious incentives and wickedly complicated instruments [that] led to our current plight.”
But is the Effi cient Market Hypothesis (EMH) really responsible for the current crisis? The answer is no. The EMH, originally put forth by Eugene Fama of the University of Chicago in the 1960s, states that the prices of securities refl ect all known information that impacts their value. The hypothesis does not claim that the market price is always right. On the contrary, it implies that the prices in the market are mostly wrong, but at any given moment it is not at all easy to say whether they are too high or too low. The fact that the best and brightest on Wall Street made so many mistakes shows how hard it is to beat the market.
This does not mean the EMH can be used as an excuse by the CEOs of the failed fi nancial fi rms or by the regulators who did not see the risks that subprime mortgage-backed securities posed to the fi nancial stability of the economy. Regulators wrongly believed that fi nancial fi rms were offsetting their credit risks, while the banks and credit rating agencies were fooled by faulty models that underestimated the risk in real estate.
After the 1982 recession, the U.S. and world economies entered into a long period where the fl uctuations in variables such as gross domestic product, industrial production, and employment were signifi cantly lower than they had been since World War II. Economists called this period the “Great Moderation” and attributed the increased stability to better monetary policy, a larger service sector and better inventory control, among other factors.
The economic response to the Great Moderation was predictable: risk premiums shrank and individuals and fi rms took on more leverage. Housing prices were boosted by historically low nominal and real interest rates and the development of the securitized subprime lending market.
According to data collected by Prof. Robert Shiller of Yale University, in the 61 years from 1945 through 2006, the maximum cumulative decline in the average price of homes was 2.84% in 1991. If this low volatility of home prices persisted into the future, a mortgage security composed of a nationally diversifi ed portfolio of loans comprising the fi rst 80% of a home’s value would have never come close to defaulting. The credit quality of home buyers was secondary because it was
thought that underlying collateral—the home—could always cover the principal in the event the homeowner defaulted. These models led credit agencies to rate these subprime mortgages as “investment grade.”
But this assessment was faulty. From 2000 through 2006, national home prices rose by 88.7%, far more than the 17.5% gain in the consumer price index or the paltry 1% rise in median household income. Never before have home prices jumped that far ahead of prices and incomes.
This should have sent up red fl ags and cast doubts on using models that looked only at historical declines to judge future risk. But these fl ags were ignored as Wall Street was reaping large profi ts bundling and selling the securities while Congress was happy that more Americans could enjoy the “American Dream” of home ownership. Indeed, through government- sponsored enterprises such as Fannie Mae and Freddie Mac, Washington helped fuel the subprime boom.
Neither the rating agencies’ mistakes nor the overleveraging by the fi nancial fi rms in the subprime securities is the fault of the Effi cient Market Hypothesis. The fact that the yields on these mortgages were high despite their investment-grade rating indicated that the market was rightly suspicious of the quality of the securities, and this should have served as a warning to prospective buyers.
With few exceptions (Goldman Sachs being one), fi nancial fi rms ignored these warnings. CEOs failed to exercise their authority to monitor overall risk of the fi rm and instead put their faith in technicians whose narrow models could not capture the big picture. One can only wonder if the large investment banks would have taken on such risks when they were all partnerships and the lead partner had all his wealth in the fi rm, as they were just a few decades ago.
The misreading of these economic trends did not just reside within the private sector. Former Fed Chairman Alan Greenspan stated before congressional committees last December that he was “shocked” that the top executives of the fi nancial fi rms exposed their stockholders to such risk. But had he looked at their balance sheets, he would have realized that not only did they put their own shareholders at risk, but their leveraged positions threatened the viability of the entire fi nancial system.
As home prices continued to climb and subprime mortgages proliferated, Mr. Greenspan and current Fed Chairman Ben Bernanke were perhaps the only ones infl uential enough to sound an alarm and soften the oncoming crisis. But they did not. For all the deserved kudos that the central bank received for their management of the crisis after the Lehman bankruptcy, the failure to see these problems building will stand as a permanent blot on the Fed’s record.
IN THEIR OWN WORDS…
338 Part 5: Risk and Return
12Ross_Chapter12_3rd_A.indd 33812Ross_Chapter12_3rd_A.indd 338 12-11-12 13:3212-11-12 13:32
Our crisis wasn’t due to blind faith in the Effi cient Market Hypothesis. The fact that risk premiums were low does not mean they were nonexistent and that market prices were right. Despite the recent recession, the Great Moderation is real and our economy is inherently more stable.
But this does not mean that risks have disappeared. To use an analogy, the fact that automobiles today are safer than they were years ago does not mean that you can drive at 120 mph.
A small bump on the road, perhaps insignifi cant at lower speeds, will easily fl ip the best-engineered car. Our fi nancial fi rms drove too fast, our central bank failed to stop them, and the housing defl ation crashed the banks and the economy.
Jeremy J. Siegel, Russell E. Palmer Professor of Finance at the University of Pennsylvania’s Wharton School, is the author of “Stocks for the Long Run,” now in its 5th edition from McGraw-Hill.
Market Eff iciency—Forms and Evidence It is common to distinguish among three forms of market effi ciency. Depending on the degree of effi ciency, we say that markets are either weak form effi cient, semistrong form effi cient, or strong form effi cient. Th e diff erence between these forms relates to what information is refl ected in prices.
We start with the extreme case. If the market is strong form effi cient, then all information of every kind is refl ected in stock prices. In such a market, there is no such thing as inside informa- tion. Th us, in our previous 3DT example, we apparently were assuming the market was not strong form effi cient.
Casual observation, particularly in recent years, suggests that inside information exists and it can be valuable to possess. Whether it is lawful or ethical to use that information is another issue. In any event, we conclude that private information about a particular stock may exist that is not currently refl ected in the price of the stock. For example, prior knowledge of a takeover attempt can be very valuable as illustrated by the case of Raj Rajaratnam who was sentenced to 11 years in prison for illegal insider trading in New York in 2011. Th e prosecution proved that his Galleon Management fund earned $72 million U.S. based on illegal tips from corporate insiders.13 Th e OSC is responsible for enforcement of insider trading rule is Canada. Th e accompanying box discusses one case of insider trading.
Th e second form of effi ciency, semistrong effi ciency, is the most controversial. In a market that is semistrong form effi cient, all public information is refl ected in the stock price. Th e reason this form is controversial is that it implies that a security analyst who tries to identify mispriced stocks using, for example, fi nancial statement information is wasting time because that information is already refl ected in the current price.
Studies of semistrong form effi ciency include event studies that measure whether prices adjust rapidly to new information following the effi cient markets pattern in Figure 12.7. Announce- ments of mergers, dividends, earnings, capital expenditures, and new issues of securities are a few examples. Although there are exceptions, event study tests for major exchanges including the TSX, NYSE, and Nasdaq generally support the view that these markets are semistrong effi cient with respect to the arrival of new information. In fact, the tests suggest these markets are gift ed with a certain amount of foresight. By this, we mean that news tends to leak out and be refl ected in stock prices even before the offi cial release of the information.
Referring back to Figure 12.7, what this means is that for stocks listed on major exchanges, the stock price reaction to new information is typically the one shown for an effi cient market. In some cases, the price follows the pattern shown for overreaction and correction. For example, a classic study found that stocks recommended in Th e Financial Post “Hot Stock” column experienced price increases followed by declines.14 Our conclusion here is that the market is mainly effi cient
13 The film Wall Street, Twentieth Century Fox, 1987, realistically illustrates how valuable the information can be. More on the Galleon story may be found at washingtonpost.com/business/economy/hedge-fund-billionaire-gets-11-year- sentence-in-fraud-case/2011/10/13/gIQAa0PZhL_print.html. The trading activities of company insiders in Canada can now be tracked on the System for Electronic Disclosure by Insiders at sedi.ca. To know more about the securities law and enforcements, visit osc.gov.on.ca/ 14 For more details see V. Mehrotra, W.W. Yu, and C. Zhang, “Market Reactions to The Financial Post’s ‘Hot Stock’ Col- umn,” Canadian Journal of Administrative Sciences 16, June 1999, pp. 118–131.
Chapter 12: Lessons from Capital Market History 339
12Ross_Chapter12_3rd_A.indd 33912Ross_Chapter12_3rd_A.indd 339 12-11-12 13:3212-11-12 13:32
but that there are some exceptions. If the market is effi cient in the semistrong form, no matter what publicly available information
mutual fund managers rely on to pick stocks, their average returns should be the same as those of the average investor in the market as a whole. Researchers have tested mutual fund performance against a market index and found that, on average, fund managers have no special ability to beat the market.15 Th is supports semistrong form effi ciency. An important practical result of such studies is the growth of index funds that follow a passive investment strategy of investing in the market index. For example, TD Waterhouse Canadian Index Fund invests in the S&P/TSX Com- posite and its performance tracks that of the index. Th e fund has lower expenses than an actively managed fund because it does not employ analysts to pick stocks. Investors who believe in market effi ciency prefer index investing because market effi ciency means that the analysts will not beat the market consistently.
Th e third form of effi ciency, weak form effi ciency, suggests that, at a minimum, the current price of a stock refl ects its own past prices. In other words, studying past prices in an attempt to identify mispriced securities is futile if the market is weak form effi cient. Research support- ing weak form effi ciency suggests that successive price changes are generally consistent with a random walk where deviations from expected return are random. Tests on both the TSX and NYSE support weak form effi ciency, although the results are more conclusive for the NYSE.16 Th is form of effi ciency might seem rather mild; however, it implies that searching for patterns in historical prices that identify mispriced stocks does not work in general. An exception to this statement occurred in the hot high tech market of the late 1990s. Some investors were able to achieve superior returns following momentum strategies based on the idea that stocks that went up yesterday are likely also to go up today. Day trading became very popular in this “momentum market.”17
Although the bulk of the evidence supports the view that major markets such as the TSX, NYSE, and Nasdaq are reasonably effi cient, we would not be fair if we did not note the existence of selected contrary results oft en termed anomalies.18 Th ese anomalies include crashes like those in 2008 and 1987 and seasonal movements in markets that have no rational explanation. We discuss these in detail in Chapter 26.
In summary, what does research on capital market history say about market effi ciency? At risk of going out on a limb, the evidence does seem to tell us three things: First, prices do appear to respond very rapidly to new information, and the response is at least not grossly diff erent from what we would expect in an effi cient market. Second, the future of market prices, particularly in the short run, is very diffi cult to predict based on publicly available information. Th ird, if mis- priced stocks do exist, there is no obvious means of identifying them. Put another way, simple- minded schemes based on public information will probably not be successful.19
15 Two Canadian studies are M. A. Ayadi and L. Kryzanowski, “Portfolio Performance Measurement Using APM-free Kernel Models,” Journal of Banking and Finance, 2005, Vol. 29, pp. 623–659 and G. Athanassakos, P. Carayannopoulos, and M. Racine, “Mutual Fund Performance: The Canadian Experience Between 1985 and 1996,” Canadian Journal of Financial Planning of the CAFP, June 2000, Vol. 1, Issue 2, pp. 5–9. Chapter 26 discusses more of the evidence. 16 A recent study supporting weak form efficiency for the TSX is V. Alexeev and F. Tapon, “ Testing Weak Form Effi- ciency on the Toronto Stock Exchange”, Journal of Empirical Finance, 2011, Vol. 18, pp. 661–691. 17 Three Canadian studies on momentum are R. Deaves and P. Miu, “ Refining Momentum Strategies by Conditioning on Prior Long-term Returns: Canadian Evidence”, Canadian Journal of Administrative Sciences, 2007, Vol. 24, pp. 135– 145; M. Cao and J. Wei, “Uncovering Sector Momentums”, Canadian Investment Review, Winter 2002, pages 14–22 and M. Inglis and S. Cleary, “Momentum in Canadian Stock Returns,” Canadian Journal of Administrative Sciences, September 1998, pp. 279–291. 18 The effect is international and has been documented in most stock exchanges around the world occurring immedi- ately after the close of the tax year. See V. Jog, “Stock Pricing Anomalies Revisited,” Canadian Investment Review, Win- ter 1998, pp. 28–33 and S. Elfakhani, L.J. Lockwood, and R.S. Zaher, “Small Firm and Value Effects in the Canadian Stock Market,” Journal of Financial Research 21, Fall 1998, pp. 277–291. 19 The suggested readings for this chapter give references to the large body of U.S. and Canadian research on efficient markets. We return to the topic of market efficiency and behavioural finance in Chapter 26.
340 Part 5: Risk and Return
12Ross_Chapter12_3rd_A.indd 34012Ross_Chapter12_3rd_A.indd 340 12-11-12 13:3212-11-12 13:32
A Case of Insider Trading in Canada
Andrew Rankin on Thursday confi rmed for the fi rst time that he is at fault for letting details of secret merger and takeover deals fall into the hands of a longtime friend, who used the information to make $4.5 million through insider trading.
The one-time star Bay Street investment banker, who was fi red from his job almost seven years ago, made the surprise admission as part of a settlement agreement with the Ontario Securities Commission, which requires the market regulator to drop 10 counts of insider tipping against him.
The deal comes less than a week before the start of Rankin’s second criminal trial. (His 2005 conviction was overturned on appeal.)
Rankin’s “negligence” made Daniel Duic’s insider trading possible, the agreement says, noting that Rankin gave his
friend unsupervised access to his Toronto home, where secret documents were left out in the open.
Rankin, who declined to speak with reporters, also acknowledged that he discussed sensitive transaction details with Duic, but denied that he knew his former private-school classmate planned to use the information to make illegal trades. As part of Thursday’s deal, the former Bay Street whiz kid must pay $250,000 toward the regulator’s costs. He is also permanently banned from the securities industry and barred from trading for 10 years. Rankin was fi red from his job as a managing director at RBC Dominion Securities in 2001. Criminal charges were later laid and he was convicted of insider tipping in July 2005.
Source: canada.com/topics/news/story.html?id=b8c871b8-ed83-43f7-b6cb- 0b824bd0a6dc&k=54846. Used with permission.
IN THEIR OWN WORDS…
1. What is an efficient market?
2. What are the forms of market efficiency?
3. What evidence exists that major stock markets are efficient?
4. Explain anomalies in the efficient market hypothesis.
12.7 SUMMARY AND CONCLUSIONS
Th is chapter explores the subject of capital market history. Such history is useful because it tells us what to expect in the way of returns from risky assets. We summed up our study of market history with two key lessons:
1. Risky assets, on average, earn a risk premium. There is a reward for bearing risk. 2. The greater the risk from a risky investment, the greater is the required reward.
Th ese lessons have signifi cant implications for fi nancial managers. We consider these implica- tions in the chapters ahead.
We also discussed the concept of market effi ciency. In an effi cient market, prices adjust quickly and correctly to new information. Consequently, asset prices in effi cient markets are rarely too high or too low. How effi cient capital markets (such as the TSX and NYSE) are is a matter of debate, but, at a minimum, they are probably much more effi cient than most real asset markets.
Key Terms arithmetic average return (page 333) efficient capital market (page 335) efficient markets hypothesis (EMH) (page 337) geometric average return (page 333) normal distribution (page 329)
risk premium (page 325) standard deviation (page 326) value at risk (VaR) (page 331) variance (page 326)
Concept Questions
Chapter 12: Lessons from Capital Market History 341
12Ross_Chapter12_3rd_A.indd 34112Ross_Chapter12_3rd_A.indd 341 12-11-12 13:3212-11-12 13:32
Chapter Review Problems and Self-Test 12.1 Recent Return History Use Table 12.1 to calculate the aver-
age return over the five years 2007–2011 for Canadian com- mon stocks, small stocks, and Treasury bills.
12.2 More Recent Return History Calculate the standard devia- tions using information from Problem 12.1. Which of the in- vestments was the most volatile over this period?
Answers to Self-Test Problems 12.1 We calculate the averages as follows:
Year TSX Small T-bills
2007 0.0980 -0.11380 0.0440
2008 -0.3300 -0.46600 0.0330
2008 0.3435 0.86800 0.0060 2010 0.1727 0.36100 0.0050 2011 -0.0857 -0.19500 0.0100
Average 0.0397 0.09084 0.0196
12.2 We first need to calculate the deviations from the average returns. Using the averages from Problem 12.1, we get: Year TSX Small T-bills
2007 0.0583 -0.2046 0.0244
2008 -0.3697 -0.5568 0.0134
2009 0.3038 0.7772 -0.0136 2010 0.1330 0.2702 -0.0146 2011 -0.1254 -0.2858 -0.0096
We square the deviations and calculate the variances and standard deviations: Year TSX Small T-bills
2007 0.003399 0.041878 0.000595 2008 0.136678 0.310071 0.000180 2009 0.092294 0.603978 0.000185 2010 0.017689 0.072986 0.000213 2011 0.015725 0.081705 0.000092
Variance 0.066446 0.277654 0.000316 Standard deviation 0.257772 0.526929 0.017785
To calculate the variances, we added the squared deviations and divided by four, the number of returns less one. Notice that the small stocks had substantially greater volatility with a higher average return. Once again, such investments are risky, particularly over short periods.
Concepts Review and Critical Thinking Questions 1. (LO4) Given that Nortel was up by more than 300 percent in
the 12 months ending in July 2000, why didn’t all investors hold Nortel?
2. (LO4) Given that Hayes was down by 98 percent for 1998, why did some investors hold the stock? Why didn’t they sell out before the price declined so sharply?
3. (LO2, 3) We have seen that, over long periods of time, stock investments have tended to substantially outperform bond in- vestments. However, it is not at all uncommon to observe in- vestors with long horizons holding entirely bonds. Are such investors irrational?
4. (LO4) Explain why a characteristic of an efficient market is that investments in that market have zero NPVs.
5. (LO4) A stock market analyst is able to identify mispriced stocks by comparing the average price for the last 10 days to the average price for the last 60 days. If this is true, what do you know about the market?
6. (LO4) If a market is semistrong form efficient, is it also weak form efficient? Explain.
7. (LO4) What are the implications of the efficient markets hy- pothesis for investors who buy and sell stocks in an attempt to “beat the market”?
8. (LO4) Critically evaluate the following statement: Playing the stock market is like gambling. Such speculative investing has no social value, other than the pleasure people get from this form of gambling.
9. (LO4) There are several celebrated investors and stock pick- ers frequently mentioned in the financial press who have re- corded huge returns on their investments over the past two decades. Is the success of these particular investors an invali- dation of the EMH? Explain.
10. (LO4) For each of the following scenarios, discuss whether profit opportunities exist from trading in the stock of the firm under the conditions that (1) the market is not weak form ef- ficient, (2) the market is weak form but not semistrong form
342 Part 5: Risk and Return
12Ross_Chapter12_3rd_A.indd 34212Ross_Chapter12_3rd_A.indd 342 12-11-12 13:3212-11-12 13:32
efficient, (3) the market is semistrong form but not strong form efficient, and (4) the market is strong form efficient. a. The stock price has risen steadily each day for the past 30
days. b. The financial statements for a company were released
three days ago, and you believe you’ve uncovered some
anomalies in the company’s inventory and cost control reporting techniques that are causing the firm’s true li- quidity strength to be understated.
c. You observe that the senior management of a company has been buying a lot of the company’s stock on the open market over the past week.
Questions and Problems 1. Calculating Returns (LO1) Suppose a stock had an initial price of $91 per share, paid a dividend of $2.40 per share during the
year, and had an ending share price of $102. Compute the percentage total return. 2. Calculating Yields (LO1) In Problem 1, what was the dividend yield? The capital gains yield? 3. Return Calculations (LO1) Rework Problems 1 and 2 assuming the ending share price is $83. 4. Calculating Returns (LO1) Suppose you bought a 7 percent coupon bond one year ago for $1,040. The bond sells for $1,070
today. a. Assuming a $1,000 face value, what was your total dollar return on this investment over the past year? b. What was your total nominal rate of return on this investment over the past year? c. If the inflation rate last year was 4 percent, what was your total real rate of return on this investment?
5. Nominal versus Real Returns (LO2) What was the average annual return on Canadian stock from 1957 through 2011: a. In nominal terms? b. In real terms?
6. Bond Returns (LO2) What is the historical real return on Scotia Capital Markets long bonds? 7. Calculating Returns and Variability (LO1) Using the following returns, calculate the arithmetic average returns, the variances,
and the standard deviations for X and Y.
Year
Returns
X Y
1 8% 16% 2 21 38 3 17 14 4 -16 -22 5 9 26
8. Risk Premiums (LO2, 3) Refer to Table 12.1 in the text and look at the period from 1970 through 1975. a. Calculate the arithmetic average returns for large-company stocks and T-bills over this period. b. Calculate the standard deviation of the returns for large-company stocks and T-bills over this period. c. Calculate the observed risk premium in each year for the large-company stocks versus the T-bills. What was the average
risk premium over this period? What was the standard deviation of the risk premium over this period? d. Is it possible for the risk premium to be negative before an investment is undertaken? Can the risk premium be negative
after the fact? Explain. 9. Calculating Returns and Variability (LO1) You’ve observed the following returns on Regina Computer’s stock over the past
five years: 7 percent, -12 percent, 11 percent, 38 percent, and 14 percent. a. What was the arithmetic average return on Regina’s stock over this five-year period? b. What was the variance of Regina’s returns over this period? The standard deviation?
10. Calculating Real Returns and Risk Premiums (LO1) For Problem 9, suppose the average inflation rate over this period was 3.5 percent and the average T-bill rate over the period was 4.2 percent.
a. What was the average real return on Regina’s stock? b. What was the average nominal risk premium on Regina’s stock?
11. Calculating Real Rates (LO1) Given the information in Problems 9 and 10, what was the average real risk-free rate over this time period? What was the average real risk premium?
12. Effects of Inflation (LO2) Look at Table 12.1 and Figure 12.4 in the text. When were T-bill rates at their highest over the period from 1957 through 2011? Why do you think they were so high during this period? What relationship underlies your answer?
13. Calculating Investment Returns (LO1) You bought one of Glenelm Co.’s 8 percent coupon bonds one year ago for $1,030. These bonds make annual payments and mature six years from now. Suppose you decide to sell your bonds today, when the required return on the bonds is 7 percent. If the inflation rate was 4.2 percent over the past year, what was your total real return on investment?
Basic (Questions
1–12)
7
8
Intermediate (Questions
13–20)
Chapter 12: Lessons from Capital Market History 343
12Ross_Chapter12_3rd_A.indd 34312Ross_Chapter12_3rd_A.indd 343 12-11-12 13:3212-11-12 13:32
14. Calculating Returns and Variability (LO1) You find a certain stock that had returns of 7 percent, -12 percent, 18 percent, and 19 percent for four of the last five years. If the average return of the stock over this period was 10.5 percent, what was the stock’s return for the missing year? What is the standard deviation of the stock’s return? Assume the face value of the bond is $1,000.
15. Arithmetic and Geometric Returns (LO1) A stock has had returns of 3 percent, 38 percent, 21 percent, -15 percent, 29 percent, and -13 percent over the last six years. What are the arithmetic and geometric returns for the stock?
16. Arithmetic and Geometric Returns (LO1) A stock has had the following year-end prices and dividends: Year Price Dividend
1 $60.18 — 2 73.66 $0.60 3 94.18 0.64 4 89.35 0.72 5 78.49 0.80 6 95.05 1.20
What are the arithmetic and geometric returns for the stock? 17. Using Return Distributions (LO3) Suppose the returns on long-term corporate bonds are normally distributed. Based on the
historical record, what is the approximate probability that your return on these bonds will be less than -2.2 percent in a given year? What range of returns would you expect to see 95 percent of the time? What range would you expect to see 99 percent of the time?
18. Using Return Distributions (LO3) Assuming that the returns from holding small-company stocks are normally distributed, what is the approximate probability that your money will double in value in a single year? What about triple in value?
19. Distributions (LO3) In Problem 18, what is the probability that the return is less than -100 percent (think)? What are the implications for the distribution of returns?
20. Calculating Returns (LO2, 3) Refer to Table 12.1 in the text and look at the period from 1973 through 1980: a. Calculate the average return for Treasury bills and the average annual inflation rate (consumer price index) for this period. b. Calculate the standard deviation of Treasury bill returns and inflation over this period. c. Calculate the real return for each year. What is the average real return for Treasury bills? d. Many people consider Treasury bills risk-free. What do these calculations tell you about the potential risks of
Treasury bills? 21. Using Probability Distributions (LO3) Suppose the returns on Canadian stocks are normally distributed. Based on the
historical record, use a cumulative normal probability table (rounded to the nearest table value) to determine the probability that in any given year you will lose money by investing in common stock.20
22. Using Probability Distributions (LO3) Suppose the returns on Scotia Capital Markets long bonds and T-bills are normally distributed. Based on the historical record, use a cumulative normal probability table (rounded to the nearest table value) to answer the following questions:
a. What is the probability that in any given year, the return on long-term corporate bonds will be greater than 10 percent? Less than 0 percent?
b. What is the probability that in any given year, the return on T-bills will be greater than 10 percent? Less than 0 percent? c. In 1981, the return on Scotia Capital Markets long bonds was -2.09 percent. How likely is it that such a low return will
recur at some point in the future? T-bills had a return of 19.11 percent in this same year. How likely is it that such a high return on T-bills will recur at some point in the future?
20 The table can be found at the link: miha.ef.uni-lj.si/_dokumenti3plus2/195166/norm-tables.pdf
Challenge (Questions
21–22)
344 Part 5: Risk and Return
12Ross_Chapter12_3rd_A.indd 34412Ross_Chapter12_3rd_A.indd 344 12-11-12 13:3212-11-12 13:32
A Job at Hillsdale Inc.
You recently graduated from university, and your job search led you to Hillsdale Inc. Because you felt the company’s busi- ness was taking off, you accepted a job offer. The first day on the job, while you are finishing your employment paperwork, Shane Shillingford, who works in Finance, stops by to inform you about the company’s defined contribution (DC) pension plan. A DC pension plan is a retirement plan offered by many companies. Such plans are tax-deferred savings vehicles, meaning that any deposits you make into the plan are de- ducted from your current pre-tax income, so no current taxes are paid on the money. For example, assume your salary will be $80,000 per year. If you contribute $4,000 to the DC pen- sion plan, you will pay taxes on only $76,000 in income. There are also no taxes paid on any capital gains or income while you are invested in the plan, but you do pay taxes when you withdraw money at retirement. As is fairly common, the company also has a 5 percent match. This means that the company will match your contribution up to 5 percent of your salary, but you must contribute to get the match. The DC pension plan has several options for investments, most of which are mutual funds. A mutual fund is a portfolio of assets. When you purchase shares in a mutual fund, you are actually purchasing partial ownership of the fund’s assets. The return of the fund is the weighted average of the return of the assets owned by the fund, minus any expenses. The largest expense is typically the management fee, paid to the fund manager. The management fee is compensation for the man- ager, who makes all of the investment decisions for the fund. Hillsdale Inc. uses TD Canada Trust as its DC pension plan administrator. Here are the investment options offered for employees:
Company Stock One option in the DC pension plan is stock in Hillsdale Inc. The company is currently privately held. How- ever, when you interviewed with the owner, Kevin Cooper, he informed you the company stock was expected to go public in the next three to four years. Until then, a company stock price is simply set each year by the board of directors. TD Canadian Index Fund This mutual fund tracks the S&P/ TSX Composite. Stocks in the fund are weighted exactly the same as the S&P/TSX Composite. This means the fund return is approximately the return on the S&P/TSX Composite, mi- nus expenses. Because an index fund purchases assets based on the composition of the index it is following, the fund man- ager is not required to research stocks and make investment decisions. The result is that the fund expenses are usually low. The TD Canadian Index Fund charges expenses of 0.84 per- cent of assets per year. TD Canadian Small-Cap Equity Fund This fund primarily invests in small-capitalization stocks. As such, the returns of the fund are more volatile. The fund can also invest 10 percent of its assets in companies based outside Canada. This fund charges 2.42 percent in expenses. TD Canadian Blue Chip Equity Fund This fund invests pri- marily in large-capitalization stocks of companies based in
Canada. The fund is managed by Margot Richie and has out- performed the market in six of the last eight years. The fund charges 2.23 percent in expenses.
TD Canadian Bond Fund This fund invests in long-term cor- porate bonds issued by Canada-domiciled companies. The fund is restricted to investments in bonds with an investment-grade credit rating. This fund charges 1.05 percent in expenses.
TD Canadian Money Market Fund This fund invests in short-term, high credit-quality debt instruments, which in- clude Treasury bills. As such, the return on the money market fund is only slightly higher than the return on Treasury bills. Because of the credit quality and short-term nature of the in- vestments, there is only a very slight risk of negative return. The fund charges 0.92 percent in expenses.
QUESTIONS
1. What advantages do the mutual funds offer compared to the company stock?
2. Assume that you invest 5 percent of your salary and re- ceive the full 5 percent match from Hillsdale Inc. What EAR do you earn from the match? What conclusions do you draw about matching plans?
3. Assume you decide you should invest at least part of your money in large-capitalization stocks of companies based in Canada. What are the advantages and disadvantages of choosing the TD Canadian Blue Chip Equity Fund compared to the TD Canadian Index Fund?
4. The returns on the TD Canadian Small-Cap Equity Fund are the most volatile of all the mutual funds offered in the DC pension plan. Why would you ever want to invest in this fund? When you examine the expenses of the mutual funds, you will notice that this fund also has the highest expenses. Does this affect your decision to invest in this fund?
5. A measure of risk-adjusted performance that is often used is the Sharpe ratio. The Sharpe ratio is calculated as the risk premium of an asset divided by its standard devia- tion. The standard deviation and return of the funds over the past 10 years are listed in the following table. Calcu- late the Sharpe ratio for each of these funds. Assume that the expected return and standard deviation of the com- pany stock will be 18 percent and 70 percent, respec- tively. Calculate the Sharpe ratio for the company stock. How appropriate is the Sharpe ratio for these assets? When would you use the Sharpe ratio?
10-Year
Fund Annual
return (%) Standard
deviation (%)
TD Canadian Index 6.42 13.75 TD Canadian Small-Cap Equity 5.44 17.05 TD Canadian Blue Chip Equity 4.33 11.55 TD Canadian Bond 6.17 3.03
Source: theglobeandmail.com/globe-investor/funds-and-etfs/funds/
6. What portfolio allocation would you choose? Why? Ex- plain your thinking carefully.
MINI CASE
Chapter 12: Lessons from Capital Market History 345
12Ross_Chapter12_3rd_A.indd 34512Ross_Chapter12_3rd_A.indd 345 12-11-12 13:3212-11-12 13:32
In our last chapter, we learned some important lessons from capital market history. Most importantly, there is a reward, on average, for bearing risk. We called this reward a risk premium. Th e second lesson is that this risk premium is larger for riskier investments. Th e principle that higher returns can be earned only by taking greater risks appeals to our moral sense that we can- not have something for nothing. Th is chapter explores the economic and managerial implications of this basic idea.
Th us far, we have concentrated mainly on the return behaviour of a few large portfolios. We need to expand our consideration to include individual assets and mutual funds. Accordingly, the purpose of this chapter is to provide the background necessary for learning how the risk premium is determined for such assets.
When we examine the risks associated with individual assets, we fi nd two types of risk: system- atic and unsystematic. Th is distinction is crucial because, as we see, systematic risks aff ect almost all assets in the economy, at least to some degree, while a particular unsystematic risk aff ects at most a small number of assets. We then develop the principle of diversifi cation, which shows that highly diversifi ed portfolios tend to have almost no unsystematic risk.
Th e principle of diversifi cation has an important implication: To a diversifi ed investor, only systematic risk matters. It follows that in deciding whether to buy a particular individual asset, a diversifi ed investor is concerned only with that asset’s systematic risk. Th is is a key observa- tion, and it allows us to say a great deal about the risks and returns on individual assets. In particular, it is the basis for a famous relationship between risk and return called the security market line, or SML. To develop the SML, we introduce the equally famous beta coeffi cient, one of the centrepieces of modern fi nance. Beta and the SML are key concepts because they supply
manulifemutualfunds.ca/
RETURN, RISK, AND THE SECURITY MARKET LINE
C H A P T E R 1 3
A s of March 31, 2012, Manulife Dividend Fund generated a 5 year average return of 0.62 percent, underperforming the S&P/TSX Com-
posite index, which in the same period gave an aver-
age return of 1.66 percent. In hindsight, investment
in S&P/TSX Composite index looks to be a better
investment than in the Manulife Dividend Fund. But
can we judge an investment only on the basis of
return? Over the last year the Manulife fund had a
loss of 6.82%, which was better than the perform-
ance of the S&P/TSX Composite, which lost 9.76%.
One cannot talk about returns in isolation because
investment decisions always involve a trade-off
between risk and return. This chapter explores the
relationship between risk and return and also intro-
duces the important concept of diversification and
asset pricing.
Learning Object ives
After studying this chapter, you should understand:
LO1 The calculation for expected returns and standard deviations for individual securities and portfolios.
LO2 The principle of diversification and the role of correlation.
LO3 Systematic and unsystematic risk.
LO4 Beta as a measure of risk and the security market line.
Th e
M an
uf ac
tu re
rs L
ife In
su ra
nc e
C om
pa ny
is t
he o
w ne
r of
a ll
rig ht
s,
in cl
ud in
g co
py rig
ht a
nd t
ra de
m ar
k rig
ht s,
in a
nd t
o th
e M
an ul
ife M
ut ua
l Fu
nd s
lo go
, a nd
a ll
rig ht
s, in
cl ud
in g
tr ad
e m
ar k
rig ht
s, in
t he
w or
ds
“M an
ul ife
”, “
M an
ul ife
M ut
ua l F
un ds
”, a
nd “
M an
ul ife
D iv
id en
d Fu
nd ”.
Sa
id c
op yr
ig ht
p ro
te ct
ed lo
go a
nd t
ra de
m ar
ks a
re r
ep ro
du ce
d in
t hi
s te
xt u
nd er
li ce
ns e
fr om
T he
M an
uf ac
tu re
rs L
ife In
su ra
nc e
C om
pa ny
.
13Ross_Chapter13_4th.indd 34613Ross_Chapter13_4th.indd 346 12-11-27 12:1012-11-27 12:10
us with at least part of the answer to the question of how to determine the required return on an investment.
13.1 Expected Returns and Variances
In our previous chapter, we discussed how to calculate average returns and variances using his- torical data. We now begin to discuss how to analyze returns and variances when the information we have concerns future possible returns and their possibilities.
Expected Return We start with a straightforward case. Consider a single period of time, say, a year. We have two stocks, L and U, with the following characteristics: Stock L is expected to have a return of 25 percent in the coming year. Stock U is expected to have a return of 20 percent for the same period.1
In a situation like this, if all investors agreed on the expected returns, why would anyone want to hold Stock U? Aft er all, why invest in one stock when the expectation is that another will do better? Clearly, the answer must depend on the risk of the two investments. Th e return on Stock L, although it is expected to be 25 percent, could actually be higher or lower.
For example, suppose the economy booms. In this case, we think Stock L would have a 70 per- cent return. If the economy enters a recession, we think the return would be -20 percent. Th us, we say there are two states of the economy, meaning that these are the only two possible situations. Th is setup is oversimplifi ed, of course, but it allows us to illustrate some key ideas without a lot of computation.
Suppose we think a boom and a recession are equally likely to happen, a 50-50 chance of each. Table 13.1 illustrates the basic information we have described and some additional information about Stock U. Notice that Stock U earns 30 percent if there is a recession and 10 percent if there is a boom.
TABLE 13.1
States of the economy and stock returns
State of the Economy Probability of State
of the Economy
Security returns if state occurs
L U
Recession 0.5 -20% 30%
Boom 0.5 70 10 1.0
Obviously, if you buy one of these stocks, say Stock U, what you earn in any particular year depends on what the economy does during that year. However, suppose the probabilities stay the same through time. If you hold U for a number of years, you’ll earn 30 percent about half the time and 10 percent the other half. In this case, we say that your expected return on Stock U, E(RU), is 20 percent:
E(RU) = .50 × 30% + .50 × 10% = 20%
In other words, you should expect to earn 20 percent from this stock, on average. For Stock L, the probabilities are the same, but the possible returns are diff erent. Here we lose
20 percent half the time, and we gain 70 percent the other half. Th e expected return on L, E(RL), is thus 25 percent:
1 This is a good point to clarify the difference between expected return and required return. While the expected return reflects how investors think the stock will actually perform over a future period, the required return is the amount that investors must receive to compensate them for the risk they are accepting on any given investment.
expected return Return on a risky asset expected in the future.
Chapter 13: Return, Risk, and the Security Market Line 347
13Ross_Chapter13_4th.indd 34713Ross_Chapter13_4th.indd 347 12-11-27 12:1012-11-27 12:10
E(RL) = .50 × -20% + .50 × 70% = 25%
Table 13.2 illustrates these calculations.
TABLE 13.2
Calculation of expected return
(1) State of
Economy
(2) Probability of State of Economy
Stock L Stock U
(3) Rate of Return if
State Occurs
(4) Product (2) × (3)
(5) Rate of Return if State Occurs
(6) Product (2) × (5)
Recession Boom
0.5 0.5 1.0
-.20 .70
-.10 .35
E(RL) = 25%
.30
.10 .15 .05
E(RU) = 20%
In our previous chapter, we defi ned the risk premium as the diff erence between the return on a risky investment and a risk-free investment, and we calculated the historical risk premiums on some diff erent investments. Using our projected returns, we can calculate the projected or expected risk premium as the diff erence between the expected return on a risky investment and the certain return on a risk-free investment.
For example, suppose risk-free investments are currently off ering 8 percent. We say the risk- free rate (which we label as Rf) is 8 percent. Given this, what is the projected risk premium on Stock U? On Stock L? Since the expected return on Stock U, E(RU), is 20 percent, the projected risk premium is:
Risk premium = Expected return - Risk-free rate [13.1] = E(RU) - Rf = 20% - 8% = 12%
Similarly, the risk premium on Stock L is 25% - 8% = 17%. In general, the expected return on a security or other asset is simply equal to the sum of the
possible returns multiplied by their probabilities. So, if we have 100 possible returns, we would multiply each one by its probability and add the results. Th e result would be the expected return. Th e risk premium would be the diff erence between this expected return and the risk-free rate.
A useful generalized equation for expected return is:
E(R) = Σ j
Rj × Pj [13.2] where Rj = value of the jth outcome Pj = associated probability of occurrence Σ
j = the sum over all j
EXAMPLE 13.1: Unequal Probabilities
Look back at Tables 13.1 and 13.2. Suppose you thought that a boom would only occur 20 percent of the time in- stead of 50 percent. What are the expected returns on Stocks U and L in this case? If the risk-free rate is 10 per- cent, what are the risk premiums?
The first thing to notice is that a recession must occur 80 percent of the time (1 - .20 = .80) because there are only two possibilities. With this in mind, Stock U has a 30 per- cent return in 80 percent of the years and a 10 percent re- turn in 20 percent of the years. To calculate the expected
return, we again just multiply the possibilities by the prob- abilities and add up the results:
E(RU) = .80 × 30% + .20 × 10% = 26%
Table 13.3 summarizes the calculations for both stocks. No- tice that the expected return on L is -2 percent.
The risk premium for Stock U is 26% - 10% = 16% in this case. The risk premium for Stock L is negative: -2% - 10% = -12%. This is a little odd, but, for reasons we discuss later, it is not impossible.
348 Part 5: Risk and Return
13Ross_Chapter13_4th.indd 34813Ross_Chapter13_4th.indd 348 12-11-27 12:1012-11-27 12:10
TABLE 13.3
(1) State of
Economy
(2) Probability of
State of Economy
Stock L Stock U
(3) Rate of Return if State Occurs
(4) Product (2) × (3)
(5) Rate of Return if State Occurs
(6) Product (2) × (5)
Recession Boom
.80
.20 1.0
-.20 .70
-.16 .14
E(RL) = -2%
.30
.10 .24 .02
E(RU) = 26%
Calculating the Variance To calculate the variances of the returns on our two stocks, we determine the squared deviations from the expected return. We then multiply each possible squared deviation by its probability. We add these, and the result is the variance. Th e standard deviation, as always, is the square root of the variance. It is important to note that later on in the chapter another alternative to calculating variance will be introduced, using the correlation coeffi cient.
Generalized equations for variance and standard deviation are
σ2 = Σj[Rj - E(R)]2 × Pj σ = √
___ σ2 [13.3]
To illustrate, Stock U has an expected return of E(RU) = 20%. In a given year, it could actually return either 30 percent or 10 percent. Th e possible deviations are thus 30% - 20% = 10% or 10% - 20% = -10%. In this case, the variance is:
Variance = σ2 = .50 × (10%)2 + .50 × (-10%)2 = .01
Th e standard deviation is the square root of this: = .10 = 10%
Standard deviation = σ = √ ___
.01 = .10 = 10%
Table 13.4 summarizes these calculations for both stocks. Notice that Stock L has a much larger variance.
TABLE 13.4
Calculation of variance
(1) State of Economy
(2) Probability of
State of Economy
(3) Return Deviation from Expected
Return
(4) Squared Return Deviation from
Expected Return
(5) Product (2) × (4)
Stock L Recession 0.5 -.20 - .25 = -.45 (-.45)2 = .2025 .10125
Boom 0.5 .70 - .25 = .45 (.45)2 = .2025 .10125
σ2L = .2025 Stock U Recession 0.5 .30 - .20 = .10 (.10)2 = .01 .005
Boom 0.5 .10 - .20 = -.10 (-.10)2 = .01 .005
σ2U = .010
Chapter 13: Return, Risk, and the Security Market Line 349
13Ross_Chapter13_4th.indd 34913Ross_Chapter13_4th.indd 349 12-11-27 12:1012-11-27 12:10
When we put the expected return and variability information for our two stocks together, we have:
Stock L Stock U
Expected return, E(R) 25% 20%
Variance, σ2 .2025 .0100
Standard deviation, σ 45% 10%
Stock L has a higher expected return, but U has less risk. You could get a 70 percent return on your investment in L, but you could also lose 20 percent. Notice that an investment in U always pays at least 10 percent.
Which of these two stocks should you buy? We can’t really say; it depends on your personal preferences. We can be reasonably sure that some investors would prefer L to U and some would prefer U to L. You’ve probably noticed that the way we calculated expected returns and variances here is some- what diff erent from the way we did it in the last chapter. Th e reason is that, in Chapter 12, we were examining actual historical returns, so we estimated the average return and the variance based on some actual events. Here, we have projected future returns and their associated probabilities, so this is the information with which we must work.
EXAMPLE 13.2: More Unequal Probabilities
Going back to Example 13.1, what are the variances on the two stocks once we have unequal probabilities? The standard deviations? We can summarize the needed calculations as follows:
(1) State of
Economy
(2) Probability of
State of Economy
(3) Return Deviation
from Expected Return
(4) Squared Return Deviation
from Expected Return
(5) Product (2) × (4)
Stock L Recession .80 -.20 - (-.02) = -.18 .0324 .02592
Boom .20 .70 - (-.02) = .72 .5184 .10368
σ2L = .12960 Stock U Recession .80 .30 - .26 = .04 .0016 .00128
Boom .20 .10 - .26 = -.16 .0256 .00512
σ2U = .00640
Based on these calculations, the standard deviation for L is σL = √ ______
.1296 = 36 percent. The standard deviation for U is much smaller, σU = √
______ .0064 = .08 or 8 percent.
1. How do we calculate the expected return on a security?
2. In words, how do we calculate the variance of the expected return?
Concept Questions
350 Part 5: Risk and Return
13Ross_Chapter13_4th.indd 35013Ross_Chapter13_4th.indd 350 12-11-27 12:1012-11-27 12:10
13.2 Portfolios
Th us far in this chapter, we have concentrated on individual assets considered separately. How- ever, most investors actually hold a portfolio of assets. All we mean by this is that investors tend to own more than just a single stock, bond, or other asset. Given that this is so, portfolio return and portfolio risk are of obvious relevance. Accordingly, we now discuss portfolio expected returns and variances.
Portfol io Weights Th ere are many equivalent ways of describing a portfolio. Th e most convenient approach is to list the percentages of the total portfolio’s value that are invested in each portfolio asset. We call these percentages the portfolio weights.
For example, if we have $50 in one asset and $150 in another, our total portfolio is worth $200. Th e percentage of our portfolio in the fi rst asset is $50/$200 = 25 percent (0.25). Th e percentage of our portfolio in the second asset is $150/$200, or 75 percent (0.75). Our portfolio weights are thus .25 and .75. Notice that the weights have to add up to 1.00 since all of our money is invested somewhere.2
Portfol io Expected Returns Let’s go back to Stocks L and U. You put half your money in each. Th e portfolio weights are obvi- ously .50 and .50. What is the pattern of returns on this portfolio? Th e expected return?
To answer these questions, suppose the economy actually enters a recession. In this case, half your money (the half in L) loses 20 percent. Th e other half (the half in U) gains 30 percent. Your portfolio return, RP, in a recession is thus:
RP = .50 × (-20%) + .50 × 30% = 5%
Table 13.5 summarizes the remaining calculations. Notice that when a boom occurs, your port- folio would return 40 percent:
RP = .50 × 70% + .50 × 10% = 40%
As indicated in Table 13.5, the expected return on your portfolio, E(RP), is 22.5 percent. We can save ourselves some work by calculating the expected return more directly. Given these
portfolio weights, we could have reasoned that we expect half of our money to earn 25 percent (the half in L) and half of our money to earn 20 percent (the half in U). Our portfolio expected return is thus:
E(RP) = .50 × E(RL) + .50 × E(RU) = .50 × 25% + .50 × 20% = 22.5%
Th is is the same portfolio expected return we had before.
TABLE 13.5
Expected return on an equally weighted portfolio of Stock L and Stock U (1)
State of Economy
(2) Probability of
State of Economy
(3) Portfolio Return if State Occurs
(4) Product (2) ×(3)
Recession .50 1/2 × (-20%) + 1/2 × (30%) = 5% 2.5%
Boom .50 1/2 × (70%) + 1/2 × (10%) = 40% 20.0
E(RP) = 22.5%
2 Some of it could be in cash, of course, but we would just consider the cash to be one of the portfolio assets.
portfolio Group of assets such as stocks and bonds held by an investor.
portfolio weights Percentage of a portfolio’s total value in a particular asset.
Chapter 13: Return, Risk, and the Security Market Line 351
13Ross_Chapter13_4th.indd 35113Ross_Chapter13_4th.indd 351 12-11-27 12:1012-11-27 12:10
Th is method of calculating the expected return on a portfolio works no matter how many assets are in the portfolio. Suppose we had n assets in our portfolio, where n is any number. If we let xi stand for the percentage of our money in asset i, the expected return is:
E(RP) = x1 × E(R1) + x2 × E(R2) + … + xn × E(Rn) [13.4] Th is says that the expected return on a portfolio is a straightforward combination of the expected returns on the assets in that portfolio. Th is seems somewhat obvious, but, as we examine next, the obvious approach is not always the right one.
EXAMPLE 13.3: Portfolio Expected Returns
Suppose we have the following projections on three stocks:
State of Economy
Probability of State
Returns
Stock A
Stock B
Stock C
Boom .40 10% 15% 20% Bust .60 8% 4% 0%
What would be the expected return on a portfolio with equal amounts invested in each of the three stocks? What would the expected return be if half the portfolio were in A, with the remainder equally divided between B and C? From our earlier discussions, the expected returns on the individual stocks are (check these for practice):
E(RA) = 8.8% E(RB) = 8.4% E(RC) = 8.0%
If a portfolio has equal investments in each asset, the port- folio weights are all the same. Such a portfolio is said to be equally weighted. Since there are three stocks, the weights are all equal to 1/3. The portfolio expected return is thus:
E(RP) = (1/3) × 8.8% + (1/3) × 8.4% + (1/3) × 8.0% = 8.4%
In the second case, check that the portfolio expected return is 8.5 percent.
Portfol io Variance From our previous discussion, the expected return on a portfolio that contains equal investment in Stocks U and L is 22.5 percent. What is the standard deviation of return on this portfolio? Simple intuition might suggest that half the money has a standard deviation of 45 percent and the other half has a standard deviation of 10 percent, so the portfolio’s standard deviation might be calculated as:
σP = .50 × 45% + .50 × 10% = 27.5%
Unfortunately, this approach is incorrect. Let’s see what the standard deviation really is. Table 13.6 summarizes the relevant calcula-
tions. As we see, the portfolio’s variance is about .031, and its standard deviation is less than we thought—it’s only 17.5 percent. What is illustrated here is that the variance on a portfolio is not generally a simple combination of the variances of the assets in the portfolio.
We can illustrate this point a little more dramatically by considering a slightly diff erent set of portfolio weights. Suppose we put 2/11 (about 18 percent) in L and the other 9/11 (about 82 per- cent) in U. If a recession occurs, this portfolio would have a return of:
RP = ( 2 ___ 11 ) × ( -20% ) + ( 9 ___ 11 ) × ( 30% ) = 20.91%
If a boom occurs, this portfolio would have a return of:
Rp = ( 2 ___ 11 ) × ( 70% ) + ( 9 ___ 11 ) × ( 10% ) = 20.91%
Notice that the return is the same no matter what happens. No further calculations are needed. Th is portfolio has a zero variance. Apparently, combining assets into portfolios can substantially alter the risks faced by the investor. Th is is a crucial observation, and we explore its implications in the next section.
352 Part 5: Risk and Return
13Ross_Chapter13_4th.indd 35213Ross_Chapter13_4th.indd 352 12-11-27 12:1012-11-27 12:10
TABLE 13.6
Variance on an equally weighted portfolio of Stock L and Stock U (1)
State of Economy
(2) Probability of
State of Economy
(3) Portfolio Return if
State Occurs
(4) Squared Deviation
from Expected Return
(5) Product (2) × (4)
Recession .50 5% (.05 - .225)2 = .030625 .0153125
Boom .50 40% (.40 - .225)2 = .030625 .0153125
σP = √ ________
.030625 = 17.5% σ2P = .030625
EXAMPLE 13.4: Portfolio Variance and Standard Deviation
In Example 13.3, what are the standard deviations on the two portfolios? To answer, we first have to calculate the portfolio returns in the two states. We will work with the second portfolio, which has 50 percent in Stock A and 25 percent in each of Stocks B and C. The relevant calculations can be summarized as follows:
State of Economy
Probability of State
Returns
Stock A
Stock B
Stock C Portfolio
Boom .40 10% 15% 20% 13.75% Bust .60 8% 4% 0% 5.00%
The portfolio return when the economy booms is calcu- lated as:
.50 × 10% + .25 × 15% + .25 × 20% = 13.75%
The return when the economy goes bust is calculated the same way. The expected return on the portfolio is 8.5 per- cent. The variance is thus:
σ2 = .40 × (.1375 - .085)2 + .60 × (.05 - .085)2
= .0018375
The standard deviation is thus about 4.3 percent. For our equally weighted portfolio, check to see that the standard deviation is about 5.4 percent.
Portfol io Standard Deviation and Diversif ication How diversifi cation reduces portfolio risk as measured by the portfolio standard deviation is worth exploring in some detail.3 Th e key concept is correlation, which provides a reading on the extent to which the returns on two assets move together. If correlation is positive, we say that Assets A and B are positively correlated; if it is negative, we say they are negatively correlated; and if it is zero, the two assets are uncorrelated.
Figure 13.1 shows these three benchmark cases for two assets, A and B. Th e graphs on the left side plot the separate returns on the two securities through time. Each point on the graphs on the right side represents the returns for both A and B over a particular time interval. Th e fi gure shows examples of diff erent values for the correlation coeffi cient, CORR (Ra, Rb), that range from -1.0 to 1.0.
To show how the graphs are constructed, we need to look at points 1 and 2 (on the upper left graph) and relate them to point 3 (on the upper right graph). Point 1 is a return on Company B and point 2 is a return on Company A. Th ey both occur over the same time period, say, for example, the month of June. Both returns are above average. Point 3 represents the returns on both stocks in June. Other dots in the upper right graph represent the returns on both stocks in other months.
Because the returns on Security B have bigger swings than the returns on Security A, the slope of the line in the upper right graph is greater than one. Perfect positive correlation does not imply
3 The ideas in this section were first developed systematically in an article written in 1952 by Harry Markowitz, “Portfo- lio Selection,” Journal of Finance 7 (March 1952), pp. 77–91. His work laid the foundation for the development of the capital asset pricing model, principally by William F. Sharpe, “Capital Asset Prices: A Theory of Market Equilibrium under Conditions of Risk,” Journal of Finance 19 (1964), pp. 425–42. These pioneers of modern portfolio theory were awarded the Nobel Prize in Economics in 1991.
Chapter 13: Return, Risk, and the Security Market Line 353
13Ross_Chapter13_4th.indd 35313Ross_Chapter13_4th.indd 353 12-11-27 12:1012-11-27 12:10
that the slope is one. Rather, it implies that all points lie exactly on the line. Less-than-perfect pos- itive correlation implies a positive slope, but the points do not lie exactly on the line. An example of less-than-perfect positive correlation is provided in the left side of Figure 13.2. As before, each point in the graph represents the returns on both securities in the same month. In a graph like this, the closer the points lie to the line, the closer the correlation is to one. In other words, a high correlation between the two returns implies that the graph has a tight fi t.4
Less-than-perfect negative correlation implies a negative slope, but the points do not lie exactly on the line, as shown on the right side of Figure 13.2.
FIGURE 13.1
Examples of different correlation coefficients
The graphs on the left- hand side of the figure plot the separate returns on the two securities through time. Each point on the graphs on the right- hand side represents the returns for both A and B over a particular time period.
0
–
+
A
B
Time
Returns
0
–
+
A B
Time
Returns
0
–
+
A
B
Time
Returns
Perfect positive correlation Corr (RA, RB)=1
Perfect negative correlation Corr (RA, RB)= –1
Zero correlation Corr (RA, RB)=0
1
2
Both the return on Security A and the return on Security B are higher than average at the same time. Both the return on Security A and the return on Security B are lower than average at the same time.
Security A has a higher-than-average return when Security B has a lower- than-average return, and vice versa.
The return on Security A is completely unrelated to the return on Security B.
Return on B
Return on A
Return on B
Return on A
Return on B
Return on A
3
4 If we measure the correlation by regression analysis, the correlation coefficient is the square root of R squared, the re- gression coefficient of determination. For a perfect fit, R squared is one and the correlation coefficient is also one.
354 Part 5: Risk and Return
13Ross_Chapter13_4th.indd 35413Ross_Chapter13_4th.indd 354 12-11-27 12:1012-11-27 12:10
FIGURE 13.2
Graphs of possible relationships between two stocks
Less than perfect positive correlation
Less than perfect negative correlation
Return on B Return on B
Return on A
Return on A
EXAMPLE 13.5: Correlation between Stocks U and L
What is the correlation between Stocks U and L from our earlier example if we assume the two states of the economy are equally probable? Table 13.2 shows the returns on each stock in recession and boom states.
Stock L Stock U
Recession –.20 .30 Boom .70 .10
Figure 13.3 plots the line exactly the same way as we plot- ted the graphs on the right sides of Figures 13.1 and 13.2. You can see from the figure that the line has a negative slope and all the points lie exactly on the line. (Since we only have two outcomes for each stock, the points must plot exactly on a straight line.) You can conclude that the correlation between Stocks U and L is equal to -1.0.
Our discussion of correlation provides us with a key building block of a formula for portfolio standard variance and its square root, portfolio standard deviation.
σ2P = x 2
Lσ 2
L + x 2
Uσ 2
U + 2xLxUCORRL,UσLσU [13.5]
σP = √ ___
σ2P
Recall that xL and xU are, respectively, the portfolio weights for Stocks U and L. CORRL,U is the correlation of the two stocks.
We can use the formula to check our previous calcula- tion of portfolio standard deviation for a portfolio invested 50 percent in each stock.
= (.5)2 × (.45)2 + (.5)2 × (.10)2 + (2) × (.5) × (.5) × (–1.0) × (.45) × (.10) = .030625 = √
________ .030625 = 17.5%
These are the same results we got in Table 13.6.
The Eff icient Set Suppose U and L actually have a correlation of about +0.70. Th e opportunity set is graphed in Figure 13.4. In Figure 13.5, we have marked the minimum variance portfolio, MV. No risk-averse investor would hold any portfolio with expected return below MV. For example, no such inves- tor would invest 100 percent in Stock U because such a portfolio has lower expected return and higher standard deviation than the minimum variance portfolio. We say that portfolios such as U are dominated by the minimum variance portfolio. (Since standard deviation is the square root of variance, the minimum variance portfolios also have minimum standard deviations as shown in Figures 13.4 and 13.5.) Th ough the entire curve from U to L is called the feasible set, investors only consider the curve from MV to L. Th is part of the curve is called the effi cient set.
Chapter 13: Return, Risk, and the Security Market Line 355
13Ross_Chapter13_4th.indd 35513Ross_Chapter13_4th.indd 355 12-11-27 12:1012-11-27 12:10
FIGURE 13.3
Correlation between Stocks U and L
Return on L
Return on U.30 .50
.50
.70
–.20
–.50
0
EXAMPLE 13.6: Th e Zero-Variance Portfolio
Can you find a portfolio of Stocks U and L with zero vari- ance? Earlier, we showed that investing 2/11 (about 18 per- cent) of the portfolio in L and the other 9/11 (about 82 percent) in U gives the same expected portfolio return in either recession or boom. As a result, the portfolio variance and standard deviation should both be zero. We can check this with the formula for portfolio variance.
σ 2 p = ( 2 ___ 11 ) 2 × ( .45 ) 2 + ( 9 ___ 11 )
2 × ( .10 ) 2 + 2 × ( 2 ___ 11 )
× ( 9 ___ 11 ) × ( - 1.0 ) × ( .45 ) × ( .10 ) = .006694 + .006694 - .013388 = 0
You can see that the portfolio variance (and standard devia- tion) are zero because the weights were chosen to make the negative third term exactly offset the first two positive terms. This third term is called the covariance term because the product of the correlation times the two security stan- dard deviations is the covariance of U and L.5
To explore how the portfolio standard deviation de- pends on correlation, Table 13.7 recalculates the portfolio standard deviation, changing the correlation between U and L, yet keeping the portfolio weights and all the other input data unchanged. When the correlation is perfectly negative, CORRU,L = -1.0, the portfolio standard deviation is 0 as we just calculated. If the two stocks were uncorre- lated (CORRL,U = 0), the portfolio standard deviation be- comes 11.5708 percent. And, with perfect positive correlation (CORRL,U = +1.0) the portfolio standard devia- tion is 16.3636 percent.
When the returns on the two assets are perfectly corre- lated, the portfolio standard deviation is simply the weighted average of the individual standard deviations. In this special case:
16.3636 = ( 2 ___ 11 ) × 45% + ( 9 ___ 11
) × 10% With perfect correlation, all possible portfolios lie on a
straight line between U and L in expected return/standard deviation space as shown in Figure 13.4. In this polar case, there is no benefit from diversification. But, as soon as cor- relation is less than perfectly positive, CORRL,U = +1.0, di- versification reduces risk.
As long as CORR is less than +1.0, the standard deviation of a portfolio of two securities is less than the weighted aver- age of the standard deviations of the individual securities.
Figure 13.4 shows this important result by graphing all possible portfolios of U and L for the three cases for CORRL,U given in Table 13.7. The portfolios marked 1, 2, and 3 in Figure 13.4 all have an expected return of 20.91 percent as calculated in Table 13.7. Their standard deviations also come from Table 13.7. The other points on the respective lines or curves are derived by varying the portfolio weights for each value of CORRL,U. Each line or curve represents all the possible portfolios of U and L for a given correlation. Each is called an opportunity set or feasible set. The lowest opportunity set representing CORRL,U = 1.0 always has the largest standard deviation for any return level. Once again, this shows how diversification reduces risk as long as corre- lation is less than perfectly positive.
5
5 As the number of stocks in the portfolio increases beyond the two in our example, the number of covariance terms in- creases geometrically. In general, for a portfolio of N securities, the number of covariance terms is (N2 - N)/2. For ex- ample, a 10-stock portfolio has 45 covariance terms.
356 Part 5: Risk and Return
13Ross_Chapter13_4th.indd 35613Ross_Chapter13_4th.indd 356 12-11-27 12:1012-11-27 12:10
TABLE 13.7
Portfolio standard deviation and correlation
Stock L xL = 2/11 σL = 45% E(RL) = 25%
Stock U xU = 9/11 σU = 10% E(RU) = 20%
E(RP) = ( 2/11) × 25% +
9/11 × 20% = 20.91%
CORRL,U Portfolio Standard Deviation of Portfolio sP 1. -1.0 0.0000%
2. 0.0 11.5708%
3. +1.0 16.3636%
EXAMPLE 13.7: Benefi ts of Foreign Investment
What percentage of their equity portfolios should Canadian investors place outside of Canada? To come up with an an- swer we need to extend our discussion of historical average returns and risks in Chapter 12 to include foreign invest- ment portfolios. It turns out that the feasible set looks like Figure 13.5 where points like U and L represent portfolios instead of individual stocks. Portfolio U represents 100 per- cent investment in Canadian equities and Portfolio L repre- sents 100 percent in foreign equities. The domestic stock portfolio is less risky than the foreign portfolio. Does this mean Canadian portfolio managers should invest entirely in Canada?
The answer is no because the minimum variance portfo- lio with approximately 20 percent foreign content domi- nates portfolio U, the 100 percent domestic portfolio. Going from 0 percent to around 20 percent foreign con- tent actually reduces portfolio standard deviation due to the diversification effect. Increasing the foreign content be- yond around 20 percent increases portfolio risk but also raises expected return. At the time of writing in May 2012, professional investment managers held 30 to 50 percent of their portfolios outside of Canada.
Correlations in the Financial Cris is of 2007–2009 During the fi nancial crisis, investors sought safety and liquidity causing equity markets to fall in all countries. Th e resulting increase in the correlation of returns across countries led some investors to doubt the benefi ts of international diversifi cation. While higher correlations reduce its advantages, doubts about diversifi cation were overstated for two reasons. First, although cor- relations undoubtedly increased during the crisis, they later returned to more normal levels. Sec- ond, even with relatively high positive correlation between assets, diversifi cation still reduces risk as long as the correlation coeffi cient is less than 1.0 (perfect positive correlation).6
1. What is a portfolio weight?
2. How do we calculate the expected return on a portfolio?
3. Is there a simple relationship between the standard deviation on a portfolio and the standard deviation of the assets in the portfolio?
6 The discussion here draws on Z. Bodie, A. Kane, A.J. Marcus, S. Perrakis and P.J. Ryan, Investments, Seventh Canad- ian Edition, McGraw-Hill Ryerson, 2011, Chapter 23 and V., de Martel, V., “Is diversification dead?” Catalyst, 2009, 1(2), Retrieved from www2.blackrock.com/webcore/litService/search/getDocument.seam?venue=PUB_INS&source=C ONTENT&ServiceName=PublicServiceView&ContentID=1111101021
Concept Questions
Chapter 13: Return, Risk, and the Security Market Line 357
13Ross_Chapter13_4th.indd 35713Ross_Chapter13_4th.indd 357 12-11-27 12:1012-11-27 12:10
FIGURE 13.4
Opportunity sets composed of holdings in Stock L and Stock U
Standard deviation of portfolio's return
Expected return of portfolio
ρ = – 1
ρ = 0
ρ = 1
.20
20.91
.25
.10 .1157 .1636 .45
• • • 3
U
L
2
1
FIGURE 13.5
Efficient frontier
Total return of portfolio (%)
Risk (standard deviation of portfolio's return)(%)
Minimum variance portfolio
MV
U
L
358 Part 5: Risk and Return
13Ross_Chapter13_4th.indd 35813Ross_Chapter13_4th.indd 358 12-11-27 12:1012-11-27 12:10
13.3 Announcements, Surprises, and Expected Returns
Now that we know how to construct portfolios and evaluate their returns, we begin to describe more carefully the risks and returns associated with individual securities. Th us far, we have mea- sured volatility by looking at the diff erences between the actual returns on an asset or portfolio, R, and the expected return, E(R). We now look at why those deviations exist.
Expected and Unexpected Returns To begin, for concreteness, we consider the return on the stock of TransCanada Industries. What will determine this stock’s return in, say, the coming year? Th e return on any stock traded in a fi nancial market is composed of two parts: First, the normal or expected return from the stock is the part of the return that shareholders in the market predict or expect. Th is return depends on the information shareholders have that bears on the stock, and it is based on the market’s under- standing today of the important factors that infl uence the stock in the coming year.
Th e second part of the return on the stock is the uncertain or risky part. Th is is the portion that comes from unexpected information that is revealed within the year. A list of all possible sources of such information is endless, but here are a few examples:
News about TransCanada’s research. Government fi gures released on gross national product (GNP). Th e imminent bankruptcy of an important competitor. Th e news that TransCanada’s sales fi gures are higher than expected. A sudden, unexpected drop in interest rates. Based on this discussion, one way to write the return on TransCanada’s stock in the coming
year would be:
Total return = Expected return + Unexpected return [13.6] R = E(R) + U
where R stands for the actual total return in the year, E(R) stands for the expected part of the return, and U stands for the unexpected part of the return. What this says is that the actual return, R, diff ers from the expected return, E(R), because of surprises that occur during the day.
Announcements and News We need to be careful when we talk about the eff ect of news items on the return. For example, sup- pose that TransCanada Industries’ business is such that the company prospers when GNP grows at a relatively high rate and suff ers when GNP is relatively stagnant. In deciding what return to expect this year from owning stock in TransCanada, shareholders either implicitly or explicitly must think about what the GNP is likely to be for the year.
When the government actually announces GNP fi gures for the year, what will happen to the value of TransCanada Industries stock? Obviously, the answer depends on what fi gure is released. More to the point, however, the impact depends on how much of that fi gure is new information.
At the beginning of the year, market participants have some idea or forecast of what the yearly GNP will be. To the extent that shareholders had predicted the GNP, that prediction is already fac- tored into the expected part of the return on the stock, E(R). On the other hand, if the announced GNP is a surprise, the eff ect is part of U, the unanticipated portion of the return. As an example, suppose shareholders in the market had forecast that the GNP increase this year would be 0.5 per- cent. If the actual announcement this year is exactly 0.5 percent, the same as the forecast, the shareholders didn’t really learn anything, and the announcement isn’t news. Th ere would be no impact on the stock price as a result. Th is is like receiving confi rmation of something that you suspected all along; it doesn’t reveal anything new.
To give a more concrete example, on October 5, 2011, the co-founder and former Chief Execu- tive Offi cer of Apple Inc., Steve Jobs, passed away. Th is seems like it would have been disastrous news for Apple, but Apple’s stock price dropped by only 0.2 percent on the announcement. Why? Because, years of declining health and resignation from the post of CEO, gave the market partici- pants time to re-price Apple shares without his leadership. Since then up to the time of writing,
apple.com/ca/
Chapter 13: Return, Risk, and the Security Market Line 359
13Ross_Chapter13_4th.indd 35913Ross_Chapter13_4th.indd 359 12-11-27 12:1012-11-27 12:10
the shares of Apple Inc. have gained more than 50%. A common way of saying that an announcement isn’t news is to say that the market has already
“discounted” the announcement. Th e use of the word discount here is diff erent from the use of the term in computing present values, but the spirit is the same. When we discount a dollar in the future, we say it is worth less to us because of the time value of money. When we discount an announcement or a news item, we mean it has less of an impact on the market because the market already knew much of it.
For example, going back to TransCanada Industries, suppose the government announced that the actual GNP increase during the year was 1.5 percent. Now shareholders have learned some- thing, namely, that the increase is 1 percentage point higher than they had forecast. Th is diff er- ence between the actual result and the forecast, 1 percentage point in this example, is sometimes called the innovation or the surprise.
An announcement, then, can be broken into two parts, the anticipated or expected part and the surprise or innovation:
Announcement = Expected part + Surprise [13.7]
Th e expected part of any announcement is the part of the information that the market uses to form the expectation E(R), of the return on the stock. Th e surprise is the news that infl uences the unanticipated return on the stock, U.
Our discussion of market effi ciency in the previous chapter bears on this discussion. We are assuming that relevant information that is known today is already refl ected in the expected return. Th is is identical to saying that the current price refl ects relevant publicly available information. We are thus implicitly assuming that markets are at least reasonably effi cient in the semistrong form sense.
Henceforth, when we speak of news, we mean the surprise part of an announcement and not the portion that the market has expected and, therefore, already discounted.
1. What are the two basic parts of a return?
2. Under what conditions does an announcement have no effect on common stock prices?
13.4 Risk: Systematic and Unsystematic
Th e unanticipated part of the return, that portion resulting from surprises, is the true risk of any investment. Aft er all, if we always receive exactly what we expect, the investment is perfectly predictable and, by defi nition, risk-free. In other words, the risk of owning an asset comes from surprises—unanticipated events.
Th ere are important diff erences, though, among various sources of risk. Look back at our pre- vious list of news stories. Some of these stories are directed specifi cally at TransCanada Industries, and some are more general. Which of the news items are of specifi c importance to TransCanada Industries?
Announcements about interest rates or GNP are clearly important for nearly all companies, whereas the news about TransCanada Industries’ president, its research, or its sales are of specifi c interest to TransCanada Industries. We distinguish between these two types of events however because, as we shall see, they have very diff erent implications.
Systematic and Unsystematic Risk Th e fi rst surprise, the one that aff ects a large number of assets, we label systematic risk. A system- atic risk is one that infl uences a large number of assets, each to a greater or lesser extent. Because systematic risks are market-wide eff ects, they are sometimes called market risks.
Th e second type of surprise we call unsystematic risk. An unsystematic risk is one that aff ects
Concept Questions
systematic risk A risk that influences a large number of assets. Also called market risk.
unsystematic risk A risk that affects at most a small number of assets. Also called unique or asset-specific risks.
360 Part 5: Risk and Return
13Ross_Chapter13_4th.indd 36013Ross_Chapter13_4th.indd 360 12-11-27 12:1012-11-27 12:10
a single asset or a small group of assets. Because these risks are unique to individual companies or assets, they are sometimes called unique or asset-specifi c risks. We use these terms interchangeably.
As we have seen, uncertainties about general economic conditions, such as GNP, interest rates, or infl ation, are examples of systematic risks. Th ese conditions aff ect nearly all companies to some degree. An unanticipated increase or surprise in infl ation, for example, aff ects wages and the costs of the supplies that companies buy; it aff ects the value of the assets that companies own; and it aff ects the prices at which companies sell their products. Forces such as these, to which all com- panies are susceptible, are the essence of systematic risk.
In contrast, the announcement of an oil strike by a company primarily aff ects that company and, perhaps, a few others (such as primary competitors and suppliers). It is unlikely to have much of an eff ect on the world oil market, however, or on the aff airs of companies not in the oil business.
Systematic and Unsystematic Components of Return Th e distinction between a systematic risk and an unsystematic risk is never really as exact as we make it out to be. Even the most narrow and peculiar bits of news about a company ripple through the economy. Th is is true because every enterprise, no matter how tiny, is a part of the economy. It’s like the tale of a kingdom that was lost because one horse lost a shoe. Th is is mostly hairsplit- ting, however. Some risks are clearly much more general than others. We’ll see some evidence on this point in just a moment.
Th e distinction between the types of risk allows us to break down the surprise portion, U, of the return on TransCanada Industries stock into two parts. As before, we break the actual return down into its expected and surprise components:
R = E(R) + U
We now recognize that the total surprise for TransCanada Industries, U, has a systematic and an unsystematic component, so:
R = E(R) + Systematic portion + Unsystematic portion [13.8] Because it is traditional, we use the Greek letter epsilon, ε, to stand for the unsystematic portion. Since systematic risks are oft en called market risks, we use the letter m to stand for the systematic part of the surprise. With these symbols, we can rewrite the total return:
R = E(R) + U = E(R) + m + ε
Th e important thing about the way we have broken down the total surprise, U, is that the unsys- tematic portion, ε, is more or less unique to TransCanada Industries. For this reason, it is unre- lated to the unsystematic portion of return on most other assets. To see why this is important, we need to return to the subject of portfolio risk.
1. What are the two basic types of risk?
2. What is the distinction between the two types of risk?
13.5 Diversification and Portfolio Risk
We’ve seen earlier that portfolio risks can, in principle, be quite diff erent from the risks of the assets that make up the portfolio. We now look more closely at the riskiness of an individual asset versus the risk of a portfolio of many diff erent assets. We once again examine some market history to get an idea of what happens with actual investments in capital markets.
Concept Questions
Chapter 13: Return, Risk, and the Security Market Line 361
13Ross_Chapter13_4th.indd 36113Ross_Chapter13_4th.indd 361 12-11-27 12:1012-11-27 12:10
The Effect of Diversif ication: Another Lesson from Market History In our previous chapter, we saw that the standard deviation of the annual return on a portfolio of several hundred large common stocks has historically been about 17 percent per year for both the Toronto Stock Exchange and the New York Stock Exchange (see Table 12.4, for example). Does this mean the standard deviation of the annual return on a typical stock is about 17 percent? As you might suspect by now, the answer is no. Th is is an extremely important observation.
To examine the relationship between portfolio size and portfolio risk, Table 13.8 illustrates typical average annual standard deviations for equally weighted portfolios that contain diff erent numbers of randomly selected NYSE securities.7
In Column 2 of Table 13.8, we see that the standard deviation for a “portfolio” of one security is about 49 percent. What this means is that, if you randomly selected a single NYSE stock and put all your money into it, your standard deviation of return would typically have been a substantial 49 percent per year. If you were to randomly select two stocks and invest half your money in each, your standard deviation would have been about 37 percent on average, and so on.
TABLE 13.8
Standard deviations of annual portfolio returns
(1) Number of Stocks
in Portfolio
(2) Average Standard Deviation of Annual Portfolio Returns
(3) Ratio of Portfolio
Standard Deviation to Standard Deviation
of a Single Stock
1 49.24% 1.00 2 37.36 0.76 4 29.69 0.60 6 26.64 0.54 8 24.98 0.51 10 23.93 0.49 20 21.68 0.44 30 20.87 0.42 40 20.46 0.42 50 20.20 0.41
100 19.69 0.40 200 19.42 0.39 300 19.34 0.39 400 19.29 0.39 500 19.27 0.39
1,000 19.21 0.39
Th e important thing to notice in Table 13.8 is that the standard deviation declines as the num- ber of securities is increased. By the time we have 30 randomly chosen stocks, the portfolio’s stan- dard deviation has declined by about 60 percent, from 49 to about 20 percent. With 500 securities, the standard deviation is 19.27 percent, similar to the 21 percent we saw in our previous chapter for the large common stock portfolio. Th e small diff erence exists because the portfolio securities and time periods examined are not identical.
7 These figures are from Table 1 in a classic paper by Meir Statman, “How Many Stocks Make a Diversified Portfolio?” Jour- nal of Financial and Quantitative Analysis 22 (September 1987), pp. 353–64. They were derived from E. J. Elton and M. J. Gruber, “Risk Reduction and Portfolio Size: An Analytic Solution,” Journal of Business 50 (October 1977), pp. 415–37.
nyse.com tmx.com
362 Part 5: Risk and Return
13Ross_Chapter13_4th.indd 36213Ross_Chapter13_4th.indd 362 12-11-27 12:1012-11-27 12:10
The Principle of Diversif ication Figure 13.6 illustrates the point we’ve been discussing. What we have plotted is the standard devi- ation of return versus the number of stocks in the portfolio. Notice in Figure 13.6 that the benefi t in risk reduction from adding securities drops as we add more and more. By the time we have 10 securities, the portfolio standard deviation has dropped from 49.2 to 23.9 percent, most of the eff ect is already realized, and by the time we get to 30 or so, there is very little remaining benefi t. Th e data in Table 13.8 and Figure 13.6 are from the NYSE but a Canadian study documented the same eff ect. However, the Canadian researchers found that Canadian investors need to hold a larger number of stocks to achieve diversifi cation. Th is is likely due to Canadian stocks being more concentrated in a few industries than in the U.S.8
FIGURE 13.6
Portfolio diversification
Average annual standard deviation
Diversifiable risk
Nondiversifiable risk
Number of stocks in portfolio1 10 20 30 40 1,000
19.2%
23.9%
49.2%
Figure 13.6 illustrates two key points: First, the principle of diversifi cation (discussed earlier) tells us that spreading an investment across many assets eliminates some of the risk. Th e shaded area in Figure 13.6, labelled diversifi able risk, is the part that can be eliminated by diversifi cation.
Th e second point is equally important. A minimum level of risk cannot be eliminated simply by diversifying. Th is minimum level is labelled nondiversifi able risk in Figure 13.6. Taken together, these two points are another important lesson from capital market history: Diversifi cation reduces risk, but only up to a point. Put another way, some risk is diversifi able and some is not.
To give a recent example of the impact of diversifi cation, the S&P TSX Composite Index, which is a widely followed stock market index of large Canadian stocks, was down by 8.6% for the year 2011. As we saw in our previous chapter, this loss represents a bad year for a portfolio of large-cap stocks. Some of the biggest individual winners of the year were Westport Innovations (up a whop- ping 84 percent) and Dollarama (up 55 percent). But not all stocks were up: Th e losers included Yellow Media Inc. (down 91 percent) and Perpetual Energy Inc. (down 63 percent). Again, the lesson is clear: Diversifi cation reduces exposure to extreme outcomes, both good and bad.
8 For more on the Canadian study, see S. Cleary and D. Copp, “Diversification with Canadian stocks: How much is enough?” Canadian Investment Review 12, Fall 1999, pp. 21–25.
principle of diversification Principle stating that spreading an investment across a number of assets eliminates some, but not all, of the risk.
Chapter 13: Return, Risk, and the Security Market Line 363
13Ross_Chapter13_4th.indd 36313Ross_Chapter13_4th.indd 363 12-11-27 12:1012-11-27 12:10
Diversif ication and Unsystematic Risk From our discussion of portfolio risk, we know that some of the risk associated with individual assets can be diversifi ed away and some cannot. We are left with an obvious question: Why is this so? It turns out that the answer hinges on the distinction we made earlier between systematic and unsystematic risk.
By defi nition, an unsystematic risk is one that is particular to a single asset or, at most, a small group. For example, if the asset under consideration is stock in a single company, the discovery of positive NPV projects such as successful new products and innovative cost savings tend to increase the value of the stock. Unanticipated lawsuits, industrial accidents, strikes, and similar events tend to decrease future cash fl ows and thereby reduce share values.
Here is the important observation: If we only held a single stock, the value of our investment would fl uctuate because of company-specifi c events. If we held a large portfolio, on the other hand, some of the stocks in the portfolio would go up in value because of positive company- specifi c events and some would go down in value because of negative events. Th e net eff ect on the overall value of the portfolio is relatively small, however, as these eff ects tend to cancel each other out.
Now we see why some of the variability associated with individual assets is eliminated by diversifi cation. By combining assets into portfolios, the unique or unsystematic events—both positive and negative—tend to wash out once we have more than just a few assets.
Th is important point bears repeating: Unsystematic risk is essentially eliminated by diversifi ca- tion, so a relatively large portfolio has almost no unsystematic risk. In fact, the terms diversifi able risk and unsystematic risk are oft en used interchangeably.
Diversif ication and Systematic Risk We’ve seen that unsystematic risk can be eliminated by diversifying. What about systematic risk? Can it also be eliminated by diversifi cation? Th e answer is no because, by defi nition, a systematic risk aff ects almost all assets to some degree. As a result, no matter how many assets we put into a portfolio, the systematic risk doesn’t go away. Th us, for obvious reasons, the terms systematic risk and nondiversifi able risk are used interchangeably.
Because we have introduced so many diff erent terms, it is useful to summarize our discussion before moving on. What we have seen is that the total risk of an investment, as measured by the standard deviation of its return, can be written as:
Total risk = Systematic risk + Unsystematic risk [13.9]
Systematic risk is also called nondiversifi able risk or market risk. Unsystematic risk is also called diversifi able risk, unique risk, or asset-specifi c risk. For a well-diversifi ed portfolio, the unsystem- atic risk is negligible. For such a portfolio, essentially all of the risk is systematic.
Risk and the Sensible Investor Having gone to all this trouble to show that unsystematic risk disappears in a well-diversifi ed portfolio, how do we know that investors even want such portfolios? Suppose they like risk and don’t want it to disappear?
We must admit that, theoretically at least, this is possible, but we argue that it does not describe what we think of as the typical investor. Our typical investor is risk averse. Risk-averse behaviour can be defi ned in many ways, but we prefer the following example: A fair gamble is one with zero expected return; a risk-averse investor would prefer to avoid fair gambles.
Why do investors choose well-diversifi ed portfolios? Our answer is that they are risk averse, and risk-averse people avoid unnecessary risk, such as the unsystematic risk on a stock. If you do not think this is much of an answer to why investors choose well-diversifi ed portfolios and avoid unsystematic risk, consider whether you would take on such a risk. For example, suppose you had worked all summer and had saved $5,000, which you intended to use for your university expenses. Now, suppose someone came up to you and off ered to fl ip a coin for the money: heads, you would double your money, and tails, you would lose it all.
Would you take such a bet? Perhaps you would, but most people would not. Leaving aside any
364 Part 5: Risk and Return
13Ross_Chapter13_4th.indd 36413Ross_Chapter13_4th.indd 364 12-11-27 12:1012-11-27 12:10
moral question that might surround gambling and recognizing that some people would take such a bet, it’s our view that the average investor would not.
To induce the typical risk-averse investor to take a fair gamble, you must sweeten the pot. For example, you might need to raise the odds of winning from 50-50 to 70-30 or higher. Th e risk- averse investor can be induced to take fair gambles only if they are sweetened so that they become unfair to the investor’s advantage.
TABLE 13.9
Average returns and standard deviations for two Canadian mutual funds and S&P/TSX Composite, 2010–2012
Fund Annual return (%) Standard deviation (%)
S&P/TSX Composite 15.59 13.79 CIBC Canadian Equity 12.73 13.87 CIBC Precious Metals 13.40 30.94
Source: theglobeandmail.com/globe-investor/funds-and-etfs/funds/
EXAMPLE 13.8: Risk of Canadian Mutual Funds
Table 13.9 shows the returns and standard deviations for two Canadian mutual funds over the three-year period end- ing March 31, 2012. The table also shows comparable sta- tistics for the S&P/TSX Composite. As you would expect, the TSX portfolio is the most widely diversified of the three portfolios and has the lowest unsystematic risk. For this rea- son, it has the lowest portfolio standard deviation. The next lowest standard deviation is the CIBC Canadian Equity fund, which invests in equities across different Canadian industries.
The CIBC Precious Metals fund focuses on one sector of the economy. For example, its top three holdings at the end of March 2012 were Goldcorp Inc., Silver Wheaton, and B2Gold. The narrower focus of this fund makes it less diversified, with higher standard deviations.
What does this example tell us about how good these funds were as investments? To answer this question, we have to investigate asset pricing, our next topic.
1. What happens to the standard deviation of return for a portfolio if we increase the number of securities in the portfolio?
2. What is the principle of diversification?
3. Why is some risk diversifiable? Why is some risk not diversifiable?
4. Why can’t systematic risk be diversified away?
5. Explain the concept of risk aversion.
13.6 Systematic Risk and Beta
Th e question that we now begin to address is: What determines the size of the risk premium on a risky asset? Put another way, why do some assets have a larger risk premium than other assets? Th e answer to these questions, as we discuss next, is also based on the distinction between sys- tematic and unsystematic risk.
Concept Questions
Chapter 13: Return, Risk, and the Security Market Line 365
13Ross_Chapter13_4th.indd 36513Ross_Chapter13_4th.indd 365 12-11-27 12:1012-11-27 12:10
The Systematic Risk Principle Th us far, we’ve seen that the total risk associated with an asset can be decomposed into two com- ponents: systematic and unsystematic risk. We have also seen that unsystematic risk can be essen- tially eliminated by diversifi cation. Th e systematic risk present in an asset, on the other hand, cannot be eliminated by diversifi cation.
Based on our study of capital market history, we know that there is a reward, on average, for bearing risk. However, we now need to be more precise about what we mean by risk. Th e system- atic risk principle states that the reward for bearing risk depends only on the systematic risk of an investment. Th e underlying rationale for this principle is straightforward: Because unsystematic risk can be eliminated at virtually no cost (by diversifying), there is no reward for bearing it. Put another way, the market does not reward risks that are born unnecessarily.
Th e systematic risk principle has a remarkable and very important implication: Th e expected return on an asset depends only on that asset’s systematic risk. Th ere is an obvious corollary to this principle: No matter how much total risk an asset has, only the systematic portion is relevant in determining the expected return (and the risk premium) on that asset.
Measuring Systematic Risk Since systematic risk is the crucial determinant of an asset’s expected return, we need some way of measuring the level of systematic risk for diff erent investments. Th e specifi c measure that we use is called the beta coeffi cient, for which we will use the Greek symbol β. A beta coeffi cient, or beta for short, tells us how much systematic risk a particular asset has relative to an average asset representing the market portfolio. By defi nition, an average asset has a beta of 1.0 relative to itself. An asset with a beta of .50, therefore, has half as much systematic risk as an average asset; an asset with a beta of 2.0 has twice as much. Th ese diff erent levels of beta are illustrated in Figure 13.7. You can see that high beta assets display greater volatility over time.
FIGURE 13.7
Volatility: High and low betas
E(R)
Time
ß = 1
ß = 0
ß > 1
Table 13.10 contains the estimated beta coeffi cients for the stocks of some well-known com- panies ranging from 0.51 to 3.31.
TABLE 13.10
Beta coefficients for selected companies
Companies Beta coefficient
Bank of Nova Scotia 0.78 Investors Group 0.76 Talisman Energy 1.43 Manulife Financial Corp. 1.39 Rogers Communications 0.51 Teck Resources Ltd. 3.31Source: Financial Post Advisor, 2012
systematic risk principle Principle stating that the expected return on a risky asset depends only on that asset’s systematic risk.
beta coefficient Amount of systematic risk present in a particular risky asset relative to an average risky asset.
366 Part 5: Risk and Return
13Ross_Chapter13_4th.indd 36613Ross_Chapter13_4th.indd 366 12-11-27 12:1012-11-27 12:10
EXAMPLE 13.9: Total Risk versus Beta
Consider the following information on two securities. Which has greater total risk? Which has greater systematic risk? Greater unsystematic risk? Which asset has a higher risk premium?
Standard Deviation Beta
Security A 40% .50 Security B 20 1.50
From our discussion in this section, Security A has greater total risk, but it has substantially less systematic risk. Since total risk is the sum of systematic and unsystematic risk, Se- curity A must have greater unsystematic risk. Finally, from the systematic risk principle, Security B has a higher risk premium and a greater expected return, despite the fact that it has less total risk.
Remember that the expected return, and thus the risk premium, on an asset depends only on its systematic risk. Because assets with larger betas have greater systematic risks, they have greater expected returns. Th us, in Table 13.10, an investor who buys stock in Bank of Nova Scotia with a beta of 0.78, should expect to earn less, on average, than an investor who buys stock in Teck Resources Limited, with a beta of 3.31.
Portfol io Betas Earlier, we saw that the riskiness of a portfolio does not have any simple relationship to the risks of the assets in the portfolio. A portfolio beta, however, can be calculated just like a portfolio expected return. For example, looking at Table 13.10, suppose you put half of your money in Bank of Nova Scotia and half in Teck Resources Limited. What would the beta of this combination be? Since Bank of Nova Scotia (BNS) has a beta of 0.78 and Teck Resources Ltd. (TRL) has a beta of 3.31, the portfolio’s beta, βP, would be:
βP = .50 × βBNS + .50 × βTRL = .50 × 0.78 + .50 × 3.31 = 2.05
In general, if we had a large number of assets in a portfolio, we would multiply each asset’s beta by its portfolio weight and then add the results to get the portfolio’s beta.
EXAMPLE 13.10: Portfolio Betas
Suppose we had the following investments:
Security Amount Invested
Expected Return Beta
Stock A $1,000 8% .80 Stock B 2,000 12 .95 Stock C 3,000 15 1.10 Stock D 4,000 18 1.40
What is the expected return on this portfolio? What is the beta of this portfolio? Does this portfolio have more or less systematic risk than an average asset?
To answer, we first have to calculate the portfolio weights. Notice that the total amount invested is $10,000. Of this, $1,000/$10,000 = 10% is invested in Stock A. Sim- ilarly, 20 percent is invested in Stock B, 30 percent is in-
vested in Stock C, and 40 percent is invested in Stock D. The expected return, E(RP), is thus:
E(RP) = .10 × E(RA) + .20 × E(RB) + .30 × E(RC) + .40 × E(RD) = .10 × 8% + .20 × 12% + .30 × 15% + .40 × 18% = 14.9%
Similarly, the portfolio beta, βP, is:
βP = .10 × βA + .20 × βB + .30 × βC + .40 × βD = .10 × .80 + .20 × .95 + .30 × 1.10 + .40 × 1.40 = 1.16
This portfolio thus has an expected return of 14.9 percent and a beta of 1.16. Since the beta is larger than 1.0, this portfolio has greater systematic risk than an average asset.
scotiabank.ca
Chapter 13: Return, Risk, and the Security Market Line 367
13Ross_Chapter13_4th.indd 36713Ross_Chapter13_4th.indd 367 12-11-27 12:1012-11-27 12:10
1. What is the systematic risk principle?
2. What does a beta coefficient measure?
3. How do you calculate a portfolio beta?
4. Does the expected return on a risky asset depend on that asset’s total risk? Explain.
13.7 The Security Market Line
We’re now in a position to see how risk is rewarded in the marketplace. To begin, suppose Asset A has an expected return of E(RA) = 20% and a beta of βA = 1.6. Furthermore, the risk-free rate is Rf = 8%, the return on 3-month Treasury bills. We choose this measure because it matches the investor’s horizon for measuring performance. Notice that a risk-free asset, by defi nition, has no systematic risk (or unsystematic risk), so a risk-free asset has a beta of 0.
Beta and the Risk Premium Consider a portfolio made up of Asset A and a risk-free asset. We can calculate some diff erent possible portfolio expected returns and betas by varying the percentages invested in these two assets. For example, if 25 percent of the portfolio is invested in Asset A, the expected return is:
E(RP) = .25 × E(RA) + (1 - .25) × Rf = .25 × 20% + .75 × 8% = 11.0%
Similarly, the beta on the portfolio, βP, would be:
βP = .25 × βA + (1 - .25) × 0 = .25 × 1.6 = .40
Notice that, since the weights have to add up to 1, the percentage invested in the risk-free asset is equal to 1 minus the percentage invested in Asset A.
One thing that you might wonder about is whether it is possible for the percentage invested in Asset A to exceed 100 percent. Th e answer is yes. Th is can happen if the investor borrows at the risk-free rate. For example, suppose an investor has $100 and borrows an additional $50 at 8 percent, the risk-free rate. Th e total investment in Asset A would be $150, or 150 percent of the investor’s wealth. Th e expected return in this case would be:
E(RP) = 1.50 × E(RA) + (1 - 1.50) × Rf = 1.50 × 20% - .50 × 8% = 26%
Th e beta on the portfolio would be:
βP = 1.50 × βA + (1 - 1.50) × 0 = 1.50 × 1.6 = 2.4
We can calculate some other possibilities as follows: Percentage of Portfolio
in Asset A Portfolio
Expected Return Portfolio
Beta
0% 8% 0.0 25 11 0.4 50 14 0.8 75 17 1.2
100 20 1.6 125 23 2.0 150 26 2.4
Concept Questions
368 Part 5: Risk and Return
13Ross_Chapter13_4th.indd 36813Ross_Chapter13_4th.indd 368 12-11-27 12:1012-11-27 12:10
In Figure 13.8A, these portfolio expected returns are plotted against the portfolio betas. Notice that all the combinations fall on a straight line.
FIGURE 13.8A
Portfolio expected returns and betas for Asset A
Portfolio expected return (E(RP))
E(RA) – Rf = 7.50%
Portfolio beta (ßP)1.6 = A
E(RA) = 20%
Rf = 8%
A =
�
�
THE REWARD-TO-RISK RATIO What is the slope of the straight line in Figure 13.8A? As always, the slope of a straight line is equal to the “rise over the run.” As we move out of the risk-free asset into Asset A, the beta increases from zero to 1.6 (a “run” of 1.6). At the same time, the expected return goes from 8 to 20 percent, a “rise” of 12 percent. The slope of the line is thus 12%/1.6 = 7.50%.
Notice that the slope of our line is just the risk premium on Asset A, E(RA) - Rf, divided by Asset A’s beta, βA:
Slope = [E(RA) - Rf] ___________
βA
= [20% - 8%] __________ 1.6 = 7.50%
What this tells us is that Asset A off ers a reward-to-risk ratio of 7.50 percent.9 In other words, Asset A has a risk premium of 7.50 percent per unit of systematic risk.
THE BASIC ARGUMENT Now suppose we consider a second asset, Asset B. This asset has a beta of 1.2 and an expected return of 16 percent. Which investment is better, Asset A or As- set B? You might think that, once again, we really cannot say. Some investors might prefer A; some investors might prefer B. Actually, however, we can say: A is better because, as we demon- strate, B offers inadequate compensation for its level of systematic risk, at least relative to A.
To begin, we calculate diff erent combinations of expected returns and betas for portfolios of Asset B and a risk-free asset just as we did for Asset A. For example, if we put 25 percent in Asset B and the remaining 75 percent in the risk-free asset, the portfolio’s expected return would be:
E(RP) = .25 × E(RB) + (1 - .25) × Rf = .25 × 16% + .75 × 8% = 10%
Similarly, the beta on the portfolio, βP, would be:
βP = .25 × βB + (1 - .25) × 0 = .25 × 1.2 = .30
Some other possibilities are as follows:
9 This ratio is sometimes called the Treynor index, after one of its originators.
Chapter 13: Return, Risk, and the Security Market Line 369
13Ross_Chapter13_4th.indd 36913Ross_Chapter13_4th.indd 369 12-11-27 12:1012-11-27 12:10
Percentage of Portfolio in Asset B
Portfolio Expected Return
Portfolio Beta
0% 8% 0.0 25 10 0.3 50 12 0.6 75 14 0.9
100 16 1.2 125 18 1.5 150 20 1.8
When we plot these combinations of portfolio expected returns and portfolios betas in Figure 13.8B, we get a straight line just as we did for Asset A.
FIGURE 13.8B
Portfolio expected returns and betas for Asset B
Portfolio expected return (E(RP))
E(RB) – Rf = 6.67%
1.2 = B
Rf = 8%
E(RB) = 16%
B =
�
�
Portfolio beta (ßP)
Th e key thing to notice is that when we compare the results for Assets A and B, as in Figure 13.8C, the line describing the combinations of expected returns and betas for Asset A is higher than the one for Asset B. Th is tells us that for any given level of systematic risk (as measured by β), some combination of Asset A and the risk-free asset always off ers a larger return. Th is is why we were able to state that Asset A is a better investment than Asset B.
Another way of seeing that A off ers a superior return for its level of risk is to note that the slope of our line for Asset B is:
Slope = [E(RB) - Rf] ___________
βB
= [16% - 8%] __________ 1.2 = 6.67%
Th us, Asset B has a reward-to-risk ratio of 6.67 percent, which is less than the 7.5 percent off ered by Asset A.
THE FUNDAMENTAL RESULT The situation we have described for Assets A and B cannot persist in a well-organized, active market, because investors would be attracted to Asset A and away from Asset B. As a result, Asset A’s price would rise and Asset B’s price would fall. Since prices and returns move in opposite directions, the result is that A’s expected return would decline and B’s would rise.
Th is buying and selling would continue until the two assets plotted on exactly the same line, which means they off er the same reward for bearing risk. In other words, in an active, competitive market, we must have:
[E(RA) - Rf] ___________
βA =
[E(RB) - Rf] ___________ βB
370 Part 5: Risk and Return
13Ross_Chapter13_4th.indd 37013Ross_Chapter13_4th.indd 370 12-11-27 12:1012-11-27 12:10
Th is is the fundamental relationship between risk and return. Our basic argument can be extended to more than just two assets. In fact, no matter how many
assets we had, we would always reach the same conclusion:
Th e reward-to-risk ratio must be the same for all the assets in the market.
Th is result is really not so surprising. What it says, for example, is that, if one asset has twice as much systematic risk as another asset, its risk premium is simply twice as large.
Since all the assets in the market must have the same reward-to-risk ratio, they all must plot on the same line in market equilibrium. Th is argument is illustrated in Figure 13.9. As shown, Assets A and B plot directly on the line and thus have the same reward-to-risk ratio. If an asset plotted above the line, such as C in Figure 13.9, its price would rise, and its expected return would fall until it plotted exactly on the line. Similarly, if an asset plotted below the line, such as D in Figure 13.9, its expected return would rise until it too plotted directly on the line.
Th e arguments we have presented apply to active, competitive, well-functioning markets. Th e fi nancial markets, such as the TSX, NYSE, and Nasdaq, best meet these criteria. Other markets, such as real asset markets, may or may not. For this reason, these concepts are most useful in examining fi nancial markets. We thus focus on such markets here. However, as we discuss in a later section, the information about risk and return gleaned from fi nancial markets is crucial in evaluating the investments that a corporation makes in real assets.
FIGURE 13.8C
Portfolio expected returns and betas for both assets
Portfolio expected return (E(RP))
1.2 = B 1.6 = A
Rf = 8%
E(RA) = 20%
E(RB) = 16%
Asset A
Asset B= 7.50%
= 6.67%
� �
Portfolio beta (ßP)
FIGURE 13.9
Expected returns and systematic risk
Asset expected return (E(Ri))
Asset beta (ßi) C B A D
i
Rf
E(RC)
E(RD)
E(RB)
E(RA) A
B
C
D E(Ri) – Rf =
�
����
The fundamental relationship between beta and expected return is that all assets must have the same reward-to-risk ratio [E(Ri) - Rf]/βi. This means they would all plot on the same straight line. Assets A and B are examples of this behaviour. Asset C’s expected return is too high; Asset D’s is too low.
nasdaq.com
Chapter 13: Return, Risk, and the Security Market Line 371
13Ross_Chapter13_4th.indd 37113Ross_Chapter13_4th.indd 371 12-11-27 12:1012-11-27 12:10
EXAMPLE 13.11: Beta and Stock Valuation
An asset is said to be overvalued if its price is too high given its expected return and risk. Suppose you observe the fol- lowing situation:
Security Beta Expected Return
SWMS Company 1.3 14% Insec Company .8 10
The risk-free rate is currently 6 percent. Is one of the two preceding securities overvalued relative to the other?
To answer, we compute the reward-to-risk ratio for both. For SWMS, this ratio is (14% - 6%)/1.3 = 6.15%. For Insec, this ratio is 5 percent. What we conclude is that Insec offers an insufficient expected return for its level of risk, at least relative to SWMS. Since its expected return is too low, its price is too high. To see why this is true, recall
that the dividend valuation model presented in Chapter 8 treats price as the present value of future dividends.
P0 = D1 _______
(r - g)
Projecting the dividend stream gives us D1 and g. If the re- quired rate of return is too low, the stock price will be too high. For example, suppose D1 = $2.00 and g = 7 percent. If the expected rate of return on the stock is wrongly under- estimated at 10 percent, the stock price estimate is $66.67. This price is too high if the true expected rate of return is 14 percent. At this higher rate of return, the stock price should fall to $28.57. In other words, Insec is overvalued relative to SWMS, and we would expect to see its price fall relative to SWMS’s. Notice that we could also say that SWMS is under- valued relative to Insec.
Calculating Beta Th e beta of a security measures the responsiveness of that security’s return to the return on the market as a whole. To calculate beta, we draw a line relating the expected return on the security to diff erent returns on the market. Th is line, called the characteristic line of the security, has a slope equal to the stock’s beta.
EXAMPLE 13.12: Mutual Fund Performance
Table 13.11 gives the inputs needed to compute the re- ward-to-risk ratios for the TSX and two mutual funds. Start- ing with the TSX, the reward-to-risk ratio was:
(Average return - Riskless rate)/Beta (7.37 - 3.07)/1.00 = 4.3%
You can verify that the reward-to-risk ratio for RBC Canad- ian Equity was 3.69 percent and the ratio for BMO Divi- dend was 8.49 percent. BMO Dividend fund beat the
market by earning a higher reward-to-risk ratio than the TSX, while RBC Canadian Equity fund underperformed over this period.
Unfortunately, in an efficient market, while past per- formance may guide expectations of future returns, these expectations may not be realized in actual returns. So, we would not expect that BMO Dividend fund would beat the market consistently over time.
TABLE 13.11
Average returns and betas for selected Canadian mutual funds, S&P/TSX Composite, and Canadian 3-month Treasury bills, 15 years ending March 31, 2012
Fund Annual return (%) Beta
S&P/TSX Composite 7.37 1 3-month Treasury bills 3.07 0 RBC Canadian Equity 6.80 1.01 BMO Dividend fund 9.35 0.74
Source: theglobeandmail.com/globe-investor/funds-and-etfs/funds/
372 Part 5: Risk and Return
13Ross_Chapter13_4th.indd 37213Ross_Chapter13_4th.indd 372 12-11-27 12:1012-11-27 12:10
Consider Figure 13.10, which displays returns for both a hypothetical company and the market as a whole.10 Each point represents a pair of returns over a particular month. Th e vertical dimension measures the return on the stock over the month and the horizontal dimension that of the S&P/TSX Composite. (Th e S&P/TSX Composite is considered a reasonable proxy for the general market.)
FIGURE 13.10
Graphic representation of beta
Return on company
Return on market
0.20
0.10
0
–0.10
–0.20
–0.20 –0.15 –0.10 –0.05 0 0.05 0.10 .15 R2 = 0.584
Slope = 1.28
Figure 13.10 also shows the line of best fi t superimposed on these points. In practical applica- tions, this line is calculated from regression analysis. As one can see from the graph, the slope is 1.28. Because the average beta is 1, this indicates the stock’s beta of 1.28 is higher than that for the average stock.
Th e goal of a fi nancial analyst is to determine the beta that a stock will have in the future, because this is when the proceeds of an investment are received. Of course, past data must be used in regression analysis. Th us, it is incorrect to think of 1.28 as the beta of our example company. Rather it is our estimate of the fi rm’s beta from past data.
Th e bottom of Figure 13.10 indicates that the company’s R2 over the time period is 0.584. What does this mean? R2 measures how close the points in the fi gure are to the characteristic line. Th e highest value for R2 is 1, a situation that would occur if all points lay exactly on the characteristic line. Th is would be the case where the security’s return is determined only by the market’s return without the security having any independent variation. Th e R2 is likely to approach one for a large portfolio of securities. For example, many widely diversifi ed mutual funds have R2s of 0.80 or more. Th e lowest possible R2 is zero, a situation occurring when two variables are entirely unre- lated to each other. Th ose companies whose returns are pretty much independent of returns on the stock market would have R2s near zero.
Th e risk of any security can be broken down into unsystematic and systematic risk. Whereas beta measures the amount of systematic risk, R2 measures the proportion of total risk that is sys- tematic. Th us, a low R2 indicates that most of the risk of a fi rm is unsystematic.11
Th e mechanics for calculating betas are quite simple. People in business frequently estimate beta by using commercially available computer programs. Certain handheld calculators are also
10 As we mentioned in Chapter 12, the return on a security includes both the dividend and the capital gain (or loss). 11 Standard computer packages generally provide confidence intervals (error ranges) for beta estimates. One has greater confidence in beta estimates where the confidence interval is small. While stocks with high R2s generally have small confidence intervals, it is the size of the confidence interval, not the R2 itself, that is relevant here. Because expected re- turn is related to systematic risk, the R2 of a firm is of no concern to us once we know the firm’s beta. This often sur- prises students trained in statistics, because R2 is an important concept for many other purposes.
Chapter 13: Return, Risk, and the Security Market Line 373
13Ross_Chapter13_4th.indd 37313Ross_Chapter13_4th.indd 373 12-11-27 12:1012-11-27 12:10
able to perform the calculation. In addition, a large number of services sell or even give away estimates of beta for diff erent fi rms. For example, Table 13.10 presents a set of betas calculated by Financial Post Advisor in May 2012.
In calculating betas, analysts make a number of assumptions consistent with Canadian research on the capital asset pricing model.12 First, they generally choose monthly data, as do many fi nancial economists. On the one hand, statistical problems frequently arise when time intervals shorter than a month are used. On the other hand, important information is lost when longer intervals are employed. Th us, the choice of monthly data can be viewed as a compromise.
Second, analysts typically use just under fi ve years of data, the result of another compromise. Due to changes in production mix, production techniques, management style, and/or fi nancial leverage, a fi rm’s nature adjusts over time. A long time period for calculating beta implies many out-of-date observations. Conversely, a short time period leads to statistical imprecision, because few monthly observations are used.
1. What is the statistical procedure employed for calculating beta?
2. Why do financial analysts use monthly data when calculating beta?
3. What is R2?
The Security Market Line Th e line that results when we plot expected returns and beta coeffi cients is obviously of some importance, so it’s time we gave it a name. Th is line, which we use to describe the relationship between systematic risk and expected return in fi nancial markets, is usually called the security market line (SML). Aft er NPV, the SML is arguably the most important concept in modern fi nance.
MARKET PORTFOLIOS It will be very useful to know the equation of the SML. There are many different ways that we could write it, but one way is particularly common. Suppose we were to consider a portfolio made up of all of the assets in the market. Such a portfolio is called a market portfolio, and we write the expected return on this market portfolio as E(RM).
Since all the assets in the market must plot on the SML, so must a market portfolio made of those assets. To determine where it plots on the SML, we need to know the beta of the market portfolio, βM. Because this portfolio is representative of all the assets in the market, it must have average systematic risk. In other words, it has a beta of one. We could therefore write the slope of the SML as:
SML slope = [E(RM) - Rf] ___________
βM =
[E(RM) - Rf] ___________ 1 = E(RM) - Rf
Th e term E(RM) - Rf is oft en called the market risk premium since it is the risk premium on a market portfolio.
THE CAPITAL ASSET PRICING MODEL To finish up, if we let E(Ri) and βi stand for the expected return and beta, respectively, on any asset in the market, we know it must plot on the SML. As a result, we know that its reward-to-risk ratio is the same as the overall market’s:
[E(Ri) - Rf] __________
βi = E(RM) - Rf
If we rearrange this, we can write the equation for the SML as:
E(Ri) = Rf + [E(RM) - Rf] × βi [13.10]
12 See Z. Bodie, A. Kane, A. J. Marcus, S. Perrakis and P. J. Ryan, In vestments, 7th Canadian ed. (Whitby, Ontario: Mc- Graw-Hill Ryerson, 2011).
financialpost.com
Concept Questions
security market line (SML) Positively sloped straight line displaying the relationship between expected return and beta.
market risk premium Slope of the SML, the difference between the expected return on a market portfolio and the risk-free rate.
374 Part 5: Risk and Return
13Ross_Chapter13_4th.indd 37413Ross_Chapter13_4th.indd 374 12-11-27 12:1012-11-27 12:10
Th is result is identical to the famous capital asset pricing model (CAPM).13 What the CAPM shows is that the expected return for a particular asset depends on three things:
1. The pure time value of money. As measured by the risk-free rate, Rf, this is the reward for merely waiting for your money, without taking any risk.
2. The reward for bearing systematic risk. As measured by the market risk premium [E(RM) - Rf], this component is the reward the market offers for bearing an average amount of systematic risk in addition to waiting.
3. The amount of systematic risk. As measured by βi, this is the amount of systematic risk pres- ent in a particular asset, relative to an average asset.
Heather Pelant on Investment Risk Diversification and Exchange Traded Funds
Investors have been advised repeatedly to diversify their investment portfolios, but Canadians still have the bulk of their money invested in the Canadian market. That adds a new layer of risk to their investments, according to Heather Pelant, head of business development at Barclays Global Investors Canada.
“There’s an opportunity to do a strategic rebalance right now,” Pelant said in an interview. “The market has led Canadians to be overweight in Canadian equities… to me we have some embedded risks in those portfolios.”
According to July 2007 statistics from the Investment Funds Institute of Canada, almost 27 percent of investments in the country are in Canadian equity funds, 22 percent are in domestic balanced mutual funds, 16 percent are in global and international equities and 13.3 percent are in global balanced funds.
According to a TD Economics report, investors who put most of their money in the Canadian market expose their portfolios to geographic risk from a potential downturn in the Canadian economy.
Not only is Canada a tiny part of the global market, representing roughly 3.5 percent of the world’s equities, the TSX is dominated by energy, mining and fi nancial company’s. That heavy sectoral weighting results in investors having too few funds in high-tech, pharmaceuticals and other sectors prospering elsewhere around the world. Pelant said Canadians can easily realign their portfolios by investing in international exchange traded funds (ETFs), which track the performance of stock indexes from around the world and provide investors with a diversifi ed index fund.
You can think about it in three ways. You can be broad or you can go country specifi c or you can go with global investors. You can add one or two ETFs to your portfolio and take a lot of risk off the table.
Pelant said ETFs have lower management expense ratios
than mutual funds and are aimed at providing the same rate of return as the market, which has historically been better than what most mutual fund managers have achieved.
At a recent Barclays iShares adviser forum in Vancouver, Pelant said people think that, because mutual funds are actively managed, they’re less affected by market volatility. Yet the opposite tends to be true.
In her presentation, she showed how fund managers add volatility, because they’re trying to beat the market. “That comes with some risk,” Pelant said.
She noted that fi nding a fund manager that does consistently well is diffi cult because he or she might do well in one period, but poorly in the next.
But Pelant added that if investors are comfortable with the risk and want to invest with a mutual fund in a sector or region, adding an ETF to the same asset class can cut the volatility of returns in half.
“Sometimes the index outperforms and sometimes the active manager underperforms, but combine the two [and] you end up with a better portfolio.”
And if investors need to diversify their asset mix by adding more fi xed income or by entering emerging markets, ETFs now cover those areas.
Investing in ETFs that match the market in the long run might sound attractive, but they’re not without risk, and investors need to be comfortable with market volatility. And with the number of ETFs available in Canada today, it’s important to know which one best suits your own investment goals. With sector specifi c ETFs like those for gold, silver or fi nancial services, it’s important to know the fund’s inherent risk level, because some ETFs will be more riskier than others.
Heather Pelant is the Managing Director at BlackRock Hong Kong. Her comments are excerpted with permission from “To hedge investment risks, diversify and go global,” by Richard Chu, Business in Vancouver, October 16–22, 2007.
IN THEIR OWN WORDS…
13 Our discussion leading up to the CAPM is actually much more closely related to a more recently developed theory, known as the arbitrage pricing theory (APT). The theory underlying the CAPM is a great deal more complex than we have indicated here, and the CAPM has a number of other implications that go beyond the scope of this discussion. As we present here, the CAPM and the APT have essentially identical implications, so we don’t distinguish between them. Appendix 13A presents another way to develop the CAPM.
capital asset pricing model (CAPM) Equation of the SML showing the relationship between expected return and beta.
Chapter 13: Return, Risk, and the Security Market Line 375
13Ross_Chapter13_4th.indd 37513Ross_Chapter13_4th.indd 375 12-11-27 12:1012-11-27 12:10
By the way, the CAPM works for portfolios of assets just as it does for individual assets. In an earlier section, we saw how to calculate a portfolio’s β. To fi nd the expected return on a portfolio, we simply use this β in the CAPM equation.
Figure 13.11 summarizes our discussion of the SML and the CAPM. As before, we plot the expected return against beta. Now we recognize that, based on the CAPM, the slope of the SML is equal to the market risk premium [E(RM) - Rf]. Th is concludes our presentation of concepts related to the risk-return trade-off . For future reference, Table 13.12 summarizes the various con- cepts in the order we discussed them in.
FIGURE 13.11
The security market line (SML)
Asset expected return
Asset beta
M
Rf
E(RM)
E(RM) – Rf
=
=
1.0�
The slope of the security market line is equal to the market risk premium; i.e., the reward for bearing an average amount of systematic risk. The equation describing the SML can be written: E(Ri) = Rf + βi × [E(RM) - Rf] which is the capital asset pricing model (CAPM).
TABLE 13.12 Summary of risk and return
Total risk. The total risk of an investment is measured by the variance or, more commonly, the standard deviation of its return.
Total return. The total return on an investment has two components: the expected return and the unexpected return. The unexpected return comes about because of unanticipated events. The risk from investing stems from the possibility of unanticipated events.
Systematic and unsystematic risks. Systematic risks (also called market risks) are unanticipated events that affect almost all assets to some degree because they are economy wide. Unsystematic risks are unanticipated events that affect single assets or small groups of assets. Unsystematic risks are also called unique or asset-specific risks.
The effect of diversification. Some, but not all, of the risk associated with a risky investment can be eliminated by diversification. The reason is that unsystematic risks, which are unique to individual assets, tend to wash out in a large portfolio; systematic risks, which affect all of the assets in a portfolio to some extent, do not.
The systematic risk principle and beta. Because unsystematic risk can be freely eliminated by diversification, the systematic risk principle states that the reward for bearing risk depends only on the level of systematic risk. The level of systematic risk in a particular asset, relative to average, is given by the beta of that asset.
The reward-to-risk ratio and the security market line. The reward-to-risk ratio for asset i is the ratio of its risk premium E(Ri) - Rf to its beta, βi:
E(Ri) - Rf _________
βi
In a well-functioning market, this ratio is the same for every asset. As a result, when asset expected returns are plotted against asset betas, all assets plot on the same straight line, called the security market line (SML).
The capital asset pricing model. From the SML, the expected return on asset i can be written: E(Ri) = Rf + [E(RM) - Rf] × βi This is the capital asset pricing model (CAPM). The expected return on a risky asset thus has three components: The first is the pure time value of money (Rf), the second is the market risk premium [E(RM) - Rf], and the third is the beta for that asset, βi.
376 Part 5: Risk and Return
13Ross_Chapter13_4th.indd 37613Ross_Chapter13_4th.indd 376 12-11-27 12:1012-11-27 12:10
EXAMPLE 13.13: Risk and Return
Suppose the risk-free rate is 4 percent, the market risk pre- mium is 8.6 percent, and a particular stock has a beta of 1.3. Based on the CAPM, what is the expected return on this stock? What would the expected return be if the beta were to double?
With a beta of 1.3, the risk premium for the stock would be 1.3 × 8.6%, or 11.18 percent. The risk-free rate is 4 percent, so the expected return is 15.18 percent. If the beta doubles to 2.6, the risk premium would double to 22.36 percent, so the expected return would be 26.36 percent.
1. What is the fundamental relationship between risk and return in well-functioning markets?
2. What is the security market line? Why must all assets plot directly on it in a well-functioning market?
3. What is the capital asset pricing model (CAPM)? What does it tell us about the required return on a risky investment?
13.8 Arbitrage Pricing Theory And Empirical Models
Th e CAPM and the arbitrage pricing theory (APT) are alternative models of risk and return. One advantage of the APT is that it can handle multiple factors that the CAPM ignores. Although the bulk of our presentation in this chapter focused on the one-factor model, a multifactor model is probably more refl ective of reality.
Th e APT assumes that stock returns are generated according to factor models. For example, we have described a stock’s return as
Total return = Expected return + Unexpected return R = E(R) + U
In APT, the unexpected return is related to several market factors. Suppose there are three such factors: unanticipated changes in infl ation, GNP, and interest rates. Th e total return can be expanded as
R = E(R) + βIFI + βGNP FGNP + βrFr + ε [13.11] Th e three factors FI, FGNP, and Fr represent systematic risk because these factors aff ect many secur- ities. Th e term ε is considered unsystematic risk because it is unique to each individual security. Under this multifactor APT, we can generalize from three to K factors to express the relationship between risk and return as:
E(R) = RF + E[(R1) - RF]β1 + E[(R2) - RF]β2 + E[(R3) - RF]β3 + … + E[(RK) - RF]βK [13.12] In this equation, β1 stands for the security’s beta with respect to the fi rst factor, β2 stands for the security’s beta with respect to the second factor, and so on. For example, if the fi rst factor is infl a- tion, β1 is the security’s infl ation beta. Th e term E(R1) is the expected return on a security (or portfolio) whose beta with respect to the fi rst factor is one and whose beta with respect to all other factors is zero. Because the market compensates for risk, E((R1) - RF) is positive in the normal case.14 (An analogous interpretation can be given to E(R2), E(R3), and so on.)
Th e equation states that the security’s expected return is related to its factor betas. Th e argu- ment is that each factor represents risk that cannot be diversifi ed away. Th e higher a security’s beta with regard to a particular factor, the higher the risk that security bears. In a rational world, the expected return on the security should compensate for this risk. Th e preceding equation states that the expected return is a summation of the risk-free rate plus the compensation for each type of risk the security bears.
14 Actually (Ri - RF) could be negative in the case where factor i is perceived as a hedge of some sort.
Concept Questions
arbitrage pricing theory (APT) An equilibrium asset pricing theory that is derived from a factor model by using diversification and arbitrage. It shows that the expected return on any risky asset is a linear combination of various factors.
Chapter 13: Return, Risk, and the Security Market Line 377
13Ross_Chapter13_4th.indd 37713Ross_Chapter13_4th.indd 377 12-11-27 12:1012-11-27 12:10
As an example, consider a Canadian study where the factors were
1. The rate of growth in industrial production (INDUS). 2. The changes in the slope of the term structure of interest rates (the difference between the
yield on long-term and short-term Canada bonds) (TERMS). 3. The default risk premium for bonds (measured as the difference between the yield on long-
term Canada bonds and the yield on the ScotiaMcLeod corporate bond index) (RISKPREM).
4. The inflation (measured as the growth of the consumer price index) (INFL). 5. The value-weighted return on the market portfolio (S&P/TSX Composite) (MKRET).15
Using the period 1970–84, the empirical results of the study indicated that expected monthly returns on a sample of 100 TSX stocks could be described as a function of the risk premiums associated with these fi ve factors.
Because many factors appear on the right side of the APT equation, the APT formulation explained expected returns in this Canadian sample more accurately than did the CAPM. How- ever, as we mentioned earlier, one cannot easily determine which are the appropriate factors. Th e factors in this study were included for reasons of both common sense and convenience. Th ey were not derived from theory and the choice of factors varies from study to study. A more recent Can- adian study, for example, includes changes in a U.S. stock index and in exchange rates as factors.16
Th e CAPM and the APT by no means exhaust the models and techniques used in practice to measure the expected return on risky assets. Both the CAPM and the APT are risk based. Th ey each measure the risk of a security by its beta(s) on some systematic factor(s), and they each argue that the expected excess return must be proportional to the beta(s). As we have seen, this is intui- tively appealing and has a strong basis in theory, but there are alternative approaches.
One popular alternative is a multifactor empirical model developed by Fama and French and based less on a theory of how fi nancial markets work and more on simply looking for regularities and relations in the past history of market data. In such an approach, the researcher specifi es some parameters or attributes associated with the securities in question and then examines the data directly for a relation between these attributes and expected returns. Fama and French examine whether the expected return on a fi rm is related to its size and market to book ratio in addition to its beta. Is it true that small fi rms have higher average returns than large fi rms? Do growth companies with high market to book ratios have higher average returns than value companies with low market to book ratios?17 A well-known extension of the Fama-French model includes a fourth, momentum factor measured by last year’s stock return.18
Although multifactor models are commonly used in investment performance analysis they have not become standard practice in estimating the cost of capital. Surveys of corporate execu- tives show that only 1 in 3 employ multifactor models for this purpose while over 70 percent rely on the CAPM.19
1. What is the main advantage of the APT over the CAPM?
15 E. Otuteye, “How Economic Forces Explain Canadian Stock Returns,” Canadian Investment Review, Spring 1991, pp. 93–99. 16 L. Kryzanowski, S. Lalancette, and M.C. To, “Performance Attribution using an APT with Prespecified Macro-factors and Time-Varying Risk Premia and Betas,” Journal of Financial and Quantitative Analysis 32 (June 1997), pp. 205–224. A further Canadian study is: B.F. Smith, “A Study of the Arbitrage Pricing Theory Using Daily Returns of Canadian Stocks,” in M.J. Robinson and B.F. Smith, eds., Canadian Capital Markets, London, Ont., Ivey Business School, 1993. 17 E.F. Fama and K.R. French, “Common Risk Factors in the Returns on Stocks and Bonds,” Journal of Financial Eco- nomics 33 (1) (February 1993) and “Multifactor Explanations of Asset Pricing Anomalies,” Journal of Finance, March 1996, 51:1, pp. 55–84. 18 M. Carhart, “On Persistence in Mutual Fund Performance,” Journal of Finance 52 (1997), pp. 57–82. 19 J.R. Graham and C. R. Harvey, “The Theory and Practice of Corporate Finance: Evidence from the Field”, Journal of Financial Economics, 2001, Vol. 60, pp. 187–243.
Concept Questions
378 Part 5: Risk and Return
13Ross_Chapter13_4th.indd 37813Ross_Chapter13_4th.indd 378 12-11-27 12:1012-11-27 12:10
13.9 SUMMARY AND CONCLUSIONS
Th is chapter covered the essentials of risk. Along the way, we introduced a number of defi nitions and concepts. Th e most important of these is the security market line, or SML. Th e SML is impor- tant because it tells us the reward off ered in fi nancial markets for bearing risk. Once we know this, we have a benchmark against which to compare the returns expected from real asset investments and to determine if they are desirable.
Because we covered quite a bit of ground, it’s useful to summarize the basic economic logic underlying the SML as follows:
1. Based on capital market history, there is a reward for bearing risk. This reward is the risk premium on an asset.
2. The total risk associated with an asset has two parts: systematic risk and unsystematic risk. Unsystematic risk can be freely eliminated by diversification (this is the principle of diversi- fication), so only systematic risk is rewarded. As a result, the risk premium on an asset is de- termined by its systematic risk. This is the systematic risk principle.
3. An asset’s systematic risk, relative to average, can be measured by its beta coefficient, βi. The risk premium on an asset is then given by its beta coefficient multiplied by the market risk premium [E(RM) - Rf] × βi.
4. The expected return on an asset, E(Ri), is equal to the risk-free rate, Rf, plus the risk premium:
E(Ri) = Rf + [E(RM) - Rf] × βi Th is is the equation of the SML, and it is oft en called the capital asset pricing model (CAPM). Th is chapter completes our discussion of risk and return and concludes Part 5 of our book.
Now that we have a better understanding of what determines a fi rm’s cost of capital for an invest- ment, the next several chapters examine more closely how fi rms raise the long-term capital needed for investment.
Key Terms arbitrage pricing theory (APT) (page 377) beta coefficient (page 366) capital asset pricing model (CAPM) (page 375) expected return (page 347) market risk premium (page 374) portfolio (page 351)
portfolio weights (page 351) principle of diversification (page 363) security market line (SML) (page 374) systematic risk (page 360) systematic risk principle (page 366) unsystematic risk (page 360)
Chapter Review Problems and Self-Test 13.1 Expected Return and Standard Deviation This problem
gives you some practice calculating measures of prospective portfolio performance. There are two assets and three states of the economy:
Rate of Return if State Occurs
State of Economy
Probability of
State of Economy Stock A Stock B
Recession .20 -.15 .20
Normal .50 .20 .30 Boom .30 .60 .40
What are the expected returns and standard deviations for these two stocks?
13.2 Portfolio Risk and Return Using the information in the pre- vious problem, suppose you have $20,000 total. If you put $15,000 in Stock A and the remainder in Stock B, what will be the expected return and standard deviation on your portfolio?
13.3 Risk and Return Suppose you observe the following situation:
Security Beta Expected Return
Cooley Inc. 1.8 22.00% Moyer Company 1.6 20.44
If the risk-free rate is 7 percent, are these securities correctly priced? What would the risk-free rate have to be if they are correctly priced?
13.4 CAPM Suppose the risk-free rate is 8 percent. The expected return on the market is 16 percent. If a particular stock has a beta of .7, what is its expected return based on the CAPM? If another stock has an expected return of 24 percent, what must its beta be?
Chapter 13: Return, Risk, and the Security Market Line 379
13Ross_Chapter13_4th.indd 37913Ross_Chapter13_4th.indd 379 12-11-27 12:1012-11-27 12:10
Answers to Self-Test Problems 13.1 The expected returns are just the possible returns multiplied by the associated probabilities: E(RA) = (.20 × -.15) + (.50 × .20) + (.30 × .60) = 25% E(RB) = (.20 × .20) + (.50 × .30) + (.30 × .40) = 31% The variances are given by the sums of the squared deviations from the expected returns multiplied by their probabilities: σ2A = .20 × (-.15 - .25)2 + .50 × (.20 - .25)2 + .30 × (.60 - .25)2
= (.20 × -.402) + (.50 × -.052) + (.30 × .352) = (.20 × .16) + (.50 × .0025) + (.30 × .1225) = .0700
σ2B = .20 × (.20 - .31)2 + .50 × (.30 - .31)2 + .30 × (.40 - .31)2 = (.20 × -.112) + (.50 × -.012) + (.30 × .092) = (.20 × .0121) + (.50 × .0001) + (.30 × .0081) = .0049
The standard deviations are thus: σA = √
_____ .0700 = 26.46%
σB = √ _____
.0049 = 7% 13.2 The portfolio weights are $15,000/20,000 = .75 and $5,000/20,000 = .25. The expected return is thus: E(RP) = .75 × E(RA) + .25 × E(RB)
= (.75 × 25%) + (.25 × 31%) = 26.5%
Alternatively, we could calculate the portfolio’s return in each of the states: State of Economy Probability of State of Economy Portfolio Return if State Occurs
Recession .20 (.75 × -.15) + (.25 × .20) = -.0625 Normal .50 (.75 × .20) + (.25 × .30) = .2250 Boom .30 (.75 × .60) + (.25 × .40) = .5500
The portfolio’s expected return is: E(RP) = (.20 × -.0625) + (.50 × .2250) + (.30 × .5500) = 26.5% This is the same as we had before. The portfolio’s variance is: σ2P =.20 × (-.0625 - .265)2 + .50 × (.225 - .265)2 + .30 × (.55 - .265)2
= .0466 So the standard deviation is √
_____ .0466 = 21.59%.
13.3 If we compute the reward-to-risk ratios, we get (22% - 7%)/1.8 = 8.33% for Cooley versus 8.4% for Moyer. Relative to that of Cooley, Moyer’s expected return is too high, so its price is too low.
If they are correctly priced, they must offer the same reward-to-risk ratio. The risk-free rate would have to be such that: (22% - Rf)/1.8 = (20.44% - Rf)/1.6 With a little algebra, we find that the risk-free rate must be 8 percent: 22% - Rf = (20.44% - Rf)(1.8/1.6)
22% - 20.44% × 1.125 = Rf - Rf × 1.125 Rf = 8%
13.4 Because the expected return on the market is 16 percent, the market risk premium is 16% - 8% = 8%. (the risk-free rate is 8 percent). The first stock has a beta of .7, so its expected return is 8% + .7 × 8% = 13.6%.
For the second stock, notice that the risk premium is 24% - 8% = 16%. Because this is twice as large as the market risk premium, the beta must be exactly equal to 2. We can verify this using the CAPM:
E(Ri) = Rf + [E(RM) - Rf] × βi 24% = 8% + (16% - 8%) × βi βi = 16%/8% = 2.0
Concepts Review and Critical Thinking Questions 1. (LO3) In broad terms, why is some risk diversifiable? Why
are some risks nondiversifiable? Does it follow that an inves- tor can control the level of unsystematic risk in a portfolio, but not the level of systematic risk?
2. (LO3) Suppose the government announces that, based on a just-completed survey, the growth rate in the economy is likely to be 2 percent in the coming year, as compared to 5 percent for the year just completed. Will security prices in-
380 Part 5: Risk and Return
13Ross_Chapter13_4th.indd 38013Ross_Chapter13_4th.indd 380 12-11-27 12:1012-11-27 12:10
crease, decrease, or stay the same following this announce- ment? Does it make any difference whether or not the 2 percent figure was anticipated by the market? Explain.
3. (LO3) Classify the following events as mostly systematic or mostly unsystematic. Is the distinction clear in every case?
a. Short-term interest rates increase unexpectedly. b. The interest rate a company pays on its short-term debt
borrowing is increased by its bank. c. Oil prices unexpectedly decline. d. An oil tanker ruptures, creating a large oil spill. e. A manufacturer loses a multimillion-dollar product lia-
bility suit. f. A Supreme Court of Canada decision substantially
broadens producer liability for injuries suffered by prod- uct users.
4. (LO3) Indicate whether the following events might cause stocks in general to change price, and whether they might cause Big Widget Corp.’s stock to change price.
a. The government announces that inflation unexpectedly jumped by 2 percent last month.
b. Big Widget’s quarterly earnings report, just issued, gen- erally fell in line with analysts’ expectations.
c. The government reports that economic growth last year was at 3 percent, which generally agreed with most econ- omists’ forecasts.
d. The directors of Big Widget die in a plane crash. e. The Government of Canada approves changes to the tax
code that will increase the top marginal corporate tax rate. The legislation had been debated for the previous six months.
5. (LO1) If a portfolio has a positive investment in every asset,
can the expected return on the portfolio be greater than that on every asset in the portfolio? Can it be less than that on ev- ery asset in the portfolio? If you answer yes to one or both of these questions, give an example to support your answer.
6. (LO2) True or false: The most important characteristic in de- termining the expected return of a well-diversified portfolio is the variances of the individual assets in the portfolio. Explain.
7. (LO2) If a portfolio has a positive investment in every asset, can the standard deviation on the portfolio be less than that on every asset in the portfolio? What about the portfolio beta?
8. (LO4) Is it possible that a risky asset could have a beta of zero? Explain. Based on the CAPM, what is the expected re- turn on such an asset? Is it possible that a risky asset could have a negative beta? What does the CAPM predict about the expected return on such an asset? Can you give an explanation for your answer?
9. (LO1) In recent years, it has been common for companies to experience significant stock price changes in reaction to an- nouncements of massive layoffs. Critics charge that such events encourage companies to fire long-time employees and that Bay Street is cheering them on. Do you agree or disagree?
10. (LO1) As indicated by a number of examples in this chapter, earnings announcements by companies are closely followed by, and frequently result in, share price revisions. Two issues should come to mind. First, earnings announcements concern past periods. If the market values stocks based on expectations of the future, why are numbers summarizing past performance relevant? Second, these announcements concern accounting earnings. Going back to Chapter 2, such earnings may have little to do with cash flow, so, again, why are they relevant?
Questions and Problems 1. Determining Portfolio Weights (LO1) What are the portfolio weights for a portfolio that has 145 shares of Stock A that sell for
$45 per share and 110 shares of Stock B that sell for $27 per share? 2. Portfolio Expected Return (LO1) You own a portfolio that has $2,950 invested in Stock A and $3,700 invested in Stock B. If the
expected returns on these stocks are 8 percent and 11 percent, respectively, what is the expected return on the portfolio? 3. Portfolio Expected Return (LO1) You own a portfolio that is 35 percent invested in Stock X, 20 percent in Stock Y, and 45
percent in Stock Z. The expected returns on these three stocks are 9 percent, 17 percent, and 13 percent, respectively. What is the expected return on the portfolio?
4. Portfolio Expected Return (LO1) You have $10,000 to invest in a stock portfolio. Your choices are Stock X with an expected return of 12 percent and Stock Y with an expected return of 9.5 percent. If your goal is to create a portfolio with an expected return of 11.1 percent, how much money will you invest in Stock X? In Stock Y?
5. Calculating Expected Return (LO1) Based on the following information, calculate the expected return: State of
Economy Probability of
State of Economy Portfolio Return if State Occurs
Recession .30 -.14 Boom .70 .22
6. Calculating Expected Return (LO1) Based on the following information, calculate the expected return: State of
Economy Probability of
State of Economy Portfolio Return if State Occurs
Recession .20 -.18 Normal .50 .11 Boom .30 .29
7. Calculating Returns and Standard Deviations (LO1) Based on the following information, calculate the expected return and standard deviation for the two stocks:
Basic (Questions
1–20)
Chapter 13: Return, Risk, and the Security Market Line 381
13Ross_Chapter13_4th.indd 38113Ross_Chapter13_4th.indd 381 12-11-27 12:1012-11-27 12:10
State of Economy
Probability of State of Economy
Rate of Return if State Occurs
Stock A Stock B
Recession .20 .05 -.17 Normal .55 .08 .12 Boom .25 .13 .29
8. Calculating Expected Returns (LO1) A portfolio is invested 15 percent in Stock G, 55 percent in Stock J, and 30 percent in Stock K. The expected returns on these stocks are 8 percent, 14 percent, and 18 percent, respectively. What is the portfolio’s expected return? How do you interpret your answer?
9. Returns and Variances (LO1, 2) Consider the following information:
State of Economy
Probability of State of Economy
Rate of Return if State Occurs
Stock A Stock B Stock C
Boom .65 .07 .15 .33 Bust .35 .13 .03 -.06
a. What is the expected return on an equally weighted portfolio of these three stocks? b. What is the variance of a portfolio invested 20 percent each in A and B and 60 percent in C?
10. Returns and Standard Deviations (LO1, 2) Consider the following information:
State of Economy
Probability of State of Economy
Rate of Return if State Occurs
Stock A Stock B Stock C
Boom .15 .35 .45 .27 Good .55 .16 .10 .08 Poor .25 -.01 -.06 -.04 Bust .05 -.12 -.12 -.09
a. Your portfolio is invested 30 percent each in A and C, and 40 percent in B. What is the expected return of the portfolio? b. What is the variance of this portfolio? The standard deviation?
11. Calculating Portfolio Betas (LO4) You own a stock portfolio invested 35 percent in Stock Q, 25 percent in Stock R, 30 percent in Stock S, and 10 percent in Stock T. The betas for these four stocks are .84, 1.17, 1.11, and 1.36, respectively. What is the portfolio beta?
12. Calculating Portfolio Betas (LO4) You own a portfolio equally invested in a risk-free asset and two stocks. If one of the stocks has a beta of 1.27 and the total portfolio is equally as risky as the market, what must the beta be for the other stock in your portfolio?
13. Using CAPM (LO1, 4) A stock has a beta of 1.05, the expected return on the market is 10 percent, and the risk-free rate is 3.8 percent. What must the expected return on this stock be?
14. Using CAPM (LO1, 4) A stock has an expected return of 10.2 percent, the risk-free rate is 4.5 percent, and the market risk premium is 7.5 percent. What must the beta of this stock be?
15. Using CAPM (LO1, 4) A stock has an expected return of 12.4 percent, its beta is 1.17, and the risk-free rate is 4.2 percent. What must the expected return on the market be?
16. Using CAPM (LO4) A stock has an expected return of 13.3 percent, its beta is 1.45, and the expected return on the market is 10.5 percent. What must the risk-free rate be?
17. Using CAPM (LO1, 4) A stock has a beta of 1.25 and an expected return of 14 percent. A risk-free asset currently earns 2.1 percent. a. What is the expected return on a portfolio that is equally invested in the two assets? b. If a portfolio of the two assets has a beta of .93, what are the portfolio weights? c. If a portfolio of the two assets has an expected return of9 percent, what is its beta? d. If a portfolio of the two assets has a beta of 2.50, what are the portfolio weights? How do you interpret the weights for the
two assets in this case? Explain. 18. Using the SML (LO1, 4) Asset W has an expected return of 12.8 percent and a beta of 1.25. If the risk-free rate is 4.1 percent,
complete the following table for portfolios of Asset W and a risk-free asset. Illustrate the relationship between portfolio expected return and portfolio beta by plotting the expected returns against the betas. What is the slope of the line that results?
Percentage of Portfolio in Asset W
Portfolio Expected Return
Portfolio Beta
0% 25 50 75
100 125 150
382 Part 5: Risk and Return
13Ross_Chapter13_4th.indd 38213Ross_Chapter13_4th.indd 382 12-11-27 12:1012-11-27 12:10
19. Reward-to-Risk Ratios (LO4) Stock Y has a beta of 1.3 and an expected return of 15.3 percent. Stock Z has a beta of .70 and an expected return of 9.3 percent. If the risk-free rate is 5.5 percent and the market risk premium is 6.8 percent, are these stocks correctly priced?
20. Reward-to-Risk Ratios (LO4) In the previous problem, what would the risk-free rate have to be for the two stocks to be correctly priced?
21. Portfolio Returns (LO1, 2) Using Table 12.4 from the previous chapter on capital market history, determine the return on a portfolio that is equally invested in large-company stocks and long-term government bonds. What is the return on a portfolio that is equally invested in small-company stocks and Treasury bills?
22. CAPM (LO4) Using the CAPM, show that the ratio of the risk premiums on two assets is equal to the ratio of their betas. 23. Portfolio Returns and Deviations (LO1, 2) Consider the following information about three stocks:
State of Economy
Probability of State of Economy
Rate of Return if State Occurs
Stock A Stock B Stock C
Boom .20 .24 .36 .55 Normal .55 .17 .13 .09 Bust .25 .00 -.28 -.45
a. If your portfolio is invested 40 percent each in A and B and 20 percent in C, what is the portfolio expected return? The variance? The standard deviation?
b. If the expected T-bill rate is 3.80 percent, what is the expected risk premium on the portfolio? c. If the expected inflation rate is 3.50 percent, what are the approximate and exact expected real returns on the portfolio?
What are the approximate and exact expected real risk premiums on the portfolio? 24. Analyzing a Portfolio (LO2) You want to create a portfolio equally as risky as the market, and you have $1,000,000 to invest.
Given this information, fill in the rest of the following table: Asset Investment Beta
Stock A $195,000 .95 Stock B $340,000 1.15 Stock C 1.29 Risk-free asset
25. Analyzing a Portfolio (LO2, 4) You have $100,000 to invest in a portfolio containing Stock X and Stock Y. Your goal is to create a portfolio that has an expected return of 17 percent. If Stock X has an expected return of 14.8 percent and a beta of 1.35, and Stock Y has an expected return of 11.2 percent and a beta of .90, how much money will you invest in stock Y? How do you interpret your answer? What is the beta of your portfolio?
26. Systematic versus Unsystematic Risk (LO3) Consider the following information about Stocks I and II:
State of Economy
Probability of State of Economy
Rate of Return if State Occurs
Stock I Stock II
Recession .25 .02 -.25 Normal .50 .21 .09 Irrational exuberance .25 .06 .44
The market risk premium is 8 percent, and the risk-free rate is 4 percent. Which stock has the most systematic risk? Which one has the most unsystematic risk? Which stock is “riskier”? Explain.
27. SML (LO4) Suppose you observe the following situation: Security Beta Expected Return
Pete Corp. 1.15 .129 Repete Co. .84 .102
Assume these securities are correctly priced. Based on the CAPM, what is the expected return on the market? What is the risk- free rate?
28. SML (LO1, 4) Suppose you observe the following situation:
State of Economy
Probability of State
Return if State Occurs
Stock A Stock B
Recession .25 -.08 -.05 Normal .60 .13 .14 Irrational exuberance .15 .48 .29
a. Calculate the expected return on each stock. b. Assuming the capital asset pricing model holds and stock A’s beta is greater than stock B’s beta by .25, what is the expected
market risk premium?
Intermediate (Questions
21–24)
2
2
Challenge (Questions
25–26)
2
Chapter 13: Return, Risk, and the Security Market Line 383
13Ross_Chapter13_4th.indd 38313Ross_Chapter13_4th.indd 383 12-11-27 12:1012-11-27 12:10
Internet Application Questions 1. You have decided to invest in an equally weighted portfolio consisting of Petro-Canada, Royal Bank of Canada, Canadian Tire,
and WestJet Airlines and need to find the beta of your portfolio. Go to finance.yahoo.com and follow the “Global Symbol Lookup” link to find the ticker symbols for each of these companies. Next, go back to finance.yahoo.com, enter one of the ticker symbols and get a stock quote. Follow the “Profile” link to find the beta for this company. You will then need to find the beta for each of the companies. What is the beta for your portfolio?
2. Go to money.msn.com and search for Reitmans Canada. Follow the “Quote” link to get the beta for the company. Go to bankofcanada.ca/rates/interest-rates/, and find the current interest rate for three-month treasury bills. Using this information, calculate the expected return on the market using the reward-to-risk ratio. What would be the expected stock price one year from now?
3. Recall that the site theglobeandmail.com/globe-investor/funds-and-etfs/funds/ contains considerable information on Canadian mutual funds. Visit the site and update the calculations in Example 13.12 to reflect the most recent three-year period.
4. You want to find the expected return for Bank of Montreal using the CAPM. First you need the market risk premium. Go to bmonesbittburns.com/economics/, and find “Daily Economic Update” under ’Publications’. Find the current interest rate for three-month Treasury bills. Use the average Canadian common stock return in Table 12.3 to calculate the market risk pre- mium. If the beta for Bank of Montreal is 1.01, what is the expected return using CAPM?20 What assumptions have you made to arrive at this number? As you may recall from Chapter 8, stock growth is often assumed to be equal to earnings growth. Compare your answer above with an EPS growth estimate from theglobeandmail.com/globe-investor/. What does this tell you about analyst estimates?
5. You have decided to invest in an equally weighted portfolio consisting of Rogers Communications, Bank of Montreal, and Goldcorp Inc. and need to find the beta of your portfolio. Go to finance.yahoo.com and follow the “Symbol Lookup” link to find the ticker symbols for each of these companies. Next, go back to finance.yahoo.com, enter one of the ticker symbols and get a stock quote. Follow the “Profile” link to find the beta for this company. You will then need to find the beta for each of the companies. What is the beta for your portfolio? (Note that this beta will compare the stock to the NYSE.)
6. Go to finance.yahoo.com and enter the ticker symbol RCI for Rogers Communication Inc. Follow the “Profile” link to get the beta for the company. Next, follow the “Research” link to find the estimated price in 12 months according to market analysts. Using the current share price and the mean target price, compute the expected return for this stock. Don’t forget to include the expected dividend payments over the next year. Now go to money.cnn.com and find the current interest rate for three-month Treasury bills. Using this information, calculate the expected return on the market using the reward-to-risk ratio. Does this number make sense? Why or why not? (Note that the beta value you locate will compare Rogers Communication to the NYSE volatility. You should analyze this question from a U.S. perspective.)
DERIVATION OF THE CAPITAL ASSET PRICING MODEL
Up to this point, we have assumed that all assets on the efficient frontier are risky. Alternatively, an investor could easily combine a risky investment with an investment in a riskless or risk-free security, such as a Canada Treasury bill. Using the equation for portfolio variance (Equation 13A.1) we can find the variance of a portfolio with one risky and one risk-free asset:
σ2P = x2Lσ2L + x2Uσ2U + 2xLxUCORRL,UσLσU [13A.1] However, by definition, the risk-free asset (say, L in this example) has no variability so the equation for portfolio standard deviation reduces to:
σ2P = x2Uσ2U σP = √
___ σ2P = xUσU
The relationship between risk and return for one risky and one riskless asset is represented on a straight line between the risk-free rate and a pure investment in the risky asset as shown in Figure 13A.1. The line ex- tends to the right of the point representing the risky asset when we assume the investor can borrow at the risk-free rate to take a leveraged position of more than 100 percent in the risky asset.
To form an optimal portfolio, an investor is likely to combine an investment in the riskless asset with a portfolio of risky assets. Figure 13A.1 illustrates our discussion by showing a risk-free asset and four risky assets: A, X, Q, and Y. If there is no riskless asset, the efficient set is the curve from X to Y. With a risk-free asset, it is possible to form portfolios like 1, 2, and 3 combining Q with the risk-free asset. Portfolios 4 and 5 combine the riskless asset with A.
20 Note that if you have access to investment research services like those offered by TD Waterhouse or ScotiaMcLeod you could update the beta value by accessing their stock research section.
APPENDIX 13A
384 Part 5: Risk and Return
13Ross_Chapter13_4th.indd 38413Ross_Chapter13_4th.indd 384 12-11-27 12:1012-11-27 12:10
FIGURE 13A.1
Relationship between expected return and standard deviation for an investment in a combination of risky securities and the riskless asset
Standard deviation of portfolio's return
Expected return of portfolio
– 40% in risk-free asset 140% in stocks represented by Q
35% in risk-free asset 65% in stocks represented by Q
2 3
A
4
1 X
70% in risk-free asset 30% in stocks represented by Q
Risk-free rate (RF )
5 Y
Q Line I
Line II (capital market line)
Portfolio Q is composed of 30 percent BCE 45 percent Bank of Montreal 25 percent Telus
The graph illustrates an important point. With riskless borrowing and lending, the portfolio of risky assets held by any investor would always be point A. Regardless of the investor’s tolerance for risk, he or she would never choose any other point on the efficient set of risky assets. Rather, an investor with a high aver- sion to risk would combine the securities of A with riskless assets. The investor would borrow at the risk- free rate to invest more funds in A had he or she low aversion to risk. In other words, all investors would choose portfolios along Line II, called the capital market line.
To move from our description of a single investor to market equilibrium, financial economists imagine a world where all investors possess the same estimates of expected returns, variance, and correlations. This assumption is called homogeneous expectations.
If all investors have homogeneous expectations, Figure 13A.1 becomes the same for all individuals. All investors sketch out the same efficient set of risky assets because they are working with the same inputs. This efficient set of risky assets is represented by the curve XAY. Because the same risk-free rate applies to everyone, all investors view point A as the portfolio of risky assets to be held. In a world with homogeneous expectations, all investors would hold the portfolio of risky assets represented by point A.
If all investors choose the same portfolio of risky assets, A, then A must be the market portfolio.21 This is because, in our simplified world of homogeneous expectations, no asset would be demanded (and priced) if it were not in portfolio A. Since all assets have some demand and non-zero price, A has to be the market portfolio including all assets.
The variance of the market portfolio can be represented as:
σ2P ∑ i=1
N ∑
j=1
N xjσij [13A.2]
where we define σij as the covariance of i with j if i ≠ j and σij is the variance or σ2i if i = j. σij = CORRijσiσj
Using a little elementary calculus, we can represent a security’s systematic risk (the contribution of se- curity i to the risk of the market portfolio) by taking the partial derivative of the portfolio risk with respect to a change in the weight of the security. This measures the change in the portfolio variance when the weight of the security is increased slightly. For security 2,
δ σ 2 p ____ δx2
= 2 ∑ j=1
N
xjσi2 = 2 [ x1COV ( R1,R2 ) + x2 σ 2 2 + x3COV ( R3,R2 ) + … + x N COV ( RN,R2 ) ] [13A.3]
21 A market portfolio is a theoretical portfolio that includes every available type of asset at a level proportional to its market value.
Chapter 13: Return, Risk, and the Security Market Line 385
13Ross_Chapter13_4th.indd 38513Ross_Chapter13_4th.indd 385 12-11-27 12:1012-11-27 12:10
The term within brackets in (Equation 13A.3) is COV(R2,RM). This shows that systematic risk is pro- portional to a security’s covariance with the market portfolio. The final step is to standardize systematic risk by dividing by the variance of the market portfolio. The result is β2 as presented in the text.
β2 = COV(R2,RM) ___________
σ2(RM) [13A.4]
If you consult any basic statistics text, you will see that this formula is identical to the β2 obtained from a regression of R2 on RM.
We can now redraw Figure 13A.1 in expected return-β space, as shown in Figure 13A.2. The vertical axis remains the same, but on the horizontal axis we replace total risk (σ) with systematic risk as measured by β. We plot the two points on the capital market line from Figure 13A.1: RF with β = 0 and M (the market portfolio represented by A) with a β = 1. To see that βM = 1, substitute portfolio M for i in Equation 13A.4.
FIGURE 13A.2
Relationship between expected return on an individual security and beta of the security
RF
Beta of security10
Expected return on security (%)
RM
Security market line (SML)
M RF is the risk-free rate.
__
R M is the expected return on the market portfolio.
βM = COV(RM, RM) ____________
σ 2 (RM)
= CORRM,MσMσM _____________
σ2(RM)
= 1.0 × σ 2 M _________
σ 2 (RM)
βM = 1.0 The result is the security market line shown in Figure 13A.2. We can use the slope-intercept method to
find that the intercept of the SML is RF and the slope is (RM - RF). The equation for the SML is: E(R) = RF + β(RM - RF)
And this completes the derivation of the capital asset pricing model.
Appendix Questions and Problems
A.1 A mutual fund A has a standard deviation of 13 percent (assume this fund to be on the effi cient frontier; i.e., the fund plots on the capital market line). Th e risk-free rate is 3 percent. Th e standard deviation of the market’s return is 18 percent, and the expected return on the market is 15 percent. What is the ex- pected return on the mutual fund A?
386 Part 5: Risk and Return
13Ross_Chapter13_4th.indd 38613Ross_Chapter13_4th.indd 386 12-11-27 12:1012-11-27 12:10
Suppose you have just become the president of a large company and the fi rst decision you face is whether to go ahead with a plan to renovate the company’s warehouse distribution system. Th e plan will cost the company $50 million, and it is expected to save $12 million per year aft er taxes over the next six years.
Th is is a familiar problem in capital budgeting. To address it, you would determine the relevant cash fl ows, discount them, and, if the net present value (NPV) is positive, take on the project; if the NPV is negative, you would scrap it. So far so good, but what should you use as the discount rate?
From our discussion of risk and return, you know that the correct discount rate depends on the riskiness of the warehouse distribution system. In particular, the new project would have a positive NPV only if its return exceeds what the fi nancial markets off er on investments of similar risks. We called this minimum required return the cost of capital associated with the project.
Th us, to make the right decision as president, you must examine the returns that investors expect to earn on the securities represented in the pool of funds that would fi nance the project. You then use this information to arrive at an estimate of the project’s cost of capital. Our primary purpose in this chapter is to describe how to do this. Th ere are a variety of approaches to this task, and a number of conceptual and practical issues arise.
COST OF CAPITAL
C H A P T E R 1 4
R esolute Forest Products Inc., formerly known as AbitibiBowater Inc., is a global leader in the forest products industry with a diverse range of
products, including newsprint, commercial print-
ing paper, market pulp, and wood products. 2010
proved to be a pivotal year for Resolute, as the Mon-
treal-based firm successfully completed its restruc-
turing plan. The objective of the restructuring plan
was to focus on top-performing facilities by closing
or idling 3.4 million tonnes of paper capacity and to
capitalize on export market opportunities and prom-
ising growth markets for paper used in catalogues,
magazine inserts, direct mail, inkjet paper, and paper
packaging. In order to evaluate expansion opportu-
nities, Resolute needs to know the cost of capital.
A lower cost of capital helps firms to compete
effectively and move towards the goal of wealth
maximization for the shareholders. In this chapter,
we learn how to compute a firm’s cost of capital and
find out what it means to a firm and its investors.
Learning Object ives
After studying this chapter, you should understand:
LO1 How to determine a firm’s cost of equity capital.
LO2 How to determine a firm’s cost of debt.
LO3 How to determine a firm’s overall cost of capital.
LO4 How to correctly include flotation costs in capital budgeting projects.
LO5 Some of the pitfalls associated with a firm’s overall cost of capital and what to do about them.
P A R T 6
C ou
rt es
y of
R es
ol ut
e Fo
re st
P ro
du ct
s
14Ross_Chapter14_4th.indd 38714Ross_Chapter14_4th.indd 387 12-11-27 12:1112-11-27 12:11
One of the most important concepts we develop is the weighted average cost of capital (WACC). Th is is the cost of capital for the fi rm as a whole, and it can be interpreted as the required return on the overall fi rm. In discussing the WACC, we recognize the fact that a fi rm normally raises capital in a variety of forms and that these diff erent forms of capital may have diff erent costs associated with them.
We also recognize in this chapter that taxes are an important consideration in determining the required return on an investment, because we are always interested in valuing the aft er-tax cash fl ows from a project. We therefore discuss how to incorporate taxes explicitly into our estimates of the cost of capital.
14.1 The Cost of Capital: Some Preliminaries
In Chapter 13, we developed the security market line (SML) and used it to explore the relation- ship between the expected return on a security and its systematic risk. We concentrated on how the risky returns from buying securities looked from the viewpoint of, for example, a shareholder in the fi rm. Th is helped us understand more about the alternatives available to an investor in the capital markets.
In this chapter, we turn things around and look more closely at the other side of the problem, which is how these returns and securities look from the viewpoint of the companies that issue them. Note that the return an investor in a security receives is the cost of that security to the company that issued it.
Required Return versus Cost of Capital When we say that the required return on an investment is, say, 10 percent, we usually mean the investment has a positive NPV only if its return exceeds 10 percent. Another way of interpreting the required return is to observe that the fi rm must earn 10 percent on the investment just to com- pensate its investors for the use of the capital needed to fi nance the project. Th is is why we could also say that 10 percent is the cost of capital associated with the investment.
To illustrate the point further, imagine that we were evaluating a risk-free project. In this case, how to determine the required return is obvious: We look at the capital markets and observe the current rate off ered by risk-free investments, and we use this rate to discount the project’s cash fl ows. Th us, the cost of capital for a risk-free investment is the risk-free rate.
If this project were risky, then, assuming that all the other information is unchanged, the required return is obviously higher. In other words, the cost of capital for this project, if it is risky, is greater than the risk-free rate, and the appropriate discount rate would exceed the risk-free rate.
We henceforth use the terms required return, appropriate discount rate, and cost of capital more or less interchangeably because, as the discussion in this section suggests, they all mean essen- tially the same thing. Th e key fact to grasp is that the cost of capital associated with an investment depends on the risk of that investment. Th is is one of the most important lessons in corporate fi nance, so it bears repeating: Th e cost of capital depends primarily on the use of the funds, not the source. Th e use of the funds refers to risk associated with the investment.
It is a common error to forget this crucial point and fall into the trap of thinking that the cost of capital for an investment depends primarily on how and where the capital is raised.
Financial Policy and Cost of Capital We know that the particular mixture of debt and equity that a fi rm chooses to employ—its capital structure—is a managerial variable. In this chapter, we take the fi rm’s fi nancial policy as given. In particular, we assume the fi rm has a fi xed debt/equity ratio that it maintains. Th is D/E ratio refl ects the fi rm’s target capital structure. How a fi rm might choose that ratio is the subject of Chapter 16.
From our discussion, we know that a fi rm’s overall cost of capital refl ects the required return on the fi rm’s assets as a whole. Given that a fi rm uses both debt and equity capital, this overall cost of capital is a mixture of the returns needed to compensate its creditors and its shareholders. In other words, a fi rm’s cost of capital refl ects both its cost of debt capital and its cost of equity capital. We discuss these costs separately in the following sections.
388 Part 6: Cost of Capital and Long-Term Financial Policy
14Ross_Chapter14_4th.indd 38814Ross_Chapter14_4th.indd 388 12-11-27 12:1112-11-27 12:11
1. What is the primary determinant of the cost of capital for an investment?
2. What is the relationship between the required return on an investment and the cost of capital associated with that investment?
14.2 The Cost of Equity
We begin with the most diffi cult question on the subject of cost of capital: What is the fi rm’s overall cost of equity? Th e reason this is a diffi cult question is that there is no way of directly observing the return that the fi rm’s equity investors require on their investment. Instead, we must somehow estimate it. Th is section discusses two approaches to determining the cost of equity: the dividend growth model approach and the security market line (SML) approach.
The Dividend Growth Model Approach Th e easiest way to estimate the cost of equity capital is to use the dividend growth model that we developed in Chapter 8. Recall that, under the assumption that the fi rm’s dividend will grow at a constant rate, g, the price per share of the stock, P0, can be written as:
P 0 = D 0 × (1 + g) ___________ [RE - g]
= D 1 _______ [RE - g]
where D0 is the dividend just paid, and D1 is the next period’s projected dividend. Notice that we have used the symbol RE (the E stands for equity) for the required return on the stock. As we discussed in Chapter 8, we can arrange this to solve for RE as follows:
RE = (D1/P0) + g [14.1] Since RE is the return that the shareholders require on the stock, it can be interpreted as the fi rm’s cost of equity capital.
IMPLEMENTING THE APPROACH To estimate RE using the dividend growth model approach, we obviously need three pieces of information: P0, D0, and g.1 Of these, for a publicly traded, dividend-paying company, the first two can be observed directly, so they are easily obtain- able. Only the third component, the expected growth rate in dividends, must be estimated.
For example, suppose Provincial Power Company, a large public utility, paid a dividend of $4 per share last year. Th e stock currently sells for $60 per share. You estimate the dividend will grow steadily at 6 percent per year into the indefi nite future. What is the cost of equity capital for Provincial Power? Using the dividend growth model, the expected dividend for the coming year, D1 is:
D1 = D0 × (1 + g) = $4 × (1.06) = $4.24
Given this, the cost of equity, RE, is:
RE = D1/P0 + g = $4.24/$60 + .06 = 13.07%
Th e cost of equity is thus 13.07 percent.
ESTIMATING g To use the dividend growth model, we must come up with an estimate for g, the growth rate. There are essentially two ways of doing this: (1) use historical growth rates, or (2) use analysts’ forecasts of future growth rates. Analysts’ forecasts are available from the re-
1 Notice that if we have D0 and g, we can simply calculate D1 by multiplying D0 by (1 + g).
Concept Questions
cost of equity The return that equity investors require on their investment in the firm.
CHAPTER 14: Cost of Capital 389
14Ross_Chapter14_4th.indd 38914Ross_Chapter14_4th.indd 389 12-11-27 12:1112-11-27 12:11
search departments of investment dealers. Naturally, different sources have different estimates, so one approach might be to obtain multiple estimates and then average them.
Alternatively, we might observe dividends for the previous, say, fi ve years, and calculate the compound growth rate. For example, suppose we observe the following for the James Bay Company:
Year Dividend
2008 $1.10 2009 1.20 2010 1.35 2011 1.40 2012 1.55
Th e compound growth rate, g, is the rate at which $1.10 grew to $1.55 during four periods of growth.
$1.10 (1 + g)4 = $1.55 (1 + g)4 = $1.55/$1.10 = 1.4090 1 + g = (1.4090)0.25 = 1.0895 g = 0.0895 = 8.95%
If historical growth has been volatile, the compound growth rate would be sensitive to our choice of beginning and ending years. In this case, it is better to calculate the year-to-year growth rates and average them.
Year Dividend Dollar Change Percentage Change
2008 $1.10 — — 2009 1.20 $.10 9.09% 2010 1.35 .15 12.50 2011 1.40 .05 3.70 2012 1.55 .15 10.71
Notice that we calculated the change in the dividend on a year-to-year basis and then expressed the change as a percentage. Th us, in 2009 for example, the dividend rose from $1.10 to $1.20, an increase of $.10. Th is represents a $.10/1.10 = 9.09% increase.
If we average the four growth rates, the result is (9.09 + 12.50 + 3.70 + 10.71)/4 = 9%, so we could use this as an estimate for the expected growth rate, g. In this case, averaging annual growth rates gives about the same answer as the compound growth rate. Other more sophisticated sta- tistical techniques could be used, but they all amount to using past dividend growth to predict future dividend growth.2
AN ALTERNATIVE APPROACH Another way to find g starts with earnings retention. Consider a business whose earnings next year are expected to be the same as earnings this year unless a net investment is made. The net investment will be positive only if some earnings are not paid out as dividends, that is, only if some earnings are retained. This leads to the following equation:
Earnings next year = Earnings this year + Retained earnings this year × Return on retained earnings
Th e increase in earnings is a function of both the retained earnings and the return on retained earnings.
We now divide both sides of the equation by earnings this year yielding
Earnings next year
________________ Earnings this year
= Earnings this year
_______________ Earnings this year + Retained earnings this year
______________________ Earnings this year × Return on retained earnings
2 Statistical techniques for calculating g include linear regression, geometric averaging, and exponential smoothing.
390 Part 6: Cost of Capital and Long-Term Financial Policy
14Ross_Chapter14_4th.indd 39014Ross_Chapter14_4th.indd 390 12-11-27 12:1112-11-27 12:11
Th e left side of the last equation is simply one plus the growth rate in earnings, which we write as 1 + g.3 Th e ratio of retained earnings to earnings is called the retention ratio. Th us we can write:
1 + g = 1 + Retention ratio × Return on retained earnings
It is diffi cult for a fi nancial analyst to determine the return to be expected on currently retained earnings, because the details on forthcoming projects are not generally public information. How- ever, it is frequently assumed that the projects selected in the current year have the same risk and therefore the same anticipated return as projects in other years. Here, we can estimate the anticipated return on current retained earnings by the historical return on equity (ROE). Aft er all, ROE is simply the return on the fi rm’s entire equity, which is the return on the accumulation of all the fi rm’s past projects.
We now have a simple way to estimate growth:
g = Retention ratio × ROE
ADVANTAGES AND DISADVANTAGES OF THE APPROACH Whichever way we estimate g, the primary advantage of the dividend growth model approach is its simplicity. It is both easy to understand and easy to use. There are a number of associated practical problems and disadvantages.
First and foremost, the dividend growth model is most applicable to companies that pay divi- dends. For companies that do not pay dividends, we can use the model and estimate g from growth in earnings. Th is is equivalent to assuming that one day dividends will be paid. Either way, the key underlying assumption is that the dividend grows at a constant rate. As our previous example illustrates, this will never be exactly the case. More generally, the model is really only applicable to cases where reasonably steady growth is likely to occur.
A second problem is that the estimated cost of equity is very sensitive to the estimated growth rate. An upward revision of g by just 1 percentage point, for example, increases the estimated cost of equity by at least a full percentage point. Since D1 would probably be revised upwards as well, the increase would actually be somewhat larger than that.
Finally, this approach really does not explicitly consider risk. Unlike the SML approach (which we consider next), there is no direct adjustment for the riskiness of the investment. For example, there is no allowance for the degree of certainty or uncertainty surrounding the estimated growth rate in dividends. As a result, it is diffi cult to say whether or not the estimated return is commen- surate with the level of risk.4
The SML Approach In Chapter 13, we discussed the security market line (SML). Our primary conclusion was that the required or expected return on a risky investment depends on three things:
1. The risk-free rate, Rf. 2. The market risk premium, E(RM) - Rf. 3. The systematic risk of the asset relative to average, which we called its beta coefficient, β.
Using the SML, the expected return on the company’s equity, E(RE), can be written as:
E(RE) = RF + βE × [E(RM) - RF]
where βE is the estimated beta for the equity. For the SML approach to be consistent with the divi- dend growth model, we drop the expectation sign, E, and henceforth write the required return from the SML, RE, as:
RE = Rf + βE × [RM - Rf] [14.2]
3 Previously g referred to growth in dividends. However, the growth in earnings is equal to the growth rate in dividends in this context, because we assume the ratio of dividends to earnings is held constant. 4 There is an implicit adjustment for risk because the current stock price is used. All other things being equal, the higher the risk, the lower the stock price. Further, the lower the stock price, the greater the cost of equity, again assuming all the other information is the same.
retention ratio Retained earnings divided by net income.
return on equity (ROE) Net income after interest and taxes divided by average common shareholders’ equity.
CHAPTER 14: Cost of Capital 391
14Ross_Chapter14_4th.indd 39114Ross_Chapter14_4th.indd 391 12-11-27 12:1112-11-27 12:11
IMPLEMENTING THE APPROACH To use the SML approach, we need a risk-free rate, Rf, an estimate of the market risk premium, RM - Rf, and an estimate of the relevant beta, βE. In Chapter 12 (Table 12.3), we saw that one estimate of the market risk premium (based on large capi- talization Canadian common stocks) is around 4.30 percent. To reflect the long-term horizon over which we will apply the cost of equity, we measure the risk-free rate as the yield on 30-year Canada bonds around 5 percent.5 Beta coefficients for publicly traded companies are widely available. Chapter 13 showed how to calculate betas from historical returns.
To illustrate, in Chapter 13 we saw that Investors Group had an estimated beta of 0.76 (Table 13.10). We could thus estimate Investors Group’s cost of equity as:
RCU = Rf + β × [RM - Rf] = 5.0% + 0.76 × (4.30%) = 8.27%
Th us, using the SML approach, Investors Group’s cost of equity is about 8.27 percent.
ADVANTAGES AND DISADVANTAGES OF THE APPROACH The SML ap- proach has two primary advantages: First, it explicitly adjusts for risk. Second, it is applicable to companies other than those with steady dividend growth. Thus, it may be useful in a wider variety of circumstances.
Th ere are drawbacks, of course. Th e SML approach requires that two things be estimated, the market risk premium and the beta coeffi cient. To the extent that our estimates are poor, the result- ing cost of equity is inaccurate. For example, our estimate of the market risk premium, 4.30 per- cent, is based on about 50 years of returns on a particular portfolio of stocks. Using diff erent time periods or diff erent stocks could result in very diff erent estimates.
Finally, as with the dividend growth model, we essentially rely on the past to predict the future when we use the SML approach. Economic conditions can change very quickly, so, as always, the past may not be a good guide to the future. On balance, the SML approach is considered to be “best practice” and is used most widely according to a survey of CFOs.6 Th e dividend valuation model may be used as a check on the reasonableness of the SML result. We might also wish to compare the results to those for other, similar companies as a reality check.
For example, the SML approach provides useful estimates of the cost of equity for banks in dif- ferent countries. On a global scale, the cost of equity estimates declined steadily from 1999 to 2005 and then increased from 2006 onward.7
The Cost of Equity in Rate Hearings Suppose that Provincial Power, a regulated utility, has just applied for increases in the rates charged some of its customers. One test that regulators apply is called the “fair rate of return” rule. Th is means that they determine the fair rate of return on capital for the company and allow an increase in rates only if the company can show that revenues are insuffi cient to achieve this fair rate. For example, suppose a company had capital in the form of equity of $100 and net income of $8 provid- ing a return of 8 percent. If the fair rate of return were 9 percent, the company would be allowed a rate increase suffi cient to generate one additional dollar of net income.
Regulatory authorities determine the fair rate of return aft er hearing presentations by the company and by consumer groups. Since a higher fair rate of return helps make the case for rate increases, it is no surprise to fi nd that consultants engaged by the company argue for a higher fair rate and consultants representing consumer groups argue for a lower fair rate. Because the fair rate of return depends on capital market conditions, consultants use the dividend growth approach and the SML approach, along with other techniques.
Suppose that Provincial Power has presented the regulators with a cost of equity of 11 percent. You are a consultant for a consumer group. What fl aws would you look for?
5 At the time of writing in May 2012, the 30-year Canada rate was 2.55 percent. Because many analysts believed that this rate was artificially low due to the relaxed monetary policy of the Bank of Canada, we use 5 percent. 6 J.R. Graham and C.R. Harvey, “Theory and practice for corporate finance: evidence from the field,” Journal of Financial Economics 60 (2001), pp. 187–243. 7 Michael R King, 2009. “The cost of equity for global banks: a CAPM perspective from 1990 to 2009,” BIS Quarterly Re- view, Bank for International Settlements, September.
392 Part 6: Cost of Capital and Long-Term Financial Policy
14Ross_Chapter14_4th.indd 39214Ross_Chapter14_4th.indd 392 12-11-27 12:1112-11-27 12:11
If you think that the cost of equity is too high, you should challenge the assumed growth rate in dividends. Also, the market risk premium used in the SML may be too high.8 If you are clever at working with these models and can remain unruffl ed when testifying, you may have career potential as a fi nancial expert witness.
EXAMPLE 14.1: Th e Cost of Equity
At the time of writing, stock in Sun Life Financial Inc. was trading on the TSX at $22.34. Sun Life had a 120-month beta of 0.78. The market risk premium historically has been around 4.30 percent and our estimate of the risk-free rate in 2012 was 5.00 percent. Sun Life’s last dividend was $1.44 and some analysts expected that the dividends would grow at 8 percent indefinitely. What is Sun Life’s cost of equity?
RE = Rf + βE × [RM – Rf] = 5.00% + 0.78 × 4.30% = 8.35%
This suggests that 8.35 percent is Sun Life’s cost of equity. We next use the dividend growth model as a check. The projected dividend is D0 × (1 + g) = $1.44 × (1.08) = $1.56, so the expected return using this approach is:
RE = D1/P0 + g = $1.56/$22.34 + 0.08 = 14.98%
Our two estimates differ significantly, so we will use the one in which we have the greater confidence—the SML. If the inputs are fairly reliable for the SML, it is preferred over the growth model, which may not apply in all companies. One key reason for this preference is that the SML considers risk (as measured by beta), while the growth model does not. We should also note that in our example the 8 percent in- definite growth rate seems quite high, so the dividend growth model may be overestimating the cost of equity. In this case, this gives us a cost of equity for Sun Life Financial Inc. of 8.35 percent.
1. What do we mean when we say that a corporation’s cost of equity capital is 16 percent?
2. What are two approaches to estimating the cost of equity capital?
14.3 The Costs of Debt and Preferred Stock
In addition to ordinary equity, fi rms use debt and, to a lesser extent, preferred stock to fi nance their investments. As we discuss next, determining the costs of capital associated with these sources of fi nancing is much easier than determining the cost of equity.
The Cost of Debt Th e cost of debt is the return that the fi rm’s long-term creditors demand on new borrowing. In principle, we could determine the beta for the fi rm’s debt and then use the SML to estimate the required return on debt just as we estimate the required return on equity. Th is isn’t really neces- sary, however.
Unlike a fi rm’s cost of equity, its cost of debt can normally be observed either directly or indi- rectly, because the cost of debt is simply the interest rate the fi rm must pay on new borrowing, and we can observe interest rates in the fi nancial markets. For example, if the fi rm already has bonds outstanding, then the yield to maturity on those bonds is the market-required rate on the fi rm’s debt.
Alternatively, if we knew that the fi rm’s bonds were rated, say, A, we can simply fi nd out what the interest rate on newly issued A-rated bonds is. Either way, there is no need to actually estimate a beta for the debt since we can directly observe the rate we want to know.
8 If you were the consultant for the company, you should counter that, at the time of writing, long-term bonds issued by Canadian utilities were yielding around 6.6 percent. Since equity is riskier than bonds, the cost of equity should be higher than 6.6 percent.
Concept Questions
cost of debt The return that lenders require on the firm’s debt.
CHAPTER 14: Cost of Capital 393
14Ross_Chapter14_4th.indd 39314Ross_Chapter14_4th.indd 393 12-11-27 12:1112-11-27 12:11
Th ere is one thing to be careful about, though. Th e coupon rate on the fi rm’s outstanding debt is irrelevant here. Th at just tells us roughly what the fi rm’s cost of debt was back when the bonds were issued, not what the cost of debt is today.9 Th is is why we have to look at the yield on the debt in today’s marketplace. For consistency with our other notation, we use the symbol RD for the cost of debt.
EXAMPLE 14.2: Th e Cost of Debt
At the time of writing, Encana Corporation had a bond out- standing with approximately 6 years to maturity (12 semi- annual coupons) and a coupon rate of 5.80 percent. The bond was currently selling for $112.22. What is Encana’s cost of debt?
To answer this question, we need to solve the bond pric- ing formula for R, the yield to maturity:
$112.22 = ∑ t=1
12
$2.9/ ( 1 + R __ 2 ) t + 100/ ( 1 + R __ 2 )
12
Using a spreadsheet or a financial calculator, we find that R is 3.52 percent. Encana’s cost of debt is thus 3.52 percent.
The Cost of Preferred Stock Determining the cost of fi xed rate preferred stock is quite straightforward. As we discussed in Chapters 7 and 8, this type of preferred stock has a fi xed dividend paid every period forever, so a share of preferred stock is essentially a perpetuity. Th e cost of preferred stock, RP, is thus:
RP = D/P0 [14.3] where D is the fi xed dividend and P0 is the current price per share of the preferred stock. Notice that the cost of preferred stock is simply equal to the dividend yield on the preferred stock. Alternatively, preferred stocks are rated in much the same way as bonds, so the cost of preferred stock can be esti- mated by observing the required returns on other, similarly rated shares of preferred stock.
EXAMPLE 14.3: Aimia’s Cost of Preferred Stock
On May 09, 2012, Aimia Inc.’s preferred stock (AIM.PR.A) traded on the TSX with a dividend of $1.63 annually and a price of $26.00. What is Aimia’s cost of preferred stock?
The cost of preferred stock is:
RP = D/P0 = $1.63/$26 = 6.3%
So Aimia’s cost of preferred stock is 6.3%.
1. How can the cost of debt be calculated?
2. How can the cost of preferred stock be calculated?
3. Why is the coupon rate a bad estimate of a firm’s cost of debt?
14.4 The Weighted Average Cost of Capital
Now that we have the costs associated with the main sources of capital that the fi rm employs, we need to worry about the specifi c mix. As we mentioned earlier, we take this mix (the fi rm’s capital structure) as given for now.
One of the implications of using WACC for a project is that we are assuming that money is
9 The firm’s cost of debt based on its historic borrowing is sometimes called the embedded debt cost.
Concept Questions
394 Part 6: Cost of Capital and Long-Term Financial Policy
14Ross_Chapter14_4th.indd 39414Ross_Chapter14_4th.indd 394 12-11-27 12:1112-11-27 12:11
raised in the optimal proportions. For instance, if the optimal weight for debt is 25 percent, rais- ing $100 million means that $25 million will come from new debt and $75 million from common and preferred shares. Practically speaking, the fi rm would not raise these sums simultaneously by issuing both debt and equity. Instead, the fi rm may issue just debt, or just equity, which, at that point, has the eff ect of upsetting the optimal debt ratio. Issuing just one type of security and tem- porarily upsetting the optimal weights presents no problem as long as a subsequent issue takes the fi rm back to the optimal ratio for which it is striving. Th e point is that the fi rm’s capital structure weights may fl uctuate within some range in the short term, but the target weights should always be used in computing WACC.
In Chapter 3, we mentioned that fi nancial analysts frequently focus on a fi rm’s total capital- ization, which is the sum of its long-term debt and equity. Th is is particularly true in determin- ing the cost of capital; short-term liabilities are oft en ignored in the process. Some short-term liabilities such as accounts payable and accrued wages rise automatically with sales increases and have already been incorporated into cash fl ow estimates. We ignore them in calculating the cost of capital to avoid the error of double counting. Other current liabilities, short-term bank borrowing for example, are excluded because they support seasonal needs and are not part of the permanent capital structure.10
The Capital Structure Weights We use the symbol E (for equity) to stand for the market value of the fi rm’s equity. We calculate this by taking the number of shares outstanding and multiplying it by the price per share. Simi- larly, we use the symbol Dm (for debt) to stand for the market value of the fi rm’s debt. For long- term debt, we calculate this by multiplying the market price of a single bond by the number of bonds outstanding.
For multiple bond issues (as there normally would be), we repeat this calculation for each and then add the results. If there is debt that is not publicly traded (because it was privately placed with a life insurance company, for example), we must observe the yields on similar, publicly traded debt and estimate the market value of the privately held debt using this yield as the discount rate.
Finally, we use the symbol V (for value) to stand for the combined market value of the debt and equity:
V = E + Dm [14.4] If we divide both sides by V, we can calculate the percentages of the total capital represented by the debt and equity:
100% = E/V + Dm/V [14.5] Th ese percentages can be interpreted just like portfolio weights, and they are oft en called the capital structure weights.
For example, if the total market value of a company’s stock were calculated as $200 million and the total market value of the company’s debt were calculated as $50 million, the combined value would be $250 million. Of this total, E/V = $200/250 = 80%, so 80 percent of the fi rm’s fi nancing is equity and the remaining 20 percent is debt.
We emphasize here that the correct way to proceed is to use the market values of the debt and equity. Th e reason is that, as we discussed in Chapters 1 and 2, market values measure man- agement’s success in achieving its goal: maximizing shareholder wealth. Under certain circum- stances, such as a privately owned company, it may not be possible to get reliable estimates of these quantities. Even for publicly traded fi rms, market value weights present some diffi culties. If there is a major shift in stock or bond prices, market value weights may fl uctuate signifi cantly so that the weighted average cost of capital (WACC) is quite another number by the time a weekend is over. In fact, because practitioners encounter some of these diffi culties in computing WACC using market value weights, book values are usually the better alternative when market values are not readily available.
10 If a firm used short-term bank loans as part of its permanent financing, we would include their cost as part of the cost of debt.
weighted average cost of capital (WACC) The weighted average of the costs of debt and equity.
CHAPTER 14: Cost of Capital 395
14Ross_Chapter14_4th.indd 39514Ross_Chapter14_4th.indd 395 12-11-27 12:1112-11-27 12:11
Taxes and the Weighted Average Cost of Capital Th ere is one fi nal issue associated with the WACC. We called the preceding result the unadjusted WACC because we haven’t considered taxes. Recall that we are always concerned with aft er-tax cash fl ows. If we are determining the discount rate appropriate to those cash fl ows, the discount rate also needs to be expressed on an aft er-tax basis.
As we discussed previously in various places in this book (and as we discuss later), the interest paid by a corporation is deductible for tax purposes. Payments to shareholders, such as dividends, are not. What this means, eff ectively, is that the government pays some of the interest provided the fi rm expects to have positive taxable income. Th us, in determining an aft er-tax discount rate, we need to distinguish between the pre-tax and the aft er-tax cost of debt.
To illustrate, suppose a fi rm borrows $1 million at 9 percent interest. Th e corporate tax rate is 40 percent. What is the aft er-tax interest rate on this loan? Th e total interest bill would be $90,000 per year. Th is amount is tax deductible, however, so the $90,000 interest reduces our tax bill by .40 × $90,000 = $36,000. Th e aft er-tax interest bill is thus $90,000 - 36,000 = $54,000. Th e aft er-tax interest rate is $54,000/$1 million = 5.4%.
Notice that, in general, the aft er-tax interest rate is simply equal to the pre-tax rate multiplied by one minus the tax rate. For example, using the preceding numbers, we fi nd that the aft er-tax interest rate is 9% × (1 - .40) = 5.4%.
If we use the symbol TC to stand for the corporate tax rate, the aft er-tax rate that we use in our WACC calculation can be written as RD × (1 - TC). Th us, once we consider the eff ect of taxes, the WACC is:
WACC = (E/V) × RE + (P/V) × RP + (Dm/V) × RD × (1 - TC) [14.6] From now on, when we speak of the WACC, this is the number we have in mind.
Th is WACC has a very straightforward interpretation. It is the overall return that the fi rm must earn on its existing assets to maintain the value of its stock. It is also the required return on any investments by the fi rm that have essentially the same risks as existing operations. So, if we were evaluating the cash fl ows from a proposed expansion of our existing operations, this is the discount rate we would use.
EXAMPLE 14.4: Calculating the WACC
The B. B. Lean Company has 1.4 million shares of stock out- standing. The stock currently sells for $20 per share. The firm’s debt is publicly traded and was recently quoted at 93 percent of face value. It has a total face value of $5 million, and it is currently priced to yield 11 percent. The risk-free rate is 8 percent, and the market risk premium is 3.4 percent. You’ve estimated that Lean has a beta of .74. If the corporate tax rate is 40 percent, what is the WACC of Lean Co.?
We can first determine the cost of equity and the cost of debt. From the SML, the cost of equity is 8% + .74 × 3.4% = 10.52%. The total value of the equity is 1.4 million × $20 = $28 million. The pre-tax cost of debt is the current yield to maturity on the outstanding debt, 11 percent. The debt sells for 93 percent of its face value, so its current mar-
ket value is.93 × $5 million = $4.65 million. The total mar- ket value of the equity and debt together is $28 + 4.65 = $32.65 million.
From here, we can calculate the WACC easily enough. The percentage of equity used by Lean to finance its opera- tions is $28/$32.65 = 85.76%. Because the weights have to add up to 1, the percentage of debt is 1 - .8576 = 14.24%. The WACC is thus:
WACC = (E/V) × RE + (Dm/V) × RD × (1 - TC) = .8576 × 10.52% + .1424 × 11% × (1 - .40) = 9.96%
B. B. Lean thus has an overall weighted average cost of cap- ital of 9.96 percent.
Solving the Warehouse Problem and Similar Capital Budgeting Problems Now we can use the WACC to solve the warehouse problem that we posed at the beginning of the chapter. However, before we rush to discount the cash fl ows at the WACC to estimate NPV, we need to make sure we are doing the right thing.
396 Part 6: Cost of Capital and Long-Term Financial Policy
14Ross_Chapter14_4th.indd 39614Ross_Chapter14_4th.indd 396 12-11-27 12:1112-11-27 12:11
Going back to fi rst principles, we must fi nd an alternative in the fi nancial markets that is com- parable to the warehouse renovation. To be comparable, an alternative must be of the same risk as the warehouse project. Projects that have the same risk are said to be in the same risk class.
Th e WACC for a fi rm refl ects the risk and the target capital structure of the fi rm’s existing assets as a whole. As a result, strictly speaking, the fi rm’s WACC is the appropriate discount rate only if the proposed investment is a replica of the fi rm’s existing operating activities.
In broader terms, whether or not we can use the fi rm’s WACC to value the warehouse project depends on whether the warehouse project is in the same risk class as the fi rm. We assume that this project is an integral part of the overall business of the fi rm. In such cases, it is natural to think that the cost savings are as risky as the general cash fl ows of the fi rm, and the project is thus in the same risk class as the overall fi rm. More generally, projects like the warehouse renovation that are intimately related to the fi rm’s existing operations are oft en viewed as being in the same risk class as the overall fi rm.
We can now see what the president should do. Suppose the fi rm has a target debt/equity ratio of 1/3. In this case, E/V is .75 and Dm/V is .25. Th e cost of debt is 10 percent, and the cost of equity is 20 percent. Assuming a 40 percent tax rate, the WACC is:
WACC = (E/V) × RE + (Dm/V) × (RD × (1 - TC)) = .75 × 20% + .25 × 10% × (1 - .40) = 16.5%
Recall that the warehouse project had a cost of $50 million and expected aft er-tax cash fl ows (the cost savings) of $12 million per year for six years. Th e NPV is thus:
NPV = -$50 + $12/(1 + WACC)1 + … + $12/(1 + WACC)6
Since the cash fl ows are in the form of an ordinary annuity, we can calculate this NPV using 16.5 percent (the WACC) as the discount rate as follows:
NPV = -$50 + $12 × [1 - (1/(1 + 0.165)6)]/0.165 = -$50 + $12 × 3.6365 = -$6.36
Should the fi rm take on the warehouse renovation? Th e project has a negative NPV using the fi rm’s WACC. Th is means the fi nancial markets off er superior projects in the same risk class (namely, the fi rm itself). Th e answer is clear: Th e project should be rejected.
EXAMPLE 14.5: Using the WACC
A firm is considering a project that will result in initial cash savings of $5 million at the end of the first year and for an infinite period. These savings will grow at the rate of 5 per- cent per year. The firm has a debt/equity ratio of 0.5, a cost of equity of 29.2 percent, and a cost of debt of 10 percent. The cost-saving proposal is closely related to the firm’s core business, so it is viewed as having the same risks as the overall firm. Should the firm take on the project?
Assuming a 40 percent tax rate, the firm should take on this project if it costs less than $30.36 million. To see this, first note that the PV is:
PV = $5 million/[WACC - 0.05]
This is an example of a growing perpetuity as discussed in Chapter 8. The WACC is:
WACC = (E/V) × RE + (Dm/V) × RD × (1 - TC) = 2/3 × 29.2% + 1/3 × 10% × (1 - .40) = 21.47%
The PV is thus:
PV = $5 million/[.2147 - .05] = $30.36 million
The NPV is positive only if the cost is less than $30.36 million.
For future reference, Table 14.1 summarizes our discussion of the WACC.
CHAPTER 14: Cost of Capital 397
14Ross_Chapter14_4th.indd 39714Ross_Chapter14_4th.indd 397 12-11-27 12:1112-11-27 12:11
TABLE 14.1 Summary of capital cost calculations
The Cost of Equity, RE � SML approach (from Chapter 13-best practice):
RE = Rf + (RM - Rf) × βE, where Rf is the risk-free rate, RM is the expected return on the overall market, and βE is the systematic risk of the equity.
� Dividend growth model approach (from Chapter 8 used as a check): RE = D1/P0 + g, where D1 is the expected dividend in one period, g is the dividend growth rate, and P0 is the current stock price.
The Cost of Debt, RD � For a firm with publicly held debt, the cost of debt can be measured as the yield to maturity on the outstanding debt. The
coupon rate is irrelevant. Yield to maturity is covered in Chapter 7.
� If the firm has no publicly traded debt, the cost of debt can be measured as the yield to maturity on similarly rated bonds (bond ratings are discussed in Chapter 7).
The Weighted Average Cost of Capital, WACC
� The firm’s WACC is the overall required return on the firm as a whole. It is the appropriate discount rate to use for cash flows similar in risk to the overall firm.
� The WACC is calculated as WACC = E/V × RE + Dm/V × RD × (1 - TC), where TC is the corporate tax rate, E is the market value of the firm’s equity, Dm is the market value of the firm’s debt, and V = E + Dm. Note that E/V is the percentage of the firm’s financing (in market value terms) that is equity, and Dm/V is the percentage that is debt.
1. How is the WACC calculated?
2. Why do we multiply the cost of debt by (1 - TC) when we compute the WACC?
3. Under what conditions is it correct to use the WACC to determine NPV?
Performance Evaluation: Another Use of the WACC WACCs can also be used for performance evaluation purposes. Probably the best-known approach in this area is the economic value added (EVA) (also called economic value contri- bution (EVC)) method developed by Stern Stewart and Co. and implemented in Canada by the Corporate Renaissance Group. Companies such as Cogeco, Domtar, and Grand & Toy are among the Canadian fi rms that have been using EVA as a means of evaluating corporate performance. In Canada, a CICA survey showed that 45 percent of public companies and 27 percent of private fi rms are using some type of EVA analysis. Several studies found evidence that Canadian compan- ies with higher economic value added enjoy larger shareholder returns.11
Although the details diff er, the basic idea behind EVA and similar strategies is straightforward. Suppose we have $100 million in capital (debt and equity) tied up in our fi rm and our overall WACC is 12 percent. If we multiply these together, we get $12 million. Referring back to Chapter 2, if our cash fl ow from assets is less than this, we are, on an overall basis, destroying value. If cash fl ow from assets exceeds $12 million, we are creating value. In practice, strategies such as these suff er to a certain extent from problems with implementation. For example, it appears that the Corporate Renaissance Group makes extensive use of book values for debt and equity in com- puting cost of capital. Evidence is mixed on the track record of EVA in identifying undervalued
11 Our comments on EVAs in Canada draw on S. Northfield, “A New Way to Measure Wealth,” The Globe and Mail, June 13, 1998, B22; V. Jog, “Value and Wealth Creation in Canada,” Canadian Investment Review, Winter 2003, pp. 45-50; S. Lieff and V. Jog, “Value Creation and Long-run Shareholder Returns: A Canadian Perspective”, Sprott School of Business, Carleton University, Working Paper, 2005 and John M. Griffith, “The True Value of EVA,” Journal of Ap- plied Finance, Fall/Winter 2004, Vol. 14, No. 2, pp. 25-29. Appendix 14B discusses EVA in more detail.
Concept Questions
economic value added (EVA) Performance measure based on WACC.
398 Part 6: Cost of Capital and Long-Term Financial Policy
14Ross_Chapter14_4th.indd 39814Ross_Chapter14_4th.indd 398 12-11-27 12:1112-11-27 12:11
securities. Even so, by focusing on value creation, WACC-based evaluation procedures force employees and management to pay attention to the real bottom line: increasing share prices.
Bennett Stewart on EVA
A firm’s weighted average cost of capital has important applications other than the discount rate in capital project evaluations. For instance, it is a key ingredient to measure a firm’s true economic profit, or what I like to call EVA, standing for economic value added. Accounting rules dictate that the interest expense a company incurs on its debt fi nancing be deducted from its reported profit, but those same rules ironically forbid deducting a charge for the shareholders’ funds a firm uses. In economic terms, equity capital is in fact a very costly financing source; because shareholders bear the risk of being paid last, after all other stakeholders and investors are paid fi rst. But according to accountants, shareholders’ equity is free.
This egregious oversight has dire practical consequences. For one thing, it means that the profit figure accountants certify to be correct is inherently at odds with the net present value decision rule. For instance, it is a simple matter for management to inflate its reported earnings and earnings-per-share in ways that actually harm the shareholders by investing capital in projects that earn less than the overall cost of capital but more than the after-tax cost of borrowing money, which amounts to a trivial hurdle in most cases, a couple percentage points at most. In effect, EPS requires management to vault a mere three foot hurdle when to satisfy shareholders managers must jump a ten foot hurdle that includes the cost of equity. A prime example of the way accounting profit leads smart managers to do dumb things was Enron, where former top executives Ken Lay and Jeff Skilling boldly declared in the firm’s 2000 annual report that they were “laser-focused on earnings per share,”
and so they were. Bonuses were funded out of book profi t, and project developers were paid for signing up new deals and not generating a decent return on investment. Consequently, Enron’s EPS was on the rise while its true economic profit—its EVA—measured after deducting the full cost of capital, was plummeting in the years leading up to the firm’s demise— the result of massive misallocations of capital to ill-advised energy and new economy projects. The point is, EVA measures economic profit, the profit that actually discounts to net present value, and the maximization of which is every company’s most important financial goal; yet for all its popularity EPS is just an accounting contrivance that is wholly unrelated to the maximization of shareholder wealth or sending the right decision signals to management.
Starting in the early 1990s firms around the world—ranging from Coca-Cola, to Briggs & Stratton, Herman Miller, and Eli Lilly in America, Siemens in Germany, Tata Consulting and the Godrej Group out of India, Brahma Beer in Brazil, and many, many more—began to turn to EVA as a new and better way to measure performance and set goals, make decisions and determine bonuses, and to communicate with investors and to teach business and fi nance basics to managers and employees. Properly tailored and implemented, EVA is a natural way to bring the cost of capital to life, and to turn everyone in a company into a capital conscientious, owner-entrepreneur.
Bennett Stewart is a co-founder of Stern Stewart & Co. and also the CEO of EVA Dimensions, a firm providing EVA data, valuation modelling, and hedge fund management. Stewart pioneered the practical development of EVA as chronicled in his book, The Quest for Value.
IN THEIR OWN WORDS…
14.5 Divisional and Project Costs of Capital
As we have seen, using the WACC as the discount rate for future cash fl ows is only appropriate when the proposed investment is similar to the fi rm’s existing activities. Th is is not as restrictive as it sounds. If we were in the pizza business, for example, and we were thinking of opening a new location, the WACC is the discount rate to use. Th e same is true of a retailer thinking of opening a new store, a manufacturer thinking of expanding production, or a consumer products company thinking of expanding its markets.
Nonetheless, despite the usefulness of the WACC as a benchmark, there are clearly situations where the cash fl ows under consideration have risks distinctly diff erent from those of the overall fi rm. We consider how to cope with this problem next.
The SML and the WACC When we are evaluating investments with risks substantially diff erent from the overall fi rm, the use of the WACC can potentially lead to poor decisions. Figure 14.1 illustrates why.
CHAPTER 14: Cost of Capital 399
14Ross_Chapter14_4th.indd 39914Ross_Chapter14_4th.indd 399 12-11-27 12:1112-11-27 12:11
FIGURE 14.1
The security market line (SML) and the weighted average cost of capital (WACC)
Expected return
B Firm A
Rf = 7%
16% 15% 14%
SML
WACC = 15%
Beta
Incorrect acceptance
Incorrect rejection
A
B
= 8%
= .60 = 1.0 = 1.2� � �
If a firm uses its WACC to make accept/reject decisions for all types of projects, it will have a tendency toward incorrectly accepting risky projects and incorrectly rejecting less risky projects.
In Figure 14.1, we have plotted an SML corresponding to a risk-free rate of 7 percent and a market risk premium of 8 percent. To keep things simple, we consider an all-equity company with a beta of 1. As we have indicated, the WACC and the cost of equity are exactly equal to 15 percent for this company, since there is no debt.
Suppose our fi rm uses its WACC to evaluate all investments. Th is means any investment with a return of greater than 15 percent is accepted and any investment with a return of less than 15 percent is rejected. We know from our study of risk and return, however, that a desirable invest- ment is one that plots above the SML. As Figure 14.1 illustrates, using the WACC for all types of projects can result in the fi rm incorrectly accepting relatively risky projects and incorrectly reject- ing relatively safe ones.
For example, consider point A. Th is project has a beta of .6 compared to the fi rm’s beta of 1.0. It has an expected return of 14 percent. Is this a desirable investment? Th e answer is yes, because its required return is only:
Required return = Rf + β × (RM - Rf) = 7% + .60 × 8% = 11.8%
However, if we use the WACC as a cutoff , this project would be rejected because its return is less than 15 percent. Th is example illustrates that a fi rm using its WACC as a cutoff tends to reject profi table projects with risks less than those of the overall fi rm.
At the other extreme, consider point B. Th is project off ers a 16 percent return, which exceeds the fi rm’s cost of capital. Th is is not a good investment, however, because its return is inadequate, given its level of systematic risk. Nonetheless, if we use the WACC to evaluate it, it appears to be attractive. So the second error that arises if we use the WACC as a cutoff is that we tend to make unprofi table investments with risks greater than the overall fi rm. As a consequence, through time, a fi rm that uses its WACC to evaluate all projects has a tendency to both accept unprofi table investments and become increasingly risky.
400 Part 6: Cost of Capital and Long-Term Financial Policy
14Ross_Chapter14_4th.indd 40014Ross_Chapter14_4th.indd 400 12-11-27 12:1112-11-27 12:11
Divisional Cost of Capital Th e same type of problem with the WACC can arise in a corporation with more than one line of business. Imagine, for example, a corporation that has two divisions, a regulated telephone company and a high-tech communications company. Th e fi rst of these (the telephone company) has relatively low risk; the second has relatively high risk. Companies like this spanning several industries are very common in Canada.
In this case, the fi rm’s overall cost of capital is really a mixture of two diff erent costs of capital, one for each division. If the two divisions were competing for resources, and the fi rm used a single WACC as a cutoff , which division would tend to be awarded greater funds for investment?
Th e answer is that the riskier division would tend to have greater returns (ignoring the greater risk), so it would tend to be the winner. Th e less glamorous operation might have great profi t potential that ends up being ignored. Large corporations in Canada and the United States are aware of this problem and many work to develop separate divisional costs of capital.
The Pure Play Approach We’ve seen that using the fi rm’s WACC inappropriately can lead to problems. How can we come up with the appropriate discount rates in such circumstances? Because we cannot observe the returns on these investments, there generally is no direct way of coming up with a beta, for exam- ple. Instead, what we must do is examine other investments outside the fi rm that are in the same risk class as the one we are considering and use the market-required returns on these investments as the discount rate. In other words, we determine what the cost of capital is for such investments by locating some similar investments in the marketplace.
For example, going back to our telephone division, suppose we wanted to come up with a dis- count rate to use for that division. What we can do is to identify several other phone companies that have publicly traded securities. We might fi nd that a typical phone company stock has a beta of .40, AA-rated debt, and a capital structure that is about 50 percent debt and 50 percent equity. Using this information, we could develop a WACC for a typical phone company and use this as our discount rate.
Alternatively, if we are thinking of entering a new line of business, we would try to develop the appropriate cost of capital by looking at the market-required returns on companies already in that business. In the language of Bay Street, a company that focuses only on a single line of business is called a pure play. For example, if you wanted to bet on the price of crude oil by purchasing com- mon stocks, you would try to identify companies that dealt exclusively with this product because they would be the most aff ected by changes in the price of crude oil. Such companies would be called pure plays on the price of crude oil.
What we try to do here is to fi nd companies that focus as exclusively as possible on the type of project in which we are interested. Our approach, therefore, is called the pure play approach to estimating the required return on an investment.
Th e pure play approach is also useful in fi nding the fair rate of return for utility companies. Going back to our earlier example, we use the pure play approach if Provincial Power is not a pub- lic company. Because a number of electric utilities in Canada are crown corporations, consultants for the two sides use publicly traded Canadian and U.S. utilities for comparison.
In Chapter 3, we discussed the subject of identifying similar companies for comparison pur- poses. Th e same problems that we described there come up here. Th e most obvious one is that we may not be able to fi nd any suitable companies. In this case, how to determine a discount rate objectively becomes a very diffi cult question. Alternatively, a comparable company may be found but the comparison complicated by a diff erent capital structure. In this case, we have to adjust the beta for the eff ect of leverage. Appendix 14A on adjusted present value (APV) explains how to do this.12 Th e important thing is to be aware of the issue so we at least reduce the possibility of the kinds of mistakes that can arise when the WACC is used as a cutoff on all investments.
12 Another approach is to develop an accounting beta using a formula that makes beta a function of the firm’s financial ratios.
pure play approach Use of a WACC that is unique to a particular project.
CHAPTER 14: Cost of Capital 401
14Ross_Chapter14_4th.indd 40114Ross_Chapter14_4th.indd 401 12-11-27 12:1112-11-27 12:11
The Subjective Approach Because of the diffi culties that exist in objectively establishing discount rates for individual pro- jects, fi rms oft en adopt an approach that involves making subjective adjustments to the overall WACC. To illustrate, suppose a fi rm has an overall WACC of 14 percent. It places all proposed projects into four categories as follows:
Category Examples Adjustment Factor Discount Rate
High risk New products +6% 20%
Moderate risk Cost savings, expansion of existing lines +0 14
Low risk Replacement of existing equipment -4 10
Mandatory Pollution control equipment n.a.* n.a.
*n.a. = Not applicable
Th e eff ect of this crude partitioning is to assume that all projects either fall into one of three risk classes or else they are mandatory. In this last case, the cost of capital is irrelevant since the project must be taken. Examples are safety and pollution control projects. With the subjective approach, the fi rm’s WACC may change through time as economic conditions change. As this happens, the discount rates for the diff erent types of projects also change.
Within each risk class, some projects presumably have more risk than others, and the danger of incorrect decisions still exists. Figure 14.2 illustrates this point. Comparing Figures 14.1 and 14.2, we see that similar problems exist, but the magnitude of the potential error is less with the subjec- tive approach. For example, the project labelled A would be accepted if the WACC were used, but it is rejected once it is classifi ed as a high-risk investment. What this illustrates is that some risk adjustment, even if it is subjective, is probably better than no risk adjustment.
It would be better, in principle, to determine the required return objectively for each project separately. However, as a practical matter, it may not be possible to go much beyond subjective adjustments because either the necessary information is unavailable or else the cost and eff ort required are simply not worthwhile.
FIGURE 14.2
The security market line (SML) and the subjective approach
Expected return
Rf = 7%
20%
10%
SML
WACC = 14%
Beta
A
= 8%
High risk (+6%)
Low risk (–4%)
Moderate risk (+0%)
With the subjective approach, the firm places projects into one of several risk classes. The discount rate used to value the project is then determined by adding (for high risk) or subtracting (for low risk) an adjustment factor to or from the firm’s WACC.
402 Part 6: Cost of Capital and Long-Term Financial Policy
14Ross_Chapter14_4th.indd 40214Ross_Chapter14_4th.indd 402 12-11-27 12:1112-11-27 12:11
1. What are the likely consequences if a firm uses its WACC to evaluate all proposed investments?
2. What is the pure play approach to determining the appropriate discount rate? When might it be used?
14.6 Flotation Costs and the Weighted Average Cost of Capital
So far, we have not included fl otation costs in our discussion of the weighted average cost of capital. If a company accepts a new project, it may be required to issue or fl oat new bonds and stocks. Th is means the fi rm incurs fl otation costs.
Sometimes it is suggested that the fi rm’s WACC should be adjusted upward to refl ect fl ota- tion costs. Th is is really not the best approach because, once again, the required return on an investment depends on the risk of the investment, not the source of the funds. Th is is not to say that fl otation costs should be ignored; since these costs arise as a consequence of the decision to undertake a project, they are relevant cash fl ows. We therefore briefl y discuss how to include them in a project analysis.
The Basic Approach We start with a simple case. Th e Spatt Company, an all-equity fi rm, has a cost of equity of 20 percent. Since this fi rm is 100 percent equity, its WACC and its cost of equity are the same. Spatt is contemplating a large-scale $100 million expansion of its existing operations. Th e expansion would be funded by selling new stock.
Based on conversations with its investment dealer, Spatt believes its fl otation costs would run 10 percent of the amount issued. Th is means that Spatt’s proceeds from the equity sale would be only 90 percent of the amount sold. When fl otation costs are considered, what is the cost of the expansion?
As we discuss in Chapter 15, Spatt needs to sell enough equity to raise $100 million aft er cover- ing the fl otation costs. In other words:
$100 million = (1 - .10) × Amount raised
Amount raised = $100/.90 = $111.11 million
Spatt’s fl otation costs are thus $11.11 million, and the true cost of the expansion is $111.11 million once we include fl otation costs.
Th ings are only slightly more complicated if the fi rm uses both debt and equity. For example, suppose Spatt’s target capital structure is 60 percent equity, 40 percent debt. Th e fl otation costs associated with equity are still 10 percent, but the fl otation costs for debt are less, say 5 percent.
Earlier, when we had diff erent capital costs for debt and equity, we calculated a weighted aver- age cost of capital using the target capital structure weights. Here, we do much the same thing. We can calculate a weighted average fl otation cost, fA, by multiplying the equity fl otation cost, fE, by the percentage of equity (E/V) and the debt fl otation cost, fD, by the percentage of debt (Dm/V) and then adding the two together:
fA = (E/V) × fE + (Dm/V) × fD [14.7] = 60% × .10 + 40% × .05 = 8%
Th e weighted average fl otation cost is thus 8 percent. What this tells us is that for every dollar in outside fi nancing needed for new projects, the fi rm must actually raise $1/(1 - .08) = $1.087. In our previous example, the project cost is $100 million when we ignore fl otation costs. If we include them, the true cost is $100/(1 - fA) = $100/.92 = $108.7 million.
In taking issue costs into account, the fi rm must be careful not to use the wrong weights. Th e
Concept Questions
flotation costs The costs associated with the issuance of new securities.
CHAPTER 14: Cost of Capital 403
14Ross_Chapter14_4th.indd 40314Ross_Chapter14_4th.indd 403 12-11-27 12:1112-11-27 12:11
fi rm should use the target weights, even if it can fi nance the entire cost of the project with either debt or equity. Th e fact that a fi rm can fi nance a specifi c project with debt or equity is not directly relevant. If a fi rm has a target debt/equity ratio of 1, for example, but chooses to fi nance a par- ticular project with all debt, it has to raise additional equity later to maintain its target debt/equity ratio. To take this into account, the fi rm should always use the target weights in calculating the fl otation cost.13
EXAMPLE 14.6: Calculating the Weighted Average Flotation Cost
The Weinstein Corporation has a target capital structure that is 80 percent equity, 20 percent debt. The fl otation costs for equity issues are 20 percent of the amount raised; the fl otation costs for debt issues are 6 percent. If Weinstein needs $65 million for a new manufacturing facility, what is the true cost once fl otation costs are considered?
We fi rst calculate the weighted average fl otation cost, fA:
fA = (E/V) × fE + (Dm/V) × fD = 80% × .20 + 20% × .06 = 17.2%
The weighted average fl otation cost is thus 17.2 percent. The project cost is $65 million when we ignore fl otation costs. If we include them, the true cost is $65/(1 - fA) = $65/.828 = $78.5 million, again illustrating that fl otation costs can be a considerable expense.
F lotation Costs and NPV To illustrate how fl otation costs can be included in an NPV analysis, suppose the Tripleday Print- ing Company is currently at its target debt/equity ratio of 100 percent. It is considering building a new $500,000 printing plant. Th is new plant is expected to generate aft er-tax cash fl ows of $73,150 per year forever. Th ere are two fi nancing options:
1. A $500,000 new issue of common stock. The issuance costs of the new common stock would be about 10 percent of the amount raised. The required return on the company’s new equity is 20 percent.
2. A $500,000 issue of 30-year bonds. The issuance costs of the new debt would be 2 percent of the proceeds. The company can raise new debt at 10 percent. The company faces a 40-per- cent combined federal/provincial tax rate.
What is the NPV of the new printing plant? To begin, since printing is the company’s main line of business, we use the company’s weighted
average cost of capital to value the new printing plant:
WACC = (E/V) × RE + (Dm/V) × RD × (1 - TC) = .50 × 20% + .50 × 10% × (1 - .40) = 13.0%
Since the cash fl ows are $73,150 per year forever, the PV of the cash fl ows at 13.0 percent per year is:
PV = $73,150/.13 = $562,692
If we ignore fl otation costs, the NPV is:
NPV = $562,692 - 500,000 = $62,692
Th e project generates an NPV greater than zero, so it should be accepted. What about fi nancing arrangements and issue costs? From the information just given, we
know that the fl otation costs are 2 percent for debt and 10 percent for equity. Since Tripleday uses equal amounts of debt and equity, the weighted average fl otation cost, fA, is:
13 Since flotation costs may be amortized for tax purposes, there is a tax adjustment as explained in Appendix 14A.
404 Part 6: Cost of Capital and Long-Term Financial Policy
14Ross_Chapter14_4th.indd 40414Ross_Chapter14_4th.indd 404 12-11-27 12:1112-11-27 12:11
fA = (E/V) × fE + (Dm/V) × fD = .50 × 10% + .50 × 2% = 6%
Remember that the fact that Tripleday can fi nance the project with all debt or equity is irrelevant. Because Tripleday needs $500,000 to fund the new plant, the true cost, once we include fl otation costs, is $500,000/(1 - fA) = $500,000/.94 = $531,915. Since the PV of the cash fl ows is $562,692, the plant has an NPV of $562,692 - 531,915 = $30,777, so it is still a good investment. However, its return is lower than we initially might have thought.14
Samuel Weaver on Cost of Capital and Hurdle Rates at Hershey Foods Corporation
At Hershey, we re-evaluate our cost of capital annually or as market conditions warrant. The calculation of the cost of capital essentially involves three different issues, each with a few alternatives:
• Capital weights Book value or market value weights Current or target capital structure
• Cost of debt Historical (coupon) interest rates Market-based interest rates
• Cost of equity Dividend growth model Capital asset pricing model, or CAPM
At Hershey, we calculate our cost of capital offi cially based upon the projected “target” capital structure at the end of our three- year intermediate planning horizon. This allows management to see the immediate impact of strategic decisions related to the planned composition of Hershey’s capital pool. The cost of debt is calculated as the anticipated weighted average after-tax cost of debt in that fi nal plan year based upon the coupon rates attached to that debt. The cost of equity is computed via the dividend growth model.
We recently conducted a survey of the 10 food processing companies that we consider our industry group competitors. The result of this survey indicated that the cost of capital for most of these companies was in the 7 to 10 percent range. Furthermore, without exception, all 10 of these companies employed the CAPM when calculating their cost of equity.
Our experience has been that the dividend growth model works better for Hershey. We do pay dividends, and we do experience steady, stable growth in our dividends. This growth is also projected within our strategic plan. Consequently, the dividend growth model is technically applicable and appealing to management since it refl ects their best estimate of the future long-term growth rate.
In addition to the calculation already described, the other possible combinations and permutations are calculated as barometers. Unoffi cially, the cost of capital is calculated using market weights, current marginal interest rates, and the CAPM cost of equity. For the most part, and due to rounding the cost of capital to the nearest whole percentage point, these alternative calculations yield approximately the same results.
From the cost of capital, individual project hurdle rates are developed using a subjectively determined risk premium based on the characteristics of the project. Projects are grouped into separate project categories, such as cost savings, capacity expansion, product line extension, and new products. For example, in general, a new product is more risky than a cost savings project. Consequently, each project category’s hurdle rate refl ects the level of risk and commensurate required return as perceived by senior management. As a result, capital project hurdle rates range from a slight premium over the cost of capital to the highest hurdle rate of approximately double the cost of capital.
Samuel Weaver, Ph.D., was formerly director, fi nancial planning and analysis, for Hershey. He is a certifi ed management accountant and certifi ed fi nancial manager. His position combined the theoretical with the pragmatic and involved the analysis of many different facets of fi nance in addition to capital expenditure analysis.
IN THEIR OWN WORDS…
1. What are flotation costs?
2. How are flotation costs included in an NPV analysis?
14 Our example abstracts from the tax deductibility of some parts of flotation costs.
Concept Questions
CHAPTER 14: Cost of Capital 405
14Ross_Chapter14_4th.indd 40514Ross_Chapter14_4th.indd 405 12-11-27 12:1112-11-27 12:11
14.7 Calculating WACC for Loblaw
We illustrate the practical application of the weighted average cost of capital by calculating it for a prominent Canadian company. Loblaw is a large food distribution company with operations across Canada. Th e company operates grocery stores under various banners. Loblaw’s revenue for the year ending December 2011 was about $31.25 billion, with net earnings of $769 million.
As we pointed out, WACC calculations depend on market values as observed on a particular date. In this application, market values for Loblaw were observed on May 10, 2012.15 Other infor- mation comes from annual statements at Loblaw’s year-end on December 31, 2011.
Estimating Financing Proportions Table 14.3 shows an abbreviated statement of fi nancial position for Loblaw. Recall from our earlier discussion that when calculating the cost of capital, it is common to ignore short-term fi nancing, such as payables and accruals. We also ignore short-term debt unless it is a permanent source of fi nancing. As both current assets and current liabilities are ignored for our purposes, increases (or decreases) in current liabilities are netted against changes in current assets. Leases are included in long-term debt for the purposes of this analysis.
TABLE 14.3
Book value statement of financial positionon December 31, 2011 ($ millions)
Assets Liabilities and Equity Current $6,462 Current $ 4,718
Deferred taxes and other 938 Long-term 10,966 Long-term debt 5,765
Equity Common equity 6,007
Total $17,428 Total $17,428 Obtained from loblaw.ca. Author’s calculation.
Ideally, we should calculate the market value of all sources of fi nancing and determine the relative weights of each source. Sometimes, diffi culties arise in fi nding the market value of non- traded bonds. Th is would require us to use book values for debt. Th is is not a problem for Loblaw as the company does not have any non-traded bonds. It is much more important to use the market value for calculation of equity weights than for debt, as the market value of common equity diff ers markedly from the book value.
Market Value Weights for Loblaw To fi nd the market value weights of debt and common stock we fi nd the total market value of each. Th e market values are calculated as the number of shares times the share price. Th e fi gures for Loblaw, as of December 31, 2011, were 281,385,318 common shares and 9,000,000 preferred shares outstanding. Multiplying each by its price gives:
Security Book Value ($ millions) Market Price
Market Value ($ millions)
Interest-bearing debt $5,765 — $ 4,393.1* Preferred Shares 225 27.57 248.1
6,007 $38.48 10,828
Proportions Dollars Market Value Weights
Debt $4,393.1 28.40% Preferred Shares 248.1 1.60% Common stock 10,828 70.00%
$15,469.2 100.00%
*We calculate market value of interest-bearing debt below.
15 Obtained from loblaw.ca. Used with permission.
406 Part 6: Cost of Capital and Long-Term Financial Policy
14Ross_Chapter14_4th.indd 40614Ross_Chapter14_4th.indd 406 12-11-27 12:1112-11-27 12:11
As you can see from the market value weights, Loblaw capital structure contains common equity, debt and preferred stock.
Cost of Debt Loblaw has 18 relatively long-term bond issues that account for virtually all of its long-term debt. To calculate the cost of debt, we combine these 18 issues and compute a weighted average. We use Bloomberg Financial Services to fi nd quotes on the bonds. We should note here that fi nding the yield to maturity for all of a company’s outstanding bond issues on a single day is unusual. If you remember our previous discussion on bonds, the bond market is not as liquid as the stock market, and on many days individual bond issues may not trade. To fi nd the book value of the bonds, we also used Bloomberg Financial Services. Th e basic information is as follows:
Coupon Rate (%)
Maturity Date
Book Value (Face value, in $ millions)
Price (% of par)
Yield to Maturity
5.4000 20-Nov-13 200 105.2 1.906 6.0000 3-Mar-14 100 107.1 1.975 4.8500 8-May-14 350 105.43 2.043 7.1000 1-Jun-16 300 117.37 2.556 5.2200 18-Jun-20 350 113.28 3.335 6.6500 8-Nov-27 100 119.51 4.844 6.4500 9-Feb-28 200 116.76 4.908 6.5000 22-Jan-29 175 117.35 4.959
11.4000 23-May-31 200 176.99 5.053 6.8500 1-Mar-32 200 121.19 5.132 6.5400 17-Feb-33 200 118.09 5.114 8.7500 23-Nov-33 200 147.38 5.099 6.0500 9-Jun-34 200 112.1 5.127 6.1500 29-Jan-35 200 113.88 5.11 5.9000 18-Jan-36 300 110.63 5.12 6.4500 1-Mar-39 200 119.34 5.116 7.0000 7-Jun-40 150 126.19 5.204 5.8600 18-Jun-43 55 109.93 5.211
To calculate the total average cost of debt, we take the percentage of the total debt represented by each issue and multiply by the yield on the issue. We then add to get the overall weighted average debt cost. We use both book values and market values here for comparison. Th e results of the calculations are as follows:
Coupon Rate (%)
Book Value (Face
value, in $ millions)
Percent age of Total
Price (Percentage
of par)
Market Value (in
$ millions) Percentage of
Total Yield to Maturity
Book Values
Market Values
5.4000 200 5.43% 105.2% 210.40 4.79% 1.906% 0.104% 0.091% 6.0000 100 2.72% 107.1% 107.10 2.44% 1.975% 0.054% 0.048% 4.8500 350 9.51% 105.43% 369.01 8.40% 2.043% 0.194% 0.172% 7.1000 300 8.15% 117.37% 352.11 8.02% 2.556% 0.208% 0.205% 5.2200 350 9.51% 113.28% 396.48 9.03% 3.335% 0.317% 0.301% 6.6500 100 2.72% 119.51% 119.51 2.72% 4.844% 0.132% 0.132% 6.4500 200 5.43% 116.76% 233.52 5.32% 4.908% 0.267% 0.261% 6.5000 175 4.76% 117.35% 205.36 4.67% 4.959% 0.236% 0.232%
11.4000 200 5.43% 176.99% 353.98 8.06% 5.053% 0.275% 0.407% 6.8500 200 5.43% 121.19% 242.38 5.52% 5.132% 0.279% 0.283% 6.5400 200 5.43% 118.09% 236.18 5.38% 5.114% 0.278% 0.275% 8.7500 200 5.43% 147.38% 294.76 6.71% 5.099% 0.277% 0.342% 6.0500 200 5.43% 112.1% 224.20 5.10% 5.127% 0.279% 0.262% 6.1500 200 5.43% 113.88% 227.76 5.18% 5.11% 0.278% 0.265% 5.9000 300 8.15% 110.63% 331.89 7.55% 5.12% 0.417% 0.387% 6.4500 200 5.43% 119.34% 238.68 5.43% 5.116% 0.278% 0.278% 7.0000 150 4.08% 126.19% 189.29 4.31% 5.204% 0.212% 0.224% 5.8600 55 1.49% 109.93% 60.46 1.38% 5.211% 0.078% 0.072%
Total $3,680 100% $4,393.06 4.162% 4.236%
CHAPTER 14: Cost of Capital 407
14Ross_Chapter14_4th.indd 40714Ross_Chapter14_4th.indd 407 12-11-27 12:1112-11-27 12:11
As these calculations show, Loblaw’s cost of debt is 4.162% on a book value basis and 4.236% on a market value basis. Th ey are very similar. Th us, for Loblaw, whether market values are used or book values are used makes only a small diff erence. Th e reason is simply that the market values and book values are similar. Th is will oft en be the case and explains why companies frequently use book values for debt in WACC calculations.
Th e last step that needs to be done is to convert the before-tax cost of debt to an aft er-tax cost. To do this, we use the average tax rate for Loblaw during 2011: 27.2 percent.
RD(1 - TC) = Cost of Debt (Market Value) × (1 - TC) = 4.236% (1 - 0.272) = 3.08%
Cost of Preferred Shares Th e cost of preferred shares is obtained from Bloomberg Financial Services and its value is
5.597%. If a yield of a preferred share is not available online, it can also be obtained from yields of corporate preferred shares of similar rating.
Cost of Common Stock To determine the cost of common stock for Loblaw, we begin with the CAPM and use the divi- dend valuation model as a reality check.
CAPM
β = 0.30 Market risk premium = 4.30%16 Risk-free rate = 5%
RE = Rf + β(Market risk premium)17 = 5.0% + 0.30(4.30%) = 6.29%
To calculate the cost of equity using the dividend valuation model, we need a growth rate for Loblaw. A geometric regression would be the most accurate; however, a geometric average is simpler and nearly as accurate. We use the EPS fi gures to determine the growth rate for Loblaw.
Year EPS
2011 2.73 2010 2.45 2009 2.39 2008 1.99 2007 1.20 2006 -0.80 2005 2.72 2004 3.53 2003 3.07 2002 2.64 2001 2.04 2000 1.71 1999 1.37 1998 1.06 1997 0.88
Source: FP Advisor.
16 We use the 60-month beta calculated by FP Advisor and the arithmetic mean market risk premium from Chapter 12 for the period 1957-2011. A further refinement would compute the market risk premium as the average of the arith- metic and geometric mean values. 17 We consider Loblaw a going concern, so we use the risk-free rate on a long-term government bond estimated evalua- tion of 5%.
408 Part 6: Cost of Capital and Long-Term Financial Policy
14Ross_Chapter14_4th.indd 40814Ross_Chapter14_4th.indd 408 12-11-27 12:1112-11-27 12:11
Dividend Valuation Model Growth Rate
(1 + g)14 = ($2.73/0.88) g = (3.10)1/14 - 1 g = 8.42%
Th e geometric growth rate in EPS over the period 1997-2011 was 8.42 percent.18
Dividend valuation model = D1/P0 + g
To get next year’s dividend, D1, we adjust the current dividend of $0.84 for projected growth:
D1 = D0 (1 + g) = $0.84(1.0842) = $0.9107 P0 = $38.48 RE = D1/P0 + g
= $0.9107/$38.48 + 0.0842 = 10.79%
Notice that the estimates for the cost of equity are quite diff erent. Remember that each method of estimating the cost of equity relies on diff erent assumptions, so diff erent estimates of the cost of equity should not surprise us. Recall that earlier we argued that the CAPM estimate follows best practices and that the Dividend Growth Model can be used as a reality check. In this case the CAPM estimate seems rather low. One reasonable approach would be to make a subjective adjust- ment to the CAPM estimate increasing it by half a percentage point to 6.8 percent.19
Since this seems like a reasonable number, we will use it in calculating the cost of equity in this example.
Loblaw’s WACC To fi nd the weighted average cost of capital, we weight the cost of each source by the weights:
WACC = (E/V) RE + (P/V) RP + (Dm/V) RD (1 - TC) = 0.70(6.80%) + 0.0160(5.597%) + 0.2840(3.08%) = 5.72%
Our analysis shows that in May 2012 Loblaw’s weighted average cost of capital was 5.72 percent.
14.8 SUMMARY AND CONCLUSIONS
Th is chapter discussed cost of capital. Th e most important concept is the weighted average cost of capital (WACC) that we interpreted as the required rate of return on the overall fi rm. It is also the discount rate appropriate for cash fl ows that are similar in risk to the overall fi rm. We described how the WACC can be calculated as the weighted average of diff erent sources of fi nancing. We also illustrated how it can be used in certain types of analyses.
In addition, we pointed out situations in which it is inappropriate to use the WACC as the discount rate. To handle such cases, we described some alternative approaches to developing dis- count rates such as the pure play approach. We also discussed how the fl otation costs associated with raising new capital can be included in an NPV analysis.
18 Strictly speaking, the two growth rates will diverge unless the payout ratio is constant. 19 This may be due to the influence of the market meltdown of 2008 and the European government debt crisis on the risk premium and risk-free rate as explained earlier.
CHAPTER 14: Cost of Capital 409
14Ross_Chapter14_4th.indd 40914Ross_Chapter14_4th.indd 409 12-11-27 12:1112-11-27 12:11
Key Terms adjusted present value (APV) (page 414) cost of debt (page 393) cost of equity (page 389) economic value added (EVA) (page 398) flotation costs (page 403)
pure play approach (page 401) retention ratio (page 391) return on equity (ROE) (page 391) weighted average cost of capital (WACC) (page 395)
Chapter Review Problems and Self-Test 14.1 Calculating the Cost of Equity Suppose that stock in Boone
Corporation has a beta of .90. The market risk premium is 7 percent, and the risk-free rate is 8 percent. Boone’s last divi- dend was $1.80 per share, and the dividend is expected to grow at 7 percent indefinitely. The stock currently sells for $25. What is Boone’s cost of equity capital?
14.2 Calculating the WACC In addition to the information in the previous problem, suppose Boone has a target debt/equity ra-
tio of 50 percent. Its cost of debt is 8 percent, before taxes. If the tax rate is 40 percent, what is the WACC?
14.3 Flotation Costs Suppose that in the previous question Boone is seeking $40 million for a new project. The necessary funds have to be raised externally.
Boone’s flotation costs for selling debt and equity are 3 per- cent and 12 percent, respectively. If flotation costs are consid- ered, what is the true cost of the new project?
Answers to Self-Test Problems 14.1 We start with the SML approach. Based on the information given, the expected return on Boone’s common stock is: RE = Rf + βE × [RM - Rf]
= 8% + .9 × 7% = 14.3%
We now use the dividend growth model. The projected dividend is D0 × (1 + g) = $1.80 × (1.07) = $1.926, so the expected return using this approach is:
RE = D1/P0 + g = $1.926/25 + .07 = 14.704%
Since these two estimates, 14.3 percent and 14.7 percent, are fairly close, we average them. Boone’s cost of equity is approximately 14.5 percent.
14.2 Since the target debt/equity ratio is .50, Boone uses $.50 in debt for every $1.00 in equity. In other words, Boone’s target capital structure is 1⁄3 debt and 2⁄3 equity. The WACC is thus:
WACC = (E/V) × RE + (Dm/V) × RD × (1 - TC) = 2/3 × 14.5% + 1/3 × 8% × (1 - .40) = 11.267%
14.3 Since Boone uses both debt and equity to finance its operations, we first need the weighted average flotation cost. As in the previous problem, the percentage of equity financing is 2⁄3, so the weighted average cost is:
fA = (E/V) × fE + (Dm/V) × fD = 2/3 × 12% + 1/3 × 3% = 9%
If Boone needs $40 million after flotation costs, the true cost of the project is $40/(1 - fA) = $40/.91 = $43.96 million.
Concepts Review and Critical Thinking Questions 1. (LO3) On the most basic level, if a firm’s WACC is 12 per-
cent, what does this mean? 2. (LO3) In calculating the WACC, if you had to use book val-
ues for either debt or equity, which would you choose? Why? 3. (LO5) If you can borrow all the money you need for a project
at 6 percent, doesn’t it follow that 6 percent is your cost of capital for the project?
4. (LO3) Why do we use an after-tax figure for cost of debt but not for cost of equity?
5. (LO1) What are the advantages of using the DCF model for determining the cost of equity capital? What are the disadvan- tages? What specific piece of information do you need to find the cost of equity using this model? What are some of the
ways in which you could get this estimate? 6. (LO1) What are the advantages of using the SML approach to
finding the cost of equity capital? What are the disadvantages? What are the specific pieces of information needed to use this method? Are all of these variables observable, or do they need to be estimated? What are some of the ways you could get these estimates?
7. (LO2) How do you determine the appropriate cost of debt for a company? Does it make a difference if the company’s debt is privately placed as opposed to being publicly traded? How would you estimate the cost of debt for a firm whose only debt issues are privately held by institutional investors?
410 Part 6: Cost of Capital and Long-Term Financial Policy
14Ross_Chapter14_4th.indd 41014Ross_Chapter14_4th.indd 410 12-11-27 12:1112-11-27 12:11
8. (LO5) Suppose Tom O’Bedlam, president of Bedlam Prod- ucts Inc. has hired you to determine the firm’s cost of debt and cost of equity capital.
a. The stock currently sells for $50 per share, and the divi- dend per share will probably be about $5. Tom argues, “It will cost us $5 per share to use the stockholders’ money this year, so the cost of equity is equal to 10 percent ($5/50).” What’s wrong with this conclusion?
b. Based on the most recent financial statements, Bedlam Products’ total liabilities are $8 million. Total interest ex- pense for the coming year will be about $1 million. Tom therefore reasons, “We owe $8 million, and we will pay $1 million interest. Therefore, our cost of debt is obvi- ously $1 million/8 million = 12.5%.” What’s wrong with this conclusion?
c. Based on his own analysis, Tom is recommending that the company increase its use of equity financing, because “debt costs 12.5 percent, but equity only costs 10 percent; thus equity is cheaper.” Ignoring all the other issues, what do you think about the conclusion that the cost of equity is less than the cost of debt?
9. (LO5) Both Enbridge Inc., a large natural gas user, and Can- adian Natural Resources Ltd., a major natural gas producer,
are thinking of investing in natural gas wells near Edmonton. Both are all-equity-financed companies. Enbridge Inc. and Canadian Natural Resources Ltd. are looking at identical pro- jects. They’ve analyzed their respective investments, which would involve a negative cash flow now and positive expected cash flows in the future. These cash flows would be the same for both firms. No debt would be used to finance the projects. Both companies estimate that their project would have a net present value of $1 million at an 18 percent discount rate and a -$1.1 million NPV at a 22 percent discount rate. Enbridge Inc. has a beta of 1.25, whereas Canadian Natural Resources Ltd. has a beta of .75. The expected risk premium on the mar- ket is 8 percent, and risk-free bonds are yielding 12 percent. Should either company proceed? Should both? Explain.
10. (LO5) Under what circumstances would it be appropriate for a firm to use different costs of capital for its different operat- ing divisions? If the overall firm WACC were used as the hur- dle rate for all divisions, would the riskier divisions or the more conservative divisions tend to get most of the invest- ment projects? Why? If you were to try to estimate the appro- priate cost of capital for different divisions, what problems might you encounter? What are two techniques you could use to develop a rough estimate for each division’s cost of capital?
Questions and Problems 1. Calculating Cost of Equity (LO1) The Rollag Co. just issued a dividend of $2.75 per share on its common stock. The company
is expected to maintain a constant 5.8 percent growth rate in its dividends indefinitely. If the stock sells for $59 a share, what is the company’s cost of equity?
2. Calculating Cost of Equity (LO1) The Lenzie Corporation’s common stock has a beta of 1.2. If the risk-free rate is 4.8 percent and the expected return on the market is 11 percent, what is the company’s cost of equity capital?
3. Calculating Cost of Equity (LO1) Stock in Coalhurst Industries has a beta of 1.1. The market risk premium is 7 percent, and T-bills are currently yielding 4.5 percent. The company’s most recent dividend was $1.70 per share, and dividends are expected to grow at a 6 percent annual rate indefinitely. If the stock sells for $39 per share, what is your best estimate of the company’s cost of equity?
4. Estimating the DCF Growth Rate (LO1) Suppose Whitney Ltd. just issued a dividend of $1.69 per share on its common stock. The company paid dividends of $1.35, $1.43, $1.50, and $1.61 per share in the last four years. If the stock currently sells for $50, what is your best estimate of the company’s cost of equity capital using the arithmetic average growth rate in dividends? What if you use the geometric average growth rate?
5. Calculating Cost of Preferred Stock (LO1) Coaldale Bank has an issue of preferred stock with a $4.25 stated dividend that just sold for $92 per share. What is the bank’s cost of preferred stock?
6. Calculating Cost of Debt (LO2) Nobleford Inc. is trying to determine its cost of debt. The firm has a debt issue outstanding with 18 years to maturity that is quoted at 107 percent of face value. The issue makes semiannual payments and has an embedded cost of 6 percent annually. Assume the par value of the bond is $1,000. What is the company’s pre-tax cost of debt? If the tax rate is 35 percent, what is the after-tax cost of debt?
7. Calculating Cost of Debt (LO2) Pearce’s Cricket Farm issued a 30-year, 8 percent semiannual bond 3 years ago. The bond currently sells for 93 percent of its face value. The company’s tax rate is 35 percent. Assume the par value of the bond is $1,000.
a. What is the pre-tax cost of debt? b. What is the after-tax cost of debt? c. Which is more relevant, the pre-tax or the after-tax cost of debt? Why?
8. Calculating Cost of Debt (LO2) For the firm in Problem 7, suppose the book value of the debt issue is $60 million. In addition, the company has a second debt issue on the market, a zero coupon bond with 10 years left to maturity; the book value of this issue is $35 million and the bonds sell for 57 percent of par. What is the company’s total book value of debt? The total market value? What is your best estimate of the after-tax cost of debt now?
9. Calculating WACC (LO3) Peacock Corporation has a target capital structure of 60 percent common stock, 5 percent preferred stock, and 35 percent debt. Its cost of equity is 12 percent, the cost of preferred stock is 5 percent, and the cost of debt is 7 percent. The relevant tax rate is 35 percent.
a. What is Peacock’s WACC?
Basic (Questions
1–19)
4
CHAPTER 14: Cost of Capital 411
14Ross_Chapter14_4th.indd 41114Ross_Chapter14_4th.indd 411 12-11-27 12:1112-11-27 12:11
b. The company president has approached you about Peacock’s capital structure. He wants to know why the company doesn’t use more preferred stock financing because it costs less than debt. What would you tell the president?
10. Taxes and WACC (LO3) Iron Springs Manufacturing has a target debt-equity ratio of .45. Its cost of equity is 13 percent and its cost of debt is 6 percent. If the tax rate is 35 percent, what is the company’s WACC?
11. Finding the Target Capital Structure (LO3) Turin Corp. has a weighted average cost of capital of 9.6 percent. The company’s cost of equity is 12 percent and its pre-tax cost of debt is 7.9 percent. The tax rate is 35 percent. What is the company’s target debt-equity ratio?
12. Book Value versus Market Value (LO3) Tempest Manufacturing has 8 million shares of common stock outstanding. The current share price is $73, and the book value per share is $7. Tempest Manufacturing also has two bond issues outstanding. The first bond issue has a face value of $70 million, an 7 percent coupon, and sells for 97 percent of par. The second issue has a face value of $50 million, has an 8 percent coupon, and sells for 108 percent of par. The first issue matures in 21 years, the second in 6 years.
a. What are Tempest’s capital structure weights on a book value basis? b. What are Tempest’s capital structure weights on a market value basis? c. Which are more relevant, the book or market value weights? Why?
13. Calculating the WACC (LO3) In Problem 12, suppose the most recent dividend was $4.10 and the dividend growth rate is 6 percent. Assume that the overall cost of debt is the weighted average of that implied by the two outstanding debt issues. Assume the par value of each bond is $1,000. Both bonds make semiannual payments. The tax rate is 35 percent. What is the company’s WACC?
14. WACC (LO3) Welling Inc. has a target debt-equity ratio of 1.25. Its WACC is 9.2 percent, and the tax rate is 35 percent. a. If Welling’s cost of equity is 14 percent, what is its pre-tax cost of debt? b. If instead you know that the after-tax cost of debt is 6.8 percent, what is the cost of equity?
15. Finding the WACC (LO3) Given the following information for Magrath Power Co., find the WACC. Assume the company’s tax rate is 35 percent.
Debt: 8,000 6.5 percent coupon bonds outstanding, $1,000 par value, 25 years to maturity, selling for 106 percent of par; the bonds make semiannual payments.
Common stock: 310,000 shares outstanding, selling for $57 per share; the beta is 1.05. Preferred stock: 15,000 shares of 4 percent preferred stock outstanding, currently selling for $72 per share. Market: 7 percent market risk premium and 4.5 percent risk-free rate. 16. Finding the WACC (LO3) Raymond Mining Corporation has 8.5 million shares of common stock outstanding, 250,000 shares
of 5 percent preferred stock outstanding, and 135,000 7.5 percent semiannual bonds outstanding, par value $1,000 each. The common stock currently sells for $34 per share and has a beta of 1.25, the preferred stock currently sells for $91 per share, and the bonds have 15 years to maturity and sell for 114 percent of par. The market risk premium is 7.5 percent, T-bills are yielding 4 percent, and Adex Mining’s tax rate is 35 percent.
a. What is the firm’s market value capital structure? b. If Raymond Mining is evaluating a new investment project that has the same risk as the firm’s typical project, what rate
should the firm use to discount the project’s cash flows? 17. SML and WACC (LO1) An all-equity firm is considering the following projects:
Project Beta Expected Return
W .60 8.8% X .85 9.5 Y 1.15 11.9 Z 1.45 15.0
The T-bill rate is 4 percent, and the expected return on the market is 11 percent. a. Which projects have a higher expected return than the firm’s 11 percent cost of capital? b. Which projects should be accepted? c. Which projects would be incorrectly accepted or rejected if the firm’s overall cost of capital were used as a hurdle rate?
18. Calculating Flotation Costs (LO4) Suppose your company needs $15 million to build a new assembly line. Your target debt- equity ratio is .60. The flotation cost for new equity is 8 percent, but the flotation cost for debt is only 5 percent. Your boss has decided to fund the project by borrowing money, because the flotation costs are lower and the needed funds are relatively small.
a. What do you think about the rationale behind borrowing the entire amount? b. What is your company’s weighted average flotation cost, assuming all equity is raised externally? c. What is the true cost of building the new assembly line after taking flotation costs into account? Does it matter in this case
that the entire amount is being raised from debt? 19. Calculating Flotation Costs (LO4) Craddock Company needs to raise $55 million to start a new project and will raise the
money by selling new bonds. The company will generate no internal equity for the foreseeable future. The company has a target
412 Part 6: Cost of Capital and Long-Term Financial Policy
14Ross_Chapter14_4th.indd 41214Ross_Chapter14_4th.indd 412 12-11-27 12:1112-11-27 12:11
capital structure of 70 percent common stock, 5 percent preferred stock, and 25 percent debt. Flotation costs for issuing new common stock are 9 percent, for new preferred stock, 6 percent, and for new debt, 3 percent. What is the true initial cost figure Craddock should use when evaluating its project?
20. WACC and NPV (LO3, 5) Taber Inc. is considering a project that will result in initial after-tax cash savings of $1.8 million at the end of the first year, and these savings will grow at a rate of 2 percent per year indefinitely. The firm has a target debt-equity ratio of .80, a cost of equity of 12 percent, and an after-tax cost of debt of 4.8 percent. The cost-saving proposal is somewhat riskier than the usual project the firm undertakes; management uses the subjective approach and applies an adjustment factor of +2 percent to the cost of capital for such risky projects. Under what circumstances should the company take on the project?
21. Flotation Costs (LO4) Judson Inc. recently issued new securities to finance a new TV show. The project cost $14 million, and the company paid $725,000 in flotation costs. In addition, the equity issued had a flotation cost of 7 percent of the amount raised, whereas the debt issued had a flotation cost of 3 percent of the amount raised. If Judson issued new securities in the same proportion as its target capital structure, what is the company’s target debt-equity ratio?
22. Divisional Cost of Capital (LO3) Wrentham Inc. has two divisions of equal size. Division A has a beta of 0.93, while Division B has a beta of 1.57. Wrentham has no debt, and is completely equity-financed. The real risk-free rate is 6.5 percent, and the market risk premium is 5.3 percent. The cost of capital for Wrentham is 16 percent. The projects in division A are discounted at A’s required return, and division B’s projects are discounted at B’s required return. Which of the two divisions has a lower cost of capital than the overall cost of capital for the firm?
23. Risk Adjusted WACC (LO3, 5) Conrad Mining Inc. uses a cost of capital of 11 percent to evaluate average risk project and it adds or subtracts 3 percent to adjust for risk. Currently the firm has two mutually exclusive projects under consideration. Both the projects have an initial cost of $100,000 and will last four years.
Project A, riskier than average, will produce an annual cash flow of $72,164 at the end of each year. Project B, of less than average risk will produce cash flows of $145,340 at the end of Years 3 and 4 only. Which investment should firm chose and why? 24. Flotation Costs and NPV (LO3, 4) Retlaw Corporation (RC) manufactures time series photographic equipment. It is currently
at its target debt equity ratio of .80. It’s considering building a new $50 million manufacturing facility. This new plant is expected to generate after-tax cash flows of $6.2 million in perpetuity. The company raises all equity from outside financing. There are three financing options:
1. A new issue of common stock: The flotation costs of the new common stock would be 8 percent of the amount raised. The required return on the company’s new equity is 14 percent.
2. A new issue of 20-year bonds: The flotation costs of the new bonds would be 4 percent of the proceeds. If the company issues these new bonds at an annual coupon rate of 8 percent, they will sell at par.
3. Increased use of accounts payable financing: Because this financing is part of the company’s ongoing daily business, it has no flotation costs, and the company assigns it a cost that is the same as the overall firm WACC. Management has a target ratio of accounts payable to long-term debt of .15. (Assume there is no difference between the pre-tax and after-tax ac- counts payable cost.)
What is the NPV of the new plant? Assume that RC has a 35 percent tax rate.
Internet Application Questions The following problems are interrelated and involve the steps necessary to calculate the WACC for Telus Corporation. 1. Most publicly traded companies in the United States are required to submit quarterly (10Q) and annual (10K) reports to the
SEC detailing the financial operations of the company over the past quarter or year, respectively. These corporate filings are available on the SEC website at sec.gov. In Canada, companies make filings with the local regulatory body such as the Ontario Securities Commission, and the filings can be found at sedar.com. Go to the website and search for the most recent filings made by Telus Corporation. Locate the book value of debt, the book value of equity, and information breaking down the company’s long-term debt.
2. You wish to calculate the cost of equity for Telus. Go to finance.yahoo.com and enter the ticker symbol “T.TO” to locate infor- mation on the firm’s stock, listed on the TSX. Locate the most recent price for Telus, the market capitalization, the number of shares outstanding, the beta, and the most recent annual dividend. Can you use the dividend discount model in this case? Go to bankofcanada.ca and follow the “Interest Rates” link to locate the yield on the three-month Treasury bills. Assuming a 4 per- cent market risk premium, what is the cost of equity for Telus using CAPM?
3. You now need to calculate the cost of debt for Telus. Go to pfin.ca/canadianfixedincome/Default.aspx and, under Corporates section, search for yield to maturity data for some of Telus’s bonds. What is the weighted average cost of debt for Telus using the book value weights and the market value weights? Does it make a difference if you use book value weights or market value weights?
4. Now you can calculate the weighted average cost of capital for Telus, using book value weights and market value weights, assuming Telus has a 35 percent marginal tax rate. Which number is more relevant?
Intermediate (Questions
20–23)
Challenge (Question
24)
CHAPTER 14: Cost of Capital 413
14Ross_Chapter14_4th.indd 41314Ross_Chapter14_4th.indd 413 12-11-27 12:1112-11-27 12:11
Cost of Capital for Lethbridge Computer Inc.
You have recently been hired by Lethbridge Computer Inc. (LCI), in its relatively new treasury management department. LCI was founded eight years ago by Geoff Boycott and cur- rently operates 74 stores in Alberta. The company is privately owned by Geoff and his family, and it had sales of $115 mil- lion last year. LCI primarily sells to customers who shop in the stores. Cus- tomers come to the store and talk with a sales representative. The sales representative assists the customer in determining the type of computer and peripherals that are necessary for the individual customer’s computing needs. After the order is taken, the customer pays for the order immediately, and the computer is made to fill the order. Delivery of the computer averages 15 days, and it is guaranteed in 30 days. LCI’s growth to date has come from its profits. When the company had sufficient capital, it would open a new store. Other than scouting locations, relatively little formal analysis has been used in its capital budgeting process. Geoff has just read about capital budgeting techniques and has come to you for help. For starters, the company has never attempted to determine its cost of capital, and Geoff would like you to per- form the analysis. Because the company is privately owned, it is difficult to determine the cost of equity for the company. Geoff wants you to use the pure play approach to estimate the cost of capital for LCI, On investigation, Geoff found that Dell USA’s business model closely resembles that of LCI, and there- fore chose Dell as the representative company for estimating LCI’s cost of capital. The following questions will lead you through the steps to calculate this estimate:
Questions
1. Most publicly traded corporations are required to submit quarterly (10Q) and annual reports (10K) to the SEC de- tailing the financial operations of the company over the past quarter or year, respectively. These corporate filings
are available on the SEC website at sec.gov. Go to the SEC website; follow the “Search for Company Filings” link and the “Companies & Other Filers” link; enter “Dell Inc.”; and search for SEC filings made by Dell. Find the most recent 10Q or 10K, and download the form. Look on the balance sheet to find the book value of debt and the book value of equity. If you look further down the report, you should find a section titled “Long-term Debt and Interest Rate Risk Management” that will provide a breakdown of Dell’s long-term debt.
2. To estimate the cost of equity for Dell, go to finance. yahoo.com and enter the ticker symbol DELL. Follow the links to answer the following questions: What is the most recent stock price listed for Dell? What is the market value of equity, or market capitalization? How many shares of stock does Dell have outstanding? What is the most re- cent annual dividend? Can you use the dividend discount model in this case? What is the beta for Dell? Now go back to finance.yahoo.com and follow the “bonds” link. What is the yield on 30-year Treasury Bonds? Using the historical market risk premium, what is the cost of equity for Dell using CAPM?
3. You now need to calculate the cost of debt for Dell. Go to finra.org/marketdata, enter Dell as the company, and find the yield to maturity for each of Dell’s bonds. What is the weighted average cost of debt for Dell using the book value weights and using the market value weights? Does it make a difference in this case if you use book value weights or market value weights?
4. You now have all the necessary information to calculate the weighted average cost of capital for Dell. Calculate this using book value weights and market value weights, assuming Dell has a 35 percent marginal tax rate. Which number is more relevant?
5. You used Dell as a pure play company to estimate the cost of capital for LCI. Are there any potential problems with this approach in this situation?
MINI CASE
ADJUSTED PRESENT VALUE
Adjusted present value (APV) is an alternative to WACC in analyzing capital budgeting proposals. Under APV, we first analyze a project under all-equity financing and then add the additional effects of debt. This can be written as
Adjusted present value = All-equity value + Additional eff ects of debt In May 2009, Canadian General Tower (CGT) sought debt financing of $7.5 million from EDC to emerge from the auto sector turmoil. APV is preferable from a financial manager’s perspective as it shows directly the sources of value created by a project.
We illustrate the APV methodology with a simple example.20 Suppose BDE is considering a $10 million project that will last five years. Projected operating cash flows are $3 million annually. The risk-free rate is
20 To make it easier to illustrate what is new in APV, we simplify the project details by assuming the operating cash flows are an annuity. Most Canadian projects generate variable cash flows due to the CCA rules. This is handled within APV by finding the present value of each source of cash flow separately exactly, as presented in Chapter 10.
APPENDIX 14A
adjusted present value (APV) Base case net present value of a project’s operating cash flows plus present value of any financing benefits.
414 Part 6: Cost of Capital and Long-Term Financial Policy
14Ross_Chapter14_4th.indd 41414Ross_Chapter14_4th.indd 414 12-11-27 12:1112-11-27 12:11
10 percent and the cost of equity is 20 percent. This is often called the cost of unlevered equity because we assume initially that the firm has no debt.
All-Equity Value Assuming that the project is financed with all equity, its value is
-$10,000,000 + $3,000,000 × [1 - 1/(1.20)5]/.20 = -$1,028,164 An all-equity firm would clearly reject this project because the NPV is negative. And equity flotation costs (not considered yet) would only make the NPV more negative. However, debt financing may add enough value to the project to justify acceptance. We consider the effects of debt next.
Additional Effects of Debt BDE can obtain a five-year, balloon payment loan for $7.5 million after flotation costs. The interest rate is the risk-free cost of debt of 10 percent. The flotation costs are 1 percent of the amount raised. The amount of the loan is determined using the firm’s target capital structure. In this case, debt represents 75 percent of firm value so the loan for the $10 million project is $7.5 million. If the firm borrowed only $5 million, the difference of $2.5 million would remain as unused debt capacity for another project. This unused debt ca- pacity would be a benefit of the current project. For this reason, we would still use $7.5 million in calculating the additional effects of debt for the current project.21 We look at three ways in which debt financing alters the NPV of the project.
Flotation Costs The formula introduced in the chapter gives us the flotation costs.
$7,500,000 = (1 - .01) × Amount raised Amount raised = $7,500,000/.99 = $7,575,758
So flotation costs are $75,758 and in the text we added these to the initial outlay reducing NPV. The APV method refines the estimate of flotation costs by recognizing that they generate a tax shield.
Flotation costs are paid immediately but are deducted from taxes by amortizing over the life of the loan. In this example, the annual tax deduction for flotation costs is $75,758/5 years = $15,152. At a tax rate of 40 percent, the annual tax shield is $15,152 × .40 = $6,061.
To find the net flotation costs of the loan, add the present value of the tax shield to the flotation costs. Net fl otation costs = -$75,758 + $6,061 × [1 - 1/(1.10)5]/.10
= -$75,758 + $22,976 = -$52,782 The net present value of the project after debt flotation costs but before the benefits of debt is
-$1,028,164 - $52,782 = -$1,080,946
Tax Subsidy The loan of $7.5 million is received at Date 0. Annual interest is $750,000 ($7,500,000 × .10). The interest cost after tax is $450,000 ($750,000 × (1 - .40)). The loan has a balloon payment of the full $7.5 million at the end of five years. The loan gives rise to three sets of cash flows—the loan received, the annual interest cost after taxes, and the repayment of principal. The net present value of the loan is simply the sum of three present values.
NPV (Loan) = Amount borrowed - Present value of aft er-tax interest payments - Present value of loan repayments = $7,500,000 - $450,000 × [1 - 1/(1.10)5]/.10 - $7,500,000/(1.10)5 = $7,500,000 - $1,705,854 -$4,656,910 = $1,137,236
The NPV of the loan is positive, reflecting the interest tax shield.22
21 We base this explanation on teaching materials kindly provided by Alan Marshall. 22 The NPV (Loan) must be zero in a no-tax world, because interest provides no tax shield there. To check this intuition, we calculate 0 = +$7,500,000 - $750,000 [1 - 1/(1.10)5]/.10 - $7,500,000/(1.10)5
CHAPTER 14: Cost of Capital 415
14Ross_Chapter14_4th.indd 41514Ross_Chapter14_4th.indd 415 12-11-27 12:1112-11-27 12:11
The adjusted present value of the project with this financing is: APV = All-equity value - Flotation costs of debt + NPV (Loan) $56,290 = -$1,028,164 - $52,782 + $1,137,236
Though we previously saw that an all-equity firm would reject the project, a firm would accept the project if a $7.5 million loan could be obtained.
Because this loan discussed was at the market rate of 10 percent, we have considered only two of the three additional effects of debt (flotation costs and tax subsidy) so far. We now examine another loan where the third effect arises.
Non-Market Rate Financing In Canada a number of companies are fortunate enough to obtain subsidized financing from a governmen- tal authority. Suppose the project of BDE is deemed socially beneficial and a federal governmental agency grants the firm a $7.5 million loan at 8 percent interest. In addition, the agency absorbs all flotation costs. Clearly, the company would choose this loan over the one we previously calculated. At 8 percent interest, the annual interest payments are $7,500,000 × .08 = $600,000. The after-tax payments are $360,000 = $600,000 × (1 - .40). Using the equation we developed,
NPV (Loan) = Amount borrowed - Present value of aft er-tax interest payments - Present value of loan repayments = $7,500,000 - $360,000 × [1 - 1/(1.10)5]/.10 - $7,500,000/(1.10)5 = $7,500,000 - $1,364,683 - $4,656,910 = $1,478,407
Notice that we still discount the cash flows at 10 percent when the firm is borrowing at 8 percent. This is done because 10 percent is the fair, market-wide rate. That is, 10 percent is the rate at which one could bor- row without benefit of subsidization. The net present value of the subsidized loan is larger than the net present value of the earlier loan because the firm is now borrowing at the below-market rate of 8 percent. Note that the NPV (Loan) calculation captures both the tax effect and the non-market rate effect.
The net present value of the project with subsidized debt financing is: APV = All-equity value - Flotation costs of debt + NPV (Loan) $450,243 = -$1,028,164 - 0 + $1,478,407
Subsidized financing has enhanced the NPV substantially. The result is that the government debt subsidy program will likely achieve its result—encouraging the firm to invest in the kind of project the government agency wishes to encourage.
This example illustrates the adjusted present value (APV) approach. The approach begins with the present value of a project for the all-equity firm. Next, the effects of debt are added in. The approach has much to recommend it. It is intuitively appealing because individual components are calculated separately and added together in a simple way. And, if the debt from the project can be specified precisely, the present value of the debt can be calculated precisely.
APV and Beta The APV approach discounts cash flows from a scale-enhancing project at the cost of unlevered equity, which is also the cost of capital for the all-equity firm. Because in this chapter we are considering firms that have debt, this unlevered equity does not exist. One must somehow use the beta of the levered equity (which really exists) to calculate the beta for the hypothetical unlevered firm. Then the SML line can be employed to determine the cost of equity capital for the unlevered firm.
We now show how to compute the unlevered firm’s beta from the levered equity’s beta. To begin, we treat the case of no corporate taxes to explain the intuition behind our results. However, corporate taxes must be included to achieve real-world applicability. We therefore consider taxes in the second case.
No Taxes In the previous two chapters, we defined the value of the firm to be equal to the value of the firm’s debt plus the value of its equity. For a levered firm, this can be represented as VL = B + S. Imagine an individual who owns all the firm’s debt and all its equity. In other words, this individual owns the entire firm. What is the beta of his or her portfolio of the firm’s debt and equity?
416 Part 6: Cost of Capital and Long-Term Financial Policy
14Ross_Chapter14_4th.indd 41614Ross_Chapter14_4th.indd 416 12-11-27 12:1112-11-27 12:11
As with any portfolio, the beta of this portfolio is a weighted average of the betas of the individual items in the portfolio. Hence, we have
β Portfolio = β Levered firm = Debt ____________ Debt + Equity × β Debt +
Equity ____________ Debt + Equity × β Equity [14A.1]
where βEquity is the beta of the equity of the levered firm. Notice that the beta of debt is multiplied by Debt/ (Debt + Equity), the percentage of debt in the capital structure. Similarly, the beta of equity is multiplied by the percentage of equity in the capital structure. Because the portfolio is the levered firm, the beta of the portfolio is equal to the beta of the levered firm.
The previous equation relates the betas of the financial instruments (debt and equity) to the beta of the levered firm. We need an extra step, however, because we want to relate the betas of the financial instru- ments to the beta of the firm had it been unlevered. Only in this way can we apply APV, because APV begins by discounting the project’s cash flows for an all-equity firm.
Ignoring taxes, the cash flows to both the debt holders and the equity holders of a levered firm are equal to the cash flows to the equity holders of an otherwise identical unlevered firm. Because the cash flows are identical for the two firms, the betas of the two firms must be equal as well.
Because the beta of the unlevered firm is equal to Equation 14A.1, we have
β Unlevered fi rm = Debt ____________ Debt + Equity × β Debt +
Equity ____________ Debt + Equity × β Equity
The beta of debt is very low in practice. If we make the common assumption that the beta of debt is zero, we have the no-tax case:
β Unlevered firm = Equity
____________ Debt + Equity × β Equity [14A.2]
Because Equity/(Debt + Equity) must be below 1 for a levered firm, it follows that βUnlevered firm < βEquity. In words, the beta of the unlevered firm must be less than the beta of the equity in an otherwise identical le- vered firm. This is consistent with our work on capital structure. We showed there that leverage increases the risk of equity. Because beta is a measure of risk, it is sensible that leverage increases the beta of equity.
Real-world corporations pay taxes, whereas the above results are for no taxes. Thus, although the previ- ous discussion presents the intuition behind an important relationship, it does not help apply the APV method in practice. We examine the tax case next.
Corporate Taxes It can be shown that the relationship between the beta of the unlevered firm and the beta of the levered equity in the corporate-tax case is:23
23 This result holds if the beta of debt equals zero. To see this, note that VU + TCB = VL = B + S (a) where VU = value of unlevered firm B = value of debt in a levered firm VL = value of levered firm S = value of equity in a levered firm The formula for VL and VU is discussed in Chapter 16. As we stated in the text, the beta of the levered firm is a weighted average of the debt beta and the equity beta: B _____ B + S × βB +
S _____ B + S × βS where βB and βS are the betas of the debt and the equity of the levered firm, respectively. Because VL = B + S, we have B ___ VL
× βB + S ___ VL
× βS (b)
The beta of the leveraged firm can also be expressed as a weighted average of the beta of the unlevered firm and the beta of the tax shield:
VU _________ VU + TCB
× βU + T CB _________ VU + TCB
× βB where βU is the beta of the unlevered firm. This follows from Equation (a). Because VL = VU + TCB, we have
VU ___ VL
× βU + TCB ____ VL
× βB (c)
We can equate (b) and (c) because both represent the beta of a levered firm. Equation (a) tells us that VU = S + (1 - TC) × B. Under the assumption that βB = 0, equating (b) and (c) and using Equation (a) yields Equation 14A.3.
CHAPTER 14: Cost of Capital 417
14Ross_Chapter14_4th.indd 41714Ross_Chapter14_4th.indd 417 12-11-27 12:1112-11-27 12:11
β Unlevered firm = Equity
______________________ Equity + (1 - TC) × Debt × β Equity [14A.3]
Equation 14A.3 holds when (1) the corporation is taxed at the rate of TC and (2) the debt has a zero beta. Because Equity/(Equity + (1 - TC) × Debt) must be less than 1 for a levered firm, it follows that
βUnlevered firm < βEquity. The corporate-tax case of (Equation 14A.3) is quite similar to the no-tax case of (Equa- tion 14A.2), because the beta of levered equity must be greater than the beta of the unlevered firm in either case. The intuition that leverage increases the risk of equity applies in both cases.
However, notice that the two equations are not equal. It can be shown that leverage increases the equity beta less rapidly under corporate taxes. This occurs because, under taxes, leverage creates a riskless tax shield, thereby lowering the risk of the entire firm.
EXAMPLE 14A.1: Applying APV
Trans Canada Industries is considering a scale-enhancing project. The market value of the firm’s debt is $100 million, and the market value of the firm’s equity is $200 million. The debt is considered riskless. The corporate tax rate is 34 percent. Regression analysis indicates that the beta of the firm’s equity is 2. The risk-free rate is 10 percent, and the expected market premium is 8.5 percent. What is the pro- ject’s discount rate in the hypothetical case that Trans Can- ada is all equity?
We can answer this question in two steps. 1. Determining beta of hypothetical all-equity firm. Using
Equation 14A.3, we have:
Unlevered beta: [$200 million/$200 million + (1 - 0.34) × $100 mil- lion] × 2 = 1.50
2. Determining discount rate. We calculate the discount rate from the SML as: Discount rate: RS = Rf + β × [E(RM) - Rf] 22.75% = 10% + 1.50 × 8.5%
Thus, the APV method says that the project’s NPV should be calculated by discounting the cash flows at the all equity rate of 22.75 percent. As we discussed earlier in this chapter, the tax shield should then be added to the NPV of the cash flows, yielding APV.
The Project Is Not Scale-Enhancing This example assumed that the project is scale-enhancing, doing what the firm does already on a larger scale. So, we began with the beta of the firm’s equity. If the project is not scale-enhancing, one could begin with the equity betas of firms in the industry of the project. For each firm, the hypothetical beta of the unle- vered equity could be calculated by Equation 14A.3. The SML could then be used to determine the project’s discount rate from the average of these betas.
Comparison of WACC and APV In Chapter 14 we provided two approaches to capital budgeting for firms that use debt financing. Both WACC and APV attempt the same task: to value projects when debt financing is allowed. However, as we have shown, the approaches are markedly different in technique. Because of this, it is worthwhile to com- pare the two approaches.24
WACC is an older approach that has been used extensively in business. APV is a newer approach that, while attracting a large following in academic circles, is used less commonly in business. Over the years, we have met with many executives in firms using both approaches. They have frequently pointed out to us that the cost of equity, the cost of debt, and the proportions of debt and equity can easily be calculated for a firm as a whole.
Some projects are scale-enhancing with the same risk as the whole firm. An example is a fast-food chain adding more company-owned outlets. In this case, it is straightforward to calculate the project’s NPV with WACC. However, both the proportions and the costs of debt and equity are different for the project than for the firm as a whole if the project is not scale-enhancing. WACC is more difficult to use in that case.
As a result, firms may switch between approaches using WACC for scale-enhancing projects and APV for special situations. For example, an acquisition of a firm in a completely different industry is clearly not scale-enhancing. So when Campeau Corporation, originally a real estate firm, acquired Federated Depart-
24 In some circumstances faced by multinational firms, APV breaks down. See L. Booth, “Capital Budgeting Frameworks for the Multinational Corporation,” Journal of International Business Studies, Fall 1982, pp. 113-23.
418 Part 6: Cost of Capital and Long-Term Financial Policy
14Ross_Chapter14_4th.indd 41814Ross_Chapter14_4th.indd 418 12-11-27 12:1112-11-27 12:11
ment Stores, APV analysis would have been appropriate because Federated was in a different industry. Also, the acquisition was through a leveraged buyout involving a large (with hindsight, too large) amount of debt and the APV approach values the NPV of the loan.
1. What are the steps in using adjusted present value (APV) to value a project?
2. Compare APV with WACC. In what situations is each best applied?
Appendix Questions and Problems
A.1 APV Problem A mining company has discovered a small silver deposit neighbouring its existing mine site. It has been estimated that there is a 10-year supply of silver in the deposit that would return $13.5 million annually to the fi rm. Th e estimated cost of developing the site is $63.6 million and could be fi - nanced by the issuance of shares. Th e fi rm has experienced signifi cant growth, and this is refl ected in a cost of equity of 21.6 percent. Aft er analyzing the returns to the project, the fi rm’s chief fi nancial offi cer (CFO) recommends to the board not to continue with it as it is not profi table to the fi rm. However, in speaking with an investment dealer the following week, the CFO is told that it would be possible to fl oat bonds for up to $42 million carrying a coupon of 12 percent. Th e fl otation costs for debt and equity are both 1.2 percent and the marginal tax rate for the fi rm is 40 percent. Is it profi table for the fi rm to con- tinue with the project now?
A.2 APV Problem What would be the marginal benefi t to the mining company if it could obtain a govern- ment loan for $42 million at 8.4 percent that has a balloon payment for the full amount at the end of 10 years? Assume there are no fl otation costs for this loan.
A.3 APV Problem A fi rm is considering a project that will last fi ve years and will generate an annual cash fl ow of $9 million. Th e project requires an initial investment of $28 million. Assume that the cost of equity for the project is 20 percent, if the project is 100 percent equity fi nanced. Th e fi rm can obtain a loan for $22.5 million to start the project, at a rate of 10 percent ($2.25 million in interest paid each year, with principal paid in a lump sum at the end of the loan). However, the lender will only extend the loan for three years. Th e fi rm’s tax rate is 30 percent. Calculate the APV of the project. Is this invest- ment worthwhile for the fi rm?
ECONOMIC VALUE ADDED AND THE MEASUREMENT OF FINANCIAL PERFORMANCE
Chapter 13 shows how to calculate the appropriate discount rate for capital budgeting and other valuation problems. We now consider the measurement of financial performance. We introduce the concept of eco- nomic value added, which uses the same discount rate developed for capital budgeting. We begin with a simple example.
Calculating Economic Value Added Many years ago, Henry Bodenheimer started Bodie’s Blimps, one of the largest high-speed blimp manufac- turers. Because growth was so rapid, Henry put most of his effort into capital budgeting. His approach to capital budgeting paralleled that of Chapter 13. He forecasted cash flows for various projects and discounted them at the cost of capital appropriate to the beta of the blimp business. However, these projects have grown rapidly, in some cases becoming whole divisions. He now needs to evaluate the performance of these divi- sions in order to reward his division managers. How does he perform the appropriate analysis?
Henry is aware that capital budgeting and performance measurement are essentially mirror images of each other. Capital budgeting is forward-looking by nature because one must estimate future cash flows to
Concept Questions
APPENDIX 14B
CHAPTER 14: Cost of Capital 419
14Ross_Chapter14_4th.indd 41914Ross_Chapter14_4th.indd 419 12-11-27 12:1112-11-27 12:11
value a project. By contrast, performance measurement is backward-looking. As Henry stated to a group of his executives, “Capital budgeting is like looking through the windshield while driving a car. You need to know what lies further down the road to calculate a net present value. Performance measurement is like looking into the rearview mirror. You find out where you have been.”
Henry first measured the performance of his various divisions by return on assets (ROA), an approach, which we treated in the appendix to Chapter 3. For example, if a division had earnings after tax of $1,000 and had assets of $10,000, the ROA would be25
$1,000 _______ $10,000 = 10%
He calculated the ROA ratio for each of his divisions, paying a bonus to each of his division managers based on the size of that division’s ROA. However, while ROA was generally effective in motivating his managers, there were a number of situations where it appeared that ROA was counterproductive.
For example, Henry always believed that Sharon Smith, head of the supersonic division, was his best manager. The ROA of Smith’s division was generally in the high double digits, but the best estimate of the weighted average cost of capital for the division was only 20 percent. Furthermore, the division had been growing rapidly. However, as soon as Henry paid bonuses based on ROA, the division stopped growing. At that time, Smith’s division had after-tax earnings of $2,000,000 on an asset base of $2,000,000, for an ROA of 100 percent ($2 million/$2 million).
Henry found out why the growth stopped when he suggested a project to Smith that would earn $1,000,000 per year on an investment of $2,000,000. This was clearly an attractive project with an ROA of 50 percent ($1 million/$2 million). He thought that Smith would jump at the chance to place his project into her division, because the ROA of the project was much higher than the cost of capital of 20 percent. How- ever, Smith did everything she could to kill the project. And, as Henry later figured out, Smith was rational to do so. Smith must have realized that if the project were accepted, the division’s ROA would become
$2,000,000 + $1,000,000 ____________________ $2,000,000 + $2,000,000 = 75%
Thus, the ROA of Smith’s division would fall from 100 percent to 75 percent if the project were accepted, with Smith’s bonus falling in tandem.
Henry was later exposed to the economic-value-added (EVA) approach,26 which seems to solve this particular problem. The formula for EVA is
[ROA - Weighted average cost of capital] × Total capital Without the new project, the EVA of Smith’s division would be:
[100% - 20%] × $2,000,000 = $1,600,000 This is an annual number. That is, the division would bring in $1.6 million above and beyond the cost of capital to the firm each year.
With the new project included, the EVA jumps to [75% - 20%] × $4,000,000 = $2,200,000
If Sharon Smith knew that her bonus was based on EVA, she would now have an incentive to accept, not reject, the project. Although ROA appears in the EVA formula, EVA differs substantially from ROA. The big difference is that ROA is a percentage number and EVA is a dollar value. In the preceding example, EVA increased when the new project was added even though the ROA actually decreased. In this situation, EVA correctly incorporates the fact that a high return on a large division may be better than a very high return on a smaller division.
Further understanding of EVA can be achieved by rewriting the EVA formula. Because ROA × total capital is equal to earnings after tax, we can write the EVA formula as:
Earnings aft er tax - Weighted average cost of capital × Total capital Thus, EVA can simply be viewed as earnings after capital costs. Although accountants subtract many costs (including depreciation) to get the earnings number shown in financial reports, they do not subtract out
25 Earnings after tax is EBIT (1 - TC) where EBIT is earnings before interest and taxes and TC is the tax rate. Stern Stew- art and other EVA users refer to EBIT (1 - TC) as net operating profit after tax. 26 Stern Stewart & Company have a copyright on the terms economic value added and EVA. Details on the Stern Stewart & Company EVA can be found in J. M. Stern, G. B. Stewart, and D. A. Chew, “The EVA Financial Management Sys- tem,” Journal of Applied Corporate Finance (Summer 1999).
420 Part 6: Cost of Capital and Long-Term Financial Policy
14Ross_Chapter14_4th.indd 42014Ross_Chapter14_4th.indd 420 12-11-27 12:1112-11-27 12:11
capital costs. One can see the logic of accountants, because the cost of capital is very subjective. By contrast, costs such as COGS (cost of goods sold), SG&A (Selling, General and Administrative Expesnses), and even depreciation can be measured more objectively.27 However, even if the cost of capital is difficult to estimate, it is hard to justify ignoring it completely. After all, this textbook argues that the cost of capital is a necessary input to capital budgeting. Shouldn’t it also be a necessary input to performance measurement?
This example argues that EVA can increase investment for those firms that are currently underinvesting. However, there are many firms in the reverse situation; the managers are so focused on increasing earnings that they take on projects for which the profits do not justify the capital outlays. These managers either are unaware of capital costs or, knowing these costs, choose to ignore them. Because the cost of capital is right in the middle of the EVA formula, managers will not easily ignore these costs when evaluated on an EVA system.
One other advantage of EVA is that the number is either positive or it is negative. Plenty of divisions have negative EVAs for a number of years. Because these divisions are destroying more value than they are creating, a strong point can be made for liquidating these divisions. Although managers are generally emo- tionally opposed to this type of action, EVA analysis makes liquidation harder to ignore.
EXAMPLE 14B.1
Assume the following figures for the International Trade Corporation
EBIT = $2.5 billion TC = 0.4 rwacc = 11%
Total capital contributed = Total debt + Equity = $10 billion + $10 billion = $20 billion
Now we can calculate International Trade’s EVA:
EVA = EBIT (1 - TC) - rwacc × Total capital = ($2.5 billion × 0.6) - (0.11 × $20 billion) = $1.5 billion - $2.2 billion = -$700 million
In this example, International Trade Corporation has a negative EVA—it is destroying shareholder value.
Some Caveats on EVA The preceding discussion puts EVA in a very positive light. However, one can certainly find much to criticize with EVA as well. We now focus on two well-known problems with EVA. First, the preceding example uses EVA for performance measurement, where we believe it properly belongs. To us, EVA seems a clear im- provement over ROA and other financial ratios. However, EVA has little to offer for capital budgeting be- cause EVA focuses only on current earnings. By contrast, net-present-value analysis uses projections of all future cash flows, where the cash flows will generally differ from year to year. Although supporters may argue that EVA correctly incorporates the weighted average cost of capital, one must remember that the discount rate in NPV analysis is the same weighted average cost of capital. That is, both approaches take the cost of equity capital based on beta and combine it with the cost of debt to get an estimate of this weighted average.
A second problem with EVA is that it may increase the shortsightedness of managers. Under EVA, a manager will be well rewarded today if earnings are high today. Future losses may not harm the manager, because there is a good chance that she will be promoted or have left the firm by then. Thus, the manager has an incentive to run a division with more regard for short-term than long-term value. By raising prices or cutting quality, the manager may increase current profits (and, therefore, current EVA). However, to the extent that customer satisfaction is reduced, future profits (and therefore future EVA) are likely to fall. However, one should not be too harsh with EVA here, because the same problem occurs with ROA. A man- ager who raises prices or cuts quality will increase current ROA at the expense of future ROA. The problem, then, is not EVA per se but with the use of accounting numbers in general. Because shareholders want the discounted present value of all cash flows to be maximized, managers with bonuses based on some function of current profits or current cash flows are likely to behave in a shortsighted way.
27 Some EVA users add back depreciation and other non-cash items. A Canadian example is: B.A. Schofield, “Evaluating Stocks,” Canadian Investment Review (Spring 2000).
CHAPTER 14: Cost of Capital 421
14Ross_Chapter14_4th.indd 42114Ross_Chapter14_4th.indd 421 12-11-27 12:1112-11-27 12:11
Despite these shortcomings EVA or something similar is used widely by corporations in Canada and the U.S. Table 14B.1 lists some examples.
TABLE 14B.1
Selected economic value added users
United States Canada
Bausch & Lomb Alcan Aluminum Briggs and Stratton Crop. Cogeco Inc. Coca-Cola Company Domtar Inc. Dun & Bradstreet Corp. Grand & Toy Eli Lilly & Co. Long Manufacturing JC Penney Robin Hood Multifoods Monsanto Rubbermaid Inc. Print Toys R Us U.S. Postal Service WhirlpoolSource: Adapted from sternstewart.com.
1. Why is capital budgeting important to a firm?
2. What is the major difference between EVA and ROA?
3. What are the advantages of using EVA?
4. What are the well-known problems of EVA?
Appendix Questions and Problems
B.1 As a new fi nancial analyst at ABC Co., your manager has decided to give you two projects to evaluate for the company. Prior to undertaking either of these projects, the company has an ROA of 37 percent on total assets of $12 million. Project A would involve an investment of $5.5 million, and would derive aft er-tax earnings of $1.3 million. Project B would involve an investment of $3 million, but would only produce aft er-tax earnings of $450,000. Th e cost of capital for the fi rm is 17.5 percent. You have been asked to undertake an EVA analysis to determine which of these projects should be selected (if any).
B.2 You are the manager of a department that recently launched a new product line for High Flyer Incor- porated. High Flyer invested $3.8 million of equity and $2.2 million of debt in the project, and the project has earned the company earnings before taxes of $1.25 million in 2006. Th e fi rm’s capital struc- ture has a market value of $110 million for debt and $185 million of equity. Th e cost of debt is 6.8 per- cent, and the cost of equity is currently 11.3 percent. If the fi rm pays taxes at a rate of 36 percent, what is the EVA of the project your department launched?
Concept Questions
422 Part 6: Cost of Capital and Long-Term Financial Policy
14Ross_Chapter14_4th.indd 42214Ross_Chapter14_4th.indd 422 12-11-27 12:1112-11-27 12:11
All fi rms must, at varying times, obtain capital. To do so, a fi rm must either borrow the money (debt fi nancing), sell a portion of the fi rm (equity fi nancing), or both. How a fi rm raises capital depends a great deal on the size of the fi rm, its life cycle stage, and its growth prospects. In this chapter, we examine some of the ways in which fi rms actually raise capital. We begin by looking at companies in the early stages of their lives and the importance of venture capital for such fi rms. We then look at the process of going public and the role of investment banks. Along the way, we discuss many of the issues associated with selling securities to the public and their implications for all types of fi rms. We close the chapter with a discussion of sources of debt capital.
15.1 The Financing Life Cycle of a Firm: Early-Stage Financing and Venture Capital
One day, you and a friend have a great idea for a new GPS device that drives a car automatically without manual intervention. Filled with entrepreneurial zeal, you christen the product ‘Hands- Free Drive’ and set about bringing it to market.
Working nights and weekends, you are able to create a prototype of your product. It doesn’t actually work, but at least you can show it around to illustrate your idea. To develop the product, you need to hire programmers, buy a GPS device, hire automobile expert, and so on. Unfortu- nately, because you are both university students, your combined assets are not suffi cient to cover a start-up company. You need what is oft en referred to as OPM—other people’s money.
Your fi rst thought might be to approach a bank for a loan. You would probably discover, how- ever, that banks are generally not interested in making loans to start-up companies with no assets (other than an idea) run by fl edgling entrepreneurs with no track record. Instead, your search for
RAISING CAPITAL
C H A P T E R 1 5
I n an eagerly awaited initial public offering, the social networking giant Facebook went public on May 18, 2012. Assisted by leading underwriters
such as Morgan Stanley and Goldman Sachs, Face-
book sold around 420 million shares at U.S. $38 per
share. While the shares of the company soared more
than 10 percent at the start of trading on the NAS-
DAQ it ended the day at its opening price. Obvi-
ously, this came as a disappointment to Facebook
executives including Mark Zuckerberg, the CEO of
the company.
According to a PwC review of IPO activity, the
Canadian market for IPOs struggled to hit $2 billion
in 2011. The European debt crises, the natural disas-
ter in Japan, the political upheaval in the Middle East,
and concerns over slowing growth in China created
a weaker market for Canadian IPOs in 2011. In this
chapter, we will examine the process by which com-
panies such as Facebook sell stock to the public, the
costs of doing so, and the role of investment banks
in the process.
Learning Object ives
After studying this chapter, you should understand:
LO1 The venture capital market and its role in the financing of new, high-risk ventures.
LO2 How securities are sold to the public and the role of investment banks in the process.
LO3 Initial public offerings and some of the costs of going public.
LO4 How rights are issued to existing shareholders and how to value those rights.
Th e
C an
ad ia
n Pr
es s/
C ra
ig R
ut tle
15Ross_Chapter15_4th.indd 42315Ross_Chapter15_4th.indd 423 12-11-27 12:1212-11-27 12:12
capital would very likely lead you to use your own wealth (mortgaging the home) as well as bor- rowing from relatives and wealthy friends. If more capital needs to be raised, the next step would lead you to the venture capital market.
Venture Capital Th e term venture capital does not have a precise meaning, but it generally refers to fi nancing for new, oft en high-risk, ventures. For example, before they went public, Research in Motion (RIM) and Apple were fi nanced by venture capital. Individual venture capitalists invest their own money; so-called angels are usually individual investors, but they tend to specialize in smaller deals.1 Venture capital fi rms specialize in pooling funds from various sources and investing them. Th e underlying sources of funds for such fi rms include individuals, pension funds, insurance companies, large corporations, and even university endowment funds. Th e broad term private equity is oft en used to label the rapidly growing area of equity fi nancing for nonpublic companies.2
Venture capitalists and venture capital fi rms recognize that many or even most new ventures will not fl y, but the occasional one will. Th e potential profi ts are enormous in such cases. To limit their risk, venture capitalists generally provide fi nancing in stages. At each stage, enough money is invested to reach the next milestone or planning stage. For example, the fi rst-stage fi nancing might be enough to get a prototype built and a manufacturing plan completed. Based on the results, the second-stage fi nancing might be a major investment needed to begin manufacturing, marketing, and distribution. Th ere might be many such stages, each of which represents a key step in the process of growing the company.
Venture capital fi rms oft en specialize in diff erent stages. Some specialize in very early “seed money,” or ground fl oor, fi nancing. In contrast, fi nancing in the later stages might come from ven- ture capitalists specializing in so-called mezzanine level fi nancing, where mezzanine level refers to the level just above the ground fl oor.
Th e fact that fi nancing is available in stages and is contingent on specifi ed goals being met is a powerful motivating force for the fi rm’s founders. Oft en, the founders receive relatively little in the way of salary and have substantial portions of their personal assets tied up in the business. At each stage of fi nancing, the value of the founder’s stake grows and the probability of success rises.
In addition to providing fi nancing, venture capitalists oft en actively participate in running the fi rm, providing the benefi t of experience with previous start-ups as well as general business expertise. Th is is especially true when the fi rm’s founders have little or no hands-on experience in running a company.
Some Venture Capital Real it ies Although there is a large venture capital market, the truth is that access to venture capital is really very limited. Venture capital companies receive huge numbers of unsolicited proposals, the vast majority of which end up in the circular fi le unread. Venture capitalists rely heavily on informal networks of lawyers, accountants, bankers, and other venture capitalists to help identify potential investments. As a result, personal contacts are important in gaining access to the venture capital market; it is very much an “introduction” market.
Another simple fact about venture capital is that it is incredibly expensive, a fact that is inevita- ble given the high risk involved in such fi rms. In a typical deal, the venture capitalist will demand (and get) 40 percent or more of the equity in the company. Venture capitalists will frequently hold voting preferred stock, giving them various priorities in the event that the company is sold or liquidated. Th e venture capitalist will typically demand (and get) several seats on the company’s board of directors and may even appoint one or more members of senior management.
Choosing a Venture Capital ist Some start-up companies, particularly those headed by experienced, previously successful entre- preneurs, will be in such demand that they will have the luxury of looking beyond the money in
1 For discussion of this topic in Canada see A. Riding, “Roundtable on Angel Investment in Canada,” Canadian Invest- ment Review, Fall 2000; and Joseph Lo, “Note on Venture Capital,” Richard Ivey School of Business, 9B04N005, 2004. 2 So-called vulture capitalists specialize in high-risk investments in established, but financially distressed, firms.
venture capital Financing for new, often high-risk ventures.
424 Part 6: Cost of Capital and Long-Term Financial Policy
15Ross_Chapter15_4th.indd 42415Ross_Chapter15_4th.indd 424 12-11-27 12:1212-11-27 12:12
choosing a venture capitalist. Th ere are some key considerations in such a case, some of which can be summarized as follows:
1. Financial strength is important. The venture capitalist needs to have the resources and fi- nancial reserves for additional financing stages should they become necessary. This does not mean that bigger is necessarily better, however, because of our next consideration.
2. Style is important. Some venture capitalists will wish to be very much involved in day-to-day operations and decision making, whereas others will be content with monthly reports. Which are better depends on the firm and also on the venture capitalists’ business skills. In addition, a large venture capital firm may be less flexible and more bureaucratic than a smaller “boutique” firm.
3. References are important. Has the venture capitalist been successful with similar firms? Of equal importance, how has the venture capitalist dealt with situations that didn’t work out?
4. Contacts are important. A venture capitalist may be able to help the business in ways other than helping with financing and management by providing introductions to potentially im- portant customers, suppliers, and other industry contacts. Venture capitalist firms fre- quently specialize in a few particular industries, and such specialization could prove quite valuable.
5. Exit strategy is important. Venture capitalists are generally not long-term investors. How and under what circumstances the venture capitalist will “cash out” of the business should be carefully evaluated.
Conclusion If a start-up succeeds, the big payoff frequently comes when the company is sold to another com- pany or goes public. Th e IPO process has created many “dot-com” millionaires. Either way, invest- ment bankers are oft en involved in the process. We discuss the process of selling securities to the public in the next several sections, paying particular attention to the process of going public.
1. What is venture capital?
2. Why is venture capital often provided in stages?
15.2 The Public Issue
As the term implies, a public issue refers to the creation and sale of securities, which are intended to be traded on the public markets. A fi rm issuing securities must satisfy a number of require- ments set out by provincial regulations and statutes and enforced by provincial securities com- missions. Regulation of the securities market in Canada is carried out by provincial commissions and through provincial securities acts. Each province and territory has its own securities com- mission. Th is is in contrast to the United States, where regulation is handled by a federal body, the Securities and Exchange Commission (SEC). Th e goal of the regulators is to promote the effi cient fl ow of information about securities and the smooth functioning of securities markets.
All companies listed on the Toronto Stock Exchange come under the jurisdiction of the Ontario Securities Commission (OSC). Th e Securities Act sets forth the provincial regulations for all new securities issues involving the province of Ontario and the Toronto Stock Exchange. Th e OSC administers the act. Other provinces have similar legislation and regulating bodies; however, the OSC is the most noteworthy because of the scope of the TSX.3 Th e Canadian Securities Adminis- tration (CSA) coordinates across provinces. One of the most recent eff orts by the CSA has been to
3 The TSX is Canada’s largest exchange and its dollar trading ranked 8th in the world behind the NYSE Euronext (US) (number 1) and NASDAQ OMX (US) (number 2) in 2011. Chapter 8 discusses equity markets in more detail.
Concept Questions
public issue The creation and sale of securities on public markets.
Chapter 15: Raising Capital 425
15Ross_Chapter15_4th.indd 42515Ross_Chapter15_4th.indd 425 12-11-27 12:1212-11-27 12:12
streamline Canadian securities regulations by establishing guidelines for uniform securities laws to be applied in Canada’s 13 securities jurisdictions. In general terms, OSC rules seek to ensure that investors receive all material information on new issues in the form of a registration state- ment and prospectus.
Th e OSC’s responsibilities for effi cient information fl ow go beyond new issues. It continues to regulate the trading of securities aft er they have been issued to ensure adequate disclosure of information. For example, in April 2011 the OSC accused the former executives of Coventree Inc. of failing to disclose bad news to investors about the material changes in its asset-backed com- mercial paper (ABCP).
Another role of the OSC is gathering and publishing insider reports fi led by major sharehold- ers, offi cers, and directors of TSX-listed fi rms. To ensure effi cient functioning of markets, the OSC oversees the training and supervision that investment dealers provide for their personnel. It also works with the Investment Industry Regulatory Organization of Canada (IIROC) to monitor investment dealers’ capital positions. Increasing market volatility and the popularity of bought deals where the dealer assumes all the price risk make capital adequacy important.
15.3 The Basic Procedure for a New Issue
Th ere is a series of steps involved in issuing securities to the public. In general terms, the basic procedure is as follows:
1. Management’s first step in issuing any securities to the public is to obtain approval from the board of directors. In some cases, the number of authorized shares of common stock must be increased. This requires a vote of the shareholders.
2. The firm must prepare and distribute copies of a preliminary prospectus to the OSC and to potential investors. The preliminary prospectus contains some of the financial information that will be contained in the final prospectus; it does not contain the price at which the secu- rity will be offered. The preliminary prospectus is sometimes called a red herring, in part because bold red letters are printed on the cover warning that the OSC has neither approved nor disapproved of the securities. The OSC studies the preliminary prospectus and notifies the company of any changes required. This process is usually completed within about two weeks.
3. Once the revised, final prospectus meets with the OSC’s approval, a price is determined, and a full-fledged selling effort gets under way. A final prospectus must accompany the delivery of securities or confirmation of sale, whichever comes first. You can find current examples of Canadian prospectuses at the website of the System for Electronic Documents and Re- trieval (SEDAR).
Tombstone advertisements are placed during and aft er the waiting period. Th e tombstone con- tains the name of the company whose securities are involved. It provides some information about the issue, and it lists the investment dealers (the underwriters) who are involved with selling the issue. We discuss the role of the investment dealers in selling securities more fully later.
Th e investment dealers are divided into groups called brackets on the tombstone and prospec- tus, and the names of the dealers are listed alphabetically within each bracket. Th e brackets are a kind of pecking order. In general, the higher the bracket, the greater the underwriter’s prestige. In recent years, the use of printed tombstones has declined, in part as a cost-saving measure.
While an underwriter’s prestige is important for a seasoned new issue by a well-known com- pany already traded on the TSX, it is even more critical for the fi rst public equity issue referred to as an initial public off ering (IPO), or an unseasoned new issue. An IPO occurs when a company decides to go public. Researchers have found that IPOs with prestigious underwriters perform better. Th is is likely because investors believe that prestigious underwriters, jealous of their repu- tations, shun questionable IPOs.4
4 Richard Carter and Steven Manaster, “Initial Public Offerings and Underwriter Reputation,” Journal of Finance 1990, 45(4), 1045–1067.
prospectus Legal document describing details of the issuing corporation and the proposed offering to potential investors.
red herring A preliminary prospectus distributed to prospective investors in a new issue of securities.
seasoned new issue A new issue of securities by a firm that has already issued securities in the past.
initial public offering (IPO) A company’s first equity issue made available to the public. Also an unseasoned new issue.
426 Part 6: Cost of Capital and Long-Term Financial Policy
15Ross_Chapter15_4th.indd 42615Ross_Chapter15_4th.indd 426 12-11-27 12:1212-11-27 12:12
Securit ies Registration Th e SEC employs a shelf registration system designed to reduce repetitive fi ling requirements for large companies. Th e OSC’s SFPD (short form prospectus distribution) system has a similar goal. Th e provincial securities commissions all have compatible legislation allowing certain securities issuers prompt access to capital markets without preparing a full preliminary and fi nal prospectus before a distribution.
Th e SFPD system, accessible only by large companies, lets issuers fi le annual and interim fi nancial statements regardless of whether they issue securities in a given year. To use the POP (Prompt Off ering Prospectus) system, issuers must have not only reported for 36 months but also complied with the continuous disclosure requirements. Because the OSC has an extensive fi le of information on these companies, only a short prospectus is required when securities are issued.
In the early 1990s, securities regulators in Canada and the SEC in the United States introduced a Multi-Jurisdictional Disclosure System (MJDS). Under MJDS, large issuers in the two countries are allowed to issue securities in both countries under disclosure documents satisfactory to regu- lators in the home country. In its day, this was an important simplifi cation of fi ling requirements for certain large Canadian companies. While MJDS is based on a model of companies issuing securities simultaneously at home and in foreign markets, many Canadian companies are cross- listed on the NYSE or Nasdaq. Cross-listing refers to the practice of listing a fi rm’s shares for trad- ing on other exchanges, usually in foreign countries. For Canadian fi rms, cross-listing opens up the alternative of issuing in larger U.S. stock markets. Possible advantages of U.S. listing include greater liquidity, lower trading costs, greater visibility, and greater investor protection under more stringent U.S. securities laws such as Sarbanes-Oxley on corporate governance. U.S. listing also brings possible disadvantages in the form of higher accounting and compliance costs. On balance, it remains undecided whether U.S. listing adds shareholder value.
Alternative Issue Methods For equity sales, there are two kinds of public issues: a general cash off er and a rights off er (or rights off ering). With a cash off er, securities are off ered to the general public. With a rights off er, securities are initially off ered only to existing owners. Rights off ers are fairly common in other countries, but they are relatively rare in Canada (and the United States), particularly in recent years. We therefore focus primarily on cash off ers in this chapter.
Th e fi rst public equity issue that is made by a company is referred to as an initial public off er- ing, IPO, or an unseasoned new issue. Th is issue occurs when a company decides to go public. Obviously, all initial public off erings are cash off ers. If the fi rm’s existing shareholders wanted to buy the shares, the fi rm wouldn’t have to sell them publicly in the fi rst place.
A seasoned equity off ering (SEO) is a new issue for a company with securities that have been previously issued. A seasoned equity off ering of common stock can be made by using a cash off er or a rights off er.
Th ese methods of issuing new securities are shown in Table 15.1. Th ey are discussed in Sec- tions 15.4 through 15.8.
15.4 The Cash Offer
If the public issue of securities is a cash off er, underwriters are usually involved. Underwriters perform the following services for corporate issuers:
• Formulating the method used to issue the securities. • Pricing the new securities. • Selling the new securities.
Typically, the underwriter buys the securities for less than the off ering price and accepts the risk of not being able to sell them. Because underwriting involves risk, underwriters combine to form an underwriting group called a syndicate or a banking group to share the risk and help to sell the issue.
In a syndicate, one or more managers arrange or co-manage the off ering. Th is manager is des- ignated as the lead manager and typically has the responsibility for packaging and executing the deal. Th e other underwriters in the syndicate serve primarily to distribute the issue.
general cash offer An issue of securities offered for sale to the general public on a cash basis.
rights offer A public issue of securities in which securities are first offered to existing shareholders. Also called a rights offering.
seasoned equity offering (SEO) A new equity issue of securities by a company that has previously issued securities to the public.
syndicate A group of underwriters formed to reduce the risk and help to sell an issue.
Chapter 15: Raising Capital 427
15Ross_Chapter15_4th.indd 42715Ross_Chapter15_4th.indd 427 12-11-27 12:1212-11-27 12:12
TABLE 15.1
Methods of issuing new securities Method Type Definition
Public Traditional negotiated cash offer
Firm commitment cash offer
Company negotiates an agreement with an investment banker to underwrite and distribute the new shares. A specified number of shares are bought by underwriters and sold at a higher price.
Best efforts cash offer
Company has investment bankers sell as many of the new shares as possible at the agreed-upon price. There is no guarantee concerning how much cash will be raised.
Dutch auction cash offer
Company has investment bankers auction shares to determine the highest offer price obtainable for a given number of shares to be sold.
Privileged subscription
Direct rights offer Company offers the new stock directly to its existing shareholders.
Standby rights offer
Like the direct rights offer, this contains a privileged subscription arrangement with existing shareholders. The net proceeds are guaranteed by the underwriters.
Nontraditional cash offer
Shelf cash offer Qualifying companies can authorize all shares they expect to sell over a two-year period and sell them when needed.
Competitive firm cash offer
Company can elect to award the underwriting contract through a public auction instead of negotiation.
Private Direct placement Securities are sold directly to the purchaser, who, at least until recently, generally could not resell securities for 4 months.
Th e diff erence between the underwriter’s buying and the off ering price is called the spread or discount. It is the basic compensation received by the underwriter.
In Canada, fi rms oft en establish long-term relationships with their underwriters. With the growth in popularity of bought deals, competition among underwriters has increased. At the same time, mergers among investment dealers have reduced the number of underwriters. For example, RBC Dominion Securities grew through merger with six other investment dealers and a major capital injection by the Royal Bank.
Types of Underwrit ing Two basic types of underwriting are possible in a cash off er: regular underwriting and a bought deal.
With regular underwriting the banking group of underwriters buys the securities from the issuing fi rm and resells them to the public for the purchase price plus an underwriting spread. Regular underwriting includes a market out clause that gives the banking group the option to decline the issue if the price drops dramatically. In this case, the deal is usually withdrawn. Th e issue might be repriced and/or reoff ered at a later date. Firm commitment underwriting is like regular underwriting without the market out clause.
A close counterpart to regular underwriting is called best eff orts underwriting. Th e under- writer is legally bound to use its best eff orts to sell the securities at the agreed-on off ering price. Beyond this, the underwriter does not guarantee any particular amount of money to the issuer. Th is form of underwriting is more common with initial public off erings (IPOs), and with smaller, less well-known companies.
Bought Deal In a bought deal, the issuer sells the entire issue to one investment dealer or to a group that attempts to resell it. As in fi rm commitment underwriting, the investment dealer assumes all the price risk. Th e dealer usually markets the prospective issue to a few large, institutional invest- ors. Issuers in bought deals are large, well-known fi rms qualifying for the use of SPDF to speed up OSC fi lings. For these reasons, bought deals are usually executed swift ly. Bought deals are the most popular form of underwriting in Canada today. Bought deals have smaller off er price
spread Compensation to the underwriter, determined by the difference between the underwriter’s buying price and offering price.
bought deal One underwriter buys securities from an issuing firm and sells them directly to a small number of investors.
regular underwriting The purchase of securities from the issuing company by an investment banker for resale to the public.
firm commitment underwriting Underwriter buys the entire issue, assuming full financial responsibility for any unsold shares.
best efforts underwriting Underwriter sells as much of the issue as possible, but can return any unsold shares to the issuer without financial responsibility.
428 Part 6: Cost of Capital and Long-Term Financial Policy
15Ross_Chapter15_4th.indd 42815Ross_Chapter15_4th.indd 428 12-11-27 12:1212-11-27 12:12
discounts and smaller underwriting fees, implying superior pricing and thus, higher quality off er- ings.5 For example in June 2012, Fortis Inc., a St. John’s, Newfoundland and Labrador based inter- national diversifi ed electric utility holding company, closed its $601 million bought-deal off ering of subscription receipts underwritten by a syndicate of underwriters led by CIBC World Markets Inc., Scotia Capital Inc., and TD Securities Inc.
Dutch Auction Underwrit ing With Dutch auction underwriting, the underwriter does not set a fi xed price for the shares to be sold. Instead, the underwriter conducts an auction in which investors bid for shares. Th e off er price is determined based on the submitted bids. A Dutch auction is also known by the more descriptive name uniform price auction. Th is approach to selling securities to the public was used by Google. It is still relatively new in the IPO market and has not been widely used there, but it is very common in the bond markets. For example, it is the sole procedure used by the U.S. Treasury to sell enormous quantities of notes, bonds, and bills to the public. Also, in June 2012, AOL Inc., an internet-based American giant, started a “Dutch auction” tender off er to buy back up to $400 million of its common stock. Earlier, the company sold more than 800 patents and related patent applications to Microsoft and used the sale proceeds to buy back the shares.
Th e best way to understand a Dutch or uniform price auction is to consider a simple example. Suppose the Rial Company wants to sell 400 shares to the public. Th e company receives fi ve bids as follows:
Bidder Quantity Price
A 100 shares $16 B 100 shares 14 C 200 shares 12 D 200 shares 12 E 200 shares 10
Th us, bidder A is willing to buy 100 shares at $16 each, bidder B is willing to buy 100 shares at $14, and so on. Th e Rial Company examines the bids to determine the highest price that will result in all 400 shares being sold. So, for example, at $14, A and B would buy only 200 shares, so that price is too high. Working our way down, all 400 shares won’t be sold until we hit a price of $12, so $12 will be the off er price in the IPO. Bidders A through D will receive shares; bidder E will not.
Th ere are two additional important points to observe in our example: First, all the winning bidders will pay $12, even bidders A and B, who actually bid a higher price. Th e fact that all suc- cessful bidders pay the same price is the reason for the name “uniform price auction.” Th e idea in such an auction is to encourage bidders to bid aggressively by providing some protection against bidding a price that is too high.
Second, notice that at the $12 off er price, there are actually bids for 600 shares, which exceeds the 400 shares Rial wants to sell. Th us, there has to be some sort of allocation. How this is done varies a bit, but, in the IPO market, the approach has been to simply compute the ratio of shares off ered to shares bid at the off er price or better, which, in our example, is 400/600 = 0.67, and allocate bidders that percentage of their bids. In other words, bidders A through D would each receive 67 percent of the shares they bid for at a price of $12 per share.
The Sell ing Period While the issue is being sold to the public, the underwriting group agrees not to sell securities for less than the off ering price until the syndicate dissolves. Th e principal underwriter is permitted to buy shares if the market price falls below the off ering price. Th e purpose would be to support the market and stabilize the price from temporary downward pressure. If this issue remains unsold aft er a time (for example, 30 days), members can leave the group and sell their shares at whatever price the market allows.
5 Pandes, J. Ari, Bought Deals: The Value of Underwriter Certification in Seasoned Equity Offerings (March 3, 2010). Journal of Banking and Finance, Vol. 34, No. 7, 2010.
Dutch auction underwriting The type of underwriting in which the offer price is set based on competitive bidding by investors. Also known as a uniform price auction.
google.com/about/company/
wrhambrecht.com
Chapter 15: Raising Capital 429
15Ross_Chapter15_4th.indd 42915Ross_Chapter15_4th.indd 429 12-11-27 12:1212-11-27 12:12
The Overal lotment Option Many underwriting contracts contain an overallotment option or Green Shoe provision that gives the members of the underwriting group the option to purchase additional shares at the off ering price less fees and commissions.6 Th e stated reason for the overallotment option is to cover excess demand and oversubscriptions. Th e option has a short maturity, around 30 days, and is limited to about 15 percent of the original number of shares issued.
Th e overallotment option is a benefi t to the underwriting syndicate and a cost to the issuer. If the market price of the new issue rises immediately, the overallotment option allows the under- writers to buy additional shares from the issuer and immediately resell them to the public.
In the Facebook IPO introduced in the chapter opener, the underwriters had an option to exer- cise the Green Shoe provision and raise another $18.4 billion. When the IPO was priced and allo- cated, the underwriters sold at least 15% more shares than their initial allocation. Th at left them ‘short’ around 63 million shares. If there had been an increase in the share price, the underwriters would have exercised the Green Shoe option to go back to Facebook and buy those 63 million shares at $38, in order to cover their short position. As it turned out, the share price fell and the Green Shoe option was not taken up. Th e underwriters still needed to cover their short position which they did by buying those 63 million shares in the aft ermarket at or around the issue price of $38 to stabilize the IPO price.
Lockup Agreements Although they are not required by law, almost all underwriting contracts contain so-called lockup agreements. Such agreements specify how long insiders must wait aft er an IPO before they can sell some or all of their stock. Lockup periods have become fairly standardized in recent years at 180 days. Th us, following an IPO, insiders can’t cash out until six months have gone by, which ensures that they maintain a signifi cant economic interest in the company going public.
Lockup periods are also important because it is not unusual for the number of locked-up shares to exceed the number of shares held by the public, sometimes by a substantial multiple. On the day the lockup period expires, there is the possibility that a large number of shares will hit the market on the same day and thereby depress values. Th e evidence suggests that, on average, companies backed by venture capital are particularly likely to experience a loss in value on the lockup expiration day.
The Quiet Period For 40 calendar days following an IPO, both the OSC and the SEC require that a fi rm and its man- aging underwriters observe a “quiet period.” Th is means that all communications with the public must be limited to ordinary announcements and other purely factual matters. Th e OSC’s logic is that all relevant information should be contained in the prospectus. An important result of this requirement is that the underwriter’s analysts are prohibited from making recommendations to investors. As soon as the quiet period ends, however, the managing underwriters typically publish research reports, usually accompanied by a favourable “buy” recommendation.
In 2004, Google experienced notable quiet period-related problems. Just before the IPO, an interview with Google co-founders Sergy Brin and Larry Page appeared in Playboy. Th e interview almost caused a postponement of the IPO, but Google was able to amend its prospectus in time.
The Investment Dealers Investment dealers are at the heart of new security issues. Th ey provide advice, market the secur- ities (aft er investigating the market’s receptiveness to the issue), and provide a guarantee of the amount an issue will raise (with a bought deal). To determine the off ering price, the underwriter will meet with potential buyers, typically large institutional buyers such as mutual funds. Oft en, the underwriter and company management will do presentations in multiple cities, pitching the stock in what is known as a ‘road show’. Potential buyers provide information on the price they would be willing to pay and the number of shares they would purchase at a particular price. Th is
6 The term Green Shoe provision sounds quite exotic, but the origin is relatively mundane. It comes from the Green Shoe Company, which once granted such an option.
overallotment option An underwriting provision that permits syndicate members to purchase additional shares at the original offering price.
lockup agreement The part of the underwriting contract that specifies how long insiders must wait after an IPO before they can sell stock.
430 Part 6: Cost of Capital and Long-Term Financial Policy
15Ross_Chapter15_4th.indd 43015Ross_Chapter15_4th.indd 430 12-11-27 12:1212-11-27 12:12
process of soliciting information about buyers and the prices and quantities they would demand is known as bookbuilding. As we will see, despite the bookbuilding process, underwriters frequently get the price wrong, or so it seems.
Table 15.2 lists the top underwriters of equity issuances in Canada for 2011. Th e table shows that TD Securities Inc. was the leading underwriter.
TABLE 15.2
Canada’s top equity underwriters, 2011; ranked by total amount raised
1 TD Securities Inc. 2 RBC Capital Markets 3 BMO Capital Markets 4 CIBC World Markets Inc. 5 Scotiabank–Bank of Nova Scotia 6 National Bank Financial Inc. 7 Canaccord Capital Corp 8 GMP Capital Corp 9 Cormark Securities Inc.
10 Peters & Co. Limited Source: Material reprinted with the express permission of National Post, a division of Postmedia Network Inc.
1. What are the basic procedures in selling a new issue?
2. What is a preliminary prospectus?
3. What is the POP system and what advantages does it offer?
4. What is the difference between a rights offer and a cash offer?
5. Why is an initial public offering necessarily a cash offer?
15.5 IPOs and Underpricing
Determining the correct off ering price is the most diffi cult thing an underwriter must do for an initial public off ering. Th e issuing fi rm faces a potential cost if the off ering price is set too high or too low. If the issue is priced too high, it may be unsuccessful and have to be withdrawn. If the issue is priced below the true market value, the issuer’s existing shareholders will experience an opportunity loss when they sell their shares for less than they are worth.
Underpricing is fairly common. It obviously helps new shareholders earn a higher return on the shares they buy. However, the existing shareholders of the issuing fi rm are not helped by under- pricing. To them, it is an indirect cost of issuing new securities. For example, on April 14, 2011, ZipCar Inc., the car sharing service company, went public on the Nasdaq, selling 38.6 million shares at a price of US $18, thereby raising $694.8 million. At the end of the fi rst day of trading, the stock sold for US $28.00, up about 55 percent for the day. Based on these numbers, ZipCar’s shares were apparently underpriced by US $10 each, which means that the company missed out on an additional US $386 million. On a much smaller scale, Middlefi eld Income Plus II Corp. began trading on the TSX at $11.65 per unit on March 20, 2012. Th e unit price jumped approximately 1.3 percent within the fi rst two days of trading. Th e initial public off ering was for 5,000,000 units, thus the money “left on the table” was over $750,000. A classic example of money “left on the table” is that of eToys, whose 8.2-million-share 1999 IPO was underpriced by $57 per share, or almost half a billion dollars in all! eToys could have used the money; it was bankrupt within two years.
IPO Underpricing: The 1999–2000 Experience Figure 15.1 shows that 1999 and 2000 were extraordinary years in the IPO market. Almost 900 companies went public, and the average fi rst-day return across the two years was about 65 percent.
Concept Questions
Chapter 15: Raising Capital 431
15Ross_Chapter15_4th.indd 43115Ross_Chapter15_4th.indd 431 12-11-27 12:1212-11-27 12:12
During this time, 194 IPOs doubled, or more than doubled, in value on the fi rst day. In contrast, only 39 percent did so in the preceding 24 years combined. One company, VA Linux, shot up 698 percent!
FIGURE 15.1
Average initial returns by month for SEC-registered Initial Public Offerings: 1960–2011
1960
0
–20
–40
20
40
60
80
1964 1970 1974 1978 1982 1986 1990 1994 1998 2002 2006 2010 Year
Average first day return
Source: Roger G. Ibbotson, Jody L. Sindelar, and Jay R. Ritter, “The Market’s Problems with the Pricing of Initial Public Offerings,” Journal of Applied Corporate Finance 7 (Spring 1994), as updated by the authors.
Th e dollar amount raised in 2000, $66 billion, was a record, followed closely by 1999 at $65 billion. Th e underpricing was so severe in 1999 that companies left another $36 billion on the table, which was substantially more than 1990–1998 combined, and, in 2000, the amount was at least $27 billion. In other words, over the two-year period, companies missed out on $63 billion because of underpricing.
October 19, 1999, was one of the more memorable days during this time. Th e World Wrestling Federation (WWF) (now known as World Wrestling Entertainment, or WWE) and Martha Stewart Omnimedia both went public, so it was Martha Stewart versus “Stone Cold” Steve Austin in a Wall Street version of MTV’s Celebrity Deathmatch. When the closing bell rang, it was a clear smack- down as Martha Stewart gained 98 percent on the fi rst day compared to 48 percent for the WWF.
Evidence on Underpricing Figure 15.1 provides a more general illustration of the underpricing phenomenon. What is shown is the year-by-year history of underpricing for SEC-registered IPOs.7 Th e period covered is 1960 through 2011. Figure 15.2 presents the number of off erings in each year for the same period.
Figure 15.1 shows that underpricing can be quite dramatic, exceeding 60 percent in some years. In some cases, IPOs more than doubled in value, sometimes in a matter of hours. Also, the degree of underpricing varies through time, and periods of severe underpricing (“hot issue” markets) are followed by periods of little underpricing (“cold issue” markets). For example, in the 1960s, the average U.S. IPO was underpriced by 21.2 percent. In the 1970s, the average under- pricing was much smaller (7.1 percent), and the amount of underpricing was actually very small or even negative for much of that time. Underpricing in the 1980s ran about 6.8 percent. For 1990–99, U.S. IPOs were underpriced by 21.0 percent on average, and they were underpriced by 22.8 percent in 2000–11.
From Figure 15.2, it is apparent that the number of IPOs is also highly variable through time. Further, there are pronounced cycles in both the degree of underpricing and the number of IPOs. Comparing Figures 15.1 and 15.2, we see that increases in the number of new off erings tend to follow periods of signifi cant underpricing by roughly six months. Th is probably occurs because companies decide to go public when they perceive that the market is highly receptive to new issues.
7 The discussion in this section draws on Roger G. Ibbotson, Jody L. Sindelar, and Jay R. Ritter, “The Market’s Problems with the Pricing of Initial Public Offerings,” Journal of Applied Corporate Finance 7 (Spring 1994).
432 Part 6: Cost of Capital and Long-Term Financial Policy
15Ross_Chapter15_4th.indd 43215Ross_Chapter15_4th.indd 432 12-11-27 12:1212-11-27 12:12
Jay Ritter on IPO Underpricing around the World
The United States is not the only country in which initial public offerings (IPOs) of common stock are underpriced. The phenomenon exists in every country with a stock market, although the extent of underpricing varies from country to country.
In general, countries with developed capital markets have more moderate underpricing than in emerging markets. During the Internet bubble of 1999–2000, however, underpricing in the developed capital markets increased dramatically. In the United States, for example, the average fi rst-day return during 1999–2000 was 65 percent. The underpricing of Chinese IPOs used to be extreme, but in recent years it has moderated. In the 1990s, Chinese government regulations required that the offer
price could not be more than 15 times earnings, even when comparable stocks had a price/earnings ratio of 45. In 2010, the average fi rst day return was 40%, and there were more IPOs in China, raising more money, than any other country. After the bursting of the Internet bubble in mid-2000, the level of underpricing in the United States, Germany, and other developed capital markets has returned to more traditional levels.
The table below gives a summary of the average fi rst-day returns on IPOs in a number of countries around the world, with the fi gures collected from a number of studies by various authors.
Jay R. Ritter is Cordell Professor of Finance at the University of Florida. An outstanding scholar, he is well known for his insightful analyses of new issues and going public.
Country Sample Size Time Period Avg. Initial Return (%) Country
Sample Size
Time Period
Avg. Initial Return (%)
Argentina 20 1991–1994 4.40 Jordon 53 1999–2008 149.00 Australia 1,103 1976–2006 19.80 Korea 1,521 1980–2009 63.50 Austria 96 1971–2006 6.50 Malaysia 350 1980–2006 69.60 Belgium 114 1984–2006 13.50 Mexico 88 1987–1994 15.90 Brazil 264 1979–2010 34.40 Netherlands 181 1982–2006 10.20 Bulgaria 9 2004–2007 36.50 New Zealand 214 1979–2006 20.30 Canada 635 1971–2006 7.10 Nigeria 114 1989–2006 12.70 Chile 65 1982–2006 8.40 Norway 153 1984–2006 9.60 China 2,102 1990–2010 137.40 Philippines 123 1987–2006 21.20 Cyprus 51 1999–2002 23.70 Poland 224 1991–2006 22.90 Denmark 145 1984–2006 8.10 Portugal 28 1992–2006 11.60 Egypt 53 1990–2000 8.40 Russia 40 1999–2006 4.20 Finland 162 1971–2006 17.20 Singapore 519 1973–2008 27.40 France 686 1983–2009 10.60 South Africa 285 1980–2007 18.00 Germany 704 1978–2009 25.20 Spain 128 1986–2006 10.90 Greece 373 1976–2009 50.80 Sri Lanka 105 1987–2008 33.50 Hong Kong 1,259 1980–2010 15.40 Sweden 406 1980–2006 27.30 India 2,811 1990–2007 92.70 Switzerland 159 1983–2008 28.00 Indonesia 361 1990–2010 26.30 Taiwan 1,312 1980–2006 37.20 Iran 279 1991–2004 22.40 Thailand 459 1987–2007 36.60 Ireland 31 1999–2006 23.70 Turkey 315 1990–2008 10.60 Israel 348 1990–2006 13.80 United Kingdom 4,205 1959–2009 16.30 Italy 273 1985–2009 16.40 United States 12,165 1960–2010 16.80 Japan 3,078 1970–2009 40.50
IN THEIR OWN WORDS…
Table 15.3 contains a year-by-year summary of underpricing for the years 1960–2011. As indi- cated, a grand total of 12,297 companies were included in this analysis. Th e degree of underpric- ing averaged 16.8 percent overall for the 52 years examined. Securities were overpriced on average in only 5 of the 52 years;. At the other extreme, in 1999, the 486 issues were underpriced, on aver- age, by a remarkable 69.7 percent. Since the tech boom at the turn of the century, IPO volumes have stayed relatively high, mainly due to the popularity of income trust IPOs, but underpricing has declined because income trusts represent more mature, more easily valued businesses. In the recent fi nancial crisis of 2007–2008, market conditions made it challenging for issuers seeking fi nancing in the capital markets. Th e Canadian IPO market was relatively poor in the fi rst quarter of 2012 with $20 million raised from 13 new issues. It was the third lowest total amount raised for any quarter in the past decade. Only the fourth quarter of 2008 ($2 million) and the fi rst quarter of 2009 ($2.5 million) had lesser proceeds.
Chapter 15: Raising Capital 433
15Ross_Chapter15_4th.indd 43315Ross_Chapter15_4th.indd 433 12-11-27 12:1212-11-27 12:12
TABLE 15.3 Number of offerings, average first-day return, and gross proceeds of initial U.S. Public Offerings: 1960–2011
Year Number of Offerings* Average First-Day Return, %† Gross Proceeds, $ Millions‡
1960 269 17.8 553 1961 435 34.1 1,243 1962 298 -1.6 431 1963 83 3.9 246 1964 97 5.3 380 1965 146 12.7 409 1966 85 7.1 275 1967 100 37.7 641 1968 368 55.9 1,205 1969 780 12.5 2,605 1970 358 -0.7 780 1971 391 21.2 1,655 1972 562 7.5 2,724 1973 105 -17.8 330 1974 9 -7.0 51 1975 12 -0.2 261 1976 26 1.9 214 1977 15 3.6 128 1978 19 12.6 207 1979 39 8.5 313 1980 75 13.9 934 1981 197 6.2 2,367 1982 81 10.7 1,016 1983 522 9.0 11,234 1984 222 2.5 2,841 1985 214 6.2 5,125 1986 479 6.0 15,697 1987 336 5.7 12,418 1988 130 5.4 4,141 1989 121 7.9 5,303 1990 115 10.5 4,325 1991 295 11.7 16,602 1992 416 10.2 22,678 1993 527 12.7 31,599 1994 411 9.8 17,544 1995 460 21.1 28,947 1996 688 17.2 42,425 1997 485 14.0 33,383 1998 318 20.2 34,614 1999 486 69.7 64,927 2000 381 56.3 64,844 2001 79 14.2 34,241 2002 70 8.6 22,136 2003 67 12.3 10,068 2004 184 12.2 32,269 2005 168 10.1 28,593 2006 162 11.9 30,648 2007 162 13.8 35,762 2008 21 6.4 22,762 2009 43 10.6 13,307 2010 103 8.8 31,068 2011 82 13.2 27,750
1960–69 2,661 21.2 7,988 1970–79 1,536 7.1 6,663 1980–89 2,377 6.8 61,076 1990–99 4,201 21.0 297,044 2000–11 1,522 22.8 353,448
1960–2011 12,297 16.8 726,219
*Beginning in 1975, the number of off erings excludes IPOs with an off er price of less than $5.00, ADRs, best eff orts, units, and Regulation A off ers (small issues, raising less than $1.5 million during the 1980s), real estate investment trusts (REITs), partnerships, and closed-end funds. Banks and S&Ls and non-CRSP-listed IPOs are included (unlike most other tables). †First-day returns are computed as the percentage return from the off ering price to the fi rst closing market price. ‡Gross proceeds data are from Securities Data Co., and exclude overallotment options but include the international tranche, if any. No adjustments for infl ation have been made.
Source: Professor Jay R. Ritter, University of Florida.
434 Part 6: Cost of Capital and Long-Term Financial Policy
15Ross_Chapter15_4th.indd 43415Ross_Chapter15_4th.indd 434 12-11-27 12:1212-11-27 12:12
FIGURE 15.2
Number of offerings by month for SEC-registered Initial Public Offerings: 1960–2011
0
200
400
600
800
Year
Number of IPOs
1960 1964 1970 1974 1978 1982 1986 1990 1994 1998 2002 2006 2010
Source: Roger G. Ibbotson, Jody L. Sindelar, and Jay R. Ritter, “The Market’s Problems with the Pricing of Initial Public Offerings,” Journal of Applied Corporate Finance 7 (Spring 1994), as updated by the authors.
TABLE 15.4
Average first-day returns, categorized by sales, for U.S. IPOs: 1980–2010*
Annual Sales of Issuing Firms
1980–89 1990–98 1999–2000 2001–2010
Number of Firms
First-Day Average Return
Number of Firms
First-Day Average Return
Number of Firms
First-Day Average Return
Number of Firms
First-Day Average Return
$0 ≤ Sales < $10m 424 10.4% 744 17.4% 334 68.8% 149 5.5%
$10m ≤ Sales < $20m 255 8.5 392 18.4 138 80.7 43 7.9
$20m ≤ Sales < $50m 495 7.7 792 18.7 154 75.7 143 13.5
$50m ≤ Sales < $100m 353 6.6 585 12.9 87 60.4 161 16.3
$100m ≤ Sales < $200m 238 4.8 451 11.9 58 39.1 144 14.4
$200m ≤ Sales 288 3.4 641 8.6 87 22.6 376 10.6
All 2,053 7.2 3,605 14.8 858 64.4 1,016 11.6
*Sales, measured in millions, are for the last 12 months prior to going public. All sales have been converted into dollars of 2003 purchasing power, using the Consumer Price Index. Th ere are 7,532 IPOs, aft er excluding IPOs with an off er price of less than $5.00 per share, units, REITs, ADRs, closed-end funds, banks and S&Ls, fi rms not listed on CRSP within six months of the off er date, and 20 fi rms with missing sales. Th e average fi rst day return is 18.0 percent.
Source: Professor Jay R. Ritter, University of Florida.
Why Does Underpricing Exist? Based on the evidence we’ve examined, an obvious question is, why does underpricing continue to exist? As we discuss, there are various explanations, but, to date, there is a lack of complete agreement among researchers as to which is correct.
We present some pieces of the underpricing puzzle by stressing two important caveats to our preceding discussion. First, the average fi gures we have examined tend to obscure the fact that much of the apparent underpricing is attributable to the smaller, more highly speculative issues. Th is point is illustrated in Table 15.4, which shows the extent of underpricing for IPOs over the period from 1980 through 2010. Here, the fi rms are grouped based on their total sales in the 12 months prior to the IPO.
As illustrated in Table 15.4, the underpricing tends to be higher for fi rms with little to no sales in the previous year. Th ese fi rms tend to be young fi rms, and such young fi rms can be very risky investments. Arguably, they must be signifi cantly underpriced, on average, just to attract
Chapter 15: Raising Capital 435
15Ross_Chapter15_4th.indd 43515Ross_Chapter15_4th.indd 435 12-11-27 12:1212-11-27 12:12
investors, and this is one explanation for the underpricing phenomenon. Th e second caveat is that relatively few IPO buyers will actually get the initial high average
returns observed in IPOs, and many will actually lose money. Although it is true that, on average, IPOs have positive initial returns, a signifi cant fraction of them have price drops. Furthermore, when the price is too low, the issue is oft en “oversubscribed.” Th is means investors will not be able to buy all the shares they want, and the underwriters will allocate the shares among investors.
Th e average investor will fi nd it diffi cult to get shares in a “successful” off ering (one in which the price increases) because there will not be enough shares to go around. On the other hand, an investor blindly submitting orders for IPOs tends to get more shares in issues that go down in price.
To illustrate, consider this tale of two investors. Smith knows very accurately what the Bonanza Corporation is worth when its shares are off ered. She is confi dent that the shares are underpriced. Jones knows only that prices usually rise one month aft er an IPO. Armed with this information, Jones decides to buy 1000 shares of every IPO. Does he actually earn an abnormally high return on the initial off ering?
Th e answer is no, and at least one reason is Smith. Knowing about the Bonanza Corporation, Smith invests all her money in its IPO. When the issue is oversubscribed, the underwriters have to somehow allocate the shares between Smith and Jones. Th e net result is that when an issue is underpriced, Jones doesn’t get to buy as much of it as he wanted.
Smith also knows that the Blue Sky Corporation IPO is overpriced. In this case, she avoids its IPO altogether, and Jones ends up with a full 1000 shares. To summarize this tale, Jones gets fewer shares when more knowledgeable investors swarm to buy an underpriced issue and gets all he wants when the smart money avoids the issue.
Th is is an example of a “winner’s curse,” and it is thought to be another reason why IPOs have such a large average return. When the average investor “wins” and gets the entire allocation, it may be because those who knew better avoided the issue. Th e only way underwriters can coun- teract the winner’s curse and attract the average investor is to underprice new issues (on average) so that the average investor still makes a profi t.
Another reason for underpricing is that the underpricing is a kind of insurance for the invest- ment banks. Conceivably, an investment bank could be sued successfully by angry customers if it consistently overpriced securities. Underpricing guarantees that, at least on average, customers will come out ahead.
A fi nal reason for underpricing is that before the off er price is established, investment banks talk to big institutional investors to gauge the level of interest in the stock and to gather opinions about a suitable price. Underpricing is a way that the bank can reward these investors for truth- fully revealing what they think the stock is worth and the number of shares they would like to buy.
1. Why is underpricing a cost to the issuing firm?
2. Suppose a stockbroker calls you up out of the blue and offers to sell you “all the shares you want” of a new issue. Do you think the issue will be more or less underpriced than average?
15.6 New Equity Sales and the Value of the Firm
It seems reasonable to believe that new long-term fi nancing is arranged by fi rms aft er positive net present value projects are put together. As a consequence, when the announcement of external fi nancing is made, the fi rm’s market value should go up. Interestingly, this is not what happens. Stock prices tend to decline following the announcement of a new equity issue, and they tend to rise following a debt announcement. A number of researchers have studied this issue. Plausible reasons for this strange result include:
1. Managerial information. If management has superior information about the market value of the firm, it may know when the firm is overvalued. If it does, it attempts to issue new shares
Concept Questions
436 Part 6: Cost of Capital and Long-Term Financial Policy
15Ross_Chapter15_4th.indd 43615Ross_Chapter15_4th.indd 436 12-11-27 12:1212-11-27 12:12
of stock when the market value exceeds the correct value. This benefits existing sharehold- ers. However, the potential new shareholders are not stupid, and they anticipate this su- perior information and discount it in lower market prices at the new issue date.
2. Debt usage. Issuing new equity may reveal that the company has too much debt or too little liquidity. One version of this argument is that the equity issue is a bad signal to the market. After all, if the new projects are favourable ones, why should the firm let new shareholders in on them? As you read earlier, in IPOs it is regarded as a positive signal when the original owners keep larger amounts of stock for themselves. Taking this argument to the limit, the firm could just issue debt and let the existing shareholders have all the gain.
3. Issue costs. As we discuss next, there are substantial costs associated with selling securities.
1. What are some possible reasons that the price of stock drops on the announcement of a new equity issue?
2. Explain why we might expect a firm with a positive NPV investment to finance it with debt instead of equity.
15.7 The Cost of Issuing Securities
Issuing securities to the public isn’t free, and the costs of diff erent methods are important deter- minants of which method is used. Th ese costs associated with fl oating a new issue are generically called fl otation costs. In this section, we take a closer look at the fl otation costs associated with equity sales to the public.
Th e costs of selling stock fall into six categories: (1) the spread, (2) other direct expenses, (3) indirect expenses, (4) abnormal returns (discussed earlier), (5) underpricing, and (6) the over- allotment option. We look at these costs fi rst for United States and then for Canadian equity sales.
The Costs of Issuing Securities
Spread The spread consists of direct fees paid by the issuer to the underwriting syndicate—the difference between the price the issuer receives and the offer price.
Other direct expenses
These are direct costs, incurred by the issuer, that are not part of the compensation to underwriters. These costs include filing fees, legal fees, and taxes—all reported on the prospectus.
Indirect expenses These costs are not reported on the prospectus and include the costs of management time spent working on the new issue.
Abnormal returns In a seasoned issue of stock, the price drops on average by 3 percent on the announcement of the issue.
Underpricing For initial public offerings, losses arise from selling the stock below the correct value. Overallotment (Green Shoe) option
The Green Shoe option gives the underwriters the right to buy additional shares at the offer price to cover overallotments.
Table 15.5 reports direct costs as a percentage of the gross amount raised for IPOs, SEOs, straight (ordinary) bonds, and convertible bonds sold by U.S. companies over the 19-year period from 1990 through 2008. Th ese are direct costs only. Not included are indirect expenses, the cost of the overallotment option, underpricing (for IPOs), and abnormal returns (for SEOs).
As Table 15.5 shows, the direct costs alone can be very large, particularly for smaller issues (less than $10 million). On a smaller IPO, for example, the total direct costs amount to 25.22 percent of the amount raised. Th is means that if a company sells $10 million in stock, it will only net about $7.5 million; the other $2.5 million goes to cover the underwriter spread and other direct expenses. Typical underwriter spreads on an IPO range from about 5 percent up to 10 percent or so, but, for well over half of the IPOs in Table 15.5, the spread is exactly 7 percent, so this is, by far, the most common spread.
Concept Questions
Chapter 15: Raising Capital 437
15Ross_Chapter15_4th.indd 43715Ross_Chapter15_4th.indd 437 12-11-27 12:1212-11-27 12:12
TABLE 15.5
Direct costs as a percentage of gross proceeds for equity (IPOs and SEOs) and straight and convertible bonds offered by U.S. operating companies: 1990–2008
Proceeds ($ in millions)
Equity Bonds
IPOs SEOs Convertible Bonds Straight Bonds
Number
of Issues
Gross
Spread
Other
Direct
Expense
Total
Direct
Cost
Number
of Issues
Gross
Spread
Other
Direct
Expense
Total
Direct
Cost
Number
of Issues
Gross
Spread
Other
Direct
Expense
Total
Direct
Cost
Number
of Issues
Gross
Spread
Other
Direct
Expense
Total
Direct
Cost
2–9.99 1,007 9.40% 15.82% 25.22% 515 8.11% 26.99% 35.11% 14 6.39% 3.43% 9.82% 3,962 1.64% 2.40% 4.03%
10–19.99 810 7.39 7.30 14.69 726 6.11 7.76 13.86 23 5.52 3.09 8.61 3,400 1.50 1.71 3.20
20–39.99 1,442 6.96 7.06 14.03 1,393 5.44 4.10 9.54 30 4.63 1.67 6.30 2,690 1.25 0.92 2.17
40–59.99 880 6.89 2.87 9.77 1,129 5.03 8.93 13.96 35 3.49 1.04 4.54 3,345 0.81 0.79 1.59
60–79.99 522 6.79 2.16 8.94 841 4.88 1.98 6.85 60 2.79 0.62 3.41 891 1.65 0.80 2.44
80–99.99 327 6.71 1.84 8.55 536 4.67 2.05 6.72 16 2.30 0.62 2.92 465 1.41 0.57 1.98
100–199.99 702 6.39 1.57 7.96 1,372 4.34 0.89 5.23 82 2.66 0.42 3.08 4,949 1.61 0.52 2.14
200–499.99 440 5.81 1.03 6.84 811 3.72 1.22 4.94 46 2.65 0.33 2.99 3,305 1.38 0.33 1.71
500 and up 155 5.01 0.49 5.50 264 3.10 0.27 3.37 7 2.16 0.13 2.29 1,261 0.61 0.15 0.76
Total 6,285 7.19 3.18 10.37 7,587 5.02 2.68 7.69 313 3.07 0.85 3.92 24,268 1.38 0.61 2.00
Source: Inmoo Lee, Scott Lochhead, Jay Ritter, and Quanshui Zhao, “Th e Costs of Raising Capital,” Journal of Financial Research 19 (Spring 1996), updated by the authors.
Overall, four clear patterns emerge from Table 15.5. First of all, with the possible exception of straight debt off erings (about which we will have more to say later), there are substantial econo- mies of scale. Th e underwriter spreads are smaller on larger issues, and the other direct costs fall sharply as a percentage of the amount raised, a refl ection of the mostly fi xed nature of such costs. Second, the costs associated with selling debt are substantially less than the costs of selling equity. Th ird, IPOs have higher expenses than SEOs, but the diff erence is not as great as might originally be guessed. Finally, straight bonds are cheaper to fl oat than convertible bonds.
Table 15.5 tells only part of the story. For IPOs, the eff ective costs can be much greater because of the indirect costs. Table 15.6 reports both the direct costs of going public in Canada as of 2011. Th ese fi gures understate the total cost because the study did not consider indirect expenses or the overallotment option. Once again we see that the costs of issuing securities can be considerable.
TABLE 15.6
Costs of going public in Canada: 2011
Toronto Stock Exchange TSX Venture Exchange
Listing Fees $10,000–$200,000 $7,500–$40,000 Accounting and Auditing Fees $75,000–$100,000 $25,000–$100,000 Legal Fees $400,000–$750,000 Above $75,000 Underwriters’ Commission 4–6% Up to 12%Source: TMX Group
Overall, three conclusions emerge from our discussion of underwriting:
1. Substantial economies of size are evident. Larger firms can raise equity more easily. 2. The cost associated with underpricing can be substantial and can exceed the direct costs. 3. The issue costs are higher for an initial public offering than for a seasoned offering.
438 Part 6: Cost of Capital and Long-Term Financial Policy
15Ross_Chapter15_4th.indd 43815Ross_Chapter15_4th.indd 438 12-11-27 12:1212-11-27 12:12
1. What are the different costs associated with security offerings?
2. What lessons do we learn from studying issue costs?
IPOs in Practice: The Case of Athabasca Oil Sands In March 2010, Athabasca Oil Sands Corp., began trading on the Toronto Stock Exchange. Atha- basca, an Alberta based company, is focused on the sustainable development of oil sands in the Athabasca region in northeastern Alberta and light oil resources in northwestern Alberta.
Athabasca sold 75 million shares at $18 each generating $1.35 billion aft er fl otation costs. Th e proceeds of the issue were used to extract tar-like bitumen from the ground using steam-assisted gravity drainage techniques. Morgan Stanley Canada Ltd. and GMP Securities Ltd. were the lead- ing underwriters used in this off ering. Th e underwriters had an overallotment option to purchase up to an additional 11.25 million shares of common stock “at the initial public off ering price” that would increase the value of the deal to $1.55 billion.
Th e Athabasca IPO had a poor debut—shares plummeted8 to $16.90 on the Toronto Stock Exchange, nearly a 6% drop from the IPO price of $18. Th e shares were apparently overpriced by $1.10, which means that the company cashed in on an additional $82.5 million. Th e shares fell an additional 33% during the fi rst month of trading, making Athabasca one of the worst Canadian IPOs.9 Th e drop in the share price can be attributed to the decrease in the crude oil prices, the European debt crises and concerns over increasing interest rates. Th e decrease in crude oil price would exacerbate Athabasca’s prospects as it is costly to dig bitumen out of the ground and refi ne it into usable petroleum products.
15.8 Rights
When new shares of common stock are sold to the general public, the proportional ownership of existing shareholders is likely reduced. However, if a preemptive right is contained in the fi rm’s articles of incorporation, the fi rm must fi rst off er any new issue of common stock to existing shareholders. If the articles of incorporation do not include a preemptive right, the fi rm has a choice of off ering the issue of common stock directly to existing shareholders or to the public. In some industries, regulatory authorities set rules concerning rights. For example, before the Bank Act of 1980, chartered banks were required to raise equity exclusively through rights off erings.
An issue of common stock off ered to existing shareholders is called a rights off ering. In a rights off ering, each shareholder is issued one right for every share owned. Th e rights give the share- holder an option to buy a specifi ed number of new shares from the fi rm at a specifi ed price within a specifi ed time, aft er which time the rights are said to expire.
Th e terms of the rights off ering are evidenced by certifi cates known as rights. Such rights are oft en traded on securities exchanges or over the counter.
The Mechanics of a Rights Offering To illustrate the various considerations a fi nancial manager has in a rights off ering, we examine the situation faced by the National Power Company, whose abbreviated initial fi nancial state- ments are given in Table 15.7.
As indicated in Table 15.7, National Power earns $2 million aft er taxes and has 1 million shares outstanding. Earnings per share are thus $2, and the stock sells for $20, or 10 times earnings (that is, the price-earnings ratio is 10). To fund a planned expansion, the company intends to raise $5 million of new equity funds by a rights off ering.
8 Source: divestor.com/2010/04/09/athabasca-oil-sands-ipo-first-day-of-trading/ 9 Source: bloomberg.com/news/2010-05-12/athabasca-oil-largest-canadian-ipo-since-1999-performs-worst-since-2007. html
Concept Questions
Chapter 15: Raising Capital 439
15Ross_Chapter15_4th.indd 43915Ross_Chapter15_4th.indd 439 12-11-27 12:1212-11-27 12:12
TABLE 15.7
National Power Company financial statements before rights offering
Statement of Financial Position
Assets Shareholders’ Equity Common stock $ 5,000,000 Retained earnings 10,000,000
Total $15,000,000 Total $ 15,000,000
Statement of Comprehensive Income
Earnings before taxes $ 3,333,333 Taxes (40%) 1,333,333 Net income 2,000,000 Earnings per share 2 Shares outstanding 1,000,000 Market price per share 20 Total market value $ 20,000,000
To execute a rights off ering, the fi nancial management of National Power has to answer the fol- lowing questions:
1. What should the price per share be for the new stock? 2. How many shares will have to be sold? 3. How many shares will each shareholder be allowed to buy?
Also, management would probably want to ask:
4. What is the likely effect of the rights offering on the per share value of the existing stock?
It turns out that the answers to these questions are highly interrelated. We get to them in a moment. Th e early stages of a rights off ering are the same as for the general cash off er. Th e diff erence between a rights off ering and a general cash off er lies in how the shares are sold. As we discussed earlier, in a cash off er, shares are sold to retail and institutional investors through investment deal- ers. With a rights off er, National Power’s existing shareholders are informed that they own one right for each share of stock they own. National Power then specifi es how many rights a share- holder needs to buy one additional share at a specifi ed price.
To take advantage of the rights off ering, shareholders have to exercise the rights by fi lling out a subscription form and sending it, along with payment, to the fi rm’s subscription agent. Share- holders of National Power actually have several choices: (1) exercise and subscribe to the entitled shares, (2) sell the rights, or (3) do nothing and let the rights expire. Th is third action is inadvis- able, as long as the rights have value.
Number of Rights Needed to Purchase a Share National Power wants to raise $5 million in new equity. Suppose the subscription price is set at $10 per share. How National Power arrived at that price is something we discuss later, but notice that the subscription price is substantially less than the current $20 per share market price.
At $10 per share, National Power will have to issue 500,000 new shares. Th is can be determined by dividing the total amount of funds to be raised by the subscription price:
Number of new shares = Funds to be raised/Subscription price [15.1] = $5,000,000/$10 = 500,000 shares
Because shareholders always get one right for each share of stock they own, 1 million rights would be issued by National Power. To determine how many rights are needed to buy one new share of
440 Part 6: Cost of Capital and Long-Term Financial Policy
15Ross_Chapter15_4th.indd 44015Ross_Chapter15_4th.indd 440 12-11-27 12:1212-11-27 12:12
stock, we can divide the number of existing outstanding shares of stock by the number of new shares:
Number of rights needed to buy a share of stock = Old shares/New shares [15.2] = 1,000,000/500,000 = 2 rights
Th us, a shareholder needs to give up two rights plus $10 to receive a share of new stock. If all the shareholders do this, National Power could raise the required $5 million.
It should be clear that the subscription price, the number of new shares, and the number of rights needed to buy a new share of stock are interrelated. For example, National Power can lower the subscription price. If so, more new shares will have to be issued to raise $5 million in new equity. Several alternatives are worked out here:
Subscription Price New Shares Rights Needed to Buy a Share of Stock
$20 250,000 4 10 500,000 2
5 1,000,000 1
The Value of a Right Rights clearly have value. In the case of National Power, the right to buy a share of stock worth $20 for $10 is defi nitely worth something. In fact, if you think about it, a right is essentially a call option. A call option gives the holder of the option the ability to buy a particular asset, in this case a stock, at a fi xed price for a particular period of time. Th e most important diff erence between a right and an ordinary call option is that rights are issued by the fi rm, so they closely resemble warrants. In general, the valuation of options, rights, and warrants can be fairly complex, so we defer discussion of this to a later chapter. However, we can discuss the value of a right just prior to expiration in order to illustrate some important points.
Suppose a shareholder of National Power owns two shares of stock just before the rights off er- ing. Th is situation is depicted in Table 15.8. Initially, the price of National Power is $20 per share, so the shareholder’s total holding is worth 2 × $20 = $40. Th e National Power rights off er gives shareholders with two rights the opportunity to purchase one additional share for $10. Th e addi- tional share does not carry a right.
TABLE 15.8
The value of rights: the individual shareholder
Initial Position
Number of shares 2 Share price $20 Value of holding $40
Terms of Offer
Subscription price $10 Number of rights issued 2 Number of rights for a new share 2
After Offer
Number of shares 3 Value of holdings $50 Share price $16.67 Value of a right
Old price - New price $20 - 16.67 = $3.33
Th e shareholder who has two shares receives two rights. Th e holding of the shareholder who exercises these rights and buys the new share would increase to three shares. Th e total investment would be $40 + 10 = $50 (the $40 initial value plus the $10 paid to the company).
Chapter 15: Raising Capital 441
15Ross_Chapter15_4th.indd 44115Ross_Chapter15_4th.indd 441 12-11-27 12:1212-11-27 12:12
Th e shareholder now holds three shares, all of which are identical because the new share does not have a right and the rights attached to the old shares have been exercised. Since the total cost of buying these three shares is $40 + 10 = $50, the price per share must end up at $50/3 = $16.67 (rounded to two decimal places).
Table 15.9 summarizes what happens to National Power’s stock price. If all shareholders exer- cise their rights, the number of shares increases to 1 million + .5 million = 1.5 million. Th e value of the fi rm increases to $20 million + 5 million = $25 million. Th e value of each share thus drops to $25 million/1.5 million = $16.67 aft er the rights off ering.
TABLE 15.9
National Power Company rights offering
Initial Position
Number of shares 1 million Share price $20 Value of firm $20 million
Terms of Offer
Subscription price $10 Number of rights issued 1 million Number of rights for a share 2
After Offer
Number of shares 1.5 million Share price $16.67 Value of firm $25 million
Value of one right $20 - 16.67 = $3.33
Th e diff erence between the old share price of $20 and the new share price of $16.67 refl ects the fact that the old shares carried rights to subscribe to the new issue. Th e diff erence must be equal to the value of one right, that is, $20 - 16.67 = $3.33.
Although holding no shares of outstanding National Power stock, an investor who wants to subscribe to the new issue can do so by buying some rights. Suppose an outside investor buys two rights. Th is costs $3.33 × 2 = $6.67 (to account for previous rounding). If the investor exercises the rights at a subscription price of $10, the total cost would be $10 + 6.67 = $16.67. In return for this expenditure, the investor receives a share of the new stock, which, as we have seen, is worth $16.67.
EXAMPLE 15.1: Exercising Your Rights: Part I
In the National Power example, suppose the subscrip- tion price was set at $8. How many shares have to be sold? How many rights would you need to buy a new share? What is the value of a right? What will the price per share be after the rights offer?
To raise $5 million, $5 million/$8 = 625,000 shares need to be sold. There are 1 million shares outstanding, so
it will take 1 million/625,000 = 8/5 = 1.6 rights to buy a new share of stock (you can buy five new shares for every eight you own). After the rights offer, there will be 1.625 million shares, worth $25 million all together, so the per share value is $25/1.625 = $15.38 each. The value of a right is the $20 original price less the $15.38 ending price, or $4.62.
Theoretical Value of a Right We can summarize the discussion with an equation for the theoretical value of a right during the rights-on period:
Ro = (Mo - S)/(N + 1) [15.3]
442 Part 6: Cost of Capital and Long-Term Financial Policy
15Ross_Chapter15_4th.indd 44215Ross_Chapter15_4th.indd 442 12-11-27 12:1212-11-27 12:12
where
Mo = common share price during the rights-on period S = subscription price N = number of rights required to buy one new share
We can illustrate the use of Equation 15.3 by checking our answer for the value of one right in Example 15.1.
Ro = ($20 - 8)/(1.6 + 1) = $4.62
Th is is the same answer we got in Example 15.1.
EXAMPLE 15.2: Exercising Your Rights: Part II
The Lagrange Point Company has proposed a rights of- fering. The stock currently sells for $40 per share. Under the terms of the offer, shareholders are allowed to buy one new share for every five that they own at a price of $25 per share. What is the value of a right? What is the ex-rights price?
You can buy five rights on shares for 5 × $40 = $200 and then exercise the rights for another $25. Your total in-
vestment is $225, and you end up with six ex-rights shares. The ex-rights price per share is $225/6 = $37.50 per share. The rights are thus worth $40 - 37.50 = $2.50 apiece.
Using Equation 15.3 we have:
Ro = ($40 - 25)/(5 + 1) = $2.50
Ex Rights National Power’s rights have substantial value. In addition, the rights off ering would have a large impact on the market price of National Power’s stock price. It would drop by $3.33 on the day when the shares trade ex rights.
Th e standard procedure for issuing rights involves the fi rm’s setting a holder-of-record date. Following stock exchange rules, the stock typically goes ex-rights two trading days before the holder-of-record date. If the stock is sold before the ex-rights date—rights-on, with rights, or cum rights—the new owner receives the rights. Aft er the ex-rights date, an investor who purchases the shares will not receive the rights. Th is is depicted for National Power in Figure 15.3
FIGURE 15.3
Ex-rights stock prices: the effect of rights on stock prices
Rights on Ex rights
Announcement date
Ex rights date
Record date
September 30 October 13 October 15
Rights-on price $20.00
Ex rights price $16.67
$3.33 = Value of a right
In a rights offering, there is a date of record, which is the last day that a shareholder can establish legal ownership. However, stocks are sold ex rights two business days before the record date. Before the ex rights day, the stock sells rights on, which means the purchaser receives the rights.
ex rights Period when stock is selling without a recently declared right, normally beginning two business days before the holder-of-record date.
holder-of-record date The date on which existing shareholders on company records are designated as the recipients of stock rights. Also the date of record.
Chapter 15: Raising Capital 443
15Ross_Chapter15_4th.indd 44315Ross_Chapter15_4th.indd 443 12-11-27 12:1212-11-27 12:12
As illustrated, on September 30, National Power announced the terms of the rights off ering, stating that the rights would be mailed on, say, November 1 to shareholders of record as of Octo- ber 15. Since October 13 is the ex-rights date, only those shareholders who own the stock on or before October 12 receive the rights.
Value of Rights after Ex-Rights Date When the stock goes ex rights, we saw that its price drops by the value of one right. Until the rights expire, holders can buy one share at the subscription price by exercising N rights. In equa- tion form:10
Me = Mo - Ro [15.4] Re = (Me - S)/N [15.5]
where Me = common share price during the ex-rights period and Mo = rights-on common share price.
Checking the formula using Example 15.2 gives
Me = $40 - 2.50 = $37.50 Re = ($37.50 - 25)/5 = $2.50
The Underwrit ing Arrangements Rights off erings are typically arranged using standby underwriting. In standby underwriting, the issuer makes a rights off ering, and the underwriter makes a fi rm commitment to “take up” (that is, purchase) the unsubscribed portion of the issue. Th e underwriter usually gets a standby fee and additional amounts based on the securities taken up.
Standby underwriting protects the fi rm against undersubscription. Th is can occur if invest- ors throw away rights or if bad news causes the market price of the stock to fall to less than the subscription price.
In practice, a small percentage (less than 10 percent) of shareholders fail to exercise valuable rights. Th is can probably be attributed to ignorance or vacations. Furthermore, shareholders are usually given an oversubscription privilege enabling them to purchase unsubscribed shares at the subscription price. Th e oversubscription privilege makes it unlikely that the corporate issuer would have to turn to its underwriter for help.
Effects on Shareholders Shareholders can exercise their rights or sell them. In either case, the shareholder does not win or lose by the rights off ering. Th e hypothetical holder of two shares of National Power has a portfolio worth $40. If the shareholder exercises the rights, he or she ends up with three shares worth a total of $50. In other words, by spending $10, the investor’s holding increases in value by $10, which means the shareholder is neither better nor worse off .
On the other hand, if the shareholder sells the two rights for $3.33 each, he or she would obtain $3.33 × 2 = $6.67 and end up with two shares worth $16.67 and the cash from selling the right:
Shares held = 2 × $16.67 = $33.33 Rights sold = 2 × $3.33 = $ 6.67 Total = $40.00
Th e new $33.33 market value plus $6.67 in cash is exactly the same as the original holding of $40. Th us, shareholders cannot lose or gain from exercising or selling rights.
10 During the ex-rights period, a right represents a short-lived option to buy the stock. Equation 15.5 gives the minimum value of this option. The market value of rights is generally higher, as explained in our discussion of options in Chapter 25.
standby underwriting Agreement where the underwriter agrees to purchase the unsubscribed portion of the issue.
standby fee Amount paid to underwriter participating in standby underwriting agreement.
oversubscription privilege Allows shareholders to purchase unsubscribed shares in a rights offering at the subscription price.
444 Part 6: Cost of Capital and Long-Term Financial Policy
15Ross_Chapter15_4th.indd 44415Ross_Chapter15_4th.indd 444 12-11-27 12:1212-11-27 12:12
It is obvious that aft er the rights off ering, the new market price of the fi rm’s stock would be lower than it was before the rights off ering. As we have seen, however, shareholders have suff ered no loss because of the rights off ering. Th us, the stock price decline is very much like a stock split, a device that is described in Chapter 17. Th e lower the subscription price, the greater is the price decline of a rights off ering. It is important to emphasize that because shareholders receive rights equal in value to the price drop, the rights off ering does not hurt shareholders.
Th ere is one last issue. How do we set the subscription price in a rights off ering? If you think about it, in theory, the subscription price really does not matter. It has to be less than the market price of the stock for the rights to have value, but, beyond this, the price is arbitrary. In principle, it could be as low as we cared to make it as long as it is not zero.
In practice, however, the subscription price is typically 20 to 25 percent less than the prevailing stock price. Once we recognize market ineffi ciencies and frictions, a subscription price too close to the share price may result in undersubscription due simply to market imperfections.
Cost of Rights Offerings Until the early 1980s, rights off erings were the most popular method of raising new equity in Canada for seasoned issuers. (Obviously, you cannot use rights off erings for IPOs.) Th e reason was lower fl otation costs from the simpler underwriting arrangements. Even though rights off er- ings lost some popularity with the advent of POP, they still are widely used by companies to raise capital. For example, in February 2011, Ivanhoe Mines completed one of the largest rights off er- ings in Canadian history, raising gross proceeds of US$1.18 billion. Th e proceeds of the rights off ering were used to advance construction and development of Ivanhoe Mines’ Oyu Tolgoi Cop- per and Gold Project in southern Mongolia.
1. How does a rights offering work?
2. What are the questions that financial management must answer in a rights offering?
3. How is the value of a right determined?
4. When does a rights offering affect the value of a company’s shares?
5. Does a rights offer cause a share price decrease? How are existing shareholders affected by a rights offer?
EXAMPLE 15.3: Right on or Rights-On?
In Example 15.2, suppose you could buy the rights for only $0.25 instead of the $2.50 we calculated. What could you do?
You can get rich quick, because you have found a money machine. Here’s the recipe: Buy five rights for $1.25. Exercise them and pay $25 to get a new share. Your total investment to get one ex rights share is 5 × $0.25 + $25 = $26.25. Sell the share for $37.50 and pocket the $11.25 difference. Repeat as desired.
A variation on this theme actually occurred in the course of a rights offering by a major Canadian chartered bank in
the mid-1980s. The bank’s employee stock ownership plan had promoted share ownership by tellers and clerical staff who were unfamiliar with the workings of rights offerings. When they received notification of the rights offering, many employees did not bother to respond until they were per- sonally solicited by other, more sophisticated employees who bought the rights for a fraction of their value. We do not endorse the ethics behind such transactions. But the incident does show why it pays for everyone who owns shares to understand the workings of rights offers.
Concept Questions
Chapter 15: Raising Capital 445
15Ross_Chapter15_4th.indd 44515Ross_Chapter15_4th.indd 445 12-11-27 12:1212-11-27 12:12
15.9 Dilution
A subject that comes up quite a bit in discussions involving the selling of securities is dilution. Dilution refers to a loss in existing shareholders’ value. Th ere are several kinds:
1. Dilution of percentage ownership. 2. Dilution of market value. 3. Dilution of book value and earnings per share.
Th e diff erence between these three types can be a little confusing and there are some common misconceptions about dilution, so we discuss it in this section.
Dilution of Proportionate Ownership Th e fi rst type of dilution can arise whenever a fi rm sells shares to the general public. For example, Joe Smith owns 5000 shares of Merit Shoe Company. Merit Shoe currently has 50,000 shares of stock outstanding; each share gets one vote. Smith thus controls 10 percent (5000/50,000) of the votes and gets 10 percent of the dividends.
If Merit Shoe issues 50,000 new shares of common stock to the public via a general cash off er, Smith’s ownership in Merit Shoe may be diluted. If Smith does not participate in the new issue, his ownership drops to 5 percent (5000/100,000). Notice that the value of Smith’s shares is unaff ected; he just owns a smaller percentage of the fi rm.
Because a rights off ering would ensure Joe Smith an opportunity to maintain his proportion- ate 10 percent share, dilution of the ownership of existing shareholders can be avoided by using a rights off ering.
Dilution of Value: Book versus Market Values We now examine dilution of value by looking at some accounting numbers. We do this to illus- trate a fallacy concerning dilution; we do not mean to suggest that accounting dilution is more important than market value dilution. As we illustrate, quite the reverse is true. Suppose Provincial Telephone Company (PTC) wants to build a new switching facility to meet future anticipated demands. PTC currently has 1 million shares outstanding and no debt. Each share is selling for $5, and the company has a $5 million market value. PTC’s book value is $10 million total, or $10 per share.
PTC has experienced a variety of diffi culties in the past, including cost overruns, regulatory delays, and below normal profi ts. Th ese diffi culties are refl ected in the fact that PTC’s market- to-book ratio is $5/$10 = .50 (successful fi rms rarely have market prices less than book values).
Net income for PTC is currently $1 million. With 1 million shares, earnings per share (EPS) are $1, and the return on equity (ROE) is $1/$10 = 10%.11 PTC thus sells for fi ve times earnings (the price/earnings ratio is fi ve). PTC has 200 shareholders, each of whom holds 5000 shares each. Th e new plant will cost $2 million, so PTC has to issue 400,000 new shares ($5 × 400,000 = $2,000,000). Th ere will thus be 1.4 million shares outstanding aft er the issue.
Th e ROE on the new plant is expected to be the same as for the company as a whole. In other words, net income is expected to go up by .10 × $2 million = $200,000. Total net income will thus be $1.2 million. Th e following things would occur:
1. With 1.4 million shares outstanding, EPS would be $1.2/1.4 = $.857 per share, down from $1.
2. The proportionate ownership of each old shareholder drops to 5000/1.4 million = .36 percent from .50 percent.
3. If the stock continues to sell for five times earnings, the value would drop to 5 × .857 = $4.29, a loss of $.71 per share.
11 Return on equity (ROE) is equal to earnings per share divided by book value per share or, equivalently, net income di- vided by common equity. We discuss this and other financial ratios in some detail in Chapter 3.
dilution Loss in existing shareholders’ value, in terms of either ownership, market value, book value, or EPS.
446 Part 6: Cost of Capital and Long-Term Financial Policy
15Ross_Chapter15_4th.indd 44615Ross_Chapter15_4th.indd 446 12-11-27 12:1212-11-27 12:12
4. The total book value is the old $10 million plus the new $2 million for a total of $12 million. Book value per share falls to $12 million/1.4 million = $8.57 per share.
If we take this example at face value, dilution of proportionate ownership, accounting dilution, and market value dilution all occur. PTC’s stockholders appear to suff er signifi cant losses.
A MISCONCEPTION Our example appears to show that selling stock when the market- to-book ratio is less than 1 is detrimental to the shareholders. Some managers claim that this dilu- tion occurs because EPS goes down whenever shares are issued where the market value is less than the book value. When the market-to-book ratio is less than 1, increasing the number of shares does cause EPS to go down. Such a decline in EPS is accounting dilution, and accounting dilution always occurs under these circumstances. Is it furthermore true that market value dilution will also necessarily occur? Th e answer is no. Th ere is nothing incorrect about our example, but why the market value has decreased is not obvious. We discuss this next.
THE CORRECT ARGUMENTS In this example, the market price falls from $5 per share to $4.29. This is true dilution, but why does it occur? The answer has to do with the new project. PTC is going to spend $2 million on the new switching facility. However, as shown in Table 15.10, the total market value of the company is going to rise from $5 million to $6 million, an increase of only $1 million. This simply means that the NPV of the new project is -$1 million. With 1.4 million shares, the loss per share is $1/1.4 = .71, as we calculated before.
TABLE 15.10
New issues and dilution: the case of Provincial Telephone Company
After
(1) Initial (2) Dilution (3) No Dilution
Number of shares 1,000,000 1,400,000 1,400,000 Book value (B) $10,000,000 $12,000,000 $12,000,000 Book value per share $10 $8.57 $8.57 Market value $5,000,000 $6,000,000 $8,000,000 Market price (P) $5 $4.29 $5.71 Net income $1,000,000 $1,200,000 $1,600,000 Return on equity (ROE) 0.10 0.10 0.13 Earnings per share (EPS) $1 $0.86 $1.14 EPS/P 0.20 0.20 0.20 P/EPS 5 5 5 P/B 0.5 0.5 0.67 PROJECT Cost $2,000,000 NPV = -$1,000,000 NPV = $1,000,000
So, true dilution takes place for the shareholders of PTC because the NPV of the project is negative and the market knows it, not because the market-to-book ratio is less than 1. Th is nega- tive NPV causes the market price to drop, and the accounting dilution has nothing to do with it.
Suppose that the new project had a positive NPV of $1 million. Th e total market value would rise by $2 + 1 = $3 million. As shown in Table 15.10 (third column), the price per share rises to $5.71. Notice that accounting dilution still occurs because the book value per share still falls, but there is no economic consequence to that fact. Th e market value of the stock rises.
Th e $.71 increase in share value comes about because of the $1 million NPV, which amounts to an increase in value of about $.71 per share. Also, as shown, if the ratio of price to EPS remains at 5, EPS must rise to $5.71/5 = $1.14. Total earnings (net income) rises to $1.14 per share × 1.4 million shares = $1.6 million. Finally, ROE would rise to $1.6 million/$12 million = 13.33%.
Chapter 15: Raising Capital 447
15Ross_Chapter15_4th.indd 44715Ross_Chapter15_4th.indd 447 12-11-27 12:1212-11-27 12:12
1. What are the different kinds of dilution?
2. Is dilution important?
15.10 Issuing Long-term Debt
Th e general procedures followed in a public issue of bonds are the same as those for stocks. Th e issue must be registered with the OSC and any other relevant provincial securities commissions, there must be a prospectus, and so on. Th e registration statement for a public issue of bonds, however, is diff erent from the one for common stock. For bonds, the registration statement must indicate an indenture.
Another important diff erence is that debt is more likely to be issued privately. Th ere are two basic forms of direct private long-term fi nancing: term loans and private placement.
Term loans are direct business loans. Th ese loans have maturities of between one and fi ve years. Most term loans are repayable during the life of the loan. Th e lenders include chartered banks, insurance companies, trust companies, and other lenders that specialize in corporate fi nance. Th e interest rate on a term loan may be either a fi xed or fl oating rate.
Syndicated loans are loans made by a group (or syndicate) of banks and other institutional investors. Th ey are used because large banks such as Citigroup and Royal Bank of Canada typi- cally have a larger demand for loans than they can supply, and small regional banks frequently have more funds on hand than they can profi tably lend to existing customers. As a result, a very large bank may arrange a loan with a fi rm or country and then sell portions of it to a syndicate of other banks. With a syndicated loan, each bank has a separate loan agreement with the borrowers.
A syndicated loan may be publicly traded. It may be a line of credit and be “undrawn” or it may be drawn and be used by a fi rm. Syndicated loans are always rated investment grade. However, a leveraged syndicated loan is rated speculative grade (i.e., it is “junk”). Every week, the Wall Street Journal reports on a number of syndicated loan deals, credit costs, and yields. In addition, syndi- cated loan prices are reported for a group of publicly traded loans. Research fi nds slightly higher default rates for syndicated loans when compared to corporate bonds.12
While there is no market for the public trading of syndicated loans, commercial and invest- ment banks in the U.S. have created loan trading desks and a secondary loan market for syndi- cated loans. Further, the Loan Syndications and Trading Association was formed to help develop regulations and practices for this market. Th ere is currently no similar market in Canada.13
Private placements are very similar to term loans except that the maturity is longer. Unlike term loans, privately placed debt usually employs an investment dealer. Th e dealer facilitates the process but does not underwrite the issue. A private placement does not require a full prospec- tus. Instead, the fi rm and its investment dealer only need to draw up an off ering memorandum briefl y describing the issuer and the issue. Most privately placed debt is sold to exempt purchasers. Th ese are large insurance companies, pension funds, and other institutions, which, as sophisti- cated market participants, do not require the protection provided by studying a full prospectus.
Th e important diff erences between direct private long-term fi nancing—term loans and private debt placements—and public issues of debt are:
1. Registration costs are lower for direct financing. A term loan avoids the cost of OSC regis- tration. Private debt placements require an offering memorandum, but this is cheaper than preparing a full prospectus.
2. Direct placement is likely to have more restrictive covenants.
12 Edward I. Altman and Heather J. Suggitt, “Default Rates in the Syndicated Bank Loan Market: A Longitudinal Analy- sis,” Journal of Banking and Finance, vol. 24, 2000. 13 This discussion of the secondary syndicated loan market is largely based upon the following Bank of Canada paper available at bankofcanada.ca: Jim Armstrong (2011), “The Syndicated Loan Market: Developments in the North Ameri- can Context,” Bank of Canada Financial System Review, 69–73.
Concept Questions
term loans Direct business loans of, typically, one to five years.
syndicated loans Loans made by a group of banks or other institutions.
private placements Loans, usually long term in nature, provided directly by a limited number of investors.
448 Part 6: Cost of Capital and Long-Term Financial Policy
15Ross_Chapter15_4th.indd 44815Ross_Chapter15_4th.indd 448 12-11-27 12:1212-11-27 12:12
3. It is easier to renegotiate a term loan or a private placement in the event of a default. It is harder to renegotiate a public issue because hundreds of holders are usually involved.
4. Life insurance companies and pension funds dominate the private-placement segment of the bond market. Chartered banks are significant participants in the term loan market.
5. The costs of distributing bonds are lower in the private market because fewer buyers are in- volved and the issue is not underwritten.
Th e interest rates on term loans and private placements are usually higher than those on an equiva- lent public issue. Th is refl ects the trade-off between a higher interest rate and more fl exible arrange- ments in the event of fi nancial distress, as well as the lower costs associated with private placements.
An additional, and very important, consideration is that the fl otation costs associated with selling debt are much less than the costs associated with selling equity.
1. What is the difference between private and public bond issues?
2. A private placement is likely to have a higher interest rate than a public issue. Why?
15.11 SUMMARY AND CONCLUSIONS
Th is chapter looks at how corporate securities are issued. Th e following are the main points:
1. The costs of issuing securities can be quite large. They are much lower (as a percentage) for larger issues.
2. The bought deal type of underwriting is far more prevalent for large issues than regular un- derwriting. This is probably connected to the savings available through Prompt Offering Prospectuses and concentrated selling efforts.
3. The direct and indirect costs of going public can be substantial. However, once a firm is public it can raise additional capital with much greater ease.
4. Rights offerings are cheaper than general cash offers. Even so, most new equity issues in the United States are underwritten general cash offers. In Canada, the bought deal is cheaper and dominates the new issue market.
Key Terms best efforts underwriting (page 428) bought deal (page 428) dilution (page 446) Dutch auction underwriting (page 429) ex rights (page 443) firm commitment underwriting (page 428) general cash offer (page 427) holder-of-record date (page 443) initial public offering (IPO) (page 426) lockup agreement (page 430) overallotment option (page 430) oversubscription privilege (page 444) private placements (page 448) prospectus (page 426)
public issue (page 425) red herring (page 426) regular underwriting (page 428) rights offer (page 427) seasoned equity offering (SEO) (page 427) seasoned new issue (page 426) spread (page 428) standby fee (page 444) standby underwriting (page 444) syndicate (page 427) syndicated loans (page 448) term loans (page 448) venture capital (page 424)
Concept Questions
Chapter 15: Raising Capital 449
15Ross_Chapter15_4th.indd 44915Ross_Chapter15_4th.indd 449 12-11-27 12:1212-11-27 12:12
Chapter Review Problems and Self-Test 15.1 Flotation Costs The L5 Corporation is considering an equity
issue to finance a new space station. A total of $10 million in new equity is needed. If the direct costs are estimated at 6 per- cent of the amount raised, how large does the issue need to be? What is the dollar amount of the flotation cost?
15.2 Rights Offerings The Hadron Corporation currently has 4 million shares outstanding. The stock sells for $50 per share. To raise $30 million for a new particle accelerator, the firm is considering a rights offering at $20 per share. What is the value of a right in this case? The ex-rights price?
Answers to Self-Test Problems 15.1 The firm needs to net $10 million after paying the 6 percent flotation costs. So the amount raised is given by: Amount raised × (1 - .06) = $10 million
Amount raised = $10/.94 = $10.638 million The total flotation cost is thus $638,000. 15.2 To raise $30 million at $20 per share, $30 million/$20 = 1.5 million shares will have to be sold. Before the offering, the firm is worth 4
million × $50 = $200 million. The issue raised $30 million and there will be 5.5 million shares outstanding. The value of an ex-rights share will therefore be $230/5.5 = $41.82. The value of a right is thus $50 - 41.82 = $8.18.
Concepts Review and Critical Thinking Questions 1. (LO2) In the aggregate, debt offerings are much more com-
mon than equity offerings and typically much larger as well. Why?
2. (LO2) Why are the costs of selling equity so much larger than the costs of selling debt?
3. (LO2) Why do noninvestment-grade bonds have much higher direct costs than investment-grade issues?
4. (LO2) Why is underpricing not a great concern with bond offerings?
Use the following information in answering the next three questions: ZipCar, the car sharing company, went public in April 2011. Assisted by the investment bank, The Goldman Sachs Group, Inc., ZipCar sold 9.68 million shares at $18 each, thereby raising a total of $174.28 million. At the end of the first day of trading, the stock sold for $28 per share, down from a high of $31.50 reached earlier in the day in frenzied trading. Based on the end-of-day numbers, ZipCar’s shares were apparently un- derpriced by about $10 each, meaning that the company missed out on an additional $96.8 million. 5. (LO3) The Zipcar IPO was severely underpriced by about 56
percent. Should Zipcar be upset at Goldman over the underpricing?
6. (LO3) In the previous question, would it affect your thinking to know that, at the time of the IPO, Zipcar was only 10 years old, had only $186 million in revenues in 2010, and had never earned a profit? Additionally, the viability of the company’s business model was still unproven.
7. (LO3) In the previous two questions, how would it affect your thinking to know that in addition to the 9.68 million shares offered in the IPO, Zipcar had an additional 30 million shares outstanding? Of those 30 million shares, 14.1 million
shares were owned by four venture capital firms, and 15.5 mil- lion shares were owned by the 12 directors and executive officers.
8. (LO4) Ren-Stimpy International is planning to raise fresh eq- uity capital by selling a large new issue of common stock. Ren- Stimpy is currently a publicly traded corporation, and it is trying to choose between an underwritten cash offer and a rights offering (not underwritten) to current shareholders. Ren-Stimpy management is interested in minimizing the sell- ing costs and has asked you for advice on the choice of issue methods. What is your recommendation and why?
9. (LO3) In 1999, a certain assistant professor of finance bought 12 initial public offerings of common stock. He held each of these for approximately one month and then sold. The invest- ment rule he followed was to submit a purchase order for ev- ery initial public offering of Internet companies. There were 22 of these offerings, and he submitted a purchase order for approximately $1,000 in stock for each of the companies. With 10 of these, no shares were allocated to this assistant professor. With 5 of the 12 offerings that were purchased, fewer than the requested number of shares were allocated.
The year 1999 was very good for Internet company owners: on average, for the 22 companies that went public, the stocks were selling for 80 percent above the offering price a month after the initial offering date. The assistant professor looked at his performance record and found that the $8,400 invested in the 12 companies had grown to $10,000, representing a return of only about 20 percent (commissions were negligible). Did he have bad luck, or should he have expected to do worse than the average initial public offering investor? Explain.
450 Part 6: Cost of Capital and Long-Term Financial Policy
15Ross_Chapter15_4th.indd 45015Ross_Chapter15_4th.indd 450 12-11-27 12:1212-11-27 12:12
Questions and Problems 1. Rights Offerings (LO4) Berczy Inc. is proposing a rights offering. Presently there are 400,000 shares outstanding at $73 each.
There will be 50,000 new shares offered at $65 each. a. What is the new market value of the company? b. How many rights are associated with one of the new shares? c. What is the ex-rights price? d. What is the value of a right? e. Why might a company have a rights offering rather than a general cash offer?
2. Rights Offerings (LO4) The Greensborough Corporation has announced a rights offer to raise $30 million for a new journal, the Journal of Financial Excess. This journal will review potential articles after the author pays a nonrefundable reviewing fee of $5,000 per page. The stock currently sells for $48 per share, and there are 3.9 million shares outstanding.
a. What is the maximum possible subscription price? What is the minimum? b. If the subscription price is set at $43 per share, how many shares must be sold? How many rights will it take to buy one
share? c. What is the ex-rights price? What is the value of a right? d. Show how a shareholder with 1000 shares before the offering and no desire (or money) to buy additional shares is not
harmed by the rights offer. 3. Rights (LO4) Milliken Co. has concluded that additional equity financing will be needed to expand operations and that the
needed funds will be best obtained through a rights offering. It has correctly determined that as a result of the rights offering, the share price will fall from $65 to $63.20 ($65 is the rights-on price; $63.20 is the ex-rights price, also known as the when-issued price). The company is seeking $17 million in additional funds with a per-share subscription price equal to $35. How many shares are there currently, before the offering? (Assume that the increment to the market value of the equity equals the gross proceeds from the offering.)
4. IPO Underpricing (LO3) The Markville Co. and the Unionville Co. have both announced IPOs at $40 per share. One of these is undervalued by $9, and the other is overvalued by $4, but you have no way of knowing which is which. You plan to buy 1000 shares of each issue. If an issue is underpriced, it will be rationed, and only half your order will be filled. If you could get 1000 shares in Markville and 1000 shares in Unionville, what would your profit be? What profit do you actually expect? What principle have you illustrated?
5. Calculating Flotation Costs (LO3) The Cresthaven Horses Corporation needs to raise $85 million to finance its expansion into new markets. The company will sell new shares of equity via a general cash offering to raise the needed funds. If the offer price is $16 per share and the company’s underwriters charge an 8 percent spread, how many shares need to be sold?
6. Calculating Flotation Costs (LO3) In the previous problem, if the OSC filing fee and associated administrative expenses of the offering are $900,000, how many shares need to be sold?
7. Calculating Flotation Costs (LO3) The Rouge Co. has just gone public. Under a firm commitment agreement, Rouge received $17.67 for each of the 15 million shares sold. The initial offering price was $19 per share, and the stock rose to $23.18 per share in the first few minutes of trading. Rouge paid $900,000 in direct legal and other costs, and $320,000 in indirect costs. What was the flotation cost as a percentage of funds raised?
8. Price Dilution (LO3) Reesor Inc. has 175,000 shares of stock outstanding. Each share is worth $68, so the company’s market value of equity is $11,900,000. Suppose the firm issues 30,000 new shares at the following prices: $68, $65, and $60. What will the effect be of each of these alternative offering prices on the existing price per share?
9. Dilution (LO3) Chancery Inc. wishes to expand its facilities. The company currently has 5 million shares outstanding and no debt. The stock sells for $31 per share, but the book value per share is $7. Net income is currently $3.2 million. The new facility will cost $45 million, and it will increase net income by $900,000.
a. Assuming a constant price–earnings ratio, what will the effect be of issuing new equity to finance the investment? To answer, calculate the new book value per share, the new total earnings, the new EPS, the new stock price, and the new market-to-book ratio. What is going on here?
b. What would the new net income for the company have to be for the stock price to remain unchanged? 10. Dilution (LO3) The Hagerman Heavy Metal Mining (H2M2) Corporation wants to diversify its operations. Some recent
financial information for the company is shown here: Stock price $ 76 Number of shares 40,000 Total assets $ 7,500,000 Total liabilities $ 3,100,000 Net income $ 850,000
Basic (Questions
1–8)
1. R T
7
Intermediate (Questions
9–15)
Chapter 15: Raising Capital 451
15Ross_Chapter15_4th.indd 45115Ross_Chapter15_4th.indd 451 12-11-27 12:1212-11-27 12:12
H2M2 is considering an investment that has the same PE ratio as the firm. The cost of the investment is $800,000, and it will be financed with a new equity issue. The return on the investment will equal H2M2’s current ROE. What will happen to the book value per share, the market value per share, and the EPS? What is the NPV of this investment? Does dilution take place?
11. Dilution (LO3) In the previous problem, what would the ROE on the investment have to be if we wanted the price after the offering to be $76 per share? (Assume the PE ratio remains constant.) What is the NPV of this investment? Does any dilution take place?
12. Rights (LO4) Milne Mfg. is considering a rights offer. The company has determined that the ex-rights price would be $83. The current price is $89 per share, and there are 24 million shares outstanding. The rights offer would raise a total of $50 million. What is the subscription price?
13. Value of a Right (LO4) Show that the value of a right just prior to expiration can be written as:
Value of a right = PRO - PX = (PRO - PS)/(N + 1) where PRO, PS, and PX stand for the rights-on price, the subscription price, and the ex-rights price, respectively, and N is the
number of rights needed to buy one new share at the subscription price. 14. Selling Rights (LO4) Belford Corp. wants to raise $4.5 million via a rights offering. The company currently has 580,000 shares
of common stock outstanding that sell for $45 per share. Its underwriter has set a subscription price of $20 per share and will charge the company a spread of 6 percent. If you currently own 5000 shares of stock in the company and decide not to participate in the rights offering, how much money can you get by selling your rights?
15. Valuing a Right (LO4) Cherrywood Inventory Systems Inc. has announced a rights offer. The company has announced that it will take four rights to buy a new share in the offering at a subscription price of $31. At the close of business the day before the ex-rights day, the company’s stock sells for $56 per share. The next morning, you notice that the stock sells for $49 per share and the rights sell for $3 each. Are the stock and the rights correctly priced on the ex-rights day? Describe a transaction in which you could use these prices to create an immediate profit.
Internet Application Questions 1. What is the Investment Industry Regulatory Organization of Canada (iiroc.ca)? Describe its mandate, with particular attention
on how the IIROC protects the investors’ funds (cipf.ca). 2. What comprises the Canadian regulatory landscape (iiroc.ca/industry/industrycompliance/Pages/default.aspx) for securities
trading? Also go to the website for the newest stock exchange in Canada, the TSX Venture Exchange. Describe the role played by the capital pool program (142.201.0.1/en/pdf/CPCBrochure.pdf) at the Venture Exchange.
3. What is the most recent Canadian IPO? Go to ipo.investcom.com and search under the “Date of Filing” link. What is the com- pany? What exchange trades the stock? What was the IPO price? Is the company currently trading? If so, find the current price and calculate the return since inception.
4. What were the biggest first day returns in the latest quarter for IPOs in the U.S. markets? Go to hoovers.com, follow the “IPO Central” link, then the “IPO Scorecard” link.
5. You want to look at the most recent initial public offering filings on SEDAR. Go to ipo.investcom.com and locate the most recent company making a filing (note the name and ticker symbol of the company). Then go to sedar.com and search for the company. What is the name of the document filed with SEDAR for the IPO? What does this company do? What purpose does the company propose for the funds raised by the IPO?
6. Go to ipo.investcom.com and locate the largest Canadian offering listed. What is the name of the company? What industry is it in? What is the final offering price per share? How much does the company expect to raise in the offering? Who is (are) the lead underwriter(s)?
7. Go to hoovers.com; follow the “IPO Central” link, then the “IPO Scorecard” link. What companies are currently in the list for “Money Left on the Table,” (capital that could have been raised had the stock been offered at a higher price)? Calculate the money on the table as a percentage of the value of the company at the offer price for all the companies on the list? Which com- pany is the most underpriced?
8. Go to finance.yahoo.com and find the current share price of Facebook Inc.? Why was the Facebook IPO overpriced? Comment on the efficiency of NASDAQ in bringing shares to the market.
452 Part 6: Cost of Capital and Long-Term Financial Policy
15Ross_Chapter15_4th.indd 45215Ross_Chapter15_4th.indd 452 12-11-27 12:1212-11-27 12:12
The following material represents the cover page and sum- mary of the prospectus for the initial public offering of the Markham Pest Control Corporation (MPCC), which is going public tomorrow with a firm commitment initial public offer- ing managed by the investment banking firm of Drape and Grape. Answer the following questions: a) Assume that you know nothing about MPCC other than
the information contained in the prospectus. Based on your knowledge of finance, what is your prediction for the price of MPCC tomorrow? Provide a short explana- tion of why you think this will occur.
b) Assume that you have several thousand dollars to invest. When you get home from class tonight, you find that your stockbroker, whom you have not talked to for weeks, has called. She has left a message that MPCC is going public tomorrow and that she can get you several hundred shares at the offering price if you call her back first thing in the morning. Discuss the merits of this opportunity.
Prospectus MPCC
Markham Pest Control Corporation
Of the shares being offered hereby, all 400,000 are being sold by the Markham Pest Control Corporation Inc. (“the Com- pany”). Before the offering there has been no public market for the shares of MPCC, and no guarantee can be given that any such market will develop. These securities have not been approved or disapproved by the OSC, nor has the commission passed upon the accuracy or adequacy of this prospectus. Any representation to the con- trary is a criminal offence.
Price to Public
Underwriting Discount
Proceeds to Company*
Per share $12.00 $1.00 $11.00 Total $4,000,000 $400,000 $3,600,000
*Before deducting expenses estimated at $27,000 and pay- able by the Company.
This is an initial public offering. The common shares are being offered, subject to prior sale, when, as, and if delivered to and accepted by the Underwriters and subject to approval of certain legal matters by their Counsel and by Counsel for the Company. The Underwriters reserve the right to withdraw, cancel, or modify such offer and to reject offers in whole or in part.
Drape and Grape, Investment Bankers May 3, 2012
Prospectus Summary
The Company The Markham Pest Control Corporation (MPCC) breeds and markets toads and tree frogs as ecologically safe insect-control mechanisms.
The Offering 400,000 shares of common stock, no par value. Listing The Company will seek listing on the TSX. Shares Outstanding
As of December 31, 2011, 500,000 shares of common stock were outstanding. After the offering, 900,000 shares of common stock will be outstanding.
Use of Proceeds To finance expansion of inventory and receivables and general working capital, and to pay for country club memberships for certain finance professors.
Selected Financial Information (amounts in thousands except per share data)
Fiscal Year Ended December 31
2009 2010 2011
Revenues $65.00 $130.00 $260.00 Net earnings 4.50 17.00 30.00 Earnings per share 0.011 0.043 0.075
As of December 31, 2011
Actual As Adjusted for This Offering
Working capital $10.00 $2,200 Total assets $550 $2,856 Shareholders’ equity $460 $2,712
MINI CASE
Chapter 15: Raising Capital 453
15Ross_Chapter15_4th.indd 45315Ross_Chapter15_4th.indd 453 12-11-27 12:1212-11-27 12:12
Thus far, we have taken the fi rm’s capital structure as given. Debt/equity ratios don’t just drop on fi rms from the sky, of course, so now it’s time to wonder where they do come from. Going back to Chapter 1, we call decisions about a fi rm’s debt/equity ratio capital structure decisions.1
For the most part, a fi rm can choose any capital structure it wants. If management so desired, a fi rm could issue some bonds and use the proceeds to buy back some stock, thereby increasing the debt/equity ratio. Alternatively, it can issue stock and use the money to pay off some debt, thereby reducing the debt/equity ratio. Th ese activities that alter the fi rm’s existing capital structure are called capital restructurings. In general, such restructurings occur whenever the fi rm substitutes one capital structure for another while leaving the fi rm’s assets unchanged.
Since the assets of a fi rm are not directly aff ected by a capital restructuring, we can examine the fi rm’s capital structure decision separately from its other activities. Th is means a fi rm can consider capital restructuring decisions in isolation from its investment decisions. In this chapter then, we
1 It is conventional to refer to decisions regarding debt and equity as capital structure decisions. However, the term fi- nancial structure would be more accurate, and we use the terms interchangeably.
FINANCIAL LEVERAGE AND CAPITAL STRUCTURE POLICY
C H A P T E R 1 6
I n late 2009, Canwest Global Communications Corporation, then the largest media company in Canada, filed for bankruptcy as it had amassed a debt
of $4 billion. The Winnipeg-based company owned
a range of broadcasting and printing businesses,
including the National Post newspaper. As a part of
the bankruptcy process, Canwest’s newspaper arm
was sold to a group of creditors led by National Post
CEO Paul Godfrey, through a newly formed com-
pany, Postmedia Network. Canwest’s broadcasting
arm was sold to Shaw Communications.
A firm’s choice of how much debt it should have
relative to equity is known as a capital structure deci-
sion. Such a choice has many implications for a firm
and is far from being a settled issue in theory or prac-
tice. In this chapter, we discuss the basic ideas under-
lying capital structures and how firms choose them.
A firm’s capital structure is really just a reflection
of its borrowing policy. Should we borrow a lot of
money, or just a little? At first glance, it probably
seems that debt is something to be avoided. After
all, the more debt a firm has, the greater is the risk
of bankruptcy. What we learn is that debt is really a
double-edged sword, and, properly used, debt can
be enormously beneficial to a firm.
A good understanding of the effects of debt financ-
ing is important simply because the role of debt is
so misunderstood, and many firms (and individuals)
are too far conservative in their use of debt. Having
said this, we can also say that firms sometimes err in
the opposite direction, becoming too much heavily
indebted, with bankruptcy as the unfortunate conse-
quence. Striking the right balance is what the capital
structure issue is all about.
Learning Object ives
After studying this chapter, you should understand:
LO1 The effect of financial leverage on firm value and cost of capital.
LO2 The impact of taxes and bankruptcy on capital structure choice.
LO3 The essentials of the bankruptcy process. Th
e C
an ad
ia n
Pr es
s/ N
at ha
n D
en et
te
16Ross_Chapter16_3rd.indd 45416Ross_Chapter16_3rd.indd 454 12-11-01 16:2812-11-01 16:28
ignore investment decisions and focus on the long-term fi nancing, or capital structure, question. We consider only long-term fi nancing because, as we explained in Chapter 14, short-term sources of fi nancing are excluded in calculating capital structure weights.
What we see in this chapter is that capital structure decisions can have important implications for the value of the fi rm and its cost of capital. We also fi nd that important elements of the capital structure decision are easy to identify, but precise measures of these elements are generally not obtainable. As a result, we are able to give only an incomplete answer to the question of what the best capital structure might be for a particular fi rm at a particular time.
16.1 The Capital Structure Question
How should a fi rm choose its debt/equity ratio? Here, as always, we assume that the guiding principle is to choose the action that maximizes the value of a share of stock. As we discuss next, however, when it comes to capital structure decisions, this is essentially the same thing as maxi- mizing the value of the fi rm, and, for convenience, we frame our discussion in terms of fi rm value.
Firm Value and Stock Value: An Example Th e following example illustrates that the capital structure that maximizes the value of the fi rm is the one that fi nancial managers should choose for the shareholders, so there is no confl ict in our goals. To begin, suppose the market value of the J. J. Sprint Company is $1,000. Th e company currently has no debt, and J. J. Sprint’s 100 shares sell for $10 each. Further suppose that J. J. Sprint restructures itself by borrowing $500 and then paying out the proceeds to shareholders as an extra dividend of $500/100 = $5 per share.
Th is restructuring changes the capital structure of the fi rm with no direct eff ect on the fi rm’s assets. Th e immediate eff ect is to increase debt and decrease equity. However, what would be the fi nal impact of the restructuring? Table 16.1 illustrates three possible outcomes in addition to the original no-debt case. Notice that in scenario II the value of the fi rm is unchanged at $1,000. In scenario I, fi rm value rises by $250; it falls by $250 in scenario III. We haven’t yet said what might lead to these changes. For now, we just take them as possible outcomes to illustrate a point.
Since our goal is to benefi t the shareholders, we next examine, in Table 16.2, the net payoff s to the shareholders in these scenarios. For now we ignore the impact of taxes on dividends, capital gains and losses. We see that, if the value of the fi rm stays the same, then shareholders experience a capital loss that exactly off sets the extra dividend. Th is is outcome II. In outcome I, the value of the fi rm increases to $1,250 and the shareholders come out ahead by $250. In other words, the restructuring has an NPV of $250 in this scenario. Th e NPV in scenario III is -$250.
TABLE 16.1
Possible firm values: No debt versus debt plus dividend
Debt plus Dividend
No Debt I II III Debt $ 0 $ 500 $ 500 $500 Equity 1,000 750 500 250 Firm value $ 1,000 $ 1,250 $ 1,000 $750
TABLE 16.2
Possible payoffs to shareholders: Debt plus dividend
Debt plus Dividend
I II III Equity value reduction -$250 -$ 500 -$750
Dividends 500 500 500 Net effect +$250 $ 0 -$250
Chapter 16: Financial Leverage and Capital Structure Policy 455
16Ross_Chapter16_3rd.indd 45516Ross_Chapter16_3rd.indd 455 12-11-01 16:2812-11-01 16:28
Th e key observation to make here is that the change in the value of the fi rm is the same as the net eff ect on the shareholders. Financial managers can therefore try to fi nd the capital structure that maximizes the value of the fi rm. Put another way, the NPV rule applies to capital structure decisions, and the change in the value of the overall fi rm is the NPV of a restructuring. Th us, J.J. Sprint should borrow $500 if it expects outcome I. Th e crucial question in determining a fi rm’s capital structure is, of course, which scenario is likely to occur.
Capital Structure and the Cost of Capital In Chapter 14, we discussed the concept of the fi rm’s weighted average cost of capital (WACC). Recall that the WACC tells us that the fi rm’s overall cost of capital is a weighted average of the costs of the various components of the fi rm’s capital structure. When we described the WACC, we took the fi rm’s capital structure as given. Th us, one important issue that we want to explore in this chapter is what happens to the cost of capital when we vary the amount of debt fi nancing or the debt/equity ratio.2
A primary reason for studying the WACC is that the value of the fi rm is maximized when the WACC is minimized. To see this, recall that the WACC is the discount rate that is appropriate for the fi rm’s overall cash fl ows. Because values and discount rates move in opposite directions, minimizing the WACC maximizes the value of the fi rm’s cash fl ows.
Th us, we want to choose the fi rm’s capital structure so that the WACC is minimized. For this reason, we say that one capital structure is better than another if it results in a lower weighted average cost of capital. Further, we say that a particular debt/equity ratio represents the optimal capital structure if it results in the lowest possible WACC. Th is is sometimes called the fi rm’s target capital structure as well.
1. Why should financial managers choose the capital structure that maximizes the value of the firm?
2. What is the relationship between the WACC and the value of the firm?
3. What is an optimal capital structure?
16.2 The Effect of Financial Leverage
Th e previous section describes why the capital structure that produces the highest fi rm value (or the lowest cost of capital) is the one most benefi cial to shareholders. In this section, we examine the impact of fi nancial leverage on the payoff s to shareholders. As you may recall, fi nancial lever- age refers to the extent to which a fi rm relies on debt. Th e more debt fi nancing a fi rm uses in its capital structure, the more fi nancial leverage it employs.
As we describe, fi nancial leverage can dramatically alter the payoff s to shareholders in the fi rm. Remarkably, however, fi nancial leverage may not aff ect the overall cost of capital. If this is true, then a fi rm’s capital structure is irrelevant because changes in capital structure won’t aff ect the value of the fi rm. We return to this issue a little later.
The Basics of Financial Leverage We start by illustrating how fi nancial leverage works. For now, we ignore the impact of taxes. Also, for ease of presentation, we describe the impact of leverage in its eff ects on earnings per share (EPS) and return on equity (ROE). Th ese are, of course, accounting numbers, and, as such, are not our primary concern. Using cash fl ows instead of these accounting numbers would lead to precisely the same conclusions, but a little more work would be needed. We discuss the impact on market values in a subsequent section.
2 Note that when we looked at WACC, we considered the cost of debt to be related to bond issues. This cost could also be a bank debt financing rate if the firm predominantly uses that form of debt.
Concept Questions
456 Part 6: Cost of Capital and Long-Term Financial Policy
16Ross_Chapter16_3rd.indd 45616Ross_Chapter16_3rd.indd 456 12-11-01 16:2812-11-01 16:28
FINANCIAL LEVERAGE, EPS, AND ROE: AN EXAMPLE The Trans North Corporation currently has no debt in its capital structure. The CFO, Kim Morris, is considering a restructuring that would involve issuing debt and using the proceeds to buy back some of the outstanding equity. Table 16.3 presents both the current and proposed capital structures. As shown, the firm’s assets have a value of $8 million, and there are 400,000 shares outstanding. Be- cause Trans North is an all-equity firm, the price per share is $20.
TABLE 16.3
Current and proposed capital structures for the Trans North Corporation
Current Proposed
Assets $ 8,000,000 $ 8,000,000 Debt 0 4,000,000 Equity 8,000,000 4,000,000 Debt/equity ratio 0 1 Share price $ 20 $ 20 Shares outstanding 400,000 200,000 Interest rate 10% 10%
Th e proposed debt issue would raise $4 million; the bonds would be issued at par with a cou- pon rate of 10 percent for a required return on debt of 10 percent. Since the stock sells for $20 per share, the $4 million in new debt would be used to purchase $4 million/$20 = 200,000 shares, leaving 200,000. Aft er the restructuring, Trans North would have a capital structure that was 50 percent debt, so the debt/equity ratio would be 1. Notice that, for now, we assume the stock price remains at $20.
To investigate the impact of the proposed restructuring, Morris has prepared Table 16.4, that compares the fi rm’s current capital structure to the proposed capital structure under three sce- narios. Th e scenarios refl ect diff erent assumptions about the fi rm’s EBIT. Under the expected scenario, the EBIT is $1 million. In the recession scenario, EBIT falls to $500,000. In the expan- sion scenario, it rises to $1.5 million.
TABLE 16.4
Capital structure scenarios for the Trans North Corporation
Recession Expected Expansion
Current Capital Structure: No Debt EBIT $ 500,000 $ 1,000,000 $ 1,500,000 Interest 0 0 0 Net income $ 500,000 $ 1,000,000 $ 1,500,000 ROE 6.25 % 12.50 % 18.75 % EPS $ 1.25 $ 2.50 $ 3.75
Proposed Capital Structure: Debt = $4 million EBIT $ 500,000 $ 1,000,000 $ 1,500,000 Interest 400,000 400,000 400,000 Net income $ 100,000 $ 600,000 $ 1,100,000 ROE 2.50 % 15.00 % 27.50 % EPS $ .50 $ 3.00 $ 5.50
To illustrate some of the calculations in Table 16.4, consider the expansion case. EBIT is $1.5 million. With no debt (the current capital structure) and no taxes, net income is also $1.5 million. In this case, there are 400,000 shares worth $8 million total. EPS is therefore $1.5 million/400,000 = $3.75 per share. Also, since accounting return on equity (ROE) is net income divided by total equity, ROE is $1.5 million/$8 million = 18.75%.3
3 ROE is discussed in some detail in Chapter 3.
Chapter 16: Financial Leverage and Capital Structure Policy 457
16Ross_Chapter16_3rd.indd 45716Ross_Chapter16_3rd.indd 457 12-11-01 16:2812-11-01 16:28
With $4 million in debt (the proposed capital structure), things are somewhat diff erent. Since the interest rate is 10 percent, the interest bill is $400,000. With EBIT of $1.5 million, interest of $400,000, and no taxes, net income is $1.1 million. Now there are only 200,000 shares worth $4 million total. EPS is therefore $1.1 million/200,000 = $5.50 per share versus the $3.75 per share that we calculated earlier. Furthermore, ROE is $1.1 million/$4 million = 27.5 percent. Th is is well above the 18.75 percent we calculated for the current capital structure. So our example in Table 16.4 shows how increased debt can magnify ROE when profi tability is good.
Greater use of debt also magnifi es ROE in the other direction. To see this, look at the recession case in Table 16.4. Under the current capital structure, EPS falls to $1.25 in a recession bringing ROE down to 6.25 percent. With more debt under the proposed capital structure, EPS is only $.50 and ROE drops to 2.50 percent. In brief, Table 16.4 shows that using more debt makes EPS and ROE more risky.
DEGREE OF FINANCIAL LEVERAGE As our example shows, financial leverage measures how much earnings per share (and ROE) respond to changes in EBIT. It is the financial counterpart to operating leverage that we discussed in Chapter 11. We can generalize our discus- sion of financial leverage by introducing a formula for the degree of financial leverage:
Degree of financial leverage = Percentage change in EPS
______________________ Percentage change in EBIT [16.1]
Like the degree of operating leverage, DFL varies for diff erent ranges of EPS and EBIT. To illus- trate the formula, we calculate DFL for Trans North for an EBIT of $1 million. Th ere are two calculations, one for the current and one for the proposed capital structure. Starting with the current capital structure:
DFL = ( $3.75 - 2.50 ) /2.50 _____________________________
( $1,500,000 - 1,000,000 ) /1,000,000
DFL = .50 ___ .50
DFL = 1.0
So for the existing capital structure, the degree of fi nancial leverage is 1.0. For the proposed capital structure:
DFL = ( $5.50 - 3.00 ) /3.00 ______________________________
( $1,500,000 - 1,000,000 ) /1,000,000
DFL = .83 ___ .50
DFL = 1.67
Th e proposed capital structure includes debt and this increases the degree of fi nancial leverage. Calculating DFL adds precision to our earlier observation that increasing fi nancial leverage mag- nifi es the gains and losses to shareholders. We can now say that EPS increases or decreases by a factor of 1.67 times the percentage increase or decrease in EBIT. Many analysts use a convenient alternative formula for DFL:
DFL = EBIT ______________ EBIT - Interest [16.2]
We recalculate DFL for the proposed capital structure at EBIT of $1 million to show that the new formula gives the same answer.
DFL = $1,000,000 __________________ $1,000,000 - 400,000
DFL = $1,000,000 _________ $600,000
DFL = 1.67
EPS VERSUS EBIT The impact of leverage is evident when the effect of the restructuring on EPS and ROE is examined. In particular, the variability in both EPS and ROE is much larger
458 Part 6: Cost of Capital and Long-Term Financial Policy
16Ross_Chapter16_3rd.indd 45816Ross_Chapter16_3rd.indd 458 12-11-01 16:2812-11-01 16:28
under the proposed capital structure. This illustrates how financial leverage acts to magnify gains and losses to shareholders.
In Figure 16.1, we take a closer look at the eff ect of the proposed restructuring. Th is fi gure plots earnings per share (EPS) against earnings before interest and taxes (EBIT) for the current and proposed capital structures. Th e fi rst line, labelled “No debt,” represents the case of no lever- age. Th is line begins at the origin, indicating that EPS would be zero if EBIT were zero. From there, every $400,000 increase in EBIT increases EPS by $1 (because there are 400,000 shares outstanding).
Th e second line represents the proposed capital structure. Here, EPS is negative if EBIT is zero. Th is follows because $400,000 of interest must be paid regardless of the fi rm’s profi ts. Since there are 200,000 shares in this case, the EPS is -$2 per share as shown. Similarly, if EBIT were $400,000, EPS would be exactly zero.
Th e important thing to notice in Figure 16.1 is that the slope of the line in this second case is steeper. In fact, for every $400,000 increase in EBIT, EPS rises by $2, so the line is twice as steep. Th is tells us that EPS is twice as sensitive to changes in EBIT because of the fi nancial leverage employed.
Another observation to make in Figure 16.1 is that the lines intersect. At that point, EPS is exactly the same for both capital structures. To fi nd this point, note that EPS is equal to EBIT/400,000 in the no-debt case. In the with-debt case, EPS is (EBIT - $400,000)/200,000. If we set these equal to each other, EBIT is:
EBIT/400,000 = (EBIT - 400,000)/200,000 EBIT = 2 × (EBIT - $400,000) EBIT = $800,000
FIGURE 16.1
Financial leverage, EPS, and EBIT for the Trans North Corporation
1,200,000800,000
4
3
2
1
0
–1
–2
Earnings per share (EPS) in $
EBIT (in $, no taxes)
With debt No debt
Advantage to debt
Indifference point Disadvantage to debt
400,000
Chapter 16: Financial Leverage and Capital Structure Policy 459
16Ross_Chapter16_3rd.indd 45916Ross_Chapter16_3rd.indd 459 12-11-01 16:2812-11-01 16:28
When EBIT is $800,000, EPS is $2 per share under either capital structure. Th is is labelled as the indiff erence point in Figure 16.1. If EBIT is above this level, leverage is benefi cial; if it is below this point, it is not.
Th ere is another, more intuitive way of seeing why the indiff erent point is $800,000. Notice that, if the fi rm has no debt and its EBIT is $800,000, its net income is also $800,000. In this case, the ROE is 10 percent. Th is is precisely the same as the interest rate on the debt, so the fi rm earns a return that is just suffi cient to pay the interest.
EXAMPLE 16.1: Indiff erence EBIT
The MPD Corporation has decided in favour of a capital restructuring. Currently, MPD uses no debt financing. Fol- lowing the restructuring, however, debt would be $1 mil- lion. The interest rate on the debt would be 9 percent. MPD currently has 200,000 shares outstanding, and the price per share is $20. If the restructuring is expected to increase EPS, what is the minimum level for EBIT that MPD’s management must be expecting? Ignore taxes in answering.4
To answer, we calculate EBIT at the indifferent point. At any EBIT above this, the increased financial leverage in- creases EPS, so this tells us the minimum level for EBIT. Un- der the old capital structure, EPS is simply EBIT/200,000. Under the new capital structure, the interest expense is $1 million × .09 = $90,000. Furthermore, with the $1 million
proceeds, MPD could repurchase $1 million/$20 = 50,000 shares of stock, leaving 150,000 outstanding. EPS is thus (EBIT – $90,000)/150,000.
Now that we know how to calculate EPS under both scenarios, we set them equal to each other and solve for the indifference point EBIT:
EBIT/200,000 = (EBIT – $90,000)/150,000 EBIT = (4/3) × (EBIT – $90,000) EBIT = $360,000
Check that, in either case, EPS is $1.80 when EBIT is $360,000. Management at MPD is apparently of the opin- ion that EPS will exceed $1.80.
4
Corporate Borrowing and Homemade Leverage Based on Tables 16.3 and 16.4 and Figure 16.1, Morris draws the following conclusions:
1. The effect of financial leverage depends on Trans North’s EBIT. When EBIT is expected to increase, leverage is beneficial.
2. Under the expected scenario, leverage increases the returns to shareholders, both as mea- sured by ROE and EPS.
3. Shareholders are exposed to more risk under the proposed capital structure since the EPS and ROE are more sensitive to changes in EBIT in this case.
4. Because of the impact that financial leverage has on both the expected return to shareholders and the riskiness of the stock, capital structure is an important consideration.
Th e fi rst three of these conclusions are clearly correct. Does the last conclusion necessarily follow? Surprisingly, the answer is not necessarily—at least in a world of perfect capital markets where individual investors can borrow at the same rate as corporations. As we discuss next, the reason is that shareholders can adjust the amount of fi nancial leverage by borrowing and lending on their own. Th is use of personal borrowing to alter the degree of fi nancial leverage is called homemade leverage.
We now assume perfect markets and illustrate that it actually makes no diff erence whether or not Trans North adopts the proposed capital structure, because any shareholder who prefers the proposed capital structure can simply create it using homemade leverage. To begin, the fi rst part of Table 16.5 shows what would happen to an investor who buys $2,000 worth of Trans North stock if the proposed capital structure were adopted. Th is investor purchases 100 shares of stock. From Table 16.4, EPS will either be $.50, $3.00, or $5.50, so the total earnings for 100 shares is either $50, $300, or $550 under the proposed capital structure.
4 Note that at the break-even point, taxes are irrelevant.
homemade leverage The use of personal borrowing to change the overall amount of financial leverage to which the individual is exposed.
460 Part 6: Cost of Capital and Long-Term Financial Policy
16Ross_Chapter16_3rd.indd 46016Ross_Chapter16_3rd.indd 460 12-11-01 16:2812-11-01 16:28
TABLE 16.5
Proposed capital structure versus original capital structure with homemade leverage
Recession Expected Expansion
Proposed Capital Structure EPS $ .50 $ 3.00 $ 5.50 Earnings for 100 shares 50.00 300.00 550.00
Net cost = 100 shares at $20 = $2,000 Original Capital Structure and Homemade Leverage
EPS $ 1.25 $ 2.50 $ 3.75 Earnings for 200 shares 250.00 500.00 750.00 Less: Interest on $2,000 at 10% 200.00 200.00 200.00 Net earnings $ 50.00 $300.00 $550.00
Net cost = 200 shares at $20/share - Amount borrowed = $4,000 - 2,000 = $2,000
Now, suppose that Trans North does not adopt the proposed capital structure. In this case, EPS is $1.25, $2.50, or $3.75. Th e second part of Table 16.5 demonstrates how a shareholder who pre- ferred the payoff s under the proposed structure can create them using personal borrowing. To do this, the shareholder borrows $2,000 at 10 percent on his or her own. Our investor uses this amount, along with the original $2,000, to buy 200 shares of stock. As shown, the net payoff s are exactly the same as those for the proposed capital structure.
How did we know to borrow $2,000 to create the right payoff s? We are trying to replicate Trans North’s proposed capital structure at the personal level. Th e proposed capital structure results in a debt/equity ratio of 1. To replicate it at the personal level, the shareholder must borrow enough to create this same debt/equity ratio. Since the shareholder has $2,000 in equity invested, borrowing another $2,000 creates a personal debt/equity ratio of 1.
Th is example demonstrates that investors can always increase fi nancial leverage themselves to create a diff erent pattern of payoff s. It thus makes no diff erence whether or not Trans North chooses the proposed capital structure.
EXAMPLE 16.2: Unlevering the Stock
In our Trans North example, suppose management adopts the proposed capital structure. Further suppose that an in- vestor who owned 100 shares preferred the original capital structure. Show how this investor could “unlever” the stock to re-create the original payoffs.
Recession Expected Expansion
EPS (proposed structure) $ .50 $ 3.00 $ 5.50 Earnings for 50 shares 25.00 150.00 275.00 Plus: Interest on $1,000 100.00 100.00 100.00 Total payoff $125.00 $250.00 $375.00
To create leverage, investors borrow on their own. To undo leverage, investors must lend money. For Trans North, the corporation borrowed an amount equal to half its value. The investor can unlever the stock by simply lend- ing money in the same proportion. In this case, the investor sells 50 shares for $1,000 total and then lends out the $1,000 at 10 percent. The payoffs are calculated in the ac- companying table. These are precisely the payoffs the in- vestor would have experienced under the original capital structure.
1. What is the impact of financial leverage on shareholders?
2. What is homemade leverage?
3. Why is Trans North’s capital structure irrelevant?
Concept Questions
Chapter 16: Financial Leverage and Capital Structure Policy 461
16Ross_Chapter16_3rd.indd 46116Ross_Chapter16_3rd.indd 461 12-11-01 16:2812-11-01 16:28
16.3 Capital Structure and the Cost of Equity Capital
We have seen that there is nothing special about corporate borrowing because investors can borrow or lend on their own. As a result, whichever capital structure Trans North chooses, the stock price is the same. Trans North’s capital structure is thus irrelevant, at least in the simple world we examined.
Our Trans North example is based on a famous argument advanced by two Nobel laureates, Franco Modigliani and Merton Miller, whom we henceforth call M&M. What we illustrated for the Trans North Company is a special case of M&M Proposition I. M&M Proposition I states that it is completely irrelevant how a fi rm chooses to arrange its fi nances.
M&M Proposit ion I: The Pie Model One way to illustrate M&M Proposition I is to imagine two fi rms that are identical on the left side of the statement of fi nancial position. Th eir assets and operations are exactly the same. Each fi rm earns $EBIT every year indefi nitely. No EBIT growth is projected. Th e right sides are diff er- ent because the two fi rms fi nance their operations diff erently. We can view the capital structure question as a pie model. Why we chose this name is apparent in Figure 16.2. Figure 16.2 gives two possible ways of cutting up this pie between the equity slice, E, and the debt slice, D: 40–60 percent and 60–40 percent. However, the size of the pie in Figure 16.2 is the same for both fi rms because the value of the assets is the same. Th is is precisely what M&M Proposition I states: Th e size of the pie does not depend on how it is sliced.
FIGURE 16.2
Two pie models of capital structure
Value of firm Value of firm
Stocks 40%
Bonds 60%
Stocks 60%
Bonds 40%
Proposition I is expressed in the following formula:
Vu = EBIT/REu = VL = EL + DL [16.3] where
Vu = Value of the unlevered firm VL = Value of the levered firm EBIT = Perpetual operating income REu = Equity required return for the unlevered firm EL = Market value of equity DL = Market value of debt
The Cost of Equity and Financial Leverage: M&M Proposit ion I I Although changing the capital structure of the fi rm may not change the fi rm’s total value, it does cause important changes in the fi rm’s debt and equity. We now examine what happens to a fi rm fi nanced with debt and equity when the debt/equity ratio is changed. To simplify our analysis, we continue to ignore taxes.
M&M Proposition I The value of the firm is independent of its capital structure.
462 Part 6: Cost of Capital and Long-Term Financial Policy
16Ross_Chapter16_3rd.indd 46216Ross_Chapter16_3rd.indd 462 12-11-01 16:2812-11-01 16:28
M&M PROPOSITION II In Chapter 14, we saw that if we ignore taxes the weighted aver- age cost of capital, WACC, is:
WACC = (E/V) × RE + (D/V) × RD where V = E + D. We also saw that one way of interpreting the WACC is that it is the required return on the fi rm’s overall assets. To remind us of this, we use the symbol RA to stand for the WACC and write:
RA = (E/V) × RE + (D/V) × RD If we rearrange this to solve for the cost of equity capital, we see that:5
RE = RA + (RA - RD) × (D/E) [16.4] Th is is the famous M&M Proposition II, which tells us that the cost of equity depends on three
things: the required rate of return on the fi rm’s assets, RA; the fi rm’s cost of debt, RD; and the fi rm’s debt/equity ratio, D/E.
Figure 16.3 summarizes our discussion thus far by plotting the cost of equity capital, RE, against the debt/equity ratio. As shown, M&M Proposition II indicates that the cost of equity, RE, is given by a straight line with a slope of (RA - RD). Th e y-intercept corresponds to a fi rm with a debt/ equity ratio of zero, so RA = RE in that case. Figure 16.3 shows that, as the fi rm raises its debt/ equity ratio, the increase in leverage raises the risk of the equity and, therefore, the required return or cost of equity (RE).
FIGURE 16.3
The cost of equity and the WACC; M&M Propositions I and II with no taxes
Debt/equity ratio D/E
WACC = RA
RD
RE
Cost of capital (%)
RE = RA + (RA - RD) × (D/E) by Proposition II
WACC = ( E __ V ) RE + ( D __ V
) RD V = D + E
Notice in Figure 16.3 that the WACC doesn’t depend on the debt/equity ratio; it’s the same no matter what the debt/equity ratio is. Th is is another way of stating M&M Proposition I: Th e fi rm’s overall cost of capital is unaff ected by its capital structure. As illustrated, the fact that the cost of debt is lower than the cost of equity is exactly off set by the increase in the cost of equity from bor- rowing. In other words, the change in the capital structure weights (E/V and D/V) is exactly off set by the change in the cost of equity (RE), so the WACC stays the same.
Business and Financial Risk In our previous chapter, we discussed the use of the security market line (SML) to estimate the cost of equity capital. If we now combine the SML and M&M Proposition II, we can develop a
5 Appendix 16B gives the full derivation.
M&M Proposition II A firm’s cost of equity capital is a positive linear function of its capital structure.
Chapter 16: Financial Leverage and Capital Structure Policy 463
16Ross_Chapter16_3rd.indd 46316Ross_Chapter16_3rd.indd 463 12-11-01 16:2812-11-01 16:28
particularly valuable insight into the cost of equity. Using the SML, we can write the required return on the fi rm’s assets as:
RA = Rf + (RM - Rf) × βA Th e beta coeffi cient in this case, βA, is called the fi rm’s asset beta, and it is a measure of the system- atic risk of the fi rm’s assets. It is also called the unlevered beta because it is the beta that the stock would have if the fi rm had no debt. Th e cost of equity from the SML is:
RE = Rf + (RM - Rf) × βE When this is combined with M&M Proposition II, it is straightforward to show the relationship between the equity beta, βE, and the asset beta, βA, is:6
βE = βA × (1 + D/E) [16.5] Th e term (1 + D/E) here is the same as the equity multiplier described in Chapter 3, except here it is measured in market values instead of book values. In fact, from the Du Pont identity, we saw that the fi rm’s return on assets (ROA) was equal to its return on equity (ROE) multiplied by the equity multiplier. Here we see a very similar result: Th e risk premium on the fi rm’s equity is equal to the risk premium on the fi rm’s assets multiplied by the equity multiplier.
EXAMPLE 16.3: Th e Cost of Equity Capital
The Ricardo Corporation has a weighted average cost of capital (unadjusted) of 12 percent. It can borrow at 8 per- cent. Assuming that Ricardo has a target capital structure of 80 percent equity and 20 percent debt, what is its cost of equity? What is the cost of equity if the target capital struc- ture is 50 percent equity (D/E of 1.0)? Calculate the unad- justed WACC using your answers to verify that it is the same.
According to M&M Proposition II, the cost of equity, RE, is:
RE = RA + (RA – RD) × (D/E)
In the first case, the debt/equity ratio is .2/.8 = .25, so the cost of the equity is:
RE = 12% + (12% – 8%) × (.25) = 13%
In the second case, check that the debt/equity ratio is 1.0, so the cost of equity is 16 percent. We can now calculate the unadjusted WACC assuming that the percentage of equity financing is 80 percent and the cost of equity is 13 percent:
WACC = (E/V) × RE + (D/V) × RD = .80 × 13% + .20 × 8% = 12%
In the second case, the percentage of equity financing is 50 percent and the cost of equity is 16 percent. The WACC is:
WACC = (E/V) × RE + (D/V) × RD = .50 × 16% + .50 × 8% = 12%
As we calculated, the WACC is 12 percent in both cases.
We are now in a position to examine directly the impact of fi nancial leverage on the fi rm’s cost of equity. Rewriting things a bit, we see the equity beta has two components:
βE = βA + βA × (D/E)
Th e fi rst component, βA, is a measure of the riskiness of the fi rm’s assets. Since this is deter- mined primarily by the nature of the fi rm’s operations, we say it measures the business risk of the equity. Th e second component, βA × (D/E), depends on the fi rm’s fi nancial policy. We therefore say it measures the fi nancial risk of the equity.
6 To see this, assume the firm’s debt has a beta of zero. This means that RD = Rf. If we substitute for RA and RD in M&M Proposition II, we see that: RE = RA + (RA - RD) × (D/E)
= [Rf + βA × (RM - Rf)] + ([Rf + βA × (RM - Rf)] - Rf) × (D/E) = Rf + (RM - Rf) × βA × (1 + D/E)
Thus, the equity beta, βE, equals the asset beta, βA, multiplied by the equity multiplier, (1 + D/E).
business risk The equity risk that comes from the nature of the firm’s operating activities.
financial risk The equity risk that comes from the financial policy (i.e., capital structure) of the firm.
464 Part 6: Cost of Capital and Long-Term Financial Policy
16Ross_Chapter16_3rd.indd 46416Ross_Chapter16_3rd.indd 464 12-11-01 16:2812-11-01 16:28
Th e total systematic risk of the fi rm’s equity thus has two parts: business risk and fi nancial risk. As we have illustrated, the fi rm’s cost of equity rises when it increases its use of fi nancial leverage because the fi nancial risk of the stock increases. Shareholders require compensation in the form of a larger risk premium, thereby increasing the fi rm’s cost of equity capital.
1. What does M&M Proposition I state?
2. What are the two determinants of a firm’s cost of equity?
Merton H. Miller on Capital Structure—M&M 30 Years Later
How diffi cult it is to summarize briefl y the contribution of these papers was brought home to me very clearly after Franco Modigliani was awarded the Nobel Prize in Economics, in part— but, of course, only in part—for the work in fi nance. The television camera crews from our local stations in Chicago immediately descended upon me. “We understand,” they said, “that you worked with Modigliani some years back in developing these M&M theorems, and we wonder if you could explain them briefl y to our television viewers.” “How briefl y?” I asked. “Oh, take 10 seconds,” was the reply.
Ten seconds to explain the work of a lifetime! Ten seconds to describe two carefully reasoned articles, each running to more than 30 printed pages and each with 60 or so long footnotes! When they saw the look of dismay on my face, they said: “You don’t have to go into details. Just give us the main points in simple, commonsense terms.”
The main point of the cost-of-capital article was, in principle at least, simple enough to make. It said that in an economist’s ideal world, the total market value of all the securities issued by a fi rm would be governed by the earning power and risk of its underlying real assets and would be independent of how the mix of securities issued to fi nance it was divided between debt instruments and equity capital. Some corporate treasurers might well think that they could enhance total value by increasing the proportion of debt instruments because yields on debt instruments, given their lower risk, are, by and large, substantially below those on equity capital. But, under the ideal conditions assumed, the added risk to the shareholders from issuing more debt will raise required yields on the equity by just enough to offset the seeming gain from use of low cost debt.
Such a summary would not only have been too long, but it relied on shorthand terms and concepts that are rich in connotations to economists, but hardly so to the general public. I thought, instead, of an analogy that we ourselves had invoked in the original paper. “Think of the fi rm,” I said, “as a gigantic tub of whole milk. The farmer can sell the whole milk as is. Or he can separate out the cream and sell it at a considerably higher price than the whole milk would bring. (Selling cream is the
analog of a fi rm selling low-yield and hence high- priced debt securities.) But, of course, what the farmer would have left would be skim milk, with low butter-fat content and that would sell for much less than whole milk. Skim milk corresponds to the levered equity. The M&M proposition says that if there were no costs of separation (and, of course, no government dairy support programs), the cream plus the skim milk would bring the same price as the whole milk.”
The television people conferred among themselves for a while. They informed me that it was still too long, too complicated, and too academic. “Have you anything simpler?” they asked. I thought for another way that the M&M proposition is presented which stresses the role of securities as devices for “partitioning” a fi rm’s payoffs among the group of its capital suppliers. “Think of the fi rm,” I said, “as a gigantic pizza, divided into quarters. If now, you cut each quarter in half into eighths, the M&M proposition says that you will have more pieces, but not more pizza.”
Once again widespread conversation. This time, they shut the lights off. They folded up their equipment. They thanked me for my cooperation. They said they would get back to me. But I knew that I had somehow lost my chance to start a new career as a packager of economic wisdom for TV viewers in convenient 10-second sound bites. Some have the talent for it; and some just don’t.
The late Merton H. Miller was Robert R. McCormick Distinguished Service Professor at the University of Chicago Graduate School of Business. He was famous for his path-breaking work with Franco Modigliani on corporate capital structure, cost of capital, and dividend policy. He received the Nobel Prize in Economics for his contributions in 1990 shortly after this essay was prepared.
IN THEIR OWN WORDS…
Concept Questions
Chapter 16: Financial Leverage and Capital Structure Policy 465
16Ross_Chapter16_3rd.indd 46516Ross_Chapter16_3rd.indd 465 12-11-01 16:2812-11-01 16:28
16.4 M&M Propositions I and II with Corporate Taxes
Debt has two distinguishing features that we have not taken into proper account: First, as we have mentioned in a number of places, interest paid on debt is tax deductible. Th is is good for the fi rm, and it may be an added benefi t to debt fi nancing. Second, failure to meet debt obligations can result in bankruptcy. Th is is not good for the fi rm, and it may be an added cost of debt fi nancing. Since we haven’t explicitly considered either of these two features of debt, we may get a diff erent answer about capital structure once we do. Accordingly, we consider taxes in this section and bankruptcy in the next one.
We can start by considering what happens to M&M Propositions I and II when we look at the eff ect of corporate taxes. To do this, we examine two fi rms, Firm U (unlevered) and Firm L (levered). Th ese two fi rms are identical on the left side of the balance sheet, so their assets and operations are the same.
We assume EBIT is expected to be $1,000 every year forever for both fi rms. Th e diff erence between them is that Firm L has issued $1,000 worth of perpetual bonds on which it pays 8 per- cent interest every year. Th e interest bill is thus .08 × $1,000 = $80 every year forever. Also, we assume the corporate tax rate is 30 percent.
For our two fi rms, U and L, we can now calculate the following: Firm U Firm L
EBIT $1,000 $1,000 Interest 0 80 Taxable income $1,000 $ 920 Taxes (30%) 300 276 Net income $ 700 $ 644
The Interest Tax Shield To simplify things, we assume depreciation is equal to zero. We also assume capital spending is zero and there are no additions to NWC. In this case, the cash fl ow from assets is simply equal to EBIT - Taxes. For fi rms U and L we thus have:
Cash Flow from Assets Firm U Firm L
EBIT $ 1,000 $ 1,000
-Taxes 300 276
Total $ 700 $ 724
We immediately see that capital structure is now having some eff ect because the cash fl ows from U and L are not the same even though the two fi rms have identical assets.
To see what’s going on, we can compute the cash fl ow to shareholders and bondholders. Cash Flow Firm U Firm L
To shareholders $ 700 $ 644 To bondholders 0 80 Total $ 700 $ 724
What we are seeing is that the total cash fl ow to L is $24 more. Th is occurs because L’s tax bill (which is a cash outfl ow) is $24 less. Th e fact that interest is deductible for tax purposes has generated a tax saving equal to the interest payment ($80) multiplied by the corporate tax rate (30 percent): $80 × .30 = $24. We call this tax saving the interest tax shield.
Taxes and M&M Proposit ion I Since the debt is perpetual, the same $24 shield would be generated every year forever. Th e aft er- tax cash fl ow to L would thus be the same $700 that U earns plus the $24 tax shield. Since L’s cash fl ow is always $24 greater, Firm L is worth more than Firm U by the value of this perpetuity.
Because the tax shield is generated by paying interest, it has the same risk as the debt, and 8 per- cent (the cost of debt) is therefore the appropriate discount rate. Th e value of the tax shield is thus:
PV = $24/.08 = .30 × 1,000 × .08/.08 = .30(1,000) = $300
interest tax shield The tax saving attained by a firm from interest expense.
466 Part 6: Cost of Capital and Long-Term Financial Policy
16Ross_Chapter16_3rd.indd 46616Ross_Chapter16_3rd.indd 466 12-11-01 16:2812-11-01 16:28
As our example illustrates, the value of the tax shield can be written as:
Value of the interest tax shield = (TC × RD × D)/RD [16.6] = TC × D
We have now come up with another famous result, M&M Proposition I with corporate taxes. We have seen that the value of Firm L, VL, exceeds the value of Firm U, VU, by the present value of the interest tax shield, TC × D. M&M Proposition I with taxes therefore states that:
VL = VU + TC × D [16.7] Th e eff ect of borrowing is illustrated in Figure 16.4. We have plotted the value of the levered
fi rm, VL, against the amount of debt, D. M&M Proposition I with corporate taxes implies that the relationship is given by a straight line with a slope of TC and a y-intercept of VU.
FIGURE 16.4
M&M Proposition I with taxes
Value of the firm VL VL = VU + TC � D
VL = $7,300
VU = $7,000
D Total debt1,000
VU
VU
= TC
TC � D
The value of the firm increases as total debt increases because of the interest tax shield. This is the basis of M&M Proposition I with taxes.
In Figure 16.4, we have also drawn a horizontal line representing VU. As indicated, the distance between the two lines is TC × D, the present value of the tax shield.
Suppose the cost of capital for Firm U is 10 percent. We call this the unlevered cost of capital, (RU). We can think of RU as the cost of the capital the fi rm would have if it had no debt. Firm U’s cash fl ow is $700 every year forever, and since U has no debt, the appropriate discount rate is RU = 10%. Th e value of the unlevered fi rm, VU, is simply:
VU = EBIT × (1 - TC)/RU = 700/.10 = $7,000
Th e value of the levered fi rm, VL, is:
VL = VU + TC × D = $7,000 + .30 × $1,000 = $7,300
As Figure 16.4 indicates, the value of the fi rm goes up by $.30 for every $1 in debt. In other words, the NPV per dollar in debt is $.30. It is diffi cult to imagine why any corporation would not borrow to the absolute maximum under these circumstances.
Th e result of our analysis in this section is that, once we include taxes, capital structure defi - nitely matters. However, we immediately reach the illogical conclusion that the optimal capital structure is 100 percent debt.
unlevered cost of capital (RU) The cost of capital of a firm that has no debt.
Chapter 16: Financial Leverage and Capital Structure Policy 467
16Ross_Chapter16_3rd.indd 46716Ross_Chapter16_3rd.indd 467 12-11-01 16:2812-11-01 16:28
Taxes, the WACC, and Proposit ion I I Th e conclusion that the best capital structure is 100 percent debt also can be seen by examining the weighted average cost of capital. From our previous chapter, we know that, once we consider the eff ect of taxes, the WACC is:
WACC = (E/V) × RE + (D/V) × RD × (1 - TC)
To calculate this WACC, we need to know the cost of equity. M&M Proposition II with corporate taxes states that the cost of equity is:
RE = RU + (RU - RD) × (D/E) × (1 - TC) [16.8] To illustrate, we saw a moment ago that Firm L is worth $7,300 total. Since the debt is worth $1,000, the equity must be worth $7,300 - 1,000 = $6,300. For Firm L, the cost of equity is thus:
RE = .10 + (.10 - .08) × ($1,000/$6,300) × (1 - .30) = 10.22%
Th e weighted average cost of capital is:
WACC = $6,300/$7,300 × 10.22% + $1,000/$7,300 × 8% × (1 - .30) = 9.6%
Without debt, the WACC is 10 percent; with debt, it is 9.6 percent. Th erefore, the fi rm is better off with debt.
Th is is a comprehensive example that illustrates most of the points we have discussed thus far.
EXAMPLE 16.4: Th e Cost of Equity and the Value of the Firm
You are given the following information for the Format Company:
EBIT = $166.67 TC = .40 D = $500 RU = .20
The cost of debt capital is 10 percent. What is the value of Format’s equity? What is the cost of equity capital for For- mat? What is the WACC?
This one’s easier than it looks. Remember that all the cash flows are perpetuities. The value of the firm if it had no debt, VU, is:
VU = EBIT × (1 – TC)/RU = 100/.20 = $500
From M&M Proposition I with taxes, we know that the value of the firm with debt is:
VL = VU + TC × D = $500 + .40 × $500 = $700
Since the firm is worth $700 total and the debt is worth $500, the equity is worth $200.
E = VL – D = $700 – 500 = $200
Thus, from M&M Proposition II with taxes, the cost of eq- uity is:
RE = RU + (RU – RD) × (D/E) × (1 – TC) = .20 + (.20 – .10) × ($500/200) × (1 – .40) = 35%
Finally, the WACC is:
WACC = ($200/700) × 35% + ($500/700) × 10% × (1 – .40) = 14.29%
Notice that this is substantially lower than the cost of cap- ital for the firm with no debt (RU = 20%), so debt financing is highly advantageous.
Figure 16.5 summarizes our discussion concerning the relationship between the cost of equity, the aft er-tax cost of debt, and the weighted average cost of capital. For reference, we have included RU, the unlevered cost of capital. In Figure 16.5, we have the debt/equity ratio on the horizontal axis. Notice how the WACC declines as the debt/equity ratio grows. Th is illustrates again that the more debt the fi rm uses, the lower is its WACC. Table 16.6 summarizes the key results for future reference.
468 Part 6: Cost of Capital and Long-Term Financial Policy
16Ross_Chapter16_3rd.indd 46816Ross_Chapter16_3rd.indd 468 12-11-01 16:2812-11-01 16:28
FIGURE 16.5
The cost of equity and the WACC; M&M Propositions I and II with taxes
Cost of capital (%)
RD � (1 – TC) RD � (1 – TC)
RE = 10.22%
RU = 10% RU
Debt/equity ratio, D/E
RE
$1,000/6,300 = D/E
WACC = 9.6%
= 8% � (1 – .30) = 5.6%
WACC
RE = RU + (RU - RD) × (D/E) × (1 - TC) by Proposition II with taxes
WACC = ( E __ V ) × RE + ( D __ V
) × RD × (1 - TC)
TABLE 16.6 Modigliani and Miller summary
The no tax case
� Proposition I: The value of the firm leveraged (VL) is equal to the value of the firm unleveraged (VU): VL = VU Implications of Proposition I: 1. A firm’s capital structure is irrelevant. 2. A firm’s weighted average cost of capital (WACC) is the same no matter what mixture of debt and equity is used to finance the firm.
� Proposition II: The cost of equity, RE, is RE = RA + (RA - RD) × D/E, where RA is the WACC, RD is the cost of debt, and D/E is the debt/equity ratio. Implications of Proposition II: 1. The cost of equity rises as the firm increases its use of debt financing. 2. The risk of the equity depends on two things, the riskiness of the firm’s operations (business risk) and the degree of financial leverage (financial risk).
With taxes
� Proposition I with taxes: The value of the firm leveraged (VL) is equal to the value of the firm unleveraged (VU) plus the present value of the interest tax shield: VL = VU + TC × D where TC is the corporate tax rate and D is the amount of debt. Implications of Proposition I: 1. Debt financing is highly advantageous, and, in the extreme, a firm’s optimal capital structure is 100 percent debt. 2. A firm’s weighted average cost of capital (WACC) decreases as the firm relies on debt financing.
� Proposition II with taxes: The cost of equity, RE, is RE = RU + (RU - RD) × (D/E) × (1 - TC), where RU is the unleveraged cost of capital, that is, the cost of capital for the firm if it had no debt. Unlike Proposition I, the general implications of Proposition II are the same whether there are taxes or not.
Chapter 16: Financial Leverage and Capital Structure Policy 469
16Ross_Chapter16_3rd.indd 46916Ross_Chapter16_3rd.indd 469 12-11-01 16:2812-11-01 16:28
1. What is the relationship between the value of an unlevered firm and the value of a levered firm once we consider the effect of corporate taxes?
2. If we only consider the effect of taxes, what is the optimum capital structure?
16.5 Bankruptcy Costs
One limit to the amount of debt a fi rm might use comes in the form of bankruptcy costs. Bank- ruptcy costs are a form of the agency costs of debt introduced in Chapter 1. As the debt/equity ratio rises, so too does the probability that the fi rm could be unable to pay its bondholders what was promised to them. When this happens, ownership of the fi rm’s assets is ultimately transferred from the shareholders to the bondholders. Th e credit crisis and recession starting at the end of 2007 brought an increase in large bankruptcies including Lehman Brothers, Washington Mutual and General Motors in the U.S. and Nortel and AbitibiBowater in Canada. All of these companies had taken on excessive leverage.
In principle, a fi rm is bankrupt when the value of its assets equals the value of the debt. When this occurs, the value of equity is zero and the shareholders turn over control of the fi rm to the bondholders. When this takes place, the bondholders hold assets whose value is exactly equal to what is owed on the debt. In a perfect world, there are no costs associated with this transfer of ownership, and the bondholders don’t lose anything.
Th is idealized view of bankruptcy is not, of course, what happens in the real world. Ironically, it is expensive to go bankrupt. As we discuss, the costs associated with bankruptcy may eventually off set the tax-related gains from leverage.
Direct Bankruptcy Costs When the value of a fi rm’s assets equals the value of its debt, the fi rm is economically bankrupt in the sense that the equity has no value. However, the formal means of turning over the assets to the bondholders is a legal process, not an economic one. Th ere are legal and administrative costs to bankruptcy, and it has been remarked that bankruptcies are to lawyers what blood is to sharks.
For example, in April 2009, Montreal based paper and pulp manufacturer, AbitibiBowater Inc., fi led for bankruptcy in the U.S and Canada. Over the next one year, the company went through the bankruptcy process, fi nally emerging in December 2010 as Resolute Forest Products. Th e direct bankruptcy costs were staggering: Resolute spent over $250 million on lawyers, accoun- tants, consultants, and examiners.
Because of the expenses associated with bankruptcy, bondholders won’t get all that they are owed. Some fraction of the fi rm’s assets disappear in the legal process of going bankrupt. Th ese are the legal and administrative expenses associated with the bankruptcy proceeding. We call these costs direct bankruptcy costs.
Th ese direct bankruptcy costs are a disincentive to debt fi nancing. When a fi rm goes bankrupt, suddenly, a piece of the fi rm disappears. Th is amounts to a bankruptcy tax. So a fi rm faces a trade- off : Borrowing saves a fi rm money on its corporate taxes, but the more a fi rm borrows, the more likely it is that the fi rm becomes bankrupt and has to pay the bankruptcy tax.
Indirect Bankruptcy Costs Because it is expensive to go bankrupt, a fi rm spends resources to avoid doing so. When a fi rm is having signifi cant problems in meeting its debt obligations, we say it is experiencing fi nancial distress. Some fi nancially distressed fi rms ultimately fi le for bankruptcy, but most do not because they are able to recover or otherwise survive.
Th e costs of avoiding a bankruptcy fi ling by a fi nancially distressed fi rm are one example of indirect bankruptcy costs. We use the term fi nancial distress costs to refer generically to the direct and indirect costs associated with going bankrupt and/or avoiding a bankruptcy fi ling.
Th e problems that come up in fi nancial distress are particularly severe, and the fi nancial dis- tress costs are thus larger, when the shareholders and the bondholders are diff erent groups. Until
Concept Questions
direct bankruptcy costs The costs that are directly associated with bankruptcy, such as legal and administrative expenses.
indirect bankruptcy costs The difficulties of running a business that is experiencing financial distress.
financial distress costs The direct and indirect costs associated with going bankrupt or experiencing financial distress.
470 Part 6: Cost of Capital and Long-Term Financial Policy
16Ross_Chapter16_3rd.indd 47016Ross_Chapter16_3rd.indd 470 12-11-01 16:2812-11-01 16:28
the fi rm is legally bankrupt, the shareholders control it. Th ey, of course, take actions in their own economic interests. Since the shareholders can be wiped out in a legal bankruptcy, they have a very strong incentive to avoid a bankruptcy fi ling.
Th e bondholders, on the other hand, are primarily concerned with protecting the value of the fi rm’s assets and try to take control away from shareholders. Th ey have a strong incentive to seek bankruptcy to protect their interests and keep shareholders from further dissipating the assets of the fi rm. Th e net eff ect of all this fi ghting is that a long, drawn-out, and potentially quite expen- sive, legal battle gets started.
Long before the wheels of justice begin to turn, the assets of the fi rm lose value because man- agement is busy trying to avoid bankruptcy instead of running the business. Further, as they get desperate, managers may adopt go-for-broke strategies that increase the risk of the fi rm. A good example of this occurred in the failure of two banks in Western Canada in 1985. Because they were allowed to stay in business although they were economically insolvent, the banks had noth- ing to lose by taking great risks. Solvent banks had to pay increased deposit insurance premiums to shore up the resources of the Canada Deposit Insurance Corporation.
When fi rms are on the brink of bankruptcy, normal operations are disrupted, and sales are lost. Valuable employees leave, potentially fruitful programs are dropped to preserve cash, and otherwise profi table investments are not taken. For example, in 2009 General Motors and Chrys- ler aft er experiencing signifi cant fi nancial diffi culty, fi led for bankruptcy in the U.S. As a result of the bad news surrounding the companies, there was a loss of confi dence in their automobiles. A survey showed that many people would not purchase an automobile from a bankrupt company because the company might not honour the warranty. Th is concern resulted in lost potential sales which only added to the companies’ diffi culties. In 2009, the Obama administration announced a program under which the U.S. Treasury would back the warranties of GM and Chrysler.
Th ese are all indirect bankruptcy costs, or costs of fi nancial distress. Whether or not the fi rm ultimately goes bankrupt, the net eff ect is a loss of value because the fi rm chose to use too much debt in its capital structure. Th is possibility of loss limits the amount of debt a fi rm chooses to use.
Agency Costs of Equity Bankruptcy costs are agency costs of debt that increase with the amount of debt a fi rm uses. Agency costs of equity can result from shirking by owner-managers and work in the opposite direction. Th e idea is that when a fi rm run by an owner-entrepreneur issues debt, the entrepre- neur has an incentive to work harder because he or she retains the claim to all the payoff s beyond the fi xed interest on the debt. If the fi rm issues equity instead, the owner-entrepreneur’s stake is diluted. In this case, the entrepreneur has more incentive to work shorter hours and to con- sume more perquisites (a big offi ce, a company car, more expense account meals) than if the fi rm issues debt. Adelphia and Hollinger are two famous examples of publicly traded companies where owner-entrepreneurs allegedly used company funds to fi nance all sorts of perquisites.
Agency costs of equity are likely to be more signifi cant for smaller fi rms where the dilution of ownership by issuing equity is signifi cant. Underpricing of new equity issues, especially IPOs, dis- cussed in Chapter 15, is the market’s response to the agency costs of equity. In eff ect, underpricing passes most of these agency costs back to owner-entrepreneurs. Th e fi nal eff ect is that fi rms may use more debt than otherwise.
In the 1980s, it was argued that leveraged buyouts (LBOs) signifi cantly reduced the agency costs of equity. In an LBO, a purchaser (usually a team of existing management) buys out the shareholders at a price above the current market. In other words, the company goes private since the stock is placed in the hands of only a few people. Because the managers now own a substantial chunk of the business, they are likely to work harder than when they were simply employees. Th e track record of LBOs is at best mixed, and we discuss them in detail in Chapter 23.
1. What are direct bankruptcy costs?
2. What are indirect bankruptcy costs?
3. What are the agency costs of equity?
cdic.ca
Concept Questions
Chapter 16: Financial Leverage and Capital Structure Policy 471
16Ross_Chapter16_3rd.indd 47116Ross_Chapter16_3rd.indd 471 12-11-01 16:2812-11-01 16:28
16.6 Optimal Capital Structure
Our previous two sections have established the basis for an optimal capital structure. A fi rm borrows because the interest tax shield is valuable. At relatively low debt levels, the probability of bankruptcy and fi nancial distress is low, and the benefi t from debt outweighs the cost. At very high debt levels, the possibility of fi nancial distress is a chronic, ongoing problem for the fi rm, so the benefi t from debt fi nancing may be more than off set by the fi nancial distress costs. Based on our discussion, it would appear that an optimal capital structure exists somewhere between these extremes.
The Static Theory of Capital Structure Th e theory of capital structure that we have outlined is called the static theory of capital struc- ture. It says that fi rms borrow up to the point where the tax benefi t from an extra dollar in debt is exactly equal to the cost that comes from the increased probability of fi nancial distress. We call this the static theory because it assumes the fi rm’s assets and operations are fi xed and it only con- siders possible changes in the debt/equity ratio.
Th e static theory is illustrated in Figure 16.6, which plots the value of the fi rm, VL, against the amount of debt, D. In Figure 16.6, we have drawn lines corresponding to three diff erent stories. Th e fi rst is M&M Proposition I with no taxes. Th is is the horizontal line extending from VU, and it indicates that the value of the fi rm is unaff ected by its capital structure. Th e second case, M&M Proposition I with corporate taxes, is given by the upward-sloping straight line. Th ese two cases are exactly the same as the ones we previously illustrated in Figure 16.4.
Th e third case in Figure 16.6 illustrates our current discussion: Th e value of the fi rm rises to a maximum and then declines beyond that point. Th is is the picture that we get from our static theory. Th e maximum value of the fi rm, VL*, is reached at D*, so this is the optimal amount of borrowing. Put another way, the fi rm’s optimal capital structure is composed of D*/VL* in debt and (1 - D*/VL*) in equity.
Th e fi nal thing to notice in Figure 16.6 is that the diff erence between the value of the fi rm in our static theory and the M&M value of the fi rm with taxes is the loss in value from the possibility of fi nancial distress. Also, the diff erence between the static theory value of the fi rm and the M&M value with taxes is the gain from leverage, net of distress costs.7
FIGURE 16.6
The static theory of capital structure. The optimal capital structure and the value of the firm.
Actual firm value
VU = Value of firm with no debt
Financial distress costs
D Total debtD*
Optimal amount of debt
Maximum firm value VL*
Value of the firm VL
Present value of tax shield on debt
VL = VU + TC � D
VU
•
According to the static theory, the gain from the tax shield on debt is offset by financial distress costs. An optimal capital structure exists that just balances the additional gain from leverage against the added financial distress cost.
7 Another way of arriving at Figure 16.6 is to introduce personal taxes on interest and equity disbursements. Interest is taxed more heavily than dividends and capital gains in Canada. This creates a tax disadvantage to leverage that partially offsets the corporate tax advantage to debt. This argument is developed in Appendix 16A.
static theory of capital structure Theory that a firm borrows up to the point where the tax benefit from an extra dollar in debt is exactly equal to the cost that comes from the increased probability of financial distress.
472 Part 6: Cost of Capital and Long-Term Financial Policy
16Ross_Chapter16_3rd.indd 47216Ross_Chapter16_3rd.indd 472 12-11-01 16:2812-11-01 16:28
Optimal Capital Structure and the Cost of Capital As we discussed earlier, the capital structure that maximizes the value of the fi rm is also the one that minimizes the cost of capital. Figure 16.7 illustrates the static theory of capital structure in the weighted average cost of capital and the costs of debt and equity. Notice in Figure 16.7 that we have plotted the various capital costs against the debt/equity ratio, D/E.
Figure 16.7 is much the same as Figure 16.5 except that we have added a new line for the WACC. Th is line, which corresponds to the static theory, declines at fi rst. Th is occurs because the aft er-tax cost of debt is cheaper than equity, at least initially, so the overall cost of capital declines.
At some point, the cost of debt begins to rise and the fact that debt is cheaper than equity is more than off set by the fi nancial distress costs. At this point, further increases in debt actually increase the WACC. As illustrated, the minimum WACC occurs at the point D*/E*, just as we described earlier.
FIGURE 16.7
The static theory of capital structure. The optimal capital structure and the cost of capital.
Minimum cost of capital
Cost of capital (%)
WACC*
D*/ E* The optimal debt / equity ratio
Debt/equity ratio D/E
RE
WACC
RD � (1 – TC)
RU
According to the static theory, the WACC falls initially because of the tax advantage to debt. Beyond the point D*/E*, it begins to rise because of financial distress costs.
Optimal Capital Structure: A Recap With the help of Figure 16.8, we can recap (no pun intended) our discussion of capital structure and cost of capital. As we have noted, there are essentially three cases. We will use the simplest of the three cases as a starting point and then build up to the static theory of capital structure. Along the way, we will pay particular attention to the connection between capital structure, fi rm value, and cost of capital.
Figure 16.8 illustrates the original Modigliani and Miller (M&M) no-tax, no-bankruptcy argu- ment in Case I. Th is is the most basic case. In the top part, we have plotted the value of the fi rm, VL, against total debt, D. When there are no taxes, bankruptcy costs, or other real-world imper- fections, we know that the total value of the fi rm is not aff ected by its debt policy, so VL is simply constant. Th e bottom part of Figure 16.8 tells the same story in terms of the cost of capital. Here, the weighted average cost of capital, WACC, is plotted against the debt to equity ratio, D/E. As with total fi rm value, the overall cost of capital is not aff ected by debt policy in this basic case, so the WACC is constant.
Chapter 16: Financial Leverage and Capital Structure Policy 473
16Ross_Chapter16_3rd.indd 47316Ross_Chapter16_3rd.indd 473 12-11-01 16:2812-11-01 16:28
FIGURE 16.8
The capital structure question
VL*
VU
D*/ E*
Debt/equity ratio D/E
RU
Value of the firm (VL)
PV of bankruptcy costs
Net gain from leverage
Case II M&M (with taxes)
Case III Static Theory Case I M&M (no taxes)
Case I M&M (no taxes)
Case III Static Theory
Case II M&M (with taxes)
Total debt (D)D*
Weighted average cost of capital (WACC) (%)
WACC*
Net saving from leverage
Case I With no taxes or bankruptcy costs, the value of the firm and its weighted average cost of capital are not affected by capital structure.
Case II With corporate taxes and no bankruptcy costs, the value of the firm increases and the weighted average cost of capital decreases as the amount of debt goes up.
Case III With corporate taxes and bankruptcy costs, the value of the firm VL* reaches a maximum at D*, the optimal amount of borrowing. At the same time, the weighted average cost of capital, WACC*, is minimized at D*/E*.
Next, we consider what happens to the original M&M arguments once taxes are introduced. As Case II illustrates, we now see that the fi rm’s value critically depends on its debt policy. Th e more the fi rm borrows, the more it is worth. From our earlier discussion, we know this happens because interest payments are tax deductible, and the gain in fi rm value is just equal to the present value of the interest tax shield.
In the bottom part of Figure 16.8, notice how the WACC declines as the fi rm uses more and more debt fi nancing. As the fi rm increases its fi nancial leverage, the cost of equity does increase, but this increase is more than off set by the tax break associated with debt fi nancing. As a result, the fi rm’s overall cost of capital declines.
To fi nish our story, we include the impact of bankruptcy of fi nancial distress costs to get Case III. As shown in the top part of Figure 16.8, the value of the fi rm will not be as large as we previ- ously indicated. Th e reason is that the fi rm’s value is reduced by the present value of the potential future bankruptcy costs. Th ese costs grow as the fi rm borrows more and more, and they eventu- ally overwhelm the tax advantage of debt fi nancing. Th e optimal capital structure occurs at D*, the point at which the tax saving from an additional dollar in debt fi nancing is exactly balanced by the increased bankruptcy costs associated with the additional borrowing. Th is is the essence of the static theory of capital structure.
Th e bottom part of Figure 16.8 presents the optimal capital structure in terms of the cost of capital. Corresponding to D*, the optimal debt level, is the optimal debt to equity ratio, D*/E*. At this level of debt fi nancing, the lowest possible weighted average cost of capital, WACC*, occurs.
474 Part 6: Cost of Capital and Long-Term Financial Policy
16Ross_Chapter16_3rd.indd 47416Ross_Chapter16_3rd.indd 474 12-11-01 16:2812-11-01 16:28
Capital Structure: Some Managerial Recommendations Th e static model that we described is not capable of identifying a precise optimal capital structure, but it does point out two of the more relevant factors: taxes and fi nancial distress. We can draw some limited conclusions concerning these.
TAXES First, the tax benefit from leverage is obviously important only to firms that are in a tax-paying position. Firms with substantial accumulated losses get little value from the tax shield. Furthermore, firms that have substantial tax shields from other sources, such as depreciation, get less benefit from leverage.
Also, not all fi rms have the same tax rate. Th e higher the tax rate, the greater the incentive to borrow.
FINANCIAL DISTRESS Firms with a greater risk of experiencing financial distress bor- row less than firms with a lower risk of financial distress. For example, all other things being equal, the greater the volatility in EBIT, the less a firm should borrow.
In addition, fi nancial distress is more costly for some fi rms than others. Th e costs of fi nancial distress depend primarily on the fi rm’s assets. In particular, fi nancial distress costs are determined by how easily ownership of those assets can be transferred.
For example, a fi rm with mostly tangible assets that can be sold without great loss in value has an incentive to borrow more. If a fi rm has a large investment in land, buildings, and other tangible assets, it has lower fi nancial costs than a fi rm with a large investment in research and develop- ment. Research and development typically has less resale value than land; thus, most of its value disappears in fi nancial distress.
Timminco, a Canadian producer of silicon used for solar panels, provides an excellent example of the eff ects fi nancial distress can have on a company. Th e fi rm faced considerable unexpected volatility in its earnings with reduced cash fl ow from silicon metal operations, slow growth in the solar market industry, and the restricted availability of funding. As a result, it appears to have relied too heavily on borrowing and was forced to enter into bankruptcy protection in January 2012. In April 2012, the company held an auction to sell off its business and assets.
1. Describe the trade-off that defines the static theory of capital structure.
2. What are the important factors in making capital structure decisions?
16.7 The Pie Again
Although it is comforting to know that the fi rm might have an optimal capital structure when we take account of such real-world matters as taxes and fi nancial distress costs, it is disquieting to see the elegant, original M&M intuition (that is, the no-tax version) fall apart in the face of them.
Critics of the M&M theory oft en say it fails to hold as soon as we add in real-world issues and that the M&M theory is really just that, a theory that doesn’t have much to say about the real world that we live in. In fact, they would argue that it is the M&M theory that is irrelevant, not capital structure. As we discuss next, however, taking that view blinds critics to the real value of the M&M theory.
The Extended Pie Model To illustrate the value of the original M&M intuition, we briefl y consider an expanded version of the pie model that we introduced earlier. In the extended pie model, taxes just represent another claim on the cash fl ows of the fi rm. Since taxes are reduced as leverage is increased, the value of the government’s claim (G) on the fi rm’s cash fl ows decreases with leverage.
Concept Questions
Chapter 16: Financial Leverage and Capital Structure Policy 475
16Ross_Chapter16_3rd.indd 47516Ross_Chapter16_3rd.indd 475 12-11-01 16:2812-11-01 16:28
Bankruptcy costs are also a claim on the cash fl ows. Th ey come into play as the fi rm comes close to bankruptcy and has to alter its behaviour to attempt to stave off the event itself, and they become large when bankruptcy actually occurs. Th us, the value of the cash fl ows to this claim (B) rises with the debt/equity ratio.
Th e extended pie theory simply holds that all of these claims can be paid from only one source, the cash fl ows (CF) of the fi rm. Algebraically, we must have:
CF = Payments to shareholders + Payments to bondholders + Payments to the government + Payments to bankruptcy courts and lawyers + Payments to any and all other claimants to the cash flow of the firm
Th e extended pie model is illustrated in Figure 16.9. Notice that we have added a few slices for the other groups. Notice also the relative size of the slices as the fi rm’s use of debt fi nancing is increased.
With this list, we have not even begun to exhaust the potential claims to the fi rm’s cash fl ows. To give an unusual example, everyone reading this book has an economic claim to the cash fl ows of Gen- eral Motors Corporation (GM). Aft er all, if you are injured in an accident involving a GM vehicle, you might sue GM, and, win or lose, GM expends some of its cash fl ow in dealing with the matter. For GM, or any other company, there should thus be a slice of the pie representing the potential lawsuits.
Th is is the essence of the M&M intuition and theory: Th e value of the fi rm depends on the total cash fl ow of the fi rm. Th e fi rm’s capital structure just cuts that cash fl ow up into slices without altering the total. What we recognize now is that the shareholders and the bondholders may not be the only ones who can claim a slice.
FIGURE 16.9
The extended pie model
Bondholder claim
Bondholder claim
Higher financial leverageLower financial leverage
Shareholder claim
Bankruptcy claim
Tax claim
Shareholder claim Bankruptcy
claim
Tax claim
In the extended pie model, the value of all the claims against the firm’s cash flows is not affected by capital structure, but the relative value of claims changes as the amount of debt financing is increased.
Marketed Claims versus Non-Marketed Claims With our extended pie model, there is an important distinction between claims such as those of shareholders and bondholders, on the one hand, and those of the government and potential litigants in lawsuits on the other. Th e fi rst set of claims are marketed claims, and the second set are non-marketed claims. A key diff erence is that the marketed claims can be bought and sold in fi nancial markets and the non-marketed claims cannot be.
When we speak of the value of the fi rm, we are generally referring just to the value of the mar- keted claims, VM, and not the value of the non-marketed claims, VN. If we write VT for the total value of all the claims against a corporation’s cash fl ows, then:
VT = E + D + G + B + … = VM + VN
gm.com
476 Part 6: Cost of Capital and Long-Term Financial Policy
16Ross_Chapter16_3rd.indd 47616Ross_Chapter16_3rd.indd 476 12-11-01 16:2812-11-01 16:28
Th e essence of our extended pie model is that this total value, VT, of all the claims to the fi rm’s cash fl ows is unaltered by capital structure. However, the value of the marketed claims, VM, may be aff ected by changes in the capital structure.
By the pie theory, any increase in VM must imply an identical decrease in VN. Th e optimal capital structure is thus the one that maximizes the value of the marketed claims, or, equivalently, minimizes the value of non-marketed claims such as taxes and bankruptcy costs.
1. What are some of the claims to a firm’s cash flows?
2. What is the difference between a marketed claim and a non-marketed claim?
3. What does the extended pie model say about the value of all the claims to a firm’s cash flows?
16.8 The Pecking-Order Theory
Th e static theory we have developed in this chapter has dominated thinking about capital struc- ture for a long time, but it has some shortcomings. Perhaps the most obvious is that many large, fi nancially sophisticated, and highly profi table fi rms use little debt. Th is is the opposite of what we would expect. Under the static theory, these are the fi rms that should use the most debt because there is little risk of bankruptcy and the value of the tax shield is substantial. Why do they use so little debt? Th e pecking-order theory, which we consider next, may be part of the answer.
Internal Financing and the Pecking Order Th e pecking-order theory is an alternative to the static theory. A key element in the pecking-order theory is that fi rms prefer to use internal fi nancing whenever possible. A simple reason is that selling securities to raise cash can be expensive, so it makes sense to avoid doing so if possible. If a fi rm is very profi table, it might never need external fi nancing; so it would end up with little or no debt. For example, in December 2011, Google’s balance sheet showed assets of $72.6 billion, of which almost $44.6 billion was classifi ed as either cash or marketable securities. In fact, Google held so much of its assets in the form of securities that, at one point, it was in danger of being regulated as a mutual fund!
Th ere is a more subtle reason that companies may prefer internal fi nancing. Suppose you are the manager of a fi rm, and you need to raise external capital to fund a new venture. As an insider, you are privy to a lot of information that isn’t known to the public. Based on your knowledge, the fi rm’s future prospects are considerably brighter than outside investors realize. As a result, you think your stock is currently undervalued. Should you issue debt or equity to fi nance the new venture?
If you think about it, you defi nitely don’t want to issue equity in this case. Th e reason is that your stock is undervalued, and you don’t want to sell it too cheaply. So, you issue debt instead.
Would you ever want to issue equity? Suppose you thought your fi rm’s stock was overvalued. It makes sense to raise money at infl ated prices, but a problem crops up. If you try to sell equity, investors will realize that the shares are probably overvalued, and your stock price will take a hit. In other words, if you try to raise money by selling equity, you run the risk of signaling to invest- ors that the price is too high. In fact, in the real world, companies rarely sell new equity, and the market reacts negatively to such sales when they occur.
So, we have a pecking order. Companies will use internal fi nancing fi rst. Th en, they will issue debt if necessary. Equity will be sold pretty much as a last resort.
Implications of the Pecking Order Th e pecking-order theory has several signifi cant implications, a couple of which are at odds with our static trade-off theory:
Concept Questions
Chapter 16: Financial Leverage and Capital Structure Policy 477
16Ross_Chapter16_3rd.indd 47716Ross_Chapter16_3rd.indd 477 12-11-01 16:2812-11-01 16:28
1. No target capital structure: Under the pecking-order theory, there is no target or optimal debt–equity ratio. Instead, a firm’s capital structure is determined by its need for external fi- nancing, which dictates the amount of debt the firm will have.
2. Profitable firms use less debt: Because profitable firms have greater internal cash flow, they will need less external financing and will therefore have less debt. As we mentioned earlier, this is a pattern that we seem to observe, at least for some companies.
3. Companies will want financial slack: To avoid selling new equity, companies will want to stockpile internally generated cash. Such a cash reserve is known as financial slack. It gives management the ability to finance projects as they appear and to move quickly if necessary.
Which theory, static trade-off or pecking order, is correct? Financial researchers have not reached a defi nitive conclusion on this issue, but we can make a few observations. Th e trade-off theory speaks more to long-run fi nancial goals or strategies. Th e issues of tax shields and fi nancial dis- tress costs are plainly important in that context. Th e pecking-order theory is more concerned with the shorter-run, tactical issue of raising external funds to fi nance investments. So both theo- ries are useful ways of understanding corporate use of debt. For example, it is probably the case that fi rms have long-run, target capital structures, but it is also probably true that they will deviate from those long-run targets as needed to avoid issuing new equity.
1. Under the pecking-order theory, what is the order in which firms will obtain financing?
2. Why might firms prefer not to issue new equity?
3. What are some differences in implications of the static and pecking-order theories?
16.9 Observed Capital Structures
No two fi rms have identical capital structures. Nonetheless, we see some regular elements when we start looking at actual capital structures. We discuss a few of these next.
A pattern is apparent when we compare capital structures across industries. Table 16.7 shows Canadian debt/equity ratios for selected industries measured at book values. You can see rather large diff erences in the use of debt among industries. Real estate developers and operators, for example, carry about three times as much debt as manufacturers. Th is is consistent with our discussion of the costs of fi nancial distress. Real estate developers have large tangible assets while manufacturers carry signifi cant intangible assets in the form of research and development.
Further, because diff erent industries have diff erent operating characteristics, for example, EBIT volatility and asset types, there does appear to be some connection between these characteristics and capital structure. Our story involving tax savings and fi nancial distress costs is undoubtedly part of the reason, but, to date, there is no fully satisfactory theory that explains these regularities.
In practice, fi rms (and lenders) also look at the industry’s debt/equity ratio as a guide. If the industry is sound, the industry average provides a useful benchmark. Of course, if the entire indus- try is in distress, the average leverage is likely too high. For example, in 2011, the average debt/ equity ratio of the Arts, Entertainment and Recreation industry (2.868) was probably too high.
Th e leverage ratios in Table 16.7 are considerably higher than they were in the 1960s. Most of the increase in Canada came in the 1970s and early 1980s—periods of low interest rates and economic growth particularly in Western Canada. Signifi cant corporate tax rates encouraged cor- porations to use debt fi nancing. Table 16.7 shows that the construction industry had one of the highest uses of leverage in 2011 and this industry accounts for a major portion of the leverage increase for Canadian companies over the last 40 years. In the U.S., the increase in leverage was similar but occurred in the leveraged buyout period of the 1980s.8
8 Our discussion of trends in leverage draws on M. Zyblock, “Corporate Financial Leverage: A Canada–U.S. Compari- son, 1961–1996,” Statistics Canada, Paper no. 111, December 1997 and P.M. Shum, “Taxes and Corporate Debt Policy in Canada: An Empirical Investigation,” Canadian Journal of Economics 29, August 1996.
Concept Questions
478 Part 6: Cost of Capital and Long-Term Financial Policy
16Ross_Chapter16_3rd.indd 47816Ross_Chapter16_3rd.indd 478 12-11-01 16:2812-11-01 16:28
TABLE 16.7
Book value long-term debt/equity ratios for selected industries in Canada, 2011
Industry Ratio
All industries 0.868 Non-financial 0.887 Agriculture, forestry, fishing, and hunting 1.097 Oil and gas extraction and support activities 0.593 Mining and quarrying (except oil and gas) 0.607 Utilities 1.228 Construction 1.444 Manufacturing 0.682 Wholesale trade 0.827 Retail trade 0.753 Transportation and warehousing 1.617 Information and cultural industries 1.302 Real estate and rental and leasing 1.504 Professional, scientific, and technical services 0.631 Administrative and support, waste management, and remediation services 0.791 Educational, healthcare, and social assistance services 0.715 Arts, entertainment and recreation 2.868 Accommodation and food services 2.180 Repair, maintenance, and personal services 0.871 Finance and insurance 0.815
Source: Statistics Canada “Quarterly fi nancial statistics for enterprises,” 61-008-XWE, Fourth Quarter, 2011, March 2012.
1. Do Canadian corporations rely heavily on debt financing? What about U.S. corporations?
2. What regularities do we observe in capital structures?
16.10 Long-Term Financing Under Financial Distress and Bankruptcy
One of the consequences of using debt is the possibility of fi nancial distress, which can be defi ned in several ways:
1. Business failure. Although this term usually refers to a situation where a business has termi- nated with a loss to creditors, even an all-equity firm can fail.9
2. Legal bankruptcy. Firms bring petitions to a federal court for bankruptcy. Bankruptcy is a legal proceeding for liquidating or reorganizing a business.
3. Technical insolvency. Technical insolvency occurs when a firm defaults on a current legal ob- ligation; for example, it does not pay a bill. Technical insolvency is a short-term condition that may be reversed to avoid bankruptcy.
4. Accounting insolvency. Firms with negative net worth are insolvent on the books. This hap- pens when the total book liabilities exceed the book value of the total assets.
For future reference, we defi ne bankruptcy as the transfer of some or all of the fi rm’s assets to creditors. We now very briefl y discuss what happens in fi nancial distress and some of the relevant issues associated with bankruptcy.10
9 Dun & Bradstreet Canada Ltd. compiles failure statistics in “The Canadian Business Failure Record.” 10 Our discussion of bankruptcy procedures is based on the 2009 Bankruptcy and Insolvency Act.
Concept Questions
bankruptcy A legal proceeding for liquidating or reorganizing a business. Also, the transfer of some or all of a firm’s assets to its creditors.
Chapter 16: Financial Leverage and Capital Structure Policy 479
16Ross_Chapter16_3rd.indd 47916Ross_Chapter16_3rd.indd 479 12-11-01 16:2812-11-01 16:28
Liquidation and Reorganization Firms that cannot or choose not to make contractually required payments to creditors have two basic options: liquidation or reorganization. Both of these options are covered under the Bank- ruptcy and Insolvency Act (1992). Liquidation means termination of the fi rm as a going concern, and it involves selling the assets of the fi rm. Th e proceeds, net of selling costs, are distributed to creditors in order of established priority. Reorganization is the option of keeping the fi rm a going concern; it oft en involves issuing new securities to replace old securities. Liquidation or reorga- nization is the result of a bankruptcy proceeding, which occurs depends on whether the fi rm is worth more dead or alive.
Before the early 1990s, most legal bankruptcies in Canada ended with liquidation. More recently, more frequent cases of fi nancial distress along with new bankruptcy laws are encour- aging restructuring and reorganizations. For example, in 2003, Air Canada’s cash fl ow was not enough to cover its operating expenses, including interest and principal payments on its $13 bil- lion in debt. Th e company had experienced several unusual business circumstances including the terrorist attacks in 2001 and the SARS health crisis in Asia and Canada, and was said to be using up to $5 million a day in cash. Th e company decided to seek court protection to allow it to restructure its assets and avoid formal bankruptcy liquidation.
BANKRUPTCY LIQUIDATION Liquidation occurs when the court directs sale of all assets of the firm. The following sequence of events is typical:
1. A petition is filed in a federal court. Corporations may file a voluntary petition, or involun- tary petitions may be filed against the corporation by creditors.
2. A trustee-in-bankruptcy is elected by the creditors to take over the assets of the debtor cor- poration. The trustee attempts to liquidate the assets.
3. When the assets are liquidated, after the payment of the bankruptcy administration costs, the proceeds are distributed among the creditors.
4. If any assets remain, after expenses and payments to creditors, they are distributed to the shareholders.
Th e distribution of the proceeds of the liquidation occurs according to the following priority. Th e higher a claim is on the list, the more likely it is to be paid. In many of these categories, we omit various limitations and qualifi cations for the sake of brevity.
1. Administrative expenses associated with the bankruptcy. 2. Other expenses arising after the filing of an involuntary bankruptcy petition but before the
appointment of a trustee. 3. Wages, salaries, and commissions. 4. Contributions to employee benefit plans. 5. Consumer claims. 6. Government tax claims. 7. Unsecured creditors. 8. Preferred shareholders. 9. Common shareholders.
Two qualifi cations to this list are in order: Th e fi rst concerns secured creditors. Such creditors are entitled to the proceeds from the sale of the security and are outside this ordering. However, if the secured property is liquidated and provides cash insuffi cient to cover the amount owed, the secured creditors join with unsecured creditors in dividing the remaining liquidated value. In contrast, if the secured property is liquidated for proceeds greater than the secured claim, the net proceeds are used to pay unsecured creditors and others.
Th e second qualifi cation is that, in reality, courts have a great deal of freedom in deciding what actually happens and who actually gets what in the event of bankruptcy; as a result, the priority just set out is not always followed.
Th e 1988 restructuring of Dome Petroleum is an example. Declining oil prices in 1986 found Dome already in diffi culties aft er a series of earlier debt rescheduling. Dome’s board believed that if the company went into bankruptcy, secured creditors could force disposal of assets at fi re sale prices
liquidation Termination of the firm as a going concern.
reorganization Financial restructuring of a failing firm to attempt to continue operations as a going concern.
480 Part 6: Cost of Capital and Long-Term Financial Policy
16Ross_Chapter16_3rd.indd 48016Ross_Chapter16_3rd.indd 480 12-11-01 16:2812-11-01 16:28
producing losses for unsecured creditors and shareholders. One estimate obtained at the time pro- jected that unsecured creditors would receive at best 15 cents per dollar of debt under liquidation. As a result, the board sought and received court and regulatory approval for sale of the company as a going concern to Amoco Canada. Unsecured creditors eventually received 45 cents on the dollar.
BANKRUPTCY REORGANIZATION The general objective of corporate reorganiza- tion is to plan to restructure the corporation with some provision for repayment of creditors. A typical sequence of events follows: 1. A voluntary petition can be filed by the corporation, or an involuntary petition can be filed
by creditors. 2. A federal judge either approves or denies the petition. If the petition is approved, a time for
filing proofs of claims is set. A stay of proceedings of 30 days is effected against all creditors. 3. In most cases, the corporation (the “debtor in possession”) continues to run the business. 4. The corporation is required to submit a reorganization plan. 5. Creditors and shareholders are divided into classes. A class of creditors accepts the plan if a
majority of the class (in dollars or in number) agrees to the plan. The secured creditors must vote before the unsecured creditors.
6. After acceptance by creditors, the plan is confirmed by the court. 7. Payments in cash, property, and securities are made to creditors and shareholders. The plan
may provide for the issuance of new securities.
Th e corporation may wish to allow the old shareholders to retain some participation in the fi rm. Needless to say, this may involve some protest by the holders of unsecured debt.
So-called prepackaged bankruptcies are a relatively new phenomenon. What happens is that the corporation secures the necessary approval of a bankruptcy plan by a majority of its credi- tors fi rst, and then it fi les for bankruptcy. As a result, the company enters bankruptcy and re- emerges almost immediately. In some cases, the bankruptcy procedure is needed to invoke the “cram down” power of the bankruptcy court. Under certain circumstances, a class of creditors can be forced to accept a bankruptcy plan even if they vote not to approve it, hence the remarkably descriptive phrase cram down.
Returning to our Air Canada example, the company underwent a major restructuring eff ort in June 2003. Air Canada sought court protection to reorganize, and reached agreements with all of its employee unions to workplace rule changes, job cuts, and wage reductions that would reduce operating expenses by approximately $1.1 billion per year. Creditors approved Air Canada’s restructuring plan in August 2004. Th e plan called for creditors to receive a very small percentage of every dollar they were owed, but their approval of the plan opened up the option of picking up a 45.8 per cent interest in the parent company of Air Canada.
Air Canada has enjoyed mixed success since. Th e company recorded a $118 million net profi t in the fi rst quarter of 2006, compared to a $77 million net loss in the fi rst quarter of 2005. Th e stock price was up to $33 a share in May 2006, compared to $1 a share in June 2003. However, at the time of writing in May 2012, the stock price was back down to $0.85 as the company faced lower demand and higher pension obligations resulting from the global recession.
Agreements to Avoid Bankruptcy A fi rm can default on an obligation and still avoid bankruptcy. Because the legal process of bank- ruptcy can be lengthy and expensive, it is oft en in everyone’s best interest to devise a “workout” that avoids a bankruptcy fi ling. Much of the time creditors can work with the management of a company that has defaulted on a loan contract. Voluntary arrangements to restructure the com- pany’s debt can be and oft en are made. Th is may involve extension, which postpones the date of payment, or composition, which involves a reduced payment.
1. What is a bankruptcy?
2. What is the difference between liquidation and reorganization?
Concept Questions
Chapter 16: Financial Leverage and Capital Structure Policy 481
16Ross_Chapter16_3rd.indd 48116Ross_Chapter16_3rd.indd 481 12-11-01 16:2812-11-01 16:28
16.11 SUMMARY AND CONCLUSIONS
Th e ideal mixture of debt and equity for a fi rm—its optimal capital structure—is the one that maxi- mizes the value of the fi rm and minimizes the overall cost of capital. If we ignore taxes, fi nancial distress costs, and any other imperfections, we fi nd that there is no ideal mixture. Under these cir- cumstances, the fi rm’s capital structure is simply irrelevant, as we see in M&M Proposition I and II.
If we consider the eff ect of corporate taxes, we fi nd that capital structure matters a great deal. Th is conclusion is based on the fact that interest is tax deductible and thus generates a valuable tax shield. Unfortunately, we also fi nd that the optimal capital structure is 100 percent debt, which is not something we observe for healthy fi rms.
We next introduced costs associated with bankruptcy, or, more generally, fi nancial distress. Th ese costs reduce the attractiveness of debt fi nancing. We concluded that an optimal capital struc- ture exists when the net tax saving from an additional dollar in interest just equals the increase in expected fi nancial distress costs. Th is is the essence of the static theory of capital structure.
When we examine actual capital structures, we fi nd two regularities: First, fi rms in Canada typically do not use great amounts of debt, but they pay substantial taxes. Th is suggests there is a limit to the use of debt fi nancing to generate tax shields. Second, fi rms in similar industries tend to have similar capital structures, suggesting that the nature of their assets and operations is an important determinant of capital structure.
Key Terms bankruptcy (page 479) business risk (page 464) direct bankruptcy costs (page 470) financial distress costs (page 470) financial risk (page 464) homemade leverage (page 460) indirect bankruptcy costs (page 470)
interest tax shield (page 466) liquidation (page 480) M&M Proposition I (page 462) M&M Proposition II (page 463) reorganization (page 480) static theory of capital structure (page 472) unlevered cost of capital (RU) (page 467)
Chapter Review Problems and Self-Test 16.1 EBIT and EPS Suppose the GNR Corporation has decided in
favour of a capital restructuring that involves increasing its existing $5 million in debt to $25 million. The interest rate on the debt is 12 percent and is not expected to change. The firm currently has 1 million shares outstanding, and the price per share is $40. If the restructuring is expected to increase the ROE, what is the minimum level for EBIT that GNR’s man- agement must be expecting? Ignore taxes in your answer.
16.2 M&M Proposition II (no taxes) The Pro Bono Corporation has a WACC of 20 percent. Its cost of debt is 12 percent. If Pro Bono’s debt/equity ratio is 2, what is its cost of equity capital?
If Pro Bono’s equity beta is 1.5, what is its asset beta? Ignore taxes in your answer.
16.3 M&M Proposition I (with corporate taxes) The Deathstar Telecom Company (motto: “Reach out and clutch someone”) expects an EBIT of $4,000 every year forever. Deathstar can borrow at 10 percent.
Suppose that Deathstar currently has no debt and its cost of equity is 14 percent. If the corporate tax rate is 30 percent, what is the value of the firm? What will the value be if Death- star borrows $6,000 and uses the proceeds to buy up stock?
Answers to Self-Test Problems 16.1 To answer, we can calculate the break-even EBIT. At any EBIT more than this, the increased financial leverage increases EPS. Under the
old capital structure, the interest bill is $5 million × .12 = $600,000. There are 1 million shares of stock, so, ignoring taxes, EPS is (EBIT - $600,000)/1 million.
Under the new capital structure, the interest expense is $25 million × .12 = $3 million. Furthermore, the debt rises by $20 million. This amount is sufficient to repurchase $20 million/$40 = 500,000 shares of stock, leaving 500,000 outstanding. EPS is thus (EBIT - $3 million)/500,000.
Now that we know how to calculate EPS under both scenarios, we set them equal to each other and solve for the break-even EBIT; (EBIT - $600,000)/1 million = (EBIT - $3 million)/500,000
(EBIT - $600,000) = 2 × (EBIT - $3 million) EBIT = $5,400,000
Check that, in either case, EPS is $4.80 when EBIT is $5.4 million.
482 Part 6: Cost of Capital and Long-Term Financial Policy
16Ross_Chapter16_3rd.indd 48216Ross_Chapter16_3rd.indd 482 12-11-01 16:2812-11-01 16:28
16.2 According to M&M Proposition II (no taxes), the cost of equity is: RE = RA + (RA - RD) × (D/E)
= 20% + (20% - 12%) × 2 = 36%
Also, we know that the equity beta is equal to the asset beta multiplied by the equity multiplier: βE = βA × (1 + D/E) In this case, D/E is 2 and βE is 1.5, so the asset beta is 1.5/3 = .50. 16.3 With no debt, Deathstar’s WACC is 14 percent. This is also the unlevered cost of capital. The after-tax cash flow is $4,000 × (1 - .30) =
$2,800, so the value is just VU = $2,800/.14 = $20,000. After the debt issue, Deathstar is worth the original $20,000 plus the present value of the tax shield. According to M&M Proposition I
with taxes, the present value of the tax shield is TC × D, or .30 × $6,000 = $1,800, so the firm is worth $20,000 + 1,800 = $21,800.
Concepts Review and Critical Thinking Questions 1. (LO1) Explain what is meant by business and financial risk.
Suppose Firm A has greater business risk than Firm B. Is it true that Firm A also has a higher cost of equity capital? Explain.
2. (LO1) How would you answer in the following debate? Q: Isn’t it true that the riskiness of a firm’s equity will rise if
the firm increases its use of debt financing? A: Yes, that’s the essence of M&M Proposition II. Q: And isn’t it true that, as a firm increases its use of bor-
rowing, the likelihood of default increases, thereby in- creasing the risk of the firm’s debt?
A: Yes. Q: In other words, increased borrowing increases the risk of
the equity and the debt? A: That’s right. Q: Well, given that the firm uses only debt and equity fi-
nancing, and given that the risks of both are increased by increased borrowing, does it not follow that increasing debt increases the overall risk of the firm and therefore decreases the value of the firm?
A: ?? 3. (LO1) Is there an easily identifiable debt-equity ratio that will
maximize the value of a firm? Why or why not? 4. (LO1) Refer to the observed capital structures given in Table
16.7 of the text. What do you notice about the types of indus- tries with respect to their average debt-equity ratios? Are cer- tain types of industries more likely to be highly leveraged than others? What are some possible reasons for this observed seg- mentation? Do the operating results and tax history of the
firms play a role? How about their future earnings prospects? Explain.
5. (LO1) Why is the use of debt financing referred to as finan- cial “leverage”?
6. (LO1) What is homemade leverage? 7. (LO3) As mentioned in the text, some firms have filed for
bankruptcy because of actual or likely litigation-related losses. Is this a proper use of the bankruptcy process?
8. (LO3) Firms sometimes use the threat of a bankruptcy filing to force creditors to renegotiate terms. Critics argue that in such cases, the firm is using bankruptcy laws “as a sword rather than a shield.” Is this an ethical tactic?
9. (LO1, 2) In the context of the extended pie model, what is the basic goal of financial management with regard to capital structure?
10. (LO3) What basic options does a firm have if it cannot (or chooses not to) make a contractually required payment such as interest? Describe them.
11. (LO3) Absolute Priority Rule In the event of corporate liqui- dation proceedings, rank the following claimants of the firm from highest to lowest in order of their priority for being paid:
a. Preferred shareholders. b. Canada Revenue Agency. c. Unsecured debt holders. d. The company pension plan. e. Common shareholders. f. Employee wages. g. The law firm representing the company in the bank-
ruptcy proceedings.
Questions and Problems 1. EBIT and Leverage (LO1) Charny Inc. has no debt outstanding and a total market value of $180,000. Earnings before interest
and taxes, EBIT, are projected to be $23,000 if economic conditions are normal. If there is strong expansion in the economy, then EBIT will be 20 percent higher. If there is a recession, then EBIT will be 30 percent lower. Charny is considering a $75,000 debt issue with a 7 percent interest rate. The proceeds will be used to repurchase shares of stock. There are currently 6,000 shares outstanding. Ignore taxes for this problem.
a. Calculate earnings per share (EPS) under each of the three economic scenarios before any debt is issued. Also calculate the percentage changes in EPS when the economy expands or enters a recession.
b. Repeat part (a) assuming that the company goes through with recapitalization. What do you observe? 2. EBIT, Taxes, and Leverage (LO2) Repeat parts (a) and (b) in Problem 1 assuming Charny has a tax rate of 35 percent. 3. ROE and Leverage (LO1, 2) Suppose the company in Problem 1 has a market-to-book ratio of 1.0.
a. Calculate return on equity (ROE) under each of the three economic scenarios before any debt is issued. Also calculate the percentage changes in ROE for economic expansion and recession, assuming no taxes.
Basic (Questions
1–15)
Chapter 16: Financial Leverage and Capital Structure Policy 483
16Ross_Chapter16_3rd.indd 48316Ross_Chapter16_3rd.indd 483 12-11-01 16:2812-11-01 16:28
b. Repeat part (a) assuming the firm goes through with the proposed recapitalization. c. Repeat parts (a) and (b) of this problem assuming the firm has a tax rate of 35 percent.
4. Break-Even EBIT (LO1) Vanier Corporation is comparing two different capital structures: an all-equity plan (Plan I) and a levered plan (Plan II). Under Plan I, the company would have 210,000 shares of stock outstanding. Under Plan II, there would be 150,000 shares of stock outstanding and $2.28 million in debt outstanding. The interest rate on the debt is 8 percent, and there are no taxes.
a. If EBIT is $500,000, which plan will result in the higher EPS? b. If EBIT is $750,000, which plan will result in the higher EPS? c. What is the break-even EBIT?
5. M&M and Stock Value (LO1) In Problem 4, use M&M Proposition I to find the price per share of equity under each of the two proposed plans. What is the value of the firm?
6. Break-Even EBIT and Leverage (LO1, 2) Des Chatels Corp. is comparing two different capital structures. Plan I would result in 10,000 shares of stock and $90,000 in debt. Plan II would result in 7,600 shares of stock and $198,000 in debt. The interest rate on the debt is 10 percent.
a. Ignoring taxes, compare both of these plans to an all-equity plan assuming that EBIT will be $48,000. The all-equity plan would result in 12,000 shares of stock outstanding. Which of the three plans has the highest EPS? The lowest?
b. In part (a), what are the break-even levels of EBIT for each plan as compared to that for an all-equity plan? Is one higher than the other? Why?
c. Ignoring taxes, when will EPS be identical for Plans I and II? d. Repeat parts (a), (b), and (c) assuming that the corporate tax rate is 40 percent. Are the break-even levels of EBIT different
from before? Why or why not? 7. Leverage and Stock Value (LO1) Ignoring taxes in Problem 6, what is the price per share of equity under Plan I? Plan II? What
principle is illustrated by your answers? 8. Homemade Leverage (LO1) Beauport Inc. a prominent consumer products firm, is debating whether to convert its all-equity
capital structure to one that is 30 percent debt. Currently, there are 7,000 shares outstanding, and the price per share is $55. EBIT is expected to remain at $27,000 per year forever. The interest rate on new debt is 8 percent, and there are no taxes.
a. Denise, a shareholder of the firm, owns 100 shares of stock. What is her cash flow under the current capital structure, assuming the firm has a dividend payout rate of 100 percent?
b. What will Denise’s cash flow be under the proposed capital structure of the firm? Assume she keeps all 100 of her shares. c. Suppose the company does convert, but Denise prefers the current all-equity capital structure. Show how she could unlever
her shares of stock to recreate the original capital structure. d. Using your answer to part (c), explain why the company’s choice of capital structure is irrelevant.
9. Homemade Leverage and WACC (LO1) St. Louis Co. and St. Romuald Co. are identical firms in all respects except for their capital structure. St. Louis is all equity financed with $650,000 in stock. St. Romuald uses both stock and perpetual debt; its stock is worth $325,000 and the interest rate on its debt is 8 percent. Both firms expect EBIT to be $68,000. Ignore taxes.
a. Clifford owns $48,750 worth of St. Romuald’s stock. What rate of return is he expecting? b. Show how Clifford could generate exactly the same cash flows and rate of return by investing in St. Louis and using
homemade leverage. c. What is the cost of equity for St. Louis? What is it for St. Romuald? d. What is the WACC for St. Louis? For St. Romuald? What principle have you illustrated?
10. M&M (LO1) Limoilou Corp. uses no debt. The weighted average cost of capital is 8 percent. If the current market value of the equity is $18 million and there are no taxes, what is EBIT?
11. M&M and Taxes (LO2) In the previous question, suppose the corporate tax rate is 35 percent. What is EBIT in this case? What is the WACC? Explain.
12. Calculating WACC (LO1) Portneuf Industries has a debt–equity ratio of 1.5. Its WACC is 9 percent, and its cost of debt is 5.5 percent. The corporate tax rate is 35 percent.
a. What is the company’s cost of equity capital? b. What is the company’s unlevered cost of equity capital? c. What would the cost of equity be if the debt–equity ratio were 2? What if it were 1.0? What if it were zero?
13. Calculating WACC (LO1) Laurier Corp. has no debt but can borrow at 6.1 percent. The firm’s WACC is currently 9.5 percent, and the tax rate is 35 percent.
a. What is the company’s cost of equity? b. If the firm converts to 25 percent debt, what will its cost of equity be? c. If the firm converts to 50 percent debt, what will its cost of equity be? d. What is the company’s WACC in part (b)? In part (c)?
6
484 Part 6: Cost of Capital and Long-Term Financial Policy
16Ross_Chapter16_3rd.indd 48416Ross_Chapter16_3rd.indd 484 12-11-01 16:2812-11-01 16:28
14. M&M and Taxes (LO2) Elzear & Co. expects its EBIT to be $74,000 every year forever. The firm can borrow at 7 percent. Elzear currently has no debt, and its cost of equity is 12 percent. If the tax rate is 35 percent, what is the value of the firm? What will the value be if the company borrows $125,000 and uses the proceeds to repurchase shares?
15. M&M and Taxes (LO2) In Problem 14, what is the cost of equity after recapitalization? What is the WACC? What are the implications for the firm’s capital structure decision?
16. M&M (LO2) Sillery Manufacturing has an expected EBIT of $73,000 in perpetuity and a tax rate of 35 percent. The firm has $145,000 in outstanding debt at an interest rate of 7.25 percent, and its unlevered cost of capital is 11 percent. What is the value of the firm according to M&M Proposition I with taxes? Should the company change its debt–equity ratio if the goal is to maximize the value of the firm? Explain.
17. Firm Value (LO2) Lazare Corporation expects an EBIT of $19,750 every year forever. Lazare currently has no debt, and its cost of equity is 15 percent. The firm can borrow at 10 percent. If the corporate tax rate is 35 percent, what is the value of the firm? What will the value be if the company converts to 50 percent debt? To 100 percent debt?
18. Homemade Leverage (LO1) The Montmagny Company and the Shawinigan Company are identical in every respect except that Montmagny is not levered. Financial information for the two firms appears in the following table. All earnings streams are perpetuities, and neither firm pays taxes. Both firms distribute all earnings available to common shareholders immediately.
Montmagny Shawinigan
Projected operating income $ 500,000 $ 500,000 Year-end interest on debt — $ 78,000 Market value of stock $ 3,100,000 $ 2,050,000 Market value of debt — $ 1,300,000
a. An investor who can borrow at 6 percent per year wishes to purchase 5 percent of Shawinigan’s equity. Can he increase his dollar return by purchasing 5 percent of Montmagny’s equity if he borrows so that the initial net costs of the strategies are the same?
b. Given the two investment strategies in (a), which will investors choose? When will this process cease? 19. Weighted Average Cost of Capital (LO1) In a world of corporate taxes only, show that the WACC can be written as
WACC = RU × [1 - TC(D/V)]. 20. Cost of Equity and Leverage (LO1) Assuming a world of corporate taxes only, show that the cost of equity, RE, is as given in
the chapter by M&M Proposition II with corporate taxes. 21. Business and Financial Risk (LO1) Assume a firm’s debt is risk-free, so that the cost of debt equals the risk-free rate, Rf . Define
βA as the firm’s asset beta—that is, the systematic risk of the firm’s assets. Define βE to be the beta of the firm’s equity. Use the capital asset pricing model (CAPM) along with M&M Proposition II to show that βE = βA × (1 + D/E), where D/E is the debt– equity ratio. Assume the tax rate is zero.
22. Shareholder Risk (LO1) Suppose a firm’s business operations are such that they mirror movements in the economy as a whole very closely; that is, the firm’s asset beta is 1.0. Use the result of Problem 21 to find the equity beta for this firm for debt–equity ratios of 0, 1, 5, and 20. What does this tell you about the relationship between capital structure and shareholder risk? How is the shareholders’ required return on equity affected? Explain.
23. Bankruptcy (LO3) A petition for the reorganization of the Boniface Company has been filed under the Insolvency Act. The trustees estimate the firm’s liquidation value, after considering costs, is $102 million. Alternatively, the trustees, using the analysis of the Zulu Consulting firm, predict that the reorganized business will generate $18 million annual cash flows in perpetuity. The discount rate is 14 percent. Should Boniface be liquidated or reorganized? Why?
24. Bankruptcy (LO3) The Odanak Corporation (OC) has filed for bankruptcy. All of OC’s assets would fetch $43 million on the open market today if put up for sale. The other alternative would be to reorganize the business. If this occurs, the company would generate $3.97 million cash flows in perpetuity. Since there are no competitors making products similar to OC, there is no company that can offer a comparable discount rate. Analysts estimate that the discount rate can be between 10 percent and 25 percent. If the company’s discount rate is 10 percent, should the company be liquidated or reorganized? Is the answer the same for a 20 percent discount rate? What other factors may play a role in deciding whether to liquidate the company or reorganize it?
Intermediate (Questions
16–18)
Challenge (Questions
19–24)
Chapter 16: Financial Leverage and Capital Structure Policy 485
16Ross_Chapter16_3rd.indd 48516Ross_Chapter16_3rd.indd 485 12-11-01 16:2812-11-01 16:28
Nicolet Real Estate Recapitalization
Nicolet Real Estate Company was founded 25 years ago by the current CEO, Steven Nicolet. The company purchases real es- tate, including land and buildings, and rents the property to tenants. The company has shown a profit every year for the past 18 years, and the shareholders are satisfied with the com- pany’s management. Prior to founding Nicolet Real Estate, Steven was the founder and CEO of a failed alpaca farming operation. The resulting bankruptcy made him extremely averse to debt financing. As a result, the company is entirely equity financed, with 12 million shares of common stock out- standing. The stock currently trades at $31.40 per share. Nicolet is evaluating a plan to purchase a huge tract of land in the southeastern Canada for $80 million. The land will sub- sequently be leased to a developer who plans to build a gated community for the Canadian snowbird market. This purchase is expected to increase Nicolet’s annual pre-tax earnings by $16 million in perpetuity. Scarlett Wright, the company’s new CFO, has been put in charge of the project. Scarlett has deter- mined that the company’s current cost of capital is 10.2 per- cent. She feels that the company would be more valuable if it included debt in its capital structure, so she is evaluating whether the company should issue debt to entirely finance the project. Based on some conversations with investment banks, she thinks that the company can issue bonds at par value with an 6 percent coupon rate. From her analysis, she also believes that a capital structure in the range of 70 percent equity/30 percent debt would be optimal. If the company goes beyond 30 percent debt, its bonds would carry a lower rating and a much higher coupon because the possibility of financial dis- tress and the associated costs would rise sharply. Nicholet has a 40 percent corporate tax rate (state and federal).
Questions
1. If Nicolet wishes to maximize its total market value, would you recommend that it issue debt or equity to fi- nance the land purchase? Explain.
2. Construct Nicolet’s market value statement of financial position before it announces the purchase.
3. Suppose Nicolet decides to issue equity to finance the purchase. a. What is the net present value of the project? b. Construct Nicolet’s market value statement of finan-
cial position after it announces that the firm will fi- nance the purchase using equity. What would be the new price per share of the firm’s stock? How many shares will Nicolet need to issue to finance the purchase?
c. Construct Nicolet’s market value statement of finan- cial position after the equity issue but before the purchase has been made. How many shares of com- mon stock does Nicolet have outstanding? What is the price per share of the firm’s stock?
d. Construct Nicolet’s market value statement of finan- cial position after the purchase has been made.
4. Suppose Nicolet decides to issue debt to finance the purchase. a. What will the market value of the Nicolet company
be if the purchase is financed with debt? b. Construct Nicolet’s market value balance sheet after
both the debt issue and the land purchase. What is the price per share of the firm’s stock?
5. Which method of financing maximizes the per-share stock price of Nicolet’s equity?
MINI CASE
Internet Application Questions 1. Capital structure choice in textbooks usually revolves around debt versus equity. In reality, there are several shades of grey in
between. For example, subordinated debt can often be a useful source of capital for many firms. The following website (bctechnology.com/connector/scripts/experts/subdebt.cfm) lists the benefits of including subordinated debt in a firm’s capital structure. What types of firms would find this financing attractive?
2. Highly leveraged transactions called LBOs attempt to gain control of a firm through the use of borrowed funds, and their per- petrators hope to profit from de-leveraging the acquired assets in the future and doing a reverse LBO. Onex Corp. (onex.com) is an example of a Canadian company that specializes in doing LBO deals. Click on their website and explain the principles that underlie Onex’s operating philosophy.
3. Go to ca.finance.yahoo.com/ and enter the ticker symbols for JDS Uniphase (JDSU), Suncor Energy (SU), and BCE Inc. (BCE). Click on “Key Statistics” link for each one. What are the long-term debt-to-equity and total debt-to-equity ratios for each of the companies? How do these values compare to the industry, sector, and S&P 500 for each company? Can you think of possible explanations for the differences among the three companies in terms of their financial structures?
4. A useful site for information on bankruptcy and reorganizations is found at abiworld.org. For the latest news, follow the “Bank- ruptcy Headlines” link on the site. How many companies filed for bankruptcy on this day? What conditions or issues caused these filings?
486 Part 6: Cost of Capital and Long-Term Financial Policy
16Ross_Chapter16_3rd.indd 48616Ross_Chapter16_3rd.indd 486 12-11-01 16:2812-11-01 16:28
CAPITAL STRUCTURE AND PERSONAL TAXES
Up to this point, we considered corporate taxes only. Unfortunately, Canada Revenue Agency does not let us off that easily. As we saw in Chapter 2, income to individuals is taxed at different rates. For individuals in the top brackets, some kinds of personal income can be taxed more heavily than corporate income. Earlier, we showed that the value of a levered firm equals the value of an identical unlevered firm, VU plus the present value of the interest tax shield TC × D.
VL = VU + TC × D This approach considered only corporate taxes. In a classic paper, Miller derived another expression for the value of the levered firm taking into account personal taxes.11 In Equation 16A.1, Tb is the personal tax rate on ordinary income, such as interest and TS is the weighted average of the personal tax rate on equity distri- butions—dividends and capital gains.12
VL = VU + [ 1 - (1 - TC) × (1 - TS) _________________ 1 - Tb ] × D [16A.1] Value of the Firm with Personal and Corporate Taxes If the personal tax rates on interest (Tb) and on equity distributions (TS) happen to be the same, then our new, more complex expression (Equation 16A.1) simplifies to Equation 16.7, which is the result when there are no personal taxes. It follows that introducing personal taxes does not affect our valuation formula as long as equity distributions are taxed identically to interest at the personal level.
However, the gain from leverage is reduced when equity distributions are taxed more lightly than inter- est, that is when TS is less than Tb. Here, more taxes are paid at the personal level for a levered firm than for an unlevered firm. In fact, imagine that (1 - TC) × (1 - TS) = 1 - Tb. Formula 16A.1 tells us there is no gain from leverage at all! In other words, the value of the levered firm is equal to the value of the unlevered firm. The reason there is no gain from leverage is that the lower corporate taxes for a levered firm are exactly offset by higher personal taxes. These results are presented in Figure 16A.1.
11 M. H. Miller, “Debt and Taxes,” Journal of Finance 32 (May 1977), pp. 261–75. 12 Shareholders receive (EBIT - rDD) × (1 - TC) × (1 - TS) Bondholders receive rDD × (1 - Tb) Thus, the total cash flow to all stakeholders is (EBIT - rDD) × (1 - TC) × (1 - TS) + rDD × (1 - Tb) which can be rewritten as
EBIT × (1 - TC) × (1 - TS) + rDD × (1 - Tb) × [ 1 - (1 - TC) × (1 - TS) _________________ 1 - Tb ] (a) The first term in Equation (a) is the cash flow from an unlevered firm after all taxes. The value of this stream must be VU, the value of an unlevered firm. An individual buying a bond for B receives rDD × (1 - Tb) after all taxes. Thus, the value of the second term in (a) must be
D × [ 1 - (1 - TC) × (1 - TS) _________________ 1 - Tb ] Therefore, the value of the stream in (a), which is the value of the levered firm, must be
VU + [ 1 - (1 - TC) × (1 - TS) _________________ 1 - Tb ] × D
APPENDIX 16A
Chapter 16: Financial Leverage and Capital Structure Policy 487
16Ross_Chapter16_3rd.indd 48716Ross_Chapter16_3rd.indd 487 12-11-01 16:2812-11-01 16:28
FIGURE 16A.1
Gains from financial leverage with both corporate and personal taxes
0
VU
Value of firm (V)
VL = VU + TCB when TS = Tb
VL = VU + 1–
when (1 – Tb) > (1 – TC) � (1 – TS)
VL = VU when (1 – Tb) = (1 – TC) � (1 – TS)
VL < VU when (1 – Tb) < (1 – TC) � (1 – TS)
(1 – Tb) B
(1 – TC) � (1 – TS)
Debt (B)
[ [ TC is the corporate tax rate. Tb is the personal tax rate on interest. TS is the personal tax rate on dividends and other equity distributions. Both personal taxes and corporate taxes are included. Bankruptcy costs and agency costs are ignored. The effect of debt on firm value depends on TS, TC, and Tb.
EXAMPLE 16A.1: Financial Leverage with Personal Taxes
Acme Industries anticipates a perpetual pretax earning stream of $100,000 and faces a 36 percent corporate tax rate. Investors discount the earnings stream after corporate taxes at 15 percent. The personal tax rate on equity distri- butions is 20 percent and the personal tax rate on interest is 40 percent. Acme currently has an all-equity capital struc- ture but is considering borrowing $120,000 at 10 percent. The value of the all-equity firm is:13
VU = $100,000 × ( 1 - .36 )
____________________ 0.15
= $426,667
The value of the levered firm is
VL = $426,667 + [ 1 - ( 1 - .36 ) × ( 1 - .20 ) ________________________ ( 1 - .40 ) ] × $120,000 = $444,267
The advantage to leverage here is $444,267 – $426,667 = $17,600. This is much smaller than the $43,200 = .36 × $120,000 = TC × B, which would have been the gain in a world with no personal taxes. Acme had previously considered the choice years earlier when TB = 60 percent, TC = 45 percent and TS = 18 percent. Here
VL = $366,667 + [ 1 - ( 1 - .45 ) × ( 1 - .18 ) _______________________ ( 1 - .60 ) ] × $120,000 = $351,367
In this case, the value of the levered firm, VL, is $351,367 which is less than the value of the unlevered firm, VU = $366,667. Hence, Acme was wise not to increase leverage years ago. Leverage causes a loss of value because the per- sonal tax rate on interest is much higher than the personal tax rate on equity distributions. In other words, the reduc-
tion in corporate taxes from leverage is more than offset by the increase in taxes from leverage at the personal level.
Figure 16A.1 summarizes the different cases we consid- ered. Which one is the most applicable to Canada? While the numbers are different for different firms in different provinces, Chapter 2 showed that interest income is taxed at the full marginal rate, around 40 percent for the top bracket. Equity distributions take the form of either divi- dends or capital gains and both are taxed more lightly than interest. As we showed in Chapter 2, dividend income is sheltered by the dividend tax credit.
While the exact numbers depend on the type of portfo- lio chosen, our first scenario for Acme is a reasonable tax scenario for Canadian investors and companies. In Canada, personal taxes reduce, but do not eliminate, the advantage to corporate leverage.
This result is still unrealistic. It suggests that firms should add debt, moving out on the second line from the top in Figure 16A.1, until 100 percent leverage is reached. Firms do not do this. One reason is that interest on debt is not the firm’s only tax shield. Investment tax credits, capital cost allowance, and depletion allowances give rise to tax shields regardless of the firm’s decision on leverage. Because these other tax shields exist, increased leverage brings with it a risk that income will not be high enough to utilize the debt tax shield fully. The result is that firms use a limited amount of debt.14
Of course, as we argued in the chapter, the costs of bankruptcy and financial distress are another reason healthy firms do not use 100 percent debt financing.
1314
13 Alternatively, we could have said that investors discount the earnings stream after both corporate and personal taxes at 12% = 15% (1 - .20):
VU = $100,000 × ( 1 - .36 ) × ( 1 - .20 ) ____________________________ .12 = $426,667
14 This argument was first advanced by H. DeAngelo and R. Masulis, “Optimal Capital Structure under Corporate and Personal Taxation,” Journal of Financial Economics, March 1980, pp. 3–30 and is further discussed by Alfred H.R. Da- vis, “The Corporate Use of Debt Substitutes in Canada: A Test of Competing Versions of the Substitution Hypothesis,” Canadian Journal of Administrative Sciences, March 1994, vol. 11, issue 1, p. 105.
488 Part 6: Cost of Capital and Long-Term Financial Policy
16Ross_Chapter16_3rd.indd 48816Ross_Chapter16_3rd.indd 488 12-11-01 16:2812-11-01 16:28
1. How does considering personal taxes on interest and equity distributions change the M&M conclusions on optimal debt?
2. Explain in words the logic behind Miller’s theory of capital structure.
3. How does this theory apply in Canada?
Appendix Questions and Problems
A.1 Miller’s model introduces personal taxes into the theory of capital structure. With both personal and corporate taxes, we got the same indiff erence result as with no taxes. Explain why.
A.2 Th is question is a follow-up to Question A.1 on Miller’s model. In comparing this approach to M&M with corporate taxes, you can see that in one case both models imply that fi rms should use 100 percent debt fi nancing. Explain how this conclusion occurs in each case. Why does it not occur in practice?
DERIVATION OF PROPOSITION II (EQUATION 16.4)
We use the symbol RA to stand for WACC. RA = WACC = (E/V) × RE + (D/V) × RD
Multiplying both sides by V/E yields: (D/E) RD + RE = (V/E) RA
We can rewrite the right-hand side as: (D/E) RD + RE = (D/E) RA + RA
Moving (D/E) RD to the right-hand side and rearranging gives: RE = RA + (RA - RD) × (D/E)
Concept Questions
APPENDIX 16B
Chapter 16: Financial Leverage and Capital Structure Policy 489
16Ross_Chapter16_3rd.indd 48916Ross_Chapter16_3rd.indd 489 12-11-01 16:2812-11-01 16:28
Dividend policy is an important subject in corporate fi nance, and dividends are a major cash outlay for many corporations. At fi rst glance, it may seem obvious that a fi rm would always want to give as much as possible back to its shareholders by paying dividends. It might seem equally obvious, however, that a fi rm can always invest the money for its shareholders instead of paying it out. Th e heart of the dividend policy question is just this: Should the fi rm pay out money to its shareholders, or should the fi rm take that money and invest it for its shareholders?
It may seem surprising, but much research and economic logic suggest that dividend policy doesn’t matter. In fact, it turns out that the dividend policy issue is much like the capital structure question. Th e important elements are not diffi cult to identify, but the interactions between those elements are complex and no easy answer exists.
Dividend policy is controversial. Many implausible reasons are given for why dividend policy might be important, and many of the claims made about dividend policy are economically illogi- cal. Even so, in the real world of corporate fi nance, determining the most appropriate dividend policy is considered an important issue. It could be that fi nancial managers who worry about dividend policy are wasting time, but it could be true that we are missing something important in our discussions.
In part, all discussions of dividends are plagued by the “two-handed lawyer” problem. Former U.S. President Harry S. Truman, while discussing the legal implications of a possible presidential decision, asked his staff to set up a meeting with a lawyer. Supposedly, Truman said, “But I don’t want one of those two-handed lawyers.” When asked what a two-handed lawyer was, he replied, “You know, a lawyer who says, ‘On the one hand I recommend you do so and so because of the following reasons, but on the other hand I recommend that you don’t do it because of these other reasons.’ ”
Unfortunately, any sensible treatment of dividend policy appears to be written by a two- handed lawyer (or, in fairness, several two-handed fi nancial economists). On the one hand, there are many good reasons for corporations to pay high dividends; on the other hand, there are also many good reasons to pay low dividends or no dividends.
We cover three broad topics that relate to dividends and dividend policy in this chapter. First, we describe the various kinds of dividends and how dividends are paid. Second, we consider an
DIVIDENDS AND DIVIDEND POLICY
C H A P T E R 1 7
O n May 2, 2012, Barrick Gold, the world’s largest gold miner, headquartered in Toronto, reported a big first quarter profit of around
US $1 billion. As a result, the company decided to
hike its dividend by 33 percent to 20 cents US a
share from 15 cents US. While other gold companies
were known for paying low dividends, Barrick had
increased its dividend by 260 percent in 5 years due
to its superior earnings and operating cash flows.
Explaining dividends and dividend policy is the focus
of this chapter.
Learning Object ives
After studying this chapter, you should understand:
LO1 Dividend types and how dividends are paid.
LO2 The issues surrounding dividend policy decisions.
LO3 The difference between cash and stock dividends.
LO4 Why share repurchases are an alternative to dividends.
C ou
rt es
y of
Ba
rr ic
k G
ol d
17Ross_Chapter17_4th.indd 49017Ross_Chapter17_4th.indd 490 12-11-27 12:1212-11-27 12:12
idealized case in which dividend policy doesn’t matter. We then discuss the limitations of this case and present some practical arguments for both high- and low-dividend payouts. Finally, we conclude the chapter by looking at some strategies that corporations might employ to implement a dividend policy.
17.1 Cash Dividends and Dividend Payment
Th e term dividend usually refers to cash paid out of earnings. If a payment is made from sources other than current or accumulated retained earnings, the term distribution rather than dividend is sometimes used. However, it is acceptable to refer to a distribution from earnings as a dividend and a distribution from capital as a liquidating dividend. More generally, any direct payment by the corporation to the shareholders may be considered a dividend or a part of dividend policy. Figure 17.1 shows how the dividend decision is part of distributing the fi rm’s cash fl ow over dif- ferent uses.
Dividends come in several diff erent forms. Th e basic types of cash dividends are:
1. Regular cash dividends. 2. Extra dividends. 3. Special dividends. 4. Liquidating dividends.
Later in the chapter, we discuss dividends that are paid in stock instead of cash, and we also con- sider an alternative to cash dividends, stock repurchase.
Cash Dividends Th e most common type of dividend is a cash dividend. Commonly, public companies pay regular cash dividends four times a year. As the name suggests, these are cash payments made directly to shareholders, and they are made in the regular course of business. In other words, management sees nothing unusual about the dividend and no reason it won’t be continued.
Sometimes fi rms pay a regular cash dividend and an extra cash dividend. By calling part of the payment extra, management is indicating it may or may not be repeated in the future. A special divi- dend is similar, but the name usually indicates that this dividend is viewed as a truly unusual or one- time event and won’t be repeated. For example, in May 2010, Sears Canada paid a special dividend of $3.50 per share. Th e total payout of $368 million was the largest one-time corporate dividend in history. Finally, a liquidating dividend usually means that some or all of the business has been liqui- dated, that is, sold off . Debt covenants, discussed in Chapter 7, off er the fi rm’s creditors protection against liquidating dividends that could violate their prior claim against assets and cash fl ows.
However it is labelled, a cash dividend payment reduces corporate cash and retained earnings, except in the case of a liquidating dividend (where capital may be reduced).
FIGURE 17.1
Distribution of corporate cash flow
Total cash flow
Internal cash flow
New financing
Stock repurchases
New investments and acquisitions
Cash dividends
Existing operations
To shareholders
dividend Payment made out of a firm’s earnings to its owners, either in the form of cash or stock.
distribution Payment made by a firm to its owners from sources other than current or accumulated earnings.
regular cash dividend Cash payment made by a firm to its owners in the normal course of business, usually made four times a year.
Chapter 17: Dividends and Dividend Policy 491
17Ross_Chapter17_4th.indd 49117Ross_Chapter17_4th.indd 491 12-11-27 12:1212-11-27 12:12
Standard Method of Cash Dividend Payment Th e decision to pay a dividend rests in the hands of the board of directors of the corporation. When a dividend has been declared, it becomes a debt of the fi rm and cannot be rescinded eas- ily. Sometime aft er it has been declared, a dividend is distributed to all shareholders as of some specifi c date.
Commonly, the amount of the cash dividend is expressed in dollars per share (dividends per share). As we have seen in other chapters, it is also expressed as a percentage of the market price (the dividend yield) or as a percentage of earnings per share (the dividend payout).
Dividend Payment: A Chronology Th e mechanics of a dividend payment can be illustrated by the example in Figure 17.2 and the following description:
1. Declaration date. On January 15, the board of directors passes a resolution to pay a divi- dend of $1 per share on February 16 to all holders of record as of January 30.
2. Ex-dividend date. To make sure that dividend cheques go to the right people, brokerage firms and stock exchanges establish an ex-dividend date. This date is two business days be- fore the date of record (discussed next). If you buy the stock before this date, then you are entitled to the dividend. If you buy on this date or after, then the previous owner gets it.
The ex-dividend date convention removes any ambiguity about who is entitled to the div- idend. Since the dividend is valuable, the stock price is affected when it goes “ex.” We exam- ine this effect later.
In Figure 17.2, Wednesday, January 28, is the ex-dividend date. Before this date, the stock is said to trade “with dividend” or “cum dividend.” Afterwards the stock trades “ex dividend.”
3. Date of record. Based on its records, the corporation prepares a list on January 30 of all in- dividuals believed to be shareholders as of this date. These are the holders of record and Janu- ary 30 is the date of record. The word believed is important here. If you buy the stock just before this date, the corporation’s records may not reflect that fact. Without some modifica- tion, some of the dividend cheques would go to the wrong people. This is the reason for the ex-dividend day convention.
4. Date of payment. The dividends are paid on February 16.
More on the Ex-Dividend Date Th e ex-dividend date is important and is a common source of confusion. We examine what hap- pens to the stock when it goes ex, meaning that the ex-dividend date arrives. To illustrate, suppose we have a stock that sells for $10 per share. Th e board of directors declares a dividend of $1 per share, and the record date is Th ursday, June 14. Based on our previous discussion, we know that the ex date will be two business (not calendar) days earlier on Tuesday, June 12.
FIGURE 17.2
Procedure for dividend payment
Days
Thursday, January
15 Declaration
date
Wednesday, January
28 Ex-dividend
date
Friday, January
30 Record date
Monday, February
16 Payment
date
1. Declaration date: The board of directors declares a payment of dividends. 2. Ex-dividend date: A share of stock goes ex dividend on the date the seller is entitled to keep the dividend; under TSX rules, shares are traded ex
dividend on and after the second business day before the record date. 3. Record date: The declared dividends are distributable to shareholders of record on a specific date. 4. Payment date: The dividend payment date.
declaration date Date on which the board of directors passes a resolution to pay a dividend.
ex-dividend date Date two business days before the date of record, establishing those individuals entitled to a dividend.
date of record Date on which holders of record are designated to receive a dividend.
date of payment Date of the dividend payment.
492 Part 6: Cost of Capital and Long-Term Financial Policy
17Ross_Chapter17_4th.indd 49217Ross_Chapter17_4th.indd 492 12-11-27 12:1212-11-27 12:12
FIGURE 17.3
Price behaviour around ex-dividend date for a $1 cash dividend
Price = $10
Price = $9
$1 is the ex-dividend price drop
Ex-date
0–1–2• • •–t +1 +2 • • • t
The stock price will fall by the amount of the dividend on the ex date (time 0). If the dividend is $1 per share, the price will be equal to $10 - $1 = $9 on the ex date: Before ex date (-1) dividend = 0 Price = $10 Ex-date (0) dividend = $1 Price = $9
If you buy the stock on Monday, June 11, right as the market closes, you’ll get the $1 dividend because the stock is trading cum dividend. If you wait and buy it right as the market opens on Tuesday, you won’t get the $1 dividend. What will happen to the value of the stock overnight?
If you think about it, the stock is obviously worth about $1 less on Tuesday morning, so its price will drop by this amount between close of business on Monday and the Tuesday opening. In general, we expect the value of a share of stock to go down by about the dividend amount when the stock goes ex dividend. Th e key word here is about. Since dividends are taxed, the actual price drop might be closer to some measure of the aft er-tax value of the dividend. Determining this value is complicated because of the diff erent tax rates and tax rules that apply for diff erent buyers. Th e series of events described here is illustrated in Figure 17.3.
Th e amount of the price drop is a matter for empirical investigation. Researchers have argued that, due to personal taxes, the stock price should drop by less than the dividend.1 For example, consider the case with no capital gains taxes. On the day before a stock goes ex dividend, share- holders must decide either to buy the stock immediately and pay tax on the forthcoming dividend, or to buy the stock tomorrow, thereby missing the dividend. If all investors are in a 30 percent bracket for dividends and the quarterly dividend is $1, the stock price should fall by $.70 on the ex-dividend date. If the stock price falls by this amount on the ex-dividend date, then purchasers receive the same return from either strategy.
EXAMPLE 17.1: “Ex” Marks the Day
The board of directors of Divided Airlines has declared a dividend of $2.50 per share payable on Tuesday, May 30, to shareholders of record as of Tuesday, May 9. Cal Icon buys 100 shares of Divided on Tuesday, May 2, for $150 per share. What is the ex date? Describe the events that will occur with regard to the cash dividend and the stock price.
The ex date is two business days before the date of re- cord, Tuesday, May 9, so the stock will go ex on Friday, May 5. Cal buys the stock on Tuesday, May 2, so Cal has purchased the stock cum dividend. In other words, Cal gets $2.50 × 100 = $250 in dividends. The payment is made on Tuesday, May 30. When the stock does go ex on Friday, its value drops overnight by about $2.50 per share (or maybe a little less due to personal taxes).
1. What are the different types of cash dividends?
2. What are the mechanics of the cash dividend payment?
3. How should the price of a stock change when it goes ex dividend?
1 The original argument was advanced and tested for the United States by E. Elton and M. Gruber, “Marginal Stockholder Tax Rates and the Clientele Effect,” Review of Economics and Statistics 52 (February 1970). Canadian evidence (discussed briefly later in this chapter) is from J. Lakonishok and T. Vermaelen, “Tax Reform and Ex-Dividend Day Behavior,” Jour- nal of Finance 38 (September 1983) pp. 1157–80, and L. D. Booth and D. J. Johnston, “The Ex-Dividend Day Behavior of Canadian Stock Prices: Tax Changes and Clientele Effects,” Journal of Finance 39 (June 1984), pp. 457–76.
Concept Questions
Chapter 17: Dividends and Dividend Policy 493
17Ross_Chapter17_4th.indd 49317Ross_Chapter17_4th.indd 493 12-11-27 12:1212-11-27 12:12
17.2 Does Dividend Policy Matter?
To decide whether or not dividend policy matters, we fi rst have to defi ne what we mean by divi- dend policy. All other things being the same, of course dividends matter. Dividends are paid in cash, and cash is something that everybody likes. Th e question we are discussing here is whether the fi rm should pay out cash now or invest the cash and pay it out later. Dividend policy, therefore, is the time pattern of dividend payout. In particular, should the fi rm pay out a large percentage of its earnings now or a small (or even zero) percentage? Th is is the dividend policy question.
An I l lustration of the Irrelevance of Dividend Policy A powerful argument can be made that dividend policy does not matter. We illustrate this by con- sidering the simple case of Wharton Corporation. Wharton is an all-equity fi rm that has existed for 10 years. Th e current fi nancial managers plan to dissolve the fi rm in two years. Th e total cash fl ows that the fi rm will generate, including the proceeds from liquidation, are $10,000 in each of the next two years.
CURRENT POLICY: DIVIDENDS SET EQUAL TO CASH FLOW At the present time, dividends at each date are set equal to the cash flow of $10,000. There are 100 shares out- standing, so the dividend per share will be $100. In Chapter 8, we stated that the value of the stock is equal to the present value of the future dividends. Assuming a 10 percent required return, the value of a share of stock today, P0, is:
P0 = D1/(1 + R)1 + D2/(1 + R)2 = $100/1.10 + $100/1.21 = $173.55
Th e fi rm as a whole is thus worth 100 × $173.55 = $17,355. Several members of the board of Wharton have expressed dissatisfaction with the current
dividend policy and have asked you to analyze an alternative policy.
ALTERNATIVE POLICY: INITIAL DIVIDEND IS GREATER THAN CASH FLOW Another policy is for the firm to pay a dividend of $110 per share on the first date, which is, of course, a total dividend of $11,000. Because the cash flow is only $10,000, an extra $1,000 must somehow be raised. One way to do it is to issue $1,000 of bonds or stock at Date 1. Assume that stock is issued. The new shareholders desire enough cash flow at Date 2 so that they earn the required 10 percent return on their Date 1 investment.2
What is the value of the fi rm with this new dividend policy? Th e new shareholders invest $1,000. Th ey require a 10 percent return, so they demand $1,000 × 1.10 = $1,100 of the Date 2 cash fl ow, leaving only $8,900 to the old shareholders. Th e dividends to the old shareholders would be:
Date 1 Date 2
Aggregate dividends to old shareholders $11,000 $8,900 Dividends per share 110 89
Th e present value of the dividends per share is therefore:
P0 = $110/1.10 + $89/1.102 = $173.55
Th is is the same present value as we had before. Th e value of the stock is not aff ected by this switch in dividend policy even though we had
to sell some new stock just to fi nance the dividend. In fact, no matter what pattern of dividend payout the fi rm chooses, the value of the stock is always the same in this example. In other words, for the Wharton Corporation, dividend policy makes no diff erence. Th e reason is simple: Any increase in a dividend at some point in time is exactly off set by a decrease somewhere else, so the net eff ect, once we account for time value, is zero.
HOMEMADE DIVIDENDS There is an alternative and perhaps more intuitively appeal- ing explanation about why dividend policy doesn’t matter in our example. Suppose individual investor X prefers dividends per share of $100 at both Dates 1 and 2. Would he or she be disap-
2 The same results would occur after an issue of bonds, though the arguments would be less easily presented.
494 Part 6: Cost of Capital and Long-Term Financial Policy
17Ross_Chapter17_4th.indd 49417Ross_Chapter17_4th.indd 494 12-11-27 12:1212-11-27 12:12
pointed when informed that the firm’s management is adopting the alternative dividend policy (dividends of $110 and $89 in the two dates, respectively)? Not necessarily, because the investor could easily reinvest the $10 of unneeded funds received on Date 1 by buying more Wharton stock. At 10 percent, this investment grows to $11 at Date 2. Thus, the investor would receive the desired net cash flow of $110 - 10 = $100 at Date 1 and $89 + 11 = $100 at Date 2.
Conversely, imagine Investor Z, preferring $110 of cash fl ow at Date 1 and $89 of cash fl ow at Date 2, fi nds that management pays dividends of $100 at both Dates 1 and 2. Th is investor can sim- ply sell $10 worth of stock to boost his or her total cash at Date 1 to $110. Because this investment returns 10 percent, Investor Z gives up $11 at Date 2 ($10 × 1.1), leaving him with $100 - 11 = $89.
Our two investors are able to transform the corporation’s dividend policy into a diff erent policy by buying or selling on their own. Th e result is that investors are able to create homemade divi- dends. Th is means dissatisfi ed shareholders can alter the fi rm’s dividend policy to suit themselves. As a result, there is no particular advantage to any one dividend policy that the fi rm might choose.
Many corporations actually assist their shareholders in creating homemade dividend policies by off ering automatic dividend reinvestment plans (ADPs or DRIPs). As the name suggests, with such a plan, shareholders have the option of automatically reinvesting some or all of their cash dividends in shares of stock.
Under a new issue dividend reinvestment plan, investors buy new stock issued by the fi rm. Th ey may receive a small discount on the stock, usually under 5 percent, or be able to buy without a broker’s commission. Th is makes dividend reinvestment very attractive to investors who do not need cash fl ow from dividends. Since the discount or lower commission compares favourably with issue costs for new stock discussed in Chapter 15, dividend reinvestment plans are popular with large companies like BCE that periodically seek new common stock.3
Investment dealers also use fi nancial engineering to create homemade dividends (or homemade capital gains). Called stripped common shares, these vehicles entitle holders to receive either all the dividends from one or a group of well-known companies or an installment receipt that pack- ages any capital gain in the form of a call option. Th e option gives the investor the right to buy the underlying shares at a fi xed price and so it is valuable if the shares appreciate beyond that price.
A TEST Our discussion to this point can be summarized by considering the following true/ false test questions:
1. True or false: Dividends are irrelevant. 2. True or false: Dividend policy is irrelevant.
Th e fi rst statement is surely false, and the reason follows from common sense. Clearly, investors prefer higher dividends to lower dividends at any single date if the dividend level is held constant at every other date. To be more precise regarding the fi rst question, if the dividend per share at a given date is raised while the dividend per share at each other date is held constant, the stock price rises. Th e reason is that the present value of the future dividends must go up if this occurs. Th is action can be accomplished by management decisions that improve productivity, increase tax savings, strengthen product marketing, or otherwise improve cash fl ow.
Th e second statement is true, at least in the simple case we have been examining. Dividend policy by itself cannot raise the dividend at one date while keeping it the same at all other dates. Rather, dividend policy merely establishes the trade-off between dividends at one date and divi- dends at another date. Once we allow for time value, the present value of the dividend stream is unchanged. Th us, in this simple world, dividend policy does not matter, because managers choos- ing either to raise or to lower the current dividend do not aff ect the current value of their fi rm. However, we have ignored several real-world factors that might lead us to change our minds; we pursue some of these in subsequent sections.
1. How can an investor create a homemade dividend?
2. Are dividends irrelevant?
3 Reinvested dividends are still taxable.
homemade dividends Idea that individual investors can undo corporate dividend policy by reinvesting dividends or selling shares of stock.
stripped common shares Common stock on which dividends and capital gains are repackaged and sold separately.
Concept Questions
Chapter 17: Dividends and Dividend Policy 495
17Ross_Chapter17_4th.indd 49517Ross_Chapter17_4th.indd 495 12-11-27 12:1212-11-27 12:12
17.3 Real-World Factors Favouring a Low Payout
Th e example we used to illustrate the irrelevance of dividend policy ignored taxes and fl otation costs. In other words, we assumed perfect capital markets in which these and other imperfections did not exist. In this section, we see that these factors might lead us to prefer a low-dividend payout.
Taxes Th e logic we used to establish that dividend policy does not aff ect fi rm value ignored the real- world complication of taxes. In Canada, both dividends and capital gains are taxed at eff ective rates less than the marginal tax rates.
For dividends, we showed in Chapter 2 that individual investors face a lower tax rate due to the dividend tax credit. Capital gains in the hands of individuals are taxed at 50 percent of the marginal tax rate. Since taxation only occurs when capital gains are realized, capital gains are very lightly taxed in Canada. On balance, capital gains are subject to lower taxes than dividends.
A fi rm that adopts a low-dividend payout reinvests the money instead of paying it out. Th is reinvestment increases the value of the fi rm and of the equity. All other things being equal, the net eff ect is that the capital gains portion of the return is higher in the future. So, the fact that capital gains are taxed favourably may lead us to prefer this approach.
Th is tax disadvantage of dividends doesn’t necessarily lead to a policy of paying no dividends. Suppose a fi rm has some excess cash aft er selecting all positive NPV projects. Th e fi rm might consider the following alternatives to a dividend:
1. Select additional capital budgeting projects. Because the firm has taken all the available posi- tive NPV projects already, it must invest its excess cash in negative NPV projects. This is clearly a policy at variance with the principles of corporate finance and represents an exam- ple of the agency costs of equity introduced in Chapter 1. Still, research suggests that some companies are guilty of doing this.4 It is frequently argued that managers who adopt nega- tive NPV projects are ripe for takeover, leveraged buyouts, and proxy fights.
2. Repurchase shares. A firm may rid itself of excess cash by repurchasing shares of stock. In both the United States and Canada, investors can treat profits on repurchased stock in pub- lic companies as capital gains and pay somewhat lower taxes than they would if the cash were distributed as a dividend.
3. Acquire other companies. To avoid the payment of dividends, a firm might use excess cash to acquire another company. This strategy has the advantage of acquiring profitable assets. However, a firm often incurs heavy costs when it embarks on an acquisition program. In ad- dition, acquisitions are invariably made above the market price. Premiums of 20 to 80 per- cent are not uncommon. Because of this, a number of researchers have argued that mergers are not generally profitable to the acquiring company, even when firms are merged for a valid business purpose.5 Therefore, a company making an acquisition merely to avoid a divi- dend is unlikely to succeed.
4. Purchase financial assets. The strategy of purchasing financial assets in lieu of a dividend payment can be illustrated with the following example.
Suppose the Regional Electric Company has $1,000 of extra cash. It can retain the cash and invest it in Treasury bills yielding 8 percent, or it can pay the cash to shareholders as a dividend. Share- holders can also invest in Treasury bills with the same yield. Suppose, realistically, that the tax rate is 44 percent on ordinary income like interest on Treasury bills for both the company and individual investors and the individual tax rate on dividends is 30 percent. What is the amount of cash that investors have aft er fi ve years under each policy? Dividends paid now: If dividends are paid now, shareholders will receive $1,000 before taxes, or $1,000 × (1 - .30) =
4 M. C. Jensen, “Agency Costs of Free Cash Flows, Corporate Finance and Takeovers,” American Economic Review, May 1986, pp. 323–29. 5 The original hypothesis comes from R. Roll, “The Hubris Hypothesis of Corporate Takeovers,” Journal of Business (1986). Chapter 23 presents some Canadian examples.
496 Part 6: Cost of Capital and Long-Term Financial Policy
17Ross_Chapter17_4th.indd 49617Ross_Chapter17_4th.indd 496 12-11-27 12:1212-11-27 12:12
$700 aft er taxes. Th is is the amount they invest. If the rate on T-bills is 8 percent, before taxes, then the aft er-tax return is 8% × (1 - .44) = 4.48% per year. Th us, in fi ve years, the shareholders have:
$700 × (1 + 0.0448)5 = $871.49
Company retains cash: If Regional Electric Company retains the cash, invests in Treasury bills, and pays out the proceeds fi ve years from now, then $1,000 will be invested today. However, since the corporate tax rate is 44 percent, the aft er-tax return from the T-bills will be 8% × (1 - .44) = 4.48% per year. In fi ve years, the investment will be worth:
$1,000 × (1 + 0.0448)5 = $1,244.99
If this amount is then paid out as a dividend, aft er taxes the shareholders receive:
$1,244.99 × (1 - .30) = $871.49
In this case, dividends are the same aft er taxes whether the fi rm pays them now or later aft er investing in Treasury bills. Th e reason is that the fi rm invests exactly as profi tably as the share- holders do on an aft er-tax basis.
Th is example shows that for a fi rm with extra cash, the dividend payout decision depends on personal and corporate tax rates. All other things the same, when personal tax rates are higher than corporate tax rates, a fi rm has an incentive to reduce dividend payouts. Th is would have occurred if we changed our example to have the fi rm invest in preferred stock instead of T-bills. (Recall from Chapter 8 that corporations enjoy a 100 percent exclusion of dividends from tax- able income.) However, if personal tax rates on dividends are lower than corporate tax rates (for investors in lower tax brackets or tax-exempt investors), a fi rm has an incentive to pay out any excess cash in dividends.
Th ese examples show that dividend policy is not always irrelevant when we consider personal and corporate taxes. To continue the discussion, we go back to the diff erent tax treatment of divi- dends and capital gains.
EXPECTED RETURN, DIVIDENDS, AND PERSONAL TAXES We illustrate the effect of personal taxes by considering a situation where dividends are taxed and capital gains are not taxed—a scenario that is not unrealistic for many Canadian individual investors. We show that a firm that provides more return in the form of dividends has a lower value (or a higher pre- tax required return) than one whose return is in the form of untaxed capital gains.
Suppose every shareholder is in the top tax bracket (tax rate on dividends of 30 percent) and is considering the stocks of Firm G and Firm D. Firm G pays no dividend, and Firm D pays a dividend. Th e current price of the stock of Firm G is $100, and next year’s price is expected to be $120. Th e shareholder in Firm G thus expects a $20 capital gain. With no dividend, the return is $20/$100 = 20%. If capital gains are not taxed, the pre-tax and aft er-tax returns must be the same.6
Suppose the stock of Firm D is expected to pay a $20 dividend next year. If the stocks of Firm G and Firm D are equally risky, the market prices must be set so that their aft er-tax expected returns are equal. Th e aft er-tax return on Firm D thus has to be 20 percent.
What will be the price of stock in Firm D? Th e aft er-tax dividend is $20 × (1 - .30) = $14, so our investor has a total of $114 aft er taxes. At a 20 percent required rate of return (aft er taxes), the present value of this aft er-tax amount is:
Present value = $114/1.20 = $95.00
Th e market price of the stock in Firm D thus must be $95.00.
Some Evidence on Dividends and Taxes in Canada Is our example showing higher pre-tax returns for stocks that pay dividends realistic for Canadian capital markets? Since tax laws change from budget to budget, we have to exercise caution in inter- preting research results. Before 1972, capital gains were untaxed in Canada (as in our simplifi ed
6 Under current tax law, if the shareholder in Firm G does not sell the shares for a gain, it will be an unrealized capital gain, which is not taxed.
Chapter 17: Dividends and Dividend Policy 497
17Ross_Chapter17_4th.indd 49717Ross_Chapter17_4th.indd 497 12-11-27 12:1212-11-27 12:12
example). Research suggests stocks that paid dividends had higher pre-tax returns prior to 1972. From 1972 to 1977, the same study detected no diff erence in pre-tax returns.7
In 1985, the lifetime exemption on capital gains was introduced. Recent research found that investors anticipated this tax break for capital gains and bid up the prices of stocks with low divi- dend yields. Firms responded by lowering their dividend payouts. Th is all ended in 1994 when the federal budget ended the capital gains exemption.8 In 2000, the federal budget lowered the taxable portion of capital gains from 75 to 50 percent. In November 2005, the government of Canada ini- tiated changes with the goal of making dividend-paying stocks more attractive relative to income trusts by increasing the gross-up and the dividend tax credit.9 We suspect that from the viewpoint of individual investors, higher dividends require larger pre-tax returns.
Another way of measuring the eff ective tax rates on dividends and capital gains in Canada is to look at ex-dividend day price drops. We showed earlier that, ignoring taxes, a stock price should drop by the amount of the dividend when it goes ex dividend. Th is is because the price drop off sets what investors lose by waiting to buy the stock until it goes ex dividend. If dividends are taxed and capital gains are tax free, the price drop should be lower, equal to the aft er-tax value of the dividend. However, if gains are taxed too, the price drop needs to be adjusted for the gains tax. An investor who waits for the stock to go ex dividend buys at a lower price and hence has a larger capital gain when the stock is sold later.
All this allowed researchers to infer tax rates from ex-dividend day behaviour. One study con- cludes that marginal investors who set prices are taxed more heavily on dividends than on capital gains.10 Th is supports our argument: Individual investors likely look for higher pre-tax returns on dividend paying stocks.
Flotation Costs In our example illustrating that dividend policy doesn’t matter, we saw that the fi rm could sell some new stock if necessary to pay a dividend. As we mentioned in Chapter 15, selling new stock can be very expensive. If we include fl otation costs in our argument, then we fi nd that the value of the stock decreases if we sell new stock.
More generally, imagine two fi rms that are identical in every way except that one pays out a greater percentage of its cash fl ow in the form of dividends. Since the other fi rm plows back more, its equity grows faster. If these two fi rms are to remain identical, the one with the higher payout has to sell some stock periodically to catch up. Since this is expensive, a fi rm might be inclined to have a low payout.
Dividend Restrictions In some cases, a corporation may face restrictions on its ability to pay dividends. For example, as we discussed in Chapter 7, a common feature of a bond indenture is a covenant prohibiting dividend payments above some level.
1. What are the tax benefits of low dividends?
2. Why do flotation costs favour a low payout?
7 I. G. Morgan, “Dividends and Stock Price Behaviour in Canada,” Journal of Business Administration 12 (Fall 1989). 8 B. Amoako-adu, M. Rashid, and M. Stebbins, “Capital Gains Tax and Equity Values: Empirical Test of Stock Price Re- action to the Introduction and Reduction of Capital Gains Tax Exemption, Journal of Banking and Finance 16 (1992), pp. 275–87; F. Adjaoud and D. Zeghal, “Taxation and Dividend Policy in Canada: New Evidence,” FINECO (2nd Se- mester) 1993, pp. 141–54. 9 We discuss these tax changes in detail in Chapter 2. 10 L. Booth and D. Johnston, “Ex-Dividend Day Behavior.” Their research also showed that interlisted stocks, traded on exchanges in both the United States and Canada, tended to be priced by U.S. investors and not be affected by Canadian tax changes. J. Lakonishok and T. Vermaelen, “Tax Reforms and Ex-Dividend Day Behavior,” Journal of Finance, Sep- tember 1983, pp. 1157–58, gives a competing explanation in terms of tax arbitrage by short-term traders.
Concept Questions
498 Part 6: Cost of Capital and Long-Term Financial Policy
17Ross_Chapter17_4th.indd 49817Ross_Chapter17_4th.indd 498 12-11-27 12:1212-11-27 12:12
17.4 Real-World Factors Favouring a High Payout
In this section, we consider reasons a fi rm might pay its shareholders higher dividends even if it means the fi rm must issue more shares of stock to fi nance the dividend payments.
In a classic textbook, Benjamin Graham and David Dodd, have argued that fi rms should gen- erally have high-dividend payouts because:
1. “The discounted value of near dividends is higher than the present worth of distant dividends.”
2. Between “two companies with the same general earning power and same general position in an industry, the one paying the larger dividend will almost always sell at a higher price.”11
Two factors favouring a high-dividend payout have been mentioned frequently by proponents of this view: the desire for current income and the resolution of uncertainty.
Desire for Current Income It has been argued that many individuals desire current income. Th e classic example is the group of retired people and others living on fi xed incomes, the proverbial “widows and orphans.” It is argued that this group is willing to pay a premium to get a higher dividend yield. If this is true, it lends support to the second claim by Graham, Dodd, and Cottle.
It is easy to see, however, that this argument is not relevant in our simple case. An individual preferring high current cash fl ow but holding low-dividend securities could easily sell shares to provide the necessary funds. Similarly, an individual desiring a low current cash fl ow but holding high-dividend securities can just reinvest the dividend. Th is is just our homemade dividend argu- ment again. Th us, in a world of no transaction costs, a high current dividend policy would be of no value to the shareholder.
Th e current income argument may have relevance in the real world. Here the sale of low- dividend stocks would involve brokerage fees and other transaction costs. Such a sale might also trigger capital gains taxes. Th ese direct cash expenses could be avoided by an investment in high-dividend securities. In addition, the expenditure of the shareholder’s own time when selling securities and the natural (but not necessarily rational) fear of consuming out of principal might further lead many investors to buy high-dividend securities.
Even so, to put this argument in perspective, remember that fi nancial intermediaries such as mutual funds can (and do) perform these repackaging transactions for individuals at very low cost. Such intermediaries could buy low-dividend stocks, and, by a controlled policy of realizing gains, they could pay their investors at a higher rate.
Uncertainty Resolution We have just pointed out that investors with substantial current consumption needs prefer high current dividends. In another classic treatment, the late Professor Myron Gordon argued that a high-dividend policy also benefi ts shareholders because it resolves uncertainty.12
According to Gordon, investors price a security by forecasting and discounting future divi- dends. Gordon then argues that forecasts of dividends to be received in the distant future have greater uncertainty than do forecasts of near-term dividends. Because investors dislike uncer- tainty, the stock price should be low for those companies that pay small dividends now in order to remit higher dividends later.
Gordon’s argument is essentially a “bird-in-hand” story. A $1 dividend in a shareholder’s pocket is somehow worth more than that same $1 in a bank account held by the corporation. By now, you should see the problem with this argument. A shareholder can create a bird in hand very easily just by selling some stock.
11 Benjamin Graham & David Dodd (2008) Security Analysis: Sixth Edition, Foreword by Warren Buffett, McGraw-Hill Professional. 12 M. Gordon, The Investment, Financing and Valuation of the Corporation (Homewood, IL: Richard D. Irwin, 1961).
Chapter 17: Dividends and Dividend Policy 499
17Ross_Chapter17_4th.indd 49917Ross_Chapter17_4th.indd 499 12-11-27 12:1212-11-27 12:12
Tax and Legal Benefits from High Dividends Earlier, we saw that dividends were taxed more heavily than capital gains for individual investors. Th is fact is a powerful argument for a low payout. However, a number of other investors do not receive unfavourable tax treatment from holding high-dividend yield, rather than low-dividend yield, securities.
CORPORATE INVESTORS A significant tax break on dividends occurs when a corpora- tion owns stock in another corporation. A corporate shareholder receiving either common or preferred dividends is granted a 100 percent dividend exclusion.13 Since the 100 percent exclusion does not apply to capital gains, this group is taxed unfavourably on capital gains.
As a result of the dividend exclusion, high-dividend, low capital gains stocks may be more appropriate for corporations to hold. As we discuss elsewhere, this is why corporations hold a substantial percentage of the outstanding preferred stock in the economy. Th is tax advantage of dividends also leads some corporations to hold high-yielding stocks instead of long-term bonds because there is no similar tax exclusion of interest payments to corporate bondholders.
TAX-EXEMPT INVESTORS We have pointed out both the tax advantages and disadvan- tages of a low-dividend payout. Of course, this discussion is irrelevant to those in zero tax brack- ets. This group includes some of the largest investors in the economy, such as pension funds, endowment funds, and trust funds.
Th ere are some legal reasons for large institutions to favour high-dividend yields: First, insti- tutions such as pension funds and trust funds are oft en set up to manage money for the benefi t of others. Th e managers of such institutions have a fi duciary responsibility to invest the money prudently. It has been considered imprudent in courts of law to buy stock in companies with no established dividend record.
Second, institutions such as university endowment funds and trust funds are frequently prohibited from spending any of the principal. Such institutions might, therefore, prefer high- dividend yield stocks so they have some ability to spend. Like widows and orphans, this group thus prefers current income. Unlike widows and orphans, in terms of the amount of stock owned, this group is very large and its market share is expanding rapidly.
Conclusion Overall, individual investors (for whatever reason) may have a desire for current income and may thus be willing to pay the dividend tax. In addition, some very large investors such as corporations and tax-free institutions may have a very strong preference for high-dividend payouts.
1. Why might some individual investors favour a high-dividend payout?
2. Why might some non-individual investors prefer a high-dividend payout?
17.5 A Resolution of Real-World Factors?
In the previous sections, we presented some factors that favour a low-dividend policy and others that favour high dividends. In this section, we discuss two important concepts related to divi- dends and dividend policy: the information content of dividends and the clientele eff ect. Th e fi rst topic illustrates both the importance of dividends in general and the importance of distinguishing between dividends and dividend policy. Th e second topic suggests that, despite the many real- world considerations we have discussed, the dividend payout ratio may not be as important as we originally imagined.
13 For preferred stock, we assume the issuer has elected to pay the refundable withholding tax on preferred dividends.
Concept Questions
500 Part 6: Cost of Capital and Long-Term Financial Policy
17Ross_Chapter17_4th.indd 50017Ross_Chapter17_4th.indd 500 12-11-27 12:1212-11-27 12:12
Information Content of Dividends To begin, we quickly review some of our earlier discussion. Previously, we examined three diff er- ent positions on dividends:
1. Based on the homemade dividend argument, dividend policy is irrelevant. 2. Because of tax effects for individual investors and new issues costs, a low-dividend policy
is the best. 3. Because of the desire for current income and related factors, a high-dividend policy is the
best.
If you wanted to decide which of these positions is the right one, an obvious way to get started would be to look at what happens to stock prices when companies announce dividend changes. You would fi nd with some consistency that stock prices rise when the current dividend is unex- pectedly increased, and they generally fall when the dividend is unexpectedly decreased. What does this imply about any of the three positions just stated?
At fi rst glance, the behaviour we describe seems consistent with the third position and incon- sistent with the other two. In fact, many writers have argued this. If stock prices rise on dividend increases and fall on dividend decreases, isn’t the market saying it approves of higher dividends?
Other authors have pointed out that this observation doesn’t really tell us much about dividend policy. Everyone agrees that dividends are important, all other things being equal. Companies only cut dividends with great reluctance. Th us, a dividend cut is oft en a signal that the fi rm is in trouble.
More to the point, a dividend cut is usually not a voluntary, planned change in dividend policy. Instead, it usually signals that management does not think the current dividend policy can be maintained. As a result, expectations of future dividends should generally be revised downward. Th e present value of expected future dividends falls and so does the stock price.
In this case, the stock price declines following a dividend cut because future dividends are generally lower, not because the fi rm changes the percentage of its earnings it will pay out in the form of dividends.
Dividend Signall ing in Practice To give a particularly dramatic example, consider what happened to Perpetual Energy Inc., a natural gas-focused Canadian Corporation, on October 19, 2011. A dramatic decrease in natural gas prices made it diffi cult for the company to continue dividend payment. Th is was shocking news to the shareholders and the share price lost about one-third of its market value in a single day at the time of announcement. Of course, the phenomenon of a stock price decrease in the face of a dividend cut is not restricted to Canada. In February 2011, bookseller Barnes and Noble announced that it was suspending its $1 per share annual dividend in order to invest in digital products. In response, the stock price declined by around 14 percent.
In a similar vein, an unexpected increase in the dividend or dividend initiation signals good news. Management raises the dividend only when future earnings, cash fl ow, and general pros- pects are expected to rise enough so that the dividend does not have to be cut later. A dividend increase is management’s signal to the market that the fi rm is expected to do well. Th e stock reacts favourably because expectations of future dividends are revised upward, not because the fi rm has increased its payout. Since the fi rm has to come up with cash to pay dividends, this kind of signal is more convincing than calling a press conference to announce good earnings prospects. For example, Apple Inc. announced that it was planning to resume the payment of dividends in 2012, which was a stellar year for the company.
Management behaviour is consistent with the notion of dividend signalling. In 1989, for exam- ple, the Bank of Montreal’s earnings per share dropped from $4.89 the previous year to $.04 due to increased loan loss provisions for LDC debt. Yet the annual dividend was increased slightly from $2.00 to $2.12 per share. Th e payout ratio skyrocketed to 5300 percent ($2.12/$.04). Management signalled the market that earnings would recover in 1990, which they did. Investors turned to the idea of dividend signalling when evaluating bank stocks in the crash of 2008 and early 2009. Discounting the fear of bank dividend cuts, in February 2009, Sherry Cooper, Chief Economist,
Chapter 17: Dividends and Dividend Policy 501
17Ross_Chapter17_4th.indd 50117Ross_Chapter17_4th.indd 501 12-11-27 12:1212-11-27 12:12
BMO Capital Markets noted that “aside from the National Bank, none of the other fi ve Canadian banks have cut their dividend since the Great Depression.”14
Generally, the stock price reacts to the dividend change. Th e reaction can be attributed to changes in the amount of future dividends, not necessarily a change in dividend payout pol- icy. Th is signal is called the information content eff ect of the dividend. Th e fact that dividend changes convey information about the fi rm to the market makes it diffi cult to interpret the eff ect of dividend policy of the fi rm.
The Clientele Effect In our earlier discussion, we saw that some groups (wealthy individuals, for example) have an incentive to pursue low-payout (or zero-payout) stocks. Other groups (corporations, for example) have an incentive to pursue high-payout stocks. Companies with high payouts thus attract one group and low-payout companies attract another.
Table 17.1 shows the dividends paid by the 15 largest Canadian companies in terms of market capitalization. In April 2012, mining stocks such as Potash Corp. and oil and gas stocks like Sun- cor Energy paid low dividends. Banks and utilities paid relatively high dividends.
Groups of investors attracted to diff erent payouts are called clienteles, and what we have described is a clientele eff ect. Th e clientele eff ect argument states that diff erent groups of invest- ors desire diff erent levels of dividends. When a fi rm chooses a particular dividend policy, the only eff ect is to attract a particular clientele. If a fi rm changes its dividend policy, it just attracts a diff erent clientele.
What we are left with is a simple supply and demand argument. Suppose that 40 percent of all investors prefer high dividends, but only 20 percent of the fi rms pay high dividends. Here the high-dividend fi rms are in short supply; thus, their stock prices rise. Consequently, low-dividend fi rms would fi nd it advantageous to switch policies until 40 percent of all fi rms have high payouts. At this point, the dividend market is in equilibrium. Further changes in dividend policy are point- less because all of the clienteles are satisfi ed. Th e dividend policy for any individual fi rm is now irrelevant.
TABLE 17.1
Largest TSX companies by market capitalization and dividends for April 13, 2012 Rank Company Market cap ($ billion) Dividend Yield (%)
1 Royal Bank of Canada 80.6 4.1 2 Toronto-Dominion Bank 74.2 3.5 3 Bank of Nova Scotia 61.5 4.1 4 Suncor Energy 47.5 1.4 5 Barrick Gold Corp. 41.5 1.4 6 Imperial Oil Ltd. 37.0 1.1 7 Bank of Montreal 36.9 4.9 8 Potash Corp. of Saskatchewan Inc. 36.7 1.3 9 Canadian Natural Resources Ltd. 35.1 1.3 10 Canadian National Railway Co 34.6 1.9 11 GoldCorp Inc. 33.8 1.3 12 BCE Inc. 30.7 5.5 13 Enbridge Inc. 30.2 2.9 14 Canadian Imperial Bank of Commerce 30.0 4.8 15 TransCanada Corp. 29.9 4.1
Source: Drawn from Canadian Business, Investor 500, 2012.
14 National Post, February 2, 2009
information content effect The market’s reaction to a change in corporate dividend payout.
clientele effect Stocks attract particular groups based on dividend yield and the resulting tax effects.
502 Part 6: Cost of Capital and Long-Term Financial Policy
17Ross_Chapter17_4th.indd 50217Ross_Chapter17_4th.indd 502 12-11-27 12:1212-11-27 12:12
To see if you understand the clientele eff ect, consider the following statement: “In spite of the theoretical argument that dividend policy is irrelevant or that fi rms should not pay dividends, many investors like high dividends. Because of this fact, a fi rm can boost its share price by having a higher dividend payout ratio.” True or false?
Th e answer is false if clienteles exist. As long as enough high-dividend fi rms satisfy the divi- dend-loving investors, a fi rm won’t be able to boost its share price by paying high dividends.
1. How does the market react to unexpected dividend changes? What does this tell us about dividends? About dividend policy?
2. What is a dividend clientele? All things considered, would you expect a risky firm with significant but highly uncertain growth prospects to have a low- or high-dividend payout?
17.6 Establishing a Dividend Policy
How do fi rms actually determine the level of dividends that they pay at a particular time? As we have seen, there are good reasons for fi rms to pay high dividends and there are good reasons to pay low dividends.
We know some things about how dividends are paid in practice. Firms don’t like to cut divi- dends. We saw this with Bank of Montreal earlier. As Table 17.2 shows, two chartered banks, Bank of Montreal and Bank of Nova Scotia, have been paying dividends for over 170 years.
TABLE 17.2
Paying dividends
Stock Year Dividend Payments Began
Bank of Montreal 1829 Bank of Nova Scotia 1833 Royal Bank 1870
In the next section, we discuss a particular dividend policy strategy. In doing so, we emphasize the real-world features of dividend policy. We also analyze an alternative to cash dividends, a stock repurchase.
Residual Dividend Approach Earlier, we noted that fi rms with higher dividend payouts have to sell stock more oft en. As we have seen, such sales are not very common and they can be very expensive. Consistent with this, we assume that the fi rm wishes to minimize the need to sell new equity. We also assume that the fi rm wishes to maintain its current capital structure.15 If a fi rm wishes to avoid new equity sales, then it has to rely on internally generated equity to fi nance new, positive NPV projects.16 Dividends can only be paid out of what is left over. Th is left over is called the residual, and such a dividend policy would be called a residual dividend approach.
With a residual dividend policy, the fi rm’s objective is to meet its investment needs and main- tain its desired debt/equity ratio before paying dividends. To illustrate, imagine that a fi rm has $1,000 in earnings and a debt/equity ratio of .50. Notice that, since the debt/equity ratio is .50,
15 As in our discussion of the cost of capital in Chapter 14, the capital structure should be measured using market value weights. 16 Our discussion of sustainable growth in Chapter 4 is relevant here. We assumed there that a firm has a fixed capital structure, profit margin, and capital intensity. If the firm raises no new equity and wishes to grow at some target rate, there is only one payout ratio consistent with these assumptions.
Concept Questions
residual dividend approach Policy where a firm pays dividends only after meeting its investment needs while maintaining a desired debt- to-equity ratio.
Chapter 17: Dividends and Dividend Policy 503
17Ross_Chapter17_4th.indd 50317Ross_Chapter17_4th.indd 503 12-11-27 12:1212-11-27 12:12
the fi rm has 50 cents in debt for every $1.50 in value. Th e fi rm’s capital structure is thus 1/3 debt and 2/3 equity.
Th e fi rst step in implementing a residual dividend policy is to determine the amount of funds that can be generated without selling new equity. If the fi rm reinvests the entire $1,000 and pays no dividend, equity increases by $1,000. To keep the debt/equity ratio at .50, the fi rm must borrow an additional $500. Th e total amount of funds that can be generated without selling new equity is thus $1,000 + 500 = $1,500.
Th e second step is to decide whether or not a dividend will be paid. To do this, we compare the total amount that can be generated without selling new equity ($1,500 in this case) with planned capital spending. If funds needed exceed funds available, no dividend is paid. In addition, the fi rm will have to sell new equity to raise the needed fi nance or else (more likely) postpone some planned capital spending.
If funds needed are less than funds generated, a dividend will be paid. Th e amount of the dividend is the residual, that is, that portion of the earnings not needed to fi nance new projects. For example, suppose we have $900 in planned capital spending. To maintain the fi rm’s capital structure, this $900 must be fi nanced 2/3 equity and 1/3 debt. So, the fi rm actually borrows 1/3 × $900 = $300. Th e fi rm spends 2/3 × $900 = $600 of the $1,000 in equity available. Th ere is a $1,000 - 600 = $400 residual, so the dividend is $400.
In sum, the fi rm has aft er-tax earnings of $1,000. Dividends paid are $400. Retained earnings are $600, and new borrowing totals $300. Th e fi rm’s debt/equity ratio is unchanged at .50.
Th e relationship between physical investment and dividend payout is presented for six diff er- ent levels of investment in Table 17.3 and illustrated in Figure 17.4. Th e fi rst three rows of the table can be discussed together, because in each case no dividends are paid.
FIGURE 17.4
Relationship between dividends and investment in residual dividend policy
Dividends in dollars
New investment in dollars0
–333
0
333
667
1,000
500 1,000 1,500 2,000 2,500 3,000 •
•
•
•
• • • •
This figure illustrates that a firm with many investment opportunities will pay small amounts of dividends and a firm with few investment opportunities will pay relatively large amounts of dividends.
TABLE 17.3
Dividend policy under the residual approach
Row
(1) After tax Earnings
(2) New
Investment
(3) Additional
Debt
(4) Retained Earnings
(5) Additional
Stock (6)
Dividends
1 $1,000 $3,000 $1,000 $1,000 $1,000 $0 2 1,000 2,000 667 1,000 333 0 3 1,000 1,500 500 1,000 0 0 4 1,000 1,000 333 667 0 333 5 1,000 500 167 333 0 667 6 1,000 0 0 0 0 1,000
504 Part 6: Cost of Capital and Long-Term Financial Policy
17Ross_Chapter17_4th.indd 50417Ross_Chapter17_4th.indd 504 12-11-27 12:1212-11-27 12:12
In row 1, for example, note that new investment is $3,000. Additional debt of $1,000 and equity of $2,000 must be raised to keep the debt/equity ratio constant. Since this latter fi gure is greater than the $1,000 of earnings, all earnings are retained. Additional stock to be raised is also $1,000. In this example, since new stock is issued, dividends are not simultaneously paid out. In rows 2 and 3, investment drops. Additional debt needed goes down as well since it is equal to 1/3 of investment. Because the amount of new equity needed is still greater than or equal to $1,000, all earnings are retained and no dividends are paid.
We fi nally fi nd a situation in row 4 where a dividend is paid. Here, total investment is $1,000. To keep our debt/equity ratio constant, 1/3 of this investment, or $333, is fi nanced by debt. Th e remaining 2/3 or $667, comes from internal funds, implying that the residual is $1,000 - 667 = $333. Th e dividend is equal to this $333 residual.
In this case, note that no additional stock is issued. Since the needed investment is even lower in rows 5 and 6, new debt is reduced further, retained earnings drop, and dividends increase. Again, no additional stock is issued.
Given our discussion, we expect those fi rms with many investment opportunities to pay a small percentage of their earnings as dividends and other fi rms with fewer opportunities to pay a high percentage of their earnings as dividends. Young, fast-growing fi rms commonly employ a low payout ratio, whereas older, slower-growing fi rms in more mature industries use a higher ratio. Th is pattern is consistent with fi rms’ practice in the U.S. and Canada.17
We see this pattern somewhat in Table 17.4 where the Bank of Montreal is a slower-growing fi rm with a high payout; Canadian Tire is a faster-growing fi rm with a pattern of low payouts. Bank of Montreal had a steady payout in most of the years, but the payout increased to 91 percent on one occasion in 2009. Th is illustrates that fi rms will sometimes accept a signifi cantly diff er- ent payout ratio in order to avoid dividend cuts. In the case of Bank of Montreal, the change was driven by a drop in EPS in 2009 (due to the fi nancial crisis in the U.S.).
Dividend Stabil ity Th e key point of the residual dividend approach is that dividends are paid only aft er all profi t- able investment opportunities are exhausted. Of course, a strict residual approach might lead to a very unstable dividend policy. If investment opportunities in one period are quite high, divi- dends would be low or zero. Conversely, dividends might be high in the next period if investment opportunities are considered less promising.
17 Current research shows that in many other countries where shareholders have weaker legal rights, dividends are not linked to firm growth. Rather, they are seen as a way of prying wealth loose from the hands of controlling shareholders: R. LaPorta, F. Lopez-de-Silanes, A. Schleifer, and R.W. Vishny, “Agency Problems and Dividend Policies Around the World,” Journal of Finance 2000.
TABLE 17.4
The stability of dividends
Bank of Montreal
EPS DPS Payout
2000 3.30 1.00 30 2001 2.72 1.12 41 2002 2.73 1.20 44 2003 3.51 1.34 38 2004 4.53 1.59 35 2005 4.74 1.85 39 2006 5.25 2.26 43 2007 4.18 2.71 65 2008 3.79 2.80 74 2009 3.09 2.80 91 2010 4.78 2.80 59 2011 5.28 2.80 53
Canadian Tire
EPS DPS Payout
2000 1.89 0.40 21 2001 2.25 0.40 18 2002 2.56 0.40 16 2003 3.06 0.40 13 2004 3.60 0.475 13 2005 4.04 0.56 14 2006 4.35 0.66 15 2007 5.05 0.74 15 2008 4.59 0.84 18 2009 4.10 0.84 20 2010 5.45 0.91 17 2011 5.73 1.13 20
Source: Annual reports from sedar.com
Chapter 17: Dividends and Dividend Policy 505
17Ross_Chapter17_4th.indd 50517Ross_Chapter17_4th.indd 505 12-11-27 12:1212-11-27 12:12
Consider the case of Big Department Stores Inc., a retailer whose annual earnings are forecasted to be equal from year to year but whose quarterly earnings change throughout the year. Th ey are low in each year’s fi rst quarter because of the post-Christmas business slump. Although earnings increase only slightly in the second and third quarters, they advance greatly in the fourth quarter as a result of the Christmas season. A graph of this fi rm’s earnings is presented in Figure 17.5.
FIGURE 17.5
Earnings for Big Department Stores Inc.
Earnings per share (EPS)
1,000
667
333
0
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 –333
Time (quarters)
EPS
Year 1 Year 2 Year 3
Th e fi rm can choose between at least two types of dividend policies. First, each quarter’s dividend can be a fi xed fraction of that quarter’s earnings. Here, dividends vary throughout the year. Th is is a cyclical dividend policy. Second, each quarter’s dividend can be a fi xed fraction of yearly earn- ings, implying that all dividend payments would be equal. Th is is a stable dividend policy. Th ese two types of dividend policies are displayed in Figure 17.6.
FIGURE 17.6
Alternative dividend policies for Big Department Stores Inc.
Dollars
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
Time (quarters)
EPS
Year 1 Year 2 Year 3
Cyclical dividends
Stable dollar dividends
Cyclical dividend policy: Dividends are a constant proportion of earnings at each pay date. Stable dividend policy: Dividends are a constant proportion of earnings over an earnings cycle.
Corporate executives generally agree that a stable policy is in the interest of the fi rm and its share- holders. Dividend stability complements investor objectives of information content, income, and reduction in uncertainty. Institutional investors oft en follow “prudence” tests that restrict
506 Part 6: Cost of Capital and Long-Term Financial Policy
17Ross_Chapter17_4th.indd 50617Ross_Chapter17_4th.indd 506 12-11-27 12:1212-11-27 12:12
investment in fi rms that do not pay regular dividends. For all these reasons a stable dividend policy is common. For example, looking back at Table 17.4, the dividends paid by these large Canadian fi rms are much less volatile through time than their earnings.
Th e dividend policy might also depend on the class of shares. For example, in case of dual class shares the diff erent classes of shareholders have diff erent voting rights and dividend payments.
A Compromise Dividend Policy In practice, many fi rms appear to follow what amounts to a compromise dividend policy. Such a policy is based on fi ve main goals:
1. Avoid cutting back on positive NPV projects to pay a dividend. 2. Avoid dividend cuts. 3. Avoid the need to sell equity. 4. Maintain a target debt/equity ratio. 5. Maintain a target dividend payout ratio.
Th ese goals are ranked more or less in order of their importance. In our strict residual approach, we assumed that the fi rm maintained a fi xed debt/equity ratio. Under the compromise approach, that debt/equity ratio is viewed as a long-range goal. It is allowed to vary in the short run if neces- sary to avoid a dividend cut or the need to sell new equity.
In addition to a strong reluctance to cut dividends, fi nancial managers tend to think of divi- dend payments in terms of a proportion of income, and they also tend to think investors are entitled to a “fair” share of corporate income. Th is share is the long-run target payout ratio, and it is the fraction of the earnings that the fi rm expects to pay as dividends under ordinary circum- stances. Again, this is viewed as a long-range goal, so it might vary in the short run if needed. As a result, in the long run, earnings growth is followed by dividend increases, but only with a lag.
One can minimize the problems of dividend instability by creating two types of dividends: regular and extra. For companies using this approach, the regular dividend would likely be a rela- tively small fraction of permanent earnings, so that it could be sustained easily. Extra dividends would be granted when an increase in earnings was expected to be temporary.
Since investors look on an extra dividend as a bonus, there is relatively little disappointment when an extra dividend is not repeated.
Some Survey Evidence on Dividends A recent study surveyed a large number of Canadian fi nancial executives regarding dividend policy. Table 17.5 shows the top 5 factors infl uencing dividend policy.
As shown in Table 17.5, fi nancial managers are highly disinclined to cut dividends. Moreover, they are very conscious of their previous dividends and desire to maintain a relatively steady dividend. In contrast, concerns about dividends aff ecting the fi rm’s stock price are somewhat less important.
TABLE 17.5
Factors influencing dividend policy of Canadian financial firms
Factor Moderate or High Level of Importance (%)
1. Stability of earnings 95.7 2. Pattern of past dividends 95.7 3. Level of current earnings 87.0 4. Level of expected future earnings 82.6 5. Concern about affecting the stock price 47.8
Source: Adapted from Table 2 of Baker, H.K., Dutta, S., And Saadi, S. (2008), “How Managers Of Financial Versus Non-Financial Firms View Dividends: Th e Canadian Evidence”, Global Finance Journal, 19, pp. 171–186.
target payout ratio A firm’s long-term desired dividend-to-earnings ratio.
Chapter 17: Dividends and Dividend Policy 507
17Ross_Chapter17_4th.indd 50717Ross_Chapter17_4th.indd 507 12-11-27 12:1212-11-27 12:12
Table 17.6 is drawn from the same survey, but here the responses address the top fi ve reasons for Canadian fi nancial fi rms paying dividends Not surprisingly given the responses in Table 17.5 and our earlier discussion, the highest priority is maintaining a consistent dividend policy. Th e next several items are also consistent with our previous analysis. Financial managers are very concerned about earnings stability and future earnings levels in making dividend decisions, and they consider the availability of good investment opportunities. Survey respondents also believed that fi rm should disclose to investors its reasons for changing the cash dividend.
In contrast to our discussion in the earlier part of this chapter on taxes and fl otation costs, the Canadian. fi nancial managers in this survey did not think that personal taxes paid on dividends by shareholders are very important.
TABLE 17.6
Explanation for paying dividends: Canadian financial firms
Policy Statements Percent Who Agree or
Strongly Agree (%)
1. A firm should strive to maintain an uninterrupted record of dividend payments. 96.0 2. Investors generally regard dividend changes as signals about a firm’s future prospects. 95.1 3. A firm should adequately disclose to investors its reasons for changing its cash
dividend. 91.3
4. A firm’s stock price generally falls when the firm unexpectedly decreases its dividend. 90.9 5. A firm’s stock price generally rises when the firm unexpectedly increases its dividend. 87.0
Source: Adapted from Table 3 and Table 4 of Baker, H.K., Dutta, S., and Saadi, S. (2008), “How Managers of Financial versus Non-Financial Firms View Dividends: Th e Canadian Evidence”, Global Finance Journal, 19, pp. 171–186.
1. What is a residual dividend policy?
2. What is the chief drawback to a strict residual policy? What do many firms do in practice?
17.7 Stock Repurchase: An Alternative to Cash Dividends
When a fi rm wants to pay cash to its shareholders, it normally pays a cash dividend. Another way is to repurchase its own shares. Over recent years, share repurchase has grown in importance relative to dividends. Consider Figure 17.7, which shows the dividends and share repurchases for Canadian fi rms over the years from 1987 to 2008. As can be seen, the ratio of repurchases to earn- ings was far less than the ratio of dividends to earnings in the early years.
Following the market crash of 2008 and early 2009, the number of Canadian companies announcing share repurchases increased. For example, in February 2012, Tim Hortons announced a program to repurchase $200 million in shares. Also, in December 2011, Air Canada. announced a stock repurchase program, to increase the value of its shares, which were depressed due to ongo- ing labour talks, economic uncertainty, and dwindling growth prospects.
Cash Dividends versus Repurchase Imagine an all-equity company with excess cash of $300,000. Th e fi rm pays no dividends, and its net income for the year just ended is $49,000. Th e market value statement of fi nancial position at the end of the year is represented below.
Market Value Statement of Financial Position (before paying out excess cash)
Excess cash $ 300,000 $ 0 Debt Other assets 700,000 1,000,000 Equity Total $ 1,000,000 $ 1,000,000
Concept Questions
repurchase Another method used to pay out a firm’s earnings to its owners, which provides more preferable tax treatment than dividends.
508 Part 6: Cost of Capital and Long-Term Financial Policy
17Ross_Chapter17_4th.indd 50817Ross_Chapter17_4th.indd 508 12-11-27 12:1212-11-27 12:12
FIGURE 17.7
Dividends and Share Repurchases of Canadian firms: 1987–2008
1988 1990 1992 1994 1996 1998 2000 2006 200820042002
0.0
0.2
0.4
0.6
0.8
% o
f Fi
rm s
Share Repurchases Dividends
Figure 5 of Mitchell, Chris, “Essays on Capital Gains, Household Consumption and Corporate Payout Policy” (2012). Electronic Thesis and Dissertation Repository. Paper 687. ir.lib.uwo.ca/etd/687 Repurchase data covering the years 1987–2000 provided by McNally, William J. and Brian F. Smith. “Long-Run Returns Following Open Market Share Repurchases.” 2007. Journal of Banking and Finance. Vol. 31, Issue 3, 703–717.
Th ere are 100,000 shares outstanding. Th e total market value of the equity is $1 million, so the stock sells for $10 per share. Earnings per share (EPS) were $49,000/100,000 = $.49, and the price/earnings ratio (P/E) is $10/$.49 = 20.4.
One option the company is considering is a $300,000/100,000 = $3 per share extra cash divi- dend. Alternatively, the company is thinking of using the money to repurchase $300,000/$10 = 30,000 shares of stock.
If commissions, taxes, and other imperfections are ignored in our example, the shareholders shouldn’t care which option is chosen. Does this seem surprising? It shouldn’t, really. What is hap- pening here is that the fi rm is paying out $300,000 in cash. Th e new statement of fi nancial position is represented below.
Market Value Statement of Financial Position (after paying out excess cash as dividends)
Excess cash $ 0 $ 0 Debt Other assets 700,000 700,000 Equity Total $ 700,000 $ 700,000
If the cash is paid out as a dividend, there are still 100,000 shares outstanding, so each is worth $7. Th e fact that the per-share value fell from $10 to $7 isn’t a cause for concern. Consider a share-
holder who owns 100 shares. At $10 per share before the dividend, the total value is $1,000. Aft er the $3 dividend, this same shareholder has 100 shares worth $7 each, for a total of $700,
plus 100 × $3 = $300 in cash, for a combined total of $1,000. Th is just illustrates what we saw earlier: A cash dividend doesn’t aff ect a shareholder’s wealth if there are no imperfections. In this case, the stock price simply fell by $3 when the stock went ex dividend.
Also, since total earnings and the number of shares outstanding haven’t changed, EPS is still 49 cents. Th e price/earnings ratio (P/E), however, falls to $7/.49 = 14.3. Why we are looking at accounting earnings and P/E ratios will be apparent just below.
Alternatively, if the company repurchases 30,000 shares, there will be 70,000 left outstanding. Th e statement of fi nancial position looks the same.
Market Value Statement of Financial Position (after paying out excess cash as stock repurchase)
Excess cash $ 0 $ 0 Debt Other assets 700,000 700,000 Equity Total $ 700,000 $ 700,000
Chapter 17: Dividends and Dividend Policy 509
17Ross_Chapter17_4th.indd 50917Ross_Chapter17_4th.indd 509 12-11-27 12:1212-11-27 12:12
Th e company is worth $700,000 again, so each remaining share is worth $700,000/70,000 = $10 each. Our shareholder with 100 shares is obviously unaff ected. For example, if the shareholder were so inclined, he or she could sell 30 shares and end up with $300 in cash and $700 in stock, just as if the fi rm pays the cash dividend. Th is is another example of a homemade dividend.
In this second case, EPS goes up since total earnings are the same while the number of shares goes down. Th e new EPS will be $49,000/70,000 = $.70 per share. However, the important thing to notice is that the P/E ratio is $10/$.70 = 14.3, just as it was following the dividend.
Th is example illustrates the important point that, if there are no imperfections, a cash dividend and a share repurchase are essentially the same thing. Th is is just another illustration of dividend policy irrelevance when there are no taxes or other imperfections.
Real-World Considerations in a Repurchase In the real world, there are some accounting diff erences between a share repurchase and a cash dividend, but the most important diff erence is in the tax treatment. A repurchase has a signifi cant tax advantage over a cash dividend. A dividend is taxed, and a shareholder has no choice about whether or not to receive the dividend. In a repurchase, a shareholder pays taxes only if (1) the shareholder actually chooses to sell, and (2) the shareholder has a taxable capital gain on the sale.
Normally, at any time, about one-third of TSX listed companies have announced their inten- tions to repurchase stock through the exchange. Th is means they plan to buy up to 5 percent of their stock for their treasury. Because of the favourable tax treatment of capital gains, a repurchase is a very sensible alternative to an extra dividend.
Share repurchases can be used to achieve other corporate goals such as altering the fi rm’s capital structure or as a takeover defence. Many fi rms repurchase shares because management believes the stock is undervalued. Th is reason for repurchasing is controversial because it contra- dicts the effi cient market hypothesis. However, there is considerable evidence that fi rms repur- chasing shares do experience an increase in shareholder return.18
Share Repurchase and EPS You may read in the popular fi nancial press that a share repurchase is benefi cial because earnings per share increase. As we have seen, this will happen. Th e reason is simply that a share repurchase reduces the number of outstanding shares, but it has no eff ect on total earnings. As a result, EPS rises.
However, the fi nancial press may place undue emphasis on EPS fi gures in a repurchase agreement. In our example above, we saw that the value of the stock wasn’t aff ected by the EPS change. In fact, the price/earnings ratio was exactly the same when we compared a cash dividend to a repurchase.
Since the increase in earnings per share is exactly tracked by the increase in the price per share, there is no net eff ect. Put another way, the increase in EPS is just an accounting adjustment that refl ects (correctly) the change in the number of shares outstanding.
In the real world, to the extent that repurchases benefi t the fi rm, we would argue that they do so primarily because of the tax considerations we discussed above.
1. Why might a stock repurchase make more sense than an extra cash dividend?
2. Why don’t all firms use stock repurchases instead of cash dividends?
17.8 Stock Dividends and Stock Splits
Another type of dividend is paid out in shares of stock. Th is type of dividend is called a stock divi- dend. A stock dividend is not a true dividend because it is not paid in cash. Th e eff ect of a stock
18 This evidence is in: D. Ikenberry, J. Lakonishok, and T. Vermaelen, “Stock Repurchases in Canada: Performance and Strategic Trading,” Journal of Finance, October 2000. For a contradictory view, see K. Li and W. McNally, “Information Signalling or Agency Conflicts: What Explains Canadian Open Market Share Repurchases?” Working Paper, Wilfrid Laurier University, March 2000.
Concept Questions
stock dividend Payment made by a firm to its owners in the form of stock, diluting the value of each share outstanding.
510 Part 6: Cost of Capital and Long-Term Financial Policy
17Ross_Chapter17_4th.indd 51017Ross_Chapter17_4th.indd 510 12-11-27 12:1212-11-27 12:12
dividend is to increase the number of shares that each owner holds. Since there are more shares outstanding, each is simply worth less.
A stock dividend is commonly expressed as a percentage; for example, a 20 percent stock dividend means that a shareholder receives one new share for every fi ve currently owned (a 20 percent increase). Since every shareholder owns 20 percent more stock, the total number of shares outstanding rises by 20 percent. As we see in a moment, the result would be that each share of stock is worth about 20 percent less.
A stock split is essentially the same thing as a stock dividend, except that a split is expressed as a ratio instead of a percentage. When a split is declared, each share is split to create additional shares. For example, Coca-Cola stock split two-for-one in 2012 and each old share was split into two new shares.
Some Detai ls on Stock Splits and Stock Dividends Stock splits and stock dividends have essentially the same impacts on the corporation: Th ey increase the number of shares outstanding and reduce the value per share. Also, both options will have a similar impact on future cash dividends. When stocks split, the cash dividend per share is reduced accordingly. Th e accounting treatment is not the same, however. Under TSX rules, the maximum stock dividend is 25 percent, anything larger is considered a stock split. Further, stock dividends are taxable, but stock splits are not.
EXAMPLE OF A STOCK DIVIDEND The Peterson Company, a consulting firm spe- cializing in difficult accounting problems, has 10,000 shares of stock, each selling at $66. The total market value of the equity is $66 × 10,000 = $660,000. With a 10 percent stock dividend, each shareholder receives one additional share for each 10 presently owned, and the total number of shares outstanding after the dividend is 11,000.
Before the stock dividend, the equity portion of Peterson’s statement of fi nancial position might look like this:
Common stock (10,000 shares outstanding) $210,000 Retained earnings 290,000 Total owners’ equity $500,000
Th e amount of the stock dividend is transferred from retained earnings to common stock. Since 1000 new shares are issued, the common stock account is increased by $66,000 (1000 shares at $66 each). Total owners’ equity is unaff ected by the stock dividend because no cash has come in or out, so retained earnings is reduced by the entire $66,000. Th e net eff ect of these machinations is that Peterson’s equity accounts now look like this:
Common stock (11,000 shares outstanding) $276,000 Retained earnings 224,000 Total owners’ equity $500,000
EXAMPLE OF A STOCK SPLIT A stock split is conceptually similar to a stock divi- dend, but it is commonly expressed as a ratio. For example, in a three-for-two split, each share- holder receives one additional share of stock for each two held originally, so a three-for-two split amounts to a 50 percent stock dividend. Again, no cash is paid out, and the percentage of the entire firm that each shareholder owns is unaffected.
Th e accounting treatment of a stock split is a little diff erent (and simpler) from that of a stock dividend. Suppose Peterson decides to declare a two-for-one stock split. Th e number of shares outstanding doubles to 20,000. Th e owner’s equity aft er the split is the same as before the split except the new number of shares is noted.
Common stock (20,000 shares outstanding) $210,000 Retained earnings 290,000 Total owners’ equity $500,000
stock split An increase in a firm’s shares outstanding without any change in owner’s equity.
Chapter 17: Dividends and Dividend Policy 511
17Ross_Chapter17_4th.indd 51117Ross_Chapter17_4th.indd 511 12-11-27 12:1212-11-27 12:12
Value of Stock Splits and Stock Dividends Th e laws of logic tell us that stock splits and stock dividends can (1) leave the value of the fi rm unaff ected, (2) increase its value, or (3) decrease its value. Unfortunately, the issues are complex enough that one cannot easily determine which of the three relationships holds.
THE BENCHMARK CASE A strong case can be made that stock dividends and splits do not change either the wealth of any shareholder or the wealth of the firm as a whole. In our prior example, the equity was worth a total of $660,000. With the stock dividend, the number of shares increased to 11,000, so it seems that each would be worth $660,000/11,000 = $60.
For example, a shareholder who had 100 shares worth $66 each before the dividend would have 110 shares worth $60 each aft erwards. Th e total value of the stock is $6,600 either way; so the stock dividend doesn’t really have any economic aff ect.
With the stock split, there were 20,000 shares outstanding, so each should be worth $660,000/20,000 = $33. In other words, the number of shares doubles and the price halves. From these calculations, it appears that stock dividends and splits are just paper transactions.
Although these results are relatively obvious, there are reasons that are oft en given to suggest that there may be some benefi ts to these actions. Th e typical fi nancial manager is aware of many real-world complexities, and, for that reason, the stock split or stock dividend decision is not treated lightly in practice.
TRADING RANGE Proponents of stock dividends and stock splits frequently argue that a security has a proper trading range. When the security is priced above this level, many investors do not have the funds to buy the common trading unit called a round lot (usually 100 shares).
Although this argument is a popular one, its validity is questionable for a number of reasons. Mutual funds, pension funds, and other institutions have steadily increased their trading activity since World War II and now handle a sizeable percentage of total trading volume (over half of the trading volume on both the TSX and NYSE). Because these institutions buy and sell in huge amounts, the individual share price is of little concern. Furthermore, we sometimes observe share prices that are quite large without appearing to cause problems.
Finally, there is evidence that stock splits may actually decrease the liquidity of the company’s shares. Following a two-for-one split, the number of shares traded should more than double if liquid- ity is increased by the split. Th is doesn’t appear to happen, and the reverse is sometimes observed.
Regardless of the impact on liquidity, fi rms do split their stock. Some managers believe that keeping the share price within a range attractive to individual investors helps promote Canadian ownership.
Reverse Splits A less frequently encountered fi nancial maneuver is the reverse split. In a one-for-three reverse split, each investor exchanges three old shares for one new share. As mentioned previously with reference to stock splits and stock dividends, a case can be made that a reverse split changes noth- ing substantial about the company.
Given real-world imperfections, three related reasons are cited for reverse splits. First, trans- action costs to shareholders may be less aft er the reverse split. Second, the liquidity and market- ability of a company’s stock might be improved when its price is raised to the popular trading range. Th ird, stocks selling below a certain level are not considered respectable, meaning that investors underestimate these fi rms’ earnings, cash fl ow, growth, and stability. Some fi nancial analysts argue that a reverse split can achieve instant respectability. As with stock splits, none of these reasons is particularly compelling, especially the third one.
Th ere are two other reasons for reverse splits. First, stock exchanges have minimum price per share requirements. A reverse split may bring the stock price up to such a minimum. Second, companies sometimes perform reverse splits and, at the same time, buy out any shareholders who end up with less than a certain number of shares. Th is second tactic can be abusive if used to force out minority shareholders.
In the aft ermath of the tech bubble, a number of technology fi rms made the decision to under- take reverse splits. More recently, in 2009, Domtar Corporation, the Montreal-based largest inte- grated producer of uncoated free sheet paper in North America, underwent a reverse stock split at a 1-for-12 ratio. Domtar management cited two reasons for undertaking a reverse split—to return the company’s share price to a level similar to that of other widely owned companies and to attract a broader range of institutional investors.
trading range Price range between highest and lowest prices at which a stock is traded.
reverse split Procedure where a firm’s number of shares outstanding is reduced.
512 Part 6: Cost of Capital and Long-Term Financial Policy
17Ross_Chapter17_4th.indd 51217Ross_Chapter17_4th.indd 512 12-11-27 12:1212-11-27 12:12
1. What is the effect of a stock split on shareholder wealth?
2. How does the accounting treatment of a stock split differ from that used with a small stock dividend?
17.9 SUMMARY AND CONCLUSIONS
In this chapter, we discussed the types of dividends and how they are paid. We then defi ned divi- dend policy and examined whether or not dividend policy matters. Finally, we illustrated how a fi rm might establish a dividend policy and described an important alternative to cash dividends, a share repurchase.
In covering these subjects, we saw that:
1. Dividend policy is irrelevant when there are no taxes or other imperfections because share- holders can effectively undo the firm’s dividend strategy. A shareholder who receives a divi- dend greater than desired can reinvest the excess. Conversely, the shareholder who receives a dividend that is smaller than desired can sell extra shares of stock.
2. Individual shareholder income taxes and new issue flotation costs are real-world consider- ations that favour a low-dividend payout. With taxes and new issue costs, the firm should pay out dividends only after all positive NPV projects have been fully financed.
3. There are groups in the economy that may favour a high payout. These include many large institutions such as pension plans. Recognizing that some groups prefer a high payout and some prefer a low payout, the clientele effect supports the idea that dividend policy responds to the needs of shareholders. For example, if 40 percent of the shareholders prefer low divi- dends and 60 percent of the shareholders prefer high dividends, approximately 40 percent of companies will have a low-dividend payout, while 60 percent will have a high payout. This sharply reduces the impact of any individual firm’s dividend policy on its market price.
4. A firm wishing to pursue a strict residual dividend payout will have an unstable dividend. Dividend stability is usually viewed as highly desirable. We therefore discussed a compro- mise strategy that provides for a stable dividend and appears to be quite similar to the divi- dend policies many firms follow in practice.
5. A stock repurchase acts much like a cash dividend, but can have a significant tax advantage. Stock repurchases are therefore a very useful part of over-all dividend policy.
To close our discussion of dividends, we emphasize one last time the diff erence between divi- dends and dividend policy. Dividends are important, because the value of a share of stock is ultimately determined by the dividends that are paid. What is less clear is whether or not the time pattern of dividends (more now versus more later) matters. Th is is the dividend policy question, and it is not easy to give a defi nitive answer to it.
Key Terms clientele effect (page 502) date of payment (page 492) date of record (page 492) declaration date (page 492) distribution (page 491) dividend (page 491) ex-dividend date (page 492) homemade dividends (page 495) information content effect (page 502) regular cash dividend (page 491)
repurchase (page 508) residual dividend approach (page 503) reverse split (page 512) stock dividend (page 510) stock split (page 511) stripped common shares (page 495) target payout ratio (page 507) trading range (page 512)
Concept Questions
Chapter 17: Dividends and Dividend Policy 513
17Ross_Chapter17_4th.indd 51317Ross_Chapter17_4th.indd 513 12-11-27 12:1212-11-27 12:12
Chapter Review Problems and Self-Test 17.1 Residual Dividend Policy The Rapscallion Corporation
practices a strict residual dividend policy and maintains a capital structure of 40 percent debt, 60 percent equity. Earn- ings for the year are $2,500. What is the maximum amount of capital spending possible without new equity? Suppose that planned investment outlays for the coming year are $3,000. Will Rapscallion be paying a dividend? If so, how much?
17.2 Repurchase versus Cash Dividend Trantor Corporation is deciding whether to pay out $300 in excess cash in the form of an extra dividend or a share repurchase. Current earnings are
$1.50 per share and the stock sells for $15. The market value statement of financial position before paying out the $300 is as follows:
Statement of Financial Position (before paying out excess cash)
Excess cash $ 300 $ 400 Debt Other assets 1,600 1,500 Equity Total $ 1,900 $ 1,900
Evaluate the two alternatives for the effect on the price per share of the stock, the EPS, and the P/E ratio.
Answers to Self-Test Problems 17.1 Rapscallion has a debt/equity ratio of .40/.60 = 2/3. If the entire $2,500 in earnings were reinvested, $2,500 × 2/3 = $1,667 in new bor-
rowing would be needed to keep the debt/equity unchanged. Total new financing possible without external equity is thus $2,500 + 1,667 = $4,167.
If planned outlays are $3,000, this amount can be financed 60 percent with equity. The needed equity is thus $3,000 × .60 = $1,800. This is less than the $2,500 in earnings, so a dividend of $2,500 - 1,800 = $700 would be paid.
17.2 The market value of the equity is $1,500. The price per share is $15, so there are 100 shares outstanding. The cash dividend would amount to $300/100 = $3 per share. When the stock goes ex dividend, the price drops by $3 per share to $12. Put another way, the total assets decrease by $300, so the equity value goes down by this amount to $1,200. With 100 shares, this is $12 per share. After the divi- dend, EPS is the same, $1.50, but the P/E ratio is $12/1.50 = 8 times.
With a repurchase, $300/15 = 20 shares would be bought up, leaving 80. The equity again is worth $1,200 total. With 80 shares, this is $1,200/80 = $15 per share, so the price doesn’t change. Total earnings for Trantor must be $1.5 × 100 = $150. After the repurchase, EPS is higher at $150/80 = $1.875. The P/E ratio, however, is still $15/1.875 = 8 times.
Concepts Review and Critical Thinking Questions 1. (LO2) How is it possible that dividends are so important, but,
at the same time, dividend policy could be irrelevant? 2. (LO4) What is the impact of a stock repurchase on a compa-
ny’s debt ratio? Does this suggest another use for excess cash? 3. (LO2) What is the chief drawback to a strict residual divi-
dend policy? Why is this a problem? How does a compromise policy work? How does it differ from a strict residual policy?
4. (LO1) On Tuesday, December 8, Hometown Power Co.’s board of directors declares a dividend of 75 cents per share payable on Wednesday, January 17, to shareholders of record as of Wednesday, January 3. When is the ex-dividend date? If a shareholder buys stock before that date, who gets the divi- dends on those shares, the buyer or the seller?
5. (LO1) Some corporations, like one British company that of- fers its large shareholders free crematorium use, pay dividends in kind (that is, offer their services to shareholders at below- market cost). Should mutual funds invest in stocks that pay these dividends in kind? (The fundholders do not receive these services.)
6. (LO2) If increases in dividends tend to be followed by (im- mediate) increases in share prices, how can it be said that divi- dend policy is irrelevant?
7. (LO2) Last month, East Coast Power Company, which had been having trouble with cost overruns on a nuclear power plant that it had been building, announced that it was “tempo- rarily suspending payments due to the cash flow crunch asso- ciated with its investment program.” The company’s stock price dropped from $28.50 to $25 when this announcement
was made. How would you interpret this change in the stock price (that is, what would you say caused it)?
8. (LO2) The DRK Corporation has recently developed a divi- dend reinvestment plan, or DRIP. The plan allows investors to reinvest cash dividends automatically in DRK in exchange for new shares of stock. Over time, investors in DRK will be able to build their holdings by reinvesting dividends to purchase additional shares of the company.
Over 1000 companies offer dividend reinvestment plans. Most companies with DRIPs charge no brokerage or service fees. In fact, the shares of DRK will be purchased at a 10 per- cent discount from the market price. A consultant for DRK estimates that about 75 percent of DRK’s shareholders will take part in this plan. This is somewhat higher than the average.
Evaluate DRK’s dividend reinvestment plan. Will it in- crease shareholder wealth? Discuss the advantages and disad- vantages involved here.
9. (LO2) For initial public offerings of common stock, 1993 was a very big year, with over $43 billion raised by the process. Relatively few of the firms involved paid cash dividends. Why do you think that most chose not to pay cash dividends?
10. (LO2) York University pays no taxes on its capital gains or on its dividend income and interest income. Would it be irratio- nal to find low-dividend, high-growth stocks in its portfolio? Would it be irrational to find preferred shares in its portfolio? Explain.
514 Part 6: Cost of Capital and Long-Term Financial Policy
17Ross_Chapter17_4th.indd 51417Ross_Chapter17_4th.indd 514 12-11-27 12:1212-11-27 12:12
Questions and Problems 1. Dividends and Taxes (LO2) Pandosy Inc. has declared a $5.10 per share dividend. Suppose capital gains are not taxed, but
dividends are taxed at 15 percent. Pandosy sells for $93.85 per share, and the stock is about to go ex dividend. What do you think the ex-dividend price will be?
2. Stock Dividends (LO3) The owners’ equity accounts for Okanagan International are shown here:
Common stock ($1 par value) $ 20,000 Capital Surplus Retained earnings
285,000 638,120
Total owners’ equity $ 943,120
a. If Okanagan stock currently sells for $30 per share and a 10 percent stock dividend is declared, how many new shares will be distributed? Show how the equity accounts would change.
b. If Okanagan declared a 25 percent stock dividend, how would the accounts change? 3. Stock Splits (LO3) For the company in Problem 2, show how the equity accounts will change if:
a. Okanagan declares a four-for-one stock split. How many shares are outstanding now? b. Okanagan declares a one-for-five reverse stock split. How many shares are outstanding now?
4. Stock Splits and Stock Dividends (LO3) Mill Creek Corporation (MCC) currently has 425,000 shares of stock outstanding that sell for $80 per share. Assuming no market imperfections or tax effects exist, what will the share price be after:
a. MCC has a five-for-three stock split? b. MCC has a 15 percent stock dividend? c. MCC has a 42.5 percent stock dividend? d. MCC has a four-for-seven reverse stock split?
Determine the new number of shares outstanding in parts (a) through (d). 5. Regular Dividends (LO1) The statement of financial position for Knox Corp. is shown here in market value terms. There are
9,000 shares of stock outstanding. Market Value Statement of Financial Position
Cash $ 43,700 Equity $353,700 Fixed assets 310,000 Total $ 353,700 Total $353,700
The company has declared a dividend of $1.40 per share. The stock goes ex dividend tomorrow. Ignoring any tax effects, what is the stock selling for today? What will it sell for tomorrow? What will the statement of financial position look like after the dividends are paid?
6. Share Repurchase (LO4) In the previous problem, suppose Knox has announced it is going to repurchase $12,600 worth of stock. What effect will this transaction have on the equity of the firm? How many shares will be outstanding? What will the price per share be after the repurchase? Ignoring tax effects, show how the share repurchase is effectively the same as a cash dividend.
7. Stock Dividends (LO3) The market value statement of financial position for McKinley Manufacturing is shown here. McKinley has declared a 25 percent stock dividend. The stock goes ex dividend tomorrow (the chronology for a stock dividend is similar to that for a cash dividend). There are 14,000 shares of stock outstanding. What will the ex-dividend price be?
Market Value Statement of Financial Position
Cash $ 86,000 Debt $145,000 Fixed assets 630,000 Equity 571,000 Total $ 716,000 Total $716,000
8. Stock Dividends (LO3) The company with the common equity accounts shown here has declared a 15 percent stock dividend when the market value of its stock is $43 per share. What effects on the equity accounts will the distribution of the stock dividend have?
Common stock ($1 par value) $ 385,000 Capital surplus 846,000 Retained earnings 3,720,000 Total owners’ equity $ 4,951,000
9. Stock Splits (LO3) In the previous problem, suppose the company instead decides on a four-for-one stock split. The firm’s 75- cent per share cash dividend on the new (post-split) shares represents an increase of 10 percent over last year’s dividend on the presplit stock. What effect does this have on the equity accounts? What was last year’s dividend per share?
10. Residual Dividend Policy (LO2) Crawford Inc., a litter recycling company, uses a residual dividend policy. A debt-equity ratio of 1.0 is considered optimal. Earnings for the period just ended were $1,400, and a dividend of $420 was declared. How much in new debt was borrowed? What were total capital outlays?
Basic (Questions
1–13)
5
Chapter 17: Dividends and Dividend Policy 515
17Ross_Chapter17_4th.indd 51517Ross_Chapter17_4th.indd 515 12-11-27 12:1212-11-27 12:12
11. Residual Dividend Policy (LO2) Rutland Corporation has declared an annual dividend of $0.50 per share. For the year just ended, earnings were $8 per share.
a. What is Rutland’s payout ratio? b. Suppose Rutland has seven million shares outstanding. Borrowing for the coming year is planned at $14 million. What are
planned investment outlays assuming a residual dividend policy? What target capital structure is implicit in these calculations?
12. Residual Dividend Policy (LO2) Summerland Corporation follows a strict residual dividend policy. Its debt-equity ratio is 1.5. a. If earnings for the year are $145,000, what is the maximum amount of capital spending possible with no new equity?
b. If planned investment outlays for the coming year are $790,000, will Summerland pay a dividend? If so, how much? c. Does Summerland maintain a constant dividend payout? Why or why not?
13. Residual Dividend Policy (LO2) Penticton Rock (PR) Inc. predicts that earnings in the coming year will be $54 million. There are 19 million shares, and PR maintains a debt-equity ratio of 1.2.
a. Calculate the maximum investment funds available without issuing new equity and the increase in borrowing that goes along with it.
b. Suppose the firm uses a residual dividend policy. Planned capital expenditures total $74 million. Based on this information, what will the dividend per share be?
c. In part (b), how much borrowing will take place? What is the addition to retained earnings? d. Suppose PR plans no capital outlays for the coming year. What will the dividend be under a residual policy? What will new
borrowing be? 14. Homemade Dividends (LO2) You own 1000 shares of stock in Armstrong Corporation. You will receive a $1.85 per share
dividend in one year. In two years, Armstrong will pay a liquidating dividend of $58 per share. The required return on Armstrong stock is 15 percent. What is the current share price of your stock (ignoring taxes)? If you would rather have equal dividends in each of the next two years, show how you can accomplish this by creating homemade dividends. Hint: Dividends will be in the form of an annuity.
15. Homemade Dividends (LO2) In the previous problem, suppose you want only $750 total in dividends the first year. What will your homemade dividend be in two years?
16. Stock Repurchase (LO4) Salmon Arm Corporation is evaluating an extra dividend versus a share repurchase. In either case, $11,000 would be spent. Current earnings are $1.40 per share, and the stock currently sells for $58 per share. There are 2,000 shares outstanding. Ignore taxes and other imperfections in answering the first two questions.
a. Evaluate the two alternatives in terms of the effect on the price per share of the stock and shareholder wealth. b. What will be the effect on Salmon Arm’s EPS and PE ratio under the two different scenarios? c. In the real world, which of these actions would you recommend? Why?
17. Expected Return, Dividends, and Taxes (LO2) The Sicamous Company and the Revelstoke Company are two firms whose business risk is the same but that have different dividend policies. Sicamous pays no dividend, whereas Revelstoke has an expected dividend yield of 4 percent. Suppose the capital gains tax rate is zero, whereas the income tax rate is 35 percent. Sicamous has an expected earnings growth rate of 15 percent annually, and its stock price is expected to grow at this same rate. If the after-tax expected returns on the two stocks are equal (because they are in the same risk class), what is the pre-tax required return on Revelstoke’s stock?
18. Dividends and Taxes (LO2) As discussed in the text, in the absence of market imperfections and tax effects, we would expect the share price to decline by the amount of the dividend payment when the stock goes ex dividend. Once we consider the role of taxes, however, this is not necessarily true. One model has been proposed that incorporates tax effects into determining the ex- dividend price:19
(P0 - PX)/D = (1 - TP)/(1 - TG) where P0 is the price just before the stock goes ex, PX is the ex-dividend share price, D is the amount of the dividend per share, TP
is the relevant marginal personal tax rate on dividends, and TG is the effective marginal tax rate on capital gains. a. If TP = TG = 0, how much will the share price fall when the stock goes ex? b. If TP = 15 percent and TG = 0, how much will the share price fall? c. If TP = 15 percent and TG = 30 percent, how much will the share price fall? d. Suppose the only owners of stock are corporations. Recall that corporations get at least a 100 percent exemption from
taxation on the dividend income they receive, but they do not get such an exemption on capital gains. If the corporation’s income and capital gains tax rates are both 35 percent, what does this model predict the ex-dividend share price will be?
e. What does this problem tell you about real-world tax considerations and the dividend policy of the firm?
19 N. Elton and M. Gruber, “Marginal Stockholder Tax Rates and the Clientele Effect,” Review of Economics and Statis- tics 52 (February 1970).
Intermediate (Questions
14–16)
Challenge (Questions
17–20)
516 Part 6: Cost of Capital and Long-Term Financial Policy
17Ross_Chapter17_4th.indd 51617Ross_Chapter17_4th.indd 516 12-11-27 12:1212-11-27 12:12
19. Dividends versus Reinvestment (LO2) Nelson Business Machine Co. (NBM) has $3 million of extra cash after taxes have been paid. NBM has two choices to make use of this cash. One alternative is to invest the cash in financial assets. The resulting investment income will be paid out as a special dividend at the end of three years. In this case, the firm can invest in Treasury bills yielding 3 percent or a 5 percent preferred stock. CRA regulations allow the company to exclude from taxable income 100 percent of the dividends received from investing in another company’s stock. Another alternative is to pay out the cash now as dividends. This would allow the shareholders to invest on their own in Treasury bills with the same yield, or in preferred stock. The corporate tax rate is 40 percent. Assume the investor has a 40 percent personal income tax rate, which is applied to interest income. The personal dividend tax rate is 20 percent on common stock dividends after applying the dividend tax credit. Should the cash be paid today or in three years? Which of the two options generates the highest after-tax income for the shareholders?
20. Dividends versus Reinvestment (LO2) After completing its capital spending for the year, Banff Manufacturing has $1,000 extra cash. Banff ’s managers must choose between investing the cash in Canada bonds that yield 6 percent or paying the cash out to investors who would invest in the bonds themselves.
a. If the corporate tax rate is 35 percent, what personal tax rate after applying the dividend tax credit would make the invest- ors equally willing to receive the dividend or to let Banff invest the money?
b. Is the answer to (a) reasonable? Why or why not? c. Suppose the only investment choice is a preferred stock that yields 9 percent. The corporate dividend exclusion of 100
percent applies. What personal tax rate will make the shareholders indifferent to the outcome of Banff’s dividend decision? d. Is this a compelling argument for a low dividend-payout ratio? Why or why not?
Kelowna Microchips Inc.
Kelowna Microchips Inc. (KMI) is a small company founded 15 years ago by electronics engineers Justin Langer and Suzanne Maher. KMI manufactures integrated circuits to capitalize on the complex mixed-signal design technology and has recently entered the market for frequency timing generators, or silicon timing devices, which provide the timing signals or “clocks” necessary to synchronize electronic systems. Its clock products originally were used in PC video graphics applications, but the market subsequently expanded to include motherboards, PC peripheral devices, and other digital consumer electronics, such as digital television boxes and game consoles. KMI also designs and markets custom application specific integrated circuits (ASICs) for industrial customers. The ASIC’s design combines analog and digital, or mixed-signal, technology. In addition to Justin and Suzanne, Andrew Keegan, who pro- vided capital for the company, is the third primary owner. Each owns 25 percent of the one million shares outstanding. The company has several other individuals, including current employees, who own the remaining shares. Recently, the company designed a new computer mother- board. The company’s design is both more efficient and less expensive to manufacture, and the KMI design is expected to become standard in many personal computers. After investi- gating the possibility of manufacturing the new motherboard, KMI determined that the costs involved in building a new plant would be prohibitive. The owners also decided that they were unwilling to bring in another large outside owner. In- stead, KMI sold the design to an outside firm. The sale of the motherboard design was completed for an after-tax payment of $40 million.
QUESTIONS
1. Justin believes the company should use the extra cash to pay a special one-time dividend. How will this proposal affect the stock price? How will it affect the value of the company?
2. Suzanne believes the company should use the extra cash to pay off debt and upgrade and expand its existing manufacturing capability. How would Suzanne’s propos- als affect the company?
3. Andrew favors a share repurchase. He argues that a re- purchase will increase the company’s P/E ratio, return on assets, and return on equity. Are his arguments correct? How will a share repurchase affect the value of the company?
4. Another option discussed by Justin, Suzanne, and Andrew would be to begin a regular dividend payment to share- holders. How would you evaluate this proposal?
5. One way to value a share of stock is the dividend growth, or growing perpetuity, model. Consider the following: The dividend payout ratio is 1 minus b, where b is the “retention” or “plowback” ratio. So, the dividend next year will be the earnings next year, E1, times 1 minus the retention ratio. The most commonly used equation to calculate the growth rate is the return on equity times the retention ratio. Substituting these relationships into the dividend growth model, we get the following equation to calculate the price of a share of stock today:
P0 = E1(1 - b) _____________
Rs - ROE × b where Rs = Expected rate of return
What are the implications of this result in terms of whether the company should pay a dividend or upgrade and expand its manufacturing capability? Explain.
MINI CASE
Chapter 17: Dividends and Dividend Policy 517
17Ross_Chapter17_4th.indd 51717Ross_Chapter17_4th.indd 517 12-11-27 12:1212-11-27 12:12
Internet Application Questions 1. Buying back a company’s own shares is an alternative way of distributing corporate assets. Share buybacks involve both capital
structure and dividend policy. In fact, share repurchases have overtaken dividends as the most popular means of cash payouts by corporations in the U.S. The following link explains the advantages of share repurchases, and also cautions against cases where repurchases have not or will not work.
fool.com/EveningNews/FOTH/1998/foth981019.htm Discuss the following questions after reading the link above. a. Show that share repurchases and dividend payments are equivalent, in the sense that they do not affect relative corporate
value. b. The link above argues that Circus Circus (NYSE: CIR) and Trump (NYSE: DJT) should have avoided buying back their
shares. Do you agree with the admonition that highly leveraged firms should not use share buybacks? What are you assuming about dividend policy when you answer this question?
c. The link also contends that share buybacks enhance shareholder value when done properly and cites three companies as virtuous examples: Coke (NYSE: KO), Intel (Nasdaq: INTC), and Chrysler (NYSE: C). Keeping in mind that the article was written in October 1998, what lessons do you draw from the successful repurchase strategies of these firms?
2. Dividend reinvestment plans (DRIPs) permit shareholders to automatically reinvest cash dividends in the company. To find out more about DRIPs go to fool.com/School/Drips.htm?ref=SchAg. What are the advantages that Motley Fool lists for DRIPs? What are the different types of DRIPs? What is a Direct Purchase Plan? How does a Direct Purchase Plan differ from a DRIP?
3. Information on recently announced dividends and stock splits for the U.S. markets can be found at earnings.com. How many companies went “ex” today? What is the largest declared dividend? Are there any reverse splits listed? What is the largest split in terms of the number of shares?
4. How many times has Royal Bank of Canada stock split? Go to the website rbc.com and visit the “Investor Relations” section. You will find share information, including dates of stock splits. Were there any splits accomplished in unique ways? When did the splits occur?
5. Go to canadiandividendstock.com/best-canadian-dividend-stocks/ and find the best Canadian dividend stocks for the most recent date. This website highlights some Canadian stocks which are high dividend achievers. To find the dividend history of Canadian stocks visit ca.dividendinvestor.com/
518 Part 6: Cost of Capital and Long-Term Financial Policy
17Ross_Chapter17_4th.indd 51817Ross_Chapter17_4th.indd 518 12-11-27 12:1212-11-27 12:12
To this point, we have described many of the decisions of long-term fi nance, for example, cap- ital budgeting, dividend policy, and fi nancial structure. In this chapter, we begin to discuss short- term fi nance. Short-term fi nance is primarily concerned with the analysis of decisions that aff ect current assets and current liabilities.
Financial managers spend major blocks of time daily on short-term fi nancial management. What types of questions fall under the general heading of short-term fi nance? To name just a very few:
1. What is a reasonable level of cash to keep on hand (in a bank) to pay bills? 2. How much should the firm borrow short-term? 3. How much credit should be extended to customers? 4. How much inventory should the firm carry?
Answering these questions is central to the fi nancial manager’s job. Short-term fi nancial manage- ment is oft en an important part of entry-level jobs for new fi nance graduates.1
Frequently, the term net working capital is associated with short-term fi nancial decision mak- ing. As we describe in Chapter 2 and elsewhere, net working capital is the diff erence between current assets and current liabilities. Oft en, short-term fi nancial management is called working capital management. Th ese terms mean the same thing.
Th ere is no universally accepted defi nition of short-term fi nance. Th e most important diff erence between short-term and long-term fi nance is the timing of cash fl ows. Short-term fi nancial decisions
1 N. C. Hill and W. L. Sartoris, Short-Term Financial Management 2d ed., Prentice Hall College Division, 1995.
Interested in a career in short- term finance? Visit the Treasury Management Association of Canada at tmac-toronto.ca/
SHORT-TERM FINANCE AND PLANNING
C H A P T E R 1 8
D uring the fiscal year 2011–2012, Liquor Con-trol Board of Ontario (LCBO), one of the world’s largest single purchasers of beverage alco-
hol products, achieved record sales of $4.7 billion. It
also transferred a record $1.63 billion to the Ontario
government. These numbers were primarily due to
operational efficiency achieved through excellent
inventory management. The Board achieved record
inventory turnover for its premium wine Vintages
division as well as for sales of beers and spirits. Total
inventory turnover for 2011–2012 was 7.6.
As this chapter will illustrate, choosing the best
inventory levels and financing them appropriately
are important elements of short-term financial man-
agement, and organizations like LCBO pay close
attention to these decisions.
Learning Object ives
After studying this chapter, you should understand:
LO1 The operating and cash cycles and why they are important.
LO2 The different types of short-term financial policy.
LO3 The essentials of short-term financial planning.
LO4 The sources and uses of cash on the statement of financial position.
LO5 The different types of short-term borrowing.
P A R T 7
C ou
rt es
y of
L C
BO
18Ross_Chapter18_4th.indd 51918Ross_Chapter18_4th.indd 519 12-11-27 12:1312-11-27 12:13
typically involve cash infl ows and outfl ows that occur within a year or less. For example, short-term fi nancial decisions are involved when a fi rm orders raw materials, pays in cash, and anticipates selling fi nished goods in one year for cash. In contrast, long-term fi nancial decisions are involved when a fi rm purchases a special machine that reduces operating costs over, say, the next fi ve years.
Th is chapter introduces the basic elements of short-term fi nancial decisions. We begin by dis- cussing the short-term operating activities of the fi rm. We then identify some alternative short- term fi nancial policies. Finally, we outline the basic elements in a short-term fi nancial plan and describe short-term fi nancing instruments.
18.1 Tracing Cash and Net Working Capital
In this section, we examine the components of cash and net working capital as they change from one year to the next. We have already discussed various aspects of this subject in Chapters 2, 3, and 4. We briefl y review some of that discussion as it relates to short-term fi nancing decisions. Our goal is to describe the short-term operating activities of the fi rm and their impact on cash and working capital.
To begin, recall that current assets are cash and other assets expected to convert to cash within the year. Current assets are presented in the statement of fi nancial position in order of their accounting liquidity—the ease with which they can be converted to cash and the time it takes to do so. Four of the most important items found in the current asset section of a statement of fi nancial position are cash, marketable securities (or cash equivalents), accounts receivable, and inventories.
Analogous to their investment in current assets, fi rms use several kinds of short-term debt, called current liabilities. Current liabilities are obligations expected to require cash payment within one year (or within the operating period if it is diff erent from one year). Th e three major items found as current liabilities are accounts payable; expenses payable, including accrued wages and taxes; and notes payable.
Because we want to focus on changes in cash, we start by defi ning cash in terms of the other elements of the statement of fi nancial position. Th is lets us isolate the cash account and explore the impact on cash from the fi rm’s operating and fi nancing decisions. Th e basic statement of fi nancial position identity can be written as:
Net working capital + Fixed assets = Long-term debt + Equity [18.1]
Net working capital is cash plus other current assets less current liabilities; that is,
Net working capital = (Cash + Other current assets) - Current liabilities [18.2]
If we substitute this for net working capital in the basic statement of fi nancial position identity and rearrange things a bit, cash is:
Cash = Long-term debt + Equity + Current liabilities - Current assets (other than cash) - Fixed assets [18.3]
Th is tells us in general terms that some activities naturally increase cash and some activities decrease it. We can list these along with an example of each as follows:
ACTIVITIES THAT INCREASE CASH • Increasing long-term debt (borrowing long-term). • Increasing equity (selling some stock). • Increasing current liabilities (getting a 90-day loan). • Decreasing current assets other than cash (selling some inventory for cash). • Decreasing fi xed assets (selling some property).
ACTIVITIES THAT DECREASE CASH • Decreasing long-term debt (paying off a long-term debt). • Decreasing equity (repurchasing some stock). • Decreasing current liabilities (paying off a 90-day loan). • Increasing current assets other than cash (buying some inventory for cash). • Increasing fi xed assets (buying some property).
520 Part 7: Short-Term Financial Planning and Management
18Ross_Chapter18_4th.indd 52018Ross_Chapter18_4th.indd 520 12-11-27 12:1312-11-27 12:13
Notice that our two lists are exact opposites. For example, fl oating a long-term bond issue increases cash (at least until the money is spent). Paying off a long-term bond issue decreases cash.
As we discussed in Chapter 3, those activities that increase cash are sources of cash. Th ose activities that decrease cash are uses of cash. Looking back at our list, sources of cash always involve increasing a liability (or equity) account or decreasing an asset account. Th is makes sense because increasing a liability means we have raised money by borrowing it or by selling an own- ership interest in the fi rm. A decrease in an asset means we have sold or otherwise liquidated an asset. In either case, there is a cash infl ow.
Uses of cash are just the reverse. A use of cash involves decreasing a liability by paying it off , perhaps, or an increase in assets from purchasing something. Both of these activities require that the fi rm spend some cash.
EXAMPLE 18.1 SOURCES AND USES
Here is a quick check of your understanding of sources and uses: If accounts payable goes up by $100, is this a source or use? If accounts receivable goes up by $100, is this a source or use?
Accounts payable are what we owe our suppliers. This is a short-term debt. If it rises by $100, we have effectively borrowed the money, so this is a source of cash. Receivables is what our customers owe to us, so an increase of $100 means that we loaned the money; this is a use of cash.
1. What is the difference between net working capital and cash?
2. Will net working capital always increase when cash increases?
3. List five potential uses of cash.
4. List five potential sources of cash.
18.2 The Operating Cycle and the Cash Cycle Th e primary concern in short-term fi nance is the fi rm’s short-run operating and fi nancing activi- ties. For a typical manufacturing fi rm, these short-run activities might consist of the following sequence of events and decisions:
Events Decisions
1. Buying raw materials 1. How much inventory to order? 2. Paying cash 2. Borrow or draw down cash balance? 3. Manufacturing the product 3. What choice of production technology? 4. Selling the product 4. Should credit be extended to a particular customer? 5. Collecting cash 5. How to collect?
Th ese activities create patterns of cash infl ows and cash outfl ows. Th ese cash fl ows are both unsynchronized and uncertain. Th ey are unsynchronized because, for example, the payment of cash for raw materials does not happen at the same time as the receipt of cash from selling the product. Th ey are uncertain because future sales and costs cannot be predicted precisely.
Small businesses in particular must pay attention to the timing of infl ows and outfl ows. For example, Earthly Elements, a maker of dried fl oral gift s and accessories, was formed in March 2012. Th e owners of the fi rm rejoiced when they received a $10,000 order from a national home shopping service in November 2012. Th e order represented 20 percent of total orders for the year and was expected to give a big boost to the young company. Unfortunately, it cost Earthly Ele- ments 25 percent more than expected to fi ll the order. Th en, its customer was slow to pay. By the end of February 2013, the payment was 30 days late, and the company was running out of cash. By the time the payment was received in April, the fi rm had already closed its doors in March, a victim of the cash cycle.
Concept Questions
CHAPTER 18: Short-Term Finance and Planning 521
18Ross_Chapter18_4th.indd 52118Ross_Chapter18_4th.indd 521 12-11-27 12:1312-11-27 12:13
Defining the Operating and Cash Cycles We can start with a simple case. One day, call it Day 0, you purchase $1,000 worth of inventory on credit. You pay the bill 30 days later, and, aft er 30 more days, someone buys the $1,000 in inven- tory for $1,400. Your buyer does not actually pay for another 45 days. We can summarize these events chronologically as follows:
Day Activity Cash effect
0 Acquire inventory none 30 Pay for inventory -$1,000 60 Sell inventory on credit none
105 Collect on sale +$1,400
THE OPERATING CYCLE There are several things to notice in our example: First, the entire cycle, from the time we acquire some inventory to the time we collect the cash, takes 105 days. This is called the operating cycle.
As we illustrate, the operating cycle is the length of time it takes to acquire inventory, sell it, and collect for it. Th is cycle has two distinct components. Th e fi rst part is the time it takes to acquire and sell the inventory. Th is 60-day span (in our example) is called the inventory period. Th e second part is the time it takes to collect on the sale, 45 days in our example. Th is is called the accounts receivable period.
Based on our defi nitions, the operating cycle is obviously just the sum of the inventory and receivables periods:
Operating cycle = Inventory period + Accounts receivable period [18.4]
105 days = 60 days + 45 days
What the operating cycle describes is how a product moves through the current asset accounts. It begins life as inventory, it is converted to a receivable when it is sold, and it is fi nally converted to cash when we collect from the sale. Notice that, at each step, the asset is moving closer to cash.
THE CASH CYCLE The second thing to notice is that the cash flows and other events that occur are not synchronized. For example, we didn’t actually pay for the inventory until 30 days after we acquired it. This 30-day period is called the accounts payable period. Next, we spend cash on Day 30, but we don’t collect until Day 105. Somehow or the other, we have to arrange to finance the $1,000 for 105 - 30 = 75 days. This period is called the cash cycle.
Th e cash cycle, therefore, is the number of days that pass until we collect the cash from a sale, measured from when we actually pay for the inventory. Notice that, based on our defi nitions, the cash cycle is the diff erence between the operating cycle and the accounts payable period:
Cash cycle = Operating cycle - Accounts payable period [18.5]
75 days = 105 days - 30 days
Figure 18.1 depicts the short-term operating activities and cash fl ows for a typical manufacturing fi rm by looking at the cash fl ow time line. As shown, the cash fl ow time line is made up of the operating cycle and the cash cycle. In Figure 18.1, the need for short-term fi nancial management is suggested by the gap between the cash infl ows and cash outfl ows. Th is is related to the length of the operating cycle and accounts payable period.
Th e gap between short-term infl ows and outfl ows can be fi lled either by borrowing or by hold- ing a liquidity reserve in the form of cash or marketable securities. Alternatively, the gap can be shortened by changing the inventory, receivable, and payable periods. Th ese are all managerial options that we discuss in this and subsequent chapters.
Internet-based bookseller and retailer Amazon.com provides an interesting example of the importance of managing the cash cycle. By mid-2012, the market value of Amazon.com was higher than (in fact more than 400 times as much as) that of Indigo Books & Music Inc., Canad- ian retail bookstore chain headquartered in Toronto, even though Amazon’s sales were only 48 times greater.
How could Amazon.com be worth so much more? Th ere are multiple reasons, but short-term management is one factor. During 2011, Amazon turned over its inventory about 9 times per year,
operating cycle The time period between the acquisition of inventory and when cash is collected from receivables.
inventory period The time it takes to acquire and sell inventory.
accounts receivable period The time between sale of inventory and collection of the receivable.
accounts payable period The time between receipt of inventory and payment for it.
cash cycle The time between cash disbursement and cash collection.
cash flow time line Graphical representation of the operating cycle and the cash cycle.
522 Part 7: Short-Term Financial Planning and Management
18Ross_Chapter18_4th.indd 52218Ross_Chapter18_4th.indd 522 12-11-27 12:1312-11-27 12:13
3 times faster than Indigo; so its inventory period was dramatically shorter. Even more strikingly, Amazon charges a customer’s credit card when it ships a book, and it usually gets paid by the credit card firm within a day. Th is means Amazon has a negative cash cycle! In fact, during 2011, Amazon’s cash cycle was a negative 38 days. Every sale therefore generates a cash inflow that can be put to work immediately.
THE OPERATING CYCLE AND THE FIRM’S ORGANIZATION CHART Be- fore we look at detailed examples of operating and cash cycles, realism dictates a look at the peo- ple involved in implementing a firm’s policies. This is important because short-term financial management in a large corporation involves non-financial managers as well and there is potential for conflict as each manager looks at only part of the picture.2 As you can see in Table 18.1, selling on credit involves the credit manager, the marketing manager, and the controller. Of these three, only two are responsible to the vice president of finance, as the marketing function has its own vice president in most large corporations. If the marketing function is trying to land a new ac- count, it may seek more liberal credit terms as an inducement. Since this may increase the firm’s investment in receivables or its exposure to the bad debt risk, conflict may result. To resolve such conflict, the firm must look beyond personalities to the ultimate impact on shareholder wealth.
FIGURE 18.1
Cash flow time line and the short-term operating activities of a typical manufacturing firm
Inventory sold
Cash received
Inventory purchased
Inventory period
Accounts payable period
Accounts receivable period Time
Cash paid for inventory
Operating cycle
Cash cycle
The operating cycle is the time period from inventory purchase until the receipt of cash. (Sometimes the operating cycle includes the time from placement of the order until arrival of the stock.) The cash cycle is the time period from when cash is paid out to when cash is received.
TABLE 18.1
Managers who deal with short-term financial problems Title Short-Term Financial Management Duties Assets/Liabilities Influenced
Cash manager Collection, concentration, disbursement; short-term investment; short-term borrowing; banking relations
Cash, marketable securities, short-term loans
Credit manager Monitoring and control of accounts receivable; credit policy decisions
Accounts receivable
Marketing manager Credit policy decisions Accounts receivable Purchasing manager Decisions on purchase, suppliers; may negotiate payment terms Inventory, accounts payable Production manager Setting of production schedules and materials requirements Inventory, accounts payable Payables manager Decisions on payment policies and on whether to take discounts Accounts payable Controller Accounting information on cash flows; reconciliation of accounts
payable; application of payments to accounts receivable Accounts receivable, accounts payable
Source: Ned C. Hill and William L. Sartoris, Short-Term Financial Management, 3rd ed. (Prentice Hall College Div., 1995)
2 This discussion draws on N.C. Hill and W.L. Sartoris, Short-Term Financial Management 2d ed., Prentice Hall College Division, 1995.
CHAPTER 18: Short-Term Finance and Planning 523
18Ross_Chapter18_4th.indd 52318Ross_Chapter18_4th.indd 523 12-11-27 12:1312-11-27 12:13
Calculating the Operating and Cash Cycles In our example, the lengths of time that made up the diff erent periods were obvious. When all we have is fi nancial statement information, however, we have to do a little more work. We illustrate these calculations next.
To begin, we need to determine various things like how long it takes, on average, to sell inven- tory and how long it takes, on average, to collect. We start by gathering some statement of fi nan- cial position information such as the following (in $ thousands):
Item Beginning Ending Average
Inventory $2,000 $3,000 $2,500 Accounts receivable 1,600 2,000 1,800 Accounts payable 750 1,000 875
Also, from the most recent statement of comprehensive income, we might have the following fi gures (in $ thousands):
Net sales $11,500 Cost of goods sold 8,200
We now need to calculate some fi nancial ratios. We discussed these in some detail in Chapter 3; here we just defi ne them and use them as needed.
THE OPERATING CYCLE First, we need the inventory period. We spent $8.2 million on inventory (our cost of goods sold). Our average inventory was $2.5 million. We thus turned our inventory over 8.2/2.5 times during the year:3
Inventory turnover = Cost of goods sold/Average inventory = $8.2 million/$2.5 million = 3.28 times
Loosely speaking, this tells us that we bought and sold off our inventory 3.28 times during the year. Th is means that, on average, we held our inventory for:
Inventory period = 365 days/Inventory turnover = 365/3.28 = 111.3 days
So the inventory period is about 111 days. On average, in other words, inventory sat for about 111 days before it was sold.
Similarly, receivables averaged $1.8 million, and sales were $11.5 million. Assuming that all sales were credit sales, the receivables turnover is:4
Receivables turnover = Credit sales/Average accounts receivable = $11.5 million/$1.8 million = 6.4 times
If we turn over our receivables 6.4 times, then the receivables period is:
Receivables period = 365 days/Receivables turnover = 365/6.4 = 57 days
Th e receivables period is also called the days’ sales in receivables or the average collection period. Whatever it is called, it tells us that our customers took an average of 57 days to pay.
Th e operating cycle is the sum of the inventory and receivables periods:
Operating cycle = Inventory period + Accounts receivables period = 111 days + 57 days = 168 days
Th is tells us that, on average, 168 days elapse between the time we acquire inventory, sell it, and collect for the sale.
3 Notice that we have used the cost of goods sold in calculating inventory turnover. Sales is sometimes used instead. Also, rather than average inventory, ending inventory is often used. See Chapter 3 for some examples. 4 If less than 100 percent of our sales are credit sales, we would just need a little more information, namely, credit sales for the year. See Chapter 3 for more discussion of this measure.
524 Part 7: Short-Term Financial Planning and Management
18Ross_Chapter18_4th.indd 52418Ross_Chapter18_4th.indd 524 12-11-27 12:1312-11-27 12:13
THE CASH CYCLE We now need the payables period. From the information just given, average payables were $875,000, and cost of goods sold was again $8.2 million. Our payables turnover is thus:
Payables turnover = Cost of goods sold/Average payables = $8.2 million/$.875 million = 9.4 times
Th e payables period is:
Payables period = 365 days/Payables turnover = 365/9.4 = 39 days
Th us, we took an average of 39 days to pay our bills. Finally, the cash cycle is the diff erence between the operating cycle and the payables period:
Cash cycle = Operating cycle - Accounts payables period = 168 days - 39 days = 129 days
So, on average, there is a 129-day delay from the time we pay for merchandise and the time we collect on the sales.
Interpreting the Cash Cycle Our examples show how the cash cycle depends on the inventory, receivables, and payables peri- ods. Taken one at a time, the cash cycle increases as the inventory and receivables periods get longer. It decreases if the company is able to stall payment of payables, lengthening the payables period. Suppose a fi rm could purchase inventory, sell its product, collect receivables (perhaps selling for cash) and then pay suppliers all on the same day. Th is fi rm would have a cash cycle of zero days.
Some fi rms may meet this description but it is hard to think of many examples (gas retailing or dry cleaners might meet the description). Most fi rms have a positive cash cycle. Such fi rms require some additional fi nancing for inventories and receivables. Th e longer the cash cycle, the more fi nancing is required, other things being equal. You could also think of this concept in terms of liquidity. All fi rms need liquidity to operate. Th at means that a fi rm must create liquidity quickly (as in the case of a company with a short cash cycle), or it must invest in working capital on its statement of fi nancial position. Since bankers are conservative and dislike surprises, they monitor the fi rm’s cash cycle. A lengthening cycle may indicate obsolete, unsalable inventory or problems in collecting receivables. Unless these problems are detected and solved, the fi rm may require emergency fi nancing or face insolvency.
EXAMPLE 18.2: Th e Operating and Cash Cycles
You have collected the following information for the Slow- pay Company.
Item Beginning Ending
Inventory $5,000 $7,000 Accounts receivable 1,600 2,400 Accounts payable 2,700 4,800
Sales for the year just ended were $50,000, and cost of goods sold was $30,000. How long does it take Slowpay to collect on its receivables? How long does merchandise stay around before it is sold? How long does Slowpay take to pay its bills?
We can first calculate the three turnover ratios:
Inventory turnover = $30,000/$6,000 = 5 times Receivables turnover = $50,000/$2,000 = 25 times Payables turnover = $30,000/$3,750 = 8 times
We use these to get the various periods:
Inventory period = 365/5 = 73 days Receivables period = 365/25 = 14.6 days Payables period = 365/8 = 45.6 days
All told, Slowpay collects on a sale in 14.6 days, inventory sits around for 73 days, and bills get paid after about 46 days. The operating cycle here is the sum of the inventory and receivables: 73 + 14.6 = 87.6 days. The cash cycle is the difference between the operating cycle and the pay- ables period: 87.6 - 45.6 = 42 days.
CHAPTER 18: Short-Term Finance and Planning 525
18Ross_Chapter18_4th.indd 52518Ross_Chapter18_4th.indd 525 12-11-27 12:1312-11-27 12:13
Our calculations of the cash cycle used fi nancial ratios introduced in Chapter 3. We can use some other ratio relationships from Chapter 3 to see how the cash cycle relates to profi tability and sus- tainable growth. A good place to start is with the Du Pont equation for profi tability as measured by return on assets (ROA):
ROA = Profit margin × Total asset turnover Total asset turnover = Sales/Total assets
Go back to the case of the fi rm with a lengthening cash cycle. Increased inventories and receiv- ables that caused the cash cycle problem also reduce total asset turnover. Th e result is lower profi t- ability. In other words, with more assets tied up over a longer cash cycle, the fi rm is less effi cient and therefore less profi table. And, as if its troubles were not enough already, this fi rm suff ers a drop in its sustainable growth rate.
Chapter 4 (in the discussion of Equation 4.5) showed that total asset turnover is directly linked to sustainable growth. Reducing total asset turnover lowers sustainable growth. Th is makes sense because our troubled fi rm must divert its fi nancial resources into fi nancing excess inventory and receivables.5
1. What does it mean to say that a firm has an inventory turnover ratio of 4?
2. Describe the operating cycle and cash cycle. What are the differences?
3. Explain the connection between a firm’s accounting-based profitability and its cash cycle.
18.3 Some Aspects of Short-Term Financial Policy
Th e short-term fi nancial policy that a fi rm adopts is refl ected in at least two ways:
1. The size of the firm’s investment in current assets. This is usually measured relative to the firm’s level of total operating revenues. A flexible or accommodative short-term financial policy would maintain a relatively high ratio of current assets to sales. A restrictive short- term financial policy would entail a low ratio of current assets to sales.6
2. The financing of current assets. This is measured as the proportion of short-term debt (that is, current liabilities) and long-term debt used to finance current assets. A restrictive short- term financial policy means a high proportion of short-term debt relative to long-term fi- nancing, and a flexible policy means less short-term debt and more long-term debt.
If we take these two areas together, a fi rm with a fl exible policy would have relatively large invest- ment in current assets. It would fi nance this investment with relatively less in short-term debt. Th e net eff ect of a fl exible policy is thus a relatively high level of net working capital. Put another way, with a fl exible policy, the fi rm maintains a larger overall level of liquidity.
At the beginning of this chapter, we introduced the example of LCBO and its eff orts to reduce inventory levels. We can now see that LCBO’s working capital policy in relation to inventory man- agement is moving from a more fl exible to a more restrictive approach.
The Size of the Firm’s Investment in Current Assets Flexible short-term fi nancial policies with regard to current assets include such actions as:
1. Keeping large balances of cash and marketable securities. 2. Making large investments in inventory. 3. Granting liberal credit terms, which result in a high level of accounts receivable.
5 Further discussion of the cash cycle is in L. Kryzanowski, Business Solvency Risk Analysis (Montreal: Institute of Can- adian Bankers, 1990), chap. 10. 6 Some people use the term conservative in place of flexible and the term aggressive in place of restrictive.
Concept Questions
526 Part 7: Short-Term Financial Planning and Management
18Ross_Chapter18_4th.indd 52618Ross_Chapter18_4th.indd 526 12-11-27 12:1312-11-27 12:13
Restrictive short-term financial policies would just be the opposite of these:
1. Keeping low cash balances and little investment in marketable securities. 2. Making small investments in inventory. 3. Allowing little or no credit sales, thereby minimizing accounts receivable.
Determining the optimal investment level in short-term assets requires an identifi cation of the diff erent costs of alternative short-term fi nancing policies. Th e objective is to trade off the cost of a restrictive policy against the cost of a fl exible one to arrive at the best compromise.
Current asset holdings are highest with a fl exible short-term fi nancial policy and lowest with a restrictive policy. So fl exible short-term fi nancial policies are costly in that they require a greater investment in cash and marketable securities, inventory, and accounts receivable. However, we expect future cash infl ows to be higher with a fl exible policy. For example, sales are stimulated by the use of a credit policy that provides liberal fi nancing to customers. A large amount of fi n- ished inventory on hand (“on the shelf ”) provides a quick delivery service to customers and may increase sales. Similarly, a large inventory of raw materials may result in fewer production stop- pages because of inventory shortages.7
A more restrictive short-term fi nancial policy probably reduces future sales levels below those that would be achieved under fl exible policies. It is also possible that higher prices can be charged to customers under fl exible working capital policies. Customers may be willing to pay higher prices for the quick delivery service and more liberal credit terms implicit in fl exible policies.
Managing current assets can be thought of as involving a trade-off between costs that rise and costs that fall with the level of investment. Costs that rise with increases in the level of investment in current assets are called carrying costs. Th e larger the investment a fi rm makes in its current assets, the higher its carrying costs are. Costs that fall with increases in the level of investment in current assets are called shortage costs.
In a general sense, carrying costs are the opportunity costs associated with current assets. Th e rate of return on current assets is very low when compared to other assets. For example, the rate of return on Treasury bills is usually considerably less than the rate of return fi rms would like to achieve overall. (Treasury bills are an important component of cash and marketable securities.)
Shortage costs are incurred when the investment in current assets is low. If a fi rm runs out of cash, it is forced to sell marketable securities. Of course, if a fi rm runs out of cash and marketable securities to sell, it may have to borrow, sell assets at fi re-sale prices, or default on an obligation. Th is situation is called a cash out. A fi rm loses customers if it runs out of inventory (a stock out) or if it cannot extend credit to customers.
More generally, there are two kinds of shortage costs:
1. Trading or order costs. Order costs are the costs of placing an order for more cash (brokerage costs, for example) or more inventory (production set-up costs, for example).
2. Costs related to lack of safety reserves. These are costs of lost sales, lost customer goodwill, and disruption of production schedules.
Th e top part of Figure 18.2 illustrates the basic trade-off between carrying costs and shortage costs. On the vertical axis, we have costs measured in dollars and, on the horizontal axis, we have the amount of current assets. Carrying costs start at zero when current assets are zero and then climb steadily as current assets grow. Shortage costs start very high and then decline as we add current assets. Th e total cost of holding current assets is the sum of the two. Notice how the com- bined costs reach a minimum at CA*. Th is is the optimum level of current assets.
Current asset holdings are highest under a fl exible policy. Th is is one in which the carrying costs are perceived to be low relative to shortage costs. Th is is Case A in Figure 18.2. In com- parison, under restrictive current asset policies, carrying costs are perceived to be high relative to shortage costs. Th is is Case B in Figure 18.2.
7 Many industries are reducing inventory through new technology. We discuss this approach, called just-in-time inven- tory (or production), in Chapter 20.
carrying costs Costs that rise with increases in the level of investment in current assets.
shortage costs Costs that fall with increases in the level of investment in current assets.
CHAPTER 18: Short-Term Finance and Planning 527
18Ross_Chapter18_4th.indd 52718Ross_Chapter18_4th.indd 527 12-11-27 12:1312-11-27 12:13
FIGURE 18.2
Carrying costs and shortage costs
Dollars
CA* Amount of current assets (CA)
Minimum point
Shortage costs
Carrying costs
Total cost of holding current assets
Dollars
CA*
A. Flexible policy
Amount of current assets (CA)
Shortage costs
Carrying costs
Total cost
Dollars
CA*
B. Restrictive policy
Amount of current assets (CA)
Minimum point
Shortage costs
Carrying costs Total cost
The optimal amount of current assets. This point minimizes costs.
Minimum point
Short-term financial policy: the optimal investment in current assets. Carrying costs increase with the level of investment in current assets. They include the costs of maintaining economic value and opportunity costs. Shortage costs decrease with increases in the level of investment in current assets. They include trading costs and the costs related to being short of the current asset (for example, being short of cash). The firm’s policy can be characterized as flexible or restrictive.
A flexible policy is most appropriate when carrying costs are low relative to shortage costs.
A restrictive policy is most appropriate when carrying costs are high relative to shortage costs.
Alternative Financing Policies for Current Assets In previous sections, we looked at the basic determinants of the level of investment in current assets, and we thus focused on the asset side of the statement of fi nancial position. Now we turn to the fi nancing side of the question. Here we are concerned with the relative amounts of short-term and long-term debt, assuming the investment in current assets is constant.
AN IDEAL CASE We start with the simplest possible case: an ideal economy. In such an economy, short-term assets can always be financed with short-term debt, and long-term assets can be financed with long-term debt and equity. In this economy, net working capital is always zero.
Consider a simplifi ed case for a grain elevator operator. Grain elevator operators buy crops aft er harvest, store them, and sell them during the year. Th ey have high inventories of grain aft er
528 Part 7: Short-Term Financial Planning and Management
18Ross_Chapter18_4th.indd 52818Ross_Chapter18_4th.indd 528 12-11-27 12:1312-11-27 12:13
the harvest and end up with low inventories just before the next harvest. Bank loans with maturities of less than one year are used to fi nance the purchase of grain and
the storage costs. Th ese loans are paid off from the proceeds of the sale of grain. Th e situation is shown in Figure 18.3. Long-term assets are assumed to grow over time,
whereas current assets increase at the end of the harvest and then decline during the year. Short- term assets end up at zero just before the next harvest. Current (short-term) assets are fi nanced by short-term debt, and long-term assets are fi nanced with long-term debt and equity. Net working capital—current assets minus current liabilities—is always zero. Figure 18.3 displays a saw tooth pattern that we see again when we get to our discussion on cash management in the next chapter. For now, we need to discuss some alternative policies for fi nancing current assets under less ideal- ized conditions.
FIGURE 18.3
Financing policy for an ideal economy Current assets = Short-term debt
Time
Dollars
Fixed assets
0
Long-term debt plus common shares
1 2 3 4
In an ideal world, net working capital is always zero because short-term assets are financed by short-term debt.
DIFFERENT POLICIES IN FINANCING CURRENT ASSETS In the real world, it is not likely that current assets would ever drop to zero. For example, a long-term rising level of sales results in some permanent investment in current assets. Moreover, the firm’s investments in long-term assets may show a great deal of variation.
A growing fi rm can be thought of as having a total asset requirement consisting of the current assets and long-term assets needed to run the business effi ciently. Th e total asset requirement may exhibit change over time for many reasons, including (1) a general growth trend, (2) seasonal variation around the trend, and (3) unpredictable day-to-day and month-to-month fl uctuations. Th is situation is depicted in Figure 18.4. (We have not tried to show the unpredictable day-to-day and month-to-month variations in the total asset requirement.)
Th e peaks and valleys in Figure 18.4 represent the fi rm’s total asset needs through time. For example, for a lawn and garden supply fi rm, the peaks might represent inventory buildups prior to the spring selling season. Th e valleys would come about because of lower off -season inven- tories. Th ere are two strategies such a fi rm might consider to meet its cyclical needs. First, the fi rm could keep a relatively large pool of marketable securities. As the need for inventory and other current assets began to rise, the fi rm would sell off marketable securities and use the cash to purchase whatever was needed. Once the inventory was sold and inventory holdings began to decline, the fi rm would reinvest in marketable securities. Th is approach is the fl exible policy illustrated in Figure 18.5 as Policy F. Notice that the fi rm essentially uses a pool of marketable
CHAPTER 18: Short-Term Finance and Planning 529
18Ross_Chapter18_4th.indd 52918Ross_Chapter18_4th.indd 529 12-11-27 12:1312-11-27 12:13
securities as a buff er against changing current asset needs.
FIGURE 18.4
The total asset requirement over time
Time
Dollars
Total asset requirementGeneral growth in
fixed assets and permanent current assets
Seasonal variation
FIGURE 18.5
Alternative asset financing policies
Time
Dollars
Long-term financing
Marketable securities
Time
Dollars
Short-term financing
Policy R
Total asset requirement
Policy F
Total asset requirement
Long-term financing
Policy F always implies a short-term cash surplus and a large investment in cash and marketable securities.
Policy R uses long-term financing for permanent asset requirements only and short-term borrowing for seasonal variations.
At the other extreme, the fi rm could keep relatively little in marketable securities. As the need for inventory and other assets began to rise, the fi rm would simply borrow the needed cash on a short-term basis. Th e fi rm would repay the loans as the need for assets cycled back down. Th is approach is the restrictive policy illustrated in Figure 18.5 as Policy R.
In comparing the two strategies illustrated in Figure 18.5, notice that the chief diff erence is the way in which the seasonal variation in asset needs is fi nanced. In the fl exible case, the fi rm fi nances internally, using its own cash and marketable securities. In the restrictive case, the fi rm fi nances the variation externally, borrowing the needed funds on a short-term basis. As we
530 Part 7: Short-Term Financial Planning and Management
18Ross_Chapter18_4th.indd 53018Ross_Chapter18_4th.indd 530 12-11-27 12:1312-11-27 12:13
discussed previously, all else being the same, a fi rm with a fl exible policy will have a greater invest- ment in net working capital.
Which Financing Policy is Best? What is the most appropriate amount of short-term borrowing? Th ere is no defi nitive answer. Several considerations must be included in a proper analysis:
1. Cash reserves. The flexible financial policy implies surplus cash and little short-term borrow- ing. This policy reduces the probability that a firm would experience financial distress. Firms may not have to worry as much about meeting recurring, short-run obligations. However, this higher level of liquidity comes at a price. Investments in cash and marketable securities generally produce lower returns than investments in real assets. For example, suppose the firm invests any temporary excess liquidity in Treasury bills. The price of a Treasury bill is simply the present value of its future cash flow. It follows that, since present value and the cost of a Treasury bill are equal, Treasury bills are always zero net present value investments. If the firm followed another policy, the funds tied up in Treasury bills and other zero NPV short-term financial instruments could be invested to produce a positive NPV.
2. Maturity hedging. Most firms attempt to match the maturities of assets and liabilities. They finance inventories with short-term bank loans and fixed assets with long-term financing. Firms tend to avoid financing long-lived assets with short-term borrowing. This type of ma- turity mismatching is inherently more risky for two reasons: First, the cost of the financing is more uncertain because short-term interest rates are more volatile than longer rates. For example, in 1981, many short-term borrowers faced financial distress when short-term rates exceeded 20 percent.
Second, maturity mismatching necessitates frequent refinancing and this produces roll- over risk, the risk that renewed short-term financing may not be available. A classic example is the financial distress faced in 1992 by Olympia & York (O&Y), a real estate development firm privately owned by the Reichmann family of Toronto. O&Y’s main assets were office towers, including First Canadian Place in Toronto and Canary Wharf outside London, Eng- land. Financing for these long-term assets was short-term bank loans and commercial paper. In early 1992, investor fears about real estate prospects prevented O&Y from rolling over its commercial paper. To avoid default, the company turned to its bankers to negotiate emer- gency longer-term financing and, when that failed, had to file for bankruptcy protection.
3. Relative interest rates. Short-term interest rates are usually lower than long-term rates. This implies that it is, on the average, more costly to rely on long-term borrowing as compared to short-term borrowing. This is really a statement about the yield curve we introduced in Ap- pendix 7B. What we are saying is that the yield curve is normally upward sloping.
Policies F and R, which are shown in Figure 18.5, are, of course, extreme cases. With F, the fi rm never does any short-term borrowing; with R, the fi rm never has a cash reserve (an investment in marketable securities). Figure 18.6 illustrates these two policies along with a compromise, Policy C.
With this compromise approach, the fi rm borrows short-term to cover peak fi nancing needs, but it maintains a cash reserve in the form of marketable securities during slow periods. As current assets build up, the fi rm draws down this reserve before doing any short-term borrowing. Th is allows for some run-up in current assets before the fi rm has to resort to short-term borrowing.
Current Assets and Liabil it ies in Practice Current assets made up around 56 percent of all assets for Canadian Tire in 2011. Short-term fi nancial management deals with a signifi cant portion of the statement of fi nancial position for this large fi rm. For small fi rms, especially in the retailing and service sectors, current assets make up an even larger portion of total assets.
Over time, advances in technology are changing the way Canadian fi rms manage current assets. With new techniques such as just-in-time inventory and business-to-business e-business sales (B2B), fi rms are moving away from fl exible policies and toward a more restrictive approach to current assets.
candiantire.ca
CHAPTER 18: Short-Term Finance and Planning 531
18Ross_Chapter18_4th.indd 53118Ross_Chapter18_4th.indd 531 12-11-27 12:1312-11-27 12:13
FIGURE 18.6
A compromise financing policy
Dollars
Time
Flexible policy (F)
Compromise policy (C)
Restrictive policy (R)
Marketable securities General growth in fixed assets
and permanent current assets
Total seasonal variation
Short-term financing
With a compromise policy, the firm keeps a reserve of liquidity, which it uses to initially finance seasonal variations in current asset needs. Short-term borrowing is used when the reserve is exhausted.
TABLE 18.2
Current assets and current liabilities as percentages of total current assets and total current liabilities for Canadian Tire 2010–2011
2011 2010
Current assets Cash and cash equivalents 4.7% 8.7% Short-term investments 2.8 3.0 Trade and other receivables 11.9 10.3 Loans receivable 58.7 61.9 Merchandise inventories 20.8 13.8 Income taxes recoverable 0.0 1.5 Prepaid expenses and deposits 0.6 0.6 Assets classified as held for sale 0.4 0.3 Total 100.0% 100.0%
Current liabilities Bank indebtedness 3.0% 3.6% Deposits 28.5 18.9 Trade and other payables 39.5 36.3 Provisions 4.6 6.0 Short-term borrowings 8.5 3.1 Loans payable 15.1 21.1 Income taxes payable 0.1 0.0 Current portion of long-term debt 0.7 10.9 Total 100.0% 100.0%
Source: Drawn from the 2011 Canadian Tire Corporation Ltd. Annual Report.
Current liabilities are also declining as a percentage of total assets. Firms are practising matu- rity hedging as they match lower current liabilities with decreased current assets. In addition to
532 Part 7: Short-Term Financial Planning and Management
18Ross_Chapter18_4th.indd 53218Ross_Chapter18_4th.indd 532 12-11-27 12:1312-11-27 12:13
these diff erences over time, there are diff erences between industries in policies on current assets and liabilities. Furthermore, fi rms responded to the recent economic downturn by relaxing their restrictive approach to current assets. Table 18.2 shows that Canadian Tire increased receivables and inventory as opposed to bank debt and payables.
Th e cash cycle is longer in some industries; various products and industry practices require diff erent levels of inventory and receivables. Th is is why we saw in Chapter 3 that industry average ratios are not the same. Levels of current assets and liabilities diff er across industries.8 For exam- ple, the aircraft industry carries more than twice the amount of inventory of the other industries. Does this mean aircraft manufacturers are less effi cient? Most likely, the higher inventory consists of airplanes under construction. Because building planes takes more time than most printing processes, it makes sense that aircraft manufacturers carry higher inventories than printing and publishing fi rms.
1. What keeps the real world from being an ideal one where net working capital could always be zero?
2. What considerations determine the optimal size of the firm’s investment in current assets?
3. What considerations determine the optimal compromise between flexible and restrictive net working capital policies?
4. How are industry differences reflected in working capital policies?
18.4 The Cash Budget
Th e cash budget is a primary tool in short-run fi nancial planning. It allows the fi nancial manager to identify short-term fi nancial needs and opportunities. Importantly, the cash budget helps the manager explore the need for short-term borrowing. Th e idea of the cash budget is simple: It records estimates of cash receipts (cash in) and disbursements (cash out). Th e result is an estimate of the cash surplus or defi cit.
Sales and Cash Collections We start with an example for the Fun Toys Corporation for which we prepare a quarterly cash budget. We could just as well use a monthly, weekly, or even daily basis. We choose quarters for convenience and also because a quarter is a common short-term business planning period.
All of Fun Toys’ cash infl ows come from the sale of toys. Cash budgeting for Fun Toys must therefore start with a sales forecast for the next year, by quarters:
Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4
Sales (in $ millions) $200 $300 $250 $400
Note that these are predicted sales, so there is forecasting risk here because actual sales could be more or less. Also, Fun Toys started the year with accounts receivable equal to $120.
Fun Toys has a 45-day receivables or average collection period. Th is means that half of the sales in a given quarter are collected the following quarter. Th is happens because sales made during the fi rst 45 days of a quarter are collected in that quarter. Sales made in the second 45 days are col- lected in the next quarter. Note that we are assuming that each quarter has 90 days, so the 45-day collection period is the same as a half-quarter collection period.
Based on the sales forecasts, we now need to estimate Fun Toys’ projected cash collections. First, any receivables that we have at the beginning of a quarter would be collected within 45 days, so all of them are collected sometime during the quarter. Second, as we discussed, any sales made in the fi rst half of the quarter are collected, so total cash collections are:
8 See N.G. Hill and W.L. Sartoris, Short-Term Financial Management 2d ed., Prentice Hall College Division, 1995.
Concept Questions
cash budget A forecast of cash receipts and disbursements for the next planning period.
CHAPTER 18: Short-Term Finance and Planning 533
18Ross_Chapter18_4th.indd 53318Ross_Chapter18_4th.indd 533 12-11-27 12:1312-11-27 12:13
Cash collections = Beginning accounts receivable + 1/2 × Sales [18.6]
For example, in the fi rst quarter, cash collections would be the beginning receivables of $120 plus half of sales, 1/2 × $200 = $100, for a total of $220.
Since beginning receivables are all collected along with half of sales, ending receivables for a particular quarter would be the other half of sales. First-quarter sales are projected at $200, so ending receivables are $100. Th is would be the beginning receivables in the second quarter. Cash collections in the second quarter are thus $100 plus half of the projected $300 in sales, or $250 total.
Continuing this process, we can summarize Fun Toys’ projected cash collections as shown in Table 18.3. In this table, collections are shown as the only source of cash. Of course, this need not be the case. Other sources of cash could include asset sales, investment income, and receipts from planned long-term fi nancing.
TABLE 18.3
Cash collections for Fun Toys (in $ millions)
Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4
Beginning receivables $120 $100 $150 $125 Sales 200 300 250 400 Cash collections 220 250 275 325 Ending receivables 100 150 125 200
Notes: Collections = Beginning receivables + 1/2 × Sales Ending receivables = Beginning receivables + Sales - Collections
= 1/2 × Sales
Cash Outflows Next, we consider the cash disbursements or payments. Th ese come in four basic categories:
1. Payments of accounts payable. These are payments for goods or services rendered from sup- pliers, such as raw materials. Generally, these payments are made sometime after purchases.
2. Wages, taxes, and other expenses. This category includes all other regular costs of doing busi- ness that require actual expenditures. Depreciation, for example, is often thought of as a reg- ular cost of business, but it requires no cash outflow, and is not included.
3. Capital expenditures. These are payments of cash for long-lived assets. 4. Long-term financing expenses. This category, for example, includes interest payments on
long-term outstanding debt and dividend payments to shareholders.
Fun Toys’ purchases from suppliers (in dollars) in a quarter are equal to 60 percent of next quar- ter’s predicted sales. Fun Toys’ payments to suppliers are equal to the previous quarter’s pur- chases, so the accounts payable period is 90 days. For example, in the quarter just ended, Fun Toys ordered .60 × $200 = $120 in supplies. Th is would actually be paid in the fi rst quarter (Q1) of the coming year.
Wages, taxes, and other expenses are routinely 20 percent of sales; interest and dividends are currently $20 per quarter. In addition, Fun Toys plans a major plant expansion (a capital expen- diture) of $100 in the second quarter. If we put all this information together, the cash outfl ows are as shown in Table 18.4.
The Cash Balance Th e predicted net cash infl ow is the diff erence between cash collections and cash disbursements. Th e net cash infl ow for Fun Toys is shown in Table 18.5. What we see immediately is that there is a cash surplus in the fi rst and third quarters and a cash defi cit in the second and fourth.
We assume that Fun Toys starts the year with a $20 cash balance. Furthermore, Fun Toys main- tains a $10 minimum cash balance to guard against unforeseen contingencies and forecasting errors. So we start the fi rst quarter with $20 in cash. Th is increases by $40 during the quarter, and the ending balance is $60. Of this, $10 is reserved as a minimum, so we subtract it out and fi nd that the fi rst-quarter surplus is $60 - 10 = $50.
534 Part 7: Short-Term Financial Planning and Management
18Ross_Chapter18_4th.indd 53418Ross_Chapter18_4th.indd 534 12-11-27 12:1312-11-27 12:13
TABLE 18.4
Cash disbursements for Fun Toys (in $ millions)
Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4
Payment of accounts (60% of sales) $120 $180 $150 $240 Wages, taxes, other expenses 40 60 50 80 Capital expenditures 0 100 0 0 Long-term financing expenses (interest and dividends)
20 20 20 20
Total $180 $360 $220 $340
TABLE 18.5
Net cash inflow for Fun Toys (in $ millions)
Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4
Total cash collections $ 220 $ 250 $ 275 $ 325 Total cash disbursements 180 360 220 340 Net cash inflow $ 40 -$ 110 $ 55 -$ 15
Fun Toys starts the second quarter with $60 in cash (the ending balance from the previous quar- ter). Th ere is a net cash infl ow of -$110, so the ending balance is $60 - 110 = -$50. We need another $10 as a buff er, so the total defi cit is -$60. Th ese calculations and those for the last two quarters are summarized in Table 18.6.
TABLE 18.6
Cash balance for Fun Toys (in $ millions)
Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4
Beginning cash balance $20 $60 -$50 $ 5
Net cash inflow 40 -110 55 -15 Ending cash balance $60 -$50 $ 5 -$10 Minimum cash balance -10 -10 -10 -10 Cumulative surplus (deficit) $50 -$60 -$ 5 -$20
Beginning in the second quarter, Fun Toys has a cash shortfall of $60. Th is occurs because of the seasonal pattern of sales (higher toward the end of the second quarter), the delay in collections, and the planned capital expenditure.
Th e cash situation at Fun Toys is projected to improve to a $5 defi cit in the third quarter, but, by year’s end, Fun Toys still has a $20 defi cit. Without some sort of fi nancing, this defi cit would carry over into the next year. We explore fi nancing sources in the next section. For now, we can make the following general comments on Fun Toys’ cash needs: 1. Fun Toys’ large outflow in the second quarter is not necessarily a sign of trouble. It results
from delayed collections on sales and a planned capital expenditure (presumably a worth- while one).
2. The figures in our example are based on a forecast. Sales could be much worse (or better) than the forecast.
CHAPTER 18: Short-Term Finance and Planning 535
18Ross_Chapter18_4th.indd 53518Ross_Chapter18_4th.indd 535 12-11-27 12:1312-11-27 12:13
1. How would you do a sensitivity analysis (discussed in Chapter 11) for Fun Toys’ net cash balance?
2. What could you learn from such an analysis?
18.5 A Short-Term Financial Plan
To illustrate a completed short-term fi nancial plan, we assume Fun Toys arranges to borrow any needed funds on a short-term basis. Th e interest rate is 20 percent APR, and it is compounded on a quarterly basis. From Chapter 6, we know that the rate is 20%/4 = 5% per quarter. We assume that Fun Toys starts the year with no short-term debt.
From Table 18.6, Fun Toys has a second-quarter defi cit of $60 million. We have to borrow this amount. Net cash infl ow in the following quarter is $55 million. We now have to pay $60 × .05 = $3 million in interest out of that, leaving $52 million to reduce the borrowing.
We still owe $60 - 52 = $8 million at the end of the third quarter. Interest in the last quarter is thus $8 × .05 = $.4 million. In addition, net infl ows in the last quarter are -$15 million, so we have to borrow $15.4 million, bringing our total borrowing up to $15.4 + 8 = $23.4 million. Table 18.7 extends Table 18.6 to include these calculations.
TABLE 18.7
Short-term financial plan for Fun Toys (in $ millions)
Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4
Beginning cash balance $20 $ 60 $10 $10.0 Net cash inflow 40 -110 55 -15.0 New short-term borrowing — 60 — 15.4 Interest on short-term borrowing — — -3 -.4 Short-term borrowing repaid — — -52 —
Ending cash balance $60 $ 10 $10 $10.0 Minimum cash balance -10 -10 -10 -10.0 Cumulative surplus (deficit) $50 $ 0 $ 0 $ 0.0 Beginning short-term borrowing 0 0 60 8.0 Change in short-term debt 0 60 -52 15.4
Ending short-term debt $ 0 $ 60 $ 8 $23.4
Notice that the ending short-term debt is just equal to the cumulative defi cit for the entire year, $20, plus the interest paid during the year, $3 + .4 = $3.4, for a total of $23.4.
Our plan is very simple. For example, we ignored the fact that the interest paid on the short- term debt is tax deductible. We also ignored the fact that the cash surplus in the fi rst quarter would earn some interest (which would be taxable). We could add on a number of refi nements. Even so, our plan highlights the fact that in about 90 days, Fun Toys would need to borrow $60 million or so on a short-term basis. It’s time to start lining up the source of the funds.
Our plan also illustrates that fi nancing the fi rm’s short-term needs costs more than $3 million in interest (before taxes) for the year. Th is is a starting point for Fun Toys to begin evaluating alternatives to reduce this expense. For example, can the $100 million planned expenditure be postponed or spread out? At 5 percent per quarter, short-term credit is expensive.
Also, if Fun Toys’ sales are expected to keep growing, the $20 million plus defi cit would prob- ably also keep growing, and the need for additional fi nancing is permanent. Fun Toys may wish to think about raising money on a long-term basis to cover this need.
As our example for Fun Toys illustrates, cash budgeting is a planning exercise because it forces
Concept Questions
536 Part 7: Short-Term Financial Planning and Management
18Ross_Chapter18_4th.indd 53618Ross_Chapter18_4th.indd 536 12-11-27 12:1312-11-27 12:13
the fi nancial manager to think about future cash fl ows. Th is is important because, as we showed in Chapter 4, fi rms can “grow bankrupt” if there is no planning. Th is is why bankers, venture capital- ists, and other fi nancing sources stress the importance of management and planning.
Short-Term Planning and Risk Aft er it is revised, the short-term fi nancial plan in Table 18.7 represents Fun Toys’ best guess for the future. Large fi rms go beyond the best guess to ask what-if questions using scenario analysis, sensitivity analysis, and simulation. We introduced these techniques in Chapter 11’s discussion of project analysis. Th ey are tools for assessing the degree of forecasting risk and identifying those components most critical to the success or failure of a fi nancial plan.
Recall that scenario analysis involves varying the base case plan to create several others—a best case, worst case, and so on. Each produces diff erent fi nancing needs to give the fi nancial manager a fi rst look at risk.
Sensitivity analysis is a variation on scenario analysis that is useful in pinpointing the areas where forecasting risk is especially severe. Th e basic idea of sensitivity analysis is to freeze all the variables except one and then see how sensitive our estimate of fi nancing needs is to changes in that one variable. If our projected fi nancing turns out to be very sensitive to, say, sales, then we know that extra eff ort in refi ning the sales forecast would pay off .
Since the original fi nancial plan was almost surely developed on a computer spreadsheet, scen- ario and sensitivity analysis are quite straightforward and widely used.
Simulation analysis combines the features of scenario and sensitivity analysis varying all the variables over a range of outcomes simultaneously. Th e result of simulation analysis is a probabil- ity distribution of fi nancing needs.
Air Canada uses simulation analysis in forecasting its cash needs. Th e simulation is useful in capturing the variability of cash fl ow components in the airline industry in Canada. Bad weather, for example, causes delays and cancelled fl ights, with unpredictable dislocation payments to trav- ellers and crew overtime. Th is and other risks are refl ected in a probability distribution of cash needs, giving the treasurer better information for planning borrowing needs. Beyond the weather, fi nancial market turmoil can also create challenges for cash budgeting. Th e fallout of the credit crisis of 2007–2008 made it diffi cult for fi rms to raise capital as the lender base shrunk.
18.6 Short-Term Borrowing
Fun Toys has a short-term fi nancing problem. It cannot meet the forecasted cash outfl ows in the second quarter from internal sources. How it fi nances that shortfall depends on its fi nancial policy. With a very fl exible policy, Fun Toys might seek up to $60 million in long-term debt fi nancing.
In addition, much of the cash defi cit comes from the large capital expenditure. Arguably, this is a candidate for long-term fi nancing. Examples discussed in Chapter 15 include issuing shares or bonds or taking a term loan from a chartered bank or other fi nancial institution. If it chose equity fi nancing through an initial public off ering (IPO), Fun Toys would be following the example of Chapters Online. As the fi rm’s Internet division, Chapters Online sells books, CD ROMs, DVDs and videos through its website. In September 1999, Chapters Online went public, raising equity at an off ering price of $13.50 per share. A little under a year later, in August 2000, analysts calculated Chapters Online’s “burn rate,” the rate at which the fi rm was using cash, to determine its cash position. Given that the stock price had fallen from the off ering price of $13.50 to $2.80 per share, a further equity off ering seemed unlikely and the discussion of the fi rm’s fi nancial health focused on the availability of short-term borrowing.
Here we concentrate on two short-term borrowing alternatives: (1) unsecured borrowing and (2) secured borrowing.
Operating Loans Th e most common way to fi nance a temporary cash defi cit is to arrange a short-term operating loan from a chartered bank. Th is is an agreement under which a fi rm is authorized to borrow up
aircanada.ca
operating loan Loan negotiated with banks for day-to-day operations.
CHAPTER 18: Short-Term Finance and Planning 537
18Ross_Chapter18_4th.indd 53718Ross_Chapter18_4th.indd 537 12-11-27 12:1312-11-27 12:13
to a specifi ed amount for a given period, usually one year (much like a credit card).9 Operating loans can be either unsecured or secured by collateral. Large corporations with excellent credit ratings usually structure the facility as an unsecured line of credit. Because unsecured credit lines are backed only by projections of future cash fl ows, bankers off er this cash fl ow lending only to those with top-drawer credit.
Short-term lines of credit are classifi ed as either committed or noncommitted. Th e latter is an informal arrangement. Committed lines of credit are more formal legal arrangements and usually involve a commitment fee paid by the fi rm to the bank (usually the fee is 0.25 percent of the total committed funds per year). A fi rm that pays a commitment fee for a committed line of credit is essentially buying insurance to guarantee that the bank can’t back out of the agreement (absent some material change in the borrower’s status).
COMPENSATING THE BANK The interest rate on an operating loan is usually set equal to the bank’s prime lending rate plus an additional percentage, and the rate usually floats. For example, suppose that the prime rate is 3 percent when the loan is initiated and the loan is at prime plus 1.5 percent. The original rate charged the borrower is 4.5 percent. If after, say, 125 days, prime increases to 3.5 percent, the company’s borrowing rate goes up to 5 percent and inter- est charges are adjusted accordingly.
Th e premium charged over prime refl ects the banker’s assessment of the borrower’s risk. Table 18.8 lists factors bankers use in assessing risk in loans to small business. Notice that risks related to management appear most oft en because poor management is considered the major risk with small business. Th ere is a trend among bankers to look more closely at industry and economic risk factors. A similar set of risk factors applies to loans to large corporations.
TABLE 18.8
Factors mentioned in the credit files
Factor Percent of Mentions
(1,539 cases)
1. Economic environment 6.1% Opportunities and risks
2. Industry environment 40.4 Competitive conditions, prospects, and risks
3. Client’s marketing activities 30.8 Strategies, strengths, and weaknesses
4. Firm’s operations management 59.5 Strengths and weaknesses
5. Client’s financial resources, skills, and performance 44.9 Financial management expertise 84.8 Historical or future profitability 41.6 Future cash flows 20.5 Future financing needs (beyond the current year)
6. Management capabilities and character 79.6 Strengths and weaknesses 95.1 Length of ownership of the firm 57.1 Past management experience relevant to the business
7. Collateral security and the firm’s net worth position 97.7
8. Borrower’s past relationship with bank 65.3
Source: Larry Wynant and James Hatch, Banks and Small Business Borrowers (London: University of Western Ontario, 1991), p. 136.
9 Descriptions of bank loans draw on L. Wynant and J. Hatch, Banks and Small Business Borrowers (London: University of Western Ontario, 1991).
538 Part 7: Short-Term Financial Planning and Management
18Ross_Chapter18_4th.indd 53818Ross_Chapter18_4th.indd 538 12-11-27 12:1312-11-27 12:13
Banks are in the business of lending mainly to low-risk borrowers. For this reason, bankers generally prefer to decline risky business loans that would require an interest rate more than prime plus 3 percent. Many of the loan requests that banks turn down are from small business, especially start-ups. Around 60 percent of these turn-downs fi nd fi nancing elsewhere. Alterna- tive sources include venture capital fi nancing discussed in Chapter 15 and federal and provincial government programs to assist small business.
In addition to charging interest, banks also levy fees for account activity and loan manage- ment. Small businesses may also pay application fees to cover the costs of processing loan applica- tions. Fees are becoming increasingly important in bank compensation.10 Fees and other details of any short-term business lending arrangements are highly negotiable. Banks generally work with fi rms to design a package of fees and interest.
Letters of Credit A letter of credit is a common arrangement in international fi nance. With a letter of credit, the bank issuing the letter promises to make a loan if certain conditions are met. Typically, the letter guarantees payment on a shipment of goods provided that the goods arrive as promised. A letter of credit can be revocable (subject to cancellation) or irrevocable (not subject to cancellation if the specifi ed conditions are met).
Secured Loans Banks and other fi nancial institutions oft en require security for an operating loan just as they do for a long-term loan. Table 18.8 shows that collateral security is a factor in virtually every small- business loan. Security for short-term loans usually consists of accounts receivable, inventories, or both because these are the assets most likely to retain value if the borrower goes bankrupt. Security is intended to reduce the lender’s risk by providing a second “line of defence” behind the borrower’s projected cash fl ows. To achieve this intention, the ideal collateral is Treasury bills or another asset whose value is independent of the borrower’s business. We say this because, under the NPV principle, business assets derive their value from cash fl ow. When business is bad and cash fl ow low (or negative), the collateral value is greatly reduced. Several Canadian banks found this out in the early 1990s when they wrote off billions in real estate loans, and again in 2002 when the deteriorating fi nancial health of several large telecom companies including Worldcom, Teleglobe, and Global Crossing resulted in signifi cant loan write-downs.
In addition, banks routinely limit risk through loan conditions called covenants. Table 18.9 lists common covenants in Canadian small-business loans. You can see that bankers expect to have a detailed knowledge of their clients’ businesses.
Accounts receivable fi nancing from chartered banks typically involves assigning receivables to the lender under a general assignment of book debts. Under assignment, the bank or other lender has the receivables as security, but the borrower is still responsible if a receivable can’t be collected. Th e lending agreement establishes a margin usually 75 percent of current (under 90 days) receivables. As the fi rm makes sales, it submits its invoices to the bank and can borrow up to 75 percent of their value.
Inventory margins are set similarly to accounts receivable. Since inventory is oft en less liquid than receivables (bringing a lower percentage of book value in liquidations), inventory lending margins are lower, typically 50 percent.
Many small and medium-sized businesses secure their operating loans with both receivables and inventory. In this case, the lending limit fl uctuates with both accounts according to the lend- ing margins.
10 U.S. banks sometimes require that the firm keep some account of money on deposit. This is called a compensating balance. A compensating balance is some of the firm’s money kept by the bank in low-interest or non-interest-bearing accounts. By leaving these funds with the bank and receiving no interest, the firm further increases the effective interest rate earned by the bank on the line of credit, thereby compensating the bank.
letter of credit A written statement by a bank that money will be paid, provided conditions specified in the letter are met.
covenants A promise by the firm, included in the debt contract, to perform certain acts. A restrictive covenant imposes constraints on the firm to protect the interests of the debtholder.
accounts receivable financing A secured short-term loan that involves either the assignment or factoring of receivables.
CHAPTER 18: Short-Term Finance and Planning 539
18Ross_Chapter18_4th.indd 53918Ross_Chapter18_4th.indd 539 12-11-27 12:1312-11-27 12:13
TABLE 18.9
Loan conditions for approved bank credits in the credit file sample
Condition Percent of Cases*
(1,382 cases)
Postponement of shareholder claims 39.8% Life insurance on key principals 39.4 Fire insurance on company premises 35.7 Accounts receivable and inventory reporting 27.8 Limits on withdrawals and dividends 11.9 Limits on capital expenditures 10.5 Maintenance of minimum working capital levels 2.9 Restrictions on further debt 2.5 Restrictions on disposal of company assets 1.7 Maintenance of minimum cash balances 0.9 Other conditions 6.2
*Adds up to more than 100 percent because of multiple responses.
Source: Larry Wynant and James Hatch, Banks and Small Business Borrowers (London: University of Western Ontario, 1991), p. 173.
EXAMPLE 18.3: Secured Borrowing for Fun Toys
Based on the cash budget we drew up earlier, the financial manager of Fun Toys has decided to seek a bank operating loan to cover the projected deficit of $60 million. The Royal Canadian National Bank has offered Fun Toys an operating loan at prime plus 1 percent to be secured by inventories. The lending officer has set a 75 percent margin on current receivables and 50 percent on inventory. Fun Toys has as- sured you that all its receivables are current and that two- thirds of payables were for inventory purchases. Can Fun Toys provide sufficient security for a $60 million operating loan?
Tables 18.3 and 18.4 show receivables and payables for Fun Toys for the next three quarters. Since the bank lends only against existing receivables and inventory, we use the
Q1 beginning figures of $120 million for receivables and the same figure for payables. The full amount of the inven- tory is eligible for margining but only two-thirds of pay- ables ($80) are inventory. We can calculate the amount that Fun Toys can secure as follows:
Amount × Margin = Security
Receivables $120 .75 $ 90 Inventory 80 .50 40 Total eligible security $130
So Fun Toys could borrow up to $130 million under the margin formula and have no trouble securing a loan of $60 million
Factoring In addition to bank borrowing, accounts receivable fi nancing is also possible through factoring. A factor is an independent company that acts as “an outside credit department” for the client. It checks the credit of new customers, authorizes credit, handles collections and bookkeeping. If any accounts are late, the factor still pays the selling fi rm on an average maturity date determined in advance. Th e legal arrangement is that the factor purchases the accounts receivable from the fi rm. Th us, factoring provides insurance against bad debts because any defaults on bad accounts are the factor’s problem. Companies such as Accord Financial Corp. in Canada, provide factoring ser- vices allowing client fi rms to shorten their collection cycles and expand sales. Accord purchases the client’s receivables and provides up to 85% of the value of the approved invoices.11
Factoring in Canada is conducted by independent fi rms whose main customers are small busi- nesses. Factoring is popular with manufacturers of retail goods, especially in the apparel business. Th e attraction of factoring to small businesses is that it allows outside professionals to handle the headaches of credit. To avoid magnifying those headaches, factors must off er cost savings and avoid alienating their clients’ customers in the collection process.
11 accordfinancial.com/financing-services/receivable-purchase-financing.html
540 Part 7: Short-Term Financial Planning and Management
18Ross_Chapter18_4th.indd 54018Ross_Chapter18_4th.indd 540 12-11-27 12:1312-11-27 12:13
What we have described so far is maturity factoring and does not involve a formal fi nancing arrangement. What factoring does is remove receivables from the statement of fi nancial position and so, indirectly, it reduces the need for fi nancing. It may also reduce the costs associated with granting credit. Because factors do business with many fi rms, they may be able to achieve scale economies, reduce risks through diversifi cation, and carry more clout in collection.
Firms fi nancing their receivables through a chartered bank may also use the services of a factor to improve the receivables’ collateral value. In this case, the factor buys the receivables and assigns them to the bank. Th is is called maturity factoring with assignment of equity. Or the factor pro- vides an advance on the receivables and charges interest at prime plus 2.5 to 3 percent. In advance factoring, the factor provides fi nancing as well as other services.
EXAMPLE 18.4: Cost of Factoring
For the year just ended, LuLu’s Fashions had $500,000 in credit sales monthly with an average maturity of receivables of 45 days. LuLu’s uses a factor to obtain funds 15 days af- ter the sale. This means the factor is advancing funds for 45 - 15 = 30 days. The factor charges 10.5 percent inter- est (APR), 2.5 percent over the current prime rate of 8 per- cent. In addition, the factor charges a 1.5 percent fee for processing the receivables and assuming all credit risk. If LuLu’s ran its own credit department, it would cost $2,000 per month in variable expenses and this is saved with fac- toring. What is the effective interest cost of factoring?
The costs are:
Per Month
Interest = .105 × 30/365 × $500,000 = $ 4,315
Factor’s fee = .015 × $500,000 = 7,500
Variables expenses saved = -2,000 Total cost $ 9,815
$9,815/$500,000 = 1.96 percent per month. The effective annual rate (EAR) is (1.0196)12 - 1 =
26.23 percent. Note that the factor takes on the risk of default by a
buyer, thus providing insurance as well as immediate cash. More generally, the factor essentially takes over the firm’s credit operations. This can result in a significant saving. The interest rate we calculated is therefore overstated, particu- larly if default is a significant possibility.
Securit ized Receivables—A Financial Innovation Financial engineers have come up with a new approach to receivables fi nancing. When a large corporation such as Canadian Tire, securitized receivables, it sold them to Glacier Credit Card Trust, a wholly owned subsidiary. Glacier issued debentures and commercial paper backed by a diversifi ed portfolio of receivables. Because receivables are liquid, Glacier debt is less risky than lending to Canadian Tire and the company hopes to benefi t through interest savings. Th e growing market for asset-backed securities faced a major setback in the global credit crisis beginning in 2007. As a result, companies like Canadian Tire ensure that back-up fi nancing from bank lines of credit and medium-term notes programs are in place.
Inventory Loans Inventory loans, or operating loans to fi nance inventory, feature assignment of inventory to the lender who then advances funds according to a predetermined margin as we discussed earlier. Th e specifi c legal arrangements depend on the type of inventory. Th e most sweeping form is the general security agreement that registers security over all a fi rm’s assets. Inventory as a whole can be assigned under Section 178 of the Bank Act, or Bill 97 in Quebec. If the inventory consists of equipment or large, movable assets, the appropriate legal form is a chattel mortgage (commercial pledge of equipment in Quebec).
Th e legal form of the security arrangement can be tailored to the type of inventory. For example, with large, expensive items in inventory, the security agreement is oft en based on trust receipts listing the individual items by serial numbers. Trust receipts are used to support fl oor plan fi nancing for automobile dealers and sellers of household appliances and other equipment. Th e advantage of fl oor plan fi nancing is that it gives the lender a systematic way to monitor the inventory as it moves through the cash cycle. As the vehicles are sold, the dealer reports the sale to the lender and repays the fi nancing.
maturity factoring Short-term financing in which the factor purchases all of a firm’s receivables and forwards the proceeds to the seller as soon as they are collected.
inventory loan A secured short-term loan to purchase inventory.
trust receipt An instrument acknowledging that the borrower holds certain goods in trust for the lender.
CHAPTER 18: Short-Term Finance and Planning 541
18Ross_Chapter18_4th.indd 54118Ross_Chapter18_4th.indd 541 12-11-27 12:1312-11-27 12:13
Ken Hitzig on Keeping Business Liquid through Factoring
Through subsidiaries in Canada and the United States, Accord Financial Corp. provides factoring services to small and medium- sized companies. Accord’s customers are engaged in temporary staff placement, computer services, textiles, apparel, medical services, food distribution, sporting goods, leisure products, transportation, footwear, fl oor coverings, home furnishings, and industrial products.
Accord is engaged in the factoring business on both a recourse and non-recourse basis. Non-recourse factoring is a service provided to companies desiring to outsource their customer accounts receivable departments, including the risk of customer default. Almost all the work involving credit checking, recordkeeping, collections, and credit losses is effectively off-loaded on Accord for a predetermined fee. Financing is available, but few of Accord’s clients avail themselves of this facility, preferring instead to fund their business through banks.
Accord’s non-recourse service appeals to medium-sized companies (annual sales of $1–$10 million) which view the virtual elimination of customer credit risk as the single, most important benefi t. Most of these clients are privately owned and the owners are very aware of preserving capital and avoiding unnecessary risk. The failure of a large customer could cause the bank to reduce or cancel the operating line of credit and jeopardize the owner’s life savings. Non-recourse factoring with Accord solves the problem. As one client described it: “Accord’s credit is best described in three words—Ship and Sleep.”
Recourse factoring is similar to non-recourse but the customer credit risk remains with the client company. Accord purchases the invoices from the client for cash; however, in the event of customer default, Accord has the right to resell the account back to the client. Recourse factoring is attractive to small and medium-sized companies needing liquidity but unable to borrow from banks on the strength of their fi nancial statements. These companies are usually thinly capitalized, going through a turnaround phase, growing rapidly or a combination of some or all of these traits. They usually have better-than-average quality customers, and by factoring their sales, they effectively exchange paper for cash.
Ken Hitzig is a Commerce graduate of McGill University and a Chartered Accountant. After an 18-year career at Aetna Factors Corp. Ltd., he left to start Accord Business Credit Inc. in 1978. Along with Montcap Financial Corp. in Canada and J.T.A. Factors, Inc. in South Carolina, Accord is now a subsidiary of Accord Financial Corp., a publicly held company listed on the Toronto Stock Exchange. Mr. Hitzig is Chairman, Board of Director of Accord Financial Corp.
IN THEIR OWN WORDS…
Warehouse fi nancing is a similar system in which the inventory that serves as security is identifi ed and monitored. In this case, the inventory is segregated in a designated fi eld or public warehouse run by a third party. Th e warehouse issues a warehouse receipt providing legal evidence of the existence of the security. Because the goods are segregated, warehouse fi nancing is not suitable for work-in-progress inventory. On the other hand, this form of fi nancing is ideally suited for inventories that improve with age such as whiskey or wine.
Trade Credit When a fi rm purchases supplies on credit, the increase in accounts payable is a source of funds and automatic fi nancing. As compared with bank fi nancing, trade credit has the advantage of arising automatically from the fi rm’s business. It does not require a formal fi nancing agreement with covenants that may restrict the borrower’s business activities. Suppliers off er credit to remain competitive; in many industries, the terms of credit include a cash discount for paying within a certain period. For example, suppose a supplier off ers terms of 2/10, net 30.12 If your fi rm makes a $1,000 purchase, you have a choice of paying aft er 10 days, taking the cash discount, or paying the full $1,000 aft er 30 days. Or you could stretch your payables by paying the $1,000 aft er, say, 45 days. Th e longer you wait, the longer the supplier is providing you with trade credit fi nancing.
In making your decision, you should ask whether the cash discount provides a signifi cant incentive for early payment. Th e answer is yes because the implicit interest rate is extremely high.
12 Chapter 20 provides a full discussion of credit terms from the seller’s viewpoint.
542 Part 7: Short-Term Financial Planning and Management
18Ross_Chapter18_4th.indd 54218Ross_Chapter18_4th.indd 542 12-11-27 12:1312-11-27 12:13
To see why the discount is important, we calculate the cost to the buyer of not paying early. To do this, we fi nd the interest rate that the buyer is eff ectively paying for the trade credit. Suppose the order is for $1,000. Th e buyer can pay $980 in 10 days or wait another 20 days and pay $1,000. (For the moment, we ignore the possibility of stretching.) It’s obvious that the buyer is eff ectively bor- rowing $980 for 20 days and that the buyer pays $20 in interest on the loan. What’s the interest rate?
Th is interest is ordinary discount interest, which we discussed in Chapter 5. With $20 in inter- est on $980 borrowed, the rate is $20/$980 = 2.0408%. Th is is relatively low, but remember that this is the rate per 20-day period. Th ere are 365/20 = 18.25 such periods in a year, so the buyer is paying an eff ective annual rate (EAR) of:
EAR = (1.020408)18.25 - 1 = 44.6%
From the buyer’s point of view, this is an expensive source of fi nancing. Now suppose the buyer decides to stretch its payables and pay in 45 days. What is the EAR
now? Th e interest is still $20 on $980 borrowed so the rate is still 2.0408%. What stretching changes is the length of the loan period. Since we are paying on Day 45, the loan period is now 45 - 10 = 35 days. Th ere are 365/35 = 10.43 such periods in a year. Th e new EAR is:
EAR = (1.020408)10.43 - 1 = 23.5%
So you can see that stretching reduces the EAR somewhat but this does not make it a recom- mended practice. Companies that habitually pay their suppliers late risk supplier ill will. Th is may impact unfavourably on delivery schedules and, in the extreme case, suppliers may cut off the fi rm or ship only terms of C.O.D. (cash on delivery). Late payment may also harm the fi rm’s credit rating.
EXAMPLE 18.5: What’s the Rate?
Ordinary tiles are often sold 3/30, net 60. What effective annual rate does a buyer pay by not taking the discount? What would the APR be if one were quoted?
Here we have 3 percent discount interest on 60 - 30 = 30 days’ credit. The rate per 30 days is .03/.97 = 3.093%. There are 365/30 = 12.17 such periods in a year, so the effective annual rate is:
EAR = (1.03093)12.17 - 1 = 44.9%
The APR, as always, would be calculated by multiplying the rate per period by the number of periods:
APR = .03093 × 12.17 = 37.6%
An interest rate calculated like this APR is oft en quoted as the cost of the trade credit, and, as this example illustrates, the true cost can be seriously understated.
Money Market Financing Large fi rms with excellent credit ratings can obtain fi nancing directly from money markets. Two of the most important money market instruments for short-term fi nancing are commercial paper and bankers acceptances.
Commercial paper consists of short-term notes issued by large and highly rated fi rms. Firms issuing commercial paper in Canada generally have borrowing needs over $20 million. Rating agencies, DBRS and Standard & Poor’s (S&P) discussed in Chapter 7, rate commercial paper similarly to bonds. Typically, these notes are of short maturity, ranging from 30 to 90 days with some maturities up to 365 days. Commercial paper is off ered in denominations of $100,000 and up. Because the fi rm issues paper directly and because it usually backs the issue with a special bank line of credit, the interest rate the fi rm obtains is less than the rate a bank would charge for a direct loan, usually by around 1 percent. Another advantage is that commercial paper off ers the issuer fl exibility in tailoring the maturity and size of the borrowing.
Bankers acceptances are a variant on commercial paper. When a bank accepts paper, it charges a stamping fee in return for a guarantee of the paper’s principal and interest. Stamping fees vary from .20 percent to .75 percent. Bankers acceptances are more widely used than commercial paper in Canada because Canadian chartered banks enjoy stronger credit ratings than all but the
CHAPTER 18: Short-Term Finance and Planning 543
18Ross_Chapter18_4th.indd 54318Ross_Chapter18_4th.indd 543 12-11-27 12:1312-11-27 12:13
largest corporations.13 Th e main buyers of bankers acceptances and commercial paper are institu- tions, including mutual funds, insurance companies, and banks.
A disadvantage of borrowing through bankers acceptances or commercial paper is the risk that the market might temporarily dry up when it comes time to roll over the paper. Extendible com- mercial paper is an innovation designed to address the risk of market disruption. In the event that the issuer cannot obtain new fi nancing through normal channels, the extension feature makes it possible to keep maturing paper in force beyond its stated maturity.
Figure 18.7 shows the short term fi nancing market in Canada. Clearly, the Asset Backed Com- mercial Paper (ABCP) fell out of favour aft er the fi nancial crises in 2008. However, Bankers Acceptances are steadily on the rise during the same period.
FIGURE 18.7
Short-term financing market in Canada
19 90
19 91
19 92
19 94
19 95
19 97
19 98
19 99
20 01
20 02
20 04
20 05
20 07
20 08
20 09
20 11
0
20,000
40,000
60,000
80,000
100,000
120,000
140,000
in $
m ill
io n
Commercial Paper Asset Backed Commercial Paper
Bankers Acceptances
Source: Bank of Canada, as of May 28, 2012
1. What are the two basic forms of short-term financing?
2. Describe two types of secured operating loans.
3. Describe factoring and the services it provides.
4. How does trade credit work? Should firms stretch their accounts payable?
5. Describe commercial paper and bankers acceptances. How do they differ?
13 The reverse situation prevails in the United States, with commercial paper being more common.
Concept Questions
544 Part 7: Short-Term Financial Planning and Management
18Ross_Chapter18_4th.indd 54418Ross_Chapter18_4th.indd 544 12-11-27 12:1312-11-27 12:13
18.7 SUMMARY AND CONCLUSIONS
1. This chapter introduces the management of short-term finance. Short-term finance involves short-lived assets and liabilities. We trace and examine the short-term sources and uses of cash as they appear on the firm’s financial statements. We see how current assets and cur- rent liabilities arise in the short-term operating activities and the cash cycle of the firm. This chapter shows why managing the cash cycle is critical to small businesses.
2. Managing short-term cash flows involves the minimizing of costs. The two major costs are carrying costs, the return forgone by keeping too much invested in short-term assets such as cash, and shortage costs, the cost of running out of short-term assets. The objective of man- aging short-term finance and doing short-term financial planning is to find the optimal trade-off between these two costs.
3. In an ideal economy, the firm could perfectly predict its short-term uses and sources of cash, and net working capital could be kept at zero. In the real world we live in, cash and net working capital provide a buffer that lets the firm meet its ongoing obligations. The financial manager seeks the optimal level of each of the current assets.
4. The financial manager can use the cash budget to identify short-term financial needs. The cash budget tells the manager what borrowing is required or what lending will be possible in the short run. The firm has available to it a number of possible ways of acquiring funds to meet short-term shortfalls, including unsecured and secured loans.
Key Terms accounts payable period (page 522) accounts receivable financing (page 539) accounts receivable period (page 522) carrying costs (page 527) cash budget (page 533) cash cycle (page 522) cash flow time line (page 522) covenants (page 539)
inventory loan (page 541) inventory period (page 522) letter of credit (page 539) maturity factoring (page 541) operating cycle (page 522) operating loan (page 537) shortage costs (page 537) trust receipt (page 541)
Chapter Review Problems and Self-Test 18.1 The Operating and Cash Cycles Consider the following
financial statement information for the Glory Road Company:
Item Beginning Ending
Inventory $1,543 $1,669 Accounts receivable 4,418 3,952 Accounts payable 2,551 2,673 Net sales $11,500 Cost of goods sold 8,200
Calculate the operating and cash cycles. 18.2 Cash Balance for Masson Corporation The Masson Corpo-
ration has a 60-day average collection period and wishes to maintain a $5 million minimum cash balance. Based on this and the following information, complete the cash budget. What conclusions do you draw?
MASSON CORPORATION Cash Budget (in $ millions)
Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4
Beginning receivables $120 Sales 90 120 150 120 Cash collections Ending receivables Total cash collections Total cash disbursements 80 160 180 160 Net cash inflow Beginning cash balance $ 5 Net cash inflow Ending cash balance Minimum cash balance Cumulative surplus (deficit)
Answers to Self-Test Problems 18.1 We first need the turnover ratios. Note that we have used the average values for all statement of financial position items and that we
have based the inventory and payables turnover measures on cost of goods sold. Inventory turnover = $8,200/[(1,543 + 1,669)/2] = 5.11 times
CHAPTER 18: Short-Term Finance and Planning 545
18Ross_Chapter18_4th.indd 54518Ross_Chapter18_4th.indd 545 12-11-27 12:1312-11-27 12:13
Receivables turnover = $11,500/[(4,418 + 3,952)/2] = 2.75 times Payables turnover = $8,200/[(2,551 + 2,673)/2] = 3.14 times We can now calculate the various periods: Inventory period = 365 days/5.11 times = 71.43 days
Receivables period = 365 days/2.75 times = 132.73 days Payables period = 365 days/3.14 times = 116.24 days
So the time it takes to acquire inventory and sell it is about 71 days. Collection takes another 133 days, and the operating cycle is thus 71 + 133 = 204 days. The cash cycle is thus 204 days less the payables period, 204 - 116 = 88 days.
18.2 Since Masson has a 60-day collection period, only those sales made in the first 30 days of the quarter are collected in the same quarter. Total cash collections in the first quarter thus equal 30/90 = 1/3 of sales plus beginning receivables, or $120 + 1/3 × $90 = $150. Ending receivables for the first quarter (and the second quarter beginning receivables) are the other 2/3 of sales, or 2/3 × $90 = $60. The re- maining calculations are straightforward, and the completed budget follows:
MASSON CORPORATION Cash Budget (in $ millions)
Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4
Beginning receivables $ 120 $ 60 $ 80 $ 100 Sales 90 120 150 120 Cash collection 150 100 130 140 Ending receivables $ 60 $ 80 $ 100 $ 80 Total cash collections $ 150 $ 100 $ 130 $ 140 Total cash disbursements 80 160 180 160 Net cash inflow $ 70 -$ 60 -$ 50 -$ 20 Beginning cash balance $ 5 $ 75 $ 15 -$ 35 Net cash inflow 70 - 60 - 50 - 20 Ending cash balance $ 75 $ 15 -$ 35 -$ 55 Minimum cash balance -$ 5 -$ 5 -$ 5 -$ 5 Cumulative surplus (deficit) $ 70 $ 10 -$ 40 -$ 60
The primary conclusion from this schedule is that beginning in the third quarter, Masson’s cash surplus becomes a cash deficit. By the end of the year, Masson needs to arrange for $60 million in cash beyond what is available.
Concepts Review and Critical Thinking Questions 1. Operating Cycle (LO1) What are some of the characteristics
of a firm with a long operating cycle? 2. Cash Cycle (LO1) What are some of the characteristics of a
firm with a long cash cycle? 3. Sources and Uses (LO4) For the year just ended, you have
gathered the following information about the Holly Corporation:
a. A $200 dividend was paid. b. Accounts payable increased by $500. c. Fixed asset purchases were $900. d. Inventories increased by $625. e. Long-term debt decreased by $1,200. Label each as a source or use of cash and describe its effect on
the firm’s cash balance. 4. Cost of Current Assets (LO2) Loftis Manufacturing Inc. has
recently installed a just-in-time (JIT) inventory system. De- scribe the effect this is likely to have on the company’s carry- ing costs, shortage costs, and operating cycle.
5. Operating and Cash Cycles (LO1) Is it possible for a firm’s cash cycle to be longer than its operating cycle? Explain why
or why not. Use the following information to answer Questions 6–10: Last
month, BlueSky Airline announced that it would stretch out its bill payments to 45 days from 30 days. The reason given was that the company wanted to “control costs and optimize cash flow.” The increased payables period will be in effect for all of the company’s 4000 suppliers.
6. Operating and Cash Cycles (LO1) What impact did this change in payables policy have on BlueSky’s operating cycle? Its cash cycle?
7. Operating and Cash Cycles (LO1) What impact did the an- nouncement have on BlueSky’s suppliers?
8. Corporate Ethics (LO1) Is it ethical for large firms to unilat- erally lengthen their payables periods, particularly when deal- ing with smaller suppliers?
9. Payables Period (LO1) Why don’t all firms simply increase their payables periods to shorten their cash cycles?
10. Payables Period (LO1) BlueSky lengthened its payables per- iod to “control costs and optimize cash flow.” Exactly what is the cash benefit to BlueSky from this change?
546 Part 7: Short-Term Financial Planning and Management
18Ross_Chapter18_4th.indd 54618Ross_Chapter18_4th.indd 546 12-11-27 12:1312-11-27 12:13
Questions and Problems 1. Changes in the Cash Account (LO4) Indicate the impact of the following corporate actions on cash, using the letter I for an
increase, D for a decrease, or N when no change occurs: a. A dividend is paid with funds received from a sale of debt. b. Real estate is purchased and paid for with short-term debt. c. Inventory is bought on credit. d. A short-term bank loan is repaid. e. Next year’s taxes are prepaid. f. Preferred stock is redeemed. g. Sales are made on credit. h. Interest on long-term debt is paid. i. Payments for previous sales are collected. j. The accounts payable balance is reduced. k. A dividend is paid. l. Production supplies are purchased and paid for with a short-term note. m. Utility bills are paid. n. Cash is paid for raw materials purchased for inventory. o. Marketable securities are sold.
2. Cash Equation (LO3) Prince George Corp. has a book net worth of $13,205. Long-term debt is $8,200. Net working capital, other than cash, is $2,575. Fixed assets are $17,380. How much cash does the company have? If current liabilities are $1,630, what are current assets?
3. Changes in the Operating Cycle (LO1) Indicate the effect that the following will have on the operating cycle. Use the letter I to indicate an increase, the letter D for a decrease, and the letter N for no change:
a. Average receivables goes up. b. Credit repayment times for customers are increased. c. Inventory turnover goes from 3 times to 6 times. d. Payables turnover goes from 6 times to 11 times. e. Receivables turnover goes from 7 times to 9 times. f. Payments to suppliers are accelerated.
4. Changes in Cycles (LO1) Indicate the impact of the following on the cash and operating cycles, respectively. Use the letter I to indicate an increase, the letter D for a decrease, and the letter N for no change:
a. The terms of cash discounts offered to customers are made less favourable. b. The cash discounts offered by suppliers are decreased; thus, payments are made earlier. c. An increased number of customers begin to pay in cash instead of with credit. d. Fewer raw materials than usual are purchased. e. A greater percentage of raw material purchases are paid for with credit. f. More finished goods are produced for inventory instead of for order.
5. Calculating Cash Collections (LO3) The Charella Coffee Company has projected the following quarterly sales amounts for the coming year:
Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4
Sales $720 $750 $830 $910
a. Accounts receivable at the beginning of the year are $310. Charella has a 45-day collection period. Calculate cash collec- tions in each of the four quarters by completing the following:
Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4
Beginning receivables Sales Cash collections Ending receivables
b. Rework (a) assuming a collection period of 60 days. c. Rework (a) assuming a collection period of 30 days.
Basic (Questions
1–12)
5
CHAPTER 18: Short-Term Finance and Planning 547
18Ross_Chapter18_4th.indd 54718Ross_Chapter18_4th.indd 547 12-11-27 12:1312-11-27 12:13
6. Calculating Cycles (LO1) Consider the following financial statement information for the Carlboo Corporation: Item Beginning Ending
Inventory $10,583 $12,142 Accounts receivable 5,130 5,340 Accounts payable 7,205 7,630 Credit sales $97,381 Cost of goods sold 69,382
Calculate the operating and cash cycles. How do you interpret your answer? Assume 365 days in a year. 7. Factoring Receivables (LO5) Your firm has an average collection period of 29 days. Current practice is to factor all receivables
immediately at a 1.25 percent discount. What is the effective cost of borrowing in this case? Assume that default is extremely unlikely. Assume 365 days in a year.
8. Calculating Payments (LO3) Ospika Products has projected the following sales for the coming year: Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4
Sales $790 $870 $830 $930
Sales in the year following this one are projected to be 15 percent greater in each quarter. a. Calculate payments to suppliers assuming that Ospika places orders during each quarter equal to 30 percent of projected
sales for the next quarter. Assume that Ospika pays immediately. What is the payables period in this case? Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4
Payment of accounts $ $ $ $
b. Rework (a) assuming a 90-day payables period. c. Rework (a) assuming a 60-day payables period.
9. Calculating Payments (LO3) The Giscome Corporation’s purchases from suppliers in a quarter are equal to 75 percent of the next quarter’s forecast sales. The payables period is 60 days. Wages, taxes, and other expenses are 20 percent of sales, and interest and dividends are $90 per quarter. No capital expenditures are planned.
Projected quarterly sales are shown here: Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4
Sales $1,930 $2,275 $1,810 $1,520
Sales for the first quarter of the following year are projected at $2,150. Calculate the company’s cash outlays by completing the following:
Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4
Payment of accounts Wages, taxes, other expenses Long-term financing expenses (interest and dividends) Total
10. Calculating Cash Collections (LO3) The following is the sales budget for Yellowhead Inc. for the first quarter of 2013: January February March
Sales $195,000 $215,000 $238,000
Credit sales are collected as follows: 65 percent in the month of the sale 20 percent in the month after the sale 15 percent in the second month after the sale
The accounts receivable balance at the end of the previous quarter was $86,000 ($59,000 of which was uncollected December sales). a. Compute the sales for November. b. Compute the sales for December. c. Compute the cash collections from sales for each month from January through March.
11. Calculating the Cash Budget (LO3) Here are some important figures from the budget of Nechako Nougats Inc. for the second quarter of 2013:
April May June
Credit sales $312,000 $291,200 $350,400 Credit purchases 118,240 141,040 166,800 Cash disbursements Wages, taxes, and expenses 43,040 10,800 62,640 Interest 10,480 10,480 10,480 Equipment purchases 74,000 135,000 0
6
548 Part 7: Short-Term Financial Planning and Management
18Ross_Chapter18_4th.indd 54818Ross_Chapter18_4th.indd 548 12-11-27 12:1312-11-27 12:13
The company predicts that 5 percent of its credit sales will never be collected, 35 percent of its sales will be collected in the month of the sale, and the remaining 60 percent will be collected in the following month. Credit purchases will be paid in the month following the purchase.
In March 2013, credit sales were $196,000, and credit purchases were $134,000. Using this information, complete the following cash budget:
April May June
Beginning cash balance $112,000 Cash receipts Cash collections from credit sales Total cash available Cash disbursements Purchases Wages, taxes, and expenses Interest Equipment purchases Total cash disbursements Ending cash balance
12. Sources and Uses (LO4) Below are the most recent statements of financial position for Tabor Inc. Excluding accumulated depreciation, determine whether each item is a source or a use of cash, and the amount:
TABOR INC. Statement of financial position
December 31, 2013
2012 2013
Assets Cash $ 30,400 $ 29,520 Accounts receivable 69,904 73,344 Inventories 60,800 63,736 Property, plant, and equipment 147,000 157,180 Less: Accumulated depreciation 45,730 52,280 Total assets $ 262,374 $ 271,500
Liabilities and Equity Accounts payable $ 44,994 $ 47,118 Accrued expenses 6,280 5,632 Long-term debt 25,600 28,000 Common stock 16,000 20,000 Accumulated retained earnings 169,500 170,750 Total liabilities and equity $ 262,374 $ 271,500
13. Costs of Borrowing (LO3) You’ve worked out a line of credit arrangement that allows you to borrow up to $50 million at any time. The interest rate is .53 percent per month. In addition, 5 percent of the amount that you borrow must be deposited in a non-interest-bearing account. Assume that your bank uses compound interest on its line of credit loans.
a. What is the effective annual interest rate on this lending arrangement? b. Suppose you need $15 million today and you repay it in six months. How much interest will you pay?
14. Costs of Borrowing (LO3) A bank offers your firm a revolving credit arrangement for up to $70 million at an interest rate of 1.9 percent per quarter. The bank also requires you to maintain a compensating balance of 4 percent against the unused portion of the credit line, to be deposited in a non-interest-bearing account. Assume you have a short-term investment account at the bank that pays 1.05 percent per quarter, and assume that the bank uses compound interest on its revolving credit loans.
a. What is your effective annual interest rate (an opportunity cost) on the revolving credit arrangement if your firm does not use it during the year?
b. What is your effective annual interest rate on the lending arrangement if you borrow $45 million immediately and repay it in one year?
c. What is your effective annual interest rate if you borrow $70 million immediately and repay it in one year? 15. Calculating the Cash Budget (LO3) Cottonwood Inc. has estimated sales (in millions) for the next four quarters as follows:
Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4
Sales $160 $175 $190 $215
Sales for the first quarter of the year after this one are projected at $170 million. Accounts receivable at the beginning of the year were $68 million. Cottonwood has a 45-day collection period.
Intermediate (Questions
13–16)
CHAPTER 18: Short-Term Finance and Planning 549
18Ross_Chapter18_4th.indd 54918Ross_Chapter18_4th.indd 549 12-11-27 12:1312-11-27 12:13
Cottonwood’s purchases from suppliers in a quarter are equal to 45 percent of the next quarter’s forecast sales, and suppliers are normally paid in 36 days. Wages, taxes, and other expenses run about 25 percent of sales. Interest and dividends are $12 million per quarter.
Cottonwood plans a major capital outlay in the second quarter of $75 million. Finally, the company started the year with a $49 million cash balance and wishes to maintain a $30 million minimum balance.
a. Complete a cash budget for Cottonwood by filling in the following: COTTONWOOD INC.
Cash Budget (in millions)
Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4
Beginning cash balance $49 Net cash inflow Ending cash balance Minimum cash balance 30 Cumulative surplus (deficit)
b. Assume that Cottonwood can borrow any needed funds on a short-term basis at a rate of 3 percent per quarter and can invest any excess funds in short-term marketable securities at a rate of 2 percent per quarter. Prepare a short-term financial plan by filling in the following schedule. What is the net cash cost (total interest paid minus total investment income earned) for the year?
COTTONWOOD INC. Short-Term Financial Plan (in millions)
Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4
Beginning cash balance $30 Net cash inflow New short-term investments Income from short-term investments Short-term investments sold New short-term borrowing Interest on short-term borrowing Short-term borrowing repaid Ending cash balance Minimum cash balance Cumulative surplus (deficit) 30 Beginning short-term investments Ending short-term investments Beginning short-term debt Ending short-term debt
16. Cash Management Policy (LO3) Rework Problem 15 assuming: a. Cottonwood maintains a minimum cash balance of $40 million. b. Cottonwood maintains a minimum cash balance of $10 million.
Based on your answers in (a) and (b), do you think the firm can boost its profit by changing its cash management policy? Are there other factors that must be considered as well? Explain.
17. Costs of Borrowing (LO5) In exchange for a $400 million fixed commitment line of credit, your firm has agreed to do the following:
1. Pay 2.1 percent per quarter on any funds actually borrowed. 2. Maintain a 4 percent compensating balance on any funds actually borrowed. 3. Pay an up-front commitment fee of .150 percent of the amount of the line.
Based on this information, answer the following: a. Ignoring the commitment fee, what is the effective annual interest rate on this line of credit? b. Suppose your firm immediately uses $130 million of the line and pays it off in one year. What is the effective annual
interest rate on this $130 million loan?
Challenge (Question
17)
550 Part 7: Short-Term Financial Planning and Management
18Ross_Chapter18_4th.indd 55018Ross_Chapter18_4th.indd 550 12-11-27 12:1312-11-27 12:13
Internet Application Questions 1. Short-term financing is structured in many different ways. The following site from British Columbia describes different types
of short-term credit. www.smallbusinessbc.ca What type of loan will suit the following companies’ short-term financing needs? a. Small garment store with seasonal sales. b. Mid-sized pulp producer with level sales. 2. In many cases, a straight bank loan may not be the best source of funds. The following link describes a few of the alternative
debt sources available to small businesses today. www.smallbusinessbc.ca Pick any three financing alternatives from the link above, and give an example of a business that would find the particular type
of financing attractive.
CHAPTER 18: Short-Term Finance and Planning 551
18Ross_Chapter18_4th.indd 55118Ross_Chapter18_4th.indd 551 12-11-27 12:1312-11-27 12:13
This chapter is about how fi rms manage cash. Cash management is not as complex and con- ceptually challenging as capital budgeting and asset pricing. Still this is a very important activity and fi nancial managers in many companies, especially in the retail and services industries, spend a signifi cant portion of their time on cash management.
Th e basic objective in cash management is to keep the investment in cash as low as possible while still keeping the fi rm operating effi ciently and eff ectively. Th e goal usually reduces to the dictum, “Collect early and pay late.” Accordingly, we discuss ways of accelerating collections and managing disbursements. Our examples feature large fi rms and how they use computer-based cash management services off ered by banks.
In addition, fi rms must invest temporarily idle cash in short-term marketable securities. As we discuss in various places, these securities can be bought and sold in the fi nancial markets. As a group, they have very little default risk, and most are highly marketable. Th ere are diff erent types of marketable securities and we discuss a few of the most important ones. 1
19.1 Reasons for Holding Cash
John Maynard Keynes, in his great work, Th e General Th eory of Employment, Interest, and Money, identifi ed three reasons why liquidity is important: the precautionary motive, the speculative motive, and the transaction motive. We discuss these next.
1 See Eric Reguly, “Gamble may pay off for Air Canada pilots,” The Globe and Mail, May 31, 2003.
CASH AND LIQUIDITY MANAGEMENT
C H A P T E R 1 9
M ost often, when news breaks about a firm’s cash position, it’s because the firm is run- ning low on cash. This happened to Air Canada as it
faced a cash shortage resulting from reduced travel
during the recession of 2009. The airline sought a
loan of $600 million from Aeroplan, its parent com-
pany (ACE Aviation Holdings Inc.) and Export Devel-
opment Canada. Air Canada was also short of cash
in 2003, when it entered bankruptcy protection and
had only $492 million in cash (falling considerably
short of its obligations to creditors).1 Around the
same time, some firms had sizeable cash reserves. In
2004, Microsoft made the news regarding its cash
position, but not because it was running low on
cash. Cash reserves were at $76.6 billion until the
company issued a special dividend of $3 a share,
paying out a total of $30 billion to investors. In
2011, Microsoft had a cash reserve of around $53
billion. Why would firms such as these hold so much
cash? We examine cash management in this chapter
to explore this question and some related issues.
Learning Object ives
After studying this chapter, you should understand:
LO1 The importance of float and how it affects the cash balances.
LO2 How firms manage their cash and some of the collection, concentration, and disbursement techniques used.
LO3 The advantages and disadvantages to holding cash and some of the ways to invest idle cash.
Th e
C an
ad ia
n Pr
es s/
La P
re ss
e/ A
rm an
d Tr
ot tie
r
19Ross_Chapter19_3rd.indd 55219Ross_Chapter19_3rd.indd 552 12-11-13 16:4012-11-13 16:40
Speculative and Precautionary Motives Th e speculative motive is the need to hold cash to be able to take advantage of, for example, bar- gain purchases that might arise, attractive interest rates, and (in the case of international fi rms) favourable exchange rate fl uctuations.
For most fi rms, reserve borrowing ability and marketable securities can be used to satisfy speculative motives. Th us, for a modern fi rm, there might be a speculative motive for liquidity, but not necessarily for cash per se. Th ink of it this way: If you have a credit card with a very large credit limit, you can probably take advantage of any unusual bargains that come along without carrying any cash.
Th is is also true, to a lesser extent, for precautionary motives. Th e precautionary motive is the need for a safety supply to act as a fi nancial reserve. Once again, there probably is a precaution- ary motive for liquidity. However, given that the value of money market instruments is relatively certain and that instruments such as T-bills are extremely liquid, there is no real need to literally hold substantial amounts of cash for precautionary purposes.
Take the examples of Chrysler and Ford: both companies had argued during the late 1990s that they needed huge cash reserves to weather a downturn in the economy if one came. Th e automo- tive industry experiences large capital expenditures to engineer new models and update plant and equipment. Th us, the motive for these companies at the time was largely precautionary. Th e economic slowdown in 2001–2002 resulted in increased competition and larger sales incentives for these companies, and appeared to prove their arguments to be good ones. However, the cost of such reserves is high. If Ford could earn a 10 percent greater return by investing the money it has in reserves, the company would earn an additional $329,000 per day.
The Transaction Motive Cash is needed to satisfy the transaction motive, the need to have cash on hand to pay bills. Trans- action-related needs come from the normal disbursement and collection activities of the fi rm. Th e disbursement of cash includes the payment of wages and salaries, trade debts, taxes, and dividends.
Cash is collected from sales, the selling of assets, and new fi nancing. Th e cash infl ows (collec- tions) and outfl ows (disbursements) are not perfectly synchronized, and some level of cash hold- ings is necessary to serve as a buff er. Perfect liquidity is the characteristic of cash that allows it to satisfy the transaction motive.
As electronic funds transfers and other high-speed, paperless payment mechanisms continue to develop, even the transaction demand for cash may all but disappear. Even if it does, however, there is still a demand for liquidity and a need to manage it effi ciently.
Costs of Holding Cash When a fi rm holds cash in excess of some necessary minimum, it incurs an opportunity cost. Th e opportunity cost of excess cash (held in currency or bank deposits) is the interest income that could be earned in the next best use, such as investment in marketable securities.
Given the opportunity cost of holding cash, why would a fi rm hold any cash? Th e answer is that a cash balance must be maintained to provide the liquidity necessary for transaction needs— paying bills. If the fi rm maintains too small a cash balance, it may run out of cash. When this happens, the fi rm may have to raise cash on a short-term basis. Th is could involve, for example, selling marketable securities or borrowing.
Activities such as selling marketable securities and borrowing involve various costs. As we’ve discussed, holding cash has an opportunity cost. To determine the target cash balance, the fi rm must weigh the benefi ts of holding cash against these costs. We discuss this subject in more detail in the next section.
Cash Management versus Liquidity Management Before we move on, we should note that it is important to distinguish between true cash manage- ment and a more general subject, liquidity management. Th e distinction is a source of confu- sion because the word cash is used in practice in two diff erent ways. First of all, it has its literal
speculative motive The need to hold cash to take advantage of additional investment opportunities, such as bargain purchases.
precautionary motive The need to hold cash as a safety margin to act as a financial reserve.
transaction motive The need to hold cash to satisfy normal disbursement and collection activities associated with a firm’s ongoing operations.
CHAPTER 19: Cash and Liquidity Management 553
19Ross_Chapter19_3rd.indd 55319Ross_Chapter19_3rd.indd 553 12-11-13 16:4012-11-13 16:40
meaning, actual cash on hand. However, fi nancial managers frequently use the word to describe a fi rm’s holdings of cash along with its marketable securities, and marketable securities are some- times called cash equivalents or near-cash. In the case of Ford’s cash position, for example, what was actually being described was Ford’s total cash and cash equivalents.
Th e distinction between liquidity management and cash management is straightforward. Liquidity management concerns the optimal quantity of liquid assets a fi rm should have on hand, and it is one particular aspect of the current asset management policies we discussed in our previ- ous chapter. Cash management is much more closely related to optimizing mechanisms for col- lecting and disbursing cash, and it is this subject that we primarily focus on in this chapter.
1. What is the transaction motive, and how does it lead firms to hold cash?
2. What is the cost to the firm of holding excess cash?
19.2 Determining the Target Cash Balance
Based on our general discussion of current assets in the previous chapter, the target cash balance involves a trade-off between the opportunity costs of holding too much cash (the carrying costs) and the costs of holding too little (the shortage costs, also called adjustment costs). Th e nature of these costs depends on the fi rm’s working capital policy.
If the fi rm has a fl exible working capital policy, it probably maintains a marketable securities portfolio. As we showed earlier, large Canadian corporations carry portfolios of marketable secur- ities. In this case, the adjustment or shortage costs are the trading costs associated with buying and selling securities. In addition to these costs, fi rms holding large amounts of cash may be too fl ex- ible. Th is can occur if management prefers the comfort of sitting on a large cash balance instead of investing in projects with positive net present values. If this happens, shareholders face an unwanted agency cost. In Chapter 23, we discuss how takeover bids can discipline such managers.2
If the fi rm has a restrictive working capital policy, it probably borrows short-term to meet cash shortages. Th e costs are the interest and other expenses associated with arranging a loan. Th e restrictive case is more realistic for small- and medium-sized companies.
In the following discussion, we assume the fi rm has a fl exible policy. Its cash management consists of moving money in and out of marketable securities. Th is is a very traditional approach to the subject, and it is a nice way of illustrating the costs and benefi ts of holding cash. Keep in mind, however, that the distinction between cash and money market investments is becoming increasingly blurred as electronic technology allows easy and fast transfers.
The Basic Idea Figure 19.1 presents the cash management problem for our fl exible fi rm. If a fi rm tries to keep its cash holdings too low, it fi nds itself running out of cash more oft en than is desirable, and thus sell- ing marketable securities (and perhaps later buying marketable securities to replace those sold) more frequently than it would if the cash balance were higher. Th us, trading costs are high when the size of the cash balance is low. Th ese fall as the cash balance becomes larger.
In contrast, the opportunity costs of holding cash are very low if the fi rm holds very little cash. Th ese costs increase as the cash holdings rise because the fi rm is giving up more and more in interest that could have been earned.
At point C* in Figure 19.1, the sum of the costs is given by the total cost curve. As shown, the minimum total cost occurs where the two individual cost curves cross. At this point, the oppor- tunity costs and the trading costs are equal. Th is is the target cash balance, and it is the point the fi rm should try to fi nd.
2 This argument was originated in M.C. Jensen, “Agency Costs of Free Cash Flow, Corporate Finance and Takeovers,” American Economic Review, May 1986.
Concept Questions
target cash balance A firm’s desired cash level as determined by the trade-off between carrying costs and shortage costs.
adjustment costs The costs associated with holding too little cash.
554 Part 7: Short-Term Financial Planning and Management
19Ross_Chapter19_3rd.indd 55419Ross_Chapter19_3rd.indd 554 12-11-13 16:4012-11-13 16:40
FIGURE 19.1
Costs of holding cash
Cost in dollars of holding cash
Total costs of holding cash
Opportunity costs
Trading costs
Size of cash balance (C) C* Optimal size of cash balance
Trading costs are increased when the firm must sell securities to establish a cash balance. Opportunity costs are increased when there is a cash balance because there is no return to cash.
Figure 19.1 is essentially the same as one in the previous chapter. However, if we use real data on holding and opportunity costs, we can come up with a precise dollar optimum investment in cash. (Appendix 19A on Connect covers two models that do this in varying degrees of complexity.) Here, we focus only on their implications. All other things being equal:
1. The greater the interest rate, the lower is the target cash balance. 2. The greater the trading cost, the higher is the target balance.
Th ese are both fairly obvious from looking at Figure 19.1, but they bring out an important point on the evolution of computerized cash management techniques. In the early 1980s, high interest rates (the prime rate was over 22 percent) caused the cost of idle cash to skyrocket. In response, large corporations and banks invested in applying computer and communications technologies to cash management. Th e result was lower trading costs. With systems in place, banks are now able to off er cash management services to smaller customers.
Going beyond the simple framework of Figure 19.1, the more advanced models also show that the target cash balance should be higher for fi rms facing greater uncertainty in forecasting their cash needs. Th is makes sense because such fi rms need a larger cash balance as a cushion against unexpected outfl ows. We cover cash management under uncertainty later in the chapter.
Other Factors Influencing the Target Cash Balance Before moving on, we briefl y discuss two additional considerations that aff ect the target cash balance.
First, in our discussion of cash management, we assume cash is invested in marketable secur- ities such as Treasury bills. Th e fi rm obtains cash by selling these securities. Another alternative is to borrow cash. Borrowing introduces additional considerations to cash management:
1. Borrowing is likely to be more expensive than selling marketable securities because the in- terest rate is likely to be higher. For example, Figure 19.7 in a later section shows that the prime rate considerably exceeds all money market rates.
2. The need to borrow depends on management’s desire to hold low cash balances. A firm is more likely to have to borrow to cover an unexpected cash outflow the greater its cash flow variability and the lower its investment in marketable securities.
Second, for large fi rms, the trading costs of buying and selling securities are very small when compared to the opportunity costs of holding cash. For example, in 2011, Microsoft had a cash
CHAPTER 19: Cash and Liquidity Management 555
19Ross_Chapter19_3rd.indd 55519Ross_Chapter19_3rd.indd 555 12-11-13 16:4012-11-13 16:40
reservoir of US$53 billion. If this cash won’t be needed for 24 hours, should the fi rm invest the money or leave it sitting?
Suppose Microsoft can invest the money overnight at the call money rate. To do this, the trea- surer arranges through a bank to lend funds for 24 hours to an investment dealer. According to Figure 19.7 in Section 19.4, this is an annualized rate of approximately 1 percent per year in Canada. Th e daily rate is about 0.27 basis points (.0027 percent).3
Th e daily return earned on $53 billion is thus $53b × 0.0027 ÷ 100 = $1,431,000. Th e order cost would be much less than this. Following up on our earlier point about technology and cash management, large corporations buy and sell securities daily so they are unlikely to leave substan- tial amounts of cash idle.
1. What is a target cash balance?
2. How do changes in interest rates affect the target cash balance? Changes in trading costs?
19.3 Understanding Float
As you no doubt know, the amount of money you have according to your cheque book can be very diff erent from the amount of money that your bank thinks you have. Th e reason is that some of the cheques you have written haven’t yet been presented to the bank for payment. Th e same thing is true for a business. Th e cash balance that a fi rm shows on its books is called the fi rm’s book or ledger balance. Th e balance shown in its bank account is called its available or collected balance. Th e diff erence between the available balance and the ledger balance is called the fl oat, and it rep- resents the net eff ect of cheques in the process of clearing (moving through the banking system).
Disbursement Float Cheques written by a fi rm generate disbursement fl oat, causing a decrease in its book balance but no change in its available balance. For example, suppose General Mechanics Inc. (GMI) currently has $100,000 on deposit with its bank. On June 8, it buys some raw materials and puts a cheque in the mail for $100,000. Th e company’s book balance is immediately reduced by $100,000 as a result.
GMI’s bank, however, does not fi nd out about this cheque until it is presented to GMI’s bank for payment on, say, June 14. Until the cheque is presented, the fi rm’s available balance is greater than its book balance by $100,000. In other words, before June 8, GMI has a zero fl oat:
Float = Firm’s available balance - Firm’s book balance = $100,000 - $100,000 = $0
GMI’s position from June 8 to June 14 is:
Disbursement float = Firm’s available balance - Firm’s book balance = $100,000 - $0 = $100,000
During this period while the cheque is clearing (moving through the mail and the banking sys- tem), GMI has a balance with the bank of $100,000. It can obtain the benefi t of this cash while the cheque is clearing. For example, the available balance could be temporarily invested in marketable securities and thus earn more interest. We return to this subject a little later.
3 A basis point is 1 percent of 1 percent. Also, the annual interest rate is calculated as (1 + R)365 = 1.01, implying a daily rate of .0027 percent.
Concept Questions
float The difference between book cash and bank cash, representing the net effect of cheques in the process of clearing.
556 Part 7: Short-Term Financial Planning and Management
19Ross_Chapter19_3rd.indd 55619Ross_Chapter19_3rd.indd 556 12-11-13 16:4012-11-13 16:40
Collection Float and Net Float Cheques received by the fi rm create collection fl oat. Collection fl oat increases book balances but does not immediately change available balances. For example, suppose GMI receives a cheque from a customer for $100,000 on October 8. Assume, as before, that the company has $100,000 deposited at its bank and a zero fl oat. It processes the cheque through the bookkeeping depart- ment and increases its book balance by $100,000 to $200,000. However, the additional cash is not available to GMI until the cheque is deposited in the fi rm’s bank. Th is occurs on, say, October 9, the next day. In the meantime, the cash position at GMI refl ects a collection fl oat of $100,000. We can summarize these events. Before October 8, GMI’s position is:
Float = Firm’s available balance - Firm’s book balance = $100,000 - $100,000 = $0
GMI’s position from October 8 to October 9 is: Collection float = Firm’s available balance - Firm’s book balance
= $100,000 - $200,000 = -$100,000
In general, a fi rm’s payment (disbursement) activities generate disbursement fl oat, and its collec- tion activities generate collection fl oat. Th e net eff ect, that is, the sum of the total collection and disbursement fl oats, is the net fl oat. Th e net fl oat at a point in time is simply the overall diff erence between the fi rm’s available balance and its book balance.
If the net fl oat is positive, the fi rm’s disbursement fl oat exceeds its collection fl oat and its avail- able balance exceeds its book balance. In other words, the bank thinks the fi rm has more cash than it really does. Th is, of course, is desirable. If the available balance is less than the book bal- ance, the fi rm has a net collection fl oat. Th is is undesirable because we actually have more cash than the bank thinks we do, but we can’t use it.
EXAMPLE 19.1: Staying Afl oat
Suppose you have $5,000 on deposit. You write and mail a cheque for $1,000. You receive a cheque for $2,000 and put it in your wallet to deposit the next time you use a bank ma- chine. What are your disbursement, collection, and net floats?
After you write the $1,000 cheque, you show a balance of $4,000 on your books, but the bank shows $5,000 while the cheque is moving through the mail and clearing. This is a disbursement float of $1,000.
After you receive the $2,000 cheque, you show a bal- ance of $6,000. Your available balance doesn’t rise until
you deposit the cheque and it clears. This is a collection float of -$2,000. Your net float is the sum of the collection and disbursement floats, or -$1,000.
Overall, you show $6,000 on your books, but the bank only shows $5,000 cash. The discrepancy between your available balance and your book balance is the net float (-$1,000), and it is bad for you. If you write another cheque for $5,500, it might bounce even though it shouldn’t. This is the reason the financial manager has to be more concerned with available balances than book balances.
F loat Management Float management involves controlling the collection and disbursement of cash. Th e objective in cash collection is to speed up collections and reduce the lag between the time customers pay their bills and the time the cheques are collected. Th e objective in cash disbursement is to control pay- ments and minimize the fi rm’s costs associated with making payments.
Float can be broken down into three parts: mail fl oat, processing fl oat, and availability fl oat:
1. Mail float is the part of the collection and disbursement process where cheques are trapped in the postal system.
2. Processing float is the time it takes the receiver of a cheque to process the payment and de- posit it in a bank.
3. Availability float refers to the time required to clear a cheque through the banking system. In the Canadian banking system, availability float does not exceed one day for creditworthy firms and is often zero, so this is the least important part.
CHAPTER 19: Cash and Liquidity Management 557
19Ross_Chapter19_3rd.indd 55719Ross_Chapter19_3rd.indd 557 12-11-13 16:4012-11-13 16:40
Speeding collections involves reducing one or more of these fl oat components. Slowing disburse- ments involves increasing one of them. Later, we describe some procedures for managing fl oat times; before that, we need to discuss how fl oat is measured.
MEASURING FLOAT The size of the float depends on both the dollars and time delay involved. For example, suppose you receive a cheque for $500 from another province each month. It takes five days in the mail to reach you (the mail float) and one day for you to get over to the bank (the processing float). The bank gives you immediate availability (so there is no availability float). The total delay is 5 + 1 = 6 days.
What is your average daily fl oat? Th ere are two equivalent ways of calculating the answer: First, you have a $500 fl oat for six days, so we say the total fl oat is 6 × $500 = $3,000. Assuming 30 days in the month, the average daily fl oat is $3,000/30 = $100.
Second, your fl oat is $500 for 6 days out of the month and zero the other 24 days (again assum- ing 30 days in a month). Your average daily fl oat is thus:
Average daily float = (6 × $500 + 24 × 0)/30 = 6/30 × $500 + 24/30 × 0 = $3,000/30 = $100
Th is means that, on an average day, there is $100 that is not available to spend. In other words, on average, your book balance is $100 greater than your available balance, a $100 average collection fl oat.
COST OF THE FLOAT The basic cost to the firm of collection float is simply the oppor- tunity cost from not being able to use the cash. At a minimum, the firm could earn interest on the cash if it were available for investing.
Suppose the Lambo Corporation has average daily receipts of $1,000 and a weighted average delay of three days. Th e average daily fl oat is thus 3 × $1,000 = $3,000. Th is means that, on a typical day, there is $3,000 that is not earning interest. Suppose Lambo could eliminate the fl oat entirely. What would be the benefi t? If it costs $2,000 to eliminate the fl oat, what is the NPV of doing it?
Aft er the fl oat is eliminated, daily receipts are still $1,000. We collect the same day since the fl oat is eliminated, so daily collections are also still $1,000. Th e only change occurs the fi rst day. On that day, we catch up and collect $1,000 from the sale made three days ago. Because the fl oat is gone, we also collect on the sales made two days ago, one day ago, and today, for an additional $3,000. Total collections today are thus $4,000 instead of $1,000.
What we see is that Lambo generates an extra $3,000 today by eliminating the fl oat. On every subsequent day, Lambo receives $1,000 in cash just as it did before the fl oat was eliminated. If you recall our defi nition of relevant cash fl ow, the only change in the fi rm’s cash fl ow from eliminat- ing the fl oat is this extra $3,000 that comes in immediately. No other cash fl ows are aff ected, so Lambo is $3,000 richer.
In other words, the PV of eliminating the fl oat is simply equal to the total fl oat. Lambo could pay this amount out as a dividend, invest it in interest-bearing assets, or do anything else with it. If it costs $2,000 to eliminate the fl oat, the NPV is $3,000 - 2,000 = $1,000, so Lambo should do it.
SUMMARY OF FLOAT MEASURES • Float = Firm’s available balance - Firm’s book balance • Average daily fl oat = Total fl oat/Total days • Average daily receipts = Total receipts/Total days • Average daily fl oat = Average daily receipts × Weighted average delay
ELECTRONIC DATA INTERCHANGE: THE END OF FLOAT? Electronic data interchange (EDI) is a general term that refers to the growing practice of direct, electronic infor- mation exchange between all types of businesses. One important use of EDI, often called financial EDI, or FEDI, is to electronically transfer financial information and funds between parties, thereby eliminating paper invoices, paper cheques, mailing, and handling. For example, it is now possible to arrange to have your chequing account directly debited each month to pay many types
558 Part 7: Short-Term Financial Planning and Management
19Ross_Chapter19_3rd.indd 55819Ross_Chapter19_3rd.indd 558 12-11-13 16:4012-11-13 16:40
of bills, and corporations now routinely directly deposit pay cheques into employee accounts. More generally, EDI allows a seller to send a bill electronically to a buyer, thereby avoiding the mail. The buyer can then authorize payment, which also occurs electronically. Its bank then transfers the funds to the seller’s account at a different bank.
Major banks have implemented a fi nancial EDI system for personal banking. Canadian banks have added personal banking services for clients using their Web-based systems whereby clients can pay bills online and can also receive their bills electronically instead of by mail. Partnering with Rogers Communications Inc. (discussed further in the accompanying box), CIBC is helping customers to transfer money easily using smartphones.
‘Mobile wallets’ in Canada
A joint venture between Rogers Communications Inc. and the Canadian Imperial Bank of Commerce to turn smartphones into wallets capable of making day-to-day transactions with the swipe of a device represents the tip of the iceberg in a burgeoning mobile payments market, executives from both companies say. The country’s fi fth-largest bank and its biggest wireless carrier said Tuesday each is looking to partner with additional players in the nascent space. “It will scale from here,” David Williamson, CIBC’s senior vice-president of retail and business banking said in an interview following a press conference at the bank’s Toronto headquarters. Importantly, the partnership hinges on a new standards framework the Canadian Bankers Association announced Monday that clears many of the security and logistical obstacles that have held back the deployment of a so-called “mobile wallet” for years.
With the concerns resolved, CIBC and Rogers—alongside credit-card issuers Mastercard and Visa Canada—will enable smartphone devices to act as a physical CIBC credit card and pay for groceries, gas, restaurant bills, and other small ticket items by the end of the year. Mr. Williamson said this is the fi rst such deal to develop from the code, which had been in the works for months. While the bank is fi rmly focused on its partnership with Rogers, Mr. Williamson would not rule out working with competing mobile providers, such as BCE’s Bell Mobility and Telus Corp. “At this time it would be fair to say we would like to bring this to others,” the executive said. A spokeswoman for Telus, the country’s third-largest carrier, said talks are taking place between it and fi nancial institutions. “We are currently working with a number of banks to offer this service in the near future,” spokeswoman Elisabeth Naplano said via email. The new opportunity for both fi nancial institutions and wireless providers is based on near-fi eld communications (NFC) technology, which sends data such as a person’s card “credentials” over very short distances. In this instance, the data housed on a Rogers phone would be received by a small terminal near a traditional cash register. Credit card companies, which have been fast to roll out mobile payment solutions of their own using their own cards, are logical partners because of
their extensive “tap and go” networks already in place with merchants country wide, as well the loyalty and rewards programs they offer through their bank- sponsored cards, bank executives said.
Rogers will charge a fl at-rate “rent” for a customer’s CIBC credentials to be stored on their SIM card, the small, removable chip that acts as a digital repositories for wireless usage, numbers, contact information and other personal data. Rob Bruce, president of Rogers wireless and wireline operations, said roughly 300,000 customers have phones equipped with NFC technology in the market now, with the goal to have three-quarters of a million devices in use by the end of the year without specifying how many are CIBC credit-card holders and therefore eligible for the solution. In an interview, the executive said it was “premature” to speculate on what other fi nancial institutions Rogers may partner with, but he said the company is working aggressively to broaden the program. “We’re in very good shape,” he said. While wireless credit and payment models have been in place for some time in emerging economies that lack large-scale banking infrastructure, there are only two other commercial NFC deployments like the one announced Tuesday in the world, Mr. Bruce said—underscoring the leap in innovation both CIBC and Rogers are taking. The fi rst is from Telefónica SA of Spain while a second venture has been launched by a South Korean carrier. The sole handset partner supporting the CIBC- Rogers NFC solution to date is BlackBerry maker Research In Motion Ltd. Apple Inc.’s iPhone currently has no plans to bring on NFC technology, a blow to consumer adoption perhaps but boon to rival smartphone makers. Mr. Bruce said a “robust” roadmap is now in development for devices using Google’s Android platform.
Source: Financial Post, May 15, 2012, By Jamie Sturgeon. Used with permission.
IN THEIR OWN WORDS…
CHAPTER 19: Cash and Liquidity Management 559
19Ross_Chapter19_3rd.indd 55919Ross_Chapter19_3rd.indd 559 12-11-13 16:4012-11-13 16:40
Th e net eff ect is that the length of time required to initiate and complete a business or per- sonal transaction is shortened considerably, and much of what we normally think of as fl oat is sharply reduced or eliminated. As the use of FEDI increases (which it will), fl oat management will evolve to focus much more on issues surrounding computerized information exchange and funds transfers.
EXAMPLE 19.2: Reducing the Float
Instead of eliminating the float, suppose Lambo can reduce it to one day. What is the maximum Lambo should be will- ing to pay for this?
If Lambo can reduce the float from three days to one day, the amount of the float will fall from $3,000 to $1,000. We see immediately that the PV of doing this is just equal to the $2,000 float reduction. Lambo should thus be willing to pay up to $2,000.
1. Would a firm be most interested in reducing a collection or disbursement float? Why?
2. How is daily average float calculated?
3. What is the benefit from reducing or eliminating float?
Accelerating Collections Based on our discussion, we can depict the basic parts of the cash collection process in Figure 19.2. Th e total time in this process is made up of mailing time, cheque-processing time, and the bank’s cheque-clearing time. Th e amount of time that cash spends in each part of the cash col- lection process depends on where the fi rm’s customers are located and how effi cient the fi rm is at collecting cash.
FIGURE 19.2
Float time line
Customer mails
payment
Company receives payment
Company deposits payment
Cash received
Mail delay
Mail float
Processing delay
Collection float
Time
Processing float
Clearing delay
Availability float
Coordinating the fi rm’s eff orts in all areas in Figure 19.2 is its cash fl ow information system. Tracking payments through the system and providing the cash manager with up-to-date daily cash balances and investment rates are its key tasks. Chartered banks off er cash information sys- tems that all but put the bank on the manager’s desk. Linking the manager’s computer with the bank’s system gives the manager access to account balances and transactions and information
Concept Questions
560 Part 7: Short-Term Financial Planning and Management
19Ross_Chapter19_3rd.indd 56019Ross_Chapter19_3rd.indd 560 12-11-13 16:4012-11-13 16:40
on money market rates. Th e system also allows the manager to transfer funds and make money market investments.
Th e cash management system has security features to prevent unauthorized use. Diff erent passwords allow access to each level of authority. For example, you could give your receivables clerk access to deposit activity fi les but not to payroll. Some systems use smart cards for security. A smart card looks like a credit card but contains a computer chip that can be programmed to grant access to certain fi les only. Th e card must be inserted into an access device attached to a personal computer and provides another safeguard in addition to a password.
We next discuss several techniques used to accelerate collections and reduce collection time: systems to expedite mailing and cheque processing and concentration banking.
Over-the-Counter Collections In an over-the-counter system, customers pay in person at fi eld offi ces or stores. Most large retail- ers, utilities, and many other fi rms receive some payments this way. Because the payments are made at a company location, there is no mail delay. Th e manager of the fi eld location is respon- sible for ensuring that cheques and cash collected are deposited promptly and for reporting daily deposit amounts to the head offi ce.
When payments are received by mail, a company may instruct customers to mail cheques to a collection point address on its invoices. By distributing the collection points locally throughout its market area, the company avoids the delays occurring when all payments are mailed to its head offi ce. If the collection points are fi eld offi ces, the next steps are the same as for over-the-counter collections. A popular alternative, lockboxes, contracts out the collection points to a bank.
LOCKBOXES Lockboxes are special post office boxes set up to intercept accounts receivable payments. The collection process is started by business and retail customers mailing their cheques to a post office box instead of sending them to the firm. The lockbox is maintained at a local bank branch. Large corporations may maintain a number of lockboxes, one in each significant market area. The location depends on a trade-off between bank fees and savings on mailing time.
In the typical lockbox system, the local bank branch collects the lockbox cheques from the post offi ce daily. Th e bank deposits the cheques directly to the fi rm’s account. Details of the operation are recorded in some computer-usable form and sent to the fi rm.
A lockbox system reduces mailing time because cheques are received at a nearby post offi ce instead of at corporate headquarters. Lockboxes also reduce the processing time because the cor- poration doesn’t have to open the envelopes and deposit cheques for collection. In all, a bank lockbox should enable a fi rm to get its receipts processed, deposited, and cleared faster than if it were to receive cheques at its headquarters and deliver them itself to the bank for deposit and clearing.
ELECTRONIC COLLECTION SYSTEMS Over-the-counter and lockbox systems are standard ways to reduce mail and processing float time. They are used by almost all large Canad- ian firms that can benefit from them. Newer approaches focus on reducing float virtually to zero by replacing cheques with electronic fund transfers. Examples used in Canada include preautho- rized payments, point-of-sale transfers, and electronic trade payables. We discuss the first two here and the third later when we look at disbursement systems.
Preauthorized payments are paperless transfers of contractual or installment payments from the customer’s account directly to the fi rm’s. Common applications are mortgage payments and install- ment payments for insurance, rent, cable TV, telephone, and so on. Th is system eliminates all invoice paperwork and the deposit and reconciliation of cheques. Th ere is no mail or processing fl oat.
Point-of-sale systems use debit cards to transfer funds directly from a customer’s bank account to a retailer’s. A debit card typically is a bank machine (ATM) card with a personal identifi cation card (PIN) for security. Unlike a credit card, the funds are transferred immediately. Point-of-sale systems are common in Canada.
Th e next generation of cards for point-of-sale applications is the smart card mentioned earlier in its role of security for corporate cash management systems. Smart cards diff er from debit cards in that they contain a chip that can hold a cash balance. Consumers can download small amounts of money (usually under $300) directly on the card and then spend it at point-of-sale terminals.
smart card Much like an automated teller machine card; one use is within corporations to control access to information by employees.
lockboxes Special post office boxes set up to intercept and speed up accounts receivable payments.
debit card An automated teller machine card used at the point of purchase to avoid the use of cash. As this is not a credit card, money must be available in the user’s bank account.
CHAPTER 19: Cash and Liquidity Management 561
19Ross_Chapter19_3rd.indd 56119Ross_Chapter19_3rd.indd 561 12-11-13 16:4012-11-13 16:40
Th e advantage of smart cards is that, with the balance programmed on the card’s chip, there is no need for the merchant to have technology that goes online to the customer’s bank. Several Canad- ian banks have test marketed smart card technology in several Canadian communities.
CASH CONCENTRATION Using lockboxes or other collection systems helps firms collect cheques from customers and get them deposited rapidly. But the job is not finished yet since these systems give the firm cash at a number of widely dispersed branches. Until it is concentrated in a central account, the cash is of little use to the firm for paying bills, reducing loans, or investing.
With a concentration banking system, sales receipts are processed at fi eld sales offi ces and banks providing lockbox services and deposited locally. Surplus funds are transferred from the various local branches to a single, central concentration account. Th is process is illustrated in Figure 19.3, where concentration banks are combined with over-the-counter collection and lock- boxes in a total cash management system.
FIGURE 19.3
Lockboxes and concentration banks in a cash management system
Corporate customers
Corporate customers
Firm sales office
Local bank deposits
Concentration bank
Firm cash manager
Maintenance of cash reserves
Disbursements activity
Short-term investments of cash
Maintenance of compensating balance at creditor bank
Post office lockbox receipts
Corporate customers
Corporate customersFunds are transferred
to concentration bank
Statements are sent by mail to firm for receivables processing
Cash manager analyzes bank balance and deposit information and makes cash allocation revision
Large fi rms in Canada may manage collections through one chartered bank across the country. Chartered banks off er a concentrator account that automatically electronically transfers deposits at any branch in Canada to the fi rm’s concentration account. Th ese funds receive same day value. Th is means the fi rm has immediate use of the funds even though it takes 24 hours for a cheque to clear in Canada.4 If the concentration involves branches of more than one bank, electronic transfers take place between banks.
4 Since the bank is providing availability in advance of receiving funds, same day availability creates collection float for the bank. An interest charge on this float is usually included in the bank’s fees.
same day value Bank makes proceeds of cheques deposited available the same day before cheques clear.
562 Part 7: Short-Term Financial Planning and Management
19Ross_Chapter19_3rd.indd 56219Ross_Chapter19_3rd.indd 562 12-11-13 16:4012-11-13 16:40
Once the funds are in the concentration account, the bank can make automatic transfers to pay down the fi rm’s credit line or, if there is a surplus, to an investment account. Transfers are made in units of minimum size agreed in advance. A common practice is in units of $5,000. Mid-sized fi rms lacking in money market expertise may invest in bank accounts at competitive interest rates. Th e largest fi rms have the capability to purchase money market instruments electronically.
Controll ing Disbursements Accelerating collections is one method of cash management; slowing disbursements is another. Th is can be a sensitive area and some practices exist that we do not recommend. For example, some small fi rms that are short of working capital make disbursements on the “squeaky wheel principle.” Payables invoices are processed before their due dates and cheques printed. When the cheques are ready, the fi rm’s controller puts them all in a desk drawer. As suppliers call and ask for their money, the cheques come out of the drawer and go into the mail! We do not recommend the desk drawer method because it is bad for supplier relations and borders on being unethical.
CONTROLLING DISBURSEMENTS IN PRACTICE As we have seen, float in terms of slowing down payments comes from mail delivery, cheque-processing time, and collection of funds. In the United States, disbursement float can be increased by writing a cheque on a geo- graphically distant bank. For example, a New York supplier might be paid with cheques drawn on a Los Angeles bank. This increases the time required for the cheques to clear through the banking system. Mailing cheques from remote post offices is another way firms slow disbursement. Be- cause there are significant ethical (and legal) issues associated with deliberately delaying disburse- ments in these and similar ways, such strategies appear to be disappearing. In Canada, banks provide same day availability so the temptation is easy to resist.
For these reasons, the goal is to control rather than simply delay disbursements. A treasurer should try to pay payables on the last day appropriate for net terms or a discount.5 Th e traditional way is to write a cheque and mail it timed to arrive on the due date. With the cash management system we described earlier, the payment can be programmed today for electronic transfer on the future due date. Th is eliminates paper along with guesswork about mail times.
Th e electronic payment is likely to come from a disbursement account, kept separate from the concentration account to ease accounting and control. Firms keep separate accounts for payroll, vendor disbursements, customer refunds, and so on. Th is makes it easy for the bank to provide each cost or profi t centre with its own statement.
Firms use zero-balance accounts to avoid carrying extra balances in each disbursement account. With a zero-balance account, the fi rm, in cooperation with its bank, transfers in just enough funds to cover cheques presented that day. Figure 19.4 illustrates how such a system might work. In this case, the fi rm maintains two disbursement accounts, one for suppliers and one for payroll. As shown, when the fi rm does not use zero-balance accounts, each of these accounts must have a safety stock of cash to meet unanticipated demands. A fi rm that uses zero-balance accounts can keep one safety stock in a master account and transfer in the funds to the two subsidiary accounts as needed. Th e key is that the total amount of cash held as a buff er is smaller under the zero-balance arrangement, thereby freeing cash to be used elsewhere.
1. What are collection and disbursement floats?
2. What are lockboxes? Concentration banking? Zero-balance accounts?
3. How do computer and communications technologies aid in cash management by large corporations?
5 We discuss credit terms in depth in Chapter 20.
zero-balance account A chequing account in which a zero balance is maintained by transfers of funds from a master account in an amount only large enough to cover cheques presented.
Concept Questions
CHAPTER 19: Cash and Liquidity Management 563
19Ross_Chapter19_3rd.indd 56319Ross_Chapter19_3rd.indd 563 12-11-13 16:4012-11-13 16:40
FIGURE 19.4
Zero-balance accounts
Payroll account Supplier account
Safety stocks
Two zero-balance accounts
Master account
No zero-balance accounts
Cash transfers
Cash transfers
Safety stock
Payroll account Supplier account
19.4 Investing Idle Cash
If a fi rm has a temporary cash surplus, it can invest in short-term securities. As we have men- tioned at various times, the market for short-term fi nancial assets is called the money market. Th e maturity of short-term fi nancial assets that trade in the money market is one year or less.
Most large fi rms manage their own short-term fi nancial assets through transactions with banks and investment dealers. Some fi rms use money market funds that invest in short-term fi nancial assets for a management fee. Th e management fee is compensation for the professional expertise and diversifi cation provided by the fund manager.
Money market funds are becoming increasingly popular in Canada. Also, Canadian chartered banks off er arrangements in which the bank takes all excess available funds at the close of each business day and invests them for the fi rm.
Temporary Cash Surpluses Firms have temporary cash surpluses for various reasons. Two of the most important are the fi nancing of seasonal or cyclical activities and the fi nancing of planned or possible expenditures.
SEASONAL OR CYCLICAL ACTIVITIES Some firms have a predictable cash flow pattern. They have surplus cash flows during part of the year and deficit cash flows the rest of the year. For example, Toys “R” Us, a retail toy firm, has a seasonal cash flow pattern influenced by Christmas.
A fi rm such as Toys “R” Us may buy marketable securities when surplus cash fl ows occur and sell marketable securities when defi cits occur. Of course, bank loans are another short-term fi nancing device. Th e use of bank loans and marketable securities to meet temporary fi nancing needs is illustrated in Figure 19.5. In this case, the fi rm is following a compromise working capital policy in the sense we discussed in the previous chapter.
PLANNED OR POSSIBLE EXPENDITURES Firms frequently accumulate tempo- rary investments in marketable securities to provide the cash for a plant construction program, dividend payment, and other large expenditures. Thus, firms may issue bonds and stocks before the cash is needed, investing the proceeds in short-term marketable securities, and then selling the securities to finance the expenditures. Also, firms may face the possibility of having to make a large cash outlay. An obvious example would be the possibility of losing a large lawsuit. Firms may build up cash surpluses against such a contingency.
564 Part 7: Short-Term Financial Planning and Management
19Ross_Chapter19_3rd.indd 56419Ross_Chapter19_3rd.indd 564 12-11-13 16:4012-11-13 16:40
FIGURE 19.5
Seasonal cash demands
Total financing needs
Marketable securities
Bank loans
Short-term financing
Long-term financing: Equity plus long-term debt
Time
Dollars
0 1 2 3
Time 1: A surplus cash flow exists. Seasonal demand for assets is low. The surplus cash flow is invested in short-term marketable securities. Time 2: A deficit cash flow exists. Seasonal demand for assets is high. The financial deficit is financed by selling marketable securities and by bank borrowing.
Characterist ics of Short-Term Securit ies Given that a fi rm has some temporarily idle cash, there are a variety of short-term securities available for investing. Th e most important characteristics of these short-term marketable secur- ities are their maturity, default risk, and marketability. Consistent with Chapter 12’s discussion of risk and return, managers of marketable securities portfolios have an opportunity to increase expected returns in exchange for taking on higher risk. Marketable securities managers almost always resolve this trade-off in favour of low risk. Because this portfolio is a liquidity reserve, preservation of capital is generally the primary goal.
MATURITY Maturity refers to the time period over which interest and principal payments are made. From Chapter 7, we know that for a given change in the level of interest rates, the prices of longer maturity securities change more than those of shorter maturity securities. As a conse- quence, firms that invest in long-term maturity securities are accepting greater risk than firms that invest in securities with short-term maturities.
We called this type of risk interest rate risk. Firms oft en limit their investments in marketable securities to those maturing in less than 90 days to avoid the risk of losses in value from changing interest rates. Of course, the expected return on securities with short-term maturities is usually (but not always) less than the expected return on securities with longer maturities.
For example, suppose you are the treasurer of a fi rm with $10 million needed to make a major capital investment aft er 90 days. You have decided to invest in obligations of the Government of Canada to eliminate all possible default risk. Th e newspaper (or your computer screen) pro- vides you with the list of securities and rates in Figure 19.6. Th e safest investment is three-month Treasury bills yielding 0.95 percent. Because this matches the maturity of the investment with the planned holding period, there is no interest rate risk. Aft er three months, the Treasury bills mature for a certain future cash fl ow of $10 million.6
If you invest instead in a 10-year Canada bond, the expected return is higher, 1.80 percent, but so is the risk. Again drawing on Chapter 7, if interest rates rise over the next three months, the bond drops in price. Th e resulting capital loss reduces the yield, possibly below the 0.95 percent on Treasury bills.
6 Treasury bills are sold on a discount basis so the future cash flow includes principal and interest.
CHAPTER 19: Cash and Liquidity Management 565
19Ross_Chapter19_3rd.indd 56519Ross_Chapter19_3rd.indd 565 12-11-13 16:4012-11-13 16:40
FIGURE 19.6
Money market quotations
BONDS AND RATES
CANADIAN YIELDS U.S. YIELDS INTERNATIONAL
Latest Prev. day
Wk ago
4 wks ago Latest
Prev. day
Wk ago
4 wks ago Latest
Prev. day
Wk ago
4 wks ago
T-Bills T-Bills Euro-deposit rates (bid)
1-month 0.91 0.91 0.89 0.97 1-month 0.03 0.06 0.86 0.05 US$ 1-month 0.15 0.15 0.15 0.15
3-month 0.95 0.95 0.99 1.05 3-month 0.07 0.08 0.08 0.08 3-month 0.47 0.47 0.41 0.48
6-month 1.00 1.01 1.04 1.12 6-month 0.13 0.13 0.14 0.14 6-month 0.56 0.56 0.69 0.68
1-year 1.03 1.06 1.08 1.25 C$ 3-month 1.21 1.21 1.21 1.21
euro 3-month 0.57 0.57 0.58 0.50
Bonds Bonds Yen 3-month 0.05 0.05 0.05 0.05
2-year 1.12 1.16 1.16 1.32 2-year 0.256 0.29 0.29 0.27 £ 3-month 0.90 0.90 0.90 0.91
5-year 1.32 1.39 1.40 1.58 5-year 0.69 0.77 0.73 0.83 London interbank offer rate US$
10-year 1.80 1.87 1.88 2.02 10-year 1.61 1.74 1.73 1.93 US$ 1-month 0.24 0.24 0.24 0.24
30-year 2.33 2.39 2.40 2.59 30-year 2.70 2.85 2.82 3.12 3-month 0.47 0.47 0.47 0.47
Banker’s acceptances (ask price) Commercial paper BANK RATES
1-month 1.20 1.19 1.22 1.19 1-month 0.14 0.13 0.15 0.17 Canada United States
3-month 1.23 1.22 1.29 1.11 3-month 0.21 0.20 0.20 0.19 Bank of Canada 1.25 Discount 0.75
6-month 1.32 1.32 1.32 1.38 6-month 0.36 0.33 0.32 0.31 Overnight Money 0.80 Prime 3.25
Market Financing
3-mth forward rate agreement 3-mth forward rate agreement Prime 3.00 Federal Funds 0.16
3-month 1.22 1.26 1.27 1.41 3-month 0.52 0.52 053 0.47 Call Loan Average 1.00
6-month 1.22 1.27 1.29 1.49 6-month 0.58 0.58 0.59 0.49 Supplied by Thomson Reuters. Indicative late afternoon rates. 9-month 1.26 1.31 1.31 1.56 9-month 0.60 0.60 0.61 0.49
Source: Th e National Post, FP Investing, May 30, 2012, Used with permission. For current market quotations visit financialpost.com/markets/data/money-yields- can_us.html
DEFAULT RISK Default risk refers to the probability that interest and principal will not be paid in the promised amounts on the due dates (or not paid at all). In Chapter 7, we observed that various financial reporting agencies, such as DBRS and Standard and Poor’s (S&P), compile and publish ratings of various corporate and public securities. These ratings are connected to default risk. Of course, some securities have negligible default risk, such as Canada Treasury bills. Given the purposes of investing idle corporate cash, firms typically avoid investing in marketable secur- ities with significant default risk.
Small variations in default risk are refl ected in the rates in Figure 19.6. For example, consider the rates on two alternative 90-day (three-month) Canadian investments on May 30 2012. Since the maturities are the same, they diff er only in default risk. In increasing order of default risk, the securities are Treasury bills (0.95 percent yield) and banker’s acceptances (1.23 percent yield). Treasury bills are backed by the credit of the Government of Canada. Banker’s acceptances are generally a slightly less risky variation on commercial paper, as they are guaranteed by a chartered bank as well as by the issuing corporation.
566 Part 7: Short-Term Financial Planning and Management
19Ross_Chapter19_3rd.indd 56619Ross_Chapter19_3rd.indd 566 12-11-13 16:4012-11-13 16:40
MARKETABILITY Marketability refers to how easy it is to convert an asset to cash; so mar- ketability and liquidity mean much the same thing. Some money market instruments are much more marketable than others. At the top of the list are Treasury bills, which can be bought and sold very cheaply and very quickly in large amounts.
TAXES Interest earned on money market securities is subject to federal and provincial corpo- rate tax. Capital gains and dividends on common and preferred stock are taxed more lightly, but these long-term investments are subject to significant price fluctuations and most managers con- sider them too risky for the marketable securities portfolio. One exception is the strategy of divi- dend capture. Under this strategy portfolio managers purchase high-grade preferred stock or blue chip common stock just before a dividend payment. They hold the stock only long enough to receive the dividend. In this way, firms willing to tolerate price risk for a short period can ben- efit from the dividend exclusion that allows corporations to receive dividends tax free from other Canadian corporations.
Some Different Types of Money Market Securit ies Th e money market securities listed in Figure 19.6 are generally highly marketable and short-term. Th ey usually have low risk of default. Th ey are issued by the federal government (for example, Treasury bills), domestic and foreign banks (certifi cates of deposit), and business corporations (commercial paper). Of the many types, we illustrate only a few of the most common here.
Treasury bills are obligations of the federal government that mature in 1, 2, 3, 6, or 12 months. Th ey are sold at weekly auctions and traded actively over the counter by banks and investment dealers.
Commercial paper refers to short-term securities issued by fi nance companies, banks, and corporations. Typically, commercial paper is unsecured.7 Maturities range from a few weeks to 270 days. Th ere is no active secondary market in commercial paper. As a consequence, the mar- ketability is low; however, fi rms that issue commercial paper oft en repurchase it directly before maturity. Th e default risk of commercial paper depends on the fi nancial strength of the issuer. DBRS and S&P publish quality ratings for commercial paper. Th ese ratings are similar to the bond ratings we discussed in Chapter 7.
As explained earlier, banker’s acceptances are a form of corporate paper stamped by a char- tered bank that adds its guarantee of principal and interest.
Certifi cates of deposit (CDs) are short-term loans to chartered banks. Rates quoted are for CDs in excess of $100,000. Th ere are active markets in CDs of 3-month, 6-month, 9-month, and 12-month maturities, particularly in the United States.
Our brief look at money markets illustrates the challenges and opportunities for treasurers today. Securitization has produced dramatic growth in banker’s acceptances and commercial paper.
1. What are some reasons firms find themselves with idle cash?
2. What are some types of money market securities?
3. How does the design of money market securities reflect the trends of securitization, globalization, and financial engineering?
7 Commercial paper and banker’s acceptances are sources of short-term financing for their issuers. We discussed them in detail in Chapter 18.
dividend capture A strategy in which an investor purchases securities to own them on the day of record and then quickly sells them; designed to attain dividends but avoid the risk of a lengthy hold.
Concept Questions
CHAPTER 19: Cash and Liquidity Management 567
19Ross_Chapter19_3rd.indd 56719Ross_Chapter19_3rd.indd 567 12-11-13 16:4012-11-13 16:40
19.5 SUMMARY AND CONCLUSIONS
Th is chapter has described the computer-based cash management systems used by large corpora- tions in Canada and worldwide. By moving cash effi ciently and maximizing the amount available for short-term investment, the treasurer adds value to the fi rm. Our discussion made the follow- ing key points:
1. A firm holds cash to conduct transactions and to compensate banks for the various services they render.
2. The optimal amount of cash for a firm to hold depends on the opportunity cost of holding cash and the uncertainty of future cash inflows and outflows.
3. The difference between a firm’s available balance and its book balance is the firm’s net float. The float reflects the fact that some cheques have not cleared and are thus uncollected.
4. The firm can use a variety of procedures to manage the collection and disbursement of cash in such a way as to speed the collection of cash and control payments. Large firms use com- puterized cash management systems that include over-the-counter collections and lock- boxes, concentration banking, and electronic disbursements through zero-balance accounts.
5. Because of seasonal and cyclical activities, to help finance planned expenditures, or as a con- tingency reserve, firms temporarily find themselves with a cash surplus. The money market offers a variety of possible vehicles for parking this idle cash.
Key Terms adjustment costs (page 554) debit card (page 561) dividend capture (page 567) float (page 556) lockboxes (page 561) precautionary motive (page 553)
same day value (page 562) smart card (page 561) speculative motive (page 553) target cash balance (page 554) transaction motive (page 553) zero-balance account (page 563)
Chapter Review Problem and Self-Test 19.1 Float Measurement On a typical business day, a firm writes and mails cheques totalling $1,000. These cheques clear in six days on aver-
age. Simultaneously, the firm receives $1,300. The cash is available in one day on average. Calculate the disbursement float, the collection float, and the net float. How do you interpret the answer?
Answers to Self-Test Problem 19.1 The disbursement float is 6 days × $1,000 = $6,000. The collection float is 1 day × -$1,300 = -$1,300. The net float is $6,000 +
(-$1,300) = $4,700. In other words, at any given time, the firm typically has uncashed cheques outstanding of $6,000. At the same time, it has uncollected receipts of $1,300. Thus, the firm’s book balance is typically $4,700 less than its available balance, a positive $4,700 net float.
Concepts Review and Critical Thinking Questions 1. (LO3) Is it possible for a firm to have too much cash? Why
would shareholders care if a firm accumulates large amounts of cash?
2. (LO3) What options are available to a firm if it believes it has too much cash? How about too little?
3. (LO3) Are shareholders and creditors likely to agree on how much cash a firm should keep on hand?
4. (LO3) In the discussion at the beginning of this chapter, do you think the motivations for holding cash are reasonable?
5. (LO3) What is the difference between cash management and liquidity management?
6. (LO3) Why is a preferred stock with a dividend tied to short- term interest rates an attractive short-term investment for corporations with excess cash?
7. (LO2) Which would a firm prefer: a net collection float or a net disbursement float? Why?
8. (LO3) For each of the short-term marketable securities given here, provide an example of the potential disadvantages the investment has for meeting a corporation’s cash management goals.
a. Treasury bills b. Ordinary preferred stock
568 Part 7: Short-Term Financial Planning and Management
19Ross_Chapter19_3rd.indd 56819Ross_Chapter19_3rd.indd 568 12-11-13 16:4012-11-13 16:40
c. Certificates of deposit (CDs) d. Commercial paper e. 10-year Canada bonds 9. (LO3) It is sometimes argued that excess cash held by a firm
can aggravate agency problems (discussed in Chapter 1) and, more generally, reduce incentives for shareholder wealth maximization. How would you frame the issue here?
10. (LO3) One option a firm usually has with any excess cash is to pay its suppliers more quickly. What are the advantages and disadvantages of this use of excess cash?
11. (LO3) Another option usually available is to reduce the firm’s outstanding debt. What are the advantages and disadvantages of this use of excess cash?
Questions and Problems 1. Calculating Float (LO1) In a typical month, the Saint John Corporation receives 80 cheques totalling $139,000. These are
delayed four days on average. What is the average daily float? Assume 30 days in a month. 2. Calculating Net Float (LO1) Each business day, on average, a company writes cheques totalling $12,000 to pay its suppliers.
The usual clearing time for the cheques is four days. Meanwhile, the company is receiving payments from its customers each day, in the form of cheques, totalling $23,000. The cash from the payments is available to the firm after two days.
a. Calculate the company’s disbursement float, collection float, and net float. b. How would your answer to part (a) change if the collected funds were available in one day instead of two?
3. Costs of Float (LO1) Lancaster Wine Inc. receives an average of $17,000 in cheques per day. The delay in clearing is typically three days. The current interest rate is .017 percent per day.
a. What is the company’s collection float? b. What is the most Lancaster should be willing to pay today to eliminate its float entirely? c. What is the highest daily fee the company should be willing to pay to eliminate its float entirely?
4. Float and Weighted Average Delay (LO1) Your neighbour goes to the post office once a month and picks up two cheques, one for $14,000 and one for $5,000. The larger cheque takes four days to clear after it is deposited; the smaller one takes 3 days. Assume 30 days in a month.
a. What is the total float for the month? b. What is the average daily float? c. What are the average daily receipts and weighted average delay?
5. NPV and Collection Time (LO2) Your firm has an average receipt size of $125. A bank has approached you concerning a lockbox service that will decrease your total collection time by two days. You typically receive 6,400 cheques per day. The daily interest rate is .016 percent. If the bank charges a fee of $175 per day, should the lockbox project be accepted? What would the net annual savings be if the service were adopted?
6. Using Weighted Average Delay (LO1) A mail-order firm processes 5,300 cheques per month. Of these, 60 percent are for $43 and 40 percent are for $75. The $43 cheques are delayed two days on average; the $75 cheques are delayed three days on average. Assume 30 days in a month.
a. What is the average daily collection float? How do you interpret your answer? b. What is the weighted average delay? Use the result to calculate the average daily float. c. How much should the firm be willing to pay to eliminate the float? d. If the interest rate is 7 percent per year, calculate the daily cost of the float. Assume 365 days per year. e. How much should the firm be willing to pay to reduce the weighted average float to 1.5 days?
7. Value of Lockboxes (LO2) Rothesay Submarine Manufacturing is investigating a lockbox system to reduce its collection time. It has determined the following:
Average number of payments per day 385 Average value of payment $975 Variable lockbox fee (per transaction) $.35 Daily interest rate on money market securities .068%
The total collection time will be reduced by three days if the lockbox system is adopted. a. What is the PV of adopting the system? b. What is the NPV of adopting the system? c. What is the net cash flow per day from adopting? Per cheque?
8. Lockboxes and Collections (LO2) It takes Quispamsis Modular Homes Inc. about six days to receive and deposit cheques from customers. Quispamsis’s management is considering a lockbox system to reduce the firm’s collection times. It is expected that the lockbox system will reduce receipt and deposit times to three days total. Average daily collections are $130,000, and the required rate of return is 9 percent per year. Assume 365 days per year.
a. What is the reduction in outstanding cash balances as a result of implementing the lockbox system? b. What is the dollar return that could be earned on these savings?
Basic (Questions
1–10)
CHAPTER 19: Cash and Liquidity Management 569
19Ross_Chapter19_3rd.indd 56919Ross_Chapter19_3rd.indd 569 12-11-13 16:4012-11-13 16:40
c. What is the maximum monthly charge Quispamsis should pay for this lockbox system if the payment is due at the end of the month? What if the payment is due at the beginning of the month?
9. Value of Delay (LO2) Loch Alva Inc. disburses cheques every two weeks that average $86,000 and take seven days to clear. How much interest can the company earn annually if it delays transfer of funds from an interest-bearing account that pays .011 percent per day for these seven days? Ignore the effects of compounding interest.
10. NPV and Reducing Float (LO2) Lepreau Books Corporation has an agreement with Hampton Bank whereby the bank handles $5 million in collections a day and requires a $350,000 compensating balance. Lepreau Books is contemplating cancelling the agreement and dividing its eastern region so that two other banks will handle its business. Banks A and B will each handle $2.5 million of collections a day, and each requires a compensating balance of $200,000. Lepreau Books’ financial management expects that collections will be accelerated by one day if the eastern region is divided. Should the company proceed with the new system? What will be the annual net savings? Assume that the T-bill rate is 2.5 percent annually.
11. Lockboxes and Collection Time (LO2) Norton Treehouses Inc., a Nova Scotia–based company, has determined that a majority of its customers are located in the Quebec area. It therefore is considering using a lockbox system offered by a bank located in Montreal. The bank has estimated that use of the system will reduce collection time by 1.5 days. Based on the following information, should the lockbox system be adopted?
Average number of payments per day 800 Average value of payment $750 Variable lockbox fee (per transaction) $.15 Annual interest rate on money market securities 5.5%
How would your answer change if there were a fixed charge of $6,000 per year in addition to the variable charge? Assume 365 days per year.
12. Calculating Transactions Required (LO2) Sussex Inc., a large fertilizer distributor based in Nova Scotia, is planning to use a lockbox system to speed up collections from its customers located on the West Coast. A Vancouver-area bank will provide this service for an annual fee of $10,000 plus 10 cents per transaction. The estimated reduction in collection and processing time is one day. If the average customer payment in this region is $5,700, how many customers each day, on average, are needed to make the system profitable for Sussex? Treasury bills are currently yielding 5 percent per year and assume 365 days per year.
Cash Management at Donaghy Corporation
Donaghy Corporation was founded 20 years ago by its presi- dent, Jack Donaghy. The company originally began as a mail- order company, but has grown rapidly in recent years, in large part due to its website. Because of the wide geographical dis- persion of the company’s customers, it currently employs a lockbox system with collection centres in Vancouver, Calgary, Toronto, and Montreal. Liz Lemon, the company’s treasurer, has been examining the current cash collection policies. On average, each lockbox centre handles $175,000 in payments each day. The compa- ny’s current policy is to invest these payments in short-term marketable securities daily at the collection centre banks. Ev- ery two weeks, the investment accounts are swept; the pro- ceeds are wire-transferred to Donaghy’s headquarters in Winnipeg to meet the company’s payroll. The investment ac- counts each earn .012 percent per day, and the wire transfers cost .20 percent of the amount transferred. Liz has been approached by the Royal Canadian Bank, about the possibility of setting up a concentration banking
system for Donaghy Corp. Royal Canadian will accept each of the lockbox centre’s daily payments via automated clearing- house (ACH) transfers in lieu of wire transfers. The ACH-trans- ferred funds will not be available for use for one day. Once cleared, the funds will be deposited in a short-term account, which will also yield .012 percent per day. Each ACH transfer will cost $150. Jack has asked Liz to determine which cash management system will be the best for the company. As her assistant, Liz has asked you to answer the following questions:
Questions
1. What is Donaghy Corporation’s total net cash flow avail- able from the current lockbox system to meet payroll?
2. Under the terms outlined by the bank should the com- pany proceed with the concentration banking system?
3. What cost of ACH transfers would make the company in- different between the two systems?
MINI CASE
Intermediate (Questions
11–12)
570 Part 7: Short-Term Financial Planning and Management
19Ross_Chapter19_3rd.indd 57019Ross_Chapter19_3rd.indd 570 12-11-13 16:4012-11-13 16:40
Internet Application Questions 1. Cash management today involves integrating various functions such as invoicing and electronic deposits. For many mid-sized
businesses, such tasks end up consuming valuable scarce resources if done in-house. SAP Canada (sap.com/canada/index.epx) provides consulting and implementation services in all cash and liquidity management. Search SAP’s website and discuss what kinds of companies will find SAP Canada’s services particularly useful.
2. ITG Canada (itg.com/our-locations/canada) provides equity trading research for institutions and brokers. Click on their web- site and explain what “soft dollar” arrangements are.
3. CIBC World Markets sells commercial paper in Canada and the U.S. to interested institutional investors. Go to the CIBC World Markets website at research.cibcwm.com and find out current information about the company’s commercial paper. What is the credit rating for the paper in Canada and the U.S.? What firms provided the ratings? What is the minimum size CIBC World Markets will sell in Canada and the U.S.? For what duration?
4. What are the highest and lowest historical interest rates for commercial paper in Canada? Go to the Bank of Canada website at bankofcanada.ca and follow the link “Rates and Statistics,” then “Canadian Interest Rates” and “Selected Historical Interest Rates.” Find the highest and lowest interest rates for one-month and three-month prime corporate paper. What are they and when did they occur? What implications do these rates have for short-term financial planning and liquidity management?
CHAPTER 19: Cash and Liquidity Management 571
19Ross_Chapter19_3rd.indd 57119Ross_Chapter19_3rd.indd 571 12-11-13 16:4012-11-13 16:40
Most fi rms hold inventories to ensure that they have fi nished goods to meet sales demand and raw materials and work in process when they are needed in production. Deciding how much to hold is important to managers in production and marketing. Because inventories represent a sig- nifi cant investment with carrying costs, the fi nancial manager is also involved in the decision. Our discussion of inventory looks at a traditional approach that focuses on the trade-off between carrying costs and shortage costs. We also present just-in-time inventory that off ers an innovative solution.
Th is chapter also covers credit management. When a fi rm sells goods and services, it can demand cash on or before the delivery date, or it can extend credit to customers and allow some delay in payment. Th e next few sections provide an idea of what is involved in the fi rm’s decision to grant credit to its customers. Granting credit is investing in a customer, an investment tied to the sale of a product or service.
Why do fi rms grant credit? Not all do, but the practice is extremely common. Th e obvious reason is that off ering credit is a way of stimulating sales. Th e costs associated with granting credit are not trivial: First, there is the chance that the customer will not pay. Second, the fi rm has to bear the costs of carrying the receivables. Th e credit policy decision thus involves a trade-off between the benefi ts of increased sales and the costs of granting credit. We examine this trade-off in the next sections.
20.1 Credit and Receivables
From an accounting perspective, when credit is granted, an account receivable is created. Th ese receivables include credit to other fi rms, called trade credit, and credit granted to consumers, called consumer credit. About 10 percent of all the assets of Canadian industrial fi rms are in the
CREDIT AND INVENTORY MANAGEMENT
C H A P T E R 2 0
I n May 2012, Toyota Canada Inc. posted an increase in sales of 65% over May 2011—a strong recovery from weak demand due to consumer uncer-
tainty in 2011. In order to meet increased demand,
Toyota Canada had to overcome supply and inven-
tory problems arising from the tsunami in Japan and
flooding in Thailand. This shows the importance of
inventory management for companies such as Toy-
ota Canada Inc. Proper management of inventory
can have a significant impact on the profitability of a
company and the value investors place on it. In this
chapter, we discuss, among other things, how com-
panies arrive at an optimal inventory level.
Learning Object ives
After studying this chapter, you should understand:
LO1 How firms manage their receivables and the basic components of a firm’s credit policies.
LO2 The distinct elements of the terms of sale.
LO3 The factors that influence a firm’s decision to grant credit.
LO4 How to evaluate credit policy.
LO5 The types of inventory and inventory management systems used by firms.
LO6 How to determine the costs of carrying inventory and the optimal inventory level.
C ou
rt es
y of
T oy
ot a
20Ross_Chapter20_4th.indd 57220Ross_Chapter20_4th.indd 572 12-11-27 12:1312-11-27 12:13
form of accounts receivable. For retail fi rms, the fi gure is much higher. So receivables obviously represent a major investment of fi nancial resources by Canadian businesses.
Furthermore, trade credit is a very important source of fi nancing for corporations. Looking back at Table 18.2 in Chapter 18, Canadian Tire fi nanced about 39.5 percent of total current liabil- ities through trade and other payable, more than any other single source of short-term fi nancing. However we look at it, receivables and receivables management are key aspects of a fi rm’s short- term fi nancial policy.
Components of Credit Policy If a fi rm decides to grant credit to its customers, it must establish procedures for extending credit and collecting. In particular, the fi rm has to deal with the following components of credit policy:
1. Terms of sale. The terms of sale establish how the firm proposes to sell its goods and ser- vices. A basic distinction is whether the firm requires cash or extends credit. If the firm does grant credit to a customer, the terms of sale specify (perhaps implicitly) the credit period, the cash discount and discount period, and the type of credit instrument.
2. Credit analysis. In granting credit, a firm determines how much effort to expend trying to distinguish between customers who pay and customers who do not pay. Firms use a number of devices and procedures to determine the probability that customers will not pay, and put together, these are called credit analysis.
3. Collection policy. After credit has been granted, the firm has the potential problem of col- lecting the cash when it becomes due, for which it must establish a collection policy.
In the next several sections, we discuss these components of credit policy that collectively make up the decision to grant credit.
The Cash Flows from Granting Credit In a previous chapter, we described the accounts receivable period as the time it takes to collect on a sale. Several events occur during that period. Th ese are the cash fl ows associated with granting credit, and they can be illustrated with a traditional cash fl ow diagram:
Credit sale is made
Customer mails
cheque
Firm deposits cheque in
bank
Bank credits firm's
account
Cash collection
Accounts receivable
Time
The cash flows of granting credit
As our time line indicates, the typical sequence of events when a fi rm grants credit is (1) the credit sale is made, (2) the customer sends a cheque to the fi rm, (3) the fi rm deposits the cheque, and (4) the fi rm’s account is credited for the amount of the cheque.
Based on our discussion in the previous chapter, it is apparent that one of the factors infl uenc- ing the receivables period is fl oat. Th us, one way to reduce the receivables period is to speed up cheque mailing, processing, and clearing. Because we cover this subject elsewhere, we ignore fl oat in our subsequent discussion and focus on what is likely to be the major determinant of the receivables period, credit policy. We come back to fl oat at the end when we look at a computerized implementation of credit policy.
The Investment in Receivables Th e investment in accounts receivable for any fi rm depends on the amount of credit sales and the average collection period. For example, if a fi rm’s average collection period (ACP) is 30 days, at any given time there are 30 days’ worth of sales outstanding. If sales run $1,000 per day, the fi rm’s accounts receivable are equal to 30 days × $1,000 per day = $30,000.
terms of sale Conditions on which a firm sells its goods and services for cash or credit.
credit analysis The process of determining the probability that customers will or will not pay.
collection policy Procedures followed by a firm in collecting accounts receivable.
CHAPTER 20: Credit and Inventory Management 573
20Ross_Chapter20_4th.indd 57320Ross_Chapter20_4th.indd 573 12-11-27 12:1312-11-27 12:13
As our example illustrates, a fi rm’s receivables generally are equal to its average daily sales mul- tiplied by its average collection period (ACP):
Accounts receivable = Average daily sales × ACP [20.1]
Th us, a fi rm’s investment in accounts receivable depends on factors that infl uence credit sales and collections.
We have seen the average collection period in various places, including Chapters 3 and 18. Recall that we use the terms days’ sales in receivables, receivables period, and average collection period interchangeably to refer to the length of time it takes for the fi rm to collect on a sale.
1. What are the basic components of credit policy?
2. What are the basic components of the terms of sale if a firm chooses to sell on credit?
20.2 Terms of the Sale
As we just described, the terms of a sale are made up of three distinct elements:
1. The period for which credit is granted (the credit period). 2. The cash discount and the discount period. 3. The type of credit instrument.
Within a given industry, the terms of sales are usually fairly standard, but across industries these terms vary quite a bit. In many cases, the terms of sale are remarkably archaic and literally date to previous centuries. Organized systems of trade credit that resemble current practice can be eas- ily traced to the great fairs of medieval Europe, and they almost surely existed long before then.
Why Trade Credit Exists Set aside the venerable history of trade credit for a moment and ask yourself why it should exist.1 Aft er all, it is quite easy to imagine that all sales could be for cash. From the fi rm’s viewpoint, this would get rid of receivables carrying costs and collection costs. Bad debts would be zero (assum- ing the fi rm was careful to accept no counterfeit money).
Imagine this cash-only economy in the context of perfectly competitive product and fi nan- cial markets. Competition would force companies to lower their prices to pass the savings from immediate collections on to customers. Any company that chose to grant credit to its customers would have to raise its prices accordingly to survive. A purchaser who needed fi nancing over the operating cycle could borrow from a bank or the money market. In this perfect market environ- ment, it would make no diff erence to the seller or the buyer whether credit were granted.
In practice, fi rms spend signifi cant resources setting credit policy and managing its implemen- tation. So deviations from perfect markets—market imperfections—must explain why trade credit exists. We look briefl y at several imperfections and how trade credit helps to overcome them.
In practice, both the buyer and seller have imperfect information. Buyers lack perfect infor- mation on the quality of the product. For this reason, the buyer may prefer credit terms that give time to return the product if it is defective or unsuitable. When the seller off ers credit, it signals to potential customers that the product is of high quality and likely to provide satisfaction.2
In addition, in practice, any fi rm that grants credit or a loan lacks perfect information on the creditworthiness of the borrower. Although it is costly for a bank or other third-party lender to acquire this information, a seller that has been granting trade credit to a purchaser likely has it
1 Our discussion draws on N. C. Hill and W. L. Sartoris, Short-Term Financial Management, 3rd ed. (Prentice Hall Col- lege Div., 1995), chap. 14. 2 This use of signalling is very similar to dividend signalling discussed in Chapter 17. There corporations signalled the quality of projected cash flows by maintaining dividends even when earnings were down.
Concept Questions
574 Part 7: Short-Term Financial Planning and Management
20Ross_Chapter20_4th.indd 57420Ross_Chapter20_4th.indd 574 12-11-27 12:1312-11-27 12:13
already. Further, the seller may have superior information on the resale value of the product serv- ing as collateral. Th ese information advantages may allow the seller to off er more attractive, more fl exible credit terms and be more liberal in authorizing credit.3
Finally, perfect markets have zero transaction costs but, in reality, it is costly to set up a bank borrowing facility or to borrow in money markets. We discussed some of the costs in Chapter 18. It may be cheaper to utilize credit from the seller.
Th ese reasons go a long way toward explaining the popularity of trade credit. Whatever the reasons, setting credit policy involves major decisions for the fi rm.
The Basic Form Th e easiest way to understand the terms of sale is to consider an example. For bulk candy, terms of 2/10, net 60 are common. Th is means that customers have 60 days from the invoice date to pay the full amount. However, if payment is made within 10 days, a 2 percent cash discount can be taken.
Consider a buyer who places an order for $1,000, and assume that the terms of the sale are 2/10, net 60. Th e buyer has the option of paying $1,000 × (1 - .02) = $980 in 10 days, or paying the full $1,000 in 60 days.
When the terms are stated as just net 30, then the customer has 30 days from the invoice date to pay the entire $1,000, and no discount is off ered for early payment.
The Credit Period Th e credit period is the basic length of time for which credit is granted. Th e credit period varies widely from industry to industry, but it is almost always between 30 and 120 days. When a cash discount is off ered, the credit period has two components: the net credit period and the cash dis- count period. In most cases, the credit period and the cash discount conform to industry practice. Firms do not oft en deviate from the industry norm. For this reason, we focus on examples at the industry level.
Th e net credit period is the length of time the customer has to pay. Th e cash discount period, as the name suggests, is the time during which the discount is available. With 2/10, net 30, for example, the net credit period is 30 days and the cash discount period is 10 days.
THE INVOICE DATE The invoice date is the beginning of the credit period. An invoice is a written account of merchandise shipped to the buyer. For individual items, by convention, the invoice date is usually the shipping date or the billing date, not the date the buyer receives the goods or the bill.
Many other arrangements exist. For example, the terms of sale might be ROG, for “receipt of goods.” In this case, the credit starts when the customer receives the order. Th is might be used when the customer is in a remote location.
End-of-month (EOM) terms are fairly common. With EOM dating, all sales made during a particular month are assumed to be made at the end of that month. Th is is useful when a buyer makes purchases throughout the month, but the seller bills only once a month.
For example, terms of 2/10th EOM tell the buyer to take a 2 percent discount if payment is made by the 10th of the month, otherwise the full amount is due aft er that. Confusingly, the end of the month is sometimes taken to be the 25th day of the month. MOM, for middle of month, is another variation.
Seasonal dating is sometimes used to encourage sales of seasonal products during the off - season. A product that is sold primarily in the spring, such as bicycles or sporting goods, can be shipped in January with credit terms of 2/10, net 30. However, the invoice might be dated May 1, so the credit period actually begins at that time. Th is practice encourages buyers to order early.
LENGTH OF THE CREDIT PERIOD A number of factors influence the length of the credit period. One of the most important is the buyer’s inventory period and operating cycle. All other things being equal, the shorter these are, the shorter the credit period normally is.
3 B. Biais and C. Gollier, “Trade Credit and Credit Rationing,” Review of Financial Studies, January 1997, Volume 10, pp. 903–937.
credit period The length of time that credit is granted.
invoice Bill for goods or services provided by the seller to the purchaser.
CHAPTER 20: Credit and Inventory Management 575
20Ross_Chapter20_4th.indd 57520Ross_Chapter20_4th.indd 575 12-11-27 12:1312-11-27 12:13
Based on our discussion in Chapter 18, the operating cycle has two components: the inven- tory period and the receivables period. Th e inventory period is the time it takes the buyer to acquire inventory (from us), process it, and sell it. Th e receivables period is the time it then takes the buyer to collect on the sale. Note that the credit period that we off er is eff ectively the buyer’s payables period.
By extending credit, we fi nance a portion of our buyer’s operating cycle and thereby shorten the cash cycle. When our credit period exceeds the buyer’s inventory period, we are fi nancing not only the buyer’s inventory purchases but also part of the buyer’s receivables.
Furthermore, if our credit period exceeds our buyer’s operating cycle, we are eff ectively pro- viding fi nancing for aspects of our customer’s business beyond the immediate purchase and sale of our merchandise. Th e reason is that the buyer has a loan from us even aft er the merchandise is resold, and the buyer can use that credit for other purposes. For this reason, the length of the buyer’s operating cycle is oft en cited as an appropriate upper limit to the credit period.
A number of other factors infl uence the credit period. Many of these also infl uence our cus- tomers’ operating cycles; so, once again, these are related subjects. Among the most important are:
1. Perishability and collateral value. Perishable items have relatively rapid turnover and rela- tively low collateral value. Credit periods are thus shorter for such goods. For example, a food wholesaler selling fresh fruit and produce might use net seven terms. Alternatively, jewellery might be sold for 5/30, net four months.
2. Consumer demand. Products that are well established generally have more rapid turnover. Newer or slow-moving products often have longer credit periods to entice buyers. Also, as we have seen, sellers may choose to extend much longer credit periods for off-season sales (when customer demand is low).
3. Cost, profitability, and standardization. Relatively inexpensive goods tend to have shorter credit periods. The same is true for relatively standardized goods and raw materials. These all tend to have lower markups and higher turnover rates, both of which lead to shorter credit periods. There are exceptions. Auto dealers, for example, generally pay for cars as they are received.
4. Credit risk. The greater the credit risk of the buyer, the shorter the credit period is likely to be (assuming that credit is granted at all).
5. The size of the account. If the account is small, the credit period is shorter. Small accounts are more costly to manage, and the customers are less important.
6. Competition. When the seller is in a highly competitive market, longer credit periods may be offered as a way of attracting customers.
7. Customer type. A single seller might offer different credit terms to different buyers. A food wholesaler, for example, might supply grocers, bakeries, and restaurants. Each group would probably have different credit terms. More generally, sellers often have both wholesale and retail customers, and they frequently quote different terms to each.
Cash Discounts As we have seen, cash discounts are oft en part of the terms of sale. Th e practice of granting discounts for cash purposes goes back more than 100 years and is widespread today. One reason discounts are off ered is to speed the collection of receivables. Th is reduces the amount of credit being off ered, and the fi rm must trade this off against the cost of the discount.
Notice that when a cash discount is off ered, the credit is essentially free during the discount period. Th e buyer only pays for the credit aft er the discount expires. With 2/10, net 30, a rational buyer either pays in 10 days to make the greatest possible use of the free credit or pays in 30 days to get the longest possible use of the money in exchange for giving up the discount. So, by giving up the discount, the buyer eff ectively gets 30 - 10 = 20 days’ credit.
Another reason for cash discounts is that they are a legal way of charging higher prices to cus- tomers that have had credit extended to them. In both Canada and the United States, the law pro- hibits discrimination in charging diff erent prices to diff erent buyers for the same product. In this sense, cash discounts are a convenient way of separately pricing the credit granted to customers.
cash discount A discount given for a cash purchase.
576 Part 7: Short-Term Financial Planning and Management
20Ross_Chapter20_4th.indd 57620Ross_Chapter20_4th.indd 576 12-11-27 12:1312-11-27 12:13
ELECTRONIC CREDIT TERMS In Chapter 19, we showed how electronic disburse- ments saved time and money. To induce buyers to pay electronically or to give discounts to large customers, some firms offer discounts of around 1 percent for electronic payment one day after the goods are delivered. If electronic disbursement is coupled with electronic data interchange, the buyer and seller negotiate the discount and the date for payment.
COST OF THE CREDIT In our examples, it might seem that the discounts are rather small. With 2/10, net 30, for example, early payment gets the buyer only a 2 percent discount. Does this provide a significant incentive for early payment? The answer is yes because the implicit interest rate is extremely high.
To see why the discount is important, we will calculate the cost to the buyer of not paying early. To do this, we will fi nd the interest rate the buyer is eff ectively paying for the trade credit. Suppose the order is for $1,000. Th e buyer can pay $980 in 10 days or wait another 20 days and pay $1,000. It’s obvious that the buyer is eff ectively borrowing $980 for 20 days and that the buyer pays $20 in interest on the “loan.” What’s the interest rate?
Th is interest is ordinary discount interest, which we discussed in Chapter 5. With $20 in inter- est on $980 borrowed, the rate is $20/$980 = 2.0408%. Th is is relatively low, but remember that this is the rate per 20-day period. Th ere are 365/20 = 18.25 such periods in a year, so, by not tak- ing the discount, the buyer is paying an eff ective annual rate (EAR) of:
EAR = (1.020408)18.25 - 1 = 44.6%
From the buyer’s point of view, this is an expensive source of fi nancing! Given that the interest rate is so high here, it is unlikely that the seller benefi ts from early pay-
ment. Ignoring the possibility of default by the buyer, the decision by a customer to forgo the discount almost surely works to the seller’s advantage.
TRADE DISCOUNTS In some circumstances, the discount is not really an incentive for early payment but is instead a trade discount, a discount routinely given to some type of buyer. For example, with our 2/10th, EOM terms, the buyer takes a 2 percent discount if the invoice is paid by the 10th, but the bill is considered due on the 10th, and overdue after that. Thus, the credit period and the discount period are effectively the same, and there is no reward for paying before the due date.
EXAMPLE 20.1: What’s the Rate?
Ordinary tiles are often sold 3/30, net 60. What effective annual rate does a buyer pay by not taking the discount? What would the APR be if one were quoted?
Here we have 3 percent discount interest on 60 - 30 = 30 days’ credit. The rate per 30 days is .03/.97 = 3.093%. There are 365/30 = 12.17 such periods in a year, so the effective annual rate is:
EAR = (1.03093)12.17 - 1 = 44.9%
The APR, as always, would be calculated by multiplying the rate per period by the number of periods:
APR = .03093 × 12.17 = 37.6%
An interest rate calculated like this APR is often quoted as the cost of the trade credit, and, as this example illustrates, can seriously understate the true cost.
THE CASH DISCOUNT AND THE ACP To the extent that a cash discount encourages customers to pay early, it shortens the receivables period and, all other things being equal, reduces the firm’s investment in receivables.
For example, suppose a fi rm currently has terms of net 30 and an ACP of 30 days. If it off ers terms of 2/10, net 30, perhaps 50 percent of its customers (in terms of volume of purchases) would pay in 10 days. Th e remaining customers would still take an average of 30 days to pay. What would the new average collection period (ACP) be? If the fi rm’s annual sales are $15 million (before dis- counts), what happens to the investment in receivables?
CHAPTER 20: Credit and Inventory Management 577
20Ross_Chapter20_4th.indd 57720Ross_Chapter20_4th.indd 577 12-11-27 12:1312-11-27 12:13
If half of the customers take 10 days to pay and half take 30, the new average collection period is:
New ACP = .50 × 10 days + .50 × 30 days = 20 days
Th e ACP thus falls from 30 days to 20 days. Average daily sales are $15 million/365 = $41,096 per day. Receivables thus fall by $41,096 × 10 = $410,960.
Credit Instruments Th e credit instrument is the basic evidence of indebtedness. Most trade credit is off ered on open account. Th is means the only formal instrument of credit is the invoice that is sent with the ship- ment of goods and that the customer signs as evidence the goods have been received. Aft erward, the fi rm and its customers record the exchange on their books of account.
At times, the fi rm may require the customer to sign a promissory note. Th is is a basic IOU and might be used when the order is large, when there is no cash discount involved, and when the fi rm anticipates a problem in collections. Promissory notes are not common, but they can eliminate controversies later about the existence of debt.
One problem with promissory notes is that they are signed aft er delivery of the goods. To obtain a credit commitment from a customer before the goods are delivered, a fi rm arranges a commercial draft . Typically, the fi rm draws up a commercial draft calling for the customer to pay a specifi c amount by a specifi ed date. Th e draft is then sent to the customer’s bank with the ship- ping invoices.
When immediate payment on the draft is required, it is called a sight draft . If immediate pay- ment is not required, the draft is a time draft . When the draft is presented and the buyer accepts it—meaning the buyer promises to pay it in the future—it is called a trade acceptance and is sent back to the selling fi rm. Th e seller can keep the acceptance, in eff ect providing trade credit fi nanc- ing to the buyer, or sell it to someone else. Th e third party buying the acceptance is a money mar- ket investor. Th is investor is now fi nancing the buyer and the seller receives immediate payment less discount interest.
To make the trade acceptance more salable, a chartered bank may stamp it, meaning the bank is guaranteeing payment. Th en the draft becomes a bankers acceptance. Th is arrangement is com- mon in international trade and widely used domestically. Bankers acceptances are actively traded in the money market as we discussed in Chapter 19.
A fi rm can also use a conditional sales contract as a credit instrument. Th is is an arrangement where the fi rm retains legal ownership of the goods until the customer has completed payment. Conditional sales contracts usually are paid in installments and have an interest cost built into them.
1. What considerations enter into the determination of the terms of sale?
2. Explain what terms of “3/45, net 90” mean. What is the implicit interest rate?
20.3 Analyzing Credit Policy
In this section, we take a closer look at the factors that infl uence the decision to grant credit. Granting credit makes sense only if the NPV from doing so is positive. We thus need to look at the NPV of the decision to grant credit.
Credit Policy Effects In evaluating credit policy, there are fi ve basic factors to consider:
1. Revenue effects. When the firm grants credit, there is a delay in revenue collections as some customers take advantage of the credit offered and pay later. However, the firm may be able to charge a higher price if it grants credit and it may be able to increase the quantity sold. Total revenues may thus increase.
credit instrument The evidence of indebtedness.
Concept Questions
578 Part 7: Short-Term Financial Planning and Management
20Ross_Chapter20_4th.indd 57820Ross_Chapter20_4th.indd 578 12-11-27 12:1312-11-27 12:13
2. Cost effects. Although the firm may experience delayed revenues if it grants credit, it still in- curs the costs of sales immediately. Whether or not the firm sells for cash or credit, it still has to acquire or produce the merchandise (and pay for it).
3. The cost of debt. When the firm grants credit, it must arrange to finance the resulting receiv- ables. As a result, the firm’s cost of short-term borrowing is a factor in the decision to grant credit.4
4. The probability of nonpayment. If the firm grants credit, some percentage of the credit buy- ers do not pay. This can’t happen, of course, if the firm sells for cash.
5. The cash discount. When the firm offers a cash discount as part of its credit terms, some cus- tomers choose to pay early to take advantage of the discount.
Evaluating a Proposed Credit Policy To illustrate how credit policy can be analyzed, we start with a relatively simple case. Locust Soft ware has been in existence for two years; it is one of several successful fi rms that develop computer programs. Currently, Locust sells for cash only.
Locust is evaluating a request from some major customers to change its current policy to net 30 days. To analyze this proposal, we defi ne the following:
P = Price per unit v = Variable cost per unit Q = Current quantity sold per month Q′ = Quantity sold under new policy R = Monthly required return
For now, we ignore discounts and the possibility of default. Also, we ignore taxes because they don’t aff ect our conclusions.
NPV OF SWITCHING POLICIES To illustrate the NPV of switching credit policies, suppose we had the following for Locust:
P = $49 v = $20 Q = 100 Q′ = 110
If the required return is 2 percent per month, should Locust make the switch? Currently, Locust has monthly sales of P × Q = $4,900. Variable costs each month are v × Q
= $2,000, so the monthly cash fl ow from this activity is:
Cash flow (old policy) = (P - v)Q [20.2] = ($49 - 20) × 100 = $2,900
Th is is not the total cash fl ow for Locust, of course, but it is all that we need to look at because fi xed costs and other components of cash fl ow are the same whether or not the switch is made. If Locust does switch to net 30 days on sales, the quantity sold rises to Q′ = 110. Monthly revenues increase to P × Q′, and costs are v × Q′. Th e monthly cash fl ow under the new policy is thus:
Cash flow (new policy) = (P - v)Q′ [20.3] = ($49 - 20) × 110 = $3,190
Going back to Chapter 10, the relevant incremental cash fl ow is the diff erence between the new and old cash fl ows:
4 The cost of short-term debt is not necessarily the required return on receivables, although it is commonly assumed to be. As always, the required return on an investment depends on the risk of the investment, not the source of the financ- ing. The buyer’s cost of short-term debt is closer in spirit to the correct rate. We maintain the implicit assumption that the seller and the buyer have the same short-term debt cost. In any case, the time periods in credit decisions are rela- tively short, so a relatively small error in the discount rate does not have a large effect on our estimated NPV.
CHAPTER 20: Credit and Inventory Management 579
20Ross_Chapter20_4th.indd 57920Ross_Chapter20_4th.indd 579 12-11-27 12:1312-11-27 12:13
Incremental cash inflow = (P - v)(Q′ - Q) = ($49 - 20) × (110 - 100) = $290
Th is says the benefi t each month of changing policies is equal to the gross profi t per unit sold (P - v) = $29, multiplied by the increase in sales (Q′ - Q) = 10. Th e present value of the future incremental cash fl ows is thus:
PV = [(P - v)(Q′ - Q)]/R [20.4] For Locust, this present value works out to be:
PV = ($29 × 10)/.02 = $14,500
Notice that we have treated the monthly cash fl ow as a perpetuity since the same benefi t would be realized each month forever.
Now that we know the benefi t of switching, what’s the cost? Th ere are two components to con- sider: First, since the quantity sold rises from Q to Q′, Locust has to produce Q′ - Q more units today at a cost of v(Q′ - Q) = $20 × (110 - 100) = $200. Second, the sales that would have been collected this month under the current policy (P × Q = $4,900) are not collected. Th is happens because the sales made this month won’t be collected until 30 days later under the new policy. Th e cost of the switch is the sum of these two components:
Cost of switching = PQ + v(Q′ - Q), [20.5] where PQ = present value in perpetuity of a one-month delay in receiving the monthly revenue of PQ.
For Locust, this cost would be $4,900 + 200 = $5,100. Putting it all together, the NPV of the switch is:
NPV of switching = -[PQ + v(Q′ - Q)] + (P - v)(Q′ - Q)/R [20.6] For Locust, the cost of switching is $5,100. As we saw, the benefi t is $290 per month, forever. At 2 percent per month, the NPV is:
NPV = -$5,100 + $290/.02 = -$5,100 + 14,500 = $9,400
Th erefore, the switch is very profi table.
EXAMPLE 20.2: We’d Rather Fight than Switch
Suppose a company is considering a switch from all cash to net 30, but the quantity sold is not expected to change. What is the NPV of the switch? Explain.
In this case, Q′ - Q is zero, so the NPV is just -P × Q. What this says is that the effect of the switch is simply to postpone one month’s collections forever, with no benefit from doing so.
A BREAK-EVEN APPLICATION Based on our discussion thus far, the key variable for Locust is Q′ - Q, the increase in unit sales. The projected increase of 10 units is only an estimate, so there is some forecasting risk. Under the circumstances, it’s natural to wonder what increase in unit sales is necessary to break even.
Earlier, the NPV of the switch was defi ned as:
NPV = -[PQ + v(Q′ - Q)] + (P - v)(Q′ - Q)/R
We can calculate the break-even point explicitly by setting the NPV equal to zero and solving for (Q′ - Q):
NPV = 0 = -[PQ + v(Q′ - Q)] + (P - v)(Q′ - Q)/R [20.7]
Q′ - Q = (PQ)/[(P - v)/R - v]
580 Part 7: Short-Term Financial Planning and Management
20Ross_Chapter20_4th.indd 58020Ross_Chapter20_4th.indd 580 12-11-27 12:1312-11-27 12:13
For Locust, the break-even sales increase is thus:
Q′ - Q = $4,900/[$29/.02 - $20] = 3.43 units
Th is tells us that the switch is a good idea as long as we are confi dent we can sell at least 3.43 more units.
1. What are the important effects to consider in a decision to offer credit?
2. Explain how to estimate the NPV of a credit policy switch.
20.4 Optimal Credit Policy
So far, we’ve discussed how to compute net present value for a switch in credit policy. We have not discussed the optimal amount of credit or the optimal credit policy. In principle, the optimal amount of credit is determined where the incremental cash fl ows from increased sales are exactly equal to the incremental costs of carrying the increased investment in accounts receivable.
The Total Credit Cost Curve Th e trade-off between granting credit and not granting credit isn’t hard to identify, but it is dif- fi cult to quantify precisely. As a result, we can only describe an optimal credit policy. To begin, the carrying costs associated with granting credit come in three forms:
1. The required return on receivables. 2. The losses from bad debts. 3. The costs of managing credit and credit collections.
We have already discussed the fi rst and second of these. Making up the third cost of managing credit are the expenses associated with running the credit department. Firms that don’t grant credit have no such department and no such expense. Th ese three costs all increase as credit policy is relaxed.
If a fi rm has a very restrictive credit policy, all the preceding costs are low. In this case, the fi rm has a shortage of credit, so there is an opportunity cost. Th is opportunity cost is the extra potential profi t from credit sales that is lost because credit is refused. Th is forgone benefi t comes from two sources, the increase in quantity sold, Q′ versus Q, and, potentially, a higher price. Th ese costs go down as credit policy is relaxed.
Th e sum of the carrying costs and the opportunity costs of a particular credit policy is called the total credit cost curve. We have drawn such a curve in Figure 20.1. As this fi gure illustrates, there is a point where the total credit cost is minimized. Th is point corresponds to the optimal amount of credit or, equivalently, the optimal investment in receivables.
If the fi rm extends more credit than this minimum, the additional net cash fl ow from new cus- tomers does not cover the carrying costs of the investment in receivables. If the level of receivables is less than this amount, the fi rm is forgoing valuable profi t opportunities.
In general, the costs and benefi ts from extending credit depend on the characteristics of particular fi rms and industries. All other things being equal, for example, it is likely that fi rms with (1) excess capacity, (2) low variable operating costs, and (3) repeat customers extend credit more liberally than otherwise. See if you can explain why each of these contributes to a more liberal credit policy.
Organizing the Credit Function As we stated earlier, fi rms selling only for cash save the expense of running a credit department. In practice, fi rms that do grant credit may achieve some of these savings by contracting out all or part of the credit function to a factor, an insurance company, or a captive fi nance company. Chapter 18 discussed factoring, an arrangement where the fi rm sells its receivables to a factor that takes on all responsibility for credit checking, authorization, and collection. Th e factor also guar- antees payment, ruling out defaults. Factors oft en provide accounts receivable fi nancing as well. Small fi rms may fi nd factoring cheaper than an in-house credit department.
Concept Questions
credit cost curve Graphical representation of the sum of the carrying costs and the opportunity costs of a credit policy.
captive finance company Wholly owned subsidiary that handles credit extension and receivables financing through commercial paper.
CHAPTER 20: Credit and Inventory Management 581
20Ross_Chapter20_4th.indd 58120Ross_Chapter20_4th.indd 581 12-11-27 12:1312-11-27 12:13
FIGURE 20.1
The costs of granting credit
Cost in dollars
Total costs
Carrying costs
Optimal amount of credit
Opportunity costs
Level of credit extended
Carrying costs are the cash flows that must be incurred when credit is granted. They are positively related to the amount of credit extended. Opportunity costs are the lost sales from refusing credit. These costs go down when credit is granted.
Firms that run internal credit operations are self-insured against default risk. An alternative is to buy credit insurance through an insurance company. Th e insurance company off ers coverage up to a preset dollar limit for accounts. As you would expect, accounts with a higher credit rating merit higher insurance limits.
Exporters may qualify for credit insurance through Export Development Canada (EDC), a Crown corporation of the federal government. For example, in May 2012, the EDC supported Vancouver-based North American Tungsten through its Accounts Receivable Insurance Program.5
Large corporations commonly extend credit through a subsidiary called a captive fi nance com- pany, instead of a credit department. For example, before divesting it in 2008, General Motors Corporation fi nanced its dealers and car buyers through its subsidiary, General Motors Accep- tance Corporation (GMAC). Consumer and dealer receivables are the assets of GMAC and they are fi nanced largely through commercial paper. Setting up the credit function as a separate legal entity has potential advantages in facilitating borrowing against receivables. Since they are segre- gated on the balance sheet of a captive, the receivables may make better collateral. As a result, the captive may be able to carry more debt and save on borrowing costs.6
A related issue in credit administration, whether through a fi nance captive or in-house, is the importance of having a set of written credit policies.7 Th e policy covers credit terms, the informa- tion needed for credit analysis, collection procedures and the monitoring of receivables. Having the policy clearly stated helps control possible confl icts between the credit department and sales. For example, during the economic slowdown of 2008–2009, some Canadian companies tight- ened their credit granting rules to off set the higher probability of customer bankruptcy. Other companies eased credit to promote sales and to provide fl exibility for regular customers. Th e decision depends on the considerations we analyzed earlier. Either way, sales and credit have to work together.
1. What are the carrying costs of granting credit?
2. What are the opportunity costs of not granting credit?
3. Why do many large U.S. and Canadian corporations form captive finance subsidiaries?
5 More information about EDC is at edc.ca 6 The trend toward securitization of receivables through wholly owned subsidiaries discussed in Chapter 18 is support- ing evidence. This somewhat controversial view of finance captives comes from G. S. Roberts and J. A. Viscione, “Cap- tive Finance Subsidiaries and the M-Form Hypothesis,” Bell Journal of Economics, Spring 1981, pp. 285–95. 7 Our discussion draws on “A Written Credit Policy Can Overcome a Host of Potential Problems,” Joint Venture Sup- plement, The Financial Post, June 20, 1991.
Concept Questions
582 Part 7: Short-Term Financial Planning and Management
20Ross_Chapter20_4th.indd 58220Ross_Chapter20_4th.indd 582 12-11-27 12:1312-11-27 12:13
20.5 Credit Analysis
Th us far, we have focused on establishing credit terms. Once a fi rm decides to grant credit to its customers, it must then establish guidelines for determining who is allowed to buy on credit as well as the credit limits to be set. Since the forces of competition oft en leave a fi rm little discre- tion in setting credit terms, credit managers focus on credit analysis, along with collection and receivables monitoring. Credit analysis refers to the process of deciding whether to extend credit to a particular customer. It usually involves two steps: gathering relevant information and deter- mining creditworthiness.
Credit analysis is important simply because potential losses on receivables can be substantial. For example, at the end of 2010, IBM reported that $734 million of accounts receivable were doubtful, and GE reported a staggering $8.1 billion as allowance for losses.
When Should Credit Be Granted? Imagine that a fi rm is trying to decide whether to grant credit to a customer. Th is decision can get complicated. For example, the answer depends on what happens if credit is refused. Will the customer simply pay cash or will the customer not make the purchase? To avoid this and other diffi culties, we use some special cases to illustrate the key points.
A ONETIME SALE We start by considering the simplest case. A new customer wishes to buy one unit on credit at a price of P′ per unit. If credit is refused, the customer would not make a purchase.
Furthermore, we assume that, if credit is granted, in one month, the customer either pays up or defaults. Th e probability of the second of these events is π. In this case, the probability (π) can be interpreted as the percentage of new customers who do not pay. Our business does not have repeat customers, so this is strictly a one-time sale. Finally, the required return on receivables is R per month and the variable cost is v per unit.
Th e analysis here is straightforward. If the fi rm refuses credit, the incremental cash fl ow is zero. If it grants credit, it spends v (the variable cost) this month and expects to collect (1 - π)P′ next month. Th e NPV of granting credit is:
NPV = -v + (1 - π)P′/(1 + R) [20.8] For example, for Locust Soft ware, this NPV is:
NPV = -$20 + (1 - π) × $49/(1.02)
With, say, a 20 percent rate of default, this works out to be:
NPV = -$20 + .80 × $49/1.02 = $18.43
Th erefore, credit should be granted. Our example illustrates an important point. In granting credit to a new customer, a fi rm risks
its variable cost (v). It stands to gain the full price (P′). For a new customer, then, credit may be granted even if the default probability is high. For example, the break-even probability can be determined by setting the NPV equal to zero and solving for π:
NPV = 0 = -$20 + (1 - π) × $49/(1.02) (1 - π) = $20/$49 × 1.02 π = 58.37%
Locust should extend credit as long as there is at least a 1 - .583 = 41.7% chance or better of col- lecting. Th is explains why fi rms with higher markups tend to have looser credit terms.
A common rule of thumb restates this information by asking, how many good accounts do we have to sell and collect to make up for the mistake of one write-off ? Working with accounting numbers instead of NPVs, we can restate the break-even point as follows:
Profit = 0 = -variable cost × probability of loss + profit margin × probability of payment 0 = -v × π + (P′ - v)(1 - π)
In the Locust example, we have at the break-even point:
CHAPTER 20: Credit and Inventory Management 583
20Ross_Chapter20_4th.indd 58320Ross_Chapter20_4th.indd 583 12-11-27 12:1312-11-27 12:13
Profit = 0 = -$20 × π + ($49 - $20)(1 - π)
With a little algebra, we can solve for p = 60 percent, the same as we had earlier except for round- ing error due to ignoring the present value. Notice that the break-even probability of default is simply the profi t margin = $30/$49 = 61.2%. Th is makes sense since the seller breaks even if losses off set profi ts. Business people interpret this as saying that for every write-off we have to sell and collect around .61 good accounts.
Finally, notice that the break-even percentage of 61.2 percent is much higher than the break- even percentage of .04 percent we calculate in Appendix 20A (available on Connect), because that percentage is calculated assuming that Q = Q′, implying there are no new customers. Th e percentage calculated here applies to a potential new customer only.
Th e key diff erence between the analysis for a new customer versus an old one is what is at risk if we extend credit. For the new customer, there is no sale unless we extend credit so the amount at risk is the fi rm’s variable cost. For the old customer, the answer is diff erent. Because this customer has bought from us before with cash, if we grant credit we are risking the full price.
REPEAT BUSINESS A second, very important factor to keep in mind is the possibility of repeat business. We can illustrate this by extending our onetime example. We make one impor- tant assumption: A new customer who does not default the first time remains a customer forever and never defaults. If the firm grants credit, it spends v this month. Next month, it either gets nothing if the customer defaults or it gets P if the customer pays. If the customer does pay, he or she buys another unit on credit and the firm spends v again. The net cash inflow for the month is thus P - v. In every subsequent month, this same P - v occurs as the customer pays for the previ- ous month’s order and places a new one.
It follows from our discussion that, in one month, the fi rm has $0 with probability π. With probability (1 - π), however, the fi rm has a new customer. Th e value of a new customer is equal to present value of (P - v) every month forever:
PV = (P - v)/R
Th e NPV of extending credit is therefore:
NPV = -v + (1 - π)(P - v)/R [20.9] For Locust, this is:
NPV = -$20 + (1 - π) × ($49 - $20)/.02 = -$20 + (1 - π) × $1,450
Even if the probability of default is 90 percent, the NPV is:
NPV = -$20 + .10 × $1,450 = $125
Locust should extend credit unless default is a virtual certainty. Th e reason is that it costs only $20 to fi nd out who is a good customer and who is not. A good customer is worth $1,450, however, so Locust can aff ord quite a few defaults.
Our repeat business example probably exaggerates the acceptable default probability, but it does illustrate that oft en the best way to do credit analysis is simply to extend credit to almost anyone. It also points out that the possibility of repeat business is a crucial consideration. In such cases, the important thing is to control the amount of credit initially off ered so the possible loss is limited. Th e amount can be increased with time. Most oft en, the best predictor of whether cus- tomers will pay in the future is whether they have paid in the past.
Credit Information If a fi rm does want credit information on customers, there are a number of sources. Information commonly used to assess creditworthiness includes the following:
1. Financial statements. A firm can ask a customer to supply financial statement information such as statements of financial position and statements of comprehensive income. Mini- mum standards and rules of thumb based on financial ratios like the ones we discussed in Chapter 3 can be used as a basis for extending or refusing credit.
584 Part 7: Short-Term Financial Planning and Management
20Ross_Chapter20_4th.indd 58420Ross_Chapter20_4th.indd 584 12-11-27 12:1312-11-27 12:13
2. Credit reports on a customer’s payment history with other firms. Quite a few organizations sell information on the credit strength and credit history of business firms. Dun & Brad- street Canada provides subscribers with a credit reference book and credit reports on indi- vidual firms. Ratings and information are available for a huge number of firms, including very small ones. Creditel of Canada also provides credit reporting.
Many fi rms have mechanized rules that allow for automatic approval of, say, all credit requests up to a preset dollar amount for fi rms with high ratings. Potential customers with ratings below some minimum are automatically rejected. All others are investigated further.
3. Banks. Banks may provide some assistance to their business customers in acquiring infor- mation on the creditworthiness of other firms.
4. The customer’s payment history with the firm. The most obvious way to obtain information about the likelihood of a customer not paying is to examine whether the customer paid in the past and how much trouble collecting turned out to be.
Figure 20.2 illustrates just part of a Dun & Bradstreet credit report. As you can see, quite detailed information is available. Export Development Canada also provides credit profi les of U.S. and international companies.
EXAMPLE 20.3: Good and Bad Accounts at a Financial Institution
Suppose a lending officer at a chartered bank or other fi- nancial institution lends $1,000 to a customer who defaults completely. When this happens the lender has to write off the full $1,000. How many good $1,000 loans, paid in full and on time, does the lender have to make to offset the loss and break even on the lending portfolio?
To answer the question, we need to know the profit margin on loans. In banking this is called the spread be-
tween the lending rate and the cost of funds to the bank. The spread varies over the interest rate cycle but is usually around 2 or 3 percent. Supposing the spread is 2.5 percent, the bank makes $25 on every $1,000 loan. This means the lender must make $1,000/$25 = 40 good loans for every write-off. Our example illustrates one reason banks are con- servative lenders. Low spreads leave little room for loan losses.
spread The gap between the interest rate a bank pays on deposits and the rate it charges on loans.
Credit Evaluation and Scoring No magical formulas can assess the probability that a customer will not pay. In very general terms, the classic fi ve Cs of credit are the basic factors to be evaluated:
1. Character. The customer’s willingness to meet credit obligations. 2. Capacity. The customer’s ability to meet credit obligations out of operating cash flows. 3. Capital. The customer’s financial reserves. 4. Collateral. A pledged asset in the case of default. 5. Conditions. General economic conditions in the customer’s line of business.
Credit scoring refers to the process of calculating a numerical rating for a customer based on information collected and then granting or refusing credit based on the result. For example, a fi rm might rate a customer on a scale of 1 (very poor) to 10 (very good) on each of the fi ve Cs of credit using all the information available about the customer. A credit score could then be calculated based on the total. From experience, a fi rm might choose to grant credit only to customers with a score of more than, say, 30.
Firms such as credit card issuers have developed elaborate statistical models for credit scoring. Th is approach has the advantage of being objective as compared to scoring based on judgments on the fi ve Cs. Usually, all the legally relevant and observable characteristics of a large pool of cus- tomers are studied to fi nd their historic relation to default rates. Based on the results, it is possible to determine the variables that best predict whether or not a customer will pay and then calculate a credit score based on those variables.
five Cs of credit The following five basic credit factors to be evaluated: character, capacity, capital, collateral, and conditions.
credit scoring The process of quantifying the probability of default when granting consumer credit.
CHAPTER 20: Credit and Inventory Management 585
20Ross_Chapter20_4th.indd 58520Ross_Chapter20_4th.indd 585 12-11-27 12:1312-11-27 12:13
FIGURE 20.2
A Dun & Bradstreet credit report
One basic example of credit scoring employs a statistical technique called multiple discrimi- nant analysis (MDA) to predict which customers will be good or bad accounts.8 Similar to regres- sion analysis, MDA chooses a set of variables that best discriminate between good and bad credits
8 Our discussion of scoring models draws on Hill and Sartoris, Short-Term Financial Management, chap. 14; and L. Kry- zanowski et al., Business Solvency Risk Analysis (Montreal: Institute of Canadian Bankers, 1990), chap. 6.
multiple discriminant analysis (MDA) Statistical technique for distinguishing between two samples on the basis of their observed characteristics.
586 Part 7: Short-Term Financial Planning and Management
20Ross_Chapter20_4th.indd 58620Ross_Chapter20_4th.indd 586 12-11-27 12:1312-11-27 12:13
with hindsight in a sample for which the outcomes are known. Th e variables are then used to classify new applications that come in. For consumer credit, for example, these variables include length of time in current job, monthly income, whether the customer’s home is owned or rented, other fi nancial obligations, and so on. For business customers, ratios are the relevant variables.
To illustrate how MDA works without getting into the derivation, suppose only two ratios explain whether a business customer is creditworthy: sales/total assets and EBIT/total assets. What MDA does is draw a line to separate good (G) from bad (B) accounts as shown in Figure 20.3. Th e equation for the line is:
Score = Z = 0.4 × [Sales/Total assets] + 3.0 × EBIT/Total assets [20.10]
FIGURE 20.3
Credit scoring with multiple discriminant analysis
Sales/Total assets
EBIT/ Total assets
Kiwi: Z = 1.2
Z = 0.9
Z = 0.4 � 3.0 Sales
Total assets EBIT
Total assets[ ] [ ] 0.450.300.16
0
1.0
2.0 1.8
2.25
3.0
B B
B
B
B
BB
B B
B
B
B
B
B G
G
G
G
G
G G
G
G
G
G G
G
G G
G
G
B BB
For example, suppose Locust Soft ware has a credit application from Kiwi Computers. Kiwi’s fi nancial statements reveal sales/total assets of 1.8 and EBIT/total assets of .16. We can calculate Kiwi’s score as:
Z = 0.4 × 1.8 + 3.0 × .16 = 1.2
Th e line in Figure 20.3 is drawn at a cutoff score of .90. Because Kiwi’s score is higher, it lies above the line and the model predicts it will be a good account. Th e decision rule is to grant credit to all accounts with scores more than 0.9, that is to all accounts above the line.
To test the track record of scoring models, researchers have compared their predictions with actual outcomes. If the models were perfect, all good accounts would be above the line and all bad accounts below it. As you can see in Figure 20.3, the model does a reasonable job but there are some errors. For this reason, fi rms using scoring models assign scores near the line to a grey area for further investigation.
As you might expect, statistical scoring models work best when there is a large sample of similar credit applicants. Research on scoring models bears this out: the models are most useful in consumer credit.
CHAPTER 20: Credit and Inventory Management 587
20Ross_Chapter20_4th.indd 58720Ross_Chapter20_4th.indd 587 12-11-27 12:1312-11-27 12:13
Because credit-scoring models and procedures determine who is and is not creditworthy, it is not surprising that they have been the subject of government regulation. In particular, the kinds of background and demographic information that can be used in the credit decision are limited. For example, suppose a consumer applicant was formerly bankrupt but has discharged all obliga- tions. Aft er a waiting period that varies from province to province, this information cannot be used in the credit decision.
Credit scoring is used for business customers by Canadian chartered banks. Scoring for small business loans off ers the advantages of objective analysis without taking more of the lending offi - cer’s time than could be justifi ed for a small account.
Many Canadian banks have online information and application forms for small businesses. For example, visit the website of TD Canada Trust (tdcanadatrust.com/products-services/small- business/smallbusiness-index.jsp) or Royal Bank of Canada (rbcroyalbank.com/business/index. html).
1. What is credit analysis?
2. What are the five Cs of credit?
3. What are credit scoring models and how are they used?
20.6 Collection Policy
Th e collection policy is the fi nal element management considers in establishing a credit policy. Collection policy involves monitoring receivables to spot trouble and obtaining payment on past- due accounts.
Monitoring Receivables To keep track of payments by customers, most fi rms monitor outstanding accounts. First, a fi rm normally keeps track of its average collection period through time. If a fi rm is in a seasonal busi- ness, the ACP fl uctuates during the year, but unexpected increases in the ACP are a cause for concern. Either customers in general are taking longer to pay, or some percentage of accounts receivable is seriously overdue.
Th e aging schedule is a second basic tool for monitoring receivables. To prepare one, the credit department classifi es accounts by age.9 Suppose a fi rm has $100,000 in receivables. Some of these accounts are only a few days old, but others have been outstanding for quite some time. Th e fol- lowing is an example of an aging schedule.
Aging Schedule
Age of Account Amount Percent of Total Value of Accounts Receivable
0–10 days $ 50,000 50% 11–60 days 25,000 25 61–80 days 20,000 20
Over 80 days 5,000 5 $ 100,000 100%
If this fi rm has a credit period of 60 days, 25 percent of its accounts are late. Whether or not this is serious depends on the nature of the fi rm’s collection and customers. Oft en, accounts beyond a certain age are almost never collected. “Th e older the receivable, the less value it is to the business and the harder it is to collect.”10 Monitoring the age of accounts is very important in such cases.
9 Aging schedules are used elsewhere in business. For example, aging schedules are often prepared for inventory items. 10 The quotation is from S. Horvitch, “Debt Collection: When to Drop the Hammer on Delinquent Customers,” The Fi- nancial Post, March 15, 1991, p. 39.
Concept Questions
aging schedule A compilation of accounts receivable by the age of each account.
588 Part 7: Short-Term Financial Planning and Management
20Ross_Chapter20_4th.indd 58820Ross_Chapter20_4th.indd 588 12-11-27 12:1312-11-27 12:13
Firms with seasonal sales fi nd the percentages on the aging schedule changing during the year. For example, if sales in the current month are very high, total receivables also increase sharply. Th is means the older accounts, as a percentage of total receivables, become smaller and might appear less important. Some fi rms have refi ned the aging schedule so that they have an idea of how it should change with peaks and valleys in their sales.
Collection Effort A fi rm’s credit policy should include the procedures to follow for customers who are overdue. A sample set of procedures is given in Table 20.1 for an account due in 30 days. Th e time line is an important part of the table since experienced credit managers stress the need for prompt action.
TABLE 20.1
Schedule of actions to follow up late payments (Stated terms: Net 30 days)
If Payment Is Not Made By: Action
40 days Telephone call to customer’s payables department Send duplicate invoice if needed
50 days Second telephone call to customer’s payables department 60 days Warning letter (mild) 75 days Warning letter (strong) 90 days Telephone call to management level Notify that future
deliveries will be made only on a COD basis until payment is made
120 days Stop further deliveries 1. Initiate appropriate legal action if the account is large 2. Turn over to a collection agency if the account is small
Source: Ned C. Hill and William L. Sartoris, Short-Term Financial Management, 3rd ed. (Prentice Hall College Div., 1995), p. 392.
Th e step at 90 days is severe: refusing to grant additional credit to the customer until arrearages are cleared up. Th is may antagonize a normally good customer, and it points to a potential confl ict of interest between the collections department and the sales department.
Aft er 120 days, the fi rm takes legal action only if the account is large. Legal action is expen- sive and, as we saw in Chapter 16, if the customer goes bankrupt as a result, there is usually little chance of recovering a signifi cant portion of the credit extended. When this happens, the credit-granting fi rm is just another unsecured creditor. Th e fi rm can simply wait, or it can sell its receivable. For example, when book-seller Borders fi led for bankruptcy in 2011, it owed US$178.8 million to its vendors and $18.6 million to its landlords. One of the largest vendors was publisher Penguin Putnam, which was owed $41.1 million. Of course, a fi rm can simply give up on its claim. Another publisher, Wiley, had already written off US $9 million in debt for books sold to Borders.
Credit Management in Practice CO-OP Atlantic is a groceries and fuel distributor located in Moncton, New Brunswick. Its credit manager, Gary Steeves, is responsible for monitoring and collecting over $450 million in receiv- ables annually. CO-OP’s customers include large grocery stores with balances of more than $1 million as well as several thousand small accounts with balances around $1,000. By installing a computerized system, CO-OP has reduced its average collection period by two days with a savings (NPV) of millions. Th e system improved monitoring of receivables and credit granting analysis. It also saved on labour costs in processing receivables documentation.
To make monitoring easy, treasury credit staff call up customer information from a central database. For example, in the home fuel division, aging schedules are used to identify overdue accounts that require authorization by an analyst before further deliveries can be made. Under the old manual system, this information was not available. Th e system also provides collections staff with a daily list of accounts due for a telephone call together with a complete history of each.
CHAPTER 20: Credit and Inventory Management 589
20Ross_Chapter20_4th.indd 58920Ross_Chapter20_4th.indd 589 12-11-27 12:1312-11-27 12:13
Credit analysis centres around an early warning system that examines the solvency risk of existing and new commercial accounts. Th e soft ware scores the accounts based on fi nancial ratios. By mechanizing the analysis, CO-OP is now able to score all its large commercial accounts. Under the manual system, detailed fi nancial analysis was done on an exception basis and oft en came too late.
CO-OP achieved these gains in monitoring and analysis without adding any staff in the credit department. Th e department has the same number of people as it did 10 years earlier when sales were half the present level. Gary Steeves estimates automation saved the company over $100,000 in additional wages.
1. What tools can a manager use to monitor receivables?
2. What is an aging schedule?
3. Describe collection procedures and the reasons for them.
4. Describe the key features of a computerized credit system.
20.7 Inventory Management
Like receivables, inventories represent a signifi cant investment for many fi rms. For a typical Canadian manufacturing operation, inventories oft en exceed 20 percent of assets. For a retailer, inventories could represent more than 25 percent of assets. From our discussion in Chapter 18, we know that a fi rm’s operating cycle is made up of its inventory period and its receivables period. Th is is one reason for discussing credit and inventory policy together. Beyond this, both credit policy and inventory policy are used to drive sales, and the two must be coordinated to ensure that the process of acquiring inventory, selling it, and collecting on the sale proceeds smoothly. For example, changes in credit policy designed to stimulate sales must be simultaneously accom- panied by planning for adequate inventory.
The Financial Manager and Inventory Policy Despite the size of an average fi rm’s investment in inventories, the fi nancial manager typically does not have primary control over inventory management. Instead, other functional areas such as purchasing, production, and marketing normally share decision-making authority. Inventory management has become an increasingly important specialty in its own right; oft en fi nancial management has only input into the decision. For this reason, we only survey some basics of inventory and inventory policy in the sections ahead.
Inventory Types For a manufacturer, inventory is normally classifi ed into one of three categories: Th e fi rst category is raw material. Th is is whatever the fi rm uses as a starting point in its production process. Raw materials might be something as basic as iron ore for a steel manufacturer or something as sophis- ticated as disk drives for a computer manufacturer.
Th e second type of inventory is work-in-progress, which is just what the name suggests, namely, unfi nished product. How large this portion of inventory is depends on the length and organiza- tion of the production process. Th e third and fi nal type of inventory is fi nished goods, that is, products ready to ship or sell. Merchandise inventory being held by retail and wholesale fi rms for sale could also be categorized as fi nished goods.
Th ere are three things to keep in mind concerning inventory types. First, the names for the diff erent types can be a little misleading because one company’s raw materials could be another’s fi nished goods. For example, going back to our steel manufacturer, iron ore would be a raw mate- rial, and steel would be the fi nal product. An auto body panel stamping operation has steel as its raw material and auto body panels as its fi nished goods, and an automobile assembler has body panels as raw materials and automobiles as fi nished products.
Concept Questions
590 Part 7: Short-Term Financial Planning and Management
20Ross_Chapter20_4th.indd 59020Ross_Chapter20_4th.indd 590 12-11-27 12:1412-11-27 12:14
Th e second thing to keep in mind is that the diff erent types of inventory can be quite diff erent in their liquidity. Raw materials that are commodity-like or relatively standardized can be easy to convert to cash. Work-in-progress, on the other hand, can be quite illiquid and have little more than scrap value. As always, the liquidity of fi nished goods depends on the nature of the product.
Finally, a very important distinction between fi nished goods and other types of inventories is the demand for an inventory item that becomes a part of another item is usually termed derived or dependent demand because a company’s demand for the input item depends on its need for fi nished items. In contrast, the fi rm’s demand for fi nished goods is not derived from demand for other inventory items, so it is sometimes said to be independent.
Inventory Costs As we discussed in Chapter 18, two basic types of costs are associated with current assets in general and with inventory in particular. Th e fi rst of these are carrying costs. Here, carrying costs represent all the direct and opportunity costs of keeping inventory on hand.
Th ese include:
1. Storage and tracking costs. 2. Insurance and taxes. 3. Losses due to obsolescence, deterioration, or theft. 4. The opportunity cost of capital on the invested amount.
Th e sum of these costs can be substantial, roughly ranging from 20 to 40 percent of inventory value per year.
Th e other type of costs associated with inventory are shortage costs. Th ese are costs associated with having inadequate inventory on hand. Th e two components are restocking costs and costs related to safety reserves. Depending on the fi rm’s business, restocking or order costs are either the costs of placing an order with suppliers or the cost of setting up a production run. Th e costs related to safety reserves are opportunity losses such as lost sales and loss of customer goodwill that result from having inadequate inventory.
A basic trade-off in inventory management exists because carrying costs increase with inven- tory levels while shortage or restocking costs decline with inventory levels. Th e goal of inventory management is thus to minimize the sum of these two costs. We consider approaches to this goal in the next section.
Just to give you an idea of how important it is to balance carrying costs with shortage costs, consider the case of Kimberley-Clark, the well-known maker of Kleenex and Huggies. In the fourth quarter of 2010, the company cut production when compared to the same period the pre- vious year. Unfortunately, the company underestimated demand and missed out an estimated $20 million in profi t during the quarter.
1. What are the different types of inventory?
2. What are three things to remember when examining inventory types?
3. What are the basic goals of inventory management?
20.8 Inventory Management Techniques
As we described earlier, the goal of inventory management is usually framed as cost minimiza- tion. Th ree techniques are discussed in this section, ranging from the relatively simple to the very complex.
Concept Questions
CHAPTER 20: Credit and Inventory Management 591
20Ross_Chapter20_4th.indd 59120Ross_Chapter20_4th.indd 591 12-11-27 12:1412-11-27 12:14
The ABC Approach Th e ABC is a simple approach to inventory management where the basic idea is to divide inven- tory into three (or more) groups. Th e underlying rationale is that a small portion of inventory in terms of quantity might represent a large portion in terms of inventory value. For example, this situation would exist for a manufacturer that uses some relatively expensive, high-tech compon- ents and some relatively inexpensive basic materials in producing its products.
Figure 20.4 illustrates an ABC comparison of items by their percentage of inventory value and the percentage of items represented. As Figure 20.4 shows, the A Group constitutes only 10 percent of inventory by item count, but it represents over half the value of inventory. Th e A Group items are thus monitored closely, and inventory levels are kept relatively low. At the other end, basic inventory items, such as nuts and bolts, also exist; because these are crucial and inexpensive, large quantities are ordered and kept on hand. Th ese would be C Group items. Th e B Group is made up of in-between items.
FIGURE 20.4
ABC inventory analysis 80
60 A Group
57%
10%
B Group
27%
40%
C Group
16%
50%
40
20
0
20
40
60
80
Percent of inventory
value
Percent of inventory
items
The Economic Order Quantity (EOQ) Model Th e economic order quantity (EOQ) model is the best-known approach to explicitly establishing an optimum inventory level. Th e basic idea is illustrated in Figure 20.5, which plots the various costs associated with holding inventory (on the vertical axis) against inventory levels (on the horizontal axis). As shown, inventory carrying costs rise as inventory levels increase, while, at the same time, restocking costs decrease. From our general discussion in Chapter 18 and our discussion of the total credit cost curve in this chapter, the general shape of the total inventory cost curve is familiar. With the EOQ model, we attempt to specifi cally locate the minimum total cost point, Q*.
In our following discussion, keep in mind that the actual cost of the inventory itself is not included. Th e reason is that the total amount of inventory the fi rm needs in a given year is dictated by sales. What we are analyzing here is how much the fi rm should have on hand at any particular time. More precisely, we are trying to determine what size order the fi rm should place when it restocks its inventory.
592 Part 7: Short-Term Financial Planning and Management
20Ross_Chapter20_4th.indd 59220Ross_Chapter20_4th.indd 592 12-11-27 12:1412-11-27 12:14
FIGURE 20.5
Costs of holding inventory
Cost in dollars of holding inventory
Q* Optimal size of inventory order
Restocking costs
Carrying costs
Total costs of holding inventory
Size of inventory orders (Q)
Restocking costs are increased when the firm holds a small quantity of inventory. Carrying costs are increased when there is a large quantity of inventory on hand. Total costs are the sum of the carrying and restocking costs.
INVENTORY DEPLETION To develop the EOQ, we assume that the firm’s inventory is sold at a steady rate until it hits zero. At that point, the firm restocks its inventory back to some optimal level. For example, suppose the Trans North Corporation starts out today with 3600 units of a particular item in inventory. Annual sales of this item are 46,800 units, which is about 900 per week. If Trans North sells 900 units in inventory each week, after four weeks, all the available in- ventory would be sold, and Trans North would restock by ordering (or manufacturing) another 3600 and start over. This selling and restocking process produces the saw tooth pattern for inven- tory holdings shown in Figure 20.6. As this figure illustrates, Trans North always starts with 3600 units in inventory and ends up at zero. On average, then, inventory is half of 3600, or 1800 units.
FIGURE 20.6
Inventory holdings for the Trans North Corporation
Ending inventory: 0
Starting inventory: Q = 3600
Average inventory
1800 = Q/2
Weeks 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
The Trans North Corporation starts with inventory of 3600 units. The quantity drops to zero by the fourth week. The average inventory is Q/2 = 3600/2 = 1800 over the period.
CHAPTER 20: Credit and Inventory Management 593
20Ross_Chapter20_4th.indd 59320Ross_Chapter20_4th.indd 593 12-11-27 12:1412-11-27 12:14
THE CARRYING COSTS Going back to Figure 20.5, we see that carrying costs are nor- mally assumed to be directly proportional to inventory levels. Suppose we let Q be the quantity of inventory that Trans North orders each time (3600 units); we call this the restocking quantity. Average inventory would then just be Q/2, or 1800 units. If we let CC be the carrying cost per unit per year, Trans North’s total carrying costs are as follows:
Total carrying costs = Average inventory × Carrying costs per unit [20.11] = (Q/2) × CC
In Trans North’s case, if carrying costs were $0.75 per unit per year, total carrying costs would be the average inventory of 1800 multiplied by $0.75, or $1,350 per year.
EXAMPLE 20.4: Carrying Costs
Thiewes Shoes begins each period with 100 pairs of hiking boots in stock. This stock is depleted each period and reor- dered. If the carrying cost per pair of boots per year is $3, what are the total carrying costs for the hiking boots?
Inventories always start at 100 items and end at zero, so average inventory is 50 items. At an annual cost of $3 per item, total carrying costs are $150.
THE SHORTAGE COSTS For now, we focus only on the restocking costs. In essence, we assume the firm never actually runs short on inventory, so that costs relating to safety reserves are not important. Later, we return to this issue.
Restocking costs are normally assumed to be fi xed. In other words, every time we place an order, there are fi xed costs associated with that order (remember the cost of the inventory itself is not considered here). Suppose we let T be the fi rm’s total unit sales per year. If the fi rm orders Q units each time, it needs to place a total of T/Q orders. For Trans North, annual sales were 46,800, and the order size was 3600. Trans North thus places a total of 46,800/3600 = 13 orders per year. If the fi xed cost per order is F, the total restocking cost for the year would be:
Total restocking cost = Fixed cost per order × Number of orders [20.12] = F × (T/Q)
For Trans North, order costs might be $50 per order, so the total restocking cost for 13 orders would be $50 × 13 = $650 per year.
EXAMPLE 20.5: Restocking Costs
In our previous example, suppose Thiewes sells a total of 600 pairs of boots in a year. How many times per year does Thiewes restock? Suppose the restocking cost is $20 per order. What are total restocking costs?
Thiewes orders 100 items each time. Total sales are 600 items per year, so Thiewes restocks six times per year, or about every two months. The restocking costs would be 6 orders × $20 per order = $120.
THE TOTAL COSTS The total costs associated with holding inventory are the sum of the carrying costs and the restocking costs:
Total costs = Carrying costs + Restocking costs [20.13] = (Q/2) × CC + F × (T/Q)
Our goal is to fi nd the value of Q, the restocking quantity that minimizes this cost. To see how we might go about this, we can calculate total costs for some diff erent values of Q. For the Trans North Corporation, we had carrying costs (CC) of $0.75 per unit per year, fi xed costs per order (F) of $50 per order, and total unit sales (T) of 46,800 units. With these numbers, some possible total costs are (check some of these for practice):
594 Part 7: Short-Term Financial Planning and Management
20Ross_Chapter20_4th.indd 59420Ross_Chapter20_4th.indd 594 12-11-27 12:1412-11-27 12:14
Restocking Quantity (Q)
Carrying Costs (Q/2 × CC) +
Restocking Costs (F × T/Q) = Total Costs
500 $ 187.50 $4,680.00 $4,867.50 1000 375.00 2,340.00 2,715.00 1500 562.50 1,560.00 2,122.50 2000 750.00 1,170.00 1,920.00 2500 937.50 936.00 1,873.50 3000 1,125.00 780.00 1,905.00 3500 1,312.50 668.57 1,981.07
Inspecting the numbers, we see that total costs start at almost $5,000, and they decline to just under $1,900. Th e cost-minimizing quantity appears to be approximately 2500.
To fi nd the precise cost-minimizing quantity, we can look back at Figure 20.5. What we notice is that the minimum point occurs right where the two lines cross. At this point, carrying costs and restocking costs are the same. For the particular types of costs we have assumed here, this is always true; so we can fi nd the minimum point just by setting these costs equal to each other and solving for Q*:
Carrying costs = Restocking costs [20.14] (Q*/2) × CC = F × (T/Q*)
With a little algebra, we get that
Q*2 = 2T × F ______ CC [20.15]
To solve for Q*, we take the square root of both sides to fi nd that
Q* = √ _______
2T × F ______ CC [20.16]
Th is reorder quantity, which minimizes the total inventory cost, is called the economic order quantity (EOQ). For the Trans North Corporation, the EOQ is
Q* = √ _______
2T × F ______ CC
= √ _________________
( 2 × 46,800 ) × $50 ________________ $.75
= √ ________
6,240,000 = 2498 units
Th us, for Trans North, the economic order quantity is actually 2498 units. At this level, check that the restocking costs and carrying costs are identical (they’re both $936.75).11
Extensions to the EOQ Model Th us far, we have assumed a company lets its inventory run down to zero and then reorders. In reality, a company reorders before its inventory goes to zero for two reasons: First, by always hav- ing at least some inventory on hand, the fi rm minimizes the risk of a stockout and the resulting losses of sales and customers. Second, when a fi rm does reorder, there is some time lag between placing the order and when the inventory arrives. Th us, to fi nish our discussion of the EOQ, we consider two extensions, safety stocks and reordering points.
11 In general, EOQ is the minimum point on the total cost curve in Figure 20.5 where the derivative of total cost with respect to quantity is zero. From Equation 20.13:
d(Total cost) ___________ dQ = CC ___ 2 -
T × F _____ Q2 = 0
To find the optimal value of Q, we solve this equation for Q:
CC ___ 2 = T × F _____ Q2
Q2 = 2T × F ______ CC
Q = √ _______
2T × F ______ CC
CHAPTER 20: Credit and Inventory Management 595
20Ross_Chapter20_4th.indd 59520Ross_Chapter20_4th.indd 595 12-11-27 12:1412-11-27 12:14
EXAMPLE 20.6: Th e EOQ
Based on our previous two examples, what size orders should Thiewes place? How often will Thiewes restock? What are the carrying and restocking costs? The total costs?
We know that the total number of pairs of boots or- dered for the year (T) is 600. The restocking cost (F) is $20 per order, and the carrying cost (CC) is $3. We can calcu- late the EOQ for Thiewes as shown to the right.
Since Thiewes sells 600 pairs per year, it restocks 600/89.44 = 6.71 times.12 The total restocking costs are $20 × 6.71 = $134.16. Average inventory is 89.44/2 =
44.72 pairs of boots. The carrying costs will be $3 × 44.72 = $134.16, the same as the restocking costs. The total costs are thus $268.33.
EOQ* = √ _______
2T × F _______ CC
= √ ________________
(2 × 600) × $20
________________ $3
= √ ______
8,000 = 89.44 units
12
SAFETY STOCKS A safety stock refers to the minimum level of inventory that a firm keeps on hand. Inventories are reordered whenever the level of inventory falls to the safety stock level. The top of Figure 20.7 illustrates how a safety stock can be incorporated into our EOQ model. Notice that adding a safety stock simply means the firm does not run its inventory all the way down to zero. Other than this, the situation is identical to our earlier discussion of the EOQ.
REORDER POINTS To allow for delivery time, a firm places orders before inventories reach a critical level. The reorder points are the times at which the firm actually places its inventory orders. These points are illustrated in the middle of Figure 20.7. As shown, the reorder points simply occur some fixed number of days (or weeks or months) before inventories are projected to reach zero.
One of the reasons a fi rm keeps a safety stock is to allow for uncertain delivery times. So we can combine our reorder point and safety stock discussions in the bottom part of Figure 20.7. Th e result is a generalized EOQ in which the fi rm orders in advance of anticipated needs and also keeps a safety stock of inventory to guard against unforeseen fl uctuations in demand and delivery time.
Canadian Tire uses a modifi ed EOQ approach to set target inventory levels for the thousands of items stocked in each store. Because the company markets its stores as providing one-stop shopping, it seeks a high service level with few stockouts. Safety stocks are set accordingly. An in- store computer, online with the cash registers, monitors sales and automatically sends an order to the warehouse computer when the stock level drops to the reorder point.
To implement reorder points successfully and minimize stockouts, it is important to have an accurate count of inventory. As we discussed at the beginning of this chapter, large retailers like Wal-Mart use radio frequency identifi cation technology (RFID) to track inventory. Second-gen- eration, matrix bar codes provide a cheaper alternative to RFIDs.
EXAMPLE 20.7: Th e Reorder Point for Hiking Boots
Suppose Thiewes Shoes wishes to hold a safety stock of hik- ing boots equal to six days’ sales. If the store is open 300 days per year, what should be the safety stock? What is the reorder point for hiking boots?
The safety stock is 6/300 × 600 pairs = 12 pairs
The reorder point is when 12 pairs are on hand. If sales are evenly distributed, there will still be 6.71 orders per year.
Managing Derived-Demand Inventories As we described previously, the demand for some inventory types is derived from, or dependent on, other inventory needs. A good example is an auto manufacturer where the demand for fi n- ished products depends on consumer demand, marketing programs, and other factors related to
12 In practice, Thiewes would order 90 pairs of boots. It should also be pointed out that the EOQ model provides a guideline value, though there is some flexibility in the number chosen around this optimal point (without significantly increasing the total cost). For example, a convenient order size might be multiples of a dozen, so that 84 or 96 could be the number selected.
596 Part 7: Short-Term Financial Planning and Management
20Ross_Chapter20_4th.indd 59620Ross_Chapter20_4th.indd 596 12-11-27 12:1412-11-27 12:14
projected unit sales. Th e demand for inventory items such as tires, batteries, headlights, and other components is then completely determined by the number of autos planned.
Materials Requirements Planning (MRP) Production and inventory specialists have developed computer-based systems for ordering and/ or scheduling production of demand-dependent inventories. Th ese systems fall under the gen- eral heading of materials requirements planning (MRP). Th e basic idea behind MRP is that, once fi nished goods inventory levels are set, it is possible to back out what levels of work-in-progress inventories must exist to meet the need for fi nished goods. From there, it is possible to back out what raw materials inventories must be on hand. Th is ability to schedule backward from fi nished goods inventories stems from the dependent nature of work-in-progress and raw materials inven- tories. MRP is particularly important for complicated products where a variety of components are needed to create the fi nished product.
FIGURE 20.7
Safety stocks and reorder points
Inventory A. Safety stocks
Safety stock Time
Minimum inventory level
With a safety stock, the firm reorders when inventory reaches a minimum level.
Inventory B. Reorder points
Delivery time Time
Reorder point
Delivery time When there are lags in delivery or production times, the firm reorders when inventory reaches the reorder point.
Inventory C. Combined reorder points and safety stocks
Delivery time Safety stock
Minimum inventory level Time
Reorder point
Delivery time
By combining safety stocks and reorder points, the firm maintains a buffer against unforeseen events.
CHAPTER 20: Credit and Inventory Management 597
20Ross_Chapter20_4th.indd 59720Ross_Chapter20_4th.indd 597 12-11-27 12:1412-11-27 12:14
Just-In-Time Inventory EOQ is a useful tool for many fi rms especially in the retail sector but the cutting edge of inventory management in manufacturing is a relatively new approach called just-in-time inventory or just-in- time production.13 Th e basic idea is that raw materials, parts, and other work-in-process should be delivered at the exact time they are needed on the factory fl oor. Raw materials and work-in-process are no longer seen as a necessary buff er to decouple stages of production. Instead, all stages of produc- tion are recoupled and the goal is to reduce inventories of raw materials and work-in-process to zero.
At the heart of just-in-time inventory is a diff erent approach to ordering or set-up costs. Under the traditional EOQ approach, these are considered fi xed. As we saw, higher ordering costs trans- late into larger, less frequent orders. When producing for inventory, large set-up costs in switch- ing production from one product to another mean longer production runs. Either way, the fi rm carries a large work-in-process inventory as the next stage of production gradually draws down the stock of work-in-process. If a manufacturer produces many diff erent products, the burden of diff erent work-in-process for each becomes excessive.
Th is was the problem faced by Toyota in Japan aft er World War II. To be competitive, the com- pany needed to make a mix of vehicles, so no one model had a long production run. Th e solution was to attack set-up time and reduce it dramatically, by up to 75 percent. Th us, just-in-time inven- tory (production) was born.
Making just-in-time inventory work requires detailed materials requirements planning (MRP). As all stages of production are recoupled, careful coordination is needed. Th ere are no longer inventory buff ers to fall back on to cover planning errors or equipment downtime. Th is diff erence between the traditional approach and just-in-time inventory in resolving problems is captured in the following analogy drawn from a Japanese parable:
Th e ship of enterprise fl oats on a lake of inventory. Problems can be thought of as rocks in the lake on which one is sailing a boat. Th e safety stock inventory approach is to raise the water level in the lake so that the rocks are not seen. Th e just-in-time approach is to chart carefully the location of the rocks and sail around them while keeping the water level at a minimum.14
When a manufacturer outsources parts and other work-in-process, planning must include suppliers. With the new approach, suppliers have to be capable of delivering smaller orders more oft en with precision timing. Suppliers need to receive high-quality information on the schedule of deliveries and to communicate continually with the buyer on the location of all shipments. So, in many ways, just-in-time inventory transfers the demands of inventory management from the manufacturer to its suppliers.
Manufacturers and suppliers use electronic data interchange (EDI) over integrated computer systems. Th e cash management system discussed in Chapter 19 is an example of EDI featuring communications between a fi rm and its bank. In implementing a just-in-time system, the fi rm and its supplier electronically exchange all information from the initial order to acknowledgment of the fi nal payment.
On May 23, 2012, the workers of Canadian Pacifi c Railway walked off the job early to set off a strike that aff ected auto manufacturing plants, coal mines, farms as well as the retailer, Canadian Tire. Known for its just-in-time inventory system, Canadian Tire’s normal operations were dis- rupted by the strike at CP. Further, in western Canada, Teck Resources Ltd., CP’s largest customer, ships 650 rail cars of coal daily to the port in Vancouver from its mines in south-eastern British Columbia.15 Th e strike also aff ected the just-in-time inventory systems of Teck Resources. Th is example shows the diffi culties in implementing just-in-time inventory systems. Beyond informa- tion requirements, suppliers must meet very high quality standards. Manufacturers receive parts
13 Our discussion of just-in-time inventory draws on J. Loring, “Inventory: Taking Stock,” Canadian Business, April 1991; E. Corcoran, “Milliken & Co., Managing the Quality of a Textile Revolution,” Scientific American, April 1990; and Hill and Sar- toris, Short-Term Financial Management, chaps. 17 and 20. A good source of just-in-time production is J. D. Blackburn, ed., Time-Based Competition: The Next Battleground in American Manufacturing (Homewood, IL: Business One Irwin, 1991). 14 Hill and Sartoris, Short-Term Financial Management, p. 457. 15 cbc.ca/news/business/story/2012/05/23/f-canadian-pacific-railway-strike.html
just-in-time inventory (JIT) Design for inventory in which parts, raw materials, and other work-in-process are delivered exactly as needed for production. Goal is to minimize inventory.
598 Part 7: Short-Term Financial Planning and Management
20Ross_Chapter20_4th.indd 59820Ross_Chapter20_4th.indd 598 12-11-27 12:1412-11-27 12:14
and use them at once so there is no room for defects. Quality control and preventive maintenance become very important. Th e accompanying box shows the downside of Just-In-Time Inventory.
The Downside of Just-in-Time Inventory
In a control center above a wide-body jet plant in Everett, Washington, a group of Boeing (BA) staffers is poring over data from suppliers in Japan—making sure the company has enough parts to build its 787 Dreamliner in the U.S.
It’s a long list. Japanese manufacturers helped design and now produce 35 percent of the 787, 20 percent of the 777, and 15 percent of the 767. What they build can’t be duplicated anywhere else, and Boeing can’t call in a new supplier to make one piece if it runs short. So far, the jetmaker says it has enough inventory to keep running for a few weeks.
Thirty years ago, Japan taught U.S. companies to boost profi t by keeping inventory lean. Now it’s teaching them the risks. Mitsubishi Heavy Industries builds the 787’s wing; no one else can do that job. General Motors (GM) decided on Mar. 17 to close its Shreveport (La.) Chevrolet Colorado and GMC Canyon pickup plant for a week because it lacked components. Deere (DE) is delaying deliveries of excavators and mining equipment. And Honda Motor (HMC) suspended orders from U.S. dealers for Japan-built Honda and Acura models that would be sold in May.
“Instead of months’ worth of inventory, there are now days and even hours of inventory,” says Jim Lawton, head of supply management solutions at consultant Dun & Bradstreet (DNB) and a former procurement chief for Hewlett-Packard (HPQ). “If supply is disrupted as in this situation, there’s nowhere to get product.”
Beginning in the 1980s, to compete with Japanese manufacturers, U.S. companies became reliant on single suppliers for key parts. It was cheaper to buy in bulk from one outfi t than to split orders. Now quake damage has interrupted 25 percent of the world’s silicon production because of the shutdown of plants owned by Shin-Etsu Chemical and MEMC Electronic Materials, says IHS iSuppli (IHS), an El Segundo (Calif.)-based researcher. The earthquake forced more than 130 plants, mostly in auto and electronics, to close as of Mar. 22, according to data compiled by Bloomberg. Some of the affected factories make items sold directly to consumers; others are sold to manufacturers.
At Dell (DELL), the world’s third-largest personal computer maker, managers are concerned that the supply of optical disk drives and batteries from Japan may be interrupted, according to a person familiar with the matter. Power failures at plants that make silicon wafers could also cause shortages in the computer- chip market in six to 10 weeks, said the source, who asked not to be identifi ed discussing matters involving suppliers. In a statement, Dell said it doesn’t “see any signifi cant immediate supply-chain disruption.”
From a command center in Boeing’s Everett factory, engineers can see aircraft production from a window and a 40- foot screen that displays live video from supplier operations, weather reports, and global news. Translators are on hand around the clock. Chicago-based Boeing, which has bought parts from Japan since the end of World War II, found damage at several sites, according to Boeing Japan President Mike Denton, who is working with offi cials there to get them running. The leading edge of the 787’s wings are built at Spirit AeroSystems Holdings (SPR) in Tulsa and shipped to Mitsubishi Heavy in Nagoya, where the full wings are assembled, then fl own to Everett. Boeing and Mitsubishi Heavy use special autoclave ovens to bake composite-plastic sections of the plane and wing skins. Boeing is three years late and billions of dollars over budget on the 787.
Only about 10 percent of companies have detailed plans to deal with supply disruptions, says Lawton, who calls logistics the fastest-growing piece of Dun & Bradstreet’s business. Shortages may crop up in other countries as companies seek alternative sources, he adds.
Despite the risks, companies won’t abandon just-in-time inventory because the cost savings are too great, says James Womack, founder of the Lean Enterprise Institute in Cambridge, Mass. “Once they grasp the situation and they’ve got a plan, I would predict they are able to restore a remarkable amount of production very quickly,” he says. “Never sell Japan short.”
Susanna Ray is a reporter for Bloomberg News in Seattle. Thomas Black is a reporter for Bloomberg News. Source: businessweek.com/magazine/ content/11_14/b4222017701856.htm. Used with permission.
IN THEIR OWN WORDS…
1. Why do firms hold inventories?
2. Explain the basic idea behind the EOQ solution for inventory management.
3. What is just-in-time inventory? How does it differ from the more traditional EOQ approach?
Concept Questions
CHAPTER 20: Credit and Inventory Management 599
20Ross_Chapter20_4th.indd 59920Ross_Chapter20_4th.indd 599 12-11-27 12:1412-11-27 12:14
20.9 SUMMARY AND CONCLUSIONS
Th is chapter covered the basics of credit policy and inventory management. Th e major topics we discussed include:
1. The components of credit policy. We discussed the terms of sale, credit analysis, and collec- tion policy. Under the general subject of terms of sale, the credit period, the cash discount and discount period, and the credit instrument were described.
2. Credit policy analysis. We develop the cash flows from the decision to grant credit and show how the credit decision can be analyzed in an NPV setting. The NPV of granting credit de- pends on five factors: revenue effects, cost effects, the cost of debt, the probability of non- payment, and the cash discount.
3. Optimal credit policy. The optimal amount of credit the firm offers depends on the competi- tive conditions under which it operates. These conditions determine the carrying costs asso- ciated with granting credit and the opportunity costs of the lost sales from refusing to offer credit. The optimal credit policy minimizes the sum of these two costs.
4. Credit analysis. We looked at the decision to grant credit to a particular customer. We saw that two considerations are very important: the cost relative to the selling price and the pos- sibility of repeat business.
5. Collection policy. Collection policy is the method of monitoring the age of accounts receiv- able and dealing with past-due accounts. We describe how an aging schedule can be pre- pared and the procedures a firm might use to collect on past-due accounts.
6. The economic order quantity (EOQ) model. This traditional approach to inventory sets the optimal order size and with it the average inventory, trading off ordering or set-up costs against carrying costs. The optimal inventory minimizes the sum of these costs.
7. Just-in-time inventory. A relatively new approach, JIT reduces inventory by scheduling pro- duction and deliveries of work-in-process to arrive just in time for the next stage of produc- tion. Implementation requires detailed planning with suppliers and advanced information and communications systems such as Electronic Data Interchange (EDI).
Key Terms aging schedule (page 588) captive finance company (page 581) cash discount (page 576) collection policy (page 573) credit analysis (page 573) credit cost curve (page 581) credit instrument (page 578) credit period (page 575)
credit scoring (page 585) five Cs of credit (page 585) invoice (page 575) just-in-time inventory (JIT) (page 598) multiple discriminant analysis (MDA) (page 586) spread (page 585) terms of sale (page 573)
Chapter Review Problems and Self-Test 20.1 Credit Policy The Cold Fusion Corporation (manufacturer
of the Mr. Fusion home power plant) is considering a new credit policy. The current policy is cash only. The new policy would involve extending credit for one period. Based on the following information, determine if a switch is advisable. The interest rate is 2.0 percent per period.
Current Policy New Policy
Price per unit $ 175 $ 175 Cost per unit $ 130 $ 130 Sales per period in units 1000 1100
20.2 Discounts and Default Risk The ICU Binocular Corporation is considering a change in credit policy. The current policy is cash only, and sales per period are 5000 units at a price of $95. If credit is offered, the new price would be $100 per unit and the credit would be extended for one period. Unit sales are not expected to change, and all customers would take the credit. ICU anticipates that 2 percent of its customers will default. If the required return is 3 percent per period, is the change a good idea? What if only half the customers take the offered credit?
600 Part 7: Short-Term Financial Planning and Management
20Ross_Chapter20_4th.indd 60020Ross_Chapter20_4th.indd 600 12-11-27 12:1412-11-27 12:14
20.3 Credit Where Credit Is Due You are trying to decide whether or not to extend credit to a particular customer. Your variable cost is $10 per unit; the selling price is $14. This cus- tomer wants to buy 100 units today and pay in 60 days. You think there is a 10 percent chance of default. The required re- turn is 3 percent per 60 days. Should you extend credit? As- sume this is a onetime sale and the customer will not buy if credit is not extended.
20.4 The EOQ Heusen Computer Manufacturing starts each per- iod with 4000 CPUs in stock. This stock is depleted each month and reordered. If the carrying cost per CPU is $1, and the fixed order cost is $10, is Heusen following an economi- cally advisable strategy?
Answers to Self-Test Problems 20.1 If the switch is made, an extra 100 units per period would be sold at a gross profit of $175 - 130 = $45 each. The total benefit is thus $45
× 100 = $4,500 per period. At 2.0 percent per period forever, the PV is $4,500/.02 = $225,000. The cost of the switch is equal to this period’s revenue of $175 × 1000 units = $175,000 plus the cost of producing the extra 100 units,
100 × $130 = $13,000. The total cost is thus $188,000, and the NPV is $225,000 - 188,000 = $37,000. The switch should be made. 20.2 The costs per period are the same whether or not credit is offered; so we can ignore the production costs. The firm currently sells and
collects $95 × 5000 = $475,000 per period. If credit is offered, sales rise to $100 × 5000 = $500,000. Defaults will be 2 percent of sales, so the cash inflow under the new policy is .98 × $500,000 = $490,000. This amounts to an extra
$15,000 every period. At 3 percent per period, the PV is $15,000/.03 = $500,000. If the switch is made, ICU would give up this month’s revenues of $475,000; so the NPV of the switch is $25,000. If only half switch, then the NPV is half as large: $12,500.
20.3 If the customer pays in 60 days, then you collect $14 × 100 = $1,400. There’s only a 90 percent chance of collecting this; so you expect to get $1,400 × .90 = $1,260 in 60 days. The present value of this is $1,260/1.03 = $1,223.3. Your cost is $10 × 100 = $1,000; so the NPV is $223.3. Credit should be extended.
20.4 We can answer by first calculating Heusen’s carrying and restocking costs. The average inventory is 2000 CPUs, and, since the carrying costs are $1 per CPU, total carrying costs are $2,000. Heusen restocks every month at a fixed order cost of $10, so the total restocking costs are $120. What we see is that carrying costs are large relative to reorder costs, so Heusen is carrying too much inventory.
To determine the optimal inventory policy, we can use the EOQ model. Because Heusen orders 4000 CPUs 12 times per year, total needs (T) are 48,000 CPUs. The fixed order cost is $10, and the carrying cost per unit (CC) is $1. The EOQ is therefore:
EOQ = √ _______
2T × F ______ CC
= √ ________________
(2 × 48,000) × $10 ________________ $1 = √
_______ 960,000
= 979.8 units We can check this by noting that the average inventory is about 490 CPUs, so the carrying cost is $490. Heusen would have to reorder
48,000/979.8 = 49 times. The fixed reorder cost is $10, so the total restocking cost is also $490.
Concepts Review and Critical Thinking Questions 1. (LO1) Describe each of the following: a. Sight draft b. Time draft c. Banker’s acceptance d. Promissory note e. Trade acceptance 2. (LO2) In what form is trade credit most commonly offered?
What is the credit instrument in this case? 3. (LO2) What are the costs associated with carrying receiv-
ables? What are the costs associated with not granting credit? What do we call the sum of the costs for different levels of receivables?
4. (LO4) What are the five Cs of credit? Explain why each is important.
5. (LO2) What are some of the factors that determine the length of the credit period? Why is the length of the buyer’s operat- ing cycle often considered an upper bound on the length of the credit period?
6. (LO2) In each of the following pairings, indicate which firm would probably have a longer credit period and explain your reasoning.
a. Firm A sells a miracle cure for baldness; Firm B sells toupees.
b. Firm A specializes in products for landlords; Firm B spe- cializes in products for renters.
c. Firm A sells to customers with an inventory turnover of 10 times; Firm B sells to customers with an inventory turnover of 20 times.
d. Firm A sells fresh fruit; Firm B sells canned fruit. e. Firm A sells and installs carpeting; Firm B sells rugs. 7. (LO5) What are the different inventory types? How do the
types differ? Why are some types said to have dependent de- mand whereas other types are said to have independent demand?
CHAPTER 20: Credit and Inventory Management 601
20Ross_Chapter20_4th.indd 60120Ross_Chapter20_4th.indd 601 12-11-27 12:1412-11-27 12:14
8. (LO5) If a company moves to a JIT inventory management system, what will happen to inventory turnover? What will happen to total asset turnover? What will happen to return on equity, ROE? (Hint: remember the Du Pont equation from Chapter 3.)
9. (LO5) If a company’s inventory carrying costs are $5 million per year and its fixed order costs are $8 million per year, do you think the firm keeps too much inventory on hand or too little? Why?
10. (LO5) At least part of Dell’s corporate profits can be traced to its inventory management. Using just-in-time inventory, Dell typically maintains an inventory of three to four days’ sales. Competitors such as Hewlett-Packard and IBM have at- tempted to match Dell’s inventory policies, but lag far behind. In an industry where the price of PC components continues to decline, Dell clearly has a competitive advantage. Why would you say that it is to Dell’s advantage to have such a short in- ventory period? If doing this is valuable, why don’t all other PC manufacturers switch to Dell’s approach?
Questions and Problems 1. Cash Discounts (LO2) You place an order for 350 units of inventory at a unit price of $140. The supplier offers terms of 1/10,
net 30. a. How long do you have to pay before the account is overdue? If you take the full period, how much should you remit? b. What is the discount being offered? How quickly must you pay to get the discount? If you do take the discount, how much
should you remit? c. If you don’t take the discount, how much interest are you paying implicitly? How many days’ credit are you receiving?
2. Size of Accounts Receivable (LO1) The Moncton Corporation has annual sales of $38 million. The average collection period is 34 days. What is the average investment in accounts receivable as shown on the balance sheet? Assume 365 days per year
3. ACP and Accounts Receivable (LO1) Kyoto Joe Inc. sells earnings forecasts for Japanese securities. Its credit terms are 2/10, net 30. Based on experience, 65 percent of all customers will take the discount.
a. What is the average collection period for Kyoto Joe? b. If Kyoto Joe sells 1300 forecasts every month at a price of $1,750 each, what is its average balance sheet amount in accounts
receivable? Assume 365 days per year. 4. Size of Accounts Receivable (LO1) Melanson Inc. has weekly credit sales of $17,300, and the average collection period is 36
days. What is the average accounts receivable figure? 5. Terms of Sale (LO2) A firm offers terms of 1/10, net 30. What effective annual interest rate does the firm earn when a customer
does not take the discount? Assume 365 days per year. Without doing any calculations, explain what will happen to this effective rate if:
a. The discount is changed to 2 percent. b. The credit period is increased to 45 days. c. The discount period is increased to 15 days.
6. ACP and Receivables Turnover (LO1) Dieppe Inc. has an average collection period of 33 days. Its average daily investment in receivables is $42,300. What are annual credit sales? What is the receivables turnover? Assume 365 days per year.
7. Size of Accounts Receivable (LO1) Champlain Ltd. sells 8,200 units of its perfume collection each year at a price per unit of $430. All sales are on credit with terms of 1/10, net 40. The discount is taken by 60 percent of the customers. What is the amount of the company’s accounts receivable? In reaction to sales by its main competitor, Hamlet, Champlain is considering a change in its credit policy to terms of 2/10, net 30 to preserve its market share. How will this change in policy affect accounts receivable? Assume 365 days per year.
8. Size of Accounts Receivable (LO1) The Thaddee Corporation sells on credit terms of net 30. Its accounts are, on average, 7 days past due. If annual credit sales are $9.3 million, what is the company’s balance sheet amount in accounts receivable? Assume 365 days per year.
9. Evaluating Credit Policy (LO4) Barn Yard Inc. is a wholesaler that stocks engine components and tests equipment for the commercial aircraft industry. A new customer has placed an order for eight high-bypass turbine engines, which increase fuel economy. The variable cost is $1.9 million per unit, and the credit price is $2.015 million each. Credit is extended for one period, and based on historical experience, payment for about 1 out of every 200 such orders is never collected. The required return is 1.8 percent per period.
a. Assuming that this is a one-time order, should it be filled? The customer will not buy if credit is not extended. b. What is the break-even probability of default in part (a)? c. Suppose that customers who don’t default become repeat customers and place the same order every period forever. Further
assume that repeat customers never default. Should the order be filled? What is the break-even probability of default? d. Describe in general terms why credit terms will be more liberal when repeat orders are a possibility.
Basic (Questions
1–12)
602 Part 7: Short-Term Financial Planning and Management
20Ross_Chapter20_4th.indd 60220Ross_Chapter20_4th.indd 602 12-11-27 12:1412-11-27 12:14
10. Credit Policy Evaluation (LO4) Hildegarde Inc. is considering a change in its cash-only sales policy. The new terms of sale would be net one month. Based on the following information, determine if Hildegarde should proceed or not. Describe the buildup of receivables in this case. The required return is 0.95 percent per month.
Current Policy New Policy
Price per unit $720 $720 Cost per unit $525 $525 Unit sales per month 1,240 1,290
11. EOQ (LO6) Odium Manufacturing uses 2500 switch assemblies per week and then reorders another 2500. If the relevant carrying cost per switch assembly is $7.50, and the fixed order cost is $1,300, is Odium’s inventory policy optimal? Why or why not?
12. EOQ (LO6) The Crandall store begins each week with 300 phasers in stock. This stock is depleted each week and reordered. If the carrying cost per phaser is $38 per year and the fixed order cost is $75, what is the total carrying cost? What is the restocking cost? Should Crandall increase or decrease its order size? Describe an optimal inventory policy for Crandall in terms of order size and order frequency.
13. EOQ Derivation (LO6) Prove that when carrying costs and restocking costs are as described in the chapter, the EOQ must occur at the point where the carrying costs and restocking costs are equal.
14. Credit Policy Evaluation (LO4) The Berry Corporation is considering a change in its cash-only policy. The new terms would be net one period. Based on the following information, determine if Berry should proceed or not. The required return is 2.5 percent per period.
Current Policy New Policy
Price per unit $86 $88 Cost per unit $47 $47 Unit sales per month 3,510 3,620
15. Credit Policy Evaluation (LO4) Codiac Corp. currently has an all-cash credit policy. It is considering making a change in the credit policy by going to terms of net 30 days. Based on the following information, what do you recommend? The required return is .95 percent per month.
Current Policy New Policy
Price per unit $150 $154 Cost per unit $130 $133 Unit sales per month 1,550 1,580
16. Credit Policy (LO4) The Salisbury Bicycle Shop has decided to offer credit to its customers during the spring selling season. Sales are expected to be 500 bicycles. The average cost to the shop of a bicycle is $390. The owner knows that only 96 percent of the customers will be able to make their payments. To identify the remaining 4 percent, the company is considering subscribing to a credit agency. The initial charge for this service is $750, with an additional charge of $6 per individual report. Should she subscribe to the agency?
17. Break-Even Quantity (LO3) In Problem 14, what is the break-even quantity for the new credit policy? 18. Credit Markup (LO3) In Problem 14, what is the break-even price per unit that should be charged under the new credit policy?
Assume that the sales figure under the new policy is 3,750 units and all other values remain the same. 19. Credit Markup (LO3) In Problem 15, what is the break-even price per unit under the new credit policy? Assume all other
values remain the same. 20. Safety Stocks and Order Points (LO6) Humphrey Inc. expects to sell 700 of its designer suits every week. The store is open
seven days a week and expects to sell the same number of suits every day. The company has an EOQ of 500 suits and a safety stock of 100 suits. Once an order is placed, it takes three days for Humphrey to get the suits in. How many orders does the company place per year? Assume that it is Monday morning before the store opens, and a shipment of suits has just arrived. When will Humphrey place its next order?
21. Evaluating Credit Policy (LO2) Engi Sola Corp. manufactures solar engines for tractor trailers. Given the fuel savings available, new orders for 125 units have been made by customers requesting credit. The variable cost is $11,400 per unit, and the credit price is $13,000 each. Credit is extended for one period. The required return is 1.9 percent per period. If Engi Sola extends credit, it expects that 30 percent of the customers will repeat customers and place the same order every period forever and the remaining customers will be one-time orders. Should credit be extended?
22. Evaluating Credit Policy (LO2) In the previous problem, assume that the probability of default is 15 percent. Should the orders be filled now? Assume the number of repeat customers is affected by the defaults. In other words, 30 percent of the customers who do not default are expected to be repeat customers?
Intermediate (Questions
13–16)
Challenge (Questions
17–22)
CHAPTER 20: Credit and Inventory Management 603
20Ross_Chapter20_4th.indd 60320Ross_Chapter20_4th.indd 603 12-11-27 12:1412-11-27 12:14
Piepkorn Manufacturing Working Capital Management
You have recently been hired by Piepkorn Manufacturing to work in the newly established treasury department. Piepkorn Manufacturing is a small company that produces cardboard boxes in a variety of sizes for different purchasers. Gary Piep- korn, the owner of the company, works primarily in the sales and production areas of the company. Currently, the com- pany puts all receivables in one shoebox and all payables in another. Because of the disorganized system, the finance area needs work, and that’s what you’ve been brought in to do. The company currently has a cash balance of $240,000, and it plans to purchase new box-folding machinery in the fourth quarter at a cost of $445,000. The machinery will be purchased with cash because of a discount offered. The com- pany’s policy is to maintain a minimum cash balance of $125,000. All sales and purchases are made on credit. Gary Piepkorn has projected the following gross sales for each of the next four quarters:
Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4
Gross sales $1,240,000 $1,310,000 $1,370,000 $1,450,000
Also, gross sales for the first quarter of next year are projected at $1,290,000. Piepkorn currently has an accounts receivable period of 53 days and an accounts receivable balance of $630,000. Twenty percent of the accounts receivable balance is from a company that has just entered bankruptcy, and it is likely this portion of the accounts receivable will never be collected. Piepkorn typically orders 50 percent of next quarter’s pro- jected gross sales in the current quarter, and suppliers are typi- cally paid in 42 days. Wages, taxes, and other costs run about 30 percent of gross sales. The company has a quarterly inter- est payment of $130,000 on its long-term debt. The company uses a local bank for its short-term financial needs. It pays 1.5 percent per quarter in all short-term bor- rowing and maintains a money market account that pays 1 percent per quarter on all short-term deposits. Gary has asked you to prepare a cash budget and short- term financial plan for the company under the current poli- cies. He has also asked you to prepare additional plans based on changes in several inputs. The following questions introduce refinements to the short- term financial plan reflecting changes in the minimum cash balance, credit policy, and credit terms from suppliers. For each question, rework the cash budget and determine the in- cremental cash generated or expended due to the change. Based on your incremental cash calculation, state your recom- mendation on whether the change should be implemented. In your analysis, assume that all the preceding changes are in place.
Questions
1. Use the numbers given to complete the cash budget and short-term financial plan.
2. Rework the cash budget and short-term financial plan as- suming Piepkorn changes to a minimum balance of $130,000.
3. You have looked at the credit policy offered by your com- petitors and have determined that the industry standard credit policy is 1/10, net 40. The discount will begin to be offered on the first day of the first quarter. You want to examine how this credit policy would affect the cash budget and short-term financial plan. If this credit policy is implemented, you believe that 40 percent of all sales will take advantage of it, and the accounts receivable period will decline to 36 days. Rework the cash budget and short-term financial plan under the new credit policy and a minimum cash balance of $130,000. What interest rate are you effectively offering customers?
4. You have talked to the company’s suppliers about the credit terms Piepkorn receives. Currently, the company receives terms of net 45. The suppliers have stated that they would offer new credit terms of 1.5/15, net 40. The discount would begin to be offered in the first day of the first quarter. What interest rate are the suppliers offering the company? Rework the cash budget and short-term financial plan assuming you take the credit terms on all orders and the minimum cash balance is $100,000. Also assume that Piepkorn offers the credit terms in the previ- ous question.
PIEPKORN MANUFACTURING Cash Budget
Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4
Target cash balance Net cash inflow Ending cash balance Minimum cash balance Cumulative surplus (deficit)
PIEPKORN MANUFACTURING Short-Term Financial Plan
Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4
Target cash balance Net cash inflow New short-term investments Income from short-term investments Short-term investments sold New short-term borrowing Interest on short-term borrowing Short-term borrowing repaid Ending cash balance Minimum cash balance Cumulative surplus (deficit) Beginning short-term investments Ending short-term investments Beginning short-term debt Ending short-term debt
MINI CASE
604 Part 7: Short-Term Financial Planning and Management
20Ross_Chapter20_4th.indd 60420Ross_Chapter20_4th.indd 604 12-11-27 12:1412-11-27 12:14
Internet Application Questions 1. Working capital financing is no longer an area limited to traditional banks. In fact, for some high-growth industries, institu-
tions such as the Business Development Bank of Canada (BDC) step in and provide both advice and working capital loans, sometimes leading a syndicate. Click on the BDC link below and describe their working capital financing arrangement. bdc.ca
2. Export Development Canada (EDC) (edc.ca) provides trade finance and risk management services to Canadian exporters and investors in up to 200 markets. Founded in 1944, EDC is a Crown corporation that operates as a commercial financial institu- tion. One of their products is Equity Investments (edc.ca/EN/Our-Solutions/Pages/supply-chain-financing.aspx). This product allows a Canadian exporter to improve its financial efficiency of supply chain. Describe the advantage of this product vis-à-vis a more traditional line of credit (edc.ca/en/our-solutions/financing/foreign-buyer-financing/pages/lines-of-credit.aspx).
3. How do you think banks make personal credit line decisions? As a student, you often face a banker who is trying to ascertain your “credit score.” TransUnion Canada is one of Canada’s three major credit-reporting agencies. Go to transunion.ca and view the sample credit profile. Based on the credit-scoring model provided, what are three of the most important items banks look at when making the personal credit decision?
4. Canada Business Network, the Government Services for Entrepreneurs in Canada, provides best practices on improving work- ing capital and inventory management. To learn more about forecasting and benchmarking techniques visit canadabusiness.ca/ eng/page/2636/
CHAPTER 20: Credit and Inventory Management 605
20Ross_Chapter20_4th.indd 60520Ross_Chapter20_4th.indd 605 12-11-27 12:1412-11-27 12:14
Corporations with signifi cant foreign operations are oft en called international corporations or multinationals. Such corporations must consider many fi nancial factors that do not directly aff ect purely domestic fi rms. Th ese include foreign exchange rates, diff ering interest rates from country to country, complex accounting methods for foreign operations, foreign tax rates, and foreign government intervention.
Key topics of international fi nancial management, foreign exchange rates, for example, are also of interest to many smaller Canadian businesses. Canada has an open economy linked very closely by a free-trade agreement to its largest trading partner, the United States. Th ere are also very important economic and fi nancial ties to Europe, the Pacifi c Rim, and other major econo- mies worldwide. To illustrate, in the Atlantic Provinces, independent fi sh plants that supply the Boston market also wholesale lobster to Europe. Th ese smaller corporations do not qualify as multinationals in the league of Rio Tinto Alcan or McCain, but their fi nancial managers must know how to manage foreign exchange risk.
Th e basic principles of corporate fi nance still apply to international corporations; like domestic companies, they seek to invest in projects that create more value for the shareholders than they cost and to arrange fi nancing that raises cash at the lowest possible cost. In other words, the net present value principle holds for both foreign and domestic operations, but it is usually more complicated to apply the NPV rule to foreign investments.
riotintoalcan.com mccain.ca
INTERNATIONAL CORPORATE FINANCE
C H A P T E R 2 1
O n June 6, 2012, the Canadian dollar closed at 97 cents U.S. A high Canadian dollar creates challenges for export-sensitive manufacturers who
must contend with a rising loonie that makes their
goods more expensive. As for consumers, the rise
in the loonie will make the price of imported foods
and goods cheaper. According to Peter Hall, Chief
Economist, EDC, “As the U.S. and global economies
improve, higher economic flows will draw liquidity
back into normal channels, weakening commodity
prices. Lower commodity prices will hold the loo-
nie just below parity, helping Canadian exporters to
cash in on the global recovery.” In this chapter, we
explore the role played by currencies and exchange
rates, along with a number of other key topics in
international finance.
Learning Object ives
After studying this chapter, you should understand:
LO1 The different terminologies used in international finance.
LO2 How exchange rates are quoted, what they mean, and the difference between spot and forward exchange rates.
LO3 Purchasing power parity, interest rate parity, unbiased forward rates, uncovered interest rate parity, and the generalized Fisher effect and their implications for exchange rate changes.
LO4 How to estimate NPV using home and foreign currency approaches.
LO5 The different types of exchange rate risk and ways firms manage exchange rate risk.
LO6 The impact of political risk on international business investing.
P A R T 8
© D
es ig
np ic
s/ A
ll C
an ad
a Ph
ot os
21Ross_Chapter21_3rd_B.indd 60621Ross_Chapter21_3rd_B.indd 606 12-12-03 13:3912-12-03 13:39
One of the most signifi cant complications of international fi nance is foreign exchange. Th e foreign exchange markets provide important information and opportunities for an international corporation when it undertakes capital budgeting and fi nancing decisions. As we discuss, interna- tional exchange rates, interest rates, and infl ation rates are closely related. We spend much of this chapter exploring the connection between these fi nancial variables.
We won’t have much to say here about the role of cultural and social diff erences in interna- tional business. Also, we do not discuss the implications of diff ering political and economic sys- tems. Th ese factors are of great importance to international businesses, but it would take another book to do them justice. Consequently, we focus only on some purely fi nancial considerations in international fi nance and some key aspects of foreign exchange markets.
21.1 Terminology
Chapter 1 had a lot to say about trends in world fi nancial markets, including globalization. Th e fi rst step in learning about international fi nance is to conquer the new vocabulary. As with any specialty, international fi nance is rich in jargon. Accordingly, we get started on the subject with a highly eclectic vocabulary exercise.
Th e terms that follow are presented alphabetically, and they are not of equal importance. We chose these particular ones because they appear frequently in the fi nancial press or because they illustrate some of the colourful language of international fi nance.
1. The cross-rate is the implicit exchange rate between two currencies when both are quoted in some third currency. Usually the third currency is the U.S. dollar.
2. A Eurobond is a bond issued in multiple countries, but denominated in a single currency, usually the issuer’s home currency. Such bonds have become an important way to raise cap- ital for many international companies and governments. Eurobonds are issued outside the restrictions that apply to domestic offerings and are syndicated and traded mostly from Lon- don. Trading can and does occur anywhere there is a buyer and a seller.
3. Eurocurrency is money deposited in a financial centre outside of the country whose cur- rency is involved. For instance, Eurodollars—the most widely used Eurocurrency—are U.S. dollars deposited in banks outside the U.S. banking system. EuroCanadian are Canadian dollar bank deposits outside Canada.
4. Export Development Canada (EDC) is a federal Crown corporation with a mandate to pro- mote Canadian exports. EDC provides financing for foreign companies that purchase Canad- ian exports. EDC also insures exporters’ receivables and provides coverage against loss of assets due to political risks in foreign markets. Most of EDC’s customers are small businesses.1
5. Foreign bonds, unlike Eurobonds, are issued in a single country and are usually denomi- nated in that country’s currency. Often, the country in which these bonds are issued draws distinctions between them and bonds issued by domestic issuers, including different tax laws, restrictions on the amount issued, or tougher disclosure rules.
Foreign bonds often are nicknamed for the country where they are issued: Yankee bonds (United States), Samurai bonds (Japan), Rembrandt bonds (the Netherlands), and Bulldog bonds (Britain). Partly because of tougher regulations and disclosure requirements, the for- eign-bond market hasn’t grown in past years with the vigor of the Eurobond market. A sub- stantial portion of all foreign bonds is issued in Switzerland.
6. Gilts, technically, are British and Irish government securities, although the term also in- cludes issues of local British authorities and some overseas public-sector offerings.
7. The London Interbank Offer Rate (LIBOR) is the rate that most international banks charge one another for loans of Eurodollars overnight in the London market. LIBOR is a corner- stone in the pricing of money market issues and other short-term debt issues by both gov- ernment and corporate borrowers. Interest rates are frequently quoted as some spread over LIBOR, then they float with the LIBOR rate.2
1 More information about EDC is available at its website: edc.ca 2 For more on how LIBOR is calculated, see bbalibor.com/bbalibor-explained/the-basics
cross-rate The implicit exchange rate between two currencies (usually non-U.S.) quoted in some third currency (usually the U.S. dollar).
Eurobond International bonds issued in multiple countries but denominated in a single currency (usually the issuer’s currency).
Eurocurrency Money deposited in a financial centre outside of the country whose currency is involved.
Export Development Canada (EDC) Federal Crown corporation that promotes Canadian exports by making loans to foreign purchasers.
foreign bonds International bonds issued in a single country, usually denominated in that country’s currency.
gilts British and Irish government securities, including issues of local British authorities and some overseas public-sector offerings.
London Interbank Offer Rate (LIBOR) The rate most international banks charge one another for overnight Eurodollar loans.
Chapter 21: International Corporate Finance 607
21Ross_Chapter21_3rd_B.indd 60721Ross_Chapter21_3rd_B.indd 607 12-12-03 13:3912-12-03 13:39
8. There are two basic kinds of swaps: interest rate and currency. An interest rate swap occurs when two parties exchange a floating-rate payment for a fixed-rate payment or vice versa. Currency swaps are agreements to deliver one currency in exchange for another. Often both types of swaps are used in the same transaction when debt denominated in different curren- cies is swapped. Chartered banks make an active market in arranging swaps, and swap vol- umes have grown rapidly.
1. What are the differences between a Eurobond and a foreign bond?
2. What are Eurodollars?
21.2 Foreign Exchange Markets and Exchange Rates
Th e foreign exchange market, also known as forex or FX market, is undoubtedly the world’s larg- est fi nancial market. It is the market where one country’s currency is traded for another’s. Most of the trading takes place in a few currencies: the U.S. dollar ($), the European Union Euro (EUR), the British pound sterling (£), the Japanese yen (¥), and the Swiss franc (CHF). Table 21.1 lists some of the more common currencies and their symbols.
Th e foreign exchange market is an over-the-counter market, so there is no single location where traders get together. Instead, market participants are located in the major banks around the world. Th ey communicate using computers, telephones, and other telecommunications devices. For example, one communications network for foreign transactions is the Society for Worldwide Interbank Financial Telecommunications (SWIFT), a Belgian not-for-profi t co-operative. Using data transmission lines, a bank in Toronto, the centre of Canada’s foreign exchange trading, can send messages to a bank in London via SWIFT regional processing centres.
TABLE 21.1
International currency symbols (2012)
Country Currency Symbol
Australia Australian Dollar
AUD
Austria Euro EUR
Belgium Euro EUR
Canada Canadian Dollar
CAD
China Renminbi RMB
Denmark Krone DKK
Finland Euro EUR
France Euro EUR
Germany Euro EUR
Greece Euro EUR
India Rupee ₹
Iran Rial IRR
Italy Euro EUR
Country Currency Symbol
Japan Yen ¥
Kuwait Dinar KWD
Mexico Peso MXN
Netherlands Euro EUR
Norway Krone NOK
Saudi Arabia Riyal SAR
Singapore Dollar SGD
South Africa Rand R
Spain Euro EUR
Sweden Krona SEK
Switzerland Franc CHF
United Kingdom Pound £
United States Dollar $
swaps Agreements to exchange two securities or currencies.
Concept Questions
foreign exchange market The market where one country’s currency is traded for another’s.
608 Part 8: Topics in Corporate Finance
21Ross_Chapter21_3rd_B.indd 60821Ross_Chapter21_3rd_B.indd 608 12-12-03 13:3912-12-03 13:39
Th e many diff erent types of participants in the foreign exchange market include the following:
1. Importers who pay for goods involving foreign currencies by converting foreign exchange. 2. Exporters who receive foreign currency and may want to convert to the domestic currency. 3. Portfolio managers who buy or sell foreign stocks and bonds. 4. Foreign exchange brokers who match buy and sell orders. 5. Traders who “make a market” in foreign exchange. 6. Speculators who try to profit from changes in exchange rates.
Exchange Rates An exchange rate is simply the price of one country’s currency expressed in another country’s currency. In practice, almost all trading of currencies worldwide takes place in terms of the U.S. dollar.
EXCHANGE RATE QUOTATIONS Figure 21.1 reproduces exchange rate quotations as they appear in The National Post and The Wall Street Journal. Notice that the rates were supplied by Thomson Reuters. The bottom part of Figure 21.1 is the cross-rates of seven main currencies. Because of the heavy volume of transactions in U.S. dollars, U.S./Canada rates appear first. The first row at the top of Figure 21.1 (labelled “A US$ buys”) gives the number of Canadian dollars it takes to buy one unit of foreign currency. For example, the U.S./Canada spot rate is quoted at 1.0279, which means you can buy one U.S. dollar today with 1.0279 Canadian dollars.3
Th e next section (labelled “A CAD buys”) shows the indirect exchange rate. Th is is the amount of U.S. currency per Canadian dollar. Th e U.S./Canada spot rate is quoted here at 0.9729 U.S. dol- lars for one Canadian dollar. Naturally this second exchange rate is just the reciprocal of the fi rst one, 1/0.9729 = 1.0279.
Th e rest of Figure 21.1 shows the exchange rates for other foreign currencies. Notice that the most important currencies are listed fi rst: European euros, Japanese yen, and U.K. pounds. In this part of the fi gure, the table labelled “A CAD buys” gives the amount of foreign currency that one Canadian dollars is worth. For example, one Canadian dollar buys 0.6281 British pounds. Th e table labelled “A US$ buys” repeats the same information in U.S. dollars. With one U.S. dollar you can buy 0.6455 pounds.
CROSS-RATES AND TRIANGLE ARBITRAGE Using the U.S. dollar or the euro as the common denominator in quoting exchange rates greatly reduces the number of possible cross-currency quotes. For example, with five major currencies, there would potentially be 10 exchange rates instead of just 4.4 Also, the fact that the dollar is used throughout cuts down on inconsistencies in the exchange rate quotations.
EXAMPLE 21.1: A yen for Fast Cars
Suppose you have CAD 1,000. Based on the rates in Fig- ure 21.1, how many Japanese yen can you get? Alterna- tively, if a Porsche costs EUR 100,000, how many Canadian dollars will you need to buy it? (EUR is the abbreviation for euros.)
The exchange rate for yen is given in Canadian dollars per yen as 0.0130 (bottom section under yen). Your CAD 1,000 thus gets you:
$1,000/0.0130 dollars per yen = 76,923 yen
Since the exchange rate in dollars per euro is 1.2929, you need:
EUR 100,000 × 1.2929 CAD per EUR = CAD 129,290
3 The spot rate is for immediate trading. Forward rates are for future transactions and are discussed in detail later. 4 In discussing cross-rates, we follow Canadian practice of using the U.S. dollar. There are four exchange rates instead of five because one exchange rate would involve the exchange rate for a currency with itself. More generally, it might seem there should be 25 exchange rates with five currencies. There are 25 different combinations, but, of these, five involve the exchange rate of a currency for itself. Of the remaining 20, half of them are redundant because they are just the re- ciprocals of the exchange rate. Of the remaining 10, six can be eliminated by using a common denominator.
exchange rate The price of one country’s currency expressed in another country’s currency.
For current exchange rates visit xe.com
Chapter 21: International Corporate Finance 609
21Ross_Chapter21_3rd_B.indd 60921Ross_Chapter21_3rd_B.indd 609 12-12-03 13:3912-12-03 13:39
Earlier, we defi ned the cross-rate as the exchange rate for a non-U.S. currency expressed in another non-U.S. currency. For example, suppose we observed the following:
¥ per $1US = 100.00 AUD per $1US = 1.50
FIGURE 21.1 EXCHANGE RATE QUOTATIONS
F O R E I G N E X C H A N G E A US$ buys: Latest
Prev day
Day %ch
Wk %ch
4wk %ch
Inverse rate
Canada $ 1.0279 1.0379 –1.0 –0.2 +2.6 0.9729
euro 0.7955 0.8033 –1.0 –1.6 +2.9 1.2571
Japan yen 79.23 78.76 +0.6 +0.2 –0.5 0.0126
UK pound 0.6455 0.6503 –0.7 –0.1 +4.2 1.5492
Swiss franc 0.9551 0.9647 –1.0 –1.6 +2.9 1.047
Australia $ 1.0082 1.0265 –1.8 –2.1 +1.4 0.9919
Mexico peso 14.0278 14.2256 –1.4 –0.8 +3.9 0.0713
Hong Kong 7.7582 7.7586 nil –0.1 –0.1 0.1289
Singapore $ 1.2748 1.2862 –0.9 –1.1 +1.8 0.7844
China renminbi 6.3637 6.367 –0.1 +0.1 +0.9 0.1571
India rupee 55.27 55.55 –0.5 –1.5 +2.8 0.0181
Russia rouble 32.3482 33.065 –2.2 –1.5 +6.5 0.0309
Brazil real 2.03 2.0183 +0.6 +0.9 +3.1 0.4926
Israel shekel 3.8806 3.8979 –0.4 nil +1.6 0.2577
A CAD$ buys: Latest Prev day
Day %ch
Wk %ch
4wk %ch
Inverse rate
US$ 0.9279 0.9635 +1.0 +0.2 –2.6 1.0279
euro 0.774 0.7742 nil –1.5 +0.3 1.292
Japan yen 77.05 75.85 +1.6 +0.4 –3.0 0.013
UK pound 0.6281 0.6267 +0.2 +0.1 +1.5 1.5921
Swiss franc 0.9288 0.9289 nil –1.5 +0.3 1.0767
Australia $ 0.9811 0.9894 –0.8 –2.0 –1.2 1.0193
Mexico peso 13.6434 13.7029 –0.4 –0.6 +1.3 0.0733
Hong Kong 7.5467 7.474 +1.0 +0.1 –2.6 0.1325
Singapore $ 1.2399 1.2385 +0.1 –0.9 –0.8 0.8065
China renminbi 6.191 6.1348 +0.9 +0.3 –1.7 0.1615
India rupee 53.77 53.52 +0.5 –1.4 +0.2 0.0186
Russia rouble 31.4723 31.8576 –1.2 –1.3 +3.8 0.0318
Brazil real 1.9751 1.9446 +1.6 +1.0 +0.5 0.5063
Israel shekel 3.7756 3.7556 +0.5 +0.2 –1.1 0.2649
Supplied by Th omson Reuters. Listings indicative of late aft ernoon rates.
F O R W A R D E X C H A N G E Per US$ 1 mo 3 mo 6 mo 1 yr 2 yr 3 yr 4 yr 5 yr
C$ 1.0285 1.0298 1.0316 1.0348 1.0413 1.0495 1.0544 1.0561
euro* 1.2572 1.2580 1.2594 1.2639 1.2731 1.2796 1.2871 1.2943
Yen 79.21 79.21 79.21 79.20 79.19 79.18 79.16 79.14
£* 1.5488 1.5484 1.5478 1.5469 1.5451 1.5437 1.5452 1.5478
Per CAD$
US$ 0.9723 0.9711 0.9694 0.9663 0.9603 0.9528 0.9484 0.9469
euro* 1.2930 1.2955 1.2992 1.3079 1.3256 1.3429 1.3571 1.3669
Yen 76.98 76.82 76.57 75.95 74.42 72.49 70.48 68.41
£* 1.5928 1.5944 1.5965 1.6004 1.6082 1.6190 1.6279 1.6333
Source: The National Post, FP Investing, June 7, 2012. Used with permission. The most recent figures can be obtained from The National Post newspaper.
Dollar Euro Pound Franc Peso Yen CAD
Canada 1.0276 1.2929 1.5924 1.0767 0.0733 0.0130 — Japan 79.1899 99.6337 122.7173 82.9777 5.6455 — 77.0640 Mexico 14.0270 17.6482 21.7371 14.6979 — 0.1771 13.6504 Switzerland 0.9544 1.2007 1.4789 — 0.0680 0.0121 0.9287 U.K. 0.6453 0.8119 — 0.6762 0.0460 0.0081 0.6280 Euro 0.7948 — 1.2317 0.8328 0.0567 0.0100 0.7735 U.S. — 1.2582 1.5497 1.0478 0.0713 0.0126 0.9732 Source: ICAP plc; historical data prior to 6/9/11: Th omson Reuters
Source: online.wsj.com/mdc/public/page/2_3023-keyrates.html
610 Part 8: Topics in Corporate Finance
21Ross_Chapter21_3rd_B.indd 61021Ross_Chapter21_3rd_B.indd 610 12-12-03 13:3912-12-03 13:39
Suppose the cross-rate is quoted as:
¥ per AUD = 50.00
What do you think? Th e cross-rate here is inconsistent with the exchange rates. To see this, suppose you have
$100US. If you convert this to Australian dollars, you receive:
$100US × AUD 1.5 per $1 = AUD 150
If you convert this to yen at the cross-rate, you have:
AUD 150 × ¥50 per AUD 1 = ¥7,500
However, if you just convert your U.S. dollars to yen without going through Australian dollars, you have:
$100US × ¥100 per $1 = ¥10,000
What we see is that the yen has two prices, ¥100 per $1US and ¥75 per $1US, depending on how we get them.
To make money, we want to buy low, sell high. Th e important thing to note is that yen are cheaper if you buy them with U.S. dollars because you get 100 yen instead of just 75. You should proceed as follows:
1. Buy 10,000 yen for $100US. 2. Use the 10,000 yen to buy Australian dollars at the cross-rate. Since it takes 50 yen to buy an
Australian dollar, you receive ¥10,000/50 = AUD 200. 3. Use the AUD 200 to buy U.S. dollars. Since the exchange rate is AUD 1.5 per dollar, you re-
ceive AUD 200/1.5 = $133.33, for a round-trip profit of $33.33. 4. Repeat steps 1 through 3.
Th is particular activity is called triangle arbitrage because the arbitrage involves moving through three diff erent exchange rates.
¥100/1$ ↗ ↘
AUD 1.5/1$ = $.67/AUD 1 ← AUD .02/¥1 = ¥50/AUD 1
To prevent such opportunities, it is not diffi cult to see that since a U.S. dollar buys you either 50 yen or 1.5 Australian dollars, the cross-rate must be:
(¥50/$1US)/(AUD 1.5/$1US) = ¥33.33/AUD 1
If it were anything else, there would be a triangle arbitrage opportunity.
Types of Transactions Th ere are two basic types of trades in the foreign exchange market: spot trades and forward trades. A spot trade is an agreement to exchange currency on the spot; this actually means the transac- tion is completed or settled within two business days. Th e exchange rate on a spot trade is called the spot exchange rate. Implicitly, all of the exchange rates and transactions we have discussed so far have referred to the spot market.
FORWARD EXCHANGE RATES A forward trade is an agreement to exchange cur- rency at some time in the future. The exchange rate used is agreed on today and is called the forward exchange rate. A forward trade would normally be settled sometime in the next 12 months, but some forward rates are quoted for as far as 10 years into the future.
Look back at Figure 21.1 to see forward exchange rates quoted for some of the major curren- cies. For example, the spot exchange rate for the U.S. dollar is $1.0279. Th e six month forward exchange rate is U.S. $1 = 1.0316. Th is means you can buy one U.S. dollar today for $1.0279, or you can agree to take delivery of a U.S. dollar in six months and pay $1.0316 at that time.
Notice that the U.S. dollar is more expensive in the forward market ($1.0316 versus $1.0279). Since the U.S. dollar is more expensive in the future than it is today, it is said to be selling at a
spot trade An agreement to trade currencies based on the exchange rate today for settlement in two days.
spot exchange rate The exchange rate on a spot trade.
forward trade Agreement to exchange currency at some time in the future.
forward exchange rate The agreed-on exchange rate to be used in a forward trade.
Chapter 21: International Corporate Finance 611
21Ross_Chapter21_3rd_B.indd 61121Ross_Chapter21_3rd_B.indd 611 12-12-03 13:3912-12-03 13:39
premium relative to the Canadian dollar in the forward market. For the same reason, the Canad- ian dollar is said to be selling at a discount relative to the U.S. dollar. To see the discount, compare the spot and six-month forward rates in the “Per C$” section of Figure 21.1. Th e Canada/U.S. spot rate is 0.9729 and the six-month forward rate is 0.9694. Th e Canadian dollar is selling at a discount in the forward market since buyers with U.S. dollars will pay less for it six months from today.
EXAMPLE 21.2: Shedding Some Pounds
Suppose the exchange rates for the British pound and the euro are:
Pounds per $1US = 0.60 EUR per $1US = 0.90
The cross-rate is 1.6 euros per pound. Is this consistent? Explain how to go about making some money.
The cross-rate should be EUR 0.90/£ .60 = EUR 1.5 per pound. You can buy a pound for EUR 1.5 in one market,
and you can sell a pound for EUR 1.6 in another. So we want to first get some pounds, then use the pounds to buy some euros, and then sell the euros. Assuming you have $100US, you could: 1. Exchange U.S. dollars for pounds: $100US × 0.6 = £60. 2. Exchange pounds for euros: £60 × 1.6 = EUR 96. 3. Exchange euros for U.S. dollars: EUR 96/.90 = $106.67. This would result in a $6.67 U.S. round-trip profit.
Why does the forward market exist? One answer is that it allows businesses and individuals to lock in a future exchange rate today, thereby eliminating any risk from unfavourable shift s in the exchange rate.
EXAMPLE 21.3
In Figure 21.1, the spot exchange rate and the six-month forward rate in Canadian dollars per pound are CAD 1.5921 = 1 pound and $1.5965 = 1 pound, respectively. If you expect 1 million pounds in six months, you will get 1 mil- lion pounds × $1.5965 per pound = $1.5965 million.
Since it is more expensive to buy a pound in the forward market than in the spot market ($1.5965 versus $1.5921), the Canadian dollar is selling at a discount relative to the pound.
EXAMPLE 21.4
From Figure 21.1, the spot and 12-month forward rates in yen per Canadian dollars are 77.05 yen = $1 and 75.95, respectively. You plan to convert ¥10 million in 12 months so you need to know the forward exchange rate in dollar per yen.
$1 = 75.95 yen 1 yen = 1/75.95 = $0.013166
So your ¥10 million converts to $131,666. The spot ex- change rate in dollars per yen is 1/77.05 = $0.012979.
Either way you look at it, the yen is selling at a forward premium. One dollar will buy fewer yen 12 months from now than it does today. And if you converted your funds today, instead of waiting 12 months, you would get more yen.
1. What is triangle arbitrage?
2. What do we mean by the six-month forward exchange rate?
Concept Questions
612 Part 8: Topics in Corporate Finance
21Ross_Chapter21_3rd_B.indd 61221Ross_Chapter21_3rd_B.indd 612 12-12-03 13:3912-12-03 13:39
21.3 Purchasing Power Parity
Now that we have discussed what exchange rate quotations mean, we can address an obvious ques- tion: What determines the level of the spot exchange rate? In addition, we know that exchange rates change through time. A related question is: What determines the rate of change in exchange rates? At least part of the answer in both cases goes by the name of purchasing power parity (PPP), the idea that the exchange rate adjusts to keep purchasing power constant among curren- cies. As we discuss next, there are two forms of PPP, absolute and relative.
Absolute Purchasing Power Parity Th e basic idea behind absolute purchasing power parity is that a commodity costs the same regard- less of what currency is used to purchase it or where it is selling. Th is is a very straight-forward concept. If a beer costs £2 in London, and the exchange rate is £.60 per Canadian dollar, then a beer costs £2/.60 = $3.33 in Montreal. In other words, absolute PPP says $5 will buy you the same number of, say, cheeseburgers anywhere in the world.
More formally, let S0 be the spot exchange rate between the British pound and the Canadian dollar today (Time 0). Here we are quoting exchange rates as the amount of foreign currency per dollar. Let PCDN and PUK be the current Canadian and British prices, respectively, on a particular commodity, say, apples. Absolute PPP simply says that:
PUK = S0 × PCDN Th is tells us that the British price for something is equal to the Canadian price for that same some- thing, multiplied by the exchange rate.
Th e rationale behind PPP is similar to that behind triangle arbitrage. If PPP did not hold, arbitrage would be possible (in principle) by moving apples from one country to another. For example, suppose apples in Halifax are selling for $4 per bushel, while in London the price is £2.40 per bushel. Absolute PPP implies that:
PUK = S0 × PCDN £2.40 = S0 × $4 S0 = £2.40/$4 = £.60
Th at is, the implied spot exchange rate is £.60 per dollar. Equivalently, a pound is worth $1/£.60 = $1.67.
Suppose, instead, the actual exchange rate is £.50. Starting with $4, a trader could buy a bushel of apples in Halifax, ship it to London, and sell it there for £2.40. Our trader then converts the £2.40 into dollars at the prevailing exchange rate, S0 = £.50, yielding a total of £2.40/.50 = $4.80. Th e round-trip gain is 80 cents.
Because of this profi t potential, forces are set in motion to change the exchange rate and/or the price of apples. In our example, apples would begin moving from Halifax to London. Th e reduced supply of apples in Halifax would raise the price of apples there, and the increased supply in Brit- ain would lower the price of apples in London.
In addition to moving apples around, apple traders would be busily converting pounds back into dollars to buy more apples. Th is activity increases the supply of pounds and simultaneously increases the demand for dollars. We would expect the value of a pound to fall. Th is means the dollar is getting more valuable, so it will take more pounds to buy one dollar. Since the exchange rate is quoted as pounds per dollar, we would expect the exchange rate to rise from £.50.
For absolute PPP to hold, several things must be true:
1. The transactions cost of trading apples—shipping, insurance, wastage, and so on—must be zero. 2. There are no barriers to trading apples, such as tariffs, taxes, or other political barriers such
as voluntary restraint agreements. 3. Finally, an apple in Halifax must be identical to an apple in London. It won’t do for you to
send red apples to London if the English eat only green apples.
Given the fact that the transaction costs are not zero and that the other conditions are rarely exactly met, it is not surprising that absolute PPP is really applicable only to traded goods, and then only to very uniform ones.
purchasing power parity (PPP) The idea that the exchange rate adjusts to keep purchasing power constant among currencies.
Chapter 21: International Corporate Finance 613
21Ross_Chapter21_3rd_B.indd 61321Ross_Chapter21_3rd_B.indd 613 12-12-03 13:3912-12-03 13:39
For this reason, absolute PPP does not imply that a Mercedes costs the same as a Ford or that a nuclear power plant in France costs the same as one in Ontario. In the case of the cars, they are not identical. In the case of the power plants, even if they were identical, they are expensive and very diffi cult to ship. Still, we can observe major violations of PPP. For example, on a European trip in a recent summer, one of the authors noticed that a 500 mL bottle of Dutch beer cost 2 pounds (around $4.50 Canadian) in London but only 1.5 euros (around $2.40 Canadian) in Lisbon. Th is diff erence led thousands of students to plan vacations in Portugal instead of England. Despite the resulting increased demand for euros, the exchange rate has not adjusted to refl ect PPP.
One interesting application of the theory behind purchasing power parity is the Big Mac Index updated and published regularly by Th e Economist.5 Th e index calculates the exchange rate to the U.S. dollar that would result in McDonald’s Big Mac burgers costing the same around the world (using the U.S. cost as a base). Th is calculated value is compared with the actual current exchange rate to determine if a currency is overvalued or undervalued. At the time of writing, the index supported the widespread belief that China was keeping its currency undervalued to promote its exports. On January 11, 2012, the Big Mac index showed that the Chinese renminbi was 42 per- cent undervalued against the U.S. dollar. A Big Mac in China cost US$2.44 while its average cost in the U.S. was US$4.20. To make the two prices equal would have required an exchange rate of RMB 3.67 to the U.S. dollar, compared with the actual rate of RMB 6.32.
Relative Purchasing Power Parity As a practical matter, a relative version of purchasing power parity has evolved. Relative purchas- ing power parity does not tell us what determines the absolute level of the exchange rate. Instead, it tells what determines the change in the exchange rate over time.
THE BASIC IDEA Suppose again that the British pound/Canadian dollar exchange rate is currently S0 = £.50. Further suppose that the inflation rate in Britain is predicted to be 10 percent over the coming year and (for the moment) the inflation rate in Canada is predicted to be zero. What do you think the exchange rate will be in a year?
If you think about it, a dollar currently costs .50 pounds in Britain. With 10 percent infl ation, we expect prices in Britain to generally rise by 10 percent. So we expect that the price of a dollar will go up by 10 percent and the exchange rate should rise to £.50 × 1.1 = £.55.
If the infl ation rate in Canada is not zero, we need to worry about the relative infl ation rates in the two countries. For example, suppose the Canadian infl ation rate is predicted to be 4 percent. Relative to prices in Canada, prices in Britain are rising at a rate of 10% - 4% = 6% per year. So we expect the price of the dollar to rise by 6 percent, and the predicted exchange rate is £.50 × 1.06 = £.53.
THE RESULT In general, relative PPP says that the change in the exchange rate is deter- mined by the difference in the inflation rates between the two countries. To be more specific, we use the following notation:
S0 = Current (Time 0) spot exchange rate (foreign currency per dollar) E[St] = Expected exchange rate in t periods hCDN = Inflation rate in Canada hFC = Foreign country inflation rate
Based on our discussion, relative PPP says the expected percentage change in the exchange rate over the next year, (E[S1] - S0)/S0, is:
(E[S1] - S0)/S0 = hFC - hCDN [21.1] In words, relative PPP simply says that the expected percentage change in the exchange rate is equal to the diff erence in infl ation rates. If we rearrange this slightly, we get:
E[S1] = S0 × [1 + (hFC - hCDN)] [21.2]
5 This discussion is largely based on “McCurrencies,” The Economist, April 24, 2003. For the latest on the index visit the website at economist.com/topics/big-mac-index.
614 Part 8: Topics in Corporate Finance
21Ross_Chapter21_3rd_B.indd 61421Ross_Chapter21_3rd_B.indd 614 12-12-03 13:3912-12-03 13:39
Th is result makes a certain amount of sense, but care must be used in quoting the exchange rate. In our example involving Britain and Canada, relative PPP tells us the exchange rate rises by hFC - hCDN = 10% - 4% = 6% per year. Assuming the diff erence in infl ation rates doesn’t change, the expected exchange rate in two years, E[S2], is therefore:
E[S2] = E[S1] × (1 + .06) = .53 × 1.06 = .562
Notice that we could have written this as:
E[S2] = .53 × 1.06 = (.50 × 1.06) × 1.06 = .50 × 1.062
In general, relative PPP, says the expected exchange rate at sometime in the future, E[St], is: E[St] = S0 × [1 + (hFC - hCDN)]t [21.3]
As we shall see, this is a very useful relationship. Because we don’t really expect absolute PPP to hold for most goods, we focus on relative PPP,
or RPPP, in the following discussion.
EXAMPLE 21.5: It’s All Relative
Suppose the Japanese exchange rate is currently 130 yen per dollar. The inflation rate in Japan over the next three years will run, say, 2 percent per year while the Canadian inflation rate will be 6 percent. Based on relative PPP, what would the exchange rate be in three years?
Since the Canadian inflation rate is higher, we expect a dollar to become less valuable. The exchange rate change would be 2% - 6% = -4% per year. Over three years, the exchange rate falls to:
E[S3] = S0 × [1 + (hFC - hCDN)] 3
= 130 × [1 + (-.04)]3
= 115.02
Currency Appreciation and Depreciation We frequently hear these statements: Th e dollar strengthened (or weakened) in fi nancial markets today or the dollar is expected to appreciate (or depreciate) relative to the pound. When we say the dollar strengthens or appreciates, we mean the value of a dollar rises, so it takes more foreign currency to buy a Canadian dollar.
What happens to the exchange rates as currencies fl uctuate in value depends on how exchange rates are quoted. Since we are quoting them as units of foreign currency per dollar, the exchange rate moves in the same direction as the value of the dollar: It rises as the dollar strengthens, and it falls as the dollar weakens.
Relative PPP tells us the exchange rate rises if the Canadian infl ation rate is lower than the foreign country’s. Th is happens because the foreign currency depreciates in value and therefore weakens relative to the dollar.
1. What does absolute PPP say? Why might it not hold for many goods?
2. According to relative PPP, what determines the change in exchange rates?
Concept Questions
Chapter 21: International Corporate Finance 615
21Ross_Chapter21_3rd_B.indd 61521Ross_Chapter21_3rd_B.indd 615 12-12-03 13:3912-12-03 13:39
21.4 Interest Rate Parity, Unbiased Forward Rates, and the Generalized Fisher Effect
Th e next issue we need to address is the relationship between the spot exchange rates, forward exchange rates, and interest rates. To get started, we need some additional notation:
Ft = Forward exchange rate for settlement at time t RCDN = Canadian nominal risk-free interest rate RFC = Foreign country nominal risk-free interest rate
As before, use S0 to stand for the spot exchange rate. You can take the Canadian nominal risk-free rate, RCDN, to be the T-bill rate.
Covered Interest Arbitrage Suppose we observe the following information about Canada and the European Union (E.U.):
S0 = EUR 0.65 RCDN = 10% F1 = EUR 0.60 RG = 5%
where RG is the nominal risk-free rate in the E.U. Th e period is one year, so F1 is the one-year forward rate.
Do you see an arbitrage opportunity here? Th ere is one. Suppose you have $1 to invest, and you want a riskless investment. One option you have is to invest the $1 in a riskless Canadian invest- ment such as a one-year T-bill. If you do this, in one period your $1 will be worth:
$ value in 1 period = $1 × (1 + RCDN) = $1.10
Alternatively, you can invest in the European risk-free investment. To do this, you need to convert your $1 to euros and simultaneously exercise a forward trade to convert euros back to dollars in one year. Th e necessary steps would be as follows:
1. Convert your $1 to $1 × S0 = EUR 0.65. 2. At the same time, enter into a forward agreement to convert euros back to dollars in one
year. Since the forward rate is EUR 0.60, you get $1 for every EUR 0.60 that you have in one year.
3. Invest your EUR 0.65 in Europe at RG. In one year, you have:
EUR value in 1 year = EUR 0.65 × (1 + RG) = EUR 0.65 × 1.05 = EUR 0.6825
4. Convert your EUR 0.6825 back to dollars at the agreed-on rate of EUR 0.60 = $1. You end up with:
$ value in 1 year = EUR 0.6825/0.60 = $1.1375
Notice that the value in one year from this strategy can be written as:
$ value in 1 year = $1 × S0 × (1 + RG)/F1 = $1 × 0.65 × (1.05)/0.60 = $1.1375
Th e return on this investment is apparently 13.75 percent. Th is is higher than the 10 percent we get from investing in Canada. Since both investments are risk-free, there is an arbitrage opportunity.
To exploit the diff erence in interest rates, you need to borrow, say, $5 million at the lower Can- adian rate and invest it at the higher European rate. What is the round-trip profi t from doing this? To fi nd out, we can work through the preceding steps:
1. Convert the $5 million at EUR 0.65 = $1 to get EUR 3.25 million. 2. Agree to exchange euros for dollars in one year at EUR 0.60 to the dollar.
616 Part 8: Topics in Corporate Finance
21Ross_Chapter21_3rd_B.indd 61621Ross_Chapter21_3rd_B.indd 616 12-12-03 13:3912-12-03 13:39
3. Invest the EUR 3.25 million for one year at RG = 5%. You end up with EUR 3.4125 million. 4. Convert the EUR 3.4125 million back to dollars to fulfill the forward contract. You receive
EUR 3.4125 million/0.60 = $5.6875 million. 5. Repay the loan with interest. You owe $5 million plus 10 percent interest, for a total of
$5.5 million. You have $5,687,500, so your round-trip profit is a risk-free $187,500.
Th e activity that we have illustrated here goes by the name of covered interest arbitrage. Th e term covered refers to the fact that we are covered in the event of a change in the exchange rate because we lock in the forward exchange rate today.
Interest Rate Parity (IRP) If we assume that signifi cant covered interest arbitrage opportunities do not exist, there must be some relationship between spot exchange rates, forward exchange rates, and relative interest rates. To see what this relationship is, note that, in general, strategy 1—investing in a riskless Canadian investment—gives us (1 + RCDN) for every dollar we invest. Strategy 2—investing in a foreign risk-free investment—gives us S0 × (1 + RFC)/F1 for every dollar we invest. Since these have to be equal to prevent arbitrage, it must be the case that:
(1 + RCDN) = S0 × (1 + RFC)/F1 Rearranging this a bit gets us the famous interest rate parity (IRP) condition:
F1/S0 = (1 + RFC)/(1 + RCDN) [21.4] A very useful approximation for IRP illustrates very clearly what is going on and is not diffi cult to remember. If we defi ne the percentage forward premium or discount as (F1 - S0)/S0, IRP says this percent premium or discount is approximately equal to the diff erence in interest rates:
(F1 - S0)/S0 = RFC - RCDN [21.5] Very loosely, what IRP says is that any diff erence in interest rates between two countries for some period is just off set by the change in the relative value of the currencies, thereby eliminating any arbitrage possibilities. Notice that we could also write:
F1 = S0 × [1 + (RFC - RCDN)] [21.6] In general, if we have t periods instead of just one, the IRP approximation would be written as:
Ft = S0 × [1 + (RFC - RCDN)]t [21.7]
EXAMPLE 21.6: Parity Check
Suppose the exchange rate for Japanese yen, S0, is currently ¥120 = $1. If the interest rate in Canada is RCDN = 10% and the interest rate in Japan is RJ = 5%, what must the forward rate be to prevent covered interest arbitrage?
From IRP, we have:
F1 = S0 × [1 + (RJ - RCDN)] = ¥120 × [1 + (.05 - .10)] = ¥120 × .95 = ¥114
Notice that the yen sells at a premium relative to the dollar (why?).
Forward Rates and Future Spot Rates In addition to PPP and IRP, there is one more basic relationship we need to discuss. What is the connection between the forward rate and the expected future spot rate? Th e unbiased forward rates (UFR) condition says the forward rate, F1, is equal to the expected future spot rate, E[S1]:
F1 = E[S1]
With t periods, UFR would be written as:
Ft = E[St]
interest rate parity (IRP) The condition stating that the interest rate differential between two countries is equal to the difference between the forward exchange rate and the spot exchange rate.
unbiased forward rates (UFR) The condition stating that the current forward rate is an unbiased predictor of the future exchange rate.
Chapter 21: International Corporate Finance 617
21Ross_Chapter21_3rd_B.indd 61721Ross_Chapter21_3rd_B.indd 617 12-12-03 13:3912-12-03 13:39
Loosely, the UFR condition says that, on average, the forward exchange rate is equal to the future spot exchange rate.
If we ignore risk, the UFR condition should hold. Suppose the forward rate for the Japanese yen is consistently lower than the future spot rate by, say, 10 yen. Th is means that anyone who wanted to convert dollars to yen in the future would consistently get more yen by not agreeing to a forward exchange. Th e forward rate would have to rise to get anyone interested.
Similarly, if the forward rate were consistently higher than the future spot rate, anyone who wanted to convert yen to dollars would get more dollars per yen by not agreeing to a forward trade. Th e forward exchange rate would have to fall to attract such traders.
For these reasons, the forward and actual future spot rates should be equal to each other on average. What the future spot rate will actually be is uncertain, of course. Th e UFR condition may not hold if traders are willing to pay a premium to avoid this uncertainty. Recent research docu- ments deviations from IRP during and aft er the fi nancial crisis starting in 2007.6 To the extent that the condition does hold, the six-month forward rate that we see today should be an unbiased predictor of what the exchange rate will actually be in six months.
Putting It Al l Together We have developed three relationships, PPP, IRP, and UFR, that describe the relationships between key fi nancial variables such as interest rates, exchange rates, and infl ation rates. We now explore the implications of these relationships as a group.
UNCOVERED INTEREST PARITY To start, it is useful to collect our international fi- nancial market relationships in one place:
RPPP: E[S1] = S0 × [1 + (hFC - hCDN)] IRP: F1 = S0 × [1 + (RFC - RCDN)] UFR: F1 = E[S1]
We begin by combining UFR and IRP. Since F1 = E[S1] from the UFR condition, we can substitute E[S1] for F1 in IRP. Th e result is:
E[S1] = S0 × [1 + (RFC - RCDN)] [21.8] Th is important relationship is called uncovered interest parity (UIP), and it plays a key role in our international capital budgeting discussion that follows. With t periods, UIP becomes:
E[St] = S0 × [1 + (RFC - RCDN)]t [21.9]
THE GENERALIZED FISHER EFFECT Next, we compare RPPP and UIP. Both of them have E[S1] on the left side, so their right sides must be equal. We thus have that:
S0 × [1 + (hFC - hCDN)] = S0 × [1 + (RFC - RCDN)] hFC - hCDN = RFC - RCDN
Th is tells us that the diff erence in risk-free returns between Canada and a foreign country is just equal to the diff erence in infl ation rates. Rearranging this slightly gives us the generalized Fisher eff ect (GFE):
RCDN - hCDN = RFC - hFC [21.10] Th e GFE says that real rates are equal across countries.7
Th e conclusion that real returns are equal across countries is really basic economics. If real returns were higher in, say, the United States than in Canada, money would fl ow out of Canadian fi nancial markets and into U.S. markets. Asset prices in the United States would rise and their returns would fall. At the same time, asset prices in Canada would fall and their returns would rise. Th is process acts to equalize real returns.
6 For more on deviations from IRP during the financial crisis see: R,M. Levich, “Evidence on Financial Globalization and Crises: Interest Rate Parity,” G. Caprio, ed., The Encyclopedia of Financial Globalization, Elsevier, 2012. 7 Notice that our result here is the approximate real rate, R - h (see Chapter 7), because we used approximations for PPP and IRP.
uncovered interest parity (UIP) The condition stating that the expected percentage change in the exchange rate is equal to the difference in interest rates.
generalized Fisher effect (GFE) The theory that real interest rates are equal across countries.
618 Part 8: Topics in Corporate Finance
21Ross_Chapter21_3rd_B.indd 61821Ross_Chapter21_3rd_B.indd 618 12-12-03 13:3912-12-03 13:39
Having said all this, we need to note several things: First, we really haven’t explicitly dealt with risk in our discussion. We might reach a diff erent conclusion about real returns once we do, particularly if people in diff erent countries have diff erent tastes and attitudes toward risk. Second, there are many barriers to the movement of money and capital around the world. Real returns might be diff erent between two countries for long periods of time if money can’t move freely between them.
Despite these problems, we expect capital markets to become increasingly internationalized. As this occurs, any diff erences in real rates that do exist will probably diminish. Th e laws of eco- nomics have very little respect for national boundaries.
1. What is covered interest arbitrage?
2. What is the international Fisher effect?
EXAMPLE 21.7: Taking a High Toll
Suppose that in 2013 a federal authority starts constructing a Newfoundland-Labrador fixed link tunnel under the Strait of Belle Isle to connect Quebec and the island of New- foundland. The tunnel will initially cost CAD100 million to build. Work will be complete in one year at which time the authority will pay off the present construction loan and re- place it with long-term financing from capital markets. The loan will be paid off over 10 years with tolls collected from tunnel users.
In the meantime, it is time to renew the construction loan for one year. A group of Canadian banks has offered to lend $100 million for one year at 11 percent. A Japanese bank has offered a yen loan at 7 percent. Should the au- thority borrow in yen for one year to save 4 percent in in- terest—$4 million?
While you are considering, you come across the follow- ing information on exchange rates: the spot exchange rate is ¥110 per Canadian dollar ($0.009091 per ¥). The 12-month forward rate is ¥106 per dollar ($.0094340 per yen).
According to the UFR condition, the forward rate shows that the yen is expected to rise in value. It follows that the authority is naive if it expects to save $4 million by borrow- ing in Japan. The UIP condition tells us the yen should rise by just enough so that exchange losses on paying back the loan in more expensive yen exactly offset the lower interest rate. To prove this, we compare the balloon payments at the end of one year for borrowing in Canadian dollars and in yen. If the authority borrows in Canadian dollars at 11 percent, the principal and interest at the end of one year would be $111 million.
If the borrowing is in yen, the treasurer of the authority executes the following steps:
1. Borrow the equivalent of $100 million in yen. Converting at today’s spot rate, this is $100 million × 110 = ¥11 billion.
2. At the end of 12 months, the authority owes ¥11 billion × (1.07) = ¥11.77 billion.
3. After 12 months, the authority purchases ¥11.77 billion in the spot market to repay the loan. The cost depends on the unknown future spot rate for the yen. By borrow- ing in Japan, the authority is gambling that the yen will not appreciate in value by enough to cancel the gains of the lower interest rate. In other words, the authority is betting that the future cost of buying ¥11.77 billion will not exceed $111 million. This gives us a break-even fu- ture spot rate:
¥11.77 billion = $111 million × F1 F1 = 11.77 billion/111 million F1 = 106.036
If the authority gambles, it could break even if the future spot rate is around 106 yen per dollar. This translates to 1/106 = $.009434 per yen. If the yen appreciates more, the authority loses. Suppose the yen goes up to $.01 or 100 yen to the dollar. Then the authority has to repay ¥11.77 billion × .01 = $118 million. This is equivalent to borrow- ing at 18 percent!
Our advice in this case is to borrow in Canada to elimi- nate foreign exchange risk. Or, if there is a good reason to borrow abroad, say better access to funds, the authority should hedge in the forward market.8 Under this approach, steps 1 and 2 are the same. With a forward contract taken out when the borrowing is initiated, the future exchange rate is locked in at ¥106 to the dollar. Due to the IRP condi- tion, it is no coincidence that this is the break-even rate.
8
8 Currency futures or swaps offer another possible hedging vehicle. Chapter 24 discusses futures in more detail.
Concept Questions
Chapter 21: International Corporate Finance 619
21Ross_Chapter21_3rd_B.indd 61921Ross_Chapter21_3rd_B.indd 619 12-12-03 13:3912-12-03 13:39
21.5 International Capital Budgeting
Kihlstrom Equipment, a Canadian-based international company, is evaluating an overseas invest- ment. Kihlstrom’s exports of high-tech communications equipment have increased to such a degree that it is considering building a plant in France. Th e project would cost EUR 2.5 million to launch. Th e cash fl ows are expected to be EUR 1.1 million a year for the next three years.9
Th e current spot exchange rate for euros is EUR 0.65. Recall that this is euros per dollar, so a euro is worth $1/0.65 = $1.54. Th e risk-free rate in Canada is 5 percent, and the risk-free rate in France is 7 percent. Notice that the exchange rate and the two interest rates are observed in fi nancial markets, not estimated.10 Kihlstrom’s required return on dollar investments of this sort is 10 percent.
Should Kihlstrom take this investment? As always, the answer depends on the NPV, but how do we calculate the net present value of this project in Canadian dollars? Th ere are two basic ways to do this:
1. The home currency approach. Convert all the euro cash flows into dollars, and then discount at 10 percent to find the NPV in dollars. Notice that for this approach, we have to come up with the future exchange rates to convert the future projected euro cash flows into dollars.
2. The foreign currency approach. Determine the required return on euro investments, and dis- count the euro cash flows to find the NPV in euros. Then convert this euro NPV to a dollar NPV. This approach requires us to somehow convert the 10 percent dollar required return to the equivalent euro required return.
Th e diff erence between these two approaches is primarily a matter of when we convert from euros to dollars. In the fi rst case, we convert before estimating the NPV. In the second case, we convert aft er estimating NPV.
It might appear that the second approach is superior because we only have to come up with one number, the euro discount rate. Furthermore, since the fi rst approach requires us to forecast future exchange rates, it probably seems that there is greater room for error. As we illustrate next, however, based on our results the two approaches are really the same.
Method 1: The Home Currency Approach To convert the project future cash fl ows into dollars, we invoke the uncovered interest parity (UIP) relation to come up with the project exchange rates. Based on our discussion, the expected exchange rate at time t, E[St] is:
E[St] = S0 × [1 + (RE - RCDN)]t
where RE stands for the nominal risk-free rate in France. Since RE is 7 percent, RCDN is 5 percent, and the current exchange rate (S0) is EUR 0.65:
E[St] = 0.65 × [1 + (.07 - .05)]t = 0.65 × 1.02t
Th e projected exchange rates for the communications equipment project are thus: Year Expected Exchange Rate
1 EUR 0.65 × 1.021 = EUR 0.663 2 EUR 0.65 × 1.022 = EUR 0.676 3 EUR 0.65 × 1.023 = EUR 0.690
Using these exchange rates, along with the current exchange rate, we can convert all of the euro cash fl ows to dollars:
Year (1)
Cash Flow in EUR (2)
Expected Exchange Rate (3)
Cash Flow in $ (1)/(2)
0 -EUR 2.5 EUR 0.650 -$3.85 1 1.1 0.663 1.66 2 1.1 0.676 1.63 3 1.1 0.690 1.59
9 In our discussion of Kihlstrom, all cash flows and interest rates are nominal unless we state otherwise. 10 For example, the interest rates might be the short-term Eurodollar and euro deposit rates offered by large money centre banks.
620 Part 8: Topics in Corporate Finance
21Ross_Chapter21_3rd_B.indd 62021Ross_Chapter21_3rd_B.indd 620 12-12-03 13:3912-12-03 13:39
To fi nish, we calculate the NPV in the ordinary way:
NPV = -$3.85 + $1.66/1.10 + $1.63/1.102 + $1.59/1.103 = $ .2 million
So the project appears to be profi table.
Method 2: The Foreign Currency Approach Kihlstrom requires a nominal return of 10 percent on the dollar-denominated cash fl ows. We need to convert this to a rate suitable for euro-denominated cash fl ows.
Based on the generalized Fisher eff ect, we know that the diff erence in the nominal rates is:
RE - RCDN = hE - hCDN = 7% - 5% = 2%
Th e appropriate discount rate for estimating the euro cash fl ows from the project is approximately equal to 10 percent plus an extra 2 percent to compensate for the greater euro infl ation rate. If we calculate the NPV of the euro cash fl ows at this rate, we get:
NPVE = -EUR 2.5 + EUR 1.1/1.12 + EUR 1.1/1.122 + EUR 1.1/1.123 = EUR 0.142 million
Th e NPV of this project is EUR 0.142 million. Taking this project makes us EUR 0.142 million richer today. What is this in dollars? Since the exchange rate today is EUR 0.65, the dollar NPV of the project is:
NPV$ = NPVE/S0 = EUR 0.142/0.65 = $.2 million
Th is is the same dollar NPV as we previously calculated. Th e important thing to recognize from our example is that the two capital budgeting proce-
dures are actually the same and always give the same answer.11 In this second approach, the fact that we are implicitly forecasting exchange rates is simply hidden. Even so, the foreign currency approach is computationally a little easier.
Unremitted Cash Flows Th e previous example assumed that all aft er-tax cash fl ows from the foreign investment could be remitted to (paid out to) the parent fi rm. Actually, substantial diff erences can exist between the cash fl ows generated by a foreign project and the amount that can actually be remitted or repatri- ated to the parent fi rm.
A foreign subsidiary can remit funds to a parent in many ways, including the following:
1. Dividends. 2. Management fees for central services. 3. Royalties on the use of a trade name and patents.
However cash fl ows are repatriated, international fi rms must pay special attention to remittance because there may be current and future controls on remittances. Many governments are sensitive to the charge of being exploited by foreign national fi rms. In such cases, governments are tempted to limit the ability of international fi rms to remit cash fl ows. Funds that cannot currently be remit- ted are sometimes said to be blocked.
1. What financial complications arise in international capital budgeting? Describe two procedures for estimating NPV in this case.
2. What are blocked funds?
11 Actually, there will be a slight difference because we are using the approximate relationships. If we calculate the re- quired return as (1.10) × (1 + .02) - 1 = 12.2%, we get exactly the same NPV. See the Mini Case at the end of the chapter for more detail.
Concept Questions
Chapter 21: International Corporate Finance 621
21Ross_Chapter21_3rd_B.indd 62121Ross_Chapter21_3rd_B.indd 621 12-12-03 13:3912-12-03 13:39
21.6 Financing International Projects
The Cost of Capital for International Firms An important question for fi rms with international investments is whether the required return for international projects should be diff erent from that of similar domestic projects. Th e answer to this question depends on:
1. Segmentation of the international financial market. 2. Foreign political risk of expropriation, foreign exchange controls, and taxes.
We save political risk for later discussion and focus here on the fi rst point. Suppose barriers prevented shareholders in Canada from holding foreign securities. If this
were the case, the fi nancial markets of diff erent countries would be segmented. Further suppose that fi rms in Canada did not face the same barriers. In such a case, a fi rm engaging in interna- tional investing could provide indirect diversifi cation for Canadian shareholders that they could not achieve by investing within Canada. Th is could lead to lowering of the risk premium on international projects.
On the other hand, if there were no barriers to international investing for shareholders, investors could get the benefi t of international diversifi cation for themselves by buying foreign securities. Th en, the project cost of capital for Canadian fi rms would not depend on where the project was located.
To resolve this issue, researchers have compared the variance of purely domestic stock portfo- lios with international portfolios. Th e result is that international portfolios have lower variance. Because investors are not fully diversifi ed internationally, fi rms can benefi t from a lower cost of capital for international projects that provide diversifi cation services for the fi rms’ shareholders.12
International Diversif ication and Investors As we just saw, there is evidence that international diversifi cation by fi rms presently provides a service that investors cannot obtain themselves at reasonable cost. Holding foreign securities may subject investors to increased tax, trading, and information costs. Financial engineering is aiding investors in avoiding some of these costs. As a result, as investors diversify globally, the cost of capital advantage to fi rms is likely to decline.
An Index Participation (IP) is a current example of a fi nancially engineered vehicle for interna- tional diversifi cation.13 An IP on the Standard & Poor’s 500 Stock Average, for example, gives an investor an asset that tracks this well-known U.S. market index. IPs are highly liquid, thus reduc- ing trading costs. Information costs are also reduced since the holder need not research each of the 500 individual stocks that make up the index.
International diversifi cation for Canadian investors is being made easier by the lowering of an important barrier. Eff ective 2001, the maximum allowable foreign holding for pension funds and Registered Retirement Savings Plans (RRSPs) increased to 30 percent. Increased demand is fuelled the development of new products to exploit this opportunity.
Th ese and other fi nancial engineering developments have helped to integrate the international fi nancial market. Still, research suggests that local market eff ects infl uence prices of shares of fi rms with subsidiaries listed in diff erent markets. For example, Royal Dutch Petroleum and Shell Transport are “twin” companies that merged in 1907. Each retains its own shares, Royal Dutch trading primarily in New York and Shell mainly trading in London. When the New York market goes up relative to London, researchers found that Royal Dutch shares rise relative to Shell even though there is no change in the companies’ cash fl ows. All this means that, despite globalization of markets, some segmentation remains making international diversifi cation worthwhile.14
12 B. H. Solnik, “Why Not Diversify Internationally Rather than Domestically?” Financial Analysts Journal, July–August 1974. 13 G. Axford and Y. Lin, “Surprise! Currency Risk Improves International Investment,” Canadian Treasury Management Review, Royal Bank of Canada, March–April 1990. 14 Our discussion is based on K.A. Froot and E.M.Dabora, “How are stock prices affected by the location of trade?” Jour- nal of Financial Economics 53, August 1999, pp. 189–216. For more information on the effects of globalization on mar- ket correlation, see Dwarka Lakhan, “Increasing correlation reduces benefits of global diversification,” Canadian Treasurer, August/September 2003 and G. Andrew Karolyi, “International stock market correlations,” Canadian Invest- ment Review, Summer 2001.
standardandpoors.com
622 Part 8: Topics in Corporate Finance
21Ross_Chapter21_3rd_B.indd 62221Ross_Chapter21_3rd_B.indd 622 12-12-03 13:3912-12-03 13:39
Sources of Short- and Intermediate-Term Financing In raising short-term and medium-term cash, Canadian international fi rms have a choice between borrowing from a chartered bank at the Canadian rate or borrowing EuroCanadian (or other Eurocurrency) from a bank outside Canada through the Eurocurrency market.
Th e Eurocurrency markets are the Eurobanks that make loans and accept deposits in foreign currencies. Most Eurocurrency trading involves the borrowing and lending of time deposits at Eurobanks. For example, suppose the Bank of Nova Scotia (BNS) receives a 30-day Eurodollar deposit from McCain in London. Th e BNS then makes a U.S. dollar-denominated loan to the Bank of Tokyo. Ultimately, the Bank of Tokyo makes a loan to a Japanese importer with invoices to pay in the United States. As our example shows, the Eurocurrency market is not a retail market. Th e customers are large corporations, banks, and governments.
One important characteristic of the Eurocurrency market is that loans are made on a fl oating rate basis. Th e interest rates are set at a fi xed margin above the London Interbank Off ered Rate (LIBOR) for the given period and currency involved. For example, if LIBOR is 1 percent and the margin is 0.5 percent for Eurodollar loans in a certain risk class, called a tier, the Eurodollar bor- rower pays an interest rate of 1.5 percent. Eurodollar loans have maturities ranging up to 10 years.
Securitization and globalization have produced alternatives to borrowing from a Eurobank. Under a Note Issuance Facility (NIF), a large borrower issues short-term notes with maturi- ties usually three to six months but ranging to one year.15 Banks may underwrite NIFs or sell them to investors. In the latter case, where banks simply act as an agent, the Euronotes issued are called Eurocommercial paper (ECP). ECP is similar to domestic commercial paper but, because the Eurocredit market is not regulated, off ers greater fl exibility in available maturities and tax avoidance.
Th e drive to escape regulation (part of the regulatory dialectic introduced in Chapter 1) explains the attraction and growth of the Euromarkets. Eurocurrency markets developed to allow borrowers and banks to operate without regulation and taxes mainly in the United States. Th ey off er borrowers an opportunity to tap large amounts of short-term funds quickly and at com- petitive rates. As banking regulations—for example capital rules—become tighter, alternatives to bank borrowing, such as NIFs, are growing and sharing the Euromarket with banks.
THE EUROBOND MARKET Eurobonds are denominated in a particular currency and are issued simultaneously in the bond markets of several countries. The prefix Euro means the bonds are issued outside the countries in whose currencies they are denominated. For example, a French automobile firm issues 50,000 bonds with a face value of $1,000 (U.S.) each. When the bonds are issued, they are managed by London merchant bankers and listed on the London Stock Exchange.
Most Eurobonds are bearer bonds. Th e ownership of the bonds is established by possession of the bond. In contrast, foreign bonds (issued by foreign borrowers in a domestic capital market) are registered. Th is makes Eurobonds more attractive to Belgian dentists, investors who have a disdain for tax authorities.
Most issues of Eurobonds are arranged by underwriting. However, some Eurobonds are pri- vately placed. Eurobonds appear as straight bonds, fl oating-rate notes, convertible bonds, zero coupon bonds, mortgage-backed bonds, and dual-currency bonds.
1. Can firms reduce their risk and with it their costs of capital through diversifying with international projects?
2. What are the main sources of short and intermediate financing in Euro-markets?
3. Describe a Eurobond and its advantages over a foreign bond.
15 Our discussion of NIFs draws on A. L. Melnik and S. E. Plaut, The Short-Term Eurocredit Market (New York: New York University Salomon Center, 1991), chap. 4.
Eurobanks Banks that make loans and accept deposits in foreign currencies.
scotiabank.com
Note Issuance Facility (NIF) Large borrowers issue notes up to one year in maturity in the Euromarket. Banks underwrite or sell notes.
Concept Questions
Chapter 21: International Corporate Finance 623
21Ross_Chapter21_3rd_B.indd 62321Ross_Chapter21_3rd_B.indd 623 12-12-03 13:3912-12-03 13:39
21.7 Exchange Rate Risk
Exchange rate risk is the natural consequence of international operations in a world where rela- tive currency values move up and down. Managing exchange rate risk is an important part of international fi nance. As we discuss next, there are three diff erent types of exchange rate risk or exposure: transaction exposure, economic exposure, and translation exposure.
Transaction Exposure Transaction exposure is the day-to-day fl uctuations in exchange rates that create short-run risks for international fi rms. Transaction exposure is also called short-run exposure. Most such fi rms have contractual agreements to buy and sell goods in the near future at set prices. When diff erent currencies are involved, such transactions have an extra element of risk.
For example, imagine you are importing imitation pasta from Italy and reselling it in Canada under the Impasta brand name. Your largest customer has ordered 10,000 cases of Impasta. You place the order with your supplier today, but you won’t pay until the goods arrive in 60 days. Your selling price is $6 per case. Your cost is 3.5 euros per case, and the exchange rate is currently EUR 0.65, so it takes 0.65 euros to buy $1.
At the current exchange rate, your cost in dollars from fi lling the order is EUR 3.5/0.65 = $5.38 per case, so your pre-tax profi t on the order is 10,000 × ($6 - $5.38) = $6,200. However, the exchange rate in 60 days will probably be diff erent, so your profi t depends on what the future exchange rate turns out to be.
For example, if the rate goes to EUR 0.70, your cost is EUR 3.5/0.70 = $5 per case. Your profi t goes to $10,000. If the exchange rate goes to, say, EUR 0.58, then your cost is EUR 3.5/0.58 = $6, and your profi t is zero.
Th e short-run exposure in our example can be reduced or eliminated in several ways. Th e most obvious means of hedging is to enter into a forward exchange agreement to lock in an exchange rate. For example, suppose the 60-day forward rate is EUR 0.67. What is your profi t if you hedge? What profi t should you expect if you don’t?
If you hedge, you lock in an exchange rate of EUR 0.67. Your cost in dollars is thus EUR 3.5/0.67 = $5.22 per case, so your profi t is 10,000 × ($6 - $5.22) = $7,800. If you don’t hedge, assuming that the forward rate is an unbiased predictor (in other words, assuming the UFR con- dition holds), you should expect the exchange rate to actually be EUR 0.67 in 60 days. You should expect to make $7,800.
Alternatively, if this is not feasible, you could simply borrow the dollars today, convert them into euros, and invest the euros for 60 days to earn some interest. From IRP, this amounts to enter- ing into a forward contract.
Should the treasurer hedge or speculate? Th ere are usually two reasons the treasurer should hedge:
1. In an efficient foreign exchange rate market, speculation is a zero NPV activity. Unless the treasurer has special information, nothing is gained from foreign exchange speculation.
2. The costs of hedging are not large. The treasurer can use forward contracts to hedge, and if the forward rate is equal to the expected spot, the costs of hedging are negligible.
MORE ADVANCED SHORT-TERM HEDGES Of course, there are ways to hedge foreign exchange risk other than with forward contracts. Currency swaps, currency options, and other financially engineered products are taking considerable business away from the forward exchange market.16 A currency swap is an arrangement between a borrower, a second borrower, called a counterparty, and a bank. The borrower and the counterparty each raise funds in a dif- ferent currency and then swap liabilities. The bank guarantees the borrower’s and counterparty’s credit as in a bankers acceptance. The result is that the borrower obtains funds in the desired cur- rency at a lower rate than for direct borrowing.
16 Our discussion of currency swaps in practice draws on B. Critchley, “Explosion of New Products Cuts Foreign Cur- rency Risk,” The Financial Post, September 14, 1987. Further discussion of swaps is found in Chapter 24.
exchange rate risk The risk related to having international operations in a world where relative currency values vary.
counterparty Second borrower in currency swap. Counterparty borrows funds in currency desired by principal.
624 Part 8: Topics in Corporate Finance
21Ross_Chapter21_3rd_B.indd 62421Ross_Chapter21_3rd_B.indd 624 12-12-03 13:3912-12-03 13:39
For example, in 1986 the federal government of Canada made an 80 billion yen bond issue and swapped part of it into U.S. dollars. Th e interest rate was six-month LIBOR and the ending liability was in U.S. dollars, not yen. Th e interest cost turned out to be 54 basis points below the cost of direct borrowing in the United States.
Currency options are similar to options on stock (discussed in Chapter 25) except the exercise price is an exchange rate.17 Th ey are exchange traded in the United States with exercise prices in various currencies including the Canadian dollar. Currency options can be exercised at any time before maturity. In the jargon of options, they are American options. A call option on the Canadian dollar gives the holder the right, but not the obligation, to buy CAD at a fi xed exercise price in U.S.$. It increases in value as the CAD exchange rate in U.S.$ rises. A put option allows the holder to sell CAD at the exercise price. A put becomes more valuable when the CAD declines against the U.S.$.
Th e basic idea behind hedging with options is to take an options position opposite to the cash position. For this reason, hedge analysis starts by looking at the unhedged position of the busi- ness. For example, suppose an exporter expects to collect receivables totalling $1 million (U.S.) in 30 days. Suppose the present CAD exchange rate is $.96 (U.S.). If the rate remains at 96 cents, the exporter receives $1 million U.S./.96 = $1,041,667 (CAD) aft er 30 days. Th e exporter is at risk if the exchange rate rises so that the $1 million (U.S.) buys fewer Canadian dollars. For example, if the exchange rate rises to .98, the exporter receives only $1 million U.S./.98 = $1,020,408 (CAD). Th e loss of $21,258 comes out of profi ts.
Since the exporter loses if the exchange rate rises, buying call options is an appropriate hedge. Calls on the CAD increase in value if the exchange rate rises. Th e profi t on the calls helps off set the loss on exchange. To implement this strategy, the exporter likely seeks expert advice on how many calls to buy and, more generally, the relative cost of hedging with options rather than with forwards.
Canadian sports teams like the Toronto Blue Jays and the Edmonton Oilers also face exchange rate risk. Th ese organizations import talent, paying salaries in U.S. dollars while realizing most of their revenues from Canadian game attendance and television in Canadian dollars. Th e Jays estimate that a fl uctuation of one cent in the Canadian dollar changes the profi t for the franchise by about $700,000 over a year. Th e losses due to exchange rate diff erences are signifi cant. Unlike the auto manufacturers discussed below, there is little a sports team can do to avoid this long-run exposure. In this case, hedging is likely the best policy.
Economic Exposure Economic exposure is another term for long-run exposure. In the long run, the value of a foreign operation can fl uctuate because of unanticipated changes in relative economic conditions. For example, imagine that we own a labour-intensive assembly operation located in another country to take advantage of lower wages. Th rough time, unexpected changes in economic conditions can raise the foreign wage levels to the point where the cost advantage is eliminated or even becomes negative.
Hedging long-run exposure is more diffi cult than hedging short-term risks. For one thing, organized forward markets don’t exist for such long-term needs. Instead, the primary option that fi rms have is to try to match up foreign currency infl ows and outfl ows. Th e same thing goes for matching foreign currency-denominated assets and liabilities. For example, a fi rm that sells in a foreign country might try to concentrate its raw material purchases and labour expense in that country. Th at way, the dollar values of its revenues and costs will move up and down together. Probably the best examples of this type of hedging are the so-called transplant auto manufacturers such as BMW, Honda, Mercedes, and Toyota, which now build locally a substantial portion of the cars they sell in the United States and Canada, thereby obtaining some degree of immunization against exchange rate movements. Th ere can still be problems with this strategy. For example, many cars are built in Canada and exported to the United States.
Similarly, a fi rm can reduce its long-run exchange rate risk by borrowing in the foreign coun- try. Fluctuations in the value of the foreign subsidiary’s assets will then be at least partially off set by changes in the value of the liabilities.
17 See Chapter 25 for a thorough introduction to options. Our discussion of currency options simplifies the description by discussing options on currency. In practice, options are written against currency futures contracts.
American options A call or put option that can be exercised on or before its expiration date.
oilers.nhl.com bluejays.com
bmw.com world.honda.com mercedes-benz.com toyota.com
Chapter 21: International Corporate Finance 625
21Ross_Chapter21_3rd_B.indd 62521Ross_Chapter21_3rd_B.indd 625 12-12-03 13:3912-12-03 13:39
For example, the turmoil in the Asian currency markets in 1997 caught many companies nap- ping, but not Avon. Th e U.S. cosmetics manufacturer had a signifi cant exposure in Asia, with sales there comprising about 20 percent of the company’s worldwide volume. To protect itself against currency fl uctuations, Avon produced nearly all of its products in the country where they were sold, and purchased nearly all related raw materials in the same country as well. Th at way, their production costs and revenues were in the same currency. In addition, operating loans were denominated in the currency of the country where production was located to tie interest rates and payments to the local currency. All of this protects profi ts in the foreign market, but Avon still had the exposure related to translating profi ts back into dollars. To reduce that exposure, the company began having its foreign operating units remit earnings weekly rather than monthly to minimize “translation” risk, the subject of our next section.
Translation Exposure When a Canadian company calculates its accounting net income and EPS for some period, it must translate everything into dollars. Th is can create some problems for the accounts when there are signifi cant foreign operations. In particular, two issues arise:
1. What is the appropriate exchange rate to use for translating each statement of financial posi- tion account?
2. How should statement of financial position accounting gains and losses from foreign cur- rency translation be handled?
To illustrate the accounting problem, suppose we started a small foreign subsidiary in Lillipu- tia a year ago. Th e local currency is the gulliver, abbreviated GL. At the beginning of the year, the exchange rate was GL 2 = CAD1, and the statement of fi nancial position in gullivers looked like this:
Assets GL 1,000 Liabilities GL 500 Equity 500
At 2 gullivers to the dollar, the beginning statement of financial position in dollars was:
Assets $500 Liabilities $250 Equity 250
Lilliputia is a quiet place, and nothing at all actually happened during the year. As a result, net income was zero (before consideration of exchange rate changes). However, the exchange rate did change to 4 gullivers = $1 purely because the Lilliputian infl ation rate is much higher than the Canadian infl ation rate.
Since nothing happened, the accounting ending statement of fi nancial position in gullivers is the same as the beginning one. However, if we convert it to dollars at the new exchange rate, we get:
Assets $250 Liabilities $125 Equity 125
Notice that the value of the equity has gone down by $125, even though net income was zero. Despite the fact that absolutely nothing really happened, there is a $125 accounting loss. How to handle this $125 loss has been a controversial accounting question.
One obvious and consistent way to handle this loss is simply to report the loss on the par- ent’s statement of comprehensive income. During periods of volatile exchange rates, this kind of treatment can dramatically impact an international company’s reported EPS. Th is is purely an accounting phenomenon; even so, such fl uctuations are disliked by fi nancial managers.
Th e current compromise approach to translation gains and losses is based on rules set out in Canadian Institute of Chartered Accountants (CICA) S. 1651. Th e rules divide a fi rm’s for- eign subsidiaries into two categories: integrated and self-sustaining. For the most part, the rules require that all assets and liabilities must be translated from the subsidiary’s currency into the parent’s currency using the exchange rate that currently prevails.18 Because Canadian accountants
18 The rules also define the current exchange rate differently for the types of subsidiaries. An integrated subsidiary uses the exchange rate observed on the last day of its fiscal year. For a self-sustaining subsidiary, the exchange rate prescribed is the average rate over the year. For detailed discussion of CICA 1650, see A. Davis and G. Pinches, Canadian Financial Management, 4th ed. (Toronto, Ontario: Prentice-Hall, 2000).
cica.ca
626 Part 8: Topics in Corporate Finance
21Ross_Chapter21_3rd_B.indd 62621Ross_Chapter21_3rd_B.indd 626 12-12-03 13:3912-12-03 13:39
consolidate the fi nancial statements of subsidiaries more than 50 percent owned by the parent fi rm, translation gains and losses are refl ected on the statement of comprehensive income of the parent company.
For a self-sustaining subsidiary, any translation gains and losses that occur are accumulated in a special account within the shareholders’ equity section of the parent company’s statement of fi nancial position. Th is account might be labelled something like “unrealized foreign exchange gains (losses).” Th ese gains and losses are not reported on the statement of comprehensive income. As a result, the impact of translation gains and losses is not recognized explicitly in net income until the underlying assets and liabilities are sold or otherwise liquidated.
Managing Exchange Rate Risk For a large multinational fi rm, the management of exchange rate risk is complicated by the fact that many diff erent currencies may be involved in many diff erent subsidiaries. It is very likely that a change in some exchange rate benefi ts some subsidiaries and hurts others. Th e net eff ect on the overall fi rm depends on its net exposure.
For example, suppose a fi rm has two divisions: Division A buys goods in Canada for dollars and sells them in Britain for pounds. Division B buys goods in Britain for pounds and sells them in Canada for dollars. If these two divisions are of roughly equal size in their infl ows and outfl ows, the overall fi rm obviously has little exchange rate risk.
In our example, the fi rm’s net position in pounds (the amount coming in less the amount going out) is small, so the exchange rate risk is small. However, if one division, acting on its own, were to start hedging its exchange rate risk, the overall fi rm’s exchange risk would go up. Th e moral of the story is that multinational fi rms have to be conscious of the overall position that the fi rm has in a foreign currency. For this reason, exchange risk management is probably best handled on a centralized basis.
1. What are the different types of exchange rate risk?
2. How can a firm hedge short-run exchange rate risk? Long-run exchange rate risk?
21.8 Political and Governance Risks
Political risk refers to changes in value that arise as a consequence of political actions. Th is is not purely a problem faced by international fi rms. For example, changes in Canadian or provincial tax laws and regulations may benefi t some Canadian fi rms and hurt others, so political risk exists nationally as well as internationally. For example, the possibility of Quebec separation was seen by many as a political risk aff ecting fi rms located in the province. When fi rms announced plans to relocate to Toronto, stock market reaction was usually positive.19
Some countries do have more political risk than others, however. In such cases, the extra polit- ical risk may lead fi rms to require higher returns on overseas investments to compensate for the risk that funds will be blocked, critical operations interrupted, and contracts abrogated. For example, the rate of return required for an overseas investment made in “A” rated Chile would be less than the rate of return required for a foreign investment made in “B” rated Argentina. In the most extreme case, the possibility of outright confi scation may be a concern in countries with relatively unstable political environments.
Political risk also depends on the nature of the business; some businesses are less likely to be confi scated because they are not particularly valuable in the hands of a diff erent owner. An assembly operation supplying subcomponents that only the parent company uses would not be an attractive takeover target, for example. Similarly, a manufacturing operation that requires the
19 Our source here is: H. Bhabra, U. Lel, and D. Tirtiroglu, “Stock Market’s Reaction to Business Relocations: Canadian Evidence,” Canadian Journal of Administrative Sciences, December 2002, vol. 19, number 4, pp. 346–358.
Concept Questions
political risk Risk related to changes in value that arise because of political actions.
Chapter 21: International Corporate Finance 627
21Ross_Chapter21_3rd_B.indd 62721Ross_Chapter21_3rd_B.indd 627 12-12-03 13:3912-12-03 13:39
use of specialized components from the parent is of little value without the parent company’s cooperation.
Natural resource developments, such as copper mining or oil drilling, are just the opposite. Once the operation is in place, much of the value is in the commodity. Th e political risk for such investments is much higher for this reason. Also, the issue of exploitation is more pronounced with such investments, again increasing the political risk.
Political risk can be hedged in several ways, particularly when confi scation or nationalization is a concern. As we stated earlier, insurance against political risk is available from Export Devel- opment Canada. Further, the use of local fi nancing, perhaps from the government of the foreign country in question, reduces the possible loss because the company can refuse to pay on the debt in the event of unfavourable political activities. Based on our previous discussion, structuring the operation so that it requires signifi cant parent company involvement to function is another way some fi rms try to reduce political risk.
At the other extreme, some companies avoid the implicit threats in the methods just discussed while trying to be good corporate citizens in the host country. Th is approach is an international application of the view of the corporation as responsible to shareholders and stakeholders that we presented in Chapter 1.
Corporate Governance Risk With the internationalization of cross-border portfolios, and the global fi nancial crisis, invest- ors are looking more carefully at corporate governance of companies. For example, the rapid fall from grace of Satyam Computer Services—one of India’s foremost IT outsourcing companies— has raised some important concerns around corporate governance for international investing in emerging markets. Rules-based governance systems promote greater transparency of informa- tion in markets and greater protection of shareholders. Good corporate governance can enhance the attractiveness of a country’s fi nancial markets relative to another. At the global level, initia- tives such as the International Corporate Governance Network’s code of practice in relation to investors’ governance responsibilities are working towards strengthening corporate governance, improving transparency, and restoring investor confi dence. For example, evidence also suggests that corporate governance plays an important role in shaping the market value of Korean public companies.20
1. What is political risk?
2. What are some ways of hedging political risks?
3. Why is sound corporate governance important for companies?
20 Kim, Woochan, Black, Bernard S., and Jang, Hasung, Does Corporate Governance Predict Firms’ Market Values? Evi- dence from Korea (2006). Post-publication version, published in Journal of Law, Economics, and Organization, Vol. 22, No. 2, Fall 2006; ECGI—Finance Working Paper No. 86/2005; KDI School of Pub Policy & Management Paper No. 02-04; McCombs Research Paper Series No. 02-05; Stanford Law and Economics Olin Working Paper No. 237; U of Texas law, Law and Econ Research Paper No. 26. Available at SSRN: ssrn.com/abstract=311275
Concept Questions
628 Part 8: Topics in Corporate Finance
21Ross_Chapter21_3rd_B.indd 62821Ross_Chapter21_3rd_B.indd 628 12-12-03 13:3912-12-03 13:39
21.9 SUMMARY AND CONCLUSIONS
Th e international fi rm has a more complicated life than the purely domestic fi rm. Management must understand the connection between interest rates, foreign currency exchange rates, and infl ation. It must also become aware of a large number of diff erent fi nancial market regulations and tax systems. Th is chapter is intended to be a concise introduction to some of the fi nancial issues that come up in international investing.
Our coverage was necessarily brief. Th e main topics we discussed include:
1. Some basic vocabulary. We briefly defined some exotic terms such as LIBOR and Eurodollar. 2. The basic mechanics of exchange rate quotations. We discussed the spot and forward mar-
kets and how exchange rates are interpreted. 3. The fundamental relationships between international financial variables: a. Absolute and relative purchasing power parity (PPP). b. Interest rate parity (IRP). c. Unbiased forward rates (UFR). Absolute purchasing power parity states that $1 should have the same purchasing power in
each country. This means that an orange costs the same whether you buy it in Montreal or in Tokyo.
Relative purchasing power parity means the expected percentage change in exchange rates between the currencies of two countries is equal to the difference in their inflation rates.
Interest rate parity implies that the percentage difference between the forward exchange rate and the spot exchange rate is equal to the interest rate differential. We showed how cov- ered interest arbitrage forces this relationship to hold.
The unbiased forward rates condition indicates that the current forward rate is a good predictor of the future spot exchange rate.
4. International capital budgeting. We showed that the basic foreign exchange relationships imply two other conditions:
a. Uncovered interest parity. b. Generalized Fisher effect. By invoking these two conditions, we learned how to estimate NPVs in foreign currencies
and how to convert foreign currencies into dollars to estimate NPV in the usual way. 5. Exchange rate and political risk. We described the various types of exchange rate risk and
discussed some commonly used approaches to managing the effect of fluctuating exchange rates on the cash flows and value of the international firm. We also discussed political risk and some ways of managing exposure to it.
Key Terms American options (page 625) counterparty (page 624) cross-rate (page 607) Eurobanks (page 623) Eurobond (page 607) Eurocurrency (page 607) exchange rate (page 609) exchange rate risk (page 624) Export Development Canada (EDC) (page 607) foreign bonds (page 607) foreign exchange market (page 608) forward exchange rate (page 611) forward trade (page 611)
generalized Fisher effect (GFE) (page 618) gilts (page 607) interest rate parity (IRP) (page 617) London Interbank Offer Rate (LIBOR) (page 607) Note Issuance Facility (NIF) (page 623) political risk (page 627) purchasing power parity (PPP) (page 613) spot exchange rate (page 611) spot trade (page 611) swaps (page 608) unbiased forward rates (UFR) (page 617) uncovered interest parity (UIP) (page 618)
Chapter 21: International Corporate Finance 629
21Ross_Chapter21_3rd_B.indd 62921Ross_Chapter21_3rd_B.indd 629 12-12-03 13:3912-12-03 13:39
Chapter Review Problems and Self-Test 21.1 Relative Purchasing Power Parity The inflation rate in Can-
ada is projected at 6 percent per year for the next several years. The German inflation rate is projected to be 2 percent during that time. The exchange rate is currently EUR 0.6. Based on relative PPP, what is the expected exchange rate in two years?
21.2 Covered Interest Arbitrage The spot and 12-month forward rates on the Swiss franc are CHF 1.8 and CHF 1.7, respec- tively. The risk-free interest rate in Canada is 8 percent, and the risk-free rate in Switzerland is 5 percent. Is there an arbi- trage opportunity here? How would you exploit it?
Answers to Self-Test Problems 21.1 From relative PPP, the expected exchange rate in two years, E[S2] is: E[S2] = S0 × [1 + (hG - hCDN)]2
where hG is the European inflation rate. The current exchange rate is EUR 0.6, so the expected exchange rate is: E[S2] = EUR 0.6 × [1 + (.02 - .06)]2
= EUR 0.6 × .962 = EUR 0.55
21.2 From interest rate parity, the forward rate should be (approximately): F1 = S0 × [1 + (RFC - RCDN)]
= 1.8 × [1 + .05 - .08] = 1.75
Since the forward rate is actually CHF 1.7, there is an arbitrage opportunity. To exploit the arbitrage, we first note that dollars are selling for CHF 1.7 each in the forward market. From IRP, this is too cheap because
they should be selling for CHF 1.75. So we want to arrange to buy dollars with Swiss francs in the forward market. To do this, we can: 1. Today: Borrow, say, $10 million for 12 months. Convert it to CHF 18 million in the spot market, and forward contract at CHF 1.7 to
convert it back to dollars in one year. Invest the CHF 18 million at 5 percent. 2. In one year: Your investment has grown to CHF 18 × 1.05 = CHF 18.9 million. Convert this to dollars at the rate of CHF 1.7 = $1.
You have CHF 18.9 million/1.7 = $11,117,647. Pay off your loan with 8 percent interest at a cost of $10 million × 1.08 = $10,800,000 and pocket the difference of $317,647.
Concepts Review and Critical Thinking Questions 1. (LO2) Suppose the exchange rate for the Swiss franc is quoted
as CHF 1.50 in the spot market and CHF 1.53 in the 90-day forward market.
a. Is the dollar selling at a premium or a discount relative to the franc?
b. Does the financial market expect the franc to strengthen relative to the dollar? Explain.
c. What do you suspect is true about relative economic conditions in Canada and Switzerland?
2. (LO3) Suppose the rate of inflation in the European Union will run about 3 percent higher than the Canadian inflation rate over the next several years. All other things being the same, what will happen to the euro versus dollar exchange rate? What relationship are you relying on in answering?
3. (LO2, 3) The exchange rate for the Australian dollar is cur- rently AUD1.15. This exchange rate is expected to rise by 10 percent over the next year.
a. Is the Australian dollar expected to get stronger or weaker? b. What do you think about the relative inflation rates in
Canada and Australia? c. What do you think about the relative nominal interest
rates in Canada and Australia? Relative real rates? 4. (LO1) Which of the following most accurately describes a
Yankee bond? a. A bond issued by General Motors in Japan with the inter-
est payable in U.S. dollars. b. A bond issued by General Motors in Japan with the inter-
est payable in yen.
c. A bond issued by Toyota in the United States with the interest payable in yen.
d. A bond issued by Toyota in the United States with the interest payable in dollars.
e. A bond issued by Toyota worldwide with the interest payable in dollars.
5. (LO2) Are exchange rate changes necessarily good or bad for a particular company?
6. (LO5, 6) Duracell International confirmed in October 1995 that it was planning to open battery-manufacturing plants in China and India. Manufacturing in these countries allows Du- racell to avoid import duties of between 30 and 35 percent that have made alkaline batteries prohibitively expensive for some consumers. What additional advantages might Duracell see in this proposal? What are some of the risks to Duracell?
7. (LO3) Given that many multinationals based in many coun- tries have much greater sales outside their domestic markets than within them, what is the particular relevance of their do- mestic currency?
8. (LO3) Are the following statements true or false? Explain why.
a. If the general price index in Great Britain rises faster than that in Canada, we would expect the pound to appreciate relative to the dollar.
b. Suppose you are a European machine tool exporter and you invoice all of your sales in foreign currency. Further suppose that the European Union monetary authorities begin to undertake an expansionary monetary policy. If
630 Part 8: Topics in Corporate Finance
21Ross_Chapter21_3rd_B.indd 63021Ross_Chapter21_3rd_B.indd 630 12-12-03 13:3912-12-03 13:39
it is certain that the easy money policy will result in higher inflation rates in the European Union relative to those in other countries, then you should use the forward markets to protect yourself against future losses resulting from the deterioration in the value of the euro.
c. If you could accurately estimate differences in the relative inflation rates of two countries over a long period of time, while other market participants were unable to do so, you could succesCHFully speculate in spot currency markets.
9. (LO5) Some countries encourage movements in their ex- change rate relative to those of some other country as a short- term means of addressing foreign trade imbalances. For each of the following scenarios, evaluate the impact the announce- ment would have on a Canadian importer and a Canadian exporter doing business with the foreign country.
a. Officials in Ottawa announce that they are comfortable with a rising euro relative to the dollar.
b. British monetary authorities announce that they feel the pound has been driven too high by currency speculators relative to the U.S. dollar.
c. The Argentinian government announces that it will de- value the peso in an effort to improve its economy.
d. The Brazilian government announces that it will print billions of new reals and inject them into the economy, in an effort to reduce the country’s 40 percent unemploy- ment rate.
10. (LO3) We discussed five international capital market relation- ships: relative PPP, IRP, UFR, UIP, and the generalized Fisher effect. Which of these would you expect to hold most closely? Which do you think would be most likely to be violated?
Questions and Problems 1. Using Exchange Rates (LO2) Take a look back at Figure 21.1 to answer the following questions:
a. If you have CAD100, how many euros can you get? b. How much is one euro worth? c. If you have 5 million euros, how many dollars do you have? d. Which is worth more, an Australian dollar or a Singapore dollar? e. Which is worth more, an Indian rupee or a Chinese renminbi? f. How many Canadian dollars can you get for a euro? What do you call this rate? g. Per unit, what is the most valuable currency of those listed? The least valuable?
2. Using the Cross-Rate (LO2) Use the information in Figure 21.1 to answer the following questions: a. Which would you rather have, $100 or £100? Why? b. Which would you rather have, 100 Swiss francs (CHF) or £100? Why? c. What is the cross-rate for Swiss francs in terms of British pounds? For British pounds in terms of Swiss francs?
3. Forward Exchange Rates (LO2) Use the information in Figure 21.1 to answer the following questions: a. What is the six-month forward rate for the Japanese yen in yen per Canadian dollar? Is the yen selling at a premium or a
discount? Explain. b. What is the three-month forward rate for Canadian dollars in U.S. dollars per Canadian dollar? Is the dollar selling at a
premium or a discount? Explain. c. What do you think will happen to the value of the Canadian dollar relative to the yen and the U.S. dollar, based on the
information in the figure? Explain. 4. Using Spot and Forward Exchange Rates (LO2) Suppose the spot exchange rate for the Canadian dollar/US dollar is CAD1.05
and the six-month forward rate is CAD1.07. a. Which is worth more, a U.S. dollar or a Canadian dollar? b. Assuming absolute PPP holds, what is the cost in the United States of an Elkhead beer if the price in Canada is CAD2.50?
Why might the beer actually sell at a different price in the United States? c. Is the U.S. dollar selling at a premium or a discount relative to the Canadian dollar? d. Which currency is expected to depreciate in value? e. Which country do you think has higher interest rates—the United States or Canada? Explain.
5. Cross-Rates and Arbitrage (LO2) Suppose the Japanese yen exchange rate is ¥80 = $1, and the British pound exchange rate is £1 = $1.58.
a. What is the cross-rate in terms of yen per pound? b. Suppose the cross-rate is ¥129 = £1. Is there an arbitrage opportunity here? If there is, explain how to take advantage of the
mispricing. What would your arbitrage profit be per dollar used? 6. Interest Rate Parity (LO3) Use Figure 21.1 to answer the following questions: Suppose interest rate parity holds, and the
current six-month risk-free rate in Canada is 1.7 percent. What must the six-month risk-free rate be in Great Britain? In Japan? In European Union?
7. Interest Rates and Arbitrage (LO3) The treasurer of a major Canadian firm has $30 million to invest for three months. The interest rate in Canada is .24 percent per month. The interest rate in Great Britain is .29 percent per month. The spot exchange rate is £.631, and the three-month forward rate is £.633. Ignoring transaction costs, in which country would the treasurer want to invest the company’s funds? Why?
Basic (Questions
1–13)
2
3
5
Chapter 21: International Corporate Finance 631
21Ross_Chapter21_3rd_B.indd 63121Ross_Chapter21_3rd_B.indd 631 12-12-03 13:3912-12-03 13:39
8. Inflation and Exchange Rates (LO3) Suppose the current exchange rate for the Polish zloty is PLN2.86. The expected exchange rate in three years is PLN 2.94. What is the difference in the annual inflation rates for Canada and Poland over this period? Assume that the anticipated rate is constant for both countries. What relationship are you relying on in answering?
9. Exchange Rate Risk (LO5) Suppose your company imports computer motherboards from Singapore. The exchange rate is given in Figure 21.1. You have just placed an order for 30,000 motherboards at a cost to you of 233.5 Singapore dollars each. You will pay for the shipment when it arrives in 90 days. You can sell the motherboards for $195 each. Calculate your profit if the exchange rate goes up or down by 10 percent over the next 90 days. What is the break-even exchange rate? What percentage rise or fall does this represent in terms of the Singapore dollar versus the Canadian dollar?
10. Exchange Rates and Arbitrage (LO3) Suppose the spot and six-month forward rates on the Norwegian krone are NOK 5.78 and NOK 5.86, respectively. The annual risk-free rate in Canada is 3.8 percent, and the annual risk-free rate in Norway is 5.7 percent.
a. Is there an arbitrage opportunity here? If so, how would you exploit it? b. What must the six-month forward rate be to prevent arbitrage?
11. The Generalized Fisher Effect (LO3) You observe that the inflation rate in Canada is 2.6 percent per year and that T-bills currently yield 3.4 percent annually. What do you estimate the inflation rate to be in:
a. Australia, if short-term Australian government securities yield 4 percent per year? b. The United States, if short-term U.S. government securities yield 7 percent per year? c. Taiwan, if short-term Taiwanese government securities yield 9 percent per year?
12. Spot versus Forward Rates (LO2) Suppose the spot and three-month forward rates for the yen are ¥79.12 and ¥78.64, respectively.
a. Is the yen expected to get stronger or weaker? b. What would you estimate is the difference between the annual inflation rates of Canada and Japan?
13. Expected Spot Rates (LO2) Suppose the spot exchange rate for the Hungarian forint is HUF 204.32. The inflation rate in Canada will be 1.9 percent per year. It will be 4.5 percent in Hungary. What do you predict the exchange rate will be in one year? In two years? In five years? What relationship are you using?
14. Capital Budgeting (LO4) Gorbochevsky Equipment has an investment opportunity in Europe. The project costs EUR 12 million and is expected to produce cash flows of EUR 1.8 million in year 1, EUR 2.6 million in year 2, and EUR 3.5 million in year 3. The current spot exchange rate is $1.36/EUR; the current risk-free rate in Canada is 2.3 percent, compared to that in Europe of 1.8 percent. The appropriate discount rate for the project is estimated to be 13 percent, the Canadian cost of capital for the company. In addition, the subsidiary can be sold at the end of three years for an estimated EUR 8.9 million. What is the NPV of the project?
15. Capital Budgeting (LO4) You are evaluating a proposed expansion of an existing subsidiary located in Switzerland. The cost of the expansion would be CHF 21 million. The cash flows from the project would be CHF 5.9 million per year for the next five years. The dollar required return is 12 percent per year, and the current exchange rate is CHF 1.09. The going rate on Eurodollars is 5 percent per year. It is 4 percent per year on Euroswiss.
a. What do you project will happen to exchange rates over the next five years? b. Based on your answer in (a), convert the projected franc flows into dollar flows and calculate the NPV. c. What is the required return on franc cash flows? Based on your answer, calculate the NPV in francs and then convert to
dollars. 16. Translation Exposure (LO5) Gumtako International has operations in Arrakis. The statement of financial position for this
division in Arrakeen solaris shows assets of 27,000 solaris, debt in the amount of 11,000 solaris, and equity of 16,000 solaris. a. If the current exchange ratio is 1.50 solaris per dollar, what does the statement of financial position look like in dollars? b. Assume that one year from now the statement of financial position in solaris is exactly the same as at the beginning of the
year. If the exchange rate is 1.60 solaris per dollar, what does the statement of financial position look like in dollars now? c. Rework part (b) assuming the exchange rate is 1.41 solaris per dollar.
17. Translation Exposure (LO5) In the previous problem, assume the equity increases by 1,250 solaris due to retained earnings. If the exchange rate at the end of the year is 1.54 solaris per dollar, what does the statement of financial position look like?
18. Using the Generalized Fisher Effect (LO3, 4) From our discussion of the Fisher effect in Chapter 7, we know that the actual relationship between a nominal rate, R, a real rate, r, and an inflation rate, h, can be written as:
1 + r = (1 + R)/(1 + h) This is the domestic Fisher effect.
a. What is the non-approximate form of the generalized Fisher effect? b. Based on your answer in (a), what is the exact form for UIP? (Hint: Recall the exact form of IRP and use UFR.) c. What is the exact form for relative PPP? (Hint: Combine your previous two answers.) d. Recalculate the NPV for the Kihlstrom drill bit project (discussed in Section 21.5) using the exact forms for UIP and the
generalized Fisher effect. Verify that you get precisely the same answer either way.
Intermediate (Questions
14–16)
Challenge (Questions
17–18)
632 Part 8: Topics in Corporate Finance
21Ross_Chapter21_3rd_B.indd 63221Ross_Chapter21_3rd_B.indd 632 12-12-03 13:3912-12-03 13:39
Tuxedo Air Goes International
Mark Taylor and Jack Rodwell, the owners of Tuxedo Air, have been in discussions with a light aircraft dealer in Italy about selling the company’s planes in Europe. Tracy Jordon, the dealer, wants to add Tuxedo Air to his current retail line. Tracy has told Mark and Jack that he feels the retail sales will be ap- proximately €5 million per month. All sales will be made in euros, and Tracy will retain 5 percent of retail sales as a com- mission, which will be paid in euros. Because the planes will be customized to order, the first sales will take place in one month. Tracy will pay Tuxedo Air for the order 90 days after it is filled. This payment schedule will continue for the length of the contract between the two companies. Mark and Jack are confident the company can handle the extra volume with its existing facilities, but they are unsure about the potential financial risks of selling their planes in Eu- rope. In their discussion with Tracy, they found that the cur- rent exchange rate is $1.35/EUR. At the current exchange rate, the company would spend 80 percent of the sales on production costs. This number does not reflect the sales com- mission paid to Tracy.
Mark and Jack have decided to ask Ed Cowan, the compa- ny’s financial analyst, to prepare an analysis of the proposed international sales. Specifically, they ask Ed to answer the fol- lowing questions:
Questions
1. What are the pros and cons of the international sales? What additional risks will the company face?
2. What happens to the company’s profits if the dollar strengthens? What if the dollar weakens?
3. Ignoring taxes, what are Tuxedo Air’s projected gains or losses from this proposed arrangement at the current ex- change rate of $1.35/EUR? What happens to profits if the exchange rate changes to $1.25/EUR? At what exchange rate will the company break even?
4. How could the company hedge its exchange rate risk? What are the implications for this approach?
5. Taking all factors into account, should the company pur- sue the international sales further? Why or why not?
MINI CASE
Internet Application Questions The following web-links are related to equities that trade on foreign exchanges in the form of depository receipts. Trading on foreign exchanges allows the issuing firm to raise capital internationally, and benefit from increased scrutiny by foreign analysts. 1. What are American Depository Receipts (ADRs)? How are ADRs created? Go to the following website operated by J.P. Morgan,
the company that pioneered the use of ADRs in 1927. Look under Overview at adr.com. What are the advantages of investing in ADRs vis-à-vis the underlying foreign stock?
2. The Bank of New York Mellon is an important player in sponsoring ADRs. Go to its website at adrbnymellon.com and search for Hitachi (CUSIP: 433578507) ADR. What is the price of Hitachi ADR on the NYSE? Explain the meaning of RATIO on the ADR listings page. If 1USD = ¥100, what do you think is the price of Hitachi’s shares on the Tokyo Stock Exchange (in ¥)? You can find Hitachi’s share prices on the TSE’s website at tmx.com.
3. Go to the following website operated by Citibank, another big player in the ADR creation market: www.citiadr. idmanagedsolutions.com/www/front_page.idms. Explain how the dividend payment process works for ADRs. As a Canadian investor, do you face more foreign currency risk when you buy Hitachi’s ADRs on the NYSE, or Hitachi’s shares on the Tokyo Stock Exchange?
4. Go to marketvector.com and find the exchange rates section. Is the Canadian dollar expected to appreciate or depreciate com- pared to the U.S. dollar over the next six months? What is the difference in the annual inflation rates for the United States and Canada over this period? Assume that the anticipated rate is constant for both countries. What relationship are you relying on in your answers?
5. Go to the Financial Times site at ft.com, and find the currency section under the “Markets” link. Find the current exchange rate between the U.S. dollar and the euro. You can also locate interest rate information at this site. Find the Canadian dollar and euro interest rates. What must the one-year forward rate be to prevent arbitrage? What principle are you relying on in your answer?
6. Infosys Ltd., an Indian IT consulting and outsourcing services giant, has American Depository Receipts listed on the Nasdaq. Many ADRs listed on U.S. exchanges are for fractional shares. In the case of Infosys, one ADR is equal to one registered share. Find the information for Infosys by logging on to the Google Finance website (google.com/finance) and using the ticker symbol “INFY.” a. Click on the “Historical Prices” link and find Infosys’ closing price for May 2012. Assume the exchange rate on that day was
$/₹53.73 and Infosys shares traded for ₹2,453. Is there an arbitrage opportunity available? If so, how would you take advan- tage of it?
b. What exchange rate is necessary to eliminate the arbitrage opportunity available in part (a)?
Chapter 21: International Corporate Finance 633
21Ross_Chapter21_3rd_B.indd 63321Ross_Chapter21_3rd_B.indd 633 12-12-03 13:3912-12-03 13:39
Although corporations do both short-term leasing and long-term leasing, this chapter is pri- marily concerned with long-term leasing, where long-term typically means more than fi ve years. As we discuss in greater detail shortly, leasing an asset on a long-term basis is much like borrow- ing the needed funds and simply buying the asset. Th us, long-term leasing is a form of fi nancing much like long-term debt. When is leasing preferable to long-term borrowing? Th is is the ques- tion we seek to answer in this chapter.1
22.1 Leases and Lease Types
A lease is a contractual agreement between two parties: the lessee and the lessor. Th e lessee is the user of the equipment; the lessor is the owner. Typically, a company fi rst decides on the asset that it needs. Th en it must decide how to fi nance the asset. If the fi rm decides to lease, it then negotiates a lease contract with a lessor for use of that asset. Th e lease agreement establishes that the lessee has the right to use the asset and, in return, must make periodic payments to the les- sor, the owner of the asset. Th e lessor is usually either the asset’s manufacturer or an independent leasing company. If the lessor is an independent leasing company, it must buy the asset from a
1 Our discussion of lease valuation is drawn, in part, from Chapter 22 of S.A. Ross, R.W. Westerfield, J.F. Jaffe, and G.S. Roberts, Corporate Finance, 6th Canadian ed. (Whitby, Ontario: McGraw-Hill Ryerson, 2011), which contains a more comprehensive treatment and discusses some subtle, but important, issues not covered here.
aircanada.com cfla-acfl.ca
lessee The user of an asset in a leasing agreement. Lessee makes payments to lessor.
lessor The owner of an asset in a leasing agreement. Lessor receives payments from the lessee.
LEASING
C H A P T E R 2 2
I n March 2011, Bombardier Aerospace, the world’s third largest civil aircraft manufacturer, headquartered in Montreal, signed an $8 billion
aircraft-leasing agreement with ICBC Financial Leas-
ing Company Limited. One of the largest leasing
agreements Bombardier has ever signed, this deal
was designed to support China’s growing avia-
tion market. As we will see in this chapter, leasing
is just another form of financing for businesses and,
for reasons we will discuss, the aircraft industry is
particularly suited to leasing rather than buying.
Leasing is a way businesses finance plant, prop-
erty, and equipment. Just about any asset that can be
purchased can be leased, and there are many good
reasons for leasing. For example, when we take vaca-
tions or business trips, renting a car for a few days is
a convenient thing to do. After all, buying a car and
selling it a week later would be a great nuisance. We
discuss additional reasons for leasing in the sections
that follow.
Learning Object ives
After studying this chapter, you should understand:
LO1 The basics of a lease and the different types of leases.
LO2 How accounting rules and tax laws define financial leases.
LO3 The cash flows from leasing.
LO4 How to conduct a lease-versus-buy analysis.
LO5 How lessee and lessor can both benefit from leasing.
LO6 The difference between good and bad reasons for leasing.
C ou
rt es
y of
Bo
m ba
rd ie
r
22Ross_Chapter22_3rd.indd 63422Ross_Chapter22_3rd.indd 634 12-11-28 12:4612-11-28 12:46
manufacturer. Th e lessor then delivers the asset to the lessee, and the lease goes into eff ect. Some lessors play both roles. GE Capital, for example, leases GE’s own products and also leases aircraft to Air Canada.
Leasing versus Buying As far as the lessee is concerned, it is the use of the asset that is important, not necessarily who has title to it. One way to obtain the use of an asset is to lease it. Another way is obtain outside fi nanc- ing and buy it. Th us, the decision to lease or buy amounts to a comparison of alternative fi nancing arrangements for the use of an asset.
You may think of leasing analysis as an extension of the capital budgeting decision. Th e lessee has already done capital budgeting analysis and found that buying the asset has a positive NPV. Leasing analysis investigates whether acquiring the use of the asset through leasing is better still.
Figure 22.1 compares leasing and buying. Th e lessee, Canadian Enterprises, might be a hospi- tal, a law fi rm, or any other fi rm that uses computers. Th e lessor is an independent leasing com- pany that purchased the computer from a manufacturer such as Hewlett-Packard Company (HP). Leases of this type, where the leasing company purchases the asset from the manufacturer, are called direct leases. Of course, HP might choose to lease its own computers, and many companies have set up wholly owned subsidiaries called captive fi nance companies to lease out their products.2
FIGURE 22.1
Buying versus leasing
Manufacturer of asset
Canadian Enterprises arranges financing and buys asset from manufacturer
Canadian Enterprises 1. Uses asset 2. Owns asset
Buy Canadian Enterprises buys asset and uses asset; financing raised by debt and equity
Manufacturer of asset
Lessor arranges financing and buys asset
Lessor 1. Owns asset 2. Does not use asset
Lessee (Canadian Enterprises) 1. Uses asset 2. Does not own asset
Canadian Enterprises leases asset from lessor
Lease Canadian Enterprises leases asset from lessor; the lessor owns the asset
If Canadian Enterprises buys the asset, it owns the asset and uses it. If Canadian Enterprises leases the asset, the lessor owns it, but Canadian Enterprises still uses it as the lessee.
As shown in Figure 22.1, Canadian Enterprises ends up using the asset either way. Th e key dif- ference is that in the case of buying, Canadian Enterprises arranges the fi nancing, purchases the asset, and holds title to the asset. In the case of leasing, the leasing company arranges the fi nanc- ing, purchases the asset, and holds title to it.
Operating Leases Years ago, a lease where the lessee received an equipment operator along with the equipment was called an operating lease. Today, an operating lease (or service lease) is diffi cult to defi ne pre- cisely, but this form of leasing has several important characteristics.
2 Captive finance companies (or subsidiaries) may do a number of other things, such as purchase the parent company’s accounts receivable. Ford Credit and GE Capital are examples of captive finance companies. We discuss captive finance companies in Chapter 20.
gecapital.ca hp.com
operating lease Usually a shorter-term lease where the lessor is responsible for insurance, taxes, and upkeep. Often cancellable on short notice.
CHAPTER 22: Leasing 635
22Ross_Chapter22_3rd.indd 63522Ross_Chapter22_3rd.indd 635 12-11-28 12:4612-11-28 12:46
First, with an operating lease, the payments received by the lessor are usually not enough to fully recover the cost of the asset. A primary reason is that operating leases are oft en relatively short- term. In such cases, the life of the lease can be much less than the economic life of the asset. For example, if you lease a car for two years, the car has a substantial residual value at the end of the lease, and the lease payments you make would pay off only a fraction of the original cost of the car.
A second characteristic is that an operating lease frequently requires that the lessor maintain the asset. Th e lessor is also responsible for any taxes or insurance. Of course, these costs would be passed on, at least in part to the lessee in the form of higher lease payments.
Th e third, and perhaps most interesting, feature of an operating lease is the cancellation option. Th is option gives the lessee the right to cancel the lease contract before the expiration date. If the option to cancel is exercised, the lessee returns the equipment to the lessor and ceases to make payments. Th e value of a cancellation clause depends on whether technological and/or economic conditions are likely to make the value of the asset to the lessee less than the value of the future lease payments under the lease. Th is was seen during the fi nancial crisis of 2008, when the value of assets declined rapidly making the lease agreements less attractive.
To leasing practitioners, these three characteristics constitute an operating lease. However, as we see shortly, accountants use the term in a somewhat diff erent way.
Financial Leases Financial leases are the other major type of lease. In contrast to an operating lease, the payments made under a fi nancial lease are usually suffi cient to cover fully the lessor’s cost of purchasing the asset and pay the lessor a return on the investment. For this reason, a fi nancial lease is sometimes said to be a fully amortized or full-payout lease whereas an operating lease is said to be partially amortized.
For both operating and fi nancial leases, formal legal ownership of the leased asset resides with the lessor. However, in terms of economic function, we see that the lessee enjoys the risk/reward of ownership in a fi nancial lease. Operating leases, on the other hand, are more like a rental agreement.
With a fi nancial lease, the lessee (not the lessor) is usually responsible for insurance, maintenance, and taxes. Importantly, a fi nancial lease generally cannot be cancelled, at least not without a signifi - cant penalty. In other words, the lessee must make the lease payments or face possible legal action.
Th e characteristics of a fi nancial lease, particularly the fact it is fully amortized, make it very similar to debt fi nancing, so the name is a sensible one. Th ree special types of fi nancial leases are of particular interest, tax-oriented leases, sale and leaseback agreements, and leveraged leases. We consider these next.
TAX-ORIENTED LEASES A lease in which the lessor is the owner of the leased asset for tax purposes is called a tax-oriented lease. Such leases are also called tax leases or true leases. In contrast, a conditional sales agreement lease is not a true lease. Here, the “lessee” is the owner for tax purposes. Conditional sales agreement leases are really just secured loans. The financial leases we discuss in this chapter are all tax leases.
Tax-oriented leases make the most sense when the lessee is not in a position to use tax credits or depreciation deductions that come with owning the asset. By arranging for someone else to hold title, a tax lease passes these benefi ts on. Th e lessee can benefi t because the lessor may return a portion of the tax benefi ts to the lessee in the form of lower lease costs.
SALE AND LEASEBACK AGREEMENTS A sale and leaseback occurs when a com- pany sells an asset it owns to another firm and immediately leases it back. In a sale and leaseback, two things happen:
1. The lessee receives cash from the sale of the asset. 2. The lessee continues to use the asset.
An example of a sale and leaseback occurred in July 2009 when Air Canada arranged a sale and leaseback of three Boeing 777-300ER aircraft . Th e purchaser was GE Capital Aviation Centres institution and the transaction proceeds were $122 million providing Air Canada with immedi- ate cash during the fi nancial crises. Further examples include Canadian universities and hospitals that set up sale-leaseback deals for library books and medical equipment. With a sale and lease- back, the lessee may have the option of repurchasing the leased assets at the end of the lease. Tax changes have restricted sale-leasebacks in recent years.
financial leases Typically, a longer-term, fully amortized lease under which the lessee is responsible for upkeep. Usually not cancellable without penalty.
tax-oriented lease A financial lease in which the lessor is the owner for tax purposes. Also called a true lease or a tax lease.
sale and leaseback A financial lease in which the lessee sells an asset to the lessor and then leases it back.
636 Part 8: Topics in Corporate Finance
22Ross_Chapter22_3rd.indd 63622Ross_Chapter22_3rd.indd 636 12-11-28 12:4612-11-28 12:46
LEVERAGED LEASES A leveraged lease is a tax-oriented lease involving three parties: a lessee, a lessor, and a lender. A typical arrangement might go as follows:
1. The lessee selects the asset, gets the value of using the asset, and makes the periodic lease payments.
2. The lessor usually puts up no more than 40 to 50 percent of the financing, is entitled to the lease payments, has title to the asset, and pays interest to the lenders.
3. The lenders supply the remaining financing and receive interest payments. Thus, the ar- rangement on the right side of Figure 22.1 would be a leveraged lease if the bulk of the fi- nancing were supplied by creditors.
Th e lenders in a leveraged lease typically use a non-recourse loan. Th is means the lender cannot turn to the lessor in case of a default. However, the lender is protected in two ways:
1. The lender has a first lien on the asset. 2. The lender may actually receive the lease payments from the lessee. The lender deducts the
principal and interest due, and forwards whatever is left to the lessor.
1. What are the specific differences between an operating lease and a financial lease?
2. What is a tax-oriented lease?
3. What is a sale and leaseback agreement?
22.2 Accounting and Leasing
Before current accounting rules were in place, leasing was frequently called fi nancing off the state- ment of fi nancial position (also referred to as off balance sheet fi nancing). As the name implies, a fi rm could arrange to use an asset through a lease and not disclose the existence of the lease contract on the statement of fi nancial position. Lessees only had to report information on leasing activity in the footnotes of their fi nancial statements.
Of course, this meant fi rms could acquire the use of a substantial number of assets and incur a substantial long-term fi nancial commitment through fi nancial leases while not disclosing the impact of these arrangements in their fi nancial statements. Operating leases, being cancellable at little or no penalty, do not involve a fi rm fi nancial commitment. So operating leases did not generate much concern about complete disclosure. As a result, the accounting profession wanted to distinguish clearly between operating and fi nancial leases to ensure that the impact of fi nancial leases was included in the fi nancial statements.
Under current Canadian Institute of Chartered Accountants rules for lease accounting, all fi nan- cial leases (called capital leases) must be capitalized. Th ese rules originated under Canadian GAAP and continue under IFRS. Th is requirement means that the present value of the lease payments must be calculated and reported along with debt and other liabilities on the right side of the lessee’s statement of fi nancial position.3 Th e same amount must be shown as an asset on the statement of fi nancial position. Operating leases are not disclosed on the statement of fi nancial position. We discuss exactly what constitutes a fi nancial or operating lease for accounting purposes next.
Th e accounting implications of current lease accounting rules are illustrated in Table 22.1. Imag- ine a fi rm that has $100,000 in assets and no debt, implying that the equity is also $100,000. Th e fi rm needs a truck that costs $100,000 (it’s a big truck) that it can lease or buy. Th e top of the table shows the statement of fi nancial position assuming that the fi rm borrows the money and buys the truck.
If the fi rm leases the truck, one of two things happen: If the lease is an operating lease, the statement of fi nancial position looks like the one in the centre of the table. In this case, neither the asset (the truck) nor the liability (the lease payments) appear. If the lease is a capital (fi nancial)
3 The statement of comprehension income is also affected. The asset created is amortized over the lease life and reported income is adjusted downward. Current accounting rules are in CICA 3065.
leveraged lease A financial lease where the lessor borrows a substantial fraction of the cost of the leased asset.
Concept Questions
cica.ca
CHAPTER 22: Leasing 637
22Ross_Chapter22_3rd.indd 63722Ross_Chapter22_3rd.indd 637 12-11-28 12:4612-11-28 12:46
lease, the statement of fi nancial position would look like the one at the bottom of the table, where the truck is shown as an asset and the present value of the lease payments is shown as a liability.
As we discussed earlier, it is diffi cult, if not impossible, to give a precise defi nition of what con- stitutes a fi nancial or operating lease. For accounting purposes under IFRS, a lease is declared to be a fi nancial lease, and must therefore be disclosed, if at least one of the following criteria is met:
1. The lease transfers ownership of the property to the lessee by the end of the term of the lease. 2. The lessee has an option to purchase the asset at a price below fair market value (bargain
purchase price option) when the lease expires. 3. The lease term is 75 percent or more of the estimated economic life of the asset. 4. The present value of the lease payments is at least 90 percent of the fair market value of the
asset at the start of the lease. 5. The leased assets are of a specialised nature such that only the lessee can use them without
major modifications being made.
If one or more of the fi ve criteria is met, the lease is a capital lease; otherwise, it is an operating lease for accounting purposes.
A fi rm might be tempted to try and cook the books by taking advantage of the somewhat arbitrary distinction between operating leases and capital leases. Suppose a trucking fi rm wants to lease the $100,000 truck in our example in Table 22.1. Th e truck is expected to last for 15 years. A (perhaps unethical) fi nancial manager could try to negotiate a lease contract for 10 years with lease payments having a present value of $89,000. Th ese terms would get around criteria 3 and 4. If the other criteria are similarly circumvented, the arrangement will be an operating lease and will not show up on the statement of fi nancial position.
TABLE 22.1
Leasing and the statement of financial position
1. Initial statement of financial position (the company buys a $100,000 truck with debt) Truck Other assets Total assets
$ 100,000 100,000 $ 200,000
Debt Equity Total debt plus equity
$100,000 100,000 $ 200,000
2. Operating lease (the company has an operating lease for the truck) Truck Other assets Total assets
$ 0 100,000 $ 100,000
Debt Equity Total debt plus equity
$ 0 100,000 $ 100,000
3. Capital (financial) lease (the company has a capital lease for the truck) Assets under capital lease Other assets Total assets
$ 100,000 100,000 $ 200,000
Obligations under capital lease Equity Total debt plus equity
$100,000 100,000 $ 200,000
In the fi rst case, a $100,000 truck is purchased with debt. In the second case, an operating lease is used; no statement of fi nancial position entries are created. In the third case, a capital (fi nancial) lease is used; the lease payments are capitalized as a liability, and the leased truck appears as an asset.
Th ere are several alleged benefi ts to hiding fi nancial leases. One of the advantages to keeping leases off the statement of fi nancial position has to do with fooling fi nancial analysts, creditors, and invest- ors. Th e idea is that if leases are not on the statement of fi nancial position, they will not be noticed.
Financial managers who devote substantial eff ort to keeping leases off the statement of fi nancial position are probably wasting time. Of course, if leases are not on the statement of fi nancial position, traditional measures of fi nancial leverage, such as the ratio of total debt to total assets, understate the true degree of fi nancial leverage. As a consequence, the statement of fi nancial position appears stron- ger than it really is, but it seems unlikely that this type of manipulation could mislead many people.
Nonetheless, fi rms do try to hide leases. For example, a controversial type of lease, known as a synthetic lease, has come to be widely used. Th e details are a little complex; in essence, a company
638 Part 8: Topics in Corporate Finance
22Ross_Chapter22_3rd.indd 63822Ross_Chapter22_3rd.indd 638 12-11-28 12:4612-11-28 12:46
arranges for a separate entity to purchase an asset (oft en a building) and then lease that asset back to the company. If the deal is properly structured, the company is considered the owner of the property for tax purposes, but for accounting purposes, the transaction is classifi ed as an operating lease. Faced with investor criticism of this practice, some fi rms, such as Krispy Kreme Doughnuts, have announced that they will no longer engage in synthetic leasing.
Having said all of this, there are some reasons why a fi rm might reasonably try to come in under the radar of the accounting lease test. For example, if a fi rm’s managers are told that capital spending is frozen, an operating lease may still be an option. Alternatively, a fi rm might face a restriction on additional borrowing (a loan covenant, perhaps). A fi nancial lease counts as debt, but an operating lease does not.
1. For accounting purposes, what constitutes a capital lease?
2. How are capital leases reported?
22.3 Taxes, Canada Revenue Agency (CRA), and Leases
Th e lessee can deduct lease payments for income tax purposes if the lease is qualifi ed by Canada Revenue Agency (CRA). Th e tax shields associated with lease payments are critical to the eco- nomic viability of a lease, so CRA guidelines are an important consideration. Tax rules on leasing have changed considerably in the last few years and further changes may occur. Th e discussion that follows gives you a good idea of rules in force at the time of writing.
Essentially, CRA requires that a lease be primarily for business purposes and not merely for tax avoidance. In particular, CRA is on the lookout for leases that are really conditional sales agree- ments in disguise. Th e reason is that, in a lease, the lessee gets a tax deduction on the full lease payment. In a conditional sales agreement, only the interest portion of the payment is deductible. When CRA detects one or more of the following, it disallows the lease:
1. The lessee automatically acquires title to the property after payment of a specified amount in the form of rentals.
2. The lessee is required to buy the property from the lessor during or at the termination of the lease.
3. The lessee has the right during or at the expiration of the lease to acquire the property at a price less than fair market value.
Th ese rules also apply to sale-leaseback agreements. CRA auditors rule that a sale-leaseback is really a secured loan if they fi nd one of the three terms in the sale-leaseback agreement.
Once leases are qualifi ed for tax purposes, lessors still must be aware of further tax regulations limiting their use of CCA tax shields on leased assets. Current regulations allow lessors to deduct CCA from leasing income only. Any unused CCA tax shields cannot be passed along to other companies owned by the same parent holding company.
1. Why is CRA concerned about leasing?
2. What are some of the standards CRA uses in evaluating a lease?
22.4 The Cash Flows from Leasing
To begin our analysis of the leasing decision, we need to identify the relevant cash fl ows. Th e fi rst part of this section illustrates how this is done. A key point, and one to watch for, is that taxes are a very important consideration in a lease analysis.
Concept Questions
cra-arc.gc.ca
Concept Questions
CHAPTER 22: Leasing 639
22Ross_Chapter22_3rd.indd 63922Ross_Chapter22_3rd.indd 639 12-11-28 12:4612-11-28 12:46
The Incremental Cash Flows Consider the business decision facing TransCanada Distributors, a distribution fi rm that runs a fl eet of company cars for its sales staff . Business has been expanding and the fi rm needs 50 addi- tional cars to provide basic transportation in support of sales. Th e type of car required can be purchased wholesale for $10,000. TransCanada has determined that each car can be expected to generate an additional $6,000 per year in added sales for the next fi ve years.
TransCanada has a corporate tax rate (combined federal and provincial) of 40 percent. Th e cars would qualify for a CCA rate of 40 percent (as rental cars) and, due to the hard-driving habits of TransCanada’s sales staff , the cars would have no residual value aft er fi ve years. Using all this information, a TransCanada fi nancial analyst determines that acquiring the 50 cars is a capital budgeting decision with a positive NPV. At this point, TransCanada receives an off er from Finan- cial Leasing Company to lease the cars to TransCanada for lease payments of $2,500 per year for each car over the fi ve-year period. Lease payments are made at the beginning of the year. With the lease, TransCanada would remain responsible for maintenance, insurance, and operating expenses.
Susan Smart has been asked to compare the direct incremental cash fl ows from leasing the cars to the cash fl ows associated with buying them. Th e fi rst thing she realizes is that, because TransCanada has the cars either way, the $6,000 saving is realized whether the cars are leased or purchased. Th us, this cost saving, and any other operating costs or revenues, can be ignored in the analysis because they are not incremental.
On refl ection, Smart concludes that there are only three important cash fl ow diff erences between leasing and buying:4
1. If the cars are leased, TransCanada must make a lease payment of $2,500 each year. How- ever, lease payments are fully tax deductible, so there is a tax shield of $1,000 on each lease payment. The after-tax lease payment is $2,500 - $1,000 = $1,500. This is a cost of leasing instead of buying.5
2. If the cars are leased, TransCanada does not have to spend $10,000 apiece today to buy them. This is a benefit to leasing.
3. If the cars are leased, TransCanada does not own them and cannot depreciate them for tax purposes.
TABLE 22.2
Tax shield on CCA for car
Year UCC CCA Tax Shields
0 $5,000 $2,000 $ 800 1 8,000 3,200 1,280 2 4,800 1,920 768 3 2,880 1,152 461 4 1,728 691 276 5 1,037 415
Table 22.2 shows the CCA and UCC schedule for one car.6 Notice that CRA’s half-year rule means that the eligible UCC is only $5,000 when the car is put in use in Year 0. Table 22.2 also shows the tax shield on CCA for each year. For example, in Year 0, the tax shield is $2,000 × .40 = $800. Th e tax shields for Years 1–4 are calculated in the same way. In Year 5, the car is scrapped for a zero salvage value. We assume that the asset pool is closed at this time, so there is a tax shield on the
4 There is a fourth consequence that we do not discuss here. If the car has a non-trivial salvage value and we lease, we give up that salvage value. This is another cost of leasing instead of buying that we consider later. 5 Lease payments are made at the beginning of the year as shown in Table 22.3. Firms pay taxes later but our analysis ig- nores this difference for simplicity. Taxes paid later in the year should be discounted. 6 To keep the lease and purchase alternatives comparable, we assume here that TransCanada buys the cars at the begin- ning of period 0.
640 Part 8: Topics in Corporate Finance
22Ross_Chapter22_3rd.indd 64022Ross_Chapter22_3rd.indd 640 12-11-28 12:4612-11-28 12:46
terminal loss of $1,037 × .40 = $415.7 All these tax shields are lost to TransCanada if it leases, so they are a cost of leasing.
TABLE 22.3
Incremental cash flows for TransCanada from leasing one car instead of buying
Year
0 1 2 3 4 5
Investment $10,000 Lease payment -2,500 -$2,500 -$2,500 -$2,500 $2,500
Payment shield 1,000 1,000 1,000 1,000 1,000 Forgone tax shield -800 -1,280 -768 -461 -276 -$415 Total cash flow $ 7,700 -$2,780 -$2,268 -$1,961 -$1,776 -$415
Th e cash fl ows from leasing instead of buying are summarized in Table 22.3. Notice that the cost of the car shows up with a positive sign in Year 0. Th is is a refl ection of the fact that TransCanada saves $10,000 by leasing instead of buying.
A NOTE ON TAXES Susan Smart has assumed that TransCanada can use the tax benefits of the CCA allowances and the lease payments. This may not always be the case. If TransCanada were losing money, it would not pay taxes and the tax shelters would be worthless (unless they could be shifted to someone else). As we mentioned, this is one circumstance under which leasing may make a great deal of sense. If this were the case, the relevant lines in Table 22.3 would have to be changed to reflect a zero tax rate. We return to this point later.
1. What are the cash flow consequences of leasing instead of buying?
2. Explain why the $10,000 in Table 22.3 is a positive number.
22.5 Lease or Buy?
From our discussion thus far, Smart’s analysis comes down to this: If TransCanada Distributors leases instead of buying, it saves $10,000 today because it avoids having to pay for the car, but it must give up the cash outfl ows detailed in Table 22.3 in exchange. We now must decide whether getting $10,000 today and then paying back these cash fl ows is a good idea.
A Prel iminary Analysis Suppose TransCanada were to borrow $10,000 today and promise to make aft er-tax payments of the cash fl ows shown in Table 22.3 over the next fi ve years. Th is is essentially what the fi rm does when it leases instead of buying. What interest rate would TransCanada be paying on this “loan”? Going back to Chapter 9, we need to fi nd the unknown rate that solves the following equation:
0 = 7,700 - 2,780 _____ 1 + i - 2,268 _______ ( 1 + i ) 2 -
1,961 _______ ( 1 + i ) 3 - 1,776 _______ ( 1 + i ) 4 -
415 _______ ( 1 + i ) 5
Th e equation may be solved by trial and error using Microsoft Excel 2010 or any compatible spreadsheet to show that the discount rate is 7.8 percent aft er-tax.
Th e cash fl ows of our hypothetical loan are identical to the cash fl ows from leasing instead of borrowing, and what we have illustrated is that when TransCanada leases the car, it eff ectively arranges fi nancing at an aft er-tax rate of 7.8 percent. Whether this is a good deal or not depends
7 If the pool were continued, the remaining UCC of $1,037 would be depreciated to infinity as explained in Chapter 2. We consider this later.
Concept Questions
CHAPTER 22: Leasing 641
22Ross_Chapter22_3rd.indd 64122Ross_Chapter22_3rd.indd 641 12-11-28 12:4612-11-28 12:46
on what rate TransCanada would pay if it simply borrowed the money. For example, suppose the fi rm can arrange a fi ve-year loan with its bank at a rate of 11 percent. Should TransCanada sign the lease or should it go with the bank?
Because TransCanada is in a 40 percent tax bracket, the aft er-tax interest rate would be 11 × (1 - .40) = 6.6 percent. Th is is less than the 7.8 percent implicit aft er-tax rate on the lease. In this particular case, TransCanada is better off borrowing the money because it gets a better rate.
We have seen that TransCanada should buy instead of lease. Th e steps in our analysis can be summarized as follows:
1. Calculate the incremental after-tax cash flows from leasing instead of borrowing. 2. Use these cash flows to calculate the implicit after-tax interest rate on the lease. 3. Compare this rate to the company’s after-tax borrowing cost and choose the cheaper source
of financing.
Th e most important thing about our discussion thus far is that in evaluating a lease, the relevant rate for the comparison is the company’s aft er-tax borrowing rate. Th e fundamental reason is that the alternative to leasing is long-term borrowing, so the aft er-tax borrowing rate on such borrow- ing is the relevant benchmark.
THREE POTENTIAL PITFALLS There are three potential problems with the implicit rate on the lease that we calculated: First, this rate can be interpreted as the internal rate of return (IRR) on the decision to lease instead of buy, but doing so can be confusing. To see why, notice that the IRR from leasing is 7.8 percent, which is greater than TransCanada’s after-tax borrowing cost of 6.6 percent. Normally, the higher the IRR the better, but we decided that leasing was a bad idea here. The reason is that the cash flows are not conventional; the first cash flow is positive and the rest are negative, which is just the opposite of the conventional case (see Chapter 9 for a dis- cussion). With this cash flow pattern, the IRR represents the rate we pay, not the rate we earn, so the lower the IRR the better.
A second, and related, potential pitfall is that we calculated the advantage of leasing instead of borrowing. We could have done just the opposite and come up with the advantage to bor- rowing instead of leasing. If we did this, the cash fl ows would be the same, but the signs would be reversed. Th e IRR would be the same. Now, however, the cash fl ows are conventional, so we interpret the 7.8 percent IRR as saying that borrowing is better.
Th e third potential problem is that our implicit rate is based on the net cash fl ows of leasing instead of borrowing. Th ere is another rate that is sometimes calculated that is just based on the lease payments. If we wanted to, we could note that the lease provides $10,000 in fi nancing and requires fi ve payments of $2,500 each. It is tempting to determine an implicit rate based on these numbers, but the resulting rate is not meaningful for making lease-versus-buy decisions because it ignores the CCA tax shields. It should not be confused with the implicit return on leasing instead of borrowing and buying.
Perhaps because of these potential confusions, the IRR approach we have outlined thus far is not as widely used as an NPV-based approach that we describe next.
NPV Analysis Now that we know the relevant rate for evaluating a lease-versus-buy decision is the fi rm’s aft er- tax borrowing cost, an NPV analysis is straightforward. We simply discount the cash fl ows in Table 22.3 back to the present at TransCanada’s borrowing rate of 6.6 percent as follows:
NPV = $7,700 - $2,780 _______ ( 1.066 ) - $2,268 _______ ( 1.066 ) 2 -
$1,961 _______ ( 1.066 ) 3 - $1,776 _______ ( 1.066 ) 4 -
$415 _______ ( 1.066 ) 5 = -$199
Th e NPV from leasing instead of buying is -$199, verifying our earlier conclusion that leasing is a bad idea. Once again, notice the signs of the cash fl ows; the fi rst is positive, the rest are negative. Th e NPV that we have computed here is oft en called the net advantage to leasing and abbrevi- ated NAL. Surveys indicate that the NAL approach is the most popular means of lease analysis in the business world.
net advantage to leasing (NAL) The NPV of the decision to lease an asset instead of buying it.
642 Part 8: Topics in Corporate Finance
22Ross_Chapter22_3rd.indd 64222Ross_Chapter22_3rd.indd 642 12-11-28 12:4612-11-28 12:46
A Misconception In our lease-versus-buy analysis, it looks as if we ignored the fact that if TransCanada borrows $10,000 to buy the car, it has to repay the money with interest. In fact, we reasoned that if Trans- Canada leased the car, it would be better off by $10,000 today because it wouldn’t have to pay for the car. It is tempting to argue that if TransCanada borrowed the money, it wouldn’t have to come up with the $10,000. Instead, the fi rm would make a series of principal and interest payments over the next fi ve years. Th is observation is true, but not particularly relevant. Th e reason is that if Trans- Canada borrows $10,000 at an aft er-tax cost of 6.6 percent, the present value of the aft er-tax loan payments is simply $10,000, no matter what the repayment schedule is (assuming that the loan is fully amortized). Th us, we could write down the aft er-tax loan repayments and work with these, but it would just be extra work for no gain. (See Problem 11 at the end of the chapter for an example.)
EXAMPLE 22.1: Lease Evaluation
In our TransCanada example, suppose the firm is able to negotiate a lease payment of $2,000 per year. What would be the NPV of the lease in this case?
Table 22.4 shows the new cash flows. You can verify that the NPV of the lease (net advantage to leasing) at 6.6 percent is now a substantial $1,126.
TABLE 22.4
Revised NAL spreadsheet
Year
0 1 2 3 4 5
Investment $ 10,000 Lease payment -2,000 -$ 2,000 -$2,000 -$2,000 -$2,000 Payment shield 800 800 800 800 800 Forgone tax shield -800 -1,280 -768 -461 -276 -$415 Total cash flow $ 8,000 -$2,480 -$1,968 -$1,661 -$1,476 -$415 NAL $ 1,126
Asset Pool and Salvage Value Th e TransCanada example where the asset pool is assumed to close and the salvage value of the vehicle is assumed to be zero at the end of four years is simplistic. In reality, this may occur in some circumstances but in most situations the asset pool will remain open and the car will have some resale value. To illustrate, we assume that the vehicle will have a $500 resale value.
Assuming that the asset pool will not close aft er the lease is complete, Table 22.5 shows the incremental cash fl ows for TransCanada leaving out the forgone tax shield.
TABLE 22.5
Incremental cash flows for TransCanada from leasing one car instead of buying
0 1 2 3 4
Investment $10,000 Lease payment -2,500 -$2,500 -$2,500 -$2,500 -$2,500 Payment shield 1,000 1,000 1,000 1,000 1,000 Salvage value -500
$ 8,500 -$1,500 -$1,500 -$1,500 -$2,000
CHAPTER 22: Leasing 643
22Ross_Chapter22_3rd.indd 64322Ross_Chapter22_3rd.indd 643 12-11-28 12:4612-11-28 12:46
Th e present value of these payments, using the 6.6 percent discount rate calculated earlier is
PV = $8,500 - $1,500 ______ 1.066 - $1,500 _______ ( 1.066 ) 2 -
$1,500 _______ ( 1.066 ) 3 - $2,000 _______ ( 1.066 ) 4 = $2,986
Assuming that the salvage value for the vehicle is $500 at the end of four years, the present value of the CCA tax shield is8
PV = [ Cd T c ] ______ k + d ×
[ 1 + 0.5k ] _________ 1 + k - Sd T c _____ k + d ×
1 _______ ( 1 + k ) n
= ( $10,000 ) ( 0.40 ) ( 0.40 ) __________________ 0.066 + 0.40 ×
[ 1 + 0.5 ( 0.066 ) ] ______________ 1 + 0.066 - ( $500 ) ( 0.40 ) ( 0.40 ) ________________ 0.066 + 0.40 ×
1 ___________ ( 1 + 0.066 ) 4 = $3,194
Th ese revised calculations show that the net present value of leasing one car instead of buying amounts to $2,986 - $3,194 = -$208 when the vehicle has a salvage value of $500. Given that the NPV is negative, it would be better to buy the vehicle than to lease. Th e result is quite close to our previous answer where it was also better to buy than lease.
We can summarize our calculations in the following modifi ed formula for the Net Advantage to Leasing (NAL):
NAL = Investment - PV (after-tax lease payments) - PVCCATS - PV (Salvage)
Th ere is a risk associated with the estimation of salvage value and therefore a higher rate could be applied.
1. What is the relevant discount rate for evaluating whether or not to lease an asset? Why?
2. Explain how to go about a lease-versus-buy analysis.
22.6 A Leasing Paradox
We previously looked at the lease-versus-buy decision from the perspective of the potential lessee, TransCanada Distributors. We now turn things around and look at the lease from the perspective of the lessor, Financial Leasing Company. Th e cash fl ows associated with the lease from the les- sor’s perspective are shown in Table 22.6.9 First, the lessor must buy each car for $10,000, so there is a $10,000 outfl ow today. Next, Financial Leasing depreciates the car at a CCA rate of 40 percent to obtain the CCA tax shields shown. Finally, the lessor receives a lease payment of $2,500 each year on which it pays taxes at a 40 percent tax rate. Th e aft er-tax lease payment received is $1,500.
TABLE 22.6
Cash flows to the lessor Year 0 1 2 3 4 5
Investment -$10,000 Lease payment 2,500 $2,500 $2,500 $2,500 $2,500 Payment shield -1,000 -1,000 -1,000 -1,000 -1,000 Forgone tax shield -800 1,280 768 461 276 $415
Total cash flow -$ 7,700 $2,780 $2,268 $1,961 $1,776 $415
NAL $ 199
8 Refer to Chapter 10 for the details on the formula. 9 To keep things simple, we go back to our original case where salvage was zero and the asset pool closed.
Concept Questions
644 Part 8: Topics in Corporate Finance
22Ross_Chapter22_3rd.indd 64422Ross_Chapter22_3rd.indd 644 12-11-28 12:4612-11-28 12:46
What we see is that the cash fl ows to Financial Leasing (the lessor) are exactly the opposite of the cash fl ows to TransCanada Distributers (the lessee). Th is makes perfect sense because Financial Leasing and TransCanada are the only parties to the transaction, and the lease is a zero-sum game. In other words, if the lease has a positive NPV to one party, it must have a negative NPV to the other. Financial Leasing hopes that TransCanada will do the deal because the NPV would be +$199, just what TransCanada would lose.
We seem to have a paradox. In any leasing arrangement, one party must inevitably lose (or both parties exactly break even). Why would leasing occur? We know that leasing is very impor- tant in the business world, so the next section describes some factors that we have omitted thus far from our analysis. Th ese factors can make a lease attractive to both parties.
EXAMPLE 22.2: It’s the Lease We Can Do
In our TransCanada example, a lease payment of $2,500 makes the lease unattractive to TransCanada and a lease payment of $2,000 makes the lease very attractive. What payment would leave TransCanada indifferent to leasing or not leasing?
TransCanada is indifferent when the NPV from leasing is zero. For this to happen, the present value of the cash flows
from leasing instead of buying would have to be -$10,000. From our previous efforts, we know the answer is to set the payments somewhere between $2,500 and $2,000. To find the exact payment, we use our spreadsheet as shown in Table 22.7. It turns out that the NPV of leasing is zero for a payment of $2,425.
TABLE 22.7
Indifference lease payments
Year
0 1 2 3 4 5
Investment $ 10,000 Lease payment -2,425 -$2,425 -$2,425 -$2,425 -$2,425 Payment shield 970 970 970 970 970 Forgone tax shield 800 -1,280 -768 -461 -276 -$415 Total cash flow $ 7,745 -$2,735 -$2,223 -$1,916 -$1,731 -$415 NAL $ 0
1. Why do we say that leasing is a zero-sum game?
2. What paradox does the first question create?
Resolving the Paradox A lease contract is not a zero-sum game between the lessee and lessor when their eff ective tax rates diff er. In this case, the lease can be structured so that both sides benefi t. Any tax benefi ts from leasing can be split between the two fi rms by setting the lease payments at the appropriate level, and the shareholders of both fi rms benefi t from this tax transfer arrangement. Th e loser is Canada Revenue Agency.
Th is works because a lease contract swaps two sets of tax shields. Th e lessor obtains the CCA tax shields due to ownership. Th e lessee receives the tax shield on lease payments made. In a full-payout lease, the total dollar amounts of the two sets of tax shields may be roughly the same, but the criti- cal diff erence is the timing. CCA tax shields are accelerated deductions reducing the tax burden in early years. Lease payments, on the other hand, reduce taxes by the same amount in every year. As a result, the ownership tax shields oft en have a greater present value provided the fi rm is fully taxed.
Concept Questions
CHAPTER 22: Leasing 645
22Ross_Chapter22_3rd.indd 64522Ross_Chapter22_3rd.indd 645 12-11-28 12:4612-11-28 12:46
Th e basic logic behind structuring a leasing deal makes a fi rm in a high tax bracket want to act as the lessor. Low tax (or untaxed) fi rms are lessees because they are not able to use the tax advantages of ownership, such as CCA and debt fi nancing. Th ese ownership tax shields are worth less to the lessee because the lessee faces a lower tax rate or may not have enough taxable income to absorb the accelerated tax shields in the early years.
Overall, less tax is paid by the lessee and lessor combined and this tax savings occurs sooner rather than later. Th e lessor gains on the tax side; the lessee may lose but the amount of any loss is less than the lessor gains. To make the lease attractive, the lessor must pass on some of the tax savings in the form of lower lease payments. In the end, the lessor gains by keeping part of the tax savings, the lessee gains through a lower lease payment, and CRA pays for both gains through a reduction in tax revenue.
To see how this would work in practice, recall the example of Section 22.4 and the situation of Financial Leasing. Th e value of the lease it proposed to TransCanada was $199. Th e value of the lease to TransCanada was exactly the opposite -$199. Since the lessor’s gains came at the expense of the lessee, no deal could be arranged. However, if TransCanada pays no taxes and the lease payments are reduced to $2,437 from $2,500, both Financial Leasing and TransCanada fi nd there is positive NPV in leasing.
To see this, we can rework Table 22.3 with a zero tax rate. Th is would be the case when Trans- Canada has enough alternate tax shields to reduce taxable income to zero for the foreseeable future.10 In this case, notice that the cash fl ows from leasing are simply the lease payments of $2,437 because no CCA tax shield is lost and the lease payment is not tax deductible. Th e cash fl ows from leasing are thus:
Year
0 1 2 3 4 5
Cost of car $10,000 Lease payment -2,437 -$2,437 -$2,437 -$2,437 -$2,437 0
Cash flow $ 7,563 -$2,437 -$2,437 -$2,437 -$2,437 0
Th e value of the lease for TransCanada is
NAL = $7,563 - $2,437 × (1 - 1/1.114)/.11 = $2.34
which is positive. Notice that the discount rate here is 11 percent because TransCanada pays no taxes; in other words, this is both the pre-tax and the aft er-tax rate.
From Table 22.8, the value of the lease to Financial Leasing can be worked out as +$36 using the aft er-tax discount rate of 6.6 percent.
TABLE 22.8
Revised cash flows to lessor
Year
0 1 2 3 4 5
Investment -$ 10,000 Lease payment 2,437 $2,437 $2,437 $2,437 $2,437 Payment shield -974 -974 -974 -974 -974 CCA tax shield 800 1,280 768 461 276 $415 Total cash flow -$ 7,737 $2,743 $2,231 $1,924 $1,739 $415
NPV lessor $ 36
As a consequence of diff erent tax rates, the lessee (TransCanada) gains $2.34, and the lessor (Financial Leasing) gains $36. CRA loses. What this example shows is that the lessor and the les- see can gain if their tax rates are diff erent. Th e lease contract allows the lessor to take advantage
10 Strictly speaking, the UCC of the cars would be carried on the books until the firm is able to claim CCA. However, the present value of the CCA tax shield would be low; so for the sake of simplicity, we ignore it here.
646 Part 8: Topics in Corporate Finance
22Ross_Chapter22_3rd.indd 64622Ross_Chapter22_3rd.indd 646 12-11-28 12:4612-11-28 12:46
of the CCA and interest tax shields that cannot be used by the lessee. CRA experiences a net loss of tax revenue, and some of the tax gains to the lessor are passed on to the lessee in the form of lower lease payments.
Leasing and Capital Budgeting Recall that we began the TransCanada car-leasing example by saying that the fi rm had already made a capital budgeting decision to acquire the 50 cars. Our analysis focused on whether to buy the cars or to lease them. For this reason we ignored the added sales generated by the car acquisi- tion because they would be realized whether the cars were purchased or leased. We focused on what was incremental in developing the formula for the NPV of the decision to lease instead of buy. We called this the net advantage to leasing or NAL. NAL measures the value creation from leasing rather than buying the asset.
In our initial analysis, both TransCanada and the lessor, Financial Leasing, had the same tax rate and, as a result, NAL was -$199. Th is meant that if TransCanada leased the cars, the NPV of the capital budgeting decision would be $199 lower than if the fi rm bought the cars.
We then modifi ed the example to recognize that, in practice, leasing deals are oft en designed to take benefi t from a situation in which the lessor faces a higher tax rate than the lessee. In particu- lar, we showed that when TransCanada pays no tax and Financial Leasing faces the same 40 per- cent tax rate as earlier, the NALs are positive to both parties. Th is occurs because the loser is CRA.
From a capital budgeting perspective, in this realistic case, the NAL to TransCanada of $2.34 tells us that the NPV of acquiring one car increases by this amount by using lease fi nancing.
A major fi nancial decision for many students is whether to buy or lease a car. We went to Industry Canada’s Offi ce of Consumer Aff airs at ic.gc.ca/eic/site/oca-bc.nsf/eng/ca01851.html to fi nd a lease-versus-buy calculator. We analyzed a new car purchase for $24,000 with a 60-month loan and no down payment. To lease the car for four years requires monthly taxes of $48.01 for an Ontario resident. Th e calculator assumes that a buyer would keep the car for eight years (the national average) and compares ownership to two four-year leases. According to Consumer Aff airs buying the car is the better fi nancial decision.11
EXAMPLE 22.3: Car Leasing
Purchase Province of Residence
Purchase Price (excluding tax) $
Freight and PDI? $
Financing Rate %
Finance Term months
Tax Rate %
Amount To Be Financed $
Trade-in Value of Current Vehicle $
Down Payment $
Monthly Payment $
Total Interest Charges $
24,000
1,000
6.25
60
13
28,750
0.00
0.00
559.17
4,799.88?
?
?
?
?
?
?
?
?
?
TIPS DEFINITIONS APPLICATION NOTES CALCULATOR
(continued)
11 For a general discussion of auto leasing that reaches the same conclusion see: J. Beltrame, “Leasing a car is the worst financial option for most,” Canadian Press, March 2, 2012.
CHAPTER 22: Leasing 647
22Ross_Chapter22_3rd.indd 64722Ross_Chapter22_3rd.indd 647 12-11-28 12:4612-11-28 12:46
Compare With Leasing Option 1 - Two Leases (8 years)
Leasing Option 2 - Lease and Buy-Out
First Lease Purchase Price (excluding tax) $
Freight and PDI? $
Financing Rate %
Lease Term months
Residual % %
Residual Value $
Trade-in Value of Current Vehicle $
Down Payment (excluding tax) $
Monthly Payment $
Tax Rate %
Monthly Taxes $?
24,000
1,000
6.25
48
50
12,000
0
0
369.3
13
48.01
?
?
?
?
?
?
?
?
?
?
?
Your Result Purchase Lease Monthly Payment $549.44 Monthly Payments
1st lease 2nd lease
$417.31 $417.31
Total Interest Charges $4,716.50 1st lease 2nd lease Total Interest Charges
$4,726.29 $4,726.29 $9,452.58
Total Outlay for Purchase $32,966.40 Total Outlay over 8 years $40,061.41
Approximate Maintenance Costs
$5,530.00 1st lease 2nd lease Total Maintenance Costs
$1,755.00 $1,755.00 $3,510.00
Total Outlay including Maintenance Costs
$38,496.40 Total Outlay including Maintenance Costs
$43,571.41
Potential Saving* Buying Leasing Number of periods without payments
36 months Number of periods without payments
0 months
* Does not take into account any spending on maintenance
Source: Industry Canada’s Offi ce of Consumer Affairs, ic.gc.ca/eic/site/oca-bc.nsf/eng/ca01851.html. Used with permission.
648 Part 8: Topics in Corporate Finance
22Ross_Chapter22_3rd.indd 64822Ross_Chapter22_3rd.indd 648 12-11-28 12:4612-11-28 12:46
22.7 Reasons for Leasing
Proponents of leasing make many claims about why fi rms should lease assets rather than buy them. Some of the reasons given to support leasing are good, while some are not. We discuss here the reasons for leasing we think are good and some that we think are not so good.
Good Reasons for Leasing If leasing is a good choice, it is probably because one or more of the following is true:
1. Taxes may be reduced by leasing. 2. The lease contract may reduce certain types of uncertainty that might otherwise decrease the
value of the firm. 3. Transaction costs can be lower for a lease contract than for buying the asset.
TAX ADVANTAGES As we have hinted in various places, by far the most important rea- son for long-term leasing is tax avoidance. If the corporate income tax were repealed, long-term leasing would become much less important. The tax advantages of leasing exist because firms are in different tax brackets. A potential tax shield that cannot be used by one firm can be transferred to another by leasing. We saw this in our earlier discussion on resolving the paradox.
A REDUCTION OF UNCERTAINTY We have noted that the lessee does not own the property when the lease expires. The value of the property at this time is called the residual value (or salvage value). At the time the lease contract is signed, there may be substantial uncertainty as to what the residual value of the asset is. A lease contract is a method that transfers this uncer- tainty from the lessee to the lessor.
Transferring the uncertainty about the residual value of an asset to the lessor makes sense when the lessor is better able to bear the risk. For example, if the lessor is the manufacturer, the lessor may be better able to assess and manage the risk associated with the residual value. Th e transfer of uncertainty to the lessor amounts to a form of insurance for the lessee. A lease, there- fore, provides something besides long-term fi nancing. Of course, the lessee pays for this insur- ance implicitly, but the lessee may view the insurance as a relative bargain.
LOWER TRANSACTION COSTS The costs of changing ownership of an asset many times over its useful life are frequently greater than the costs of writing a lease agreement. Con- sider the choice that confronts a person who lives in Vancouver but must do business in Halifax for two days. It seems obvious that it will be cheaper to rent a hotel room for two nights than it would be to buy a condominium for two days and then to sell it. Thus, transactions costs may be the major reason for short-term leases (operating leases). However, they are probably not the major reason for long-term leases.
FEWER RESTRICTIONS AND SECURITY REQUIREMENTS As we discussed in Chapter 7, with a secured loan, the borrower will generally agree to a set of restrictive cove- nants, spelled out in the indenture, or loan agreement. Such restrictions are not generally found in lease agreements. Also, with a secured loan, the borrower may have to pledge other assets as security. With a lease, only the leased asset is so encumbered.
Bad Reasons for Leasing
LEASING AND ACCOUNTING INCOME Leasing can have a significant effect on the appearance of the firm’s financial statements. If a firm is successful at keeping its leases off the books, the statement of financial position and statement of comprehension income can be made to look better. As a consequence, accounting-based performance measures such as return on as- sets (ROA) can appear to be higher.
For example, off -the-books leases (that is, operating leases) result in an expense, namely, the lease payment. However, in the early years of the lease, the expense is usually lower in account- ing terms than if the asset were purchased. If an asset is purchased with debt fi nancing, capital
CHAPTER 22: Leasing 649
22Ross_Chapter22_3rd.indd 64922Ross_Chapter22_3rd.indd 649 12-11-28 12:4612-11-28 12:46
cost allowance and interest expenses are subtracted from revenues to determine accounting net income. With accelerated depreciation under the CCA rules, the total of the depreciation deduc- tion and the interest expense almost always exceeds the lease payments. Th us, accounting net income is greater with leasing.
In addition, because an operating lease does not appear on the statement of fi nancial position, total assets (and total liabilities) are lower than they would be if the fi rm borrowed the money and bought the asset. From Chapter 3, ROA is computed as net income divided by total assets. With an operating lease, the net income is bigger and total assets are smaller, so ROA is larger.
As we have discussed, however, the impact that leasing has on a fi rm’s accounting statements is not likely to fool anyone. As always, what matters are the cash-fl ow consequences. Whether or not a lease has a positive NPV has little to do with its eff ect on a fi rm’s fi nancial statements.
100 PERCENT FINANCING It is often claimed that an advantage to leasing is that it provides 100 percent financing, whereas secured equipment loans require an initial down pay- ment. Of course, a firm can simply borrow the down payment from another source that provides unsecured credit. Moreover, leases do usually involve a down payment in the form of an advance lease payment (or security deposit). Even when they do not, leases may implicitly be secured by assets of the firm other than those being leased (leasing may give the appearance of 100 percent financing, but not the substance).
Having said this, we should add that it may be the case that a fi rm (particularly a small one) simply cannot obtain debt fi nancing because, for example, additional debt would violate a loan agreement. Operating leases frequently do not count as debt, so they may be the only source of fi nancing available. In such cases, it is not lease or buy—it is lease or die!
Other Reasons for Leasing Th ere are, of course, many special reasons for some companies to fi nd advantages in leasing. For example, leasing may be used to circumvent capital expenditure control systems set up by bureau- cratic fi rms. Government cutbacks have made leasing increasingly popular with municipalities, universities, school boards, and hospitals (the MUSH sector).
Leasing Decisions in Practice Th e reduction-of-uncertainty motive for leasing is the one that is most oft en cited by corpora- tions. For example, computers have a way of becoming technologically outdated very quickly, and computers are very commonly leased instead of purchased. In a recent U.S. survey, 82 percent of the responding fi rms cited the risk of obsolescence as an important reason for leasing, whereas only 57 percent cited the potential for cheaper fi nancing.
Yet, cheaper fi nancing based on shift ing tax shields is an important motive for leasing. One piece of evidence is Canadian lessors’ strong reaction to 1989 changes in tax laws restricting sale and leasebacks. Further evidence comes from a study analyzing decisions taken by Canadian railroads to lease rolling stock. Th e study examined 20 lease contracts and found that, in 17 cases, leasing provided cheaper fi nancing than debt.12 A third study confi rmed the importance of taxes in leasing decisions. Looking at fi nancial information for Canadian fi rms between 1985 and 1995, the research showed that fi rms with lower marginal tax rates tend to use more lease fi nancing.
1. Explain why differential tax rates may be a good reason for leasing.
2. If leasing is tax-motivated, who has the higher tax bracket, the lessee or lessor?
12 T. K. Mukherjee, “A Survey of Corporate Leasing Analysis,” Financial Management 20 (Autumn 1991), pp. 96–107; C. R. Dipchand, A. C. Gudikunst, and G. S. Roberts, “An Empirical Analysis of Canadian Railroad Leases,” Journal of Financial Research 3 (Spring 1980), pp. 57–67; L. Shanker, “Tax Effects and the Leasing Decisions of Canadian Corpo- rations,” Canadian Journal of Administrative Sciences 14, June 1997, pp. 195–205.
Concept Questions
650 Part 8: Topics in Corporate Finance
22Ross_Chapter22_3rd.indd 65022Ross_Chapter22_3rd.indd 650 12-11-28 12:4612-11-28 12:46
22.8 SUMMARY AND CONCLUSIONS
A large fraction of Canada’s equipment is leased rather than purchased. Th is chapter describes dif- ferent lease types, accounting and tax implications of leasing, and how to evaluate fi nancial leases.
1. Leases can be separated into two types, financial and operating. Financial leases are generally longer-term, fully amortized, and not cancellable. In effect, the lessor obtains economic but not legal ownership. Operating leases are usually shorter-term, partially amortized, and can- cellable; they can be likened to a rental agreement.
2. The distinction between financial and operating leases is important in financial accounting. Financial leases must be reported on a firm’s statement of financial position; operating leases are not. We discussed the specific accounting criteria for classifying leases as financial or operating.
3. Taxes are an important consideration in leasing, and the Canada Revenue Agency has some specific rules about what constitutes a valid lease for tax purposes.
4. A long-term financial lease is a source of financing much like long-term borrowing. We showed how to go about an NPV analysis of the leasing decision to decide whether leasing is cheaper than borrowing. A key insight was that the appropriate discount rate is the firm’s af- ter-tax borrowing rate.
5. We saw that differential tax rates can make leasing an attractive proposition to all parties. We also mentioned that a lease decreases the uncertainty surrounding the residual value of the leased asset. This is a primary reason cited by corporations for leasing.
Key Terms financial leases (page 636) lessee (page 634) lessor (page 634) leveraged lease (page 637)
net advantage to leasing (NAL) (page 642) operating lease (page 635) sale and leaseback (page 636) tax-oriented lease (page 636)
Chapter Review Problems and Self-Test 22.1 Your company wants to purchase a new network file server
for its wide-area computer network. The server costs $24,000. It will be obsolete in three years. Your options are to borrow the money at 10 percent or lease the machine. If you lease it, the payments will be $9,000 per year, payable at the beginning of each year. If you buy the server, you can apply a CCA rate of 30 percent per year. The tax rate is 40 percent. Assuming the asset pool remains open, should you lease or buy?
22.2 In the previous question again assuming the asset pool re- mains open, what is the NPV of the lease to the lessor? At what lease payment do the lessee and the lessor both break even?
Answers to Self-Test Problems 22.1 Because the asset pool remains open after the useful life of the network file server, we can answer this question by using the net advan-
tage to leasing (NAL) formula for this case shown in the text. This formula is: NAL = Investment - PV (after-tax lease payments) - PVCCATS - PV (Salvage) We are given all the information necessary to solve for NAL: The investment necessary to purchase the asset = $24,000 The number of years, beginning at zero, that the new asset would be used = 3 (Year 0, Year 1, and Year 2) The amount of money required to lease the asset for one year = $9,000 The applicable tax rate = 40% The applicable after-tax interest rate = 10%(1 - T)
= 10%(.6) = 6%
The applicable CCA rate = 30% Salvage = $0
CHAPTER 22: Leasing 651
22Ross_Chapter22_3rd.indd 65122Ross_Chapter22_3rd.indd 651 12-11-28 12:4612-11-28 12:46
We then plug all of these numbers into the formula:
NAL = $24,000 - ∑ t=0
2
$9,000 ( 1 - .40 ) _____________ ( 1 + 0.06 ) t -
0.40 × 0.30 × $24,000 ___________________ 0.06 + 0.30 × 1.03 ____ 1.06
NAL = $24,000 - $15,300 - $7,774 NAL = $926 Because the NAL formula gives a positive value of $926, there is a net advantage to lease the file server. 22.2 The answer to the first part of the question is that the lessor has a NPV of -$926. The lessor has lost what the lessee has gained. To solve
the second question posed in 22.2 we can again refer to the NAL formula:
NAL = I - ∑ t=0
2
L ( 1 - T ) ________ ( 1 + i ) t - [ TdI ] _____ i + d ×
[ 1 + 0.5i ] _________ 1 + i
We also use much of the information used to solve Problem 22.1. However, instead of using the value of $9,000 for L, we make NAL = 0 and solve for L. We merely have to plug in the values for the information we know and rearrange the formula so that we may solve for L:
0 = 24,000 - ∑ t=0
2
L ( 1 - .40 ) __________ ( 1 + 0.06 ) t - 0.40 × 0.30 × $24,000 ___________________ 0.06 + 0.30 ×
1.03 ____ 1.06
0 = $24,000 - ∑ t=0
2
L ( 0.6 ) ______ ( 1.06 ) t - $7,774
$16,226 = ∑ t=0
2
L ( 0.6 ) ______ ( 1.06 ) t
$16,226 = L ( 0.6 ) ______ ( 1.06 ) 0 + L ( 0.6 ) ______ ( 1.06 ) 1 +
L ( 0.6 ) ______ ( 1.06 ) 2 $16,226 = .600L + .566L + .534L
$16,226 = 1.7L L = $9,545
As we can now see, some of the tax advantages of the lessee have been transferred to the lessor and they are now in a break-even situation.
Concepts Review and Critical Thinking Questions 1. (LO1) What are the key differences between leasing and bor-
rowing? Are they perfect substitutes? 2. (LO2) Taxes are an important consideration in the leasing
decision. Who is more likely to lease, a profitable corporation in a high tax bracket or a less profitable one in a low tax bracket? Why?
3. (LO4) What are some of the potential problems with looking at IRRs in evaluating a leasing decision?
4. (LO5) Comment on the following remarks: a. Leasing reduces risk and can reduce a firm’s cost of capital. b. Leasing provides 100 percent financing. c. If the tax advantages of leasing were eliminated, leasing
would disappear. 5. (LO2) Discuss the accounting criteria for determining whether
or not a lease must be reported on the statement of financial position. In each case, give a rationale for the criterion.
6. (LO2) Discuss CRA’s criteria for determining whether or not
a lease is valid. In each case, give a rationale for the criterion. 7. (LO2) What is meant by the term financing off the statement
of financial position? When do leases provide such financing, and what are the accounting and economic consequences of such activity?
8. (LO1, 6) Why might a firm choose to engage in a sale and leaseback transaction? Give two reasons.
9. (LO4) Explain why the after-tax borrowing rate is the appro- priate discount rate to use in lease evaluation.
Questions 10 and 11 refer to the Bombardier leasing example we used to open the chapter. 10. (LO4) Why would a leasing company be willing to buy planes
from Bombardier and then lease them to the airline compan- ies in China? How is this different from just loaning money to these companies to buy the planes?
11. (LO4) What do you suppose happens to the leased planes at the end of the lease period?
Questions and Problems 1. Lease or Buy (LO4) Assuming the asset pool was closed when the network file server became obsolete, redo Self-Test Problem 22.1. Use the following information to work the next six problems. You work for a nuclear research laboratory that is contemplating leasing a diagnostic scanner (leasing is a very common practice with expensive, high-tech equipment). The scanner costs $6.3 million and it qualifies for a 30 percent CCA rate. Because of radiation contami- nation, it is valueless in four years. You can lease it for $1.875 million per year for four years. Assume that assets pool remains open and payments are made at the end of the year. 2. Lease or Buy (LO4) Assume the tax rate is 37 percent. You can borrow at 7.5 percent pre-tax. Should you lease or buy? 3. Lessor View of Leasing (LO3) What are the cash flows from the lease from the lessor’s point of view? Assume a 37 percent tax bracket.
Basic (Question 1)
Intermediate (Questions
2–10) 3. L
652 Part 8: Topics in Corporate Finance
22Ross_Chapter22_3rd.indd 65222Ross_Chapter22_3rd.indd 652 12-11-28 12:4612-11-28 12:46
4. Break-even Lease (LO4) What would the lease payment have to be for both lessor and lessee to be indifferent to the lease? 5. Tax Effects on Leasing (LO3) Assume that your company does not contemplate paying taxes for the next several years. What
are the cash flows from leasing? 6. Leasing Profits (LO5) In the previous equation, over what range of lease payments will the lease be profitable for both parties? 7. Lease or Buy (LO4) Rework Problem 2 assuming the scanner qualifies for a special CCA rate of 50 percent per year and that the
asset pool remains open. Use the following information to work Problems 8 through 10. The Wildcat Oil Company is trying to decide whether to lease or buy a new computer-assisted drilling system for its oil exploration busi- ness. Management has already determined that acquisition of the system has a positive NPV. The system costs $9.4 million and qualifies for a 25 percent CCA rate. The equipment will have a $975,000 salvage value in 5 years. Wildcat’s tax rate is 36 percent, and the firm can borrow at 9 percent. Southtown Leasing Company has offered to lease the drilling equipment to Wildcat for payments of $2.15 million per year. Southtown’s policy is to require its lessees to make payments at the start of the year. 8. Lease or Buy (LO4) What is the NAL for Wildcat? What is the maximum lease payment that would be acceptable to the company? 9. Leasing and Salvage Value (LO4) Suppose it is estimated that the equipment will have no salvage value at the end of the lease.
What is the maximum lease payment acceptable to Wildcat now? 10. Deposits in Leasing (LO4) Many lessors require a security deposit in the form of a cash payment or other pledged collateral.
Suppose Southtown requires Wildcat to pay a $750,000 security deposit at the inception of the lease. If the lease payment is still $2,150,000 a year, is it advantageous for Wildcat to lease the equipment now?
11. Lease versus Borrow (LO4) Return to the case of the diagnostic scanner used in Problems 2 through 7. Suppose the entire $6.3 million purchase price of the scanner is borrowed. The rate on the loan is 8 percent, and the loan will be repaid in equal installments. Create a lease-versus-buy analysis that explicitly incorporates the loan payments. Show that the NPV of leasing instead of buying is not changed from what it was in Problem 2. Why is this so?
12. Lease or Buy (LO4) In the Self-Test Problem 21.1, suppose the server had a projected salvage value of $800. How would you conduct the lease-versus-buy analysis?
13. Break-even Lease (LO4, 5) An asset costs $675,000. The CCA rate for this asset is 25 percent. The asset’s useful life is two years after which it will be worth $50,000. The corporate tax rate on ordinary income is 35 percent. The interest rate on risk-free cash flows is 10 percent.
a. What set of lease payments will make the lessee and the lessor equally well off, assuming payments are made at the end of the year?
b. Show the general condition that will make the value of a lease to the lessor the negative of the value to the lessee. c. Assume that the lessee pays no taxes and the lessor is in the 35 percent tax bracket. For what range of lease payments does
the lease have a positive NPV for both parties?
Internet Application Questions 1. There are some very sensible reasons for leasing assets, and some that make you think more deeply. The following site argues
mostly in favour of leasing. One of its arguments is that since lease payments are typically lower than loan payments on a pur- chase, the “savings” can be invested in higher yield instruments such as equity funds, and you therefore come out ahead at the end of the term. Is this a reasonable criticism of the borrow-and-buy alternative to leasing? leaseguide.com/lease03.htm
2. OK, are you ready for a test drive? CARS4U.COM provides a unique Internet-based car buying and leasing service where they will deliver the car of your choice to your doorstep (well, driveway). Look at the information for the VW Jetta below and decide whether the lease is preferable to financing and purchasing. To get the interest rate, add 1 percent to the current prime rate from Royal Bank (rbcroyalbank.com/rates/prime.html). Leasing and financing assumptions are provided below and in the link.
2013 Volkswagen Jetta 2.0L Sedan Comfortline
Term: 36 months Rebate: TBA Cash down payment: $2,500 Vehicle Type: Sedan Trade-in allowance: $0 Engine: 2.0 litres, turbo charged 4 cylinder engine,
115 horsepower and 4 valves per cylinderInterest rate: Current market rate Lease only: 50% Residual Value/Buyback MSRP: $19,590 Fuel Economy: City: 10 L/100 km Highway: 7 L/100 km Est. Lease: $360 Cars4U.com Price: $19,372 Est. Financing: $808
3. The Equipment Lease Canada website provides completed information on equipment leasing in Canada. Visit equipmentleasecanada.com/ and click on ‘Steps to Leasing’ option under ‘Equipment Leasing’ menu. What are the steps to be taken by you for leasing your equipment?
4 5
9
Challenge (Questions
11–13)
CHAPTER 22: Leasing 653
22Ross_Chapter22_3rd.indd 65322Ross_Chapter22_3rd.indd 653 12-11-28 12:4612-11-28 12:46
The Decision to Lease or Buy at Warf Computers
Warf Computers has decided to proceed with the manufac- ture and distribution of the virtual keyboard (VK) the company has developed. To undertake this venture, the company needs to obtain equipment for the production of the microphone for the keyboard. Because of the required sensitivity of the micro- phone and its small size, the company needs specialized equipment for production. Nick Warf, the company president, has found a vendor for the equipment. Clapton Acoustical Equipment has offered to sell Warf Computers the necessary equipment at a price of $6.5 million. Because of the rapid development of new tech- nology, the equipment falls in class 45 with a CCA rate of 45 percent. At the end of four years, the market value of the equipment is expected to be $780,000. Alternatively, the company can lease the equipment from Hendrix Leasing. The lease contract calls for four annual pay- ments of $1.69 million due at the beginning of the year. Ad- ditionally, Warf Computers must make a security deposit of $400,000 that will be returned when the lease expires. Warf Computers can issue bonds with a yield of 11 percent, and the company has a marginal tax rate of 35 percent.
Questions
1. Should Warf buy or lease the equipment? 2. Nick mentions to James Hendrix, the president of Hendrix
Leasing, that although the company will need the equip- ment for four years, he would like a lease contract for two years instead. At the end of the two years, the lease could be renewed. Nick would also like to eliminate the security
deposit, but he would be willing to increase the lease payments to $2.75 million for each of the two years. When the lease is renewed in two years, Hendrix would consider the increased lease payments in the first two years when calculating the terms of the renewal. The equipment is expected to have a market value of $1.9 million in two years. What is the NAL of the lease contract under these terms? Why might Nick prefer this lease? What are the potential ethical issues concerning the new lease terms?
3. In the leasing discussion, James informs Nick that the contract could include a purchase option for the equip- ment at the end of the lease. Hendrix Leasing offers three purchase options:
a. An option to purchase the equipment at the fair market value.
b. An option to purchase the equipment at a fixed price. The price will be negotiated before the lease is signed.
c. An option to purchase the equipment at a price of $250,000.
How would the inclusion of a purchase option affect the value of the lease?
4. James also informs Nick that the lease contract can in- clude a cancellation option. The cancellation option would allow Warf Computers to cancel the lease on any anniversary date of the contract. To cancel the lease, Warf Computers would be required to give 30 days’ no- tice prior to the anniversary date. How would the inclu- sion of a cancellation option affect the value of the lease?
MINI CASE
654 Part 8: Topics in Corporate Finance
22Ross_Chapter22_3rd.indd 65422Ross_Chapter22_3rd.indd 654 12-11-28 12:4612-11-28 12:46
There is no more dramatic or controversial activity in corporate fi nance than the acquisition of one fi rm by another or the merger of two fi rms. It is the stuff of headlines in the fi nancial press, and occasionally it is an embarrassing source of scandal. And there are a lot of mergers. From 2001 to 2010, more than 10,000 mergers took place in Canada. Th is amounts to around 3 mergers per day, with a combined value of over $1.5 trillion.
Th e acquisition of one fi rm by another is, of course, an investment made under uncertainty, and the basic principles of valuation apply. Another fi rm should be acquired only if doing so generates a positive net present value to the shareholders of the acquiring fi rm. However, because the NPV of an acquisition candidate can be diffi cult to determine, mergers and acquisitions are interesting topics in their own right.
Some of the special problems that come up in this area of fi nance include:
1. The benefits from acquisitions can depend on such things as strategic fits. Strategic fits are difficult to define precisely, and it is not easy to estimate the value of strategic fits using dis- counted cash flow techniques.
2. There can be complex accounting, tax, and legal effects that must be considered when one firm is acquired by another.
3. Acquisitions are an important control device for shareholders. Some acquisitions are a con- sequence of an underlying conflict between the interests of existing managers and share-
td.com
MERGERS AND ACQUISITIONS
C H A P T E R 2 3
I n March 2012, BCE Inc., Canada’s largest tele-communications company, reached an agree- ment to buy Astral Media Inc. for $3.38 billion in
cash and stock. Astral is Canada’s largest radio
broadcaster, owning 83 radio stations in 50 Can-
adian markets, as well as the largest pay and spe-
cialty TV broadcaster. The transaction provides Bell
with Astral’s slate of television stations that include
HBO Canada, the Movie Network, and the Family
Channel, as well as radio stations under brands like
Virgin Radio and EZ Rock. However, the transaction
was denied approval from the Canadian Radio-tele-
vision and Telecommunications Commission and the
Competition Bureau and was under review by the
Federal cabinet at the time of writing. This chapter
explores two basic issues: Why does a firm choose to
merge with or acquire another firm, and how does
it happen?
Learning Object ives
After studying this chapter, you should understand:
LO1 The different types of mergers and acquisitions, why they should (or shouldn’t) take place, and the terminology associated with them.
LO2 Taxable versus tax-free acquisitions.
LO3 How accountants construct the combined statement of financial position of a new company.
LO4 Some financial side effects of mergers and acquisitions.
LO5 Cash versus common stock financing in mergers and acquisitions.
LO6 How to estimate the NPV of a merger or an acquisition.
LO7 The gains from a merger or acquisition and how to value the transaction.
LO8 Divestitures involving equity carve-outs and spin-offs.
LO9 The use of different defensive tactics by the target firm’s management.
C ou
rt es
y of
B el
l
23Ross_Chapter23_3rd.indd 65523Ross_Chapter23_3rd.indd 655 12-11-28 12:4712-11-28 12:47
holders. Agreeing to be acquired by another firm is one way that shareholders can remove existing managers.
4. Mergers and acquisitions sometimes involve “unfriendly” transactions. In such cases, when one firm attempts to acquire another, it does not always involve quiet negotiations. The sought-after firm often resists takeover and may resort to defensive tactics with exotic names such as poison pills or greenmail.
We discuss these and other issues associated with mergers in the next section. We begin by intro- ducing the basic legal, accounting, and tax aspects of acquisitions.
23.1 The Legal Forms of Acquisitions
Th ere are three basic legal procedures that one fi rm can use to acquire another fi rm:
1. Merger or consolidation. 2. Acquisition of stock. 3. Acquisition of assets.
Although these forms are diff erent from a legal standpoint, the fi nancial press frequently does not distinguish between them. To make the terminology more confusing, both the Canadian and Ontario Business Corporation Acts refer to combinations of fi rms as amalgamations. In our dis- cussion, we use the term merger regardless of the actual form of the acquisition.
In our discussion, we frequently refer to the acquiring fi rm as the bidder. Th is is the company that makes an off er to distribute cash or securities to obtain the stock or assets of another com- pany. Th e fi rm that is sought (and perhaps acquired) is oft en called the target fi rm. Th e cash or securities off ered to the target fi rm are the consideration in the acquisition.
Merger or Consolidation A merger refers to the complete absorption of one fi rm by another. Th e acquiring fi rm retains its name and its identity, and it acquires all the assets and liabilities of the acquired fi rm. Aft er a merger, the acquired fi rm ceases to exist as a separate business entity.
A consolidation is the same as a merger except that a new fi rm is created. In a consolidation, both the acquiring fi rm and the acquired fi rm terminate their previous legal existence and become part of a new fi rm. For this reason, the distinction between the acquiring and the acquired fi rm is not as important in a consolidation as it is in a merger.
Th e rules for mergers and consolidations are basically the same. Acquisition by merger or con- solidation results in a combination of the assets and liabilities of acquired and acquiring fi rms; the only diff erence is whether or not a new fi rm is created. We henceforth use the term merger to refer generically to both mergers and consolidations.
Th ere are some advantages and some disadvantages to using a merger to acquire a fi rm:
1. A primary advantage is that a merger is legally simple and does not cost as much as other forms of acquisition. The reason is that the firms simply agree to combine their entire opera- tions. Thus, for example, there is no need to transfer title to individual assets of the acquired firm to the acquiring firm.
2. A primary disadvantage is that a merger must be approved by a vote of the shareholders of each firm.1 Typically, two-thirds (or even more) of the share votes are required for approval. Obtaining the necessary votes can be time consuming and difficult. Furthermore, as we later discuss in greater detail, the cooperation of the target firm’s existing management is almost a necessity for a merger. This cooperation may not be easily or cheaply obtained.
1 As we discuss later, obtaining majority assent is less of a problem in Canada than in the United States because fewer Canadian corporations are widely held.
amalgamations Combinations of firms that have been joined by merger, consolidation, or acquisition.
merger The complete absorption of one company by another, where the acquiring firm retains its identity and the acquired firm ceases to exist as a separate entity.
consolidation A merger in which a new firm is created and both the acquired and acquiring firm cease to exist.
656 Part 8: Topics in Corporate Finance
23Ross_Chapter23_3rd.indd 65623Ross_Chapter23_3rd.indd 656 12-11-28 12:4712-11-28 12:47
Acquisit ion of Stock A second way to acquire another fi rm is to simply purchase the fi rm’s voting stock in exchange for cash, shares of stock, or other securities. Th is process oft en starts as a private off er from the man- agement of one fi rm to another. Regardless of how it starts, at some point the off er is taken directly to the target fi rm’s shareholders. Th is can be accomplished by a tender off er. A tender off er is a public off er to buy shares. It is made by one fi rm directly to the shareholders of another fi rm.
If the shareholders choose to accept the off er, they tender their shares by exchanging them for cash or securities (or both), depending on the off er. A tender off er is frequently contingent on the bidder’s obtaining some percentage of the total voting shares. If not enough shares are tendered, the off er might be withdrawn or reformulated.
Th e takeover bid is communicated to the target fi rm’s shareholders by public announcements such as newspaper advertisements. Takeover bids may be either by circular bid mailed directly to the tar- get’s shareholders or by stock exchange bid (through the facilities of the TSX or other exchange). In either case, Ontario securities law requires that the bidder mail a notice of the proposed share purchase to shareholders. Furthermore, the management of the target fi rm must also respond to the bid, includ- ing their recommendation to accept or to reject the bid. For a circular bid, the response must be mailed to shareholders. If the bid is made through a stock exchange, the response is through a press release.
Th e following factors are involved in choosing between an acquisition by stock and a merger:
1. In an acquisition by stock, no shareholder meetings have to be held and no vote is required. If the shareholders of the target firm don’t like the offer, they are not required to accept it and need not tender their shares.
2. In an acquisition by stock, the bidding firm can deal directly with the shareholders of the target firm by using a tender offer. The target firm’s management and board of directors can be bypassed.
3. Acquisition by stock is occasionally unfriendly. In such cases, a stock acquisition is used in an effort to circumvent the target firm’s management, which is usually actively resisting ac- quisition. Resistance by the target firm’s management often makes the cost of acquisition by stock higher than the cost of a merger.
4. Frequently, a significant minority of shareholders holds out in a tender offer. The target firm cannot be completely absorbed when this happens, and this may delay realization of the merger benefits or otherwise be costly.
5. Complete absorption of one firm by another requires a merger. Many acquisitions by stock end up with a formal merger later.
Acquisit ion of Assets A fi rm can eff ectively acquire another fi rm by buying most or all of its assets. Th is accomplishes the same thing as buying the company. In this case, however, the target fi rm does not necessarily cease to exist, it just has its assets sold. Th e shell still exists unless its shareholders choose to dissolve it.
Th is type of acquisition requires a formal vote of the shareholders of the selling fi rm. One advantage to this approach is that there is no problem with minority shareholders holding out. However, acquisition of assets may involve transferring titles to individual assets. Th e legal pro- cess of transferring assets can be costly.
Acquisit ion Classif ications Financial analysts typically classify acquisitions into three types:
1. Horizontal acquisition. This is acquisition of a firm in the same industry as the bidder. The firms compete with each other in their product markets. A good example is the acquisition of Equinox Minerals by Barrick Gold Corp. for $7.3 billion in 2011.
2. Vertical acquisition. A vertical acquisition involves firms at different steps of the production process. For example, Google’s purchase of Motorola Mobility for $12.5 billion in 2012 was a vertical merger. Google is a company providing Internet related products and services, while Motorola manufactures mobile phones.
tender offer A public offer by one firm to directly buy the shares from another firm.
circular bid Corporate takeover bid communicated to the shareholders by direct mail.
stock exchange bid Corporate takeover bid communicated to the shareholders through a stock exchange.
barrick.com
CHAPTER 23: Mergers and Acquisitions 657
23Ross_Chapter23_3rd.indd 65723Ross_Chapter23_3rd.indd 657 12-11-28 12:4712-11-28 12:47
3. Conglomerate acquisition. When the bidder and the target firm are not related to each other, the merger is called a conglomerate acquisition. In 2011, the acquisition of 75% stake in Maple Leaf Sports and Entertainment, owner of professional teams in Canada such as The Toronto Maple Leafs, Toronto Raptors, Toronto Marlies, and Toronto FC, by Bell Canada and Rogers Communications Inc., telecommunication companies, was considered a con- glomerate acquisition.
A Note on Takeovers Takeover is a general and imprecise term referring to the transfer of control of a fi rm from one group of shareholders to another. A takeover thus occurs whenever one group takes control from another.2 Th is can occur in three ways: acquisitions, proxy contests, and going-private transac- tions. Th us, takeovers encompass a broader set of activities than just acquisitions. Th ese activities can be depicted as follows:
Takeovers
Acquisition
Proxy contest
Going private
Merger or consolidation
Acquisition of stock
Acquisition of assets
As we have mentioned, a takeover achieved by acquisition occurs by merger, tender off er, or purchase of assets. In mergers and tender off ers, the bidder buys the voting common stock of the target fi rm.
Takeovers can also occur with proxy contests. Proxy contests occur when a group attempts to gain controlling seats on the board of directors by voting in new directors. A proxy is the right to cast someone else’s votes. In a proxy contest, proxies are solicited by an unhappy group of share- holders from the rest of the shareholders.
In going-private transactions, all the equity shares of a public fi rm are purchased by a small group of investors. Usually, the group includes members of incumbent management and some outside investors. Such transactions have come to be known generically as leveraged buyouts (LBOs) because a large percentage of the money needed to buy the stock is usually borrowed. Such transactions are also termed MBOs (management buyouts) when existing management is heavily involved.3 Th e shares of the fi rm are delisted from stock exchanges and no longer can be purchased in the open market. An example of an MBO was management’s purchase of Sun Media Corp., publisher of Th e Financial Post and Toronto Sun, from Rogers Communications, in 1996. CIBC Wood Gundy also purchased some of the shares.
Th e role of private equity fi rms in mergers and acquisitions transactions has grown signifi - cantly in recent years. In Canada, $11.5 billion of private equity funds were raised in 2011. Th is represents a 69 percent increase over the previous year. Th e largest private equity deal in 2011 was the $2.1-billion acquisition of Husky International, an Ontario-based injection-molding com- pany, by the OMERS pension fund and Berkshire Partners.4
In the wake of foreign takeovers, there have been confl icting views on the “hollowing out of the Canadian economy.” On one hand the sell-off of icons such as Hudson Bay Company, Dofasco, Fairmont, and Domtar poses a risk of Canadian companies losing dominance to foreign players. On the other hand, these foreign acquisitions represent an opportunity for corporate Canada to increase its presence in the global economy.
Th ere have been a large number of mergers and acquisitions in recent years many of them involving very familiar companies. Table 23.1 lists some of the largest mergers in Canada in recent years.
2 A takeover bid has a narrowed meaning as we explained earlier. Control may be defined as having a majority vote on the board of directors. 3 LBOs and MBOs can involve proxy contests for control of the company. 4 theglobeandmail.com/globe-investor/canadian-private-equity-deals-soar/article4171814/
proxy contests Attempts to gain control of a firm by soliciting a sufficient number of shareholder votes to replace existing management.
going-private transactions All publicly owned stock in a firm is replaced with complete equity ownership by a private group.
leveraged buyouts (LBOs) Going-private transactions in which a large percentage of the money used to buy the stock is borrowed. Often, incumbent management is involved.
658 Part 8: Topics in Corporate Finance
23Ross_Chapter23_3rd.indd 65823Ross_Chapter23_3rd.indd 658 12-11-28 12:4712-11-28 12:47
Alternatives to Merger Firms don’t have to merge to combine their eff orts. At a minimum, two (or more) fi rms can simply agree to work together. Th ey can sell each other’s products, perhaps under diff erent brand names, or jointly develop a new product or technology. Firms will frequently establish a strategic alliance, which is usually a formal agreement to cooperate in pursuit of a joint goal. An even more formal arrangement is a joint venture, which commonly involves two fi rms putting up the money to establish a new fi rm. For example, in May 2012, Rogers Communications Inc. and Canadian Imperial Bank of Commerce (CIBC) formed a joint venture to launch ‘mobile wallets’, smart phones with the capability of making day-to-day transactions.
TABLE 23.1
10 large mergers and acquisitions involving Canadian companies
Rank Year Value
(Cdn $ billion) Target Company Acquiring Company
1 2007 $39.83 Alcan Inc. Rio Tinto Group 2 2000 $39.72 The Seagram Company Ltd. Vivendi S.A. 3 2009 $23.90 Petro-Canada Suncor Energy Inc. 4 2006 $19.87 Inco Limited Companhia Vale do Rio Doce 5 2006 $19.20 Falconbridge Limited Xstrata plc 6 2007 $18.98 Reuters Group plc The Thomson Corporation 7 1998 $15.37 PolyGram N.V. The Seagram Company Ltd. 8 2003 $15.00 John Hancock Financial
Services, Inc. Manulife Financial Corporation
9 2008 $14.44 Fording Canadian Coal Trust Teck Cominco Limited 10 2005 $11.88 Placer Dome Inc. Barrick Gold Corporation
Source: FP Infomart - as of May 31, 2012
1. What is a merger? How does a merger differ from other acquisition forms?
2. What is a takeover?
23.2 Taxes and Acquisitions
If one fi rm buys another fi rm, the transaction may be taxable or tax free. In a taxable acquisi- tion, the shareholders of the target fi rm are considered to have sold their shares, and they have capital gains or losses that are taxed. In a tax-free acquisition, since the acquisition is considered an exchange instead of a sale, no capital gain or loss occurs at that time.
Determinants of Tax Status Th e general requirements for tax-free status are that the acquisition involves two Canadian corpo- rations subject to corporate income tax and that there be a continuity of equity interest. In other words, the shareholders in the target fi rm must retain an equity interest in the bidder.
Th e specifi c requirements for a tax-free acquisition depend on the legal form of the acquisi- tion; in general, if the buying fi rm off ers the selling fi rm cash for its equity, it is a taxable acquisi- tion. If shares of stock are off ered, it is a tax-free acquisition.
In a tax-free acquisition, the selling shareholders are considered to have exchanged their old shares for new ones of equal value, and no capital gains or losses are experienced.
strategic alliance Agreement between firms to cooperate in pursuit of a joint goal.
joint venture Typically an agreement between firms to create a separate, co-owned entity established to pursue a joint goal.
Concept Questions
CHAPTER 23: Mergers and Acquisitions 659
23Ross_Chapter23_3rd.indd 65923Ross_Chapter23_3rd.indd 659 12-11-28 12:4712-11-28 12:47
Taxable versus Tax-Free Acquisit ions Th ere are two factors to consider when comparing a tax-free acquisition and a taxable acquisition: the capital gains eff ect and the write-up eff ect. Th e capital gains eff ect refers to the fact that the target fi rm’s shareholders may have to pay capital gains taxes in a taxable acquisition. Th ey may demand a higher price as compensation, thereby increasing the cost of the merger. Th is is a cost of taxable acquisition.
Th e tax status of an acquisition also aff ects the appraised value of the assets of the selling fi rm. In a taxable acquisition, the assets of the selling fi rm are revalued or “written up” from their historic book value to their estimated current market value. Th is is the write-up eff ect, and it is important because the depreciation expense on the acquired fi rm’s assets can be increased in taxable acquisi- tions. Remember that an increase in depreciation is a non-cash expense, but it has the desirable eff ect of reducing taxes.
1. What factors influence the choice between a taxable and a tax-free acquisition?
2. What is the write-up effect in a taxable acquisition?
23.3 Accounting for Acquisitions
Firms keep two distinct sets of books: the shareholders’ books and the tax books. In this section, we are considering the shareholders’ books. When one fi rm buys another fi rm, the acquisition will be treated as a purchase on the shareholders’ books.
Th e purchase accounting method of reporting acquisitions requires that the assets of the target fi rm be reported at their fair market value on the books of the bidder. Th is allows the bidder to establish a new cost basis for the acquired assets. With this method, an asset called goodwill is created for accounting purposes. Goodwill is the diff erence between the purchase price and the estimated fair value of the assets acquired.
To illustrate, suppose Firm A acquires Firm B, thereby creating a new fi rm, AB. Th e statements of fi nancial position for the two fi rms on the date of the acquisition are shown in Table 23.2. Suppose Firm A pays $18 million in cash for Firm B. Th e money is raised by borrowing the full amount. Th e fi xed assets in Firm B are appraised at $14 million fair market value. Since the working capital is $2 million, the statement of fi nancial position assets are worth $16 million. Firm A thus pays $2 million in excess of the estimated market value of these assets. Th is amount is the goodwill.5
TABLE 23.2
Accounting for acquisitions: Purchase (in $ millions) Firm A Firm B
Working capital $ 4 Equity $20 Working capital $2 Equity $10 Fixed assets 16 Fixed assets 8 Total $20 $20 Total $10 $10
Firm AB
Working capital $ 6 Debt $18 Fixed assets 30 Equity 20 Goodwill 2 Total $38 $38
Th e market value of the fi xed assets of Firm B is $14 million. Firm A pays $18 million for Firm B by issuing debt.
5 Remember, there are assets such as employee talents, good customers, growth opportunities, and other intangibles that don’t show up on the statement of financial position. The $2 million excess pays for these.
Concept Questions
660 Part 8: Topics in Corporate Finance
23Ross_Chapter23_3rd.indd 66023Ross_Chapter23_3rd.indd 660 12-11-28 12:4712-11-28 12:47
Th e last statement of fi nancial position in Table 23.2 shows what the new fi rm looks like under purchase accounting. Notice that:
1. The total assets of Firm AB increase to $38 million. The fixed assets increase to $30 million. This is the sum of the fixed assets of Firm A and the revalued fixed assets of Firm B ($16 mil- lion + 14 million = $30 million). Note that the tax effect of the write-up is ignored in this example.
2. The $2 million excess of the purchase price over the fair market value is reported as goodwill on the statement of financial position.6
1. What is the role of goodwill in purchase accounting for mergers?
23.4 Gains from Acquisition
To determine the gains from an acquisition, we need to fi rst identify the relevant incremental cash fl ows, or, more generally, the source of value. In the broadest sense, acquiring another fi rm makes sense only if there is some concrete reason to believe that the target fi rm will somehow be worth more in our hands than it is worth now. As we will see, there are a number of reasons why this might be so.
Synergy Suppose Firm A is contemplating acquiring Firm B. Th e acquisition will be benefi cial if the com- bined fi rm will have value that is greater than the sum of the values of the separate fi rms. If we let VAB stand for the value of the merged fi rm, then the merger makes sense only if:
VAB > VA + VB where VA and VB are the separate values. A successful merger thus requires that the value of the whole exceed the sum of the parts.
Th e diff erence between the value of the combined fi rm and the sum of the values of the fi rms as separate entities is the incremental net gain from the acquisition, ΔV:
ΔV = VAB - (VA + VB)
When ΔV is positive, the acquisition is said to generate synergy. For example, when Transconti- nental Inc., bought Quad/Graphics Canada in 2012, it announced that the deal was expected to deliver more than $40 million in synergies.
If Firm A buys Firm B, it gets a company worth VB plus the incremental gain, ΔV. Th e value of Firm B to Firm A (VB*) is thus:
Value of Firm B to Firm A = VB* = ΔV + VB We place an * on VB* to emphasize that we are referring to the value of Firm B to Firm A, not the value of Firm B as a separate entity.
VB* can be determined in two steps: (1) estimating VB and (2) estimating ΔV. If B is a public company, then its market value as an independent fi rm under existing management (VB) can be observed directly. If Firm B is not publicly owned, then its value will have to be estimated based on similar companies that are. Either way, the problem of determining a value for VB* requires determining a value for ΔV.
6 You might wonder what would happen if the purchase price were less than the estimated fair market value. Amusingly, to be consistent, it seems that the accountants would need to create a liability called ill will! Instead, the fair market value is revised downward to equal the purchase price.
Concept Questions
synergy The positive incremental net gain associated with the combination of two firms through a merger or acquisition.
tctranscontinental.com
CHAPTER 23: Mergers and Acquisitions 661
23Ross_Chapter23_3rd.indd 66123Ross_Chapter23_3rd.indd 661 12-11-28 12:4712-11-28 12:47
To determine the incremental value of an acquisition, we need to know the incremental cash fl ows. Th ese are the cash fl ows for the combined fi rm less what A and B could generate separately. In other words, the incremental cash fl ow for evaluating a merger is the diff erence between the cash fl ow of the combined company and the sum of the cash fl ows for the two companies consid- ered separately. We will label this incremental cash fl ow as ΔCF.
From our discussions in earlier chapters, we know that the incremental cash fl ow, ΔCF, can be broken down into four parts:
ΔCF = ΔEBIT + ΔDepreciation - ΔTax - ΔCapital requirements = ΔRevenue - ΔCost - ΔTax - ΔCapital requirements
where ΔRevenue is the diff erence in revenues, ΔCost is the diff erence in costs, ΔTax is the diff er- ence in taxes, and ΔCapital requirements is the change in new fi xed assets and net working capital.
EXAMPLE 23.1: Synergy
Firms A and B are competitors with very similar assets and business risks. Both are all-equity firms with after-tax cash flows of $10 per year forever, and both have an overall cost of capital of 10 percent. Firm A is thinking of buying Firm B. The after-tax cash flow from the merged firm would be $21 per year. Does the merger generate synergy? What is VB
*? What is ΔV?
The merger does generate synergy because the cash flow from the merged firm is ΔCF = $1 greater than the sum of the individual cash flows ($21 versus $20). Assuming that the risks stay the same, the value of the merged firm is $21/.10 = $210. Firms A and B are each worth $10/.10 = $100, for a total of $200. The incremental gain from the merger, ΔV, is thus $210 - 200 = $10. The total value of Firm B to Firm A, VB
*, is $100 (the value of B as a separate company) plus $10 (the incremental gain), or $110.
Based on this breakdown, the merger will make sense only if one or more of these cash fl ow components are benefi cially aff ected by the merger. Th e possible cash fl ow benefi ts of mergers and acquisitions thus fall into four basic categories: revenue enhancement, cost reductions, lower taxes, and reductions in capital needs.
Revenue Enhancement One important reason for an acquisition is that the combined fi rm may generate greater revenues than two separate fi rms. Increases in revenue may come from marketing gains, strategic benefi ts, and increases in market power.
MARKETING GAINS It is frequently claimed that mergers and acquisitions can produce greater operating revenues from improved marketing. For example, improvements might be made in the following areas:
1. Previously ineffective media programming and advertising efforts. 2. A weak existing distribution network. 3. An unbalanced product mix.
In 2011, when Canadian Tire acquired Forzani Group Limited, the company behind Sport Chek, Athlete’s World, and Nevada Bob’s Golf, Canadian Tire predicted that it would save $25 million annually, due to synergies in its supply chain, marketing, and international suppliers.
STRATEGIC BENEFITS Some acquisitions promise a strategic advantage. This is an op- portunity to take advantage of the competitive environment if certain things occur or, more gen- erally, to enhance management flexibility with regard to the company’s future operations. In this regard, a strategic benefit is more like an option than it is a standard investment opportunity.
For example, suppose a sewing machine fi rm can use its technology to enter other businesses. Th e small-motor technology from the original business can provide opportunities to begin manu- facturing small appliances and electric typewriters. Similarly, electronics expertise gained in pro- ducing typewriters can be used to manufacture electronic printers.
662 Part 8: Topics in Corporate Finance
23Ross_Chapter23_3rd.indd 66223Ross_Chapter23_3rd.indd 662 12-11-28 12:4712-11-28 12:47
Th e word beachhead describes the process of entering a new industry/market to exploit per- ceived opportunities. Th e beachhead is to spawn new opportunities based on intangible relation- ships. One example is Procter & Gamble’s initial acquisition of the Charmin Paper Company as a beachhead that allowed Procter & Gamble to develop a highly interrelated cluster of paper products—disposable diapers, paper towels, feminine hygiene products, and bathroom tissue.7
MARKET POWER One firm may acquire another to increase its market share and market power. In such mergers, profits can be enhanced through higher prices and reduced competition for customers. In theory, such mergers are controlled by law. In practice, however, horizontal mergers are far more common in Canada than the United States due to weaker legal restrictions against combinations of competitors that might limit market competition.8 In Canada, the Com- petition Bureau, an independent agency, is responsible for the administration and enforcement of the Competition Act, a law that prevents anti-competitive practices in the Canadian marketplace.
Cost Reductions One of the most basic reasons to merge is that a combined fi rm may operate more effi ciently than two separate fi rms. A fi rm can obtain greater operating effi ciency in several diff erent ways through a merger or an acquisition.
ECONOMIES OF SCALE Economies of scale relate to the average cost per unit of pro- ducing goods and services. As Figure 23.1 shows, when the per-unit cost of production falls as the level of production increases, an economy of scale exists.
Frequently, the phrase spreading overhead is used in connection with economies of scale. Th is expression refers to the sharing of central facilities such as corporate headquarters, top manage- ment, and computer services.
FIGURE 23.1
Economies of scale
Minimum cost
Economies of scale
Diseconomies of scale
Size Optimal
size
Cost
7 This example comes from Michael Porter’s Competitive Advantage (New York: Free Press, 1985). 8 From the mid-1950s to the mid-1980s, only one merger in Canada was blocked under the Combines Investigation Act. In the same period, U.S. antitrust laws “prevented several hundred horizontal mergers” according to B. E. Eckbo, “Mergers and the Market for Corporate Control: the Canadian Evidence,” Canadian Journal of Economics, May 1986, pp. 236–260.
pg.com
CHAPTER 23: Mergers and Acquisitions 663
23Ross_Chapter23_3rd.indd 66323Ross_Chapter23_3rd.indd 663 12-11-28 12:4712-11-28 12:47
ECONOMIES OF VERTICAL INTEGRATION Operating economies can be gained from vertical combinations as well as from horizontal combinations. The main purpose of verti- cal acquisitions is to make coordinating closely related operating activities easier. Benefits from vertical integration are probably the reason most forest product firms that cut timber also own sawmills and hauling equipment. Such economies may explain why some airline companies have purchased hotels and car rental companies.
Technology transfers are another reason for vertical integration. Consider the merger of Gen- eral Motors Corporation and Hughes Aircraft in 1985. It seems natural that an automobile manu- facturer might acquire an advanced electronics fi rm if the special technology of the electronics fi rm can be used to improve the quality of the automobile.
COMPLEMENTARY RESOURCES Some firms acquire others to make better use of existing resources or to provide the missing ingredient for success. Think of a ski equipment store that could merge with a tennis equipment store to produce more even sales over both the winter and summer seasons, and thereby better use store capacity.
EVIDENCE ON REVENUE ENHANCEMENT AND COST REDUCTION Most of the evidence on merger gains is measured in returns to shareholders. We discuss this later to see who gains in mergers. To attribute any gains from mergers to specific advantages like market share requires an industrial organization approach. A study of Canadian mergers in the 1970s finds that gains occurred in market share, productivity, or profitability. This suggests that revenue enhancement and cost reduction are valid reasons at least for some mergers. Inefficiencies in real goods markets explain why it is sometimes cheaper to acquire resources and strategic links through mergers. This was the main motive for widespread mergers in the Canadian oil and min- ing industries in recent years.
Scale economies and increasing market share are also important in current mergers. For exam- ple, when Rogers Wireless acquired Saskatchewan Communications Network in 2012, one of the main motives was to expand its national reach for Citytv content, allowing it to compete with other national broadcasters.
Tax Gains Tax gains oft en are a powerful incentive for some acquisitions. Th e possible tax gains from an acquisition include the following:
1. The use of tax losses. 2. The use of unused debt capacity. 3. The use of surplus funds. 4. The ability to write up the value of depreciable assets.
NET OPERATING LOSSES Firms that lose money on a pre-tax basis do not pay taxes. Such firms can end up with tax losses that they cannot use. These tax losses are referred to as NOL (an acronym for net operating losses).
A fi rm with net operating losses may be an attractive merger partner for a fi rm with signifi cant tax liabilities. Absent any other eff ects, the combined fi rm would have a lower tax bill than the two fi rms considered separately. Th is is a good example of how a fi rm can be more valuable merged than standing alone. For example, tax savings made possible by Dome Petroleum’s large losses were an important attraction to Amoco when it bought Dome in 1988.
Th ere is an important qualifi cation to our NOL discussion. Canadian tax laws permit fi rms that experience periods of profi t and loss to even things out through loss carry-back and carry- forward provisions. A fi rm that has been profi table in the past but has a loss in the current year can get refunds of income taxes paid in the three previous years. Aft er that, losses can be carried forward for up to seven years. Th us, a merger to exploit unused tax shields must off er tax savings over and above what can be accomplished by fi rms via carry-overs.
UNUSED DEBT CAPACITY Some firms do not use as much debt as they are able. This makes them potential acquisition candidates. Adding debt can provide important tax savings, and
gm.com
rogers.com
664 Part 8: Topics in Corporate Finance
23Ross_Chapter23_3rd.indd 66423Ross_Chapter23_3rd.indd 664 12-11-28 12:4712-11-28 12:47
many acquisitions are financed with debt. The acquiring company can deduct interest payments on the newly created debt and reduce taxes.9
SURPLUS FUNDS Another quirk in the tax laws involves surplus funds. Consider a firm that has a free cash flow available after all taxes have been paid and after all positive net present value projects have been financed.
In this situation, aside from purchasing fi xed income securities, the fi rm has several ways to spend the free cash fl ow, including:
1. Pay dividends. 2. Buy back its own shares. 3. Acquire shares in another firm.
We discussed the fi rst two options in Chapter 17. We saw that an extra dividend increases the income tax paid by some investors. And, under Canada Revenue Agency regulations, share repur- chase does not always reduce the taxes paid by shareholders when compared to paying dividends.
To avoid these problems, the fi rm can buy another fi rm. By doing this, the tax problem associ- ated with paying a dividend is avoided.
ASSET WRITE-UPS We have previously observed that, in a taxable acquisition, the assets of the acquired firm can be revalued. If the value of the assets is increased, tax deductions for depreciation are a gain.
Changing Capital Requirements All fi rms must make investments in working capital and fi xed assets to sustain an effi cient level of operating activity. A merger may reduce the combined investments needed by the two fi rms. For example, Firm A may need to expand its manufacturing facilities while Firm B has signifi cant excess capacity. It may be much cheaper for Firm A to buy Firm B than to build from scratch.
In addition, acquiring fi rms may see ways of more eff ectively managing existing assets. Th is can occur with a reduction in working capital by more effi cient handling of cash, accounts receiv- able, and inventory. Finally, the acquiring fi rm may also sell certain assets that are not needed in the combined fi rm.
Avoiding Mistakes Evaluating the benefi t of a potential acquisition is more diffi cult than a standard capital budgeting analysis because so much of the value can come from intangible, or otherwise diffi cult to quan- tify, benefi ts. Consequently, there is a great deal of room for error. Here are some general rules to remember:
1. Do not ignore market values. There is no point and little gain to estimating the value of a publicly traded firm when that value can be directly observed. The current market value rep- resents the consensus of investors concerning the firm’s value (under existing management). Use this value as a starting point. If the firm is not publicly held, the place to start is with similar firms that are publicly held.
2. Estimate only incremental cash flows. It is important to estimate the cash flows that are incre- mental to the acquisition. Only incremental cash flows from an acquisition add value to the acquiring firm. Acquisition analysis should thus focus only on the newly created, incremen- tal cash flows from the proposed acquisition.
3. Use the correct discount rate. The discount rate should be the required rate of return for the incremental cash flows associated with the acquisition. It should reflect the risk associated with the use of funds, not the source. In particular, if Firm A is acquiring Firm B, Firm A’s cost of capital is not particularly relevant. Firm B’s cost of capital is a much more appropri- ate discount rate because it reflects the risk of Firm B’s cash flows.
9 While unused debt capacity can be a valid reason for a merger, hindsight shows that many mergers in the 1980s over- used debt financing. We discuss this in more detail later.
CHAPTER 23: Mergers and Acquisitions 665
23Ross_Chapter23_3rd.indd 66523Ross_Chapter23_3rd.indd 665 12-11-28 12:4712-11-28 12:47
4. Be aware of transaction costs. An acquisition may involve substantial (and sometimes as- tounding) transaction costs. These include fees to investment bankers, legal fees, and disclo- sure requirements.
A Note on Ineff icient Management and Opportunistic Takeover Offers Th ere are fi rms whose value could be increased with a change in management. Th ese fi rms are poorly run or otherwise do not effi ciently use their assets to create shareholder value. Mergers are a means of replacing management in such cases.10
Furthermore, the fact that a fi rm might benefi t from a change in management does not nec- essarily mean that existing management is dishonest, incompetent, or negligent. Instead, just as some athletes are better than others, so might some management teams be better at running a business. Th is can be particularly true during times of technological change or other periods when innovations in business practice are occurring. In any case, to the extent that they can identify poorly run fi rms or fi rms that otherwise would benefi t from a change in management, corporate raiders provide a valuable service to target fi rm shareholders and society in general.
Th e consumption of perks by top management is another ineffi ciency that may be eliminated by acquisition. For example, such perks as corporate jets, chauff er service, club memberships and spousal travel may reduce shareholder value if not linked to productivity gains.
On the other side of the ledger, bidders sometimes submit a “lowball” bid to try to gain control of a fi rm whose value is temporarily depressed due to market conditions outside the control of management. From the viewpoint of the target fi rm, such a bid is deemed opportunistic. Such bids were common at the time of the 2008 fi nancial crises. More recently, at the time of writ- ing, U.S. cosmetics producer, Avon Products, rejected a bid from rival Coty as opportunistic and undervaluing the company.
The Negative Side of Takeovers While most fi nancial analysts would likely agree that corporate raiders can deliver benefi ts to society, there is concern over whether the cost is too high. Critics of takeovers (and especially LBOs) are concerned that social costs are not counted when the post-takeover search for effi - ciency gains leads to plant closures and layoff s. When plants close or move, workers and equip- ment can be turned to other uses only at some cost to society. For example, taxpayers may need to subsidize retraining and relocation programs for workers or tax incentives for investment. For example, in the late 1990s larger companies bought two major fi nancial institutions headquar- tered in London, Ontario: Canada Trust and London Life. In both cases, the head offi ces moved elsewhere, raising fears of lost jobs and economic dislocation.
Critics of takeovers argue that they reduce trust between management and labour thus reduc- ing effi ciency and increasing costs. Th ey point to Japan, Germany, and Korea, where there are few takeovers, as examples of more effi cient economies. Th ey argue that, as an alternative to takeovers, a strong board of outside directors could maximize management’s effi ciency.11
1. What are the relevant incremental cash flows for evaluating a merger candidate?
2. What are some different sources of gain from acquisition?
3. Are takeovers good for society? State the main arguments on both sides.
10 Another alternative is for a firm to spin off or divest negative NPV divisions. See Chapter 11 for more discussion of the abandonment option. 11 This section draws on C. Robinson’s points in “C. Robinson versus W. Block, Are Corporate Takeovers Good or Bad? A Debate,” Canadian Investment Review, Fall 1991, pp. 53–60; and on a piece by the late W. S. Allen, “Relegating Cor- porate Takeovers to the ‘Campeaust’ Heap: A Proposal,” Canadian Investment Review, Spring 1990, pp. 71–76.
Concept Questions
666 Part 8: Topics in Corporate Finance
23Ross_Chapter23_3rd.indd 66623Ross_Chapter23_3rd.indd 666 12-11-28 12:4712-11-28 12:47
23.5 Some Financial Side Effects of Acquisitions
In addition to the various possibilities we discussed, mergers can have some purely fi nancial side eff ects; that is, things that occur regardless of whether the merger makes economic sense or not. Two such eff ects are particularly worth mentioning: EPS growth and diversifi cation.
EPS Growth An acquisition can create the appearance of growth in earnings per share (EPS). Th is may fool investors into thinking the fi rm is doing better than it really is. What happens is easiest to see with an example.
Suppose Global Resources Ltd. acquires Regional Enterprises. Th e fi nancial positions of Global and Regional before the acquisition are shown in Table 23.3. Because the merger creates no addi- tional value, the combined fi rm (Global Resources aft er acquiring Regional) has a value that is equal to the sum of the values of the two fi rms before the merger.
TABLE 23.3
Financial positions of Global Resources and Regional Enterprises Global
Resources before Merger
Regional Enterprises
before Merger
Global Resources after Merger
The Market is Smart The Market is Fooled
Earnings per share $ 1.00 $ 1.00 $ 1.43 $ 1.43 Price per share $ 25.00 $ 10.00 $ 25.00 $ 35.71 Price/earnings ratio 25 10 17.5 25 Number of shares 100 100 140 140 Total earnings $ 100 $ 100 $ 200 $ 200 Total value $ 2,500 $ 1,000 $ 3,500 $ 5,000
Exchange ratio: 1 share in Global for 2.5 shares in Regional.
Both Global and Regional have 100 shares outstanding before the merger. However, Global sells for $25 per share versus $10 per share for Regional. Global therefore acquires Regional by exchanging 1 of its shares for every 2.5 Regional shares. Since there are 100 shares in Regional, it takes 100/2.5 = 40 shares in all.
Aft er the merger, Global has 140 shares outstanding, and several things happen (see Column 3 of Table 23.3):
1. The market value of the combined firm is $3,500. This is equal to the sum of the values of the separate firms before the merger. If the market is smart, it realizes the combined firm is worth the sum of the values of the separate firms.
2. The earnings per share of the merged firm are $1.43. The acquisition enables Global to in- crease its earnings per share from $1 to $1.43, an increase of 43 percent.
3. Because the stock price of Global after the merger is the same as before the merger, the price/earnings ratio must fall. This is true as long as the market is smart and recognizes that the total market value has not been altered by the merger.
If the market is fooled, it might mistake the 43 percent increase in earnings per share for true growth. In this case, the price/earnings ratio of Global may not fall aft er the merger. Suppose the price/earnings ratio of Global remains equal to 25. Since the combined fi rm has earnings of $200, the total value of the combined fi rm increases to $5,000 (25 × $200). Th e per share value of Global increases to $35.71 ($5,000/140).
Th is is earnings growth magic. Like all good magic, it is just illusion. For it to work, the share- holders of Global and Regional must receive something for nothing. Th is, of course, is unlikely with so simple a trick.
earnings per share (EPS) Net income minus any cash dividends on preferred stock, divided by the number of shares of common stock outstanding.
CHAPTER 23: Mergers and Acquisitions 667
23Ross_Chapter23_3rd.indd 66723Ross_Chapter23_3rd.indd 667 12-11-28 12:4712-11-28 12:47
Diversif ication Diversifi cation is commonly mentioned as a benefi t to a merger. For example, U.S. Steel Corpo- ration included diversifi cation as a benefi t in its acquisition of Marathon Oil Company in 1982, a merger that ranked in size just behind Campeau’s purchase of Federated Department Stores. Th e problem is that diversifi cation per se probably does not create value.
Going back to Chapter 13, diversifi cation reduces unsystematic risk. We also saw that the value of an asset depends on its systematic risk and that diversifi cation does not directly aff ect system- atic risk. Since the unsystematic risk is not especially important, there is no particular benefi t to reducing it.
An easy way to see why diversifi cation isn’t an important benefi t to mergers is to consider someone who owned stock in U.S. Steel and Marathon Oil. Such a shareholder is already diversi- fi ed between these two investments. Th e merger doesn’t do anything that the shareholders can’t do for themselves.
More generally, shareholders can get all the diversifi cation they want by buying stock in diff er- ent companies. As a result, they won’t pay a premium for a merged company just for the benefi t of diversifi cation.
By the way, we are not saying that U.S. Steel (now USX Corporation) made a mistake. At the time of the merger, U.S. Steel was a cash-rich company (more than 20 percent of its assets were in the form of cash and marketable securities). It is not uncommon to see fi rms with surplus cash articulating a “need” for diversifi cation.
1. Why can a merger create the appearance of earnings growth?
2. Why is diversification by itself not a good reason for a merger?
23.6 The Cost of an Acquisition
We’ve discussed some of the benefi ts of acquisition. We now need to discuss the cost of a merger.12 We learned earlier that the net incremental gain to a merger is:
ΔV = VAB - (VA + VB)
Also, the total value of Firm B to Firm A, VB*, is:
VB* = VB + ΔV
Th e NPV of the merger is therefore:
NPV = VB* - Cost to Firm A of the acquisition [23.1] To illustrate, suppose we have the following pre-merger information for Firm A and Firm B:
Firm A Firm B
Price per share $ 20 $ 10 Number of shares 25 10 Total market value $ 500 $ 100
Both of these fi rms are 100 percent equity. You estimate that the incremental value of the acquisi- tion, ΔV, is $100.
Th e board of Firm B has indicated that it agrees to a sale if the price is $150, payable in cash or stock. Th is price for Firm B has two parts. Firm B is worth $100 as a stand-alone, so this is the minimum value that we could assign to Firm B. Th e second part, $50, is called the merger pre- mium, and it represents the amount paid more than the stand-alone value.
12 For a more complete discussion of the costs of a merger and the NPV approach, see S. C. Myers, “A Framework for Evaluating Mergers,” in Modern Developments in Financial Management, ed. S. C. Myers (New York: Praeger Publish- ers, 1976).
diversification Investment in more than one asset; returns do not move proportionally in the same direction at the same time, thus reducing risk.
Concept Questions
668 Part 8: Topics in Corporate Finance
23Ross_Chapter23_3rd.indd 66823Ross_Chapter23_3rd.indd 668 12-11-28 12:4712-11-28 12:47
Should Firm A acquire Firm B? Should it pay in cash or stock? To answer, we need to deter- mine the NPV of the acquisition under both alternatives. We can start by noting that the value of Firm B to Firm A is:
VB* = ΔV + VB = $100 + 100 = $200
Th e total value received by A from buying Firm B is thus $200. Th e question then is, how much does Firm A have to give up? Th e answer depends on whether cash or stock is used as the means of payment.
Case I: Cash Acquisit ion Th e cost of an acquisition when cash is used is just the cash itself. So, if Firm A pays $150 in cash to purchase all the shares of Firm B, the cost of acquiring Firm B is $150. Th e NPV of a cash acquisition is:
NPV = VB* - Cost = $200 - 150 = $50
Th e acquisition is, therefore, profi table. Aft er the merger, Firm AB still has 25 shares outstanding. Th e value of Firm A aft er the merger is:
VAB = VA + (VB* - Cost) = $500 + 200 - 150 = $550
Th is is just the pre-merger value of $500 plus the $50 NPV. Th e price per share aft er the merger is $550/25 = $22, a gain of $2 per share.
Case I I : Stock Acquisit ion Th ings are somewhat more complicated when stock is the means of payment. In a cash merger, the shareholders in B receive cash for their stock, and, as in the previous U.S. Steel/Marathon Oil example, they no longer participate in the company. Th us, as we have seen, the cost of the acquisi- tion is the amount of cash needed to pay off B’s shareholders.
In a stock merger, no cash actually changes hands. Instead, the shareholders in B come in as new shareholders in the merged fi rm. Th e value of the merged fi rm is equal to the pre-merger values of Firms A and B plus the incremental gain from the merger, ΔV:
VAB = VA + VB + ΔV = $500 + 100 + 100 = $700
To give $150 worth of stock for Firm B, Firm A has to give up $150/$20 = 7.5 shares. Aft er the merger, there are thus 25 + 7.5 = 32.5 shares outstanding and the per-share value is $700/32.5 = $21.54.
Notice that the per-share price aft er the merger is lower under the stock purchase option. Th e reason has to do with the fact that B’s shareholders own stock in the new fi rm.
It appears that Firm A paid $150 for Firm B. However, it actually paid more than that. When all is said and done, B’s shareholders own 7.5 shares of stock in the merged fi rm. Aft er the merger, each of these shares is worth $21.54. Th e total value of the consideration received by B’s share- holders is thus 7.5 × $21.54 = $161.55.
Th is $161.55 is the true cost of the acquisition because it is what the sellers actually end up receiving. Th e NPV of the merger to Firm A is:
NPV = VB* - Cost = $200 - 161.55 = $38.45
We can check this by noting that A started with 25 shares worth $20 each. Th e gain to A of $38.45 works out to be $38.45/25 = $1.54 per share. Th e value of the stock increases to $21.54 as we calculated.
CHAPTER 23: Mergers and Acquisitions 669
23Ross_Chapter23_3rd.indd 66923Ross_Chapter23_3rd.indd 669 12-11-28 12:4712-11-28 12:47
When we compare the cash acquisition to the stock acquisition, we see that the cash acquisi- tion is better in this case, because Firm A gets to keep all the NPV if it pays in cash. If it pays in stock, Firm B’s shareholders share in the NPV by becoming new shareholders in A.
Cash versus Common Stock Th e distinction between cash and common stock fi nancing in a merger is an important one. If cash is used, the cost of an acquisition is not dependent on the acquisition gains. All other things being the same, if common stock is used, the cost is higher because Firm A’s shareholders must share the acquisition gains with the shareholders of Firm B. However, if the NPV of the acquisi- tion is negative, the loss is shared between the two fi rms.
Whether to fi nance an acquisition by cash or by shares of stock depends on several factors, including:13
1. Sharing gains. If cash is used to finance an acquisition, the selling firm’s shareholders do not participate in the potential gains of the merger. Of course, if the acquisition is not a success, the losses are not shared, and shareholders of the acquiring firm are worse off than if stock were used.
2. Taxes. Acquisition by cash usually results in a taxable transaction. Acquisition by exchang- ing stock is generally tax free.
3. Control. Acquisition by cash does not affect the control of the acquiring firm. Acquisition with voting shares may have implications for control of the merged firm.
In 1999 and early 2000, high stock prices in the technology sector resulted in a number of acqui- sitions fi nanced with shares as companies like JDS Uniphase and Nortel Networks expanded through acquisitions.
1. Why does the true cost of a stock acquisition depend on the gain from the merger?
2. What are some important factors in deciding whether to use stock or cash in an acquisition?
23.7 Defensive Tactics
Target fi rm managers frequently resist takeover attempts. Resistance usually starts with press releases and mailings to shareholders presenting management’s viewpoint. It can eventually lead to legal action and solicitation of competing bids. Managerial action to defeat a takeover attempt may make target shareholders better off if it elicits a higher off er premium from the bidding fi rm or another fi rm.
Of course, management resistance may simply refl ect pursuit of self-interest at the expense of shareholders. Th is is a controversial subject. At times, management resistance has greatly increased the amount ultimately received by shareholders. At other times, management resistance appears to have defeated all takeover attempts to the detriment of shareholders.
In this section, we describe various defensive tactics that have been used by target fi rms’ man- agements to resist unfriendly attempts. Th e law surrounding these defences is not settled, and some of these manoeuvres may ultimately be deemed illegal or otherwise unsuitable. Our discus- sion of defensive tactics that may serve to entrench management at the expense of shareholders takes us into corporate governance. In addition to describing management’s actions, we com- ment on how large pension funds and other institutional investors strive to reform the corporate governance practices of companies in which they invest.
13 In Canada, cash transactions for the deals mentioned in Table 23.1 ranged from 50 percent to 61 percent of annual transaction value.
Concept Questions
corporate governance Rules and practices relating to how corporations are governed by management, directors, and shareholders.
670 Part 8: Topics in Corporate Finance
23Ross_Chapter23_3rd.indd 67023Ross_Chapter23_3rd.indd 670 12-11-28 12:4712-11-28 12:47
The Control Block and the Corporate Charter If one individual or group owns 51 percent of a company’s stock, this control block makes a hos- tile takeover virtually impossible. In the extreme, one interest may own all the stock. Examples are privately owned companies such as Olympia and York Developments Ltd. and Crown corpora- tions such as Quebec Hydro. Many Canadian companies are subsidiaries of foreign corporations that own control blocks. Many domestically owned companies have controlling shareholders.14
As a result, control blocks are typical in Canada although they are the exception in the United States. Table 23.4 shows that around 55 percent of corporations in Canada are widely held versus 72 for the United States. One important implication is that minority shareholders need protection in Canada. One key group of minority shareholders are pension funds and other institutional investors. Th ey are becoming increasingly vocal in opposing defensive tactics that are seen to be entrenching management at the expense of shareholders. We discuss several examples next.
For widely held companies, their corporate charters establish the conditions that allow for takeovers. Th e corporate charter refers to the articles of incorporation and corporate bylaws that establish the governance rules of the fi rm. Firms can amend their corporate charters to make acquisitions more diffi cult. For example, usually two-thirds of the shareholders of record must approve a merger. Firms can make it more diffi cult to be acquired by changing this to 80 percent or so. Th is is called a supermajority amendment.
Another device is to stagger the election of the board members. Th is makes it more diffi cult to elect a new board of directors quickly. We discuss staggered elections in Chapter 8.
TABLE 23.4
Comparison of Ownership and Control-Enhancing Mechanisms (in percentage) Canada United States Asia Europe
Widely held 55.4 71.9 43.6 36.9 Controlled at 20% threshold 44.6 28.1 56.4 63.1 Of which: Family controlled 31.2 19.8 37.9 44.3 Widely-held financial 10.8 4.7 4.9 8.7 Widely-held corporation 2.6 2.4 9.0 2.0 State owned 0.0 0.0 4.6 4.1 Miscellaneous 0.0 1.2 0.0 3.4 Controlled by pyramiding or multiple-control chains 7.6 4.0 48.8 24.7 Controlled by dual-class shares 14.0 8.2 NA 19.9 Average ratio of cash flow to voting rights 89.2 94.0 74.6 87.0
Source: King, Michael R. & Santor, Eric, 2008. “Family values: Ownership structure, performance and capital structure of Canadian fi rms,” Journal of Banking & Finance, Elsevier, vol. 32(11), pages 2423–2432, November.
Repurchase ∕ Standsti l l Agreements Managers of target fi rms may attempt to negotiate standstill agreements. Standstill agreements are contracts where the bidding fi rm agrees to limit its holdings in the target fi rm. Th ese agreements usually lead to the end of takeover attempts.
In the U.S., standstill agreements oft en occur at the same time that a targeted repurchase is arranged. In a targeted repurchase, a fi rm buys a certain amount of its own stock from an indi- vidual investor, usually at a substantial premium. Th ese premiums can be thought of as payments to potential bidders to eliminate unfriendly takeover attempts. Critics of such payments view them as bribes and label them greenmail. Paying greenmail may harm minority shareholders if it heads off a takeover that would raise the stock price.
Standstill agreements also occur in takeover attempts in Canada but without greenmail, which
14 Important exceptions are chartered banks. As we showed in Chapter 1, at the time of writing, the Bank Act prohibited any one interest from owning more than 10 percent of the shares.
control block An interest controlling 50 percent of outstanding votes plus one; thereby it may decide the fate of the firm.
greenmail A targeted stock repurchase where payments are made to potential bidders to eliminate unfriendly takeover attempts.
CHAPTER 23: Mergers and Acquisitions 671
23Ross_Chapter23_3rd.indd 67123Ross_Chapter23_3rd.indd 671 12-11-28 12:4712-11-28 12:47
is ruled out by securities laws. For example, in December 2011, activist investor and a majority shareholder of Canadian Pacifi c Railway, Bill Ackman was off ered a seat on the board of direc- tors that was conditional on his signing a standstill agreement that would have stopped him from waging a proxy battle to replace most of the directors. Th e agreement would have also restricted his ability to buy a larger stake or to take any actions, such as proxy contests, that opposed CP’s board. Critics of standstill agreements argue that in cases like this, such agreements oft en cause losses for minority shareholders by averting takeovers at a premium price.
Exclusionary Offers and Dual Class Stock An exclusionary off er is the opposite of a targeted repurchase. Here the fi rm or an outside group makes an off er for a given amount of stock while excluding targeted shareholders, oft en hold- ers of non-voting shares. Th is kind of an off er is made easier in Canada since dual-class, non- voting shares have historically been more prevalent than in the United States. Market regulators frown on such off ers and an exclusionary off er for Canadian Tire voting shares was voided by the Ontario Securities Commission in 1986. Based on that precedent, it appears that any future exclusionary off ers are likely to be viewed as an illegal form of discrimination against one group of shareholders.
In addition, corporate governance guidelines call for the removal of dual-class share structures although current academic research fails to fi nd any harm to shareholders.15 Th e percentage of dual-class shares in TSX reduced from 14% in 1993 to 6% in 2010.16 For example, the Stronach family owned only 0.8 percent of the equity in the fi rm but controlled 66.2 percent of the votes at Magna International (the highest voting power to equity ownership ratio for a composite com- pany). Magna, in turn, held voting control at Decoma and Tesma International (both also part of the S&P/TSX Composite) through use of dual-class share structures.17 In August 2010, the company completed a $1.1 billion plan of arrangement to eliminate dual-class share structure.
Share Rights Plans A poison pill is a tactic designed to repel would-be suitors. Th e term comes from the world of espionage. Agents are supposed to bite a pill of cyanide rather than permit capture. Presumably, this prevents enemy interrogators from learning important secrets.
In the equally colourful world of corporate fi nance, a poison pill is a fi nancial device designed to make it impossible for a fi rm to be acquired without management’s consent—unless the buyer is willing to commit fi nancial suicide.
In recent years, many of the largest fi rms in the United States and Canada have adopted poison pill provisions of one form or another, oft en calling them shareholder rights plans (SRPs) or something similar. Inco introduced the fi rst poison pill in Canada in 1988.
SRPs diff er quite a bit in detail from company to company; we describe a kind of generic approach here. In general, when a company adopts an SRP, it distributes share rights to its exist- ing shareholders.18 Th ese rights allow shareholders to buy shares of stock (or preferred stock) at some fi xed price.
Th e rights issued with an SRP have a number of unusual features. First, the exercise or sub- scription price on the right is usually set high enough so the rights are well out of the money, meaning the purchase price is much higher than the current stock price. Th e rights are oft en good for 10 years, and the purchase or exercise price is usually a reasonable estimate of what the stock will be worth at that time.
Second, unlike ordinary stock rights, these rights can’t be exercised immediately, and they can’t be bought and sold separately from the stock. Also, they can essentially be cancelled by
15 V. Jog, P. Zhu, and S. Dutta, “The Impact of Restricted Voting Share Structure on Firm Value and Performance,” Corporate Governance: An International Review, 18, September 2010, pp. 415–437. 16 Amoako-Adu, B., Baulkaran, V., & Smith, B. F. (2011). Unification of dual class shares in Canada with clinical case on Magna International. Financial Services Research Centre, School of Business and Economics, Wilfrid Laurier University. 17 This discussion is drawn from S. Maich, “Stronach has most votes, least shares,” National Post, June 11, 2003, IN1. 18 We discuss ordinary share rights in Chapter 15.
magna.com
poison pill A financial device designed to make unfriendly takeover attempts unappealing, if not impossible.
shareholder rights plan Provisions allowing existing shareholders to purchase stock at some fixed price should an outside takeover bid take place, discouraging hostile takeover attempts.
672 Part 8: Topics in Corporate Finance
23Ross_Chapter23_3rd.indd 67223Ross_Chapter23_3rd.indd 672 12-11-28 12:4712-11-28 12:47
management at any time; oft en, they can be redeemed (bought back) for a penny apiece, or some similarly trivial amount.
Th ings get interesting when, under certain circumstances, the rights are triggered. Th is means the rights become exercisable, they can be bought and sold separately from the stock, and they are not easily cancelled or redeemed. Typically, the rights are triggered when someone acquires 20 percent of the common stock or otherwise announces a tender off er.
When the rights are triggered, they can be exercised. Since they are out of the money, this fact is not especially important. Certain other features come into play, however. Th e most important is the fl ip-over provision.
Th e fl ip-over provision is the poison in the pill. In the event of a merger, the holder of a right can pay the exercise price and receive common stock in the merged fi rm worth twice the exercise price. In other words, holders of the right can buy stock in the merged fi rm at half price.19
Th e rights issued in connection with an SRP are poison pills because anyone trying to force a merger would trigger the rights. When this happens, all the target fi rm’s shareholders can eff ec- tively buy stock in the merged fi rm at half price. Th is greatly increases the cost of the merger to the bidder because the target fi rm’s shareholders end up with a much larger percentage of the merged fi rm.
Notice that the fl ip-over provision doesn’t prevent someone from acquiring control of a fi rm by purchasing a majority interest. It just acts to prevent a complete merger of the two fi rms. Even so, this inability to combine can have serious tax and other implications for the buyer.
Th e intention of a poison pill is to force a bidder to negotiate with management. Th is can be bad news for shareholders of the target fi rm if it discourages takeovers and entrenches ineffi cient management. On the other hand, poison pills could be positive for the target’s shareholders if they allow management time to fi nd competing off ers that maximize the selling price. For example, in 2012, Moneta Porcupine Mines Inc., a mining company headquartered in Timmins, Ontario, adopted a shareholder rights plan to protect against unwanted takeovers aft er it released a gold resource estimate for the Golden Highway project in Ontario.
In Canada, several arrangements exist that make poison pills more benefi cial to target share- holders than in the U.S. First, the Ontario Securities Commission and its counterparts in other provinces, intervene in takeover bids to rule on the acceptability of poison pills. In many cases, the result has been to extend the waiting period and increase shareholder value.20 Still, most large Canadian institutional investors like the Caisse de dépôt or Ontario Teachers’ Pension Plan con- sider the introduction of poison pills to be a bad corporate governance practice.
Going Private and Leveraged Buyouts As we have previously discussed, going private refers to what happens when the publicly owned stock in a fi rm is replaced with complete equity ownership by a private group, which may include elements of existing management. As a consequence, the fi rm’s stock is taken off the market (if it is an exchange-traded stock, it is delisted) and is no longer traded.
One result of going private is that takeovers via tender off er can no longer occur since there are no publicly held shares. In this sense, an LBO (or, more specifi cally, a management buyout or MBO) can be a takeover defence. However, it’s only a defence for management. From the stock- holder’s point of view, an LBO is a takeover because they are bought out.
In an LBO, the selling shareholders are invariably paid a premium more than the market price, just as they are in a merger.21 As with a merger, the acquirer profi ts only if the synergy created is greater than the premium. Synergy is quite plausible in a merger of two fi rms, and we delineated a number of types of synergy earlier in the chapter. However, it is much more diffi cult to explain synergy in an LBO, because only one fi rm is involved.
19 Some plans also contain flip-in provisions. These allow the holder to buy stock in the target company at half price when the target company is the surviving company in a merger. Simultaneously, the rights owned by the raider (the ac- quirer) are voided. A merger where the target is the surviving company is called a reverse merger. 20 For a detailed discussion of poison pills in Canada, see P. Halpern, “Poison Pills: The Next Decade,” Canadian Invest- ment Review 11, Winter 1998, pp. 69–70. 21 H. DeAngelo, L. DeAngelo, and E. M. Rice, “Going Private: Minority Freezeouts and Shareholder Wealth,” Journal of Law and Economics 27 (1984). They show that the premiums paid to existing shareholders in U.S. LBOs and other go- ing-private transactions are about the same as interfirm acquisitions.
otpp.com
CHAPTER 23: Mergers and Acquisitions 673
23Ross_Chapter23_3rd.indd 67323Ross_Chapter23_3rd.indd 673 12-11-28 12:4712-11-28 12:47
Th ere are generally two reasons given for the ability of an LBO to create value: First, the extra debt provides a tax deduction, which, as earlier chapters suggest, leads to an increase in fi rm value. Most LBOs are on fi rms with stable earnings and with low to moderate debt.22 Th e LBO may simply increase the fi rm’s debt to its optimum level.
Second, the LBO usually turns the previous managers into owners, thereby increasing their incentive to work hard. Th e increase in debt is a further incentive because the managers must earn more than the debt service to obtain any profi t for themselves.
LBOs to Date: The Record Since the mid-1980s, ongoing experience with LBOs has revealed some weaknesses both in the concept and the fi nancing vehicle—junk bonds.
Problems facing LBOs in the early 1990s are exemplifi ed in the trials of Robert Campeau whose real estate company took over Allied Stores in 1986 and then Federated Department Stores in 1988.
Campeau was correct; Federated Department Stores assets were undervalued at the pre-take- over share price of $33 but hindsight shows that the $73.50 per share takeover price was too high. Further, the deal was overleveraged with 97 percent debt fi nancing. With either a lower purchase price, or lower leverage, the deal might have survived.23
Despite an injection of $300 million from Olympia & York Developments Ltd. (then owned by the Reichmann family of Toronto), Campeau Corporation had to default on its bank loans. As a result, the National Bank of Canada took over 35 percent of Campeau’s voting stock in Janu- ary 1990. Shortly aft er, Allied and Federated fi led for bankruptcy protection in the United States. Over the next year, Campeau sold just under $2 billion in Canadian real estate to try to reduce its debt to manageable levels in order to survive.24 In January 1991, Campeau Corporation’s name was changed to Candev with a 65 percent control block in the hands of Olympia & York. Robert Campeau lost his seat on the board and all but 2 percent of the company’s stock. LBO prob- lems refl ected on the high-yield or junk bonds used heavily to fi nance them. For example, when Allied and Federated sought bankruptcy protection in 1990, Campeau junk bonds that had a face value of $1,000 sold for $110.25 In a more positive example, Kohlberg Kravis Roberts and Ontario Teachers’ Pension Plan bought Yellow Pages from Bell Canada in a $3-billion LBO in 2002. In July 2003, they sold part of their holding for $1 billion in an income trust IPO.26
Other Defensive Devices As corporate takeovers become more common, other colourful terms have become popular.
• Golden parachutes. Some target fi rms provide compensation to top-level management if a takeover occurs. Th is can be viewed as a payment to management to make it less concerned for its own welfare and more interested in shareholders when considering a takeover bid. Alternatively, the payment can be seen as an attempt to enrich management at the share- holders’ expense. For example, in October 2010, the CEO of Potash Corp. of Saskatchewan Inc., Bill Doyle, was given a golden parachute as the company agreed to cover any penalty taxes he would incur if the U.S. deems his severance package excessive. Th is golden para- chute can be viewed as the company’s reaction to the proposed acquisition by BHP Billiton a few months earlier.
• Crown jewels. Firms oft en sell major assets—crown jewels—when faced with a takeover threat. Th is is sometimes referred to as the scorched earth strategy. For example, in 2012, when the market capitalization of Research in Motion Ltd. (RIM) was about 1% of that of
22 T. Melman, “Leveraged Buyouts: How Everyone Can Win,” Canadian Investment Review, Spring 1990, pp. 67–70, dis- cusses LBOs from a management perspective. 23 S. N. Kaplan, “Campeau’s Acquisition of Federated, Value Destroyed or Value Added?” Journal of Financial Econom- ics, December 1989, pp. 189–212. 24 S. Horvitch, “Campeau ‘Selling Itself’ to Survive,” The Financial Post, July 1, 1991, p. 22. 25 See Edward Altman in Chapter 7 for more on problems with junk bonds in the United States. 26 Our discussion draws on Laura Santini, “Deals & Dealmakers: Ontario Teachers’ Makes Grade With Private-Equity Plays,” Wall Street Journal, August 15, 2005, p. C1.
674 Part 8: Topics in Corporate Finance
23Ross_Chapter23_3rd.indd 67423Ross_Chapter23_3rd.indd 674 12-11-28 12:4712-11-28 12:47
Apple Inc., there was speculation that RIM might avoid any acquisition by selling its crown jewels—patents and networks.
• White knight. Target fi rms sometimes seek a competing bid from a friendly bidder—a white knight—who promises to maintain the jobs of existing management and to refrain from selling the target’s assets. For example in 2011, when Wi-LAN Inc., an Intellectual Property (IP) licensing company, made a hostile takeover bid to acquire Mosaid Technologies Inc., an Ottawa based patent enforcement fi rm, Mosaid obtained a white knight in the form of Sterling Partners, a leading private equity fi rm.
Christine Dobby on Talent Acquisitions
THE BEST THING that can happen to a modern technological entrepreneur is to watch the object of their toil and anxiety evolve into a billion-dollar goliath. Running a close second is having that successful startup scooped up by a buyer with deep pockets for a big, fat payout. But with technology talent scarce in such places as Silicon Valley, buyers may come calling not for the business you’ve created with the sweat of your own brow, but rather the people you hired to help get it off the ground.
“One of the ways that’s really emerged over the last little while for big companies like Google and Facebook and Twitter to get the best talent is to buy it,” said Roger Chabra, a partner at Montreal-based venture capital fi rm Rho Canada Ventures. “It’s certainly happening a lot more than it has, basically just because there’s a talent war going on. Especially with big companies—particularly in environments like the Valley—there’s real fi ghting in the trenches for great talent.”
As more computer science graduates than ever go into business on their own, large, established Internet companies with vast demand for workers are struggling to hire. Small acquisitions can be a good way for them to address that problem, Mark MacLeod, general partner at Montreal based Real Ventures, a $50 million seed-stage fund, told a session on mergers and acquisitions at a PricewaterhouseCoopers LLP conference in Toronto last month. “If you have a really strong tech team, that commands valuations,” he said. “A phenomenon we’re seeing a lot more these days is kind of ‘acqui-hires’ or buying companies for talent.” It’s diffi cult to get a clear picture of just how prevalent the phenomenon is. From 2009 to 2011, 44% of Canadian technology companies that were acquired went to U.S. buyers, according to PwC. Mr. MacLeod pointed to Vancouver’s Summify, a social media summary company that was snapped up by Twitter in January. Work on the Summify product was shut down and the team moved to San Francisco to work for the micro-blogging site.
Google Inc. has also grabbed some Canadian talent. In 2010, it acquired BumpTop, founded by Anand Agarawala, who developed the software product out of his University of Toronto master’s degree research and now works as a product manager at the search engine giant. In some cases, Mr. Chabra said, a large company might acquire a startup solely for its team with the aim of absorbing the employees into its main operations,
often in California. Other times, the purchaser could be looking to expand its reach with new outposts and buying a ready-made team in a new city could be a convenient way to do that. The quick talent grab may be appealing to the buyer, but Mr. Chabra said some venture capital investors may try to block such sales because they get a portion of the purchase price but are cut out of bonuses given to individual team members for joining the acquirer.
Bonuses aside, acqui-hires may not sit well with those being acquired primarily for their brain power. “If you’re working on something and the acquirer is really going to make this a big platform, and you’re going to have a signifi cant role in the company and budget to build a big team, then that’s amazing,” Mr. MacLeod said. “If you’re just being acquired for talent and the product’s going to be shelved, maybe that’s not the best outcome.”
Not every acquisition of a Canadian tech startup ends up in the shuttering of the product and transplant of the team south of the border. For example, California cloud-computing giant Salesforce.com Inc. has purchased Canadian companies, including Fredericton’s Radian6 and Toronto’s Rypple Inc., and kept the businesses and their workforces in place. London, Ont., resident Jaafer Haidar sold his own technology startup Carbyn Inc. to Buffalo, N.Y.-based Synacor Inc. this year. Other buyers were interested, including a large gaming outfi t and a bigger Canadian company, Mr. Haidar said. But those two companies made it clear they were more intrigued by the Carbyn team’s facility with HTML5 than its cloud-based product, which lets users log in and access their apps on any Internet-connected device.
“We enjoyed working together and working on this project. If [you are] acquired by a company that just wants the talent, then you become less of a team and more of an individual working on whatever the company wants you to work on,” Mr. Haidar said, noting that his team has continued working together on the same product as a subsidiary of Synacor in Canada.
Christine Dobby writes for The Financial Post. Her comments are reproduced with permission from the July 3, 2012 edition.
IN THEIR OWN WORDS…
CHAPTER 23: Mergers and Acquisitions 675
23Ross_Chapter23_3rd.indd 67523Ross_Chapter23_3rd.indd 675 12-11-28 12:4712-11-28 12:47
Chapters, one of Canada’s largest bookstore chains, was taken over for $121 million in February of 2001 by Trilogy Retail Enterprises, a fi rm headed by Indigo founder Heather Reisman and spouse Gerald Schwartz, of Onex Corp. Th e takeover was launched with the intention of merging Indigo and Chapters to create a Canadian bookstore super-chain.
Before giving in to Trilogy Retail Enterprises’ fi nal takeover bid of $121 million, Chapters’ board of directors and management explored takeover defenses. Chapters had a poison pill in place to prevent a hostile takeover. When Trilogy made a partial bid which, if successful, would have given Trilogy 53 percent of Chapters, Chapters shareholders (other than the hostile bidder) had a right to purchase additional Chapters’ shares at half the market price. As well, 51 days aft er Trilogy’s initial bid, Chapters announced an off er from a white knight, Future Shop, which the Chapters’ board recommended to the shareholders. Chapters entered into a support agreement with Future Shop which provided that the poison pill would only be waived for competing bids upon the take-up of Chapters’ shares by Future Shop, and would remain in place to give Future Shop time to prepare and mail their off er. Th e poison pill was eventually removed because the OSC found that Future Shop had already had substantial time to prepare its bid. In the end, Future Shop’s role as a white knight forced Trilogy to raise its bid to $121 million, fi nally resulting in the takeover aft er months of media-publicized drama.
1. What can a firm do to make takeover less likely?
2. What is a share rights plan? Explain how the rights work.
3. What were the main problems faced by LBOs in the early 1990s?
23.8 Some Evidence on Acquisitions
One of the most controversial issues surrounding our subject is whether mergers and acquisitions benefi t shareholders. Quite a few studies have attempted to estimate the eff ect of mergers and takeovers on stock prices of the bidding and target fi rms. Th ese are called event studies because they estimate abnormal stock-price changes on and around the off er-announcement date—the event. Abnormal returns are usually defi ned as the diff erence between actual stock returns and a market index, to take account of the infl uence of market-wide eff ects on the returns of individual securities.
Table 23.5 shows merger premiums in the Canada and the world in 2010 and 2011. Th e pre- mium is the diff erence between the acquisition price per share and the previous share price of the target as a percentage of the previous price. For example, in the most recent period, bidders paid an average of 34.8 percent over the pre-merger price. Th is clearly shows that Canadian mergers benefi t the target’s shareholders. Th e average industry bid premiums in 2011 for Canada are mar- ginally higher compared to the rest of the world.
Turning to Canadian research in Table 23.6 we fi nd that targets do much better than bid- ders with an average return of 10 percent for mergers between 1994 and 2000. Th e other studies found that target fi rm shareholders in going-private transactions enjoyed an abnormal return of 25 percent.
Th ese gains are a refl ection of the merger premium that is typically paid by the acquiring fi rm. Th ese gains are excess returns, that is, the returns over and above what the shareholders would normally have earned.
Th e shareholders of bidding fi rms do not fare as well. According to U.S. studies, bidders experi- ence gains of 4 percent in tender off ers, but this gain is about zero in mergers.27 Canadian research places bidders’ gains in a range from 0 to 11 percent. While some research suggests that bidding
27 Loughran and Vijh find that bidders experience below-average returns for five years after acquisitions: T. Loughran and A. Vijh, “Do Long-Term Shareholders Benefit from Corporate Acquisitions,” Journal of Finance (December 1997).
Concept Questions
676 Part 8: Topics in Corporate Finance
23Ross_Chapter23_3rd.indd 67623Ross_Chapter23_3rd.indd 676 12-11-28 12:4712-11-28 12:47
fi rms do poorly over a longer, three-year, period aft er the merger, the most recent fi ndings show that losses to bidders’ shareholders merely off set early gains with a net zero impact.28
What conclusions can be drawn from Tables 23.5 and our discussion? First, the evidence strongly suggests that the shareholders of successful target fi rms achieve substantial gains as a result of take- overs. In the U.S. the gains appear to be larger in tender off ers than in mergers. Th is may refl ect the fact that takeovers sometimes start with a friendly merger proposal from the bidder to the manage- ment of the target fi rm. If management rejects the off er, the bidding fi rm may take the off er directly to the shareholders with a tender off er. As a consequence, tender off ers are frequently unfriendly.
Also, the target fi rm’s management may actively oppose the off er with defensive tactics. Th is oft en has the result of raising the tender off er from the bidding fi rm; on average, friendly mergers may be arranged at lower premiums than unfriendly tender off ers.
TABLE 23.5
Bid Premium: 2011 Average Premium to 4 week stock price
Sector
Canada World
2011 2010 2011 2010
Consumer Products and Services 12.8 12.8 33.4 32.0 Consumer Staples 66.1 1.0 29.5 27.4 Energy and Power 37.4 35.1 30.8 24.4 Financials 31.2 28.4 29.9 30.4 Healthcare 40.5 30.1 35.8 35.1 High Technology 41.1 41.0 31.7 28.1 Industrials 69.0 31.9 31.2 24.2 Materials 31.1 34.9 29.4 30.6 Media and Entertainment 16.2 13.0 20.5 26.8 Real Estate 36.1 33.8 30.6 24.6 Retail 27.9 3.4 29.8 30.9 Telecommunications 53.1 53.1 32.2 26.3 Average Industry Total 34.8 34.1 30.5 28.8
Source: Th omson Reuters
TABLE 23.6
Abnormal returns in successful Canadian mergers
Target Bidder
1271 acquired, 242 targets, 1994–2000** 10% 1% 1930 mergers, 1964–1983* 9 3 119 mergers, 1963–1982† 23 11 173 going-private transactions, 1977–1989‡ 25 NA Minority buyouts 27 Non-controlling bidder 1300 acquisitions, 1993–2002#
24 NA 0%
*From B. Espen Eckbo, “Mergers and the Market for Corporate Control: Th e Canadian Evidence,” Canadian Journal of Economics, May 1986, pp. 236–60. Th e test for bidders excluded fi rms involved in multiple mergers. †From A. L. Calvet and J. Lefoll, “Information Asymmetry and Wealth Eff ect of Canadian Corporate Acquisitions,” Financial Review, November 1987, pp. 415–431. ‡Modifi ed from B. Amoako-Adu and B. Smith, “How Do Shareholders Fare in Minority Buyouts?” Canadian Investment Review, Fall 1991, pp. 79–88. **From A. Yuce and A. Ng, “Eff ects of Private and Public Canadian Mergers,” Canadian Journal of Administrative Sciences, June 2005, pp. 111–124. #From S. Dutta and V. Jog, “Th e Long-term Performance of Acquiring Firms: A Re-examination of an Anomaly,” Journal of Banking and Finance 33, 2009, pp. 1400–1412.
28 P. André, M. Kooli, and J-F L’Her, “The Long-Run Performance of Mergers and Acquisitions: Evidence from the Canadian Stock Market,” Financial Management, Winter 2004, pp. 27–43. and S. Dutta and V. Jog, “The Long-term Performance of Acquiring Firms: A Re-examination of an Anomaly,” Journal of Banking and Finance 33, 2009, pp. 1400–1412.
CHAPTER 23: Mergers and Acquisitions 677
23Ross_Chapter23_3rd.indd 67723Ross_Chapter23_3rd.indd 677 12-11-28 12:4712-11-28 12:47
Th e second conclusion we can draw is that the shareholders of bidding fi rms earn signifi cantly less from takeovers. Th e balance is more even for Canadian mergers. Th is may be because there is less competition among bidders in Canada. Two reasons for this are that the Canadian capital market is smaller and that federal government agencies review foreign investments.29
In fact, studies have found that the acquiring fi rms in both countries actually lose value in many mergers.30 Th ese fi ndings are a puzzle, and there are a variety of explanations:
1. Anticipated merger gains may not have been completely achieved, and shareholders thus ex- perienced losses. This can happen if managers of bidding firms tend to overestimate the gains from acquisition, as we saw happened to Campeau Corporation.
2. The bidding firms are often much larger than the target firms. Thus, even though the dollar gains to the bidder may be similar to the dollar gains earned by shareholders of the target firm, the percentage gains are much lower.31
3. Another possible explanation for the low returns to the shareholders of bidding firms in takeovers is simply that management may not be acting in the interest of shareholders when it attempts to acquire other firms. Perhaps, it is attempting to increase the size of the firm, even if this reduces its value per share.
4. The market for takeovers may be sufficiently competitive that the NPV of acquiring is zero because the prices paid in acquisitions fully reflect the value of the acquired firms. In other words, the sellers capture all the gain.
5. The announcement of a takeover may not convey much new information to the market about the bidding firm. This can occur because firms frequently announce intentions to en- gage in merger programs long before they announce specific acquisitions. In this case, the stock price in the bidding firm may already reflect anticipated gains from mergers.
1. What does the evidence say about the benefits of mergers and acquisitions to target company shareholders?
2. What does the evidence say about the benefits of mergers and acquisitions to acquiring company shareholders?
3. What is the evidence on whether minority shareholders are shortchanged in mergers?
23.9 Divestitures and Restructurings
In contrast to a merger or acquisition, a divestiture occurs when a fi rm sells assets, operations, divisions, and/or segments to a third party. Note that divestitures are an important part of M&A activity. Aft er all, one company’s acquisition is usually another’s divestiture. Also, following a merger, it is very common for certain assets or divisions to be sold. Such sales may be required by antitrust regulations; they may be needed to raise cash to help pay for a deal; or the divested units may simply be unwanted by the acquirer.
Divestitures also occur when a company decides to sell off a part of itself for reasons unrelated to mergers and acquisitions. Th is can happen when a particular unit is unprofi table or not a good strategic fi t. Or, a fi rm may decide to cash out of a very profi table operation. Finally, a cash- strapped fi rm may have to sell assets just to raise capital (this commonly occurs in bankruptcy).
A divestiture usually occurs like any other sale. A company lets it be known that it has assets for sale and seeks off ers. If a suitable off er is forthcoming, a sale occurs.
In some cases, particularly when the desired divestiture is a relatively large operating unit,
29 P. Halpern, “Poison Pills,” p. 66; and A. L. Calvet and J. Lefoll, “Information Asymmetry,” p. 432. 30 S. Moeller, F. Schlingemann, and R. Stulz, “Wealth Destruction on a Massive Scale? A study of Acquiring Firm Re- turns in the Recent Merger Wave,” Journal of Finance (April 2005). 31 This factor cannot explain the imbalance in returns in the first Canadian study in Table 23.6. In this sample, bidder and target firms were about the same size.
Concept Questions
divestiture The sale of assets, operations, divisions, and/or segments of a business to a third party.
678 Part 8: Topics in Corporate Finance
23Ross_Chapter23_3rd.indd 67823Ross_Chapter23_3rd.indd 678 12-11-28 12:4712-11-28 12:47
companies will elect to do an equity carve-out. To do a carve-out, a parent company fi rst cre- ates a completely separate company of which the parent is the sole shareholder. Next, the parent company arranges an initial public off ering (IPO) in which a fraction, perhaps 20 percent or so, of the parent’s stock is sold to the public, thus creating a publicly held company. An example of an equity carve-out is Wendy’s International selling a small portion of wholly-owned Tim Hortons via IPO in March 2006.
Instead of a carve-out, a company can elect to do a spin-off . In a spin-off , the company simply distributes shares in the subsidiary to its existing shareholders on a pro rata basis. Shareholders can keep the shares or sell them as they see fi t. Very commonly, a company will fi rst do an equity carve-out to create an active market for the shares and then subsequently do a spin-off of the remaining shares at a later date. Many well-known companies were created by this route. For example, in May 2012, Sears Holdings Corp. planned to spin off a large part of its stake in Sears Canada Inc.
In a less common, but more drastic move, a company can elect to do (or be forced to do) a split-up. A split-up is just what the name suggests: A company splits itself into two or more new companies. Shareholders have their shares in the old company swapped for shares in the new companies. Probably the most famous split-up occurred in the United States in the 1980s. As a result of an antitrust suit brought by the Justice Department, AT&T was forced to split up through the creation of seven regional phone companies (the so-called Baby Bells). Today, the Baby Bells survive as companies such as BellSouth, SBC Communications, and Verizon.
1. What is an equity carve-out? Why might a firm wish to do one?
2. What is a split-up? Why might a firm choose to do one?
23.10 SUMMARY AND CONCLUSIONS
Th is chapter introduced you to the extensive literature on mergers and acquisitions. We touched on a number of issues, including:
1. Form of merger. One firm can acquire another in several different ways. The three legal forms of acquisition are merger and consolidation, acquisition of stock, and acquisition of assets.
2. Tax issues. Mergers and acquisitions can be taxable or tax-free transactions. The primary is- sue is whether the target firm’s shareholders sell or exchange their shares. Generally, a cash purchase is a taxable merger, while a stock exchange is not taxable. In a taxable merger, there are capital gains effects and asset write-up effects to consider. In a stock exchange, the target firm’s shareholders become shareholders in the merged firm.
3. Merger valuation. If Firm A is acquiring Firm B, the benefits (ΔV) from an acquisition are defined as the value of the combined firm (VAB) less the value of the firms as separate entities (VA and VB), or:
ΔV = VAB - (VA + VB) The gain to Firm A from acquiring Firm B is the increased value of the acquired firm (ΔV)
plus the value of B as a separate firm. The total value of Firm B to Firm A, VB*, is thus: VB* = ΔV + VB An acquisition benefits the shareholders of the acquiring firm if this value is greater than the
cost of the acquisition. The cost of an acquisition can be defined in general terms as the price paid to the shareholders of the acquired firm. The cost frequently includes a merger pre- mium paid to the shareholders of the acquired firm. Moreover, the cost depends on the form of payment, that is, the choice between cash or common stock.
equity carve-out The sale of stock in a wholly owned subsidiary via an IPO.
spin-off The distribution of shares in a subsidiary to existing parent company shareholders.
split-up The splitting up of a company into two or more companies.
Concept Questions
CHAPTER 23: Mergers and Acquisitions 679
23Ross_Chapter23_3rd.indd 67923Ross_Chapter23_3rd.indd 679 12-11-28 12:4712-11-28 12:47
4. The possible benefits of an acquisition come from several possible sources, including the following:
a. Revenue enhancement. b. Cost reduction. c. Lower taxes. d. Changing capital requirements. 5. Some of the most colourful language of finance comes from defensive tactics in acquisition
battles. Poison pills, golden parachutes, and greenmail are terms that describe various anti- takeover tactics.
6. Mergers and acquisitions have been extensively studied. The basic conclusions are that, on average, the shareholders of target firms do very well, while the shareholders of bidding firms do not appear to gain anywhere near as much.
Key Terms amalgamations (page 656) circular bid (page 657) consolidation (page 656) control block (page 671) corporate governance (page 670) diversification (page 668) divestiture (page 678) earnings per share (EPS) (page 667) equity carve-out (page 679) going-private transactions (page 658) greenmail (page 671) joint venture (page 659)
leveraged buyouts (LBOs) (page 658) merger (page 656) poison pill (page 672) proxy contests (page 658) shareholder rights plan (page 672) spin-off (page 679) split-up (page 679) stock exchange bid (page 657) strategic alliance (page 659) synergy (page 661) tender offer (page 657)
Chapter Review Problems and Self-Test 23.1 Merger Value and Cost Consider the following information
for two all-equity firms, A and B: Firm A Firm B
Shares outstanding 100 50 Price per share $50 $30
Firm A estimates that the value of the synergistic benefit from acquiring Firm B is $200. Firm B has indicated it would accept a cash purchase offer of $35 per share. Should Firm A proceed?
23.2 Stock Mergers and EPS Consider the following information for two all-equity firms, A and B:
Firm A Firm B
Total earnings $1,000 $400 Shares outstanding 100 80 Price per share $ 80 $ 30
Firm A is acquiring Firm B by exchanging 25 of its shares for all the shares in B. What is the cost of the merger if the merged firm is worth $11,000? What will happen to Firm A’s EPS? Its P/E ratio?
Answers to Self-Test Problems 23.1 The total value of Firm B to Firm A is the pre-merger value of B plus the $200 gain from the merger. The pre-merger value of B is
$30 × 50 = $1,500, so the total value is $1,700. At $35 per share, A is paying $35 × 50 = $1,750; the merger therefore has a negative NPV of -$50. At $35 per share, B is not an attractive merger partner.
23.2 After the merger, the firm would have 125 shares outstanding. Since the total value is $11,000, the price per share is $11,000/125 = $88, up from $80. Since Firm B’s shareholders end up with 25 shares in the merged firm, the cost of the merger is 25 × $88 = $2,200, not 25 × 80 = $2,000. Also, the combined firm has $1,000 + 400 = $1,400 in earnings, so EPS will be $1,400/125 = $11.20, up from $1,000/100 = $10. The old P/E ratio was $80/$10 = 8. The new one is $88/11.20 = $7.86.
Concepts Review and Critical Thinking Questions 1. (LO9) Define each of the following terms: a. Greenmail b. White knight c. Golden parachute d. Crown jewels
e. Corporate raider f. Poison pill g. Tender offer h. Leveraged buyout, or LBO
680 Part 8: Topics in Corporate Finance
23Ross_Chapter23_3rd.indd 68023Ross_Chapter23_3rd.indd 680 12-11-28 12:4712-11-28 12:47
2. (LO4) Explain why diversification per se is probably not a good reason for merger.
3. (LO1) In January 1996, Dun and Bradstreet Corp. announced plans to split into three entities: an information services core to include Moody’s credit-rating agencies, a company that would include the Nielsen media-rating business, and a third entity that would focus on tracking consumer packaged-goods purchases. D&B was not alone, because many companies vol- untarily split up in the 1990s. Why might a firm do this? Is there a possibility of reverse synergy?
4. (LO9) Are poison pills good or bad for shareholders? How do you think acquiring firms are able to get around poison pills?
5. (LO2) Describe the advantages and disadvantages of a tax- able merger as opposed to a tax-free exchange. What is the basic determinant of tax status in a merger? Would an LBO be taxable or non-taxable? Explain.
6. (LO7) What does it mean to say that a proposed merger will take advantage of available economies of scale? Suppose East- ern Power Co. and Western Power Co. are located in different time zones. Both of them operate at 60 percent of capacity ex- cept for peak periods, when they operate at 100 percent of ca-
pacity. The peak periods begin at 9:00 a.m. and 5:00 p.m. local time and last about 45 minutes. Explain why a merger be- tween Eastern and Western might make sense.
7. (LO9) What types of actions might the management of a firm take to fight a hostile acquisition bid from an unwanted suitor? How do the target-firm shareholders benefit from the defensive tactics of their management team? How are the tar- get-firm shareholders harmed by such actions? Explain.
8. (LO7) Suppose a company in which you own stock has at- tracted two takeover offers. Would it ever make sense for your company’s management to favour the lower offer? Does the form of payment affect your answer at all?
9. (LO7) Acquiring-firm shareholders seem to benefit very little from takeovers. Why is this finding a puzzle? What are some of the reasons offered for it?
10. (LO8) What is the difference between an equity carve-out and a spin-off? Why would a corporation choose to do one over the other? Describe a situation where an equity carve-out would be more advantageous than a spin-off. Describe a situ- ation where a spin-off would be more advantageous than an equity carve-out.
Questions and Problems 1. Calculating Synergy (LO7) Roseland Inc. has offered $417 million cash for all of the common stock in Forest Glade
Corporation. Based on recent market information, Forest Glade is worth $376 million as an independent operation. If the merger makes economic sense for Roseland, what is the minimum estimated value of the synergistic benefits from the merger?
2. Calculating synergy (LO7) Tecumseh Inc. is analyzing the possible merger with Devonshire Inc. Savings from the merger are estimated to be a one-time after-tax benefit of $120 million. Devonshire Inc. has 4 million shares outstanding at a current market price of $70 per share. What is the maximum cash price per share that could be paid for Devonshire Inc.?
3. Statements of Financial Position for Mergers (LO3) Consider the following pre-merger information about Firm X and Firm Y: Firm X Firm Y
Total earnings $ 91,000 $ 13,000 Shares outstanding 40,000 15,000 Per-share values: Market $ 54 $ 17 Book $ 14 $ 4
Assume that Firm X acquires Firm Y by paying cash for all the shares outstanding at a merger premium of $6 per share. Assuming that neither firm has any debt before or after the merger, construct the post-merger statement of financial position for Firm X assuming the use of the purchase accounting method.
4. Statements of Financial Position for Mergers (LO3) Assume that the following statements of financial position are stated and a book value. Construct a post-merger statement of financial position assuming that Amherst Co. purchases Essex Inc. and the pooling of interests method of accounting is used.
Amherst Co.
Current assets $12,000 Current liabilities $ 5,300 Net fixed assets 36,000 Long-term debt 9,800
Equity 32,900 Total $48,000 Total $48,000
Essex Inc.
Current assets $3,400 Current liabilities $1,300 Net fixed assets 6,400 Long-term debt 1,900
Equity 6,600 Total $9,800 Total $9,800
5. Incorporating Goodwill (LO3) In the previous problem, suppose the fair market value of Essex’s fixed assets is $9,300 versus the $6,400 book value shown. Amherst pays $16,000 for Essex and raises the needed funds through an issue of long-term debt. Construct the post-merger statement of financial position now, assuming that the purchase method of accounting is used.
Basic (Questions
1–10)
3
CHAPTER 23: Mergers and Acquisitions 681
23Ross_Chapter23_3rd.indd 68123Ross_Chapter23_3rd.indd 681 12-11-28 12:4712-11-28 12:47
6. Statements of Financial Position for Mergers (LO3) Knapps Enterprises has acquired Leamington Corp. in a merger transaction. Construct the statement of financial positionfor the new corporation if the merger is treated as a pooling of interests for accounting purposes. The following statements of financial position represent the pre-merger book values for both firms:
Knapps Enterprises
Current assets $ 4,800 Current liabilities $ 2,800 Other assets 1,200 Long-term debt 7,500 Net fixed assets 15,300 Equity 11,000 Total $ 21,300 Total $ 21,300
Leamington Corp.
Current assets $1,300 Current liabilities $1,350 Other assets 510 Long-term debt 0 Net fixed assets 6,800 Equity 7,260 Total $8,610 Total $8,610
7. Incorporating Goodwill (LO3) In the previous problem, construct the statement of financial position for the new corporation assuming that the transaction is treated as a purchase for accounting purposes. The market value of Leamington’s fixed assets is $8,700; the market values for current and other assets are the same as the book values. Assume that Knapps Enterprises issues $13,000 in new long-term debt to finance the acquisition.
8. Cash versus Stock Payment (LO5) Wheatley Corp. is analyzing the possible acquisition of Romney Company. Both firms have no debt. Wheatley believes the acquisition will increase its total after-tax annual cash flows by $2 million indefinitely. The current market value of Romney is $43 million, and that of Wheatley is $89 million. The appropriate discount rate for the incremental cash flows is 10 percent. Wheatley is trying to decide whether it should offer 40 percent of its stock or $61 million in cash to Romney’s shareholders.
a. What is the cost of each alternative? b. What is the NPV of each alternative? c. Which alternative should Wheatley choose?
9. EPS, PE, and Mergers (LO1) The shareholders of Tilbury Company have voted in favour of a buyout offer from Dover Corporation. Information about each firm is given here:
Tilbury Dover
Price-earnings ratio 13.5 21 Shares outstanding 90,000 210,000 Earnings $180,000 $810,000
Tilbury’s shareholders will receive one share of Dover stock for every three shares they hold in Tilbury. a. What will the EPS of Dover be after the merger? What will the PE ratio be if the NPV of the acquisition is zero? b. What must Dover feel is the value of the synergy between these two firms? Explain how your answer can be reconciled with
the decision to go ahead with the takeover. 10. Cash versus Stock as Payment (LO5) Consider the following pre-merger information about a bidding firm (Firm B) and a
target firm (Firm T). Assume that both firms have no debt outstanding. Firm B Firm T
Shares outstanding 5,400 1,500 Price per share $47 $19
Firm B has estimated that the value of the synergistic benefits from acquiring Firm T is $8,700. a. If Firm T is willing to be acquired for $21 per share in cash, what is the NPV of the merger? b. What will the price per share of the merged firm be, assuming the conditions in (a)? c. In part (a), what is the merger premium? d. Suppose Firm T is agreeable to a merger by an exchange of stock. If B offers one of its shares for every two of T’s shares,
what will the price per share of the merged firm be? e. What is the NPV of the merger assuming the conditions in (d)?
11. Cash versus Stock as Payment (LO5) In Problem 10, are the shareholders of Firm T better off with the cash offer or the stock offer? At what exchange ratio of B shares to T shares would the shareholders in T be indifferent between the two offers?
12. Effects of a Stock Exchange (LO1) Consider the following pre-merger information about Firm A and Firm B: Firm A Firm B
Total earnings $1,400 $600 Shares outstanding 1,000 200 Price per share $ 43 $ 47
6
8
Intermediate (Questions
11–16) 12. E
682 Part 8: Topics in Corporate Finance
23Ross_Chapter23_3rd.indd 68223Ross_Chapter23_3rd.indd 682 12-11-28 12:4712-11-28 12:47
Assume that Firm A acquires Firm B via an exchange of stock at a price of $49 for each share of B’s stock. Both A and B have no debt outstanding.
a. What will the earnings per share (EPS) of Firm A be after the merger? b. What will firm A’s price per share be after the merger if the market incorrectly analyzes this reported earnings growth (that
is, the price-earnings ratio does not change)? c. What will the price-earnings ratio of the post-merger firm be if the market correctly analyzes the transaction? d. If there are no synergy gains, what will the share price of A be after the merger? What will the price-earnings ratio be?
What does your answer for the share price tell you about the amount A bid for B? Was it too high? Too low? Explanation. 13. Merger NPV (LO6) Show that the NPV of a merger can be expressed as the value of the synergistic benefits, ΔV, less the
merger premium. 14. Merger NPV (LO6, 7) Chatham Foods, which has 1 million shares outstanding, wishes to merge with Kent Drinks with
2.5 million shares outstanding. The market prices for Chatham Foods and Kent Drinks are $49 and $18 per share, respectively. The merger could create an estimated savings of $800,000 annually for the indefinite future. If Chatham Foods were willing to pay $25 per share for Kent Drinks, and the appropriate cost of capital is 14 percent, what would be the:
a. Present value of the merger gain? b. Cost of the cash offer? c. NPV of the offer?
15. Merger NPV (LO6, 7) Raleigh Couriers is analyzing the possible acquisition of Harwich Restaurants. Neither firm has debt. The forecasts of Raleigh show that the purchase would increase its annual after-tax cash flow by $350,000 indefinitely. The current market value of Harwich is $9 million. The current market value of Raleigh is $23 million. The appropriate discount rate for the incremental cash flows is 8 percent. Raleigh is trying to decide whether it should offer 25 percent of its stock or $12 million in cash to Harwich.
a. What is the synergy from the merger? b. What is the value of Harwich to Raleigh? c. What is the cost to Raleigh of each alternative? d. What is the NPV to Raleigh of each alternative? e. Which alternative should Raleigh use?
16. Merger NPV (LO5, 7) Blenheim PLC has a market value of $125 million and 5 million shares outstanding. Howard Department Store has a market value of $40 million and 2 million shares outstanding. Blenheim is contemplating acquiring Howard. Blenheim’s CFO concludes that the combined firm with synergy will be worth $185 million, and Howard can be acquired at a premium of $10 million.
a. If Blenheim offers 1.2 million shares of its stock in exchange for the 2 million shares of Howard, what will the stock price of Blenheim be after the acquisition?
b. What exchange ration between the two stocks would make the value of a stock offer equivalent to a cash offer of $50 million?
17. Calculating NPV (LO5, 6, 7) Ridgetown News Inc. is considering making an offer to purchase Orford Publications. The vice president of finance has collected the following information:
Ridgetown Orford
Price–earnings ratio 14.5 9.2 Shares outstanding 1,300,000 175,000 Earnings $3,900,000 $640,000 Dividends 950,000 310,000
Ridgetown also knows that securities analysts expect the earnings and dividends of Orford to grow at a constant rate of 5 percent each year. Ridgetown management believes that the acquisition of Orford will provide the firm with some economies of scale that will increase this growth rate to 7 percent per year.
a. What is the value of Orford to Ridgetown? b. What would Ridgetown’s gain be from this acquisition? c. If Ridgetown were to offer $38 in cash for each share of Orford, what would the NPV of the acquisition be? d. What’s the most Ridgetown should be willing to pay in cash per share for the stock of Orford? e. If Ridgetown were to offer 100,000 of its shares in exchange for the outstanding stock of Orford, what would the NPV be? f. Should the acquisition be attempted? If so, should it be as in (c) or as in (e)? g. Ridgetown’s outside financial consultants think that the 7 percent growth rate is too optimistic and a 6 percent rate is more
realistic. How does this change your previous answers?
Challenge (Question
17)
CHAPTER 23: Mergers and Acquisitions 683
23Ross_Chapter23_3rd.indd 68323Ross_Chapter23_3rd.indd 683 12-11-28 12:4712-11-28 12:47
The Elgin Golf–Dutton Golf Merger
Elgin Golf Inc. has been in merger talks with Dutton Golf Company for the past six months. After several rounds of ne- gotiations, the offer under discussion is a cash offer of $550 million for Dutton Golf. Both companies have niche markets in the golf club industry, and both believe that a merger will re- sult in synergies due to economies of scale in manufacturing and marketing, as well as significant savings in general and administrative expenses. Bruce Wayne, the financial officer for Elgin, has been in- strumental in the merger negotiations. Bruce has prepared the following pro forma financial statements for Dutton Golf as- suming the merger takes place. The financial statements in- clude all synergistic benefits from the merger.
If Elgin Golf buys Dutton Golf, an immediate dividend of $75 million would be paid from Dutton Golf to Elgin. Stock in Elgin Golf currently sells for $94 per share, and the company has 18 million shares of stock outstanding. Dutton Golf has 8 million shares of stock outstanding. Both companies can
borrow at an 8 percent interest rate. Bruce believes the cur- rent cost of capital for Elgin Golf is 11 percent. The cost of capital for Dutton Golf is 12.4 percent, and the cost of equity is 16.9 percent. In five years, the value of Dutton Golf is ex- pected to be $300 million. Bruce has asked you to analyze the financial aspects of the potential merger. Specifically, he has asked you to answer the following questions: 1. Suppose Dutton shareholders will agree to a merger price
of $43.75 per share. Should Elgin proceed with the merger?
2. What is the highest price per share that Elgin should be willing to pay for Dutton?
3. Suppose Elgin is unwilling to pay cash for the merger but will consider a stock exchange. What exchange rate would make the merger terms equivalent to the original merger price of $43.75 per share?
4. What is the highest exchange ratio Elgin should be will- ing to pay and still undertake the merger?
2013 2014 2015 2016 2017
Sales $ 400,000,000 $ 450,000,000 $ 500,000,000 $ 565,000,000 $ 625,000,000 Production costs 276,000,000 315,000,000 350,000,000 395,000,000 437,000,000 Depreciation 40,000,000 45,000,000 50,000,000 57,000,000 62,000,000 Other expenses 37,000,000 40,000,000 41,000,000 42,000,000 43,000,000 EBIT $ 47,000,000 $ 50,000,000 $ 59,000,000 $ 71,000,000 $ 83,000,000 Interest 9,500,000 11,000,000 12,000,000 12,500,000 13,500,000 Taxable income $ 37,500,000 $ 39,000,000 $ 47,000,000 $ 58,500,000 $ 69,500,000 Taxes (40%) 15,000,000 15,600,000 18,800,000 23,400,000 27,800,000 Net income $ 22,500,000 $ 23,400,000 $ 28,200,000 $ 35,100,000 $ 41,700,000 Additions to retained earnings 0 $ 17,000,000 $ 13,000,000 $ 13,000,000 $ 12,000,000
MINI CASE
Internet Application Questions 1. The Competition Bureau (competitionbureau.gc.ca) in Canada reviews all mergers for approval. Its main concern is whether a
proposed merger is likely to reduce competition. In this regard, it has set guidelines that allow investors and firms to determine whether a proposed merger passes the Competition Bureau’s test. These guidelines are explained in the link below. laws.justice.gc.ca/eng/acts/C-34/index.html
Use the guidelines described above to make your own evaluation of the efficacy of the following mergers: a. A vertical merger involving a timber mill and a pulp producer, and a conglomerate merger involving a liquor company and
a film studio. b. Rio Tinto’s bid to acquire Alcan (riotintoalcan.com). c. What is the Efficiency Exception principle in evaluating mergers?
684 Part 8: Topics in Corporate Finance
23Ross_Chapter23_3rd.indd 68423Ross_Chapter23_3rd.indd 684 12-11-28 12:4712-11-28 12:47
All businesses face risks of many types. Some, such as unexpected cost increases, may be obvious, while others, such as disasters caused by human error, are not. Enterprise risk manage- ment (ERM) is the process of identifying and assessing risks and, where fi nancially sensible, seek- ing to mitigate potential damage. Companies have always taken steps to manage risks. Th e change in recent years has been more to view risk management as a holistic, integrated exercise rather than something to be done on a piecewise basis. Th ere is much greater awareness of the variety, complexity, and interactions of risks at the company-wide level. In fact, as the benefi ts from ERM have become increasingly clear, many companies have created a new “c-level” executive position, the Chief Risk Offi cer (CRO).
Broadly speaking, risks fall into four types. First, hazard risks involve damage done by outside forces such as natural disasters, theft , and lawsuits. Second, fi nancial risks arise from such things as adverse exchange rate changes, commodity price fl uctuations, and interest rate movements. Th ird, operational risks encompass impairments or disruptions in operations from a wide vari- ety of business-related sources including human resources; product development, distribution, and marketing; and supply chain management. Finally, strategic risks include large-scale issues such as competition, changing customer needs, social and demographic changes, regulatory and political trends, and technological innovation. Another important strategic risk is damage done to company reputation from product problems, fraud, or other unfavourable publicity.
One important aspect of ERM is to view risks in the context of the entire company. A risk that damages one division of a company might benefi t another such that they more or less off set each other. In this case, mitigating the risk in one division makes the overall company worse off .
telus.com
ENTERPRISE RISK MANAGEMENT
C H A P T E R 2 4
T ELUS is a leading telecommunications com-pany in Canada, with $10.4 billion of revenue and 12.73 million customer connections in 2011.
The company provides a wide range of communica-
tion products and services. In its 2011 annual report,
TELUS reported that it took positions in foreign cur-
rency forward contracts and currency options to lock
in the exchange rates on U.S. dollar denominated
transactions. TELUS also uses cross-currency interest
rate swaps to hedge interest rate fluctuations and
share-based compensation derivatives to hedge its
price risk from cash-settled, share-based compensa-
tion. TELUS has various risk management financial
instruments in place to manage its credit, liquidity,
and market risks. As we will see in this chapter, these
techniques are among the tools commonly used by
firms to manage risk.
Learning Object ives
After studying this chapter, you should understand:
LO1 The use of insurance as a risk-management tool.
LO2 The sources of financial risk.
LO3 How to identify specific financial risks faced by firms.
LO4 The basics of hedging with forward contracts and futures.
LO5 The basics of hedging with swaps and options.
P A R T 9
C ou
rt es
y of
T EL
U S
24Ross_Chapter24_3rd.indd 68524Ross_Chapter24_3rd.indd 685 12-11-28 12:5112-11-28 12:51
For example, consider a vertically integrated oil company in which one division drills for oil and another refi nes it. An increase in oil prices benefi ts the driller and harms the refi ner, but taken together, there may be little or no overall impact on the company’s cash fl ows. Similarly, for a multinational with operations in many countries, exchange rate fl uctuations may have limited impact at the overall company level. Another thing to recognize is that not all the risks are worth eliminating. It is important to prioritize and identify risks that have the greatest potential for economic and social harm.
For all fi rms, risk management begins with prevention. Taking steps to promote things like product safety and accident avoidance are obviously very important, but they are likely to be very company-specifi c and thus hard to discuss in general terms. Prevention is also more of an operat- ing activity than a fi nancial activity. However, certain types of fi nancial instruments are used by companies of all types to manage and mitigate risk, particularly fi nancial and hazard risk, and these will be the primary focus of our chapter.
24.1 Insurance
Insurance is the most widely used risk-management tool. It is generally employed to protect against hazard risks. Insurance can be used to provide protection against losses due to damage to a fi rm’s property and any associated loss of income. It also protects against liabilities that may arise as a result of interactions with third parties. For example, like individuals, companies will usually carry property insurance to protect against large-scale losses due to hazards ranging from fi re to storm damage. Other types of insurance commonly purchased include:
• Commercial liability insurance protects against costs that can occur because of damages to others caused by the company’s products, operations, or employees.
• Business interruption insurance protects against the loss of earnings if business operations are interrupted by an insured event such as fi re or natural disaster.
• Key personnel insurance protects against losses due to loss of critical employees. • Workers’ compensation and employer’s liability insurance protects against costs a fi rm is
required to pay in connection with work-related injuries sustained by its employees. It is important that companies and their risk managers fully understand the policy limits, con-
ditions, and perils covered by the insurance policies they purchase. For example, losses due to earthquakes, fl ooding, and terrorism are typically excluded from standard commercial property policies. Firms wishing coverage for these perils must make special arrangements with their insur- ers. Firms must also abide by policy conditions; for instance, policies oft en require the insurer to be notifi ed of any loss in a timely manner. A risk manager does not want to become familiar with a fi rm’s insurance policy exclusions aft er a loss occurs. Whether to purchase insurance is, at least in principle, a straightforward NPV question. Th e insurance premium is the cost. Th e benefi t is the present value of the expected payout by the insurance company to the fi rm. For example, imagine a fi rm has a key production facility. Th ere is a small chance, say 1-in-10,000 (or 0.01 percent) that the facility will be destroyed by fi re or natural disaster in the next year. Th e cost to the fi rm to rebuild plus any lost profi ts would be $200 million if that occurs. Th us, the fi rm either loses $0 or $200 million. Its expected loss is:
Expected loss = 0.9999 × $0 + 0.0001 × $200 million = $20,000
Of course, if the fi rm could eliminate the possibility of loss for the present value of $20,000 (or less), it would do so. But assuming that the cost of completely eliminating the risk (if that is even technologically possible) is greater than the present value of $20,000, the fi rm can purchase insurance.
Th e fi rm’s decision to purchase insurance or what types of insurance a fi rm decides to pur- chase depends on the nature of the fi rm’s business, the size of the fi rm, the fi rm’s risk aversion, as well as legal and third-party requirements that may demand proof of insurance. Large fi rms will oft en forego insurance against less costly events, opting to ‘self-insure’. When looking across all of the smaller risks faced by a big fi rm, it can be less expensive to sustain a certain loss rate than to pay the insurance premium. Alternatively, fi rms may opt to purchase insurance with large deductibles, meaning the fi rm will cover losses up to some level before the insurance kicks in. Th is approach protects the fi rm from truly catastrophic losses.
686 Part 9: Derivative Securities and Corporate Finance
24Ross_Chapter24_3rd.indd 68624Ross_Chapter24_3rd.indd 686 12-11-28 12:5112-11-28 12:51
1. What are some basic types of insurance purchased by companies?
2. What does it mean for a company to self-insure?
24.2 Managing Financial Risk
Purchasing insurance is one way to manage risk, particularly hazard risk. Managing fi nancial risk is oft en handled by fi rms without the assistance of insurance companies. In the remainder of this chapter, we discuss ways fi rms reduce their exposure to price and rate fl uctuations, a pro- cess known as hedging. Th e term immunization is sometimes used as well. As we will discuss, there are many diff erent types of hedging and many diff erent techniques. Frequently, when a fi rm desires to hedge a particular risk, there will be no direct way of doing so. Th e fi nancial manager’s job in such cases is to create a way by using available fi nancial instruments to create new ones. Th is process has come to be called fi nancial engineering.
Financial risk management oft en involves the buying and selling of derivative securities. A derivative security is a fi nancial asset that represents a claim to another fi nancial asset. For exam- ple, a stock option gives the owner the right to buy or sell stock, a fi nancial asset, so stock options are derivative securities. Financial engineering frequently involves creating new derivative secur- ities, or else combining existing derivatives to accomplish specifi c hedging goals.
To eff ectively manage fi nancial risk, fi nancial managers need to identify the types of price fl uc- tuations that have the greatest impact on the value of the fi rm. Sometimes these will be obvious, but sometimes they will not be. For example, consider a forest products company. If interest rates increase, then its borrowing costs will clearly rise. Beyond this, however, the demand for housing typically declines as interest rates rise. As housing demand falls, so does demand for lumber. An increase in interest rates thus leads to increased fi nancing costs and, at the same time, decreased revenues.
The Impact of Financial Risk: The Credit Cris is of 2007–2009 Th e greatest credit crisis since the Great Depression of the 1930s started in the U.S. housing mar- ket and spread around the world. Aft er recovering from the collapse of the dot-com bubble, the U.S. economy enjoyed a period of low interest rates and easy access to fi nancing. Optimistic about growth and eager to obtain higher returns, investors and fi nancial institutions took on increased credit and liquidity risks. Expansion of the U.S. mortgage market resulted.
Financial markets provided a favourable setting for fi nancial engineering focused on credit risk in the form of structured securitization products. One example is the growth and seizure of the Canadian market for asset-backed commercial paper.
Th e confi dence of investors in the U.S. and globally was also shaken by the collapse and rescue of several fi nancial institutions in the U.K. and U.S. in early 2008. Panic resulted in the fall of 2008 when Lehman Brothers was allowed to fail. At the time of its collapse and bankruptcy fi ling, Lehman Brothers was the fourth-largest U.S. investment bank and largest bankruptcy fi ling to that point in time. Lehman’s collapse greatly intensifi ed the 2008 credit crisis and contributed to the evaporation of nearly US$10 trillion in market capitalization from global equity markets in October 2008.
Th e credit crisis led to a global recession and the implementation of bailout packages tally- ing in the billions. Governments around the world have since implemented an ambitious set of changes to fi nancial institution regulation aimed at controlling excessive risk taking. At the time of writing in August 2012, the European fi nancial crisis continues and it still remains to be seen how eff ective the new regulations will be.
Concept Questions
hedging Reducing a firm’s exposure to price or rate fluctuations. Also, immunization.
derivative security A financial asset that represents a claim to another financial asset.
Chapter 24: Enterprise Risk Management 687
24Ross_Chapter24_3rd.indd 68724Ross_Chapter24_3rd.indd 687 12-11-28 12:5112-11-28 12:51
The Risk Profi le Th e basic tool for identifying and measuring a fi rm’s exposure to fi nancial risk is the risk profi le. Th e risk profi le is a plot showing the relationship between changes in the price of some good, ser- vice, or rate and changes in the value of the fi rm. Constructing a risk profi le is conceptually very similar to performing a sensitivity analysis (described in Chapter 11).
To illustrate, consider an agricultural products company that has a large-scale wheat-farming operation. Because wheat prices can be very volatile, we might wish to investigate the fi rm’s expo- sure to wheat price fl uctuations, that is, its risk profi le with regard to wheat prices. To do this, we plot changes in the value of the fi rm (ΔV) versus unexpected changes in wheat prices (ΔPwheat). Figure 24.1 shows the result.
FIGURE 24.1
Risk profile for a wheat grower
�V
Risk profile
�Pwheat
For a grower, unexpected increases in wheat prices increase the value of the firm.
Th e risk profi le in Figure 24.1 tells us two things. First, because the line slopes up, increases in wheat prices will increase the value of the fi rm. Because wheat is an output, this comes as no sur- prise. Second, because the line has a fairly steep slope, this fi rm has a signifi cant exposure to wheat price fl uctuations, and it may wish to take steps to reduce that exposure.
Reducing Risk Exposure Fluctuations in the price of any particular good or service can have very diff erent eff ects on diff er- ent types of fi rms. Going back to wheat prices, we now consider the case of a food processing oper- ation. Th e food processor buys large quantities of wheat and has a risk profi le like that illustrated in Figure 24.2. As with the agricultural products fi rm, the value of this fi rm is sensitive to wheat prices, but, because wheat is an input, increases in wheat prices lead to decreases in fi rm value.
Both the agricultural products fi rm and the food processor are exposed to wheat price fl uctua- tions, but any fl uctuations have opposite eff ects for the two fi rms. If these two fi rms get together, then much of the risk can be eliminated. Th e grower and the processor can simply agree that, at set dates in the future, the grower will deliver a certain quantity of wheat, and the processor will pay a set price. Once the agreement is signed, both fi rms will have locked in the price of wheat for as long as the contract is in eff ect, and both of their risk profi les with regard to wheat prices will be completely fl at during that time.
risk profile A plot showing how the value of the firm is affected by changes in prices or rates.
688 Part 9: Derivative Securities and Corporate Finance
24Ross_Chapter24_3rd.indd 68824Ross_Chapter24_3rd.indd 688 12-11-28 12:5112-11-28 12:51
FIGURE 24.2
Risk profile for a wheat buyer
Risk profile
�Pwheat
For a buyer, unexpected increases in wheat prices decrease the value of the firm.
�V
We should note that, in reality, a fi rm that hedges fi nancial risk usually wouldn’t be able to create a completely fl at risk profi le. For example, our wheat grower doesn’t actually know what the size of the crop will be ahead of time. If the crop is larger than expected, then some portion of the crop will be unhedged. If the crop is small, then the grower will have to buy more to fulfi ll the contract and will thereby be exposed to the risk of price changes. Either way, there is some exposure to wheat price fl uctuations, but that exposure is sharply reduced by hedging.
Th ere are a number of other reasons why perfect hedging is usually impossible, but this is not really a problem. With most fi nancial risk management, the goal is to reduce the risk to more bearable levels and thereby fl atten out the risk profi le, not necessarily to eliminate the risk altogether.
In thinking about fi nancial risk, there is an important distinction to be made. Price fl uctua- tions have two components. Short-run, essentially temporary changes are the fi rst component. Th e second component has to do with more long-run, essentially permanent changes. As we discuss next, these two types of changes have very diff erent implications for the fi rm.
Hedging Short-Run Exposure Short-run, temporary changes in prices result from unforeseen events or shocks. Some examples are sudden increases in orange juice prices because of a late Florida freeze, increases in oil prices because of political turmoil, and increases in lumber prices because available supplies are low fol- lowing a hurricane. Price fl uctuations of this sort are oft en called transitory changes.
Short-run price changes can drive a business into fi nancial distress even though, in the long run, the business is fundamentally sound. Th is happens when a fi rm fi nds itself with sudden cost increases that it cannot pass on to its customers immediately. A negative cash fl ow position is cre- ated, and the fi rm may be unable to meet its fi nancial obligations.
For example, wheat crops might be much larger than expected in a particular year because of unusually good growing conditions. At harvest time, wheat prices will be unexpectedly low. By that time, a wheat farmer will have already incurred most of the costs of production. If prices drop too low, revenues from the crop will be insuffi cient to cover the costs, and fi nancial distress may result.
Short-run fi nancial risk is oft en called transactions exposure. Th is name stems from the fact that short-term fi nancial exposure typically arises because a fi rm must make transactions in the near future at uncertain prices or rates. With our wheat farmer, for example, the crop must be sold at the end of the harvest, but the wheat price is uncertain. Alternatively, a fi rm may have a bond issue that will mature next year that it will need to replace, but the interest rate that the fi rm will have to pay is not known.
transactions exposure Short-run financial risk arising from the need to buy or sell at uncertain prices or rates in the near future.
Chapter 24: Enterprise Risk Management 689
24Ross_Chapter24_3rd.indd 68924Ross_Chapter24_3rd.indd 689 12-11-28 12:5112-11-28 12:51
As we will see, short-run fi nancial risk can be managed in a variety of ways. Th e opportunities for short-term hedging have grown tremendously in recent years, and fi rms in Canada and the United States are increasingly hedging away transitory price changes.
Cash Flow Hedging: A Cautionary Note One thing to notice is that, in our discussion thus far, we have talked conceptually about hedging the value of the fi rm. In our example concerning wheat prices, however, what is really hedged is the fi rm’s near-term cash fl ow. In fact, at the risk of ignoring some subtleties, we will say that hedging short-term fi nancial exposure, hedging transactions exposure, and hedging near-term cash fl ows amount to much the same thing.
It will usually be the case that directly hedging the value of the fi rm is not really feasible, and, instead, the fi rm will try to reduce the uncertainty of its near-term cash fl ows. If the fi rm is thereby able to avoid expensive disruptions, then cash fl ow hedging will act to hedge the value of the fi rm, but the linkage is indirect. In such cases, care must be taken to ensure that the cash fl ow hedging does have the desired eff ect.
For example, imagine a vertically integrated fi rm with an oil-producing division and a gaso- line-retailing division. Both divisions are aff ected by fl uctuations in oil prices. However, it may well be that the fi rm as a whole has very little transactions exposure because any transitory shift s in oil prices simply benefi t one division and cost the other. Th e overall fi rm’s risk profi le with regard to oil prices is essentially fl at. Put another way, the fi rm’s net exposure is small. If one division, acting on its own, were to begin hedging its cash fl ows, then the fi rm as a whole would suddenly be exposed to fi nancial risk. Th e point is that cash fl ow hedging should not be done in isolation. Instead, a fi rm needs to worry about its net exposure. As a result, any hedging activities should probably be done on a centralized, or at least cooperative, basis.
Hedging Long-Term Exposure Price fl uctuations can also be longer-run, more permanent changes. Th ese result from funda- mental shift s in the underlying economics of a business. If improvements in agricultural tech- nology come about, for example, then wheat prices will permanently decline (in the absence of agricultural price subsidies!). If a fi rm is unable to adapt to the new technology, then it will not be economically viable over the long run.
A fi rm’s exposure to long-run fi nancial risks is oft en called its economic exposure. Because long-term exposure is rooted in fundamental economic forces, it is much more diffi cult, if not impossible, to hedge on a permanent basis. For example, is it possible that a wheat farmer and a food processor could permanently eliminate exposure to wheat price fl uctuations by agreeing on a fi xed price forever?
Th e answer is no, and, in fact, the eff ect of such an agreement might even be the opposite of the one desired. Th e reason is that if, over the long run, wheat prices were to change on a permanent basis, one party to this agreement would ultimately be unable to honour it. Either the buyer would be paying too much, or the seller would be receiving too little. In either case, the loser would become uncompetitive and be forced to take political and legal action to reopen the contract. Th is happened in Canada with the long-term agreement by the province of Newfoundland to sell power from Churchill Falls to Hydro Quebec. When prices rose in the 1990s, the contract was renegotiated.
Conclusion In the long run, a business is either economically viable or it will fail. No amount of hedging can change this simple fact. Nonetheless, by hedging over the near term, a fi rm gives itself time to adjust its operations and thereby adapt to new conditions without expensive disruptions. So, drawing our discussion in this section together, we can say that, by managing fi nancial risks, the fi rm can accomplish two important things. Th e fi rst is that the fi rm insulates itself from otherwise troublesome transitory price fl uctuations. Th e second is that the fi rm gives itself a little breathing room to adapt to fundamental changes in market conditions.
economic exposure Long-term financial risk arising from permanent changes in prices or other economic fundamentals.
690 Part 9: Derivative Securities and Corporate Finance
24Ross_Chapter24_3rd.indd 69024Ross_Chapter24_3rd.indd 690 12-11-28 12:5112-11-28 12:51
1. What is a risk profile? Describe the risk profiles with regard to oil prices for an oil producer and a gasoline retailer.
2. What can a firm accomplish by hedging financial risk?
24.3 Hedging with Forward Contracts
Forward contracts are among the oldest and most basic tools for managing fi nancial risk. Our goal in this section is to describe forward contracts and discuss how they are used to hedge fi nancial risk.
Forward Contracts: The Basics A forward contract is a legally binding agreement between two parties calling for the sale of an asset or product in the future at a price agreed upon today. Forward contracts are traded over the counter. Th e terms of the contract call for one party to deliver the goods to the other on a certain date in the future, called the settlement date. Th e other party pays the previously agreed-upon forward price and takes the goods. Looking back, note that the agreement we discussed between the wheat grower and the food processor was, in fact, a forward contract.
Forward contracts can be bought and sold. Th e buyer of a forward contract has the obligation to take delivery and pay for the goods; the seller has the obligation to make delivery and accept payment. Th e buyer of a forward contract benefi ts if prices increase because the buyer will have locked in a lower price. Similarly, the seller wins if prices fall because a higher selling price has been locked in. Note that one party to a forward contract can win only at the expense of the other, so a forward contract is a zero-sum game.
The Payoff Profi le Th e payoff profi le is the key to understanding how forward contracts and other contracts that we discuss later are used to hedge fi nancial risks. In general, a payoff profi le is a plot showing the gains and losses on a contract that result from unexpected price changes. For example, suppose we were examining a forward contract on oil. Based on our discussion, the buyer of the forward contract is obligated to accept delivery of a specifi ed quantity of oil at a future date and pay a set price. Part A of Figure 24.3 shows the resulting payoff profi le on the forward contract from the buyer’s perspective.
FIGURE 24.3
Payoff profiles for a forward contract �V
B. Seller’s perspective
�Poil
Payoff profile
�V
Payoff profile
A. Buyer’s perspective
�Poil
Concept Questions
forward contract A legally binding agreement between two parties calling for the sale of an asset or product in the future at a price agreed upon today.
payoff profile A plot showing the gains and losses that will occur on a contract as the result of unexpected price changes.
Chapter 24: Enterprise Risk Management 691
24Ross_Chapter24_3rd.indd 69124Ross_Chapter24_3rd.indd 691 12-11-28 12:5112-11-28 12:51
Figure 24.3 shows that, as oil prices increase, the buyer of the forward contract benefi ts by having locked in a lower-than-market price. If oil prices decrease, then the buyer loses because that buyer ends up paying a higher-than-market price. For the seller of the forward contract, things are sim- ply reversed. Th e payoff profi le of the seller is illustrated in Part B of Figure 24.3.
Hedging with Forwards To illustrate how forward contracts can be used to hedge, we consider the case of a utility that uses oil to generate power. Th e prices that our utility can charge are regulated and cannot be changed rapidly. As a result, sudden increases in oil prices are a source of fi nancial risk. Th e utility’s risk profi le is illustrated in Figure 24.4.
FIGURE 24.4
Risk profile for an oil buyer
�Poil
�V
Risk profile
If we compare the risk profi le in Figure 24.4 to the buyer’s payoff profi le on a forward contract shown in Figure 24.3, we see what the utility needs to do. Th e payoff profi le for the buyer of a forward contract on oil is exactly the opposite of the utility’s risk profi le with respect to oil. If the utility buys a forward contract, its exposure to unexpected changes in oil prices will be eliminated. Th is result is shown in Figure 24.5.
FIGURE 24.5
Hedging with forward contracts
Risk profile
�Poil
�V
Payoff profile for forward contract
Resulting exposure
692 Part 9: Derivative Securities and Corporate Finance
24Ross_Chapter24_3rd.indd 69224Ross_Chapter24_3rd.indd 692 12-11-28 12:5112-11-28 12:51
Our utility example illustrates the fundamental approach to managing fi nancial risk. We fi rst identify the fi rm’s exposure to fi nancial risk using a risk profi le. We then try to fi nd a fi nancial arrangement, such as a forward contract, that has an off setting payoff profi le.
A CAVEAT Figure 24.5 shows that the utility’s net exposure to oil price fluctuations is zero. If oil prices rise, then the gains on the forward contract will offset the damage from increased costs. However, if oil prices decline, the benefit from lower costs will be offset by losses on the forward contract.
For example, in July 2010 Calgary based Encana Corp., one of North America’s largest natural gas producers, suff ered a US$505 million foreign exchange and hedging loss. Due to unexpected weakness in the price of natural gas, the price hedges of the company that covered around 60 per- cent of its production were set 50 percent higher than the benchmark natural gas prices resulting in a signifi cant loss to Encana.
Th is example illustrates an important thing to remember about hedging with forward contracts. Price fl uctuations can be good or bad, depending on which way they go. If we hedge with forward contracts, we do eliminate the risk associated with an adverse price change. However, we also eliminate the potential gain from a favourable move. You might wonder if we couldn’t somehow just hedge against unfavourable moves. We can, and we describe how in a subsequent section.
CREDIT RISK Another important thing to remember is that with a forward contract, no money changes hands when the contract is initiated. The contract is simply an agreement to trans- act in the future, so there is no up-front cost to the contract. However, because a forward contract is a financial obligation, there is credit risk. When the settlement date arrives, the party on the los- ing end of the contract has a significant incentive to default on the agreement. As we discuss in the next section, a variation on the forward contract exists that greatly diminishes this risk.
FORWARD CONTRACTS IN PRACTICE Where are forward contracts commonly used to hedge? Because exchange rate fluctuations can have disastrous consequences for firms that have significant import or export operations, forward contracts are routinely used by such firms to hedge exchange rate risk. For example, Jaguar, the U.K. auto manufacturer, historically hedged the U.S. dollar–British pound exchange rate for six months into the future. (The subject of exchange rate hedging with forward contracts is discussed in greater detail in Chapter 21.)
Another good example of hedging with forward contracts is the Forward Sales Program that Barrick Gold Corporation used to use. When the program was in full use, Barrick would commit to sell a fi xed number of ounces of gold at a future date established by the company over a period of between 10 and 15 years. Th e contract provided for a premium above the current spot rates based on the diff erence between the market LIBOR rates and the gold lease rates.1 Between 1991 and 2002, Barrick claimed to have secured additional revenue of $2.2 billion using the program. If gold prices rose above the contract price, Barrick would choose to sell into the spot market to maximize revenue. Th e long contract term and the fl exibility in choosing a delivery date reduce the risks associated with forward contracts. Two problems can occur, however, that would nega- tively impact the returns associated with hedging. First, a situation of “backwardation” in which the gold lease rates are higher than short-term interest rates can occur. In this situation, forward prices under the program would be lower than spot prices, resulting in a negative premium. Sec- ond, gold prices could rise to the point where the contract expires and the gold must be delivered at a rate less than market prices. When this occurred in 2004 and 2005, pressure on management from shareholders led to a reduction in the use of the Forward Sales Program, and Barrick Gold pledged to eventually reduce the hedge book to zero.
1. What is a forward contract? Describe the payoff profiles for the buyer and the seller of a forward contract.
2. Explain how a firm can alter its risk profile using forward contracts.
1 The gold lease rate is the fee charged by a central bank to a gold bullion dealer that borrows gold from the central bank.
jaguar.com
Concept Questions
Chapter 24: Enterprise Risk Management 693
24Ross_Chapter24_3rd.indd 69324Ross_Chapter24_3rd.indd 693 12-11-28 12:5112-11-28 12:51
24.4 Hedging with Futures Contracts
A futures contract is exactly the same as a forward contract with one exception. With a forward contract, the buyer and seller realize gains or losses only on the settlement date. With a futures contract, gains and losses are realized on a daily basis. If we buy a futures contract on oil, then, if oil prices rise today, we have a profi t and the seller of the contract has a loss. Th e seller pays up, and we start again tomorrow with neither party owing the other.
Th e daily settlement feature found in futures contracts is called marking-to-market. As we mentioned earlier, there is a signifi cant risk of default with forward contracts. With daily mark- ing-to-market, this risk is greatly reduced. Th is is probably why organized trading is much more common in futures contracts than in forward contracts (outside of international trade).
Trading in Futures In Canada and elsewhere around the world, futures contracts for a remarkable variety of items are routinely bought and sold. Th e types of contracts available are traditionally divided into two groups, commodity futures and fi nancial futures. With a fi nancial future, the underlying goods are fi nancial assets such as stocks, bonds, or currencies. With a commodity future, the underlying goods can be just about anything other than a fi nancial asset.
Th ere are commodity futures contracts on a wide variety of agricultural products such as canola, corn, orange juice, and, yes, pork bellies. Th ere is even a contract on fertilizer. Th ere are commodity contracts on precious metals such as gold and silver, and there are contracts on basic goods such as copper and lumber. Th ere are contracts on various petroleum products such as crude oil, heating oil, and gasoline.
Wherever there is price volatility, there may be a demand for a futures contract, and new futures contracts are introduced on a fairly regular basis. For example, by some estimates, the potential value of wholesale trade in electricity in the United States is more than $100 billion a year, dwarfi ng the market for many other commodities such as gold, copper, wheat, and corn. Electricity pro- ducers, who own generating capacity, are “long” large quantities of the commodity. As the market develops, new futures contracts will allow energy producers and (large) consumers to hedge their transactions in electricity. Whether such contracts will be successful remains to be seen. Many new contracts don’t pan out because there is not enough volume; such contracts are simply discontinued.
It is even possible to have derivatives that are not linked to prices. Th e Chicago Mercantile Exchange has introduced weather futures for which the underlying is the number of snow days in a winter. Bombardier, the Canadian multinational manufacturer of Ski-Doo® snowmobiles, is using such snow derivatives to hedge its cash back promise to customers if there is no snow.2 In 2012, Th e North American Derivatives Exchange sought to off er contracts tied to the results of the 2012 U.S. presidential elections and whether Democrats or Republicans would control the U.S. House, Senate, and White House. However, the Commodity Futures Trading Commission (CFTC) was quick in issuing an order to prohibit the North American Derivatives Exchange from introducing “political event contracts”.
Futures Exchanges Th ere are a number of futures exchanges in the United States and elsewhere, and more are being estab- lished. Th e Chicago Board of Trade (CBT) is among the largest. Other notable exchanges include the Chicago Mercantile Exchange (CME), the International Money Market (IMM), the New York Futures Exchange (NYFE), a part of the NYSE, ICE Futures Canada, and the Montreal Exchange (ME).
Figure 24.6 gives a sample of selected futures contracts. Taking a look at the canola contracts, note that the contracts trade on ICE Futures Canada, one contract calls for the delivery of 20 met- ric tonnes of canola, and prices are quoted in Canadian dollars per metric tonne. Th e months in which the contracts mature are given in the fi rst column.
2 C. Smith, “Weather derivatives: An enormous potential,” Financial Times, Derivatives Survey, June 28, 2000, p. vi.
futures contract A forward contract with the feature that gains and losses are realized each day rather than only on the settlement date.
cmegroup.com bombardier.com
694 Part 9: Derivative Securities and Corporate Finance
24Ross_Chapter24_3rd.indd 69424Ross_Chapter24_3rd.indd 694 12-11-28 12:5112-11-28 12:51
FIGURE 24.6
Future prices (June 20, 2012)
Commodity Futures Price Quotes For Canadian Dollar (Globex) (Price quotes for CME Canadian Dollar (Globex) delayed at least 10 minutes as per exchange requirements.)
Also available: pit. Session Quotes
Click for Chart
Current Session Prior Day
Opt’sOpen High Low Last Time Set Chg Vol Set Op Int
Sep’12 0.98030 0.08240 0.97880 0.97950 09:04 Jun 20
- -0.00100 28701 0.98050 88140 Call Put
Dec’12 0.97820 0.9800 0.97770 0.97810 09:04 Jun 20
- -0.00070 16 0.97880 6378 Call Put
Mar’13 - - - 0.97750* 09:04 Jun 20
- - 0.97700 1435 Call Put
Jun’13 0.97610 0.97610 0.97610 0.97610 09:00 Jun 20
- 0.00080 1 0.97530 311 Call Put
Sep’13 - - - 0.97350* 09:00 Jun 20
- - - 0.97350 44 Call Put
Times indicate exchange local time. *An asterisk beside the last price indicates that the price is from a previous session.
Commodity Futures Price Quotes For Canola (Price quotes for ICE (WCE) Canola delayed at least 10 minutes as per exchange requirements.)
Click for Chart
Current Session Prior Day
Opt’sOpen High Low Last Time Set Chg Vol Set Op Int
Jul’12 621.40 623.90 615.70 619.00 08:57 Jun 20
- -2.20 6807 621.20 27818 Call Put
Nov’12 580.50 584.40 576.10 579.70 08:57 Jun 20
- -1.80 16426 581.50 142827 Call Put
Jan’13 583.90 587.40 580.60 582.30 08:57 Jun 20
- -2.70 1416 585.00 23824 Call Put
Mar’13 587.80 590.40 582.40 586.00 08:57 Jun 20
- -2.20 1984 588.20 11300 Call Put
May’13 588.00 591.00 582.60 587.70 09:04 Jun 20
- -0.70 2983 588.40 8682 Call Put
Jul’13 591.70 592.10 586.70 589.10 09:04 Jun 20
- -0.10 1065 589.20 2664 Call Put
Nov’13 - - - 550.00* 07:23 Jun 20
- - 64 550.00 769 Call Put
Jan’14 - - - 550.00* 19:00 Jun 19
- - 0 550.00 0 Call Put
Mar’14 - - - 550.00* 14:05 Jun 18
- - 0 550.00 0 Call Put
May’14 - - - 550.00* 14:05 Jun 18
- - 0 550.00 0 Call Put
Jul’14 - - - 550.00* 14:05 Jun 18
- - 0 550.00 0 Call Put
Times indicate exchange local time. *An asterisk beside the last price indicates that the price is from a previous session.
Chapter 24: Enterprise Risk Management 695
24Ross_Chapter24_3rd.indd 69524Ross_Chapter24_3rd.indd 695 12-11-28 12:5112-11-28 12:51
BAX — Three-Month Canadian Bankers’ Acceptance Futures Last Update: June 20, 2012, 10:05 Montréal time - (DATA 15 MINUTES DELAYED)
Month / Strike Bid Price Ask Price Settl. Price Net Change Vol.
+ 12 JL 0.000 0.000 98.660 0.000 0 + 12 AU 0.000 0.000 98.650 0.000 0 + 12 SE 98.780 98.785 98.810 -0.025 5162
+ 12 DE 98.780 98.790 98.830 -0.040 10721
+ 13 MR 98.760 98.770 98.810 -0.040 8705
+ 13 JN 98.710 98.720 98.760 -0.050 3759
+ 13 SE 98.650 98.670 98.720 -0.060 2324
+ 13 DE 98.590 98.610 98.660 -0.060 1758
+ 14 MR 98.540 98.550 98.610 -0.070 609
+ 14 JN 98.480 98.490 98.550 -0.050 7
+ 14 SE 98.410 98.430 98.480 0.000 0 + 12 DE 98.350 98.370 98.410 0.000 0 + 15 MR 98.290 98.310 98.350 -0.040 50
+ 15 JN 98.210 98.240 98.260 0.000 0 Total 33095
Commodity Futures Price Quotes For Gold (Globex) (Price quotes for COMEX Gold (Globex) delayed at least 10 minutes as per exchange requirements.)
Also available: pit. Session Quotes
Click for Chart
Current Session Prior Day
Opt’sOpen High Low Last Time Set Chg Vol Set Op Int
Jun’12 1618.3 1618.3 1601.3 1601.3 10:11 Jun 20
- -20.9 52 1622.2 688 Call Put
Jul’12 1618.1 1621.3 1594.5 1597.8 10:11 Jun 20
- -24.5 343 1622.3 1272 Call Put
Aug’12 1619.3 1623.6 1595.1 1599.2 10:11 Jun 20
- -24.0 71814 1623.2 223051 Call Put
Oct’12 1623.5 1623.8 1598.0 1598.0 10:11 Jun 20
- -27.4 368 1625.4 19602 Call Put
Dec’12 1624.0 1627.8 1599.4 1603.0 10:11 Jun 20
- -24.5 1249 1627.5 73480 Call Put
Feb’13 1630.1 1630.1 1605.9 1605.9 10:11 Jun 20
- -23.7 108 1629.6 20757 Call Put
Apr’13 1616.0 1616.0 1616.0 1616.0 10:11 Jun 20
- -15.6 182 1631.6 12841 Call Put
Jun’13 1620.0 1620.0 1620.0 1620.0 10:11 Jun 20
- -13.6 433 1633.6 17187 Call Put
Aug’13 - - - 1594.7* 10:11 Jun 20
- - - 1635.8 1467 Call Put
Oct’13 - - - 1643.7* 10:11 Jun 20
- - - 1638.2 449 Call Put
Dec’13 - - - 1643.4* 10:11 Jun 20
- - - 1640.6 9340 Call Put
Feb’14 - - - 1672.1* 10:11 Jun 20
- - - 1643.2 6 Call Put
Apr’14 - - - - 10:11 Jun 20
- - - 1645.9 1 Call Put
Jun’14 - - - 1619.3* 10:11 Jun 20
- - - 1648.6 7989 Call Put
Dec’14 - - - 1659.7* 10:11 Jun 20
- - - 1657.4 888 Call Put
Jun’15 - - - 1600.0* 10:11 Jun 20
- - - 1666.4 3309 Call Put
Dec’15 - - - 1620.5* 10:11 Jun 20
- - - 1678.1 12022 Call Put
Times indicate exchange local time. *An asterisk beside the last price indicates that the price is from a previous session.
696 Part 9: Derivative Securities and Corporate Finance
24Ross_Chapter24_3rd.indd 69624Ross_Chapter24_3rd.indd 696 12-11-28 12:5112-11-28 12:51
Light Crude Oil (Price quotes for NYMEX Light Crude Oil delayed at least 10 minutes as per exchange requirements.)
Also available: pit. Session Quotes
Click for Chart
Current Session Prior Day
Opt’sOpen High Low Last Time Set Chg Vol Set Op Int
Jul’12 84.04 84.34 82.79 83.04 10:15 Jun 20
- -0.99 11245 84.03 24700 Call Put
Aug’12 84.36 84.72 83.09 83.38 10:15 Jun 20
- -0.97 81421 84.35 292877 Call Put
Sep’12 84.67 85.05 83.45 83.73 10:15 Jun 20
- -0.95 11236 84.68 129419 Call Put
Oct’12 84.87 85.33 83.81 84.08 10:15 Jun 20
- -0.92 6325 85.00 73980 Call Put
Nov’12 85.23 85.69 84.21 84.47 10:15 Jun 20
- -0.88 3570 85.35 67557 Call Put
Dec’12 85.57 86.06 84.58 84.83 10:15 Jun 20
- -0.84 11387 85.67 169360 Call Put
Jan’13 85.80 86.37 85.00 85.15 10:15 Jun 20
- -0.82 1000 85.97 56695 Call Put
Feb’13 86.61 86.61 85.39 85.39 10:15 Jun 20
- -0.82 695 86.21 25375 Call Put
Mar’13 86.40 86.40 85.66 85.66 10:15 Jun 20
- -0.74 2243 86.40 34662 Call Put
Apr’13 86.58 86.58 86.58 86.58 10:15 Jun 20
- 0.07 179 86.51 18073 Call Put
May’13 86.47 86.83 86.20 86.20 10:15 Jun 20
- -0.40 223 86.60 17235 Call Put
Jun’13 86.33 86.93 86.18 86.23 10:15 Jun 20
- -0.44 2803 86.67 75316 Call Put
Jul’13 - - - 86.45* 17:21 Jun 19
- - - 86.71 26958 Call Put
Aug’13 - - - 85.52* 17:21 Jun 19
- - - 86.68 13627 Call Put
Sep’13 - - - 85.57* 17:21 Jun 19
- - - 86.64 21367 Call Put
Oct’13 - - - 94.09* 17:21 Jun 19
- - - 86.61 12384 Call Put
Nov’13 86.50* 17:21 Jun 19
- - - 86.58 19224 Call Put
Dec’13 86.55 87.06 86.08 86.10 10:15 Jun 20
- -0.44 4287 86.54 104890 Call Put
Jan’14 - - - 101.71* 17:21 Jun 19
- - - 86.38 18804 Call Put
Feb’14 - - - 102.73* 17:21 Jun 19
- - - 86.26 3661 Call Put
Mar’14 - - - 100.80* 17:21 Jun 19
- - - 86.12 7985 Call Put
Apr’14 - - - 85.45* 17:21 Jun 19
- - - 85.98 3595 Call Put
May’14 - - - 86.07* 17:21 Jun 19
- - - 85.85 3368 Call Put
Jun’14 85.95 86.00 85.95 86.00 10:15 Jun 20
- 0.28 51 85.72 38605 Call Put
Jul’14 - - - 101.00* 17:21 Jun 19
- - - 85.57 2163 Call Put
Aug’14 100.50* 17:21 Jun 19
- - - 85.43 1853 Call Put
Trading Unit: 1,000 U.S. barrels Sources: futures.tradingcharts.com/marketquotes/CD.html, m-x.ca, cmegroup.com
For the canola contract with a July 2013 maturity, the number aft er the maturity month is the opening price ($591.70) followed by the highest price ($592.10) and the lowest price ($586.70) for the day. Th e settlement price is the next number ($589.10), and it is the closing price for the day. For purposes of marking-to-market, this is the fi gure used. Th e change (-0.10) listed is the movement in the settlement price since the previous trading session. Finally, the previous open interest (2,664), the number of contracts outstanding at the end of the previous trading session, is shown. Th e volume of trading is shown for the trading session (1,065).
Chapter 24: Enterprise Risk Management 697
24Ross_Chapter24_3rd.indd 69724Ross_Chapter24_3rd.indd 697 12-11-28 12:5112-11-28 12:51
To see how large futures trading can be, we take a look at the Chicago Mercantile Exchange (CME) Canadian dollar contracts (at the top of Figure 24.6). One contract is for $100,000. Th e previous day’s total open interest for all months is 88,140 contracts. Th e total value outstanding is therefore C$8.8 billion for this one type of contract!
Hedging with Futures Hedging with futures contracts is conceptually identical to hedging with forward contracts, and the payoff profi le on a futures contract is drawn just like the profi le for a forward contract. Th e only diff erence in hedging with futures is that the fi rm will have to maintain an account with an investment dealer so that gains and losses can be credited or debited each day as a part of the marking-to-market process.
Even though there is a large variety of futures contracts, it is unlikely that a particular fi rm will be able to fi nd the precise hedging instrument it needs. For example, we might produce a particular grade or variety of oil, and fi nd that no contract exists for exactly that grade. However, all oil prices tend to move together, so we could hedge our output using futures contracts on other grades of oil. Using a contract on a related, but not identical, asset as a means of hedging is called cross-hedging. In our example, the cross-hedger faces the risk that the futures price may not move closely with the price of the oil produced. Th e diff erence between the two prices is termed the basis and the risk faced by the cross hedger is basis risk.
When a fi rm does cross-hedge, it does not actually want to buy or sell the underlying asset. Th is presents no problem because the fi rm can reverse its futures position at some point before maturity. Th is simply means that if the fi rm sells a futures contract to hedge something, it will buy the same contract at a later date, thereby eliminating its futures position. In fact, futures contracts are very rarely held to maturity by anyone (despite horror stories of individuals waking up to fi nd mountains of soybeans in their front yards), and, as a result, actual physical delivery very rarely takes place.
A related issue has to do with contract maturity. A fi rm might wish to hedge over a relatively long period of time, but the available contracts might have shorter maturities. A fi rm could there- fore decide to roll over short-term contracts, but this entails some risks. For example, in stark contrast to Barrick’s relative success with its Forward Sales Program, JP Morgan Chase & Co., the largest bank in the United States by assets and market capitalization, experienced considerable trouble in 2012 with its hedging program. In 2011, JP Morgan profi ted by making bearish bets on credit conditions. Th e European Central Bank’s long-term loans to Euro zone banks spurred JP Morgan to make bullish bets in early 2012. Th e company suff ered a heavy $2 billion loss when the prices moved against the bets starting April 2012. Th is came as a surprise to the U.S legislators when they were about to implement the Volcker Rule, a provision in the Dodd-Frank Wall Street Reform and Consumer Protection Act that restricts U.S. banks from making speculative invest- ments that do not benefi t the customers. As a result, JP Morgan CEO, Jamie Dimon came under heavy criticism when he appeared before a Congressional committee in June 2012.
1. What is a futures contract? How does it differ from a forward contract?
2. What is cross-hedging? Why is it important?
24.5 Hedging with Swap Contracts
As the name suggests, a swap contract is an agreement by two parties to exchange, or swap, speci- fi ed cash fl ows at specifi ed intervals. Swaps are a recent innovation; they were fi rst introduced to the public in 1981 when IBM and the World Bank entered into a swap agreement. Th e market for swaps has grown tremendously since that time.
A swap contract is really just a portfolio, or series, of forward contracts. Recall that with a forward contract, one party promises to exchange an asset (e.g., bushels of wheat) for another asset (cash) on a specifi c future date. With a swap, the only diff erence is that there are multiple exchanges instead of just one. In principle, a swap contract could be tailored to exchange just
cross-hedging Hedging an asset with contracts written on a closely related, but not identical, asset.
basis risk Risk that futures prices will not move directly with cash price hedged.
Concept Questions
swap contract An agreement by two parties to exchange, or swap, specified cash flows at specified intervals in the future. ibm.com worldbank.com
698 Part 9: Derivative Securities and Corporate Finance
24Ross_Chapter24_3rd.indd 69824Ross_Chapter24_3rd.indd 698 12-11-28 12:5112-11-28 12:51
about anything. In practice, most swap contracts fall into one of three basic categories: currency swaps, interest rate swaps, and commodity swaps. Other types will surely develop, but we will concentrate on just these three.
Currency Swaps With a currency swap, two companies agree to exchange a specifi c amount of one currency for a specifi c amount of another at specifi c dates in the future. For example, suppose a Canadian fi rm has a German subsidiary and wishes to obtain debt fi nancing for an expansion of the subsidiary’s operations. Because most of the subsidiary’s cash fl ows are in euros, the company would like the subsidiary to borrow and make payments in euros, thereby hedging against changes in the euros– dollar exchange rate. Unfortunately, the company has good access to Canadian debt markets, but not to German debt markets.
At the same time, a German fi rm would like to obtain Canadian dollar fi nancing. It can borrow cheaply in euros, but not in dollars. Both fi rms face a similar problem. Th ey can borrow at favour- able rates, but not in the desired currency. A currency swap is a solution. Th ese two fi rms simply agree to exchange dollars for euros at a fi xed rate at specifi c future dates (the payment dates on the loans). Each fi rm thus obtains the best possible rate and then arranges to eliminate exposure to exchange rate changes by agreeing to exchange currencies, a neat solution. A further benefi t is that the two fi rms can lower their transaction costs by working together in a swap.
Interest Rate Swaps Imagine a fi rm that wishes to obtain a fi xed-rate loan, but can only get a good deal on a fl oating- rate loan, that is, a loan for which the payments are adjusted periodically to refl ect changes in interest rates. Another fi rm can obtain a fi xed-rate loan, but wishes to obtain the lowest possible interest rate and is therefore willing to take a fl oating-rate loan. (Rates on fl oating-rate loans are generally lower than rates on fi xed-rate loans; why?) Both fi rms could accomplish their objectives by agreeing to exchange loan payments; in other words, the two fi rms would make each other’s loan payments. Th is is an example of an interest rate swap; what is really being exchanged is a fl oating interest rate for a fi xed one.
Interest rate swaps and currency swaps are oft en combined. One fi rm obtains fl oating-rate fi nancing in a particular currency and swaps it for fi xed-rate fi nancing in another currency. Also, note that payments on fl oating-rate loans are always based on some index, such as the one-year Treasury rate. An interest rate swap might involve exchanging one fl oating-rate loan for another as a way of changing the underlying index. Th e most common interest rate swap is a “plain vanilla” swap. In a plain vanilla swap, a counterparty agrees to pay a sequence of fi xed-rate interest pay- ments on specifi c dates for a specifi c period of time and in turn receives a sequence of fl oating- rate interest payments. In a plain vanilla swap, the two cash fl ows are paid in the same currency.
Commodity Swaps As the name suggests, a commodity swap is an agreement to exchange a fi xed quantity of a com- modity at fi xed times in the future. Commodity swaps are the newest type of swap, and the market for them is small relative to that for other types. Th e potential for growth is enormous, however.
Swap contracts for oil have been engineered. For example, say that an oil user has a need for 20,000 barrels every quarter. Th e oil user could enter into a swap contract with an oil producer to supply the needed oil. What price would they agree on? As we mentioned previously, they can’t fi x a price forever. Instead, they could agree that the price would be equal to the average daily oil price from the previous 90 days. As a result of their using an average price, the impact of the relatively large daily price fl uctuations in the oil market would be reduced, and both fi rms would benefi t from a reduction in transactions exposure.
The Swap Dealer Unlike futures contracts, swap contracts are not traded on organized exchanges. Th e main reason is that they are not suffi ciently standardized. Instead, the swap dealer plays a key role in the swaps
Chapter 24: Enterprise Risk Management 699
24Ross_Chapter24_3rd.indd 69924Ross_Chapter24_3rd.indd 699 12-11-28 12:5112-11-28 12:51
market. In the absence of a swap dealer, a fi rm that wished to enter into a swap would have to track down another fi rm that wanted the opposite end of the deal. Th is search would probably be expensive and time-consuming.
Instead, a fi rm wishing to enter into a swap agreement contacts a swap dealer, and the swap dealer takes the other side of the agreement. Th e swap dealer will then try to fi nd an off setting transaction with some other party or parties (perhaps another fi rm or another dealer). Failing this, a swap dealer will hedge its exposure using futures contracts.
Banks are the dominant swap dealers in Canada and the United States. As a large swap dealer, a bank would be involved in a variety of contracts. It would be swapping fi xed-rate loans for fl oating-rate loans with some parties and doing just the opposite with other participants. Th e total collection of contracts in which a dealer is involved is called the swap book. Th e dealer will try to keep a balanced book to limit its net exposure. A balanced book is oft en called a matched book.
Interest Rate Swaps: An Example To get a better understanding of swap contracts and the role of the swap dealer, we consider a fl oating-for-fi xed interest rate swap. Suppose Company A can borrow at a fl oating rate equal to prime plus 1 percent or at a fi xed rate of 10 percent. Company B can borrow at a fl oating rate of prime plus 2 percent or at a fi xed rate of 9.5 percent. Company A desires a fi xed-rate loan, whereas Company B desires a fl oating-rate loan. Clearly, a swap is in order.
Company A contacts a swap dealer, and a deal is struck. Company A borrows the money at a rate of prime plus 1 percent. Th e swap dealer agrees to cover the loan payments, and, in exchange, the company agrees to make fi xed-rate payments to the swap dealer at a rate of, say, 9.75 percent. Notice that the swap dealer is making fl oating-rate payments and receiving fi xed-rate payments. Th e company is making fi xed-rate payments, so it has swapped a fl oating payment for a fi xed one.
Company B also contacts a swap dealer. Th e deal here calls for Company B to borrow the money at a fi xed rate of 9.5 percent. Th e swap dealer agrees to cover the fi xed loan payments, and the company agrees to make fl oating-rate payments to the swap dealer at a rate of prime plus, say, 1.5 percent. In this second arrangement, the swap dealer is making fi xed-rate payments and receiving fl oating-rate payments.
What’s the net eff ect of these machinations? First, Company A gets a fi xed-rate loan at a rate of 9.75 percent, which is cheaper than the 10 percent rate it can obtain on its own. Second, Com- pany B gets a fl oating-rate loan at prime plus 1.5 instead of prime plus 2. Th e swap benefi ts both companies.
Th e swap dealer also wins. When all the dust settles, the swap dealer receives (from Company A) fi xed-rate payments at a rate of 9.75 percent and makes fi xed-rate payments (for Company B) at a rate of 9.5 percent. At the same time, it makes fl oating-rate payments (for Company A) at a rate of prime plus 1 percent and receives fl oating-rate payments at a rate of prime plus 1.5 percent (from Company B). Notice that the swap dealer’s book is perfectly balanced, in terms of risk, and it has no exposure to interest rate volatility.
FIGURE 24.7
Illustration of an interest rate swap
9.75% (fixed)
9.5% (fixed)
Prime � 1% (floating)
Prime � 1% (floating)
Prime � 1.5% (floating)
9.5% (fixed)
Company A
Swap dealer
Company B
Debt market Debt market
Company A borrows at prime plus 1% and swaps for a 9.75% fixed rate. Company B borrows at 9.5% fixed and swaps for a prime plus 1.5% floating rate.
700 Part 9: Derivative Securities and Corporate Finance
24Ross_Chapter24_3rd.indd 70024Ross_Chapter24_3rd.indd 700 12-11-28 12:5112-11-28 12:51
Figure 24.7 illustrates the transactions in our interest rate swap. Notice that the essence of the swap transactions is that one company swaps a fi xed payment for a fl oating payment, while the other exchanges a fl oating payment for a fi xed one. Th e swap dealer acts as an intermediary and profi ts from the spread between the rates it charges and the rates it receives.
Credit Default Swaps (CDS) Credit default swaps, along with other credit derivatives, make up one of the fastest growing markets in the fi nancial world. A credit default swap (CDS) is a contract that pays off when a credit event occurs—default by a particular company, termed the reference entity. In this case, the buyer of the CDS has the right to sell corporate bonds issued by the reference entity to the CDS seller at their face value. Since bonds in default trade at a deep discount, the right to sell bonds at their face value becomes quite valuable when a default occurs.
Credit default swaps are an important risk management tool for fi nancial institutions. By buy- ing a CDS on a borrower, a bank sets up a payment in the event the borrower defaults on its loan. In eff ect, CDS is a form of insurance against credit losses.3 Th e failure of the CDS market was one of the main triggers of the credit crisis of 2008. CDSs created a downward spiral in the capital markets bringing down major organizations such as AIG, Lehman Brothers, and Bear Stearns. Lehman Brothers declared bankruptcy, but the swift intervention of the U.S. government pre- vented AIG and Bear Stearns from following the same path. Th e market for credit default swaps grew from approximately US$900 billion in 2001 to around US$68 trillion in April 2008. A good part of this growth was due to investors misusing CDSs to implement “bets” on the credit default of issuers as opposed to hedging risk.4
1. What is a swap contract? Describe three types.
2. Describe the role of the swap dealer.
3. Explain the cash flows in Figure 24.7.
24.6 Hedging with Option Contracts
Th e contracts we have discussed thus far—forwards, futures, and swaps—are conceptually simi- lar. In each case, two parties agree to transact on a future date or dates. Th e key is that both parties are obligated to complete the transaction.
In contrast, an option contract is an agreement that gives the owner the right, but not the obli- gation, to buy or sell (depending on the option type) some asset at a specifi ed price for a specifi ed time. Here we will quickly discuss some option basics and then focus on using options to hedge volatility in commodity prices, interest rates, and exchange rates. In doing so, we will sidestep a wealth of detail concerning option terminology, option trading strategies, and option valuation.
Option Terminology Options come in two fl avours, puts and calls. Th e owner of a call option has the right, but not the obligation, to buy an underlying asset at a fi xed price, called the strike price or exercise price, for a specifi ed time. Th e owner of a put option has the right, but not the obligation, to sell an underly- ing asset at a fi xed price for a specifi ed time.
Th e act of buying or selling the underlying asset using the option contract is called exercising the option. Some options (“American” options) can be exercised anytime up to and including the
3 For more on credit default swaps, see J.C. Hull, Fundamentals of Futures and Options Markets, Seventh Edition, Pear- son Prentice Hall, NJ, 2010, Chapter 23. 4 “Credit default swaps and bank leverage,” April 16, 2008 (available at: nakedcapitalism.com/2008/04/credit-default- swaps-and-bank-leverage.html).
credit default swap A contract that pays off when a credit event occurs, default by a particular company termed the reference entity, giving the buyer the right to sell corporate bonds issued by the reference entity at their face value.
Concept Questions
option contract An agreement that gives the owner the right, but not the obligation, to buy or sell a specific asset at a specific price for a set period of time.
call option An option that gives the owner the right, but not the obligation, to buy an asset.
put option An option that gives the owner the right, but not the obligation, to sell an asset.
Chapter 24: Enterprise Risk Management 701
24Ross_Chapter24_3rd.indd 70124Ross_Chapter24_3rd.indd 701 12-11-28 12:5112-11-28 12:51
expiration date (the last day); other options (“European” options) can only be exercised on the expiration date. Most options are American.
Because the buyer of a call option has the right to buy the underlying asset by paying the strike price, the seller of a call option is obligated to deliver the asset and accept the strike price if the option is exercised. Similarly, the buyer of the put option has the right to sell the underlying asset and receive the strike price. In this case, the seller of the put option must accept the asset and pay the strike price.
Options versus Forwards Th ere are two key diff erences between an option contract and a forward contract. Th e fi rst is obvi- ous. With a forward contract, both parties are obligated to transact; one party delivers the asset, and the other party pays for it. With an option, the transaction occurs only if the owner of the option chooses to exercise it.
Th e second diff erence between an option and a forward contract is that, whereas no money changes hands when a forward contract is created, the buyer of an option contract gains a valuable right and must pay the seller for that right. Th e price of the option is frequently called the option premium.
Option Payoff Profi les Figure 24.8 shows the general payoff profi le for a call option from the owner’s viewpoint. Th e horizontal axis shows the diff erence between the asset’s value and the strike price on the option. As illustrated, if the price of the underlying asset rises above the strike price, then the owner of the option will exercise the option and enjoy a profi t. If the value of the asset falls below the strike price, the owner of the option will not exercise it. Notice that this payoff profi le does not consider the premium that the buyer paid for the option.
FIGURE 24.8
Call option payoff profile for an option buyer
�P
�V Payoff profile
Th e payoff profi le that results from buying a call is repeated in Part A of Figure 24.9. Part B shows the payoff profi le on a call option from the seller’s side. A call option is a zero-sum game, so the seller’s payoff profi le is exactly the opposite of the buyer’s.
Part C of Figure 24.9 shows the payoff profi le for the buyer of a put option. In this case, if the asset’s value falls below the strike price, then the buyer profi ts because the seller of the put must pay the strike price. Part D shows that the seller of the put option loses out when the price falls below the strike price.
702 Part 9: Derivative Securities and Corporate Finance
24Ross_Chapter24_3rd.indd 70224Ross_Chapter24_3rd.indd 702 12-11-28 12:5112-11-28 12:51
FIGURE 24.9
Option payoff profiles �V
C. Buying a put D. Selling a put
�V�V
A. Buying a call B. Selling a call
�V
�P�P�P�P
Option Hedging Suppose a fi rm has a risk profi le that looks like the one in Part A of Figure 24.10. If the fi rm wishes to hedge against adverse price movements using options, what should it do? Examining the dif- ferent payoff profi les in Figure 24.9, we see that the one that has the desirable shape is C, buying a put. If the fi rm buys a put, then its net exposure is as illustrated in Part B of Figure 24.10.
FIGURE 24.10
Hedging with options
Risk profile
�V
Hedged profile
�V
Put option payoff
Original profile
�P
The hedged profile is created by purchasing a put option, thereby eliminating the downside risk.
A. The unhedged risk profile B. The hedged risk profile
In this case, by buying a put option, the fi rm has eliminated the downside risk, that is, the risk of an adverse price movement. However, the fi rm has retained the upside potential. In other words, the put option acts as a kind of insurance policy. Remember that this desirable insurance is not free; the fi rm pays for it when it buys the put option.
Hedging Commodity Price Risk with Options We saw earlier that there are futures contracts available for a variety of basic commodities. In addition, there are an increasing number of options available on these same commodities. In fact, the options that are typically traded on commodities are actually options on futures contracts, and, for this reason, they are called futures options.
Chapter 24: Enterprise Risk Management 703
24Ross_Chapter24_3rd.indd 70324Ross_Chapter24_3rd.indd 703 12-11-28 12:5112-11-28 12:51
Th e way these work is as follows: When a futures call option on, for example, wheat is exer- cised, the owner of the option receives two things. Th e fi rst is a futures contract on wheat at the current futures price. Th is contract can be immediately closed at no cost. Th e second thing the owner of the option receives is the diff erence between the strike price on the option and the cur- rent futures price. Th e diff erence is simply paid in cash.
Figure 24.11 gives a few futures options quotations. Briefl y, looking at the oat options, the strike prices are provided for each type of option: call or put.
Suppose you buy the July 320 Oats futures call option. You will pay 2 2/8 cents per bushel for the option (they’re actually sold in multiples of 5000 but we’ll ignore this). If you exercise your option, you will receive a futures contract on oats and the diff erence between the current futures price and the strike price of 320 cents in cash.
Hedging Exchange Rate Risk with Options Figure 24.11 shows that there are futures options available on foreign currencies as well as on com- modities. Th ese work in exactly the same way as commodities futures options. In addition, there are other traded options with which the underlying asset is just currency rather than a futures contract on a currency. Firms with signifi cant exposure to exchange rate risk will frequently pur- chase put options to protect against adverse exchange rate changes.
Hedging Interest Rate Risk with Options Th e use of options to hedge against interest rate risk is a very common practice, and there are a variety of options available to serve this purpose. Some are futures options like the ones we have been discussing, and these trade on organized exchanges. For example, we mentioned the Trea- sury bond contract in our discussion of futures. Th ere are options available on this contract and a number of other fi nancial futures as well. Beyond this, there is a thriving over-the-counter market in interest rate options. We will describe some of these options in this section.
A PRELIMINARY NOTE Some interest rate options are actually options on interest-bear- ing assets such as bonds (or on futures contracts for bonds). Most of the options that are traded on exchanges fall into this category. As we will discuss in a moment, some others are actually op- tions on interest rates. The distinction is important if we are thinking about using one type or the other to hedge. To illustrate, suppose we want to protect ourselves against an increase in interest rates using options; what should we do?
We need to buy an option that increases in value as interest rates go up. One thing we can do is buy a put option on a bond. Why a put? Remember that when interest rates go up, bond values go down, so one way to hedge against interest rate increases is to buy put options on bonds. Th e other way to hedge is to buy a call option on interest rates. We discuss this alternative in more detail in the next section.
We actually saw interest rate options in Chapter 7 when we discussed the call feature on a bond. Remember that the call provision gives the issuer the right to buy back the bond at a set price, known as the call price. What happens is that if interest rates fall, the bond’s price will rise. If it rises above the call price, the buyer will exercise its option and acquire the bond at a bargain price. Th e call provision can thus be viewed as either a call option on a bond or a put option on interest rates.
INTEREST RATE CAPS An interest rate cap is a call option on an interest rate. Suppose a firm has a floating-rate loan. It is concerned that interest rates will rise sharply and the firm will experience financial distress because of the increased loan payment. To guard against this, the firm can purchase an interest rate cap from a bank. What will happen is that if the loan payment ever rises above an agreed-upon limit (the “ceiling”), the bank will pay the difference between the actual payment and the ceiling to the firm in cash.
A fl oor is a put option on an interest rate. If a fi rm buys a cap and sells a fl oor, the result is a collar. By selling the put and buying the call, the fi rm protects itself against increases in interest rates beyond the ceiling by the cap. However, if interest rates drop below the fl oor, the put will be exercised against the fi rm. Th e result is that the rate the fi rm pays will not drop below the fl oor rate. In other words, the rate the fi rm pays will always be between the fl oor and the ceiling.
cmegroup.com cmegroup.com/company/ nymex.html
704 Part 9: Derivative Securities and Corporate Finance
24Ross_Chapter24_3rd.indd 70424Ross_Chapter24_3rd.indd 704 12-11-28 12:5112-11-28 12:51
FIGURE 24.11
Future Options Prices: Wednesday, June 20, 2012
Oat Options (Expiring July 2012): CALLS PUTS
Updated Hi / Lo Limit Volume High Low
Prior Settle Change Last
Strike Price Last Change
Prior Settle Low High Volume
Hi / Lo Limit Updated
7:04:16 PM CT 6/19/2012
31’4 No Limit
0 11’4 315 2’0 a 0’0 2’0 2’0 a 22’0 No Limit
9:31:37 AM CT 6/20/2012
10:54:38 AM CT 6/20/2012
27’4 No Limit
3 10’4 9’6 a 7’4 +2’2 9’6 a 320 2’2 a -0’6 3’0 2’2 a 4’2 0 23’0 No Limit
9:31:39 AM CT 6/20/2012
10:50:47 AM CT 6/20/2012
25’4 No Limit
0 7’1 b 5’4 +0’7 6’3 a 325 4’2 a -1’6 6’0 4’2 a 4 26’0 No Limit
11:25:24 AM CT 6/20/2012
10:50:49 AM CT 6/20/2012
22’7 No Limit
0 4’1 b 2’6 a 2’7 +1’0 3’7 a 330 5’2 a -3.1 8’3 5’0 5’4 0 28’3 No Limit
10:38:40 AM CT 6/20/2012
10:33:51 AM CT 6/20/2012
22’1 No Limit
0 2’3 b 2’1 +0’2 2’3 b 335 12’5 3 32’5 No Limit
7:07:07 AM CT 6/20/2012
Silver Options (Expiring July 2012): CALLS PUTS
Updated Hi / Lo Limit Volume High Low
Prior Settle Change Last
Strike Price Last Change
Prior Settle Low High Volume
Hi / Lo Limit Updated
9:01:05 AM CT 6/20/2012
No Limit 0.001
0 - - 0.001 - - 8500 - - 56.632 No Limit 0.001
7:06:26 PM CT 6/19/2012
9:01:05 AM CT 6/20/2012
No Limit 0.001
0 - - 0.001 - - 8600 - - 57.632 No Limit 0.001
7:07:00 PM CT 6/19/2012
9:01:05 AM CT 6/20/2012
No Limit 0.001
0 - - 0.001 - - 8700 - - 58.632 No Limit 0.001
7:04:40 PM CT 6/19/2012
9:01:05 AM CT 6/20/2012
No Limit 0.001
0 - - 0.001 - - 9000 61.708a +0.076 61.632 61.787 b
No Limit 0.001
10:27:04 PM CT 6/19/2012
9:01:05 AM CT 6/20/2012
No Limit 0.001
0 - - 0.001 - - 10000 - - 71.632 No Limit 0.001
7:05:47 PM CT 6/19/2012
Light Sweet Crude Oil Options—1,000 U.S. barrels, cents per barrel (Expiring August 2012): CALLS PUTS
Updated Hi / Lo Limit Volume High Low
Prior Settle Change Last
Strike Price Last Change
Prior Settle Low High Volume
Hi / Lo Limit Updated
11:40:22 AM CT 6/20/2012
No Limit 0.01
68 3.65 b 2.09 a 0.001 -1.51 12.09 a 8300 3.58 b +1.33 2.25 2.06 3.58 b 179 No Limit 0.01
11:40:25 AM CT 6/20/2012
11:40:22 AM CT 6/20/2012
No Limit 0.01
87 3.33 b 1.87 a 0.001 -1.43 1.87 a 8350 3.86 b +1.41 2.45 2.58 3.86 b 45 No Limit 0.01
11:40:25 AM CT 6/20/2012
11:40:25 AM CT 6/20/2012
No Limit 0.01
244 3.03 b 1.67 a 0.001 -1.34 1.67 a 8400 4.16 b +1.50 2.66 2.47 a 4.16 b 53 No Limit 0.01
11:40:25 AM CT 6/20/2012
11:40:25 AM CT 6/20/2012
No Limit 0.01
115 2.83 1.48 a 0.001 -1.25 1.48 a 8450 4.47 b +1.59 2.88 3.18 4.47 b 28 No Limit 0.01
11:40:25 AM CT 6/20/2012
11:40:22 AM CT 6/20/2012
No Limit 0.01
989 2.58 1.31 a 0.001 -1.18 1.31 a 8500 4.78 b +1.66 3.12 2.91 a 4.78 b 59 No Limit 0.01
11:40:26 AM CT 6/20/2012
CAD/USD Options (Expiring September 2012): CALLS PUTS
Updated Volume High Low Prior Settle Change Last
Strike Price Last Change
Prior Settle Low High Volume Updated
11:37:06 AM CT 6/20/2012
0 0.0222 b 0.0200 a 0.0221 -0.0021 0.0200 a 9700 0.0126 b +0.0010 0.0116 0.0107 0.0126 b 11 11:37:21 AM CT 6/20/2012
11:37:26 AM CT 6/20/2012
0 0.0189 b 0.0168 a 0.0188 -0.0020 0.0168 a 9750 0.0146 b +0.0013 0.0133 0.0130 0.0146 b 10 11:37:29 AM CT 6/20/2012
11:41:05 AM CT 6/20/2012
5 0.0160 0.0136 a 0.0158 -0.0022 0.0136 a 9800 0.0167 b +0.0014 0.0153 0.0150 a 0.0167 b 0 11:37:13 AM CT 6/20/2012
11:38:58 AM CT 6/20/2012
0 0.0131 b 0.0111 a 0.0131 -0.0020 0.0111 a 9850 0.0192 b +0.0016 0.0176 0.0174 0.0192 b 0 11:37:12 AM CT 6/20/2012
11:41:05 AM CT 6/20/2012
0 0.0107 b 0.0090 a 0.0107 -0.0017 0.0090 a 9900 0.0218 b +0.0016 0.0202 0.0195 a 0.0218 b 0 11:37:06 AM CT 6/20/2012
Source: cmegroup.com
Chapter 24: Enterprise Risk Management 705
24Ross_Chapter24_3rd.indd 70524Ross_Chapter24_3rd.indd 705 12-11-28 12:5112-11-28 12:51
OTHER INTEREST RATE OPTIONS We will close out our chapter by briefly mention- ing two relatively new types of interest rate options. Suppose a firm has a floating-rate loan. The firm is comfortable with its floating-rate loan, but it would like to have the right to convert it to a fixed-rate loan in the future.
What can the fi rm do? What it wants is the right, but not the obligation, to swap its fl oating- rate loan for a fi xed-rate loan. In other words, the fi rm needs to buy an option on a swap. Swap options exist, and they have the charming name swaptions.
We’ve seen that there are options on futures contracts and options on swap contracts, but what about options on options? Such options are called compound options. As we have just discussed, a cap is a call option on interest rates. Suppose a fi rm thinks that, depending on interest rates, it might like to buy a cap in the future. As you can probably guess, in this case, what the fi rm might want to do today is buy an option on a cap. Inevitably, it seems, an option on a cap is called a cap- tion, and there is a growing market for these instruments.
Actual Use of Derivatives Because derivatives do not usually appear in fi nancial statements, it is much more diffi cult to observe the use of derivatives by fi rms compared to, say, bank debt. Much of our knowledge of corporate derivative use comes from academic surveys. Most surveys report that the use of derivatives appears to vary widely among large publicly traded fi rms. Large fi rms are far more likely to use derivatives than are small fi rms. Table 24.1 shows that for fi rms that use derivatives, foreign currency and interest rate derivatives are the most frequently used.
Th e prevailing view is that derivatives can be very helpful in reducing the variability of fi rm cash fl ows, which, in turn, reduces the various costs associated with fi nancial distress. Th erefore, it is somewhat puzzling that large fi rms use derivatives more oft en than small fi rms—because large fi rms tend to have less cash fl ow variability than small fi rms. Also, some surveys report that fi rms occasionally use derivatives when they want to speculate on future prices and not just to hedge risks.
TABLE 24.1
Derivatives Usage Survey Results
Percent of Companies Using Derivatives
2010 71% 2009 79%
In Which Asset Class Do You Use Derivatives?
2010 2009
Interest rates 65% 68% Currencies 62% 58% Credit 13% 13% Energy 19% 13% Commodities 23% 22% Equities 13% 9%
Do You Expect Your Use of Derivatives to Change?
2010 2009
Increase Decrease Increase Decrease
Interest rates 19% 15% 13% 20% Currencies 20% 8% 31% 6% Credit 4% 4% 2% 13% Energy 11% 7% 5% 9% Commodities 16% 6% 12% 10% Equities 6% 7% 7% 6%
Do You Use an Integrated Risk Management Strategy or Do You Hedge Transactions or Specific Currency Exposures?
2010 2009
Hedge total risk 31.8% 21.1% Hedge transactions 34.1% 47.4% Hedge specific currency exposures 34.1% 31.6%
Source: Adapted from Treasury & Risk Management (March 2011 and March 2010).
However, most of the evidence is consistent with the theory that derivatives are most frequently used by fi rms where fi nancial distress costs are high and access to the capital markets is constrained.
706 Part 9: Derivative Securities and Corporate Finance
24Ross_Chapter24_3rd.indd 70624Ross_Chapter24_3rd.indd 706 12-11-28 12:5112-11-28 12:51
1. Suppose that the unhedged risk profile in Figure 24.10 sloped down instead of up. What option-based hedging strategy would be suitable in this case?
2. What is a futures option?
3. What is a caption? Who might want to buy one?
24.7 SUMMARY AND CONCLUSIONS
Th is chapter has introduced some of the basic principles of fi nancial risk management and fi nan- cial engineering. Th e motivation for risk management and fi nancial engineering stems from the fact that a fi rm will frequently have an undesirable exposure to some type of risk. Th is is particu- larly true today because of the increased volatility in key fi nancial variables such as interest rates, exchange rates, and commodity prices.
We describe a fi rm’s exposure to a particular risk with a risk profi le. Th e goal of fi nancial risk management is to alter the fi rm’s risk profi le through the buying and selling of derivative assets such as futures contracts, swap contracts, and options contracts. By fi nding instruments with appropriate payoff profi les, a fi rm can reduce or even eliminate its exposure to many types of risk.
Hedging cannot change the fundamental economic reality of a business. What it can do is allow a fi rm to avoid expensive and troublesome disruptions that might otherwise result from short-run, temporary price fl uctuations. Hedging also gives a fi rm time to react and adapt to changing market conditions. Because of the price volatility and rapid economic change that char- acterize modern business, intelligently dealing with volatility has become an increasingly impor- tant task for fi nancial managers.
Th ere are many other option types available in addition to those we have discussed, and more are created every day. One very important aspect of fi nancial risk management that we have not discussed is that options, forwards, futures, and swaps can be combined in a wide variety of ways to create new instruments. Th ese basic contract types are really just the building blocks used by fi nancial engineers to create new and innovative products for corporate risk management.
Key Terms basis risk (page 698) call option (page 701) credit default swap (page 701) cross-hedging (page 698) derivative security (page 687) economic exposure (page 690) forward contract (page 691) futures contract (page 694)
hedging (page 687) option contract (page 701) payoff profile (page 691) put option (page 701) risk profile (page 688) swap contract (page 698) transactions exposure (page 689)
Chapter Review Problems and Self-Test 24.1 Futures Contracts Suppose Golden Grain Farms (GGF) ex-
pects to harvest 50,000 bushels of wheat in September. GGF is concerned about the possibility of price fluctuations between now and September. The futures price for September wheat is $2 per bushel, and the relevant contract calls for 5000 bushels. What action should GGF take to lock in the $2 price? Suppose the price of wheat actually turns out to be $3. Evaluate GGF’s gains and losses. Do the same for a price of $1. Ignore marking-to-market.
24.2 Options Contracts In the previous question, suppose that September futures put options with a strike price of $2 per bushel cost $.15 per bushel. Assuming that GGF hedges using put options, evaluate its gains and losses for wheat prices of $1, $2, and $3.
Concept Questions
Chapter 24: Enterprise Risk Management 707
24Ross_Chapter24_3rd.indd 70724Ross_Chapter24_3rd.indd 707 12-11-28 12:5112-11-28 12:51
Answers to Self-Test Problems 24.1 GGF wants to deliver wheat and receive a fixed price, so it needs to sell futures contracts. Each contract calls for delivery of 5000 bushels,
so GGF needs to sell 10 contracts. No money changes hands today. If wheat prices actually turn out to be $3, then GGF will receive $150,000 for its crop, but it will have a loss of $50,000 on its futures
position when it closes that position because the contracts require it to sell 50,000 bushels of wheat at $2, when the going price is $3. GGF thus nets $100,000 overall.
If wheat prices turn out to be $1 per bushel, then the crop will be worth only $50,000. However, GGF will have a profit of $50,000 on its futures position, so GGF again nets $100,000.
24.2 If GGF wants to insure against a price decline only, it can buy 10 put contracts. Each contract is for 5000 bushels, so the cost per contract is 5000 × $.15 = $750. For 10 contracts, the cost will be $7,500.
If wheat prices turn out to be $3, then GGF will not exercise the put options (why not?). Its crop is worth $150,000, but it is out the $7,500 cost of the options, so it nets $142,500.
If wheat prices fall to $1, the crop is worth $50,000. GGF will exercise its puts (why?) and thereby force the seller of the puts to pay $2 per bushel. GGF receives a total of $100,000. If we subtract the cost of the puts, we see that GGF’s net is $92,500. In fact, verify that its net at any price of $2 or lower is $92,500.
Concepts Review and Critical Thinking Questions 1. (LO3) If a firm is selling futures contracts on lumber as a
hedging strategy, what must be true about the firm’s exposure to lumber prices?
2. (LO3) If a firm is buying call options on pork belly futures as a hedging strategy, what must be true about the firm’s expo- sure to pork belly prices?
3. (LO4) What is the difference between a forward contract and a futures contract? Why do you think that futures contracts are much more common? Are there any circumstances under which you might prefer to use forwards instead of futures? Explain.
4. (LO3) Bubbling Crude Corporation, a large Alberta oil pro- ducer, would like to hedge against adverse movements in the price of oil, since this is the firm’s primary source of revenue. What should the firm do? Provide at least two reasons why it probably will not be possible to achieve a completely flat risk profile with respect to oil prices.
5. (LO3) A company produces an energy intensive product and uses natural gas as the energy source. The competition pri- marily uses oil. Explain why this company is exposed to fluc- tuations in both oil and natural gas prices.
6. (LO4, 5) If a textile manufacturer wanted to hedge against adverse movements in cotton prices, it could buy cotton fu- tures contracts or buy call options on cotton futures contracts. What would be the pros and cons of the two approaches?
7. (LO5) Explain why a put option on a bond is conceptually the same as a call option on interest rates.
8. (LO3, 4, 5) A company has a large bond issue maturing in one year. When it matures, the company will float a new issue. Current interest rates are attractive, and the company is con- cerned that rates next year will be higher. What are some hedging strategies that the company might use in this case?
9. (LO5) Explain why a swap is effectively a series of forward contracts. Suppose a firm enters into a swap agreement with a swap dealer. Describe the nature of the default risk faced by both parties.
10. (LO5) Suppose a firm enters into a fixed-for-floating interest rate swap with a swap dealer. Describe the cash flows that will occur as a result of the swap.
11. (LO3) What is the difference between transactions and eco- nomic exposure? Which can be hedged more easily? Why?
12. (LO4) Refer to Figure 24.6 in the text to answer this question. If a Canadian company exports its goods to the U.S., how would it use a U.S.-traded futures contract on Canadian dol- lars to hedge its exchange rate risk? Would it buy or sell Cana- dians futures? In answering, pay attention to how the exchange rate is quoted in the futures contract.
13. (LO4) For the following scenarios, describe a hedging strat- egy using futures contracts that might be considered. If you think that a cross-hedge would be appropriate, discuss the reasons for your choice of contract.
a. A public utility is concerned about rising costs. b. A candy manufacturer is concerned about rising costs. c. A corn farmer fears that this year’s harvest will be at re-
cord high levels across the country. d. A manufacturer of photographic film is concerned about
rising costs. e. A natural gas producer believes there will be excess sup-
ply in the market this year. f. A bank derives all its income from long-term, fixed-rate
residential mortgages. g. A stock mutual fund invests in large, blue-chip stocks
and is concerned about a decline in the stock market. h. A Canadian importer of Swiss army knives will pay for its
order in six months in Swiss francs. i. A Canadian exporter of construction equipment has
agreed to sell some cranes to a German construction firm. The Canadian firm will be paid in euros in three months.
14. (LO5) Looking back at the Telus example we used to open the chapter, why would you say Telus used swap cross-cur- reny agreements? In other words, why didn’t Telus just go ahead and issue say, floating-rate bonds in Canada since the net effect of issuing fixed-rate U.S. bonds and then doing two swaps is to create a floating-rate Canadian dollar bond?
15. (LO2) The sub-prime crisis demonstrated the enormous so- cial costs arising from the misuse of financial engineering. What do you think caused this misuse? How can it be pre- vented in the future?
708 Part 9: Derivative Securities and Corporate Finance
24Ross_Chapter24_3rd.indd 70824Ross_Chapter24_3rd.indd 708 12-11-28 12:5112-11-28 12:51
Questions and Problems 1. Futures Quotes (LO4) Refer to Figure 24.6 in the text to answer this question. Suppose you purchase a May 2013 canola futures
contract on June 20, 2012. What will your profit or loss be if the canola prices turn out to be $537.25 per metric tonne at expiration? 2. Futures Quotes (LO4) Refer to Figure 24.6 in the text to answer this question. Supposed you sell June 2013 gold futures on June
20, 2012. What will your profit or loss be if gold prices turn out to be $1,590 per ounce at expiration? What if gold prices are $1,750 per ounce at expiration?
3. Futures Options Quotes (LO5) Refer to Figure 24.11 in the text to answer this question. Suppose you purchase an August 2012 call option on crude oil futures with a strike price of 8500 cents per barrel. How much does your option cost per barrel of oil? What is the total cost? Suppose the price of oil futures is 9000 cents per barrel at expiration of the options contract. What is your net profit or loss from this position? What if oil futures prices are 8000 cents per barrel at expiration?
4. Put and Call Payoffs (LO5) Suppose a financial manager buys call options on 50,000 barrels of oil with an exercise price of $83 per barrel. She simultaneously sells a put option on 50,000 barrels of oil with the same exercise price of $83 per barrel. Consider her gains and losses of oil prices are $75, $72, $80, $83, and $85. What if oil futures prices are $88.24 per barrel at expiration?
5. Hedging with Futures (LO4) Refer to Figure 24.6 in the text to answer this question. Suppose today is June 20, 2012, and your firm is a jewellery manufacturer that needs 1000 ounces of gold in October for the fall production run. You would like to lock in your costs today, because you’re concerned that gold prices might go up between now and October.
a. How could you use gold futures contracts to hedge your risk exposure? What price would you be effectively locking in? b. Suppose gold prices are $1,580 per ounce in October. What is the profit or loss on your futures position? Explain how your
futures position has eliminated your exposure to price risk in the gold market. 6. Interest Rate Swaps (LO5) ABC Company and XYZ Company need to raise funds to pay for capital improvements at their
manufacturing plants. ABC Company is a well-established firm with an excellent credit rating in the debt market; it can borrow funds either at 11 percent fixed rate or at LIBOR + 1 percent floating rate. XYZ Company is a fledgling start-up firm without a strong credit history. It can borrow funds either at 10 percent fixed rate or at LIBOR + 3 percent floating rate.
a. Is there an opportunity here for ABC and XYZ to benefit by means of an interest rate swap? b. Suppose you’ve just been hired at a bank that acts as a dealer in the swaps market, and your boss has shown you the bor-
rowing rate information for your clients ABC and XYZ. Describe how you could bring these two companies together in an interest rate swap that would make both firms better off, while netting your bank a 2.0 percent profit.
7. Insurance (LO1, 2) Suppose your company has a building worth $450 million. Because it is located in a high-risk area for natural disasters, the probability of a total loss in any particular year is 1.5 percent. What is your company’s expected loss per year on this building?
8. Financial Engineering (LO5) Suppose there were call options and forward contracts available on coal, but no put options. Show how a financial engineer could synthesize a put option using the available contracts. What does your answer tell you about the general relationship between puts, calls, and forwards?
9. Hedging (LO3, 4, 5) You are assigned to the risk management department of Torbram Wheels Inc., a Canadian chain of auto service shops with outlets in North America and internationally. Your office is located in Mississauga, Ontario, Canada and the earnings of Torbram are stated in Canadian dollars. Your responsibility is to manage the foreign exchange risk arising from operations in the European Community.
The current exchange rate is $1.29 U.S. per euro. Currently Torbram earns net profits from EC operations of 1.2 million euros per month, which are repatriated to the Canadian head office. The firm also has pension obligations to retired employees in the EC of 2 million euros per month. Pension funds for the entire company are managed in the Canadian head office and invested in Canadian assets. While the pension obligations are quite stable, monthly profits are subject to fluctuation with economic conditions and seasonality.
The CFO has identified one month as the appropriate planning horizon and foreign exchange forward contracts with a major bank, currency futures and currency futures options (puts and calls) as possible hedging vehicles. To complete your engagement, do the following:
a Assess Torbram’s exchange rate exposure. b. Explain how Torbram could hedge with each of the possible vehicles. For each, state the appropriate position (buy or sell)
and state your reasons briefly. c. Suppose the CFO is committed to hedging all the foreign exchange risk from European operations. How would these
considerations affect your recommendation on the best choice of hedging vehicle? 10. Insurance (LO1, 2) In calculating an insurance premium, the actuarially fair insurance premium is the premium that results in
a zero NPV for both the insured and the insurer. As such, the present value of the expected loss is the actuarially fair insurance premium. Suppose your company wants to insure a building worth $380 million. The probability of loss is 1.25 percent in one year and the relevant discount rate is 4 percent.
a. What is the actuarially fair insurance premium? b. Suppose that you can make modifications to the building that will reduce the probability of a loss to 0.90 percent. How
much would you be willing to pay for these modifications?
Basic (Questions
1–4) 2
3
Intermediate (Questions
5–7)
Challenge (Questions
8–10)
Chapter 24: Enterprise Risk Management 709
24Ross_Chapter24_3rd.indd 70924Ross_Chapter24_3rd.indd 709 12-11-28 12:5112-11-28 12:51
Johnson Mortgage Inc.
Danielle Johnson recently received her finance degree and has decided to enter the mortgage broker business. Rather than working for someone else, she will open her own shop. Her cousin Paul has approached her about a mortgage for a house he is building. The house will be completed in three months, and he will need the mortgage at that time. Paul wants a 25- year, fixed-rate mortgage in the amount of $500,000 with monthly payments. Danielle has agreed to lend Paul the money in three months at the current market rate of 6 percent. Because Dani- elle is just starting out, she does not have $500,000 available for the loan; so she approaches William Wheaton, the presi- dent of IT Insurance Corporation, about purchasing the mort- gage from her in three months. William has agreed to purchase the mortgage in three months, but he is unwilling to set a price on the mortgage. Instead, he has agreed in writing to purchase the mortgage at the market rate in three months. There are Government of Canada bond futures contracts avail- able for delivery in three months. A Government of Canada bond contract is for $100,000 in face value of ten-year Gov- ernment of Canada bonds.
Questions
1. What is the monthly mortgage payment on Paul’s mortgage?
2. What is the most significant risk Danielle faces in this deal?
3. How can Danielle hedge this risk? 4. Suppose that in the next three months the market rate of
interest rises to 7 percent. a. How much will William be willing to pay for the
mortgage? b. What will happen to the value of Government of
Canada bond futures contracts? Will the long or short position increase in value?
5. Suppose that in the next three months the market rate of interest falls to 5 percent.
a. How much will William be willing to pay for the mortgage?
b. What will happen to the value of Government of Canada bond futures contracts? Will the long or short position increase in value?
6. Are there any possible risks Danielle faces in using Gov- ernment of Canada bond futures contracts to hedge her interest rate risk?
MINI CASE
Internet Application Questions 1. Value at Risk is a powerful tool to analyze the risk of a portfolio. VaR attempts to estimate the dollar loss on a portfolio based
on small probabilities. The following link explains all about VaR. gloriamundi.org
Assuming that returns on a portfolio are normally distributed, reconcile the VaR measure to more traditional measures of risk such as the standard deviation of returns.
2. ICE Futures Canada provides several educational tools to help understand the world of futures trading. The following link explains the mechanics of futures trading and common futures jargon, and provides examples of hedging. theice.com/KnowledgeCenter.shtml
Explain how a wheat farmer in Saskatchewan as well as a baker in Quebec can benefit from using futures. 3. Information on derivative instruments and markets can be found at numa.com. Among the references you can access is an
“Options Strategy Guide.” What technique(s) does the guide suggest if you are moderately bullish on the market? What about if you are neutral, expecting short-term weakness, and a longer term rally?
4. The Montreal Exchange is the main market for derivative products in Canada. The exchange provides an options calculator on its website at m-x.ca/accueil_en.php. Locate an option in the newspaper or on the exchange’s website, and calculate its value using the online calculator.
5. National Futures Association (NFA) is the industry-wide, self-regulatory organization for the U.S. futures industry. Go to ‘Video Library’ section of NFA (www.nfa.futures.org/NFA-video-library/index.html) to look at the video tutorials on a variety of registration and compliance-related topics.
6. Chicago Board Options Exchange (CBOE) is the largest U.S. options exchange and creator of listed options. CBOE’s educa- tional initiatives come together in a comprehensive, online learning hub that offers option investors a foundation to build their knowledge and confidence when trading. Go to ‘Learning Centre’ of CBOE (www.cboe.com/LearnCenter/Default.aspx) and click on ‘Online Tutorials’ (www.cboe.com/LearnCenter/Tutorials.aspx). Read through the tutorials to understand the basics of Options.
710 Part 9: Derivative Securities and Corporate Finance
24Ross_Chapter24_3rd.indd 71024Ross_Chapter24_3rd.indd 710 12-11-28 12:5112-11-28 12:51
Our previous chapter briefl y examined options and their use in risk management. Options are a much broader topic, however, and there is much more to them than we have discussed so far. In fact, options are a part of everyday life. “Keep your options open” is sound business advice, and “We’re out of options” is a sure sign of trouble. Options are obviously valuable, but actually put- ting a dollar value on one is not easy. How to value options is an important topic of research, and option pricing is one of the great success stories of modern fi nance.
In fi nance, an option is an arrangement that gives its owner the right to buy or sell an asset at a fi xed price anytime on or before a given date. Th e most familiar options are stock options. Th ese are options to buy and sell shares of common stock, and we discuss them in some detail. Almost all corporate securities have implicit or explicit option features. Furthermore, the use of such features is expanding with the growth of fi nancial engineering. As a result, understanding securities that involve option features requires a general knowledge of the factors that determine an option’s value.
Th is chapter starts with a description of diff erent types of options. We identify and discuss the general factors that determine option values and show how ordinary debt and equity have option-like characteristics. We then illustrate how option features are incorporated into corporate securities by discussing warrants, convertible bonds, and other option-like securities.
25.1 Options: The Basics
An option is a contract that gives its owner the right to buy or sell some asset at a fi xed price on or before a given date. For example, an option on a building might give the holder of the option the right to buy the building for $1 million anytime on or before the Saturday before the third Wednesday in January 2016.
Options are a unique type of fi nancial contract because they give the buyer the right, but not the obligation, to do something. Th e buyer uses the option only if it is profi table to do so; other- wise the option can be thrown away.
option A contract that gives its owner the right to buy or sell some asset at a fixed price on or before a given date.
OPTIONS AND CORPORATE SECURITIES
C H A P T E R 2 5
O n June 22, 2012, IMAX Corporation, one of the world’s leading entertainment technology companies, headquartered in Mississauga, Ontario,
had a call option trading on the Montreal Exchange
with a $25 exercise price and an expiration date of
July 12, 20 days away. On the same day, Cineplex Inc.
had a call option with a similar exercise price of $25
and the same expiration date of July 12, 2012. Despite
having the same exercise price and expiration date,
the prices of the call option on these two stocks were
different. The IMAX call option was selling at $0.52,
and the Cineplex call option had a price of $4.20. In
this chapter we will discuss the basics of options and
also explore the factors affecting the price of options.
Learning Object ives
After studying this chapter, you should understand:
LO1 The basics of call and put options and how to calculate their payoffs and profits.
LO2 The factors that affect option values and how to price call and put options using no arbitrage conditions.
LO3 The basics of employee stock options and their benefits and disadvantages.
LO4 How to value a firm’s equity as an option on the firm’s assets and use of option valuation to evaluate capital budgeting projects.
LO5 The basics of convertible bonds and warrants and how to value them.
Th e
IM A
X ®
s ym
bo l i
s us
ed w
ith t
he p
er m
is si
on o
f I M
A X
C
or p
or at
io n.
IM A
X ®
is a
r eg
is te
re d
tr ad
em ar
k of
IM A
X
C or
p or
at io
n.
25Ross_Chapter25_3rd.indd 71125Ross_Chapter25_3rd.indd 711 12-11-28 12:5212-11-28 12:52
Th ere is a special vocabulary associated with options. Here are some important defi nitions:
1. Exercising the option. The act of buying or selling the underlying asset via the option con- tract is called exercising the option.
2. Striking price or exercise price. The fixed price specified in the option contract at which the holder can buy or sell the underlying asset is called the striking price or exercise price. The striking price is often just called the strike price.
3. Expiration date. An option usually has a limited life. The option is said to expire at the end of its life. The last day on which the option can be exercised is called the expiration date.
4. American options and European options. An American option may be exercised anytime up to the expiration date. A European option can be exercised only on the expiration date.
Puts and Calls As we discussed in our previous chapter, options come in two basic types: puts and calls. Call options are the more common of the two and our discussion focuses mostly on calls. A call option gives the owner the right to buy an asset at a fi xed price during a particular time period. It may help you to remember that a call option gives you the right to “call in” an asset.
A put option is essentially the opposite of a call option. Instead of giving the holder the right to buy some asset, it gives the holder the right to sell that asset for a fi xed exercise price. If you buy a put option, you can force the seller to buy the asset from you for a fi xed price and thereby “put it to him.”
What about an investor who sells a call option? Th e seller receives money up front and has the obligation to sell the asset at the exercise price if the option holder wants it. Similarly, an investor who sells a put option receives cash up front and is then obligated to buy the asset at the exercise price if the option holder demands it.1
Th e asset involved in an option could be anything. Th e options that are most widely bought and sold, however, are stock options. Th ese are options to buy and sell shares of stock. Because these are the best-known options, we study them fi rst. As we discuss stock options, keep in mind that the general principles apply to options involving any asset, not just shares of stock.
Stock Option Quotations In the 1970s and 1980s, organized trading in options grew from literally zero into some of the world’s largest markets. Th e tremendous growth in interest in derivative securities resulted from the greatly increased volatility in fi nancial markets, which we discussed in Chapter 1.2 Exchange trading in options began in 1973 on the Chicago Board Options Exchange (CBOE). Th e CBOE is still the largest organized options market; options are traded in a number of other places today, including Montreal, London, Paris, Tokyo, and Hong Kong.
Option trading in Canada began in 1975 on the Montreal Exchange. Today options are traded on the Montreal Exchange and are cleared through the Canadian Derivatives Clearing Corp. (CDCC). Th e CDCC stands between option buyers and option sellers, called writers. Put and call options involving stock in some of the best-known corporations in Canada are traded daily. Almost all such options are American (as opposed to European). Trading in Canadian options and other derivative securities has grown rapidly as banks, pension funds, and other fi nancial institutions gain experience with hedging techniques using derivative securities.
To get started with option specifi cs, we look at a Montreal Exchange option quotation for a CDCC option:
1 An investor who sells an option is often said to have “written” the option. 2 Our discussion of the history of options trading draws on L. Gagnon, “Exchange-Traded Financial Derivatives in Can- ada: Finally Off the Launching Pad,” Canadian Investment Review, Fall 1990, pp. 63–70, and J. Ilkiw, “From Suspicion to Optimism: The Story of Derivative Use by Pension Funds in Canada,” Canadian Investment Review, Summer 1994, pp. 19–22.
exercising the option The act of buying or selling the underlying asset via the option contract.
striking price The fixed price in the option contract at which the holder can buy or sell the underlying asset. Also the exercise price or strike price.
expiration date The last day on which an option can be exercised.
American option An option that can be exercised at any time until its expiration date.
European option An option that can be exercised only on the expiration date.
call option The right to buy an asset at a fixed price during a particular period of time.
put option The right to sell an asset at a fixed price during a particular period of time. The opposite of a call option.
cboe.com
712 Part 9: Derivative Securities and Corporate Finance
25Ross_Chapter25_3rd.indd 71225Ross_Chapter25_3rd.indd 712 12-11-28 12:5212-11-28 12:52
BNS - Bank of Nova Scotia (Call Option): Last Price: 53.110
Month / Strike Bid Price Ask Price Last Price Impl. Vol. Vol.
+ 12 JL 50.000 3.100 3.200 3.100 18.27 35
+ 13 JA 42.000 11.150 11.350 11.000 31.70 10
Th e fi rst thing listed here is the company identifi er, BNS. Th is tells us these options involve the right to buy or sell shares of stock in Bank of Nova Scotia. To the right of the company identifi er is the closing price of the stock. As of the close of business (in Montreal), Bank of Nova Scotia was selling for $53.11 per share.
Inside the table are the expiration date and strike price for the fi rst call option. “12 JL” means the option expires in July 2012. All CDCC options expire aft er the close of trading on the third Friday of the expiration month. Th e fi rst Bank of Nova Scotia option listed here has an exercise price of $50. Th e second option also has an exercise price of $42.
Th e fi rst option listed would be described as the “BNS $50 call.” Th e asking price for this option is $3.20. If you pay the $3.20, you have the right, between now and the third Friday in July, to buy one share of Bank of Nova Scotia stock for $50. Actually, trading occurs in round lots (multiples of 100 shares), so one option contract costs $3.20 × 100 = $320.
Figure 25.1 contains a more detailed quote reproduced from the Montreal Exchange. (You can get option quotes online at the Montreal Exchange’s website.) From our previous discussion, we know that these are Bank of Nova Scotia options and the Bank of Nova Scotia closed at $53.11 per share on the TSX. Notice that multiple striking prices ranging from $38 to $70 are available. Expiration dates range from July 2012 to January 2015.
To check your understanding of option quotes, suppose you wanted the right to buy 100 shares of Aurizon Mines Ltd. for $5 any time between now and the third Friday in August 2012. What should you order and how much will it cost you?
Since you want the right to buy the stock for $5, you need to buy a call option with a $5 exercise price. Place an order for one ARZ 2012 August $5 call. Since the August $5 call is quoted at $0.31 asking price, you have to pay $0.31 per share, or $31 in all (plus commission).
Option Payoffs Looking at Figure 25.1, suppose you were to buy 50 BNS 2012 July $52 call contracts. Th e option is quoted at a $1.28 asking price, so the contracts cost $128 each. You would spend a total of 50 × $128 = $6,400. You wait a while and the expiration date rolls around. Now what? You have the right to buy Bank of Nova Scotia stock for $52 per share. If Bank of Nova Scotia is selling for less than $52 a share, this option isn’t worth anything, and you throw it away. In this case, we say the option has fi nished “out of the money” since the exercise price exceeds the stock price. Suppose Bank of Nova Scotia rises to, say, $59 per share. Since you have the right to buy Bank of Nova Scotia at $52, you make a profi t of $7 on each share on exercise. Each contract involves 100 shares, so you make $7 per share × 100 shares per contract = $700 per contract. Finally, you own 50 contracts, so the value of your options is a handsome $35,000. Notice that since you invested $6,400, your net profi t is $28,600.
Ending Stock Price
Option Value (50 Contracts) Net Profit (Loss)
Stock Value (121 shares) Net Profit (Loss)
$45 $— $ (6,400) $5,445 $ (955) 50 $— $ (6,400) $6,050 $ (350) 55 $15,000 $ 8,600 $6,655 $ 255 60 $40,000 $33,600 $7,260 $ 860 65 $65,000 $58,600 $7,865 $1,465 70 $90,000 $83,600 $8,470 $2,070
As our example indicates, the gains and losses from buying call options can be quite large. To illustrate further, suppose you had simply purchased the stock with $6,400 at $53.11 each instead of buying call options. You would have about $6,400/53.11 = 120.50 shares (approximately 121 shares). We can now compare what you have when the options expire for diff erent stock prices.
Th e option position clearly magnifi es the gains and losses on the stock by a substantial amount. Th e reason is that payoff on your 50 option contracts is based on 50 × 100 = 5000 shares of stock instead of just 121.
scotiabank.com
m-x.ca
CHAPTER 25: Options and Corporate Securities 713
25Ross_Chapter25_3rd.indd 71325Ross_Chapter25_3rd.indd 713 12-11-28 12:5212-11-28 12:52
FIGURE 25.1
Options quotations, June 22, 2012
BNS – Bank of Nova Scotia (The) Last update: June 22, 2012, 13:44 Montréal time- (DATA 15 MINUTES DELAYED) Refresh | Print Last Price: 53.110 Net Change: 0.700 Bid Price: 53.110 Ask Price: 53.120 30-Day Historical Volatility: 19.14%
Calls Puts
Month / Strike Bid
Price Ask
Price Last Price
lmpl. Vol. Vol. Month / Strike
Bid Price
Ask Price
Last Price
lmpl. Vol. Vol.
+ 12 JL 38.000 15.050 15.200 14.550 68.82 0 + 12 JL 38.000 0.000 0.060 0.070 53.88 0 + 12 JL 40.000 13.050 13.200 12.550 59.71 0 + 12 JL 40.000 0.000 0.060 0.070 46.69 0 + 12 JL 42.000 11.050 11.200 10.550 50.92 0 + 12 JL 42.000 0.000 0.060 0.070 39.53 0 + 12 JL 44.000 9.100 9.200 8.600 44.03 0 + 12 JL 44.000 0.010 0.070 0.090 34.05 0 + 12 JL 46.000 7.100 7.200 7.000 35.45 5 + 12 JL 46.000 0.030 0.100 0.100 29.01 0 + 12 JL 48.000 5.050 5.200 4.550 25.78 0 + 12 JL 48.000 0.070 0.140 0.190 24.44 0 + 12 JL 50.000 3.100 3.200 3.100 18.27 35 + 12 JL 50.000 0.230 0.280 0.450 21.41 0 + 12 JL 52.000 1.350 1.400 1.280 13.61 40 + 12 JL 52.000 0.700 0.750 1.090 19.61 0 + 12 JL 53.000 0.740 0.800 0.750 13.18 10 + 12 JL 53.000 1.120 1.220 1.640 19.44 0 + 12 JL 54.000 0.350 0.390 0.330 12.92 120 + 12 JL 54.000 1.740 1.860 1.990 20.29 2 + 12 JL 56.000 0.050 0.100 0.070 13.85 0 + 12 JL 56.000 3.400 3.550 4.200 25.14 0 + 12 JL 58.000 0.010 0.060 0.060 N/Av 0 + 12 JL 58.000 5.350 5.500 6.150 32.58 0 + 12 JL 60.000 0.010 0.060 0.060 N/Av 0 + 12 JL 60.000 7.350 7.500 8.150 40.25 0 + 12 JL 62.000 0.000 0.040 0.040 N/Av 0 + 12 JL 62.000 9.350 9.500 10.150 47.27 0 + 12 JL 64.000 0.000 0.040 0.040 N/Av 0 + 12 JL 64.000 11.350 11.500 12.150 53.78 0 + 12 JL 66.000 0.000 0.040 0.040 N/Av 0 + 12 JL 66.000 13.350 13.500 14.150 59.91 0 + 12 JL 68.000 0.000 0.040 0.040 N/Av 0 + 12 JL 68.000 15.350 15.500 16.150 65.70 0 + 12 JL 70.000 0.000 0.040 0.040 N/Av 0 + 12 JL 70.000 17.350 17.500 18.150 71.20 0 + 12 AU 42.000 11.050 11.200 10.600 41.83 0 + 12 AU 42.000 0.060 0.140 0.150 33.71 0 + 12 AU 44.000 9.050 9.200 8.600 35.04 0 + 12 AU 44.000 0.100 0.150 0.210 29.26 0 + 12 AU 46.000 7.000 7.200 6.600 28.36 0 + 12 AU 46.000 0.180 0.220 0.320 26.20 0 + 12 AU 48.000 5.100 5.200 4.650 22.32 0 + 12 AU 48.000 0.330 0.380 0.450 23.41 10 + 12 AU 50.000 3.300 3.400 3.200 18.56 10 + 12 AU 50.000 0.620 0.710 0.900 21.24 0 + 12 AU 52.000 1.800 1.850 1.600 16.87 0 + 12 AU 52.000 1.190 1.290 1.280 19.55 229 + 12 AU 54.000 0.790 0.850 0.820 15.66 395 + 12 AU 54.000 2.170 2.270 2.220 18.68 44 + 12 AU 56.000 0.250 0.290 0.230 14.92 0 + 12 AU 56.000 3.600 3.700 4.300 18.97 0 + 12 AU 58.000 0.050 0.100 0.100 14.72 0 + 12 AU 58.000 5.400 5.550 6.150 21.38 0 + 12 AU 60.000 0.000 0.060 0.060 N/Av 0 + 12 AU 60.000 7.350 7.500 8.150 25.98 0 + 12 AU 62.000 0.000 0.040 0.040 N/Av 0 + 12 AU 62.000 9.350 9.500 10.150 30.70 0 + 12 OC 40.000 13.050 13.200 12.600 40.10 0 + 12 OC 40.000 0.240 0.270 0.300 32.06 34 + 12 OC 42.000 11.050 11.200 10.600 35.02 0 + 12 OC 42.000 0.330 0.380 0.480 29.97 0 + 12 OC 44.000 9.100 9.200 8.700 29.58 0 + 12 OC 44.000 0.480 0.530 0.700 27.92 0 + 12 OC 46.000 7.200 7.350 6.900 25.97 0 + 12 OC 46.000 0.700 0.760 0.930 26.05 0 + 12 OC 48.000 5.500 5.600 5.200 23.28 0 + 12 OC 48.000 1.030 1.100 1.340 24.46 0 + 12 OC 50.000 3.950 4.000 4.000 21.24 22 + 12 OC 50.000 1.530 1.610 1.900 22.82 0 + 12 OC 52.000 2.610 2.680 2.500 19.70 4 + 12 OC 52.000 2.250 2.330 2.710 21.56 0 + 12 OC 54.000 1.540 1.600 1.460 18.20 95 + 12 OC 54.000 3.200 3.350 3.800 20.71 0 + 12 OC 56.000 0.780 0.820 0.780 16.86 106 + 12 OC 56.000 4.500 4.650 5.150 20.21 0 + 12 OC 58.000 0.330 0.370 0.320 15.93 0 + 12 OC 58.000 6.050 6.200 6.800 20.32 0 + 12 OC 60.000 0.120 0.160 0.150 15.22 0 + 12 OC 60.000 7.850 8.000 8.600 21.80 0 + 12 OC 62.000 0.040 0.120 0.120 N/Av 0 + 12 OC 62.000 9.800 9.900 10.550 24.23 0 + 12 OC 64.000 0.000 0.060 0.060 N/Av 0 + 12 OC 64.000 11.750 11.900 12.500 26.62 0 + 12 OC 66.000 0.000 0.040 0.040 N/Av 0 + 12 OC 66.000 13.700 13.900 14.500 29.18 0 + 12 OC 68.000 0.000 0.040 0.040 N/Av 0 + 12 OC 68.000 15.700 15.850 16.500 32.03 0 + 12 OC 70.000 0.000 0.040 0.040 N/Av 0 + 12 OC 70.000 17.700 17.850 18.500 34.75 0 + 13 JA 40.000 13.000 13.250 12.650 35.92 0 + 13 JA 40.000 0.620 0.680 0.790 30.35 0 + 13 JA 42.000 11.150 11.350 11.000 31.70 10 + 13 JA 42.000 0.810 0.880 1.020 28.77 0 + 13 JA 44.000 9.300 9.500 9.000 28.69 0 + 13 JA 44.000 1.090 1.180 1.350 27.20 0 + 13 JA 46.000 7.650 7.800 7.350 26.66 0 + 13 JA 46.000 1.450 1.570 1.760 25.84 0 + 13 JA 48.000 6.100 6.250 5.850 24.40 0 + 13 JA 48.000 1.940 2.070 2.280 24.54 0 + 13 JA 50.000 4.650 4.800 4.450 23.17 0 + 13 JA 50.000 2.570 2.660 2.900 23.41 2 + 13 JA 52.000 3.400 3.550 3.250 21.62 0 + 13 JA 52.000 3.350 3.500 3.850 22.43 0 + 13 JA 54.000 2.360 2.450 2.260 20.33 0 + 13 JA 54.000 4.350 4.500 4.900 21.60 0
714 Part 9: Derivative Securities and Corporate Finance
25Ross_Chapter25_3rd.indd 71425Ross_Chapter25_3rd.indd 714 12-11-28 12:5212-11-28 12:52
Calls Puts
Month / Strike Bid
Price Ask
Price Last Price
lmpl. Vol. Vol. Month / Strike
Bid Price
Ask Price
Last Price
lmpl. Vol. Vol.
+ 13 JA 56.000 1.510 1.620 1.500 19.11 3 + 13 JA 56.000 5.550 5.700 6.200 20.75 0 + 13 JA 58.000 0.900 0.950 0.900 17.85 2 + 13 JA 58.000 6.950 7.100 7.650 20.26 0 + 13 JA 60.000 0.490 0.540 0.470 17.04 1 + 13 JA 60.000 8.550 8.700 9.300 20.21 0 + 13 JA 62.000 0.260 0.310 0.290 16.62 0 + 13 JA 62.000 10.300 10.450 11.050 20.61 0 + 13 JA 64.000 0.130 0.170 0.170 16.54 0 + 13 JA 64.000 12.150 12.300 12.950 21.42 0 + 14 JA 44.000 10.250 10.600 10.250 29.18 0 + 14 JA 44.000 3.450 3.600 4.000 26.76 0 + 14 JA 46.000 8.950 9.200 8.950 27.81 0 + 14 JA 46.000 4.100 4.350 4.800 26.24 0 + 14 JA 48.000 7.650 7.900 7.650 26.50 0 + 14 JA 48.000 4.950 5.150 5.600 25.56 0 + 14 JA 50.000 6.400 6.800 6.450 25.71 0 + 14 JA 50.000 5.750 6.000 6.500 25.02 0 + 14 JA 52.000 5.350 5.650 5.400 24.66 0 + 14 JA 52.000 6.800 7.000 7.550 24.22 0 + 14 JA 54.000 4.400 4.650 4.550 23.66 0 + 14 JA 54.000 7.800 8.100 8.650 23.74 0 + 14 JA 56.000 3.600 3.800 3.750 22.87 0 + 14 JA 56.000 9.000 9.250 9.850 23.39 0 + 14 JA 58.000 2.850 3.100 3.050 22.25 0 + 14 JA 58.000 10.250 10.650 11.150 22.88 0 + 14 JA 60.000 2.250 2.470 2.460 21.66 0 + 14 JA 60.000 11.650 12.050 12.600 22.53 0 + 14 JA 62.000 1.740 1.950 1.880 21.27 0 + 14 JA 62.000 13.150 13.550 14.150 22.05 0 + 14 JA 64.000 1.350 1.450 1.450 20.46 1 + 14 JA 64.000 14.650 15.200 15.750 21.93 0 + 15 JA 48.000 8.550 9.000 8.800 27.66 0 + 15 JA 48.000 7.250 7.550 7.450 26.33 10 + 15 JA 50.000 7.450 7.950 7.750 26.77 0 + 15 JA 50.000 8.300 8.600 9.050 25.71 0 + 15 JA 52.000 6.500 7.000 6.850 26.17 0 + 15 JA 52.000 9.300 9.650 10.150 25.45 0 + 15 JA 54.000 5.700 6.100 5.900 25.43 0 + 15 JA 54.000 10.400 10.850 11.450 25.05 0 + 15 JA 56.000 4.950 5.300 5.150 24.90 0 + 15 JA 56.000 11.650 12.150 12.650 24.60 0 Total 859 Total 331
ARZ – Aurizon Mines Ltd. Last update: June 22, 2012, 14:09 Montréal time- (DATA 15 MINUTES DELAYED) Refresh | Print Last Price: 4.680 Net Change: –0.040 Bid Price: 4.680 Ask Price: 4.690 30-Day Historical Volatility: 67.53%
Calls Puts
Month / Strike Bid
Price Ask
Price Last Price
lmpl. Vol. Vol. Month / Strike
Bid Price
Ask Price
Last Price
lmpl. Vol. Vol.
+ 12 JL 2.500 2.170 2.210 2.230 110.90 0 + 12 JL 2.500 0.000 0.070 0.080 145.23 0 + 12 JL 3.000 1.670 1.720 1.730 88.59 0 + 12 JL 3.000 0.000 0.070 0.080 108.87 0 + 12 JL 4.000 0.710 0.780 0.790 58.75 0 + 12 JL 4.000 0.040 0.100 0.090 61.27 0 + 12 JL 5.000 0.120 0.180 0.190 52.50 0 + 12 JL 5.000 0.420 0.490 0.510 50.07 0 + 12 JL 6.000 0.010 0.050 0.060 62.06 0 + 12 JL 6.000 1.300 1.360 1.350 N/Av 0 + 12 JL 7.000 0.000 0.070 0.080 N/Av 0 + 12 JL 7.000 2.290 2.340 2.340 N/Av 0 + 12 JL 8.000 0.000 0.070 0.080 N/Av 0 + 12 JL 8.0 00 3.250 3.350 3.350 N/Av 0 + 12 AU 3.000 1.690 1.740 1.750 74.95 0 + 12 AU 3.000 0.010 0.090 0.100 84.12 0 + 12 AU 4.000 0.810 0.870 0.870 60.61 0 + 12 AU 4.000 0.120 0.160 0.170 57.85 0 + 12 AU 5.000 0.280 0.310 0.320 57.53 0 + 12 AU 5.000 0.560 0.610 0.620 54.29 0 + 12 AU 6.000 0.060 0.110 0.130 58.13 0 + 12 AU 6.000 1.290 1.410 1.410 46.36 0 + 12 AU 7.000 0.010 0.090 0.110 70.26 0 + 12 AU 7.000 2.290 2.360 2.350 N/Av 0 + 12 OC 2.500 2.200 2.260 2.270 73.81 0 + 12 OC 2.500 0.020 0.140 0.120 86.62 0 + 12 OC 3.000 1.750 1.810 1.820 68.47 0 + 12 OC 3.000 0.050 0.110 0.100 65.88 0 + 12 OC 4.000 0.960 1.010 1.030 58.48 0 + 12 OC 4.000 0.260 0.300 0.300 56.99 0 + 12 OC 5.000 0.440 0.490 0.500 55.23 0 + 12 OC 5.000 0.730 0.780 0.790 53.83 0 + 12 OC 6.000 0.180 0.220 0.240 54.45 0 + 12 OC 6.000 1.460 1.520 1.530 53.08 0 + 12 OC 7.000 0.070 0.120 0.150 56.52 0 + 12 OC 7.000 2.350 2.430 2.420 55.87 0 + 13 JA 2.500 2.250 2.320 2.330 67.78 0 + 13 JA 2.500 0.060 0.110 0.110 66.54 0 + 13 JA 3.000 1.820 1.900 1.910 62.95 0 + 13 JA 3.000 0.120 0.160 0.170 59.63 0 + 13 JA 4.000 1.110 1.180 1.190 57.13 0 + 13 JA 4.000 0.400 0.450 0.450 55.69 0 + 13 JA 5.000 0.620 0.680 0.700 54.30 0 + 13 JA 5.000 0.890 0.960 0.970 53.14 0 + 13 JA 6.000 0.330 0.390 0.410 53.59 0 + 13 JA 6.000 1.600 1.670 1.670 52.78 0 + 13 JA 7.000 0.180 0.230 0.240 54.10 0 + 13 JA 7.000 2.440 2.520 2.520 53.64 0 Total 0 Total 0
Source: Montreal Exchange, June 22, 2012. Used with permission. (m-x.ca/nego_liste_en.php)
CHAPTER 25: Options and Corporate Securities 715
25Ross_Chapter25_3rd.indd 71525Ross_Chapter25_3rd.indd 715 12-11-28 12:5212-11-28 12:52
In our example, if the stock price changes by only a small amount, you lose all $6,400, with the option. With the stock, you still have about what you started with. Also notice that the option can never be worth less than zero because you can always just throw it away. As a result, you can never lose more than your original investment ($6,400 in our example).
Recognize that stock options are a zero-sum game. By this we mean that whatever the buyer of a stock option makes, the seller loses and vice versa. To illustrate, suppose that in our example you had sold 50 option contracts. You would receive $6,400 upfront, and you would be obligated to sell the stock for $52 if the buyer of the option wished to exercise it. In this situation, if the stock price ends up at or less than $52, you would be $6,400 ahead. If the stock price ends up more than $52, you have to sell something for less than it is worth, so you lose the diff erence. For example, if the stock price were $61, you would have to sell 50 × 100 = 5000 shares at $52 per share, so you would be out $61 - 52 = $9 per share, or $45,000. Because you received $6,400 up front, your net loss is $38,600. We can summarize some other possibilities as follows:
Ending Stock Price Net Profit to Option Seller
$45 $6,400 50 6,400 55 (8,600) 60 (33,600) 65 (58,600) 70 (83,600)
Notice that the net profi ts to the option buyer (just calculated) are the opposites of these amounts.
Put Payoffs Look at Figure 25.1. Suppose you buy 10 Aurizon 2012 October $5 put contracts. How much does this cost (ignoring commissions)? Just before the option expires, Aurizon is selling for $3 per share. Is this good news or bad news? What is your net profi t?
Th e option is quoted at 0.79, so one contract costs 100 × 0.79 = $79. Your 10 contracts total $790. You now have the right to sell 1000 shares of Aurizon for $5 per share—this is most defi - nitely good news. You can buy 1000 shares at $3 and sell them for $5. Your puts are thus worth $2 × 1000 = $2,000. Since you paid $790, your net profi t is $2,000 - $790 = $1,210.
Long-Term Options Figure 25.1 also shows listings for Long-Term Options. In the United States, this is referred to as Long-Term Equity Anticipation Securities or LEAPS for short. Th ese are long-term calls and puts that expire in January for terms of at least one year up to 2⅔ years. For example, Figure 25.1 lists call long-term options for Bank of Nova Scotia expiring in January 2013 and 2014—about 6 months and 1½ years respectively from the time of the price quotes.
1. What is a call option? A put option?
2. If you thought a stock was going to drop sharply in value, how might you use stock options to profit from the decline?
25.2 Fundamentals of Option Valuation
Now that we understand the basics of puts and calls, we can discuss what determines their values. We focus on call options in the following discussion, but the same type of analysis can be applied to put options.
Concept Questions
716 Part 9: Derivative Securities and Corporate Finance
25Ross_Chapter25_3rd.indd 71625Ross_Chapter25_3rd.indd 716 12-11-28 12:5212-11-28 12:52
Value of a Call Option at Expiration We have already described the payoff s from call options for diff erent stock prices. To continue this discussion, the following notation is useful:
S1 = Stock price at expiration (in one period) S0 = Stock price today C1 = Value of the call option on the expiration date (in one period) C0 = Value of the call option today E = Exercise price on the option
From our previous discussion, remember that if the stock price (S1) is not more than the exercise price (E) on the expiration date, the call option (C1) is worth zero. In other words:
C1 = 0 if S1 ≤ E
Or, equivalently:
C1 = 0 if (S1 - E) ≤ 0 [25.1] Th is is the case where the option is out of the money when it expires.
If the option fi nishes in the money, S1 > E, the value of the option at expiration is equal to the diff erence:
C1 = S1 - E if S1 > E
Or, equivalently:
C1 = S1 - E if (S1 - E) > 0 [25.2] For example, suppose we have a call option with an exercise price of $10. Th e option is about to expire. If the stock is selling for $8, we have the right to pay $10 for something worth only $8. Our option is thus worth exactly zero because the stock price is less than the exercise price on the option (S1 ≤ E). If the stock is selling for $12, the option has value. Since we can buy the stock for $10, it is worth (S1 - E) = $12 - $10 = $2.
Figure 25.2 plots the value of a call option at expiration against the stock price. Th e result looks something like a hockey stick. Notice that for every stock price less than E, the value of the option is zero. For every stock price greater than E, the value of the call option is (S1 - E). Also, once the stock price exceeds the exercise price, the option’s value goes up dollar for dollar with the stock price.
FIGURE 25.2
Value of a call option at expiration for different stock prices
Stock price at expiration (S1)Exercise price
(E)
Call option value at expiration (C1)
S1 > E
•
S1 < E
45
As shown, the value of a call option at expiration is equal to zero if the stock price is less than or equal to the exercise price. The value of the call is equal to the stock price minus the exercise price (S1 - E) if the stock price exceeds the exercise price. The resulting “hockey stick” shape is highlighted.
CHAPTER 25: Options and Corporate Securities 717
25Ross_Chapter25_3rd.indd 71725Ross_Chapter25_3rd.indd 717 12-11-28 12:5212-11-28 12:52
The Upper and Lower Bounds on a Call Option’s Value Now that we know how to determine C1, the value of the call at expiration, we turn to a somewhat more challenging question: How can we determine C0, the value sometime before expiration? We discuss this in the next several sections. For now, we establish the upper and lower bounds for the value of a call option.
THE UPPER BOUND What is the most a call option could sell for? If you think about it, the answer is obvious. A call option gives you the right to buy a share of stock, so it can never be worth more than the stock itself. This tells us the upper bound on a call’s value: A call option always sells for less than the underlying asset. So, in our notation, the upper bound is:
C0 ≤ S0 [25.3]
THE LOWER BOUND What is the least a call option could sell for? The answer here is a little less obvious. First, the call can’t sell for less than zero, so C0 ≥ 0. Furthermore, if the stock price is greater than the exercise price, the call option is worth at least S0 - E.
To see why, suppose we had a call option selling for $4. Th e stock price is $10, and the exercise price is $5. Is there a profi t opportunity here? Th e answer is yes because you could buy the call for $4 and immediately exercise it by spending an additional $5. Your total cost of acquiring the stock is $4 + 5 = $9. If you turn around and immediately sell the stock for $10, you pocket a $1 certain profi t.
Opportunities for riskless profi ts such as this one are called arbitrages or arbitrage opportunities. One who arbitrages is called an arbitrageur. Th e root for the term arbitrage is the same as the root for the word arbitrate, and an arbitrageur essentially arbitrates prices. In a well-organized market, signifi cant arbitrages are, of course, rare.
In the case of a call option, to prevent arbitrage, the value of the call today must be greater than the stock price less the exercise price:
C0 ≥ S0 - E
If we put our two conditions together, we have:
C0 ≥ 0 if S0 - E < 0 [25.4]
C0 ≥ S0 - E if S0 - E ≥ 0 Th ese conditions simply say that the lower bound on the call’s value is either zero or S0 - E, which- ever is bigger.
Our lower bound is called the intrinsic value of the option, and it is simply what the option would be worth if it were about to expire. With this defi nition, our discussion thus far can be restated as follows: At expiration, an option is worth its intrinsic value; it is generally worth more than that any time before expiration.
Figure 25.3 displays the upper and lower bounds on the value of a call option. Also plotted is a curve representing typical call option values for diff erent stock prices before maturity. Th e exact shape and location of this curve depends on a number of factors. We begin our discussion of these factors in the next section.
EXAMPLE 25.1: Upper and Lower Bounds for Aurizon Mines Calls
Look back at the options listed for ARZ in Figure 25.1. Cal- culate the upper and lower limits for the 2012 October 3 call. Does the actual price in the newspaper fall between these limits?
ARZ stock closed at $4.68 and this is the upper bound. For this call, the stock price (S0) is greater than the exercise
price (E). In the jargon of options, this call is in the money. The lower bound call value is $1.68:
S0 - E = $4.68 - $3 = $1.68
The actual price of this call is $1.81 (Ask Price), which lies between the upper and lower bounds.
intrinsic value The lower bound of an option’s value, or what the option would be worth if it were about to expire.
718 Part 9: Derivative Securities and Corporate Finance
25Ross_Chapter25_3rd.indd 71825Ross_Chapter25_3rd.indd 718 12-11-28 12:5212-11-28 12:52
FIGURE 25.3
Value of a call option before expiration for different stock prices
Stock price (S0)Exercise price
(E)
45°
Call price (C0)
Upper bound C0 ≤ S0
Typical call option values
Lower bound C0 ≥ S0 — E C0 ≥ 0
•
As shown, the upper bound on a call’s value is given by the value of the stock (C0 ≤ S0). The lower bound is either S0 - E or 0, whichever is larger. The highlighted curve illustrates the value of a call option prior to maturity for different stock prices.
A Simple Model: Part I Option pricing can be a complex subject. Fortunately, as is oft en the case, many of the key insights can be illustrated with a simple example. Suppose we are looking at a call option with one year to expiration and an exercise price of $105. Th e stock currently sells for $100, and the risk-free rate, Rf, is 20 percent.
Th e value of the stock in one year is uncertain, of course. To keep things simple, suppose we know the stock price will either be $110 or $130. Importantly, we don’t know the odds associated with these two prices. In other words, we know the possible values for the stock, but not the prob- abilities associated with those values.
Since the exercise price on the option is $105, we know the option will be worth either $110 - 105 = $5 or $130 - 105 = $25, but, once again, we don’t know which. We do know one thing, however: Our call option is certain to fi nish in the money.
THE BASIC APPROACH Here is the crucial observation: It is possible to duplicate ex- actly the payoffs on the stock using a combination of the option and the risk-free asset. How? Do the following: Buy one call option and invest $87.50 in a risk-free asset (such as a T-bill).
What will you have in a year? Your risk-free asset earns 20 percent, so it is worth $87.50 × 1.20 = $105. Your option is worth $5 or $25, so the total value is either $110 or $130, just like the stock:
Stock Value Risk-Free Asset Value + Call Value = Total Value
$110 versus $105 + $ 5 = $110
130 versus 105 + 25 = 130
As illustrated, these two strategies—buy a share of stock versus buy a call and invest in the risk- free asset—have exactly the same payoff s in the future.
Because these two strategies have the same future payoff s, they must have the same value today or else there would be an arbitrage opportunity. Th e stock sells for $100 today, so the value of the call option today, C0, is:
$100 = $87.50 + C0 C0 = $12.50
Where did we get the $87.50? Th is is just the present value of the exercise price on the option, calculated at the risk-free rate:
E/(1 + Rf) = $105/1.20 = $87.50
CHAPTER 25: Options and Corporate Securities 719
25Ross_Chapter25_3rd.indd 71925Ross_Chapter25_3rd.indd 719 12-11-28 12:5212-11-28 12:52
Th us, our example shows that the value of a call option in this simple case is given by:
S0 = C0 + E/(1 + Rf) [25.5] C0 = S0 - E/(1 + Rf)
In words, the value of the call option is equal to the stock price minus the present value of the exercise price.
A MORE COMPLICATED CASE Obviously, our assumption that the stock price would be either $110 or $130 is a vast oversimplification. We can now develop a more realistic model by assuming the stock price can be anything greater than or equal to the exercise price. Once again, we don’t know how likely the different possibilities are, but we are certain the option will finish somewhere in the money.
We again let S1 stand for the stock price in one year. Now consider our strategy of investing $87.50 in a riskless asset and buying one call option. Th e riskless asset is again worth $105 in one year, and the option is worth S1 - $105, depending on what the stock price is.
When we investigate the combined value of the option and the riskless asset, we observe some- thing very interesting:
Combined value = Riskless asset value + Option value = $105 + (S1 - $105) = S1
Just as we had before, buying a share of stock has exactly the same payoff as buying a call option and investing the present value of the exercise price in the riskless asset.
Once again, to prevent arbitrage, these two strategies must have the same cost, so the value of the call option is equal to the stock price less the present value of the exercise price:
C0 = S0 - E/(1 + Rf)
Our conclusion from this discussion is that determining the value of a call option is not diffi cult as long as we are certain the option will fi nish somewhere in the money.3
Four Factors Determining Option Values If we continue to suppose that our option is certain to fi nish in the money, we can readily identify four factors that determine an option’s value. Th ere is a fi ft h factor that comes into play if the option can fi nish out of the money. We discuss this last factor in the next section.
For now, if we assume that the option expires in t periods, the present value of the exercise price is E/(1 + Rf)t, and the value of the call is:
Call option value = Stock value - Present value of the exercise price [25.6] C0 = S0 - E/(1 + Rf)t
If we look at this expression, the value of the call obviously depends on four things:
1. The stock price. The higher the stock price (S0) is, the more the call is worth. This comes as no surprise because the option gives us the right to buy the stock at a fixed price.
2. The exercise price. The higher the exercise price (E) is, the less the call is worth. This is also not a surprise since the exercise price is what we have to pay to get the stock.
3. The time to expiration. The longer the time to expiration is (the bigger t is), the more the op- tion is worth. Once again, this is obvious. Since the option gives us the right to buy for a fixed length of time, its value goes up as that length of time increases.
3 You’re probably wondering what would happen if the stock price were less than the present value of the exercise price, resulting in a negative value for the call option. This can’t happen because we are certain the stock price will be at least E in one year since we know the stock will finish in the money. If the current price of the stock is less than E/(1 + Rf), the return on the stock is certain to be greater than the risk-free rate, thereby creating an arbitrage opportunity. For exam- ple, if the stock were currently selling for $80, the minimum return would be ($105 - $80)/$80 = 31.25%. Since we can borrow at 20 percent, we can earn a certain minimum return of 11.25 percent per dollar borrowed. This, of course, is an arbitrage.
720 Part 9: Derivative Securities and Corporate Finance
25Ross_Chapter25_3rd.indd 72025Ross_Chapter25_3rd.indd 720 12-11-28 12:5212-11-28 12:52
4. The risk-free rate. The higher the risk-free rate (Rf) is, the more the call is worth. This result is a little less obvious. Normally, we think of asset values going down as rates rise. In this case, the exercise price is a cash outflow, a liability. The current value of that liability goes down as the discount rate goes up.
1. What is the value of a call option at expiration?
2. What are the upper and lower bounds on the value of a call option any time before expiration?
3. Assuming the stock price is certain to be greater than the exercise price on a call option, what is the value of the call? Why?
25.3 Valuing a Call Option
We now investigate the value of a call option when there is the possibility that the option will fi n- ish out of the money. We again examine the simple case of two possible future stock prices. Th is case lets us identify the remaining factor that determines an option’s value.
A Simple Model: Part I I From our previous example, we have a stock that currently sells for $100. It will be worth either $110 or $130 in a year, and we don’t know which. Th e risk-free rate is 20 percent. We are now looking at a diff erent call option, however. Th is one has an exercise price of $120 instead of $105. What is the value of this call option?
Th is case is a little harder. If the stock ends up at $110, the option is out of the money and worth nothing. If the stock ends up at $130, the option is worth $130 - 120 = $10.
Our basic approach to determining the value of the call option is the same. We show once again that it is possible to combine the call option and a risk-free investment in a way that exactly duplicates the payoff from holding the stock. Th e only complication is that it’s a little harder to determine how to do it.
For example, suppose we bought one call and invested the present value of the exercise price in a riskless asset as we did before. In one year, we would have $120 from the riskless investment plus an option worth either zero or $10. Th e total value is either $120 or $130. Th is is not the same as the value of the stock ($110 or $130), so the two strategies are not comparable.
Instead, consider investing the present value of $110 (the lower stock price) in a riskless asset. Th is guarantees us a $110 payoff . If the stock price is $110, any call options we own are worthless, and we have exactly $110 as desired.
When the stock is worth $130, the call option is worth $10. Our risk-free investment is worth $110, so we are $130 - 110 = $20 short. Since each call option is worth $10, we need to buy two of them to replicate the stock.
Th us, in this case, investing the present value of the lower stock price in a riskless asset and buying two call options exactly duplicates owning the stock. When the stock is worth $110, we have $110 from our risk-free investment. When the stock is worth $130, we have $110 from the risk-free investment plus two call options worth $10 each.
Because these two strategies have exactly the same value in the future, they must have the same value today or else arbitrage would be possible:
S0 = $100 = 2 × C0 + $110/(1 + Rf) 2 × C0 = $100 - $110/1.20 C0 = $4.17
Each call option is thus worth $4.17.
Concept Questions
CHAPTER 25: Options and Corporate Securities 721
25Ross_Chapter25_3rd.indd 72125Ross_Chapter25_3rd.indd 721 12-11-28 12:5212-11-28 12:52
EXAMPLE 25.2: Don’t Call Us, We’ll Call You
We are looking at two call options on the same stock, one with an exercise price of $20 and one with an exercise price of $30. The stock currently sells for $35. Its future price will either be $25 or $50. If the risk-free rate is 10 percent, what are the values of these call options?
The first case (the $20 exercise price) is not difficult since the option is sure to finish in the money. We know that the value is equal to the stock price less the present value of the exercise price:
C0 = S0 - E/(1 + Rf) = $35 - $20/1.1 = $16.82
In the second case, the exercise price is $30, so the option can finish out of the money. At expiration, the option is
worth $0 if the stock is worth $25. The option is worth $50 - 30 = $20 if it finishes in the money.
As before, we start by investing the present value of the lower stock price in the risk-free asset. This costs $25/1.1 = $22.73. At expiration, we have $25 from this investment.
If the stock price is $50, we need an additional $25 to duplicate the stock payoff. Since each option is worth $20, we need $25/$20 = 1.25 options. So, to prevent arbitrage, investing the present value of $25 in a risk-free asset and buying 1.25 call options has the same value as the stock:
S0 = 1.25 × C0 + $25/(1 + Rf) $35 = 1.25 × C0 + $25/(1 + .10) C0 = $9.82
Notice that this second option had to be worth less be- cause it has the higher exercise price.
The Fifth Factor We now illustrate the fi ft h (and last) factor that determines an option’s value. Suppose that every- thing in our previous example is the same except the stock price can be $105 or $135 instead of $110 or $130. Notice that this change makes the stock’s future price more volatile than before.
We investigate the same strategy that we used before: Invest the present value of the lower stock price ($105) in the risk-free asset and buy two call options. If the stock price is $105, as before, the call options have no value and we have $105 in all.
If the stock price is $135, each option is worth S1 - E = $135 - 120 = $15. We have two calls, so our portfolio is worth $105 + 2 × $15 = $135. Once again, we have exactly replicated the value of the stock.
What has happened to the option’s value? More to the point, the variance of the return on the stock has increased. Does the option’s value go up or down? To fi nd out, we need to solve for the value of the call just as we did before:
S0 = $100 = 2 × C0 + $105/(1 + Rf) 2 × C0 = $100 - $105/1.20 C0 = $6.25
Th e value of the call option has gone up from $4.17 to $6.25. Based on our example, the fi ft h and fi nal factor that determines an option’s value is the vari-
ance of the return on the underlying asset. Furthermore, the greater that variance is, the more the option is worth. Th is result appears a little odd at fi rst, and it may be somewhat surprising to learn that increasing the risk (as measured by return variance) on the underlying asset increases the value of the option.
Th e reason that increasing the variance on the underlying asset increases the value of the option isn’t hard to see in our example. Changing the lower stock price to $105 from $110 doesn’t hurt a bit because the option is worth zero in either case. However, moving the upper possible price to $135 from $130 makes the option worth more when it is in the money.
More generally, increasing the variance of the possible future prices on the underlying asset doesn’t aff ect the option’s value when the option fi nishes out of the money. Th e value is always zero in this case. On the other hand, increasing that variance when the option is in the money only increases the possible payoff s, so the net eff ect is to increase the option’s value. Put another way, since the downside risk is always limited, the only eff ect is to increase the upside potential.
In later discussion, we use the usual symbol, σ2, to stand for the variance of the return on the underlying asset.
722 Part 9: Derivative Securities and Corporate Finance
25Ross_Chapter25_3rd.indd 72225Ross_Chapter25_3rd.indd 722 12-11-28 12:5212-11-28 12:52
A Closer Look Before moving on, it is useful to consider one last example. Suppose the stock price is $100 and it will either move up or down by 20 percent. Th e risk-free rate is 5 percent. What is the value of a call option with a $90 exercise price?
Th e stock price will either be $80 or $120. Th e option is worth zero when the stock is worth $80, and it’s worth $120 - 90 = $30 when the stock is worth $120. We therefore invest the present value of $80 in the risk-free asset and buy some call options.
When the stock fi nishes at $120, our risk-free asset pays $80, leaving us $40 short. Each option is worth $30 in this case, so we need $40/$30 = 4/3 options to match the payoff on the stock. Th e option’s value must thus be given by:
S0 = 4/3 × C0 + $80/1.05 C0 = (3/4) × ($100 - $76.19)
= $17.86
To make our result a little bit more general, notice that the number of options you need to buy to replicate the stock is always equal to the change in stock price divided by the change in call price, where the change in stock price is the diff erence in the possible stock prices and the change in call price is the diff erence in the possible option values. Th e change in the stock price divided by the change in the call price is termed the option delta. In our current case, for example, the change in the stock price would be $120 - 80 = $40 and the change in the call price would be $30 - 0 = $30, so the change in the stock price divided by the change in the call price is $40/$30 = 4/3, as we calculated.
Notice also that when the stock is certain to fi nish in the money, the change in the stock price divided by the change in the call price is always exactly equal to one, so one call option is always needed. Otherwise, the change in the stock price divided by the change in the call price is greater than one, so more than one call option is needed.
Th is concludes our discussion of option valuation. Th e most important thing to remember is that the value of an option depends on fi ve factors. Table 25.1 summarizes these factors and the direction of the infl uence for both puts and calls. In Table 25.1, the sign in parentheses indicates the direction of the infl uence.4 In other words, the sign tells us whether the value of the option goes up or down when the value of a factor increases. For example, notice that increasing the exercise price reduces the value of a call option. Increasing any of the other four factors increases the value of the call. Notice also that the time to expiration and the variance act the same for puts and calls. Th e other three factors have opposite signs.
TABLE 25.1
Five factors that determine option values
Factor Calls Puts
Current value of the underlying asset (+) (-) Exercise price on the option (-) (+) Time to expiration on the option (+) (+) Risk-free rate (+) (-) Variance of return on underlying asset (+) (+)
We have not considered how to value a call option when the option can fi nish out of the money and the stock price can take on more than two values. A very famous result, the Black–Scholes option pricing model, is needed in this case. For developing this model, Myron Scholes and Robert Merton shared the 1997 Nobel Prize for economics. We cover this subject in the chapter appendix.
4 The signs in Table 25.1 are for American options. For a European put option, the effect of increasing the time to expi- ration is ambiguous, and the direction of the influence can be positive or negative.
option delta The change in the stock price divided by the change in the call price.
CHAPTER 25: Options and Corporate Securities 723
25Ross_Chapter25_3rd.indd 72325Ross_Chapter25_3rd.indd 723 12-11-28 12:5212-11-28 12:52
EXAMPLE 25.3: Option Prices and Time to Expiration and Variance
According to Table 25.1, when other things are held equal, increasing either time to expiration or stock price variance raises the prices of puts and calls. Is this theory consistent with the actual option prices in Figure 25.1?
We can look at time to expiration and pricing for BNS options. Starting with calls, all the other four factors are constant if we compare calls with the same exercise price but different expiration dates. There are six BNS calls with a $50 exercise price:
Call Bid Price
July 12 3.10 Aug 12 3.30 Oct 12 3.95 Jan 13 4.65 Jan 14 6.4 Jan 15 7.45
As expected, the call prices increase with time to expiration.
1. What are the five factors that determine an option’s value?
2. What is the effect of an increase in each of the five factors on the value of a call option? Give an intuitive explanation for your answer.
3. What is the effect of an increase in each of the five factors on the value of a put option? Give an intuitive explanation for your answer.
25.4 Employee Stock Options
Options are important in corporate fi nance in a lot of diff erent ways. In this section, we begin to examine some of these by taking a look at employee stock options, or ESOs. An ESO is, in essence, a call option that a fi rm gives to employees giving them the right to buy shares of stock in the company. Th e practice of granting options to employees has become widespread. It is almost universal for upper management (see Figure 25.4), but some companies, like Th e Gap and Star- bucks, grant options to almost every employee. Over 90 percent of fi rms listed on the Toronto Stock Exchange have a bonus plan and use stock options.5 Th us, an understanding of ESOs is important. Why? Because you may very soon be an ESO holder!
FIGURE 25.4
Options Granted to the CEOs of Canada’s Five Major Chartered Banks
Company CEO Number Option
Strike Price Value reported in proxy circular
Price as of 4 Nov 2011
Value as of 4 Nov 2011
BMO Bill Downe 219,749 34.13 $ 1,800,000 58.07 $ 5,260,791 Bank of Nova Scotia Richard Waugh 444,084 33.89 3,010,000 52.24 8,148,941 CIBC Gerald McCaughey 107,481 49.75 862,500 73.96 2,240,103 RBC Gordon Nixon* 247,344 52.94 2,750,000 45.85 0 TD Ed Clark 420,172 42.50 3,750,035 74.81 12,794,237 TOTAL 12,172,535 28,444,072
* Gordon Nixon chose to forego his variable income for 2009, which included options granted in December 2008; this table reflects options granted in December 2007 and reported in RBC’s 2008 proxy circular.
Source: Canada’s CEO Elite 100, Hugh Jackson, January 2012
5 Zhou, Xianming, “CEO Pay, Firm Size, and Corporate Performance: Evidence From Canada.” Canadian Journal of Economics, Vol. 33, Issue 1, February 2000.
Concept Questions
employee stock option (ESO) An option granted to an employee by a company giving the employee the right to buy shares of stock in the company at a fixed price for a fixed time.
724 Part 9: Derivative Securities and Corporate Finance
25Ross_Chapter25_3rd.indd 72425Ross_Chapter25_3rd.indd 724 12-11-28 12:5212-11-28 12:52
ESO Features Since ESOs are basically call options, we have already covered most of the important aspects. However, ESOs have a few features that make them diff erent from regular stock options. Th e details diff er from company to company, but a typical ESO has a 10-year life, which is much lon- ger than most ordinary options. Unlike traded options, ESOs cannot be sold. Th ey also have what is known as a “vesting” period. Oft en, for up to three years or so, an ESO cannot be exercised and also must be forfeited if an employee leaves the company. Aft er this period, the options “vest,” which means they can be exercised. Sometimes, employees who resign with vested options are given a limited time to exercise their options.
Why are ESOs granted? Th ere are basically two reasons. First, going back to Chapter 1, the owners of a corporation (the shareholders) face the basic problem of aligning shareholder and management interests and also of providing incentives for employees to focus on corporate goals. ESOs are a powerful motivator because, as we have seen, the payoff s on options can be very large. High-level executives in particular stand to gain enormous wealth if they are successful in creat- ing value for shareholders. Research studies in the U.S., Canada, and other countries fi nd that, over the 1990s, the use of executive stock options served its goal of helping to tie executive com- pensation to company performance.6 While such a link may be desirable in controlling agency problems, not all governance experts agree that ESOs are a good way to compensate executives. Opponents argue that share prices may go up or down due to external events that have little to do with executive performance.7 For example, the decline of stock prices from 2001 to 2003, especially in the tech sector, had made options granted earlier almost worthless in motivating employees. For example, 750,000 options granted in 2000 to John Roth, then Nortel CEO, had an exercise price of $118.68. By 2009, Nortel was bankrupt.
Th e second reason some companies rely heavily on ESOs is that an ESO has no immediate, upfront, out-of-pocket cost to the corporation. In smaller, possibly cash-strapped, companies, ESOs are simply a substitute for ordinary wages. Employees are willing to accept them instead of cash, hoping for big payoff s in the future. In fact, ESOs are a major recruiting tool, allowing busi- nesses to attract talent that they otherwise could not aff ord.
In 2003, Microsoft halted its stock options plan entirely, instead granting restricted Micro- soft shares to a wide range of employees.8 According to Microsoft CEO Steve Ballmer, the move towards granting restricted stock instead of ESOs would increase morale and retention. Another advantage that restricted stock off ers is actual ownership of part of the company that links the personal objectives of the employee to the corporate objectives. Intel has since decided to scrap its own ESO plan in favour of restricted stock. Th is trend does not mean the end of ESOs. It only indicates that companies are becoming more conservative with their ESO plans and are looking to fi nd the alternatives that best suit the company’s corporate structure.
Publicly accountable enterprises in Canada are required to report under International Finan- cial Reporting Standards (IFRS). Stock-based compensation will still need to be recorded based on the fair value of option grants. IFRS requires that companies measure the fair value of the employee stock options granted to employees at the date that they are granted. Companies should recognize the aggregate fair value of employee stock options based on their best estimate of the number of equity-settled options expected to vest.
ESO Repricing ESOs are almost always “at the money” when they are issued, meaning that the stock price is equal to the strike price. Notice that, in this case, the intrinsic value is zero, so there is no value from immediate exercise. Of course, even though the intrinsic value is zero, an ESO is still quite valu- able because of, among other things, its very long life.
If the stock falls signifi cantly aft er an ESO is granted, then the option is said to be “underwater.” On occasion, a company will decide to lower the strike price on underwater options. Such options are said to be “restruck” or “repriced.”
6 The most current study for Canada is by X. Zhou, referenced in footnote 5. 7 Y. Allaire, “Pay for Value: Cutting the Gordian Knot of Executive Compensation”, Institute for Governance of Private and Public Organizations, 2012. 8 J. Nicholas Hoover. “The Options Mess,” InformationWeek. Manhasset: July 10, 2006. Iss. 1097; p. 21.
See esopassociation.org for a site devoted to employee stock options.
CHAPTER 25: Options and Corporate Securities 725
25Ross_Chapter25_3rd.indd 72525Ross_Chapter25_3rd.indd 725 12-11-28 12:5212-11-28 12:52
Th e practice of repricing ESOs is very controversial. Companies that do it argue that once an ESO becomes deeply out of the money, it loses its incentive value because employees recognize there is only a small chance that the option will fi nish in the money. In fact, employees may leave and join other companies where they receive a fresh options grant.
Critics of repricing point out that a lowered strike price is, in essence, a reward for failing. Th ey also point out that if employees know that options will be repriced, then much of the incentive eff ect is lost. Today, many companies award options on a regular basis, perhaps annually or even quarterly. Th at way, an employee will always have at least some options that are near the money even if others are underwater. Also, regular grants ensure that employees always have unvested options, which gives them an added incentive to stay with their current employer rather than forfeit the potentially valuable options.
1. What are the key differences between a traded stock option and an ESO?
2. What is ESO repricing? Why is it controversial?
25.5 Equity as a Call Option on the Firm’s Assets
Now that we understand the basic determinants of an option’s value, we turn to examining some of the many ways that options appear in corporate fi nance. One of the most important insights we gain from studying options is that the common stock in a leveraged fi rm (one that has issued debt) is eff ectively a call option on the assets of the fi rm. Th is is a remarkable observation, and we explore it next.
An example is the easiest way to get started. Suppose a fi rm has a single debt issue outstand- ing. Th e face value is $1,000, and the debt is coming due in a year. Th ere are no coupon payments between now and then, so the debt is eff ectively a pure discount bond. In addition, the current market value of the fi rm’s assets is $950, and the risk-free rate is 12.5 percent.
In a year, the stockholders will have a choice. Th ey can pay off the debt for $1,000 and thereby acquire the assets of the fi rm free and clear, or they can default on the debt. If they default, the bondholders will own the assets of the fi rm.
In this situation, the shareholders essentially have a call option on the assets of the fi rm with an exercise price of $1,000. Th ey can exercise the option by paying the $1,000, or they cannot exer- cise the option by defaulting. Whether they choose to exercise obviously depends on the value of the fi rm’s assets when the debt becomes due.
If the value of the fi rm’s assets exceeds $1,000, the option is in the money, and the shareholders would exercise by paying off the debt. If the value of the fi rm’s assets is less than $1,000, the option is out of the money, and the stockholders would optimally choose to default. What we now illus- trate is that we can determine the values of the debt and equity using our option pricing results.
Case I: The Debt Is Risk-Free Suppose that in one year the fi rm’s assets will either be worth $1,100 or $1,200. What is the value today of the equity in the fi rm? Th e value of the debt? What is the interest rate on the debt?
To answer these questions, we recognize that the option (the equity in the fi rm) is certain to fi nish in the money because the value of the fi rm’s assets ($1,100 or $1,200) always exceeds the face value of the debt. From our discussion in previous sections, we know that the option value is simply the diff erence between the value of the underlying asset and the present value of the exercise price (calculated at the risk-free rate). Th e present value of $1,000 in one year at 12.5 percent is $888.89. Th e current value of the fi rm is $950, so the option (the fi rm’s equity) is worth $950 - 888.89 = $61.11.
What we see is that the equity, which is eff ectively an option to purchase the fi rm’s assets, must be worth $61.11. Th e debt must therefore actually be worth $888.89. In fact, we really didn’t need to know about options to handle this example, because the debt is risk free. Th e reason is that the
For more information on ESOs, try the National Center for Employee Ownership at nceo.org.
Concept Questions
726 Part 9: Derivative Securities and Corporate Finance
25Ross_Chapter25_3rd.indd 72625Ross_Chapter25_3rd.indd 726 12-11-28 12:5212-11-28 12:52
bondholders are certain to receive $1,000. Since the debt is risk free, the appropriate discount rate (and the interest rate on the debt) is the risk-free rate. Th erefore, we know immediately that the current value of the debt is $1,000/1.125 = $888.89. Th e equity is thus worth $950 - 888.89 = $61.11 as we calculated.
Case I I : The Debt Is Risky Suppose now that the value of the fi rm’s assets in one year will be either $800 or $1,200. Th is case is a little more diffi cult because the debt is no longer risk free. If the value of the assets turns out to be $800, the shareholders will not exercise their option and thereby default. Th e stock is worth nothing in this case. If the assets are worth $1,200, the shareholders will exercise their option to pay off the debt and enjoy a profi t of $1,200 - 1,000 = $200.
What we see is that the option (the equity in the fi rm) is worth either zero or $200. Th e assets are worth either $1,200 or $800. Based on our discussion in previous sections, a portfolio that has the present value of $800 invested in a risk-free asset and ($1,200 - $800)/($200 - $0) = 2 call options exactly replicates the assets of the fi rm.
Th e present value of $800 at the risk-free rate of 12.5 percent is $800/1.125 = $711.11. Th is amount, plus the value of the two call options, is equal to $950, the current value of the fi rm:
$950 = 2 × C0 + $711.11 C0 = $119.45
Because the call option is actually the fi rm’s equity, the value of the equity is $119.45. Th e value of the debt is thus $950 - 119.45 = $830.55.
Finally, since the debt has a $1,000 face value and a current value of $830.55, the interest rate is $1,000/$830.55 - 1 = 20.40%. Th is exceeds the risk-free rate, of course, since the debt is now risky.
Erik Lie on Option Backdating
Stock options can be granted to executive and other employees as an incentive device. They strengthen the relation between compensation and a fi rm’s stock price performance, thus boosting effort and improving decision making within the fi rm. Further, to the extent that decision makers are risk averse (as most of us are), options induce more risk taking, which can benefi t shareholders. However, options also have a dark side. They can be used to (i) conceal true compensation expenses in fi nancial reports, (ii) evade corporate taxes, and (iii) siphon money from corporations to executives. One example that illustrates all three of these aspects is that of option backdating.
To understand the virtue of option backdating, it is fi rst important to realize that for accounting, tax, and incentive reasons, most options are granted at-the-money, meaning that their exercise price equals the stock price on the grant date. Option backdating is the practice of selecting a past date (e.g., from the past month) when the stock price was particularly low to be the offi cial grant date. This raises the value of the options, because they are effectively granted in-the-money. Unless this is properly disclosed and accounted for (which it rarely is), the practice of backdating can cause an array of problems. First, granting options that are effectively in-the-money violates many corporate option plans or other securities fi lings stating that the exercise price equals the fair market value on the grant day.
Second, camoufl aging in-the-money options as at-the-money options understates compensation expenses in the fi nancial statements. In fact, under the old accounting rule APB 25 that was phased out in 2005, companies could expense options according to their intrinsic value, such that at-the-money options were not expensed at all. Third, at-the-money option grants qualify for certain tax breaks that in-the-money option grants do not qualify for, such that backdating can result in underpaid taxes.
Empirical evidence shows that the practice of backdating was prevalent from the early 1990s to 2005, especially among tech fi rms. As this came to the attention of the media and regulators in 2006, a scandal erupted. More than 100 companies were investigated for manipulation of option grant dates. As a result, numerous executives were fi red, old fi nancial statements were restated, additional taxes became due, and countless lawsuits were fi led against companies and their directors. With new disclosure rules, stricter enforcement of the requirement that took effect as part of the Sarbanes-Oxley Act in 2002 that grants have to be fi led within two business days, and greater scrutiny by regulators and the investment community, we likely have put the practice of backdating options behind us.
Erik Lie is a Henry B. Tippie Research Professor of Finance at the University of Iowa. His research focuses on corporate fi nancial policy, M&A, and executive compensation.
IN THEIR OWN WORDS…
CHAPTER 25: Options and Corporate Securities 727
25Ross_Chapter25_3rd.indd 72725Ross_Chapter25_3rd.indd 727 12-11-28 12:5212-11-28 12:52
Robert C. Merton on Applications of Options Analysis
Organized markets for trading options on stocks, fi xed-income securities, currencies, financial futures, and a variety of commodities are among the most successful financial innovations of the past two decades.
Commercial success is not, however, the reason that option pricing analysis has become one of the cornerstones of fi nance theory. Instead, its central role derives from the fact that option- like structures permeate virtually every part of the fi eld.
From the fi rst observation more than 40 years ago that leveraged equity has the same payoff structure as a call option, option pricing theory has provided an integrated approach to the pricing of corporate liabilities, including all types of debt, preferred stocks, warrants, and rights. The same methodology has been applied to the pricing of pension fund insurance, deposit insurance, and other government loan guarantees. It has also been used to evaluate various labour contract provisions such as wage fl oors and guaranteed employment including tenure.
A signifi cant and recent extension of options analysis has been to the evaluation of operating or “real” options in capital budgeting decisions. For example, a facility that can use various inputs to produce various outputs provides the fi rm with
operating options not available from a specialized facility that uses a fi xed set of inputs to produce a single type of output. Similarly, choosing among technologies with different proportions of fi xed and variable costs can be viewed as evaluating alternative options to change production levels, including abandonment of the project. Research and development projects are essentially options to either establish new markets, expand market share, or reduce production costs. As these examples suggest, options analysis is especially well suited to the task of evaluating the “fl exibility” components of projects. These are precisely the components whose values are especially diffi cult to estimate by using traditional capital budgeting techniques.
Robert C. Merton is the School of Management Distinguished Professor of Finance at the MIT Sloan School of Management and the John and Natty McArthur University Professor emeritus at Harvard University. He received the 1997 Nobel Prize in Economics for his work on pricing options and other contingent claims and for this work on risk and uncertainty.
IN THEIR OWN WORDS…
EXAMPLE 25.4: Equity as a Call Option
Swenson Software has a pure discount debt issue with a face value of $100. The issue is due in a year. At that time, the assets in the firm will be worth either $55 or $160, de- pending on the sales success of Swenson’s latest product. The assets of the firm are currently worth $110. If the risk- free rate is 10 percent, what is the value of the equity in Swenson? The value of the debt? The interest rate on the debt?
To replicate the assets of the firm, we need to invest the present value of $55 in the risk-free asset. This costs $55/1.10 = $50. If the assets turn out to be worth $160,
the option is worth $160 - 100 = $60. Our risk-free asset would be worth $55, so we need ($160 - $55)/$60 = 1.75 call options. Since the firm is currently worth $110, we have:
$110 = 1.75 × C0 + $50 C0 = $34.29
The equity is thus worth $34.29; the debt is worth $110 - 34.29 = $75.71. The interest rate on the debt is about $100/$75.71 - 1 = 32.1%.
1. Why do we say that the equity in a leveraged firm is effectively a call option on the firm’s assets?
2. All other things being the same, would the stockholders of a firm prefer to increase or decrease the volatility of the firm’s return on assets? Why? What about the bondholders? Give an intuitive explanation.
Concept Questions
728 Part 9: Derivative Securities and Corporate Finance
25Ross_Chapter25_3rd.indd 72825Ross_Chapter25_3rd.indd 728 12-11-28 12:5212-11-28 12:52
25.6 Warrants
A warrant is a corporate security that looks a lot like a call option. It gives the holder the right, but not the obligation, to buy shares of common stock directly from a company at a fi xed price for a given time period. Each warrant specifi es the number of shares of stock that the holder can buy, the exercise price, and the expiration date.9
Th e diff erences in contractual features between the call options that are traded on the Montreal Exchange and warrants are relatively minor. Warrants usually have much longer maturity periods, however. In fact, some warrants are actually perpetual and have no fi xed expiration date.
Warrants are oft en called sweeteners or equity kickers because they are usually issued in combi- nation with privately placed loans, bonds, or common or preferred shares. Th rowing in some war- rants is a way of making the deal a little more attractive to the lender, and it is very common. In fact, the use of warrants is becoming more popular judging by the increasing number listed on the TSX.
In most cases, warrants are attached to the bonds when issued. Th e loan agreement states whether the warrants are detachable from the bond. Usually, the warrant can be detached imme- diately and sold by the holder as a separate security.
For example, Air Canada traded at $0.92 per share on the TSX on June 1, 2012. Outstanding warrants allowed the holder to purchase one Air Canada share at $2.20, expiring on October 28, 2012. Th e warrants traded at $0.020 and were deep out of the money.
Just as we saw with call options, the lower limit on the value of a warrant is zero if Air Canada’s stock price is less than $2.20 per share. If the price of Air Canada’s common stock rises to more than $2.20 per share, the lower limit is the stock price minus $2.20. Th e upper limit is the price of Air Canada’s common stock. A warrant to buy one share of common stock cannot sell at a price more than the price of the underlying common stock.
If, on the warrant expiration date, Air Canada stock traded for less than $2.20, the warrants would expire worthless.
With the growth of fi nancial engineering, warrant issuers are creating new varieties. Some warrant issues give investors the right to buy the issuers’ bonds instead of their stock. In addition, warrants are issued on their own instead of as sweeteners in a bond issue. In 1991, the Toronto- Dominion Bank combined these features in a $2.7 million stand-alone issue. Th e TD warrants gave the right to purchase debentures to be issued in the future.10
Echo Bay Mines Ltd. of Edmonton (a subsidiary of Kinross Gold Corp.) designed an innova- tive fi nancing package including gold purchase warrants with a preferred share issue. Th e war- rants gave the holder the right to buy gold at an exercise price of $595 (U.S.) per ounce. When the warrants were issued in 1981, gold was trading at $500 (U.S.) per ounce. A further condition restricted exercise of the warrants to cases where Echo Bay met certain production levels. As a result, how much these warrants were worth depended both on how well the company was doing and on gold prices.11
The Difference between Warrants and Call Options As we have explained, from the holder’s point of view, warrants are very similar to call options on common stock. A warrant, like a call option, gives its holder the right to buy common stock at a specifi ed price. From the fi rm’s point of view, however, a warrant is very diff erent from a call option sold on the company’s common stock.
Th e most important diff erence between call options and warrants is that call options are issued by individuals and warrants are issued by fi rms. When a call option is exercised, one investor buys stock from another investor. Th e company is not involved. When a warrant is exercised, the fi rm must issue new shares of stock. Each time a warrant is exercised, the fi rm receives some cash and the number of shares outstanding increases.
9 Rights are another closely related corporate security. Their purpose, however, is to allow current shareholders to main- tain proportionate ownership of the company when new shares are issued. The number of shares that can be purchased with each right will be calculated to maintain the proportionate ownership. We discuss rights in Chapter 15. 10 B. Critchley, “The Top 10 Financings, Innovative Fund-Raising in Corporate Canada for ’91,” Financial Post, Decem- ber 16, 1991, p. 15. 11 P. P. Boyle and E. F. Kirzner, “Pricing Complex Options: Echo-Bay Ltd. Gold Purchase Warrants,” Canadian Journal of Administrative Sciences 2, no. 12 (December 1985), pp. 294–306.
warrant A security that gives the holder the right to purchase shares of stock at a fixed price over a given period of time.
sweeteners or equity kickers A feature included in the terms of a new issue of debt or preferred shares to make the issue more attractive to initial investors.
td.com kinross.com
CHAPTER 25: Options and Corporate Securities 729
25Ross_Chapter25_3rd.indd 72925Ross_Chapter25_3rd.indd 729 12-11-28 12:5212-11-28 12:52
To illustrate, suppose the Endrun Company issues a warrant giving holders the right to buy one share of common stock at $25. Further suppose the warrant is exercised. Endrun must print one new stock certifi cate. In exchange for the stock certifi cate, it receives $25 from the holder.
In contrast, when a call option is exercised, there is no change in the number of shares out- standing. Suppose Bethany Enger purchases a call option on the common stock of the Endrun Company from Th omas Swift . Th e call option gives Enger the right to buy one share of common stock of the Endrun Company for $25.
If Enger chooses to exercise the call option, Swift is obligated to give her one share of Endrun’s common stock in exchange for $25. If Swift does not already own a share, he must go into the stock market and buy one.
Th e call option amounts to a side bet between Enger and Swift on the value of the Endrun Company’s common stock. When a call option is exercised, one investor gains and the other loses. Th e total number of outstanding Endrun shares remains constant, and no new funds are made available to the company.
Warrants and the Value of the Firm Because the company is not involved in buying or selling options, puts and calls have no eff ect on the value of the fi rm. However, the fi rm is the original seller when warrants are involved, and warrants do aff ect the value of the fi rm. We compare the eff ect of call options and warrants in this section.
Imagine that Spencer Gould and Jennifer Rockefeller are two investors who together purchase six ounces of platinum at $500 per ounce. Th e total investment is 6 × $500 = $3,000, and each of the investors puts up half. Th ey incorporate, print two stock certifi cates, and name the fi rm the GR Company. Each certifi cate represents a one-half claim to the platinum, and Gould and Rockefeller each own one certifi cate. Th e net eff ect of all of this is that Gould and Rockefeller have formed a company with platinum as its only asset.
THE EFFECT OF A CALL OPTION Suppose Gould later decides to sell a call option to Francesca Fiske. The call option gives Fiske the right to buy Gould’s share for $1,800 in one year.
At the end of the year, platinum is selling for $700 per ounce, so the value of the GR Company is 6 × $700 = $4,200. Each share is worth $4,200/2 = $2,100. Fiske exercises her option, and Gould must turn over his stock certifi cate and receive $1,800.
How would the fi rm be aff ected by the exercise? Th e number of shares won’t be aff ected. Th ere are still two of them, now owned by Rockefeller and Fiske. Th e shares are still worth $2,100. Th e only thing that happens is that, when Fiske exercises her option, she profi ts by $2,100 - 1,800 = $300. Gould loses by the same amount.
THE EFFECT OF A WARRANT This story changes if a warrant is issued. Suppose Gould does not sell a call option to Fiske. Instead, Spencer Gould and Jennifer Rockefeller get together and decide to issue a warrant and sell it to Fiske. This means that, in effect, the GR Com- pany decides to issue a warrant.
Th e warrant gives Fiske the right to receive a share of stock in the company at an exercise price of $1,800. If Fiske decides to exercise the warrant, the fi rm issues another stock certifi cate and gives it to Fiske in exchange for $1,800.
Suppose again that platinum rises to $700 an ounce. Th e fi rm is worth $4,200. Further suppose that Fiske exercises her warrant. Two things would occur:
1. Fiske would pay $1,800 to the firm. 2. The firm would print one stock certificate and give it to Fiske. The stock certificate repre-
sents a one-third claim on the platinum of the firm.
Fiske’s one-third share seems to be worth only $4,200/3 = $1,400. Th is is not correct, because we have to add the $1,800 contributed to the fi rm by Fiske. Th e value of the fi rm increases by this amount, so:
New value of firm = Value of platinum + Fiske’s contribution to the firm = $4,200 + 1,800 = $6,000
Because Fiske has a one-third claim on the fi rm’s value, her share is worth $6,000/3 = $2,000. By exercising the warrant, Fiske gains $2,000 - 1,800 = $200. Th is is illustrated in Table 25.2.
730 Part 9: Derivative Securities and Corporate Finance
25Ross_Chapter25_3rd.indd 73025Ross_Chapter25_3rd.indd 730 12-11-28 12:5212-11-28 12:52
TABLE 25.2
Effect of a call option versus a warrant on the GR Company
Value of Firm Based on Price of Platinum per Ounce
$700 $600
No Warrant or Call Option Gould’s share $2,100 $1,800 Rockefeller’s share 2,100 1,800 Firm value $4,200 $3,600
Call Option Gould’s claim $ 0 $1,800 Rockefeller’s claim 2,100 1,800 Fiske’s claim 2,100 0 Firm value $4,200 $3,600
Warrant* Gould’s share $2,000 $1,800 Rockefeller’s share 2,000 1,800 Fiske’s share 2,000 0 Firm value $6,000 $3,600
* If the price of platinum is $700, the value of the fi rm is equal to the value of six ounces of platinum plus the excess dollars paid into the fi rm by Fiske. Th is amount is $4,200 + 1,800 = $6,000.
When the warrant is exercised, the exercise money goes to the fi rm. Since Fiske ends up owning one-third of the fi rm, she eff ectively gets back one-third of what she pays in. Because she really gives up only two-thirds of $1,800 to buy the stock, the eff ective exercise price is 2/3 × $1,800 = $1,200.
Fiske eff ectively pays out $1,200 to obtain a one-third interest in the assets of the fi rm (the platinum). Th is is worth $4,200/3 = $1,400. Fiske’s gain, from this perspective, is $1,400 - 1,200 = $200 (exactly what we calculated earlier).
WARRANT VALUE AND STOCK VALUE What is the value of the common stock of a firm that has issued warrants? Let’s look at the market value of the GR Company just before and just after the exercise of Fiske’s warrant. Just after exercise, the statement of financial position looks like this:
Cash $1,800 Stock $6,000 Platinum 4,200 (3 shares) Total $6,000 Total $6,000
As we saw, each share of stock is worth $6,000/3 = $2,000. Whoever holds the warrant profi ts by $200 when the warrant is exercised; thus, the warrant is
worth $200 just before expiration. Th e statement of financial position for the GR Company just before expiration is thus:
Platinum $4,200 Warrant $ 200 Stock 4,000
(2 shares) Total $4,200 Total $ 4,200
We calculate the value of the stock as the value of the assets ($4,200) less the value of the warrant ($200).
Notice that the value of each share just before expiration is $4,000/2 = $2,000 just as it is aft er expiration. Th e value of each share of stock is thus not changed by the exercise of the warrant. Th ere is no dilution of share value from the exercise.
EARNINGS DILUTION Warrants and convertible bonds frequently cause the number of shares to increase. This happens (1) when the warrants are exercised and (2) when the bonds are converted. As we have seen, this increase does not lower the per share value of the stock. How- ever, it does cause the firm’s net income to be spread over a larger number of shares; thus, earn- ings per share decrease.
CHAPTER 25: Options and Corporate Securities 731
25Ross_Chapter25_3rd.indd 73125Ross_Chapter25_3rd.indd 731 12-11-28 12:5212-11-28 12:52
Firms with signifi cant amounts of warrants and convertible issues outstanding generally cal- culate and report earnings per share on a fully diluted basis. Th is means the calculation is based on the number of shares that would be outstanding if all the warrants were exercised and all the convertibles were converted. Since this increases the number of shares, the fully diluted EPS is lower than an EPS calculated only on the basis of shares actually outstanding.
1. What is a warrant?
2. Why are warrants different from call options?
25.7 Convertible Bonds
A convertible bond is similar to a bond with warrants. Th e most important diff erence is that a bond with warrants can be separated into distinct securities (a bond and some warrants), but a convertible bond cannot be. A convertible bond gives the holder the right to exchange the bond for a fi xed number of shares of stock anytime up to and including the maturity date of the bond.
Preferred shares can frequently be converted into common shares. A convertible preferred share is the same as a convertible bond except that it has an infi nite maturity date.12
Features of a Convertible Bond Th e basic features of a convertible bond can be illustrated by examining a particular issue. In June 2012, Discovery Air, a Canadian specialty aviation company founded in 2004, had a convertible bond outstanding, maturing aft er 12 years on June 30, 2016. Th e particular feature that makes the Discovery Air bonds interesting is that they are convertible into the common stock of Discovery Air anytime before maturity at a conversion price of $7.30 per share. Since each bond has a face value of $100, this means the holder of a Discovery Air convertible bond can exchange that bond for $100/$7.30 = 13.70 shares of Discovery Air stock. Th e number of shares received for each debenture is called the conversion ratio. On June 25, 2012, Discovery Air shares were trading at $3.30 on the TSX so the option to convert at $7.30 per share was out of the money.
On the same date, Algonquin Power & Utilities Corp., an Oakville, Ontario based company that owns power generation assets in Canada and the United States, had a convertible bond maturing on June 30, 2017 and trading at $119. Th e conversion ratio for the Algonquin convert- ible was 23.81 and the conversion price was $4.20. Since the stock was then trading at $6.39, the conversion option was in the money.
Value of a Convertible Bond Even though the conversion feature of the convertible bond cannot be detached like a warrant, the value of the bond can still be decomposed into its bond value and the value of the conversion feature. We discuss how this is done next.
STRAIGHT BOND VALUE The straight bond value is what the convertible bond would sell for if it could not be converted into common stock. This value depends on the general level of interest rates on debentures and on the default risk of the issuer.
Returning to our prior example, straight debentures issued by Discovery Air were yielding at 10.56 percent in June 2012. Th e straight bond value of Discovery Air convertible bonds can be determined by discounting the $8.38 annual coupon payment and maturity value at 10.56 percent, just as we did in Chapter 7. Th e Discovery Air convertible had 4 years to maturity in June 2012:13
12 The dividends paid are, of course, not tax deductible for the corporation. Interest paid on a convertible bond is tax deductible. 13 The latest data for convertible debentures can be obtained at financialpost.com/markets/data/bonds-debentures.html
Concept Questions
convertible bond A bond that can be exchanged for a fixed number of shares of stock for a specified amount of time.
conversion price The dollar amount of a bond’s par value that is exchangeable for one share of stock.
conversion ratio The number of shares per bond received for conversion into stock.
straight bond value The value of a convertible bond if it could not be converted into common stock.
732 Part 9: Derivative Securities and Corporate Finance
25Ross_Chapter25_3rd.indd 73225Ross_Chapter25_3rd.indd 732 12-11-28 12:5212-11-28 12:52
Straight bond value = $8.38 × (1 - 1/1.10564)/.1056 + $100/(1.1056)4 = $26.24 + 66.93 = $93.17
Th e straight bond value of a convertible bond is a minimum value in the sense that the bond is always worth at least this amount. As we discuss, it is usually worth more.
CONVERSION VALUE The conversion value of a convertible bond is what the bond would be worth if it were immediately converted into common stock. This value is computed by multiplying the current price of the stock by the number of shares received when the bond is converted.
For example, each Discovery Air convertible bond could be converted into 13.70 shares of common stock. Discovery Air common was selling for $3.30 at the time of writing in June 2012. Th us, the conversion value is 13.70 × $3.30 = $45.21.
A convertible cannot sell for less than its conversion value or an arbitrage exists. If Discovery Air’s convertible sold for less than $45.21, investors would buy the bonds and convert them into common stock and sell the stock. Th e arbitrage profi t would be the diff erence between the value of the stock and the bond’s conversion value.
FLOOR VALUE As we have seen, convertible bonds have two floor values: the straight bond value and the conversion value. The minimum value of a convertible bond is given by the greater of these two values. For the Discovery Air issue, the conversion value is $45.21, while the straight bond value is $93.17. At a minimum, this bond is thus worth $93.17.
Figure 25.5 plots the minimum value of a convertible bond against the value of the stock. Th e conversion value is determined by the value of the fi rm’s underlying common stock. As the value of common stock rises and falls, the conversion value rises and falls with it. For example, if the value of Discovery Air’s common stock increases by $1, the conversion value of its convertible bonds increases by $13.70.
In Figure 25.5, we have implicitly assumed that the convertible bond is default-free. In this case, the straight bond value does not depend on the stock price, so it is plotted as a horizontal line. Given the straight bond value, the minimum value of the convertible depends on the value of the stock. When this is low, the minimum value of a convertible is most signifi cantly infl uenced by the underlying value as straight debt. Th is is the case for the Discovery Air convertible as the straight bond value, $93.17, far exceeds the conversion value of $45.21. However, when the value of the fi rm is very high, the value of a convertible bond is mostly determined by the underlying conversion value. Th is is also illustrated in Figure 25.5.
FIGURE 25.5
Minimum value of a convertible bond versus the value of the stock for a given interest rate
Minimum convertible bond value (floor value)
Stock priceStraight bond value
greater than conversion value
Straight bond value less than conversion value
Straight bond value
Conversion ratio
Convertible bond floor value
Conversion value
=
N
As shown, the minimum or “floor” value of a convertible bond is either its straight bond value or its conversion value, whichever is greater.
conversion value The value of a convertible bond if it was immediately converted into common stock.
CHAPTER 25: Options and Corporate Securities 733
25Ross_Chapter25_3rd.indd 73325Ross_Chapter25_3rd.indd 733 12-11-28 12:5212-11-28 12:52
FIGURE 25.6
Value of a convertible bond versus value of the stock for a given interest rate
Stock priceStraight bond value
greater than conversion value
Straight bond value less than conversion value
Straight bond value
Floor value
Floor value
Option value
Conversion ratio
Conversion value
Convertible bond values
Convertible bond value
=
As shown, the value of a convertible bond is the sum of its floor value and its option value (highlighted region).
OPTION VALUE The value of a convertible bond always exceeds the straight bond value and the conversion value unless the firm is in default or the bondholders are forced to convert. The reason is that holders of convertibles do not have to convert immediately. Instead, by waiting, they can take advantage of whichever is greater in the future, the straight bond value or the con- version value.
Th is option to wait has value, and it raises the value of the convertible bond over its fl oor value. Th e total value of the convertible is thus equal to the sum of the fl oor value and the option value. Th is is illustrated in Figure 25.6. Notice the similarity between this picture and the representation of the value of a call option in Figure 25.3.
Figure 25.6 can illustrate the Discovery Air convertible. Because the stock price, $3.30 at the time, was well below the conversion price of $7.30, the bond was trading based mainly on its straight bond value of $93.17. However, due to the option value, the actual price was higher.
1. What are the conversion ratio, the conversion price, and the conversion premium?
2. What three elements make up the value of a convertible bond?
25.8 Reasons for Issuing Warrants and Convertibles
Until recently, bonds with warrants and convertible bonds were not well understood. Surveys of fi nancial executives have provided the most popular textbook reasons for warrants and convert- ibles. Here are two of them:
1. They allow companies to issue cheap bonds by attaching sweeteners to the bonds. Sweeten- ers allow the coupon rate on convertibles and bonds with warrants to be set at less than the market rates on straight bonds.
Concept Questions
734 Part 9: Derivative Securities and Corporate Finance
25Ross_Chapter25_3rd.indd 73425Ross_Chapter25_3rd.indd 734 12-11-28 12:5212-11-28 12:52
2. They give companies the chance to issue common stock at a premium more than current prices in the future. In this way, convertibles and bonds with warrants represent deferred sales of common stock at relatively high prices.
Th ese justifi cations for convertibles and bonds with warrants are frequently mixed into free lunch explanations.
The Free Lunch Story Suppose the RWJR Company can issue straight (non-convertible) subordinated debentures at 10 percent. It can also issue convertible bonds at 6 percent with a conversion value of $800. Th e conversion value means the holders can convert a convertible bond into 40 shares of common stock, which currently trades at $20.
A company treasurer who believes in free lunches might argue that convertible bonds should be issued because they represent a cheaper source of fi nancing than either straight subordinated bonds or common stock. Th e treasurer points out that, if the company does poorly and the stock price does not rise to more than $20, the convertible bondholders do not convert the bonds into common stock. In this case, the company has obtained debt fi nancing at below-market rates by attaching worthless equity kickers.
On the other hand, if the fi rm does well, the bondholders would convert. Th e company issues 40 shares. Because the company receives a bond with a face value of $1,000 in exchange for issuing 40 shares of common stock, the conversion price is $25.
Eff ectively, if the bondholders convert, the company has issued common stock at $25 per share. Th is is 20 percent more than the current common stock price of $20, so the company gets more money per share of stock. Th us, the treasurer happily points out, regardless of whether the com- pany does well or poorly, convertible bonds are the cheapest form of fi nancing. RWJR can’t lose.
Th e problem with this story is that we can turn it around and create an argument showing that issuing warrants and convertibles is always a disaster. We call this the expensive lunch story.
The Expensive Lunch Story Suppose we take a closer look at the RWJR Company and its proposal to sell convertible bonds. If the company performs badly and the stock price falls, bondholders do not exercise their conver- sion option. Th is suggests the RWJR Company should have issued common stock when prices were high. By issuing convertible bonds, the company lost a valuable opportunity.
On the other hand, if the company does well and the stock price rises, bondholders convert. Suppose the stock price rises to $40. Th e bondholders convert and the company is forced to sell stock worth $40 for an eff ective price of only $25. Th e new shareholders benefi t. Put another way, if the company prospers, it would have been better to have issued straight debt so that the gains would not have to be shared.
Whether the convertible bonds are converted or not, the company has done worse than with straight bonds or new common stock. Issuing convertible bonds is a terrible idea.
Which is correct—the free lunch story or the expensive lunch story?
A Reconcil iation Reconciling our two stories requires only that we remember our central goal: Increase the wealth of the existing shareholders. Th us, with 20/20 hindsight, issuing convertible bonds turns out to be worse than issuing straight bonds and better than issuing common stock if the company prospers. Th e reason is that the prosperity has to be shared with bondholders aft er they convert.
In contrast, if a company does poorly, issuing convertible bonds turns out to be better than issuing straight bonds and worse than issuing common stock. Th e reason is that the fi rm ben- efi ted from the lower coupon payments on the convertible bond.
Both of our stories thus have a grain of truth; we just need to combine them. Th is is done in Table 25.3. Exactly the same arguments would be used in a comparison of a straight debt issue versus a bond/warrant package.
CHAPTER 25: Options and Corporate Securities 735
25Ross_Chapter25_3rd.indd 73525Ross_Chapter25_3rd.indd 735 12-11-28 12:5212-11-28 12:52
TABLE 25.3
The case for and against convertibles If Firm Does Poorly If Firm Prospers
Convertible bonds Low stock price and no conversion High stock price and conversion versus: Straight bonds Cheap financing because coupon rate is lower
(good outcome) Expensive financing because bonds are converted, which dilutes existing equity (bad outcome)
Common stock Expensive financing because the firm could have issued common stock at high prices (bad outcome)
Cheap financing because firm issues stock at high prices when bonds are converted (good outcome)
1. What is wrong with the view that it is cheaper to issue a bond with a warrant or a convertible feature because the required coupon is lower?
2. What is wrong with the theory that says a convertible can be a good security to issue because it can be a way to sell stock at a price that is higher than the current stock price?
25.9 Other Options
We’ve discussed two of the more common option-like securities, warrants, and convertibles. Options appear in many other places. We briefl y describe a few such cases in this section.
The Call Provision on a Bond As we discussed in Chapter 7, most corporate bonds are callable. A call provision allows a corpo- ration to buy the bonds at a fi xed price for a fi xed time period. In other words, the corporation has a call option on the bonds. Th e cost of the call feature to the corporation is the cost of the option.
Convertible bonds are almost always callable. Th is means a convertible bond is really a package of three securities: a straight bond, a call option held by the bondholder (the conversion feature), and a call option held by the corporation (the call provision).
Put Bonds Th e owner of a put bond has the right to force the issuer to repurchase the bond at a fi xed price for a fi xed period of time. Such a bond is a combination of a straight bond and a put option, hence the name.
For example, Canada Savings Bonds are put bonds since the holder can force the Government of Canada to repurchase them (through a fi nancial institution acting as its agent) at 100 percent of the purchase price. Th e put option is exercisable at any time aft er the fi rst two months of the bond’s life. A more exotic, fi nancially engineered example comes from Chapter 7 where we briefl y discussed a LYON, a liquid yield option note. Th is is a callable, putable, convertible, pure discount bond. It is thus a package of a pure discount bond, two call options, and a put option. In 1991, Rogers Communication issued the fi rst LYON in Canada.
The Overal lotment Option In Chapter 15, we mentioned that underwriters are frequently given the right to purchase addi- tional shares of stock from a fi rm in an initial public off ering (IPO). We called this the overallot- ment option. We now recognize that this provision is simply a call option (or, more accurately, a warrant) granted to the underwriter. Th e value of the option is an indirect form of compensation paid to the underwriter.
Concept Questions
736 Part 9: Derivative Securities and Corporate Finance
25Ross_Chapter25_3rd.indd 73625Ross_Chapter25_3rd.indd 736 12-11-28 12:5212-11-28 12:52
Insurance and Loan Guarantees Insurance of one kind or another is a fi nancial feature of everyday life. Most of the time, having insurance is like having a put option. For example, suppose you have $1 million in fi re insurance on an offi ce building. One night, your building burns down, reducing its value to nothing. In this case, you would eff ectively exercise your put option and force the insurer to pay you $1 million for something worth very little.
Loan guarantees are a form of insurance. If you lend money to a borrower who defaults, with a guaranteed loan you can collect from someone else, oft en the government. For example, when you lend money to a fi nancial institution (by making a deposit), your loan is guaranteed (up to $100,000) by the federal government provided your institution is a member of the Canada Deposit Insurance Corporation (CDIC).
Th e federal government, with a loan guarantee, has provided a put option to the holders of risky debt. Th e value of the put option is the cost of the loan guarantee. Loan guarantees are not cost-free. Th is point was made absolutely clear to the CDIC when two banks collapsed in western Canada in 1985.
Because the put option allows a risky fi rm to borrow at subsidized rates, it is an asset to the shareholders. Th e riskier the fi rm, the greater the value of the guarantee and the more it is worth to the shareholders. Researchers modifi ed the Black–Scholes model presented in this chapter’s appendix to value the put option in CDIC deposit insurance for one of the Canadian banks that failed. Th ey found that fi nancial markets provided early warning of bank failures as the value of the put option increased signifi cantly before the bank failed.14
U.S. taxpayers learned the same lesson about loan guarantees at far greater cost in the savings- and-loan collapse. Th e cost to U.S. taxpayers of making good on the guaranteed deposits in these institutions was a staggering amount.
One result of all this is that accountants in Canada, urged on by the auditor general, are forcing government agencies to report guarantees and other contingent liabilities in their fi nancial state- ments. Th is may induce greater caution in extending guarantees in the fi rst place.
Managerial Options We introduced managerial options in our discussion of capital budgeting in Chapter 11. Th ese options represent opportunities that managers can exploit if certain things happen in the future. Returning to such options, we now see that they represent real options—options with payoff s in real goods as opposed to asset prices. One example of a real option is production fl exibility as we explain next.
Th e value of fl exibility in production has long been recognized, but at what price? All other things being equal, a company would rather have production facilities that can quickly and cheaply adapt to changing circumstances than a plant that is limited in what and how much it can produce. Changing demand for products oft en necessitates changes in products and the changing costs of raw materials and other inputs can mean that the production process now in use may no longer be the cost-minimizing one.
However, a fl exible production facility costs more than building one that is suited to one line of products or one pattern of inputs. In addition, a plant that is designed to be used with one product line and one pattern of inputs is usually optimized for those conditions. It is more effi cient for that purpose than a fl exible plant producing the same line of products and using the same inputs. A company building a production facility must trade off the advantages of fl exibility against the additional costs.
AUTOMOBILE PRODUCTION The market for automobiles is notoriously fickle. The hottest seller can be sports cars in one year and sport utility vehicles in the next. When you con- sider that it usually takes more than two years to design and bring a new model into production, the risks of the business become apparent.
In an eff ort to cope with this ever-changing environment, Honda built a production facility in Canada that may be the ultimate in fl exible production. According to popular accounts, this plant
14 R. Giammarino, E. Schwartz, and J. Zechner, “Market Valuation of Bank Assets and Deposit Insurance in Canada,” Canadian Journal of Economics, February 1989, pp. 109–27.
real option An option with payoffs in real goods.
world.honda.com
CHAPTER 25: Options and Corporate Securities 737
25Ross_Chapter25_3rd.indd 73725Ross_Chapter25_3rd.indd 737 12-11-28 12:5212-11-28 12:52
has the capacity to switch production from one car model to another in a matter of days! By con- trast, it can take other manufacturers six months or longer to switch production from one model to another. In addition, a new model can require an entirely new set of assembly lines.
Th at is the good news. Th e bad news is that a fl exible plant costs about $1.4 billion versus $1 billion for a typical automobile plant. Th e real question in building such a plant is whether the fl exibility is worth the additional $400 million investment.
To fi nd an answer to this question, we have to examine the value of having a fl exible plant. Perhaps the most important variable determining which cars to produce is the changing demands and tastes for car models. For simplicity, let us assume that the fl exible plant can produce either minivans or four-door sedans. Suppose, too, that it has a capacity of 300,000 vehicles a year and that it can produce either one type or the other, but not both at the same time. To illustrate our point, we will assume that the plant can be switched only once, three years from now, and that the lifetime of the plant is 10 years.
Currently there is a high demand for minivans, and the company forecasts that it will need to produce minivans at full capacity, 300,000 vehicles per year, for the next three years. Th ree years from now, though, there is a 50-percent chance that the public will prefer sedans rather than minivans and only 50,000 minivans per year could be produced and sold. Both the fi xed plant and the fl exible plant have a capacity of 300,000 vehicles per year. Th e profi t for the fl exible plant is $1,000 per vehicle on minivans and $1,100 per vehicle on sedans. A fi xed plant dedicated to minivan production can only produce minivans, but it does so more effi ciently. Th e cash fl ow from having the fi xed plant produce minivans is $1,200 per minivan, rather than the $1,000 per minivan for the fl exible plant.
Th e profi ts from a plant that is committed to producing minivans for the next 10 years will be $360 million per year for the fi rst three years (300,000 × $1,200) and then will either continue at this rate for the next seven years or will drop to $60 million per year if demand switches to sedans (50,000 × $1,200). On the other hand, if demand switches to sedans, a fl exible plant will be able to switch its production. Th erefore, the profi t from a fl exible plant will stay at $300 million per year for the fi rst three years (300,000 × $1,000) and then will either rise to $330 million if sedans come into favour (300,000 × $1,100) or stay at $300 million per year if it sticks to minivans. Th is demonstrates the smoothing of cash fl ows from having a fl exible plant.
Th e company faces a seemingly simple choice now. It can either invest $1 billion in a commit- ted plant to produce minivans for the next 10 years or it can invest $1.4 billion to give itself the option of switching from minivans to sedans in three years.
Th e possible results are illustrated in Figure 25.7. Using a 15-percent discount rate, the present value of the cash fl ows generated by building a
fi xed plant dedicated to minivans is
PV (Fixed Plant) = $360/1.15 + $360/1.152 + … + $360/1.1510 = $1.807 billion
if minivan production stays in demand. However, the present value will drop to
PV (Fixed Plant) = $360/1.15 + $360/1.152 + $360/1.153 + $60/1.154 + … + $60/1.1510 = $.986 billion
if sedans come into favour. If minivans stay in demand, the present value of the cash fl ows from a fl exible plant will be
PV (Flexible Plant) = $300/1.15 + $300/1.152 + … + $300/1.1510 = $1.506 billion
If sedans displace minivans in customers’ aff ections, then
PV (Flexible Plant) = $300/1.15 + $300/1.152 + $300/1.153 + $330/1.154 + … + $330/1.1510 = $1.588 billion
Th ere is a 50-percent chance that minivans will stay in fashion and a 50-percent chance that they will not. If we assume that the fi rm is risk-neutral between these two possibilities, the expected present value is the average of the two. Of course, this may not be the case. It may be that a switch in tastes to sedans is correlated with changes in GNP or broad market movements, in which case
738 Part 9: Derivative Securities and Corporate Finance
25Ross_Chapter25_3rd.indd 73825Ross_Chapter25_3rd.indd 738 12-11-28 12:5212-11-28 12:52
FIGURE 25.7
Yearly profits from a fixed plant and a flexible plant
Panel A: Fixed plant Minivans $360 m/year = 300,000 units � $1,200/unit
Minivans $360 m/year = 300,000 units � $1,200/unit
1/2
1/2
Minivans $60 m/year = 50,000 units � $1,200/unit
Today 3 years 10 years
Today 3 years 10 years
Panel B: Flexible plant Minivans $300 m/year = 300,000 units � $1,000/unit
Minivans $300 m/year = 300,000 units � $1,000/unit
1/2
1/2 Sedans $330 m/year = 300,000 units � $1,000/unit
This graph shows the annual profits from a fixed plant and a flexible plant. A fixed plant can only produce minivans. Thus, if demand turns to sedans, the fixed plant will only sell 50,000 minivans. By contrast, the flexible plant can produce sedans if demand turns to that item. However, profit per unit is less in a flexible plant.
we would have to do a beta adjustment to compute the present value correctly. For now we will assume that this risk adjustment is already incorporated in the 15-percent discount rate and take the expected present value. While it is possible to develop a more accurate technique to solve such problems, our current assumption is quite reasonable as a practical matter. Th us,
Expected PV (Fixed Plant) = (1/2)$1.807 billion + (1/2)$.986 billion = $1.396 billion
and
Expected PV (Flexible Plant) = (1/2)$1.506 billion + (1/2)$1.588 billion = $1.547 billion
Comparing these calculations, we can see that the additional expected present value of having the fl exibility to switch production is
Expected PV (Flexible Plant) - Expected PV (Fixed Plant) = $1.547 billion - $1.396 billion
= $151 million
In other words, fl exibility in this case is worth $151 million. Since the fl exible plant costs $400 million more to build, the NPV of the fl exible plant is less than that of the fi xed plant. Th e price of fl exibility is too high.
CHAPTER 25: Options and Corporate Securities 739
25Ross_Chapter25_3rd.indd 73925Ross_Chapter25_3rd.indd 739 12-11-28 12:5212-11-28 12:52
Research has shown that the decision to open or close gold mining operations could also be explained by the real options model.15 Th e study found that mine closures are strongly infl uenced by factors like price and volatility of gold, the fi rm’s operating costs, closing costs, and the size of gold reserves at the mine.
1. Explain how car insurance acts like a put option.
2. Explain why government loan guarantees are not free.
3. Explain how managerial options can change capital budgeting decisions.
25.10 SUMMARY AND CONCLUSIONS
Th is chapter described the basics of option valuation and discussed option-like corporate secur- ities. In it, we saw that:
1. Options are contracts giving the right, but not the obligation, to buy and sell underlying as- sets at a fixed price during a specified time period.
The most familiar options are puts and calls involving shares of stock. These options give the holder the right, but not the obligation, to sell (the put option) or buy (the call option) shares of common stock at a given price.
As we discussed, the value of any option depends only on five factors: a. The price of the underlying asset. b. The exercise price. c. The expiration date. d. The interest rate on risk-free bonds. e. The volatility of the underlying asset’s value. 2. A warrant gives the holder the right to buy shares of common stock directly from the com-
pany at a fixed exercise price for a given period of time. Typically, warrants are issued in a package with privately placed bonds. Often, they can be detached afterward and traded separately.
3. A convertible bond is a combination of a straight bond and a call option. The holder can give up the bond in exchange for a fixed number of shares of stock. The minimum value of a convertible bond is given by its straight bond value or its conversion value, whichever is greater.
4. Convertible bonds, warrants, and call options are similar, but important differences do exist: a. Warrants and convertible securities are issued by corporations. Call options are issued by
and traded between individual investors. b. Warrants are usually issued privately and combined with a bond. In most cases, the war-
rants can be detached immediately after the issue. In some cases, warrants are issued with preferred stock, with common stock, or in publicly traded bond issues.
c. Warrants and call options are exercised for cash. The holder of a warrant gives the com- pany cash and receives new shares of the company’s stock. The holder of a call option gives another individual cash in exchange for common stock. Convertible bonds are exer- cised by exchange; the individual gives the company back the bond in exchange for stock.
5. Many other corporate securities have option features. Bonds with call provisions, bonds with put provisions, and debt backed by a loan guarantee are just a few examples.
15 A. Moel and P. Tufano, “When Are Real Options Exercised? An Empirical Study of Mine Closings,” The Review of Fi- nancial Studies, Spring 2002.
Concept Questions
740 Part 9: Derivative Securities and Corporate Finance
25Ross_Chapter25_3rd.indd 74025Ross_Chapter25_3rd.indd 740 12-11-28 12:5212-11-28 12:52
Key Terms American options (page 712) call option (page 712) conversion price (page 732) conversion ratio (page 732) conversion value (page 733) convertible bond (page 732) employee stock option (ESO) (page 724) European options (page 712) exercising the option (page 712) expiration date (page 712)
intrinsic value (page 718) option (page 711) option delta (page 723) put option (page 712) real option (page 737) straight bond value (page 732) striking price or exercise price (page 712) sweeteners or equity kickers (page 729) warrant (page 729)
Chapter Review Problems and Self-Test 25.1 Value of a Call Option Stock in the Barsoom Corporation is
currently selling for $30 per share. In one year, the price would either be $30 or $40. T-bills with one year to maturity are paying 10 percent. What is the value of a call option with a $30 exercise price? A $34 exercise price?
25.2 Convertible Bonds The Kau Corporation, publisher of Gourmand magazine, has a convertible bond issue currently selling in the market for $900. Each bond can be exchanged
for 100 shares of stock at the holder’s option. The bond has a 6 percent coupon, payable annually, and it
matures in 12 years. Kau’s debt is BBB-rated. Debt with this rating is priced to yield 12 percent. Stock in Kau is trading at $6 per share.
What is the conversion ratio on this bond? The conversion price? The conversion premium? What is the floor value of the bond? What is its option value?
Answers to Self-Test Problems 25.1 With a $30 exercise price, the option can’t finish out of the money (it can finish “at the money” if the stock price is $30). We can replicate
the stock by investing the present value of $30 in T-bills and buying one call option. Buying the T-bill would cost $30/1.1 = $27.27. If the stock ends up at $30, the call option is worth zero and the T-bill pays $30. If the stock ends up at $40, the T-bill again pays $30,
and the option is worth $40 - 30 = $10, so the package is worth $40. Since the T-bill/call option combination exactly duplicates the payoff on the stock, it has to be worth $30 or arbitrage is possible. Using the notation from the chapter, we can calculate the value of the call option:
S0 = C0 + E/(1 + Rf) $30 = C0 + $27.27 C0 = $2.73
With the $34 exercise price, we start by investing the present value of the lower stock price in T-bills. This guarantees us $30 when the stock price is $30. If the stock price is $40, the option is worth $40 - 34 = $6. We have $30 from our T-bill, so we need $10 from the options to match the stock. Since each option is worth $6, we need to buy $10/$6 = 1.67 call options. Notice that the difference in the possible stock prices is $10 (ΔS) and the difference in the possible option prices is $6 (ΔC), so ΔS/ΔC = 1.67.
To complete the calculation, the present value of the $30 plus 1.67 call options has to be worth $30 to prevent arbitrage, so: $30 = 1.67 × C0 + $30/1.1
C0 = $2.73/1.67 = $1.63
25.2 Since each bond can be exchanged for 100 shares, the conversion ratio is 100. The conversion price is the face value of the bond ($1,000) divided by the conversion ratio, $1,000/100 = $10. The conversion premium is the percentage difference between the current price and the conversion price, ($10 - $6)/$6 = 67%.
The floor value of the bond is the greater of its straight bond value and its conversion value. Its conversion value is what the bond is worth if it is immediately converted: 100 × $6 = $600. The straight bond value is what the bond would be worth if it were not convert- ible. The annual coupon is $60, and the bond matures in 12 years. At a 12 percent required return, the straight bond value is:
Straight bond value = $60 × (1 - 1/1.1212)/.12 + $1,000/1.1212 = $371.66 + 256.68 = $628.34
This exceeds the conversion value, so the floor value of the bond is $628.34. Finally, the option value is the value of the convertible in excess of its floor value. Since the bond is selling for $900, the option value is:
Option value = $900 - 628.34 = $271.66
CHAPTER 25: Options and Corporate Securities 741
25Ross_Chapter25_3rd.indd 74125Ross_Chapter25_3rd.indd 741 12-11-28 12:5212-11-28 12:52
Concepts Review and Critical Thinking Questions 1. (LO1) What is a call option? A put option? Under what cir-
cumstances might you want to buy each? Which one has greater potential profit? Why?
2. (LO1) Complete the following sentence for each of these investors:
a. A buyer of call options b. A buyer of put options c. A seller (writer) of call options d. A seller (writer) of put options “The (buyer/seller) of a (put/call) option (pays/receives)
money for the (right/obligation) to (buy/sell) a specified asset at a fixed price for a fixed length of time.”
3. (LO1) What is the intrinsic value of a call option? How do we interpret this value?
4. (LO1) What is the value of a put option at maturity? Based on your answer, what is the intrinsic value of a put option?
5. (LO2) You notice that shares of stock in the Patel Corpora- tion are going for $50 per share. Call options with an exercise price of $35 per share are selling for $10. What’s wrong here? Describe how you can take advantage of this mispricing if the option expires today.
6. (LO2) If the risk of a stock increases, what is likely to happen to the price of call options on the stock? To the price of put options? Why?
7. (LO2) True or false: The unsystematic risk of a share of stock is irrelevant in valuing the stock because it can be diversified away; therefore, it is also irrelevant for valuing a call option on the stock. Explain.
8. (LO1) Suppose a certain stock currently sells for $30 per share. If a put option and a call option are available with $30 exercise prices, which do you think will sell for more, the put or the call? Explain.
9. (LO2) Suppose the interest rate on T-bills suddenly and un- expectedly rises. All other things being the same, what is the impact on call option values? On put option values?
10. (LO1) When you take out an ordinary student loan, it is usu- ally the case that whoever holds that loan is given a guarantee by the federal government, meaning that the government will make up any payments you skip. This is just one example of the many loan guarantees made by the federal government. Such guarantees don’t show up in calculations of government spend- ing or in official deficit figures. Why not? Should they show up?
Questions and Problems 1. Calculating Option Values (LO2) T-bills currently yield 4.3 percent. Stock in Nina Manufacturing is currently selling for $67
per share. There is no possibility that the stock will be worth less than $50 per share in one year. a. What is the value of a call option with a $45 exercise price? What is the intrinsic value? b. What is the value of a call option with a $35 exercise price? What is the intrinsic value? c. What is the value of a put option with a $45 exercise price? What is the intrinsic value?
2. Understanding Option Quotes (LO1) Use the option quote information shown here to answer the questions that follow. The stock is currently selling for $84.
Option and TSX Close Expiration
Strike Price
Calls Puts
Vol. Last Vol. Last
RWJ Mar 85 230 3.20 160 3.30 Apr 85 170 9.05 127 8.05 Jul 85 139 9.90 43 10.85 Oct 85 60 10.80 11 10.45
a. Are the call options in the money? What is the intrinsic value of an RWJ Corp. call option? b. Are the put options in the money? What is the intrinsic value of an RWJ Corp. put option? c. Two of the options are clearly mispriced. Which ones? At a minimum, what should the mispriced options sell for? Explain
how you could profit from the mispricing in each case. 3. Calculating Payoffs (LO1) Use the option quote information shown here to answer the questions that follow. The stock is
currently selling for $27.
Option and TSX Close Expiration
Strike Price
Calls Puts
Vol. Last Vol. Last
Macrosoft Feb 28 85 0.23 40 1.23 Mar 28 61 0.47 22 1.64 May 28 22 0.75 11 2.06 Aug 28 3 0.96 3 2.10
a. Suppose you buy 10 contracts of the February 28 call option. How much will you pay, ignoring commissions? b. In part (a), suppose that Macrosoft stock is selling for $30 per share on the expiration date. How much is your options
investment worth? What if the terminal stock price is $29? Explain. c. Suppose you buy 10 contracts of the August 28 put option. What is your maximum gain? On the expiration date, Macrosoft
is selling for $23 per share. How much is your options investment worth? What is your net gain? d. In part (c), suppose you sell 10 of the August 28 put contracts. What is your net gain or loss if Macrosoft is selling for $25 at
expiration? For $31? What is the break-even price, that is, the terminal stock price that results in a zero profit?
Basic (Questions
1–13)
742 Part 9: Derivative Securities and Corporate Finance
25Ross_Chapter25_3rd.indd 74225Ross_Chapter25_3rd.indd 742 12-11-28 12:5212-11-28 12:52
4. Calculating Option Values (LO2) The price of Newgen Corp. stock will be either $53 or $84 at the end of the year. Call options are available with one year to expiration. T-bills currently yield 6 percent.
a. Suppose the current price of Newgen stock is $85. What is the value of the call option if the exercise price is $75 per share? b. Suppose the exercise price is $90 in part (a). What is the value of the call option now?
5. Calculating Option Values (LO2) The price of Tara Inc. stock will be either $64 or $86 at the end of the year. Call options are available with one year to expiration. T-bills currently yield 6 percent.
a. Suppose the current price of Tara stock is $75. What is the value of the call option if the exercise price is $60 per share? b. Suppose the exercise price is $70 in part (a). What is the value of the call option now?
6. Using the Pricing Equation (LO2) A one-year call option contract on Cheesy Poofs Co. stock sells for $1,150. In one year, the stock will be worth $47 or $68 per share. The exercise price on the call option is $60. What is the current value of the stock if the risk-free rate is 3 percent?
7. Equity as an Option (LO4) Rackin Pinion Corporation’s assets are currently worth $104. In one year, they will be worth either $100 or $129. The risk-free interest rate is 5 percent. Suppose Rackin Pinion has an outstanding debt issue with a face value of $100.
a. What is the value of the equity? b. What is the value of the debt? The interest rate on the debt? c. Would the value of the equity go up or down if the risk-free rate were 20 percent? Why? What does your answer illustrate?
8. Equity as an Option (LO4) Buckeye Industries has a bond issue with a face value of $100 that is coming due in one year. The value of Buckeye’s assets is currently $109. Jim Tressell, the CEO, believes that the assets in the firm will be worth either $92 or $138 in a year. The going rate on one-year T-bills is 6 percent.
a. What is the value of Buckeye’s equity? The value of the debt? b. Suppose Buckeye can reconfigure its existing assets in such a way that the value in a year will be $80 or $160. If the current
value of the assets is unchanged, will the stockholders favour such a move? Why or why not? 9. Calculating Conversion Value (LO5) A $100 par convertible debenture has a conversion price for common stock of $28 per
share. With the common stock selling at $37, what is the conversion value of the bond? 10. Convertible Bonds (LO5) The following facts apply to a convertible bond making semiannual payments:
Conversion price $35/share Coupon rate 5.4% Par value $100 Yield on nonconvertible debentures of same quality 7% Maturity 30 years Market price of stock $34/share
a. What is the minimum price at which the convertible should sell? b. What accounts for the premium of the market price of a convertible bond over the total market value of the common stock
into which it can be converted? 11. Calculating Values for Convertibles (LO5) You have been hired to value a new 30-year callable, convertible bond. The bond
has a 7.5 percent coupon, payable annually, and its face value is $100. The conversion price is $5.5 and the stock currently sells for $4.2.
a. What is the minimum value of the bond? Comparable nonconvertible bonds are priced to yield 9 percent. b. What is the conversion premium for this bond?
12. Calculating Warrant Values (LO5) A bond with 20 detachable warrants has just been offered for sale at $100. The bond matures in 25 years and has an annual coupon of $5.5. Each warrant gives the owner the right to purchase two shares of stock in the company at $4.5 per share. Ordinary bonds (with no warrants) of similar quality are priced to yield 7 percent. What is the value of one warrant?
13. Option to Wait (LO4) Your company is deciding whether to invest in a new machine. The new machine will increase cash flow by $310,000 per year. You believe the technology used in the machine has a 10-year life; in other words, no matter when you purchase the machine, it will be obsolete 10 years from today. The machine is currently priced at $1,600,000. The cost of the machine will decline by $95,000 per year until it reaches $1,125,000, where it will remain. If your required return is 14 percent, should you purchase the machine? If so, when should you purchase it?
14. Abandonment Value (LO4) We are examining a new project. We expect to sell 6,500 units per year at $63 net cash flow apiece for the next 10 years. In other words, the annual operating cash flow is projected to be $63 × 6,500 = $409,500. The relevant discount rate is 14 percent, and the initial investment required is $1,600,000.
a. What is the base-case NPV? b. After the first year, the project can be dismantled and sold for $1,200,000. If expected sales are revised based on the first
year’s performance, when would it make sense to abandon the investment? In other words, at what level of expected sales would it make sense to abandon the project?
c. Explain how the $1,200,000 abandonment value can be viewed as the opportunity cost of keeping the project in one year.
7
8
Intermediate (Questions
14–19)
14. A f d
CHAPTER 25: Options and Corporate Securities 743
25Ross_Chapter25_3rd.indd 74325Ross_Chapter25_3rd.indd 743 12-11-28 12:5212-11-28 12:52
15. Abandonment (LO4) In the previous problem, suppose you think it is likely that expected sales will be revised upwards to 9,000 units if the first year is a success and revised downwards to 3,500 units if the first year is not a success.
a. If success and failure are equally likely, what is the NPV of the project? Consider the possibility of abandonment in answering.
b. What is the value of the option to abandon? 16. Abandonment and Expansion (LO4) In the previous problem, suppose the scale of the project can be doubled in one year in
the sense that twice as many units can be produced and sold. Naturally, expansion would only be desirable if the project is a success. This implies that if the project is a success, projected sales after expansion will be 18,000. Again assuming that success and failure are equally likely, what is the NPV of the project? Note that abandonment is still an option if the project is a failure. What is the value of the option to expand?
17. Intuition and Option Value (LO2) Suppose a share of stock sells for $54. The risk-free rate is 5 percent, and the stock price in one year will be either $60 or $70.
a. What is the value of a call option with a $60 exercise price? b. What’s wrong here? What would you do?
18. Intuition and Convertibles (LO5) Which of the following two sets of relationships, at time of issuance of convertible bonds, is more typical? Why?
A B
Offering price of bond $ 80 $100 Bond value (straight debt) 80 95 Conversion value 100 90
19. Convertible Calculations (LO5) Alicia Inc. has a $100 face value convertible bond issue that is currently selling in the market for $96. Each bond is exchangeable at any time for 20 shares of the company’s stock. The convertible bond has a 6.5 percent coupon, payable semiannually. Similar nonconvertible bonds are priced to yield 9 percent. The bond matures in 20 years. Stock in Alicia sells for $4.5 per share.
a. What are the conversion ratio, conversion price, and conversion premium? b. What is the straight bond value? The conversion value?
c. In part (b), what would the stock price have to be for the conversion value and the straight bond value to be equal? d. What is the option value of the bond?
20. Abandonment Decisions (LO4) Manga Products Inc. is considering a new product launch. The firm expects to have annual operating cash flow of $8 million for the next 8 years. Manga Products uses a discount rate of 11 percent for new product launches. The initial investment is $38 million. Assume that the project has no salvage value at the end of its economic life.
a. What is the NPV of the new product? b. After the first year, the project can be dismantled and sold for $25 million. If estimates of remaining cash flows are revised
based on the first year’s experience, at what level of expected cash flows does it make sense to abandon the project? 21. Pricing Convertibles (LO5) You have been hired to value a new 25-year callable, convertible bond. The bond has a 4.8 percent
coupon, payable annually. The conversion price is $9, and the stock currently sells for $3.21. The stock price is expected to grow at 11 percent per year. The bond is callable at $120, but, based on prior experience, it won’t be called unless the conversion value is $130. The required return on this bond is 8 percent. What value would you assign? Par value of the bond is $100.
22. Abandonment Decisions (LO4) For some projects, it may be advantageous to terminate the project early. For example, if a project is losing money, you might be able to reduce your losses by scrapping out the assets and terminating the project, rather than continuing to lose money all the way through to the project’s completion. Consider the following project of Hand Clapper Inc. The company is considering a four-year project to manufacture clap-command garage door openers. This project requires an initial investment of $15 million that will be depreciated straight-line to zero over the project’s life. An initial investment in net working capital of $900,000 is required to support spare parts inventory; this cost is fully recoverable whenever the project ends. The company believes it can generate $10.9 million in pre-tax revenues with $4.1 million in total pre-tax operating costs. The tax rate is 38 percent and the discount rate is 13 percent. The market value of the equipment over the life of the project is as follows:
Year Market Value (millions)
1 $13.00 2 10.00 3 7.50 4 0.85
a. Assuming Hand Clapper operates this project for four years, what is the NPV? b. Now compute the project NPV assuming the project is abandoned after only one year, after two years, and after three
years. What economic life for this project maximizes its value to the firm? What does this problem tell you about not con- sidering abandonment possibilities when evaluating projects?
Challenge (Questions
21–22)
2
744 Part 9: Derivative Securities and Corporate Finance
25Ross_Chapter25_3rd.indd 74425Ross_Chapter25_3rd.indd 744 12-11-28 12:5212-11-28 12:52
Internet Application Questions 1. The 1997 Nobel Prize for economics (nobelprize.org/nobel_prizes/economics/laureates/1997/index.html) was awarded to Rob-
ert C. Merton and Myron S. Scholes for their early pioneering work in options pricing. The following site contains the tran- script of an interview conducted by the Public Broadcasting Service (pbs.org) of the U.S. and the two professors. The interview explains the principles behind options pricing, and the excitement the news of the Nobel Prize generated for the recipients. In two short sentences, can you paraphrase Scholes and Merton’s explanation of the intuition behind their options pricing formula?
pbs.org/newshour/bb/business/july-dec97/nobel_10-14.html 2. The Montreal Exchange (ME) (m-x.ca) is the premier venue for trading options in the Canada. The ME provides one of the best
educational links to understand both the valuation of options, and the institutional details such as trading practices. Click on the ME link below to take a self-paced tutorial in options pricing and trading.
m-x.ca/educ_oic_en.php When you are done with the tutorial, go back to the ME site and find and describe securities called Long Term Options
(optionseducation.org/getting_started/options_overview/leaps.html?prt=mx). Note that the United States derivatives exchange, the counterpart of the ME, is the Chicago Board of Options Exchange (cboe.com).
3. Visit the website of the Montreal Exchange (m-x.ca). What are the three most active options on this trading day? What is the company, series, strike price, and volume of the three highest volume calls? Find the same information for puts?
4. The Montreal Exchange (m-x.ca) also provides information on expiration dates. Using the “Trading Calendar” tool (m-x.ca/ nego_ca_en.php), on what day do equity options expire in the current month? On what day do they expire next month?
THE BLACK–SCHOLES OPTION PRICING MODEL
In our discussion of call options in this chapter, we did not discuss the general case where the stock can take on any value and the option can finish out of the money. The general approach to valuing a call option falls under the heading of the Black–Scholes Option Pricing Model (OPM), a very famous result in finance. In ad- dition to its theoretical importance, the OPM has great practical value. Many option traders carry handheld calculators or computing devices programmed with the Black–Scholes formula.
This appendix briefly discusses the Black–Scholes model. Because the underlying development is rela- tively complex, we present only the result and then focus on how to use it.
From our earlier discussion, when a t-period call option is certain to finish somewhere in the money, its value today, C0, is equal to the value of the stock today, S0, less the present value of the exercise price, E/(1 + Rf)t:
C0 = S0 - E/(1 + Rf)t
If the option can finish out of the money, this result needs modifying. Black and Scholes show that the value of a call option in this case is given by:
C0 = S0 × N(d1) - E/(1 + Rf)t × N(d2) [25A.1] where N(d1) and N(d2) are probabilities that must be calculated. This is the Black–Scholes OPM.16
In the Black–Scholes model, N(d1) is the probability that a standardized, normally distributed random variable (widely known as a z variable) is less than or equal to d1, and N(d2) is the probability of a value that is less than or equal to d2. Determining these probabilities requires a table such as Table 25A.1.
To illustrate, suppose we were given the following information: S0 = $100 E = $80 Rf = 1% per month d1 = 1.20 d2 = .90 t = 9 months
Based on this information, what is the value of the call option, C0?
16 Strictly speaking, the risk-free rate in the Black–Scholes model is the continuously compounded risk-free rate. Con- tinuous compounding is discussed in Chapter 6.
APPENDIX 25A
There’s a Black-Scholes calculator (and a lot more) at cboe.com
CHAPTER 25: Options and Corporate Securities 745
25Ross_Chapter25_3rd.indd 74525Ross_Chapter25_3rd.indd 745 12-11-28 12:5212-11-28 12:52
To answer, we need to determine N(d1) and N(d2). In Table 25A.1, we first find the row corresponding to a d of 1.20. The corresponding probability, N(d), is .8849, so this is N(d1). For d2, the associated probabil- ity N(d2) is .8159. Using the Black–Scholes OPM, the value of the call option is thus:
C0 = S0 × N(d1) - E/(1 + Rf)t × N(d2) = $100 × .8849 - $80/1.019 × .8159 = $88.49 - 59.68 = $28.81
As this example illustrates, if we are given values for d1 and d2 (and the table), using the Black–Scholes model is not difficult. In general, however, we are not given the values of d1 and d2, and we must calculate them instead. This requires a little extra effort. The values for d1 and d2 for the Black–Scholes OPM are given by:
d1 = [ln(S0/E) + (Rf + 1/2 × σ2) × t]/[σ × √ _ t ] [25A.2]
d2 = d1 - σ × √ _ t
In these expressions, σ is the standard deviation of the rate of return on the underlying asset. Also, ln(S0/E) is the natural logarithm of the current stock price divided by the exercise price (most calculators have a key labelled ln to perform this calculation).
The formula for d1 looks intimidating, but using it is mostly a matter of “plug and chug” with a calcula- tor. To illustrate, suppose we have the following:
S0 = $70 E = $80 Rf = 1% per month σ = 2% per month t = 9 months
With these numbers, d1 is: d1 = [ln(S0/E) + (Rf + 1/2 × σ2) × t]/[σ × √
_ t ]
= [ln(.875) + (.01 + 1/2 × .022) × 9]/[.02 × 3] = [-.1335 + .0918]/.06 ≈ -.70
Given this result, d2 is: d2 = d1 - σ × √
_ t
= -.70 - .02 × 3 = -.76
Referring to Table 25A.1, the values for N(d1) and N(d2) are .2420 and .2236, respectively. The value of the option is thus:
C0 = S0 × N(d1) - E/(1 + Rf)t × N(d2) = $70 × .2420 - $80/1.019 × .2236 = $.58
This may seem a little small, but the stock price would have to rise by $10 before the option would even be in the money.
Notice that we quoted the risk-free rate, the standard deviation, and the time to maturity in months in this example. We could have used days, weeks, or years as long as we are consistent in quoting all three of these using the same time units.
A question that sometimes comes up concerns the probabilities N(d1) and N(d2). Just what are they the probabilities of? In other words, how do we interpret them? The answer is that they don’t really correspond to anything in the real world. We mention this because there is a common misconception about N(d2) in particular. It is frequently thought to be the probability that the stock price will exceed the strike price on the expiration day, which is also the probability that a call option will finish in the money. Unfortunately, that’s not correct, at least not unless the expected return on the stock is equal to the risk-free rate.
746 Part 9: Derivative Securities and Corporate Finance
25Ross_Chapter25_3rd.indd 74625Ross_Chapter25_3rd.indd 746 12-11-28 12:5212-11-28 12:52
TABLE 25A.1
Cumulative normal distribution d N(d) d N(d) d N(d) d N(d) d N(d) d N(d)
-3.00 .0013 -1.58 .0571 -0.76 .2236 0.06 .5239 0.86 .8051 1.66 .9515
-2.95 .0016 -1.56 .0594 -0.74 .2297 0.08 .5319 0.88 .8106 1.68 .9535
-2.90 .0019 -1.54 .0618 -0.72 .2358 0.10 .5398 0.90 .8159 1.70 .9554
-2.85 .0022 -1.52 .0643 -0.70 .2420 0.12 .5478 0.92 .8212 1.72 .9573
-2.80 .0026 -1.50 .0668 -0.68 .2483 0.14 .5557 0.94 .8264 1.74 .9591
-2.75 .0030 -1.48 .0694 -0.66 .2546 0.16 .5636 0.96 .8315 1.76 .9608
-2.70 .0035 -1.46 .0721 -0.64 .2611 0.18 .5714 0.98 .8365 1.78 .9625
-2.65 .0040 -1.44 .0749 -0.62 .2676 0.20 .5793 1.00 .8414 1.80 .9641
-2.60 .0047 -1.42 .0778 -0.60 .2743 0.22 .5871 1.02 .8461 1.82 .9656
-2.55 .0054 -1.40 .0808 -0.58 .2810 0.24 .5948 1.04 .8508 1.84 .9671
-2.50 .0062 -1.38 .0838 -0.56 .2877 0.26 .6026 1.06 .8554 1.86 .9686
-2.45 .0071 -1.36 .0869 -0.54 .2946 0.28 .6103 1.08 .8599 1.88 .9699
-2.40 .0082 -1.34 .0901 -0.52 .3015 0.30 .6179 1.10 .8643 1.90 .9713
-2.35 .0094 -1.32 .0934 -0.50 .3085 0.32 .6255 1.12 .8686 1.92 .9726
-2.30 .0107 -1.30 .0968 -0.48 .3156 0.34 .6331 1.14 .8729 1.94 .9738
-2.25 .0122 -1.28 .1003 -0.46 .3228 0.36 .6406 1.16 .8770 1.96 .9750
-2.20 .0139 -1.26 .1038 -0.44 .3300 0.38 .6480 1.18 .8810 1.98 .9761
-2.15 .0158 -1.24 .1075 -0.42 .3373 0.40 .6554 1.20 .8849 2.00 .9772
-2.10 .0179 -1.22 .1112 -0.40 .3446 0.42 .6628 1.22 .8888 2.05 .9798
-2.05 .0202 -1.20 .1151 -0.38 .3520 0.44 .6700 1.24 .8925 2.10 .9821
-2.00 .0228 -1.18 .1190 -0.36 .3594 0.46 .6773 1.26 .8962 2.15 .9842
-1.98 .0239 -1.16 .1230 -0.34 .3669 0.48 .6844 1.28 .8997 2.20 .9861
-1.96 .0250 -1.14 .1271 -0.32 .3745 0.50 .6915 1.30 .9032 2.25 .9878
-1.94 .0262 -1.12 .1314 -0.30 .3821 0.52 .6985 1.32 .9066 2.30 .9893
-1.92 .0274 -1.10 .1357 -0.28 .3897 0.54 .7054 1.34 .9099 2.35 .9906
-1.90 .0287 -1.08 .1401 -0.26 .3974 0.56 .7123 1.36 .9131 2.40 .9918
-1.88 .0301 -1.06 .1446 -0.24 .4052 0.58 .7191 1.38 .9162 2.45 .9929
-1.86 .0314 -1.04 .1492 -0.22 .4129 0.60 .7258 1.40 .9192 2.50 .9938
-1.84 .0329 -1.02 .1539 -0.20 .4207 0.62 .7324 1.42 .9222 2.55 .9946
-1.82 .0344 -1.00 .1587 -0.18 .4286 0.64 .7389 1.44 .9251 2.60 .9953
-1.80 .0359 -0.98 .1635 -0.16 .4365 0.66 .7454 1.46 .9279 2.65 .9960
-1.78 .0375 -0.96 .1685 -0.14 .4443 0.68 .7518 1.48 .9306 2.70 .9965
-1.76 .0392 -0.94 .1736 -0.12 .4523 0.70 .7580 1.50 .9332 2.75 .9970
-1.74 .0409 -0.92 .1788 -0.10 .4602 0.72 .7642 1.52 .9357 2.80 .9974
-1.72 .0427 -0.90 .1841 -0.08 .4681 0.74 .7704 1.54 .9382 2.85 .9978
-1.70 .0446 -0.88 .1894 -0.06 .4761 0.76 .7764 1.56 .9406 2.90 .9981
-1.68 .0465 -0.86 .1949 -0.04 .4841 0.78 .7823 1.58 .9429 2.95 .9984
-1.66 .0485 -0.84 .2005 -0.02 .4920 0.80 .7882 1.60 .9452 3.00 .9986
-1.64 .0505 -0.82 .2061 0.00 .5000 0.82 .7939 1.62 .9474 3.05 .9989
-1.62 .0526 -0.80 .2119 0.02 .5080 0.84 .7996 1.64 .9495
-1.60 .0548 -0.78 .2177 0.04 .5160
Th is table shows the probability (N(d)) of observing a value less than or equal to d. For example, as illustrated, if d is -0.24, then N(d) is .4052.
CHAPTER 25: Options and Corporate Securities 747
25Ross_Chapter25_3rd.indd 74725Ross_Chapter25_3rd.indd 747 12-11-28 12:5212-11-28 12:52
Black-Scholes Option Calculation
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
Stock = 65 d1 = 0.4952 N(d1) = 0.6898 Strike = 60 Sigma = 0.5 d2 = 0.2452 N(d2) = 0.5968 Time = 0.25 Rate = 0.05
XYZ stock has a price of $65 and an annual return standard deviation of 50%. The riskless interest rate is 5%. Calculate call and put option prices with a strike of $60 and a 3-month time to expiration.
Formula entered in E8 is =(LN(B8/B9)+(B12+0.5*B10^2)*B11)/(B10*SQRT(B11)) Formula entered in E10 is =E8–B10*SQRT(B11) Formula entered in H8 is =NORMSDIST(E8) Formula entered in K10 is =NORMSDIST(E10) Formula entered in K14 is =B8*H8–B9*EXP(–B12*B11)*H10 Formula entered in K16 is =B9*EXP(–B12*B11)+K14–B8
A B C D E F G H I J K
Using a spreadsheet to calculate Black-Scholes option prices
Call = Stock x N(d1) – Strike x exp(– Rate x Time) x N(d2) = $9.47
Put = Strike x exp(– Rate x Time) + Call – Stock = $3.72
Tables such as Table 25A.1 are the traditional means of looking up “z” values, but they have been mostly replaced by computers. Th ey are not as accurate because of rounding, and they also have only a limited number of values. Th e Spreadsheet Strategies box shows how to calculate Black–Scholes call option prices using a spreadsheet.
Appendix Review Problems and Self-Test
A.1 Black–Scholes OPM: Part I Calculate the Black–Scholes price for a six-month option given the following: S0 = $80 E = $70 Rf = 10% per year d1 = .82 d2 = .74
A.2 Black–Scholes OPM: Part II Calculate the Black–Scholes price for a nine-month option given the following: S0 = $80 E = $70 σ = .30 per year Rf = 10% per year t = 9 months
Answers to Appendix Self-Test Problems
A.1 C0 = 80 × N(.82) - 70/(1.10).5 × N(.74)
From Table 25A.1, the values for N(.82) and N(.74) are .7939 and .7704, respectively. Th e value of the option is about $12.10. Notice that since the interest rate (and standard deviation) is quoted on an an- nual basis, we used a t value of .50, representing a half year, in calculating the present value of the exer- cise price.
SPREADSHEET STRATEGIES
748 Part 9: Derivative Securities and Corporate Finance
25Ross_Chapter25_3rd.indd 74825Ross_Chapter25_3rd.indd 748 12-11-28 12:5212-11-28 12:52
A.2 We fi rst calculate d1 and d2: d1 = [ln(S0/E) + (Rf + 1/2 × σ2) × t]/[σ × √
_ t ]
= [ln(80/70) + (.10 + 1/2 × .302) × (.75)]/[.30 × √ ___
.75 ] = .9325
d2 = d1 - σ × √ _ t
= .9325 - .30 × √ ___
.75 = .6727
From Table 25A.1, N(d1) appears to be roughly .825, and N(d2) is about .75. Plugging these in, we de- termine that the option’s value is $17.12. Notice again that we used an annual t value of 9/12 = .75 in this case.
Appendix Questions and Problems For Problems A.1 through A.3, round computed values for d1 and d2 to the nearest values in Table 25A.1 for determining N(d1) and N(d2), respectively.
A.1 Using the OPM Calculate the Black–Scholes option price in each of the cases that follow. Th e risk-free rate and standard deviation are quoted in annual terms. Th e last three cases may require some thought.
Stock Price
Exercise Price
Risk-Free Rate Maturity
Standard Deviation
Call Price
$31 $37.50 07% 3 months 0.21 40 29 03% 6 months .15 89 63 12% 9 months 0.24 97 99 08% 12 months .30 0 35 05% 12 months 0.44
125 17 04% Forever .35 129 0 03% 6 months 0.21 121 113 06% 6 months .00 50 74 13% 12 months ∞
A.2 Equity as an Option and the OPM Childs Manufacturing has a discount bank loan that matures in one year and requires the fi rm to pay $2,950. Th e current market value of the fi rm’s assets is $3,400. Th e annual variance for the fi rm’s return on assets is 0.29, and the annual risk-free interest rate is 4.5 per- cent. Based on the Black–Scholes model, what is the market value of the fi rm’s debt and equity?
A.3 Changes in Variance and Equity Value Suppose that, in the previous problem, Childs is considering two mutually exclusive investments. Project A has an NPV of $135, and Project B has an NPV of $215. As a result of taking Project A, the variance of the fi rm’s return on assets will increase to .39. If Project B is taken, the variance will fall to .22.
a. What is the value of the fi rm’s debt and equity if Project A is undertaken? If Project B is undertaken?
b. Which project would the shareholders prefer? Can you reconcile your answer with the NPV rule?
c. Suppose the shareholders and bondholders are in fact the same group of investors. Would this af- fect the answer to part (b)?
d. What does this problem suggest to you about shareholder incentives?
Basic (Questions
A.1–A.2)
Intermediate (Question
A.3)
CHAPTER 25: Options and Corporate Securities 749
25Ross_Chapter25_3rd.indd 74925Ross_Chapter25_3rd.indd 749 12-11-28 12:5212-11-28 12:52
Be honest: Do you think of yourself as a better than average driver? If you do, you are not alone. About 80 percent of the people who are asked this question will say yes. Evidently, we tend to overestimate our abilities behind the wheel. Is the same true when it comes to making financial management decisions?
It will probably not surprise you when we say that human beings sometimes make errors in judgment. How these errors, and other aspects of human behaviour, aff ect financial managers falls under the general heading of “behavioural finance.” In this chapter, our goal is to acquaint you with some common types of mistakes and their financial implications. As you will see, research- ers have identified a wide variety of potentially damaging behaviours. By learning to recognize situations in which mistakes are common, you will become a better decision-maker, both in the context of financial management and elsewhere.
BEHAVIOURAL FINANCE: IMPLICATIONS FOR FINANCIAL MANAGEMENT
C H A P T E R 2 6
T he NASDAQ stock market was raging in the late 1990s, gaining about 23 percent in 1996, 14 percent in 1997, 35 percent in 1998, and 62 per-
cent in 1999. Of course, that spectacular run came
to a jarring halt, and the NASDAQ lost about 40
percent in 2000, followed by another 30 percent in
2001. The ISDEX, an index of Internet-related stocks,
rose from 100 in January 1996 to 1100 in February
2000, a gain of about 1000 percent! It then fell like a
rock to 600 by May 2000.
The performance of the NASDAQ over this period,
and particularly the rise and fall of Internet stocks, has
been described by many as one of the greatest mar-
ket “bubbles” in history. The argument is that prices
were inflated to economically ridiculous levels before
investors came to their senses, which then caused
the bubble to pop and prices to plunge. Debate over
whether the stock market of the late 1990s really was
a bubble has generated much controversy.
The Canadian based network company, Nortel,
was damaged when the Internet bubble burst. The
S&P/TSX went up 30 percent in 1999 largely on the
strength of Nortel, which rose to become around
40% of the index market capitalization, which was
about $1 trillion. Questioning the value of this stock,
a number of fund managers benchmarked their per-
formance against a capped S&P/TSX index in which
Nortel was limited to 10 percent. This judgment was
confirmed when Nortel later went bankrupt in 2009.
In this chapter, we introduce the subject of behav-
ioural finance, which deals with questions such as
how bubbles can come to exist. Some of the issues
we discuss are quite controversial and unsettled. We
will describe competing ideas, present some evi-
dence on both sides, and examine the implications
for financial managers.
Learning Object ives
After studying this chapter, you should understand:
LO1 How behaviours such as overconfidence, overoptimism, and confirmation bias can affect decision-making.
LO2 How framing effects can result in inconsistent and/or incorrect decisions.
LO3 How the use of heuristics can lead to suboptimal financial decisions.
LO4 The shortcomings and limitations to market efficiency from the behavioural finance view.
© D
in od
ia P
ho to
s/ A
la m
y/ A
ll C
an ad
a Ph
ot os
26Ross_Chapter26_3rd.indd 75026Ross_Chapter26_3rd.indd 750 12-11-28 12:5312-11-28 12:53
26.1 Introduction to Behavioural Finance
Sooner or later, you are going to make a financial decision that winds up costing you (and possibly your employer and/or stockholders) a lot of money. Why is this going to happen? You already know the answer. Sometimes, you make sound decisions, but you get unlucky in the sense that something happens that you could not have reasonably anticipated. Other times (however painful to admit), you just make a bad decision, one that could have (and should have) been avoided. Th e beginning of business wisdom is to recognize the circumstances that lead to poor decisions and thereby cut down on the damage done by financial blunders.
As we have previously noted, the area of research known as behavioural finance attempts to understand and explain how reasoning errors influence financial decisions. Much of the research done in the behavioural finance area stems from work in cognitive psychology, which is the study of how people, including financial managers, think, reason, and make decisions. Errors in reason- ing are oft en called cognitive errors. In the next several subsections, we will review three main categories of such errors: (1) biases, (2) framing eff ects, and (3) heuristics.1
26.2 Biases
If your decisions exhibit systematic biases, then you will make systematic errors in judgment. Th e type of error depends on the type of bias. In this section, we discuss three particularly relevant biases: (1) overconfidence, (2) overoptimism, and (3) confirmation bias.
Overconfidence Serious errors in judgment occur in the business world due to overconfidence. We are all overconfident about our abilities in at least some areas (recall our question about driving ability at the beginning of the chapter). Here is another example that we see a lot: Ask yourself what grade you will receive in this course (in spite of the arbitrary and capricious nature of the professor). In our experience, almost everyone will either say “A” or, at worst, “B.” Sadly, when this happens, we are always confident (but not overconfident) that at least some of our students are going to be disappointed.
In general, you are overconfident when you overestimate your ability to make the correct choice or decision. For example, most business decisions require judgments about the unknown future. Th e belief that you can forecast the future with precision is a common form of overconfidence.
Another good example of overconfidence comes from studies of stock investors. Researchers have examined large numbers of actual brokerage accounts to see how investors fare when they choose stocks. Overconfidence by investors would cause them to overestimate their ability to pick the best stocks, leading to excessive trading. Th e evidence supports this view. First, investors hurt themselves by trading. Th e accounts that have the most trading significantly underperform the accounts with the least trading, primarily because of the costs associated with trades.
A second finding is equally interesting. Accounts registered to men underperform those reg- istered to women. Th e reason is that men trade more on average. Th is extra trading is consistent with evidence from psychology that men have greater degrees of overconfidence than women.
Further, education does not necessarily control overconfi dence. According to a Canadian study, more educated people exhibit greater overconfi dence than do people with less education.2
Overoptimism Overoptimism leads to overestimating the likelihood of a good outcome and underestimating the likelihood of a bad outcome. Overoptimism and overconfidence are related, but they are not the same thing. An overconfident individual could (overconfidently) forecast a bad outcome, for example.
Optimism is usually thought of as a good thing. Optimistic people have “upbeat personali- ties” and “sunny dispositions.” However, excessive optimism leads to bad decisions. In a capital
1 A highly readable book on behavioural finance is: L.F. Ackert and R. Deaves, Behavioral Finance: Psychology, Decision- Making, and Markets, South-Western Cengage Learning, 2010. 2 G. Bhandari and R. Deaves, “The Demographics of Overconfidence,” Journal of Behavioral Finance 7 (1), 2006, pages 5–11.
behavioural finance The area of finance dealing with the implications of reasoning errors on financial decisions.
overconfidence The belief that your abilities are better than they really are.
overoptimism Taking an overly optimistic view of potential outcomes.
CHAPTER 26: Behavioural Finance: Implications for Financial Management 751
26Ross_Chapter26_3rd.indd 75126Ross_Chapter26_3rd.indd 751 12-11-28 12:5312-11-28 12:53
budgeting context, overly optimistic analysts will consistently overestimate cash flows and under- estimate the probability of failure. Doing so leads to upward-biased estimates of project NPVs, a common occurrence in the business world.
Optimism and its opposite, depression, are linked to seasonal cycles measured by the number of hours of daylight. Studies suggest that stock traders around the globe are more risk averse dur- ing the darker months.3
Confirmation Bias When you are evaluating a decision, you collect information and opinions. A common bias in this regard is to focus more on information that agrees with your opinion and to downplay or ignore information that doesn’t agree with or support your position. Th is phenomenon is known as confirmation bias, and people who suff er from it tend to spend too much time trying to prove themselves correct rather than searching for information that might prove them wrong.
Here is a classic example from psychology. Below are four cards. Notice that the cards are labelled a, b, 2, and 3. You are asked to evaluate the following statement: “Any card with a vowel on one side has an even number on the other.” You are asked which of the four cards has to be turned over to decide if the statement is true or false. It costs $100 to turn over a card, so you want to be economical as possible. What do you do?
a b 2 3
You would probably begin by turning over the card with an a on it, which is correct. If we find an odd number, then we are done because the statement is not correct.
Suppose we find an even number. What next? Most people will turn over the card with a 2. Is that the right choice? If we find a vowel, then we confirm the statement, but if we find a consonant, we don’t learn anything. In other words, this card can’t prove that the statement is wrong; it can only confirm it, so selecting this card is an example of confirmation bias.
Continuing, there is no point in turning over the card labelled “b” because the statement doesn’t say anything about consonants, which leaves us with the last card. Do we have to turn it over? Th e answer is yes because it might have a vowel on the other side, which would disprove the statement, but most people will chose the 2 card over the 3 card.
1. What is overconfidence? How is it likely to be costly?
2. What is overoptimism? How is it likely to be costly?
3. What is confirmation bias? How is it likely to be costly?
26.3 Framing Effects
You are susceptible to framing eff ects if your decisions depend on how a problem or question is framed. Consider the following example: A disaster has occurred, 600 people are at risk, and you are in charge. You must choose between the two following rescue operations:
SCENARIO 1 Option A: Exactly 200 people will be saved. Option B: There is a 1/3 chance that all 600 people will be saved and a 2/3 chance that no people will be saved.
3 M.J. Kamstra, L.A. Kramer and M.D. Levi, “Winter Blues: Seasonal Affective Disorder (SAD) and Stock Market Returns,” American Economic Review, 93 (1), 324–343, March 2003.
confirmation bias Searching for (and giving more weight to) information and opinion that confirms what you believe rather than information and opinion to the contrary.
Concept Questions
752 Part 9: Derivative Securities and Corporate Finance
26Ross_Chapter26_3rd.indd 75226Ross_Chapter26_3rd.indd 752 12-11-28 12:5312-11-28 12:53
Which would you choose? Th ere is no necessarily right answer, but most people will choose Option A. Now suppose your choices are as follows:
SCENARIO 2 Option C: Exactly 400 people will die. Option D: There is a 1/3 chance that nobody will die and a 2/3 chance that all 600 will die.
Now which do you pick? Again, there is no right answer, but most people will choose option D. Although most people will choose options A and D in our hypothetical scenarios, you prob-
ably see that doing so is inconsistent because options A and C are identical, as are options B and D. Why do people make inconsistent choices? It’s because the options are framed diff erently. Th e first scenario is positive because it emphasizes the number that will be saved. Th e second is nega- tive because it focuses on losses, and people react diff erently to positive versus negative framing, which is a form of frame dependence.
Loss Aversion Here is another example that illustrates a particular type of frame dependence:
SCENARIO 1: Suppose we give you $1,000. You have the following choices: Option A: You can receive another $500 for sure. Option B: You can flip a fair coin. If the coin flip comes up heads, you gain another $1,000, but if it comes up tails, you gain nothing.
SCENARIO 2: Suppose we give you $2,000. You have the following choices: Option C: You can lose $500 for sure. Option D: You can flip a fair coin. If the coin flip comes up heads, you lose $1,000, but if it comes up tails, you lose nothing.
What were your answers? Did you choose option A in the first scenario and option D in the second? If that’s what you did, you are guilty of just focusing on gains and losses, and not paying attention to what really matters, namely, the impact on your wealth. However, you are not alone. About 85 percent of the people who are presented with the first scenario choose option A, and about 70 percent of the people who are presented with the second scenario choose option D.
If you look closely at the two scenarios, you will see that they are actually identical. You end up with $1,500 for sure if you pick option A or C, or else you end up with a 50-50 chance of either $1,000 or $2,000 if you pick option B or D. So, you should pick the same option in both scenarios. Which option you prefer is up to you, but the point is that you should never pick option A in our first scenario and option D in our second one.
Th is example illustrates an important aspect of financial decision-making. Focusing on gains and losses instead of overall wealth is an example of narrow framing, and it leads to a phenom- enon known as loss aversion. In fact, the reason that most people avoid option C in scenario 2 in our example is that it is expressed as a sure loss of $500. In general, researchers have found that individuals are reluctant to realize losses and will, for example, gamble at unfavorable odds to avoid doing so.
Loss aversion is also known as get-evenitis or the break-even eff ect because it frequently shows up as individuals and companies hang on to bad investments and projects (and perhaps even invest more) hoping that something will happen that will allow them to break even and thereby escape without a loss. For example, we discussed the irrelevance of sunk costs in the context of capital budgeting, and the idea of a sunk cost seems clear. Nonetheless, we constantly see com- panies (and individuals) throw good money aft er bad rather than just recognize a loss in the face of sunk costs.
How destructive is get-evenitis? Perhaps the most famous case occurred in 1995, when 28-year- old Nicholas Leeson caused the collapse of his employer, the 233-year-old Barings Bank. At the end of 1992, Mr. Leeson had lost about £2 million, which he hid in a secret account. By the end of 1993, his losses were about £23 million, and they mushroomed to £208 million at the end of 1994 (at the time, this was $512 million).
Instead of admitting to these losses, Mr. Leeson gambled more of the bank’s money in an attempt to “double-up and catch-up.” On February 23, 1995, Mr. Leeson’s losses were about
frame dependence The tendency of individuals to make different (and potentially inconsistent) decisions depending on how a question or problem is framed.
CHAPTER 26: Behavioural Finance: Implications for Financial Management 753
26Ross_Chapter26_3rd.indd 75326Ross_Chapter26_3rd.indd 753 12-11-28 12:5312-11-28 12:53
£827 million ($1.3 billion), and his trading irregularities were uncovered. Although he attempted to flee from prosecution, he was caught, arrested, tried, convicted, and imprisoned. Also, his wife divorced him.
Do you suff er from get-evenitis? Maybe so. Consider the following scenario: You just lost $78 somehow. You can just live with the loss, or you can make a bet. If you make the bet, there is an 80 percent chance that your loss will grow to $100 (from $78) and a 20 percent chance that your loss will be nothing. Do you take the loss or take the bet? We bet you choose the bet. If you do, you have get-evenitis because the bet is a bad one. Instead of a sure loss of $78, your expected loss from the bet is .80 × $100 + .20 × $0 = $80.
In corporate finance, loss aversion can be quite damaging. We already mentioned the pursuit of sunk costs. We also might see managers bypassing positive NPV projects because they have the possibility of large losses (perhaps with low probability). Another phenomenon that we see is debt avoidance. As we discuss in our coverage of capital structure, debt financing generates valuable tax shields for profitable companies. Even so, there are hundreds of profitable companies listed on major stock exchanges that completely (or almost completely) avoid debt financing. Because debt financing increases the likelihood of losses and even bankruptcy, this potentially costly behaviour could be due to loss aversion.
House Money Las Vegas casinos know all about a concept called playing with house money. Th e casinos have found that gamblers are far more likely to take big risks with money that they have won from the casino (i.e., house money). Also casinos have found that gamblers are not as upset about losing house money as they are about losing the money they brought with them to gamble.
It may seem natural for you to feel that some money is precious because you earned it through hard work, sweat, and sacrifice, while other money is less precious because it came to you as a windfall. But these feelings are plainly irrational because any dollar you have buys the same amount of goods and services no matter how you obtained that dollar.
Let’s consider another common situation to illustrate several of the ideas we have explored thus far. Consider the following two investments:
Investment 1: You bought 100 shares in Moore Enterprises for $35 per share. Th e shares immediately fell to $20 each.
Investment 2: At the same time, you bought 100 shares in Miller Co. for $5 per share. Th e shares immediately jumped to $20 each.
How would you feel about your investments? You would probably feel pretty good about your Miller investment and be unhappy with your
Moore investment. Here are some other things that might occur:
1. You might tell yourself that your Miller investment was a great idea on your part; you’re a stock-picking genius. The drop in value on the Moore shares wasn’t your fault—it was just bad luck. This is a form of confirmation bias, and it also illustrates self-attribution bias, which is taking credit for good outcomes that occur for reasons beyond your control, while attributing bad outcomes to bad luck or misfortune.
2. You might be unhappy that your big winner was essentially nullified by your loser, but no- tice in our example that your overall wealth did not change. Suppose instead that shares in both companies didn’t change in price at all, so that your overall wealth was unchanged. Would you feel the same way?
3. You might be inclined to sell your Miller stock to “realize” the gain, but hold on to your Moore stock in hopes of avoiding the loss (which is, of course, loss aversion). The tendency to sell winners and hold losers is known as the disposition effect. Plainly, the rational thing to do is to decide if the stocks are attractive investments at their new prices and react accordingly.
Suppose you decide to keep both stocks a little longer. Once you do, both decline to $15. You might now feel very diff erently about the decline depending on which stock you looked at. With Moore, the decline makes a bad situation even worse. Now you are down $20 per share on your investment. On the other hand, with Miller you only “give back” some of your “paper profit.” You
754 Part 9: Derivative Securities and Corporate Finance
26Ross_Chapter26_3rd.indd 75426Ross_Chapter26_3rd.indd 754 12-11-28 12:5312-11-28 12:53
are still way ahead. Th is kind of thinking is playing with house money. Whether you lose from your original investment or from your investment gains is irrelevant.
Our Moore and Miller example illustrates what can happen when you become emotionally invested in decisions such as stock purchases. When you add a new stock to your portfolio, it is human nature for you to associate the stock with its purchase price. As the price of the stock changes through time, you will have unrealized gains or losses when you compare the current price to the purchase price. Th rough time, you will mentally account for these gains and losses, and how you feel about the investment depends on whether you are ahead or behind. Th is behav- iour is known as mental accounting.
When you engage in mental accounting, you unknowingly have a personal relationship with each of your stocks. As a result, it becomes harder to sell one of them. It is as if you have to “break up” with this stock or “fire” it from your portfolio. As with personal relationships, these stock rela- tionships can be complicated and, believe it or not, make selling stocks difficult at times. What can you do about mental accounting? Legendary investor Warren Buff et off ers the following advice: “Th e stock doesn’t know you own it. You have feelings about it, but it has no feelings about you. Th e stock doesn’t know what you paid. People shouldn’t get emotionally involved with their stocks.”
Loss aversion, mental accounting, and the house money eff ect are important examples of how narrow framing leads to poor decisions. Other, related types of judgment errors have been docu- mented. Here are a few examples:
Myopic loss aversion: Th is behaviour is the tendency to focus on avoiding short-term losses, even at the expense of long-term gains. For example, you might fail to invest in stocks for long- term retirement purposes because you have a fear of loss in the near term.
Regret aversion: Th is aversion is the tendency to avoid making a decision because you fear that, in hindsight, the decision would have been less than optimal. Regret aversion relates to myopic loss aversion.
Endowment eff ect: Th is eff ect is the tendency to consider something that you own to be worth more than it would be if you did not own it. Because of the endowment eff ect, people sometimes demand more money to give up something than they would be willing to pay to acquire it.
Money illusion: If you suff er from money illusion, you are confused between real buying power and nominal buying power (i.e., you do not account for the eff ects of inflation).
1. What is frame dependence? How is it likely to be costly?
2. What is loss aversion? How is it likely to be costly?
3. What is the house money effect? Why is it irrational?
26.4 Heuristics
Financial managers (and managers in general) oft en rely on rules of thumb, or heuristics, in making decisions. For example, a manager might decide that any project with a payback period less than two years is acceptable and therefore not bother with additional analysis. As a practical matter, this mental shortcut might be just fine for most circumstances, but we know that sooner or later, it will lead to the acceptance of a negative NPV project.
The Affect Heurist ic We frequently hear business and political leaders talk about following their gut instinct. In essence, such people are making decisions based on whether the chosen outcome or path feels “right” emotionally. Psychologists use the term aff ect (as in aff ection) to refer to emotional feel- ings, and the reliance on gut instinct is called the aff ect heuristic.
Reliance on instinct is closely related to reliance on intuition and/or experience. Both intuition and experience are important and, when used properly, help decision-makers identify potential risks and rewards. However, instinct, intuition, and experience should be viewed as complements
Concept Questions
heuristics Shortcuts or rules of thumb used to make decisions.
affect heuristic The reliance on instinct instead of analysis in making decisions.
CHAPTER 26: Behavioural Finance: Implications for Financial Management 755
26Ross_Chapter26_3rd.indd 75526Ross_Chapter26_3rd.indd 755 12-11-28 12:5312-11-28 12:53
to formal analysis, not substitutes. Overreliance on emotions in making decisions will almost surely lead (at least on occasion) to costly outcomes that could have been avoided with careful, structured thinking. An obvious example would be making capital budgeting decisions based on instinct rather than on market research and discounted cash flow analysis.
The Representativeness Heurist ic People oft en assume that a particular person, object, or outcome is broadly representative of a larger class. For example, suppose an employer hired a graduate of your high-quality educational institution and, in fact, is quite pleased with that person. Th e employer might be inclined to look to your school again for future employees because the students are so good. Of course, in doing so, the employer is assuming that the recent hire is representative of all the students, which is an example of the representativeness heuristic. A little more generally, the representativeness heuristic is the reliance on stereotypes, analogies, or limited samples to form opinions about an entire class.
Representativeness and Randomness Another implication of the representativeness heuristic has to do with perceiving patterns or causes where none exist. For example, basketball fans generally believe that success breeds suc- cess. Suppose we look at the recent performance of two basketball players named Bargnani and DeRozan. Both of these players make half of their shots. But, Bargnani has just made two shots in a row, while DeRozan has just missed two in a row. Researchers have found that if they ask 100 basketball fans which player has the better chance of making the next shot, 91 of them will say Bargnani, because he has a “hot hand.” Further, 84 of these fans believe that it is important for teammates to pass the ball to Bargnani aft er he has made two or three shots in a row.
But, and the sports fans among you will have a hard time with this, researchers have found that the hot hand is an illusion. Th at is, players really do not deviate much from their long-run shooting averages—although fans, players, announcers, and coaches think they do. Cognitive psychologists actually studied the shooting percentage of one professional basketball team for a season. Here is what they found:
Shooting Percentages and the History of Previous Attempts
Shooting Percentage on Next Shot History of Previous Attempts
46% Has made 3 in a row 50% Has made 2 in a row 51% Has made 1 in a row 52% First short of the game 54% Has missed 1 in a row 53% Has missed 2 in a row 56% Has missed 3 in a row
Detailed analysis of shooting data failed to show that players make or miss shots more or less frequently than what would be expected by chance. Th at is, statistically speaking, all the shooting percentages listed here are the same.
From the shooting percentages, it may appear that teams will try harder to stop a shooter who has made the last two or three shots. To take this into account, researchers also studied free-throw percentages. Researchers told fans that a certain player was a 70 percent free-throw shooter and was shooting two foul shots. Th ey asked fans to predict what would happen on the second shot if the player
1. Made the first free throw. 2. Missed the first free throw.
Fans thought that this 70 percent free-throw shooter would make 74 percent of the second free throws aft er making the first free throw but would only make 66 percent of the second free throws aft er missing the first free throw. Researchers studied free-throw data from a professional bas- ketball team over two seasons. Th ey found that the result of the first free throw does not matter when it comes to making or missing the second free throw. On average, the shooting percentage
representativeness heuristic The reliance on stereotypes, analogies, or limited samples to form opinions about an entire class.
756 Part 9: Derivative Securities and Corporate Finance
26Ross_Chapter26_3rd.indd 75626Ross_Chapter26_3rd.indd 756 12-11-28 12:5312-11-28 12:53
on the second free throw was 75 percent when the player made the first free throw. On average, the shooting percentage on the second free throw was also 75 percent when the player missed the first free throw.
It is true that basketball players shoot in streaks. But these streaks are within the bounds of long-run shooting percentages. So, it is an illusion that players are either “hot” or “cold.” If you are a believer in the hot hand, however, you are likely to reject these facts because you “know better” from watching your favourite teams over the years. If you do, you are being fooled by randomness.
Th e clustering illusion is our human belief that random events that occur in clusters are not really random. For example, it strikes most people as very unusual if heads comes up four times in a row during a series of coin flips. However, if a fair coin is flipped 20 times, there is about a 50 percent chance of getting four heads in a row. Ask yourself, if you flip four heads in a row, do you think you have a “hot hand” at coin flipping?
The Gambler’s Fal lacy People commit the gambler’s fallacy when they assume that a departure from what occurs on average, or in the long run, will be corrected in the short run. Interestingly, some people suff er from both the hot-hand illusion (which predicts continuation in the short run) and the gam- bler’s fallacy (which predicts reversal in the short run)! Th e idea is that because an event has not happened recently, it has become overdue and is more likely to occur. People sometimes refer (wrongly) to the law of averages in such cases.
Roulette is a random gambling game where gamblers can make various bets on the spin of the wheel. Th ere are 38 numbers on a North American roulette table, 2 green (or white) ones, 18 red ones, and 18 black ones. One possible bet is to bet whether the spin will result in a red number or in a black number. Suppose a red number has appeared five times in a row. Gamblers will oft en become (over) confident that the next spin will be black, when the true chance remains at about 50 percent (of course, it is exactly 18 in 38).
Th e misconception arises from the human intuition that the overall odds of the wheel must be reflected in a small number of spins. Th at is, gamblers oft en become convinced that the wheel is “due” to hit a black number aft er a series of red numbers. Gamblers do know that the odds of a black number appearing are always unchanged: 18 in 38. But, gamblers cannot help but feel that aft er a long series of red numbers, a black one must appear to restore the balance between red and black numbers over time.
Of course, there are many other related errors and biases due to heuristics. Here is a partial list: Law of small numbers: If you believe in the law of small numbers, you believe that a small
sample of outcomes always resembles the long-run distribution of outcomes. If your investment guru has been right five out of seven times recently, you might believe that his long-run average of being correct is also five out of seven. Th e law of small numbers is related to recency bias (see our next item) and to the gambler’s fallacy.
Recency bias: Humans tend to give recent events more importance than less recent events. For example, during the great bull market that occurred from 1995 to 1999, many investors thought the market would continue its big gains for a long time—forgetting that bear markets also occur (which happened from 2000 to 2002). Recency bias is related to the law of small numbers.
Anchoring and adjustment: People have an anchoring bias when they are unable to account for new information in a correct way. Th at is, they become “anchored” to a previous price or other value. If you have an anchoring bias, you will tend to be overly conservative in the face of fresh news.
Aversion to ambiguity: Th is bias results when people shy away from the unknown. For exam- ple, consider the following choice. You get $1,000 for sure, or you can draw a ball out of a big bin containing 100 balls. If the ball is blue, you win $2,000. If it is red, you win nothing. When people are told that there are 50 blue balls and 50 red balls in the bin, about 40 percent choose to draw a ball. When they are told nothing about how many balls in the bin are blue, most choose to take the $1,000—ignoring the possibility that the odds might really be in their favour. Th at is, there could be more than 50 blue balls in the bin.
False consensus: Th is is the tendency to think that other people are thinking the same thing you are thinking (with no real evidence). False consensus relates to overconfidence and confirmation bias.
CHAPTER 26: Behavioural Finance: Implications for Financial Management 757
26Ross_Chapter26_3rd.indd 75726Ross_Chapter26_3rd.indd 757 12-11-28 12:5312-11-28 12:53
Availability bias: You suff er from availability bias when you put too much weight on informa- tion that is easily available and place too little weight on information that is hard to obtain. Your financial decisions will suff er if you only consider information that is easy to obtain.
1. What is the affect heuristic? How is it likely to be costly?
2. What is the representativeness heuristic? How is it likely to be costly?
3. What is the gambler’s fallacy?
26.5 Behavioural Finance and Market Efficiency
Our discussion thus far has focused on how cognitive errors by individuals can lead to poor business decisions. It seems both clear and noncontroversial that such errors are both real and financially important. We now venture into a much less clear area—the implications of behav- ioural finance for stock prices.
In Chapter 12, we introduced the notion of market efficiency. Th e key idea is that in an efficient market, prices fully reflect available information. Put diff erently, prices are correct in the sense that a stock purchase or sale is a zero NPV investment. In a well-organized, liquid market such as the NYSE or TSX, the argument is that competition among profit-motivated, economically ratio- nal traders ensures that prices can never drift far from their zero-NPV level.
In this chapter, we have already seen a few examples of how cognitive errors, such as overconfidence, can lead to damaging decisions in the context of stock ownership. If many trad- ers behave in ways that are economically irrational, then is there still reason to think that markets are efficient?
First off , it is important to realize that the efficient markets hypothesis does not require every investor to be rational. Instead, all that is required for a market to be efficient is at least some smart and well-financed investors. Th ese investors are prepared to buy and sell to take advantage of any mispricing in the marketplace. Th is activity is what keeps markets efficient. It is sometimes said that market efficiency doesn’t require that everyone be rational, just that someone be.
Limits to Arbitrage Investors who buy and sell to exploit mispricings are engaging in a form of arbitrage and are known as arbitrageurs (or just arbs for short). Sometimes, however, a problem arises in this con- text. Th e term limits to arbitrage refers to the notion that, under certain circumstances, it may not be possible for rational, well-capitalized traders to correct a mispricing, at least not quickly. Th e reason is that strategies designed to eliminate mispricings are oft en risky, costly, or somehow restricted. Th ree important such problems are:
1. Firm-specific risk: This issue is the most obvious risk facing a would-be arbitrageur. Sup- pose that you believe that the observed price on Research in Motion (RIM) stock is too low, so you purchase many, many shares. Then, there is some unanticipated negative news that drives the price of RIM stock even lower. Of course, you could try to hedge some of the firm- specific risk, but any hedge you create is likely to be either imperfect and/or costly.
2. Noise trader risk: A noise trader is someone whose trades are not based on information or financially meaningful analysis. Noise traders could, in principle, act together to worsen a mispricing in the short run. Noise trader risk is important because the worsening of a mis- pricing could force the arbitrageur to liquidate early and sustain steep losses. As Keynes once famously observed, “Markets can remain irrational longer than you can remain solvent.”4
4 This remark is generally attributed to Keynes, but whether he actually said it is not known.
Concept Questions
noise trader A trader whose trades are not based on information or meaningful financial analysis.
758 Part 9: Derivative Securities and Corporate Finance
26Ross_Chapter26_3rd.indd 75826Ross_Chapter26_3rd.indd 758 12-11-28 12:5312-11-28 12:53
Noise trader risk is also called sentiment-based risk, meaning the risk that an asset’s price is being influenced by sentiment (or irrational belief) rather than fact-based financial analysis. If sentiment-based risk exists, then it is another source of risk beyond the systematic and un- systematic risks we discussed in an earlier chapter.
3. Implementation costs: All trades cost money. In some cases, the cost of correcting a mispricing may exceed the potential gains. For example, suppose you believe a small, thinly-traded stock is significantly undervalued. You want to buy a large quantity. The problem is that as soon as you try to place a huge order, the price would jump because the stock isn’t heavily traded.
When these or other risks and costs are present, a mispricing may persist because arbitrage is too risky or too costly. Collectively, these risks and costs create barriers or limits to arbitrage. How important these limits are is difficult to say, but we do know that mispricings occur, at least on occasion. To illustrate, we next consider two well-known examples.
THE 3COM/PALM MISPRICING On March 2, 2000, 3Com, a profitable provider of computer networking products and services, sold 5 percent of its Palm subsidiary to the public via an initial public offering (IPO). 3Com planned to distribute the remaining Palm shares to 3Com shareholders at a later date.5 Under the plan, if you owned one share of 3Com, you would receive 1.5 shares of Palm. So, after 3Com sold part of Palm via the IPO, investors could buy Palm shares directly, or they could buy them indirectly by purchasing shares of 3Com.
What makes this case interesting is what happened in the days that followed the Palm IPO. If you owned one 3Com share, you would be entitled, eventually, to 1.5 shares of Palm. Th erefore, each 3Com share should be worth at least 1.5 times the value of each Palm share. We say at least because the other parts of 3Com were profitable. As a result, each 3Com share should have been worth much more than 1.5 times the value of one Palm share. But, as you might guess, things did not work out this way.
FIGURE 26.1
The Percentage Difference between 1 Share of 3Com and 1.5 Shares of Palm, March 2, 2000, to July 27, 2000
3/ 2
3/ 16
3/ 30 4/ 6
4/ 13
4/ 27 5/ 4
5/ 11
5/ 25 6/ 1
6/ 15
6/ 22
6/ 29 7/ 6
7/ 13
7/ 273/ 9
3/ 23
4/ 20
5/ 18 6/ 8
7/ 20
–50
–40
–30
–20
–10
0
20
30
10
40
Date
Percentage deviation
5 In other words, as we discuss in our chapter on mergers and acquisitions, 3Com did an equity carve-out and planned to subsequently spin off the remaining shares.
sentiment-based risk A source of risk to investors above and beyond firm specific risk and overall market risk.
CHAPTER 26: Behavioural Finance: Implications for Financial Management 759
26Ross_Chapter26_3rd.indd 75926Ross_Chapter26_3rd.indd 759 12-11-28 12:5312-11-28 12:53
Th e day before the Palm IPO, shares in 3Com sold for $104.13. Aft er the first day of trading, Palm closed at $95.06 per share. Multiplying $95.06 by 1.5 results in $142.59, which is the minimum value one would expect to pay for 3Com. But the day Palm closed at $95.06, 3Com shares closed at $81.81, more than $60 lower than the price implied by Palm. It gets stranger.
A 3Com price of $81.81 when Palm is selling for $95.06 implies that the market values the rest of 3Com’s businesses (per share) at: $81.81 - 142.59 = -$60.78. Given the number of 3Com shares outstanding at the time, this means the market placed a negative value of about -$22 bil- lion for the rest of 3Com’s businesses. Of course, a stock price cannot be negative. Th is means, then, that the price of Palm relative to 3Com was much too high, and investors should have bought and sold such that the negative value was instantly eliminated.
What happened? As you can see in Figure 26.1, the market valued 3Com and Palm shares in such a way that the non-Palm part of 3Com had a negative value for about two months, from March 2, 2000, until May 8, 2000. Even then, it took approval by the IRS for 3Com to proceed with the planned distribution of Palm shares before the non-Palm part of 3Com once again had a positive value.
THE ROYAL DUTCH/SHELL PRICE RATIO Another fairly well known example of an apparent mispricing involves two large oil companies. In 1907, Royal Dutch of the Netherlands and Shell of the UK agreed to merge their business enterprises and split operating profits on a 60–40 basis. So, whenever the stock prices of Royal Dutch and Shell are not in a 60–40 ratio, there is a potential opportunity to make an arbitrage profit.
FIGURE 26.2
Royal Dutch and Shell 60–40 Price Ratio Deviations, 1962 to 2005
19 62
19 65
19 68
19 71
19 74
19 77
19 80
19 86
19 89
19 95
19 98
20 01
20 04
19 83
19 92
–50
–40
–30
–20
–10
0
20
30
10
50
40
Date
Percentage deviation from a 60–40 ratio
Figure 26.2 contains a plot of the daily deviations from the 60–40 ratio of the Royal Dutch price to the Shell price. If the prices of Royal Dutch and Shell are in a 60–40 ratio, there is a zero per- centage deviation. If the price of Royal Dutch is too high compared to the Shell price, there is a positive deviation. If the price of Royal Dutch is too low compared to the price of Shell, there is a negative deviation. As you can see in Figure 26.2, there have been large and persistent deviations from the 60–40 ratio. In fact, the ratio is seldom at 60–40 for most of the time from 1962 through mid-2005 (when the companies merged).
760 Part 9: Derivative Securities and Corporate Finance
26Ross_Chapter26_3rd.indd 76026Ross_Chapter26_3rd.indd 760 12-11-28 12:5312-11-28 12:53
Bubbles and Crashes As the famous American band Blue Öyster Cult penned in its popular song ‘Godzilla,’ “History shows again and again, how nature points up the folly of men.”6 Nowhere is this statement seem- ingly more appropriate in finance than in a discussion of bubbles and crashes.
A bubble occurs when market prices soar far in excess of what normal and rational analysis would suggest. Investment bubbles eventually pop because they are not based on fundamental values. When a bubble does pop, investors find themselves holding assets with plummeting values.
A crash is a significant and sudden drop in market-wide values. Crashes are generally associ- ated with a bubble. Typically, a bubble lasts much longer than a crash. A bubble can form over weeks, months, or even years. Crashes, on the other hand, are sudden, generally lasting less than a week. However, the disastrous financial aft ermath of a crash can last for years.
THE CRASH OF 1929 During the Roaring Twenties, the stock market was supposed to be the place where everyone could get rich. The market was widely believed to be a no-risk situation. Many people invested their life savings without learning about the potential pitfalls of investing. At the time, investors could purchase stocks by putting up 10 percent of the purchase price and borrowing the remainder from a broker. This level of leverage was one factor that led to the sud- den market downdraft in October 1929.
FIGURE 26.3
Dow Jones Industrial Average, October 21, 1929, to October 31, 1929
220 22-Oct 23-Oct 24-Oct 25-Oct 28-Oct 29-Oct 30-Oct 31-Oct21-Oct
240
260
280
300
320
340
Date
DJIA
As you can see in Figure 26.3, on Friday, October 25, the Dow Jones Industrial Average closed up about a point, at 301.22. On Monday, October 28, it closed at 260.64, down 13.5 percent. On Tuesday, October 29, the Dow closed at 230.07, with an intraday low of 212.33, which was about 30 percent lower than the closing level on the previous Friday. On this day, known as “Black Tues- day,” NYSE volume of 16.4 million shares was more than four times normal levels.
Th e crash of 1929 also had a huge impact on prices on the Montreal Exchange, Canada’s major stock exchange at that time. Figure 26.4 shows the index value of a portfolio with equal weights in Canadian common stocks from 1922 to 1940. Th e roller coaster ride of prices was similar to the experience in the U.S.
6 Lyrics from “Godzilla,” by Donald “Buck Dharma” Roeser (as performed by Blue Öyster Cult).
bubble A situation where observed prices soar far higher than fundamentals and rational analysis would suggest.
crash A situation where market prices collapse significantly and suddenly.
CHAPTER 26: Behavioural Finance: Implications for Financial Management 761
26Ross_Chapter26_3rd.indd 76126Ross_Chapter26_3rd.indd 761 12-11-28 12:5312-11-28 12:53
FIGURE 26.4
Equally Weighted Bond and Stock Index 1922–1940*
0.80 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40
0.85
0.90
0.95
1.00
1.05
Year end 19xx
Bond & stock index values
Source: L. Kryzanowski and G.S. Roberts, “Capital Forbearance: Depression- era Experience of Canadian Life Insurance Companies,” Canadian Journal of Administrative Sciences, March 1998, pages 1–16.
THE CRASH OF OCTOBER 1987 Once, when we spoke of the Crash, we meant Octo- ber 29, 1929. That was until October 1987. The Crash of 1987 began on Friday, October 16. On huge volume (at the time) of about 338 million shares, the DJIA fell 108 points to close at 2,246.73. It was the first time in history that the DJIA fell by more than 100 points in one day.
October 19, 1987, now wears the mantle of “Black Monday,” and this day was indeed a dark and stormy one on Wall Street; the market lost about 22.6 percent of its value on a new record vol- ume of about 600 million shares traded. Th e DJIA plummeted 508.32 points to close at 1,738.74. A drop of this magnitude for no apparent reason is not consistent with market effi ciency. One theory sees the crash as evidence consistent with the bubble theory of speculative markets. Th at is, security prices sometimes move wildly above their true values.
During the day on Tuesday, October 20, the DJIA continued to plunge in value, reaching an intraday low of 1,616.21. But the market rallied and closed at 1,841.01, up 102 points. From the then market high on August 25, 1987, of 2,746.65 to the intraday low on October 20, 1987, the market had fallen over 40 percent. Aft er the Crash of 1987, however, there was no protracted depression. In fact, as you can see in Figure 26.5, the DJIA took only two years to surpass its previ- ous market high made in August 1987.
FIGURE 26.5
Dow Jones Industrial Average, October 1986 to October 1990
1,250 Apr-87 Oct-87 Apr-88 Oct-88 Apr-89 Oct-89 Apr-90 Oct-90Oct-86
1,500
1,750
2,000
2,250
2,500
3,000
2,750
Date
DJIA level
762 Part 9: Derivative Securities and Corporate Finance
26Ross_Chapter26_3rd.indd 76226Ross_Chapter26_3rd.indd 762 12-11-28 12:5312-11-28 12:53
What happened? It’s not exactly ancient history, but, here again, debate rages. One faction says that irrational investors had bid up stock prices to ridiculous levels until Black Monday, when the bubble burst, leading to panic selling as investors dumped their stocks. Th e other faction says that before Black Monday, markets were volatile, volume was heavy, and some ominous signs about the economy were filtering in. From the close on October 13 to the close on October 16, 1987, for example, the market fell by over 10 percent, the largest three-day drop since May 1940 (when German troops broke through French lines near the start of World War II). To top it all off , market values had risen sharply because of a dramatic increase in takeover activity, but the U.S. Congress was in session and was actively considering antitakeover legislation.
Another factor is that beginning a few years before the Crash of 1987, large investors had devel- oped techniques known as program trading designed for very rapid selling of enormous quanti- ties of shares of stock following a market decline. Th ese techniques were still largely untested because the market had been strong for years. However, following the huge sell-off on October 16, 1987, sell orders came pouring in on Monday at a pace never before seen. In fact, these program trades were (and are) blamed by some for much of what happened.
One of the few things we know for certain about the Crash of 1987 is that the stock exchanges suff ered a meltdown. Th e NYSE simply could not handle the volume. Posting of prices was delayed by hours, so investors had no idea what their positions were worth. Th e specialists couldn’t handle the flow of orders, and some specialists actually began selling. NASDAQ went off -line when it became impossible to get through to market makers.
On the two days following the crash, prices rose by about 14 percent, one of the biggest short- term gains ever. Prices remained volatile for some time, but as antitakeover talk in Congress died down, the market recovered.
THE NIKKEI CRASH The crash of the Nikkei Index, which began in 1990, lengthened into a particularly long bear market. It is quite like the Crash of 1929 in that respect.
Th e Asian crash started with a booming bull market in the 1980s. Japan and emerging Asian economies seemed to be forming a powerful economic force. Th e “Asian economy” became an investor outlet for those wary of the U.S. market aft er the Crash of 1987.
To give you some idea of the bubble that was forming in Japan between 1955 and 1989, real estate prices in Japan increased by 70 times, and stock prices increased 100 times over. In 1989, price-earnings ratios of Japanese stocks climbed to unheard of levels as the Nikkei Index soared past 39,000. In retrospect, there were numerous warning signals about the Japanese market. At the time, however, optimism about the continued growth in the Japanese market remained high. Crashes never seem to occur when the outlook is poor, so, as with other crashes, many people did not see the impending Nikkei crash.
FIGURE 26.6
Nikkei 225 Index, January 1984 to December 2007
01 /8
6
01 /8
4
01 /8
8
01 /9
0
01 /9
2
01 /9
4
01 /9
6
01 /0
0
01 /0
2
01 /0
4
01 /0
8
01 /9
8
01 /0
6
0
5,000
10,000
15,000
20,000
25,000
30,000
35,000
40,000
45,000
Date
Nikkei 225 Index
CHAPTER 26: Behavioural Finance: Implications for Financial Management 763
26Ross_Chapter26_3rd.indd 76326Ross_Chapter26_3rd.indd 763 12-11-28 12:5312-11-28 12:53
As you can see in Figure 26.6, in three years from December 1986 to the peak in December 1989, the Nikkei 225 Index rose 115 percent. Over the next three years, the index lost 57 percent of its value. In April 2003, the Nikkei Index stood at a level that was 80 percent off its peak in December 1989.
THE “DOT-COM” BUBBLE AND CRASH How many Web sites do you think existed at the end of 1994? Would you believe only about 10,000? By the end of 1999, the number of active Web sites stood at about 9,500,000 and at the end of 2011, there were about 600,000,000 active Web sites.
By the mid-1990s, the rise in Internet use and its international growth potential fueled wide- spread excitement over the “new economy.” Investors did not seem to care about solid business plans—only big ideas. Investor euphoria led to a surge in Internet IPOs, which were commonly referred to as “dot-coms” because so many of their names ended in “.com.” Of course, the lack of solid business models doomed many of the newly formed companies. Many of them suff ered huge losses and some folded relatively shortly aft er their IPOs.
Th e extent of the dot-com bubble and subsequent crash is presented in Table 26.1 and Figure 26.7, which compare the Amex Internet Index and the S&P 500 Index. As shown in Table 26.1, the Amex Internet Index soared from a level of 114.68 on October 1, 1998, to its peak of 688.52 in late March 2000, an increase of 500 percent. Th e Amex Internet Index then fell to a level of 58.59 in early October 2002, a drop of 91 percent. By contrast, the S&P 500 Index rallied about 31 percent in the same 1998–2000 time period and fell 40 percent during the 2000–2002 time period.
FIGURE 26.7
Values of the AMEX Internet Index and the S&P 500 Index, October 1995 through December 2007
10 /9
6
10 /9
5
10 /9
7
10 /9
8
10 /9
9
10 /0
0
10 /0
1
10 /0
3
10 /0
4
10 /0
5
10 /0
7
10 /0
2
10 /0
6
0
100 200
400
600
800
1,000
1,200
1,400
1,600
1,800
200
300
400
500
600
700
800
Date
AMEX Internet Index
S&P 500 Index
S&P 500 Index AMEX Internet Index
764 Part 9: Derivative Securities and Corporate Finance
26Ross_Chapter26_3rd.indd 76426Ross_Chapter26_3rd.indd 764 12-11-28 12:5312-11-28 12:53
TABLE 26.1
Values of the Amex Internet Index and the S&P 500 Index
Date
Amex Internet
Index Value
Gain to Peak from Oct. 1,
1998 (%)
Loss from Peak to
Trough (%)
S&P 500 Index Value
Gain to Peak from Oct. 1,
1998 (%)
Loss from Peak to
Trough (%)
October 1, 1998 114.68 986.39 Later March 2000 (Internet index peak)
688.52 500 1,293.72 31
Early October 2002 (Internet index trough)
58.59 -91 776.76 -40
Source: Author calculations.
CRASH OF 2008 The crash of 2008, also known as the financial crisis, was the worst crash in stock market history since 1929. We discussed the causes of the crisis in Chapter 1. To recap briefly, the United States Federal Reserve lowered interest rates aggressively in order to restore confidence in the economy after the Internet bubble burst in 2001. In the U.S., individuals with bad credit ratings, sub-prime borrowers, looked to banks to provide loans at historically low in- terest rates for home purchases. Investors also reacted to these low rates by seeking higher re- turns. The financial industry responded by manufacturing sub-prime mortgages and asset-backed securities. These securities had risks that were hard to assess. Once housing prices began to cool and interest rates rose, sub-prime borrowers started defaulting on their loans and the collapse of the sub-prime market ensued. With mortgages serving as the underlying asset supporting most of the financial instruments that investment banks, institutions, and retail buyers had acquired, these assets lost much of their value and hundreds of billions of dollars of write-downs followed. A major panic broke out with the failure of Lehman brothers on September 15, 2008. This re- sulted in huge losses and even bankruptcy for several banks in the United States and Europe, re- sulting in massive government financial assistance. Figure 26.8 shows the huge drop in Dow Jones Index during 2008.
FIGURE 26.8
Dow Jones Index, 2001 to 2012
6,520.28
26-Sep-04 27-Jun-07 27-Mar-10 25-Dec-1227-Dec-01 0
7,160.23
8,440.14
7,800.19
10,999.96
10,360.01
13,559.78
12,279.87
9,720.05
9,080.10
14,199.74
12,919.83
11,639.92
Date
Value
SMA (50) SMA (200)
DJI (10 Year)
Source: Dow Jones Indexes (djindexes.com)
CHAPTER 26: Behavioural Finance: Implications for Financial Management 765
26Ross_Chapter26_3rd.indd 76526Ross_Chapter26_3rd.indd 765 12-11-28 12:5312-11-28 12:53
Th e fi nancial crisis had a global impact. In Canada, the S&P/TSX index fell 33 percent in 2008. At the time of writing in November 2012, the aft ermath of the fi nancial crisis continues in the form of the European fi nancial crisis as we discussed in Chapter 24.
By now, you’re probably wondering how anyone could sensibly think that financial markets are in any way efficient. Before you make up your mind, be sure to read our next section carefully. As you will see, there is a powerful argument in favour of market efficiency.
26.6 Market Efficiency and the Performance of Professional Money Managers
As we discussed in Chapter 1, a mutual fund pools money from many investors and pays a pro- fessional to manage the portfolio. We will focus here on equity funds that buy only stocks. Th ere are hundreds of equity funds in Canada and thousands in the United States and globally, and the performance of these professionally managed funds has been extensively studied.7
Most equity funds are actively managed, meaning that the fund manager actively buys and sells stocks in an attempt to improve the fund’s performance. However, one type of mutual fund, known as an index fund, is passively managed. Such funds just try to replicate the performance of stock market indexes, so there is no trading (unless the index changes, which happens from time to time). Th e most common type of index fund mimics the S&P/TSX 60 in Canada and the S&P 500 index in the U.S., both of which we studied in Chapter 12. Th e Vanguard 500 Index Fund is a well-known example. As of mid-2012, this fund was one of the largest mutual funds in the United States, with over $112 billion U.S. in assets.
If markets are not efficient because investors behave irrationally, then stock prices will deviate from their zero-NPV levels, and it should be possible to devise profitable trading strategies to take advantage of these mispricings. As a result, professional money managers in actively managed mutual funds should be able to systematically outperform index funds. In fact, that is what money managers are paid large sums to do.
Th e number of equity funds has grown substantially during the past 20 years. Figure 26.9 shows the growth in the number of such funds from 1986 through 2009 in the U.S. Th e green line shows the total number of funds that have existed for at least one year, while the purple line shows the number of funds that have existed for at least 10 years. From Figure 26.9, you can see that it is difficult for professional money managers to keep their funds in existence for 10 years (if it were easy, there would not be much diff erence between the green line and the purple line).
Figure 26.9 also shows the number of these funds that beat the performance of the Vanguard 500 Index Fund. You can see that there is much more variation in the orange line than in the blue line. What this means is that in any given year, it is hard to predict how many professional money managers will beat the Vanguard 500 Index Fund. But the low level and low variation of the blue line means that the percentage of professional money managers who can beat the Vanguard 500 Index Fund over a 10-year investment period is low and stable.
Figures 26.10 and 26.11 are bar charts that show the percentage of managed equity funds that beat the Vanguard 500 Index Fund. Figure 26.10 uses return data for the previous year only, while Figure 26.11 uses return data for the previous 10 years. As you can see from Figure 26.10, in only 12 of the 24 years spanning 1986 through 2009 did more than half the professional money managers beat the Vanguard 500 Index Fund. Th e performance is worse when it comes to 10-year investment periods. As shown in Figure 26.11, in only 4 of these 24 investment periods did more than half the professional money managers beat the Vanguard 500 Index Fund.
7 Further discussion of the mutual fund industry is in Chapter 1.
766 Part 9: Derivative Securities and Corporate Finance
26Ross_Chapter26_3rd.indd 76626Ross_Chapter26_3rd.indd 766 12-11-28 12:5312-11-28 12:53
FIGURE 26.9
The Growth of Actively Managed Equity Funds, 1986–2009
19 87
19 89
19 91
19 93
19 95
19 97
20 01
20 03
20 05
20 09
19 99
20 07
0
500
1,000
1,500
2,000
2,500
3,000
3,500
5,000
5,500
4,000
4,500
6,000
Year
Number
Funds beating Vanguard 500 over past one year
Funds existing for 10 years
Total funds
Funds beating Vanguard 500 over past 10 years
FIGURE 26.10
The Percentage of Managed Equity Funds Beating the Vanguard 500 Index Fund, One-Year Returns
19 87
19 89
19 91
19 93
19 95
19 97
20 01
20 03
20 05
20 09
19 99
20 07
0
10
20
30
40
50
60
90
70
80
Year
Percent
CHAPTER 26: Behavioural Finance: Implications for Financial Management 767
26Ross_Chapter26_3rd.indd 76726Ross_Chapter26_3rd.indd 767 12-11-28 12:5312-11-28 12:53
FIGURE 26.11
Percentage of Managed Equity Funds Beating the Vanguard 500 Index Fund, 10-Year Returns
19 87
19 89
19 91
19 93
19 95
19 97
20 01
20 03
20 05
20 09
19 99
20 07
0
10
20
30
40
50
60
90
70
80
Year
Percent
Table 26.2 presents more evidence concerning the performance of professional money managers. Using data from 1980 through 2009, we divide this time period into 1-year investment periods, rolling 3-year investment periods, rolling 5-year investment periods, and rolling 10-year invest- ment periods. Th en, aft er we calculate the number of investment periods, we ask two questions: (1) What percentage of the time did half the professionally managed funds beat the Vanguard 500 Index Fund? and (2) What percentage of the time did three-fourths of the professionally managed funds beat the Vanguard 500 Index Fund?
TABLE 26.2
The Performance of Professional Money Managers versus the Vanguard 500 Index Fund Length of Each
Investment Period (Years) span
Number of Investment
Periods
Number of Investment Periods Half the Fund
Beat Vanguard Percent
Number of Investment Periods Three-Fourths of the Fund Beat Vanguard Percent
1 1980–2009 30 14 46.7% 2 6.7% 3 1982–2009 28 11 39.3 0 0.0 5 1984–2009 26 9 34.6 0 0.0 10 1989–2009 21 3 14.3 1 4.8
Source: Author calculations.
As you see in Table 26.2, the performance of professional money managers is generally quite poor relative to the Vanguard 500 Index Fund. In addition, the performance of professional money managers declines the longer the investment period.
Th e discussion so far has used U.S. examples. Do the same conclusions hold for Canada? As we discuss in Chapter 12, Canadian studies of the performance of actively managed mutual funds also conclude that on average, mutual fund managers fail to outperform the market index.
768 Part 9: Derivative Securities and Corporate Finance
26Ross_Chapter26_3rd.indd 76826Ross_Chapter26_3rd.indd 768 12-11-28 12:5312-11-28 12:53
Taken together with the U.S. evidence this raises some difficult and uncomfortable questions for security analysts and other investment professionals. If markets are inefficient, and tools like fundamental analysis are valuable, why don’t mutual fund managers do better? Why can’t mutual fund managers even beat a broad market index?
Th e performance of professional money managers is especially troublesome when we consider the enormous resources at their disposal and the substantial survivorship bias that exists. Th e survivorship bias comes into being because managers and funds that do especially poorly disap- pear. If beating the market were possible, then this Darwinian process of elimination should lead to a situation in which the survivors, as a group, are capable of doing so. Th e fact that professional money managers seem to lack the ability to outperform a broad market index is consistent with the notion that, overall, the equity market is efficient.
So where does our discussion of behavioural finance and market efficiency leave us? Are the major financial markets efficient? Based on the past 40 or so years of research, we can make an observation or two. We start by noting that the relevant question isn’t “Are markets efficient?” Instead, it is “How efficient are markets?” It seems clear that markets are not perfectly efficient, and barriers to arbitrage do exist. On the other hand, the inability of professional money manag- ers to outperform simple market indexes consistently strongly suggests that the major markets operate with a relatively high degree of efficiency.
Hersh Shefrin on Behavioural Finance
Most of the chief fi nancial offi cers (CFOs) I know admit that there is a gap between what they learned about corporate finance in business schools and what they put into practice as executives. A major reason for this gap is the material you are studying in this chapter.
It really is true that financial managers do not practice textbook corporate finance. In the 1990s, I became convinced that this was the case after I joined the organization Financial Executives International (FEI), which gave me an opportunity to meet many CFOs on a regular basis and discuss with them how they practice corporate finance. In doing so, I gained a great deal of information that led me to conclude that behavioural finance was highly applicable to corporate life.
Behavioural corporate finance is important for at least three reasons. First, being human, financial managers are susceptible to the behavioural phenomena you are reading about in this chapter. Textbook corporate finance offers many valuable concepts, tools, and techniques. My point is not the material in traditional corporate finance textbooks lacks value, but that psychological obstacles often stand in the way of this material being implemented correctly.
Second, the people with whom financial managers interact are also susceptible to mistakes. Expecting other people to be
immune to mistakes is itself an error that can lead managers to make bad decisions.
Third, investors’ mistakes can sometimes lead prices to be inefficient. In this respect, managers can make one of two different mistakes. They might believe that prices are efficient when they are actually inefficient. Or they might believe that prices are inefficient when they are actually efficient. Managers need to know how to think about the vulnerability to both types of errors, and how to deal with each.
The material in this chapter is a wonderful start to learning about behavioural finance. However, for this material to really make a difference, you need to integrate the material with what you are learning about traditional topics such as capital budgeting, capital structure, valuation, payout policy, market efficiency, corporate governance, and mergers and acquisition. You need to study behavioural cases about real people making real decisions and see how psychology impacts those decisions. You need to learn from their mistakes in an effort to make better decisions yourself. This is how behavioural corporate finance will generate value for you.
Hersh Shefrin holds the Mario L. Belotti Chair at the Leavey School of Business at Santa Clara University and is the author of Behavioral Corporate Finance: Decisions that Create Value.
IN THEIR OWN WORDS…
CHAPTER 26: Behavioural Finance: Implications for Financial Management 769
26Ross_Chapter26_3rd.indd 76926Ross_Chapter26_3rd.indd 769 12-11-28 12:5312-11-28 12:53
26.7 SUMMARY AND CONCLUSIONS
In this chapter, we examine some of the implications of research in cognitive psychology and behavioural finance. In the first part of the chapter, we learned that a key to becoming a better financial decision-maker is to be aware of, and avoid, certain types of behaviours. By studying behavioural finance, you can see the potential damage from errors due to biases, frame depen- dence, and heuristics.
Biases can lead to bad decisions because they lead to unnecessarily poor estimates of future outcomes. Overoptimism, for example, produces overly favourable estimates and opinions. Frame dependence results in narrow framing, which is focusing on the smaller picture instead of the big- ger one. Th e use of heuristics as shortcuts ignores potentially valuable insights that more detailed analysis would reveal.
In the second part of the chapter, we turned to a much more difficult question and one where the evidence is not at all clear. Do errors in judgment by investors influence market prices and lead to market inefficiencies? Th is question is the subject of raging debate among researchers and practitioners, and we are not going to take sides. Instead, our goal is to introduce you to the ideas and issues.
We saw that market inefficiencies can be difficult for arbitrageurs to exploit because of firm- specific risk, noise trader (or sentiment-based) risk, and implementation costs. We called these difficulties limits (or barriers) to arbitrage, and the implication is that some inefficiencies may only gradually disappear, and smaller inefficiencies can persist if they cannot be profitably exploited.
Looking back at market history, we saw some examples of evident mispricing, such as the Palm IPO. We also saw that markets appear to be susceptible to bubbles and crashes, suggesting significant inefficiency. However, we closed the chapter by examining the performance of profes- sional money managers. Th e evidence here is quite clear and striking. Th e pros cannot consis- tently outperform broad market indexes, which is strong evidence in favour of market efficiency.
Key Terms affect heuristic (page 755) behavioural finance (page 751) bubble (page 761) confirmation bias (page 752) crash (page 761) frame dependence (page 753)
heuristics (page 755) noise trader (page 758) overconfidence (page 751) overoptimism (page 751) representativeness heuristic (page 756) sentiment-based risk (page 759)
Concepts Review and Critical Thinking Questions 1. (LO4) In the chapter, we discussed the 3Com/Palm and
Royal Dutch/Shell mispricings. Which of the limits to arbi- trage is least likely to be the main reason for these mispric- ings? Explain.
2. (LO1) How could overconfidence affect the financial man- ager of the firm and the firm’s shareholders?
3. (LO4) How can frame dependence lead to irrational invest- ment decisions?
4. (LO4) What is noise trader risk? How can noise trader risk lead to market inefficiencies?
5. (LO3) Suppose you are flipping a fair coin in a coin-flipping contest and have flipped eight heads in a row. What is the probability of flipping a head on your next coin flip? Suppose you flipped a head on your ninth toss. What is the probability of flipping a head on your tenth toss?
6. (LO4) In the mid- to late-1990s, the performance of the pros was unusually poor—on the order of 90 percent of all equity mutual funds underperformed a passively managed index fund. How does this fact bear on the issue of market efficiency?
7. (LO4) The efficient market hypothesis implies that all mutual
funds should obtain the same expected risk-adjusted returns. Therefore, we can simply pick mutual funds at random. Is this statement true or false? Explain.
8. (LO4) Some people argue that the efficient market hypothesis cannot explain the 1987 market crash or the high price-to- earnings ratio of Internet stocks during the late 1990s. What alternative hypothesis is currently used for these two phenomena?
9. (LO4) Proponents of behavioural finance use three concepts to argue that markets are not efficient. What are these arguments?
10. (LO2) In the chapter, we presented an example where you had lost $78 and were given the opportunity to make a wager in which your loss would increase to $100 for 80 percent of the time decrease to $0 for 20 percent of the time. Using the stand-alone principal from capital budgeting, explain how your decision to accept or reject the proposal could have been affected by frame dependence. In other words, reframe the question in a way in which most people are likely to analyze the proposal correctly.
770 Part 9: Derivative Securities and Corporate Finance
26Ross_Chapter26_3rd.indd 77026Ross_Chapter26_3rd.indd 770 12-11-28 12:5312-11-28 12:53
Questions and Problems 1. (LO1, 2, 3) John Cutter has owned a home in Toronto for the past 45 years. He is thinking of downsizing by selling his house
and moving to a rental apartment for his retirement. John observes that housing prices in the city have grown at 7 percent annually over this period. Based on this information, he decides to stay in his house in order to enjoy future gains. What behavioural finance concept is John exhibiting and how is this influencing his decision-making?
2. (LO1, 2, 3) Pamela Landry, a novice investor from Montreal, bought 2,000 shares of Research In Motion (RIM) stock during August 2012. During this period, RIM reported a loss of $518 million in revenues from the previous year. The company required around $300 million in restructuring costs and laid off more than 3,000 employees. Explain the behavioural finance concept Pamela is exhibiting and how is this influencing her decision-making.
3. (LO1, 2, 3) Forest Gump, a hockey player from Edmonton, holds two types of accounts—a risky and a retirement account. He purchases Greek and Spanish bonds for his risky account and invests in Bank of Montreal and Royal Bank of Canada stocks, which are known for paying steady dividends, for his retirement account as he requires a steady source of income after he retires. Explain the behavioural finance concept Forest is exhibiting and how is this influencing his decision-making.
4. (LO1, 2, 3) Jack Sparrow, a Vancouver based techie, had a fascination for Facebook Inc. shares. He bought 200 shares of Facebook during the IPO for $38 on May 18, 2012. During August 2012, the share price fell below half its IPO price for the first time. Jack was not willing to sell the shares below the purchase price and he decided to wait for the price to climb up. Explain the behavioural finance concept Jack is exhibiting and how is this influencing his decision-making.
5. (LO1, 2, 3) Sharon Nicol, an employee of IMAX Corporation holds 800 shares of her company stock. She thinks the company had a huge growing potential and decides not to sell any of the IMAX shares in her portfolio. Explain the behavioural finance concept Sharon is exhibiting and how is this influencing her decision-making.
6. (LO1, 2, 3) Matthew and Stephen Fleming are experienced wealth managers in Manitoba. On August 20, 2012, Matthew and Stephen bought 200 shares of Steinbach Gold Inc. and Selkirk Technology Limited. On August 21, 2012, Steinbach put out a press release stating that the company found new gold reserves near the Atitaki Provincial Park. On the same day, Selkirk lost a patent lawsuit worth $1 billion. As a result of these news items, Steinbach’s share price went up by 15 percent and Selkirk’s share price dipped by 20 percent. Matthew considered himself as an ace stock picker while Stephen attributed the drop in shares of Selkirk to bad luck. Explain the behavioural finance concept Matthew and Stephen are exhibiting and how it is this influencing their decision-making.
7. (LO1, 2, 3) Lucy Smith was in a dilemma to choose between two stocks: Telus Communications (listed on the TSX) and Seair Inc. (listed on the TSX Venture Exchange). On the Internet, she was able to find a large amount of information about Telus and the Canadian telecom industry but was unable to find much about Seair. As a result, Lucy decided to invest in Telus rather than Seair. Explain the behavioural finance concept Lucy is exhibiting and how is this influencing her decision-making.
8. (LO1, 2, 3) Jenna Simpson, a retired investment advisor from Regina, conducted a research on Baux Inc., an aluminum mining company from Saskatchewan. She found out that the company’s stock price would suffer in the short term due to fluctuation in aluminum prices even though the stock price was expected to increase in the next 10 years due to excess demand for aluminum. Hence, she decides not to invest in the company’s stock fearing a loss in the short term. What behavioural finance concept is Jenna is exhibiting and how is this influencing her decision-making?
9. (LO4) Faced with new competition from Samsung Galaxy Tabs, Apple Inc. releases a new iPad, which has a faster processor and better features, on Monday at 11 am. What do you expect would happen to the stock price of Apple on NASDAQ? Is your answer consistent with the efficient market hypothesis?
Internet Application Questions 1. Visit behaviouralfinance.net and familiarize yourself with the list of behavioural finance terms that are not covered in this
chapter. 2. The Allianz Global Investors Center for Behavioral Finance (befi.allianzgi.com/en/Pages/default.aspx) puts academic theory
into action, turning behavioural insights into actionable ideas and practical tools for financial advisors, plan sponsors and investors. Professor Richard Thaler of the University of Chicago Booth School of Business describes behavioural finance using the NFL draft as an example (befi.allianzgi.com/en/befi-tv/Pages/richard-thaler.aspx). What are the behavioural principles that drive both money mistakes and comparable suboptimal behaviour in the domain of sports?
Basic (Questions
1–9)
CHAPTER 26: Behavioural Finance: Implications for Financial Management 771
26Ross_Chapter26_3rd.indd 77126Ross_Chapter26_3rd.indd 771 12-11-28 12:5312-11-28 12:53
Your Pension Account at Tuxedo Air
You have been at your job with Tuxedo Air for a week now and have decided you need to sign up for the company’s de- fined contribution pension plan. Under the plan, pension con- tributions are invested according to your choice. Even after your discussion with Audrey Sanborn, the Bledsoe Financial Services representative, you are still unsure as to which invest- ment option you should choose. Recall that the options avail- able to you are stock in Tuxedo Air, the Bledsoe S&P/TSX 60 Index Fund, the Bledsoe Small-Cap Fund, the Bledsoe Canad- ian Large-Capitalization Stock Fund, the Bledsoe Bond Fund, and the Bledsoe Money Market Fund. You have decided that you should invest in a diversified portfolio, with 70 percent of your investment in equities, 25 percent in bonds, and 5 per- cent in the money market fund. You have also decided to focus your equity investment on large-cap Canadian stocks, but you are debating whether to select the S&P/TSX 60 Index Fund or the Canadian Large- Capitalization Stock Fund. In thinking it over, you understand the basic difference between the two funds. One is a purely passive fund that replicates a widely followed Canadian large- cap index, the S&P/TSX 60, and has low fees. The other is ac- tively managed with the intention that the skill of the portfolio manager will result in improved performance relative to an
index. Fees are higher in the latter fund. You are just not cer- tain which way to go, so you ask Ed Cowan, who works in the company’s finance area, for advice. After discussing your concerns, Ed gives you some informa- tion comparing the performance of equity mutual funds and the market index in the U.S. The Vanguard 500 is the world’s largest equity index mutual fund. It replicates the S&P 500, and its return is only negligibly different from the S&P 500. Fees are very low. As a result, the Vanguard 500 is a U.S. coun- terpart to the Bledsoe S&P/TSX 60 Index Fund offered in the pension plan, but it has been in existence for much longer, so you can study its track record for over two decades. Ed tells you that Canadian research has produced results similar to those in Figure 26.11. He suggests that you study this figure and answer the following questions:
Questions
1. What implications do you draw from the graph for mu- tual fund investors?
2. Is the graph consistent or inconsistent with market efficiency? Explain carefully.
3. What investment decision would you make for the equity portion of your pension account? Why?
MINI CASE
772 Part 9: Derivative Securities and Corporate Finance
26Ross_Chapter26_3rd.indd 77226Ross_Chapter26_3rd.indd 772 12-11-28 12:5312-11-28 12:53
FORMULA SHEET
page #
Assets = Liabilities + Shareholders’ equity [2.1] 26
Revenues - Expenses = Income [2.2] 30
Cash fl ow from assets = Cash fl ow to bondholders + Cash fl ow to shareholders [2.3] 32
Current ratio = Current assets/Current liabilities [3.1] 61
Quick ratio = Current assets − Inventory
______________________ Current liabilities [3.2] 63
Cash ratio = (Cash + Cash equivalents)/Current liabilities [3.3] 63
Net working capital to total assets = Net working capital/Total assets [3.4] 63
Interval measure = Current assets/Average daily operating costs [3.5] 63
Total debt ratio = [Total assets - Total equity]/Total assets [3.6] 64
Debt/equity ratio = Total debt/Total equity [3.7] 64
Equity multiplier = Total assets/Total equity [3.8] 64
Long-term debt ratio = Long-term debt
_________________________ Long-term debt + Total equity [3.9] 64
Times interest earned ratio = EBIT/Interest [3.10] 65
Cash coverage ratio = [EBIT + Depreciation]/Interest [3.11] 65
Inventory turnover = Cost of goods sold/Inventory [3.12] 65
Days’ sales in inventory = 365 days/Inventory turnover [3.13] 65
Receivables turnover = Sales/Accounts receivable [3.14] 66
Days’ sales in receivables = 365 days/Receivables turnover [3.15] 66
NWC turnover = Sales/NWC [3.16] 67
Fixed asset turnover = Sales/Net fi xed assets [3.17] 67
Total asset turnover = Sales/Total assets [3.18] 67
Profi t margin = Net income/Sales [3.19] 67
Return on assets = Net income/Total assets [3.20] 68
Return on equity = Net income/Total equity [3.21] 68
P/E ratio = Price per share/Earnings per share [3.22] 69
Market-to-book ratio = Market value per share/Book value per share [3.23] 69
Dividend payout ratio = Cash dividends/Net income [4.1] 90
EFN = Increase in total assets - Addition to retained earnings = A(g) - p(S)R × (1 + g) [4.2] 96
EFN = -p(S)R + [A - p(S)R] × g [4.3] 96
EFN = -p(S)R + [A - p(S)R] × g g = pS(R)/[A - pS(R)] [4.4] 98
Internal growth rate = ROA × R ___________ 1 − ROA × R [4.5] 98
Ross_FormulaSheet_4th.indd 1Ross_FormulaSheet_4th.indd 1 12-12-03 13:2712-12-03 13:27
page #
EFN* = Increase in total assets - Addition to retained earnings - New borrowing = A(g) - p(S)R × (1 + g) - p(S)R × (1 + g)[D/E]
EFN* = 0 [4.6] 98
g* = ROE × R/[1 - ROE × R] [4.7] 98
g* = p ( S/A ) ( 1 + D/E ) × R
______________________ 1 − p ( S/A ) ( 1 + D/E ) × R [4.8] 100
Future value = $1 × (1 + r)t [5.1] 112
PV = $1 × [1/(1 + r)t] = $1/(1 + r)t PV × (1 + r)t = FVt
[5.2] 120
PV = FVt/(1 + r)t = FVt × [1/(1 + r)t] [5.3] 121
Annuity present value = C × ( 1 − Present value factor ___________________ r ) = C × { 1 − 1/(1 + r ) t ___________ r } [6.1] 136
Annuity FV factor = (Future value factor - 1)/r = ((1 + r)t - 1)/r [6.2] 140
Annuity due value = Ordinary annuity value × (1 + r) [6.3] 142
Perpetuity present value × Rate = Cash fl ow PV × r = C [6.4] 142
Annuity present value factor = (1 - Present value factor)/r = (1/r) × (1 - Present value factor) [6.5] 142
PV = C ____ r − g [6.6] 144
PV = C ____ r − g [ 1 − ( 1 + g _____ 1 + r ) t ] [6.7] 145
EAR = [1 + (Quoted rate/m)]m - 1 [6.8] 146
EAR = eq - 1 [6.9] 149
Bond value = C × (1 - 1/(1 + r)t)/r + F/(1 + r)t [7.1] 168
1 + R = (1 + r) × (1 + h) [7.2] 185
1 + R = (1 + r) × (1 + h) R = r + h + r × h [7.3] 185
R ≈ r + h [7.4] 185
P0 = (D1 + P1)/(1 + r) [8.1] 197
P0 = D/r [8.2] 198
P0 = D 0 × (1 + g) ___________ r − g =
D 1 _____ r - g [8.3] 199
Pt = D t × (1 + g) ____________ r − g =
D t+1 _____ r − g [8.4] 200
(r - g) = D1/P0 r = D1/P0 + g [8.5] 203
OCF = EBIT + D - Taxes = (S - C - D) + D - (S - C - D) × TC [10.1] 263
2 Formula Sheet
Ross_FormulaSheet_4th.indd 2Ross_FormulaSheet_4th.indd 2 12-12-03 13:2712-12-03 13:27
page #
OCF = (S - C - D) + D - (S - C - D) × TC = (S - C - D) × (1 - TC) + D = Project net income + Depreciation [10.2] 264
OCF = (S - C - D) + D - (S - C - D) × TC = (S - C) - (S - C - D) × TC = Sales - Costs - Taxes [10.3] 264
OCF = (S - C - D) + D - (S - C - D) × TC = (S - C) × (1 - TC) + D × TC [10.4] 264
PV tax shield on CCA = [IdTc] _____ d + k ×
[1 + .5k] ________ 1 + k - SndTc _____ d + k ×
1 _______ (1 + k ) n [10.5] 267
S - VC = FC + D P × Q - v × Q = FC + D (P - v) × Q = FC + D Q = (FC + D)/(P - v) [11.1] 299
OCF = [(P - v) × Q - FC - D] + D = (P - v) × Q - FC [11.2] 301
Q = (FC + OCF)/(P - v) [11.3] 302
Total dollar return = Dividend income + Capital gain (or loss) [12.1] 318
Total cash if stock is sold = Initial investment + Total return [12.2] 319
Var(R) = (1/(T - 1)) [ ( R1 - __
R ) 2 + … + ( RT - __
R ) 2 ] [12.3] 328
Geometric average return = [(1 + R1) × (1 + R2) × … × (1 + RT)]1/T - 1 [12.4] 333
Risk premium = Expected return - Risk-free rate = E(RU) - Rf [13.1] 348
E(R) = Σ j
Rj × Pj where Rj = value of the jth outcome Pj = associated probability of occurrence Σ
j = the sum over all j [13.2] 348
σ2 = Σ j
[Rj - E(R)]2 × Pj
σ = √ ___
σ2 [13.3] 349 E(RP) = x1 × E(R1) + x2 × E(R2) + … + xn × E(Rn) [13.4] 352
σ2P = x2Lσ2L + x2Uσ2U + 2xLxUCORRL,UσLσU σP = √
___ σ2P [13.5] 355
Total return = Expected return + Unexpected return R = E(R) + U [13.6] 359
Announcement = Expected part + Surprise [13.7] 360
R = E(R) + Systematic portion + Unsystematic portion [13.8] 361
Total risk = Systematic risk + Unsystematic risk [13.9] 364
E(Ri) = Rf + [E(RM) - Rf] × βi [13.10] 374
R = E(R) + βIFI + βGNP FGNP + βrFr + ε [13.11] 377
Formula Sheet 3
Ross_FormulaSheet_4th.indd 3Ross_FormulaSheet_4th.indd 3 12-12-03 13:2712-12-03 13:27
page #
E(R) = RF + E[(R1) - RF]β1 + E[(R2) - RF]β2 + E[(R3) - RF]β3 + … + E[(RK) - RF]βK [13.12] 378
σ2P = x2Lσ2L + x2Uσ2U + 2xLxUCORRL,UσLσU [13A.1] 384
σ2P ∑ i=1
N ∑
j=1
N xjσij [13A.2] 385
δ σ 2 p ____ δx2
= 2 ∑ j=1
N
xjσi2 = 2 [ x1COV ( R1,R2 ) + x2 σ 2 2 + x3COV ( R3,R2 ) + … + x N COV ( RN,R2 ) ] [13A.3] 385
β2 = COV(R2,RM) ___________
σ2(RM)
[13A.4] 386 RE = (D1/P0) + g [14.1] 389
RE = Rf + βE × [RM - Rf] [14.2] 391
RP = D/P0 [14.3] 394
V = E + Dm [14.4] 395
100% = E/V + Dm/V [14.5] 395
WACC = (E/V) × RE + (P/V) × RP + (Dm/V) × RD × (1 - TC) [14.6] 396
fA = (E/V) × fE + (Dm/V) × fD [14.7] 403
β Portfolio = β Levered fi rm = Debt ____________ Debt + Equity × β Debt +
Equity ____________ Debt + Equity × β Equity [14A.1] 417
β Unlevered fi rm = Equity
____________ Debt + Equity × β Equity [14A.2] 417
β Unlevered fi rm = Equity
______________________ Equity + (1 - TC) × Debt × β Equity [14A.3] 418
Number of new shares = Funds to be raised/Subscription price [15.1] 440
Number of rights needed to buy a share of stock = Old shares/New shares [15.2] 441
Ro = (Mo - S)/(N + 1) where Mo = common share price during the rights-on period S = subscription price N = number of rights required to buy one new share [15.3] 442
Me = Mo - Ro [15.4] 444
Re = (Me - S)/N [15.5] 444
Degree of fi nancial leverage = Percentage change in EPS
______________________ Percentage change in EBIT [16.1] 458
DFL = EBIT _____________ EBIT - Interest [16.2] 458
4 Formula Sheet
Ross_FormulaSheet_4th.indd 4Ross_FormulaSheet_4th.indd 4 12-12-03 13:2712-12-03 13:27
page #
Vu = EBIT/REu = VL = EL + DL where Vu = Value of the unlevered fi rm VL = Value of the levered fi rm EBIT = Perpetual operating income REu = Equity required return for the unlevered fi rm EL = Market value of equity DL = Market value of debt [16.3] 462
RE = RA + (RA - RD) × (D/E) [16.4] 463
βE = βA × (1 + D/E) [16.5] 464
Value of the interest tax shield = (TC × RD × D)/RD = TC × D [16.6] 467
VL = VU + TC × D [16.7] 467
RE = RU + (RU - RD) × (D/E) × (1 - TC) [16.8] 468
VL = VU + [ 1 - (1 - TC) × (1 - TS) _________________ 1 - Tb ] × D [16A.1] 487 Net working capital + Fixed assets = Long-term debt + Equity [18.1] 520
Net working capital = (Cash + Other current assets) - Current liabilities [18.2] 520
Cash = Long-term debt + Equity + Current liabilities - Current assets (other than cash) - Fixed assets [18.3] 520
Operating cycle = Inventory period + Accounts receivable period [18.4] 522
Cash cycle = Operating cycle - Accounts payable period [18.5] 522
Cash collections = Beginning accounts receivable + 1/2 × Sales [18.6] 534
Accounts receivable = Average daily sales × ACP [20.1] 574
Cash fl ow (old policy) = (P - v)Q [20.2] 579
Cash fl ow (new policy) = (P - v)Q′ [20.3] 579
PV = [(P - v)(Q′ - Q)]/R [20.4] 580
Cost of switching = PQ + v(Q′ - Q) where PQ = present value in perpetuity of a one-month delay in receiving the monthly revenue of PQ [20.5] 580
NPV of switching = -[PQ + v(Q′ - Q)] + (P - v)(Q′ - Q)/R [20.6] 580
NPV = 0 = -[PQ + v(Q′ - Q)] + (P - v)(Q′ - Q)/R [20.7] 580
NPV = -v + (1 - π)P′/(1 + R) [20.8] 583
NPV = -v + (1 - π)(P - v)/R [20.9] 584
Score = Z = 0.4 × [Sales/Total assets] + 3.0 × EBIT/Total assets [20.10] 587
Total carrying costs = Average inventory × Carrying costs per unit = (Q/2) × CC [20.11] 594
Total restocking cost = Fixed cost per order × Number of orders = F × (T/Q) [20.12] 594
Total costs = Carrying costs + Restocking costs = (Q/2) × CC + F × (T/Q) [20.13] 594
Formula Sheet 5
Ross_FormulaSheet_4th.indd 5Ross_FormulaSheet_4th.indd 5 12-12-03 13:2712-12-03 13:27
page #
Carrying costs = Restocking costs (Q*/2) × CC = F × (T/Q*) [20.14] 595
Q*2 = 2T × F ______ CC [20.15] 595
Q* = √ _______
2T × F ______ CC [20.16] 595
(E[S1] - S0)/S0 = hFC - hCDN [21.1] 614
E[S1] = S0 × [1 + (hFC - hCDN)] [21.2] 614
E[St] = S0 × [1 + (hFC - hCDN)]t [21.3] 615
F1/S0 = (1 + RFC)/(1 + RCDN) [21.4] 617
(F1 - S0)/S0 = RFC - RCDN [21.5] 617
F1 = S0 × [1 + (RFC - RCDN)] [21.6] 617
Ft = S0 × [1 + (RFC - RCDN)]t [21.7] 617
E[S1] = S0 × [1 + (RFC - RCDN)] [21.8] 618
E[St] = S0 × [1 + (RFC - RCDN)]t [21.9] 618
RCDN - hCDN = RFC - hFC [21.10] 618
NPV = VB* - Cost to Firm A of the acquisition [23.1] 668
C1 = 0 if (S1 - E) ≤ 0 [25.1] 717
C1 = S1 - E if (S1 - E) > 0 [25.2] 717
C0 ≤ S0 [25.3] 718
C0 ≥ 0 if S0 - E < 0 C0 ≥ S0 - E if S0 - E ≥ 0 [25.4] 718
S0 = C0 + E/(1 + Rf) C0 = S0 - E/(1 + Rf) [25.5] 720
Call option value = Stock value - Present value of the exercise price C0 = S0 - E/(1 + Rf)t [25.6] 720
C0 = S0 × N(d1) - E/(1 + Rf)t × N(d2) [25A.1] 745
d1 = [ln(S0/E) + (Rf + 1/2 × σ2) × t]/[σ × √ _ t ]
d2 = d1 - σ × √ _ t [25A.2] 746
6 Formula Sheet
Ross_FormulaSheet_4th.indd 6Ross_FormulaSheet_4th.indd 6 12-12-03 13:2712-12-03 13:27
Online
page #
Appendix 4A
EFN = Increase in total assets - Addition to retained earnings - New borrowing = A(g) - p(S)R × (1 + g) - pS(R) × (1 + g)[D/E] [4B.1] 4
ROE = p(S/A)(1 + D/E) [4B.2] 4
Appendix 7B
NPV = (co - cN)/cN × $1,000 - CP [7B.1] 3
Appendix 19A
Opportunity costs = (C/2) × R [19A.1] 2
Trading costs = (T/C) × F [19A.2] 2
Total cost = Opportunity costs + Trading costs = (C/2) × R + (T/C) × F [19A.3] 3
C* = √ __________
(2T × F)/R [19A.4] 3 C* = L + (3/4 × F × σ2/R)1/3 [19A.5] 5 U* = 3 × C* - 2 × L [19A.6] 5 Average cash balance = (4 × C* - L)/3 [19A.7] 5
Appendix 20A
Net incremental cash fl ow = P′Q × (d - π) [20A.1] 3
NPV = -PQ + P′Q × (d - π)/R [20A.2] 3
Formula Sheet 7
Ross_FormulaSheet_4th.indd 7Ross_FormulaSheet_4th.indd 7 12-12-03 13:2712-12-03 13:27
APPENDIX A: Mathematical Tables
Table A.1: Future value of $1 at the end of t periods = (1 + r)t
Interest Rate
Period 1% 2% 3% 4% 5% 6% 7% 8% 9%
1 1.0100 1.0200 1.0300 1.0400 1.0500 1.0600 1.0700 1.0800 1.0900 2 1.0201 1.0404 1.0609 1.0816 1.1025 1.1236 1.1449 1.1664 1.1881 3 1.0303 1.0612 1.0927 1.1249 1.1576 1.1910 1.2250 1.2597 1.2950 4 1.0406 1.0824 1.1255 1.1699 1.2155 1.2625 1.3108 1.3605 1.4116 5 1.0510 1.1041 1.1593 1.2167 1.2763 1.3382 1.4026 1.4693 1.5386
6 1.0615 1.1262 1.1941 1.2653 1.3401 1.4185 1.5007 1.5869 1.6771 7 1.0721 1.1487 1.2299 1.3159 1.4071 1.5036 1.6058 1.7138 1.8280 8 1.0829 1.1717 1.2668 1.3686 1.4775 1.5938 1.7182 1.8509 1.9926 9 1.0937 1.1951 1.3048 1.4233 1.5513 1.6895 1.8385 1.9990 2.1719 10 1.1046 1.2190 1.3439 1.4802 1.6289 1.7908 1.9672 2.1589 2.3674
11 1.1157 1.2434 1.3842 1.5395 1.7103 1.8983 2.1049 2.3316 2.5804 12 1.1268 1.2682 1.4258 1.6010 1.7959 2.0122 2.2522 2.5182 2.8127 13 1.1381 1.2936 1.4685 1.6651 1.8856 2.1329 2.4098 2.7196 3.0658 14 1.1495 1.3195 1.5126 1.7317 1.9799 2.2609 2.5785 2.9372 3.3417 15 1.1610 1.3459 1.5580 1.8009 2.0789 2.3966 2.7590 3.1722 3.6425
16 1.1726 1.3728 1.6047 1.8730 2.1829 2.5404 2.9522 3.4259 3.9703 17 1.1843 1.4002 1.6528 1.9479 2.2920 2.6928 3.1588 3.7000 4.3276 18 1.1961 1.4282 1.7024 2.0258 2.4066 2.8543 3.3799 3.9960 4.7171 19 1.2081 1.4568 1.7535 2.1068 2.5270 3.0256 3.6165 4.3157 5.1417 20 1.2202 1.4859 1.8061 2.1911 2.6533 3.2071 3.8697 4.6610 5.6044
21 1.2324 1.5157 1.8603 2.2788 2.7860 3.3996 4.1406 5.0338 6.1088 22 1.2447 1.5460 1.9161 2.3699 2.9253 3.6035 4.4304 5.4365 6.6586 23 1.2572 1.5769 1.9736 2.4647 3.0715 3.8197 4.7405 5.8715 7.2579 24 1.2697 1.6084 2.0328 2.5633 3.2251 4.0489 5.0724 6.3412 7.9111 25 1.2824 1.6406 2.0938 2.6658 3.3864 4.2919 5.4274 6.8485 8.6231
30 1.3478 1.8114 2.4273 3.2434 4.3219 5.7435 7.6123 10.063 13.268 40 1.4889 2.2080 3.2620 4.8010 7.0400 10.286 14.974 21.725 31.409 50 1.6446 2.6916 4.3839 7.1067 11.467 18.420 29.457 46.902 74.358 60 1.8167 3.2810 5.8916 10.520 18.679 32.988 57.946 101.26 176.03
Continued on next page
34OLC_AppendixA_3rd.indd 134OLC_AppendixA_3rd.indd 1 12-12-03 16:3112-12-03 16:31
Table A.1: Future value of $1 at the end of t periods = (1 + r)t
Interest Rate
Period 10% 12% 14% 15% 16% 18% 20% 24% 28% 32% 36%
1 1.1000 1.1200 1.1400 1.1500 1.1600 1.1800 1.2000 1.2400 1.2800 1.3200 1.3600 2 1.2100 1.2544 1.2996 1.3225 1.3456 1.3924 1.4400 1.5376 1.6384 1.7424 1.8496 3 1.3310 1.4049 1.4815 1.5209 1.5609 1.6430 1.7280 1.9066 2.0972 2.3000 2.5155 4 1.4641 1.5735 1.6890 1.7490 1.8106 1.9388 2.0736 2.3642 2.6844 3.0360 3.4210 5 1.6105 1.7623 1.9254 2.0114 2.1003 2.2878 2.4883 2.9316 3.4360 4.0075 4.6526
6 1.7716 1.9738 2.1950 2.3131 2.4364 2.6996 2.9860 3.6352 4.3980 5.2899 6.3275 7 1.9487 2.2107 2.5023 2.6600 2.8262 3.1855 3.5832 4.5077 5.6295 6.9826 8.6054 8 2.1436 2.4760 2.8526 3.0590 3.2784 3.7589 4.2998 5.5895 7.2058 9.2170 11.703 9 2.3579 2.7731 3.2519 3.5179 3.8030 4.4355 5.1598 6.9310 9.2234 12.166 15.917 10 2.5937 3.1058 3.7072 4.0456 4.4114 5.2338 6.1917 8.5944 11.806 16.060 21.647
11 2.8531 3.4785 4.2262 4.6524 5.1173 6.1759 7.4301 10.657 15.112 21.199 29.439 12 3.1384 3.8960 4.8179 5.3503 5.9360 7.2876 8.9161 13.215 19.343 27.983 40.037 13 3.4523 4.3635 5.4924 6.1528 6.8858 8.5994 10.699 16.386 24.759 36.937 54.451 14 3.7975 4.8871 6.2613 7.0757 7.9875 10.147 12.839 20.319 31.691 48.757 74.053 15 4.1772 5.4736 7.1379 8.1371 9.2655 11.974 15.407 25.196 40.565 64.359 100.71
16 4.5950 6.1304 8.1372 9.3576 10.748 14.129 18.488 31.243 51.923 84.954 136.97 17 5.0545 6.8660 9.2765 10.761 12.468 16.672 22.186 38.741 66.461 112.14 186.28 18 5.5599 7.6900 10.575 12.375 14.463 19.673 26.623 48.039 85.071 148.02 253.34 19 6.1159 8.6128 12.056 14.232 16.777 23.214 31.948 59.568 108.89 195.39 344.54 20 6.7275 9.6463 13.743 16.367 19.461 27.393 38.338 73.864 139.38 257.92 468.57
21 7.4002 10.804 15.668 18.822 22.574 32.324 46.005 91.592 178.41 340.45 637.26 22 8.1403 12.100 17.861 21.645 26.186 38.142 55.206 113.57 228.36 449.39 866.67 23 8.9543 13.552 20.362 24.891 30.376 45.008 66.247 140.83 292.30 593.20 1178.7 24 9.8497 15.179 23.212 28.625 35.236 53.109 79.497 174.63 374.14 783.02 1603.0 25 10.835 17.000 26.462 32.919 40.874 62.669 95.396 216.54 478.90 1033.6 2180.1
30 17.449 29.960 50.950 66.212 85.850 143.37 237.38 634.82 1645.5 4142.1 10143. 40 45.259 93.051 188.88 267.86 378.72 750.38 1469.8 5455.9 19427. 66521. * 50 117.39 289.00 700.23 1083.7 1670.7 3927.4 9100.4 46890. * * * 60 304.48 897.60 2595.9 4384.0 7370.2 20555. 56348. * * * *
* The factor is greater than 99,999.
2 Appendix A: Mathematical Tables
34OLC_AppendixA_3rd.indd 234OLC_AppendixA_3rd.indd 2 12-12-03 16:3112-12-03 16:31
Table A.2: Present value of $1 to be received after t periods = 1/(1 + r)t
Interest Rate
Period 1% 2% 3% 4% 5% 6% 7% 8% 9%
1 .9901 .9804 .9709 .9615 .9524 .9434 .9346 .9259 .9174 2 .9803 .9612 .9426 .9246 .9070 .8900 .8734 .8573 .8417 3 .9706 .9423 .9151 .8890 .8638 .8396 .8163 .7938 .7722 4 .9610 .9238 .8885 .8548 .8227 .7921 .7629 .7350 .7084 5 .9515 .9057 .8626 .8219 .7835 .7473 .7130 .6806 .6499
6 .9420 .8880 .8375 .7903 .7462 .7050 .6663 .6302 .5963 7 .9327 .8706 .8131 .7599 .7107 .6651 .6227 .5835 .5470 8 .9235 .8535 .7894 .7307 .6768 .6274 .5820 .5403 .5019 9 .9143 .8368 .7664 .7026 .6446 .5919 .5439 .5002 .4604 10 .9053 .8203 .7441 .6756 .6139 .5584 .5083 .4632 .4224
11 .8963 .8043 .7224 .6496 .5847 .5268 .4751 .4289 .3875 12 .8874 .7885 .7014 .6246 .5568 .4970 .4440 .3971 .3555 13 .8787 .7730 .6810 .6006 .5303 .4688 .4150 .3677 .3262 14 .8700 .7579 .6611 .5775 .5051 .4423 .3878 .3405 .2992 15 .8613 .7430 .6419 .5553 .4810 .4173 .3624 .3152 .2745
16 .8528 .7284 .6232 .5339 .4581 .3936 .3387 .2919 .2519 17 .8444 .7142 .6050 .5134 .4363 .3714 .3166 .2703 .2311 18 .8360 .7002 .5874 .4936 .4155 .3503 .2959 .2502 .2120 19 .8277 .6864 .5703 .4746 .3957 .3305 .2765 .2317 .1945 20 .8195 .6730 .5537 .4564 .3769 .3118 .2584 .2145 .1784
21 .8114 .6598 .5375 .4388 .3589 .2942 .2415 .1987 .1637
22 .8034 .6468 .5219 .4220 .3418 .2775 .2257 .1839 .1502 23 .7954 .6342 .5067 .4057 .3256 .2618 .2109 .1703 .1378 24 .7876 .6217 .4919 .3901 .3101 .2470 .1971 .1577 .1264 25 .7798 .6095 .4776 .3751 .2953 .2330 .1842 .1460 .1160
30 .7419 .5521 .4120 .3083 .2314 .1741 .1314 .0994 .0754 40 .6717 .4529 .3066 .2083 .1420 .0972 .0668 .0460 .0318 50 .6080 .3715 .2281 .1407 .0872 .0543 .0339 .0213 .0134
Continued on next page
Appendix A: Mathematical Tables 3
34OLC_AppendixA_3rd.indd 334OLC_AppendixA_3rd.indd 3 12-12-03 16:3112-12-03 16:31
Table A.2: Present value of $1 to be received after t periods = 1/(1 + r)t
Interest Rate
Period 10% 12% 14% 15% 16% 18% 20% 24% 28% 32% 36%
1 .9091 .8929 .8772 .8696 .8621 .8475 .8333 .8065 .7813 .7576 .7353 2 .8264 .7972 .7695 .7561 .7432 .7182 .6944 .6504 .6104 .5739 .5407 3 .7513 .7118 .6750 .6575 .6407 .6086 .5787 .5245 .4768 .4348 .3975 4 .6830 .6355 .5921 .5718 .5523 .5158 .4823 .4230 .3725 .3294 .2923 5 .6209 .5674 .5194 .4972 .4761 .4371 .4019 .3411 .2910 .2495 .2149
6 .5645 .5066 .4556 .4323 .4104 .3704 .3349 .2751 .2274 .1890 .1580 7 .5132 .4523 .3996 .3759 .3538 .3139 .2791 .2218 .1776 .1432 .1162 8 .4665 .4039 .3506 .3269 .3050 .2660 .2326 .1789 .1388 .1085 .0854 9 .4241 .3606 .3075 .2843 .2630 .2255 .1938 .1443 .1084 .0822 .0628 10 .3855 .3220 .2697 .2472 .2267 .1911 .1615 .1164 .0847 .0623 .0462
11 .3505 .2875 .2366 .2149 .1954 .1619 .1346 .0938 .0662 .0472 .0340 12 .3186 .2567 .2076 .1869 .1685 .1372 .1122 .0757 .0517 .0357 .0250 13 .2897 .2292 .1821 .1625 .1452 .1163 .0935 .0610 .0404 .0271 .0184 14 .2633 .2046 .1597 .1413 .1252 .0985 .0779 .0492 .0316 .0205 .0135 15 .2394 .1827 .1401 .1229 .1079 .0835 .0649 .0397 .0247 .0155 .0099
16 .2176 .1631 .1229 .1069 .0930 .0708 .0541 .0320 .0193 .0118 .0073 17 .1978 .1456 .1078 .0929 .0802 .0600 .0451 .0258 .0150 .0089 .0054 18 .1799 .1300 .0946 .0808 .0691 .0508 .0376 .0208 .0118 .0068 .0039 19 .1635 .1161 .0829 .0703 .0596 .0431 .0313 .0168 .0092 .0051 .0029 20 .1486 .1037 .0728 .0611 .0514 .0365 .0261 .0135 .0072 .0039 .0021
21 .1351 .0926 .0638 .0531 .0443 .0309 .0217 .0109 .0056 .0029 .0016 22 .1228 .0826 .0560 .0462 .0382 .0262 .0181 .0088 .0044 .0022 .0012 23 .1117 .0738 .0491 .0402 .0329 .0222 .0151 .0071 .0034 .0017 .0008 24 .1015 .0659 .0431 .0349 .0284 .0188 .0126 .0057 .0027 .0013 .0006 25 .0923 .0588 .0378 .0304 .0245 .0160 .0105 .0046 .0021 .0010 .0005
30 .0573 .0334 .0196 .0151 .0116 .0070 .0042 .0016 .0006 .0002 .0001 40 .0221 .0107 .0053 .0037 .0026 .0013 .0007 .0002 .0001 * * 50 .0085 .0035 .0014 .0009 .0006 .0003 .0001 * * * *
*The factor is zero to four decimal places.
4 Appendix A: Mathematical Tables
34OLC_AppendixA_3rd.indd 434OLC_AppendixA_3rd.indd 4 12-12-03 16:3112-12-03 16:31
Table A.3: Present value of an annuity of $1 per period for t periods = [1 - 1/(1 + r)t]/r
Interest Rate
Period 1% 2% 3% 4% 5% 6% 7% 8% 9%
1 .9901 .9804 .9709 .9615 .9524 .9434 .9346 .9259 .9174 2 1.9704 1.9416 1.9135 1.8861 1.8594 1.8334 1.8080 1.7833 1.7591 3 2.9410 2.8839 2.8286 2.7751 2.7232 2.6730 2.6243 2.5771 2.5313 4 3.9020 3.8077 3.7171 3.6299 3.5460 3.4651 3.3872 3.3121 3.2397 5 4.8534 4.7135 4.5797 4.4518 4.3295 4.2124 4.1002 3.9927 3.8897
6 5.7955 5.6014 5.4172 5.2421 5.0757 4.9173 4.7665 4.6229 4.4859 7 6.7282 6.4720 6.2303 6.0021 5.7864 5.5824 5.3893 5.2064 5.0330 8 7.6517 7.3255 7.0197 6.7327 6.4632 6.2098 5.9713 5.7466 5.5348 9 8.5660 8.1622 7.7861 7.4353 7.1078 6.8017 6.5152 6.2469 5.9952 10 9.4713 8.9826 8.5302 8.1109 7.7217 7.3601 7.0236 6.7101 6.4177
11 10.3676 9.7868 9.2526 8.7605 8.3064 7.8869 7.4987 7.1390 6.8052 12 11.2551 10.5753 9.9540 9.3851 8.8633 8.3838 7.9427 7.5361 7.1607 13 12.1337 11.3484 10.6350 9.9856 9.3936 8.8527 8.3577 7.9038 7.4869 14 13.0037 12.1062 11.2961 10.5631 9.8986 9.2950 8.7455 8.2442 7.7862 15 13.8651 12.8493 11.9379 11.1184 10.3797 9.7122 9.1079 8.5595 8.0607
16 14.7179 13.5777 12.5611 11.6523 10.8378 10.1059 9.4466 8.8514 8.3126 17 15.5623 14.2919 13.1661 12.1657 11.2741 10.4773 9.7632 9.1216 8.5436 18 16.3983 14.9920 13.7535 12.6593 11.6896 10.8276 10.0591 9.3719 8.7556 19 17.2260 15.6785 14.3238 13.1339 12.0853 11.1581 10.3356 9.6036 8.9501 20 18.0456 16.3514 14.8775 13.5903 12.4622 11.4699 10.5940 9.8181 9.1285
21 18.8570 17.0112 15.4150 14.0292 12.8212 11.7641 10.8355 10.0168 9.2922 22 19.6604 17.6580 15.9369 14.4511 13.1630 12.0416 11.0612 10.2007 9.4424 23 20.4558 18.2922 16.4436 14.8568 13.4886 12.3034 11.2722 10.3741 9.5802 24 21.2434 18.9139 16.9355 15.2470 13.7986 12.5504 11.4693 10.5288 9.7066 25 22.0232 19.5235 17.4131 15.6221 14.0939 12.7834 11.6536 10.6748 9.8226
30 25.8077 22.3965 19.6004 17.2920 15.3725 13.7648 12.4090 11.2578 10.2737 40 32.8347 27.3555 23.1148 19.7928 17.1591 15.0463 13.3317 11.9246 10.7574 50 39.1961 31.4236 25.7298 21.4822 18.2559 15.7619 13.8007 12.2335 10.9617
Continued on next page
Appendix A: Mathematical Tables 5
34OLC_AppendixA_3rd.indd 534OLC_AppendixA_3rd.indd 5 12-12-03 16:3112-12-03 16:31
Table A.3: Present value of an annuity of $1 per period for t periods = [1 - 1/(1 + r)t]/r
Interest Rate
Period 10% 12% 14% 15% 16% 18% 20% 24% 28% 32% 36%
1 .9091 .8929 .8772 .8696 .8621 .8475 .8333 .8065 .7813 .7576 .7353 2 1.7355 1.6901 1.6467 1.6257 1.6052 1.5656 1.5278 1.4568 1.3916 1.3315 1.2760 3 2.4869 2.4018 2.3216 2.2832 2.2459 2.1743 2.1065 1.9813 1.8684 1.7663 1.6735 4 3.1699 3.0373 2.9137 2.8550 2.7982 2.6901 2.5887 2.4043 2.2410 2.0957 1.9658 5 3.7908 3.6048 3.4331 3.3522 3.2743 3.1272 2.9906 2.7454 2.5320 2.3452 2.1807
6 4.3553 4.1114 3.8887 3.7845 3.6847 3.4976 3.3255 3.0205 2.7594 2.5342 2.3388 7 4.8684 4.5638 4.2883 4.1604 4.0386 3.8115 3.6046 3.2423 2.9370 2.6775 2.4550 8 5.3349 4.9676 4.6389 4.4873 4.3436 4.0776 3.8372 3.4212 3.0758 2.7860 2.5404 9 5.7590 5.3282 4.9464 4.7716 4.6065 4.3030 4.0310 3.5655 3.1842 2.8681 2.6033 10 6.1446 5.6502 5.2161 5.0188 4.8332 4.4941 4.1925 3.6819 3.2689 2.9304 2.6495
11 6.4951 5.9377 5.4527 5.2337 5.0286 4.6560 4.3271 3.7757 3.3351 2.9776 2.6834 12 6.8137 6.1944 5.6603 5.4206 5.1971 4.7932 4.4392 3.8514 3.3868 3.0133 2.7084 13 7.1034 6.4235 5.8424 5.5831 5.3423 4.9095 4.5327 3.9124 3.4272 3.0404 2.7268 14 7.3667 6.6282 6.0021 5.7245 5.4675 5.0081 4.6106 3.9616 3.4587 3.0609 2.7403 15 7.6061 6.8109 6.1422 5.8474 5.5755 5.0916 4.6755 4.0013 3.4834 3.0764 2.7502
16 7.8237 6.9740 6.2651 5.9542 5.6685 5.1624 4.7296 4.0333 3.5026 3.0882 2.7575 17 8.0216 7.1196 6.3729 6.0472 5.7487 5.2223 4.7746 4.0591 3.5177 3.0971 2.7629 18 8.2014 7.2497 6.4674 6.1280 5.8178 5.2732 4.8122 4.0799 3.5294 3.1039 2.7668 19 8.3649 7.3658 6.5504 6.1982 5.8775 5.3162 4.8435 4.0967 3.5386 3.1090 2.7697 20 8.5136 7.4694 6.6231 6.2593 5.9288 5.3527 4.8696 4.1103 3.5458 3.1129 2.7718
21 8.6487 7.5620 6.6870 6.3125 5.9731 5.3837 4.8913 4.1212 3.5514 3.1158 2.7734 22 8.7715 7.6446 6.7429 6.3587 6.0113 5.4099 4.9094 4.1300 3.5558 3.1180 2.7746 23 8.8832 7.7184 6.7921 6.3988 6.0442 5.4321 4.9245 4.1371 3.5592 3.1197 2.7754 24 8.9847 7.7843 6.8351 6.4338 6.0726 5.4509 4.9371 4.1428 3.5619 3.1210 2.7760 25 9.0770 7.8431 6.8729 6.4641 6.0971 5.4669 4.9476 4.1474 3.5640 3.1220 2.7765
30 9.4269 8.0552 7.0027 6.5660 6.1772 5.5168 4.9789 4.1601 3.5693 3.1242 2.7775 40 9.7791 8.2438 7.1050 6.6418 6.2335 5.5482 4.9966 4.1659 3.5712 3.1250 2.7778 50 9.9148 8.3045 7.1327 6.6605 6.2463 5.5541 4.9995 4.1666 3.5714 3.1250 2.7778
6 Appendix A: Mathematical Tables
34OLC_AppendixA_3rd.indd 634OLC_AppendixA_3rd.indd 6 12-12-03 16:3112-12-03 16:31
Table A.4: Future value of an annuity of $1 per period for t periods = [(1 + r)t - 1]/r
Interest Rate
Period 1% 2% 3% 4% 5% 6% 7% 8% 9%
1 1.0000 1.0000 1.0000 1.0000 1.0000 1.0000 1.0000 1.0000 1.0000 2 2.0100 2.0200 2.0300 2.0400 2.0500 2.0600 2.0700 2.0800 2.0900 3 3.0301 3.0604 3.0909 3.1216 3.1525 3.1836 3.2149 3.2464 3.2781 4 4.0604 4.1216 4.1836 4.2465 4.3101 4.3746 4.4399 4.5061 4.5731 5 5.1010 5.2040 5.3091 5.4163 5.5256 5.6371 5.7507 5.8666 5.9847
6 6.1520 6.3081 6.4684 6.6330 6.8019 6.9753 7.1533 7.3359 7.5233 7 7.2135 7.4343 7.6625 7.8983 8.1420 8.3938 8.6540 8.9228 9.2004 8 8.2857 8.5830 8.8932 9.2142 9.5491 9.8975 10.260 10.637 11.028 9 9.3685 9.7546 10.159 10.583 11.027 11.491 11.978 12.488 13.021 10 10.462 10.950 11.464 12.006 12.578 13.181 13.816 14.487 15.193
11 11.567 12.169 12.808 13.486 14.207 14.972 15.784 16.645 17.560 12 12.683 13.412 14.192 15.026 15.917 16.870 17.888 18.977 20.141 13 13.809 14.680 15.618 16.627 17.713 18.882 20.141 21.495 22.953 14 14.947 15.974 17.086 18.292 19.599 21.015 22.550 24.215 26.019 15 16.097 17.293 18.599 20.024 21.579 23.276 25.129 27.152 29.361
16 17.258 18.639 20.157 21.825 23.657 25.673 27.888 30.324 33.003 17 18.430 20.012 21.762 23.698 25.840 28.213 30.840 33.750 36.974 18 19.615 21.412 23.414 25.645 28.132 30.906 33.999 37.450 41.301 19 20.811 22.841 25.117 27.671 30.539 33.760 37.379 41.446 46.018 20 22.019 24.297 26.870 29.778 33.066 36.786 40.995 45.762 51.160
21 23.239 25.783 28.676 31.969 35.719 39.993 44.865 50.423 56.765 22 24.472 27.299 30.537 34.248 38.505 43.392 49.006 55.457 62.873 23 25.716 28.845 32.453 36.618 41.430 46.996 53.436 60.893 69.532 24 26.973 30.422 34.426 39.083 44.502 50.816 58.177 66.765 76.790 25 28.243 32.030 36.459 41.646 47.727 54.865 63.249 73.106 84.701
30 34.785 40.568 47.575 56.085 66.439 79.058 94.461 113.28 136.31 40 48.886 60.402 75.401 95.026 120.80 154.76 199.64 259.06 337.88 50 64.463 84.579 112.80 152.67 209.35 290.34 406.53 573.77 815.08 60 81.670 114.05 163.05 237.99 353.58 533.13 813.52 1253.2 1944.8
Continued on next page
Appendix A: Mathematical Tables 7
34OLC_AppendixA_3rd.indd 734OLC_AppendixA_3rd.indd 7 12-12-03 16:3112-12-03 16:31
Table A.4: Future value of an annuity of $1 per period for t periods = [(1 + r)t - 1]/r
Interest Rate
Period 10% 12% 14% 15% 16% 18% 20% 24% 28% 32% 36%
1 1.0000 1.0000 1.0000 1.0000 1.0000 1.0000 1.0000 1.0000 1.0000 1.0000 1.0000 2 2.1000 2.1200 2.1400 2.1500 2.1600 2.1800 2.2000 2.2400 2.2800 2.3200 2.3600 3 3.3100 3.3744 3.4396 3.4725 3.5056 3.5724 3.6400 3.7776 3.9184 4.0624 4.2096 4 4.6410 4.7793 4.9211 4.9934 5.0665 5.2154 5.3680 5.6842 6.0156 6.3624 6.7251 5 6.1051 6.3528 6.6101 6.7424 6.8771 7.1542 7.4416 8.0484 8.6999 9.3983 10.146
6 7.7156 8.1152 8.5355 8.7537 8.9775 9.4420 9.9299 10.980 12.136 13.406 14.799 7 9.4872 10.089 10.730 11.067 11.414 12.142 12.916 14.615 16.534 18.696 21.126 8 11.436 12.300 13.233 13.727 14.240 15.327 16.499 19.123 22.163 25.678 29.732 9 13.579 14.776 16.085 16.786 17.519 19.086 20.799 24.712 29.369 34.895 41.435 10 15.937 17.549 19.337 20.304 21.321 23.521 25.959 31.643 38.593 47.062 57.352
11 18.531 20.655 23.045 24.349 25.733 28.755 32.150 40.238 50.398 63.122 78.998 12 21.384 24.133 27.271 29.002 30.850 34.931 39.581 50.895 65.510 84.320 108.44 13 24.523 28.029 32.089 34.352 36.786 42.219 48.497 64.110 84.853 112.30 148.47 14 27.975 32.393 37.581 40.505 43.672 50.818 59.196 80.496 109.61 149.24 202.93 15 31.772 37.280 43.842 47.580 51.660 60.965 72.035 100.82 141.30 198.00 276.98
16 35.950 42.753 50.980 55.717 60.925 72.939 87.442 126.01 181.87 262.36 377.69 17 40.545 48.884 59.118 65.075 71.673 87.068 105.93 157.25 233.79 347.31 514.66 18 45.599 55.750 68.394 75.836 84.141 103.74 128.12 195.99 300.25 459.45 700.94 19 51.159 63.440 78.969 88.212 98.603 123.41 154.74 244.03 385.32 607.47 954.28 20 57.275 72.052 91.025 102.44 115.38 146.63 186.69 303.60 494.21 802.86 1298.8
21 64.002 81.699 104.77 118.81 134.84 174.02 225.03 377.46 633.59 1060.8 1767.4 22 71.403 92.503 120.44 137.63 157.41 206.34 271.03 469.06 812.00 1401.2 2404.7 23 79.543 104.60 138.30 159.28 183.60 244.49 326.24 582.63 1040.4 1850.6 3271.3 24 88.497 118.16 158.66 184.17 213.98 289.49 392.48 723.46 1332.7 2443.8 4450.0 25 98.347 133.33 181.87 212.79 249.21 342.60 471.98 898.09 1706.8 3226.8 6053.0
30 164.49 241.33 356.79 434.75 530.31 790.95 1181.9 2640.9 5873.2 12941. 28172. 40 442.59 767.09 1342.0 1779.1 2360.8 4163.2 7343.9 22729. 69377. * * 50 1163.9 2400.0 4994.5 7217.7 10436. 21813. 45497. * * * * 60 3043.8 7471.6 18535. 29220. 46058. * * * * * *
*The factor is greater than 99,999.
8 Appendix A: Mathematical Tables
34OLC_AppendixA_3rd.indd 834OLC_AppendixA_3rd.indd 8 12-12-03 16:3112-12-03 16:31
Table A.5: Cumulative normal distribution
d N(d ) d N(d ) d N(d ) d N(d ) d N(d ) d N(d ) -3.00 .0013 -1.58 .0571 -.76 .2236 .06 .5239 .86 .8051 1.66 .9515
-2.95 .0016 -1.56 .0594 -.74 .2297 .08 .5319 .88 .8106 1.68 .9535
-2.90 .0019 -1.54 .0618 -.72 .2358 .10 .5398 .90 .8159 1.70 .9554
-2.85 .0022 -1.52 .0643 -.70 .2420 .12 .5478 .92 .8212 1.72 .9573
-2.80 .0026 -1.50 .0668 -.68 .2483 .14 .5557 .94 .8264 1.74 .9591
-2.75 .0030 -1.48 .0694 -.66 .2546 .16 .5636 .96 .8315 1.76 .9608
-2.70 .0035 -1.46 .0721 -.64 .2611 .18 .5714 .98 .8365 1.78 .9625
-2.65 .0040 -1.44 .0749 -.62 .2676 .20 .5793 1.00 .8413 1.80 .9641
-2.60 .0047 -1.42 .0778 -.60 .2743 .22 .5871 1.02 .8461 1.82 .9656
-2.55 .0054 -1.40 .0808 -.58 .2810 .24 .5948 1.04 .8508 1.84 .9671
-2.50 .0062 -1.38 .0838 -.56 .2877 .26 .6026 1.06 .8554 1.86 .9686
-2.45 .0071 -1.36 .0869 -.54 .2946 .28 .6103 1.08 .8599 1.88 .9699
-2.40 .0082 -1.34 .0901 -.52 .3015 .30 .6179 1.10 .8643 1.90 .9713
-2.35 .0094 -1.32 .0934 -.50 .3085 .32 .6255 1.12 .8686 1.92 .9726
-2.30 .0107 -1.30 .0968 -.48 .3156 .34 .6331 1.14 .8729 1.94 .9738
-2.25 .0122 -1.28 .1003 -.46 .3228 .36 .6406 1.16 .8770 1.96 .9750
-2.20 .0139 -1.26 .1038 -.44 .3300 .38 .6480 1.18 .8810 1.98 .9761
-2.15 .0158 -1.24 .1075 -.42 .3372 .40 .6554 1.20 .8849 2.00 .9772
-2.10 .0179 -1.22 .1112 -.40 .3446 .42 .6628 1.22 .8888 2.05 .9798
-2.05 .0202 -1.20 .1151 -.38 .3520 .44 .6700 1.24 .8925 2.10 .9821
-2.00 .0228 -1.18 .1190 -.36 .3594 .46 .6772 1.26 .8962 2.15 .9842
-1.98 .0239 -1.16 .1230 -.34 .3669 .48 .6844 1.28 .8997 2.20 .9861
-1.96 .0250 -1.14 .1271 -.32 .3745 .50 .6915 1.30 .9032 2.25 .9878
-1.94 .0262 -1.12 .1314 -.30 .3821 .52 .6985 1.32 .9066 2.30 .9893
-1.92 .0274 -1.10 .1357 -.28 .3897 .54 .7054 1.34 .9099 2.35 .9906
-1.90 .0287 -1.08 .1401 -.26 .3974 .56 .7123 1.36 .9131 2.40 .9918
-1.88 .0301 -1.06 .1446 -.24 .4052 .58 .7190 1.38 .9162 2.45 .9929
-1.86 .0314 -1.04 .1492 -.22 .4129 .60 .7257 1.40 .9192 2.50 .9938
-1.84 .0329 -1.02 .1539 -.20 .4207 .62 .7324 1.42 .9222 2.55 .9946
-1.82 .0344 -1.00 .1587 -.18 .4286 .64 .7389 1.44 .9251 2.60 .9953
-1.80 .0359 -.98 .1635 -.16 .4364 .66 .7454 1.46 .9279 2.65 .9960
-1.78 .0375 -.96 .1685 -.14 .4443 .68 .7518 1.48 .9306 2.70 .9965
-1.76 .0392 -.94 .1736 -.12 .4522 .70 .7580 1.50 .9332 2.75 .9970
-1.74 .0409 -.92 .1788 -.10 .4602 .72 .7642 1.52 .9357 2.80 .9974
-1.72 .0427 -.90 .1841 -.08 .4681 .74 .7704 1.54 .9382 2.85 .9978
-1.70 .0446 -.88 .1894 -.06 .4761 .76 .7764 1.56 .9406 2.90 .9981
-1.68 .0465 -.86 .1949 -.04 .4840 .78 .7823 1.58 .9429 2.95 .9984
-1.66 .0485 -.84 .2005 -.02 .4920 .80 .7881 1.60 .9452 3.00 .9987
-1.64 .0505 -.82 .2061 -.00 .5000 .82 .7939 1.62 .9474 3.05 .9989
-1.62 .0526 -.80 .2119 -.02 .5080 .84 .7995 1.64 .9495
-1.60 .0548 -.78 .2177 -.04 .5160
This table shows the probability [N(d )] of observing a value less than or equal to d. For example, as illustrated, if d is -2.24, then N(d ) is .4052.
Appendix A: Mathematical Tables 9
34OLC_AppendixA_3rd.indd 934OLC_AppendixA_3rd.indd 9 12-12-03 16:3112-12-03 16:31
APPENDIX B: Answers to Selected End-of-Chapter Problems
CHAPTER 2 2. NI = $171,600 4. EPS = $2.019
DPS = $0.86 6. Taxes Payable = $33,040 8. OCF = $10,434.75 10. Change in NWC = -$180 12. Cash flow to shareholders = $415,000 14. a. OCF = $63,745 b. CFC = $22,100 c. CFS = $4,700 d. Addition to NWC = $845 18. a. Taxes Growth = $12,320
Taxes Income = $2,200,000 b. Additional Taxes Growth = $1,400
Additional Taxes Income = $2,500 20. Net new LTD = $55,000 22. a. Owner’s equity 2011 = $1,661
Owner’s equity 2012 = $2,142 b. Change in NWC = $22 c. Fixed assets sold = $63
Cash flow from assets = $1,895.50 d. Debt retired = $180
Cash flow to creditors = $121 26. Cash flow from assets = -$492.76
Cash flow from creditors = -$2,156 Cash flow to shareholders = 1,663.24
28. a. After Tax Rate of Return on Dividends = 43.05% b. After Tax Rate of Return on Interest = 16.27% c. After Tax Rate of Return on Capital Gains = 21.47% 30. Depreciation allowance: $100,000; $180,000; $144,000; $115,200;
$92,160 UCC: $400,000; $720,000; $576,000; $460,800; $368,640
32. CCA for 2011 = $520,000 CCA for 2012 = $951,000
34. a. After tax income = $1,738.50 b. After tax income = $5,044.37 c. After tax income = $6,037.50 36. a. UCC = $20,245.23
CHAPTER 3 2. Net income = $2,320,000
ROA = 13.26% ROE = 20.71%
4. Inventory turnover = 10.07 Days’ sales in inventory = 365 days Average shelf time = 36.25 days
6. EPS = $2.88 DPS = $0.83 BVPS = $25.24 P/E = 21.875 P/S = 2.94
8. D/E = 0.38 10. Days’ sales in payables = 77.33 days 12. EM = 1.65
NI = $75,735 ROE = 14.025%
18. NI = $194.16
20. NFA = $4,085.14 22. ROE Firm A = 18.46%
ROE Firm B = 15.71% 24. COGS = $1,164,350 28. Interval = 104.78 days 30. P/E = 29.45
DPS = $0.80 M/B = 5.57
CHAPTER 4 2. EFN = -$1,252.50 4. EFN = $10,304 6. Internal growth rate = 4.209% 8. Maximum increase in sales = $5,264.03 12. Internal growth rate = 6.84% 14. Sustainable growth rate = 12.41% 16. Maximum sales growth = 5.26% 18. Maximum sales growth = 66.67% 20. PM = 5.22% 22. TAT = 1.74 times 24. Sustainable growth rate = 16.47%
New borrowing = $14,164.20 Internal growth rate = 6.038%
26. Internal growth rate = 7.07% Internal growth rate end = 6.6% Internal growth rate beginning = 7.07%
28. EFN = -$78,752 32. Payout ratio = -0.66; Maximum sustainable growth rate = 6.896%
CHAPTER 5 2. $6,419.51; $14,999.39; $687,764.17; $315,795.75 4. 11.24%; 11.61%; 10.95%; 9.17% 6. 9.68% 8. 4.81% 10. $155,893,400.10 12. $5,083.71 14. $0.10 16. a. 4.67% b. 6.52% c. 4.30% 18. $438,120.97; $154,299.40 20. 21.31 years
CHAPTER 6 2. @5%: PV(X) = $42,646.93; PV(Y) = $40,605.54
@22%: PV(X) = $28.629.50; PV(Y) = $30,275.86 4. 15 years: PV = $48,271.94
40 years: PV = $70,658.06 75 years: PV = $75,240.70 Perpetuity: PV = $75,714.29
6. PV = $411,660.36 8. C = $6,575.77 10. PVA = $22,090.28 12. r = 6.67% 14. APR: 8.42%; 18.2%; 8.99%; 15.25% 16. APR = 14.85%
Ross_AppendixB_2nd.indd 1Ross_AppendixB_2nd.indd 1 13-01-09 15:3413-01-09 15:34
18. FV5 = $7,163.64; FV10 = $11,403.94; FV20 = $28,899.97 20. EAR = 2,229.81% 22. t = 48.86 months 24. APR = 22.86%; EAR = 25.19% 26. FVA = $647,623.45 28. PV = $2,320.36 30. r = 5.449% 32. Interest = $508.35 34. FV1 = $1.14979; FV2 = $1.3220 36. r = 41.42% 38. PV = $16,856,257.32 40. PV10% = $36,867.40; PV5% = $46,330.41; PV15% = $30,112.61 42. APR = 7.13% 44. Payment = $349,470.20 46. PV = $22,812,873.40 48. r = 20.63% 50. PV = $138,724.68 52. PV = $37,051.41 54. PV5 = $39,888.33; PV3 = $32,684.88; PV0 = $24,243.67 56. C = $$1,364.99 58. Interest = $10,080 60. Breakeven resale price = $21,363.01 62. a. PV = $61,086.44 b. PV = $57,603.89 64. Settlement = $451,942.34 66. APR = 27.60%; EAR = 31.39% 68. t = 57.99 months; t = 59.35 months 70. Payment = $682,272.84 72. r = 6.464% 76. a. APR = 364.00%; EAR = 3,272.53% b. APR = 391.398%; EAR = 4,253.98% c. APR = 871.00%; EAR = 314,215.72%
CHAPTER 7 4. YTM =10.153% 6. P = $965.10 8. Coupon rate = 5.968% 10. R = 7.841% 12. r = 6.3% 16. If the YTM rises to 11%:
ΔPSam% = -5.00% ΔPDave% = -16.05% If the YTM falls to 7%: ΔPSam% = +5.33% ΔPDave% = +21.36%
18. Current yield = 8.614%; YTM = 8.12%; EAR = 8.28% 20. Clean price = $961.83 22. t = 13.18 years 26. a. coupon bonds = 30,000; zero bonds = 301,871.604 b. coupon bonds = $32,400,000; zero bonds = $301,871,604 c. coupon bonds = $1,560,000; zero bonds = $839,695.62 28. C = $7,637.76 30. a. YTM = 6.178% b. P2 = $1,116.92; HPY = 9.17%
CHAPTER 8 2. R = 9.375% 4. P0 = $42.22 6. D0 = $2.45 8. R = 5.09% 10. P0 = $43.44 12. P0 = $40.09 14. D1 = $2.73 16. D0 = $3.37 18. NI = $534,646.50 20. P0 = $113.26 22. a. P0 = $56.53 b. P0 = $59.00 24. R = 9.54%
CHAPTER 9 2. Initial cost = $2,400: payback = 3.14 years
Initial cost = $3,600: payback = 4.71 years Initial cost = $6,500: payback = 8.49 years
4. Initial cost = $7,000: discounted payback = 1.813 years Initial cost = $10,000: discounted payback = 2.54 years Initial cost = $13,000: discounted payback = 3.3 years
6. AAR = 24.48% 8. NPV12% = $5,311.91; NPV35% = -$6174.97 10. IRR = 22.64% 12. a. IRRA = 20.44%; IRRB = 18.84% b. NPVA = $7,507.61; NPVB = $9,182.29 c. R = 15.3% 14. a. NPV = $13,482.142.86 b. IRR = 53%, -79.67% 16. a. PII = 1.267; PIII = 1.414 b. NPVI = $14,145; NPVII = $6,630.35 18. NPV0% = $274,619; NPV¥% = -$684,680 22. MIRR = 18.55%; 13.28%; 12.93% 24. IRR = 25.00%, 33.33%, 42.86%; 66.67% 26. IRR = 22.14%
NPV12% = -$8,230.87; NPV0% = -$21,000.00; NPV24% = +$1,314.26 28. NPV = -$2,626.33; IRR = 10.89%
CHAPTER 10 2. Annual sales = $403,600,000 4. OCF = $231,506; Tax shield = $43,010 8. NPV = $194,703.78 12. Net cash flow = $65,930 14. NPV = $715,657.53 16. NPV = $2,427,440.81 20. Annual cash flow = $782,885,000 22. IRR = 61.85% 24. PV = $146,791.67 per system 26. Incorporating the half year rule: OCF = $112,500 28. Method 1: EAC = -$2,395.41; Method 2: EAC = -$2,901.67 30. Techron I: EAC = -$124,925.48; Techron II: EAC = -$122,298.60 32. EAC = -$108,233.45 34. NPV = $47,758.20 36. NPV = -$369,345.35 38. EACUnderground = -$1,137,201.72; EACAboveground = -$1,053,027.17 40. P0 = $14.61 42. EACA = -$180,381.93; EACB = -$145,228.04
2 Appendix B: Answers to Selected End-of-Chapter Problems
Ross_AppendixB_2nd.indd 2Ross_AppendixB_2nd.indd 2 13-01-09 15:3413-01-09 15:34
44. Using replacement chains: Sal 5000: NPV = -$383,965.79 DET 1000: NPV = -$452,894.98
46. a. NPV = -$1,295,433.70 b. Abandon in 1 year: NPV = -$816,279.85
Abandon in 2 years: NPV = -$328,497.67 Abandon in 3 years: NPV = -$799,730.99
48. a. Cost savings = $202,693.35 b. Cost savings = $185,480.85 50. NPV = $2,861,990.17; IRR = 28.04% 52. a. NPV = $113,272.98 b. New computer: EAC = $24,569.03
Old computer: EAC = -$16,100.94
CHAPTER 11 2. Total cost = $8,308,000
Marginal cost = $54.65 Average cost = $69.23 Minimum total revenue = $273,250
6. Best case: NPV = $2,554,066.81 Worst Case: NPV = -$1,952,325.82
8. D = $195,200; P = $53.36; v = $31.57 10. QF = 14,483.74 12. OCF = $60,489.47; DOL = 3.4798 14. FC = $91,770; OCF16,000 = $66,969.30; OCF14,000 = $47,030.70 18. DOL75,000 = 1.4967; DOLBE = 2.7143 20. a. NPV = $4,860,842.37 b. Abandon if Q < 2,411.98 22. NPV = $6,139,827.89; Value of option = $4,124,142.53 24. Best Case: NPV = $48,307,753.80
Worst Case: NPV = -$14,296,375.36 26. a. 53,485.84 km/year b. P = $4.81 per litre c. 68,474.93 km/year; P = $6.19 per litre 28. b. QC = 25; QA = 60; QF = 71 30. a. OCF1 = $1,059,000; OCF2 = 1,174,200; OCF3 = 1,122,360
OCF4 = $1,080,888; OCF5 = $1,047,710.40; NPV = $481,777.21 b. Worst Case: NPV = -$1,451,149.95
Best case: NPV = $2,485,048.70 32. QC = 5,259; QA = 16,526.32; QF = 36,350.46
CHAPTER 12 2. Dividend yield = 2.637%; Capital gains yield = 12.09% 4. a. Total dollar return = $100 b. R = 9.615% c. r = 5.4% 6. r = 4.608% 8. a. Stocks: R = 4.105%; T-bills: R = 5.615% b. Stocks: St. Dev. = 18.65%; T-bills: St. Dev. = 1.82% c. Average risk premium = -1.51%, St. Dev. = 19.83% 10. a. r = 7.83% b. Nominal risk premium = 7.40% 14. R = 20.5%; St. Dev. = 13.67% 16. RA = 11.825%; RG = 10.58% 18. Pr(2X) = 0.0006%; Pr(3X) ≈ 0% 20. a. Average T-bill return = 8.42%; Average inflation = 9.48% b. St. Dev. T-Bills = 2.34%; St. Dev. Inflation = 1.89% c. Average real T-Bill return = -0.94% 22. a. Pr(R > 10%) = 44.86%; Pr(R < 0%) = 18.50% b. Pr(R > 10%) = 15.23%; Pr(R < 0%) = 5.05% c. Pr(R < -2.09%) = 13.33%; Pr(R > 19.11%) = 0.027%
CHAPTER 13 2. Expected return = 9.67% 4. X: $6,400; Y: $3,600 6. Expected return = 10.60% 8. Expected return = 14.30% 10. a. Expected return = 10.12% b. Variance = .01774746; St. Dev. = 13.32% 12. Beta = 1.73 14. Beta = 0.76 16. Risk-free rate = 4.278% 18. Slope = 0.0696 20. Risk-free rate = 2.3% 24. Stock C: $328,488; Risk-free asset: $136,511.63
Beta of risk-free asset = 0 26. Beta (I) = 1.0625; St. Dev. (I) = 8.617% Beta (II) = 0.65625;
St. Dev. (II) = 24.396% 28. a. E(RA) = 13%; E(RB) = 11.50% b. Market risk premium = 6.0%
CHAPTER 14 2. RE = 12.24% 4. RE: 9.36%; 9.35% 6. YTM = 5.388%; RD = 3.5022% 8. Book value = $95,000,000; Market value = $75,750,000
Aftertax cost = 5.13% 10. WACC = 10.18% 12. a. E/V = 0.3182; D/V = 0.6818 b. E/V = 0.8273; D/V = 0.1727 14. a. RD = 8.25% b. RE = 12.2% 16. a. D/V = 0.3305; E/V = 0.6206; P/V = 0.0489 b. WACC = 9.872% 18. b. Flotation cost = 6.875% c. Cost = $16,107,382.55 20. PV = $20,454,545.45 22. Division A: RE = 11.429%; Division B: RE = 14.821% 24. NPV = $6,488,212.34
CHAPTER 15 2. a. Max = $48; Min = $0 b. Shares = 697,674.42; Rights = 5.59 c. Ex-rights price = $47.24; Value of right = $0.76 4. 1,000 shares of each: Profit = $5,000
Only half of over-subscribed shares: Profit = $500 6. Shares = 5,835,597.83 8. $68: PX = 68.00; $65: PX = 67.56; $60: PX = $66.83 10. BVPS = $102.92; M/B = 0.691; EPS = $19.88
NPV = -$247,272.73 12. PS = $21.39 14. Proceeds = $36,516
CHAPTER 16 2. a. EPS = $1.74; $2.49; $2.99 b. EPS = $2.015; $3.29; $4.15 4. a. I: EPS = $2.38; II: EPS = $2.12 b. I: EPS = $3.57; II: EPS = $3.784 c. EBIT = $638,400 6. a. EPS = $3.90; $3.71; $4
Appendix B: Answers to Selected End-of-Chapter Problems 3
Ross_AppendixB_2nd.indd 3Ross_AppendixB_2nd.indd 3 13-01-09 15:3413-01-09 15:34
b. EBIT = $54,000 c. EBIT = $54,000 d. EBIT = $54,000 8. a. Cash flow = $386 b. Cash flow = $362.45 c. Sell 30 shares 10. EBIT = $1,440,000 12. a. RE = 17.14% b. RU = 11.39% c. RE = 19.05%; 15.22%; 11.39% 14. VU = $400,833.33; VL = $444,583.33 16. VL = $482,113.64 18. Cash flow from Monmagny to shareholder = $25,000
Net cash flow from Monmagny investment = $21,850 22. Equity Beta = 1; 2; 6; 21 24. V10% = $39.7 million
V20% = $19.85 million
CHAPTER 17 2. a. New shares issued = 2,000 b. New shares issued = 5,000 4. a. P = $48.00 b. P = $69.56 c. P = $56.14 d. P = $140 e. Shares outstanding 708,333; 488,750; 605,625; 242,857 6. Shares outstanding = 8679.39; P = 39.30 8. Shares outstanding = 442,750; Capital surplus = $2,425,500 10. New borrowings = $980; Total capital outlays = $1,960 12. a. Maximum capital outlay = $362,500 b. No dividend 14. P0 = $45.47; D = $27.969 16. a. D = $5.50; PX = $58.00 b. EPS = $1.40; $1.51; P/E = 37.50 20. a. Tax rate = 35.00% c. Tax rate = 0.00%
CHAPTER 18 2. Cash = $1450; Current assets = $5,655 4. a. Increase, Increase b. Increase, No change c. Decrease, Decrease d. Decrease, Decrease e. Decrease, No change f. Increase, Increase 6. Operating cycle = 79.39 days; Cash cycle = 40.37 days 8. a. Payables period = 0 days
Payment: Q1 = 261.00; Q2 = $249.00; Q3 = $279.00; Q4 = $272.55
b. Payment: Q1 = $237.00; Q2 = $261.00; Q3 = $249.00; Q4 = $297 c. Payment: Q1 = $245.00; Q2 = $257.00; Q3 = $259.00;
Q4 = $276.85 10. a. Sales = $180,000 b. Sales = $168,571.43 c. Sales = $187,464.29; $204,035.71; $226,950 14. a. EAR = .078193566 or 7.82% b. EAR = 0.0444 or 4.44% c. EAR = 0.04267 or 4.267%
CHAPTER 19 2. a. Disbursement float = $48,000
Collection float = -$46,000 Net float = $2,000
b. Collection float = -$23,000 Net float = $25,000
4. a. Total float = $71,000 b. Average daily float = $2,366.67 c. Average daily receipts = $633.33
Weighted average delay = 3.74 days 6. a. Average daily collection float = $25,016 b. Weighted average delay = 2.537634408 days
Average daily float = $25,016 c. Maximum payment = $25,016 d. Daily cost = $4.64 e. Maximum payment = $14,787 8. a. Cash balance reduction = $390,000 b. Daily dollar return = $92.09 c. Maximum monthly payment = $2,810.19; $2,790.08 10. Annual net savings = $123,750 12. N = 40 customers per day
CHAPTER 20 2. Average receivables = $3,539,726.03 4. Average accounts receivable = $88,971.43 6. Annual credit sales = $467,863.64 8. Average receivables = $942,739.73 10. NPV = $107,265.79 12. EOQ = 248.15; Number of orders per year = 62.86 or 63 times 14. NPV = $147,150 16. Net savings = $4,050 18. PBE = $85.64 22. NPV = $2,208,057.44
CHAPTER 21 2. a. £100 b. £100 c. Swiss francs / pound: SFr 1.4786/£1
Pounds / Swiss franc: £0.6762/SFr1 4. a. $1.00 Can = $0.9524 US b. $2.38 US 6. British risk-free rate = 1.43%
Japanese risk-free rate = 1.066% European risk-free rate = 1.135%
8. Annual Polish inflation exceeds Canadian inflation by 0.9238398% 10. a. Borrow Kr1 at 5.7% interest, 180-day forward at Kr 5.86;
Profit = Kr 0.0460381 b. F180 = Kr 5.834651626 12. b. Japanese inflation exceeds Canadian inflation by -2.4% 14. NPV = $514,147.19 16. a. Assets = $18,000; Debt = $7,333.33; Equity = $10,666.67 b. Assets = $16,875; Debt = $6,875; Equity = $10,000.00 c. Assets = $19,148.94; Debt = $7,801.42; Equity = $11,347.52 18. d. NPV = $211,840.85
4 Appendix B: Answers to Selected End-of-Chapter Problems
Ross_AppendixB_2nd.indd 4Ross_AppendixB_2nd.indd 4 13-01-09 15:3413-01-09 15:34
CHAPTER 22 2. NAL = $116,056.90 4. Break-even payment before tax = $1,213,770.60 6. Lessee: NPV > 0 when L < $1,880,975.30
Lessor: NPV > 0 when L > $1,926,620 A lease is not feasible.
8. NAL = $32,985.87 Maximum payment before tax = $2,161,493.70
10. NAL = -$150,182.52 12. NAL = $479.30
CHAPTER 23 2. Maximum share price = $100 8. a. Equity cost = $60,800,000 b. NPV cash = $2,000,000; NPV stock = $2,200,000 10. a. NPV = $5,700 b. Share price = $48.06 c. Merger premium = $3,000 d. Share price = $47.32 e. NPV = $1,710 12. a. EPS = 1.6288 b. Share price = $50.03 c. P/E = 26.40 times d. Share price = $42.673; P/E = 26.20 times 14. a. PV = $5,714,285.71 b. Cost = $62,500,000 c. NPV = -$11,785,714.29 16. a. Share price = $29.83870968 b. Exchange ratio = 0.9259
CHAPTER 24 2. Gain = $162,000 - 159,000 = $3,000 CDN per ounce;
Loss = $162,000 - 175,000 = -$13,000 CDN per ounce 4. Payoff per barrel: -$11, -$8, -$30, $0, $2, $5.24 10. a. $4,567,307.69 b. $1,278,840.15
CHAPTER 25 2. a. C0 = $0 b. P0 = $1 c. The Mar call is out of money. The Oct put is mispriced. 4. a. C0 = $14.25 b. C0 = $4.167 6. C0 = $11.50; S0 = $75.82 8. a. E0 = $18.345; D0 = $90.65 b. E0 = $25.146 10. a. Minimum price = $97.14 12. W0 = $0.874 14. a. NPV = $535,999.35 b. Q = 3850.83 16. NPV = $1,745,695.47; Option value = $1,230,084.57 20. a. NPV = $3,168,982.09 b. C2 = $5,305,381.74
Appendix B: Answers to Selected End-of-Chapter Problems 5
Ross_AppendixB_2nd.indd 5Ross_AppendixB_2nd.indd 5 13-01-09 15:3413-01-09 15:34
GLOSSARY
accounting break-even The sales level that results in zero project net income. (p. 297) accounts payable period The time between receipt of inventory and payment for it. (p. 522) accounts receivable financing A secured short-term loan that involves either the assignment or factoring of receivables. (p. 539) accounts receivable period The time between sale of inventory and collection of the receivable. (p. 522) adjusted present value (APV) Base case net present value of a project’s operating cash flows plus present value of any financing benefits. (p. 414) adjustment costs The costs associated with holding too little cash. Also called shortage costs. (p. 554) affect heuristic The reliance on instinct instead of analysis in making decisions. (p. 755) agency problem The possibility of conflicts of interest between the shareholders and management of a firm. (p. 10) aggregation The process by which smaller investment proposals of each of a firm’s operational units are added up and treated as one big project. (p. 86) aging schedule A compilation of accounts receivable by the age of each account. (p. 588) amalgamations Combinations of firms that have been joined by merger, consolidation, or acquisition. (p. 656) American option A call or put option that can be exercised on or before its expiration date. (p. 625, p. 712) annual percentage rate (APR) The interest rate charged per period multiplied by the number of periods per year. (p. 148) annuity A level stream of cash flows for a fixed period of time. (p. 135) annuity due An annuity for which the cash flows occur at the beginning of the period. (p. 141) arbitrage pricing theory (APT) An equilibrium asset pricing theory that is derived from a factor model by using diversification and arbitrage. It shows that the expected return on any risky asset is a linear combination of various factors. (p. 377) arithmetic average return The return earned in an average year over a multiyear period. (p. 333) average accounting return (AAR) An investment’s average net income divided by its average book value. (p. 228) average tax rate Total taxes paid divided by total taxable income. (p. 37)
balance sheet See statement of financial position. bankruptcy A legal proceeding for liquidating or reorganizing a business. Also, the transfer of some or all of a firm’s assets to its creditors. (p. 479) basis risk Risk that futures prices will not move directly with cash price hedged. (p. 698) bearer form Bond issued without record of the owner’s name; payment is made to whoever holds the bond. (p. 175)
behavioural finance The area of finance dealing with the implications of reasoning errors on financial decisions. (p. 751) benefit/cost ratio The profitability index of an investment project. (p. 238) best efforts underwriting Underwriter sells as much of the issue as possible, but can return any unsold shares to the issuer without financial responsibility. (p. 428) beta coefficient Amount of systematic risk present in a particular risky asset relative to an average risky asset. (p. 366) bought deal One underwriter buys securities from an issuing firm and sells them directly to a small number of investors. (p. 428) bubble A situation where observed prices soar far higher than fundamentals and rational analysis would suggest. (p. 761) business risk The equity risk that comes from the nature of the firm’s operating activities. (p. 464)
call option An option that gives the owner the right, but not the obligation, to buy an asset. (p. 701); The right to buy an asset at a fixed price during a particular period of time. (p. 712) call premium Amount by which the call price exceeds the par value of the bond. (p. 176) call protected Bond during period in which it cannot be redeemed by the issuer. (p. 176) call provision Agreement giving the corporation the option to repurchase the bond at a specified price before maturity. (p. 176) Canada plus call Call provision that compensates bond investors for interest differential, making it unattractive for an issuer to call a bond. (p. 176) Canada yield curve A plot of the yields on Government of Canada notes and bonds relative to maturity. (p. 188) capital asset pricing model (CAPM) Equation of the SML showing the relationship between expected return and beta. (p. 375) capital budgeting The process of planning and managing a firm’s investment in long-term assets. (p. 2) capital cost allowance (CCA) Depreciation for tax purposes, not necessarily the same as depreciation under IFRS. (p. 42); Depreciation method under Canadian tax law allowing for the accelerated write-off of property under various classifications. (p. 254) capital gains The increase in value of an investment over its purchase price. (p. 39) capital gains yield The dividend growth rate or the rate at which the value of an investment grows. (p. 203) capital intensity ratio A firm’s total assets divided by its sales, or the amount of assets needed to generate $1 in sales. (p. 91) capital markets Financial markets where long-term debt and equity securities are bought and sold. (p. 15) capital rationing The situation that exists if a firm has positive NPV projects but cannot find the necessary financing. (p. 310)
27Ross_Glossary_3rd.indd 77327Ross_Glossary_3rd.indd 773 12-11-28 12:3612-11-28 12:36
capital structure The mix of debt and equity maintained by a firm. (p. 3) captive finance company Wholly owned subsidiary that handles credit extension and receivables financing through commercial paper. (p. 581) carrying costs Costs that rise with increases in the level of investment in current assets. (p. 527) cash break-even The sales level where operating cash flow is equal to zero. (p. 302) cash budget A forecast of cash receipts and disbursements for the next planning period. (p. 533) cash cycle The time between cash disbursement and cash collection. (p. 522) cash discount A discount given for a cash purchase. (p. 576) cash flow from assets The total of cash flow to bondholders and cash flow to shareholders, consisting of: operating cash flow, capital spending, and additions to net working capital. (p. 32) cash flow time line Graphical representation of the operating cycle and the cash cycle. (p. 522) cash flow to creditors A firm’s interest payments to creditors less net new borrowings. (p. 34) cash flow to shareholders Dividends paid out by a firm less net new equity raised. (p. 34) circular bid Corporate takeover bid communicated to the shareholders by direct mail. (p. 657) clean price The price of a bond net of accrued interest; this is the price that is typically quoted. (p. 182) clientele effect Stocks attract particular groups based on dividend yield and the resulting tax effects. (p. 502) collection policy Procedures followed by a firm in collecting accounts receivable. (p. 573) common-base-year statement A standardized financial statement presenting all items relative to a certain base year amount. (p. 59) common-size statement A standardized financial statement presenting all items in percentage terms. Statements of financial position are shown as a percentage of assets and statements of consolidated income as a percentage of sales. (p. 57) common stock Equity without priority for dividends or in bankruptcy. (p. 205) compounding The process of accumulating interest in an investment over time to earn more interest. (p. 112) compound interest Interest earned on both the initial principal and the interest reinvested from prior periods. (p. 112) confirmation bias Searching for (and giving more weight to) information and opinion that confirms what you believe rather than information and opinion to the contrary. (p. 752) consol A type of perpetuity. (p. 142) consolidation A merger in which a new firm is created and both the acquired and acquiring firm cease to exist. (p. 656) contingency planning Taking into account the managerial options that are implicit in a project. (p. 308) control block An interest controlling 50 percent of outstanding votes plus one; thereby it may decide the fate of the firm. (p. 671)
conversion price The dollar amount of a bond’s par value that is exchangeable for one share of stock. (p. 732) conversion ratio The number of shares per bond received for conversion into stock. (p. 732) conversion value The value of a convertible bond if it was immediately converted into common stock. (p. 733) convertible bond A bond that can be exchanged for a fixed number of shares of stock for a specified amount of time. (p. 732) corporate governance Rules for corporate organization and conduct; practices relating to how corporations are governed by management, directors, and shareholders. (pp. 11, 670) corporation A business created as a distinct legal entity owned by one or more individuals or entities. (p. 5) cost of debt The return that lenders require on the firm’s debt. (p. 393) cost of equity The return that equity investors require on their investment in the firm. (p. 389) counterparty Second borrower in currency swap. Counterparty borrows funds in currency desired by principal. (p. 624) coupon The stated interest payment made on a bond. (p. 165) coupon rate The annual coupon divided by the face value of a bond. (p. 166) covenants A promise by the firm, included in the debt contract, to perform certain acts. A restrictive covenant imposes constraints on the firm to protect the interests of the debt holder. (p. 539) crash A situation where market prices collapse significantly and suddenly. (p. 761) credit analysis The process of determining the probability that customers will or will not pay. (p. 573) credit cost curve Graphical representation of the sum of the carrying costs and the opportunity costs of a credit policy. (p. 581) credit default swap A contract that pays off when a credit event occurs, default by a particular company termed the reference entity, giving the buyer the right to sell corporate bonds issued by the reference entity at their face value. (p. 701) credit instrument The evidence of indebtedness. (p. 578) credit period The length of time that credit is granted. (p. 575) credit scoring The process of quantifying the probability of default when granting consumer credit. (p. 585) cross-hedging Hedging an asset with contracts written on a closely related, but not identical, asset. (p. 698) cross-rate The implicit exchange rate between two currencies (usually non-U.S.) quoted in some third currency (usually the U.S. dollar). (p. 607) cumulative voting Procedure where a shareholder may cast all votes for one member of the board of directors. (p. 218)
date of payment Date of the dividend payment. (p. 492) date of record Date on which holders of record are designated to receive a dividend. (p. 492) debenture Unsecured debt, usually with a maturity of 10 years or more. (p. 175)
774 Glossary
27Ross_Glossary_3rd.indd 77427Ross_Glossary_3rd.indd 774 12-11-28 12:3612-11-28 12:36
debit card An automated teller machine card used at the point of purchase to avoid the use of cash. As this is not a credit card, money must be available in the user’s bank account. (p. 561) debt capacity The ability to borrow to increase firm value. (p. 98) declaration date Date on which the board of directors passes a resolution to pay a dividend. (p. 492) default risk premium The portion of a nominal interest rate or bond yield that represents compensation for the possibility of default. (p. 189) deferred call Call provision prohibiting the company from redeeming the bond before a certain date. (p. 176) degree of operating leverage (DOL) The percentage change in operating cash flow relative to the percentage change in quantity sold. (p. 305) depreciation (CCA) tax shield Tax saving that results from the CCA deduction, calculated as depreciation multiplied by the corporate tax rate. (p. 264) derivative securities Options, futures, and o ther securities whose value derives from the price of another, underlying, asset. (p. 20); Financial assets that represent claims to another financial asset. (p. 687) dilution Loss in existing shareholders’ value, in terms of either ownership, market value, book value, or EPS. (p. 446) direct bankruptcy costs The costs that are directly associated with bankruptcy, such as legal and administrative expenses. (p. 470) dirty price The price of a bond including accrued interest, also known as the full or invoice price. This is the price the buyer actually pays. (p. 182) discount To calculate the present value of some future amount. (p. 119) discounted cash flow (DCF) valuation The process of valuing an investment by discounting its future cash flows. (p. 222) discounted payback period The length of time required for an investment’s discounted cash flows to equal its initial cost. (p. 227) discount rate The rate used to calculate the present value of future cash flows. (p. 120) distribution Payment made by a firm to its owners from sources other than current or accumulated earnings. (p. 491) diversification Investment in more than one asset; returns do not move proportionally in the same direction at the same time, thus reducing risk. (p. 668) divestiture The sale of assets, operations, divisions, and/or segments of a business to a third party. (p. 678) dividend Return on capital of corporation paid by company to shareholders in either cash or stock. (p. 206); Payment made out of a firm’s earnings to its owners, either in cash or stock. (p. 491) dividend capture A strategy in which an investor purchases securities to own them on the day of record and then quickly sells them; designed to attain dividends but avoid the risk of a lengthy hold. (p. 567) dividend growth model A model that determines the current price of a stock as its dividend next period, divided by the discount rate less the dividend growth rate. (p. 199)
dividend payout ratio Amount of cash paid out to shareholders divided by net income. (p. 90) dividend tax credit Tax formula that reduces the effective tax rate on dividends. (p. 39) dividend yield A stock’s cash dividend divided by its current price. (p. 203) Du Pont identity Popular expression breaking ROE into three parts: profit margin, total asset turnover, and financial leverage. (p. 71) Dutch auction underwriting The type of underwriting in which the offer price is set based on competitive bidding by investors. Also known as a uniform price auction. (p. 429)
earnings per share (EPS) Net income minus any cash dividends on preferred stock, divided by the number of shares of common stock outstanding. (p. 667) economic exposure Long-term financial risk arising from permanent changes in prices or other economic fundamentals. (p. 690) economic value added (EVA) Performance measure based on WACC. (p. 398) effective annual rate (EAR) The interest rate expressed as if it were compounded once per year. (p. 146) efficient capital market Market in which security prices reflect available information. (p. 335) efficient markets hypothesis (EMH) The hypothesis is that actual capital markets, such as the TSX, are efficient. (p. 337) employee stock option (ESO) An option granted to an employee by a company giving the employee the right to buy shares of stock in the company at a fixed price for a fixed time. (p. 724) equity carve-out The sale of stock in a wholly owned subsidiary via an IPO. (p. 679) equivalent annual cost (EAC) The present value of a project’s costs calculated on an annual basis. (p. 273) erosion The portion of cash flows of a new project that come at the expense of a firm’s existing operations. (p. 252) Eurobanks Banks that make loans and accept deposits in foreign currencies. (p. 623) Eurobond International bonds issued in multiple countries but denominated in a single currency (usually the issuer’s currency). (p. 607) Eurocurrency Money deposited in a financial centre outside of the country whose currency is involved. (p. 607) European option An option that can be exercised only on the expiration date. (p. 712) ex-dividend date Date two business days before the date of record, establishing those individuals entitled to a dividend. (p. 492) exchange rate The price of one country’s currency expressed in another country’s currency. (p. 609) exchange rate risk The risk related to having international operations in a world where relative currency values vary. (p. 624) exercising the option The act of buying or selling the underlying asset via the option contract. (p. 712) expected return Return on a risky asset expected in the future. (p. 347)
Glossary 775
27Ross_Glossary_3rd.indd 77527Ross_Glossary_3rd.indd 775 12-11-28 12:3612-11-28 12:36
expiration date The last day on which an option can be exercised. (p. 712) Export Development Canada (EDC) Federal Crown corporation that promotes Canadian exports by making loans to foreign purchasers. (p. 607) ex rights Period when stock is selling without a recently declared right, normally beginning two business days before the holder-of-record date. (p. 443) external financing needed (EFN) The amount of financing required to balance both sides of the balance sheet or statement of financial position. (p. 92)
face value The principal amount of a bond that is repaid at the end of the term. Also called par value. (p. 166) financial break-even The sales level that results in a zero NPV. (p. 303) financial distress costs The direct and indirect costs associated with going bankrupt or experiencing financial distress. (p. 470) financial engineering Creation of new securities or financial processes. (p. 20) financial leases Typically, a longer-term, fully amortized lease under which the lessee is responsible for upkeep. Usually not cancellable without penalty. (p. 636) financial ratios Relationships determined from a firm’s financial information and used for comparison purposes. (p. 60) financial risk The equity risk that comes from the financial policy (i.e., capital structure) of the firm. (p. 464) firm commitment underwriting Underwriter buys the entire issue, assuming full financial responsibility for any unsold shares. (p. 428) Fisher effect The relationship between nominal returns, real returns, and inflation. (p. 185) five Cs of credit The following five basic credit factors to be evaluated: character, capacity, capital, collateral, and conditions. (p. 585) fixed costs Costs that do not change when the quantity of output changes during a particular time period. (p. 296) float The difference between book cash and bank cash, representing the net effect of cheques in the process of clearing. (p. 556) flotation costs The costs associated with the issuance of new securities. (p. 403) forecasting risk The possibility that errors in projected cash flows lead to incorrect decisions. (p. 289) foreign bonds International bonds issued in a single country, usually denominated in that country’s currency. (p. 607) foreign exchange market The market where one country’s currency is traded for another’s. (p. 608) forward contract A legally binding agreement between two parties calling for the sale of an asset or product in the future at a price agreed upon today. (p. 691) forward exchange rate The agreed-on exchange rate to be used in a forward trade. (p. 611) forward trade Agreement to exchange currency at some time in the future. (p. 611) frame dependence The tendency of individuals to make different (and potentially inconsistent) decisions depending on how a question or problem is framed. (p. 753)
free cash flow Another name for cash flow from assets. (p. 34) futures contract A forward contract with the feature that gains and losses are realized each day rather than only on the settlement date. (p. 694) future value (FV) The amount an investment is worth after one or more periods. Also known as compound value. (p. 112)
general cash offer An issue of securities offered for sale to the general public on a cash basis. (p. 427) generalized Fisher effect (GFE) The theory that real interest rates are equal across countries. (p. 618) geometric average return The average compound return earned per year over a multiyear period. (p. 333) gilts British and Irish government securities, including issues of local British authorities and some overseas public-sector offerings. (p. 607) going-private transactions All publicly owned stock in a firm is replaced with complete equity ownership by a private group. (p. 658) greenmail A targeted stock repurchase where payments are made to potential bidders to eliminate unfriendly takeover attempts. (p. 671) growing annuity A finite number of growing annual cash flows. (p. 145) growing perpetuity A constant stream of cash flows without end that is expected to rise indefinitely. (p. 143)
half-year rule CRA’s requirement to figure CCA on only one-half of an asset’s installed cost for its first year of use. (p. 42) hard rationing The situation that occurs when a business cannot raise financing for a project under any circumstances. (p. 310) hedging Reducing a firm’s exposure to price or rate fluctuations. Also called immunization. (p. 687) heuristics Shortcuts or rules of thumb used to make decisions. (p. 755) holder-of-record date The date on which existing shareholders on company records are designated as the recipients of stock rights. Also called the date of record. (p. 443) homemade dividends Idea that individual investors can undo corporate dividend policy by reinvesting dividends or selling shares of stock. (p. 495) homemade leverage The use of personal borrowing to change the overall amount of financial leverage to which the individual is exposed. (p. 460)
income statement See statement of comprehensive income. incremental cash flows The difference between a firm’s future cash flows with a project and without the project. (p. 251) indenture Written agreement between the corporation and the lender detailing the terms of the debt issue. (p. 174) indirect bankruptcy costs The difficulties of running a business that is experiencing financial distress. (p. 470) inflation premium The portion of a nominal interest rate that represents compensation for expected future inflation. (p. 187)
776 Glossary
27Ross_Glossary_3rd.indd 77627Ross_Glossary_3rd.indd 776 12-11-28 12:3612-11-28 12:36
information content effect The market’s reaction to a change in corporate dividend payout. (p. 502) initial public offering (IPO) A company’s first equity issue made available to the public. Also called an unseasoned new issue. (p. 426) interest on interest Interest earned on the reinvestment of previous interest payments. (p. 112) interest rate parity (IRP) The condition stating that the interest rate differential between two countries is equal to the difference between the forward exchange rate and the spot exchange rate. (p. 617) interest rate risk premium The compensation investors demand for bearing interest rate risk. (p. 187) interest tax shield The tax saving attained by a firm from interest expense. (p. 466) internal growth rate The growth rate a firm can maintain with only internal financing. (p. 97) internal rate of return (IRR) The discount rate that makes the NPV of an investment zero. (p. 230) intrinsic value The lower bound of an option’s value, or what the option would be worth if it were about to expire. (p. 718) inventory loan A secured short-term loan to purchase inventory. (p. 541) inventory period The time it takes to acquire and sell inventory. (p. 522) invoice Bill for goods or services provided by the seller to the purchaser. (p. 575)
joint venture Typically an agreement between firms to create a separate, co-owned entity established to pursue a joint goal. (p. 659) just-in-time inventory (JIT) Design for inventory in which parts, raw materials, and other work-in-process is delivered exactly as needed for production. Goal is to minimize inventory. (p. 598)
lessee The user of an asset in a leasing agreement. Lessee makes payments to lessor. (p. 634) lessor The owner of an asset in a leasing agreement. Lessor receives payments from the lessee. (p. 634) letter of credit A written statement by a bank that money will be paid, provided conditions specified in the letter are met. (p. 539) leveraged buyouts (LBOs) Going-private transactions in which a large percentage of the money used to buy the stock is borrowed. Often, incumbent management is involved. (p. 658) leveraged lease A financial lease where the lessor borrows a substantial fraction of the cost of the leased asset. (p. 637) liquidation Termination of the firm as a going concern. (p. 480) liquidity premium The portion of a nominal interest rate or bond yield that represents compensation for lack of liquidity. (p. 189) lockboxes Special post office boxes set up to intercept and speed up accounts receivable payments. (p. 561) lockup agreement The part of the underwriting contract that specifies how long insiders must wait after an IPO before they can sell stock. (p. 430)
London Interbank Offer Rate (LIBOR) The rate most international banks charge one another for overnight Eurodollar loans. (p. 607) loss carry-forward, carry-back Using a year’s capital losses to offset capital gains in past or future years. (p. 40)
M&M Proposition I The value of the firm is independent of its capital structure. (p. 462) M&M Proposition II A firm’s cost of equity capital is a positive linear function of its capital structure. (p. 463) managerial options Opportunities that managers can exploit if certain things happen in the future. Also known as sell options. (p. 307) marginal cost or incremental cost The change in costs that occurs when there is a small change in output. (p. 297) marginal tax rate Amount of tax payable on the next dollar earned. (p. 37) market risk premium Slope of the SML, the difference between the expected return on a market portfolio and the risk-free rate. (p. 374) maturity date Specified date at which the principal amount of a bond is paid. (p. 166) maturity factoring Short-term financing in which the factor purchases all of a firm’s receivables and forwards the proceeds to the seller as soon as they are collected. (p. 541) merger The complete absorption of one company by another, where the acquiring firm retains its identity and the acquired firm ceases to exist as a separate entity. (p. 656) money markets Financial markets where short-term debt securities are bought and sold. (p. 15) multiple discriminant analysis (MDA) Statistical technique for distinguishing between two samples on the basis of their observed characteristics. (p. 586) multiple rates of return One potential problem in using the IRR method if more than one discount rate makes the NPV of an investment zero. (p. 234) mutually exclusive investment decisions One potential problem in using the IRR method is the acceptance of one project excludes that of another. (p. 234)
net acquisitions Total installed cost of capital acquisitions minus adjusted cost of any disposals within an asset pool. (p. 43) net advantage to leasing (NAL) The net present value (NPV) of the decision to lease an asset instead of buying it. (p. 642) net present value (NPV) The difference between an investment’s market value and its cost. (p. 221) net present value profile A graphical representation of the relationship between an investment’s NPVs and various discount rates. (p. 232) noise trader A trader whose trades are not based on information or meaningful financial analysis. (p. 758) nominal rates Interest rates or rates of return that have not been adjusted for inflation. (p. 184) non-cash items Expenses charged against revenues that do not directly affect cash flow, such as depreciation. (p. 31) normal distribution A symmetric, bell-shaped frequency distribution that can be defined by its mean and standard deviation. (p. 329)
Glossary 777
27Ross_Glossary_3rd.indd 77727Ross_Glossary_3rd.indd 777 12-11-28 12:3612-11-28 12:36
note Unsecured debt, usually with a maturity under 10 years. (p. 175) Note Issuance Facility (NIF) Large borrowers issue notes up to one year in maturity in the Euromarket. Banks underwrite or sell notes. (p. 623)
operating cash flow Cash generated from a firm’s normal business activities. (p. 32) operating cycle The time period between the acquisition of inventory and when cash is collected from receivables. (p. 522) operating lease Usually a shorter-term lease where the lessor is responsible for insurance, taxes, and upkeep. Often cancellable on short notice. (p. 635) operating leverage The degree to which a firm or project relies on fixed costs. (p. 304) operating loan Loan negotiated with banks for day-to-day operations. (p. 537) opportunity cost The most valuable alternative that is given up if a particular investment is undertaken. (p. 252) option A contract that gives its owner the right to buy or sell some asset at a fixed price on or before a given date. (p. 711) option contract An agreement that gives the owner the right, but not the obligation, to buy or sell a specific asset at a specific price for a set period of time. (p. 701) option delta The change in the stock price divided by the change in the call price. (p. 723) overallotment option An underwriting provision that permits syndicate members to purchase additional shares at the original offering price. (p. 430) overconfidence The belief that your abilities are better than they really are. (p. 751) overoptimism Taking an overly optimistic view of potential outcomes. (p. 751) oversubscription privilege Allows shareholders to purchase unsubscribed shares in a rights offering at the subscription price. (p. 444)
partnership A business formed by two or more co-owners. (p. 5) payback period The amount of time required for an investment to generate cash flows to recover its initial cost. (p. 225) payoff profile A plot showing the gains and losses that will occur on a contract as the result of unexpected price changes. (p. 691) percentage of sales approach Financial planning method in which accounts are projected depending on a firm’s predicted sales level. (p. 90) perpetuity An annuity in which the cash flows continue forever. (p. 142) planning horizon The long-range time period the financial planning process focuses on, usually the next two to five years. (p. 86) poison pill A financial device designed to make unfriendly takeover attempts unappealing, if not impossible. (p. 672) political risk Risk related to changes in value that arise because of political actions. (p. 627) portfolio Group of assets such as stocks and bonds held by an investor. (p. 351)
portfolio weights Percentage of a portfolio’s total value in a particular asset. (p. 351) precautionary motive The need to hold cash as a safety margin to act as a financial reserve. (p. 553) preferred stock Stock with dividend priority over common stock, normally with a fixed dividend rate, often without voting rights. (p. 207) present value (PV) The current value of future cash flows discounted at the appropriate discount rate. (p. 119) principle of diversification Principle stating that spreading an investment across a number of assets eliminates some, but not all, of the risk. (p. 363) private placements Loans, usually long term in nature, provided directly by a limited number of investors. (p. 448) profitability index (PI) The present value of an investment’s future cash flows divided by its initial cost. Also known as benefit/cost ratio. (p. 238) pro forma financial statements Financial statements projecting future years’ operations. (p. 254) prospectus Legal document describing details of the issuing corporation and the proposed offering to potential investors. (p. 426) protective covenant Part of the indenture limiting certain transactions that can be taken during the term of the loan, usually to protect the lender’s interest. (p. 176) proxy Grant of authority by shareholder allowing for another individual to vote his or her shares. (p. 218) proxy contests Attempts to gain control of a firm by soliciting a sufficient number of shareholder votes to replace existing management. (p. 658) public issue The creation and sale of securities on public markets. (p. 425) purchasing power parity (PPP) The idea that the exchange rate adjusts to keep purchasing power constant among currencies. (p. 613) pure play approach Use of a WACC that is unique to a particular project. (p. 401) put option An option that gives the owner the right, but not the obligation, to sell an asset. (p. 701); The right to sell an asset at a fixed price during a particular period of time. The opposite of a call option. (p. 712)
realized capital gains The increase in value of an investment, when converted to cash. (p. 39) real option An option with payoffs in real goods. (p. 737) real rates Interest rates or rates of return that have been adjusted for inflation. (p. 184) recaptured depreciation The taxable difference between adjusted cost of disposal and UCC when UCC is smaller. (p. 44) red herring A preliminary prospectus distributed to prospective investors in a new issue of securities. (p. 426) registered form Registrar of company records ownership of each bond; payment is made directly to the owner of record. (p. 175) regular cash dividend Cash payment made by a firm to its owners in the normal course of business, usually made four times a year. (p. 491) regular underwriting The purchase of securities from the issuing company by an investment banker for resale to the public. (p. 428)
778 Glossary
27Ross_Glossary_3rd.indd 77827Ross_Glossary_3rd.indd 778 12-11-28 12:3612-11-28 12:36
regulatory dialectic The pressures financial institutions and regulatory bodies exert on each other. (p. 21) reorganization Financial restructuring of a failing firm to attempt to continue operations as a going concern. (p. 480) representativeness heuristic The reliance on stereotypes, analogies, or limited samples to form opinions about an entire class. (p. 756) repurchase Another method used to pay out a firm’s earnings to its owners, which provides more preferable tax treatment than dividends. (p. 508) residual dividend approach Policy where a firm pays dividends only after meeting its investment needs while maintaining a desired debt-to-equity ratio. (p. 503) retention ratio or plowback ratio Retained earnings divided by net income. (pp. 91, 391) retractable bond Bond that may be sold back to the issuer at a prespecified price before maturity. (p. 181) return on equity (ROE) Net income after interest and taxes divided by average common shareholders’ equity. (p. 391) reverse split Procedure where a firm’s number of shares outstanding is reduced. (p. 512) rights offer A public issue of securities in which securities are first offered to existing shareholders. Also called a rights offering. (p. 427) risk premium The excess return required from an investment in a risky asset over a risk-free investment. (p. 325) risk profile A plot showing how the value of the firm is affected by changes in prices or rates. (p. 688)
sale and leaseback A financial lease in which the lessee sells an asset to the lessor and then leases it back. (p. 636) same day value Bank makes proceeds of cheques deposited available the same day before cheques clear. (p. 562) scenario analysis The determination of what happens to NPV estimates when we ask what-if questions. (p. 291) seasoned equity offering (SEO) A new equity issue of securities by a company that has previously issued securities to the public. (p. 427) seasoned new issue A new issue of securities by a firm that has already issued securities in the past. (p. 426) security market line (SML) Positively sloped straight line displaying the relationship between expected return and beta. (p. 374) sentiment-based risk A source of risk to investors above and beyond firm specific risk and overall market risk. (p. 759) sensitivity analysis Investigation of what happens to NPV when only one variable is changed. (p. 293) shareholder rights plan Provisions allowing existing shareholders to purchase stock at some fixed price should an outside takeover bid take place, discouraging hostile takeover attempts. (p. 672) shortage costs Costs that fall with increases in the level of investment in current assets. (p. 527) simple interest Interest earned only on the original principal amount invested. (p. 112) simulation analysis A combination of scenario and sensitivity analyses. (p. 295) sinking fund Account managed by the bond trustee for early bond redemption. (p. 176)
smart card Much like an automated teller machine card; one use is within corporations to control access to information by employees. (p. 561) soft rationing The situation that occurs when units in a business are allocated a certain amount of financing for capital budgeting. (p. 310) sole proprietorship A business owned by a single individual. (p. 4) sources of cash A firm’s activities that generate cash. (p. 54) speculative motive The need to hold cash to take advantage of additional investment opportunities, such as bargain purchases. (p. 553) spin-off The distribution of shares in a subsidiary to existing parent company shareholders. (p. 679) split-up The splitting up of a company into two or more companies. (p. 679) spot exchange rate The exchange rate on a spot trade. (p. 611) spot trade An agreement to trade currencies based on the exchange rate today for settlement in two days. (p. 611) spread Compensation to the underwriter, determined by the difference between the underwriter’s buying price and offering price. (p. 428); The gap between the interest rate a bank pays on deposits and the rate it charges on loans. (p. 585) stakeholder Anyone who potentially has a claim on a firm. (p. 12) stand-alone principle Evaluation of a project based on the project’s incremental cash flows. (p. 251) standard deviation The positive square root of the variance. (p. 326) standby fee Amount paid to underwriter participating in standby underwriting agreement. (p. 444) standby underwriting Agreement where the underwriter agrees to purchase the unsubscribed portion of the issue. (p. 444) stated interest rate The interest rate expressed in terms of the interest payment made each period. Also known as quoted interest rate. (p. 146) statement of cash flows A firm’s financial statement that summarizes its sources and uses of cash over a specified period. (p. 56) statement of comprehensive income Financial statement summarizing a firm’s performance over a period of time. Formerly called an income statement. (p. 30) statement of financial position Financial statement showing a firm’s accounting value on a particular date. Formerly called a balance sheet. (p. 25) static theory of capital structure Theory that a firm borrows up to the point where the tax benefit from an extra dollar in debt is exactly equal to the cost that comes from the increased probability of financial distress. (p. 472) stock dividend Payment made by a firm to its owners in the form of stock, diluting the value of each share outstanding. (p. 510) stock exchange bid Corporate takeover bid communicated to the shareholders through a stock exchange. (p. 657) stock split An increase in a firm’s shares outstanding without any change in owner’s equity. (p. 511)
Glossary 779
27Ross_Glossary_3rd.indd 77927Ross_Glossary_3rd.indd 779 12-11-28 12:3612-11-28 12:36
straight bond value The value of a convertible bond if it could not be converted into common stock. (p. 732) straight voting Procedure where a shareholder may cast all votes for each member of the board of directors. (p. 218) strategic alliance Agreement between firms to cooperate in pursuit of a joint goal. (p. 659) strategic options Options for future, related business products or strategies. (p. 309) striking price The fixed price in the option contract at which the holder can buy or sell the underlying asset. Also called the exercise price or strike price. (p. 712) stripped bond/zero-coupon bond A bond that makes no coupon payments, thus initially priced at a deep discount. (p. 179) stripped common shares Common stock on which dividends and capital gains are repackaged and sold separately. (p. 495) sunk cost A cost that has already been incurred and cannot be removed and therefore should not be considered in an investment decision. (p. 251) sustainable growth rate (SGR) The growth rate a firm can maintain given its debt capacity, ROE, and retention ratio. (p. 98) swaps Agreements to exchange two securities or currencies. (p. 608) swap contract An agreement by two parties to exchange, or swap, specified cash flows at specified intervals in the future. (p. 698) sweeteners or equity kickers A feature included in the terms of a new issue of debt or preferred shares to make the issue more attractive to initial investors. (p. 729) syndicate A group of underwriters formed to reduce the risk and help to sell an issue. (p. 427) syndicated loans Loans made by a group of banks or other institutions. (p. 448) synergy The positive incremental net gain associated with the combination of two firms through a merger or acquisition. (p. 661) systematic risk A risk that influences a large number of assets. Also called market risk. (p. 360) systematic risk principle Principle stating that the expected return on a risky asset depends only on that asset’s systematic risk. (p. 366)
target cash balance A firm’s desired cash level as determined by the trade-off between carrying costs and shortage costs. (p. 554) target payout ratio A firm’s long-term desired dividend- to-earnings ratio. (p. 507) tax-oriented lease A financial lease in which the lessor is the owner for tax purposes. Also called a true lease or a tax lease. (p. 636) tender offer A public offer by one firm to directly buy the shares from another firm. (p. 657) terminal loss The difference between UCC and adjusted cost of disposal when the UCC is greater. (p. 43) term loans Direct business loans of, typically, one to five years. (p. 448)
terms of sale Conditions on which a firm sells its goods and services for cash or credit. (p. 573) term structure of interest rates The relationship between nominal interest rates on default-free, pure discount securities and time to maturity; that is, the pure time value of money. (p. 187) trading range Price range between highest and lowest prices at which a stock is traded. (p. 512) transaction motive The need to hold cash to satisfy normal disbursement and collection activities associated with a firm’s ongoing operations. (p. 553) transactions exposure Short-run financial risk arising from the need to buy or sell at uncertain prices or rates in the near future. (p. 689) trust receipt An instrument acknowledging that the borrower holds certain goods in trust for the lender. (p. 541)
unbiased forward rates (UFR) The condition stating that the current forward rate is an unbiased predictor of the future exchange rate. (p. 617) uncovered interest parity (UIP) The condition stating that the expected percentage change in the exchange rate is equal to the difference in interest rates. (p. 618) unlevered cost of capital The cost of capital of a firm that has no debt. (p. 467) unsystematic risk A risk that affects at most a small number of assets. Also called unique or asset-specific risks. (p. 360) uses of cash A firm’s activities in which cash is spent. (p. 54)
value at risk (VaR) Statistical measure of maximum loss used by banks and other financial institutions to manage risk exposures. (p. 331) variable costs Costs that change when the quantity of output changes. (p. 296) variance The average squared deviation between the actual return and the average return. (p. 326) venture capital Financing for new, often high-risk ventures. (p. 424)
warrant A security that gives the holder the right to purchase shares of stock at a fixed price over a given period of time. (p. 729) weighted average cost of capital (WACC) The weighted average of the costs of debt and equity. (p. 395) working capital management Planning and managing the firm’s current assets and liabilities. (p. 4)
yield to maturity (YTM) The market interest rate that equates a bond’s present value of interest payments and principal repayment with its price. (p. 166)
zero-balance account A chequing account in which a zero balance is maintained by transfers of funds from a master account in an amount only large enough to cover cheques presented. (p. 563)
780 Glossary
27Ross_Glossary_3rd.indd 78027Ross_Glossary_3rd.indd 780 12-11-28 12:3612-11-28 12:36
SUBJECT INDEX
3Com, 759, 760
A Abandonment option, 308, 666n ABC approach to inventory
management, 592 AbitibiBowater Inc., 387, 470 Abnormal returns, 436, 677 Absolute purchasing power parity,
613–614, 629 Acceptance Futures, 696f Accommodative short-term fi nancial
policy, 526 Accord Financial Corp., 540, 542 Account receivables, investment in,
573–574 Account size, 576 Accounting
acquisitions and, 660–661 beta, 401n dilution, 446 generally accepted accounting
principles (GAAP). See Generally accepted accounting principles (GAAP)
income, 31, 42, 45, 57, 299, 649 insolvency, 479 leasing, 637–639, 638t, 651 liquidity, 520 period charge, 254n
Accounting break-even, 297–300, 298f, 302
break-even analysis, problems in application of, 300
calculation of, 301 cash fl ow and, 300–301 defi ned, 297 uses for, 299–300
Accounting criteria summary, 240t Accounting rates of return (ARR), 68,
239t Accounts payable payments, 534 Accounts payable period, 522 Accounts receivable, 26, 27
aging schedule, 588 credit analysis, 573, 583, 584–588 fi nancing, 539 investment in, 573–574 monitoring of, 588–589 period, 522
ACE Aviation Holdings Inc., 552 Acid-test ratio, 63 Acquisitions, 672n
abandonment option, 666n abnormal returns, 677 accounting for, 660–661 alternatives to mergers, 659 amalgamations, 656 asset write-ups, 665 assets, 657, 678 balance sheet, sample of, 660t beachhead, 663 bidder, 656 capital gains eff ect, 660 capital requirements, changing,
665, 680 cash acquisition, cost of, 669 cash fl ow benefi ts from, 661–664 cash vs. common stock fi nancing,
670, 679 circular bid, 657 classifi cation of, 657 complementary resources, 664 conglomerate, 658 consideration in, 656
considerations for acquiring potential, 665–666
consolidation, defi ned, 656 cost of, 668–670, 679 cost reductions, 663–664, 680 criticism of, 666 defensive tactics, 670–676 diversifi cation, 668 divestitures and restructurings, 678 earnings per share (EPS) growth,
667 economies of scale, 663 economies of vertical integration,
664 event studies, 676 evidence on, 676–677 fi nancial side eff ects of, 667–668 gains from, 661–666 goodwill, 660 horizontal, 657, 662 ineffi cient management, 666 joint venture, 659 largest Canadian mergers and
acquisitions, 659t legal forms of, 656–659 management buyouts (MBOs),
658, 673 management, ineffi cient, 666 market gains, 662 market power, 662 merger or consolidation, 656, 678 merger premiums, 676 mergers, defi ned, 656 net operating losses (NOL), 664 net present value (NPV) approach,
668–670 potential acquisitions, evaluating,
665–666 procedures for, 656 purchase accounting, 660 revenue enhancement, 662 revenue enhancement and cost
reduction evidence and, 680 stock acquisition, cost of, 669–670 stock exchange bid, 657 stock, acquisition of, 657, 678 strategic benefi ts, 662–663 surplus funds, 665 synergy, 661–662 takeovers, 658 target fi rm, 656 tax gains, 664–665, 680 tax status, determinants of, 659 taxable, 659–660 taxable vs. taxfree, 659–660, 679 tender off er, 657 tender off ers vs. mergers, 676–677 unused debt capacity, 664–665 vertical, 657 write-up eff ect, 660, 679
Adelphia, 11, 471 Adjusted cost of disposal, 43 Adjusted present value (APV),
414–419 all-equity value, 415 application of, example, 418 beta and, 416 corporate taxes, 417–418 debt, additional eff ects of, 415 defi ned, 414 fl otation costs, 415 non-market rate fi nancing, 416 non-scale enhancing project, 418 tax subsidy, 415–416 variable cash fl ows, 414n
weighted average cost of capital (WACC) vs., 418–419
Adjustment, 757 Adjustment costs, 554 Aeroplan, 552 Aff ect heuristic, 755–756 Affi rmative covenants, 177 Aft er-tax incremental tax fl ows, 254 Agency costs, 10, 11, 176 Agency costs of equity, 471, 496 Agency problem, 10–14, 23
agency cost, 10, 11 agency relationships, 10 bankruptcy costs, 470, 488 control of fi rm, 11 corporate governance, 11, 12–13 corporate social responsibility (CSR)
and ethical funds, 12–13 defi ned, 10 management goals, 10 managerial compensation, 11 shareholder’s interest, 11
Agent, 16 Aggregation, 86 Aging schedule, 588 AIG, 701 Air Canada, 52, 196, 252, 480, 481, 508,
537, 552, 635, 636, 729 Alcan Inc., 165, 422t, 684 Allied Stores, 674 Almaden Minerals Ltd., 292 AltaGas Income Fund, 41 Alternative issue methods, 427 Amalgamations, 656 Amazon.com, 290, 523 American Depositary Receipts (ADRs),
633 American International Group (AIG),
20 American options, 625, 701, 712, 723n Amoco Canada, 481, 664 Amortized loans, 151–154
partial, 154 student loans and, 153
Anchoring, 757 Angels, 424 Announcements, surprises, and
expected returns announcement and news, 359–360 discounted announcements,
359–360 expected and unexpected returns,
359 innovation, 360 surprise, 360
Annual percentage rate (APR), 148, 169, 543
eff ective annual rate (EAR) vs., 148–149
Annuities annuity cash fl ows, present value of,
135–140 annuity due, 141–142 annuity due future value, example,
142 annuity due value, 141 annuity payments, 137 annuity present value factor, 136,
141 annuity tables, 136 calculations summary, 143t calculator hints, 137, 139, 140, 141 defi ned, 135, 164 examples of, 138 future value, 140–141
growing, 144 mortgages, 147 ordinary, 135, 155 perpetuities, 142–145 present value interest factor for
annuities, 136, 137t proof of annuity present value
formula, 164 rate, fi nding, 139–140, 231 spreadsheet, use of, 136, 138
AOL Inc., 429 Apple Inc., 9, 201, 321, 359, 424, 501,
559, 675 Appropriate discount rate, 387 Arbitrage, 20, 718, 758, 760 Arbitrage pricing theory (APT), 375n,
377–378 capital asset pricing model (CAPM)
vs., 377 defi ned, 377
Arithmetic average/mean return, 325 defi ned, 333 geometric average vs., 333, 334t, 335
Armtec Holdings Ltd., 178 Arrearage, 207 Articles of incorporation, 5 Asian fi nancial crisis, 20 Asset backed commercial paper
(ABCP), 544 Asset beta, 464 Asset management, or turnover,
measures asset turnover ratios, 66–67 asset utilization ratios, 65 average collection period (ACP), 66 days’ sales in inventory, 65–66, 70t days’ sales in receivables, 66, 70t inventory turnover, 65–66, 70t receivables turnover, 66, 70t
Asset pool, leasing and, 643–644 Asset purchases and sales, 43
adjusted cost of disposal, 43 Asset requirements, 88 Asset turnover ratios, 65
fi xed asset turnover, 70t net working capital (NWC)
turnover, 66–67, 70t total asset turnover, 67, 70t
Asset utilization ratio, 65 Asset write-ups, 665 Asset-backed bonds, 181 Asset-backed commercial paper, 426 Asset-specifi c risks, 361, 364 Assets, 25–26
acquisitions, 657 book value, 28–29 capital, 26 capital cost allowance (CCA), 42–45 cash fl ow from, 3, 15, 32–34 current, 26, 28, 61, 520 fi nancial, 126 fi xed, 26, 28, 36 illiquid, 28 intangible, 28, 42 liquid, 28 mutual funds, 19t real, 126 replacement of, 271 tangible, 26, 28 undepreciated capital cost (UCC),
42 Astral Media Inc., 655 AT&T, 679 Athabasca Oil Sands Corp., 439 ATI Technologies Inc., 20
28Ross_Index_3rd.indd 78128Ross_Index_3rd.indd 781 12-12-19 13:5512-12-19 13:55
Auction markets, 16, 17, 23 Aureus Mining Inc., 87 AuRico Gold Inc., 220 Aurizon Mines Ltd., 713, 714, 715,
716, 718 Automatic dividend reinvestment plans
(ADPs), 495 Automobile production, 737–739
fi xed vs. fl exible plants, annual profi ts from, 739f
production fl exibility and, 737–739 Availability bias, 758 Availability fl oat, 557 Available balance, 556 Average accounting return (AAR),
228, 257 advantages and disadvantages of,
summary, 230 analysis of, 229–230 computation of, 229 defi ned, 228 projected yearly revenue and costs
for, 229t return of assets (ROA) and, 229n
Average annual returns, 325t risk premiums and, 326t
Average collection period (ACP), 66, 524, 574, 588
Average daily fl oat, 558 Average daily receipts, 558 Average returns, 324–326
arithmetic vs. geometric averages, 333, 334t, 335
average annual returns, 324 average annual returns and risk
premiums, 326t beta and, 372t calculating, 324 geometric average return,
calculating, 333–334 historical record of, 324–325 risk premiums, 325
Average tax rate, 37 Average vs. marginal tax rates, 37–39 Aversion to ambiguity, 757 Avon Products, 626, 666
B Backwardation, 693 Bailout packages, 687 Balance sheet, 25–29
assets, 25–26 book value, 28–29 capital intensity ratio, 96, 101 common-size statements, 57–59 construction of, 26f, 27 debt vs. equity, 28 deferred taxes, 42n defi ned, 25 equation, 26 identity, 26 liabilities and owners’ equity, 26 liquidity, 28 market value vs. book value, 28–29,
508–509 net working capital, 26f, 27–28 pro forma, 88 shareholders’ equity, 26 simplifi ed example of, 27t
Balloon payment, 154, 155 Bank Act, 148, 439, 541, 671n Bank of Canada, 193, 571 Bank of Guangzhou, 84 Bank of Montreal, 16, 18t, 85, 207,
331, 384, 385f, 501, 502, 503, 505, 724f
dividend payments, 503t Bank of New York Mellon, 633
Bank of Nova Scotia, 16, 18t, 84, 366, 367, 431t, 503, 623, 713, 714–715, 716, 724
dividend payments, 503t Bank of Tokyo, 623 Bankers acceptance, 18, 543, 567, 578 Banking group, 427 Bankruptcy
agreements to avoid, 480–481 avoidance of, 8 court, “cram down” power of, 481 defi ned, 479 liquidation, 480–481 long-term fi nancing under, 479–481 prepackaged, 481 reorganization, 480
Bankruptcy and Insolvency Act (1992), 480
Bankruptcy costs, 470–471 agency costs of equity, 471 claim on cash fl ows, 475 direct, 470 fi nancial distress, 470 indirect, 470–471
Barclays Bank, 86 Barclays Global Investors, 193, 217, 375 Bard Ventures, 294 Barings Bank, 753 Barnes and Noble, 501 Barrick Gold Corp., 13, 110, 490, 657,
693, 698 Base case, 290 Base-year analysis, 59 Basel II, 14 Basic present value equation, 121, 125t Basis, 698 Basis risk, 698 BCE Inc., 4, 57, 217, 385f, 486, 495,
559, 655 Beachhead, 663 Bear Stearns, 701 Bearer bonds, 623 Bearer form, 175 Behavioural fi nance, 750–772
biases, 751–752 defi ned, 751 framing eff ects, 752–755 heuristics, 755–758 market effi ciency, 758–766
Bell Canada, 658, 674 Bell Mobility, 559 BellSouth, 679 Benchmark, choosing
fi nancial statement, analysis, 74 North American Industry
Classifi cation System (NAICS) codes, 74
peer group analysis, 74 time-trend analysis, 74
Benefi t/cost ratio, 238, 309 Berkshire Partners, 658 Best case scenario, project analysis
and, 292 Best eff orts underwriting, 428 Best fi t, line of, 373 Beta coeffi cient, 347, 366, 377
average returns and, 372t best fi t, line of, 373 calculating, 372–374, 391 characteristic line, 372 confi dence intervals, 373n defi ned, 366 error range, 373n estimates of, 373 examples of, 367t expected returns and, 368–369,
369f, 371 graphs representation of, 373f portfolio, 365–367 reward-to-risk ratio, 369 risk premiums and, 368–371
selected companies, 372t stock valuation and, example, 372 systematic risk principle and, 376 total risk vs., 366 volatility and, 366f
BHP Billiton, 674 Bias, 751–752
availability, 758 recency, 757
Bid prices, setting of, 273–275, 275t winner’s curse, 273
Bidder, 656 Big Mac Index, 614 Big Six chartered banks, 18 Bigger fool approach, 197n Bill 97, 541 Black Monday, 762, 763 Black–Scholes option pricing model
(OPM), 737, 745–748 spreadsheet strategies for, 748
Black Tuesday, 761 Blanket mortgage, 175 Bloomberg, 599 BMO Capital Markets, 16, 431t, 502 BMO Nesbitt Burns, 384 BMW, 625 Boeing, 599, 636 Bombardier Aerospace, 634, 694 Bond features, 165–166, 173–177
call premium, 176 call protected, 176 call provision, 175, 176 Canada plus call, 176 coupon rate, 166, 170 coupons, 165, 166 debt vs. equity, 173–174 deferred call, 176 duration, 169n face value/par value, 166 indenture, 174–177 level coupon bond, 165 long term debt, basics of, 174 maturity date, 166, 170 par value, 166 price, 182 protective covenants, 176, 177 repayment, 176 security, 175 seniority, 175 sinking funds, 174, 176 terms, 175 zero coupon, 121
Bond funds, 184 Bond interest rates and infl ation,
184–186 Fisher eff ect, 184–186 infl ation and present values, 186 pure interest rates, 187 real rate of interest, 187 real vs. nominal rates, 184–185 term structure of, 187–188
Bond issue, 93 Bond markets, 181–184
bond price quotes, 182–183, 183f bond price reporting, 181–184 bond pricing example, 182 buying and selling bonds, method
of, 181–182 over-the-counter (OTC), 181, 190 transparency in, 181
Bond ratings, 177–178 DBRS, 177 Moody’s, 177 rating classes and description, 177t Standard and Poor’s (S&P), 177
Bond stripping, 121, 179–180 Bond types, 178–181
asset-backed, 181 catastrophe (cat), 180 CoCo, 181 convertible, 181
discount, 168, 169 fi nancial engineering, 178 fl oating-rate (fl oaters), 180 Government of Canada, 166 high-promised yield, 189 high-yield, 178, 189 income, 180 junk, 178, 180, 674 liquid, 189 long, 323 NoNo, 181 original issue discount (OID), 179n par, 166 premium, 168, 169 provincial, 166 put, 181, 736 retractable, 181 stripped, 179 stripped real return, 181 subordinated, 181 zero-coupon, 179, 181
Bond values annual percentage rate (APR) and,
169 cash fl ow example, 167f interest rate risk, 169–170 semiannual coupons, 169 spreadsheet strategies, 172–173
Bond yields, 186–189 bond spread, 194 Canada yield curve, 188 default risk premium, 189 eff ective yield, 169 fi nancial calculator, use of to
calculate, 171–172 infl ation premium, 187 interest rate risk premium, 187 interest rates, term structure of,
187–188 liquidity premium, 189 promised yield, 189 spreadsheet, use of to calculate, 173 term structure, shape of, 188 yield curve, 188–189 yield to maturity (YTM), 166, 169,
170–173 Bondholders, 26, 36 Bonds
junk, 179 low-grade, 178 real return, 180 stripped coupons, 124
Bonds, valuation and interest rates, 165–195
Book balance, 556 Book value
accounting balance on, 44 dilution of, 446–447 market value vs., 28–29 weighted average cost of capital
(WACC) and, 407 Borders, 589 Borrower, 173 Borrowing, short-term, 537–544
cash management and, 554 operating loans, 537–539
Boston Pizza Royalty Fund, 41 Bottom line, 30 Bottom-up approach, 263–264 Bought deal, 428
short form prospectus distribution (SFPD), 428
Brackets, 426 Brahma Beer, 399 Break-even analysis, 296–300, 311
accounting break-even, 297–300, 298f
fi xed costs, 296–300 marginal/incremental cost, 297 problems with application of, 300 total costs, 296–297
782 Subject Index
28Ross_Index_3rd.indd 78228Ross_Index_3rd.indd 782 12-12-19 13:5512-12-19 13:55
variable costs, 296, 297f Break-even points, 306
accounting, 300–301 cash, 302 fi nancial, 302–303 measures, summary of, 304t operating leverage and, 306–307
Briggs & Stratton, 399 British Petroleum, 292 Brokers, 15–16 Bubbles, 750, 761 Bull market, 19 Bulldog bonds, 607 Bullet loan, 154 BumpTop, 675 Burn rates, 537 Business Development Bank of
Canada, 605 Business failure, 479 Business income trusts, 6 Business interruption insurance, 686 Business organization, forms of, 4–7, 7t
corporations, 5–6, 22 income trusts, 6, 11n key features of, 7 partnership, 5 sole proprietorship, 4–5
Business risk, 464 Buyer, 691 Buying and selling bonds, method of,
181–182 Bylaws, 5
C Caisse de depot, 205, 673 Caisses Desjardins du Quebec, 19 Call features, 174, 704 Call option, 625, 701, 712
arbitrages, 718 Black–Scholes option pricing model
(OPM), 745–748 fi ft h factor, 722 lower bound on value of, 718 option delta, 723 return variance: fi ft h factor, 720 simple model, 719–720 upper bound on value of, 718, 719f valuation, 721–722 value at expiration, 717 value of fi rm and, 730–732 valuing, 719–720, 745–748 warrants vs., 729, 730, 731t
Call option on fi rm’s assets, equity as a, 726–728
risk-free debt case, 726 risky debt case, 727
Call premium, 176 Call price, 704 Call protected, 176 Call provision, 176, 181, 704
bonds, on, 736, 740 call premium, 176 call protected, 176 Canada plus call, 176 deferred call, 176 protective covenant, 177
Campeau Corporation, 418, 674 Canada Business Corporations Act,
5, 205 Canada Customs and Revenue Agency,
665 Canada Deposit Insurance Corporation
(CDIC), 471, 737 Canada Mortgage and Housing
Corporation (CMHC), 23 Canada plus call, 176 Canada Revenue Agency (CRA), 37,
259, 271, 487 half-year rule, 42 leasing and, 639, 647
Canada Savings Bonds (CSBs), 150, 736
Canada Treasury bills, 323, 325–326 Canada Trust, 666 Canada yield curve, 188 Canada’s capital markets
defensive tactics in acquisitions and, 670
reform of, 21 Canadian Atlantic Enterprises,
318–319 Canadian Coalition for Good
Governance, 205n Canadian Derivatives Clearing Corp.
(CDCC), 712, 713 Canadian Enterprises, 635
capital spending, 33t, 35 change in net working capital
(NWCC), 33 example, 33–34 operating cash fl ow, 32–33, 35
Canadian Imperial Bank of Commerce, 4, 16, 147, 163, 208, 559, 659, 724t
Canadian Institute of Chartered Accountants (CICA), 626, 637
Canadian mutual funds, risk of, example, 365
Canadian National Railway Company, 205
Canadian Pacifi c Railway Ltd., 205, 598, 672
Canadian Radio-television and Telecommunications Commission (CRTC), 655
Canadian Securities Administration (CSA), 425
Canadian small business, examples of, 540t
defi ned, 539 restrictive, 539
Canadian Tire Corporation, 74, 110, 111, 206, 207, 384, 505, 531, 532f, 533, 541, 596, 598, 662, 672
Canadian Tire Dealers Association, 206 Canadian Venture Exchange (CDNX),
325n Candev, 674 Canaccord Capital Corp., 431t Cannibalism, 252n Canwest Global Communications
Corporation, 454 Capital asset pricing model (CAPM),
353n, 374, 375, 376, 378 arbitrage pricing theory (APT) vs.,
375n, 377 defi ned, 375 derivation of, 384–386 expected return, 385f
Capital assets, 26 Capital budgeting, 2, 220–221
capital investment decisions, making, 250–287 See also Capital investment
decisions, making chosen method, frequency of usage,
239t decisions about, 2–3 defi ned, 2 infl ation and, 285–286 investment criteria, summary of,
240t leasing and, 647–648 net present value (NPV) and other
investment criteria, 221–249 See also Net present value
(NPV) and other investment criteria
options, 309
percentage of CFOs using a given technique, 239
practice of, 239–241, 239t project analysis and evaluation,
288–316 See also Project analysis and
evaluation sensitivity analysis, 286t spreadsheets, use of in, 262n,
286–287 Capital budgeting, international,
620–621, 629 foreign currency approach, 621 home currency approach, 620 unremitted cash fl ows, 621
Capital cost allowance (CCA), 42–45, 254, 255n
ACRS method vs., 42 asset pool, termination of, 43–44 asset purchases and sales, 43 calculations example, 42t, 44 common allowance classes, 42t,
259n computer system example, 44t defi ned, 42 expected salvage value, 42 half-year rule, 42 IFRS, 42 incentives in practice example, 43 leasing and, 639, 650 Majestic Mulch and Compost
Company (MMCC) example, 259–262
manufacturing equipment example, 45
net acquisitions, 43 project cash fl ow and, 258–262 recaptured depreciation, 44, 45 terminal loss, 43, 45 undepreciated capital cost (UCC),
42, 44 Capital costs, 287–422, 490–518
appropriate discount rate, 387 calculations, summary of, 398t capital structure and, 456 debt and preferred stock, cost of,
393–394 divisional and project costs,
399–402 embedded debt cost, 394n equity, cost of, 388, 389–393
See also Equity, cost of fl otation costs and weighted average
cost of capital (WACC), 403–405
international fi rms’, 622–623 required return vs., 388 tax and, 388 weighted average cost of capital
(WACC), 388, 394–399 Capital expenditures, 534 Capital gains, 39, 40
carry-forward and carry-back, 40–41
defi ned, 39 realized, 39 taxation of, 39, 40–41
Capital gains eff ect, 660 Capital gains yield, 203, 320, 321 Capital intensity ratio, 91 Capital investment decisions, making,
250–287 discounted cash fl ow (DCF)
analysis, 269–275 See also Discounted cash fl ow
(DCF) incremental cash fl ows, 251–254
See also Incremental cash fl ows
operating cash fl ow (OCF), 263–265
See also Operating cash fl ow (OCF)
pro forma fi nancial statements and project cash fl ows, 254–257 See also Pro forma fi nancial
statements project cash fl ows, 251, 257–262
See also Project cash fl ows tax shield approach, application of,
265–268 See also Tax shield approach
Capital leases, 637 Capital market, 23 Capital market effi ciency, 9, 335–340 Capital market history, lessons from,
317–345 average returns, 324–326, 333–335 capital market effi ciency. See Capital
market effi ciency coeffi cient of variation, 328n historical record, 323–324 returns, 318–321
See also Returns standard deviation, 326–328 using, 332 variability of returns, 326–332 variance, 326–328
Capital market line, 385 Capital markets
defi ned, 15 effi cient. See Capital market
effi ciency money markets, vs., 15–16
Capital raising, 423–453 angels, 424 cash off er, 427–431 dilution, 446–447 fi nancing life cycle, fi rm’s, 423–425 long-term debt, issuing, 448–449 new equity sales and fi rm’s value,
436–437 new securities, issuing procedure,
426–427 other people’s money (OPM), 423 public issue, 425–426 rights, 439–445 securities issuing, cost of, 437–439,
438t, 495 syndicated loans, 448–449 term loans, 448 venture capital, 424–425
Capital rationing, 237, 310, 311 defi ned, 310 hard rationing, 310 soft rationing, 310
Capital restructurings, 454 Capital spending, 32, 33, 36
bid price setting and, 275 capital rationing. See Capital
rationing cost-cutting proposals and, 269 interest tax shield and, 466 net capital spending, 35t, 36 project cash fl ow and, 256 project net working capital and, 256 projected, 88, 260 residual dividend approach and,
503–505 Capital structure, 3
bankruptcy costs and, 470–471 Canadian industries (2011), 479t capital cost and, 456 capital restructurings, 454 cost of equity capital, 462–465 decisions, 3–4, 454n, 456 defi ned, 3 equity capital, cost of. See Capital
structure, equity, capital cost and,
fi nancial distress/bankruptcy, long term fi nancing, 479–481
Subject Index 783
28Ross_Index_3rd.indd 78328Ross_Index_3rd.indd 783 12-12-19 13:5512-12-19 13:55
fi nancial leverage, eff ect of, 456–461 fi rm value and stock value, example,
455–456 M&M Propositions I and II with
corporate taxes, 466–469 observed, 478–479 optimal, 456
See also Capital structure, optimal
pecking order theory, 477–478 personal taxes and. See Capital
structure, personal taxes and question, 455–456, 474f regular elements of, 478 target, 456 weighted average cost of capital
(WACC), 456, 503n Capital structure policy, fi nancial
leverage and, 454–489 Capital structure, equity, capital cost
and, 462–465 business and fi nancial risk, 463–465 equity cost and fi nancial leverage:
M&M Proposition II, 462–463 equity cost and weighted average
cost of capital (WACC), 463f extended pie model theory,
475–476, 476f M&M Proposition I: pie models of,
462, 475–477 marketed vs. non marketed claims,
476–477 Capital structure, optimal, 456, 472,
475 capital, cost of and, 473 fi nancial distress, 475 M&M Proposition I, corporate
taxes, 472f, 474 M&M Proposition I, no taxes, 472f,
473, 474f managerial recommendations, 475 recap of, 473, 475 static theory of capital structure,
472, 473, 474 taxes, 475 weighted average cost of capital
(WACC) and, 473, 474 Capital structure, personal taxes and,
472n, 487–488 fi nancial leverage gains with
corporate and personal taxes, 488f
fi nancial leverage with personal taxes, example, 488
fi rm with personal and corporate taxes, value of, 487–488
Caption, 706 Captive fi nance company, 581, 635 Carbyn Inc., 675 CARP, 208 Carry-forward and carry-back, 40–41 Carrying costs
current assets and, 526, 527 defi ned, 527 economic order quantity (EOQ)
model, 596 inventory, 591, 593f, 594 target cash balance and, 554
Carrying value, 28 Cash
sources and uses of, 521 ways to increase/decrease, 520
Cash and liquidity management, 552–571
See also Cash management: Liquidity management vs.
Cash balance, 536–537 Cash break-even, 302 Cash budget, 533–535, 537
cash outfl ows, 534 defi ned, 533
sales and cash collections, 533–534 Cash collections
accelerating, 552, 558, 560–561 debit cards, 561 electronic, 560, 561 lockboxes, 561, 562f over-the-counter, 561–563 preauthorized payment, 561 sales and, 533–534
Cash concentration, 562 Cash coverage ratio, 62t, 65, 70t Cash cow, 211 Cash cycle, 521–526, 523f, 533
accounts payable period, 522 calculating, 524, 525 defi ned, 522 DuPont equation, 526 interpreting, 525 payables turnover, 525 return on assets (ROA) and, 526 sustainable growth rate, 526 total asset turnover, 526
Cash discount period, 575, 600 Cash discounts, 576, 577–578, 579, 600
average collection period (ACP) and, 577–578
break-even application, 580–581 credit cost, 577 default risk, 582, 600 defi ned, 576 electronic credit terms, 577 trade discounts, 577
Cash dividends extra, 491 liquidating, 491 payment, 492 regular, 491 repurchase vs., 508–510
Cash fl ow, 32, 36 See also Cash fl ow from leasing accounting break-even and,
300–301 aft er tax incremental, 254 assets, from, 32–34
See also Cash fl ow from assets bondholders, to, 36 calculations, summary of, 36t creditors, to, 34–35, 35t, 36 discounted, analysis of, 269–275 Dole Cola, 35, 36 fi nancial break-even and, 302–303 fi nancial statements and, 54–57 fi rm and fi nancial market, between,
15f fi rm, to and from, 15 free, 34 granting credit, from, 573 identity, 32, 35t, 36 incremental, 251 leasing, from, 639–641 level, valuing of: annuities and
perpetuities, 135, 146 multiple: future and present values
of, 129–135 net capital spending, 36 net working capital (NWC) and, 36 non-conventional, 233–234 operating, 256–257, 263–265 ordinary annuity form, 135 project, 251 projected vs. actual, 289 real, 253n relevant, 251 repatriated, 621 Royal Bank example, 167f sales volume and, 301 shareholders, to, 34–35, 36 sources and uses of cash, 54–56 statement of cash fl ows, 56–57 statement of comprehensive income,
55, 56t
summary, 35t time line, 522 timing, 134 total, 35 unremitted, 621 valuation of future, 111–164
Cash fl ow from assets, 32–34, 35t Cash fl ow from leasing, 639–641
buying vs., 639–641, 641t incremental cash fl ows, 639–641,
641t, 643t tax shield on capital cost allowance
(CCA), 639, 640t, 642 undepreciated capital cost (UCC),
673 Cash fl ow hedging, 690 Cash fl ow time line, 522 Cash holding
costs of, 555f opportunity cost of, 553 reasons for, 552–554 target cash balance, 553, 554, 556 transaction motive, 553
Cash liquidity reasons for importance of, 552–554 speculative and precautionary
motives, 553 Cash management
borrowing, 555 cash concentration, 562 cash surpluses, temporary, 564 defi ned, 553 disbursements, controlling, 563 fl oat, understanding, 556, 563 idle cash, investing, 564–567 liquidity management vs., 553–554 short-term securities, investment in,
564–567 target cash balance, determining,
554–556 Cash manager, 523t Cash off er
banking group, 427 bought deal, 428 discount, 428 Dutch auction underwriting, 429 green shoe provision, 430 initial public off ering (IPO) and
underpricing, 431–436 investment dealers, 430 lockup agreements, 430 money left on the table, 431 overallotment option, 430 selling period, 429 spread, 428 syndicate, 427 underwriters, role of, 427 underwriting, types of, 428
Cash outfl ow, 254n, 258, 534 Cash ratio, 62t, 63, 70t Cash reserves, 531 Cash surplus or shortfall, 88–89
fi nancial plug, 88 Cash surpluses, temporary
planned/possible expenditures, 564 seasonal/cyclical activities, 564, 565f
Catastrophe (cat) bonds, 180 Caterpillar Inc., 269 Certifi cates of deposit (CD), 567 Ceteris paribus, 293 Chairman, 2 Chapters, 676 Chapters Online, 537 Characteristic line, 372 Charmin Paper Company, 663 Charter, 5 Chartered banks, 16, 18 Chattel mortgage, 175 Chicago Board of Trade (CBT), 694 Chicago Board Options Exchange
(CBOE), 710, 712
Chicago Mercantile Exchange (CME), 694, 698
Chief executive offi cer (CEO), 2 Chief fi nancial offi cer (CFO), 2 Chief operating offi cer (COO), 2 Chief risk offi cer (CRO), 685 Chrysler, 308, 471, 518, 553 CIBC Wood Gundy, 308, 658 CIBC World Markets Inc., 16, 429,
431t, 571 Cineplex Inc., 711 Circular bid, 657 Circus Circus, 518 Citibank, 633 Citigroup, 448 Clean price, 182 Clearwire Corp., 20 Clientele eff ect, 502–503 Clustering illusion, 757 CO-OP Atlantic, 589–590 Co-operatives, 7 Coattail provision, 206 Coca-Cola, 399, 511, 518 CoCo bonds, 181 Coeffi cient of variation, 328n Cogeco, 398 Cold issue, 432 Collar, 704 Collateral, 175
value, 539, 541, 576 Collected balance, 556 Collection fl oat, 557 Collection policy, 573, 588–590, 600
aging schedule, 588, 600 collection eff ort, 589 credit management in practice,
589–590 defi ned. 603 receivables, monitoring, 588–589 schedule of actions for late
payments, 589f, 600 Collections
accelerating, 561 cash concentration, 562 electronic, 561–562 lockboxes, 561 over-the-counter (OTC), 561–563 same day value, 562
Combines Investigation Act, 663n Commercial draft , 578 Commercial liability insurance, 686 Commercial paper, 543, 567, 582
bankers acceptances, 543 Committed line of credit, 538 Commodities Futures Trading
Commission (CFTC), 694 Commodity futures, 694 Commodity futures prices, 696f Commodity price risk with options,
hedging, 703–704 Commodity price volatility, 688–689 Commodity swaps, 699 Common equity, 26 Common shares, stripped, 495 Common stock features
classes of stock, 206–207 cumulative voting, 205 preferred stock vs., 206–207 proxy voting, 205 shareholder rights, 206 straight voting, 205, 218 stripped, 495
Common stock valuation, 196–204 Bank of Prince Edward Island
example, 200 bigger food approach, 197n capital gains yield, 203 coattail provision, 206 common stock cash fl ows, 196–197 constant growth dividend, 198–200 dividend growth model, 199, 203
784 Subject Index
28Ross_Index_3rd.indd 78428Ross_Index_3rd.indd 784 12-12-19 13:5512-12-19 13:55
dividend policy, 198–202 dividend yield, 203 dividends and, 206 example of, 202 Gordon Model, 199n growth rate, changing the, 203 growth stock example, 198 non-constant growth dividend,
201–202 required return, components of, 203 shareholders’ rights, 205–206 special cases, 198–202 supernormal growth, 201n, 202 zero growth dividends, 198, 208
Common-base-year fi nancial statements, trend analysis, 59
Common-base-year statement, 59 Common-size statements, 57–59
balance sheets, 57–59 calculation of numbers, 60t cash fl ow, 58–59 combined common-size and
base-year analysis, 59 common-base-year fi nancial
statements: trend analysis, 59 defi ned, 57 income statements, 58 Prufrock Corporation income
statements example, 59t Prufrock Corporation statement of
comprehensive income, 59t Prufrock Corporation statement of
fi nancial position, 58t, 60t soft ware for preparation of, 73–74 statements of cash fl ow, 58–59
Compaq, 86 Comparability, 75 Compensating balance, 539n Competition, 576 Competition Act, 663 Competition Bureau, 655, 663, 684 Competitive fi rm cash off er, 428t Complementary resources, 664 Compositions, 481 Compound growth, 118 Compound interest, 112, 115
simple interest and future value and, 113f
Compound options, 706 Compounding, 112, 122n
continuous, 149 defi ned, 112 eff ect of: comparing quoted rates,
145–149 eff ective annual rates, 146–147 future value, 112–118, 114f, 115t growth, 118 mortgages, 147
Concentration banking system, 562 Conditional sales agreement lease, 636 Confi dence intervals, 373n Confi rmation bias, 752, 754, 757 Confl ict of interest, 10 Conglomerates, 74 Conglomerate acquisition, 658 Consideration, acquisitions and, 656 Consol, 142 Consolidation, defi ned, 656 Constant growth, 198–200 Consumer co-op, 7 Consumer credit, 572 Consumer demand, 576 Consumer Price Index (CPI), 323 Contingency planning, 307–308 Contingent convertible clause, 181 Continuous compounding, 149, 745n
compounding frequency and eff ective annual rate (EAR) and, 149t
Contract maturity, 698 Control block
corporate charter and, 671 defi ned, 671
Control of fi rm, 11 Controller, 2, 523t Conversion price, 732 Conversion ratio, 732 Conversion value, 733 Convertible bonds, 181, 623, 732–734,
740 bond with warrants vs., 732 call provision and, 736 case for and against, summary, 736t conversion value, 733, 740 convertible preferred share, 732 defi ned, 732 expensive lunch story, 735 features of, 732 fl oor value, 733 free lunch story, 735 interest and, 732n minimum value, 733f option value, 734 reasons for issuing, 734–736 reconciliation, 735 stock value vs. value of, 733f straight bond value, 732–733 value of, 732–734, 734f
Cormark Securities Inc., 431t Corporate abuses, 11 Corporate borrowing, homemade
leverage and, 460–461 Corporate charter, 671 Corporate democracy, 205 Corporate fi nance
agency problem and corporation control, 10–14
business organization, forms of, 4–7 corporation and fi nancial markets,
14–18 defi ned, 2 fi nancial institutions, 18–20 fi nancial management, goal of, 8–9 fi nancial manager, 1–4 fi nancial manager and, 1–4 fi nancial market trends and
fi nancial management, 20–21 fi nancial statements, cash fl ow, and
taxes, 25–52 international corporate fi nance,
606–633 See also International
corporate fi nance introduction to, 1–21 leasing, 635–654 mergers and acquisitions, 655–684 overview of, 1–46 topics in, 606–633
Corporate governance, 11, 205, 670 Corporate growth and long-term
fi nancial planning, 84–110 Corporate Renaissance Group, 398 Corporate restructuring, 179 Corporate securities
debt, 173, 174, 175, 179 derivative, 20 dilution, 446–447 equity, 173–174 registration, 427 rights off er, 427, 428t, 439–445 trading in, 16–18
Corporate social responsibility (CSR), 12–13
Corporate taxes, 39 corporate tax rates example, 40t
Corporate voting, 218–219 cumulative voting, 218 election, buying the, example, 218 proxy voting, 218–219 straight voting, 218, 219
Corporations, 5–6, 7t, 10, 18
advantages and disadvantages of, 5–6
agency problem, 10 articles of incorporation, 5 bylaws, 5 cash fl ows, 15 control of and agency problem,
10–14 defi ned, 5 double taxation, 6 fi nancial markets and, 14–18 international, 6 joint stock companies, 6 letters patent, 5n Limited liability, 5, 6 limited liability companies, 5–6 memorandum of association, 5n organizational chart, 3f professional, 6 public limited companies, 6 separation of ownership and
management, 5 taxation, 6 transfer of ownership, 5, 6
Correlation, 353–355, 356t Correlation coeffi cient, 354n
examples of, 354f Cost eff ects, 579 Cost of capital and long-term fi nancial
policy, 387–422 capital, cost of, 387–422
See also Capital costs capital, raising, 423–453
See also Capital raising dividends and dividend policy,
490–518 See also Dividend policy;
Dividends fi nancial leverage and capital
structure policy, 454–489 See also Financial leverage and
capital structure policy Cost of debt, 393–394, 396, 398t, 405,
407–408 Cost of equity
example, 393 See also Equity, cost of
Cost of goods sold (COGS), 67–68 Cost reductions, acquisitions and,
663–664, 679 complementary resources, 664 cost reduction, 663–664 economies of scale, 663–664, 663f economies of vertical integration,
664 Cost, profi tability and standardization,
576 Cost-cutting proposals, evaluating,
269–270 Costs
adjustment, 554 bankruptcy, 470–471 fi nancial distress costs, 570 fi xed, 31, 296 fl oat, 558 marginal/incremental, 297 opportunity, 252, 288 order, 527 period, 31 product, 31 safety reserve lack, related to, 527 securities issuing, 437–439, 438t sunk, 289 total, 296–297, 297f trading range, 527 variable, 31, 296, 297f
Cott Corp., 85 Coty, 666 Counterparty, 624, 699 Coupon rate, 166, 169, 170 Coupons, 165, 166
semiannual, 169 Covariance, 356, 385 Covenants, 539 Covered interest arbitrage, 616–617 Cram down power, 481 Crash, 761 Crash of 1929, 761 Crash of 1987, 762, 763 Crash of 2008, 765–766 Credit analysis, 573, 583–588, 600
5 Cs of credit, 585 credit evaluation, 585–588 credit granting, 583–584 credit information, 584–585 credit scoring, 585–588 decision to grant/deny credit,
583–584, 600 onetime sale, 583–584 repeat business, 584, 600
Credit and inventory management. See Credit management; Inventory management
Credit cost curve, 581 Credit crisis (2007–2009), 687 Credit default swaps (CDSs), 20, 701
defi ned, 701 reference entity, 701
Credit instruments, 578, 600 bankers acceptance, 578 commercial draft , 578 promissory note, 578 single draft , 578 time draft , 578 trade acceptance, 578
Credit management collection policy, 573 consumer credit, 572 credit analysis, 573 credit and receivables, 572–574 credit policy, analyzing, 578–581 credit policy, optimal, 581–582 granting credit, cash fl ows from, 573 receivables, investment in, 573–574 terms of sale, 574–578, 600 trade credit, 572
Credit manager, 523t Credit period, 575–576, 600
buyer’s inventory period, 576 end-of-month (EOM) terms, 575 factors aff ecting, 576 invoice date, 575 length of, 576 receipt of goods (ROG), 575 seasonal dating, 575, 588–589
Credit policy, 66, 573 analyzing, 578–581, 600 break-even application, 580–581 captive fi nance company, 581–582 cash discount, 578 components of, 573, 600 credit cost curve, 581, 582f, 592 credit function, organizing, 581–582 eff ects of, 578–579 evaluating a proposed, 579–581 factoring, 581 optimal, 581–582 total credit cost curve, 581
Credit risk, 576 forward contracts and, 693
Credit scoring, 585–588 credit reports, 585 Dun & Bradstreet Canada sample,
586f multiple discriminant analysis
(MDA), 586, 587f Credit Suisse, 181 Credit unions, 18, 19 Credit, cost of granting, 577, 582f
carrying costs, 581, 582f opportunity costs, 581, 582f sources of, 581
Subject Index 785
28Ross_Index_3rd.indd 78528Ross_Index_3rd.indd 785 12-12-19 13:5512-12-19 13:55
Creditor/lender, 173 Creditors and cash fl ow, 36 Creditworthiness, 74, 102, 177, 558,
575, 583, 585, 587, 588 Cross-hedging, 698 Cross-listing, 427 Cross-rate, 607 Crossover rate, net present value
(NPV) profi le and, 236 Crown jewels, 674 Cumulative and non-cumulative
dividends, 207–208 Cumulative voting, 218 Currency appreciation and
depreciation, 615 Currency futures, 620 Currency options, 624
American options, 625 Currency swaps, 608, 699 Current assets, 26, 28, 520, 554
accounts receivable, 26 alternative fi nancing policies for,
528–530 carrying costs, 527 diff erent policies in fi nancing of,
528–530 ideal case, 528–529 market vs. book value, 28–29 practice, in, 531–533 shortage costs, 527
Current income, desire for and dividend payouts, 499
Current liabilities, 26, 61, 520 accounts payable, 26 practice, in, 531–533
Current ratio, 61–63, 70t Current ratios, 62t Customer payment history and credit
analysis, 585 Customer type, 576
D Date of payment, 492 Date of record, 492 Days sales outstanding (DSO), 66 Days’ sales in inventory, 62t, 65–66, 70t Days’ sales in receivables, 70t, 524, 574 DBRS, 165, 177, 193, 566 Dealer markets, 15, 16, 23
over-the-counter (OTC) markets, 16 Debentures, 174, 175 Debit card, 561 Debt
capacity, 98 cost of, 393–394, 579 covenants, 491, 498 embedded debt cost, 394n equity vs., 28, 173–174 example of, 394 fi nancial leverage and, 28 fi nancing, 423, 466 preferred stock as, 208 subordinated, 175
Debt securities, 173 bonds, 174 collateral, 175 debentures, 174 indenture, 174–175 mortgage, 175 notes, 174
Debt, long-term, 26, 93, 174 issuing, 448–449 private vs. public placements,
448–449 syndicated loans, 448–449 term loans, 448
Debt-for-equity swaps, 179
Debt/equity (D/E) ratio, 14t, 62t, 64–65, 70t, 96, 99, 100, 101, 102, 388, 396, 404, 454, 470, 473, 478, 507
Debtor, 173 Declaration date, 492 Decoma, 672 Deed of trust, 174 Deere, 599 Default risk, 565–567
money market quotations, 566f Default risk premium, 189 Default-free pure discount bonds, 187 Defensive tactics, takeovers and,
670–676, 680 control block and corporate charter,
671 corporate governance, 670 crown jewels, 674 exclusionary off ers and non-voting
stock, 672 fl ip-in provisions, 673n fl ip-over provision, 673 going private and leveraged buyouts
(LBOs), 673–674 golden parachutes, 674, 680 management buyouts (MBOs), 673 poison pill, 672, 680 repurchase/standstill agreements,
671–672 share rights plans (SRP), 672–673 staggered elections, 671 supermajority amendment, 671 white knights, 675
Deferred call, 176 Deferred taxes, 42n Degree of operating leverage (DOL),
305 Dell, 86 Dell Computer, 599 Demand, inventory, 591 Dependent demand inventories, 591,
598 Depository institutions, 18 Depreciation, 31, 57, 63, 257, 289, 534
ACRS method, 42 average daily costs and, 63 capital cost allowance (CCA) and,
254 expected salvage value, 42 Generally Accepted Accounting
Principles (GAAP) vs. capital cost allowance (CCA), 42–43
IFRS, 42 leasehold improvements, 42 recaptured, 44 straight-line, 31, 42, 255n tax deduction, 31 taxes and, 228n undepreciated capital cost (UCC),
42, 43, 44 Depreciation (CCA) tax shield, 264 Deregulation, 22 Derivative securities, 20
corporate fi nance and, 685–710 options and corporate securities,
711–749 risk management, 687–710
Derivative security, 687 Derivative use in Canada, 690 Derived demand inventories, 591,
596–597 Descartes rule of signs, 235 Dey Report, 205 Dilution
accounting break-even and, 446 defi ned, 446 earnings per share (EPS) and book
value, 446 new issues and, example, 447t proportionate ownership, 446
value, book vs. market, 446–447 Direct bankruptcy costs, 470 Direct fi nance, 18 Direct leases, 635 Direct placement, 428t Direct rights off er, 428t Directors
control of fi rm, 11 election of, 5, 205 negligence, 5n
Dirty price, 182 Disaster bonds, 180 Disbursements
controlling, 563 fl oat, 556 zero-balance accounts, 563, 564f
Discount, 119, 428 Discount bond, 168, 169 Discount factor, 120 Discount rate, 120, 223
components of, 203 determining, 122–124 nominal, 187 opportunity cost, as, 140 rate of return, 122 real, 187, 253n Rule of 72, 122n, 124 spreadsheet calculations, 125
Discounted cash fl ow (DCF), 120, 134, 155, 231, 307
analysis cash fl ow and, 269–275 assets, replacement of, 270–272,
271t bid price, setting, 273–275 cost-cutting proposals, evaluating,
269–270 equipment replacement, 272 equipment with diff erent lives,
evaluating, 272–273 equivalent annual cost (EAC) and,
272 internal rate of return (IRR), 240t net present value (NPV), 240t,
288–290 profi tability index (PI), 240t
Discounted cash fl ow (DCF) valuation, 129–164, 222
comparing quoted rates, eff ect of compounding, 145–149
future and present values of multiple cash fl ows, 129–135
loan types and amortization, 150–154
valuing level cash fl ows: annuities and perpetuities, 135–145
Discounted payback period rule, 227–228, 239t
advantages and disadvantages of, summary, 228
net present value (NPV) vs., 228 Discounting, 122n
defi ned, 118–121 Discovery Air, 732 Disposition eff ect, 754 Distribution, 491 Diversifi able risk, 364 Diversifi cation, 668
acquisitions, 668 correlation, 353 defi ned, 668 eff ect of, 376 foreign investment, 357 implications of, 347 portfolio risk and, 353–355,
361–365, 362t, 375 portfolio standard deviation, 353 principle of, 347, 363 standard derivations of annual
portfolio returns, 362t systematic risk and, 364 unsystematic risk and, 364
zero variance portfolio, 356 Diversifi cation, international
Index Participation (IP), 622 Registered Retirement Savings Plan
(RRSP), 622 Divestitures, 678
equity carve-out, 679 spin-off , 679 split-ups, 679
Dividend aristocrats, 199 Dividend capture, 567 Dividend growth, 118
Bank of Manitoba example, 199 Dividend growth model approach,
199–200, 202 advantages and disadvantages of,
391 earnings retention, 391 growth rate, estimation of, 389–391 implementation of, 389 retention ratio, 391 return on equity (ROE), 391 security market line (SML)
approach vs., 391, 392 Dividend payout, 492, 493, 495 Dividend payout ratio, 90 Dividend policy, 6, 100, 199, 318
automatic dividend reinvestment plans (ADPs or DRIPs), 495
compromise, 507 current income argument, 499 cyclical, 505 defi ned, 494 dividend stability, 505–507 establishing a, 503–508 expected return and, 497 fl otation costs, 498 high payment factors, 499–500 homemade dividends, 495 irrelevance of, 494–495, 510 low payout factors, 496–498 payment chronology, 492 price behaviour around ex-dividend
rate, 493 regular cash, 491 residual dividend approach,
503–505, 504f, 506 signifi cance of, 494–495 stability, 505–507, 505t survey evidence, 507 target payout ratio, 507 taxes and, 496–498, 500 uncertainty resolution, 499
Dividend reinvestment plans (DRIPs), 495
Dividend restrictions and low dividend payout, 498
Dividend signalling, 501–502 Dividend tax credit, 6n, 39, 206, 209,
496 Dividend valuation model growth
rate, 409 Dividend yield, 203, 320, 321 Dividends, 39, 40, 206, 490–518, 491f
arrearage, 208 cash dividends and dividend
payment, 491–493 clientele eff ect, 502–503 corporate cash fl ow, distribution
of, 491f corporate investors, 500 cumulative, 207–208 date of payment, 492 date of record, 492 declaration date, 492 defi ned, 206, 491 distribution, 491 dividend alternatives, 496 dividend restrictions, 498 dividend tax credit, 496 double taxation, 6
786 Subject Index
28Ross_Index_3rd.indd 78628Ross_Index_3rd.indd 786 12-12-19 13:5512-12-19 13:55
DRIPs, 495 eff ective tax rate on, 38t, 39 ex-dividend date, 492–493 expected returns, dividends and
personal taxes, 497 extra, 491, 507, 510 fl otation costs and, 498 high dividends, tax and legal
benefi ts from, 500 holders of record, 492 homemade, 495 income trusts vs. taxation of, 41t information content eff ect, 501 liquidating, 491 non-cumulative, 207–208 preferred stock, 40n price behaviour around ex-dividend
date, 493f regular cash, 507 regular cash, defi ned, 491 share repurchase and earnings per
share (EPS), 510 stock dividends and stock splits,
510–512 stock repurchase: cash dividend
alternative, 508–510 stripped common shares, 495 tax credit, 6n, 38, 39 tax-exempt investors, 500 taxes and, 496–498, 500 two-handed lawyer problem, 490
Dividends per share, 495 Divisional and project costs of capital,
399–402 divisional costs, 401 pure play approach, 401 security market line (SML) and
weighted average cost of capital (WACC), 399–400
subjective approach, 402 Dofasco, 658 Dole Cola
change in net working capital (NWCC), 35
Operating cash fl ow, 35 statement of comprehensive income,
35 Dollar returns, 318–321, 319f, 320f
aft er-tax, 318n Dollarama, 363 Dome Petroleum, 480, 664 Dominion Bond Rating Service
(DBRS), 165, 193, 543 Domtar Inc., 53, 398, 422t, 512, 658 Dot-Com bubble and crash, 764 Double taxation, 6, 22, 38, 206
dividend tax credit, 6n, 38, 39, 206, 209
Dow Jones Industrial Average, 124 DRIPs, 495 Du Pont identity, 71–73, 100, 464
analysis, 73f cash cycle and, 526 ratio example, 71, 72t
Dual-currency bonds, 623 Dun & Bradstreet, 74, 585, 586, 599 Duration, 169n, 194–195 Dutch auction underwriting, 429
uniform price auction, 429
E E-billing, 56 E-business, 21 E. I. Du Pont de Nemours & Company,
71 Early-stage fi nancing, venture capital
and, 423–425
Earnings before interest and taxes (EBIT), 32, 263, 265, 301, 421, 457, 462, 467, 468, 478, 587, 662
capital gains/losses, netted out, 65n cash coverage, 65 dividends paid, 40 earnings per share (EPS) vs,
458–460 fi nancial distress, 475 fi nancial leverage, 457 indiff erence, 460 project operating cash fl ow, 256,
257, 263 taxable income, 40 times interest earned (TIE) ratio,
65, 70t unlevered cost of capital, 467
Earnings before interest, taxes, depreciation, and amortization (EBITDA), 62t, 65, 69–70
Earnings per share (EPS), 30, 68–69, 211, 446, 626
acquisitions and growth of, 667 defi ned, 667 earnings before interest and taxes
(EBIT) vs., 458–460 fi nancial leverage and, 456–458 net income as a per share basis, 30 share repurchase and, 510
Earnings retention, 390–391 Echo Bay Mines Ltd., 729 Economic assumptions, 89 Economic exposure, 625–626, 690 Economic order quantity (EOQ)
model, 592–596, 593f, 596, 600
carrying costs and, 593f, 594, 600 derived-demand inventories,
managing, 596–597 extensions to, 595–596 inventory depletion, 593 just-in-time inventory (JIT),
598–599 materials requirements planning
(MRP), 597 radio frequency identifi cation
technology (RFID), 596 reorder points, 596, 597f safety stocks, 596, 597f shortage costs, 594 total cost point, 592
Economic value added (EVA) advantages of, 420 calculating, 419–421 caveats on, 421 defi ned, 399 fi nancial performance,
measurement of and, 419–422 selected users, 422t
Economic value contribution (EVC), 399
Economies of scale, 20, 663 Economies of vertical integration, 664 Economist, Th e, 614 Edmonton Oilers, 625 Education tax credit, 37 Eff ective annual rate (EAR), 155, 541,
543, 577 annual percentage rate (APR) vs.,
148–149 calculation and comparison of,
146–147 compounding and, 146, 149 defi ned, 146 examples of, 147 stated/quoted interest rate, 146, 155
Eff ective tax rate on dividends, 38t, 39 Effi ciency
semistrong form, 339
strong form, 339 weak form, 340
Effi cient capital market, 335 See also Capital market effi ciency
Effi cient frontier, 358f Effi cient market hypothesis (EMH), 41,
337–340 Effi cient set, 355 Elasticity, 306n Electro-Motive Canada, 269 Electronic
bill payment, 561 collection systems, 561–562 credit terms, 577 trade payables, 561
Electronic data interchange (EDI), 558–559, 598
Eli Lilly, 399 Embedded debt cost, 394n Employee stock options (ESOs), 11n,
724–726 defi ned, 724 features of, 724–726 Generally Accepted Accounting
Principles (GAAP) and, 725 IFRS, 725 intrinsic value of at issue, 725 repricing of, 725 restricted stock vs., 725 restruck/repriced options, 725 underwater options, 725 vesting period, 725
Employers’ liability insurance, 686 Enbridge Inc., 248 Encana Corp., 693 End-of-month (EOM) terms, 575 Endowment eff ect, 755 Enron, 9, 205, 399 Enterprise risk management (ERM),
685 Enterprise value/earnings before
interest, tax, depreciation, and amortization (EV/EBITDA) multiple, 69–70
Equinox Minerals, 657 Equipment with diff erent lives,
evaluating, 269, 272–273 Equity, 3, 25
as a call option, 726–728 carve-out, 679 common, 26 debt vs., 28 fi nancing, 423 kickers, 729 multiplier, 64, 464 owners’, 26 principle, 37 securities, 173 shareholders’, 26
Equity carve-out, 679 Equity multiplier, 62t, 70t, 72 Equity principle, 37 Equity, cost of, 389–393
defi ned, 389 dividend growth model approach,
389–391 example, 392 fair rate of return rule, 392 rate increases and, 392–393 security market line (SML)
approach, 391–392 Equivalent annual cost (EAC), 272,
273, 274t discounted cash fl ow (DCF) analysis
and, 272–273 Erosion, 252, 289 Estimating risk, 289 Ethical funds, 12–13, 24 Ethical Growth (fund), 12 Ethics, 9n
investing in, 12–13
organizations in, 14 unethical investing impact of, 12–13
eToys, 431 Eurobanks, 623 Eurobond, 607 Eurobond market, 623
Eurocommercial paper (ECP), 623 foreign bonds vs., 623
Eurocommercial paper (ECP), 623 Eurocurrency, 607, 623, 629 European Banking Authority, 292 European option, 702, 712, 723n European put option, 723n European Union, 607, 616 Event studies, 676 Ex dividend stock trading, 492 Ex rights, 443 Ex-dividend date, 492–493
price behaviour around, 493f Exchange rate, 609–611
covered interest arbitrage, 616–617, 629
cross-rates and triangle arbitrage, 609–611
currency appreciation and depreciation, 615
defi ned, 609 forward rates, 609n forward rates and future spot rates,
617–618, 629 generalized Fisher eff ect (GFE),
618, 629 indirect exchange rate, 609 interest rate parity, unbiased
forward rates, and generalized Fisher eff ect (GFE), 616–619
purchasing power parity, 613–615 See also Purchasing power
parity (PPP) quotations, 609, 610f, 629 spot rate, 609n, 620, 629 unbiased forward rates (UFR), 617,
629 uncovered interest parity (UIP),
618, 629 Exchange rate risk, 323n, 624–627, 693
American options, 625 call option, 625 currency options, 624 currency swaps, 624 defi ned, 624 economic exposure, 625–626 forward contracts, 624 hedging with options, 704 long-run exposure, 625 management of, 627 options on stock, 625 put options, 625 short-run exposure, 624–625 short-run risks, 624–625 short-term hedges, advanced, 625 transaction exposure, 624 translation exposure, 626–627
Exchange traded funds (ETFs), 375 Exchange-listed securities, 16 Exclusionary off ers, 672 Executive compensation packages, 205 Executive stock options, 724f, 725 Exercise price, 701, 712, 719 Exercising the option, 712 Expansion option, 308 Expected economic life, 42 Expected infl ation rate, 185n, 187, 253 Expected return, 347–348, 368
announcements and, 359–360 beta and, 368–369, 369f, 371 calculation of, 348t, 349t defi ned, 347 dividends and personal taxes and,
497
Subject Index 787
28Ross_Index_3rd.indd 78728Ross_Index_3rd.indd 787 12-12-19 13:5512-12-19 13:55
equally weighted portfolio of two stocks, for, 352t
expected risk premium, 347 news and, 359–360 portfolio, 351 projected risk premium, 347 pure time value of money and, 375 required return vs., 347n standard deviation and, 349–350 states of economy and stock returns,
347t systematic risk and, 371f, 373n unequal probabilities, 348, 350 variance, calculating, 348–350
Expected risk premium, 348 Expected salvage value, 42 Expenses, 30 Expensive lunch story, 735 Expiration date, 712
option contracts and, 702 Export Development Canada (EDC),
552, 582, 605, 606, 607 Extended model theory, 475–476, 476f Extendible commercial paper, 543 Extensions, 481 External fi nancing and growth, 95–102
external fi nancing needed (EFN) and growth, 95–99
fi nancial policy and growth, 98–100 growing bankrupt, 99 growth, determinants of, 100–101 internal growth rate, 97
External fi nancing needed (EFN), 9, 92, 95–99
growth relationship with, 97f pro forma statement of
comprehensive income, 97t, 100t
pro forma statement of fi nancial position, 97t, 100t
statement of comprehensive income: Hoff man Company, 95t
statement of fi nancial position: Hoff man Company, 95t, 97t
F Face value, bond, 166, 175, 176 Facebook, 423, 430, 675 Factoring, 540–541, 581
cost of, example, 541 maturity, 541
Fair rate of return rule, 392 Fairmont, 658 False consensus, 757 Feasible set, 355, 356, 358f Federated Department Stores, 103,
418–419, 674 Fédération Internationale de Football
Association (FIFA), 180 Fiduciary responsibility, 18, 500, 507 Finance and planning, short-term,
519–551 cash fl ow time line, 522 long-term fi nance vs., 519 managers dealing with problems
in, 523t net working capital, 519 operating and cash cycles, 521–526 policy, aspects of, 526–533 tracing cash and net working capital
(NWC), 520–521 working capital management, 519
Financial break-even, 302–303 cash break-even, 302 cash fl ow and, 303 defi ned, 303
Financial calculator annuity future values, 141 annuity payments, 137 annuity present values, 137
bond prices and yields, 171–172 common problems when using,
117–118 future value, 116–118 future value of annuities, 141 internal rate of return (IRR), 233 loan payment amortization, 152 logarithm, 124n net present value (NPV), 224 present value, multiple future cash
fl ows, 134 present value, single period, 121 rate, fi nding annuity, 140 standard deviation and mean, 329 trial-and-error approach to rate
fi nding, 139 unknown rates, 123 using a, 116 wrong answers when using, 117–118
Financial crisis of 2007–2009, 357 Financial distress and bankruptcy,
long-term fi nancing under, 479–481
defi ned, 479–481 liquidation and reorganization,
480–481 Financial distress costs, 470 Financial electronic data interchange
(FEDI), 558 Financial engineering, 20, 23
bonds with warrants, 178 defi ned, 687 derivatives securities, 687 fl oating-rate bonds, 180 introduction, 687–710 junk bonds, 179, 189 stripped bonds, 179, 180 zero-coupon, 179, 181
Financial futures, 694 Financial institutions, 18–20
economies of scale and scope, 20 function of, 18–20 market capitalization of largest
Canadian, 18t regulatory dialect, 22 technology improvements and, 21 total net assets by fund type, 19t
Financial leases, 636–637, 639 conditional sales agreement lease,
636 criteria for, 637 leveraged leases, 637 sales and leaseback agreements, 636 tax oriented leases, 636 true leases, 636
Financial Leasing Corporation, 640 Financial leverage, 21, 28, 305n
basics of, 456–460 corporate borrowing and
homemade, 460–461 degree of, 458 earnings per share (EPS) and return
on equity (ROE) and, 456–458 earnings per share (EPS) vs.
earnings before interest and taxes (EBIT), eff ect on, 458–460
M&M Proposition I, 462 M&M Proposition II, 462–463 personal taxes and, 487, 488f ratios, 62t return on equity (ROE), 464 unlevering stock, 461
Financial leverage and capital structure policy, 454–489
See also Capital structure; Financial leverage
Financial leverage ratio, 64 Financial management, 2, 22
advanced communication and computer technology, 2
dividend policy, 6 fi nancial market trends, 20–21 globalization, 2 goal of, 8–9, 22
Financial management decisions, 2–4, 8–9
capital budgeting, 2 capital structure, 3–4 working capital management, 4
Financial manager, 2, 3, 8, 10, 20, 29, 31, 53, 111, 317, 519, 590
corporate fi nance, 1–4 Financial markets, corporations and,
14–18, 22 cash fl ow, fi rm to fi nancial market,
15 classifi cation of, 15 corporate securities, trading in,
16–18 money vs. capital markets, 15–16 primary vs. secondary markets,
16, 22 Financial markets, trends in
corporate governance reform, 21 derivative securities, 21 e-business, 21 fi nancial engineering, 20 fi nancial leverage, excessive, 21 globalization, 20–21 regulatory dialectic, 21 technology advances and, 21
Financial planning and management, short-term, 84, 86n, 519–551
cash and liquidity management, 552–571
credit and inventory management, 572–605
fi nance and planning, short-term, 519–551
Financial planning models, 88–90, 103 asset requirements, 88 cash surplus or shortfall, 88–89 caveats on, 3 external fi nancing needed (EFN)
approach, 92–99 fi nancial requirements, 88 Hoff man Company example,
95–100, 95t, 97f, 99t percentage of sales approach, 90–94 plug variable, 88 pro forma statements, 88, 90 sales forecast, 88 simple model of, 89–90
Financial planning, long-term and corporate growth, 84–110
aggregation, 86 described, 85–87 dimensions of, 86 elements of, 86 fi nancial planning defi ned, 85–87 fi nancing, external and growth,
95–102 See also Financing, external
and growth growth, goal of, 85–87 models of. See Financial planning
models percentage of sales approach, 85,
90–94 planning horizon, 86
Financial planning, potential accomplishments of
communication with investors and lender, 87
feasibility and internal consistency, ensuring, 87
interactions, examining, 86 options, exploring, 87 surprises, avoiding, 87
Financial policy and growth, 98–100 debt capacity, 98
growing bankrupt, 100 sustainable growth rate (SGR), 98,
100, 101–102, 104t Financial policy, short-term
alternative fi nancing policies for current assets, 528–530
borrowing, short-term, 537–544 carrying costs, 527 carrying-shortage costs trade-off ,
527, 528f cash balance, 536–537 cash budget, 533–535 cash reserves, 531 compromise approach, 531 consideration for choosing best
policy, 531 current assets and liabilities in
practice, 531–533 diff erent policies in fi nancing
current assets, 528–530 fi nancial plan, example of, 535t,
536–537 fl exible, 526, 527, 530 ideal case, 528–529 ideal economy, for, 529f maturity hedging and, 531 planning and risk, short-term, 537 relative interest rates and, 531 restrictive, 526, 527, 530 shortage costs, 527 size of fi rm’s investment in current
assets, 526–527 Financial Post, Th e, 339, 658 Financial Post Datagroup, 74 Financial ratios, 60–70
asset management, or turnover, measures, 65–67
asset utilization ratios, 65 cash ratio, 63 categories of, 60–70 current ratio, 61–63 days’ sales in inventory, 65–66 days’ sales in receivables, 66 earnings per share (EPS), 68–69 EBITA, 69–70 enterprise value/earnings before
interest, tax, depreciation, and amortization (EV/EBITDA) multiple, 69–70
fi nancial leverage ratio, 64 fi xed asset turnover, 67 gross profi t margin, 67–68 interval measure, 63 inventory turnover, 65–66 long-term solvency measures, 64–65 market value measures, 68–70 market-to-book ratio, 69 net working capital (NWC) to total
assets ratio, 63 net working capital (NWC)
turnover, 66–67 operating profi t margin, 67–68 price/earnings (P/E) ratio, 53, 69 profi t margin, 67–68 profi tability measures, 67–68 quick (acid test) ratio, 63 receivables turnover, 66 return on assets (ROA), 68 return on equity (ROE), 68 selected, 62t short-term solvency or liquidity
measures, 61–63 total asset turnover, 67 total debt ratio, 64
Financial reporting, 9n Financial requirements, 88 Financial risk, 464
cash fl ow hedging, 690 credit crisis (2007–2009), 687 economic exposure, 690
788 Subject Index
28Ross_Index_3rd.indd 78828Ross_Index_3rd.indd 788 12-12-19 13:5512-12-19 13:55
hedging with forward contracts, 691–693
hedging, long-term exposure, 690 hedging, short-run exposure,
689–690 managing, 687–690 risk exposure, reducing, 688–689 risk profi le, 688, 689f, 692 transaction exposure, 689 transitory changes, 689
Financial statements balance sheet, 25–29 capital cost allowance (CCA), 42–45 cash fl ow, 32–36
See also Financial statements, cash fl ow and taxes
common-base-year, 59 common-size statements, 57–59 credit analysis and, 584 Generally Accepted Accounting
Principles (GAAP), 28, 42 income statement, 30–31 manipulation of, 69, 94 pro forma statements, 254–257 standardized, 57–59 statements of cash fl ow, 58–59 taxes, 37–41
See also Financial statements, cash fl ow and taxes
use of, 73–75 See also Financial statements,
working with working knowledge of, 53
See also Financial statements, working with
Financial statements, analysis benchmark, choosing a, 74 common-base-year statement, 59 evaluating, reasons for, 73–74 external uses of information, 73–74 internal uses of information, 73 North American Industry
Classifi cation System (NAICS) codes, 74
peer group analysis, 74 problems with, 75 ratio analysis, 60–70 time-trend analysis, 74 trend analysis, 59
Financial statements, cash fl ow and taxes, 25–52
balance sheet, 25–29 cash fl ow, 32–36 income statements, 30–31 taxes, 37–41
Financial statements, long-term fi nancial planning and, 53–110
external fi nancing and growth, 95–102
long-term fi nancial planning and corporate growth, 84–110
Financial statements, working with, 53–83
balance sheet example, 55t cash fl ow, 54–57 cash fl ows statement example, 56t Du Pont identity, 71–73 fi nancial statement information,
using, 73–75 income statement example, 56t ratio analysis, 60–70 sources and uses of cash, 54 standardized fi nancial statements,
57–59 Financial structure, 454n Financial structure. See Capital
structure Financing expenses, 30, 253
long-term, 534
Financing, external and growth, 95–102
cost of capital and, 388 elements of, 86 external fi nancing needed (EFN)
and growth, 95–100 fi nancial policy and growth, 98–100 growth, determinants of, 100–101 internal growth rate, 97
Finished goods, 590–591 Firm commitment
cash off er, 428t underwriting, 427
Firm, control of, 11 shareholders’ interests and, 11
Firm, value of, 29 bankruptcy costs and, 466, 470 capital structure and, 455–456 equity capital, cost of and, 462–465 maximization of, 455–456 new equity sales and, 437 option value and, 455 stock value and, 455–456 warrants and, 730–732
Firm-specifi c risk, 758 First-stage fi nancing, 424 Fisher eff ect, 185–186 Five Cs of credit, 585 Fixed asset turnover, 62t, 67, 70t Fixed assets, 25, 28, 35t
intangible, 26, 28 market vs. book value, 28–29 tangible, 26, 28
Fixed costs, 254n, 296 Fixed rate preferred stock, 143 Flat tax, 37 Flexible plant profi ts, 737 Flexible short-term fi nancial policy,
526 Flip-in provisions, 673n Flip-over provisions, 673 Float, 556, 573
availability, 557 available/collected balance, 556 average daily, 558 average daily receipts, 558 book/ledger balance, 556 collections, 557 collections, accelerating, 560–561 cost, 558 defi ned, 556 disbursements, 556, 563 disbursements, controlling, 563 electronic data interchange (EDI),
558–560 fi nancial electronic data interchange
(FEDI), 558–560 ledger balance, 556 mail, 557 management, 557–560 measuring, 558 net, 557 processing, 557, 558 reducing, example, 560 time line, 560f weighted average delay, 558
Floaters, 180 Floating-rate bonds, 180 Floating-rate notes, 623 Floor, 704 Floor plan fi nancing, 541 Floor value, 733 Flotation costs, 449
adjusted present value (APV) and, 415
amortization, 404n, 415 basic approach, 403–404 defi ned, 403 dividend policy and, 498 low dividend payout and, 498
net present value (NPV) and, 404–405
security issuing and, 437, 439, 449 weighted average cost of capital
(WACC), 403–405 Ford, 553 Forecaster’s trap, 290 Forecasting risk, 289, 290, 299, 305,
310, 311, 537 Foreign bonds, 607, 623 Foreign currency approach, 621 Foreign exchange markets, 607–612
defi ned, 608 forward exchange rates, 611–612 forward trade, 611 international currency symbols, 608 participants in, 609 Society for Worldwide Interbank
Financial Telecommunications (SWIFT), 608
spot exchange rate, 611, 612, 614, 617
spot trade, 611 transactions, types of, 611–612
Foreign exchange rates, 2 Foreign investment
benefi ts of, 357 risk, 323n
Fortis Inc., 199, 429 Forward contracts, 625, 691–693
basics, 691 credit risk, 693 defi ned, 691 forward price, 691 hedging with, 691–693, 692f option vs., 702 payoff profi le, 691, 692f practical use of, 692–693 settlement date, 691
Forward exchange rate, 611–612, 617 spot rate, relationship between, 620
Forward price, 691 Forward rates, 609n Forward trade, 611 Forzani Group Limited, 662 Frame dependence, 753 Framing eff ects, 752–755 Free cash fl ow, 34 Free lunch story, 735 Full price, 182 Fully diluted earnings per share (EPS),
732 Future prices, 695f Future Shop, 676 Future spot rate, 620 Future value (FV), 112
annuities, 140–141 annuity due, 142 diff erent periods and rates for a
dollar, 114f fi nancial calculator and, 116–118 interest factor and, 115t multiple cash fl ows and, 129–131 present vs., 121–122 spreadsheet calculations, 125 time line, 129–135, 130f
Future value (FV) factor, 121, 125t Future value (FV), compounding and,
112–118 compound growth, 118 dividend growth, 118 future value defi ned, 112 future value interest factors, 115 interest on interest, 112–113, 113t multiple periods, 112–116 single period investment, 112 time period and rate, eff ect of on
future value, 114f Future/present values of multiple cash
fl ows, 129–131
compounding each cash fl ow separately, calculating, 131f
compounding forward one period at a time, calculating, 131f
saving up, example, 130 time lines, 130, 131f
Futures, 20 open interest, 697 settlement price, 697
Futures contract, 704–706 basis, 698 basis risk, 698 commodity, 694 cross hedging, 698 defi ned, 694 fi nancial, 694 futures exchanges, 698 futures options, 703, 704, 705f hedging with, 698 marking-to-market, 694 quotations, 695f trading in, 694
G Galleon Group, 20 Galleon Management, 339 Gambler’s fallacy, 757 Gap, Th e, 724 Garbage in, garbage out (GIGO), 94,
289 Gateway, 86 GE Capital, 248, 635 GE Capital Aviation, 636 GE Corp., 248 General and administrative costs
(SGA), 67 General cash off er, 427 General Motors Acceptance
Corporation (GMAC), 582 General Motors Corporation, 72, 84,
470, 471, 476, 582, 599, 664 General partners, 5 General partnerships, 5 Generalized Fisher eff ect (GFE), 618,
629 Generally Accepted Accounting
Principles (GAAP), 725 capital cost allowance (CCA) and,
42–43 fi nancial statement analysis, 75 income statement and, 30–31 realization principle, 31
Genetic Engineering Ltd., 202 Geometric average return
arithmetic vs., 333, 334t, 335 calculating, 333–334 defi ned, 333 examples of, 334
GIGO, 94, 289 Gilts, 607 Glacier Credit Card Trust, 541 Global Crossing, 539 Global fi nancial crisis, 21 Global tax rates, 49 Globalization, 2, 20, 22
fi nancial market trends, 20–21 Globe and Mail, 399n, 552n GM, 308 GMP Capital Corp., 431 GMP Securities Ltd., 439 Godrej Group, 399 Going private transactions
leveraged buyouts (LBOs), 658, 673–674
management buyouts (MBOs), 658, 673
Gold lease rates, 693 Goldcorp Inc., 384 Golden parachutes, 674, 680 Golden rule, 205
Subject Index 789
28Ross_Index_3rd.indd 78928Ross_Index_3rd.indd 789 12-12-19 13:5512-12-19 13:55
Goldman Sachs Group Inc., 20, 338, 423
Goodwill, 660 Google Inc., 20, 429, 430, 477, 559,
657, 675 Gordon Model, 199n Governance risk, 627–628 Government of Canada, 165 Government of Canada bonds, 182,
183n, 188, 208 Canada yield curve, 188
Government, subsidized fi nancing and, 416
Grand & Toy, 398 Green shoe provision, 430 Greenmail, 656, 671, 680 Gross national product (GNP), 359 Gross profi t margin, 67–68 Ground fl oor fi nancing, 424 Growing annuity, 144
lifetime salary value, 145 present value formula, 145
Growing perpetuity, 143 present value formula, 143 stock prices, 143
Growth CCA tax shield and, 264 constant, 198–200 determinants of, 100–101 dividend growth model, 199–200 external fi nancing and, 95–102 external fi nancing needed (EFN)
and, 96, 97f factors, 100–101 fi nancial management goal, 85–86 fi nancial policy and, 98, 99 internal growth rate, 97 negative, 101, 201n non-constant, 201–202 opportunity, 211 supernormal, 202 sustainable, 98, 100, 101 zero, 198
Growth stocks, 198 investing in, 332
Guarantees of small business owners, 6
H Half-year rule, 42, 266, 267n, 271 Halterm, 41 Hamilton Tire and Garage Limited, 111 Hard rationing, 310 Hazard risk, 687 Health and life insurance, 19 Hedge Fund Asset Flows & Trends
report, 19 Hedge funds, 19 Hedging, 689–690, 704–706
cash fl ow, 690 commodity price risk with options,
703–704 cross-hedging, 698 defi ned, 687 duration, 195 economic exposure, 690 exchange rate risk with options, 704 forward contracts, with, 691–693 futures contracts, with, 694–698 interest rate risk with options,
704–706 long-run exposure, 690 long-term exposure, 690 option contracts, 701–706 price volatility and, 687–690 short-run exposure, 689–690
Herman Miller, 399 Hershey Foods Corporation, 405 Heuristics, 755–758
aff ect, 755–756 randomness, 756–757
representativeness, 756 Hewlett-Packard Company, 599, 635 High dividend payout factors, 499–500
current income, desire for, 499 tax and legal benefi ts from, 500 uncertainty resolution, 499
High-promised yield bonds, 189 High-yield bonds, 178, 189 Historical cost, 28 Historical record, capital market,
323–324 annual market index returns, 322t average returns, 324–326 variability of returns, 328, 330t
Historical variability, 325 Historical variance and standard
deviation, 326–328 Hitachi, 633 Hoff man Company, sample fi nancial
planning and, 95–100, 103 Holder-of-record date, 443 Holders of record, 443, 492 Hollinger, 471 Hollowing out, 658 Home currency approach, 620 Home Depot, 11 Homemade dividends, 495 Homemade leverage
defi ned, 460 proposed vs. original capital
structure with, 461t Homogeneous expectations, 385 Honda Motor, 599 Honda Motors, 625 Horizontal acquisition, 657 Hot issue, 432 House money, 754–755 Housing bubble, 212 HudBay Minerals Inc., 11 Hudson Bay Company, 658 Hughes Aircraft , 664 Hurdle rates, 405 Husky Energy, 83 Husky International, 658
I IBM, 698 ICBC Financial Leasing Company
Limited, 634 ICE Futures Canada, 694, 710 Idle cash, investing, 564–567
cash surpluses, temporary, 564 money market securities, 567 short-term securities, characteristics
of, 564–567 IFRS
capital cost allowance, 42 depreciation, 42 employee stock options, 725 fi nancial statement analysis, 75
IHS Global Insight, 88 Illiquid assets, 28 IMAX Corporation, 711 Immunization, 687 Impasta, 624 Implementation costs, 759 Inco, 672 Income bonds, 180 Income funds, 6 Income statement, 30–31
capital spending, 33 cash fl ow, 34, 35t common-size income statements,
57–58, 59t common-size statements, 58 costs of goods sold, 31 depreciation, 30t, 31, 35t dividend payout ratio, 90 expenses, 30 fi nancing expenses, 30
Generally Accepted Accounting Principles (GAAP), 31
net capital spending, 36 net income, 30 non-cash items, 31 realization principle, 31 retention ratio, 91 revenue, 30 simplifi ed example of, 30t time and costs, 31
Income trusts, 6, 11n, 337 agency cost, 10, 11 business income trusts, 6 distributions vs. dividends, taxation
of, 41 effi cient market hypothesis (EMH),
41 income and taxation, 41 income funds, 6 riskier industries, in, 41 stable businesses, in, 41
Income, taxable, 40 Incremental cash fl ows, 251
aft er-tax, 254 capital cost allowance (CCA), 254 defi ned, 251 erosion, 252 fi nancing costs, 253 government interventions, 254 infl ation, 253 leasing and, 639–641, 641t, 643t net working capital, 253 opportunity costs, 252 other issues, 254 side eff ects, 252–253 sunk costs, 251–252
Incremental costs, 297 Indenture, 174–175, 498
bearer form, 175 bond, terms of, 175 call premium, 176 call protected, 176 call provision, 176, 181 Canada plus call, 176 debentures, 175 deferred call, 176 defi ned, 174 protective covenant, 177 provisions of, 175–177 registered form, 175 repayment, 176 security, 175 sinking fund, 176
Independent demand inventories, 591 Index Participation (IP), 622 Indiff erence, 460 Indigo, 676 Indirect bankruptcy costs, 470–471 Indirect exchange rate, 609 Indirect expenses, securities issuing
and, 438 Indirect fi nance, 18 Individual tax rates, 37, 40 Industry average ratios, 61, 69 Industry Canada’s Offi ce of Consumer
Aff airs, 647 Ineffi cient management, 673 Infl ation
capital budgeting and, 285 capital investment projects, 253 future, 185, 187, 188, 189, 253 growth and, 198n premium, 187, 188f
Infl ation and interest rates, bonds and, 184–186
Consumer Price Index (CPI) and, 323
Fisher eff ect, 185–186 present values and, 186 real vs. nominal rates, 184–185
Information cascades, 212
Information content eff ect, 502 Infosys Ltd., 633 Initial public off ering (IPO), 1, 16, 427,
428, 430, 537, 736, 759 defi ned, 426 in practice: Athabasca Oil Sands
Corp., 439 price, 439 underpricing, 431–436, 438, 439
Innovation, 14, 360 Insider reports, 426 Insider tipping, 341 Insider trading, 20
in Canada, 341 tracking of activities, 339n
Insolvency, 525 accounting, 479 technical, 479
Institution-to-institution trading, 1 Institutional investors, 12, 205, 323,
428, 437, 439, 448, 507, 512, 671, 673
Institutional Shareholders Services (ISS), 11
Insurance, 686, 737 companies, 18, 19 loan guarantees, options and, 737,
740 Insurance companies, 19 Intangible assets, 28 Intel Corp., 17, 20, 518 Interest
accrued, 182 compound, 112, 115 expense, 31, 32, 63 income, 30, 34, 35t, 36, 37, 39, 40,
41, 58 simple, 112
Interest on interest, 112, 113 Interest rate, 2
annual percentage rate (APR), 148–149, 155
bond valuation and, 166–195 caps, 704 continuously compounded risk-free
rate, 745n eff ective annual rate (EAR),
146–147 Fisher eff ect, 185–186 infl ation and, 184–186 market yields, 169 options, 704 quoted, 146–147 real vs. nominal terms, 285 relative, 531 stated rate, 149 swaps, 608, 699, 700–701, 700f term structure of, 187–188 volatility, 687
Interest rate parity (IRP), 617, 625, 629 defi ned, 617 unbiased forward rates, generalized
Fisher eff ect and, 616–619 Interest rate risk, 169–170, 565
duration, 169n, 194–195 risk premium, 187 riskless rate, 295n time to maturity and, 169f
Interest rate risk with options, hedging, 704–706
call option on interest rates, 704 caption, 706 collar, 704 compound options, 706 fl oor, 704 interest rate caps, 704 put options on bonds, 704 swaptions, 706
Interest tax shield, 466, 472, 474 Interest-only loans, 150–151 Intermediaries, 18
790 Subject Index
28Ross_Index_3rd.indd 79028Ross_Index_3rd.indd 790 12-12-19 13:5512-12-19 13:55
Internal growth rate, 97, 104t Internal rate of return (IRR), 230–238,
239t, 257, 262, 301 advantages of, 238 advantages/disadvantages summary,
238 calculating, example of, 232 crossover rate, calculation example,
237 defi ned, 230 fi nancial calculator, use of, 233 multiple rates of return, 234 mutually exclusive investment
decisions, 234–237 net present value (NPV) at diff erent
discount rates, 231t net present value (NPV) profi le,
231f, 232 net present value (NPV) vs.,
231–232, 236–237 non-conventional cash fl ows and,
233–234 problems with, 233–237 project cash fl ows, 231f ranking problem, 236f ranking problem and net present
value (NPV), 236f rule of, 234 spreadsheet, use of, 233
Internal rate of return (IRR) rule, 230–231
International capital budgeting. See Capital budgeting, international
International corporate fi nance, 606–633
capital budgeting, 620–621 covered interest arbitrage, 617, 620 cross-rate, 607 currency swap, 608 Eurobond, 607 Eurocurrency, 607 exchange rate risk, 624–627 Export Development Canada
(EDC), 606 fi nancing of projects, 622–623 foreign bonds, 607 foreign exchange, 607 future spot rate, 617–618 gilts, 607 governance risk, 627–628 interest rate parity, unbiased
forward rates, and generalized Fisher eff ect, 616–619
London Interbank Off er Rate (LIBOR), 607
political risks, 627–628, 629 projects, fi nancing, 622–623 purchasing power parity (PPP),
613–615 swaps, 608 terminology, 607–608 unbiased forward rates (UFR),
617–618 International Corporate Governance
Network, 628 International corporations, 606 International currency symbols, 608 International Financial Reporting
Standards (IFRS), 25, 28, 726 See also IFRS leases, 637 market value, 30–31 statement of comprehensive income,
30–31 International fi rms’ capital costs, 622 International Money Market (IMM),
694 International projects, fi nancing,
622–623 capital, cost of, 622
diversifi cation and investors, 622 Eurobanks, 623 Eurobond market, 623 eurocommercial paper (ECP), 623 Index Participation (IP), 622 intermediate-term fi nancing, 623 investors, 622 London Interbank Off er Rate
(LIBOR), 623 Note Issuance Facility (NIF), 623 segmentation and globalization, 622 short- and intermediate-term
fi nancing, sources of, 623 Interval measure, 62t, 63, 70t Intrinsic value, 718 Introduction market, 424 Inventory, 4, 28, 35t
carrying costs, 591, 593f, 594, 596 costs of holding, 592 dependent demand, 591, 598 depletion of, 593 derived demand, 591 fi nished product, 597 independent demand, 591 inventory costs, 591 inventory types, 590–591 just-in-time (JIT), 527n, 572 margins, 541 order costs, 591 raw material, 590 reorder quantity, 596 restocking costs, 591, 594, 596 shortage costs, 591 types of, 590–591 work-in-progress, 591
Inventory loans, 541–542 defi ned, 541 fl oor plan fi nancing, 541 trust receipt, 541 warehouse fi nancing, 542 warehouse receipt, 542
Inventory management, 590–599 ABC approach, 592 derived-demand inventories,
596–597 economic order quantity (EOQ)
model, 592–596, 593f fi nancial manager and policy of, 590 goal of, 591 just-in-time (JIT) inventory,
598–599 materials requirements planning
(MRP), 597 shortage costs, 594 techniques of, 591–599
Inventory period, 65–66, 522 buyer’s, 576
Inventory turnover, 65–66, 70t Inventory turnover ratio, 62t Investment criteria
average accounting return (AAR), 228–230
capital budgeting, practice of, 239–241
evaluating, 122 internal rate of return (IRR),
230–238 net present value (NPV), 221–224 payback rule, 225–228 profi tability index, 239 required return on, 318 summary of, 240t
Investment dealers, 16, 18, 19, 430 Investment Dealers Association of
Canada, 452 Investment income, taxation of, 39 Investment Industry Regulatory
Organization of Canada (IIROC), 426
Investors elderly, 332
high dividend, 499 institutional, 323 tax-exempt, 498
Investors Group, 392 Investors Summa (fund), 12 Invoice
date, 575 defi ned, 575 price, 182
Irrational exuberance, 212 ITG Canada, 571 Ivanhoe Mines, 445
J J. P. Morgan, 633 Jantzi Social Index, 12, 24 JDS Uniphase, 486, 670 Joint stock companies, 6 Joint venture, 659 JP Morgan Chase & Co., 698 Junk bonds, 178, 179, 674 Just-in-time (JIT) inventory, 527n,
598–599 electronic data interchange (EDI),
598
K Key personnel insurance, 686 Kihlstrom Equipment, 620–621 Kimberley-Clark, 591 Kinross Gold Corp., 729 Kohlberg Kravis Roberts, 674 Krispy Kreme Doughnuts, 639
L Law of small numbers, 757 Lean Enterprise Institute, 599 Leasehold improvements, 300n Leases, 141
capital, 637 direct, 635 fi nancial, 636–637, 639, 651 hiding, 638 leveraged, 637 off -the-books, 649 operating, 635–636, 637, 639, 651 sale and leaseback, 636 synthetic, 638 tax-oriented, 636 types of, 634–637
Leasing, 634–654 100 percent fi nancing, 650 accounting and, 637–639, 638t, 651 accounting income and, 649–650 aft er-tax borrowing rate, 641, 651 asset pool and salvage value,
643–644 balance sheet and, 637, 651 buying vs., 635, 641–644, 649–650 Canada Revenue Agency (CRA)
and, 639, 651 capital budgeting and, 647–648 capital cost allowance (CCA) and
lease payments, 641 capital vs. operating lease:
accounting lease test, 638–639 captive fi nance companies, 635 cash fl ows from, 639–641 CICA 3065 rule, 637n decisions, practical, 650 disadvantages of, 649–650 fi nancing options, 650 good reasons for, 649 indiff erence lease payments, 645t MUSH sector and, 650 net advantage to leasing (NAL)
approach, 642, 643t, 646 net present value (NPV) analysis,
642, 644, 651
off balance sheet fi nancing, 637 paradox, 644–648 potential problems with internal
rate of return (IRR) approach, 642
practice in, 650 restrictions and security
requirements of, 649 statement of comprehensive income,
637n statement of fi nancial position, 638 tax advantages, 649 tax shields and, 639, 640, 641, 643,
650, 664 taxes and, 639, 651 transaction costs, reducing, 649 uncertainty reduction re-residual
value, 649, 651 Ledger balance, 556 Legal bankruptcy, 470–471, 479, 481 Lehman Brothers, 86, 338, 470, 687,
701, 765 Lenders, 4, 6, 98, 100, 177
commercial, 101 communications with, 87 cost of borrowing disclosure
regulations, 148–149 seniority of, 175 short-term, 61
Lessee, 634 Lessor, 634 Letters of credit, 539 Letters patent, 5n Level cash fl ows, 135–145
annuity, 135–142 perpetuity, 142–145
Level coupon bond, 165 Leverage
crashes, 761 fi nancial, 305n
See also Financial leverage operating, 304–307 ratios, 62t
Leverage ratio, 64 Leveraged buyouts (LBOs), 179, 471,
658, 673–674 synergy in, 673
Leveraged leases, 637 Leveraged recapitalization, 179 Leveraged syndicated loans, 448 Liabilities, 25, 26
current, 26, 61, 520 limited, 5–6 long-term, 26 owners’ equity and, 26 unlimited, 4, 5
Liability insurance, 686 Life insurance, 19 Limited liability companies/
corporations, 5–6 Limited partnership, 5 Limited-voting stock, 206 Lionsgate Entertainment, 101 Liquid assets, 28 Liquid yield option note (LYON), 736 Liquidating dividends, 491
debt covenants and, 491 Liquidation
defi ned, 480 long-term fi nancing under, 480–481 priority in proceeds of distribution,
480–481 Liquidity, 28, 552, 567
balance sheet and, 28 Prufrock Corporation, 58 ratios, 62t value of, 28
Liquidity management, cash and, 552–571
defi ned, 553–554 Liquidity measures, 28, 61–63
Subject Index 791
28Ross_Index_3rd.indd 79128Ross_Index_3rd.indd 791 12-12-19 13:5512-12-19 13:55
cash ratio, 63 interval measure, 63 net working capital (NWC) to total
assets ratio, 63 stock splits and, 512
Liquidity premium, 187n, 189 Liquidity ratios
acid-test, 63 cash, 63 current, 61–63 interval measure, 63 net working capital (NWCC) to
total assets, 63 quick, 63
Liquor Control Board of Ontario (LCBO), 519, 526
Listing, 17 Listing, stock, 17–18 Lloyd George Management, 85 Loan agreement, 174n Loan amortization, 150–154 Loan contract, 174n Loan guarantee, 737 Loan Syndications and Trading
Association, 448 Loans
amortized, 150–154 balloon, 154 bank, 18 bonds. See Bond interest rates and
infl ation; Bond values bullet, 154 covenants, 539 credit unions, 18 fi nancial calculator, use for, 152 interest-only, 150–151 inventory, 541–542 leveraged syndicated, 448 long-term, 26 operating, 537–539 partial amortization, 154 prime lending rates, 538 pure discount, 150–154 secured, 537, 538, 539 spreadsheet, use of for amortization,
153 syndicated, 448 term, 448 trust companies, 18 types of, 150–154 unsecured, 537, 538
Loblaw Companies Limited, 83, 182, 193, 406–409
capital asset pricing model (CAPM), 408
common stock, cost of, 408 debt, cost of, 407–408 dividend valuation model growth
rate, 409 fi nancing proportions, estimating,
406 Lockboxes, 561
bank charges for, 562f processing overview, 561
Lockheed Corporation, 303 Lockup agreements, 430 London Interbank Off er Rate (LIBOR),
607, 623, 629, 693 London Life, 666 Long-run exposure, 625 Long-term debt, 3, 174
call features, 174, 704 indenture, 174–175 protective covenants, 176 ratings, 174 ratio, 64 security, 174
Long-term debt ratio, 62t, 70t Long-Term Equity Anticipation
Securities (LEAPS), 716 Long-term fi nancial exposure, 690
economic exposure, 690 Long-term fi nancial planning,
corporate growth and, 84–110 See also Financial planning, long-
term and corporate growth Long-term fi nancing under fi nancial
distress and bankruptcy, 479–481
Long-term investments, 2 Long-term liabilities, 26 Long-term solvency measures, 64–65
cash coverage ratio, 65, 70t debt/equity ratio, 70t equity multiplier, 70t fi nancial leverage ratio, 64 long-term debt ratio, 70t times interest earned (TIE), 65, 70t total capitalization vs. total assets,
64–65 total debt ratio, 64, 70t
Loss aversion, 753 Loss carry-back, 41 Loss carry-forward, 40 Lost opportunities, 10 Low-dividend payout factors, 496–498
dividend restrictions, 498 fl otation costs, 498 taxes, 496–498
Low-grade bonds, 178 Lower bound, call option value, 718,
719f Lundin Mining Corp., 11, 210
M M&M Proposition I
corporate taxes and, 466–467, 467f defi ned, 462 implications of, 469t interest tax shield, 466 no tax case, 463f, 469t, 472, 474f pie model, 462 unlevered cost of capital, 467
M&M Proposition II corporate taxes and, 468–469 defi ned, 463 derivation of equation, 487 equity cost and fi nancial leverage,
462–463 implications of, 469 interest tax shield, 466 no tax case, 474f security market line (SML) and, 463 weighted average cost of capital
(WACC), 468–469, 469f M&M Proposition theory
critics of, 475 essence, 476 extended pie theory, 475–476 market claims vs. non-marketed
claims, 476–477 summary, 469t
Magna International Inc., 207, 672 Mail fl oat, 557 Majority assent, 656n Malpractice, 6 Management buyouts (MBOs), 658,
673, 674 Managerial compensation, 11
shareholders’ interests and, 10 Managerial options, 307–310, 311,
737–740 abandonment, 308 automobile production, 737–739 capital budgeting options, 309 contingency planning, 307–308 defi ned, 307 expansion, 308 option to wait, 308 real option, 737 strategic options, 309–310
tax, 308–309 Manitoba Telecom Services Inc., 174 Manufacturers Life Insurance
Company, 193 Manulife Dividend Fund, 346 Manulife Financial, 19 Maple Leaf Sports and Entertainment,
658 Marathon Oil, 667 Marginal costs, 297 Marginal tax rate, 37
average tax rates vs., 37–39 Market effi ciency
behavioural fi nance, 758–766 money managers, 766–769
Market out clause, 428 Market portfolios, 374, 385
defi ned, 385n Market risk, 360, 364, 365t
premium, 374, 391 Market value
book value vs., 28–29 dilution, 446–447 fi rm, of, new equity sales, 437–438 Generally Accepted Accounting
Principles (GAAP), 28–29, 30–31
International Financial Reporting Standards (IFRS), 28–29, 30–31
mark-to-market accounting rules, 29
Market value measures, 68–70 debt and equity, 394 earnings before interest and tax,
69–70 earnings per share (EPS), 68–69 enterprise value/earnings before
interest, tax, depreciation, and amortization (EV/EBITDA) multiple, 69–70, 70t
price/earnings (P/E) ratio, 69, 70t Market value ratios, 62t Market yields, 169–170, 181, 182 Market-to-book ratio, 62t, 69, 70t
dilution and, 447 Market-to-market accounting rules, 29 Marketability, 567 Marketed claims, 476 Marketing manager, 523t Marking-to-market, 694 Martha Stewart Omnimedia, 432 Mastercard, 559 Match book, 700 Matching principle, 31 Materials requirements planning
(MRP), 597 Maturity, 565 Maturity date, 166 Maturity factoring, 541
with assignment of equity, 541 Maturity hedging, 531 Maturity risk premium, 187n McCain, 606, 623 Mean, 329 MEMC Electronic Materials, 599 Memorandum of association, 5n Mental accounting, 755 Mercedes, 625 Mergers and acquisitions (M & A), 21,
655–684 accounting for acquisitions,
660–661 acquisitions, legal forms of, 656–659
See also Acquisitions advantages and disadvantages of,
656 alternatives to, 659 cash fl ow benefi ts from, 662–664 cash vs. common stock fi nancing,
670
cost of, 668–670, 679 cost reductions, 663–664 defensive tactics, 670–676 defi ned, 656 divestitures and restructurings,
678–679 evidence on acquisitions, 676–677 fi nancial side eff ects of, 667–668 forms of, 656–659 gains from acquisitions, 661–666 lost value in, 677 potential problems in, 655–656 premiums, 676 revenue enhancement, 662–663 reverse merger, 673n stock acquisitions vs., 657 strategic alliance, 659 taxes and, 659–660 tenders off ers vs., 676–677
Merrill Lynch Canada, 308 Metro Inc., 83 Mezzanine fi nancing, 179 Mezzanine level fi nancing, 424 Microsoft , 17, 37, 429, 552, 556, 725 Middlefi eld Income Plus II Corp., 431 Midland Walwyn, 308 Minimum variance (MV) portfolio,
355–357 Minority participation, 218 Mitsubishi Heavy Industries, 599 Mobile wallets, 659 Modern portfolio theory, 353n Modifi ed internal rate of return
(MIRR), 238, 248–249 combination approach, 249 discounting approach, 248 reinvestment approach, 248–249
Moneta Porcupine Mines Inc., 673 Money illusion, 755 Money left on the table, 431 Money market fi nancing, 543–544
bankers acceptance, 543 commercial paper, 543
Money markets capital market vs., 15–16 defi ned, 15 funds, 564 quotations, 566f securities, 567
Monte Carlo simulation, 295 Montreal Exchange (ME), 694, 710,
712, 713, 745, 761 Moody’s Investor Service, 177, 184 Morgan Stanley Canada Ltd., 423, 439 Mortgage-backed bonds, 623 Mortgages, 23, 147, 175
calculator, 148 Canada Mortgage and Housing
Corporation (CMHC), 23 chattel, 175 payments, assessment of, 148 securities, 175 terms, choosing, 148
Mosaid Technologies Inc., 675 Motorola Mobility, 657 MultiJurisdictional Disclosure System
(MJDS), 427 Multistakeholder coop, 7 Multinationals, 606 Multiple cash fl ows, 129–135
cash fl ow timing, 134 future values, 129–131 present values, 131–133
Multiple discriminant analysis (MDA), 586, 587f
Multiple rates of return, 234 MUSH sector, leasing and, 650 Muteki Limited, 180 Mutual funds, 18, 19, 184
assets, 19t global, 19t
792 Subject Index
28Ross_Index_3rd.indd 79228Ross_Index_3rd.indd 792 12-12-19 13:5512-12-19 13:55
net assets by fund type, 19t performance example, 372
Mutually exclusive investment decisions, 234–237, 238
examples of, 235 internal rate of return (IRR) ranking
problem and net present value (NPV), 236f
net present value (NPV) vs., 236–237
Myopic loss aversion, 755
N National Association of Securities
Dealers Automated Quotation System (NASDAQ), 17, 271, 339, 427
National Association of Securities Dealers (NASD), 17
National Bank Financial Inc., 431t National Bank of Canada, 502, 674 National Futures Association (NFA),
710 National Post, 182, 454, 609 Negative covenants, 176 Negative growth rates, 201n Net acquisitions, 43 Net advantage to leasing (NAL)
approach, 642, 643t, 646 Net capital spending, 36 Net credit period, 575 Net fl oat, 557 Net income, 30, 35t
bottom line, 30 earnings per share (EPS), 30
Net operating losses (NOL), 664 Net present value (NPV), 221–224,
256–257, 262, 374, 387, 388 acquisitions, 665, 668–670 average accounting rule (AAR),
228–230 basic idea, 221–222 capital budgeting, practice of,
239–241 credit policy switch, 579–581 credit, granting, 578, 600 defi ned, 221 diff erent discount rates, at, 231t discounted cash fl ow (DCF)
valuation, 222 discounted payback period rule
vs., 228 estimation of, 222 evaluation of, 289 fi nancial calculator, use of for, 224 fl otation costs and, 404–405 forecasting risk, 289, 299, 305, 310,
311 granting credit, of, 583, 584 internal rate of return (IRR) vs.,
230–238 investment criteria, other, 220–249 leasing and, 642, 646 modifi ed internal rate of return
(MIRR), 238 multiple internal rate of return
(IRR) problem and, 234f mutually exclusive investment
decisions vs., 236–237 net advantage to leasing (NAL)
approach, 642 net present value rule, 222 payback period rule vs., 225–228 profi le, 232, 234 profi tability index (PI) vs., 238–239 project cash fl ows, 222f projected vs. actual cash fl ow, 289 sources of value, 289–290 spreadsheet, calculating by, 224 value, sources of, 289–290
Net present value (per share) of the growth opportunity, 211
Net working capital (NWC), 26f, 27–28, 70t, 253, 256, 519
additions to, 256t, 257, 260–261 cash collections and costs example,
258 change in, 33, 35t, 257 project cash fl ow and, 257–258 short-term fi nance and, 519,
520–521, 525, 529, 530 total assets to NWC ratio, 63 turnover, 66–67
Net working capital to total assets ratio, 62t
Net working capital (NWC) turnover, 62t, 70t
Net worth, 26n New equity sales and fi rm’s value,
437–438 New issue, 423, 426–427 New securities, issuing of
brackets, 426 initial public off ering (IPO), 426 red herring, 426 seasoned new issue, 426 securities registration, 427 tombstone advertisements, 426
New York Futures Exchange (NYFE), 694
New York Stock Exchange (NYSE), 17, 24, 181, 339, 340, 362, 363, 371, 425n, 427, 512
Nexen Inc., 12, 13t Nikkei crash, 763 Noise trader, 758 Noise trader risk, 758 Nominal rates, 184, 187, 285
real rates vs., 285 risk-free, 616
Nomura Holdings, 86 Non-cash items, 31
depreciation, 31 Non-constant growth, 201–202 Non-conventional cash fl ows, 238 Non-cumulative dividends, 207–208 Non-depositary institutions, 19 Non-marketed claims, 476 Non-voting stock, 206
takeovers and, 672 Noncommitted line of credit, 538 Nondiversifi able risk, 364 NoNo bonds, 181 Normal distribution, 329, 330 Nortel Networks, 470, 670, 725, 750 North American Derivatives Exchange,
694 North American Industry
Classifi cation System (NAICS) codes, 74
North American Tungsten, 582 Northgate Minerals, 220 Note Issuance Facility (NIF), 623 Notes, 174, 175 Novartis, 11
O Observed capital structures, 478–479 Off balance sheet fi nancing, 637 Off -the-books leases, 649 Oil prices, 690, 691, 697f Olympia & York Developments Ltd.,
531, 671, 674 OMERS, 13, 658 Omnimedia, 432 Onex Corp., 486, 676 Online billing, 558, 561 Ontario Business Corporation Act, 656
Ontario Municipal Employees Retirement System (OMERS), 13, 658
Ontario Securities Commission (OSC), 16, 21, 25, 207, 341, 413, 425, 427, 430, 448, 672, 673, 676
role of, 425–426 Ontario Teachers’ Pension Plan, 11, 13,
248, 673, 674 Ontario Teachers’ Pension Plan Board,
205 Open account, 578 Open interest, 697 Operating cash fl ow (OCF), 32–33,
33t, 35t alternative defi nitions of, 263–265 approaches to, summary, 265t bottom-up approach, 263–264 calculating, 32–33 cash fl ow and fi nancial break-even
points, 302–303 defi ned, 32 Dole Cola, 35 project operating cash fl ow, 255–256 sales volume and break even,
300–303, 302f tax shield approach, 264–265 top-down approach, 264
Operating cycle, 522, 523f, 576 accounts receivable period, 522 average collection period (ACP),
524 calculating, 524–525 days’ sales in receivables, 524 defi ned, 522 inventory period, 522, 524, 576 inventory turnover, 524 organization chart, fi rms, 523 receivables period, 524, 576 receivables turnover, 524 short-term operating activities, 523f
Operating leases, 635–636, 637, 639 cancellation option, 626 defi ned, 635
Operating leverage, 311 basic idea, 304 break-even and, 306–307 defi ned, 304 degree of operating leverage (DOL),
305 example of, 306 implications of, 305 measuring, 305–306
Operating loans, 537–539 accounts receivable fi nancing and,
539 bank, compensating the, 538–539 bankers acceptance, 543 commercial paper, 543 compensating balance, 539n defi ned, 537 factoring, 540–541 inventory loans, 541–542 inventory margins and, 541 letters of credit, 539 maturity factoring, 541 money market fi nancing, 543–544 risk assessment for, 538t secured loans, 539 securitized receivables, 541 trade credit, 542–543 trust receipt, 541
Operating profi t margin, 67–68 Opportunity costs, 252, 288, 553, 555f,
556 Opportunity set, 356, 358f Optimal capital structure, 456 Option backdating, 727 Option delta, 723 Option payoff profi les, 702, 703f Option payoff s, 713–716
Option premium, 702 Option valuation, 717–721
arbitrages, 718 basic approach, 719–720 call option, value at expiration, 717 call option, valuing a, 719–720 convertible bonds, 734 factors determining, summary of,
723t, 740 four factors determining, 720–721 intrinsic value, 718 lower bound on call option value,
718 option delta, 723 return variance: fi ft h factor, 720 simple model, 719–720 upper bound on call option value,
718 Options, 20, 444n, 706
American, 712 automobile production, 737–739 basics, 711–716 Black–Scholes Option Pricing
Model, 745–748 call option, 701, 712, 740
See also Call option call price, 719f, 723 call provision on a bond, 736 caption, 706 collar, 704 commodity price risk hedging,
703–704 compound options, 706 contract, 704, 706 contract, defi ned, 701 corporate securities and, 711–749 defi ned, 711 employee stock options (ESOs),
724–726 See also Employee stock
options (ESOs) equity as call option on fi rm’s assets,
726–728 European, 712 European put option, 723n exchange rate risk hedging, 704 exercise price, 701, 712 exercising the option, 712 expiration date, 702, 712 fl oor, 704 forward contracts vs., 702 futures options, 703, 704, 705f hedging, 701–706 insurance, 737 interest rate cap, 704 interest rate options, other, 706 loan guarantee, 737 Long-Term Equity Anticipation
Securities (LEAPS), 716 managerial, 737–740 option payoff s, 713–716 out of the money, 713 overallotment, 736 payoff profi le, 691, 692, 702, 703f premium, 702 put bond, 736 put options, 701, 712, 740 put payoff s, 716 puts and calls, 712 quotations, 714f real, 737 stock option quotations, 712–713,
714f striking/exercise price, 712 valuation, fundamentals of, 716–721
See also Option valuation warrants vs., 730
Options on stock, 625 Order costs, 527, 591 Ordinary annuity, 135, 155
Subject Index 793
28Ross_Index_3rd.indd 79328Ross_Index_3rd.indd 793 12-12-19 13:5512-12-19 13:55
Organizational chart, 3f operating cycle and, 523
Organized exchanges largest world stock markets by
market capitalization, 17f listing, 17–18 trading, 17
Original issue discount (OID) bond, 179n
Osler, Hoskin and Harcourt, 248 Other people’s money (OPM), 423 Over-the-counter (OTC)
collections, 561–563 markets, 16, 181, 190
Over-allotment option, 430, 736 security issuing cost, impact on, 438
Over-confi dence, 751 Over-confi dence bias, 757 Over-optimism, 751 Over-subscribing, 436 Over-subscription privilege, 444 Owner’s equity, 26
P Pacifi c Investment Management
Company (PIMCO), 184 Par bond, 155 Par value, 166, 175, 176 Partial amortization, 154 Partnership, 5, 7t
agreement, 5 defi ned, 5 gains or losses, 5 limited, 5 taxation, 5 transfer of ownership, 4
Payables manager, 523t Payables period, 525 Payables turnover, 66 Payback criteria summary
payback period, 240t payback period, discounted, 240t
Payback rule, 225–228, 239t, 240t, 257n
advantages of, 227 analysis of, 225–226 break-even measure, 226 defi ned, 225 disadvantages of, 225–226, 227 discounted payback period rule,
227–228 investment projected cash fl ows,
226f net present value (NPV) vs., 226 net project cash fl ows, 226f ordinary and discounted payback,
227t summary, 228 use of, 240t
Payoff profi le, 691, 692f Pecking-order theory, 477–478
implications of, 477–478 internal fi nancing and, 477–478 static theory of capital structure vs.,
477–478 Peer group analysis, 74
Dun & Bradstreet Canada, 74 Financial Post Datagroup, 74 North American Industry
Classifi cation System (NAICS) codes, 74
Statistics Canada, 74 PEG ratio, 212 Penguin Putnam, 589 Pension funds, 11, 18, 19
socially responsible investing and, 13n
Per-share returns, 320f example, 321
Percentage of sales approach, 85, 90–94 capital intensity ratio, 91 defi ned, 90 dividend payout ratio, 90 excess-capacity scenario, 93–94 external fi nancing needed (EFN), 92 full-capacity scenario, 92–93 garbage in, garbage out (GIGO), 94 illustration of, 90–94 partial pro forma statement of
fi nancial position, 92t, 93t, 94t plowback ratio, 91 pro forma statement of
comprehensive income, 91t retention, 91 statement of comprehensive income,
91t statement of fi nancial position,
91–92 Percentage returns, 319–321, 320f Performance evaluation
economic value added (EVA), 399 economic value contribution (EVC),
399 weighted average cost of capital
(WACC), 399 Period costs, 31 Periods, fi nding number of, 124 Perishability and collateral value, 576 Perpetual Energy Inc., 363, 501 Perpetuities, 142–145
calculation summary, 143t consol, 142 defi ned, 142 fi xed-rate preferred stock, 143 growing perpetuities, 143–144 present value of, 142, 143
Peters & Co. Limited, 431t Petro-Canada, 384 PIGS, 184 Piracy, 252n Plain vanilla swap, 699 Planning horizon, 86 Pledges, 175 Plowback ratio, 91 Plug, fi nancial, 88, 94 Point-of-sale systems, 561 Poison pill, 656, 674, 676, 680
defi ned, 672 provisions, 11
Political risk, 627–628, 629 Popular trading range, 512 Port Authority of New York and New
Jersey, 237 Portfolio risk, diversifi cation and,
362–365 Canadian mutual funds, standard
deviations and average returns, 365
diversifi cation, market history lessons and, 362
nondiversifi able risk, 364 sensible investor and, 364–365
Portfolio weights, 351 Portfolios, 351–357
beta, 367, 372–374 characteristic line, 372 correlation, 353–355, 358t defi ned, 351 diversifi cation, 347, 353, 361–365 effi cient set, 355 exchange traded funds (ETFs), 375 expected returns, 351, 352t feasible set, 356, 358f foreign investment, 357 immunization, 195 market, 374, 385 market risk premium, 374 opportunity set, 356, 358f portfolio weights, 351 risk, 353, 356, 361–365
standard deviation, 352, 353–355 variance, 352–353, 353t zero variance example, 356
Positive covenants, 177 Postmedia Network, 454 Potash Corp. of Saskatchewan, 502, 674 Precautionary motive, 553 Preemptive right, 206 Preferred stock, 65n, 143, 207–210
beyond taxes, 209–210 bond vs., 207–208 CARP, 208 common stock vs., 207 cost of, 394 cumulative and non-cumulative
dividends, 207–208 debt, as, 207–208 defi ned, 207 dividends, 40n fi xed-rate preferred stock, 143 fl oating-rate preferreds, 208 noncumulative dividends, 207 price, example, 208 sinking fund, 208 stated value, 207 tax loophole, 209 taxes and, 209
Preliminary prospectus, 426 Premium, 168 Premium bond, 168, 169 Prepackaged bankruptcy, 481 Present value (PV), 135
adjusted present value (APV), 414–419
annuity cash fl ows, 135–140 annuity date, 141–142 basic present value equation, 135 calculator, use of, 121, 123 cash fl ow timing, 134 defi ned, 119 discount factor, 120 discount rate, 120 discount, defi ned, 119 discounted cash fl ow (DCF), 120,
126 discounting and, 118–121 equivalent annual cost (EAC),
272–273 future value vs., 121–122 growing annuity, 145 growing perpetuity formula, 143 interest factor, 120, 121, 125t multiple period cases, 119–121 number of periods, fi nding, 124–125 perpetuities, 142 single period case, 119 spreadsheet, use of, 135, 136 stripped bonds, 121 sum of infi nite geometric series,
144n tax shield on CCA, 266
Present value interest factor for annuities (PVIFA(r,t)), 136
Present value, annuities, 135–140, 142 Present value, infl ation and, 186 Present value, perpetuities, 142 Present values, multiple cash fl ows,
131–134 discounting backward one period at
a time, 132–133, 133f discounting each cash fl ow
separately, 132 investment worth, example, 133, 134 saving up, example, 131 spreadsheet, use of, 135
Present vs. future values, 121–122 basic present value equation,
121–122 discount rate, determining, 122–124 investments, evaluating, 122 number of periods, fi nding, 124–125
Price behaviour in effi cient markets, 336
reaction to new information, effi cient/noneffi cient markets, 336f
Price volatility, 689–690 commodity priced volatility,
688–689 derivative use in Canada, 690
Price/earnings (P/E) ratio, 53, 62t, 69, 70t, 211–212
defi ned, 69 PEG ratio, 212 stock valuation, 211–212
PricewaterhouseCoopers LLP, 675 Primary vs. secondary markets, 16
corporate securities, trading in, 16–17
listing, 17–18 primary markets, 16 prime lending rates, 538 private placements, 16 public off erings, 16 secondary markets, 16
Principal value, 175 Principle of diversifi cation, 347, 363 Private equity, 424 Private placements, 16, 448 Pro forma fi nancial statements, 88, 90
defi ned, 254 pro forma defi ned, 88 project cash fl ows and, 254–257 projected income statement
example, 256t spreadsheets, use of in, 286
Probabilities, unequal, 348, 350 Probability of non-payment, 579 Processing fl oat, 557 Procter & Gamble, 203, 663 Producer co-op, 7 Product costs, 31 Production fl exibility, 737 Production manager, 523t Professional corporations, 6 Profi t margin, 62t, 67–68, 70t, 96, 100
gross profi t margin, 67–68 operating profi t margin, 67–68
Profi t maximization, 8, 11 Profi tability, 576 Profi tability index (PI), 238, 239
advantages and disadvantages of, summary, 239
benefi t/cost ratio, 238 internal rate of return (IRR) vs., 238 net present value (NPV) vs., 238
Profi tability measures, 67–68 Du Pont identity, 71–73 gross profi t margin, 67–68 operating profi t margin, 67–68 return on assets (ROA), 68 return on equity (ROE), 68
Profi tability ratios, 62t Project analysis and evaluation,
288–316, 537 base case, 290 break-even analysis, 296 capital rationing, 310 forecasting risk, 289 managerial options, 308–310 Monte Carlo simulation, 295 net present value (NPV) estimates,
evaluating, 288–290 operating cash fl ow, sales volume
and break even, 300–303 operating leverage, 304–307 scenario and what-if analyses,
290–295 sensitivity analysis, 286, 293–294 simulation analysis, 295 worst case, 291–292, 294f, 295
794 Subject Index
28Ross_Index_3rd.indd 79428Ross_Index_3rd.indd 794 12-12-19 13:5512-12-19 13:55
Project cash fl ows, 251, 255–262, 265–268
capital spending, 256 depreciation and capital cost
allowance (CCA), 258–259 incremental cash fl ows, 251–254 Majestic Mulch and Compost
Company (MMCC) example, 259–262
net working capital, 253, 256, 257–258
operating cash fl ow, 255–256, 258 pro forma fi nancial statements and,
254–257 projected capital requirements,
example, 256t projected income statement
example, 256t projected operating cash fl ow
example, 256t projected total cash fl ows, example,
256t relevant cash fl ows, 251 stand-alone principle, 251 total cash fl ow and value, 256–257,
258 Project hurdle rates, 405 Projected risk premium, 348 Promissory note, 578 Prompt Off ering Prospectus (POP),
427, 445 short form prospectus distribution
(SFPD), 427 Proof of annuity present value formula,
164 Property and casualty insurance, 19 Proportionate ownership dilution, 446 Prospectus, 87, 426, 430, 448 Protective covenants, 176
negative covenants, 176 positive (affi rmative) covenants, 177
Provincial bonds, 166 Proxy, 218 Proxy battle, 219 Proxy contests, 658
takeovers, 548 Proxy voting, 218–219
guidelines, 11 proxy battle, 219
Prudence test, 507 Prufrock Corporation
asset management measures, 65–67 Du Pont identity, 71–72 liquidity, 58 liquidity ratios, 61–63 long-term solvency measures, 64–65 market value measures, 68–70 profi tability measures, 67–68 sample fi nancial statements, 54,
55t, 56t turnover measures, 65–67 turnover ratios, 65, 66, 67
Public issue, 425–426 abnormal return, 436 alternate issue methods, 427 best eff ort cash off er, 428t brackets, 426 defi ned, 425 direct placement, 448 direct rights, 428t Dutch auction cash off ers, 429 fl otation costs, 437–438 general cash off er, 427 initial public off ering (IPO), 430 investment dealer, 426 off ering price, 427–428 procedure, basic, 426–427 prospectus, 426 red herring, 426 regulation, 425–426 rights off er, 427
seasoned equity off er (SEO), 427 seasoned new issue, 426 securities registration, 427 shelf cash off er, 428t short form prospectus distribution
(SFPD) system, 427 standby rights off er, 428t tombstone advertisements, 426 underpricing, 431–436, 438, 439 underwriting, 427, 428–431, 438 unseasoned new issue, 426
Public limited companies, 6 Public off erings, 16
underwriting, 16 Purchase accounting method, 660 Purchasing manager, 523t Purchasing power parity (PPP),
613–615 absolute, 613–614, 629 Big Mac Index, 614 currency appreciation and
depreciation, 615 defi ned, 613 relative (RPPP), 614–615, 629
Pure discount loans, 150 treasury bills (Tbills), 150
Pure play, 401 Pure play approach, 401 Put bonds, 181, 736, 740
liquid yield option note (LYON), 736
Put option, 625, 701, 712 Put payoff s, 716
Q Quad/Graphics Canada, 661 Quantitative techniques, 240 Quebec Hydro, 671 Quick (acid-test) ratio, 63 Quick ratio, 62t, 70t Quiet period, 430 Quoted interest rate, 146
how to quote, 146–147
R Radio frequency identifi cation
technology (RFID), 596 Random walk, 340 Randomness, 756–757 Rate of return, 122
discount, determining, 122 internal, 230–238 multiple, 234 nominal, 184 real, 184 retirement, days left until, 123 single investment period, calculating
for a, 123 university, saving for, 123
Rates, comparison of, 145–149 annual percentage rate (APR),
148–149, 155 continuous compounding, 149 eff ective annual rate (EAR) and
compounding, 146, 155 mortgages, 148 stated/quoted interest rate, 146
Ratings, 174 Ratio analysis, 60, 70
alternative calculation methods, 68n asset management/turnover
measures, 65–67 long term solvency measures, 64–65 market value measures, 68–70 profi tability measures, 67–68 short-term solvency or liquidity
measures, 61–63 Ratios
acid-test, 63 asset management, 65–67
asset turnover, 65–67 benefi t/cost, 238 capital intensity, 91 cash, 62t cash coverage, 62t conversion, 733 current, 62t days’ sales in inventory, 62t, 65–67 days’ sales in receivables, 66 debt/equity, 64–65 dividend payout, 90 equity multiplier, 62t, 64 fi xed asset turnover, 67 gross profi t margin, 68 interval measure, 62t inventory turnover, 62t liquidity, 61–63 long-term debt, 64 long-term solvency, 65 market value, 68–70 market-to-book, 69 NWC to total assets, 63 NWC turnover, 66–67 operating profi t margin, 67–68 plowback, 91 price-earnings-growth (PEG), 212 price/earnings, 69 profi t margin, 67–68 profi tability, 61, 62t quick, 62t, 63 receivables turnover, 62t retention, 91 return on assets (ROA), 62t, 68 return on equity (ROE), 68 reward-to-risk, 369 short-term solvency, 61, 62t table of common, 62t times interest earned (TIE), 62t, 65 total asset turnover, 67 total debt, 64 turnover, 62t, 65–67
Raw material, 590 RBC Capital Markets, 16, 431t RBC Dominion Securities, 341, 428 Real discount rates, 187, 253n Real option, 307
defi ned, 737 production fl exibility, 737
Real property, 175 Real rate of interest, 184, 187, 285
nominal vs., 285 Real return bonds, 180 Real Ventures, 675 Realization principle, 31 Realized capital gains, 39 Recaptured depreciation, 44 Receipt of goods (ROG), 575 Receivables period, 524, 574 Receivables turnover, 62t, 70t, 524 Recency bias, 757 Red herring, 426 Reference entity, 701 Registered Education Savings Plan
(RESP), 18 Registered form, 175 Registered Retirement Savings Plan
(RRSP), 18, 140 early contribution to, 143 international diversifi cation and,
622 stripped coupons, 180
Regression analysis, 374 Regression coeffi cient of
determination, 354n Regret aversion, 755 Regular cash dividend, 491 Regular underwriting, 428 Regulatory dialectic, 21 Reitmans Canada, 384 Relative purchasing power purity
(RPPP), 614–615, 629
Rembrandt bonds, 607 Reorder points, 596, 597f Reorder quantity, 596 Reorganization
compositions, 481 defi ned, 480 extensions, 481 sequence of events in, 480
Repayment, bond, 176 sinking fund, 176
Replacement of existing assets, 270, 271t, 272
Representativeness heuristic, 756 Repriced options, 725 Repurchase agreements, 671–672
greenmail, 671, 680 Repurchase, stock, 508–510
cash dividend vs., 508–510 defi ned, 508 earnings per share (EPS) and, 510 real-world considerations in, 510
Required return on investment, 318, 347
cost of capital vs., 388 expected return vs., 347n
Research in Motion, 53, 69, 87, 424, 559, 674, 675
Residual dividend approach, 503–505, 504t, 507
defi ned, 503 dividends: investment relationship
in, 504f Residual value, 29, 649 Resolute Forest Products Inc., 387, 470 Restocking costs, 591, 594, 596 Restrictive short-term fi nancial policy,
526 Restruck options, 725 Restructurings, 179, 678 Retention ratio, 91, 96, 391 Retractable bond, 181 Return on assets (ROA), 62t, 68, 70t,
71, 72, 96, 229n, 649, 650 average accounting rule (AAR) and,
229n cash cycle and, 526 defi ned, 68 Du Pont identity, 71–73 return on equity (ROE) vs., 68
Return on common equity, 68n Return on equity (ROE), 62t, 68, 70t,
71, 72, 96, 446, 448 anticipated return, estimate of, 391 Canadian Securities Institute
defi nition, 68n defi ned, 391 Du Pont identity, 71–73, 100 fi nancial leverage and, 456–458 fi nancial strength, 72 return on assets (ROA) vs., 68
Return on investment, 319 capital gain/loss, 318 income component, 318
Return, risk, and the security market line (SML), 347–386
announcements, surprises, and expected returns, 359–360
arbitrage pricing theory (APT), 375n, 377–378
capital asset pricing model (CAPM), 353n, 374–375
expected returns and variances, 347–350
homogeneous expectations, 385 portfolios, 351–357 security market line, 368–376 systematic risk and beta, 365–367 systematic risk principle, 366–367
Returns, 318–321 aft er-tax, 318n average, 324–325
Subject Index 795
28Ross_Index_3rd.indd 79528Ross_Index_3rd.indd 795 12-12-19 13:5512-12-19 13:55
average annual (19572011), 325t calculating, example, 321f coeffi cient of variation, 329n dollar returns, 318–319, 320f frequency distributions, 326, 327f multiple rates of, 248 percentage, 319–321, 320f required, 372 returns to investment example, 36,
323f unexpected, 359, 376t variability, 326–332
Revaluation method, 29 Revenue, 30 Revenue eff ects, 578 Revenue enhancement and cost
reduction, 662–664 Revenue enhancement, and
acquisitions, 662–663 market gains, 662 market power, 663 strategic benefi ts, 662–663
Reverse merger, 673n Reverse splits, 512 Reward-to-risk ratio, 369–371, 372, 376 Rho Canada Ventures, 675 Rights, 439–445, 729n
ex rights, 443 ex-rights stock prices, 443f exercising your, example, 442, 444 holder-of-record, 444 National Power Company example,
439–445, 442t number needed to purchase a share,
440–441 theoretical value of, 442–443 value of a, 441 value of aft er ex-rights date, 444
Rights off erings, 427, 439 cost of, 445 defi ned, 427 holder-of-record, 444 mechanics of, 439–445 oversubscription privilege, 444 shareholders, eff ects on, 444 standby fee, 444 standby underwriting, 444
Rights, triggered, 672–673 RIM, 53, 69, 87, 424 Rio Tinto, 684 Rio Tinto Alcan, 606 Risk
asset-specifi c, 361 beta vs. total, 367 business, 466 Canadian mutual funds, 365 coeffi cient of variation, 329n correlation and, 355 credit, 576, 693 default, 564, 565–567 estimation, 289 exchange, 624–627 exposure, reducing, 688–689 fi nancial, 466, 629, 687–690 fi rm-specifi c, 758 forecasting, 289, 534 governance, 628 interest rate, 565 market, 360, 364 noise trader, 758 nondiversifi able, 363f, 364 political, 627 portfolio, 356, 361–365 profi le, 688, 689f reducing exposure, 688–689 sensible investor and, 364–365 sentimentbased, 759 short-term planning, 531, 537, 538,
539 systematic, 360, 364, 367, 667 translation, 626–627
unique, 361 unsystematic, 360, 364 value at risk (VaR), 331
Risk and return, 317–345, 346–386 capital market history, lessons from,
317–345 example, 375 return, risk, and the security market
line (SML), 347–386 summary of, 376t
Risk averse behaviour, 364 Risk exposure, reducing, 688–689 Risk premiums, 325, 347, 348, 378
beta and, 368–372, 378 defi ned, 325 market, 331, 335, 374 projected/expected, 348 reward-to-risk ratio, 374 riskier investments, 347
Risk profi le, 688, 689f, 692, 704 Risk return trade-off
arbitrage pricing theory (APT), 375n, 377–378
capital asset pricing model (CAPM), 374–375
diversifi cation and portfolio risk, 361–365
fundamental relationship, 371 reward-to-risk ratio, 374–375 security market line (SML), 374–375 summary of, 376t
Risk, systematic and unsystematic market risk, 360–361 proportion of, 373 systematic and unsystematic
components of return, 360–361, 378
systematic risk, 360, 364, 367 unique/asset-specifi c risks, 361 unsystematic risk, 360, 364
Risk-free rate, 721 Risk-management fi nancial
engineering introduction, 687–710
derivative securities, 687 fi nancial risk, managing, 687–690 forward contracts, hedging with,
691–693 futures contracts, hedging with,
694–698 option contracts, hedging with,
701–706 price volatility, hedging and,
687–690 swap contracts, hedging with,
698–701 Riskless rate, 295 Road show, 430 Rogers Communications Inc., 193, 250,
384, 559, 658, 659, 664, 736 Rogers Wireless, 664 Rosengarten Corporation, sample
fi nancial statements, 91–94, 94t
Round lot, 512 Rovio Entertainment Limited, 204 Royal Bank of Canada, 16, 21, 71, 118,
167, 168, 180, 384, 428, 448, 518, 588, 724f
dividend payments, 503t Royal Dutch Petroleum, 622, 760 Royal Lepage, 163 Royal Trust, 21 Rule of 72, 122n, 124, 325 Rypple Inc., 675
S S&P, 334 S&P/TSX Venture Composite, 325n,
340, 372, 378
Safety reserves, lack of, 527, 537 Safety stocks, 596, 597f Sales and leaseback agreements, 626
taxes and, 639 Sales forecast, 88 Sales volume, operating cash fl ow and,
301, 302f Sales vs. asset needs, 94 Sales, general and administration
(SGA), 421 Salesforce.com, 675 Salvage for half-year rule, 267, 271n Salvage value, 640n, 649
leasing and, 643–644 undepreciated capital cost (UCC)
vs., 266–267 Same day value, 562 Samurai bonds, 607 SAP Canada, 571 Sarbanes-Oxley Act (SOX), 11, 14, 205,
427, 727 Saskatchewan Communications
Network, 664 Satyam Computer Services, 628 SBC Communications, 679 Scale economies, 663, 664 Scandals, 655 Scenario analysis, 291, 537 Scenario and what-if analyses, 290–295
scenario analysis, 291–292, 311, 537 sensitivity analysis, 293–294, 311 simulation analysis, 296
Scotia Capital Inc., 16, 429 Scotiabank, 16, 84 ScotiaMcLeod, 41n, 378, 384n Seabridge Gold, 293 Sears Canada, 491, 679 Sears Holdings Corp., 679 Seasonal dating, 575 Seasoned equity off ering (SEO), 427 Seasoned new issue, 426 Seaway Crude Pipeline Company, 248 Second-stage fi nancing, 424 Secondary markets, 16
auction markets, 16 dealer markets, 16 over-the-counter (OTC), 16
Secured loans, 537, 538, 539 covenants, 539
Securities, derivative. See Derivative securities
Securities Act, 425 Securities and Exchange Commission
(SEC), 17, 425, 427, 430 Securities market regulation, 425–426 Securities registration, 427
cross-listing, 427 Securities, issuing of, 426–427
basic procedure for, 426 cost of, 437–438, 438t cost of going public in Canada
(2011), 438t fl otation costs, 437 general cash off er, 427–431 initial public off ering (IPO), 427,
428, 430 methods of issuing new, summary,
428t new issue, 426–427 prospectus, 426, 430 rights off er, 427 seasoned equity off ering (SEO), 427 unseasoned new issue, 427
Securities, short-term characteristics of, 565–567 default risk, 565–567 dividend capture, 567 interest rate risk, 565 marketability, 567 maturity, 565 taxes, 567
Securitization, 18, 20 Securitized receivables, 541, 582n Security, 174, 175
collateral, 175 debenture, 175 mortgage, 175 notes, 175
Security market line (SML) approach, 347, 368–376, 376f, 388, 391–392
advantages and disadvantages of, 392
best fi t line, 373 beta and risk premium, 368–372 capital asset pricing model (CAPM)
vs., 374–376 characteristic line, 372 defi ned, 374 dividend growth model approach
vs., 391, 392 equity, cost of, 391–392 implementation of, 392 M&M Proposition II and, 463 market portfolios, 374 market risk premium, 374 reward-to-risk ratio, 369–371, 372 subjective approach, 402f underlying logic of, 379 weighted average cost of capital
(WACC), 396, 398t, 399–400, 400f
SEDAR, 413, 426 Seed money, 424 Self-attribution bias, 754 Seller, 691 Selling period, 429 Semiannual coupons, 169 Seniority, 175 Sensitivity analysis, 293–294, 311, 537
ceteris paribus vs., 293 unit sales example, 294f
Sentiment-based risk, 759 Service lease, 636 Settlement date, 691 Settlement price, 697 Share rights plans (SRP), 672–673 Shareholders
business decisions and, 2 cash fl ow to, 34–35, 36 control of fi rm, 11 dividends to, 207, 499 equity, 26 greenmail, 671 interests, 10, 22 managerial compensation, 10 minority participation, 219 rights off erings and, 427, 444 stakeholders, 12 target payout ratio, 507
Shareholders’ rights, 205–206 golden rule, 205 preemptive right, 206 rights, other, 205–206 shareholder rights plan (SRP), 672
Shaw Communications, 83, 454 Shelf cash off er, 428t Shell, 760 Shell Transport, 622 Sherritt International, 13 Shin-Etsu Chemical, 599 Short Form Prospectus Distribution
(SFPD), 21, 427, 428 Short run exposure, 624–625 Short-term borrowing, 537–544
accounts receivable fi nancing, 539 bank, compensating, 538–539 covenants, 539 factoring, 540–541 international projects, 623 inventory loans, 541–542 letters of credit, 539
796 Subject Index
28Ross_Index_3rd.indd 79628Ross_Index_3rd.indd 796 12-12-19 13:5512-12-19 13:55
maturity factoring, 541 money market fi nancing, 543–544 operating loans, 537–539 secured loans, 539 securitized receivables, 541 trade credit, 542–543 trust receipt, 541 warehouse fi nancing, 542
Short-term debt, 3 Short-term fi nance and planning,
519–551 accounts payable period, 522 accounts receivable period, 522 aspects of, 526–533 cash balance, 536–537 cash budget, 533–535 cash cycle, 521–526 cash fl ow time line, 522 cash outfl ow, 534 cash, tracing of, 520–521 factoring, 540–541 inventory loans, 541–542 inventory period, 522 letters of credit, 539 money market fi nancing, 543–544 net working capital (NWC),
520–521 operating cycle, 521–526 operating loans, 537–539 risk and, 537 sales and cash collection, 533–534 secured loans, 539 securitized receivables, 541 short-term borrowing, 537–544 short-term planning, 536–537 trade credit, 542–543
Short-term fi nancial exposure, 689–690 transaction exposure, 689
Short-term fi nancial planning and management, 519–551
Short-term fi nancial policy accommodative, 526 alternative fi nancing for current
assets, 528–530 best policy, 531 carrying costs, 527 cash reserves, 527, 531 compromise fi nancing, 531, 532f current assets and liabilities in
practice, 531–533 current assets, fi nancing of, 526 fi rm’s investment in current assets,
size of, 526–527 fl exible, 527 maturity hedging, 531 restrictive, 527 shortage costs, 527, 528f
Short-term liabilities, 4 Short-term operating activities, 526 Short-term securities
characteristics of, 565–567 default risk, 565–567 marketability, 567 maturity, 565 taxes, 567
Short-term solvency ratios, 61–63, 62t cash ratio, 70t current ratio, 61–63, 70t interval measure, 70t net working capital (NWC) ratio,
70t quick ratio, 70t
Shortage costs, 527, 591, 594 costs related to safety reserve lack,
527 defi ned, 527 economic order quantity (EOQ)
model, 594 inventory and, 594 short-term fi nancial policy and,
527, 528f
trading/order costs, 527 Side eff ects, incremental cash fl ow and,
251–252 Siemens, 399 Sight draft , 578 Simple interest, 112
compound interest and future value and, 114f
Simulation analysis, 295, 537 Monte Carlo simulation, 295
Sinking fund, 176, 209 Sino-Forest Corp., 25 Skype, 309 Small-company stock, 332 Smart card, 561
debit card vs., 561 Socially responsible investing, 12–13 Society for Worldwide Interbank
Financial Telecommunications (SWIFT), 608
Soft rationing, 310 Sole proprietorship, 4, 7t
advantages and disadvantages of, 4 defi ned, 4 life of, 4 transfer of ownership, 4
Sources of cash, 54 Special dividend, 491 Speculative bubbles, 197n Speculative motive, 553 Spin-off , 679 Spirit AeroSystems Holdings, 599 Split-up, 679 Spot exchange rate, 611, 612, 614, 616 Spot rate, 609n, 620
forward exchange rates vs., 620 Spot trade, 611 Spread, 428, 585 Spread income, 18 Spreading overhead, 663 Spreadsheet calculations, 89n
annuity payments, 138 annuity present values, 136 Black–Scholes option pricing model
(OPM) and, 748 bond prices and yields, 172–173 capital budgeting, use of for,
286–287 internal rate of return (IRR), 233 loan amortization, 153 multiple future cash fl ows,
calculating present values, 135 net present value (NPV) calculation,
224 time value of money, 125
Staggered elections, 218, 671 Stakeholders, 12
agency problems and, 12 concerns of, 12–13 defi ned, 12 shareholders’ interests and, 10 typical, 12t
Stamping fee, 18 Stand-alone principle, 251 Standard & Poor’s (S&P), 177, 543,
566, 622 Standard deviation, 326–328
calculating example, 328 fi nancial calculator, use of for, 329 portfolio variance example and, 352
Standardization, 576 Standardized fi nancial statements,
57–59 base-year, 59 common base-year, 59 common-size statements, 57–59 ratio analysis, 60–70 trend analysis, 59
Standby fee, 444 Standby rights off er, 428t Standby underwriting, 444
Standstill agreements, 671–672 greenmail, 671
Starbucks, 724 Stated/quoted interest rate, 146 Statement of comprehensive income,
30–31 cash fl ow, 55, 56t common-size statement, 59 defi ned, 30 Dole Cola, 35 International Financial Reporting
Standards (IFRS), 30–31 plowback ratio, 91 pro forma, 91
Statement of fi nancial position capital intensity ratio, 91, 93 cash fl ow, 54–57 market value vs. book value,
508–509 model of fi rm, 26f pro forma, 90, 92, 93, 94, 99 sources and uses of cash, 54–56
Statements of cash fl ow, 32, 56–57 common-size statements, 58–59 defi ned, 56
States of the economy and stock returns, 347t
Static theory of capital structure, 472–473, 478
bankruptcy, impact of, 474 defi ned, 472 optimal capital structure, capital
cost and, 473f optimal capital structure, fi rm’s
value and, 472f pecking-order theory vs., 477–478 weighted average cost of capital
(WACC) and, 473f Statistics Canada, 74, 321n, 323 Sterling Partners, 675 Stern Stewart and Co., 399 Stock dividends
defi ned, 510 details, 511 example of, 511 round lot, 512 stock splits and, 511–512 trading range, 512 value of, 512
Stock exchange bid, 657 Stock market crash (2008), 331 Stock market reporting, 210–212
growth opportunities, 211 price/earnings (P/E) ratio, 211–212 stock market quotation, sample,
210f Stock markets and world market
capitalization, 17t Stock options
backdating, 727 employee, 724–726 history of, 712 quotations, 712–713, 714f writers, 712
Stock price, 720 Stock repurchase, 491 Stock split
defi ned, 511 details, 511, 512 example of, 512 liquidity and, 512 reverse splits, 512 round lot, 512 trading range, 512 value of, 512
Stock valuation, 196–219 assumption, 197n beta and, 372 bigger fool approach, 197n capital gains yield, 203 common stock, 196–202
common stock features, 203 constant growth, 204t corporate voting, 218–219 dividend growth, 202 dividend yield, 203 growth rate, changing, 202 growth stock, 198 non-constant growth, 201 preferred stock features, 207–209 price/earnings (P/E) ratio, 211–212 required return, 203, 204t, 207 stock market reporting, 210–212 summary of, 204t supernormal growth, 202 zero growth, 201, 204t
Stock, acquisition of circular bid, 657 merger vs., 657 stock exchange bid, 657 tender off er, 657
Stocks Canadian common, 321 coattail provision, 207 common, 203–204 corporate voting, 218–219 equity/carve out, 679 fi xed-rate preferred, 143 growth, 332 non-voting, takeovers and, 672 preferred stock, 64n, 207–210 price reaction to new information
in effi cient and noneffi cient markets, 336f
small, 323 small-company, 332 spin-off , 666n, 679 TSX Venture, 323 U.S. common, 321 value maximization, 8, 10 valuing, 155
Straight bond value, convertible bonds, 733
Straight bonds, 623 Straight voting, 218, 219 Straight-line depreciation, 31, 42, 255n,
300n Strategic alliance, 659 Strategic asset allocation, 220 Strategic options, 309–310 Stress test, 292 Striking/strike price, 701, 712 Stripped bonds, 121, 124, 179 Stripped common shares, 495 Stripped coupons, 124 Stripped real return bond, 181 Sub-prime borrowers, 21 Subjective approach, 402 Subordinated bonds, 181 Subordinated debt, 175 Subordinated public debt, 179 Subsidized fi nancing, 416 Summify, 675 Sun Life Financial Inc., 19, 393 Sun Media Corp., 658 Suncor Energy Inc., 29, 53, 69, 217,
316, 486, 502 Sunk costs, 251–252, 289 Supermajority amendment, 671 Supernormal growth dividend, 201n,
202 Surplus funds, 665 Surprise announcements/news, eff ect
of on stocks, 360 systematic risk, 360 unsystematic risk, 360
Sustainable growth rate (SGR), 98, 101–102, 104t, 503n
cash cycle and, 526 example of, 101
Sustainalytics, 12, 13t Swap book, 700
Subject Index 797
28Ross_Index_3rd.indd 79728Ross_Index_3rd.indd 797 12-12-19 13:5512-12-19 13:55
Swap contracts, 706 commodity swaps, 699 credit default swaps (CDS), 701 currency swaps, 699 defi ned, 698 forward contracts vs., 698–699 hedging with, 698–701 interest rate swaps, 699, 700f swap dealer, 699–700 swap/match book, 700
Swap dealer, 699–700 Swaps, 608, 620, 624, 706
counterparty, 624 currency, 608 interest rate, 608
Swaptions, 706 Sweeteners, 729 Synacor Inc., 675 Syndicate, 16 Syndicated loans, 448–449
leveraged, 448 Syndicates, 16, 427 Synergy, 661–662
leveraged buyouts (LBOs) and, 673 Synthetic lease, 638 System for Electronic Disclosure by
Insiders, 339n System for Electronic Documents and
Retrieval (SEDAR), 426 Systematic risk, 376t, 379, 667
beta and, 365–367 defi ned, 360 diversifi cation and, 364 expected return and, 371f measuring, 367 principle of, 366–367, 376t reward for bearing, 366 volatility: high and low betas, 366f,
376t Systematic risk principle, 366
T Tables
annuity factors, 136 annuity present value, 137t present value factors, ordinary, 136
Takeovers, 11, 658 acquisition, 658 control, defi ned, 658n corporate charter, 671 crown jewels, 674 defensive tactics, 670–676 disadvantages of, 666 exclusionary off ers, 672 fl ip-over provision, 673 going private, 658 golden parachute, 674 greenmail, 680 leveraged buyouts (LBOs), 658, 666,
673, 674 negative side of, 666 non-voting stock, 11, 672 poison pill provisions, 11, 672, 673,
674, 676 proxy contest, 658 repurchase/standstill agreements,
671–672 scorched earth strategy, 674 shareholder rights plan (SRP),
672–673 staggered elections of board
members, 218, 671 supermajority amendment, 671 tender off er, 657, 658 white knight, 675
Talent acquisition, 675 Tangible assets, 26, 28 Tango, 252 TANSTAAFL, 252n Target capital structure, 456
Target cash balance, 554 adjustment costs, 554 basic idea, 554–555 defi ned, 554 determining, 554–556 factors infl uencing, 555–556
Target fi rm, 656 Target payout ratio, 507 Tata Consulting, 399 Tax depreciation, 31 Tax gains, acquisitions and, 664–665
asset write-ups, 665 net operating losses (NOL), 664 surplus funds, 665 unused debt capacity, 664–665
Tax leases, 636 Tax option, 308–309 Tax shield approach, 264–265
bid prices, setting of, 273–275 depreciation (CCA) tax shield, 264 Majestic Mulch and Compost
Company (MMCC) example and, 265–266, 265t
present value (PV) of tax shield on CCA, 265t, 266–268
salvage for half-year rule, 267, 271, 274n
undepreciated capital cost (UCC) and, 266–268
Tax-exempt investors, 500 Tax-free acquisitions, 659–660 Tax-Free Savings Account (TFSA), 18 Tax-oriented leases, 636 Taxable income, 39–40
accounting income vs., 42–43 Taxes, 39–40
Taxation Corporations, 6 Partnership, 5
Taxes, 37–41, 255n acquisitions and, 659–660 average tax rate, 37 average vs. marginal tax rates, 37–39 capital cost allowance (CCA) and
lease payments, 641 capital gains, 39, 40–41 capital structure, 475 carry-forward and carry-back,
40–41 cash outfl ow, 534 corporate, 39, 40t corporate dividend exclusion, 6n depreciation and, 228n dividend tax credit calculation, 39 dividends, 39 double taxation, 6 education tax credit, 37 eff ective tax rate on dividends,
38t, 39 fair share, 37 fl at, 37 global tax rates, 40 half-year rule, 42 ideal system, 37 income trust distribution vs.
dividends, taxation of, 41t income trust income, 41 individual income tax rates, 37,
38, 40 interest tax shield, 466 investment income, on, 39 leasing and, 649 leasing vs. conditional sales
agreements and, 639 loss carry-back, 41 loss carry-forward, 40 low dividend payout and, 496–498 M&M Propositions, 466–469 marginal tax rate, 37, 40 net operating losses (NOL), 664 personal, 37, 38t
preferred stock, 207, 209 realized capital gains, 39 recaptured depreciation, 44 reinvested dividends, 495n sale-leaseback agreements and, 639 short-term securities, 567 stripped bond, 180 subsidy, 415–416 taxable income, 39–40 terminal loss, 43 weighted average cost of capital
(WACC) and, 396, 468–469 TD Bank, 724f TD Canada Trust, 588 TD Securities Inc., 429, 431 TD Waterhouse, 384n TD Waterhouse Canadian Index Fund,
340 TDL Marks Corporation, 1 Tech stocks, 202 Technical insolvency, 379 Technology transfers, 664 Teck Resources Ltd., 367, 598 Telefonica SA, 559 Teleglobe, 539 Telus Corp., 385f, 413, 559, 685 Temporary cash surplus, 564 Tender off er, 657, 658
mergers vs., 676–677 Term loan, 448 Term structure of interest rates, 187,
188 infl ation premium and, 187 interest rate risk premium, 187 real rate of interest, 187 shape of, 187–188, 188f
Terminal loss, 43 Terms of sale, 573, 574–578, 600
basic form, 575 cash discounts, 576–578 credit instruments, 578 credit period, 575–576 defi ned, 573 elements of, 574 end-of-month (EOM), 575 invoice, 575 receipt of goods (ROG), 575 seasonal dating, 575 trade credit, reasons for existence of,
574–575 Tesma International, 672 Th omson Reuters, 611 Tim Hortons, 1, 15, 508, 679 Time and costs, 31
fi xed costs, 31 variable costs, 31
Time draft , 578 Time lines
annuity due, calculation of, 141 future values, multiple cash fl ows,
131, 134 Time to maturity, 166, 169, 170f, 171t,
187, 188f Time value of money, 111, 125t
calculations, summary of, 125t compounding, 112–118 fi nancial calculator, use of for,
116–118, 121, 123 future value, 112–118, 121–122 present value, 118–121, 125t spreadsheet, use of for, 125 summary of calculations, 125t
Time-trend analysis, 74 Times interest earned (TIE), 62t, 65,
70t Timminco, 475 TMX Group, 16 Tombstone advertisements, 426 Top-down approach, 264 Toronto Blue Jays, 625
Toronto Stock Exchange (TSX), 6, 14, 15, 16, 17, 23, 53, 111, 181, 210, 321n, 339, 340, 361, 371, 372, 393, 394, 425, 426, 459, 510, 511, 512, 657, 724, 729
Toronto Sun, 658 Toronto-Dominion Bank, 729 Total asset turnover, 62t, 67, 70t, 101 Total asset turnover ratio, 91 Total capitalization vs. total assets,
64–65 long-term debt ratio, 64
Total cash fl ow, 35t, 237, 251, 256–257, 262, 266, 270, 466, 476, 487, 491, 494, 579, 644
Total costs (TC), output level and, 296 Total credit cost curve, 581, 592 Total debt ratio, 62t, 64, 70t
debt/equity ratio, 64–65 equity multiplier, 64
Total return, 376t systematic and unsystematic
components of, 360–361 Total risk, 376t
beta vs., 367 Toyota, 87, 163, 285, 572, 598, 625 Toys “R” Us, 564 Tracing cash, 520–521 Trade acceptance, 578 Trade credit, 542–543, 572
reasons for existence of, 574–575 Trade discounts, 577 Trademark, 28 Trading costs, 527, 554, 555f, 556 Trading range, 512 Transaction exposure, 624, 689
defi ned, 689 short-term hedges, advanced,
624–625 Transaction motive, 553 TransCanada Corp., 53, 110 TransCanada Distributors, 640 TransCanada Industries, 359, 360,
361, 418 Transcontinental Inc., 661 Transitory changes, 689, 691 Translation exposure, 626–627 Translation risk, 626 Transparency, bond market and, 181 TransUnion Canada, 605 Treasurer, 2 Treasury bills (T-bills), 150, 527, 531,
553, 555, 565, 567 Treasury bonds, 178 Trend analysis, 59 Trends
bank mergers, 21 derivative securities, 21 fi nancial engineering, 21 regulatory dialectic, 21
Treynor index, 369n Triangle arbitrage, 610–611 Trilogy Retail Enterprises, 676 True leases, 636 True North Distillery Ltd., 252 Trump, 518 Trust companies, 18, 19 Trust receipt, 541 TSX Top 100, 210 TSX Venture Exchange, 17 TSX Venture stocks, 323, 325, 326, 331 Turnover ratios, 62t Twitter, 675 Tyco, 11
U U. S. Securities and Exchange
Commission, 17 U. S. Steel, 667 U. S. Treasury bonds, 178
798 Subject Index
28Ross_Index_3rd.indd 79828Ross_Index_3rd.indd 798 12-12-19 13:5512-12-19 13:55
U. S. Treasury market, 181 Unbiased forward rates (UFRs), 617 Uncertainty resolution, 498, 499 Uncovered interest parity (UIP), 618,
629 Undepreciated capital cost (UCC), 42,
43, 44, 639 tax shield and, 266–268 terminal loss and, 44t
Underpricing, initial public off erings (IPOs) and, 431–436
1966–2011 summary, 434t 1975–2011 summary, 432f 1999–2000 experience, 431–432 evidence on, 432–435 underpricing around the world, 433 underpricing, impact on securities
issuing costs, 438, 471 underpricing, reasons for, 435–436
Underwater options, 725 Underwriters, 426
role of, 427 Underwriting, 16, 736
banking group, 427 best eff orts, 428 bought deal, 428–429 conclusion from, 439 Dutch auction, 429 fi rm commitment, 428 green shoe provision, 430 investment dealers, 15–16, 428, 430 lockup agreements, 430 market cost, 428 off ering price, 428 overallotment option, 430 oversubscribing, 436 oversubscription privilege, 445 quiet period, 430 regular, 428 rights off erings and, 445 selling period, 429 services, 427 spread, 428, 438t standby fee, 445 syndicate, 427–428, 430 types of, 428 underpricing, 431–436 uniform price auction, 429 winner’s curse, 436
Unequal probabilities, 348, 350 Unexpected returns, 359 Uniform price auction, 429 Unique risks, 361, 364 United States Federal Reserve, 21 Unlevered beta, 464 Unlevered cost of capital, 467 Unlevering stock, 461 Unlimited liability, 4 Unremitted cash fl ows, 621 Unseasoned new issue, 427 Unsecured loans, 537, 538 Unsystematic risk, 360, 376t, 379
defi ned, 360, 364 diversifi cation and, 364
Unused debt capacity, 664–665 Upper bound, call option value, 718,
719f Uses of cash, 54 USX Corporation, 667
V VA Linux, 432 Valuation, future cash fl ows, 112–164
cash fl ow valuation, discounted, 129–164 See also Discounted cash fl ow
(DCF) valuation interest rates and bond valuation,
165–195
stock valuation, 197–219 See also Stock valuation
valuation, introduction to: time value of money, 112–134 See also Valuation,
introduction to: time value of money
Valuation, introduction to: time value of money, 112–134
discounted cash fl ow (DCF), 129–164
future value (FV) and compounding, 112–118
present value (PV) and discounting, 118–121
present vs. future values, 121–122 Value
book, 28–29 face, 166, 175, 176 liquidity, 28 market, 28–29 par, 166, 168, 169 preferred stock stated value of, 207 salvage, 42 sources of, 289–290 stock dividend, 512 stock split, 512
Value added, 221 Value at risk (VaR), 331 Value Line Investment Survey, 203 Vanguard 500 Index Fund, 766–769 Variability of returns, 326–332
Canadian common stocks, frequency distribution of returns on, 327
capital market history, using, 332 fi nancial calculator, use of for, 329 frequency distribution and
variability, 326–332 historical record, 328, 330t normal distribution, 329–330, 330f standard deviation, 326–328 value at risk, 331 variance, 326–328
Variable costs (VC), 287t, 291, 293, 296 output level and, 297f
Variance calculation of, 328, 349–350 defi ned, 326 expected return, 347–350, 349t historical, 326–328, 330t standard deviation, 326–328 unequal probabilities, 350
Variance, portfolio, 352–353, 354t equally weighted portfolio of two
stocks, on, 355t standard deviation and, 352 zero-variance, 356
Venture capital, 424–425, 539 angels, 424 choosing, 424–426 defi ned, 424 expense of, 424 ground fl oor fi nancing, 424 introduction market, 424 mezzanine level fi nancing, 424 private equity, 424 seed money, 424 venture capitalist, choosing a,
424–425 Venture Exchange, 17 Verizon, 679 Vertical acquisition, 657 Vertical integration, economies of, 664 Vesting period, 725 Vice president, fi nance, 2 Victoria Sailboats, 303, 304 Visa, 559 Volatility, high and low betas, 366f Volcker Rule, 698
Voting cumulative, 218 proxy, 218–219 stock, 207 straight, 218
Vulture capitalists, 424n
W Wages, 534 Waiting option, 308 Wal-Mart, 596 Wall Street Journal, 448, 611 Walt Disney Pictures, 288 Warehouse fi nancing, 542 Warehouse receipt, 542 Warner Brothers, 288 Warrants, 729–732, 740
bonds and, 178 call options eff ect on fi rm’s value,
730–732 call options vs., 729, 730, 731t, 740 defi ned, 729 earnings dilution, 732 earnings per share (EPS), fully
diluted, 732 expense lunch story, 735 free lunch story, 735 reasons for issuing, 734–736 reconciliation, 735 stock value and value of, 730–732 sweeteners/equity kickers, 729, 734 value of fi rm and, 730–732 warrant’s eff ect on fi rm’s value, 730
Washington Mutual, 470 Weighted average cost of capital
(WACC), 388 adjusted present value (APV) vs.,
418–419 calculation of, 396 capital budgeting problems, solving,
396–397 capital structure and, 456 capital structure weights, 395 capital, costs of and, 394–399 common stock calculation, 408 debt cost calculation, 407–408 defi ned, 395 dividend valuation model growth
rate, 409 divisional and project costs of
capital, 399–400 economic value added (EVA) and,
399 fi nancing proportions, estimating,
406 fl otation costs and, 403–404 M&M Proposition I, no taxes, 463f M&M Proposition II, no taxes,
462–463, 463f M&M Proposition II, with taxes,
468–469 market value of debt and equity, 395 optimal capital structure and, 473,
474 performance evaluation and,
399–400 practical application of: Loblaw
Foods, 406–409 pure play approach, 401 security market line (SML),
399–400, 400f, 402f static theory of capital structure
and, 473f taxes and, 396 using, example, 397
Weighted average delay, 558 Wendy’s International Inc., 1, 679 WestJet Airlines Ltd., 196, 384 Westport Innovations, 363
What-if analysis, 290–295, 307 best case, 291–292 Monte Carlo simulation, 295 scenario analysis, 291 sensitivity analysis, 293–294, 294f simulation analysis, 295 worst case, 291, 292
White knights, 675 Wi-LAN Inc., 675 Wiley, 589 Winner’s curse, 273, 274, 436 With/Cum dividend stock trading, 492 Work-in-progress, 590 Worker co-op, 7 Workers’ compensation, 686 Working capital, 4 Working capital management, 4, 519
decisions about, 4 defi ned, 4
World Bank, 698 World Trade Centre, 237 World Wrestling Federation (WWF),
432 Worldcom, 9, 11, 539 Worst case scenario, project analysis
and, 292 Write-up, eff ect, 660 Writers, 712
Y Yankee bonds, 606 Yellow Media Inc., 363 Yellow Pages, 674 Yellow Pages Income Trust, 41 Yield curve, 188–189
Canada yield curve, 188 Yield to maturity (YTM), 166, 170, 230
bond valuation summary, 171t fi nding, 170–173
Yields capital gains, 203 dividend, 203 market, 169
Z Zenkyoren, 180 Zero coupon bonds, 623 Zero growth dividends, 198, 208 Zero-balance accounts, 563, 564f Zero-coupon bond, 179, 181 Zero-sum game, 691, 716 Zero-variance portfolio, 356
feasible set, 356, 358f opportunity set, 356, 358f
ZipCar Inc., 431
Subject Index 799
28Ross_Index_3rd.indd 79928Ross_Index_3rd.indd 799 12-12-19 13:5512-12-19 13:55
NAME INDEX
A Ackert, L. F., 751n Ackman, William, 205, 672 Adjaoud, F., 498n Agarwala, Anand, 675 Alexeev, V., 340n Allen, W. S., 666n Altman, Edward I., 179, 448n, 674n Amoako-Adu, B., 337n, 498n, 672n,
677n Amundson, P., 13n André, P., 677n Armstrong, Jim, 448n Athanassakos, G., 340n Austin, Steve, 432 Axford, G., 622n Ayadi, M. A., 340n
B Baker, H. K., 239n, 310n, 508n Ballmer, Steve, 725 Baulkaran, V., 672n Beltrame, J., 647n Bernanke, Ben, 338 Bhabra, H., 337n, 627n Bhander, G., 751n Biais, B., 575n Bikchandani, Sushil, 212 Billes family, 206 Billes, Alfred J., 111 Billes, John W., 111 Black, Bernard S., 628n Blackburn, J. D., 598n Block, W., 666n Blume, M. E., 335n Bodie, Z., 357n, 374n Booth, L. D., 39n, 418n, 493n, 498n Boyle, P. P., 729n Brean, Donald J. S., 21n Brennan, M. J., 310n Bruce, Rob, 559
C Calvet, A. L., 677n, 678n Campeau, Robert, 103, 674 Cao, M., 340n Caprio, G., 618n Carayannopoulos, P., 340n Carhart, M., 378n Carroll, R. F., 68n Carter, Richard, 426n Chabra, Roger, 675 Chan, Allen, 25 Chesley, G. R., 68n Chew, D. A., 420n, 445n Chu, Richard, 375n Clarkson, M. B. E., 12n Cleary, S., 340n, 363n Cooper, Sherry, 501 Copp, D., 363n Corcoran, E., 598n Cottle, S., 499 Critchley, B., 624n, 729n
D Dabora, E. M., 622n Davis, Alfred H. R., 488n, 626n de Martel, V., 357n DeAngelo, H., 488n, 673n DeAngelo, L., 673n Deaves, R., 340n, 751n Denton, Mike, 599
Descartes, René, 235 Dimon, Jamie, 698 Dipchand, C. R., 650n Dobby, Christine, 675 Dodd, David, 499 Doyle, Bill, 674 Duic, Daniel, 341 Dutta, S., 239n, 310n, 508n, 672n, 677n
E Ebbers, Bernie, 12 Eckbo, B. E., 663n, 677n Elfakhani, S., 340n Elton, E. J., 362n, 493n
F Fama, Eugene F., 338, 378n Fenwick, J., 6n Finnerty, John, 178n Fisher, Irving, 185 Foerster, S. R., 13n, 17n Fooladi, I., 209n Ford, Henry, 318 French, K. R., 378n Froot, K. A., 622n
G Gagnon, L., 712n Garrison, R. H., 68n Geczy, R., 13n Giammarino, R., 737n Glew, L. A., 337 Godfrey, Paul, 454 Gollier, C., 575n Gordon, Myron, 199n, 499, 499n Graham, Benjamin, 499n Graham, G., 499 Graham, J. R., 378n, 392n Grantham, Jeremy, 338 Green, Fred, 205 Greenspan, Alan, 212, 338 Griffi th, John M., 398n Gross, Bill, 184 Gruber, M. J., 362n, 493n Gudikunst, A. C., 650n
H Haggett, Scott, 29n Haidar, Jaafer, 675 Hall, Peter, 606 Halpern, P., 673n, 678n Harrison, Hunter, 205 Harvey, C. R., 378n, 392n Hatch, J., 321n, 538n, 540n Higgins, Robert C., 95n, 102 Hill, N. C., 519n, 523n, 533n, 574n,
586n, 589n, 598n Hirshleifer, David, 212 Hitzig, Ken, 542 Hoover, J. Nicholas, 725n Horvitch, S., 588n, 674n Hull, J. C., 701n
I Ibbotson, R. G., 321n, 432n, 435n Ikenberry, D., 510n Ilkiw, J., 712n Inglis, M., 340n
J Jaff e, J. F., 634n Jang, Hasung, 628n Jensen, M. C., 496n, 554n Jobs, Steve, 359 Jog, V. M., 340n, 398n, 672n, 677n Johnson, L. D., 337 Johnston, D. J., 39n, 493n, 498n Jones, Jeff rey, 29n
K Kalymon, B., 6n Kamstra, M. J., 752n Kane, A., 357n, 374n Kaplan, S. N., 674n Karolyi, G. Andrew, 17n, 622n Keynes, John Maynard, 552, 758n Kim, Woochan, 628n King, Michael R., 392n, 671n Kirzner, E. F., 729n Kooli, M., 677n Koyanagi, Jan S., 6n Kramer, L. A., 752n Kryzanowski, L., 21n, 41n, 74n, 290n,
340n, 378n, 526n, 586n, 762n
L L’Her, J.-F., 677n La Porta, R., 10n, 505n Lakhan, Dwarka, 622n Lakonishok, J., 493n, 498n, 510n Lalancette, S., 378n Lawton, Jim, 599 Lay, Ken, 399n Lee, Inmoo, 438n Leeson, Nicholas, 753 Lefoll, J., 677n, 678n Lel, U., 337n, 627n Levi, M. D., 752n Levich, Richard M., 618n Levin, D., 13n Li, K., 510n Lie, Erik, 727 Lieff , S., 398n Lin, Y., 622n Lo, Joseph, 424n Lochhead, Scott, 438n Lockwood, L. J., 340n Lopez-de-Silanes, F., 10n, 505n Loring, J., 598n Loughran, T., 676n Lowenstein, Roger, 338 Lu, Y., 41n Luongo, Roberto, 129
M MacLeod, Mark, 675 Macqueen, Alexandra, 332n Maich, S., 672n Manaster, Steven, 426n Marcus, A. J., 357n, 374n Markowitz, Harry, 353n Masulis, R., 488n Maynes, Elizbeth, 206n McGraw, P. A., 209 McNally, W., 510n McNally, William J., 509n Mehrotra, V., 339n Melman, T., 674n Melnik, A. L., 623n Merton, Robert C., 728 Milevsky, M. A., 332n
Miller, Merton, 462, 465, 487 Miller, Merton H., 487n MinhChau, T., 290n Mitchell, Chris, 509n Mittoo, U. R., 17n Miu, P., 340n Modigliani, Franco, 462, 465 Moel, A., 740n Moeller, S., 678n Morgan, I. G., 498n Mukherjee, T. K., 650n Myers, S. C., 668n
N Naplano, Elisabeth, 559 Nardelli, Robert, 12 Ng, A., 677 Northfi eld, S., 398n
O Ortiz-Molina, H., 207n Otuteye, E., 378n
P Pandes, J. Ari, 429n Pelant, Heather, 375 Perez, William, 40n Perrakis, S., 357n, 374n Pinches, G. E., 626n Plaut, S. E., 623n Porter, Brian, 84 Porter, Michael, 663n
R Racine, M., 340n Rajaratnam, Raj, 20, 339 Rankin, Andrew, 341 Rashid, M., 498n Ray, Susanna, 599n Reguly, Eric, 552n Reisman, Heather, 676 Rice, E. M., 673n Riding, A., 424n Ritter, Jay R., 438n, 432n, 433n, 434n,
435n Roberts, G. S., 21n, 209n, 582n, 634n,
650n, 762n Robinson, Chris, 206n, 666n Robinson, M. J., 378n Roeser, Donald, 761n Roll, R., 496n Ross, S. A., 634n Roth, John, 725 Ryan, P. J., 357n, 374n
S Saadi, S., 239n, 310n, 508n Sagebien, J., 13n Santayana, George, 318 Santini, Laura, 674n Santor, Eric, 671n Sartoris, W. L., 519n, 523n, 533n, 574n,
586n, 589n, 598n Schleifer, A., 10n, 505n Schlingemann, F., 678n Schofi eld, B. A., 421n Schwartz, E. S., 310n, 737n Schwartz, Gerald, 676 Seguin, R., 74n, 290n Shanker, L., 650n Sharpe, William F., 353n
28Ross_Index_3rd.indd 80028Ross_Index_3rd.indd 800 12-12-19 13:5512-12-19 13:55
Shefrin, Hersh, 769 Shiller, Robert J., 338, 203n, 212 Shum, P. M., 478n Siegel, Jeremy, 338 Sinclair, D. R., 273n Sindelar, Jody L., 432n, 435n Sinquefi eld, R. A., 321n Skilling, Jeff , 399n Smith, B. F., 337n, 378n, 509n, 672n,
677n Smith, Cliff ord W., 178n, 694n Smithson, C. W., 178n Solnik, B. H., 622n Stambaugh, F., 13n Stanley, Frederick Arthur, 115 Statman, Meir, 362n Stebbins, M., 498n Stern, J. M., 420n Stewart, Bennett, 399n Stewart, G. B., 420n Stewart, Martha, 432 Stronach family, 672 Stronach, Frank, 207 Stulz, R., 678n Suggit, Heather J., 448n
T Tapon, F., 340n Th orp, Edward O., 295n Tirtiroglu, D., 337n, 627n To, M. C., 74n, 378n Truman, Harry S., 490 Tufano, P., 740n Twain, Mark, 318
V Vermaelen, T., 493n, 498n, 510n Vijh, A., 676n Viscione, J. A., 582n Vishny, R. W., 10n, 505n
W Weaver, Samuel, 405 Wei, J., 340n Weitzner, David, 14 Welch, I., 332n Welch, Ivo, 212 Westerfi eld, R. W., 634n White, Alan, 206n White, R., 321n Williamson, David, 559 Womack, James, 599 Wyant, Larry, 538n, 540n
Y Yu, W. W., 339n Yuce, A., 677n
Z Zaher, R. S., 340n Zechner, J., 737n Zeghal, D., 498n Zhang, C., 339n Zhao, Quanshui, 438n Zhao, X., 207n Zhou, X., 724n, 725n Zhu, P., 672n Zuckerberg, Mark, 423 Zyblock, M., 478n
Name Index 801
28Ross_Index_3rd.indd 80128Ross_Index_3rd.indd 801 12-12-19 13:5512-12-19 13:55
EQUATION INDEX
A Absolute purchasing power parity,
613–614 Accounting break-even point, 297–299 Accounts receivable, 574 Acid-test ratio, 63 Acquisitions
incremental cash fl ow, 662, 668 incremental net gain from, 662, 668 net present value (NPV), 668 value of merged fi rm, 695 value of one fi rm to other, 668, 669
Additions to net working capital, 32 Adjusted present value (APV), 414
beta of levered fi rm, 417 beta of unlevered fi rm, 417 beta of unlevered fi rm, corporate tax
case, 417 general expression, 414
Aft ertax interest rate, 396 Announcement, 360 Annual percentage rate (APR), 555 Annuities
future value, 140 future value factor, 140, 143t growing annuity present value, 145 present value, 136 present value factor, 136, 142
Annuity due value, 142 Arbitrage pricing theory, 377 Asset management measures. See
Turnover ratios Asset utilization turnover ratios. See
Turnover ratios Average accounting return (AAR), 228 Average collection period. See Days’
sales in receivables Average daily fl oat, 558 Average daily receipts, 558
B Balance sheet identity, 26, 520 Basic present value equation, 121, 122 Beta, 367, 369
equity beta, 464 levered fi rm, 417 unlevered fi rm, 417 unlevered fi rm, corporate tax case,
417 Black–Scholes option pricing model
(OPM), 745 Bond value, 168, 169, 171t Bond yield, 171t Bottom-up approach to operating cash
fl ow, 263–264 Break-even measures, 304t
cash break-even point, 302, 304t default rate, 584 fi nancial break-even point, 302–303,
304t general expression, 304t summary, 304t switching credit policies, 580
C Call option, 720, 721, 745 Call option evaluation. See Option
valuation Capital asset pricing model (CAPM),
derivation of, 384–386 general expression, 374–376 market portfolio variance, 385 portfolio standard deviation, 384
portfolio variance, 384 standardized systematic risk, 385 systematic risk, 385
Capital cost, 398t debt, cost of, 398t equity, cost of, 398t See also Debt, cost of; Equity capital,
cost of; Weighted average (WACC)
Capital gains yield, 320, 321 Capital intensity ratio, 91 Capital structure
total cash fl ow to stakeholders, 487 value of levered fi rm, 487 weights, 395
Carrying costs, 591, 595 Cash, cash cycle, 522 Cash balance
optimum, 555f target, 555
Cash break-even point, 302, 304t Cash collections, 534 Cash coverage ratio, 62t, 65, 70t Cash cycle, 525 Cash fl ow
additions to net working capital, 36 assets, 32, 35t, 54 cash fl ow identity, 32, 35t, 54 creditors to, 34, 35t incremental cash fl ow, 580 net capital spending, 36 operating cash fl ow, 32–33, 256, 263 project cash fl ow, 256 shareholders, to, 34, 35t total cash fl ow, 258
Cash ratio, 62t, 63, 70t Coeffi cient of variation, 326n Collection fl oat, 557 Combined market value of debts and
equity, 395 Cost of equity, 393, 462
dividend growth model approach, 389, 393
M&M Proposition with corporate taxes, 468
security market line (SML) approach, 392, 393
Cost of preferred stock, 394 Cost of switching credit policies, 580 Credit analysis
multiple discriminant analysis (MDA), 587
net present value (NPV) of extending credit (repeat customer, 584
net present value (NPV) of granting credit (onetime sale), 583
Credit policy break-even default rate, 584 break-even point, 580–581 cash fl ow new policy, 579 cash fl ow old policy, 579 cost of switching policies, 580 net incremental cash fl ow, 583 net present value (NPV) of
switching, 580 present value (PV) of future
incremental cash fl ows, 580 Credit policy analysis
break-even point, 584 new customer, value of, 584
Current ratio, 61–63, 70t cash ratio, 62t interval measure, 62t
net working capital to total assets, 62t
quick ratio, 62t
D Days’ sales outstanding. See Days’ sales
in receivables Days’ sales in inventory, 62t, 65, 70t Days’ sales in receivables, 62t, 66, 70t Debt ratios
long-term, 64 total, 64
Debt, cost of, 393 Debt/equity ratio, 62t, 64, 70t, 96 Degree of fi nancial leverage (DFL), 458
alternative formula, 458 general expression, 458
Degree of operating leverage (DOL), 305
Disbursement fl oat, 556 Discount rate, 122 Dividend growth model approach,
389, 417 earnings, next year, 390 expected dividend, next year, 389 growth, 390, 391 return on equity, 389–391 stock price per share, 389
Dividend payout ratio, 90 Dividend valuation formula, 266 Dividend valuation model, 409 Dividend yield, 320, 321 Dividends, eff ective tax rate, 40 Dividends, present value per share, 494 Du Pont
identity, 71–72 profi tability equation, 526
E Earnings before interest and taxes
(EBIT), 263 Earnings per share (EPS), 68–69 Earnings, next year’s, 390 Economic order quantity (EOQ), 595,
596 Economic-value-added (EVA)
approach, 419, 420 Eff ective annual rate (EAR), 543, 577
annual percentage rate (APR) and, 148
general expression, 146 upper limit, 149
Eff ective tax rate on dividends, 40 Enterprise Value/Earnings Before
Interest, Tax, Depreciation and Amortization (EV/ EBITDA) multiple, 69, 70t
Equity beta, 464 Equity capital, cost of, 393, 462
dividend growth model approach, 389, 393
security market line (SML) approach, 392, 393
Equity multiplier, 62t, 64, 70t Exchange rates
absolute purchasing power parity (PPP), 614
cross-rate, 609–611 expected future percentage change
in exchange rate, 615, 620 expected percentage change in
exchange rate, 615
generalized Fisher eff ect (GFE), 618, 620
interest rate parity (IRP), 617 relative purchasing power parity
(RPPP), 614 unbiased forward rates (UFR), 617 uncovered interest parity (UIP), 618
Expected return E(R), 347, 368, 369, 374, 377
announcement, 360 arbitrage pricing theory, 377 general expression, 348 portfolio expected return, 351 total return, 359
Extended pie theory cash fl ow, 476 value of marketed claims, 476
External fi nancing needed (EFN), 96 equal to zero, 96 general expression, 96 internal growth rate, 96 sustainable growth rate, 96
F Financial break-even point, 302–303,
304t Financial leverage
cash coverage ratio, 62t debt to equity ratio, 62t degree of, 458 equity multiplier, 62t long-term debt ratio, 62t ratios. See Long-term solvency ratio times interest earned, 62t total debt ratio, 62t
Fisher eff ect, general expression, 185, 186, 618, 620
Fixed asset turnover, 62t, 67, 70t Float, 556, 557
average daily, 558 collection, 557 disbursement, 556
Future value (FV) annuity, 140 annuity future value factor, 140,
143t future value factor, 121, 125t future value interest factor, 112 general expression, 112, 124
G Generalized Fisher eff ect (GFE), 618,
620 Geometric average return, 333 Gross profi t margin, 67–68 Growing annuity, 145 Growing perpetuity, 145 Growth
internal growth rate, 96 sustainable growth rate, 98
Growth opportunities, 211
H Historical variance, 328
I Income statement, 30 Incremental cash fl ow
components of, 668 future incremental cash fl ow, 580 general expression, 580 present value of, 580
28Ross_Index_3rd.indd 80228Ross_Index_3rd.indd 802 12-12-19 13:5512-12-19 13:55
Incremental net gain from acquisition, 668
Interest rate parity (IRP), 617 Interest rates
eff ective annual rate (EAR), 146, 148 Fisher eff ect, 185, 186 nominal rate, 185 real, 285
Interest tax shield, 466 Internal growth rate, 96 Interval measure, 62t, 63, 70t Inventory
carrying costs, 591, 595 cost-minimizing quantity, 595 days’ sales in inventory, 65 economic order quantity (EOQ),
595, 596 restocking cost, total, 594, 595 total carrying costs, 595 total costs, 594 turnover, 65
Inventory period, 524 Inventory turnover, 62t, 65, 70t, 524
L Leasing
net advantage to leasing, 645 net advantage to leasing (NAL), 642 present value of capital cost
allowance (CCA) tax shield, 642
Levered fi rm beta, 417 value of, 467
Liquidity ratios acid-test, 63 cash, 63, 70t current, 61–63, 70t interval measure, 63, 70t net working capital (NWC), 70t quick, 63, 70t summary, 70t
Long-term debt ratio, 62t, 64, 70t Long-term solvency ratio
cash coverage ratio, 65 debt/equity ratio, 64 equity multiplier, 64 long-term debt ratio, 64 summary, 70t times interest earned, 65 total debt ratio, 64
M M&M Proposition I
general expression, 462, 469t interest tax shield, with taxes, 467,
469t summary, 469t value of leveraged fi rm, 469t value of unleveraged fi rm, 467
M&M Proposition II, derivation of equation, 469
M&M Proposition II, no taxes cost of equity, 463, 464 weighted average cost of capital
(WACC), 463, 469t M&M Proposition II, with taxes
cost of equity, 469t interest tax shield, 467 weighted average cost of capital
(WACC), 468, 469t Market portfolio variance, 374 Market risk premium, 374
Market value of debt and equity, 395 Market value ratios
EV/EBITDA, 62t market-to-book, 62t price/earnings (P/E), 62t
Market-to-book ratio, 69, 70t Mergers
incremental net gain from, 669 net present value (NPV), 669 value of merged fi rms, 669
Multiple discriminant analysis (MDA), 587
N Net advantage to leasing (NAL), 645 Net capital spending, 33, 36 Net income, 299 Net incremental cash fl ow, 580 Net present value (NPV), 621, 642
credit, extending, 584 credit, granting, 583 merger, 669 switching credit policies, 579
Net working capital (NWC), 33, 36, 70t, 520
changes to, 33, 36, 47 general expression, 520 net working capital (NWC) to total
assets ratio, 63 short-term solvency, 70t turnover, 66–67, 70t
Net working capital to total assets, 62t Net working capital (NWC) turnover,
62t Nominal rate, 186 Number of new shares, 440 Number of periods (NPER), 124
O Operating cash fl ow (OCF), 301, 302
basic approach, 263 bottom-up approach, 263–264 earnings before interest and taxes
(EBIT), 263 general expression, 36 project, 256 quantity of output or sales volume
and, 304t tax shield approach, 264 top-down approach, 264
Operating cycle, 522, 525 inventory period, 524 inventory turnover, 524 receivables period, 524 receivables turnover, 524
Operating leverage, 304–306 Operating profi t margin, 67–68 Opportunity cost, 555f Opportunity costs, 553 Option valuation
arbitrage, prevention of, 718, 719 basic approach, 719 Black–Scholes option pricing model
(OPM), 745 expiration date, at, 717 four factors determining, 720 lower bound, 718 probabilities, 745 upper bound, 718 value with riskless asset, 719
P Payables period, 525 Payables turnover, 66, 525 Percentage return, 320 Perpetuities
growing perpetuity present value, 145
present value, 142 summary, 143t
Plowback ratio, 91 Portfolio
betas, 367, 369, 417 expected return, 351 standard deviation, 352, 384 standard variance, 352 variance, 384
Preferred stock, cost of, 394 Present value (PV)
annuities, 136 annuity present value factor, 136,
142 future dividends, 372 future incremental cash fl ows, 580 general expression, 119, 124 growing annuity, 145 growing perpetuity, 145 perpetuity, 142 present value factor, 121, 125t tax shield, 266–268 tax shield on CCA, 266
Price/earnings (P/E) ratio, 69, 70t Production fl exibility
expected present value (PV), 738, 739
present value (PV) fi xed plant, 738, 739
present value (PV) fl exible plant, 738, 739
Profi t, 583 Profi t margin, 62t, 67, 70t Profi tability
profi t margin, 62t return on assets (ROA), 62t return on equity (ROE), 62t
Profi tability ratios gross profi t margin, 67–68 operating profi t margin, 67–68 profi t margin, 67, 70t return on assets (ROA), 68, 70t,
71, 526 return on equity (ROE), 68, 70t,
71, 98 summary, 70t
Project net income, 264 Proof of annuity present value, 164
Q Quick ratio, 62t, 70t Quoted monthly rate, 147
R Ratios
acid-test, 63 capital intensity, 91 cash coverage ratio, 65, 70t cash ratio, 63, 70t current ratio, 61–63, 70t days’ sales in inventory, 65, 70t days’ sales in receivables, 66, 70t debt/equity, 64, 70t, 96 dividend payout, 90 equity multiplier, 64, 70t fi xed asset turnover, 67, 70t
gross profi t margin, 67–68 interval measure, 63, 70t inventory turnover, 65, 70t, 524 long-term debt, 64, 70t market-to-book, 69, 70t net working capital (NWC), 33, 36,
70t, 520 net working capital (NWC)
turnover, 66–67, 70t operating profi t margin, 67–68 plowback, 91 price/earnings (P/E), 69, 70t profi t margin, 67, 70t quick, 70t receivables turnover, 66, 70t, 524 retention, 91, 391 return on assets (ROA), 68, 70t,
71, 526 return on equity (ROE), 68, 70t,
71, 98 reward-to-risk, 369, 371, 374 times interest earned, 65, 70t total asset turnover, 70t, 91, 526 total debt, 64, 70t
Real interest rate, 285 Real rate, 186, 618n Receivables period, 524 Receivables turnover, 62t, 66, 70t, 524 Relative purchasing power parity,
614–615 Required return, 401
dividend growth model approach, 389, 417
security market line (SML), 374, 379 Restocking costs, total, 594 Retained earnings, addition to, 91 Retention ratio, 91, 391 Return on assets (ROA), 62t, 68, 70t,
71, 526 Return on equity (ROE), 62t, 68, 70t,
71, 98 dividend growth model approach,
389–391 security market line (SML)
approach, 391 Returns
capital gains yield, 320 dividend yield, 320 expected. See Expected return E(R) required. See Required return standard deviation, 328 total cash if stock sold, 319 total dollar return, 318 total. See Total return variance, 328
Reward-to-risk ratio, 369, 371, 374 Rights off ering
number of new shares, 440 rights needed buy a stock share, 441 theoretical value of a, 442 value of aft er ex-rights date, 444
Risk return versus (APT model), 374, 377 reward-to-risk ratio, 369, 371, 374 total, 364
Risk premium, 348 Risk–return relationship, 377 Rule of 72, 122n, 124
S Sales volume, 302 Security market line (SML) approach,
376, 379 cost of equity, 392, 463–464
Equation Index 803
28Ross_Index_3rd.indd 80328Ross_Index_3rd.indd 803 12-12-19 13:5512-12-19 13:55
required return on assets, 391, 463–464
return on equity, 391 Security market line (SML) slope, 374,
376, 386 Shareholder’s equity, 28 Shares, number of new, 440 short-term solvency ratios. See
Liquidity ratios Standard deviation, 328, 349
portfolio, 384 Statement of comprehensive income,
30 Statement of fi nancial position identity,
26 Stock price per share, 389, 494 Stock valuation, 197
cash cow fi rm, 211 commitment to new project, aft er,
211 constant growth dividend, 198–200,
203 dividend growth model, 199 general case, 204t nonconstant growth dividend,
201–202 required return, 203 stock value, 197 summary, 204t supernormal dividend growth, 202,
204t zero growth dividend, 198, 204t
Straight bond value, 732–733 Sustainable growth rate (SGR), 98, 101 Systematic risk, 370–372
T Tax shield, Present value, 266–268 Tax shield approach
cash fl ow calculation, 266 operating cash fl ow, 264–265
Tax shield, value of, 467 Taxes, 263 Time value of money
future value factor, 125t present value factor, 125t present vs. future values, 125t
Times interest earned, 62t Times interest earned ratio, 65, 70t Top-down approach to operating cash
fl ow, 264 Total asset turnover, 62t, 70t, 91, 526 Total assets, 46 Total carrying costs, 591, 595 Total cash if stock sold, 319 Total costs (TC), 296
cash balance policy, 554 given output level and, 296 holding inventory, 594
Total debt ratio, 62t, 64, 70t Total dollar return, 318 Total restocking cost, 594 Total return, 377
arbitrage pricing theory, 377 general expression, 359 systematic and unsystematic
components of, 361 Total risk, 364 Trading costs, 528f Turnover
days’ sales in inventory, 62t days’ sales in receivables, 62t fi xed assets turnover, 62t inventory turnover, 62t net working capital (NWC)
turnover, 62t receivables turnover, 62t total asset turnover, 62t
Turnover ratios days’ sales in inventory, 65, 70t
days’ sales in receivables, 66, 70t fi xed asset turnover, 67, 70t inventory turnover, 65, 70t, 524 net working capital (NWC)
turnover, 66–67, 70t receivables turnover, 66, 70t, 524 summary, 70t
U Uncovered interest parity (UIP), 618 Unlevered fi rm, value of, 467
V Variable costs (VC), 296 Variance, 328, 349t
general expression, 349 historical, 326 market portfolio, 385 portfolio, 384 standard deviation and, 349
W Weighted average cost of capital
(WACC), 397, 404, 463, 464 aft er-tax rate, 396 with taxes, 468
Weighted average delay, 558 Weighted average fl otation cost, 403
Z Zero growth dividend, 198, 204t
804 Equation Index
28Ross_Index_3rd.indd 80428Ross_Index_3rd.indd 804 12-12-19 13:5512-12-19 13:55